Bub GB N3ckaaaaiaaj

Gesenius'
Hebrew
grammar
Wilhelm Gesenius,
Emil Kautzsch
GESENIUS-KAUTZSCH
HEBREW GRAMMAR
COLLINS AND COWLEi'
Digitized by Google
HENRY VROWDB, MJi.
PVBUSHER TO THE VMIVKRSmr Or OXFORD
U>RI>ON, BDIMBURGU, AND NBW YORK

GESENIUS'
HEBREW GRAMMAR
AS EDITED AND ENLARGED BY
E. KAUTZSCH
PROFESSOR OF THEOLOGY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF HALLS
TRANSLATED FROM THE TWENTY-FIFTH GERMAN EDITION

BT TBX lAIS
REV. G. W. COLLINS, M.A.
TBE TRANSLATION REVISED AND ADJUSTED

TO THE TWENTY-SIXTH EDITION
BT
A. E. COWLEY, M.A.
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS

1898
Digitized by Google
FRINTSD AT TUB CLAltlMOOIf PtBSS
BY HOP^^' HAST, M A,
PRIMTKK TO TUK UNtVKKSITY
mm

"

Digitized by Google
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
The Hebrew Gmmmar of William Gesenius originally

published in 1813 has long been regarded as a standard
work in Germany, and has been repeatedly re-edited, first
by Rodiger at.d afterwards by Professor Kautzsch, with
a view to keeping it abreast of the progress of scholarship.
Various English translations of it have also appeared ; but
the original work has gained so considerably in value in the
latest editions, thanks to the scholarly revision of Professor
Kautzsch, that the time seemed to have come for a new
translation of what is practically a new book. Moreover,
no Hebrew Grammar exists in English combining in one
volume a thorough treatment both of the accidence and
of the syntax. The Delegates of the Clarendon Press
accordingly arranged with the German publisher, Herr Vogel,
of Leipzig, to issue such a translation, and entrusted the work
to the late Rev. G. W. Collins (of Corpus Christ! College,
Cambridge, and Keble College, Oxford), with whom I was
afterwards associated. His translation of the twenty-fifth
edition ( 1 was already approaching completion when a new
edition of the German was announced as being in preparation,
and the Delegates decided to await its publication in order
that Professor Kautzsch*s latest improvements m^ht be
incorporated in the English translation. The new German
edition, however, did not appear so soon as was expected,
and in the meantime Mr. Collins died. The task of revising
the translation, and of seeing it through the press, thus
devolved upon me. Its accomplishment has been somewliat
Digitized by Google
vi TranMaior's Preface.
delayed, partly by the intervention of other work, and partly

owinf to the numerous additions and improvements intro-
cluccd b}' riofcssor Kautzsch into the twenty-sixth edition
(1896), which of course had to be incoi atcd. With regârd

to the method pursued, the plan and arrangement of the
original have been strictly followed^ so that the references for
sections and paragraphs correspond exactly in German and
English. At the aame time, eveiy effort has been made
to state the principles of the grammar in a form that would
be clearly and readily apprehended by English students.

The sheets have been submitted while in proof to the
Kegius Professor of Hebrew, Dr. Driver, who has made
numerous valuable suggestions as to translation. Some
slight additions have occasionally been made în no case,
however, affectiag the substance of Professor Kautzsch's
work chiefly consisting of supplementary references to
English works, or now and then completing a list of
citations. These have been enclosed within brackets []
wherever it was possible to do so without too much com-
plication. A Um aotes added by Mr. Collins have been
marked with his initials, G. W. C. Some evident printer's
errors in the German have been It would
tacitly corrected.
be too much to h<^ that in so large a mass of details
mistakes have been entirely avoided, but my endeavours
to secure accuracy and uniformity have been very materially
aided by the skill and experience of Mr. J. C. Pembrey, the
oriental reader to the Clarendon Press. In conclusion, I wish
to express my gratitude to Dr. Driver for his ever-ready help
in all matters of difficulty, and for the encouragement I have
received from him throughout a rather toilsome piece
of work.
A. E. COW LEV.
Waokam COLLiGs, OxrotD.
Digitized by
FROM THE PREFACE TO THE
GERMAN EDITION.
Betweln the appearance of the twcTity-fifth and twenty-
sixth editions of this Grammar more than six years elapsed.
^
During that period so many important works appeared on

the textual criticism and exegesis of the Old Testament,
as well as on the grammar of the Hebrew and other Semitic
languages, that the editor again found abundant materials
for amplifying and re-casting the work. .
For the Biblical text, constant use has been made of the
critical editions of Dr. S. Baer : yerenda^ Lipsiae, 1890 ; Josua
et Judicesr 1891; Samuel, 1892; ReêSf 1895. Warm praise
is due to the admirable edition of the Old Testament
also
^ text by David Ginsbuig (London, 1^94* 2 vols.), based
primarily on the earliest printed editions, seven of the
entire Bible, dated between 1488 and 1525, and thirteen

df various parts, 147 7- 15 25, and containing a selection of
readings from the LXX, Peshitti, Targums, and Vulgate.
In the course of his work, the present writer has learnt to
value this edition more aad more. Tlie critically revised
text in the handsome series of '
Sacred Books of the Old
Testament -/ published under the editorship of Prof. P. Haupt
(Leipzig and Baltimore, ii^93, &c.), has also been consulted
' The first edition appeared at Halle ia 1813 (pp. 302, smalt 8vo); the next
thirteen editions were issued by Gesenias himself; the fifteenth to the twenty-first
(1845-1873) by E. Kodiger; the twwty-secoad to the twenty-fifth (1878-^1889)
bj the preient editor.
* Pilringwhhiiig thewioas docnmenta of the Fentateneh and bittoikal books
by colonit, and hence also called the ' Polychrome Bible.* The following parts
have appeared: Job by Siegfiricd, 1893 I nii II Samuel by Budde, Leviticus by
; 1
Driver and White, 1894; Jeremiah by ComiU, Joshua by Bennett, the Psalms
by WcUbansen, Chronicles by Kittel, 1895; Genois by Ball, Daaiel by
JUmphaoMD, i8)C i
Digitized by Google
viii From the Preface to the German Edition*
as occasion But this twenty-sixth edition has

required.
especially benefited by the systematic study of the Old
Testament, undertaken with a view to the new translation
of it, published by the editor in 1894^ Independently of
the criticism of the text, this afforded opportunity for a much
fuller notice of all striking forms, as well as for considerable
additions to the examples in the 5}mtax.
Among the works consulted on special grammatical
questions, the first place must be assigned to those of
De Lagarde, Barth. and Ed. Konig, cited on p. 231. Konig's
Lehrgebdude^ starting with Hebrew, includes a comprehensive
comparison of the other Semitic dialects, and is distinguished
by an almost exhaustive presentation of the facts, as well as
by the regard paid systematically to phonetic and philological

principles. De Lagarde and Barth, embracing in their survey
the entire system of Semitic noun-formation, suggest, inde-
pendently of each other, such abundance of new and
an
important points of editor felt no little
view, that the
embarrassment in deciding on the extent of the changes
required in 81-86, 93 and 94. However, the consideration
that, in spite of. very remarkable agreement on fundamental
questions, the two scholars often differ widely in details,
and that the controversy on the subject (see the literature
on p. 231} has led to no definite conclusk>ns, finally left no
doubt as to the course to be pursued. I have endeavoured
in an excursus ( 83. d) to give, as far as possible, an unbiassed
statement of the principles followed by both scholars, and
in 84 sqq. have altered or omitted whatever has so far been
proved to be certainly untenable. Though starting with
grave doubts, I must admit that Barth 's fundamental prin-
ciple that all iiouub may be icferrcd to either pci iect or
imperfect stems appears to
me more and more to be correct
and fruitful, although at the same time it is true that all
nouns cannot now be traced to one or the other slein with
the certainty claimed by the author in his NonUnaibildung,
> Du kiilige Sekrifil du Altm TuUmumiSt Fittfaois lod Leipzig, 1 894. Of the
readings dbcussed in pp. I to 88 of the appendix tp tUi tnuulMioa, m oomideiable
BiuDber have aUo been noUoed in the GianiflMr.
V
Digitized by Google
From the Pre/ace to the German Edition, ix
Arnons:^ smaller monographs the studies of Knudtzon,

mcniKiiied on p. 320, note, as also W Baumann's Hcbrdische
Relativsatzc (see p. 466), Hcmer's Syn/ax der ZMworter
(see p. 454), and Diehl's Prontmen perstmale sitffixum 2. ufid
3. plttr. des Hebrdischeut deserve special mention. The last-
named was available only from 91 onwards.
Dissertation
Besides these^ abundant material is contained in the numerous
discussions of grammatical and syntactical questions in
Driver's Notes on the Hebrew Text of the Books of Samuel
(Oxford, 1890), and in the lists of the linguistic features of
particular books in Driver's Introduction to the Literature of
the Old Testament {^XK^ edition, Edinburgh, 1 897), in Siegfried
and Stade's Hehraisches Worterhuch sum A. T. (Leipzig, 1893),
and last but not least iu the greatly improved twelfth cdiiioii
of Gcscmu^' Handzi'orterbuch^ edited by TVants Buhl, with Uie
assistance of A. Socin and H. Zimmern, in Sy -. The sparing i
use of such valuable works as Fricdrich Delit/scli's Assyrische

Grammatik (Berlin, 1889'), P. Haupt's ScmifiscJic Spraclilaute
(see p. 27), &c., was due to the limitations necessarily imposed
by a Grammar intended primarily for theological students
in the widest sense of the term. At the same time, the
greatest possible care has been taken to give a full account
of the which has appeared since 1889.
literature
For notes and corrections relating to particular points,
I have to thank Professors Budde (Strassburg), Dalman
(Leipzig), Haupt (Baltimore), Kamphausen (Bonn), Ley
(Kreuznach), G. Moore (Andover^ Nestle (Ulm), Philippi
(Rostock, in a review of the twenty-fifth edition in the
Theologische Litteraturseitung, 1890, no. 17), Praetorius (Halle),
Stade (Giessen), and Messrs. S. Preiswerk, junior (Bale), and
Zicgert (Brcslau); also for notes on a more considerable scale.
Dr. Ma} cr-Lanibert (1 aris), Prof. Socin (Leipzig), and
Prof. Strack (Berlin). The two last-mentioned scholars
placed at my disposal their own copies of the twenty-fifth
edition, containing numerous marginal annotations. Lastly,
I must pay a tribute of gratitude to the cherished memory
of my. friend Prof. August Miiiler (Halle). The criticisms,
' English tnuMiadon, Berlin And London (Williuns and Nufgate), 1889.
Digitized by Google
X From the Preface to the German Edition,
which, according to the dose of his review of the twenty-fifth

edition, Prof. Mttller Intended for me^ were found indicated
In his private copy by lines and crosses of various colours.
These led me in numerous cases to re-oonsider, and, I hope,
also sometimes to improve the text.
In the correction of tiie proofs of the twenty-sixth edition,
my young colleague Mr. Steuernagel deserves my thanks
for his unwearying and bkiiiui iieip.
The old complaint that reference to the Grammar was

rendered by the numerous
difficult subdivisions of the
sections, has now been met by the addition of marginal
letters. By this means the number of the section and one
letter suffice for reference in nearly nil cnsLi>. In very long
sections ( 67, 72, 7,5, 93, 112, 113, 117, 119, 126, 159) double
letters had to be used (aa, bb^ &c.) after the single alphabet
was exhausted. At the same time, the old subdivisions had
to be retained on account of the numerous references in
existing commentaries, and in the four editions of the
Exercise Book.
Finally, the Paradigms (p. 536 sqq.) have been subjected to
*
a very thorough revision for this edition. From Paradigm G
onward forms not actually occurring have been enclosed
within brackets.
The principal abbreviations used are ZDMG^ZeUsckrift
der deutscken imrgetiUindiscken GeseUschaft : ZAW^Zeit"
schriftfUr die editesiamentlkke Wissenschaft (edited, since
its commencement in by Prof. B. Stade, Giessen):
ZDPV^Zeitschrift des deuischen PaUUiinavereins (edited,
since 1878, by Prof. H. Guthe, Leipzig).
E. KAUTZSCH.
Digitized by Google
CONTENTS.
PACK
Table of Early Semitic Alphabets . . . , . xviii
SiLOAM IXSCRIl'TlOX . . . , . . . . . JOX
INTRODUCTION.
The Semitic Languages in General
j
1.
2.
3.
Sketch of the History of the Hebrew Language
Grammatical Treatment of the Hebrew Language
... l
8
l?
. .
j 4. Division and Arrangement of the Grammar . . . .21

FTRST PART.
ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES, OR THE SOUNDS AND
CHAHACTK RS.
Chapter L The Individual Sounds and Characters.
\
5.
6.
The Consonants : their Form and Names
Pronunciation and Division of Consonants
....
.... 23
28
7. The Vowels in General, \îwel Letters and Vowel Signs . 33
8. The Vowel Signs in particular . 38
C haracter of the several Vowels 42
j
9.
10. The Half Vowels and the Syllable Divider (WA)
U. Other Signs which affect the Reading

... 49
53
^ 12. Dage^ in general, and Dagea furte in particular *
53
$ 13. DageS lene 54
'j
16.
14. Mapptq and Raph6
15. The Accents ..........
Of Maqqeph and M^thgg

55
$6
62
$ 17. Of the Q^re and K<thibh 64
Chapter IL Peculiarities and Changes of Letters: the

Sylu^ble and the Tone.
18. In general 66
19. Changes of Consonants 66
20. The Doubling (strengthening and sharpening) of Consonants . 69
xii Contents,
rACE
21. The Aspiration of the Tenucs 23

22. Peculiarities of the Gutturals
23.
24.
The Feebleness of the Aspirates
Changes of the Weak Letters and \
t< and H
^
.... Z5
7^
iil
25. Firm or Immo\'abIe Vowels 8j

26. Syllablefomiation and its Influence on the Quantity of Vowels 84
27. The Change of the Vowels, especially as regards Quantity . 87
28. The Rise of New \'owels and Syllables 92
29. The Tone, its Clianges, and the Pause 94
SECOND PART.
ETYMOLOGY, OR THE PARTS OF SPEECH.
30. Stems and Roots Biliteral.
: Triliteral, and Quadriliteral 99
31. Grammatical Structure 104
CHAPTRR T. ThF PtÔ\()T7N.
32.
33.
The Personal Pronoun.

Tronominal Suffixes
34. The Demonstrative Pronoun
.........
The Separate Pronoun
.......
. . .105
108
109
85. The Article 110
3G. The Relative Pronoun 113
.37. The Intcrrogati\c and Indefinite Pronouns . . . '113
Chaptkr II. Thf. Vi.rr.
38. General \'icw 115

39. (iround-form and Derived Stems . . . . .
40. Tenses. Moods. Flexion n8

41. Variations from the Ordinary Form of the Strong Verb . .119
I. The Strong Verb.

42. In general. 119
A. The Pure Siem, or Qal.

43. Its Form and Meaning 120
44. I'lexion of the I'erfect of Qal 120
45. The Infinitive 124
4G. The Imperative . 125
47. The Imperfect and its Inflexion 127
48. Shortening and Lengthening of the Imperfect and Imperative.
The Jussive and Cohortative 131
49. The Perfect and Imperfect with Waw Consecutive .135 . .
50. The Participle 13^
d by Google
Contents. xiii
B. Verba Derivativay or Derived Conjugations.
51. Niph'al 139

52. Pi el and Pual 142
53. Hiph'n and Hoph'al 147
54. Hithpa'el 153
55. Less Common Conjugations 15S
56. Quadriliterals 158
C Strong Verb ivitk Pronominal Suffixes.
57. In general 158

58. The Pronominal Suffixes of the Verb 159
59. The Perfect with Pronominal Suffixes 162
ftO. Imperfect with Pronominal Suffixes 165
61. Infinitive, Imperative and Participle with Pronominal Suffixes 167
Vfrbs tvith Gutturals.
S2. In general 169

\ 63. V'erbs First Guttural 170
64. Verbs Middle Guttural 174
j 65. Verbs Third Guttural 177
n. The Weak Verb.

66. Verbs Primae Radicalis NQn (fP) 178
4 67. Verbs y''y . 181
The Weakest Verbs {Verba Quiescentia).
68. Verbs ^t^''D 190

69. Verbs ^'^P. First Class^ or Verbs originally ^ S . . .193
70. Verbs "^^P. Second Class, or Verbs properly *^^P . . .199
k 71. Verbs ^ P. Third Class, or Verbs with Yudh assimilated . 200
72. Verbs \"V (vulgo V'V) 20
73. Verbs middle I (vulgo ^^'V) 210
74. Verbs N'^î? 21 ^
\ 75. Verbs rf1> 21$

Weak
76.
77.
78.
Verbs Doubly
Relation of the Weak
Verba Defectiva
Verbs to one another .... 226
228
229
Chapter III. The Noun.

79. General View 231
80. The Indication of Gender in Nouns 232
81. Derivation of Nouns 235
82. Primitive Nouns 235
j7 Google
xiv Contents,
rxcE
83. Verbal Nouns in General 236
84a. Nouns derived from the Simple Stem 238
84^. Formation of Nouns from the Intensive Stem
85. Nouns with Preformative^ and Afformatives

86. Denominative Nouns
.... . . 243
245
250
k 87. Of the Plural 252
88. Of the Dual 255
89. The Genitive and the Construct State
90. Probable Remains of Early Casc-endings

91. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes
.... 258
259
265
92. Vowel Changes in the Noun 270
9S. Paradi),ans of Masculine Nouns 273
94. Formation of Feminine Nouns 286
95. Paradigms of Feminine Noons 288
06. Nouns of Peculiar Formation 293
97. Numerals, {a) Cardinal Numbers 298
98. Ncnierals. jb) Ordinal Numbers^ 302
Chapter IV. The PARTTrT.E.<>.
I 9^, General View 304

100. Adverbs 305
101. Prepositions 308
102. Prefixed Prepositions 309
I 103. Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes and in the Plural
Form 311
104. Conjunctions 316
105. Interjections 318
TTTTRT) PART.
SYNTAX.
Chapter I. The Parts op SpKRrH.
I. Syntax of the Verb.
A. Use of the Tenses and Moods.
106. Use of the Perfect 320

107. Use of the Imperfect 325
108. Use of the Cohortativc 33
109. Use of the Jussive 334
110. The Imperative
111. The Imperfect with Wftw Consecutive
112. The Perfect with Wuw Consecutive

..... 337
339
344
Contents, xv,
B. The Infinitive and Parlicipie.
113.
114.
The
The
Infinitive
Infinitive
Absolute
Construct
........ PAC.F
355
363
115. Construction of the Infinitive Construct with Subject and
Object 369
116. The Participles 372
C. T/ie G<n'emment of the Verb.
\ 117. The Direct Subordination of the Noun to the Verb as

Accusative of the Object. The Double Accusatire. . 379
118. The Looser Subordination of the Accusative to the Verb . 391
119. The Subordination of Nouns to the Verb by means of
Prepositions 395
120. Verbal Ideas under the Government of a Verb. Co-ordination
of Complementary Verbal Ideas
121. Construction of Passive Verbs ...... 404
407
II. Syntax of the Woun.
122. Indication of the Gender of the Noun .....

123. The Representation of Plural Ideas by means of Collectives,
409
and by the Repetition of Words 414

124. The Various Uses of the Plural-form 416
125. Determination of Nouns in general. Determination of
Proper Names 421
126. Determination by means of the Article 424
127. The Noun determined by a following Determinate Genitive . 431
128. The Indication of the Genitive Relation by means of the
Construct State 434
129. Expression of the Genitive by Circumlocution . . .
439
130. Wider Use of the Construct State 441
131. Apposition 443
132. Connexion of the Substantive ^^nth the Adjective . . . 448
The Comparison of Adjectives. expression
133.
134.
of the Comparative and Superlative)
Syntax of the Numerals
....
(Periphrastic
450
454
III. Syntax of the Pronoun.
135.
136.
137.
The Personal Pronoun
The Demonstrative Pronoun
The Interroc(ative Pronoun
....... 459
464
466
$ 138. The Relative Pronoun 466
139. Expression of Pronominal Ideas by means of Substantives . 470
d by Google
xvi Contents,
Chapter II. The Sentence.

I. The Sentence tn Qener&l.
140. Noun-clauses, Verbal-clauses, and the Compound Sentence 473

141. The Noun-clause 474
142. The Verbal-clause 47^
143. The Compound Sentence 481
144. Peculiarities in the Representation of the Subject (especially
in the Verbal-clause) 483
145. Agreement between the Members of a Sentence, especially
between Subject and Predicate, in respect of Gender and
Number 486
146. Construction of Compound Subjects 492
147. Incomplete Sentences 494
n. Special Kinds of Bentenoes.

148. Exclamations 496
149. Sentences which express an Oath or Asseveration . .
497
150. Interrogative Sentences 498
151. Desiderative Sentences 501
152. Nc^âtivc Sentences .
503
153. Restrictive and Intensive Clauses 509
154. Sentences connected by VVaw 509
155. Relative Clauses 5 II
156. Circumstantial Clauses 515

157. Object-clauses . . . Si
158. Causal Clauses 518
159. Conditional Sentences * . .
519
160. Concessive Clauses 525
IGl. Comparative Clauses
102. ........
Disjunctive Sentences
526
527
1G3. Adversative
164. Temporal Clauses
165. Final Clauses
.........
and Exceptive Clauses
..........
527
528
330
1G6. Consecutive Clauses 532
167. Aposiopcsis, Anacoluthon, Involved Series of Sentences , 532
Additions and Correciions 534

P.\RAI>U'.MS 535
Index of SiRji-rrs, and of Hebrew Words . . .
-559
Index of Passages 567
Digitized b\
EARLY SEMITIC ALPHABETS.
Mesa' in- Mrhri?w in- 1
Phoenician Bgvptian- Palniyr'^no
sciiption [)ldHebrew scriptions Square
coins and Neo- r Sama- Aramaic 1st cent. H.C.
Rashi.
coins And to 4th cent.
charac- i
inscrip- ritan. to ist cent.
cent. B.C 1
gems. of itt cent ter.
tioos. &C. A.ik.
t*FtVf
X '
6
3.' a 3
Any T AA 3^
AQA St 7
9\ -Xti nn
\ Art 'KW
w
1 ,
u f
V * ff V J ^
n
9^ V

A ^
SI
LC
yy
If
m ^! J J \1
!)
p
o oouv 0
u yv if yy

; 77 7; J3 >\
it \^
fvr p
WiV
V m F
T
X ^/y9'H i7j> J)
At.
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
HEBREW GRAMMAR,
INTRODUCTION.
! Semitic Languagts in General,
Six GcMDhUi Intaodnctioii to his Mr. NmtdwSrter^,, and to leth editicw;

. Kciuuit HiUeirt ghUrale H sysiime <ompari As kmgmes timiiiftus, 3rd ed^
Ftfis. 1863; B. Stade, Lehrb. der hcbr. Gramm ,
Lp/. 1879, 5 2 sqq.; E. Konig,
ffist.knt. Leht^b. der hebr. Spr., Lpr. 1881. 3 ; H. Stmck, ' Enl. in das
A. T.,*
in Zockler's Handb. der (heol. Wissemchaften, Nort!!. 1883, i. 190 st^q.; 4th ed.
Munich, 1895 ; F. Hommcl, Die semit, Voiker u. Spreuhm, Lpz. 1883, i. 1 ; Th.
Nolddkc^ article 'Sendtic Langnaget,* in the 9U1 ed. of the Encyclopaedia Br^nmica,
inGermtnurith conectioiisjid*dditlonS| Dtesanii^Sfiraehen^ljpi. 1887 ; W. W^ght,
lectures on the Comparative Grammar of the Semitic languages, Cambr. 189O1.
Much relating' to the subject may also be found in Dicstd's Gcsch. dcs A. T. in der
christl. Kirehe, Jena, 1S69. The material contained in i^^criptions has been ia
process of collection since 1881 in the Paris Cfz/ui Insn ipticiium Semiticaruin.
1. The Hebrew language is one branch of a great family of Ian- a

guages in Western Asia which was indigenous in Palestine, Phoenicia,
Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Assyria, and Arabia, that is to say, in
the countries extending from the Mediterranean to the other side of

the Euphrates and Tigris* and from the Mountains of Armenia to the
southern coast of Arabia. In earijr times, however, it spread from
Arabia over Abyssinia, and by means of Phoenician colonies over many
islands and sea boards of the Mediterranean, as for instance to the
Carthaginian coast. No comprehensive designation is found in early
times for the languages and nations of this family ; the name SmiUs
or Semitic languages (based upon the fact that according to Gen. 10,
21 sqq. almost all nations s}>eaking these languages are descended
from Shem) is however now generally accepted and has accordingly

been retained here \
' From Shem are derived (Gen. 10, 31 sqq.) the Aramaean and Arab families
as well as the Hebrews, but not the Canaanites rhoenicians". who are traced
back to Ham (vv. 6. 15 although their language belongs dcudedly to what
Digitized by Google
2 Introduction.
b 8 The better known Semitic languages may be subdivided as

follows :
I. The South Semitic or Arabic branch. To this belong, besides
the classical literary language of the Arabs and the modern vulgar
Arabic, the older southern Arabic preserved in the Sabaean inscriptions
(less correctly called Himyaritic), and its offshoot, the Ge'cz or
Kthiopic, in Abyssinia.

II. The Middle Semitic or Canaanitish branch. To this belongs
the Hebrew of the Old Testament with its descendants^ the New
Hebrew, as found especially in the Mishna (see below, { 3. i) and
Rabbinic; also Phoenician with Punic (in Carthage and its cobnies)
and the various remains of Canaanitish dbtects preserved in names of
places and persons, and in the inscription of M6ia', king of Moab.
C III. The North Semitic or Aramaic branch. The subdivisions
of this are
(i) The Kastcrii Aramaic or Syriac, the literary language
of the Christian Syrians. The religious books of the Mandaeans

(Nasoraeans, Sabians, also called the disciples of St, John) represent
a very debased ofi&lioot of this. A Jewish modification of Syriac is
to be seen in the language of the Babylonian Talmud. (2) The

Western or Palestinian Aramaic, inconeclly called also *Chaldee.'
This latter dialect is represented in the Old Testament by two words
inGen. 31, 47, by the verse Jer. 10, zi, and the sections Dan. 3, 4 7,

38; Esr. 4p 8 6, 18, and 7, i a-s6, as well as by a conderable portion
of Jewish literature (Targums, Palestinian Gemara, Ac). To the same
branch belongs also the Samaritan, with its admixture of Hebrew forms,
and, except for liic ralhcr Arabic colouring ol die proper names, the
idiom of the so-called Nabataean inscriptions in the Sinaitic peninsula,
in the East of Palestine, &c.
For further particulars about Ibeiemdns of Western Aramaic (including those in

the New Tc^t., in the Palmyrenc and Egyptian Aramaic inscriptions) ice KAiitxachf
Cnimrn. d^s Bidltseh-Arantaisthen, Lpz. 18S4, p. 6 sqq.
d IV. The East Semitic branch', the language of the Assyrio*
it DOW called Semitic The hngoage of the Bhgrloniaai ud Aiqniaiii^ aboiit

which oncertabty long prevailed, has proved to be Semitic, Jut ts Atfitr (Gen.
10, 22*1 is inrl'.?fied among the si-ns of Shem.
Cf. fspeciaiiY Iloiunicl, 'On tlif philological position of the Ass.-I'abylonian as
'
compared with V\ estem i>emitic,' to Aujsatu m. Abkandiungtn arabistisch stmitih

ifghckm ImkuiU, ICmdch, 189a, p. 9a sqq.
Digitized by Google
1.] The Semitic Languages in General. 3
Babylonian inscriptions, the third line of the Achaemenian inscrip-
tions.
n-T t!ic importn'^ce of Assyrian for Hebrew philoloi^y especially from a It-xico-
:r,T[i!K al point ol view comp Friedr. Delitzsch, '/hi Hehrexu Lanpiazf vieu'td in
Load. 1883, and ProUgpmena eincs tuiun hebr.-
i/u iighi of Assyrian research.
mmm, WMirhukt mum A. 71, Lpz. 1886; P. Haupt, Assyrian Phonology, Sec/
in /MraMi, Chio^ Jn. 1885, vol. i. 3; DeUttsch, i#/,9iri/ Grammatik,
Berlin* 1889.
If the above division into four branches be reduced to two principal

groups, No. I, as South Semitic, will be contrasted with the three
North Semitic branches.
All these languages stand to one nnoflier in mnch the same relation as those
of the Geimanic family (Gothic, Oil Norse, Dinieh, Swedish; High and Low
German m ihcxr earlier ana later dialects;, or ilic 6lavoaic languages i^Lithu*
Old Slavonic, Serbian, RotsiaB; Polish, Bohcmlaa). Tii^ ait
aninn, Lettish;
BOW wholly extinct, as the Plioenictan and Assyrian, or preserved only in a
ettlier
ddwsed form, as Neo^yiiftc among Syrian Christians and Jews in Mesopotamia

and Kimlistan, Ethtopic (Ce'ez) in the later Abyssinian dialects (Tigre, Aniharic),
and Hebrew among home modem Jews (except in so far as they attempt a literary
reproduction of the language of the Old Testament). Arabic alone has not only
oocnpied to this day its ordinal abode in Aiabia proper, bnt haa also forced its
way in all diinctioni into the domain of odier langoagea.

The Semitic fiimily of languages is bounded on the East and North hf another
of still wider extent, which reaches from Tiuli.i to the western limits of Europe, and
is called Indo-Oennanic, since it comprises, in the most v.iried ramifications, the
Indian (Sanskrit), Old and New Persian, Greek, Latin, Slavonic as well as Gothic,
along with the other Germanic lan^ûagcs. With the Old Egyptian language, of
which Coptic is a descendant, at well as with tiie languages of noith-westem
Africa, the Semiticbad from the earliest times mnch common, especially In m
grammatieal atrvctore; bnt on the other hand there are fundamental differences
between them, especially from a lexicographical point of \-iew see C. Abel, :
Ein!iifu>:_f; in cin <ii;y/'!isi. h-semitisik indo-turofîschcs VVuruliimrierbuch^ Lps.
1887; aiui Ueber IVahulbeiiekungcn der dgyptUcheny indo-curopaischen u. semit-

isekm Etymologie, Lpz. 1889, pti; Hommd, *On the extent of the relation between
aacieBt Egyptian and Semitic,* in the BiiiHgt mr Ai^rifiltgi** U. 34> MM- \
Erman. Das VtrkaUnts da Atgypiucktn tat dm ttmiHschen S/raeAm, in the

ZDMG, xlvi, 189a, p. 93 ii|q.
8. The grammatieal ttntehtrt of the Semitic family of languages, f
as compared with that of other Uuiguages, especially the Indo-Germanic,
exhibits nnmerooB peculiarities which collectively constittite its dis-
tinctive character, although many of them are found singly in other

languages. These are among the consonants, which in fact form
the substance of these languages, occur peculiar gutturals of diftcrent
grades; the vowels proceeding from the three primary sounds (a, i, )
B a
Digitized by Google
4 Introduction.
arc subject, within ihc same consonantal frame-work, to great changes

in order to express various irnHlifn Ailuns m the signification of the
same stem; {&) the word-stems are almost mvariably triliteral, i.e.
composed of three consonants ;

{c) the verb is restricted to two tense-
forms, with a peculiarly regulated use ; and (d^ the noun has only two
genders (masc and fem.); and peculiar expedients are adopted for
the purpose of indicadng the case-relations; (e) the oblique cases of
the personal pronoun, as well as of aU the possessive pronouns and the
pronominal object of the verb, are denoted by forms immediately
attached (suffixes) ; (/) the almost complete absence of compounds
both in the noun (with the exception of many proper names) and in
the verb; {g) great simplicity in the expression of syntactical relations,
e.g. the small number of particles, and the prevalence of siini)le co-
ordination of clauj.es without periodic structure. Classical Arabic,
however, forms a not unimportant exception as regards the last men-

tioned point.
g 4, From a lexicographical point of view also the vocabulary of the

Semites differs essentially from that of the Indo-Germanic hmguages,
although there is here apparently more agreement than in the grammar.
A considerable nmnber of Semitic roots and stems* agree in sound
with synonyms in the Indo-Germanic family. But apart from ex-
pressions directly Ixjrrowed (see below), the actual similarity might
be restricted lu innuiive words (onomalopoetica), and to those in
wliich one and the same idea is represented by similar sounds in tun-
sequence of a formative instinct common to the most varied families
of language. Neither of these proves any historic or generic relation,
to establish which an agreement in grammatical structure would also
be necessary.
Comp. Friedr. Dditttch, Studien iiber indogcrmmi$ck'UmiiiKke H'tmtl-wr*
z i Hiisihafty Lp*. i^TW Niildechen, Semit. Chssen tu Fifk und Ctirtitu,
M.>^'(!ch. if^76 sq. ; Mc( iinly, Aryo-Semitic Sfferh, Andovcr, U. S. ,'\., iS.Si.
// A-s cjMomalojtoctic words, <'r a> stem-sounda of a similar character, we may

compare, e.g. pp^, A<;\ll, :ti^-o, Sarts. lih, Enj^. to Vr. /^'i/ur, Gtrni.
Ittitn ; bhi (killdr. ^^K, ^l)!) iA.Va>, itikkaj, hvKioj, voJ-'o, (Icrni. i/iuf/cn, uuL't/i,
Eiig. to rtr//, lis, ri^n x*V<*"^ Vcxi. khA) idoji, âHare, Yt. gratter^
Eng. Gerou knOun ;

fo graie, to serateh^ franco. Genu, bntken, &c. Keuss, ;
Caek, der kL Sehriftem A, T.\ Bmoindiw. 188 1, p. 38, draw* attention moreover
to the Semitic cqaivlent for eartk, sijf, tepm, Jk^rm, t9 sotmd, tP metumn^ U mix.
On \bt dtktiiKtioii between stems and rootSi see 30, Kern, i and a. G. W.C]
Digitized by Google
I.] The Semitic Languages in General,
t9 sm^t toflact, clear, U Jhmlt nWM, oai, ox. Sec An example of a somewhat
diffocnt klQd is am, Aam (tarn), gam, iam, io the sense of the German utrnt,
msammtn; in Hebtew DDK (from which TOt fiopU, properly asstmbfy\ 09
D3 also, moreover^ Arab. V03 to collect; Pers. ham^ hamah at the
(t/fM) samt,
sanu time); Sans. tfwi4 {with), Cik. ana (dfjupoj), d/iJy, oôv {ofiiKot, f>fiaSoi), and
harder Koiv6t, Lnt. i-f, cumulus, ninc/us ; with the corrosi)on(ling sibilant Sans.
sam, Ck, ffi/f, îJk, ^w<Sf :--<m*'(>i, Goth, sama, Germ. .ra/M/, sammeln ; but many of
these instances aie donbtfiiL
Essentially difTerent from this internal connexion, is the occur- i

rence of the same words in different languages, where one language
has borrowed directly from the other. Such loan-words are~
a' In Htbr. : some nnmci? of objects which were oriiînally indigenous in Egypt,
Pcrs-a or Indi.i, e.g. IN^ F.gyptian properly aur da, the great river, Coptic ^^/r*?
.
or ycro\ nearly always of the XjIc; ^HX (Egyptian) Nile-recd ;

D"^"!? (in Zend
palrida^za, circumvallation ^ wa/>d5o'oO f Uii sure garden, park; }to31^ dark,
Persian ^'old coin; D**?^ pcacoiks, pcrliai)5 Iroin the Malabar tS(;ai or tSÂat.
Some of these words are aUo found in Greek, as (Sans, iapi) ape, ic^vof,
m^ffot ;
DB"]? ;Pers. kirbds, Sans, karpdsa) cotton, Khptaaot, carbasus.
{p) In Giede, &e. x some orisinaUj Semitic names of Asiatic prodncts and
articles of conuneice, e. g. p3 ^êt, iyuiuj AlilBniet, ktfiaift/rit, inemu;
ttf^ Mimf, eamMO, cane; fS$ g^gtum, mmimm, cmnhi; n^'^>*^ mw^^
coma; bÔi wiftôt, eamelux; fOT^ ^fufiim, arrkaip, arrka, pledge. Snch
tnnsitioiis have probably been bronght ahont dbieliy by Fhoeniciaa trade. (Compi
A. Miiller, ' St roitiaeheLdinwdrter im alteren Gnechisch.* in Beutfibietgia'&Beitragie
sur Kutuk der fmlo-gemt. Sprachtn, ( if 'tinj^cn, 1R77, toI. i, p. 273 sqq. E. Ries, ;
Quae res et vocahula a gentibus sctnitim tn uraeciant pi-rtfetteritU, Hreslaii, 1890 ; ,
Moss-Amolt, 'Semitic words in Greek and Latin,' in the Transactions 0/ the

Amtrkan Phi^tbigieai AsudatioM, xxiiL p. 35 sqq. H. Lewy, Ht semiiisekm ;
FrtmdwMir tm CrUck^ Beilai, 1895 J. H. Ikmdl Dem Aedr.'pkSm*. Spntck-' {
wmnge emgtkSr. LdmmSrUr im Miefitigfypk. is. kiiratitchm Texim, Lps. 18S6.)
6. No system of writing is ever ao perfect as to be able to reproduce k

the sounds of a language in all their various shades, and the writing
of Itu Similis has esif;entialiy one remarkable defect, viz. that only
the consonants (uliicii mUccd form the substance of the language)

are iirrarigcd in line as real lefters whilst of the vowels only the
longer are indicated by representative consonants (comp. below, 7).
It was only later that q>ecial small marks (points or strokes below
' According to Delitutcb, however \Prolegg. 145, v. sup. p. a), is a genuine

Semitic word.
* So also oijginaUy the Ethiopic writings, whidi aftenmids lepmented tike
owek by small appendages to the consonants, or by some other change in their
form. On tlie A isyrio- Babylonian canelfonn writing, which likewise indicates the
vowels, see p. 6, note i, ad &n
Digitized
6 Introduction,
or above the consonants) weie invented to represent to the eye all the
vowels (see { 8). These are, however, superfluous for the practised
reader, and are therefore often wholly omitted in Semitic mannscripts
and printed texts. Semitic writingt moreover, almost invariably pro-
ceeds from right to left
With the exception of the Assyrlo-Babylonian (cuneiform), all
varieties of Semitic writing, although differing %vi(lely in some respects,
are derived from one and the same original alphabet, now represented
most faithfully by the characters used on the stele of MeSa', king of

Moab (see below, { 2. 2), and in the old Phoenician inscriptions. The
old Hebrew writing, as it appears on tlie olde t monument, the Siloam
inscription (see below^ a. a), exhibits esaeniiaUy the same character.
The old Greek, and indirecdy all European alphabets, are descended
from the old Hioenician writing.
/ See tlie Table of Alptubets itt the beginning of the GnnuBMr, which ehom
the leletioat of (be older vKrietiet of Semitic viitinfr to one another and e$peciallf
the origin of the present Hebrew characten from their ])rimitive forms. For a more
complete view, see Gesenius' Scriftftra!' Ihtgtinrque Phocnictae monnmenta^ Lips.
j8.^7, 4to, pt. i. p. 15 s<iq.. and pt. iii. tab. 1-5, also his article '
Palaographie ' in
Erech and Gruber's Encykl. Sect. iii. Bd. 9. From numerous mononoents since
discoferedp ow knowledge of the Semitic characters, especially the Phoenicbn, Imb
become conndembly enlarged and more aocnimte. Comp. c^Mdally the Tables
of De Vogii^ in vol. xi. of the Kevut anhiol., l*aris, 1865, and in the MHan^s
iVar(hiologie orUntale, Paris, 1868, after p. 141 further Paul Schroder, Dit phbnii.
;
Sprai'he, Hallf, 1869. p. 75 sqq. j Ixnormant, Essai sur la propagation de

I' Alphabtl Phinuun dans Vatuien monde, Paris, 1875, torn. i. 2"" ed. (to be used
with some caution); Sclilottmano, article 'Scbrift n. Schriftzeichen ' in Riehm's

HtmdwirUrh, di$ tM, AUirt*, 1434 sqq. : Isaac Taylor, TIU AlpkM, 9ec^ Loud.
p.
i883 a Tob.: Fhil. Beiser, Hifloin dt rierihtn dam tantiqmUi, Paiis^ 1891.
For the develcq^ment of the H^rtw characteis and the best Tables of Alphabeta,
f comp. 5. a, note a.
m 6. As regards the relative age of the Semitic languages* the

oldest writings are to be met with in the Assjrrio-Babylonian (cunei-
form) inscriptions'; with which are to be classed the eax&st Hebrew
fragments occurring in the Old Testament (see 2).
' The Sabaean (Khnyaihic) mithig nms oceaaionally ftom lefk to right, and evn
alternately in both directions {houslropheJon), but as a rule from rii^ht to left. In
Klliiopic writing the direction from left to rij^bt has become the prevailing on? ;
some few old inscriptions exhibit, however, the opposite direction. The cuneiform
writing also runs from left to right, but this is undoubtedly borrowed from a non-
Semitic people.
Comp. Friedr. Dtlinach, lYritgmma, p. 57. ' We pomen written monnraents of
Digitized by Google
j.] The Semthc Languages in General, 7
The Jewish- Aramaic v riungs begin about the lime of Cyms (comp.
Ezr. 6, 3 sqq.), those of the Arabic branch first appear in ihc earliest
centuries *,.d. (Snbaean inscrijitions, Eiliiopic translation of the Bible

in the fourth to fifth century, North-Arabic literature from the sixth
century a. d.) It is, however, another question which of these languages
has adhered longest and moat uthfaUy to the original character of the
Semitic, and which consequently represents to us the earliest phase of
its development For the more or less rapid transformation of the
sounds and forms of a language, as spoken by nations and races^ is
dependent on causes quite distinct from the growth of a literature, and

oftentimes the organic structure of a language is even considerably
impaired before it has developed a literature, especially by early
contact with people of a strange tongue. Thuf? in the Semitic depart-
ment, the Aramaic dialects exhibit the earliest and greatest decay,
next to them the Hebrew -Canaanitish, and in its own way the
Assyrian. Arabic, owing to the seclusion of the desert tribes, was
the longest to retain the original fullness and purity of the sounds
and forms of words ^ Even here, however, there appeared, through
the revolutionary influence of Islam, an ever-increasmg decay, until
Arabic at lengdi reached nearly the stage at which we find Hebrew as
early as the Old Testament.
the A^tUui king* Isme-Daûi md Stmsi-KMiiiiuui I, who reigned about 1830 or

t8l6 B. C. : bat Babylonian antiquities and Babyloaian literature precede the
Assyrian by a development of more than a thonsand years.' According to
Hilprecbt, Thr Pabylonian Expedition of the University of Pennsylvania, i.
p. II sqq., the insciiptions fuund at Nippur embrace the period from 3800 to
450 a.c.
* Even now the langinge of lome of the Bidawl i attch purer and move
archaic than that of the town- Arabs. It must, however, here be admitted that the
torrner exalted estimate of the primiti%'eness of Arabic has been moderated in
many respects by the nmst recent school of Semitic philology. Much apparently
origixial is to be regarded with Ndldeke {Dit semi/. Spr., 5 [^'Êncycl. Brit.f
p.
ed. 9, art. Sbmitxc LANGUAGES, p. 642]) only as a modification of die origiaal.
The amerdoB that the Amba exhibit the Scmhic character in its pnve8tlbim,ahold,
according to Ndlddke, be rather that ' the inhabitantB of tlie dewrt lands of Arabia,
nnder the influence of the extraordinarily monotonous scenery and of n !ifc con*
tinually the same amid continnai chancre, h:\ve einphnsiêd some of the most
important Semitic cbaracteristics in a most one-sidcd manner.'
[Id modem conversational Arabic, the Tinwia and the endings of in ectional fl
faaM are ahnortalwayi neglected. Mr. E.T.Rogeia, late Brftiih Cental at Caim,
told me that tkey are stUl pranoanced in the ne^bouhood of Timbnctoo.
G. W. C.)
Digitized by C^|gte
8 Introduction,
ft Haoe tlie pbOMIIienon, that in its grammatical itnutiire the ancient Hebiew
agrees more with the modem than with the ancient Arabic, nnd that the latter,
although it only appears as a written lnni;iin{;e at a later period, has yet in many
respects preserved a more complete structtire and a more original vowel system
than the other Semitic languages. Thva it oocopies amongst tbete ft potidoo
similar to that which Saadcrit holda among tfie Lido-Germaaie huiguigei^ or
Gothic in the nanower circle of the Germanic But even tbe toughest oiganism
of a language often deteriorates, at lea^t in single forms and derivatives, while
on the contrary, in the midst of what is otherwise nnivcrsal decay, there still
remains here and there something original and archaic, and this is the case
with the Semitic languages.
Faller proof of the above statementi faelongi to the oompantlve gnmnur
of the Semitic languages. It foUowa, however, from what has been said : (i) that
the Hebrew language, as found in the sacred literature of the Jews, has, in respect
to its organic structure, already suffered more considerable losses than the Arabic,
which appears much later on the historical horizon ; (a) that, notwithstanding this
fact, we cannot at once and in all [>oints concede the priority to the latter ; (3) that
amiftake to comider with lome that the Anmaie^ on aooonnt of itsafanpUcity
it it
(which waa only caoied fay the decay of its itiuctutt), ia the oldcit fonn of
Semitic speech.
3, Sketch of the iltilory of the Hebnw Language:

Sec Gcsenius, Gesth. der hcbr. Sf rachc u. Srhrift, 1815, 5-18 i'h. ;
Noldeke's article, 'Sprachc, hebraische,' in Schenkel's iî/'ir/-Z<-xt^^ Lpz. 1875,

Bd. v; Bertheaa. *HdiKiiMhe Spnche^' ia Heraog's ReaUncykhpadU^ 2. Avfl. Bd. 5
W. Rohettson Smith, * Hebrew Langaqje and literatuic,* hi the StujKloptuifia
Britamt$ka, 9th ed., Edinh. 1880^ vol. xi. p. 594 aqq.
a 1. The name Hehnw Language usually denotes the language of

the sacred writings of tbe Israelites which fonn the canon of the
Old TesfatHiH/, It is also called Ancient ffdrew m contradistmction
to the Neo-Hebrew in Jewish wriungs of the posi-biMical period
( 3. i). The name Hebrew language (Hîsy y^câ-aa t^v 'Eî)mcoVf
i^paiari) dos iioL occur in the Old Testament itself. Instead of it
we find in Is. 19, 18 the term language of Caman \ and DH^n^ m the
Jews' language 2 Ki. 18, 26. 28 (comp. Is. 36, II. 1 3), Neh. 13, 24.
In the last-ciied passage it already agrees with the later (post-exilic)
usage, which gradually extended the name Jewish to the whole
nation, as in Haggai, Nehemiab, and tbe book of Esther*
b The distinction between tbe name* iMrms ^D^^ *2fifSin) and IsratHies
(TKlff^ ^ja) ia that the latter waa rather a national name of hononr, with alio
^ That Hebrew in its present furm was actually developed in Cauaaa appears
from Ada aa ^ nw of yam (sea) for the west, nJgcb (properly dryness,
alkerwnrda aa a proper name for the loiith of Palestiae) for the toath, comp.
ResH^ L C| p. 53 aq.
Digitized by Google
2.] History of the Hebrew Language, 9
a religious siguiHcance, employed \>y the people UiemselveS| while the lormcr
ftppcan M the leM lignifiGHit nttme by which Ae ofttion wm kiMnm amot^t
foKigiiei8 Hence in the Old Testament Mtknws we only spoken of either when
the name b employed hy thenaselTes as contnstcd with foreigners (Gen. 40, 5. 1
Ex. 2, 7. 3, iS and elsewhere; Jon. t, 9) or when it is put in the mfnith of those
who arc not Israelites (Gen. 39, ^. 17. 41, 13 and elsewhere) <>r, finilly, when it is
i
used opposition to other tiations i^Gen. 14, 13. 43, 32. Ex. 2, 11. 13. ai, i).
in
Its nse in t Sam. 13. 3. 7 and 14, the derffadon from eMMA7
m tki other side with the derivative saffiz ^~g~ (S ^> 5' appears to be the
only one philologically possil)le. The name accor(lin<;ly denoted the Israelites
as being tho-e who inhabited the V/'tv-, i.e. the dislnct on the other side of
the Euphrates or perhaps more correctly the Jordan?}, and would therefore
originally be only appropriate wlien need Ivf the nations on &is side of the
Esphratcs or Joidan. We most, then, suppose tliat after the crossing of either
river it had been retained (by the Abrahamidae) as an old-established name*
and within certain limits (sec above) had become naturalized among them. Tn
referriniT t!)is name to the patronymic 'Eber, the Hebrew genealogists have assigned
to it a much more comprebisive signification. For since in Gen. 10, ai (Num.

a4, 34 does not apply) Shem is called the tMcestor 0/ ati iki ckUdrm c/'Ebcr^ and
to the latter there also belonged according to Gen. as, 20 sqq. and xo, 35 sqq.
Arsmean and Arab races^ the name, afterwards restricted in the form of the gentilic
'ibrt, exclusively to the Israelites, must have originally included a decidedly larger
variety of conntries and nations. The etymological si^ficaoos of the name must
in that case out be lasisted upon.
The term 'Efiptiffri is first nsed, to denote the old Hebcew, in the prologue C
to JesQS theson of Siradi (abont I3obcX sad in tbe New Testament^ Rev. 9, 11.
On tbe other hand It serves In John 5, s. 19^ 13. 17 perhaps also 19^ so and
Rev. t6, 16 to denote what was then the venaeslar (Aramaic) of Palestine as
opposed to the Greek. The meaning of the expression *E^^t? ^dKtKrof in Acts
af, 40. aa, a and 26, 14 is doubtful (comp. Kautzsch, Gramvi. dcs lUbL-Aram.^
p. 19 sq.). Josephus also uses the term iitbrew lK>th of the old Hebrew and the
Araasaie vanaenlar of hk tisae.
The Hdwew Isngnsge b first csDed the nend hi^gti^ in the JevdshpArsmaio
versions of the Old TesUment for the language of the sacred tKMrfts In opposition
to the liit^ma ^nfama, i.e. the Anunaic vulgar tongoet
%. With the exception of the Old Tegtammt (and apart from d

tbe Pboenidan inscriptions ; see belo\*', 2. 3), only very few remains
of old Hebrew or old LLiiiainitish luc.aiure have been preserved. Of
the latter (i) an inscription, unfortunately much injured, of thirty-
four lines, which was found in the ancient territory of the tribe of
Reuben, about twelve miles to the east of the Dead Sea, among the
' The Graeco-Roman form of the name is not directly derived from the Hebrew
but from tbe Palestinian Aramaic 'iMgtd, Uhe Hebrew.'
Digitized by Google
10 Inirodtiction,
ruins of the city of Dtb6n (now DhMn), inhabited in earHer times by

the Gadites, afterwards by the Moabites. In it, the Moabitc king
Mesa' (at the beginning of the nintli century b.c.) recounts his battles
with Israel (comp. 2 Ki. 3, 4 sqq.). his buildings, and other matters*;
of old Hebrew (2) an inscription of six lines (probably of the eighth
century b.c.*) discovered in June, 1880, in the tunnel between the
Virgin's Spring and the Pool of Siloam at Jerusalem ; (3) twenty
engraved seal-stones, some of them piexilic but bearing little except
proper names*; (4) coins of the Maccabaean prince John Hyrkanus
(from 135 B.C.) and his successors \ and the coinage of the revolts in
the times of Vespasian and Hadrian.
Tin's monument^ unique of it^ kind, was Brst seen in August, 186$, od the
spot, by the GerTTinn missionan' F. A. Klein. It wa<; afterwnnU ftroken into
pieces by the Arabs, so that only an incom})lcte co]iy of the inscription could be
made. Most of the fragments are now in the Louvre in Parti. Comp. Ch.
CleniioDt*GDiiiu (at that time hetd of the Fiench coninUte in Jenmlem),
Im sQI* df Mesa m' it Mta^, Ptrif| 1870, and <La stile de Dhibtn,* in the
Revue Archfol.^ March, 1870, p. 184 sqq. (with an improved cap]r)j aho the
Journal Asiat., 1887, p. 71 sqq. Comp. for the history of the discovery and for
the earlier literature rclatini' to the stone, cspeciaily the article in Auslatui,
1874, No. 48, p. 951 sqq. A photograph of the two largest fragments wa prepared
bj the Fund from drawings bjr Sir Wairen. All pitoeding
Palestine Exploratioii C
now, however, antiquated, oiriag to tlie eioellent leprodiiclion and
Ikctlniiles are
tiandation of the inicr^tion by Smend and Soctn, who from the fragments of
the tone, and the squeeze taken in T869 before its destruction, have established
about eighty new characttrs Freiburg im liaden, i8!^6>. Cf. also Driver, Notet
m the Hebrew Text of the Books of Samuel, Oxford, 1890, p. Ixxxv sqq.
* Comp^ for this inseriptioB-~nof6ctimalcly not dated, bat Ungotelcallf and
palaeograiihicallj veiy impoitantwhich ideia to the boring of the tnnnd, Kaiitach
imUAtn Palestina-Verems, 1881, pp. loa iqq. and 360 sqq.
in the Zeitsehrifi its
(with a copy from a pln*;lpr-cist of the inscription), also 1883, p. 205 vy\. Guthe,
ibid. 1881, p. 250 sqq. and /DAfG. l88a, p. 725 .vjq. ; W. Wnglit in the
Proceedtngs of Soc. of Bibl. ArchcuoL^ Feb. 7, i88a ; J. Derenbourg in the Comptes
rettdus dt VAfod, des mscriptions, i88j, torn, iv, and in the Rewte det ihtdes
fmvest 1881, Parte $ and 4 ; in the Orimtal Series eftJu London PaUigrttpkkai
Soc., Plate 87 Bcswick in the QuarleH^ Statements of the Palestine Explor. Fmnd,
;
Oct. 1884. The inscription was removed in 1S90, and broken into six or seven
pieces iti the proce='^ v. Guthe in ZDl'V. xiii. 286 sqq.
: if, as can hardly be
doubted, the name (i.e. emissio) Is. 8, 6 refers to the discharge of water
fiom the Viigin's Spring, through the tunnel (so Stade^ Geseh, Isr. p. 594 , then
the hitter, and eoniaqnentlj the inscrîtioii, was alieady in cxtirtenoe aboat 796 B.c.
~
See Rodiger in ZDMG. iii, 1849, PP* ^43 347* ôgii^* MikuegjtS ^
d'artUoUê orientale^ Par. x868, pp. 131-140; M. A. Lewy, il^fv/ . GemmtH,
Bresl. 1869, p. 33 sqq.
' De baulcy, Reckerches sur la numismatique judaique, Paris, 1854, and his
Digitized by Google
a.) History oj the Hebrew Language, ii
3. In the whole series of tlic ancieiU Hebrew writings, as found t

lit the Old Testament and also in non-biblical monuments (see above,
2. 2), the language (to judge from its consonantal formation) remains,
as regards its general character, and apart from slight changes in
fonn and differences in style (see letters b to w)^ at about the same
stage of development. In this fonn, it may at an early time have been
fixed as a literary language, and the feet that the books contained in
the Old Testament were handed down as taertd writings, must have
contributed to this constant uniformity.
To tiii$ old Hebww, the language of the Caawmi^ or PhoeniciMi* ttockt f

ctme the neasett of all the Semitic Uqgnages, as b evident partly from the nuuiy
CtmenitiA iMMMt of penoBa and places with a Hebrew f<wiii and rignificetion
which occur in the Old Testament (e.g. plSr^sbo, ">DD nr)i?, &c.; on 'CanaaoitO
^losses' to Assyrian wor-U in tlie mnpiform tablets of Tell-el-Amama [fourteenth
century n c.l cf.Zimmern, Zcitschri/t fur Assyriohê, 1891, p. 154 sqq.*), and
partly from tlie extant lemains of the Phoenician aiid Punic languages.
The hitter we find in tlwlr pecoliai writing
(fi i> 5) >n a grit nvniber of
mserlptioiia add on of which have been collected by Geeenins,

eoine, ccîics
Monumm. Phtxnicia, Jnda% Boorgadc, Davis, de Vogii^, P. Sdiroder,
V. Mallzan, Eutio^. but especially in J'nrt I of the Corpus Tmcriptionum Semiti-
carum, Paris, 188 1 sqq , edited by the lâris Academy of In~.ciiptions. Among the
inscriptions but few public documents arc found, e.g. two lists of fees for
Mrifices; by frr the most are epitaphs or votive tablets. Of special importance
{ the faiscription on the Saict^phagns of King Elmihiaiar of Sidon, ftmnd in 1855,
now in the Louvre: first accwately reproduced in Mhnoire sur h sanopht^ f
rimcription funiraite if Estmrnazar, rot dt Sidon, Vax'm, iS56,by the Due de Luynes;
fiilly explained by Schlottmann, Halle, i!^68,and by Kaempl, Prague, 1874 ;
cDmp.
also the reproduction in the Corpus Inscr. StntU.^ torn, i, fasc. i. To these
nay be added isolated wofds in Gredc and Latin anthors, and the Pnnie teats
in Plaoln^ Fumulm 5, 1-3 (best treated by Gildemeisler in Ritacbl's edition
of Plaatns^ Laps. 18S4, torn, ii, fasc. 5). From those monuments we team tlie
native orthography, from the Greek and Latin transcriptions the pronunciation
and vr>ca1i2atton the two together give a tolerably distinct idea of this laagnage
;
and its relation to Hebrew.
Jttmimatiqui A la ttm smte. Par. 1874

; M. A. Levy, Gtxck. Arjmd. MSmam^
Breslaa, l86a Madden, History of Jtrvish Coinagt, Lond. 1864, and The Coins
;
of the Jtttn, l.nnd tH8i vol. ii. of the International Numismat. Oritnt."\\
Keioacli, Lts mannatts juives, Paris, i^^'^ Coinp. the liternture in Schurer's
GeuhichtB Jes Judischen Volkis im Zetiaiter J. C, Lps. 1890, 1. p. i; sqq.
'
\tl^t ^ the native namcb comnon both to tiie Gsaaanitidk tribes hi
Fdcnthie and to those which dwdt Lebanon and on the Sijniaa
at the foot of die
const, whom we call Phoenicisns while they celled theneelves )303 00 thsir coins.
The people of Caithsge also eslled themselves sn.
' Cf. inter alia: #n# *- J^t, ahcuia^TTO^îa'aH. or idrim^,kaf>mm
Digitized by Google
12 Iniroduclion,
g Phoenietan (Punic) ivoids oocvrrlag in inicriptioM ate* e.g. 711 Cod^ DIM ma^
p son, na dfastfiiAr, nap ina /Hkf/, nat mnjice, ^ya
pM iW, D* pM ipa nhtr. jrm*. |0r np iiaM^
er^v Mm. ya-Myîfr, von/w, er jr, vae^ -wp /, p ( - Heiv. rr?i)
Ptoper namct : 5/w, nSt 7>w. MSTI Hiatm, PjOSn iHmmiitU, 8cc Comp.
A. Blocb, />AwMilr. <7&trjr., Bert. 1890.
U Variations from Hebrew in Phoenician orthography and inflectioa are, e.g*

the almost invariable omission of ihc vowel letters ( J. 2], as HI for nâ
house, bp for tour, flY f(,r [H^, D^^^ for C^:n3 D3^K (in Plaut.
a/onim) gthis ; the fem., even in the absolute state, ending in H (| 80. 2)
beside K (J^),
the relative- B*f< (liebr. &c. The ciiffercnccs in pronunciation
are more remarkable, especially in Punic, where the 1 was regulaily pronounced
as 18, e.g. s&fet (Judge), saltis (three), BH ritff - kmd; i and t often
as the obfctue dvll aonnd ^, e.g. ynt^mmt (eoce eum), flK ^n^K) yik;
the P as tf, eg. "^PPO ^tfmr (comp. LXX, Geo. aa, 94 Ih^). See the
CoUeelioo of the grammatical peculiarities in Gesenius, I'ifonumctita Phoenuia^
p. 430 sqq. ; in Movers' article, '
Pluinizien,' in Ersch and Grubcr's Etuykloplidie,
Sect, Bd. a4, p. 434 sq<j.
iii, Paul Schroder, Die phdniz. Sprathe, Halle, 1S69
;
;
B. Stade, ' Emeute Priifung des zwischen dem Phoni/. und Hebr. bestcbenden
Verwandtschaft^^radet,* in the MwrgmlSnd, Forsckungen, I.pz. 1875.
i As the Hebrew writing on monumenis and coins mentioned

in 2. 2, consists only of consonants, so also the writers of the Old
Testament books used merely the consomn? signs ( i. 5), and even
now the written scroHs of the Law used in the synagogues must not,
according to ancient custom, contain anything more. The present
pronunciation of this consonantal teit, its vocalicttiott and accentu-
tion, rest on the tnufition of the Jewish schools, as it was finally fixed
by the system of punctuation ( 7 sqq.) introduced by Jewish scholars

about the seventh century a. d. ;
comp. 3. 2.
k An earlier stage of the devtlopnicnt of ihc (\ina;iuiUh,ii-Hcbrew

language, i.e. a form of it anterior to the written locuments in our
|o.ssession, and when it must have stood nearer to the original
language of the united Semitic family, can still be discerned in its
principal features :(i) from many archaisms preserved in the tradi*

tional texts, especially in the names of persons and places dating from
earlier times, as well as in isolated forms chiefly occurring in poetic
style ; (s) in general by an potltriori conclusion from traditional
forms^ so far as according to the laws and analogies of phonetic

change they obviously point back to an older pbaae of the language
Digitized by Google
ia.] History of the Hebrew Language, 13
and (3) by comparison with the kindred languages, especially Arabic,

in which this earlier .stage of the language has been frequently pre-
served even down to later times ( i. 9). In numerous instances in

ezamitung linguistic phenomena the same and consequently so much
the more certain result is attained by each of these three methods.
Althoog^ the cysleinaiic inveitigataoQ of the lingniatie developawDt indiealecl
above belongs to compufmtive Semitic philologj* it Is nevertheless iiidispensatile
for the scientific treatment of Hebrew to refer to the primitive Semitic {ijround-
form^ and to compare the corresponrling forms in Arabic Even elementary

grammar which treats of the furms uf the language occurring in the Old Testament
frequently requires, for their explanation, a reference to theie groand-forms.
6. Even in the language of the Old Testament, notwithstanding /

Its general unifonnity there is noticeable an undoubted progress from
an earlier to a later character. Two periods, though with some
reservations, may be distinguished : the frtt, down to the end of the
Babylonian exile ; and the ucmd^ afler the exile.
To the former belongs, apart from isolated traces of a later m

revision, the larger half of the Old I csiament books, viz. [a) of the
prose and historical writings, most of the Pentateuch and Joshua,
Judges, Samuel, and Kings; {b) of tiie poetical, a part of t)ic Psalms
and Proverbs : (c) the writings of the earlier prophets in the following
chronological order : Amos, Hosea, Isaiah, Micah, Nahum, Zephaniah,
Habakkuk, Obadiah (?), Jeremiah, aekiel. The last two continued
to flourish during the exile, to the close of which also some portions
of Isaiah (especially chapters 40-66) belong.
The iDeginning of this period, and consequently of Hebrew literature generally, U
it mdonhtedly to be placed early is > time of Moiet, Although the Pcatntendi
in iti pieseat form, in whidi veiy difTeient hands may be still cleariy lecogolied, la
to be regarded as a gradual production of the eeatariet alter MoMt. Certain
lingiii<;tic [>ecuHaritics of the Pentateuch, which it was once cn^tomnry to regaid at
archai^mc, s>ich as the epicene use of hov, vo:i//:, for rnV^ ffV/, and Vf\7\ for
K'*n, arc merely lo be atmbuted to a later icdaclor; cf. ( 17 aa im. The linguistic
dianctcr of the various strata of the Pentateuch has been examined by Ky^sel,
De EMisti^ P*t$UUeueJUei serawu, Lps. 1878 ; Konig, D* eriiieat focroi ofgM*
menio linguae Ugibus repctito, Lpz. 1879 (Analysis of Gen. I~i i); F. Giesebrecht,
'Der Sprach^êlir. des hexateuchischcri Elohislen,' in Ztschr.f. d. AltUst. Wissensch.
1881, p. 177 scjq ,
partly rrfO'liried by I 'rivcr in the Journal of Phihlot^, vol. xi.
p. 201 sqq. Abundant njatter is aliordcd alo by Holzinger, Einieitnn^ in Jen

J>imtattmek, Ftelhb 1893; Driver, tntnimtim U ik* LUimtmn tf ik* Old
T!t$tMu$U, 5th cd^ Edinbuigh, 1894 ; Stmck, EMtUtmf $m A, Mnnich, T\
1^5; and with regard to the linguistic character of the Old Testament writings
In general, Kiinift MmkUung in du A, Boon, 1893. On the Uognistic
Digitized by Google
14 Iniroductum, [f i\
dumeter of Z>ottero-X*iah, oomp. Kooig, Der OffmharungAigHg da A. T.,

Lpz. 1882, i. 2! I sq. ;
to the Book of Isaiah, p. 255 sqq.
Che^Tie, Infro-.L
0 Moreover, lliere occur evrn u. [( rt niiih, and still more so in Ezekiel, decided
approximations to the Aramaizmg language of the second period (see $ a. 7) ;
eomp. Zimmer, Afwiudsmi fmmUmiy Iblle, t8Bo, pt. t
/ 6. Even in the writings of this first period, which embraces

nearly a thou;nnd years, we meet, as might be expected, with some
considerable differences in linguistic form and style, which are due
partly to differences in the time and place of their composition, and
partly to the individuality and power of the authors. Thus Isaiah, for
example, writes quite differently from the later Jeremiah, but also
differently from his contemporary Micah. Amongst the historical
books of this period, the texts borrowed from earlier sources have
a linguistic colouring perceptibly different from those derived from
later sources, or passages which belong- to the latest redactor himself.
Yet the structure of the language, and, apart from isolated cases, even
the vocabulary and phraseology, are on the whole the same, especially
in the prose books.
9 But the poetic bmgtiage is in many wajrs distinguished from

prose, not only by a rfyihrn consisting of more strictly balanced
(parallel) members, but also by peculiar words and mioningSt
if^xions and synkKHeal eemtrucHms which it uses in addition to
those usual in prose. This distinction, however, does not go far as,
for example, in Greek. Many of these poetic ])LH.uliariiics occur

in the kindred lan^ûages, especially in Aramaic, as the ordinary
modes of expression, and probably are to be regarded largely as
archaisms which poetry retained. Some perhaps, also, are embellish-

ments which the Hebrew poets who knew Aramaic adopted into their
language*.
The prophets, at least the earlier, in language and ibytbm are to
be regarded almost entirely as poets, except that with them the

sentences are often more extended, and the parallelism is less regular
and balanced than is the case with the poets properly so-called. The
language of the later prophets, on the contrary, approaches nearer
to prose.
That altcady in laaiah'ii time (second hali of the eighth century B.C.) educated
Hebcewi, or at Icait offioen of itate, aodenlood Aiamale, whUe the oooubob
pco^ Id Jerottkm did not, Is ovideot from s XL 18, 36 3$, 11).
Digitized by Google
3.j History of the Hebrew Language. 15
Ob Hie rhjrti^m of HdMCir poetry, tee beeMcs dw OminMiitaiiet od the f

Pnlnu by De Wette, Delitacli, Hapfeld, and othen^ espceially H. EweM, ' All-
gemeines iiber die hebr. Dichiung und iiher das Psatounbnch* in Dichter ties
A'ti-n Bumics, Clott. 18,^9. 2nd e<l., 1866, Th. i. I Hiilftc; J. Ley. Crundzit'y ih'S
Khythmus. 6^y., Halle, 1H75 ;

L<it/euien dcr Mctrik dir hebr, Foesie, Hallc, 1887 i
Kcuss, Gesch. dtr hi SchrifUn A, T'.'j, Braunschw, ibSi, p. I4I sqq.

Of all views of this matter* the only soond one to far is Badde's discovery of the
Qhia> or Laasentation-Verse {ZAfV, tSSs, 6aqq.; ]89X, S34 sqq.; 189a, 31 sqq.)
consisting of two menaberSy the second at least one foil word shorter than the other.
The number of sylLibles in arsis
probability that a rcgnlar repetition of an equal
and was observed by other poets, has been established by Duhm, Clunkcl,
thesis
and others, especially Zimmern, who adduces a Babyloniau bynan in which the
members are definitely marked {Zischr.fiir AssyriologU^ x. i sqq.)* All the details,
however, are as yet nneettafai.
The aadent practice of willing certain poetical passages in verse-fonn (Ex. 25,
1-19. Dent. 3a, x-43. Jnd. 5. 1 Sam. a, 1-10. a Sam. aa. a3, 1-7. PSb 18. 136.
Prov, 31, 10 31. Chron. 16, 8-36; of. also Josh. la,
\ ocles. 3. a-8. Est.
9, 7-10) has nothing tu do with any question of metre.

Words arc used in poetry, for Vkhich others are customary in prose, e.g. S
To the poetic ngHîaHtm ^ awnfr bdcQg* the use of certtfai poetic qiitfieta
for the snbatantive ; thus, for eiample, "1*9^ tkt strm^ mm for God; *^l!t M
strong OHt for karu; nJSfin for /una.
Of word fn m^ \vf> rrn^ n tc. e. f^.

the longer forms of prepositions of place
(I "3- 3) \^^?-^^> ^^^^-''y ; the emliriKS V, ^ to the noun ( 90);

die pronominal sofiixes SO^ ^4- Tor D, D , 58); the fdnral
endhig |*_ for D*- ( 87. i, a). To the syntax belongs the far more sparing use
of the articlr of 'he relative pronoun, of the accusative particle HN; the construct
state even belorc prepositions ; the shortcoed imperfect with the same meaning
as the ordioaty form ( 109. a, Rem.), and in general a forcible brevity of
cspfcarfoB*
7. The second period of the Hebrew language and literature, /
after tlie return from the exile until the Maccabees (about 160 b c),
is chiefly distinguished by a constantly closer approximation of the
language to the kindred western Aramaic dialect. This is due to the

influence of the Aramaeans, who lived in dose contact with the recent
and thinly-populated colony in Jerusalem, and whose dialect was
already of importance as being the official buiguage of the western
half of the Persian empire. Nevertheless the suppknting of Hebrew
by Aramaic proceeded only very gradually. Writings intended for
popular use, such as the Hebrew original of Jesus the son of Sirach
and the book of Daniel, not only sliow that Hebrew about 170 n.c.
was still in use as a iuerary language, but also that it was still at least
Digitized
z6 Introduction,
undertfoodhf the peopk^ When it had finally ceased to ezut as a

living language, it was still preserved as the langtu^ of ihe Schools
not to mention the numerous Hebraisms mtioduced into the Aramaic
spoken by the Jews.
For particalars, se Kautzscb, Cramm. des Bibl. Aram.^ pp. i-6. We may
CODVCDlently regaid tbe idfttioD of the languages whidi oo-existed in this later
period u dnilar to diat of the High and
Low Gennna In Noitii Germany, or to
that of theHigh Gemum and the oonunoo dialects in die south and in Switzerland.
Even amongst the more edacatecV t^r- common dialect prevails orally, whilst the
High German serves essentially as the literary and cultured language, and is at
least understood by all classes of the people. Wholly untenable is the notion,
based on an enoneons interpretation of Neh. 8, 8j that tbe Jews inuncdiatdy after
the exile had completely focgottwi the Hebrew Ungnag^ and therefore needed
a trandatloD of die Holy Scriptures.
U The Old Teslament writings belonging to this second period,

in all oi which ihc Aramaic colouring appears in various degrees,
are: certain parts of the Pentateuch and of Joshua, Ruih, the books of
Ezra, Nehemiah, Chronicles, Esiher ; the prophetical books of IIa_L;jâi,
Zcchariah, Malachi, Joel, Jonaii, Daniel ; of the poetical books, part
of Proverbs, Job^ Song of Songs, Ecclesiastes, and a large part of the

Psalms. As literary compositions, these books are somelmies far
inferior to those of the first period, although there are parts which in
purity of language and aesthetic value fall little short of tbe writings
of the golden age; such, e.g. as the htier Psabns iso sqq., 137, 139.
V Lottr words (Aranudsmt) are, e.g. |^]nj^ /mm; ^3^ - ngb to Ulkt;
to govern ; ^ ^ ^ strmg,LMX meanings
arc^ e; g. (to say) Is ammand; Hd^ (to anssrer) <s hgim a mnnnatiom,^
Orthegr^kical and grammatical pecnliarities are, the frequent tcriptio pIma of
Sand e.g. TIT ^ (elsewhere T^^), even tS'lip for C'lf), 31^ for 31 ; the inter-
change of and N~ final ; the more frequent use of substantives in , \~ y
^1^,
&c. Comp. for the I'salins, r=jvf cially, ("h'vne On'i^'in of (lie J^sa/Zer, p. 4^11 ^qq.)
But all the pecuUahlicii ol iHLSc later wrucrs arc not Aramaisnis. Several do
not occnr in Aiamaic and mnst have belonged at an earlier period to the Hetnew
Temacnlar, eqwdally it would seem in northern Palestine. There oertain parts
of Jadges amongst otIicr>, may liavc originated, as is indicated, e.g. by 'w^,
the common form in Phoenician (as well as VH), for "VZ^^ (i 36), which afterwaids
recurs in Lamentations, the Song of Songs, the later PsaUni^ and Ecclesiastes.
* The very frequent employment of Hebrew in |>opular religious literature,

hich is partly preserved to us in tlie Midrasim, indicates, moreover, that Hebiew
was widely nadctstood audi later than this.
* 1*VJ b the Muor Prafdiett tbrongfaoat (Hoe. 3, 5, fte.) is dan meiely to
a capiioe of the Ifasoietca.
Digitized by Google
3-3 Grammatical Treatment of the Language, 17
Rem. ! Rqrrdiog dideeHcil irwlelkft ia Ibe old Hebnew Itngoage, only w

one expiw KileincBt oocmt in the Old Teit, namely in Jnd. 12, 6, ccoidiiig to
which the Ephraimites in ceiteia cases pronounced the 1^ as D (Comp. Marqmot .
in ZAIV. I'^ss. y> 151 sqq.) Whether in Neh. 13, 24 by the speech of Ashdod
a Htbrcw, or a (wholly diffeicnt) Philistine dialect, should be understood cannot
be detennined. On the other hand, n\any of the peculiarities in the above-
mentianed Nofth Pnlcrtiiie books O'^^g^
di0eicQeindialeet,andto]to lome eaceptioinl linns in tbeMoabite inscription
^ Hosea) are to be regarded as
ofMttia'(ieenbove. ( 3 2)
a. It is evident, that in the extant remains of old Hebrew literatare^, the entire
store of the ancient language is not preserved. The canonical literature of the
Old Testament fonued certainly only a fraction of the once extant national
literature of the ancient Hebrews.
3. Grammatical Trcatmmi of the Hebrew Language.
Gesenius, Geseh. d$r hiibr^ S^rmeke, fi 19-^; Oebler^s afticl^ 'Hebr. Spfachei*
in Schmid's Encykl. ties ges. Erzi4huttg> u, Unterrichtswesens, vol. iii. p. 346 sqq.
'in the and ed. revised hv Nestle, p. 314 sqq V Comp. nlso the literature cited
abo\e in the headings ot i and 2; also Bottcher, Ausjiihrl. Lchrl>. dcr hebr.
S/yr., Lpi. 1866, i. p. 30 sqq. ; L. Geiger, Das ^tuJium der Hebr. Spr. in Diuischl,
vom Etuk dit 1$. kit *ur MUte dtt 16. /gArJk^ Breslau, 1870; B. Pick, 'The
Stndjr of the Hebtew Langiisge among Jews and Christins* in BiUhtkâ Saera,
1884, p. 450 sqq. and 188$, p. 470 sqq.
1. At tbe time when the old Hebtew language was gradually a

becoming extinct and the formation of the Old Test, canon was
approd^limg conclusion, the Jews began 10 explain aai critically

revise the sacred text, and someiimes to translate it into the
veniacnlar languages which in various countries had come into use
among tbem. The oldest translation is ilie Greek of the seventy
(more correctly seventy-two) Interpreters (LXX), which was begun

with the Pentateuch at Alexandria under Ptolemy Pbiladelphus, but
not completed until a later date. It was drawn up by various
autbon, some of whom had a living knowledge of the original,
and was intended for the use of Greek-speaking Jews, especially in

Alexandria. Somewhat hter the Aramaic translations, or Targums
(D*iwa">ri i.e. irUerpretaHons) were gradually formed from recensions
made in i'alestinc and Babylonia. The explanations^ derived in part
from alleged tradition, refer almost exclusively to civil and ritual
' Accor linf^' to the calculation of the Dutch scholar Leas<len, the OKI Test,
contains 3,642 ditferent Hebrew and Aramaic words. [Includbg proper namea,
9,285.-0. W. C]
c
Digitized by CoÎe
J
i8 Introduction, [ 3.
law and dogmatic theology^ and are no more sciendfic in character

dian much of the textual tradidon of diat period. Both kinds of
traditions are preserved in the Tidnmiy the first part of which, the
Misna^ was finally brought to its present form towards the end of
the second century ; of the remainder, the Gemara^ one part (the Jtru-
salem or PaltsUman Gem^ about the middle of the fourth century, the
other (the Babylonian Gem.) about the middle of tlie sixth century a.d.
The MiSna forms the beginning of the New^Hebrew literature ; while
the language of the Gemaras is for the most part Aramaic.

b 2. To the interval between the completion of the Talmud and
the earliest gramroadcal writers, belong mainly the vocafisation and
accentoation of the hitherto unpointed text of the Old Testament,
according to the pronunciation traditional in the Synagogues and
Schools ( 7. 3), as wefl as the greater part of the collection of
critical reiiiarks which bears the name of Masora ("n^DD iraditio ?)
From this the text which has since been transmitted with rigid
uniformity by the MSS., and is still the received text of the Old
Testament, has obtained the name of the Masoretic Text.
C E. F. K. Rownniakr iMy {Haiu^meh fir d. LUer. ief hOI, Krilik .

Exegese, I797 i. 247 ; Vorretk %ur Stereotyp-AMsg. dcs A. T., Lpt. 1834) main-
tained that our Old Test, text was derived from Codices beloni^ftig to a sin},'lc
recension. J- Sommer (cf. rornill, Z/i IV. T892, p. 309"*, Ol&hausen (since
G.
1853,1 especially De Lagarde {/y(n/erl>un, 1863, p. i s^q.) have even made it
prohftlde dist the original Ifasofctie teit wia deiifed fiponi m tingle tfandud
ouuniaeript. Conp.. however, . K&ilg in Ztukr./. MnU. IVist^ 1887, p. 979 iq.
On the history of the Masora and the fixing of the Msoittic tradition, work has been
done recently by Giigttt JikUsche ZtSi hr. iii. 78 qq., and after him by Harris in
Jmnsh Quarte' ly A'mVw, i. 1 28 sqq,, 243599.; S. FrensdorfF. by his edition of
the Oihla W'sihla, Hanover, 1864; and his Massor. PVorii-rb., Hanover and Lpz.
1876, part i; and Ch. D. Ginsborg, The Masscra compiled from Al<mmcripts^
6'r. Lood. 1880 sqq., 3 Tob.'; on the use of the Mnsom iat the critical
' On the name Maioim (or Mnssont, m Stiadt in the Pm, RÊm^ and ed.,
ix. 388 sqq., who coraparet * Xnppfiieth,* fte., E. K8nlg, EimkUmug im iku A, 7*.,
p. 38 sqq. ; Lehrgeb. d. hehr. Sprache, ii. 35S .sqq.),and the gicnt difiicalty of satis-
factorily cxpl.ninin^ it, com}). De I^parde, Miltiilurigot, i.
91 sqq.; W. Bacher's
derivation of the expression (in Jewish Quarterly A<viiU\ 1S91, p. 7S5 sqq.) from
Exek. 30, 37 JTlbO; JTiDO, i- e. rnpÔ, being au equally legitimate form)
is rightly rejected by Konig. 1. c The correctness of the form itÔ^ (by the side
of the equally well-attested form TCpQ) doea not aeett to M to be famlMated by
hit aigaoMBta*
* See Baci'a oitidfltt of thit woik hi ZDMG, 1886, p. 743 aqq.
Digitized by Google
J.] Grammatical Treatment of the Language. 19
eomilraefciQii oftfw Tort, especially by S. Baer, in his excellent editions of the several
books (00I7 Exod.-Deat have ttQl to appear), edited sinoe 1869 conjointly with
Ff. Delitvadi and G. Dalman, and recently 1^ Baer alone. Comp. also 7. 3, Rem.
The %'arious readings of the (see 17) form one of the oldest and most
important parts of the Masora. The panctnation of the Text, however, is not to
be confounded with the compiling of the Masora. The former was settled at an
earlier period, and is the result of a much more exhaustive labour than the Masora,
trhidi as not completed till a considerably later time.
3. It was not until about the beginning of the tenth century d

that the Jews, following the example of the Arabs, began their gram-
matical compilations. Of the numerous grammatical and lexico-
graphical works of R. Sa'adya\ beyond fragments in the
Commentary
on the Sepher Yesira (ed Mayer-Lambert, pp. 4s, 47, 75, ftc),
only the explanation in Arabic of ihe seventy (more correctly
ninety) hapax legomena in the Old Testament has been preserved.
Written likewise m Arabic, bul frequently iranslalcd into Hebrew,
Were the still extant works of the grammarians R. Yehuda TIayyflg
(also called Abu Zakaria Yahya, about the year 1000) and R. Yona
(Abft 'i-\Valid Merwan ibn Ganah, about 1030). By the aid of these
earlier labcmrs, Abraham ben Ezra (commonly called Aben Ezra,
ob. 1 167) and R. David Qimbi (ob. 1235) especially gained a classical
reputation by their Hebrew grammatical writings.
From these earliesit grammariaDS are derived many principles of arraogeinent and
technical tennt, tome of which axe itiU letaioed, e.g. the naming of the oonjoga'
tions and weak verbs acooidiii|^ to the paradigm of certain voets mmonalest
a and the like".
* On his independent attitude townr<k the Masoretic punctuation, see DeUtzsch,

Comm. zH dcH rsalmen, 4th ed., p. ^y.
* On the oldest Hebrew grammstiafu, tee Strack ud SegfHedt L$M, d,
metiMr. S/r. . JUr,, Owltr. 1884, and die prefaces to tlie Hebrew
p. 107 iqq.
Lexicons of Getenins and Fiirst Berliner, Beitrdge tur hebr. Gramm. im Talmud
;
u. Midrasih, Berlin. 1S79; Baer and Strack, Die DikJuke ha fotnim ,/<; Akron
ht'n dMostkth f>en Isr/ur u. andex altc ^rarnmatisih-masiordhisi hi- I r^'r^tucke^
.
L.pz. 1879; ^'WsJd and i3ukes, liuimge a. (JescA. der dlitsten AmUûn^ u.
SprmcktrktSnmf des A. T,, Stattg. 1844, 5 voU ; Hnpfeld, De ret gnmmaHcae
^md /kduu imtiis amUfuissimUque strêrihUt Hal. 1846, 4 s Bacher, * Die
Anfange dcrkebr. Gr.,' in ZDMG. 1895, xtqq. and Die hebr. ^ruekwissenschaft ;
rem 10. Hs zrim \ f). Jahrh., Trier, 189a. On Abu Zakaria, Jastrow in ZA \V. 18S5,
p. iq; qq., "fid \\. Drnchrnann. Breslau, 1885. A fragment of his Arabic work
on the weak verbs is given i<y Teritx in ZAW. 1893, p. 193 sqq. Muok, Notice
'
sor Alxm l-Wal&l ct snr quelques mrtrat gnnunsiriait Ubititt dit ct do
C 3
Digitized by Google
Introduction, [3.
e 4. The father of Hdmw philology among Christians was John

Reucblin (ob. 1522), to whom Greek literature also is so much
indebted. Like the grammarian*? who succeeded him, till the time
of John Buxtorf the elder (ob. 1629), he still adhered almost entirely
to Jewish tradition. From the middle of thj^ seventeenth century the
field of invest igaiion gradually widened, and the study of the kindred
languages, chiefly throuph the leaders of the Dutch school, Albert
SchuUens (ob. 1 750) and N. W. Schroder (ob. 1798), became of fruitful
serWce to Hebrew grammar.
f 5 In the nineteenth century' the advances in Hebrew philology

are espedaUj connected with the names of W. Gesenius (bom at
Nordhausen, Feb. 3, 1786; from the year 18 10 Professor at HaIIe

where he died Oct. 23, 1842), who above all things aimed at the
comprehensive observation and lucid presentation of the actually
occurring linguii^tic phenomena; II. Kwald (ob. 1875, at Gottingen;
Krit. Gramm. der fubr. S/>r., Lpz. 1827; Ausfilhrh Lehrh. d. hebr.
Spr., 8lh ed., G5tt. 1870), who chiefly endeavoured to refer linguistic
formations to general laws and rationally to explain the latter;
J. Olshausen (ob. 1882, at Berlin; Lthrb* der hebr, iiprache^
Brunswick, 1861), who attempted a consistent explanation of the

existing condition of the language, from the presupposed primitive
Semitic forms, preserved according to him notably in old Arabic.
F. Bdttcher (see the bibliogmphy at the head of { 3) endeavoured
to present an exhaustive synopsis of the linguistic phenomena, as vi'ell
as to give an explanation of them from the sphere of Hebrew
alone. B. Stade, on the other hand (Lehrb. der hebr. Gr., pt. i. Lpz.
1879), adopted the strictly scientific method of endeavouring to reduce
the systems of Kwald and Olshausen to a more fundamental unity.
tiide/in ikt Joum, AsitUique, 1850. The grammatical O/usaias ci irailfs of

Abu '1-Walid have been edited by J. and H. Detenboorg, Paris, 1880; comp. also
W. Btcfaer, 'Joe. Kimclil ct Abalw. Mer/ Ac in vol. vi. of the Remu tht ihiia
Juives; and Die hcbr..arab Sprackver^'eu hutig Ja Abulw. Mer., Vienne, 1884;
Ltben umi IVerke liis Afû!:;'. Mer., &c., Ljir also by ihc same author,
Abr, ibn Esra als Gratnntaitker^ Strnssb. 1 883; and DU gratnm, TermitMlogU
des Jehuda ben David Hajjug^ Vieuoa, 1883.
^ Of the litcnrtve of the subject down to the year 1^50, see a toleiaUy foil
oeoant in Stdiiichneider* BiMiegto^ BmOmh fUr kehr, Sfrmkhmdet
Lfc 1859.
Digitized by Google
4*3 Arrangement of the Grammar. 21
E. Kdnig' in his very thorough researches into phonology and

etymology starts generally from the position reached by the earl/
Jewish grammarians (in his second part '
with comparative reference
to the Semitic languages in general') and instead of adopting the
usual dogmatic method, ^kes pains to le-open the discussion of dis-
puted giammadca) questions.Among the works of Jewish scholars,
special attention is to be called to the gramnuu* by S. D. Luszatto
written in Italian (Padua, 1853-69).
The chief requirements for one who is treating the grammar of

an ancient language are (i) thai he should observe* as fully and
accurately as possible the existing Unguislic phenomena and di-scrihe
them, after showing their organic connexion (the empirical and

historico-critical element); (2) that he should try to explain these
facts, pardy by comparing them with one another and by the analogy
of the sister langusges, partly from the general laws of philology (the
logical element).
{ 4. Division and Arrangcnuni 0/ the Grammar,

The division and arrangement of Hebrew grammar follow the three
constituent parts of every language, viz. (i ) articulate immii represented
by UUars^ and united to form ÛabUs^ (3) WDrds^ and (3) smiences.
The first part (the elements) comprises accordingly the treatment
of sounds and iheir representation in writing. It describes the nature
* Niat^riuk'krit. Likrgeb. der kiir, SpnuJU mit sUUr Bniekim^ auf Qimeki
umi die andertn Autoritaten. 1st part, 'Lehie TOD der Schrift, der Aussprache,
dcni Proo. n. dcm Verbam/ 1S81 ; 2\v\ pnrt, ToL L ' Abscblaw der spedclka
Formenlehrc u. gcnerelle Formcnl.,' Lpz. 1895.
' i>uch observation has Qiore antl more led to the belief that the original text of
the O. T. is corrupted to a greater degree than vras formerly supposed. Advance
in gruDintr b thefefoie clotely dependent on the progreit of iexiutd erUitism,
The îtematic pnnmt of the latter has only begnn in veoent ycnrt. Cf. eqtcdallj
Doominck on Jud. 1-16, Leyden, 1879; Wellhausen, Text der Bb. Sam., Gott.
1871 ; Klostermann, Hh. Sam. u. d. A!0n., Nnrd!. 1887; Driver, Notes on the J/el-rew
Text of the Books of Samuel, Oxf. 1890; Comill, Ezechiei, Lpz. 1886 Klostermann, ;
Sammiung htbr.-det^scher Bibeltexte mit krit. Anmerkk. (pt. i. Deuteio* Isaiah;,

Msnicfa. 1893. A critical edition of the O. T. with fall textual notes, and with
the vsrions docnnwats distingnished by colomik is beiqg published m a handaome
form by P. Haupt in The Sacred Bocks of the 0. T. (Lpz. and Baltimore). Parts
already publishcfl Job, by Siegfried, iSq-^; Leviticus, by Driver and White, nnd
:
Samuel, by Htiddc, S94 Joshua by Bennett ; y^rMvioA, by ComiU; TheFsalmSf

! ;
by Wellhausen ; Chronicks, by Kittel.
Digitized by Co||gle
22 Inirodudum.
and relations of the sonnds of a language, teaches the pronunciatioa

of the written signs (orthoepy), and gives infonnation concerning
the estatilished mode of writing (orthography). It then treats of
the sounds as combined in syllables and words, and specifies the
laws and conditions under which this combination takes place.
The second part (etymology) treats of words in their character
as parts of speech, and comprises: (i) ilie principles of the fonnaiion
of words^ or of the derivation of the different parts of speech from

the roots or from one another; (2) the principles of inflexion, i.e.
of the various forms which the words assume according to their
relation to other words and to tlê sentence.
The third part (syntax, the principles of the arrangement of words)
(i) shows how the word-formations and inflexions which are met
with in the language are used to express different shades of ideas, and
how other ideas, for which the language has not coined any forms,
are expressed by periphrasis; (2) states the laws according to
which the parts of speech arc combined in sentences (the principles
of the sentence, or syntax in the strict sense of the term).
1^ Digitized by Google
FIRST PART.
ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES OR THE ^SOUNDS AND
CHARACTERS.
*j
CHAPTER 1.
THE INDIVIDUAL SOUNDS AND CHARACTERS.
6. Tke Cimtmumis: their Form and Namtt.

(Comp^ tbe Table of Alpluibets.)
1, The Hebrew letters now in use, in which both the manu- a

scripts of the Old Testament are written and our editions of the
Bible are printed, commonly calkd the squarg ehmtkr (Jffjg Vyf),
also the Assyrian charader 1)S are not those originally
employed.
OU IMrao (or OH C^maoitttish) writing, as it was used on public
monuments in the beginning of the ninih and towards the end of the
eighth century b. c, is to be seen in the inscription of Afesa', as well
as in that of Siloam. The characters on the Maccabaean coins of the
second century d.c^ and also on ancient gems, l>ear much resemblance
to those found in these inscriptions (comp. 2. 2). With this Old
Hebrew witing the Phoenician is nearly identical (see i. 5, 2. 3 and
the Table of Alphabets). According to the analogy of the history
^ The name {Amjam) it hete ued in dw wideit aeue^ to iadnde the

oooBtiiet on the MeditemuMUi inhabited bjr Aramaeans; oomp^ Stade in ZAfV.
i88j, p. 89a aq. On tome other names for Old Hebrew writing, comp. G. IIofT-
mann, iMtL, i88t, p. 334 iqq. ; BtthH, ATommi v. Tiur/ du A, 71, Lpi. 1891,
p. aoa.
Digitized b
24 The Individual Sounds and Characters, [ 5.
of other kinds of writing, it may be assumed that out of and along

with the writing on stone, ft less antique and somewhat more con-
veniently rounded stÎe was early developed, owing to the use of
softer materials, skins, bark and the like. This the SamariLios
retained after their separation from the Jews, while the Jews gradually
(between the sixth and the fourth century) exchanged it for an Aramaic
character. From this gradually arose (from about the fourth to the
middle of the third century) what is called the spiare character, hich
conseqaently bears great resemblance to the eitant forms of Aramaic

writing, such as the Egyptian-Aramaean, the Nabatean and especially
the Palmyrene. Of Hebrew inscriptions in the older square character,
one belongs to the year 176 B.a

b 2. The Alphabet consists, like all Semitic alphabets, solely of
consonants, 22 in number, some of which, however, have also a kind
of vocalic power ( 7. 2). The lullowing Table shows their form,
names, pronunciauon and numerical value (Rem. 3) :
' De Vogit^, in Ranu arckj^,, nottvelle tirie, ix. 1864, p. 205 sq., and Table
vfi. No. a; conp. Ndlddce, in ZDMG. xix. p. 640; Ibr the development of Hebrew
writing in general, Men, art. '
Schreiben,' in Sohenkcl's BiMUxuM, vol. t; Phil.
Bergcr, art. * Kcriturc,' in Lichtenberper's Emychp. cUs scietues relig.^ Par. 1878,
torn. iv. p. 337 sqq. (also jniblishcd separately' ; H. Strack, * Schreibkunst u.
Scbrift bei den Hebraem,' in Hmog's keaUncyklopadu, 3nd ed., xiii. p. 6% sqq.
Driver, m l# Bt^n 0/ Samuel, Oxford, 1890, p. ix. sîq. ; L. Blau, Zur
Einleit$mfin d. hi. Schrift, Budapeit, 1894^ P> 49 sqq*; Boicingcr, Htkr, AfvhS'
logic, Freib. 1894, p. 278 sqq. ; Nomck, Ukrb, der kebr. ArkMgi4, L 279 aqq.
On the palaeograj^fiy of the He>)rcw square character, Harkavy, AUjud, DmkmaUr
atisikr Krim, Pelersb. and Lpz. 1876. p 108 sqcj. The best Tables of AIphal)t
are those by J. Euting, in G. BickelFs Ouiiims of Hebrew Grammar (trans, into
English by S. J, Curtisa, Lpz. 1877); the Hebrew Alphabet, in pt vii. of the
Orkmnl Stria ^ tk* Fale^, Saeitty, London, 188a; and lastly (the moat
complete of all) in Chwolion't Ctrpms Imeriftimmm ilekrakarmm, Fetenb.
1883.
Digitized by Google
5-3 The Cotisonanis: their Form and Names, 25
jxt'MKRTCAL
FOEM. NAME. PRONVNCIATIOK. vai itr
M '
spirilus Icnis I
n B{lh h ibh) 2
GimV{Giml) 3
T Datlih d Uh\ 4
n Hi h 5
1 Wltm 6
y as in French (soft i) 1
n Htth hf a strong guttural 8
^
Tfih /, emphatic / 9
lO
J ^
nnai 1 30
I 30
D, final D Mi'm m 40
^ final [
NUn n 50
0 Snmikh s 60
"
V 'Avin '
a peculiar guttural (see 70
v_ below)
B, final i| Pi 80
V, fiti.i]

s, emjilialic s 90
P Qdph a strong Jt^ fonned at the 100
back of the oalate
Riif r aoo
T
/, pronounced jyi
* 1
300
n Taw 400
8. As the Table shows, five letters have a special form at c

the end of the word. They are called final letters, and were com-
bined by llie Jewish grammarians in the mnemonic word 1^303
A'd;.'i>.ui'/>/iJf, or belter, with Kdnig, i.e. as ihe breaker in pieces.
* Riilippi, '
Die Aasftpnche der temit. Coosooanten \ and \' in ZDMG. 1886,
P* ^39 adduces leasoos in detail for the <^)ifiioa tint 'the Semitic ) and ^ aie
oertainljby iiMge conmnanti^ althongli hy mtore thqr aie vowels, vii. u sad ,
and consequently are consonantal vowels * comp. $ 8. 5. ;
' As n representation of this soand the Latin

q is very nitable^ as it occupies in
the alphabet the place of the Semitic p (Greek ^va).
Digitized by Coê
Of these % |,
t|,
y are distinguished from the common form by the
shaft being drawn straight down, while in the usual form it is bent
round towards the left*. In thQ case of D the letter is completely
closed.
d 4. Hebrew is read and written from right to left. Words must

not be divided ai the end of the lines ; but, in order that no empty
space may be left, in MSS. and printed texts, certain letters suitable
for the purpose are dilated at the end or in the middle of the line.
In our printed texts these liltrai dHaia^kt are the five following:
Qn ^ n H (mnemonic word IÎ'lI^). In MSS. other letters
suitable for the purpose are also employed in this way, as 1, 3, ">
comp. Strack in the TheoL Lehrb. 1882, No. 22.
e Reri). 1. The forms of the Utters originally represent the rude outlines of
perceptible object!^ the names of which, respectively, begin with the consonant
BCpitKnttd (ajcrophony).Thus YSd^ in the earlier alphattets the rode pictine
kand (ifd.
of a hand, properly denojtes hot at a letter dmpty the sound ^ (y\
with which tbU word begfaiii *A]^h, originally a dxcte pioperly an <y* (r8)i
stands for the consonant y. In the Phoenician alphabet especially, the reaemblanoe
of the forms to the objects denoted by the name is still for the most part recog-
nizable (see the Table', in some letters ^3, \^ I, D, B'j the similarity is till
preserved in the square character.
J" ffhe noit proteble meaning of the namei of the letter* of the alphabet' is
1)^ Mr, Amuv. tauui^ door, Mil fdr^hoU (Ot Utttitt-'windtw (!)
11 kee^, naUf X% totafon (nnlett, widi Neatle, we are to infer from the Greek CSra*
name
that the origioal wn
11^ tfAwsffw), H^H fmti, iarrur^ fl^ a n^mdSmg (t)t
perhapt haiktr koUU, aoooidlng to othen smakf, JUmd, C|3 httU katid, *1D^
0x-^<>ad, D*0 wa/fr, }\3 jSsk, IjffO prop (?), eye, KB (also *B) moutK n|
fish-hook (?),
c)^ y4 ^ a n/te^, according to odiera iaek ^tAi head^ Juadt
pg> tooth, IFI sign, rrots.
g There is no doubt that this alphaljct was first drawn up by Semites. It may
be questioned, however, whether the Egyptian Hieroglyphics, and the Mieratic
wrttiog derived from it, did not serve as the model, perhaps less as regard* the
fbnns than the (afcrophonie) piêiple. For tiie hieroglyphic pictoret liiwwiie
* Chwolsou, Corpus Imcr. Hcbr. col. 68, nghtly observes that the origioal forms
of these letlien aie practically preserved in the lUtragfolates,
* Cf. Conder, * The Alphabet (the Semitic NamaV hi the Qnarterfy StaUmimis
of the FaksHm xpUra0im fkmd, The LXX give transcriptions
1S89, p. 17 iqq.
of the Hcbr' w Tinmes in Lam. T vlii
1-4, as do also nmny
of tlie Vulgate e.g.
the Cu<i. AnuntiQus in I'ss. in. it:. 119, but with many variations from the
customary fuiaii>, which rest 00 the traditional Jewiih pronnnciatioQ. The forms
Dtletkj Zai, Sen (the LXX also x^*** comp. Helnr. \^ tooth) aie to be noticed,
amongst otbcis, for lkd$ih, 2mm, iiit.
Digitized tjy Google

5- J The Consonants: their Form and Names. 27
indicate mottly the initial aovnd of tbe name of the pictured object ; e. g. tot^ the
band, the letter I; tMt tbe lion, the l\
a. As to the order of the lcttf% we poewM an andeot tcetinonj in the ^
alphabetic poems of the Old Pm, 9 (tC-d, oompb Ps. 10, i ^, and
Test. : la-t;
p-fi) ; 25 and 34 (both without a separate l-verse and with & repeated at the
end^; 37. iii. 112. irg. 145; Lam. 1-4; Prov. 31, lo-y (in the LXX with
D before J?) ; al*o in Nah. 1, 3-10, Frohnmeyer dctcctctl traces of an alphabetic

arrangement; so Bickell, Ztschr./. kath. Thiol., i88i, p. 319 in the assumed
Hebrew original of Jems the wm of Sitadi, phap. 51, 18-38 (without 1 and urith fi
repeated at tiie end). The feqoen^ of the three toJbeft labial* paletal, and Ungual
Oftnds 3, 3, 1, and of the tbiee liquids ^, 3, indiatfet an attempt at danifi*
cation. At the same time other conri'li rations also appear to have had influence.
Thus it is certainly not accidrntnl, that two letters, representing a iiaiul 'A'M,
KafJk)f as also two QSph u>: uf the head) which represent the head, and in
(if i>
genoal leveral fonne dnoting objects natorally connected {JliiM and AUn, 'Ay in
and stand next to one another.
Both the order and the names of the letteta, together with their numerical f
va1ne, have passed over from the Phoenicians to the Grctks, in whose alphabet
thr If !tf rs A-T are borrowed from the C>ld Semitic. So also the Old Italic a]i>hah>ets
well the Roman, and consequently all alphabets derived either from thi or
from the Greek, arc directly or indirectly dependent on the Phoenician.
3. . In default of spedal arithmetical fig|u% thfs cooionaatt werp used also k
as numerical signs. The earliest tra^ of thto usage atc^ bowyver, first found
on the Maccabean cobs (sec above, $ a. a, 4). Thcs^ numerical lietteis were
afterwards cm pi oval principally for marking the numbers of chapters and verses in
the editions uf the Hihlc. The units ar^^- denoti'd hy N-D , the tens by *-V, 100-
400 by p ri , the nuniberii from 500 900 Ly fi 400 , with the addition of" the
rcnuiiuiag hundreds, e.g. pn 500. In compound number:* the greater precedes ôn
the right), thus tO 11, (Up lai. Bat 15 is expressed by \0 9*6, not iT (which
is a Ibtm of tiie divige xamn, being tbe first |wo consonants of nvi^)'. For
* Comp. above, f i. 5, /. also Hitzig, Die Erfitulung dts Alphtbcts^ Ziirich,

1840; J. Okhansen. Obcr din Un^r. dcs Alphabets, Kiel, 1841 F. Bottcher, ;
Unsins Alphabii^ Ursprunge, Dre^. 1860^ Kd. iJuhmer, 'Das Alphabet in organ-
ischer Ordnung,' in ZDMG. xvi. 579 !<^4. . de Rong^, Mimtin sur tongue ;
igy^Htmu de FmlfkaUt fh4tdekm, Paris* 1874; E. van Drivalp Dt tmrigitu dt

fieritHti, 3rd ed., Paris, 1879. Tbe attempt of Wnttfce, fat the and ed. of bis
G$seh, dtr Schri/i, and W. Deecke, ZDMG, Juud. 102 sqq^ to derive the Old
Semitic alphabet from the later Assyrian cunelforTO characters, fails even Oft
chrunoloyical {pounds. According to Peters, Proceedings Am. Orient. Soc, l880|
p. xi ]i<|., and Hummel, 'Gcsch. Babyluniens u. Ai>yricns,' p. 50 st^*] , in Oucken's
Series, 1885, It ia derived from the old Babylonian writing. Aoeordiog to Ball,
Pmett^Hgi tf ikt Sfcitfy tf BiH. AnhtuoLt xv; 99a aqq., frMn tbe aicfaaie
AssjTian cuneiform.
Compare for the rise of this custom (after iT had been originally written, and
*
afterwards M), Nestle in ZAU^. 1884, p. 250, where a trace of this method of
writing occtttxing as early as Origen is referred lo.
Digitized by {lipbgle
a Bmihr kmou ID is alto mocdy written for i6b instead of V wlUch in componnd
proper nsne^ IUm also itpfcsents tlie name of God, mn*.
The thoosaads are sometimes denoted bj the nnits witli two dots placed above,
e.g. looo.
/ b. The reckoning of the years in Jcwi-h writings (generally JT>*V*^ afttr

th'' rrraffrfF'' follows cither the //<// (hrotioli\Q' înH U^th or '3 'th), with the
a. Oilion oi the thousands, or the al't-iJg^d (hroHOtogy (pt3p 'D^s in wliich they are
omitted. In the dates of the (it%i thousand years after Christ, the Christian era
is obtained bjr the addition of 340, in the second thoosand yean by the addition of
1340, the Uionssnds of the Creation em being omitted.
m 4. Abfareriatlons of words are not foottd in the text of the Old Testament, but
they occur on coins, and their use is extremely frequent amongst the later Jews'.
A i)ojnt, or later an obliqire stroke, serves as the siffn of abridgement in old MSS.
and editions, e.g. 'b*^ for ^tnb^ 'D for ^^>B ah'ouis, 1 forn2^ afi\;ui\f. '^31 for
>D^3^ et compUns, i.e. and sa tm. Also in the imdule oi what ib apjiaruitl) a word,
such strokes indicate that it is au abbreviation or a vox memorialis (comp. e. g. 15.

D"Mnv Two sodi strohes are employed, from 41, e Rem., onward to maric the
diflEncnt classes of weak Teibs : comp. moreover ^ or (also'n)for rrfrr.
n 5* Peculiarities in the tradition of the Old Testament text, whidi a c already

mentioned in the Talmud, arc (1) The puncta extraordinaria over single con-
sonants (e.g. Gen. 16, 5. 19. 33"^, or whole words

Gen. 33,4. Dtut. 39, 28. 'e.g.
It. 44, 9. Kzck. 4!, ao and elsewhere), and both over and under Ps. 27, 13,
all no doubt originally critical marks ; cf. Strack, Prolcômtna Criika, p. 88 sqq.
I* Bkn, Mattrîseke UtUertiukungiHiStt$$iitmtg^ i69t p. 6 sqq., and EitUrihmg
iniukL StkHft, Budapest, 1894; KMgsbeigcr,/^ Uij-BlaU, 1891. nos. 29-31,
and Au$ Masorah u. Talmudkriiik, Berlin, 1893, p. 6 sqq. (a) The Un rae
majusculae (e.g. 3 Gen. i, i, ^ Lev. 11, 4a as the middle consonant of the IVma-
teuch, * Num. 14, 17, Sec), and minmcufae (e.g. H lien. 3,4). (3) The///tva/
smpcftsof 3 Jud. i8, 30 (which poinis to the reading HE'D for n0D), V Ps. 80, 14
(the middle of the Psalms)* and Job 38, 1 3. 1 5. (4) The * mntUated' Hîn in DIÊ^
Num. S5, IS, and p Ex. 3a, 15 (DmOpa). and Num. 7, a (tntpBH). Ci)
clOHSum in HTtD? It. 9,6, and Mim affrHm in CPamfi DH Neh. a, 5. (6; im- 1 m
v*r$mm before Nom. to, 35, and after ver. 36^ aa also before Fl 107. a3*s8 and 40.
6. Pronunciation and JJivisim of Comonanis,

P. Tl.inpt. 'Die Semit. Sprachlantc u. ihre Umschrift,' in Biif>,'i^f zur Assyri'
c!i->ê u. vergUith, stmii, Sprachunuemchaft^ by Delitzsch and Haupt, Lpc 1889,
i. 34^ btjii.
a 1. An accurate knowledge of the original phonetic value of

each consonant is of the greatest importance, since very many
grammatical peculiarities and changes ( i8 sqq.) only become in-
telligible from the oature and pronunciation of tlie sounds. This
( f Jo. Hiixtorf, Z.V ai'h efiahtris Hibr., Ba&cl. 1613, &C.J Ph. Ledcrer, /^<r*r.
ti. Ckald. Abbrtviaturtn, l-rankfurt, '893.
f See QiMMim, chap. i. fol. 39.O. W. C]
Digitized by Google
6.] Pronunciation and Division of Consonants. 29
knowledge is obtained partly from the pronunciation of the kindred
diakcls, especially tl.e still living Arabic, partly by observing the

affinity and interchange of sounds in Hebrew itself ( 19), and partly
from the tradition of the Jews

The pronunciation of Hebrew by the modem Polish and German which
jjiirtlv rcsf'tiibles the Syriac, diffcn considerably from that of the Spanish and
PortUi,Tic5e Jews, whicli approaches nearer to the Arabic. The pronunciation of
Hebrew by Christians, follows the latter (after the example of Reuchlin), in
Tlie oldot tnbditioii is pmentcd in the tiMueriptioin of Hclr niiici In h

Assyrna cnneiform a later, but yet in it way very important system is seen
;
in the manner in which the LXX transcribe Hebrew names with Greek letters*.
As huwevcr corresponding signs for several sounds (13, J? , ^f, p, 5^') are wanting in
the Greek alphabet, only an approximate representation was pocsible in these cases.
Tbt iftBe applies to the Latin tmicriptiaii of Hebiew words by Jerome, noooidaig
to the Jewish prooandatloQ of his time*.
On the pronunciation of the modem Jews in North Africa, see Bazgis in the
Jouin. ^sia/., iio\. 1S4S; on that of the South Arabian Jews, J. renboiirpj,
Manuel du Ucteur, &c. from a Yemen MS. of the year l^^), Taris, 1871,
Extrait 6 du Jfium. Aiiai. itSjo.
2. With regard to the pronunciation of the several gutturals and c

sibilants, and of D and it majr be remarked i-^
I. Among the gattonUsi M is the l^htest, comspoodhig to tlie tfîtm intis of
Uie Gicdci, the nse of whidi lesnlts from the correct observance of the fact, that
n toft aspiratioo precedes efcij initial vowel in viztue of its nntnie. It may stand
Comp. C. Meiahof, 'Die Auspracbe des llebr.,' In AVm<- Jakrh.f. rhilol. u.

*
PaJag., 1885, Bd. 133, p. 146 sqq. M. Schrciner, 'Zui Gcsch. tier Ausspr. ces
;
HebrV in ff. 1886, p. 213 sqq. More eicact physiological observations of the
whole phonetic system and its formatioo by the oigsns of speech, are also impor*
tant for this purpose ; comp. . firiicke, GrunJzUfê der Physiologie u. SfUianUik
der Spnu hlauU,Wcnr\%s 1856, 2ml cd. 1S76 ; C. L. Mcrkcl, Physiologie der mensch I.
S/rai /w, Lpz. i866 ; F. Dt litz-ch, FhyiioL\^:c u. .\fiisik in ihrcr Bednttung fur die
Gramm.y bes. die Ucbraische, Lpz. 1868; E. Sicvcrs, Gruttiiiiige dcr Lauiphyiio-
Lpz. 1876 (2nd-4th ed. entitled Crund&gt dcr Phmtttik^ 1881, 1885, 1893) ;
H. Sweet, Hmuôok if Pkmaies,Oxfoid, tSyy* snd ed, |889 and Primtr tf A

Phctiiiiis,Oxford, 1890; K. Techmer, Photuiik, LpSi 1880^ pt. i; Traotmsnn,
Die Sprachlaute, Sec, T.pz. iSS^-Srt, 3 pts. ; P. Tassy, tudes sur les chan^ntmls
photu ti:iues et Uurs caracttrts ginh-anx^ Paii^ 1^91; Idxtma, JJeutstk* PhoneliJt,
Lpz. 1693.
' Comi. 00 thl% Ftankel, V^rttu^m 9m dSr Septuag^ Lpz. 1841, p.
C. Xaimdce, * Gymn-'Progr.,* Stargud, 1885.

* Numerous examples occur in HuronynU quMîma Jubraiccu in libro gemse^t
edited by P. de Iî},'ardc, I.pz. 1868 corap. the exhaustive and systematic

;
discussion by Siegfried, ' Die Anssprachc des Hebr. bei tiierooymns,' in ZA IV,
1884, pp. 34-83.
Digitized by Google
either at the begimiiDg or end of syllable, e.^. np^ *iMr, DJ^K^ ^SUm,
befort a Towel K b alnMwt loet to our ear. like the k in hour and in the Fiendi
kai^, kmnfru. After a vowel K generally (and at the end of a word, always)
coalesces with it, e.g. Kl^ qarA for an wiginal %ar^ Arab, fdti^d; see fnitber,
k 33. I, 27. 3 f.
n before a vowel, corresponds exactly to our h v^piritus asper) ; after a
%'owel it is either a guttural (so always at the end of a syllable which is not Bnal,
e.g. ?)|n| ndhpakh: at the end <tf a word the ooniooantal n haa a point
Mappit} in it, aooording to 1 14), r it standt iaandible at the end of a word,
genally at a mere orthogiaphical hidicatioa of a preeeding mwel, e.g. gSlS;
cf. 7. 3 and 75. I.
/ y is related to K, but is a mach stronger guttural. Its stronfjest snmd i>
a ffitfle*! <> formed at the bnck of the palate, comp. tJg. njj?, LXX rdCa. niDJ?
rrifjo/J^ ;
elsewhere, a weaker sound of the same kind, which tiie LXX repro<luce
by a spiritus {lenis or asper), eg. *J)Jf

'Wd, pSojl 'A/iaX/*. In the mouth of the
Araba one hean la tiie former caae a tort of guttural r, in the latter a sonnd peculiar
to tbemielfes formed in the bade of the throat It it at inoorreek to omit tiie 9
entlKly, in reading and ttaaacribing woidt EH, pho^l AmM\
as to
pfononnoe it exacdy like g or like a nasal ng. The strcmger fonnd might be
apfffOximately transcribed by gh or ^g; but since in Hebrew the softer sound
was the more commoo, it it sufficient to represent it by the sigp as pa*^
'orM, 'lit/.
f n is the strongest guttural sound, like the deep guttural ch, as sounded gene-
rally in Swiss German, somewhat as in the GenDtan Aekatf Mackt, Sache, Dacht,
Zuekt (not as hi Lkkt, Kneehi), similar to the Spanish / like P it was however
prononnoed in many words feebly, in others ttroi^ly*
g As regards 1, its pronundatioo at a palatal (with a vibrating uvula) seems
to have beon the prevailing one. Hrncc it is not merely clissied with the
liquids (I, m, ti . hut in some respects also with the gutturals 33. 5). On the
Uni'uijl~\, comp. 6. 4,
Jl The Hebrew language is unusually rich in sibilants. These have, at any

3.
rate Insome cases, arisen from lingnals which are retained as snch in Aramaic
and Arabic (tee in tibe ZavMMi the l^ten t, y and 1^.
i and fc^ were originally represented (as is still the ease in the mipoteted
texts) by only one form C^; but that the nse of this one form to express two
different sounds Tat least in Hebrew) was due only to the poverty of the alphabet,
is clear from the fact that they are differentiated in Arabic and Ethiopic
(comp. Noldeke wiuensch. TheoL, 1873, p. I3i). lu the Masoretic
in Tlifichr. f.
ponctnation they were ditUogoithed by means of the diacritical point as (M)

andb(i)'.
k The original difference between die soonds \f and D* sometimes ^Wfatiimt
* The modern Samanians, however, iu reading liieir Hebrew Fculateuch pro-
noonce )o invariably as C^.

' The original value of 0^ and its relation to the original value of and b
it ttill nndetennined, despite the valuable invcitigatloiis of D. H. Miiller, 'Zwr
Digitized by Google
6.J Pi uHunciation and Division of Consonants, 31
dntbctioQ m meuiin|^ U ekse^ to kin, {dD befioHth, to be
prudent, to be wiso, Tht SyvUns always represent both sounds by D> ^
Hrbrew also they arc sometimes interchanged; u ^0 for to >U!rv, Eir. 4, 5;
r.^S^b for ni^pp/f//j', Ecclcs. 1,17.
t (transcribed C by the LXX) is a soil wbuziog J, the Fitncb and Eogliih s, /
altogether different from the German s.
1- US, P, and y are pronounced with a strong artictilation and with a com> 1H
prearioD of the larynx. TbefiiBttwooe thns easeiitiallydillmnt fromnandS,
trhtch oone^MMid to onr / and M and are often aipiraled (ice below, no. 5),
3t is dtstingnished from every other by Its peculiar articalatioo and in no way
^
ooReqMQds to the German or l!r; we transcribe it by |.

r
3. Six conaoiuuits, the weak and middle hard \^ * { n

n 6 a 1 3 a (neanaa)
have a twofold pronunciation, (i) a harder sound as Unues like
k, p, /, or as mediae like b, g hard, d; and (2) a softer sound as

spt'ran.'a^. 'J'lic liarJcr iôuud is the original. It is rcLained ai
the beginning of syllables, when there is no vowel immediately

preceding to influence the pronunciation, and is denoted by a point
Dages km ( 1 3), placed in the consoQants viz. 3 ^, Ig^ ^ ^ 3 ^,
B /, n /. The weaker pronunciation appears as soon as a vowel

sound immediately precedes* It is occasionally denoted, esp. in MSS.,
by RdpHt ({14. a), but in printed texts usually by the mere absence
of the D^êr. In the case of 3* and *i, the distinction is less
noticeable to our ear. Yet the Gennan dialects mostly distinguish,
e. g. in hehen, the second ^, influenced by the preceding vowel, firom
the first, and in the same way the two ^-sounds in gegen. In the ca^
of 3, B, n, the two sounds are clearly distinguishable even to our ear
a^^ k and German (weak) ch, p and ph, t and Knglish ih. The
Greeks too o: press this twofold pronunciation by special characters:
Sit, a*; n^-
Geschichtc der semit. Zischlavitc,' in the Verhandluugcn des Wiener Orient.

Vonp-^sses, Vienna, 1888, Semitic section, p. 239 sqq. ; De Lagarde, 'Samcch,' in
the Aa<hrichten der Gott. Geselluhaft d. Wiss., 1891, no. 5, esp. p. 173; Aug.
Miaier, ZA
9y. 1S91, p. 267 sqq. ; Noldeke, X893, p. 100 sq. ZDMG.
* So at any rale at the time when the pivsent panetnatsoo arose, rqplaciog an
earlier pronunciation as atpirafae. However, it cannot be dctennhied iriiether the
transition from atfirutat to spiranUs took place in oi/ these aoonda and in
gvery case.
And also by the following vovvtl ; for at the cud of a word the b after
a vowd is pronoimoed as a comp. s^b, bUib, and on Uie other hand
Digitized by Google
32 The Indiuidual Sounds and Ckaraders. [f 6.
For more precise information on the cases which the one or the other
in
pronunciation takci^ place, sec a I. The modem Jewt pcononnce Ibe aspirated
3 as Vi the aspirated M as e.g. 31 rmf, D^S Ms.
a 4. Accoiding to the oigan of speech irith which the consonants
are pronounced, they are divided into
(a) Gutturals n n V m
(/>) Palatals p 3 3
m) ;
{c) Linguals D n 1 with i and ^

{d) Dentals or Sibilants V 6^ (e^ and fe^) 0 ?
it) Labials D 3 D 1
In the case of 1 its hardest pronunciation as a paiaial (see above,

letter^ at the end) is to be distinguished from its more unusual sound
as a lingual, in the front of the mouth.
Com p. on the twofold pronunciation ol r in Tiberias, Delitrsch, Physiol, nnd

Musik, Lpz. iSCS, p. losqq. ; Baer and Strack, Dikdukc ha i'amim, Lpz. 1879,
p 5, note a, and S 7 of the Hebrew text, as well as p. 89.
Independently of the organs of speech the liquids D, 3, are

also grouped together as a distinct class.
P The Hebrew phonetic system may lie more precisely represented
In the following table :
UUTAX. UQUIDAE. SIBILANT&S. EXri.OSIVK

SP1RANTS.
w. m. e vibr. naiftl lemhrow. w* ID* e*
Guttural K y n n
Palatal a 3 p
Lingual
T n D
Dental
Labial 0 1
q Rem. I. The meaiiing of die Ictteit hi tiie heading is, w.wek, m.- middle
herd, e. emphatic Consoiuuits whidi produoed by the ame ofgaa of speech
are called komorgumc (e.g. 3 and 3 as palatals), consonants whoee soond is of the
same nature homcffentoits (c. tD and 3 as liquids). On tlu ir homorganic character
and homogeneity depends the possibility of a changfe of sound, as well within
Hebrew itself as between the kindred dialects. lu such cases the soft :ound generally
interchenget wHh die aoft the hard with the heid, fte. (e.g. 1 -t* H V^, D * 1).
Fnrdier tmultions eie not however eidndcd, u eg, the mterchenge of n end p
(n = 3 = p). Here it is of importance to observe whether the change takes
piece hi en initiAl, middle or Enal letter ; linoe e.g. the change in a letter when
Digitized by Google
t
I 70 Vowel Letters and Vowel Signs, 33

medial does not always prove the possibility of its change when initial. That in
certain cases the dbuicler of the conaoaantol sound nlao infliienccs the pieoeding or
fbllowiog vowel will be nodeed in the acddenee s the ittstancet occur.
Ren. 2. Very probably as the pnmvnciation was handed down, in couise of f
time certain nicer distinctions became more and more neglected and finally were
lost. Thus r ^:^ the stronfjer y which was known to the LXX (sec above
letter e), becnme in many cast-s altogether lost lo the later Jews. ;
by the Samaritans
and Galileans y as well as n, was pronounced only like K (as in Ethiopic y like K
nUkeA.riike/).
Rem. 3. The consooantt which it is usual to designate espedallj as makt are S
those which rendilf coalesce with a preceding vowel to form a long vowel, vir.
1, * ; as to n comp,
, 33. 4; or those which are most frequently afTcctcd by the
ch.ingcs (Jescrihcd in 19. 2, 3, as again K, 1, ^, and J, and in certain casM
n and ^ ;
fmally 1 fur the reason a&sigaed in $ 12. ^ a.
7. The Vvzve/s m Gemrai^ V'ozvei LeiUrs and Vcwel Signs.
L The original vowels in Hebrew, as in the other Semitic

tongues, are a, i, u, E and 0 always arise from an obscuring or
contraction of tliese tbree pure sounds, viz. ^ by a modification from
r orJ/ short H from H; t from a contraction of at (properly oyr);
and 4 sometimes from a modification (obscuring) of sometimes
from a contraction of au (properly aw).
In Arabic writing there are vowel signs only for a, i, ; the corabiiitd sounds ay
and m are therefore retained nneontraeted and pronounoed as diphthongs (ot and
e.g. êM Arab, /on^, and D^^^ Arab, 'mtudn. It was only in later Arabic
that they became in pronnnciation i and ^, at least after weaker or softer consonants;
comp. p3 Arab, brnm, itm^ Xi^ Arab, yaum, yom. The same contraction appears
al?o in other langtiaiês, c. p in Hreek and I^tin {}^meaf>^ Caesar ; ffavfja, Lmie
(fwfia ;
plaustrum /los/rum], iu the French pronunciatiun of at and au, and like-
wise in the German popular dialects {Ojsê for /iuâ, Sleen for S(ein, 8cc). Similarly,
iSb/t obscnxing of the vowels plays a part in variovs languages (cf. e.g. the In
modem Fenian, Swedish, English, ftc)^
2. The partial expression of the vowels by certain consonants b

(n, 1, n), which sufficed during? the lifetime of the language, and
for a still longer period ;ifterwards (comp. 1. 5), mtist in the main,
have j)absed through the following stages ^ :
{a) The need of a written indication of the vowel to be read first
made itself felt in cases wbere, after the rejection of a consonant.
* In Sanskrit, in the Old Persian cancif(m, and in Ethiopic, short a alone of

all the Towds is not represented, but the consonant bj itself is prononnced with
short a.
Comp. especially, Sude, Lthrb. der hebr. Gr., p. 34 sqq.
Digitized by
34 The Individual Sounds and Characters, [ 7
or of an entire syllable, a long vowel formed the final sound of

the word. The first step in such a case was to retain the
original final consonant, at least as a vowel letter, i.e. merely
as an indication of a final vowel. In point of fact we find even
in the Old Testament, as already on the Mesa' stone, a n employed
in this way (see below) as an indication of a final o. From this
it was only a step to the employment of the same consonant to
indicate also other vowels when final (thus, e. g. in the inflection of

the verbs n"!? , the vowels d i, e). After the employment of i as
a vowel letter for d and 4, and of ^ for / and f had been established
(see below, letter t\ these consonants were also employed although
not Gonsistently^for the same vowels at the end of a word.
C Accocdiog to and Rem. i. ^, the nffia of the ytA lin^. nuue. in the
( 91. 1
noon was originally prooonnoed Vl. Bat in the placet where tbic
(as in the verb)
V\ with a preceding a is contracted into 6 (after the rejection of the n), we find
the n still fre<inently refined as a vowel letter, c. f^. HH^y nh^D Cen. 49, 11,
comp. 91. I, Rem. 2; iso throughout, on the Meâ' stone njnjt, HJlâ (also
nhS^. nj2. n3 n^. nbnr>i)n; on the other hand already in the Siloam inscrin-
tion ijn. no* MeSa', 1. 8 ~ VD* his days is unusual, as also nBH 1. 20 if it =
Vtt'iO his chiefs. The verbal forms with H suffixed arc to be read nDj>n*1 (1. 6),
TOTIDNI U. " H') and HBhSn (1, 19).
d As an example t^the original consonant being retained, we might also include

the * of the constr. state plur. maac. if tts / (aocording to | 89. a ^, Rem.) has
arisen from an original ay. Against this assnmption it may however be orged
that the Phoenician inscriptions do not nsually eapiesa tills nor any other
final vowel*.
According to Stade, 1. c. p. 35, the emplojment of fl for d perhaps first took

pboe in the case of the locative accusatives whidi originally ended in n , as
nsPK, none.
Thus there occurs, e.g. in Mclit. i, 1. 3 tht two ions ; elsewhere
3 for ^9 (the inscriptions of MHa* and Siloam exUbit the hitter), T for m (the
hitler in the Siloam Inscription), m3 - ^nsa (so Msa') or *naa, ftc. Comp. on
the other hand in Mesa', 23tt ^S^K (unless it M'as actually prononnced ân&kh
by the Moahitc s : ). As liual J is represented by H and tt and final t by so final & is
almost everywh*;re expreêd by 1 in Mesa", and always in the Siloam inscription.
It is indeed not impossible that llebiew orthography also once passed through
ft period In whidi the final vowels wm left always ta sometimes nndenoted, and
that not a few strange fofms in the present text of the IKble are to
be ex|dained
from the &Ct that subsequently the vowel letters (especially 1 and ^) were not added
in all ca?es. So Chwolson, in Die (Juiescentia *in in der althcbr, Orthogr.,'
'
in Travaux du Congris international dcs OritntaiistUt Fetenb. 1876^ with many
Digitized by Google
70 Vowel Letters and Vowel Signs. 35
{b) The employment of 1 to denote ^, 4^ and of * to denote e
may have resulted from those cases in which a 1 with a preceding
a was coniracled into an and further to 6, or with a preceding u
coalesced into tf, and where ' with ln;^ W vw lonlracted into ai and
further to or with a preceding i into / (comp. 24). In this case

also the previously existing consonants were retained as vowel letters
and were further applied at the end of the word to denote the
respective loi^ vowels. Finally H also will in the fitat instance
have eatablished itself as a vowel letter onlj where a consonantal
II with a preceding a had coalesced into d.
The oithography of the Siloam mscription corresponds almost exactly with the
f
above Mmmpciont. Heie (u 00 the Mtia* stone) w find all the loof Towdi*
wbidi hftve not ariMn from origiiial diphthongs, vtithmt vowel letters, thns
09Sh, (or X^)\ T^/^^ "V. On the other hid K|to (from
mameTit *l1p (from 'aud) ; p^t3 also, if it is to be read }CI*D, is an instance of the
retention of n ^ which has cnalesced with i into /. Instances of the retention of an
originally consonantal N as a vowel letter are
DÔ^î '^^t '"'^
'^l'?-
C^Kl.
Otherwise final a is alwavs represented by H : JTtSK rPH mt n2pJ. To this
D* alone would form an exception (comp. however the note on DV, h 9^)> instead of
Oi^ (Arab.âMmj day^ which one would expect. If the reading be correct, this is
to be r^fded as an aigasacnt that a oomdoasness of the origin of mucf long
vowtb was lost at an early period, so that (at least in the middle of the word)
the vowel letters were omitted in places where they should stand, according to
what has !>een stated al'ovc, and added where there was no case of contraction.
This view is in a great measure conlirmed by the orthography of the Mc5a'
inscription. There we find, as might be expected, ( Daibon, as the Atufiuy
of the tXX proves ^pin from au), and ntV^ (/ from )> but also even
,
*7S^* bstead of ^l^k (from /laaj.), 3Bf|C1-a|pHM1, font times, nha oooe,
for'n3^ and Tth^ {fnm Am/): n^-n^^, fN^Î^ or f^.
(c) In the present state of Old Testament orthography as it

^
appears in the Masoreiic text, the striving after a certain uniformity
cannot be mistaken, in spite of the inconsistencies which have

crept in. Thus the final long vowel is, with very few exceptions
(comp. 9. I at the end, and the very doubtful cases in 8. 4),
indicated by a vowel letter and almost always by the same letter
proofs. Tt cannot fie pr<)v(-d as I^. Bartlowic/, Sfitdirn sur Geschicht,- der Orth<h
tliat in Bible MSS. of
graphie im Aiihehnii,. hni, Fr.mkfurt, 1R94, seeks to show -
the time of the Talmud and Midrash, the letters (<riV were not so frequently
used as in the Maswetic text,
* ^)3n^ is the more strange stnee the name of king {VHn is represented as
A-M'Sf in cuneiform as late as 728
D9
Digitized by Google
3^) The Individual Sounds and Characters, [ 7.
in certain nominal and verbal endings. In many cases the tue of

1 to mark an 6 or arising from contraction, and of * for / or is by t,
far the more coniniun, while we selduni liiicl an originally consonantal
K rejected, and the simple pljonelic principle taking the place of the
historical orthography. On the other hand the number of exceptions

is ver}' great. In many cases (as e.g. in the plural endings 0*t->
and ni) the vowel letters are habitually employed to express long
vowels which do not arise through contraction, and we even find
short vowels indicated. The conclusion is, that if there ever was
a period of Hebrew writing when the application of fixed laws to
all cases was considered, either thiese laws were not consistently
carried out in the further transmission of the text, or errors and
confusion afterwards crept into it. Moreover much remained un-
tcriain even in texts which were plenurully provided witli vowel
letters. For, although in most cases the context was a guide to the
torrect ceading, yet there were also cases where, of the many possible
ways of |wojiouncing a word, more than one appeared admissible*.

h 3> When the language had died out, and the ambiguity of such
a writing must Itaye been found continually more troublesome, and

;there was a dangei^- that the correct pronunciation might be finally
,lost,.f9lc vow4l;jHgn$.or vowel points were invented in order to fix it

means of thw, points everything hitherto left uncertain was most
accurately setded. Itiis true that there is no historical account of the
âle of this vocalizatiqp x>f the Old Testament text, yet we may at
least infer, from u ^comparieon of other historical facts, that it was

gradually developed 'by Jowieh grammarians under the influence of
different Schools in the sjixlJb aiiJ si vcnth centuries a. d., traces of which
have been preserved to the present time in various differences of
reading ^ They mainly oiiowed, though with independent regard
'
Thus t- g. bop can be read qajtal^ qatui, qaôi, qUol, (/illcl, gtt{{ait
^îl, uid several of these forms have alio dUTercot significatioii:.

' The most ivpoiMat of these diffetenoes are, () those between the Orientals,
i.e, the scholars of the Babylonian Schools (comp. for their peculiar vowel system,
p. 40, note, below), and the Occidentals, i.e. the scholars of Palestine (Tiberias,
&c. ;//
;
amongst the Occidentals, between Ben-Xaphtali and Ben-Asher, who
Houri^licMl in ilie (w-ai half of the tenth century at Tiberias. Both sets of variants
arc given by liacr in the appendices to his critical editions. Our printed editions
present tmifonnly the text of Ben-Asher, with the exception of a few isolated
teadhigs of Bai-Napbtali and attmetons later corroptioas.
Digitized by Google
Vowel Letters and Vowel Signs, 37
lo the peculiar nature of the Hebrew, the example and pattern of the
older Syrian punctuation
See Gescniiis, Gesfh. d. htbr. Spr. p. 183 sqq. ; Ilupfeld, in Tkeol. Studitn u.
Kriiiketi t**30, pt. iii. (where it is shown that neitherJerome nor the Talmud
mentions vowel sign*'. \\t.x\\wr, BtUragt &ur htbr. Grunim im Talm-
II. Midrasfk, p. a6 sqq. ; and B. Pick, in Uebraiea, i. 3, p. i sqq.) ; Abr. Geiger,
'Zor NaIidaiiim-[FtancMon>]Utenitttr,' in Jud. Ztaekr^fUr fVistemstk, . LOen,
Braslan, 187a, z. p. 10 sqq.; H. Stride, JVUggBnuna tritUm Vt, TeH, HAr,^ m
Lips. 1873; 'Beitrag zur Gesch. des hebr. Bibcl-textes,' in T)uol. Stud. u. Xni,y
1875, p. 736 <iqq., as also in the Ztsehr.f. die ês. luth. TJieol. u. A'., 1875, p. fiif)scjq,;
Massorah/ in the IVoUsi. Rtal-Em. c^\. 2, ix. p. 388 sqq. ; M. Schwab, /)cs />on:fr-
veyelUs dans l<s languts sdmitiqueSy Paris, 1879 \ A. Merx, in the Verhandlungcn
de$ OrimiaHsUmmgrtsset m
Berfim, Berlm, 1881, i. p. 164 sqq. and p. 188 sqq.
H. GiaeUi ' Die AofSnge der Vokftlseichai im Hebr./ in MtnattuAr./. GeMA, it,
IVissensih. d. Judtnfk., 1881, pp. 348 sqq. and 395 sqq.; HefSvaim, Zur Gesch. des
.Strtiies fiber die Entstehung dcr hebr. Punktation, Rnhrort. 1S85, 4; Harris, 'The
Rise ... of the Massor.ah/ /. Q. R. 1889, i. 128 sqq. and 2^3 sqq. Mayer-Lamfêrt, ;
Kevut Hmies juives, 1893, xxvi. p. / 74 sqq. On the hypothesis of the origin
des
of panctwitioa tbx the Jewish cbooU for diildm, ooinp. J. Dîenbowg in the Rw,
Crit., 1879, xUt. na 25.
4 This vowel system is really based on the pronunciation i
of the Jews of Palestine, as it was then in use (about the sixth

century a. d.). This again is based on a mach older tradition,
foUowed in the solemn pnUk reading of the sacred writings in the

SjmagQgues and Schools. The consistency of the sjsteni, as well
as the analogy of the kindred hinguages, testifies to a high degree
of fiuthfiibiess in the tradition. This was represented with such
exactness, that special signs were invented even for the more minute
gradations of the vowels and vowel trills ( 10), as well as ibr the
involuntary helijinfi; vowels which in other languages are but seldom
indicated by the writing. At the same recension of llie te.xt also the
various other signs for reading ( 11-14, 16) were added, and the
accents ( 15).
' Coiup. lor this, < Icifêr, '

.Massorah bei d SvTem,' in '/.DMG. 1S73, p. 148 s<iq. ;
J. P. Martin, Hist, dt ia ponauaUon on ia Afassore ihct ies .^yritns^ Par.

tie
1875
H. Nctfle, in ZDMG.
1876, p. 535 sqq. ; VVcingarten* Di* syr. Mass$r& tutck Bvr
Mmnut Hnlle, 1887.
[* Jerome expressly itmtet thnt pnnctnation was not foand in the texts of his
lime. He refers however to the vowel sii^s, see his ComioenUuy on It. 36^ I4.
Jet. 9, 21, &c. i
also lileek'& EinUitungt ^d ed. \ 330. G. W. C]
Digitized by Google
38 The Individual Sounds and Characters, [f 8.
7^ Vmei SigHf m partial,

1. The ftill vowels (in contrast to the half-vowels or vowel trills,
lo. 1, 2), classified according to the three principal vowel sounds
(7. I, 2), are as follows ;
First CUus. A-$09ind.
^ ^ Pdth&^, a, na WJi (daughter).

I a.
Also 3. S'gA^/, an open e, ^ (<y), as a modification of either in
an untoned syllable and consequently as a short * vowel, as in the
first syllable oi ^'yyi yid" khi m (your hand) horn yattkhhri or in

a tone-syllable as a half lengthening of a, (ihe full lengthening would
<
require Q3mes,) as in HDB ptsah {naaxa). Also with a following %

as nr^lîl^/ia (cf. 75. a); '^l^yad^khd (cf. 91. a, end).
Seemd Class. / and E-tomnds,
b 1. ^_ or (defectively written, see No. 4) Htteg longum

{magnum /*, e.g. D*J>"^Y mddiqim (righteous).
2. _ H(rlq breve [parvum), i, ^'^\>\yllqtdl,
f
3. êri or Sc're with yod, and -~ Ser/ without yod, the
fornier the latter mostly <F, e.g. ^'2 MA (house),
tip Sim (name). Less frequently (defective^ see
No. 4) for /.
4. S'gMif if a modification of I, e.g. ^^fin (gxound-form
't 1$^ (ground-form lifii).
'
In early MSS. Qames is a stroke with a point underacath, i. e.
the sign for
according to Nestle \JLDMG. 1892, p. 41 1 sq.), Pathah with IloUm^
s discovery
the latter suggesting the obscnve prommmtioo of Qaauf as J or .
* Tlie ootatioa 4, 9 wpstmitt here the vowds eaientially long, either natartUy
or by contraction the notation d, /, S those lengthened only by the tone, and
;
therefore changeable; J, /, J the short v(nvcl<?. (On i comp. the retnaik at the
end of the A-class.) As regards tlu- otl)er>>, the dislinelion into / and f, and iJ is
sofBcient ; see 9. The mark " stands in the following pages over the tone-
syllable, especially if thte Ii not the last, ai it nanal, bat the penultimate syllabic
of the word, e. g. np3 . Comp. fi 15, Rem. a.
' These S'gMls, modified ftom 4, are very fteqnent in the langaage. The
Babylonian punctoation (see below, p. 40, note) has for it and tone>bearing
Pathah only one sign ; see also G.ister in IV. 1894, p. 60 sqq.
It must be mentioned that the Masoretes are not concerned with any distino*
tion between long and short vowels, or in general with any question uf quantity.
Their efforts are directed to hxing the received pronunciatiun a faithfully as
Digitized by Google
i 8.] The Vowel Signs in particular. 39
Third Class. U- and 0- sounds.
I. I &&riq, a, rm mM (to die), rarely also for u, c

17 \^,~^ QtMf, both for e.g. Q^D siUldm (ladder), and a,
e. g. top (rise up) instead of the usual VMp.

3. ) and ^(SASm, ^ and Hp fw/ (voice), a^l rSÂ (rotritttude).
Often also a defective for d; rarely S for J.
4. _ Qamh-haiUph, if, e. g. "PC" (statute).
5. The tone-bearing e in D^K W/m (you), and a few other

cases (comp. 27, Rem. 4 5), is perhaps to be
considered as a weakening of an original u.
The aamct of Uie vowds an nearly oU taken from the fonn and action d
moBth in pfodnciBg the vanoiu sounds, as nn^ 9peHi$if(; dMstfint parHmg
(of the motith), also "QB^ knakimt (comp. the Arab, vteir); (also pin)
gmaskh^t OJ^ ttmagt acooiding to tti}a% fit!husst i.e. of the mondi (also
(of the mdith). ffS^ ' lias also the same signl6caftioa.
That the long a and the short 0 (^^DH yO^ QSm^'s (omptiim) have the same
sign and name, arises from the fact that the inventors of the vowel signs prononnced
the d rather obscurely and similarly to o, just n? it afterwards passed into a lull o
among modem German and Polish Jews (cou p, ilic Syriac d in the West-Syriaa
proonndataon*^, the Swedish 4, and the early weakening of J to ^, even in
Hebrew, { 9. 10, a)** On the rales for distingnishii^ i and ^, see f 9. is, Rem.
S^gMl (SlaD himk f gr^) takes its name from its foim. So fll^^S
(Mrvr f^nis)is another name ibr QiM$,
Moreover the names were mostly so formed, that the sound of each vowel g
is heard in the first syllabic ; in order to cany out this coasittentlj some even
write Sdgfii, Qomtf-}}a{uJ\ Qubbus.
possible, by means of writinj;. Kor a long time only 0*3^ nyDC' sacn kiii^
were reckoned {vox memor. in Klias Levita, ^n>ijK '<D4<*\), Surccj and Qibbiij
being counted as one vowel. The division of the vowels in respect of quantity is
a later attempt at a scientific conc^tioo of the phonetie system, whidi was not
invented but only represented bj the Masoretes (Qimchi, Mikhlol, cd. Rittenb.
156 a, distiagaishes the five long, as mothers from tV ir five daughters).
* The usual spelling ^*Dp takes the word (as also nng) ^ a Hebrew substantive;
according to De Lagarde ' Cott. ê/. Anz. 1S86, p. 873, and so previously Luzzatlo),
and runs are ratlur Aram, participles, like Daglt dec, and cooseqaeutly
to t>e transliterated by Qdm^s and Pdthafy,
' In the BiUgflmUm fKUctnation (see the following note) d and 9 are carefully
distidgnished, as well as in many manucripts with the common pnnctnation,
and so hi Baer's editions since 1880 (by addition of a S^wd to indicate even the
full vnwel If). It is however probable that the two signs were identical hi the
origioal system.
Digitized by Gq
f S. As the above examples sbow^ the vowel sign stands legnlariy

under the consonant, t^kr wtiich it is to be pronounced, 7 ra^ ri^
y re, rH, kc. The PaAa^ called furtmm (f as. 2 ^) alone fonns
an exception to this rule, being pronounced before the consonant,
rR"> rtVh (wind, spirit^ The HbUni (uitls r>ut 7/vf/;) stands on the
left above the coii ' ii int, rh fbut ^lo). If n. as a vowel Iclicr,
follows a consonant which is to be pronounced with 5, the point
is placed over its right arm, thus ife, Wh. On the other hand,
e.g. OK^, since M is here at the sane time the initial sound of
a syllable.
g No b ptaoed for the (tolon when 9 (of coone withoot wiw) is }>ro-
nonnoed
T9^ mMt (not
dot
after itn at before llw.
n{>b); hot
Hence fdtu (lialaig),
1^ Umir (a waldtman).
9^9 (to bear), ^
When # preoedet the Hm^
the dot it placed oter aim, eg. ISÎT ybfH
iti right (he ticada with the ibet),
irit^ kamiiftm (those who carry).

In the sign 1, the ) may be also a consonant The 1 is then either to be rcn ?
dw (necessarily so when a consonant otheiwi without a vowel prccefles, e.g.

Ihtti. lending or -l-o, when a vowel already prece!LS the 1, P iaiûity)
g f^V 'i:<'i'M
for (i^J?_ In more exact pruiling, a di^liiictiou is at lca5>t made Wtwcea \ ^ttw)
and V (i. e. either 6 or, when another vowel follows the wdw^ 6w^).
'Since 1846 we have beeomc aoqnaialod with a eysteni of wraiiration different

in many respects fiora the common method. The vowel signs, all cnept \ are there
placed ahcT'e the consonant?, and differ almost throughout in form, and <w5me even
AS regards the sound which they denote : ~ tone-hearing ti and .ê,
-/, /i. In an onsharpenrd syllable '

toneless 4 and i, and also Hateph
I'athah ;
= toncleai I and Hateph Sgh61 ; = i', i7, - 8, and Ilntcph
Qamcs. Lastly before Dagc^ ^. fl, = i, - d, J. S\â is
The accents differ 1cm and stand m many cases nnder dw line of the consonants.
For the oMer litemtnre on this Balylomian punetuatim (}>ai -npj), as it is oUled,
see A. Harkavy and H. L. Stmdc*s KeOal^ dtr kOr, BiMkamiu*r. der JOUttrL
Sfftmtl BiUitiM tm St. fiUersb., S. Peteisb. and Ldpe. 1875, parts i. and iL p. 313
iqq. A more thorough study of the system was made possible by H. Strack*t
facsimile edition of the Prcphdanim po$ttriornm fotiex Bahyhnuus Petropolitanui
S. I'ctcmh ,
gT. fol.> >f the year yi6, which 1* irkowitsch dix-nvcred in 1^39,
in the .Synagogue at 1 ncbututkale in Crimea
;,cump. .Strack s ProUgomtna
the
on die liistory of the Codex, the entire literature on Uie Babylonian punctoation,
and other MS& with that qrstem). Stredc edited a fragment of this Codex in
Hosta it Joel prophetat ad jSdem
Babylon. Pttrop., S. Pctcisbi 1875, Comp.
tod.
also the publication by A. Menc, quoted above at

\\\'- mfi of
7. 3, and his Chrtsto-
nuithia Targnmuai Hcilin, iSSH; and (.1. Margoljouth, in the ProfefMnp ef the
Soiuiy of Bihl. Arikiuab^t xv. 4. According to the opinion foiinerly pre-
vailing, this Babylonian punctoation exliibits the system which was developed
in the Eastern school^ coircspooding to and cootemporsneons with the Western
Digitized by Google
8 ] The Voivel Signs in particular. 41
8. The vowels of the first class are, with the exception of //
in the middle and n__, K__, n__. at the end of the word (9. i, 3),
represented only by vowel signs ( 7. 2), but the long vowels of the
I- and U-class largely by vowel letters. The vowel sound to which

the letter points, is determined more precisely by the vowel sign
standing before, above, or within them. Thus
^ may be combined with lli'riq, Set/, S'ghSl ,
\ with $ureq and Hbtim and 1)'.
In Arabic the long a is also regularly expressed by a vowel letter, viz. " AUph
(K__), so that in that language three vowel letters corre>pond to the three vowel
classes. In Hebrew K is rarely ased as a vowel letter; lee i 9. i and 33. 3, Rem. I.
4. The omission of the vowel letters with the long vowels of the /
1- and U-class, is called scriptio defeciiva in contrast to scriplio plena.

bip, Wp are written plene^ H^J', defective.
So far as the choice of the full or defective mode of writing /'
is concerned, there are certainly some cases in which only the one
or the other is admissible. Thus the full form is necessary at the
end of the word, for 6, 0, /, e, e, as well as for e in nih &c. { 9. 3),
also generally with d, d (comp. however 9. d), e.g. ^Î'Pi^.
^2^0 (but the Masora requires in Jer. 26, 6. 44, 8; Ezr. 6, 21;
2 Chr. 32. 13 which is for *]ja; Zeph. 2, 9 ^3 for ; Is. 40, 31

!^P1 for '"y^^ Jer. 38, 11 :pS3 for ^^%). On the other hand the
defective writing is common when the letter, which would have to be
employed as a vowel letter, immediately precedes as a strong consonant,
e. g. Dâ {nalions) for D*^3, n^SfO {commandments) for ri^^SfO.
or Tibcrian system. Of these a higher degree of originality, or approximation

to the original of both systems of punctuation, was generally conceded to the
latter. Recently, however, Wickes, Accents of the T-u>enty-om Bocks, Oxford,
1887, p. 143 sqq., has proved, from the accents, that the ' Babylonian' punctua-
tion may certainly be an Oriental, but is by no means the Oriental system. It is
rather to be regarded, according to him, as a later and nut altogether successful

attempt to modify, and thus to simplify, the system common to all the Schools in
the East and West. G. Moore, Proceedings of the American Or. Society, Oct.
18S8, established the probability that the vowels of the supcrlincar punctuation
arose under Arctb influence from the vowel letters KV (so previously Pinsker and
Graetz), while the Tibcrian system shows Syrian influence.
' After the example of the Jewish grammarians the expression, 'the vowel letter
rests {quiesces) in the vowel-sign,' has become customary. On the other hand, the
vowel letters arc also called by the grammarians, matres lectionis or supports
ijulcra).
42 The Individual Sounds and Characters, [{ 9.
/ That much is here arbitrary (see 7. 2 c), follows from the fact that now
and then the same word is written very differently, e.g. "TlitS^^n ILsu 16, 60:
'nbpn Off even *rtD^n Jer. 33, 4; comp. aj. 1. Only it luay be obwrred,
(a) Tfaftt the defective mode of writing was duNen in preference, when the word
included alio other vowel letters, so that the acenmnla^n of them was avoided
comp.e.g.'p*^, hot D^pnjf ;
i>ip, rSbp ;
ycHn^, î^??.
{6) That in the later Books of the Old TesL the fall' form, in the earlier the
defective, is more usnaJ.
tH B. In the cognate dialects, when a vowel precedes a vowel letter
which is not kindred (heterogeneous), e.g. 1-^, W* ^-r-,

a diphthong (a&, m) is formed if the heterogeneous vowel be a This
is also to be regarded as the Old Hebrew pronunciation, as the
transcription of Hebrew names in the LXX further testifies. Thus
such words as ^J, ''D, ^^3, ^^fe^, W, n*3 are not lo be pronounced
according to the usual Jewish custom' as zvdtv, hay, gt^y^ 'dsuy,
geWy ikij/Z/i, (or even as Wijv, &c. ;

comp. modern Greek av, ev for
ahy tl^ but with the Italian Jews more like vdqu^ hat, &c. The
sound of V_ is the same as i.e. almost like so that
is often written defectively for
8 Charatier the several Vcwels,
a Numerous as are the vowel signs in Hebrew writmg, they are yet
inadequate to express completely the various modiikations of the
vowel sounds, especially with respect lo length and shortness. To
understand this better a short explanaLion of the character and value
of the several vowels is required, especially in regard to their length
and shortness as well as to their changeableness ( 25, 27).
^ L Fir$t Ciois, A-somul.
1. Qamts: ) is everywhere long a, but according to its nature and

origin is of two kuids ;
(i) the essentially long d (in Arabic regularly written M^), which
is not readily shortened and never wholly dropped 3$. 2), e. g.
kthdbh (writing), 311 gSntUibh (thief) ; very seldom with a follow-

ing K, as 2 Sam. i3 i. 4 (see the examples in ) 73, Rem. i)'.
* In MSS. 1 and \ in such combinations as 1|, are occasionaUy even

marked with Mappiq { 14. i\
' Of different kind are ihc cases in which K has lost
.-i its consonantal sound by
coalescing with a preceding a, $ 23. i, 2.
Digitized by Google
} 9-] Character of the several Vowels, 43
The writing of DK{? Hos. lo, 14 for would only be jtutiBable, if the a of ^
this form were to be explai?>ed as a CDntractiorj of JJ; comp. however the note
on i 72. 3; ytX^ Neh. 13, 16 fur {dag) is certainly incorrect. The ranty of the
luuunllj loog A in Hebrew arises from the fact that it has for the most part
becone an obtme 9; tee below, No. 10. 3.
(2) J, lengtlicned only by prosody (i.e. tone-long or at ail events c

lengthened under the influence of the tone, nccording to the laws
for the formation of syllables, {37. a), as well in the tone-syllable
itself, (or in the secondary lone-syllable indicated hfMihS^t see below,)
as before or after it. This sound is invariably lengthened^ from an

Cfiginal J, and is found in open syllables, le. syllables ending in
a vowel (f a6. 3), e.g. i?, i'Pi', D^p:, ^'px (Arab. IM, galdla, ywjum,
'(hir), as well as in closed syllables, i.e. those ending in a consonant, as
naiS (Arab. j'ljJ, kaukal'). In a closed syllable however it can
only stand when this lias the tone, "^^j D^J'; whereas in an open
syllable it is especially frequent be/ore the tone, e.g. "^^H, JpT, D3p.
Where the tone is moved forward or weakened (as happens most

commonly in what is called the construct state of noons, comp. 89. i)
the short ^ (Paihah) is apt to re-appear in a closed syllable; while
in an open syllable Qames becomes Siod ( ay. 3); Oan, constr. state
D?n {hrkham) TO (d'mr) iÔ^, DÔ?. For examples of the
; ;
retention, in the secondary tone-syllable, of <f lengthened from a, see

<^ 2 a and 0, a ; aUo 93. 4, Rem, 3.
In some lerminalions of the verb in the 2nd sing. masc. d

perf., J in the 2nd pi. fem. of the imperat, as well as in the 2nd
and 3rd pi. fem. of the imperf.), in ihou (masc.) and in the suffi.xes
1 and f^, the final 4 can stand even without a vowel letter. A n is
however in these cases (except with n) frequently added as a vowel

letter.
2. Pafha^ or short it, stands in Hebrew almost exclusively in e

a closed syllable with or without the tone (^Pi?, '^{'Q?)' In places
where it now appears to stand in an open syllable the S3rllable
was originally closed, and became half open only by the insertion
of a helping vowe! {a, i, e) in the second syllable, e. g. (ground-
form nahi), (Arab, daii), see 28. 4, and with regard to two
cases of a different kind, 36. 3 ^ and Otherwise Patka^ in an
> In Aiabic thit 4 ti eveiywhcte retained in an open pliable.
Digitized by Google
44 The Individual Sounds and Characters. [ 9.
open syllabic has almost without exception passed into d (-^), see
above. No. i. 2.
On the veiy fieqaent attennation of H to f, comp. below. No. 5. On the nur,

and only apparent union of Pathafi with K }t I S3> On (Va* a helping-
vowel, t aa. a ^ (J^haf^ JurHvuM)^ and f a8. 4.
/ 8. S<gh61 ^) by origin belongs sometimes to the secoiu), more

rarely to the third, and most frequently to the first vowe! class
( 27, Rem. I, 2, 4). It belongs to the firsl clas>> when it is a uiodificd
form of a, (as the (jcrm. Bad, pi. BUder ; T.and^ pi. iMudcr) cither
in a toneless syllable, e. g. 03*]^ (^'^'" y^d^hem), or with the tone, e. g.
from 'ars, ^.^ Arab, qarn, ng^ Arab. qdmh. This S'ghSl is often
retained even in the strongest tone^syllable, at the end of a sentence
or of a prominent division of a sentence, (in as 1}^, PJV. pamt^
As a however in such cases the Paikah which uniferltes the
rule
i is lengthened into Qamef, e,g. nsp, fi?. A S'ghS apparently

lengthened from ^tud, but in reality traceable to an original stands
in pausal forms, as (ground-form piry), *n* {y^y\ &c. On the
cases where a ' (originally consonaniai) follows this S<'gh61, see 75. 2,
and 91. 2, Rem. i.
II. Setond Class. I- and E-sounds.
g 4. The long ( is frequently even in the consonantal writing
indicated by the letter ' (a fully written Hireq ) ; but a naturally

long / can, by an orthographic license, be also written de/ectively
({ 8. 4), e.g. P*^ (rtghk<ms)i plur. O^W foddfqtm; in^ {he fean\
plur. Wi^,. Whether a de/ecfwdy written Jînq is long, may be best
known from the origin of the form; often also from the nature of the
syllable ( 26), or as in ^Kn;. from the Mtih^ attached to it ( 16. a).
h 6. The s/ufrf Hirrq (always* written de/ec(if*efy) is especially
frequent in sharj)enccl sy HSK), and in toneless closed

syllables (I^W? psalm); comp. however 3^*1 in a closed tone- syllable,
and even in a loose])' closed tone-syllable. It has arisen very

frequently by attenuation from d, as in 'l?"^ from '^3'^, (ground-
form fddq)\ or else it is the original 1^ which in the tone-syllable
'
At least according to the Maioietic orthography i cf. WeUhawe&'a Ttxtdtr
Bb. Sam. p. 18, Rem.
* Jerome (cf. Siegfried, ZA W. 1884, p. 77; iu these cases olien gives & for /.
Digitized by Google
9-] Character oj the several Fozve/s. 45
hftd become iy as in ^y*.^ {ihy enemy) from (ground-form \fyib).
li is sometimes a simple hclpini; vowel, as in ri*a, ^ 28, 4.
The earlier j^'mmtnari.ins call every Ilvej wriv.cn ftilly, If"'^'/ "taûum ; every
one written defectively^ i/ireq ^rvum, an iimccuiate (ii!liuctiou, so far as
qaantity is coacemed.
e. riie longest / (more rarely defective -., , e. ^. 'JJ? for I
Is. 3, 8 ; .It the end of a word also n .-) is as a rule contracted from .
ay (a/), 7. i, e.g. hzi'T} {fHihic). Arab, and Syriac hatkaL

7. The .^r without Yddh mostly ^presents the lone-Iong k
vhich, like the tone-long & (No. 1.2), is very rarely retained except
fit and befire the tone-syllable, and is always lengthened from an
original t. It stands in an open syllable with or before the tone,
e.g."P (ground-form siphr) book, njV (Arab, sfn&t) slt\p, or with
Metbeg (see 16. 2 a and b, a) in the secondary tone-syllable,
e.g. ^^^^ my rtqucsl, n3^3 hi us go. On the other hainl in a closed
syllable il is almost always with the tone, as ^5 son, Q.{î< dumb.

Exceptions : 'a^ <" is sometimes retained in a toneless clsed *;y11nble, in /
monosyllabic wurtls bi tore Mn'j<|eph, e.g. Num. 35, i^, as well as in the
examples of nas$g 'dhin menliuncd in \ 29. 3 b; {b) in a toneless oped final
occnn In examples of the i*is9g 'a^^r, at KIP Ex. 16, 99
comp. Jad. 9 59.
8. The Sgh61 of ilie I(K)-cla.ss is most frequently an obtuse ?, W

a modification of an original 1, either re[)lacing (on loss of the
tone) a tone-long e.g. from \^ {gM, l")^^ {fhy nc-a/fr)
from "^3f*, or in the case discussed in 93. i, Rem. 2, from

the ground-forms Îg, *vsr; comp. also $ 64, Rem. i. ^ghSl
appears as a simple helping-vowel in cases such as ^6 for siphrt
!^?for>;f/(|a8.4).
III. Tkini Cbut. mtd O-swmit,

0. In the U-sound there is to be distinguished ft
(i) the long ^, either (</) written fully, ^ Surey (corresponding to

the of the second class), e. g. {^boundary), or (b) defectively
written Qt'Ms (analogous to the long of the second class),
(s) the short 6, QiiMf proper (corresponding to the short ^*req)t

in a toneless closed syllable and especially in a sharpened syllable*
Digitized by Google
o Sonetimet lfo il in ilwrpened qrlkbk U writtoi f^^t e.g. ftSMl

Pfc 10a, 5, Jer. 31, 34 for n^n, oj^l.
For thU u the LXX put e.g. 'OBoMU^, from which however it only
follows, that this H was prononnced somewhat indistincdj. The LXX alio
express the sharp Jîrtq by #, e.g. IDK-^'E/tî^/*. The pronunciation of the
QiN'rls like the German I'i, which was formerly common, !<; incorrect, riUliough
the occasional pronunciation of the U-soun(is as u in the tunc of the punctators

must be admitted, at least as regards Palestine comp. the Turkish bulbul for the ' ;
Fenian Mhtty and the pronnndation of the AraUc dtmjtS in Syria as dUnj^
p 10. riie 0-sound bears the same relation to U, as the does to I

in the second class. It has four gradations :
(i) The 6 which is contracted iVora aw J. i,

and accord-
ingly is mostly written fully; ^ {Holem plenum)^ e.g. ^^f^ (a whip)
Afab. sauf^ iiViy {nil) from n^. More rarely de/eciMy as
ijhine 9x) from Arab, tour,
q (a) The long 6 which arose in Hebrew at an early period,
through an extensive obscuring, oat of an original while the

latter has been retained in Arabic and Aramaic. It is usually written
fully in the tone-syllable, defectively in the toneless, Arab.
qdtil, Aram. qdteJ, î^^N Arab, 'ildh, Aram. plur. CJ^:^^; {lig\
Arab, sdfj ; "'^S? {h(ro), Ar^h. gdbbdr ; Drtn {seal), Arab. hd/Hm. pST)
{pomegranate), Arab, rtimmdn ; f^'ch^ {dominion), Aram. [CpiJ' and \^^^
Arab. s&l{dn; ti'kt* {peacr), Aram. D^^, Arab, saidm. Sometimes
the form in <f also occurs side by side with that in d, as t^"^
and ff^ (coai rf maii; see however 29 at the end). Comp,
also 68. t.
r (3) The tone-long q which is lengthened from an original tf, or

from an 8 arising from by the tone, or in general sccordtng to the
la\\ .s for the formation of syllables. Besides the tone-syllable it also
occurs in an open syllabic before the tone, e.g. Bn}5 (ground-form

qudf) satic/uary; for hurrakh. p2p|'^ Ps. 104, 28, as well as (with
jMeiheg) in llie secondary lonc-syllablc ;

D^^HK, As s(K)n as the
tone is lost, or the other reasons for the lengthening are no longer
operative, either the original 0 (), in a closed syllable, returns, or, in
an open syllable, a weakening to takes place. Comp. {oH),
(kl), xhlL {kailsm) ;

i'b^, iy(^. and where it is weakened
Comp. Delitach, PfyikkgU u. Mmsik, Lpt. 1868, p. 15 aq.

' Cf.
i 8. 1 end. On Jerome'* tnuiilttemtioo d ^ foe utt ZA IV, 18B4, p. 75.
Digitized by Google
i^."] Chamder of (he several Vowels. 47
to ; yifCWt Arab. yaqSdA, This tone-long 0 is only as an

exception written fully.
(4) Qames-haluph, alwaj^ sbort 9t stands in the same relation s

to the Ifolem, as the S'ghSl of the second class to the êre, ktH^
D|?^ zvayyaq^m. On the distinction between this and Qanuf, see the
Rem. after No. 12.
11. On the S'ffAî as an obtuse sound of an original cooip.
27, Rem. 4 ^.
12. The following table gives a summary of the gradation of the /

three vowel-clasaes according to the quantity of the vowels :
Firii Citu: A. Sinmi Clan: I and . ThmiCUustVuiAO.
ff lOfmcTijr uipn* 1 0|ioniieriy aipotiKMigai,

dioogidy from ^ (fiij. from w (aw).
^ or obtuse from d,
ôr-r long /. ^ or long A.
tone-lont' a {from d tone-long <~ ffrom f) tone-loni^ o (from ?

or chicriy in the generally in the tone- or w) in the tone-syl-
tone iyllabk bat llso syllable bvt aUo before lable, otherwise in an
befoiit. it. open syllable.
(m a modificttloii of -r abort
(f) sometimes a tone-
loiif^ ? ur at least one
which bears the tone,
ametiines /.
short 41. ihort f. Aoit iJF, especially in
[t^ t fttmiMted frmn a; a dttTpened syllable.
see No. 5.]
Utmoit weftkeni^g to Utmost wetkening to Utmost weakening
at * ~ or -r-.

to
Rem. Oh the distinction betwetn Qames and Qiinus- /latuff;^

According to $ 8. I, long d (^Qames) and short J i^Qamef liaiufh are in
maniucripts and printed texts generally expressed by tbe same sign (J, e g.
^m, ÛtL
(On tbe marking of tbe ^ by tbe addition of a mA (^) wbicb
is regttlarly done in many manuscripts* see Baer-Del., LikrJî^ p. 43.) The
beginner who docs not yet kaow tbe grammatical origm of ê words in
' These statements, in order to be fully luiderstood, must be stndled In connexion

with tbe theory of sylhibles ( 36) and Mtthtg 16. a).
questicm, (whidi b of cotttae the tnrest guide,) my depend meutwhile on the

following principal rules :
I. The sign Q is 9 in a dosed syUabie which has noi Ou hnt^ since
such a syllable can have only a diort vowel ( 36. 5). The above
case occurs
(0) When 2i^wd follows as a syllableîvider, as in n^?? hikk'md
(wisdom), 'm-id (food). WnhJlfe/At!g on the other hand Q is a
and stands in an open syllable. The following ^lod is then a half-
vowel {S^mchik), e.g. n^djf 'd-k^fld (she ate), according to { 16. s.
(h) When formed by Dagtl fark^ e.g. ^în
a closed syllable is
Mtttiiftf (have mercy upon me); but (witb Meikig, i b)
(f) When the syllable in question loses the tone on account of

a following Maqqiph ( 16. i), e.g. QIMJT^ l^-hor adorn (all men).
In Ps. 35, 10 and Prov. 19, 7 Maqqiph with 7| is repkced by a con-
junctive accent {Mtf'kheCw so by Darga^ Jud. 19, 5 with *1V?>
Ex. 37, 8 with Enp^. (so Baer after Qirohi; ed. Mant. D'pn).
(</) In a closed final syllable without the tone, e. g. D^Jl 'tvqyyaqbm

(and he stood up). In the cases where dfx a has in the final syllable
become toneless through Maqqeph ( 16. i) and yet must remain,

e.g. nTrsra Esth. 4, 8, '"Y^t 4< ^5* it has in correct manuscripts
and printed texts a Metheg beside it
In cases like
^^r'^'* *^ idtnma^ the tone shows that () is to be
read as a.
^ a. The places in which {ry) appears to stand iu aji o]>ea syllable and yet
is to be read a* 8 leiiniie spedal contention. This it the cm^ (a) when
Jâtefh-Qamei follows (e.g. his nvril), or rimple vocal i'tni (e.g. |Zk')'i ox
gad; i^l^S 4i 7 ; rf1IMS^^mriv 1^. 86, t, comp. i6, i ; other examples are
Obod. It! Jnd. 14, 15); muph Palha^ follows in ^HVtd^ i Sam. 15, i,
S4, II, and ^C^^D^ (so Baer, Gen. 3a, 18, others ^K^|B^) ; {i) before another
Qamcs-hntufh, c. p. dm, because from imperf.

Num. 33, 7, see 67, Rem. 2) ;
(r") in the two plural
fornri D*L'n^ sanctuaries and D*!:hU' (also written and 'li:''. In all
these ca&c'S tlio Mai,ora puts a Aletlug beside the , \ which accordinij to the
Statement of the Jewish grammarians, is intended to indicate that the Masora reads
the as *; ftns pd'Û^ dS-t^bdn, pd-ifl*kk3, qd-dHtm. This tradition is in point
of foet expressly oonfinned hy the Bnhytoaian pvnctnation (see above, ( 8. s,
note), which careliilly disttatgnishes between t and d. Nevertheless, neither the
origin of these form?, nor the analogous formations in Hebrew and in the cognate
langungt nor lastW the transcrihingf of the proper names in the LXX, admits
of this tradition being regarded as correct, whether the Mctheg originally bad
I Comp. Biker-Delitxsch, Liktr Joî, Lpi. 1875, Pteface, p. vi.
Digitized by Google
lo.j Half Vowels and Syllable Divider (^'wd). 49
MMthermeuiiBgorisdnetoan cmrK It U better to ^vide and fMd (for
p^'-IS), pdd-fbha, qddS-itm (ttiictly orthographic for ^dSttm), Quite u iiicon*
ccivablc is it for Afethtg to be a of the lengthening into d in C]X*nna (Ex.
11,8), although it is so ia ^^K^ ba-'nt (ia thenavjr), sinoe hene the <i'of tho'aitiele
appears under the 3.
1 10. Tilt Half Vmels and ihe SylhiU moider

1. Besides the full vowels, Hebrew has also a series of vowel a
sounds which may be called //(/// vowels. The punciuation makes
use of these to represent extremely slight sounds which are to be
regarded as remains of fuller and more distinct vowels from an earlier
period of the language. They generally take the place of vowels

or^naiiy short standing in itpm syUabUs, Such short vowels, though
preserved in the kindred languagei) are not tolerated by the present
system of pointing in Hebrew, but either undeigo a lengthening
or are weakened to S^wft. Under some circumstances however the
origina] short vowel may- re-appear.
To these belongs first of all die sign which indicates an ez* h
tremely short, slight, and (as regards pronunciation) indeterminate
vowel sound, something like an obscure half e ('). It is called
l^wd^ or simple S'wa [S'wj simp/ex) to distinguish u Irom the

compound (see No. 2), and vocal Szad (S'wd mobik) to distinguish
it from k^wd quiesrens, which is silent and stands as a mere syllable
divider (see No. 3) under the consonant which closes the syllable.
Of the vocal S'wd the following kinds are further to be distinguished
1. The real i^wd moiile under a consonant which is closely unitedi C

as a kind of grace-note widi the following syllable, whether it be
{a) at ibe beginning of the word, as bbj^ ffSl (to kill), t^DD
mfmalU (filling), or (6) in the middle of the word, as rfyj^ gd-n
2. What is called S'wd medium or wavering S'wd under a consonant d

which stands at the end of a syllable containing a short vowel, and
thus causes at least a partial closing of it, while serving at the same
> It is jnit conceivable that ftc ( 93. 1, A. 3) were really iBteoded, and
that ^ wM iMeewitely lepreiented by the siinilarly aonndiiva.
' Instead of KIC^ it would be more correct to write nncc the name is very
probably to be referred to Aram. JlZl^ rest, and hence originally, like the Arab.
sukftn rist indicatefl only the S'wA quuscens.
\ ,
Cf. C. "L/fSXTA, Anuriian Journ,
of Philology, xvi. i, who considers or iX^SO (a translation of sukiin) to be

the original ibim.
Digitized by Google
50 The Individual Sounds and Characters. [ lo.
time as a grace-note to the following syllable ( 26. a Rem.). The

^wd medium accordingly stands half-way between the S'wd quiescens
and the real ^'wd mobile. In regard to pronunciaLion and otiier charac-
teristics it is however to be reckoned \vith the latter; comp. e.g. Difi^^
la-m'nass^h (for 'tp^), ^?! ma-tkhi', bitfphdl, i>bJ3 kitfphdl.
t The sonnd ? may be regarded as normally representing simple !^wd mobiU,

although it is certain that it often became assimilated in soand to other
vmri^ The LXX oîress it by , even by Q^sns Xipovfiift, ttph^ t^,
d\A9Xo^ mote fxeqneiitiy by a, ^^tD^ lofum^ hot very frequently in nidi a way
that tills dic^k tomd aceoidt with the foHowiag principal vowel, e.. tho
MifM, rlthf SoJUiiiAr (a* well at Âmpdi^), rtttqOf blSfTQ IMmh^ i UM,
A eloilu account of tiie proonndatioD of iSnJ ii given by Jewidi giainmariana
of the middle ages'.
How the S*V''1 sound has arisen throu-h the vani<;hin'; of a full vowel is seen,
c. g. in HS'IB from bjrdku, as the word, is siiil prouuunLcd la Arabic. The latter
language still regularly employs the full short vowel for the Hebrew iS^wd mtHle.
f 2. With the simple !^wd mobile is connected the compound

ywd or IJdtiph {correplum), i.e. a S'lvd the pronunciation of which
is more accurately fixed by the addition of a short vowel. There
are three compound i^wds formed ia this way, corresponding to the
three vowel classes ( 7. x) :
(^) Hdiiph-Pdihih, e. g. "t^PQ ^m^, ass.

(--) Ifdfiph'S'ga, e. g. >b '<5r, to say.
(-r) BdfiM'<^k, e.g. 'Jn, ^K, sickness.
These Hdtiphs^ or at least the first two, stand chiefly under the
four guttural letters (22. 3), instead of a simple S^wd mMe^ since
these letters by their nature require a more precise utterance of the
otherwise indeterminate simple ^*wd tnulnk. Accordingly a guttural

at the beginning of a syllable, where the S'wd is necessarily vocal,
can ne\'er have a mere S'wd simplex.
g Kcrti. A. Only '' ) and (tt) occur under letters which are not gutturals.
JleU/ph'TcUhak is found instead of simple (especially ^wA moi>ile), chicily
' The same occurs frequently also in the Creek and Iîtin transcriptions of
Phoenician words, c. g. Afalaga, 0*^33 guhulim (^SchrcKler, Die phoniz.
Spr., p. 139 sqq.). Comp. the Latin augmenl in momordi, pupmgi, with the (ireek
In rlrv^ vtrv/i/t^rof , and the old*fonn wutimdL
*
See eipedally Yakml* pp. 4 sq. end lao iq. of the editieii liy Natl
(Lond. 1870), ooneqMading to p. 300 of the edition by Dukes (Stnttg. 1844) Ibn ;
Ezra's Sahoth, p. 3; Ccscnhi>, I.ehrjêbiiuJe der hebr. Sprache, p. 68. The

M<snuel du Ici teur, mciuioncd above, 6. i, al^n contnin; rxy-^ x^n niles for the
various ways of pronouueiiig mcbiie : so too the UiLtuke ha-Camim, ed.
by Basraad Sliadc, Lpc 1879. p. la sqq. CC alw Sehidaer, 2f IK iriL 336 sqq.
Digitized by Google
10.] Half Vowels and Syllable Divider {^'wd). 51
(a) nodcr doubled consonants, since this doubling causes a more distinct }>ronuncia-
tkm of tlie i^wA mtWt, ^bs^^ irmeAti, Zadi. 4f la. Aooording to the nle ghrni
bjr Ben-Asber, the Ifatepk Is luustttrj^ iriteOy in a doobled wuHai oomonaat wMh
SSA (consequently not in cases like ^n^, ftc.) preceded by a Patha|^, tiie s^
or th doabling (ZJîd farU^ Ins illlcn away, e.f. 4^ri praist ftl V1S^ri>
Jnd. 16, 16 no lets nnivensllyy where after a consonant with ^tvA the same oon-
;
?ionant follows (for a sharper separation of the two, and hence with a metheg always
preceding , e.g. DnitD Ps. 68, 7; Gen. 27, 13 (but not without exceptions,
comp. e.g. **P?n Jd, 5,15. Is. 10, i ; ^S^Jf Jer. 6, 5, wjd so alwa)-s ^33n hfhoM me,
^33n hekold us : on 3 before the suffix ^, comp. 5 20. i Rem.) ; also in certain
forms undrr A'.zfh and /^tî after a long vowel and before the tone, e.g. nS^^t^H
Gen. 3. 17 ; Ps. T03, i (but ^3")3ri^ Ps. 73, 17, cf. Jer. 4, a. I Chr. 29, 30,
because the tone is thrown back on to the d. After e S^r/'rf remains even
before the tone, as lO'lS, &c.)*; (d) under initial sibilants alter ^ copulative,
e.g. 3nft Gen. a, la ; cf. Jer. 48, ao; inW Is. 45, 14; Hl^ Lev. 35, 34; ngj^
Gen. 37, 36 ; yo^^ Nnm. 9$, 18. Is. 37, 17. Dan. 9, 18, cf. Jud. 5, 12. 1 KL 14, si.
s Ki. 9, 17. Job 14, I. End. g, 7to emphasise the vocsl diaiacter of the
JS^wtd, For the same icasoo mider the emphatio O in iS'D^n Jer. SS| sS;
cf. Job 33, Hi Aer QfipA in Pi* 65* ^s ; cf. Jer. 3a, 9; mder /H/f in D]^ni
Ps. 28, 9; even under n z. ?i ; tmder 2 Esth. 2, S; (r) under liquids,

sibilants or Qi^fh after /, e.g. pnY"* Gen. 21, 5. comp. 30, 38 and F,z. 31, 38
(under p) ; Jin^.N I's. 12, 7; Jer. 33, 15; nnp Josh. 11. 2; "T]3D3
Ps. 74 5, for the same reason as the cases under {f>)^; according to iJaci also in
niCD'^' I Sam. 30, 38 ; ^Cf3D' Gen. 33, 18 alter (J (comp. 9 i i, Kem. 2), as well
as after a in rOTSjl Dan." 9,'
19; n3")3n Gen. 27, 38 ; DîT.iOn 2 Ki. 7, 8.
B. The llaltpk-Qames is less restricted to the gutttirals than the first two, and h
Stands frequently for a simple iSnl MsMEr wlien O<ooimd was originally in the n
ty11able and tcquiics to be partly prewred, e.g. at tiie beginning in HCn (ground*
fenn vidm (comp. f 93. 1, Ress. 6) \ a Chr. 31, ia Ac, i^ft (JTVA.
''ao) ; rie^ AmmmiHA wmm, 1 Kings s i (sing. nÂsy): ^SMTf for the nsnal
^JDTI^ Es. 33,61, from ^^1^; u|^n Num. 33, 25. Jer. 31, 33, and elsewheie
before suffixes, comp. ( 60; \lyl'^J> his pate (from Pfc 7, 17 and elsewhere;
nOpe^tt Is. 18,4 ^r/. Further, like . , it stands under consonants, which ought
to have Dagei forte, as in nPIpp (for nnpP) Gen. 2, 23. In this example, as in
rn5?D"^ I Ki. 13. 7; rrND^ 2 Ki. 7, 18; and "^V^^ J^r. 23, 20, the Hateph-Qames
tt':, tt:i 'r'_ '
is due to the influence of the follovvi-;^ c^niuunil as well as of the preceding
* See Delitz^h, ' ikmerkuogen iiber masoreti^h treue Darstellung des alttestam.
Ttes,' in the Ztschr.f, Ittth, Theol, u. Kirche, 1863, voL xxiv. p. 409 sqq.
* On the nncertainty of die HSS. in some cases whieh come nnder (o), see
JtfGw^ Môo Gen. is, 3 and Jnd. 7, 6.
* Ben-Asher requires for (even for ^wd qmesans) generally before
a gtittur.al or tlicrefore Baer reads in Ps. 18, 7 K'ljps ; 49, 15
-inin ;
r)S, 34 }'npn; Pro v. 30^ 17 yi^'t Job 29, 33 "Ô-JSi conP DcUtzach,
FsaimSf 4th ed. p. 149, note.
B 3
Digitized by Google
52 The Individual Sounds and Characters, lo.
(/MNUid. (EbewbeM indoed in ilmikr gmm after \ Ji[a{epkfBatka^ fo pie-

leined, lee above ktler k't bat with eoaqiare alio lâD Ii* 9 3* wheie the
0<aoiHi4 mmt naoaMarity ba admitted to hkva aa faffiwacft on the immedi-
ately following.) LlintJ^ (ji-/*A^r) Job 17, 10 it is also due to the inflocnw of
the following 0-sound. In ^DOP i Sam. 38, 8 (/ri, the oHiîial form is t^^,
where again the 0 reprr^rnts nn It is only through the infioence of n following
guttural that we can explain the lorms ^^^^p3 Esth. a, 14: ^Hjj I'n.v. ;
'^'T^P? J*''' 49. 7; nyfe'D*? Is- 27. 4; nV^K'K\ Dan. 8, 13; Ps. 39, 13:
!Ti;^D3 a Ki. 2, i (Baer's ed. also in ver. 11); D^riH^H 2 Chr. 34, 12 (the Mantua
edition and Opitius have Q^rinj^n). Finally in most of the examples which have
beat adduced, the inflnnoe of an eBsphatie aoimd (p, D , comp. also HD^H Ruth
a, 8. 7), or of a sihilaDC ii at the same time to be taken into contidciatioB.
i 8. The sign of the simpic S'^vd serves also as a mere

syllable divider. In this case it is disregarded in pronunciation and
is called S'wd quiescms. In the middle of a word it stands under
every consonant which closes a syllable ; at the end of words on
the other hand it is omitted except in final 1 (to distinguish it better
'
from final }) e. g. kit^^ and in the less firequent case, where a word
ends with a mute after another vowelless consonant as in 7)2 nard^
^ thou fem.| tkim fern, hasi kiUed, ^fSi and he waieredt and
he took captwe, n^n*^ drink thou not; comp. on the other hand
9n, *c.
k However, m the examples where a mute closes the syllable, tiie tinal .S*wd
comet soBMwhat neaver to a vocid i*wit especially as ia ataiuMt all the caes
a weakening of a final vowel baa tdcen place, vis. ft|l *a!fl* from Vl^
from *Jf)J)6^ (comp. in thia fimn, the tid fern. peif. Qal, even flKS, after
a vowel. Gen. t6, 8. Mic. 4 10 and elsewhere according to the readings of Bear),
1^ yill^ from 9 ftc. The Arabic actaally has a short vowel in aaalogoos
forms. In "Îj) borrowed from the Indian, as also in {qoit) Prov. aa, ai ; and
in c^cln'^K tu- atU<js) Prov. ^P, 6 the final mate of itself attracts a vowel aouid,
elthougli a very slight one.
/ Hem. The proj>cr <iistincrion between simple .^ml mobile and y///Vjifj depends
on a correct understatidiug of llie tortnation ui ^syllables (( 36). i he beginner may
obaerve for the present; that (t) i'v/d is always MiMtt (a) at the beginning uf a
word (except in D*n|p^, 1 97. i, note t;; (^) nnder a consonant with I>4iffei
forte, .g. Ifi*^ gi!M*/Ai; {e) after another .s*wS, e.g. I^Qj^ yifCtA (except at
the end of the word, see above No. 3). (a) i'wd is qnieuem (a) at the end of a
word (even in the ^) ; ifi) before another ^*fod.
> On IT-- as an ending of the and sing. feoL peil Qsl of verbs Tf^, see
I 75 Rem. i.
Digitized by Google
Dage^ etc. 53
U. Oiher Sigm wktek ajftet ikt Jdadttig,
In very close connexion with the vowel |)oints stand the readtng-
signSy which were probably adopted at the same lime. Besides the
diacritic point over )ff and a point is placed within a consonant
to show tliat it has a stronger sound, or is even doubled. On the
other band a horixontal stroke {RapM) ever ft consonant is a sign
that it has not the stronger or double sound. Acoordmg to the
different purposes for which it is used the point is either (i) Ikês
firle, a sign of doubling (f is); or (a) Jkig^ Ime, a sign of the
hard (not aspirated) pronunciation of certain consonants ( 13); or
(3) Mapp(q^ a sign to bring out the full consonantal value of letters
which may otherwise serve as vowel letters ( 7. 2) especially in the

case of n al the end of the word (14.1 ). The Rdphi, which excludes
the insertion of any of these points, has almost entirely gone out
of use in our printed texts (} 14. a),
18. Dagtl in gemral^, and Dagl fork in partiatlar.
1. Dogti^ a pobit standing in the middle of a consonant* a

denotes, according to it, {a) the dmMng* of a consonant {p<igel
/orte), e. g. qittel; or [b] the harder pronunciation of the letters
nKJT:^ {Dages kne). For a variety of the latter, now rarely used in
our pniittil u x s, see 13. 2, Rem.

The root t^'iT signifies in Syriac to puree through, to bore through (with b
sharp iron) ; hence the name Dagei iscommonly explained, solely with reference
to its form, by puntture, point. But the names of all tunilar signs are derived
ntber from their gmmmatical itgnifiesoce. Aeeoidiiiglj l^rt mli^t bcve the
mtvAng iriddi the MMora avigns to It ; nrrv (iUtemfff), i. e. to sharpen a letter
(by doubling it), ttiren a? to kanlm \% Le. to pronounce it as hard and without
aqriiation. ConKqneotly iS^j^ aaum (iUeram) is a lign of sbarpenrng and haidaiing
' Comp. liractr, 'Die mannigfache Aiiwerulung u. licdeut. des Dagesch,* in
Monatsschr./ur Geseh. u. U iis.

d.Judent., 1887, pp. 435 sqq. and 473 sqq.
* Wiw witii Dtigel cannot la our printed teits be diiHiîihfd fnm a wiw
pointed as iSflrJ^ (9); in the latter caie the point ihonUitniid higgler tt^ Tht%4
is however easily to be recognized since it cawwt take a vowel before or under it.
' Stadr. F.fhrb. der hchr. Gr., Lpz. 1S79, pp. 44, 103, rrfinires, instead of the
teiTn dotibling, that of Urtngihemd pronunciation, sincf tlie consonant in question
is only once represented. No doubt this is correct, but the common expression is
in some degree josdfimble, dnoe the tnmsoripdon of one of these strmgtkimd

consonnaU can only be effected bf writii^ it as double^
Digitized by Gi
54 The Individual Sounds and Characters. [ 13.
(like Mapptq pBD profertns a signum proUUioms), Sot both of which pnrpoMS the
nw/rAloftbe/n, or/MiMflw, WIS lehctod. The oppoHte of ZX^fvf is noi
jQlV, 1 14. s (eompw Ik this f as. 4, Rem. i).
C 2. Its use in the Grammar as Daês forte or a douhHng

is especially important, corrcsjKiiiding to ihe staiicus of the Latins
{Luodltts for Lucullus) or to the stroke over the German Wi and .
In tfa unpointied text it is omitted, like the vowels and other reading
signs.
For the diffiMmt ktaids of Dtigiiftm, oomp, % so.
{18. Dageilmi.
a 1. BaL^d lene, the sign of hardening, is in ordinary printed texts
placed only within [he riD3H32l letters ( 6. 3) as a sign that Lhcy sliould
be pronounced their original hard sound (without aspiraiion),
e.g. "^1^9 meWth, but i3}P mal-kS ; W taph4r, but "^^^yUh-por;
vs\^ lathi, but nn^
b a. The cases in which a Jkijgei km is to be inserted may be
leained from f at. It occofs almost exclusively at the beginning
of words and syllables. In the middle of the word it can easily
be distinguished from Dagti firk^ sudce the latter always has a vowel
before it, whereas DggtH km never has; accordingly the Dagti in
*afff, Xine\ rMfm must be forte, but in yigdal'tt is kne.
C A variety of the Daî lent is the pomt which in many manuscripts, as wcU
S h) Bier's editions, is employed in oaBSOnuttl other than the B^gudk'pkaik
to cell etteatlon expressly to the becfanhig of e new sfUsbie: (a) whai the ssme
consoasnt piecedcs b dose oomeidon, e.g. Psi % s, where, owing to the
ihgO, the coslcsdtig of the two Litmeis is SToidcd ; (^) ia cssss like *D1^
6j, t^maJ^st (not m^J^'-sl) ; (r) according to some (including Baer; not in
cd. Mant.^ in VO 'l^c combination Deut. 5, or l^ Gen. 38, 9.
Ilab. 1.6. J, For other casc& see below, i
6 and elsewhere. 30. e and ^. Delitrsch
appropriately gives the ruune of Dage} ortkophimuHm to this variety uf Doge)
{BM, XSmmtntar, 1874, on Fk 64, comp. noreoTer Dditnch, Lmtk. ZCmHt.,

1 a) ;
1863, p. 41$; slso his CompkiUmHstkt VarimUem AUUa* TtxU, Lpe. m dm

1B781 IS.
d 8. When Dagei fork is placed in a B'gadk'phaih, the doubling

excludes iU> aspiration, since the latter of the two consonanis would
necessarily have Dagei Une, e. g. (from '^^) properly 'ap-pL
Digitized by Google
{ 14.] Mappiq and Raphe. 55
I M Mappiq and Rdph^.
L Mt^^, /%vdft Abo a point nwCM

like the conBonanty servcf in
tbe ktten înN at a sign tbat tbey are to be regarded as fiill
consonants and not as vowel letters. In most editions of the text

it is confined solely to the consonantal n at the end of words (since
n can never be a vowel letter in ihc middle of a word), e.g. ^"^gSbhdh
(to be high), nTit< 'ar sdh (her land) which has a consonantal ending
(shortened from -hd), different lioai nfî* 'dr^d (to ibc earth) which
has a vowel ending.
Ren. Without doubt tocb a /RF was diltiiicdr aipimted like the hxtSt&bOi
I. b
at the end of a syllable. There arc howerer examples where the consonantal
character of this H is lost (the Mnpptq of course disapjêaring too), so that it has
only the significance of a vowel letter; comp. 91. i, Rem. a on the 3rd
fan. sing.
The mme pîp rignifies fr^trmt, Le. % tigii whidi dktiMllj brings out
the of Ae ^rowd letter
toiiiid m
% coptonant. The aanie lign was lelecbed for
this and for Dagel, since both am isteniled to indicate a hard, i. e. a rtroog, MMUd.
Hence Raph^ (see No. a) is the opposite of both.
2. In MSS. Mapptq is aUo found %vitli N V
,
^, to mark them as consonants, d
e.g. {jS^)t (S^)' Comp. for the various statements of the Maseru i^wherc
thew points aie ticated aa Ihigef), Ginsburg, TUs MastmUk, lOUt K, i 5, and
*The Dagedied Alephs in tfie Karbnihe MS.' (wlicie tfww pointa aie extremely
freqnent), la DU Verhandlungen des Berliner OrUnUUiiten-Kongreisesy Berlin,
1882, i. p. 136 sqq. The great differences in the Statements found in the Masora
point to a difference of tbe schools on this subject; one scho<i1 appears to have
intaukd that every audible K should be pointed. In the printed editions the
point occort only four times with K (K or K), Geo. 43, 36. Lev. 33, 17. Ezr. 8, 18
and Job 33, ai (^P; where the point can be taken onlj aa an oidiophonetic sign,
not with Kooig as Dagei forte) >.
Comp. Delitaach, and ed. p^ 439 iqq.
S. Raphe (HQ*) i. e. soft), a hofisonta) Stroke over the letter, is the #

opposite of both Doges and Mappiq, but especially of Dages lene.
In exact manuscripts every nCDIi^ letter has either Dages lene or
RdphK e.g. melekh, nnE*. In the more modem editions
of the text, Rdpki is used only when the absence of a Dtês or

Mt^ptq is to be eipressljr pointed out.
[* The blaioia takes the point to be Dageiia theie firar caaea.G. W. C]
Digitized by Google
56 The Individual Sounds and Characters. [} 15
16. 2^ Accenls,
a Cf. gtamiStft A. BUdiler, Umttrtuckmt^gim tur BmMAuttf ^ Snimitkelimg

hibr. Accenttt I. 'Die Urspriioge der veittkalen Bcstandteile/ &c., Vienna,
1891; ;cf. also Thcolog. Lit. ZfUung, 1893. no. 17). Of later works ob the
ordinary accents (see below, 3 a), W. Heidcnhcim, D*D^J1 ^QBÔ [^The
Laws of the A(r,-ntf\, Rodelhcim, 1808 (A compilation from older Jewish
writing on the accents, with a commentary) ; W. Wickes iâee also below),
DnOD IC^ "XSSO {Tke AttnUs ^ the TrntUy-iu /IMr], Oxibid, 1887,
an eshanitiTe mvestigation in English; A. Davit, londoo, 189J ; & P. Nathan,
Hamb^ 1893. The ennflNntioii given below, foUows Delitiscb's aammaiy in
Cnrtiss* English translation of Bickell's Gruruhiss, Lpz. 1877, pp. i8-ai, with some
modifications suggested by Wickes. On the accents of the Books D"Kn (see
below, 3 f>), S. Baer, HDN mm

iJcuniuaJ La-vs of th Books n"D], RoUelheim,
1853, and bis addendum to Delitzsch's Psalmencotnmmtar, Lpz. i860, vol. ii,
and in the 5th ed^ 1894 (an qntome of this is to be ibond in Baer'DelitaKli'i
lAhr PnUmorum htbr^t Lpa. i86t, 1874, 1880) ; cnmp. also Delitudi's nuNt
instinctive Accentnologischer Commentar* to Psalms 1-3, in his Psalmtm'
'
commentar of 1*^71, as well as the numerons contributions to the critical acccntn-

ology of thv t( \r, 's:c , in the editions of the text by Haer and Delitzsch, and in
the commenuncs ot tiie iaiicr; W, Wickes, n"Dfi< 'Dyo, Uxlord, 1881; Mitchell,
in the Jmtrml tf BiM. LU.^ 1S91, p. 144 sqq.; Baer and Stradc, DikAtke
Aa-famim, p. 17 aqq.
^ 1. The desigri of the accents is primarily regulate most minutely
the musical enunciation (chanting) of the Sacred Text, and thus they
are first of ail a kind of musical notes \ Their value as such lias
bowever, with the exception of a few traces, become lost in trans*
mission. On the other hand, according to their original design they

have also a twofold nse which Is still of the greatest importance for
the grammar (and syntax), viz. their value (tf) as markmg fit imu,
{d) as marks of pumhuHon to point out the logical (syntactical)

relation of single words to their bmnediate surtonndings, and thus
to the whole sentence*.
C a. As a mark of the tone the accent Clauds almost invariably

with that syllable which has the principal tone in the word. This
On the attemplk uf Chrisuau schul&rs of the sixteenth <xntury to express

* the
Hebrew acce&U by mndcal note*, cfl Oitenbcr^ ZDMG. 1889, p. 534.
* At the Mine time howem it must not be foifottcn that the vahie of the
accent as a marie of pnnctnation ii alwaji lelative; thus, e. g. Âtkmi^ as icipads
the lo^îcal stmcturc of the i^r!fence may at one time indicate a very strong
caesura ^thos Gcn. x 4); at another, one which is almost imperceptible (thus
Gen. I, i).
Digitized by Google
150 The Accents, 57
is mostly the ultima, less frequently the penultima. Amongst the
Jewii,h grammarians a word which has the tone on the ultima is
called Milrd (Aram. Le. accented Mew), e.g. ^Df5 qatdl; a word
which has the tone on the penultima, Mil^ (Aram. ^^27^9, accented
abaDe)t e.g. n^Hkk, Moreover, in many cases a secondary tone
is indicated in the word by Mêg (comp. f i6). Esamples such
as ipf^ 'i^V^ Is. 50, S (comp. 40, iS. Ex. 15, 8. Lam. a, 16) are
regarded by the Jewish grammarians as even proparoxyiomK
8. As marks of interpunduation the accents are subdivided into d
thcMe which separate {DittituHvi or Domini) and those which conned
{Conjunchvi or Strvi). There is further to be distinguished a, twofold
system of accentuation: {a) that which is common in twcntv-one
Books (the i.e. twenty-one), and {d} the system of accents in liie
first three Books of the Hagu^rapha^ Psalms, Proverbs and Job {vox
memor. ncK , from the initial consonants of the names, ni^nn Psalms,
^^f^ Proverbs, 3>*M Job, or more correctly, according to their
sequence^ D^'KH ; thus Q^'Kn signifies the accents [sing. of

the three mentioned Books). The latter system is not only richer
and more compiicated in itself, but also mnsicaUy nxire significant
than the ordinary accentuation.
L Cmmcn Accents,
FreUmuuiy reoMurk. The aooenti wtiich at marked ai preposiHvi ituid e

to Ufee Eight over or under the initial conBooant of tiie word ; those nadccd at
Papm/i9i, to the left over or under the last consonant. Conseqoentlj in botfl
cases the tone-syllable moit be aaeertained independently ol the aooent (cowp.
however below, Rem. a).
A. DisjaNCTtvc Accents (iûisiSMr^* or i^MVMO*. /

1. (__) SillCiq (
v/iij always with the tone-syllable of the last word
betofe (:) soph pasdq or verse-divider, e.g. I
Yy^*}.
* Comp. Delitzach 00 lit. 40, 18.

' lie eariier Jewiah acoeatnologiflta aheadj diatingniih between 0*9^ Rifgi*
and D^Jniwt) Suvi, The dlvUon of the disjunctive aoceats into Impmtoiei,
Rep> Dneca, Comltea, which haa beoome oommon aaongtt Cfafiatian gnn<
mariaoa, originated irott the Scrutinium S. S. ex atccntihu of Sam. Bohlias, Rost.
1636, and, as the sonrce of manifold confusion, had better be given op. The order
in which the accents are arranged in rf cpect to their power as disjunctives, follows
in general from the above classiiicaauu revised according to Wickes. In respect

to the height of tone (in chanting) i. a, 5, 4, 8, which were hw and long sustained
Digitized by Google
58 The Individual Sounds and Characters, [f 15.
a. (^) 'Atbnfl^ or 'Athnahtil (mi), the piindpal divider in the

middle of the vene.
3 a. ( ) SgdU&, postpone, marks the fourth or fifth snbordiDate
division, counting backwards from the 'Athnfth (e.g.
Gen. I, 7. 28).
3^, (I ) balickih (i.e. chain), as disjunctive, as Great a1Sbleth,

distinguished by the following P4seq '-stroke from the
conjunctive in the poetic accentuation, is used for ScgOlta
(seven times altogether) when this would stand at the
head of the sentence; comp* Gen. I9 i6 and elsewliere.
4 a. () Zaqeph gaddl, and

4^. (-^) Zdqeph q&)6n. The names refer to their musical character.
Afl a disjunctive, Little Ziq^ph is stronger than Great
ZAqeph ; but if the/ stand togedieTi the one which comes
first is always the stronger.
5. (--) Tiphh or Jarha, a subordinate disjunctive before Silllllq
and 'Athn&h, but very often the principal disjunctive of
the whole ver^c instead of 'Athnah ;

always bO when the
verse consists of only two or three words (e.g. Is. 2, 18)

also however in longer verses (Gen. 3, ai).
6. (^) R^bhia.
7. ( ) ZzTQ^f postpositive.
8a. (-^) PaM> posipmtivt^, and
notes, eiele be dimngaiihed from the high Dotes (7, 3*, 6, 13, 9), and the Ughest
C3^ It, SI, 10); comp. Widwi^ If^ p. la tqq.
' Pascq (i.e. the ' restrainer,' also bcorrectly called P*8!q) nowhere appears as
an independent but only a<> a constituent part ccrtnin accents (comj). below.
No. 13 and 11. 11 a, b^. Moreover Fasc<) is very tre ,ULntly used as a mark for
various purposes (see the Masoretic hsis at ihe end oi Bojtr's editions, and Wickea,
AtwUt ^
ikt TkMmît^m Books, p. 120 sqq., where Plaeq b divided into
ÛakuHmum^ ^pAaHmm, komomymiotm, and M/AMidiraMi). The ooajeetoie of
Olalunsen {Lthrb., p. 86 sq.), that Plaeq and other acoentt also served to point
out marginal glosses subsequently int6rp>oIated, has bcMi farther dcvcloi>d by
K. V. Ortcnbcrg, '
Die Bcdcutung flc^ I'aseq filr Quellenscheidung in <ien WW. d.
ATV Lhmgymn. iu I enicn,

Progr. (Us 18S7, as well as in the axlicle, *Pascq a.
Legannefa,* 'mthtZAfT. 1887, p. 301 sqq. (on the other hand, Wickcs, $bid, i98S,
p. 149 See alio . Klhi^, io the ZtseJkr,/, JdnJU, Win, m. kirtkL Lokm,
tqq.).
1889, parts 5 ud 6 ; BdUws, in Hibra&m, v. lai tqiq., viiL 89 aqq.

* If tho woid in qacslioo baa the tone on the peaaltima, Pal|i ia placed alee
over il^ e.f. vA GcB. t, s; oonp. heic Ran. a bdk>ir.
Digitized by Google
'50 The Accents. 59
8^. ( ) Ynhibh, prepositive, and thus different from Mhuppakh.
Ythibh is used in [ihice of PaSia when the latter would
stand on a monosyllable or on a foretoned word, not

preceded by a conjunctive accent.
9. {^) Tcbhfr.
lOtf. {^) CkttA or T^reS, in conjnnctioii with QadmS (see below) also
called 'Azll, and
10^. (-^) G^raUttjfim ' or Double GMI, used for G^rei^ when tbe lone
Kits on the itltinia, and 'Aaft does not pieoede.
1 1 a. (-^) Pazer, and
11^. () Pftjft- gadM (Great Hzcr) or Qamfi phSra {cawkorm) only
used in sixteen plaees, always to express special emphasis.
12. (~) Tl?a gd61a or Great T^Wi'a., prepositive.
13. (l~) L^garmeh, i.e. M^nih (see below) with a following Paseq.
CoNjtTNCTtvs ACCBNTS {Cmjamttin or Strviy,

B.
g
14. (_-) MfinSh.
>5- ( ) M'huppakli or Wahpakh.

16a. (__) Mer^kha, and
1 6 3. ( ) Markba kpb(Ua or Double M^rkba.
*7- (-r) Darga.
18. (-^) 'Azla, when associated with Gîet (see above) also called
Qadml.
19. (-^) T*l!a q^tannft or Little TIHa, pat^âtOive,
aa (-^) Galgal or Ykah.
[21. (_) Mfty^lS, a variety of Tiphha, serves to mark the secondary
tone in words which have SiDAq or 'Athnfth, or which
are united by Maqqeph with a word so accentuated,
e.g. rt-3f M].
II. AcctfUs 0/ the Books 0"Kn.
A. DlSTINCTITI. j|
I. (_) SUlAq (see above).

9. (-7^) 'dfe w*y6id*, a stronger divider than
' Wickes requires GerSAyim ^D^w'^!) ).
* Wrongly called also Mcr*kh5 m hiijipakh {Mh*kha mahpakhatuni), althonf^h
the accent underneath is in no way connected with Merkha ; comp. Wickes as

bove, p. 14.
Digitized by Google
6o The Individual Sounds and Characters, [ 15.
3. ( ) 'Atbnfih (see above). In shorter verses 'Athndi suffices as
principal distinctive ; in longer verses *0U ufydrid serves

as such, and is then mostly followed by 'Athneih as the
principal disjuiiciive of the second half of ihe verse.
4. (-^) Rfbhi-^* gadol (Great Rbhi*').
5. ( ) Rebhi'*' mugrilS, i.e. Rebht' with Gêfi on the same word.

6. (-- ) Great Sal^leih (see above, I. 3^).
*t* (~) inn^r (Zarqa), as postpositivf, is easily distingnished from

$inn6rtth similarly placed, which is not an independent
accent, but stands only over an open syllable before
a consonant which has M6rkha or MabpaUi.
8. (-) Rbh1* qi|6n (Litde R^bhli^) immediately before *dli
wy6rd.
9. (__) I>M or Tiphha, prepositive, to the right underneath the

initial consonant, e.g. 'i^n (consequently it does nui mark
the tone-syllable).
10. () Pdzer (see above).
II a. (1-^-) Rl' huppakh legarmeh, i.e. Mahpakh with P&seq.
1 1 ^. (I 'Azla l^garmeh, i.e. 'Azli with P4seq.
f B. COMJONCnVI.
12. (^) M^rkha (see above).
13. ( ) Mfinah (see above).

14. () 'lllfly or Mfinah superior.
15. (_) Tarh& (under the tone-syllable, and thus easily distinguished
from No. 9).
16. (-^) Galgal or Y^rah (see above).
17. Mhuppikh or Mahpakh (see above).

18. ( ) 'Azla (see above).
19. ( ) âlSUeth qnanna (Little Salftletfa).
The last three are distinguished from the disjunctives of

the buiiic iia.nic by the absence of the Paseq.
[30. (~) înnortih, see above under No. 7.]
Reuarks on the Accents.
I. At Signs o/ikt Tinu,
k I. At ia Gieek tad EagUfh (eoai|iL Afi tad tmfdd aad iimpaeii so abo
io Hebceir, words wbidi aie wiltim wifli the ssane contoninti tie ooeasUMnllt
Digitized by Google
The Accents. 6x
fli^ti:iL;i;i^he<l by the position oi tac toiiC, e.g. X^l i\mii (they buiii;, 133 odnu
Via us; HD^ ^d^na ^,she stood up),
; jâmi^ (standing xn^^fem.).
f. At a nil the accoit rtuidf on the tooe'iylkhle, and properly on hi /

initial oouooant. In the cue of inepoiltim and poitpoiltives alone die tone-
tyllablc mmt be ascertained independently of tiie accent. In many MSS. as well as in
Bacr s editions of the text, the postpositive sign in foretoned words stands also
over the tone-syllable after the analogy of Poita (see above, 1. S a, note; ;
e.g.
19, 4; SO the prepositive sign in cases like Gen. S, 13.
IL A9 Signs ofpymtuatim*
3. In respect to thii ie of the aecente, evecy vcne is ffqgtrded as a period lil
which closes with Sillilq, or hi tiie fignrative language of the grammarians, as

a province 'ditio^ which is goveme<l hy the great distinctive at the end. According
as the vtrsc is long or short, i.e. the province great or small, there arc several
subordinate Domini of different grades, as governors of greater and s^maller
divisions. When pocsiblet tiie split np into parti
snbdividons diensdves are also
^ aooofdmg to the law of didiotomj (see Wickes, Tki Aamtt / tk$ 7\oem^hCiii
B90h, p. 29 sqq.). When two or more equivtiltmi accents (Ziqîlw R*bhta*) ooevr
coosecTitirely, the accent which precedes causes a eatef dlvisioD than die one p
which follows comp. e t'. t^le /.aqeph, (kn. 1, ao a.
;
4. In general a conjuncUve {Serous) unites only such words as are closely tl
connected in sense, e.g. a noon with a fbUoiring genitive or a noon with an

adjective. For the doseit oonneiion between two or moie words Muf^ph is
sdded ($ 16. I).

5. The coniiecution of the several accents 'especially the correspondence of dii- 0
junctivcs with their proper cOTijunctives^ conforms in the most minute details to strict
rules, for a further investigation of which we must refer to the above-mentioned
wodKS. Here, to avoid misnnderstanding, we shall only notice farther the mle
that hi the aecentoation of Books 0"Kn. the ^Ml** mt^p^ beibre SiU4f, and
the ^^t before Âthndlf^ must be changed into conjunctives, unless at least two
toneless syllables precede the principal disjunctive. For this purpose S^wl
mohik after Qames, .Sere, or Hokni (w ith Mctheg^ is to be regarde<l as forming
a syllable. After '(y\k vr'ydreU the 'Athnah dues not necessarily act as pausal
(comp. DelUzsch on Fs. 45, 6). In the corrupt condition of our common texts*
the system of acoents csa only be studied with the help of such ooneet editioos
la those of Bser
6. A donUe accentuation occnis in Gen. 35, la, from onward (where p
the later accentuation aims at uniting verses a2 and 33 into one^ and in
;
the Decalogue, Kx. 30, i <^\i\. \ Deut. 5, 6 sqq. The later accentuation which
closes the first ver&e with On^y înstead of ^JID) is adopted here also simply for
thrpurposes of pobUc reading, in order to rednoe the original twelve verses to ten,
the attttber of the Commandments; Geiger Unckrift m. denUtmngtm dir
Digitized byflbogle
62 The Individual Sounds and Characters. [ i6
I le. O/Maqqipk md Unthtg,
a These are both closely connected with the accents.
i. Maqqeph i.e. iinder) is a small horizontal stroke between

the upper part of two words which so connects them that in respect
of tone and pointing they are to be regarded as one, and therefore

have only one accent Two, three, or even four words may.be
connected in this way, e.g. every 9uut, Siff'î'b^'rvif evety ker^.
Gen. I, 29, iine^s-nK a/i that ke had. Gen. as, 5.
b Certain monosyllabic prcposiuons and conjunctions, such as "ly

until, -i>j; TDlIf with, ru, "DK i/, wketktr, -|0 from, ']i Ust, are
almost ilwafi fonod with a foUowing Maqqeph, provided they haiw not
beoome independent Ibnne bf being conlwied with pMfiMe e.g. D]^^
in which cue Maqqeph M
a rnle does not follow. OcoiiionnHy Meqq^ le
replace<1 by a conjunctive accent (see above, 9. 12, Rem. i. c), at, according to
the Masora, in Deut. 27, 9. 2 Sam. 20, 23. Jer. 25, 30. 29, 25. Eccl. 9, 4 in the
case of "^3 Ps. 47, 5. 60, a. Prov. 3, 12 in the case of TIK, the objective
particle. Longer words are however connected by Maqqeph with a foUowing

monosyllabic, e.g. rft-Tj^nTin Gen. 6, 9. J3-^!TJJ_ Gen. I, 7, abo two wwds of
move than one tjrllable, e. g.
'i^^}f7\f2p sepmtem. Gen. 7, 1 1. Comp. the Gieek
procUtict h^f ht, Ir, tj; dv, whi^ as dropa lean on Ae foUowing wotd.
C 2. Mc'ihcj^ i.e. a bridle), a small perpendicular stroke under
the consonant to the left of the vowel, indicates most frequently the
secondary stress or counter-tone, as opposed to the principal tone
marked by the accents. It serves however in other cases to point
out that the vowel should not be hastily passed over in pronunciation,
but should be allowed its fiill sound. Hence the other names
of MliKig, MS'r&ih, i.e. lengthener^ or Gelyd^ i.e. ramtig of the
voice; and even Great Gdyd with long vowels, elsewhere JJliU
Gdya\
^ Farther jt is to be distinguished into: I. T)\c light Af^thl'g. This is divided
.ngain into {a) the ordinan,' Mctheg of the counter-tone, a& a lule on the second
(oiH-'n syllabic before the tone, e.g. O'lKH (comp. also such cases as ; bttt
aL>o in the third when the second is cloiied, e. g. D^^B^^H (also in such cases as
* Comp. the source of this article on MUhfg, the exhaostive statement by

S. Bacr upon the '
Mcthcg-Sctzung nach ihrcn itf>erlicfertcn Gesetien,* in A. Merx's
Archiv fitr dir '.vissenuhaftl. J-lr/ont Imng ihs A. Test., Halle, 1R67, Heft i.
p. f 6 sq(} , and ib68, licit ii. p. 194 ^^4. ; Bacr and Strack, Dikduk* ha-(amim^
p. 30 sqq.
V
Digitized by Google
i6.] Of Maqqeph and MitfUg, 63
Tl^n^nSJ^), and when the third is not suitable for it, even on the lourth (open)
syllable before the tone. This Mithg may be repeated in the fourth syllable
befere the tone, vhoi it alreaidy ttendt in the wicmi, e. g. D3^nV3{^. Flaaltj it is
alwajt added to the vowel of an open vltfma, wUdt b- joined by Maqqepih to
A word bcpAttiiv with a toneleae jrlkUe and to wilhotit MMi^ (e.g. blt^^ftS,
on the other baiiB fH^^Bf^, n^nK^fi^^), or to a word beginning with an inii^
SSttd beTore the tone-qrliabl^ e.g. ^!r^, *S3'7lb6f^, ftc; the otgect la to
pMvent the ifwd beeomiqg fmiisaiU,
The ordinary i(gkt Mithfg never stands with a moveable ^ copulatitx^ con-
sequently we do not find Q^J3^, &c. (nor even &c. oontnuy to ^ a; bnt
3nj^^ &c., according to 8, comp. ( lo. a, Rem.)*
The firm ox indispenmbh M^th}g. With vowels (rxcept

(//
Obtain casra, ^ copulative, sec above), which

(a
are
all
followed
longf
by a !^'u>d mobtU
in
^
preceding the tone-syllable, e.j;. H^Dj?^, ^^'^ emphasize a lonjj
vowel imnacdiately before Mnqqeph, e. fj. *!^"ntJ' Gen. 4, 25 (rot IS(-I(); hence
also with "^b Ps. 138, 2, aiidTiS Job 41, lb (for "^3 and 'nX ; cL also TlXD
Jos. I5 18 aL). (7) With Sere, which has beom&e tonelos through retraction of
die tone In oider to prevent Itsbeing prononnced as S^^kO, .g. T\'p\ SHK
PkOT. IS, I (not*AUil). (B) With all vowda before oompoaite SSf^ e.gSb)r
0^|9S)r, fte., except when the fellowing conaooant is donfaled, e.g. Vl^^ lb. tia, a,
because the sharpening by Daget excludes the retarding of the vowel by JWM<|^;
so in the cases discussed in $ 28. 3, where instead of a (lateph a short vowd haa
arisen, as TlOV* &c. () In the initial syllable of all forms of iTH (a It, and iTfl
<o live, to emphasize more sharply the îvA quiescens when it stands under the
n or n, e.g. n%T, riMni {yih-yi, iih-yi), Sec, comp. 63, Rem. 5. {Q With the
Qamc^ of the jdural forms of n"'3 h<ft/se OTIS bAftfm, comp. 5 96 under
n^>, and with HSX' prithee^ to guard against the pronimi,];Liion bSttim, dnftd.
Kvcry kind ot light Methcg may in certain circumisUnccs be changed into a con-
junct ivc accent, e.g. B^^J' 2 Chr. 34, 11, and elsewhere.
a. The grave Mithig {Uayd more limited sense) is especially
in the ^
employed in the following cases in order nsore distinct^ to rmpharise n short
vowel or an faiitial S^:
(n) with the Pathah oT the aitide or of the mdiaca
3, S, b, when followed hf ^Smi wider a consonant without Dtigi^, e. g. n^pDn^

n^pO^, ftc, but not before ^
(before which \ also remains without Afitk^t with
the exception of ^JTI and *JT\, when they are followed by Maqqeph, or accented
with Pa'itlx), nor before the tone-syllable of a word, and neither h/ore nor <if(rr
the common Af?thh': likewise not in words which are connected by a conjunctiv e
accent with the following word ; wxih the interrogative H with I\itnah
(except wliai it precedes ^, Dagei forte or the toae>syllable of the word), e.g.
<
* The common form is or even with an accent on both syllables, in which
case, according to Qimht, the tonf i^; nhvays to be placed on the formrr For the
above mode of writing and pobitiun ol the tone comp. Is. 3$, 3. Jon. i, 14. 4, a.
1^116^4.
Digitized by Google
64 The Individtujd Sounds and Characters, [ 17.
Ijpttn. When % i^W foUowt tlie H snd titer the there it tn mtoned
qrlitblt, the mktg tttndt to the of the Puhah^ e.^. ^Sij <^ >7 38.
The S^wA-Ga*yS (,,) It etpedtUy important in the teecMnation of the Poetiod
Books, for purposes of musical recitation; it stands chiefly in words whose
principal tone is marked by t di^jnactife withont n pieoeding ooojonctivi^ cc

T^TX\ Ps. I, 3.
h 3. The euphonic Ga'yd, for the iistinct pronunciation of those consonants which
in consequence of the lo^s of the tone might easily be neglected, e.g.
Gen. 34, 9 ; Chens to avoid an liiatiis) a8, a, or in such cases as ^^p)"^

Job 33, 4, &c.
I Mitkct; especially in the cases mentioned in 1. ^, a) gives an indication of tlie
correct prouanciation, since it distinguishes d from S, and ; from I; e.g. H

^d kh'ld (she has caU n 1 , hut H^Dftl 'dihhi food), since the ( ) stands here in a tone-
less closed syllabic, ami must therefore be a shon vowel ; thus also )'(-r"i2 they
fear' , hut ^* r'V/? (they see^, (they slept;, hut (they rejveat . The
Jewish graniinaiians however do not consider the syllables lengthened by Methifg
at open. They regard the wft as ptiaetiU in cases like ri^SM , and belonging to
the pieoeding lyllsble (comp. Btert 7%orat *mHk^ p. 9, and hi Men*a Awtkiv^ i.
p. Rem. i and especially DikA^ J^famim, p. 13); althongh, as Konig

i^dy maintains, Ae absence of DagA hi the consonant wliicfa iblhms S*wt
(at eg. rona) is opposed to this.
17. 0/ Oe Qri and K'imh,

a 1, Tlie margin of Biblical MSS. and editions exhibits various
readings of an early dale ( 3. 2), called *^P* lo be read, since,
according to the opinion of the Jewish critics, ihey are to be preferred

to the 3^n3, i.e. what i8 wriUm in the text, and are to be read
instead of it.
Oa this account the voweb of the marginal leading (the Qtri) are
placed under the consonants of the text, and in order to understand
both readings properly, the vowels in the text must be attached to
the marginal reading, while for the reading of the text (the KUhihK)
its own vowels Are to be used. Thus in Jer. 42,6 OK occurs in the
text, in the margin np wrUK. Read ^3^t wt (or according to Jewish
tradition ON) in the text, in the ni ugin 0n3l<, A small circle or

asterisk over a word in the text always refers to the mar^pnal
reading.
' On tlic iiectsiity of the punctnation '"^p instead of '"1^ (>*'ri, formerly common,
and used in earlier editions of this Grammar), comp. Kaatncb, Gramm.da BtbL'
Aram., p. 81, note.
Digitized by Google
OJ the Qre and KHhlbh.
S. Words or coMonants which are to he passed over in reading, b
and are therefore left unpointed, are called ^\ 3*^^? {scripia
et non ligmda), e.g. DK ]er. 38, 16; DX 39, 12; 51, 3. Con-
versely, words not preserved in the text, but required by the
Masora (as indicated by the insertion of their vowels), arc called
yna in np, e.g. 2 Sam. 8, 3. Jer. 31, 38. See further Strack,
Prolegomena Critica, p. 85; Diqdttqe ha-famimy J 6a 64; BJau,
Masmretitclu Uniersuchungin, p. 49 sqq.
8. In the case of some very common words, which are ahoigts to c
be read otherwise than according to the K'Mh^ it has not heen
considered necessary to pUtce the Qri in the margin, but its vowels
are simply attadied to the word in the text The instances in which
this Qrfperpehmm occurs, are Wn (Q. Kn) in the Ptotateuch wherever
VT Stands for the feminine (32, Rem. 6); "jyj (Knhtbh ny:, Q^rft
'n^'l) always in the Hebrew (;;<?/ in the Samaritan) Pentateuch, except

Deut. 22, 19. Tlie orumary explanation, on the analogy of Greek
6 Tratf and 17 rrair, our child, is inadequate, since there is no trace
elsewhere of this epicene use; cf. 2. 5, Rem. Other instances

are: ^SB^^ (Q. "^^^ Gen. 30, 18 &c., comp. Ges. Lexicon, and
Baer and Delitzsch, Genesis, p. 84, and below, note to 47. a;
0^?^.: (Q. properly ob^^; njn; (Q. ^
(after ^j^) n*r, (Q- ^^)* properly mx: FoAwi (comp. } los. a,
Rem.) ; perhaps also ti^, for comp. { 97. a.
Digitized by Google
66 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters. [ 18.
CHAPTER IL
PECULIARITIES AND CHANGES OF LETTERS: THE

SYLLABLE AND THE TONE.
18.
The changes which take place in the forms of the varions parts
of speech} depend partly on the peculiar nature of certain classes
of letters and the numner in which they affect the formation of
syUables, partly on certain laws of the language in regard to
qrlkbles and the tone.
19. Changes of Consonants.
a The changes which take place among consonants, owing to the

formation of words, inflexion, euphony, or to influences connected
widk the progress of the language, are fmmuUUim, astimUatim,
L Commttia/toH^ may take place between consonants which are

ather kamorgamc or homeâuatts (comp. 6. e. g. K^^, D^, /a
exult, nit^, nni), Aram. to labour, rO^ and rC to press, i^D
and "OD to ciosc, i^^D ^.nd D^^B to escape. In {)rotess of time,

and partly under the influence of Aramaic, the harder and
rougher rounds vere changed into the softer, e.g. pny into
to laiigh, into to reject, and the sibilants into the corre-
sponding mutes: ? into 1, ^ into n, t into o. In many cases

these mutes may be regarded as a return to an earlier stage of the
pronunciation.
* C BUrth, Etymol0giscke Forsikungm, Lfs. 1893, p. 15 sqq. (<Lautver>

irMiiliiiiigm*)*
Digitized by Google
1 19.3 Changes of Consonants, 67
The interchange of consonants, however, belongs rather to the

kxicographical treatment of roots ^
than to grammatical inflexion.
To the latter belong (a) the interchange of n and D in iitthpdil
(54- 2) ; (^) of 1 and * in verbs prinuu VSd ( 69), lij for 1^, &c.
a. Assmilaitm umaUy takes place when one conaoiuuiit which b
doses a syllable passes over into aaother beginmng the next syllable,
and fotms with it a double soand, as iSusirir for inbuiHs, t^ftrQ for
a^trî wXX^r^MNi for wika^îam. In Hebrew this occurs,

(a) most frequently with 9, e.g. (for mnflSsi) frm ihtrtt ^
(for mm-ti) /rom this, \P^. (for yinien) he givn. ^ ^ nci assimilated
after the prefix !>, e.g. ^î^, nor as a rule before gutturals (except
sometimes before n), nor when it is the third consonant of the stem,
e.g. J!?^?^ (comp. however *î?3 for naihdnld), except when another A'ww
follows, comp. 44, Rem. 6 ; nor in some isolated cases, as Deut. 33, 9.
Is. 29, 1. 58, 3, all in the principal pause ; on I'vn and Fs. 68, 3,
cf. 51, Rem. and 66, Rem.
I, i.
(h) Less frequently and only in special cases with ^, n, *1 e.g. <^
(torjfUpUk) he laket; KtlA for K|^n; nn|fi ibr *ahadL

(<) In isolated cases with n, 1, % e. g. Kill priOmt from M) 1 and e
* mostly before sibilants in the verbal forms enumerated In { 71.
In aO these cases, instead of the assimilated letter, a Dagei fork /
appears in the following consonant. Dagel, however, is omitted when
the doubled consonant would stand at the end of the word, since the
doubling would then be inaudible ( 20. 3 a), e.g. 11? nose (from *<z/),
io give (from hnt).
The cases are less frequent where a following weaker sound is lost in pronun-
ciatioa', and in place of it the stronger sound preceding is sharpened, i.e. takes
Dagei, c. g. Viy^^ from Vin^^f (J 59, Rem. 3). for p^Df (| 66. a) ii an
Aramaum.
9* Complete rejection takes place only in the case of weaker con- g

onants, especially the liquids I and ^, the aspirates M and n, and the
two half voweb 1 and \ Rejection takes place,
() at the beginning of a word {pphaermt), when these weak h
consonants (M, \ ^, )) are not supported by a full vowel, but have
' See in tlic Ltxircn, the ]

rcliminary remarks on the several consonants.
* The Ucrinan gr.ammarians ioaccaritcly call ittcb a nipprasaioa of a touad
'
Kuckwaii&-A&&imiIatioo.'
Digitized by ^(tfSbgle .
68 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters. (, 19.
only Sewa, e - ^:n3 z/y, also ^JTOK ; jn for PI]; for ngb; for
85^2?, for 'vf Kzek. 2, 10.
f Aphaeresi? of a weak consonant iJkith a full vowel perhaps occurs in
Jud. 19, II for Ti^; in HPR 2 Sam. 22, 41 for T\T\l; in ISIO for 3it;'^ Jer.4a, lo;
on Ezek. 17, 5 for Hpb, nnd in Dnj^ IIos. 11,3 for DHi^S, ^tt S fi'"), Keni. 2 ad fin.
In reality, however, these forms are to be regarded rather as ulu icxtual cii >is
k (^) In the middle of a word {syncope), when S*\v5 precedes ihe
weak consonant*; thus in the ci?c of k (see further 23. a, 3, and

{ 68| Rem* l, s)i e.g. in O^d for D)fi<^. As a rule in such cases,
however, the M is orthogiaphically retained, e.g. nJOj?!) for nitTj?^.
Syncope occurs frequently in the case of n, e.g. for î^^ (f 23.
and 35, Rem. a), for (f 53 O-
Syncope of M with occurs in such cases as for
(comp. 102. a </| Rem.)'; "^B^^l Zech. 11, 5. On the cases where
It is wholly omitted after the ardde, see 35. 2, i Rem.
Finally, the elision of ^ and * in verbs n"i> ( 75. 3) is an instance
of syncope. On the syncope of n between iwo vowels, comp.
23- 4 ^.
/ At the end of a word [apocope)^ -e.g. r6a pr. name of a city

if)
(comp. ^\
Gilonite) ; Kn^, where M really rejected is orthogiaphi-
cally retained, Ac. On the apocope of 1 and ^ hi verbs n^, see
{ 24. 2, Rem. and f 75.

Bolder changes, (especially the apocope 'of ctfOBg eouoiMuits,) were nwde la
earlier periods of the language. For iosianoe, especially tlie weakening of the fen-
ioiae ending iik to HL.. J, tee | 44. i and | to. t.
m 4 To avoid harshness in pronunciation a helping sound, Alepb

prosthetic * with its vowel, is prefixed to some words, e.g. yi'>]t< and
y^l arm (comp. xBii, ixOi^ : spin'lus, French esprii).
ft 6. Transposition'' seldom occurs in the grammar, e.g. "^^Pl^ for
* Syncope of a strong consonant iV) occurs iu ^3 /rithu! if this stands for
(see Lexicon), also in T\p^y\ Am. 8, 8, KUhibh for n^pC'JI (comp. n^|n 9, 5),
ttd in n^3 Jos. 19. 3 for (as b 15. 39). Probably howeyer npt^j^ and
are only clerical erroit, at is nndonbtedly nio Am. 8, 8 for (9, f).
* Fictitdofff, OtkUi iV'peMla, p. 97 *q.> gives a list of fofty-eight WMtdt wltb
qviesoent H.
* This term is at any rate as suitable as the name Ale/ptvtAUiemm proposed by
Nettle, Afarginalitn u. Malerialien '! i;hi'ijen,
1893, p. 67 jqq.
* Cf. Barth, Etymologische Stmuoi, I r 1893, p. i s^.j Konigsberger, in
]
Zeitsckrift/. wisunuhaftlithe Jhcoieê, 11394, p. 451 s^^.
Digitized by Google
20.] The Doubling of Consonants. 69
IBB^n ( 5^ 2) for the sake of euphony; it is more frequent in
the lexicon and i,jmf>. -i^V and noj^ garnunt)^ but is
mostly confined to sibilantb and liquids.
6. Sofhm'ng occurs e.g. in 3013 s/ar, from kaukabh = kawkabh o

for kabhkabh (comp Sjriac r4xmQb^rabrab) ;
nlDD^D phylacteries for
iaphtdphSthi according to the common opinion, also in IS^M man
from Vfff, comp. however 96*
20. Tht Doubiing {^strengthening and sharpening)

CwswettUs*
L. The doubling of & consonant, indicated by Ihgel forte^ takes a

place^ and is necessary and essential [Dagei necessarium)
{a) when the same consonant would be written twice in succession
w ihout an intermediate vowel or ^^wd mobiU; thus we have ^^nj for
ucuhdji-na and î??' for ^nriK^
(/^) in cases of assimilation ( 19. 2), e.g. for yinicn. In both

these cases the Dagts is called compensaiivum
{f)
when it is characteristic of a grammatical form, e.g. '^9^ he has
Uarmd, It^t^ he hat taught {Dagei characteristicum). In a wider sense
this includes the cases in which a consonant is sharpened by Dageil
forte, to preserve a preceding short vowel (which in an open syllable
would have to be lengthened by { 26. 3), e.g. CS^^ eameh for ^nUUtm;
cf. 93. 2, Rem. I and Rem. a ad fin.; 93. 3, Rem. i.
Thw coalescing of two couoatnto does not take place when the first has b
a vowel or S^wd nubile.
la the iMter tarn, aoooidiag to the comet Masora,
it ihonld be written with a iompwnd praoeded hf MHkt^gft e.g. 0*^n,
^ff^t ^
(eomp. { 16). Thii pointing Is not Iband before mtut snffix ^, eg.
1|a^3n Gen. 37, 4, although the first 3 has a vo<aI J^*wd, otiienriae the aeoond 3
would have Dagel lent. Also when the former of the two consonants has been
already doubled by Dagel forte, since as it must have at legist a vocal S'zoti, any
further contraction is impossible. This applies also to cases wlit n- Da^ci forte has
Ixcn omitted i,6ee below 3. 6), e.g. properly ^!?^n ^ hal-i"iil. The form
^JiiM Ps. 9, 14 (not V'!?^'' ^'S^^ ^
explained as unpcjat. Pi'cl *332n in the ;
imperat. Qal the non-contiaclioo of the monosyllabic root wooid be as strange

it ii in Jer. 49, a8, and hi the imperf. tJ"|"!C^ Jcr. 5, 6.
2. A consonant is sometimes doubled merely for the sake of euphony c

{J)agel uph<micum\ and the doubiing is then not so esiieniial. This
*
occurs
A Comp. Baer^ *De primanm vocabolorum iiteranun dagessatione/ in bis
Digitized by Google
TO Peculiarities and Changes of Letters. [ ao.
(tf) when two words are dosety united in proniinciation by Doge}

forte cmjunrtivum: (i) in the fir^t letter of a monos) liable or of
a uoid haMng the tone on the first syllable \ which is preceded by
a word closely connected with it by Maqqeph, and ending in a tone-
bearing with ^*wd mobile preceding (except when H is the

ending of the 3td masc. sing. perf. of a verb ff'>) or tone-bearing
n--^ the P^n^ (i.e. cmpretttd) of the Jewish grammarians.
Some limit the use of the I>hiq to the cloaesC union of a mono-
syllable with a ioBowing B'gadlfpkaik, However, it also applies to
cases Uke T"?^ Num. as, 6; nitpn^g^ Gen. a, 23; l^njf; Ps. 91,11;
and even in J?lf, PrOv. 15, i ; ^{fUJftol Gen. 43, 15. In alt
tiiese examples the tone, were it not for the Maqqph, would be on
the nhima of the first word.
d Rem. I. When the sljorl wonls Hif (hit, and HO (properly 7vhaif have
Maqîph after them, a Dapi JorU conj. always follows, even if the aext word
b neither % mtMnfiiMit aor btt tbe tone on tiM initial i^hble; tliu not only in
toe^n Jer. SB, 6 (where Hof is counted as mu eyllable), but also in riyne^np
GcB. 38, S9, coeap. aS, 17. 31, 36. 44, 16; n>*]B*nT1 Num. 13, 97. i Chr. aa, t.
In *t(I nin Oca. I9 a (wbeve Maqqepli ia Rpicaented by a conjnnctive aoeeat,
I 9. la, Rem. t.^', and 1 1. I, Ren.), the S<^t belongs to the aeoondaiywtooe
sj^blc.
2, Swch ca*e as nX3 mXS Kx. is, i. 31; ver. 11, ami perhaps aJso
0pK3, npKS ver. 13, ]2ii3 ver. 16, do not belong here. In these the Z^^fvl can
only be intended for V^g. Um, see a i. 1, Rem. a.
/ (a) in the first letter of a monoayllable, or of a word with the

tone on the first syllable after a closely connected wut4l, ending in
n_ or n-7.. Such a miTtt is called by the Jewish grammarians
p^rno ^riM vtnims e Imgtnquo (in respect of the lone). The attraction
of the following tone-syllable by JDagd forte conj.

rhythm,
Gen. I,
eg.
ii; ?V?-
Jâc^ Ps. 68, 19
n, 31 ;
; ^ njQ*^
wrnn
31, 23.
is
Is. 5,
for the sake of
The
14; nn nfc?P
prefixes
3, 3, h and \ alone do not take a DageS in this case, except in

which has always Da ere ^. and Ps. 19, 3. Siicli forms as
nnjf^ Ps. a6, 10; n^;t Job si, 16; and even nn^ niiî u. 50, 8^
JaMdnGlioa to IJber Ft^mirHmm, Lpa. i33o^ pp^ vii-sr; F. FMoiina, * Ober

dcB Unpning des Dag. f. coojanctiram,* in ZAfT. 1S83, p. 17 aqq.
alone, althoogh haring the tone on the altima, inrariably retains the
Dagei forte tmj, wbca n|fD with a conjnnctife accent piccedcs, jl 6, lo.
29. 34, &c
Digitized by Google
30.] The Doubling of Consonants. 71
i. e. the cases where the accent of the uluiua is thrown back on the
syllable which otherwise would have Melht-g, are likewise regarded as
nni'ei. On the other hand, e. ^. nin Gen. 4, 6, not 1)^ since the
first d of n^n could not have Mtiiug. The Imperfects and Participles
of verbs lY"^ are, however, excq>tk8. When woida are closely

united by Maqqipk the lame rules apfdy as abtpve, except that in the
lint void Methig^ as a secondary tone, appears instead of the accent,

^1im|^ Gen. I, is; WflCfe^ Gen. 3a, 30, and dwwheie
Finally, the Dagti is used when the attiacted ivord does not begin
with the principal accent, but with a syllable having Meik^, nisn
P*. 37. 9 i ^ 44, i ;

'^'^'^^ E- 29. provided
dial the second word does not begin with a JB'gadk'pha/h letter
(comp. e.g. Gen. 2, 4).
Rem. Such cnsî as "S^Jf^ nent. 33, 6, aad ri'[:'I! 3?, 15, nnd niys (so
^
Bacr, but not cel. Mririt., >Scc i Sam. 1, 13 nic therefore anomalous; al&0|
because begimung v. uh a B'*gadk'^'phath, hx, 15, II (oomp. ho.v( \cr aliove.

Rem. a) "hn Jos. 8, 38 ; jrtn|3 P. 77, 16; trrr;3 Job 5, 27, It u doubtful
;
wbeAcr AoflU indadt hm tboM etiet ta wUdi Dagt /ortt occart after
a wad ending in a tonekn 4, sack m Gcb. 19^ 14; oomp. ta, 31
Ex. IS, 25 (IMI^). Dcata, J4 also 16 Gen. 19,4. 1 29; 19 Jo^g. 18, 19.
Erth. tf^ 13; Xsj(^ Hot. 8, 10; Tn Jer. 49, 3Pt ITI I Smm. 15,^ Whw we
explained the Dagel in these examples not at conJaoctiâ, hot wthopbotuc (see
above, \ 13. a, Rem., and DcUtzsch, Psalms, 4th vA. on Ps. 94, 1 J a^, we especially
referred to those cn^cs in which the conson,^Ti; wiih Daêi h:is a S'wd. The
exteniioo ot the use ot Ungues to cunsonaiiu with a strong vowel, seems hocrever to
indicate that time are CMet of the ^tTVQ ^rM, which was reqaired hy MNne
Maioraleabotnot coodsleadyioierled. Oa dhe other hand, the Z)^r} hi ^
after a pieoedfaig / (Pe. It8, r8), and efca after 4 (Pi. 94, it), is to ha
explained as an attempt to preaove Itt ooMooaDtal power by ihaipeohig; see
(I) When a consonant with is sharpened by /hrk k

dtrfmemg to make the more audible. In almost idl cases the
sharpening can be easily explained from the character of the consonant
itself, which is almost always a Liquid, Sibikint or the emphatic Qdph;
comp. ^?|V Lev. 25, 5. Deut. 32, 32 i^for I^P^^f? Is. 33, i (where,
hovvvver, ^^33 is to be read); comp. Nah. 3, 17. Job 9, 18. 17, 2. Joel
1,17 (with ; Is. 57, 6 (with h) ; Judg. 20, 43'. i Sam. i, 6 (with n)
Gen. 49, 10. 17 (and so always in Judg. 5, a 2. SoAg 1, 8
* The onUaaiy leadiaf V1^nf|n, wheie 1 It wilhoat Ayrl, aeiames the n

CO have Z^|lf.
Digitized by Google
72 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters, [{ aa
and nbp^ 77, so. 89, 53); Ex. 15, 17. 13uL 23, 11. Jadg.
ao, 38. I Sam. s8, jo (p); *x. 2, 3. Is. 58, 3. Am. 5, at. Ps. 141, 3.
Prov. 4, 13. 16, 13 (V); Prov. a7, as (1?); la. 5, a8. Ps. 37, 15. Jcr.
51, 56. Neh. 4, 7 (tr). Moreover, with a Hos. 3, a with 3 Is. 9, 3.
Jer. 4, 7; with n i Sam. 10, 11. In many instences of this kind

the influent , of the following consonant is also observable.
I {f)
When a vowel is to be made more emphatic, especially in
the principal pause^ by a Dage} fork affectuosum in the following
consonant. Thus in a following Liquid, Judg, 5,
7 (^C^)* Job *9
22, 12 (d;J); Ewk. 27, 19 (in 3); in n 18.33,12. 41, ^7, Jcr.
51, 58, perhaps also Job 21, 13 (Vin*).
k When a Liquid is doubled by fwk fimuUhum in the
pronouns noQ, nfn, n||t, and in nttp w^^/ cf. also nDB, noi wj|r^/
km) nmh f ({ loa. a i), to give greater firmness to the preceding
tone>vowel.
/ 8. Omission of the doubling, or at Ifcast the losa of the Bagti

forte occurs,
(<;) almost always at the end of a word, since here a double con-
sonant cannot easily be pronounced ^ In such cases the preceding
vowel is frequently lengthened ( 27. 2 b)^ e.g. ^ multitude^ from
33"!
;
people, with a distinctive accent and after the article D^,
from tSDy ; but e. g. 11 garden^ ra daughter, with the final consonant
sharpened.
Esek. 16, 33, comp. { 10.
On the exceptbna
Rem.
f19 tkm (fem.) and ^ Mow katt given
3,
m (^) Very frequently in certain consonants with nMltt

since the absence of a strong vowel causes the doubling to be less
audible. This occurs principally in the case of) and ^ (on ^ and * after
the driicle, see 35. i, Rem. ; on ] after "np, 37. i, Rem.), and in
the liquids d', :) and h, less frequently in the sibilants, and this chiefly
when a guttural follows, (conip., liowever. Is. 62, 2, VDDKD, as ed.
Mant. correctly reads, while Baer has 'DK^ with compensatory
So b Latin /el (for /ell), ^.ftUis: am/, wttOut M, Mis, In Middle High
German the doublinjj of consonants never takes place at the end of a word, but
only in the middle (as in the Old Hi^h German), e.g. vcU i^î-all), gax. tuoUfS j
swam {SiAwamm), Sec., Grimm, DeuUthe Gramm., and ed., i.
' Dagei /9rU is almoct always omitted in D when it is the pctfiz of tiie
participle^ hence B. 104, 3 "Qipn tnAtf kgft^ ike kam, but ni^'l tk* rtf
Eodct. 10^ iS (comp. nSNî tkt awnft,
Digitized by Coogle
$ 21.3 Aspiration of the lenues. 73
lengthening, and others even 'DWD ;
*3D^ Gen. 27, 28. 39 ; 38, 24
c6pTD for fo, D*3i>fn I Ki. 7, 28; "n^B^N 1 K; 19, 20 from pB^?,
D^riDB^n Ezek. 40, 43 and D^sBf,^ Ps. 104, 18; Q^nf^ Jon. 4, 11,
D^]|n"jMn Ex. 8, I and elsewhere), and finally in the emphatic p'.
Of the B'gadkfphath letters, 1 occurs without Dagel in "^V^
Judg. 8, a, a in DCn^3jD Ezek. 3a, 30^ T in *n"l3 (Is. 11, 12. 56, 8.
Ps. 147, 2 ; ff^/ in Jer. 49, 36), supposing that it is the Participle
Niph'al of nij; lastly, n in vnnfi Is. ss, 10. Comp. moceover,
and ffî the tmulr^ tL of and also Ttchjf the ^Mw/r. //r.
of Examples, ^ (so always the prefonnative ^ in the
d^ji, tjp, Vipp, vî*, rt5p?, ftc.
imp^f, of verbs), nwfj^, *j}ri,
In correct MSS the omission of the Dagtt is indicated by the Ri^Kk

stroke (14) over the consonant Moreover, the preceding short
vowel, which would be lengthened in an open syllable, indicates that
at least a virtual doubling takes place by means of a Dagel fortt
impUciium (see 22. i. Rem.).
(r) In the Gutturals, see as. i.
Rem. I. Contrary to rule the doabling ii omitted (especially in the later H

Books'', owinjj to the ler?;'thening of the preceding; short vowel, which is mostly
hireq (comp. mile for milU), e.g. ]T^n'^ he makes them afrnid, for fnn* (Hab.
a, 17, where perhaps however it is more correct to suppoie with Kunig. a formation
iJicr ibc analogy o verbs Vy, and moreover to read 'jrpn* with the LXX), nip^j
la. 50, II for rrtpl.
a. Veiy donbtfnl are the iDrtancea in which MnnpeiisatioB for the doubling o
Is supposed to be made by die inieitioii of a following 3. Thus for n^^]^
]* 3 ii> (or ^^t^) Is to be read ; and for Vipll Lam. 3, aa,
is the oorrect reading. \!l3f^ Nam. 33, 13 is not an initanoe of compensatioo (see
1 67, Rem. at the end).
'
%^ Tht AspiraHen 0/ Temits\
The harder sound of the six B*gadkphalh letters, indicated by a

Dagti lau, is to be regarded, according to the general analogy of
languages, as their older and original pronunciation, from which the

softer sound was weakened ( 6. 3 and 13). The original hard
'
* According to some also in D in ^^DTI li. ij, 10; but see Baer on this
passage.
* Comp. DelitttGb, ZUehr,/, kUh* 7M. . Xvrtkt^ 187I, 585 sqq.
74 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters, [ ai.
pronunciation is maintained when the letter is initial, and after a
consonant, but when ii immediaicl)' follows a vowel or ^*wd mobile
it is softened and aspirated by their influence, e. g. pB paras, f^D*

yiphrbs. kdl, fkhol. Hence the B'gadlfphalh take DagA Ime,
(i) at the beginning of words: (a) without exception when the

preceding word ends with a vowelless consonant, c. g. ys'^y 'al-kin
(therî), nf r t^ri ijrmi-iree) ; {b) at the beginning of

a chapter, e. g. Tky^h^ Gen. t, x, and at the beginning of a sentence^
or even of a minor diviaon of a aentence after a distinctive accent
(f '5* 3}> slthougb the preceding word may end with a vowel The
distinctive accent in such a case prevents the vowel having an
influence on the following tenuis, e.g. and it was sa, ikai
when, Judg. ii, 5 (on the other hand ^rT^. Gen. 1,7).
C Rem. I. The vowel letters H, 1, tt, as such, natori^lly do nnt close
syllable. In cl(^ connexion they are therefore followed by ihc nsj ir^ttd
I^gadk*pkaih, e.g. r13 HiTCJ^, &c On the other hand, syllables are closed by the
consonantal "I and ^ 1 exceptions Vlfnj? Is. 34, 1

1
; n5 l^tt' Ezek. 23, 41 ; and
^J*!!*
Ps. 68, 18), as well at by PI with Maff u,!, hence c g there is Dagtl Uiu
in Dn*9 and always after rrfn^, sioce the Q^ri ^rpetuum of this wofd ( Jj)
presupposes the reading ^ÎK.
^ a. In a number of cases Da^< 'z Une is inserted, although a vowel precedes in

close ct)ti:u \i >n. This almost alwa)^ occurs in the prefixes 3 and 3 when m the
combinaiiuns 33, 33, &3 (i.e. in the h'^cuik'phath wilh "wd before the same or
a lundred aspixate) and 03 (see Baer, L. Psalmorttm 1 88o, p. 9a, on Ps. 33, 3}
fiomp. e.g. I Sam. it moertaln ; ^3, "13,

I. la. 10, 9. Ps. 34, a. Job 19, a ;
and da aceofdiag to David Qimhi shoold lanam aqiinted, alio 33 23, and GD ,
aoeoidfa to the ZKidMtf Jla/MMM, 1^. 30. SometinM the ^îl>4/<l kOen^
even with a fall vowel, take Dag/A befoie a ipwant (and eran befoie fl in Hf^l
I Ki. la, 32' Here also belong the cases mentioned abov^ f M. (mostly
.
tenues before K). In all these cacs the object evidently is to prevent too great
nn accumul.Ttion of nspimtps. The i^XX, on the nthf-r hand, almost always repre-
sent the '2 and C, even at the beginning of a syllable, by x ^ ; Xt^vfi, XaXSaim,
*ap<t^P &c The fonna ni"|3 (tfter ^jfebj) Is. 54, la, and ^^'^^ (after Jri^|>3])
Jer. o, 9 ate doubtjr anomaloos.
e (2) In the middle of words after S'ukf quiescens, i. e. at tlie
beginning of a syllable immediately after a vowelless con80DaDt'
'
Also /. Proverhiontm, jSô, Praef. p. is; and DiAdukt MOnftmim^ p. JO
'(in (ifrman in Konig's Lehyg<b. u p. 62).
* 'tf^î^ J'**- ' -^'^ i**^*-' ^^^*^<*^ i^^y* on this passage), a Ki. 14, 7, and
0|*^ Jos. 15, 56 are incxpUcaUe ezoeptinos.
Digitized by Google
{ 33.] Peculiarities of the Gutturals, 75
e. g. KB")^ yirpd {he heals), DrSjO? ye have killed; on the other hand
after ^wd mobile there is the soft pronunciation, e.g. rÂi (ô/
/!^), ^"^^ sht was heavy,
Od and dmUtf fount, iw

Whether ^wA
f lo. 3.
be vocal and conseqaently causes the asplradon of a folloiwliig
y
imttis, depends upon the origin of the respective forms. It is almost always VOCtl,
(a) When it has arisen from the weakening of a strong vowel, e. g. ^SiT) pursue
ye not
( la-jl) from C|Vl ;
âjjO (not because it is properly m&UUUU (but
*3^P from the ground-form malk').
{Jf) With the D of the proiioiumal
since the *w& mobile is characteristic of this

suffixes of the and pets.
form (see S 58. 3 ^; 91. i).
P
Rtm. Fofloit like riH^ thorn (fem.) kmU smt^ fai whidi ws ihonld eipect
g
a aqisatd n After tiw vowd, wen ofigintlljr ^n^^, ftc.; Patliilji bebg hene
simplj A helpinc; vowd bw no infiiienoe on theteniiis; comp. f s8. 4.
88. PecmUarities rf the Guiiurals,
The four gutttmis n ,

r., y, in consequence of their peculiar a
pronunciation, have special characteristics, but K, as the weakest of
these sounds, and sometimes also y (which elsewhere as one of the
harder gutturals is the opposite of M) diiler in several respects from
the stronger n and n.
1. They do not admit of Dagei forte^ since, in consequence of b

a gradual weakening of the pronunciation (see below, note i), the
doubling of the aspirates was hardly audible to the Masoretes. But
a distinction must be drawn here between (a) the complete omission
of the doubling, and (^) the mere lra of the doubUng, common]/
calkd ka^t or better, vtrtuoi doubling.
In the former case, the short wwel before the guttural would stand c
in an open syllable, and must accordingly be lengthened *. But a dis-
uiiction must bt: again drawn between the lull lengthening of Pafliah
into Qdmes mostly before K (always under the n of the article,
see 35), as a rule also before y, less frequently before rr, and
least olten before n and the half lengthening of Paihah into S'gh6l^
mostly before a guttural with Qamtf* In the other case (vtriual
* Cornp* ierm ftad the Fiendi ieme, die Gcfnaa end the Fiench rUe:
Gennea MSiSfit end Fiench i/lnMr. The ominioQ of die doubling diowt a deteri-
oration of the language. The fresher and more original phonetic system of the
Aiabsc (1 1. 6) ttiU admits evetywheie of the donbiing of the gvttenls.
Digitized by Google
76 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters, [ aa.
doubling) XhtDagis: is cmitted, but the doubling is regarded as having

taken place, and therefore the preceding vowel remains short. This
virtual doubling consequently occurs most frequently with Pi, usually
\vi:li n, less freqnpntlv with y, and very seldom with N. Examples of
{a) m lor mrcn :
Dixn for ha'addmj DV'?* "^^"'7. ^^C** {for ythhabe);
further 'init, inn,
article before
Ac.
9 in
onnn,
În all
35).Of
^^^n (see
(5) IB^,
more
m
iblly on
(from
these cases of vutual doubling the Ikigel^ fork
the pointing of the
mm^/), wnn,
is to be regarded at least as implied (hence called Da^î firU

impUciium^ occtdtum^ or delfiacens),
d 2. They prefer before them, sometimes also after them, a short
A-sound (comp. Rem. i), because this vowel is organically the nearest
akin to the guttural sounds
Hence (a) before a guttural, Pathah readily takes the place of
another short vowel as well as of a rhythmically long / and 3, e. g.
naj sacrificM^ not s^^jft/ report, not tcnii. This is more especially
so, when a was the original vowel of the word, or is otherwise

admissible. Thus In the Imper. and Imperf. Qal of guttural verbs,
h win send (not jn'mh); Perf. Pi*el (not

/f7/M) ; ^bn! he will desire (not yihmdd) ; Tpi a youlh. In the last
three cases a is the original vowel.

,< < I < <
e Rem. That ^)gh61 remains before {< in such casts as Kfl K3D K^B NIB
is to be explained from the fact tlmi N here has lost its consooaxital value, and is
only retained as a vowel letter (see 23. i).
f {b) After a heterogeneous long vowel, i.e. after all except Qams,
the bard gutturals (consequently not K) require, when standing at
the end of the word, the insertion of a rapidly uttered d {Pathah
furiive) between themselves and the voweL This Pathah is placed
under the guttural, but sounded before it It is, therefore, merely
an orthographic indication not to neglect the guttural sound in
pronunciation, e.g. nn rH^h, 71, CT?*^, ^^^Î (when consonantal
n is final it necessarily takes Mappiq). But at the beginning of
a syllable, e.g. &c., since here the rapidly uLLered a ib no iuiiger
heard.
* Like the gutturals,, the A-sound is prodoced by opening the numtli and
directly emitting a breath, while the vowels of the IcIaM are fonncd puUy by the
palate, and those oX the U-dass by the lipi.
Digiti-êu by Google
Peculiarities of the Gutturals. 11
I^dk fbr iek, ftc, arc analogow twHiiictt ainongst Mmt f At Swiw't t
Patka^ fitrthm it here involttntorily intnided before tlie deep guttnml eowKl.
In Arabic the same may l)e heard in such WOtds as nicuahf althoagh it if not
cxpressrd in writing. The I. XX (and Jerome, cf. ZAiV.vi. 79) write f, some'
timei o, instead <3{ Pathah furtive, c. g. fib Ncit, JJ^T liSSofJa i'also *Ia55ov \
Rem. 1. The gcttTiral may also have an influence upon the foUowitjg h
vowel, especially in the Scgholate forms, e. g. (not na'rr^ a youth, (not
poiP) deed. The only exceptions are ShK, |n2, DhS^ Drn.
a. Wheve in the pment fonn of the language attenuated firom Patkah^ i
would stand before or after a guttural in the first qrllaUe of a word* a
a* being between i and i ii frequently ued instead, e.g. Cânj (also B^]L)f
"IT* IT*
n^p, &c
tit'
On the oditf hand, the slighter and sharper Sirtq is retained even nnder k
gnttarals when the qrUable is sharpened by t.Jg> n|n, {infl
but when this sharpening falls away, S*jgli61 fa apt to reappear, e.g. fCVS\ waaUr,
r^^jii, Ji^nconstr-I^^n.
8. Instead of n'mp/e S*wd moh'le^ the gutturals take without excep- /

Uon a compound S u J, c. g. in|^, i^^px, nbK, Dî^nK, &c.
4. \M)cn a guttural with quiescent S'wd happens to close a in

syllable in the middle of a word, the strong closed syllable (with
quiescent S'tvd) can remain. es}>ecially with n and y at the end of the
tone syllable, e.g. ^^^^^ ^J^Xi also be/ore the tone (see examples
onder No. a, Rem* a), and similarly with n and N.
But in the syllable before the tone and further back, the closed
syllable is generally opened artificially, by a ât^h taking the place

of a ûescenS^tDd{ovfmg to the nature of the gutturals), and especially
the Hateph which repeats the sound of the preceding vowel, e.g.
afe^n;. (also atrn!) ; pip*^ (also Pin^); î>};9 pmS (for lS>yB). But when,
owing to a flcxional change, the strong vowel following the HaUph
is weakened into ^wd mobile^ then instead of Hal/ph its vowel alone
is written, e.g. HtpiT (from TtoKl-), ÎFi. Î'V^ (ôm i>P). The
original forms, according to a8. 3, were ya'm'dhH, rn'r'mH, fiftkhd.
Hence Ac, are really only different orthographic foims of
V10|^, ftc^ and would be better transcribed by ytt^dhA^ Sk,
Rem. 1. The gnonmarians call sim^ Shui nnder the gutturals Jiayvf({^).'^), y
and the t9ii^$tmi S^wd they osll (no"^). See farther In the observattona 00
wfaa with gttttuals, f{ 62-65.
[' Comp. also our use of a furtive e before r after e, t, ii and cu, e>g. 4wrr
(pronounced ki*r)fjire (yi*r),/ {pi^r), and our {fiu*r),Q. W. C.}
Digiii^ca by GoOglc
. 0 %, Rciptotiiiff flM dioke betucea the three wmpmmd S^mdi, il nmf be

lenulced, (a) n, n, y at the beginning of a syllable prefer -=rt bnt K prefien
e. g. -lion ahn /> -jbH say: when however the tone sellable ia moved
farther forward, the under K change* into the lighter -=j-, e. g. (poetic for
to you, to eat, bat (^^kh9!, tnne1if"is on account

ol Maqqeph). Comp. J 27, Rem. c Likfwi*.?' is naturally f nnd rndcr K
in cases where the Hateph arises frnin -x f akcnin- of an orij^nal a ^.e.^;. lion,
ground-form âry)^ and li there be a w eakening of an original u (e. g.

a yf!^^/, ""JJ? affliction, comp. ( 93, Rem. 3 and 6. <)
P (^) In the middle of * wocd after a long vowd, a Hatefh-PaikoM

iuteed of a sim^ i^wd moHU, e.g. nSKD, n^^h (ce f 63, Rem. 4) ; bet if
a short Tinrd pnsoedeit the ehake of die J^t4^ is regnUted by it, e. %, Bnf.
Hifh. (see above, No. a, Reaa. a). l^lj^n (after the form ^*^p(n);
Ptf. H^hJn^ (after !^) ; hot ei: TTniE^ Job 6^ aa (f 64- 0*
q 5. The n, which in sound approximates to the gutturals ( 6. r),
shares with Lhc guiiurals pro|>er their first, and lo a cerum exleixi
their second, peculiarity, viz.
{a) The exclusion of the doubling, lo compensate for which the
preceding vowel is almost always lengtbenedy e. g. ht has bUmd

for bt'rrakh, ip? bUss for barrikh.
r The preference for a as a preceding vowel, e.g. M^!! and
{b)
he taw (from n^); 'IQ^ for tfii^ il ilKrim^ hath, also ibr
tfii^ he earned to Aim back,
S The exccptiooa lo letter a aie TPO^ mfrriUk^ Prov. 14, 10; kkhrUk
and IpHB^ lArriM, Eadc, 16, 4 (comp. Frov. 3, 8); ^S^thB^ Song 5, a ;i^V^n
I Sam. 1, 6; DTl^vnn i Sam. 10, %\, 17, 35. a Ki. 6, 3a ; VlC^Tin Jnd. ao^ 43
<e I ao. a (j^TJp t Sam. 93, a8, a Sank 18, t6i alio on aoooonl of pvn
(f ao. i) Jer. 33, aa. ôv. 15, 1. ao^ aa. a Cbvoo. ^ to; and pi*rnD ^mt (f ao. /)
I Sam. 15, 6. Jer. 39, 12 TTrt! . 13. Prov. ii, 21. Job 39, 9. Ezra 9, 6. A kind
of virtual doublinj^ '-xiXKi D for ^D, is found in ^T3'5'2 14, 3. In Snmnritan and
Arabic this doobling has been retained throughont, and the LXX write c.g. 'SA^
for nn^,
%^ The Feebkaess of the Aspiratet It atii n.
il 1. The M, a light and scarcely audible guttural, as a rule entirely

loses its slight consonantal power whenever it stands without a vowel
at the end of a syllable. It then serves (like the Gennan h in roh^
geh, nahte) meiely as a sign of the preceding long vowel, e.g.

M^, M^n (iNit when a syllable is added with an inlroductoiy vowel,
according to Na s, e.g. *?tf)f , ^9tf*l^?> since the N then stands at the
Digitized by Gopgle
330 The Feebleness of the Aspirates and n.
79
beginning of the syllabic, not 'at3, W2rfn), K^, (comp,,
howc\c r,
74. i\ f'WXD (for mdfa/d\ n3K3ftpn. Similarly in cases
like N'-^', &c. ( 19. and even in (see above,
2 3. e), tiie K has only an orthographic significance.
S. On the other hand, k is generally retained as a strong conaonant d

whenever it begins a qrUable, e.g. V9|Kp, or when it Is protected
by a JjfafipA in a partially closed syllable, e.g. ^^|$^> and, as an
CKcepiion, even in a dosed syllable with quiesoent after a pie-
ceding S'gM, e.g. '^^.^ "tîfl tt/dSr, Even in such cases the
consonantal power of It may be entirely lost,
{a} when it wouM Stand with a long vowel in the middle of ^

a word after S'Tftf mobile. The lonp; vowel is then occ usion.illy
thrown back into the place of the S'wd^ and the K is onlv retained
orthographical ly, as an indication of the etymology, e. g. D'C'K'J heads
(for f*altm\ DÔHO huo hundred (for ne'aidyim\ '^ff^ sek. 85, 6 for
fiienia Nefa. 6, 31, 7. Dan. i, 4 for
8 for Qfi^; MtO Job
BW; 33; tTMDh ^fti, I Sam. 14, 33 for
rrilti for iTTMp Is. 10^
BH^n (comp. { 74, Rem. a, and 75, Rem. si); ^99!*^ Num.
34, 14, from YSnn; so always mten or nwdon i Kings 14, 16. Mic.
I, 5, &c., for n^Ktsn. Sometimes a still more violent snppresston of
the K occurs at the beginiiing ( f a syllable, which then causes

a further change in the preceding syllable, e.g. nSK^Ci work for
naxfrp, bK^f^ for h}kc^ or inite^ hand, ground-form
^7^f\ ; /g^/
samal.
(^) When it originaUy closed a syllable. In Hebrew tt is then gen- d

craHy {by sa* 4) pranoonoed with a faftph^ or The preceding
short vowel is, however, sometimes lengthened and let^ns the following
te only orthographically, e.g. Num. ti, S5 for ^t^^X (comp.

Judg. 9, 41), and 'WTKf Jod a, 6 for I'^KB ;
^5*^ obscured iiom Jai^
for (comp., however, % 68. i) ib> ; for -ibKS, &c. The short
vowel is retained, akhough the consouanial power of K is entirely lost,
in Ac. (see 102. 2), HK^. Is. 41, 25, IT^KI Ezck. 28, 16 for
^li^î comp. Deut. 34, la i Kings 11, 39. Is. 10, 13.
fiutetd oftlibllwUehhM]oftitsoonioiMntdvaliw,lhCTeiioilaiwiltlm i
^ vowd letters 1 and
nnd
^ according to the nature of the soond, the
ri^frm for
fornm with
cnrnp also
6 and
the lifter with / r f;. >f<i3 hffflj.'c for
for not I Sam, 2, 16 and lre<jnently m the K'^thtoh. At the end of ilu- word H
also IS wntten for k4 ^fiiis Ux Job 8, ai (tee below. No. 4, Kem.).
Digitized by Cjtfogle
8o Peculiarities and Changes of Letters, [ 23.
/ 8. When n is only a vowel letter or an indication of the etymology

(quiescent), it is also soroetinies entirely dropped (cf. 19. k\ e.g.
*rw^ Job I, 21 for *nfe Job 32, 18 for *ril^; DOin Gen. 25, 24
for DO^KTi; Hsonx 31, 39 for njîsnt* ;
Tjn^ i Sam. I, 17 for "W;
DÔl Ps. 22, 22 for DÔKi ; ma job 22, 29 for ;
^nnan i Chron.
II, 3Q for "^5^30, and so 2 Sam. 23, 37 rine^ i Chron. 12, 38 for :
nn\"^. T\^:p 2 Ki. 19, 25 A'V/;/?//; for niKiJ^ni (comp. Is. -,7, 26);
^ Job 39, 6 for
strengthening of the following consonant by

>. In n^39 i Ki. 5. 25 (for ''îCO) the
DageS compensates for
the loss of the m; but in TTp^ Esek. ao^ at (if for'ÔKt^) the pre*
ceding vowel is lengthened; cf. above, No. a. On for "V^k see
S 68. a.
^ Rem. I. Tn Ar-imn'c !lie is much weftl^f r and more liable to chanc;e than in
f>{
Hebrew. In iiicrary Arabic, on the other hand, it is almost always a firm

consonmt. Aoooidiiig to Anhic orthography, It lervet alio to indicate a long a,
wbena* in Hebrew it very rarely oecnn as a mere vowel letter after Qmef ; as in
DtC^ tfoi. xo, 14 for DP /ir- rose up; Vy^^ Piov, to, 4. 13, 33 for Bh/Mr; bat in
3 Sam. II, I the JîkSik O^^jion the meMsengtrs^ is the proper leading;
comp. I 7. 2.
h a. some cases at the bcpnning of a word, the N instead of taking

In ,
a compound ^wd, retains the corresponding long vowel, e.g. 'i\\^^r(/le for
cf. 84. a, No. IS, Rem., and the analogons cases b f 5a, note, { 63, Rem. 4,
f 76. < and f 93, Rem. 3 (D^J'nK).

i 3- An It is sometimes aêd at the end of the woid to a final 4, f, and e^g.
malHI for o|ki Jos. 10, S4 (before KI), KiaK Is. a8, is. These eiamples,
however, are not so much instances of 'Arabic orthography,* as early scribal
errors, as in Wfe'r Jcr. 10, 5 for ^nI"2^ and in tObj Ps. 139. 30 for W\r3. ;
Comp. also K^JT Eccl. 11, 3 f 75, Rem. 3. K*p3 for pure: for ^Vi/;
K^DK for tAnt; K^n for B*} m/nW, Nefa. 7, 66. 7a. On mn and see
33, Kern. 6.
k 4. The n is stronger and firmer than the K, and never loses its
consonantal sound (Le. gmaeet) in the middle of a word*; on the

other hand, at the end of a word it is always a mere vowel letter, unless
it is expressly marked by Mappl^ as a strong consonant ({ 14* i)
Yet at times the consonantal sonnd of n at the end of a word is lost.
* In Jer. 22, 23, HOnj is unqut t;oii;ibly a corruption of Wn^JI for RPOKJ .
Only apparent exceptions arc such proper names as ^J<nfe*5?, "W5m*tB^ which
are compounded of two words and consequently arc sometimes divided. Cf. forms
like for ^|(7l|n. Here belongs also mcnB;, wUdi oocnis hi many 1IS8.
Ibrthe aitilidally divided fetm H^HD^ in the priatcd tcati^ Jcr. 46, so.
Digitized by Google
a4 ] Changes of the Weak i and \ 8i
and a aimple n or more correctly n (with as an indication of

the wealning) lakes its place, e.g. to her for nV, Zech. 5, 1 1 and
elsewhere (comp. 103. g, also 58.^, aiul 91. i*iii.illy, in very
many cases a complete elision of the consonantal n takes place by

syncope : {a) when its vowel is thrown back 10 the place of a preceding
S'wd mobile (see above, letter c, with k), e.g. "^^3^ for "^P-jnfi (the n of
the article bein^ syncopated as it almost always is) ; ôr
Tpf: Im^. HipKU for Tpfim ; for ; OJ^Jf for O.Tnj^ Eaek.
a7 38. (3) By contracUon of the vowels preceding and following
the n, e. g. to (also written nbO) from tibahu (a+ itb^. A violent
suppreflaion of n together with its vowel occurs in 03 (from ftc.
Rem. In connexion with o and ?, a H which only marks the vowel ending is /
occasionally changed ioto \ or ^ OK"! = "''Hf ^?0= "^^D ^ y)> ^" *^
caM* into It in the later AranMic orthography, especially with a, e. g. lUK^
197, 9 for ; mIe^ Jer. 33, 39 for nb3, &c. Thus it ii evident tluit final
n la a Towel letter has only an orthograplilcai importance.
$ 84. Changes of ike Weak Letters 1 and ^

The 1 w and '^y are, as consonants, so weak, and approach so nearly a
to the corresponding vowels u and i (comp. 5. note i), that under
certain conditions they very readily merge into them. This fact is
especially important for the formation of those weak stems, in which 1 or ^

occurs as one of the three radical consonants ( 69 sqq., } 85, { 93).
1. The cases in which \ and ^ lose their consonantal power, L e.
merge mto a vowel, belong almost exclusively to the middle and end
of words ; at the beginning they remain as consonants \
The cases are to be further distinguisiied
(a) When cither ^ or ^ with quiescent S'wd stands at the end of b
a syllable immediately after a homoi;cneous vowel {u or 7), it has not

Strength enough in this position to maintain the consonantal sound,
but merges in the homogeneous vowel. More accurately they pass into
vowels (1 into > into 1 ), and are thus contracted with the preceding
vowel into mie vowel which is necessarily long, bat they are mostly
retained orthographicaliy as vowel letters. Thus for ^S^;
M for 1 and, alone b a ttaadii^ esKepUoo, tee f a6. i and 1 204. (It to mote
piobabk a I it Iiere wiitten defectively nftftr >, On that thia ibonld be an ex^^
to such a fimdamental prindpfe.^^. W. C] On the caiea where ^ to aoftened to i
at the beginning ol a word, comp. f 47. a note.
Digiii^ca by Cooglc
82 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters, [ 24,
for ri?!!; so also at the end of the word, e.g. ^l^St a Htirew^
properly
nWS'g
'ihrty, hence fern, nnap;
On
^ Job 41, 25 for (comp.
I Sam. 25, 18 K'thtbK). the oiher hand, if the preceding
vowel be heterogeneous, 1 and ^ are retained as strong consonants (see
8. 5), e. g. quiet, \\ Uu month 0/ May, nation, '^^3 m eakd.

But with a preceding & the 1 and ^ are mostly contracted into 6 and /
(see below, 3, b\ though at the end of a word thef are sometimes
rejected (see below, s, Rem.).
c Thus an initial \ coalesces after the prefixes a, 1, f, ^, whkh are
then pronounced with f (comp. { s8. 1), and also almost always
alter 9 (see loa. h\ with the / to /, e. g. nwa in Juddh (for '^3),
nW) and Judah, "vtc? OS ike Nile, rvw), for Judah, /rm the
hands of.
d {b) When 1 and * uiihoui a vowel would stand at the end of the
word after iûuiceni S'wii, they are either wholly rejected and only
orthographically replaced by n (e. g. n33 from bakhy, as well as the
reguhtfly formed ^33 weeping; comp. for these forms, 93. i, Rem. 6)
or become again vowel letters. In the latter case ^ becomes homofe-
ncotts J^vrtq^ and also attracts to itself the tone, whilst the preceding
owel becomes S^wd (e. g. from />/ry, properly pf^yi ; 1 is changed
sometimes into a toneless u (e. g. Vih from iuku^,
t Rem. la Syriac, where the feeble letters more readily become vowel sotinds,
a simple 1 may stand at the beginning of words mstd of ^ or V The LXX also,
ia ftODOfdaaoe with tbii, write "lovSd for HIVl^, *Umtm far pn>*^. Hence may ba
explained the ^frUu usa^t (oocuriag alto b Hebrew) of dfawing bade the vowet
^ to the preeeding cohioma^ when it properly hid a simple vocal SSod, e.g.
(MCOidinK to the iCKding of Ben-NaphUli*) Jer. 35,36 for (10 Beer),
fnf^ Eodes. 9 1$ for fiVPf , even 19n*l Job 39, ai (In tome editioat) for
^^rfl. Accordbg to Qimbi MSj^ was pranoonced as iqldl, and therefore tht
pointing in the ist pers. was VbpK to av^d eoolwioo. In &ct the Babylooiaa
punctuation always has I for / in the ist pers. In Pt. 45, 10 and Prov. 30, 17,
instead of Yr'^"^P*3 ^rul Hî^^S (ô Ben-Naphtnli"^. Baer hrts recently adopted the
readings of Ben-Aier, ^^^3 and (comp, Dikduke ka-âmim, p. 14).
/ S. With regard to the ch^'ce of the long vowel, in which 1 and ^
quiesce after such a vocalization and contraction, the followmg rules

may be laid down :
' v\ccor(ling to Abolwalid, Bea-Naphtali iqpuded the Yfidh in all inch caiet
a Towel letter.
Digitized by Qofigle
} as l Firm or Immatfable Vowels. 83
(a) With a short kmtgituous vowel 1 and ^ are cootracted into their
conesponding long vowel (if or see above, i, a.
With A they form the diphthongs ^ and / according to f 7* i

e. g. from 30je a^^pP^ from 3*9^2, &c*
Rem. The above-mentioned rejection of the half vowels 1 and ^ (letter b) occors
^
especially at the end of woidt after a heterogcaemit irowcl when aocofdIitK to
tfi^natDie of the fbnn the cootractloii appceia iopqienile. So especially in verbs
e. g, originally ^?3s(^)^sn^, since d after the rejection of the ^ stands in
an open syllable, and consequently most be lengthened to a. The n is simply an

orthographic sign of the long voweL So also On the develo]^
for idldw*.
ment of .1^3^ from ,

sec 75. i ; on as peil and part of Up, see i 7s. a
and 4; on &c,rom 1^, see f 69. x.
25. Firm or ImmonfoMe Vowels,
What vowels in Hebrew are firm and unmovable can be known, a

certainly and lolly, only from the nature of the grammatical forms,
and in some cases from a comparison with Arabic (comp. i. si).
This holds especially of the etstntuMy long vowels, ie. those long by
nalure or cwtractim, as disdngaisbed from those which are only
lengthened for the sake of rhythm, i.e. on accotint of the special laws
which in Hebrew regulate the tone and the formation of syllables.
The latter, when a change takes place in the position of the tone or
in the division of syllables, readily become short again, or are reduced

to a mere vocal ^wd.
L The essentially long and consequîtly, as a rule, unchangeable bf
vowels of the tecaid and U^rd class, /, 4^ 4, can mostly be recognised

by means of the vowel letters which accompany them (*-r- ^ân
e.g. hi doit welif pakue, ôumdafy, Hp vctee. The
defective writing ( 8. 4) is indeed common enough, e. g. and 3^
for ; for ; ^j? for i'ip, but this is merely an orthographic
in which no contraction takes place after d are, 0^3MpT) i Chron.

I a, a (comp. % 70. a); DTP*K Hos.7,ia; "VB^H Ps. 5. 9 Q'rt-; the locatives
nn*3 nOÎÎD, &c. sometimes both forms are found, as HTiy and nîV ; comn.
*n
- livings
constr. state ^Fl. Analogous is the contraction ot JlID
....
;
ground-form
^ ^
mawf) dealh, constr. HiD ;

fgroond-forra 'ayn ['a;]) eye, constr. pj^.
' The Arabic, in such ca^^cs, often writes etymological ly ^^3, but pronounces
gala. So the LXX ^jîp Ziya. Bot even in Arabic vbtt is written for and
pronounced uUd,
O 2
Digitizoa by CoOglC
84 Pecultanties and Changes of Letters. [ 26.
licence and has no influence on the quantity of the vowiel; the il in

b just as necessarily long, as in coinp. 8. 4.
As an exception, a merely tone-long TOwd of both thcie daiacs ii aonetiiiiet
c 9. The essentfally and naturally long d {Qamef impuref, unless it
has become <^ (comp. 9. q\ has as a rule in Hebrew no representative
among the consonants, while in Arabic it is regularly indicated by N

on tlie few instances of this kind in Hebrew, comp. 9. 1, 23. îf.
The naturally long d nnd the merely tone-long d can only be

distintruished by an accurate knowledge of the forms.
d 8* Short vowels in sharpened syllables, i.e. before Dagei forte,
are as a nile unchangeable, e.g. ^ ikkft also generally in closed
sfUabies ( a6. a, ^) which are not final, e.g. gammtf

wHdemen, kAigdm,
g 4. Fmallyi those long vowels are unchangeable which, owing to
the omission of the doubling in a guttural or i have arisen by
lengthening from the corresponding short vowels, e.g. |KD for m3("ins
for burrakh,
f 90. Syllablt-formatim* and its Infiuence on tfu Quantity 0/ Vowels.
a Apart from the unchangeable vowels ( 25), the use of short or long
vowelS) le. their lengthening, shortening or change into vocal S^wd^
depends on the theory of syUahkformaHm, The initial and final
syllables especially require (.ardul consideration.
1. The initial syllable. Every syllable necessarily begins with a con-
sonant, or, in the case of initial \ and ' (cf. note on 5. b), a consonantal
vowel'. The copula is the only exception to this rule*. According to
the Tiberian pronunciation \ and is softened into the corresponding
* The older i^rimmarians (lee Geeenius, LeArgg^^fp, 160) called those vowdft
impure which should be i^roiêrly follower! by a TOwel letter. Thui 3^ WU
rârded as merely by licence for 3Kn3, Sec.
Comp. C. II. Toy, 'The byllablc ia Hebrew,' Attur, Jcumai cj Pkiioi.^
1884, p. 494 sqq. ; H. Strack, 'The Syllabks fa tike Bfibieir Language/ Mndem^
Oct 1884. ^ 11 .
' The only exec ptions are the few instances in which initial Yodti is representod
aa simple /, by Ix ln^; '\ riiten or N -r-?'
24. e, and csj'cctnllv S 4^. h, note.
This is not really an excaptioo, Sureq was no doobt here written deiectively
Le.Uor.G. W. C.j
Digitized by Coogle
$ 26.] Syllabhjbrmation, Us Influence on Vowels, 85
^ before S'wd, and the labials, e.g. "Î^, the Babylonian punc-
tuation, however, even in these cases has \ i.e. \. On the other hand,
in such cases as "^V^ ilie N is to be regarded as an initial consonant

2. The Jinal syllable. A syllable may end b
(a) With a vowel, and is then called an open or simpig syllable,
e. g. in where the first and last are open. See No. 3.
if) With MM consonant; and is then called a stu^ eioud or corn*
pmmd syllable, as the second in 93^. See Na 5. Such are

also the syllables tharpemd by a following DageS, as the first in
qat'i^l. See No. 6.
Rem. Between a and b comes the hosdy closed or 'af^r/if syllable, e.g. ^sJjD C
maPkhif UTQ kith'bhA (not nuU-JU, kith-lm) ;
compare for the ii'ivd (medium)
(r) Willi /It 6* consonants, a dmbly closed syllable, as tD^p qdsf, ^

Comp. for this, No. 7 below and 10. iW.
8. Open or smpU syllables have, as a rule, a long vowel, whether 4
they have the tone as in ^m ihee, "ttg iook^ saticfyiaty,
or are toneless as hi 3^ a itmck of grapts^. A bag vowel

((^nies, less frequently $ere) is especially common in an open syllable
before the tone (pretonic vowel), e. g. tin^, 0^, 23^*.
Short voweU in opiH syllables occur more or less apparently

() Id diaqrlUtbic woids Ibniicd by meaai of a helping vowd ({ aS. 4) frcm
f
aonotyUables, i ^ hntk^ house, ^ jblm imrtaM^ fiom mi^, A^tf,
In om'<'*i^ to tUs fondaineiital law in Hebrew (a long vowel in an 9ptm

*
AiaUet and sometiniei in tiie

yllaUe), the original dioft vowel is always found in
other Semitic langnages, except of course in the case of natural^ \on^ vowels.
The above examples are prononnced in Arabic as bfkd, slfr, qilds, (/'ffff,!,
Although accordingly it is certain that in Hebrew niso. at an earlier period, short
vowels were prooonuced ia open syllables, it may suU be doubted whether the
present proomiciation dq>aMlf MHrdjf npoo an artificial custom arising oat of tiM
folcmn recitation of the text of tiie Old Testament. On this hypoUiesb wo
shoBld have itill to explain, e. g. the mdonbtedly old lengthening of f and 4 wj
in an open syllable into ^ and 0.
' For this pretonic vowel the Arabic rcj^tjlarly has a short vowel {Itihtim, yiiqum^
afc.>, the Aramaic simply a vocal ^wd '
pnS^ D^P^ ,
^P, 1"^^'. and even
in Hebrew, when the tone is thrown forward tbc pretonic vowci almost always
beoomct vocal S^wd, see | 27. It would, however, be inooncct to airaaM from
tfiia that the pietonie vowd takes the place of S^wA only on aoconnt of a following
tone-syllable. It rather aiiiei from an original short vowel, since such a vowel is
mostly lengthencil in an open syllable befoK tlie tOO^ bot whcn the tone is movcd
iurtber fonraxd it become* vocal ^wA,
Digitized by ^^pgle^
yM; OMBpb also tlie ending of fhe dnnl (f 88). But the hdiiinf Towd
cannot in such cases be i^gnidcd as a loll vowd, i.e. it d<Ms not completely open
Uie clc^rfl syllable.
^ (d) In the verbal suffix of the ist pers. sing. (*3 ~ nu), e.g. (Arab.
îJtJItfnf). The not infrequent form ^3-^- (Gen. 30, 6. I's. 118, 18) proves that the
tone-bearing raihaii produces a sharpening of the following liquid, and thus virtuaJly
staade in a doicd tyllaUe, even wlien the Ihm it not expressly written with
DagA. In caiet like |hKl (f los at the end) Fuika^ is retained with the
Gonntcff-tone after the II has become qnieseeoL
h (0 Sometimes befove die toneless ni^ êai (( 90. a), e.g. !T^3*1td towards tkt
wilderness ; only, however, in the const, state (i Ki. 19, 15), since the toneless
n__ does not affect the character of the form (especially when rapidly pronounced
in close connexion'^: otherwise it is m3TO,

In all these cases the short vowel is supported by the tone (or principal tone) of
the word (compare the effect of tlie Arsis on the short vowel m clîcoi prosody).
Elsewheio it has at least the support of the eonater-toiie i/Htthej;), viz.
i (rf) In the combinations t,g, llja kis nDK; k*

wiUiimd,\?jgkk$tM, In all these cases the syllable was at fiist leally dosed,
and it was only when the gnttnral took a HaUph that it became in oonseqncnce
open (bnt compare, e.g. '^bK^ with "^DK^). The same Towel sequence arises
whcreTer a preposition 3^ 3^ or ) copulative is prefixed to an initial syllable
^^hich hr'.s n I/alefh, since the fonner then takes the vowel contained in the
Jiaieph i^scc | 102. 2 and 104. 2, Kera.). In such cases tlic prefix forms with the
Hafeph one loosely closed syllable. To the same category belong also the cases
where tiiese prepodtlons with lîreq stand liefbfe a consonant with simple
mobib, e.g. -aT?, 1319, &c
% () In fofiw like ipjm ytl^-^-fA (they aie atnm^, ff^-Tkkd (thy deed).
These again aie cases of the sobseqnent opening of dosed syllables (hcnM^Cg.
^p|r|^ also occurs) ought properly to be pfonoonoed ^l^khSi compaie
;
generally 22. 4 at the cnH, and 28. 3.
/ Such cases as K*"lhn, D^ni< ( 96). HTinn ( 67, Rem. 6) do not come under
this head, sincp thrv nil have <f in a virtually 5hRq>cned syllable; nor does
the tone-bearing yghoi which is icngthcncd troui d ui iuiTixes (e.g. and
other cases, nor S'Âdl for d before a guttural with Qanuf ({ 22. c). On O^^jj^
and Oê^lJ^ {9 for see above, 1 9. v.
m 4. The independent syllables with a firm vowel which have been

described above, are frequently preceded by a single consonant with
vocai S*wil simple or compound. Such a consonant with vocal
never has the value of an independent syllable, but rather attacbes
Itself flo closely to the following syllable^ that it fonns practically one
lySable with it, e.g. -ni) (cheek) f^: \in (sickness) ^tts rtoY,yii'
nfdM, This concerns espedally the prefixes 1, ^- See f tot.
H The ^xud ffwbik uas no doubt in all such cases weakened from an onginai
fdl vowel (e.g. Arab. âqtHM, ^3 Attfab blkd^ &c.) ; Irom tiii^ however.
Digitized by Google
{ 17.] Change of Vowds, as regards Quantity, 87
it cannot be iafefred that the Masoretes regarded it as rorming a kind of opm
yllablc, for this would be even more directly opposed to their fundamental law,
(vi^;. that a long vowel should stand m an open syllable,) than are the exceptions
cited above in No. Even the use of Methqg with S*wi in particular
3. cases (see
1 16. 9) i* no proof of nidi a view 00 tbe part of Oe Maiontes.
6. Closed syllables ending ui;h one consonant, when wiiliout the u

tone, necessarily have shorl vowels, w hether at the beginning or at the
end of words', e.g. ^"^^Q queen, P^C'n understandings ^9?^ wisdom,

^PJl and he turned back, Di?Jl, Dj?*! {xvayydqdm).
In a tone-bearing closed syllable there may be either a long or /

short vowel, but if the latter, it must as a rule be either Pathab or
S^ghdl*. The tone-beariog closed penultima admita^ of the hng
Towels, only the tone-long &^ i, d, not the longest /, 6, 4; of the
ikori vowels, only ^ I, not i; iK, ^. Thus I^Dp (3rd pL masc. Imperf.
Hiph.) but n^bcpn 3rd pi. fern., and VMp (and pi. masc. Imperat. Qal)
but 'Ô^ fern.
e. A special kind of closed syllables are the sharpened, i. e. those q

which end in the same consonant with which the follosving syllable
begins, e.g. ^^p^^ tm-mt, kUl-ld, If without the tone, they have, like
tbe rest, short vowels ; but if beaiing the tone, either short vowels as
^0, or long, as noo.

Oh the omitrion of Ibe dooblii^ of a consonant at the end of a woid,
lee i ao.
7. SyllaUes ending with two consonants occur only at the end of r

words, and have most natnraUy short vowels, f but some-
times $eret as Y"?-, ffolem, BK^p ^Dta. Compare, however,
10. 3. Usually the harshness of pronimciation is avoided by the use
of a helping vowel ( 2b. 4).
a?. The Change 0/ the Vowett, especially as regards Quantity,
The changes in sound through which the Hebrew language passed, n

before it assumed the form in which we know it from the Masoretic
' In eioejiliont soch as Gen. 4, 35 (whae W is reqnired by the character

of the form, although the closed syllable has lost the tone owing to the following
Maqqeph), Mctbeg is used to ûard against a wrong pronunciation; sometiBaM
also f is retained before Maqqeph, e.g. "D'l^ Gni j, 13 "^y Gen. a, 16.
;
See 9. 2, 3. r occurs thus only in the partK Ic . DN, Dy, jtp ; but these usnally
(IP always) arc rendered

toneless by a following Maqqeph. Compare also
Mch Ibnnt as 2lf^ 75. q and B^na ( 29. g.
Digitized by Gopgle
text of the Old Test, (see 2. 4), have especially affected its vowel
system. iV precise knowledge of these vowel changes, which is
intiis|)t;n-;ible for the understanding of the greater part of the present

lornis of ihe language, is derived partly from the phenomena which
the language itself presents in the laws of derivation and inflexion,
partly from the comparison of the kindred dialects, principally the
Arabic. By these two methodsy we atiive at the foUowiog facts as

regards Hebrew
h x That in an open sylkble the language has fieqaently retained
only a half-vowel {$^wd moiik), where there originally stood a full
short vowel, e.g. n^'aj; (ground-form 'i^giSU/) a waggon, n^3t (ground-
form
a.
Ûddqiif) righteousness,
That vowels
^
oriLMnally short have
(Arab, qmiil), 'h^, {Kriî. jHqainkt).
in the tone-syllabic, as also
in the open syllable preceding it, been generally changed into the
corresponding tone-long vowels, a into 5, i into u into o (see 9,
No. 1.2, No. 7, and No. 10. 3). If however the tone be shifted or
weakened, these tone-long vowels mostly revert to their original
shortness, or, occasionaUy, are still further shortened, and vanish into
a mere mMe, or, finally, are entirely lost through a change hi
the division of syllables; e.g. (Arab. miilUr) rain, in dose
dependence on a following genitive (in the consfntti tiaie), becomes
3EV {Anh/ifql6) heel, dual ^'6^, dual (with attenuation
of the original S of the first syllable to f) ^^PV; ^bp^ (Arab. JaqHll),
plur. ^^{^ (Arab, jaqiuiu). For instances of complete loss, aa in
BD5, comp. 93. m.
According to 26, the following details of voweUchange must be
observed
d 1. In place of a tone-lengthened vowel, the original, or a kindred
short vowel reappears
(tf) When a closed syllable loses the tone ( a6. g). Thus, T hemi^
but when the tone moved forward njnp: ikt hand
is Fakwe: y
19 son, but î^n-Q ike ton 9/ dm kmg; Hu wht^, but DVTÎ the ^
whole if the people; so also when an accented dosed syllable becomes,
through inflexion, loosely closed, e.g. 3!|i< enemy, thy enemy;
finally, when the tone recedes, Di'f'l {wayyaqM)\ îh, 1^*1.
(6) When in place of an oîcu syllable with a tone-long vowel there
arises, through lengthening ol the word, a fully or half-closed toneless
syllable, e.g. book, 9 my book; tancimay, f|y tamttuiy.
Digitized by Google
i 37.} Change qfVowels, as regards Quantity. 69
In such cases, according to what has been saitl, e passes into i ov i
(under certain circumstances also into d; comp. 93, Parad. II, c
and e\ and 0 into rarely into iS. On the change of a closed
syllable with a long vowel into a sharpened sjrlhble, i reverts to the
original f, Jmosdy to if, e.g. nwiktr, W ngy moUUr; pH law^ plmr.
VQn ; but 4f Hrmgik, ^^ sirei^th,
9. The lengthening of the short rowel to the corresponding long, e

takes place
(<z) When a closed syllable becomes open by its final consonant
being transferred to a suffix beginning with a vowel, or in general to
the following syllable, e. g. ^!?lDf5 he has ktlltd htm; ^n o^D
primarily from np^D : so a mostly becomes a even before a suffix

beginning with S'wd mobile; e. g. ^j^C^ from ^p^.
iff) When a syllable has become open by complete loss of the /
doubling in its final consonant, a guttural or a Rii, e.g. in|9 for
krrakk, see as. i. Cbmp. also f sa i
(^) When a weak consonant (M, 1, (blbwing the short vowel, g"
according to 23. i, 2, 24. 2, quiesces in this vowel, e.g. for K^^,

where the K, losing its consonantal value, loses also the power of
closing the syllable, and the open syllable requires a long vowel.
{d) Very frequently through the influence of the pause^ i.e. the /i
principal tone in the last word of a sentence or clause ( 29. 4).

Sometimes also through the influence of the article ( 35. 0)*
8. When a word increases at the end and the tone is conseqnendy
moved forward, or when, in the amthnei siaU (see { 89), or otherwise

In dose connexion with the following word, its tone is weakened, in
such cases a full vowel (short or tone-long) may, by the change in the
diviôn of syllables, be weakened to mobik (or j'nuf meitum)^
or even be entirely lost, so that its place is taken by the mere
syllable-divider {S'wd quiescens). Examples of the first case are, DK^
pi. nfeB', but w my name, Drnot? iheir names, "^3^ ward,
constr. St. "Q^; n^TY righteousness^ consir. st. ngl^ (with S^wd
medium) ; an example of the seomd case is, ns^d bUtnng, constr. st.
119*1?. Whether the vowel is retained or becomes vocal &^wd (in,

but and which of the two disappears m two consecutive
syUablesi, depends upon the chaiacter of the Ibnn in question. In
general the nde is that only those vowels which scsnd in an open
qrflable can become vocal iSovf,
Digiii^ca by Coogle
go Peculiarities and Changes of Letters, [f 27.
Thus the change into S'wd takes place in

k () The i and / of the first syllable (especially in the inflezton of
nouns) e.g. *9) uwi^ plor. 0*1^'^;
fflv ^r/. Compaie, however, also In the verb^ she wiU rtlumt
plor. nrsv^ri ; and so always, rhen the original short vowel of the
prefixes of the Imperfect comes to stand in an open syllable. On the
other hand, the J, which, before ihe tone, has been lengthened
from is retained in the Perfect cotmcutive of Qal even in the
secondary tone, e.g. C^^PP,]; comp. 49. 1.
/ (^) The ^rt, or merely tone-long, vowels a, e, 0 of the ultima,
especially in verbal forms, e.g. fem. ni>Dg qai*la; h^l,

yiqCU: comp., however, also I^^, TW^t according to 47.
m and 9, The helping vowels are either entirely omitted, e.g.
(groond-fonn malk), mjf king; or become weakened
into Sivd moHkf or Shd medtum,
tone remains unmoved, the vowel also
e.g. 193 iay,
is retained,
^ Ms boy.
notwithstanding the
If the
lengthening of the word, e.g. pausal-form for ^^B^.
m Where the tone moves forward two places, the former of the two
vowels of a dissyllabic woi J may be shortened, and the secorui
changed into S'wd. Comp. "1^^' word; in the plur. D^l^"^; with
heavy suffix onn^'l (comp. 28. i) their words. On the shortening
(atienuation) of the J to if, see further, Rem. 3.
u Ron. I. Aa ^ ttrUnf from m, or by an obieaifBf of 4 (we f o),

oiiietiaMS beeooMt 4, when die tone is moved Ibrwaid, e.g. Dfp^, ^^^V^ if^
Ftaadigm I^.) DtipJUgiU, Urn. nD\3D, with iafib ÔUD. Shnilmrly the /,
i
wMmg from <gf ^ ^ in the PeiiiKt of verbe M''^ (| 75. a) fiequoidy become* t
The not uncommoD use of I in a aharpcned sylkble, u ^^n3 Ez. ao, 18 (for
^0n3), ii to be regarded at an orthographic licence, although lomeUBMt in each

case* 4 may really have been intended by the K*thtbh.
O Of the vowels of the ^/-class, /J and tone-long 0 stand in a tone-bearing^ dosed
final syllable, and J in a toneless syllabic, e. j;. D^p^ he will arise, OfT jussive,
let him arise, Dp*1 and he arose. The only instance of ii in an uhiraa which ha^
lost the tone is D~i^ Ex. i6, 20 (see 67. /). Similarly, of vowels of the /-class,
i, f, and ( stand lu a tone-bearing closed final syllable, and / in a toneless stUable,
e. g. D^P' ht -will raise. Dp' let him r<i;.t , il;p'' ../. J /le raised. The only iuitaiicc
of / m an uitmia which has lost the tone, is I'^HI Judg. 9, 53 (sec 67. x).
P %. In the place of a Pathal^ we not unfreûeutly find (according to 9. 3)

a 5Vî /or ai a aiodUicatlon of
() In a doeed aatyconltima, e. g. "VT^K (pr. mime) for VP3|t ; or hi n doaed
pennltUMi (eg. or halfdoaed rfrnilrima (eg. tSO^ jvwr ilM^,fiif/iIWNV^
Digitized-b y S oogle
270 Change of Vowels, as regards Quantify, 91
In all these cases the chancier of the mnonding cooMnantt (eee 1 6. f) hu ao
doobt had tome infloenoe*
{i) Regukrly before a guttuial with Qamif, where the doubling f

has been dropped, provided that a lengthening of the Pathah into
Qamtf be not necessary, e.g. his iroiiert, for *a^Sw; /JUse,
foria^; Dhb coai; 'nn Oe inn^ (with the article ?) ; tar^ Num.
23, 19, &c., and so always before p. Before n and ^ 6^^^*^ generally
stands only in the second syllable before the tone, e.g. D^")'^;'^ /Ae
mouniains; ihc guilt; immeUiaLci}' before the tone Paihah is
lengthened into a (pretonic) Qames^ e.g. '^^n, DV"?* ^f. also '^S^^'?
Num. 8, 7. Before the weak consonants N and n (comp. 22. i, 5),
the lengthening of the Pathah into Qam almost always takes place,
e.g. 3Kn />5^father^ pi. n1an ; SJ'i^T the head, pi. DH?^n. Exceptions,
nvf Urwardt the mmmiam. Gen. 14, 10, in the tone-syllable, for hdrrd/
Vraâ; (pr. name) for Vija^J. On Q as a form of the interrogative
n (Tt), see too. 4; on for (ap),
f 37. i. Finally, îjlj Ex.
33, 3 abo comes partly under this head, in consequence of the loss
of the doubling, for 1^?^.

(r) As a modification of the origiual J'aihah in the hrst class of the segholate ^
Ibmn ( 93, Rem. i),when a helping vowel (f 38. 4) Is iaterted after iccond
conioDeiiL Tim the gnmndoform ka^ i/^t teodmg * helping S'gMl,
is modified faito JjQ (fHao in modem AnUc prooooaoed Mif)\jw^ (mm/A) with
a helping Ftika^t m^. The etne phenomenoo appeus also hi the forms of terbi,
in cases
The
lllce
^ 0>2ve of the Hiph*tt of rh\\ with a helping S'gkUt fot/agi,
attenaatioQ of 4 to ocems veiy frequently in a toneless^ dosed, or X
3. I*
halfxlot^ syllable.
(a) In a firmly closed syllable, ilD his measure, loi )1D (in a sharpened
syllablej ; / Aav bej;otUn thee, from ^fll^ with the sufRx comp. Lev.
II, 44. z. 38, 33 and % ^.d. Especially is this the case in a large number of
s^gkdat$ from the ground^fotm fa{l, when combined witih slDalar sofliaeSi e.fl;.
^QTi^ righUnumns, fm fodgt

ih) In a hslf-doscd syllable^
'^S?^ ^^"^ AM for &JO^> and so commonly in t
tte tt. ^mhr. plur. of segholates from the grotrnd-fonn qatl, e. g. ÎJ^ from 1^
(ground-form 3(Zî/) a garment. In most cases of this kind the attenuation is
easily intelligible from the nature of the snrrounding consonants. It is evident

from a comparison of the dialects, that the attenuation was consistently carried
out in a very large number of noun and verb-forms in Hebrew, as will be shown
in the pfoper placed
* So thft LXX write M(XxMr8l for p^^|j>p.

* Analogous to this attenuation of <f to is the Lat tango, attingo; laxus^
prolixus ; to the txansitioo of d into / (see abovci Rem. a), the LsU earf^, <Ucerp9i
spargOf compergo
Digitized by Google
92 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters. [ a8.
U 4. ^gkH ariiet, b addition to die cuet mcntioiied in Rem. x and a, also-^

(tf) From the wcakeidag of 4 of tbe final qrUable in the isolated tttet (n for
n ) in I Sam. 28, 15 (T see % 48. d). Ps. 4 (I), la. 59^ 5. Pv. a4, 14 (ee
48. /) ; for examples of LocatiTe forms in H-^ tee f ^ a end.
V Q>) Perhaps from the obtnsion of , m XXPt^ ftu (Ainb. "JMtfjn), see f 3a. t
lad m, and in DH^ to them (Arab. lahUm) ; comp. $ 8. r, 5.
W 5. Amon^ the /fa/ e/>^ -sounds is shorter and lighter than and con-
sequently the vowel ^Toup (- (.,)
) is shorter than ( ); e.g.

(...\
DilK dom,
but (Êdomilt), shortened at the befjinning becanse the tone is thrown
forward ; JTOK ( WM) truth, Aw //WA; hiddtn, pi. D'ojtga
but ^n"!3j;n>.
* 6. To the chapter on vowel changes belongs lastly the dissimilation of vowels,

i. e. the change of one vowel into another entirely heterogeneous, in order to
prevent two aimilar, or at least closely related vowels, from following one another ia
the tame wofd^ for M 1$ (unless) ; the propo: names KVV^ and ypl&l
stand most probably for HMiS, mh^S^ (- S^np. Cfl also ftTTllfrom pn ;
fiNmi ISW-I
;
j^S'n from %\r\ ; Qn^y bim\ttm'W nd the seeond foot-note
on 1 68. t.
S8. Tke Hue of New Vowels mnd S^yOttblit.
a 1. According to 26. 4 a half-syllable, i.e. a consonant with wd,

(always weakened from a short vowei,) can only occur in close
depen lt ri(
on a full syllable. If another half-syllable with simple
6wa would follow, the former becomes again a full short vowel*.
Tbi vowd 18 almost always Hireq. Id most cases it is probably an
attenuation of an original 4, and never a mere helping vowel In
some instances analogy may have led to the choice of the f. Thus,
according to { loa. a, the prefixes 3, ^ before a consonant irith
(-T-) become a ?, ^ e,g. HB?, ^fK before \

they are pointed as
in n*nT3 (from bi^yhMa, according to 24. so too with Who
copulative, e. g. 'TTVl^ for ufyehUda. The first half-syllable, after the
resloraiion of the short vowel, combines with the second lo forni
a firmly closed syllable, e.g. ^^"^ Num. 14, 3 for litfphbl, and so
almost always in the infin. conatr. after b ( A^*g) m isoiaied cases
also with 3, as ">3p Jer. 17, 2.
h 8 Before a guttural with I^ttleph the consonant of the half-qrllable

takes the short vowel contained in the â(e^ and thus arise tiie
* Cf. Barth, Die Nominalbildung in den semitisthen Spracken, p. xxix ; A. Miiller,

Theologisfhe StuJien u k'ritikrn, 1892, p. 177 ?q ; with Nestle, ibid, p. 573
* and is the only exception. It becomes ^ belore a simple comp. 104. ,
I
Digitized by Google
28.] The Rise of New Vowels and Syllables. 93
vowel groups rrr-fr , Tjr-nr* -?nr - *^?r- "'Fî? ^
^^'"^'^
bbH^ ^j/, i sickness. On the Meiheg with every such bhort
vowel, see 1 6. /J 8. Sometimes here also a fuUy closed syllable is
Ibnned. In such a case, the consonant of the halfsyllable retains the

abort vowel, which would have belonged to the suppressed Hateph,
e.g. 3bn^ for Sbnb; 099^
Is. 47, 14 for D^ri^ (see f 67.^0 ; -ibMj^ but
also ibw]^ *
and even Job 4, a, comp. Gen. 3a, 16. So always In
the Infin* and Imperat. Qal of the verbs Tf^ io he and Tt^ to im, e. g.
M*n^ /9 ie, v*rn jv/ even with as flt^^, for which compare
( roa. h: ^^t1 and bet n^Qi and live, for iT") , n*nv alone have/ instead
of I un lor the pre fix. For the Methcg, comp. i6.y", .
3. When a IJuuph in the middle of a word, owing to flexional c

changes, would stand before a vocal S'lvd, it is changed into the
short vowel, with which it is compounded. This includes especially

the cases in which the Hateph stands under a guttural instead of
a quiescent ^wd, as an echo of the preceding short vowel, e.g. "^^Jj^!
kt wOl tUmd (for bat plur. for yd*wem, and ^ni for
comp. s6* k
The syllables are to be divided yS*-nfdM^ and the second ^ is to be

regarded exactly as the helping PaUtah in Ac.*
4. At the end of words, syllables occur which close with two con- d
sonantb i
10, 3, 26. 7), but only when the latic-r of the two is an
ciii| ih;Uic consonant (C, p) or a tenuis (viz. 3, 1, 0'), e. g. pfe'l'. let him
turn aside, Wl\ and he caused to drink, ^^1"|P^^ thou (lera.) /last said, ^3*1
and he zvepf, dominion, 3^ and he took captive.

This harsh combination of letters is however commonly avoided 4
by inserting between the two final consonants a helping vowel,
which is mostly S'ghdl, but with guttorals Pathah\ and after ^
Jîreq^ e.g. inn and he revealed, for we^gl; 3$ ki it muUipfy, for

yirb; cn^ eanetnaryt ground-fonn qudk: !^ hfwk^ ground-form naJ^;
J|>n^V * for ipn^ ikon hast eent; n^3 ground^form he^t. These helping
* In Judges 16, 13 read ^sntjUn not (with OpitiiiSr Hfthn and tlieit) ^nKH.
* WHh a final ^, tlie only emnple is *)Dta Pvov. 3^ 6, where aevenl HSSL and
piintBd edttioitt inooficctly haw l| without DagdL
* On the appaicBt cxoeptioBt ftc, oonp. aa. ; odier initancet in which
M has entirely lost its consonantal value, and ii ooly retained orthoKntphieally, are
KCn sin, K^l vaUey (also WK^ ai/>' (Job 15, 31 iCtktbh
* la that form
(| 65. a) Dnpi Une itmaios in the final T&n^ althongh a vowel
Digitized by CgÎe
vowels are of course always without the tone, and disappear before
< . <
formative suffixes, e. p;. viy sanctuary, nJT3 home-ward,
f S. On the rise of a full vowel in place of a simple ^tcwf, under the

influence of the pauu, see { 89. m; on initia] for see { S3, ik
29. 7^ Tone, its Changes and the Pause.
a 1* The principal tone lestSi according to the IMasoretic accentua-
tion (comp. $ 15. 3), as a rule on the final syllable \ e.g. boQ,
tb'v, 139^* ^^Pi in the last five examples on the
formative additions to the stem. Less frequently it rests on the
penuldma as hi n^^* night, ^^>^, 9^; but a closed penultima
can only have the tone if the ultima is open (e.g. '132?,
wliilst A < losed ultima can as a rule only be without the tone, if the
pcnuliima is open, e. g. Dj^^l, D^; compare also below, No. 3.
b A kind of counter tone or secondary stress, as opposed to the

principal tone, is marked by Afeiheg ( 16. a). Words which are
closely united by Maqqeph with the following word (| 16. 1} can at

the most have only a seoondaiy tone.
c 2. The original tone of a word, however, frequently shifts its place

in consequence either of changes in the word itself, or of its close
connexion with other words. If the word b increased at the end, the
tone is moved forward {desem^) one or two phces according to the

length of the addition, e.g. W word, plur. 0*^3"^ ;
D9*^3'7>'<?r w&rit;
B'TJj sam/uary, plur. D*?'^!^,; with ViR^j^. On the consequent
vowel-changes, see 27. J, 3.
3. On the other hand, the original tone is shifted from the ultima
to the penultima {ascendit) :
(a) In many forms of the Imperfect, when WSw consfcutive (! see
49. 3) is prefixed, e. g. "^(Q^ he will sqy, "i^^ and he tasd; ^ At

will go, Ti^Ti ond hi wen/,
1
precedes, in order to point out that the helping Paihah is not to be regarded
as a really full vowel, but merely as an orthographic indication of a very sli^t
sound, ti) help the correct pronunciatioa. An analogous case is "^H^ jfiffJtd (&oa
nnn. see 75. r).
* This WIS not erigioatly the cues. Vaifovt llngniitic pbenomaM lend to Aam
that the princlptl tone wjâalty teilad at nle 00 the pcraltims. See the prooft
in PiMtoriof, ZAHT,, 1883, an Lsnbctt, ifevm dee hmiee
iqq., siid llajer
prime, voL sx, 1890^ p. 73 iqq.; voL zxv, 1891, p. tit iq^ aDd jani, p. 53,
Digitized by Google
290 The Tone, its Changes and the Pause, 95
{0) For rhythmical reasons, v\hcii a monosyllable, or a word wuh ^
the tone on the first syllable, follows a word with the tone on the
ultima, in orde r to ux i 1 liie concurrence of two tone-syllables \ This
rhythmical retraction of the tone, however, f^^^ ^^03 receding, as it is
called by the Jewish grammarians^) is only admissible according to

No I above, provided that the penultlma, which now receives the
tone, is an open syllable^ (with a long vowel; see however the Rem.,)
whilst the oltima, which loses the tone, must be either an open
aylbble with a long vowel, e.g. inp Gen. 1,5. 4, 17. 27, 25. Ex.
16, 29. Ps. 5, II. 104, 14. Dan. II, 13, or a dosed syUable with
a short vowel, e.g. Dn^* fetch Gen. 3, 19. Job 3, 3. 22, 28*. The grave
suffixes D3-, ^3-, DH-, fn. are exceptions, as they never lose ihe tone.
Sere alone of the long vowels can remain in a closed ultima which f
has lost the tone, but it then has, in correct editions, a retarding
Mftheg in order to prevent its being pronounced as S'ghdl, e.g.
"^fi^ Num. 24, 82 ;

comp. Num. 17, 23. Jud. 20, 2. Is. 66, ^ Jer.
33, 29. Ezek. 23, 35. Ps. 37, 7. Fiov. i, 19. In other cases the
sfaoftening into S^ghSl does take place, e.g. Dfil 0^ who tmiUih iki
amni, IsL 4t, 7, for OJi D?ln. The retraction of the tone even occurs
when a halF-syllable with a Swi mobile precedes the original tone-
svUable, e. g. ii> riDiA Gen. 19, 5, and frequently; ^to "T)^* Ps.28, i;
V t3D Ps. 31, 5 ;
3*1151 ^?.y"ep Is. 14,
19 ; as also when the tone-syllable
of the second word is preceded by a half-syllable, e. g. '^^ nnb' Gen.

15,7 (comp. 20, c),
Aocordiss to the above, it must be tfldd as anomaloos whea the Masora ^

throws back the tone of a closed oltima vpon a virfually sharpened syllable with
a short vowel, e.g. \^ "SXyk l Sam. 10, 5; e^ni] Job 8, 18, cf. Lev. 5, 33;
^3 pnib Gen. 39, 14. 1

7. Hos. 9, a ; whereat it elsewhere allows a closed pcmittima
to bear the tone only when the ultima is open, Still more nnonialous is the
placing of the tone oa a reaJiljf sharpened syllable, when the ultima is closed, as in
*
Even Hebrew prose proceeds, according; to the nrrentu.ition, in a kind of
Iambic rhythm. I'hat this was intended by the marking of the tone, can be seen
from the nse of Mctheg. Jos. Wijnkoop in Darcht hanmsigak siv Ugu d$
tusetHimMetraiau imgiiat tueetuimi, tngd. Bat i88t, endeavoiira to exjâhi,
DO enphonie and sjrntactical grmilldi^ the namerons cases in which the usual
retraction of the tone does not occur, e.g. Vt^^^S^ la. 45, 7, where the object
probably is to avoid a kind of hiatat; comp., however, Amos 4, 15.
' The reading D^^]| (so tvcn OpiUoi and Hahn) Esek. 16, 7 for irn]; is rightly
deicribed bj Bacr as ' aror tiupts.*
Digitized by Google
96 Peculiarities and Changes of Letters, [ 39.
O^n 3 Sub. ai, f (oonp. 1^ Job 34,19; }^C3^;^ Gak4, 94, wiOi MdlKg
oflhe secooduy tooo). Weshould ied dther D^n, or,wifhFfeDloiff,ilisif)t
MagnOf p. i67i id othei% D^n As hnomwl fonn^ comp, futiier, 13 P|!2^
.
Ex. and l*rt|j|) Dent 10,5.
(r) In /a2Af<r, see No. 4.

of two tone-syllables (Na 3i ^ is avoided alio by connecting the
The meeting
words with Maqqeph, in whidi case the first word entiidy lOMt the tone, e. g.
D|^~3fD^ tmd ht WFtie (Ain, Joe. 8, 3a.
f 4. Very essential changes of the tone and of the vowels are effected
by tlie pause. By this term is meant the strong stress laid on the
tone-syllable in the last word of a sentence (a verse) or clause. It is
represented by a great distmctivc accent, Silluq, 'Aihndh, and in the

accentuation of the books D'^KH, ufySrid, Apart from these
principal pauses (fhe grtat pattse\ there are often pausal changes {the
lesser pome), with the leaser distinctives, especially S'gfâ, Zaqefh

fafOH, Ji'iht^t and even with Paila^ T^kha, Gerei, and Paur\
The changes are as follows
^ (<7) When the tone*synable naturally has a short vowel, it as a rule

becomes tone-long in pause, e.g. fe^, S^g^j D^, 0*0; i?S>6i>, wSd^.
An d which has been modified to S'ghSl usually becomes d in pause,
e.g. '^K'P (ground-form gasr) in pause 2 Ki. 11, 14 ; Y^l^, njl j^^"*
22,29; also in 3 Ki. 4 3 ^ read with ed. Mant, &c. (Baer 1)
"^1 becomes in pattse "îl.
/ Sometimes, however, the distinct and shaiper S ii IntentioDany rataloed in faiue,

especially if the following consonant be doubled, e.g. Job 4, ao, or ought to
be doubled, e.g. t3 Is. 8, i, &c. and even without the doubling, e.g.
; Gctt.
49, 27; y^'^pn^ 2 Chron. 29, 19 and regularly in the numeral y3^K /our.
Lev. 11,20, 6cc. Compare the list of instances of pausal d and ^ in the Appendices
to Baer's editions.
* Id most eases, probably on aeoottnt of a f<dlowing gnttnial or (pomp. e.g.

\
Ex, ai, 31. Jer. 3, 9. Rath 4, 4. Eoclea. ix,6; before ] Jer. 17, xi). DJ^
I Sam. 7, 17, where d has munaJi, is very irregular, bat the lengthening here is
probably only to avoid the cacophony Idphat \'f. In the same way
17, 15 (with Mahpakh before H) and D"î>^^ Ezck. 37. 8 (with Darga before g) are
< *
to be cxplainc<i. The four instances of for ^JK apparently require a difTerent

explanation ; see i 32. c. The theory of Olsliausen and oihcrs that the phenomena
of the patfje are due etUirely to liturgical considerations, i. e. that it is 'a convenient
way of develofdng the mukal indue of the final acoenti hy meant of ihller Ibnnt
*
ID divhie service, is conttadicted fay the &ct that similar pheaomcna are itill to be
obeened in modern vulgar Arabic, when diey can only be attributed to ihytiimieal
leaiooi of a geneml ehaiacter.
i 29.] The Tone, its Changes and the Pause, 97
{b) When a full vowel in a [one-bearing final S} liable has lost the m
tone before an afformative, and has become vocal ^w<f, it is restored
io /ause to its position as tone-vowel, and, if short, is lengthened,
C-g- ^ "^9?, {gaf^"^), in p<ms^

rhl2? iqatila) ;
^V^P n^ra,
mjttuse VJOV (from sing. Jja^); nK>p, nwb^; ^Jj^R (sing;
^tV!). The fuller endings of the Imperfect P and T-i- ({ 47> and 0)
alone retain the tone even when the original vowel is restored. In
segholate forms, like (ground-form hiy, pary), the original
it rettuns, though under the form of a tone4>earing 5*^V;<^/, thus ^n^,
< <
'^B; original / becomes e.g. ^Vn, in pause *2fn; original d {u)
becomes 3, e.g. Î'n (grouts J- form huly), in pause (^ ^j. jr, j', z).
On the analogy of ûch forms as ^n^, &c,, the shortened Imperfects

and become in pause ^7^, ^n^, because in the full forms rpn^ he
will be and iTn^ ^ m//// //r^ ihe / is attenuated from an original iL
We may also mention here OJf^ Ht ntck^ in paust (ground-form
IsMjR), and the pron. /, in pami as well as the restonuion
of the original ^ as ^ before the suffix ^-^ thut e.g. TIDl % XMr<^>
in /Mtfe ; T)^ ^ guarA Ont^ in ^"^P?^ i but after the

prepositions HK (MK) the stiffix in pmuM becomes e.g.
(r) This tendency to draw back the tone in pause to the pmuittma o
(as being the original tone-s) liable ?), shows itself also in such cases
as *3i>$ /, in pause thou, in pause '"^^^J

(but in the three
poetically accented Books also nriH, since in those Books 'Athnaî

especially after vfydrid, has only the force of a Zaqtph; hence
also HJpJ!* Prov, 34, 4 instead of 'J?*)*; nîy now, nFj; and in
other sporadic instances, like Ps. 37, so for ^| : but in i Sam.
IS, 35 Baer^s reading is to be preferred to that of ed. Mant) ftc
Conversely all forms of imperfects consecutive, whose final p
syllable, when not in pause^ loses the tone and is pronounced with
a short vowel, take, when in pause^ the tone on the ultima with a
tone-long vowel, e.g. HDM and he died^ in paust nb^.
' Soch a panstl ^liable is sometimes farther sticngthened by doubling the

foUowing contooant, lee ao. t.
* Pi. 45, 6, comp. also
^f>3^
Fs. 40* 15, is to be explained in the wme
wmy, bat not Zech. ^, 11, ^riiei^ on the analogy of J^* 9 3'
Aoold cqieet ^PTm,
Digiii^ca by Cooglc
^ Of odier efledf of the /mm we bAve stiU to memioiii (x) tilte tianiation of an r
(kDgtliCDed fiom O to tlw num disUnet (aee ebofve^ letter e.g. ttin for tQH
Is. 18, 5 (comp. f 67. 9; 1 7a. i*?^ I* i3* 9
:i>KaD Is. 7. 6 (5>K30 Ear. 4, 7) : "^B^ Jer. aa, 14; TiDD
Cf.
f ^ > Chron. 8, 38 (bende
isftll C >ee z^. 37 ;
db*2o; Ex.11^\r, X^^fL a Sam 2, 15 (below, 51. w)S.R-D.]);T
IBn Gen. 17, 14; I^Dn i Sam. 15, 33; nnWl Ps. 40, 18; prnn Job 13, 21,
&c, mostly before liquids or sibilants (but also 3C^n Is. 43, 32, and without the
pause *Tj|n Lam. 3,48). So also t|^l (shortened from -J^) becomes in
J^^Jl; compare Lam. 3, 2; f^n for J^fl Jud. 19, ao. On S^ghdl in /^tm/^
Instead of Sere, comp. 52. n, and especially 75. n, on H^ni Prov. 4, 4 and 7, 2.
^ (a) he transition from J to ? in the ultima; so always in the formula Oi'tyl)

'J
T^l (for ^y) for ever attd ever.

S (3) The /owjo/ â/n^/ in JIUhpa*el (but not in AV/) for ^Vr^, e.g. Tj^nTl^
Job z8, 8 for Aeomding to $ 54. this Qamei ii leBgthened firooi aa
otigbial A
/ (4) The rertoiatien of % fioal YMSI whieh has been drofîed from tiie stem,
together with the pfeoeding vowel e.g. ^^3,- la. ax xi, for VIM,
the latter also without the pame Is. 56, 9. i a ; comp. Job la, 6, and ^ aame
oeconenoe even in the word btfore the pause Deut. 32, 37. Is. ai, la.
H (5^ The transition from ^ or ^ to a in pausf ' n^NC' Is. 7, 1 1, if it be a locative

of ijiSK', and not rather impcrat. Qal of (>i<y' ; ^nSîr Gen. 43, 14 for ^n*^bC': Ty
Gen. 49, 3; Gen. 49, 27 ;
perhaps also i Ki. 32, 34. Is. 59, 17, and
n^^BiO Is. 28, 17, comp. 2 Ki. 21 , On the other hnrvl the resjular pausal form
ên*, which is found as well as the ordinary Imperfect J^SH^, must be referred to ,
a Perfect J^H (see 47. h\

V (6) When a PathaJ^ both precedes and follows a virtually doubled guttural, the
second becomes a pause and the first S'ghSl, according to
in ^ { aa. r and % 27- ^,
e.g. *n|t my irothm, in pause comp. DJin^ Deut. 3 J,
; ^ Num. 8, 7. 33, 19.
Eaek. 5, 13. Pi. 135, 14.-00 panaal êre, for .SVUV, in infin., impeiati and ImpcrC
of erbs W^, tee | 75. kh.
Digili^ca by Google
SECOND PART,
ETYMOLOGY, OR THE PARTS OF SPEECH.
30. Skm and Jiools ilikral, Triliteral, and QuadriliUrah
! Stems in Hebrew, as in the other Semitic languages, have this
peculiari^, diat \iy far the majority of them consist of three con*'
sonants. On these the meaning essentially depends, while the various

modifications of the idea are expressed rather by changes in tiie
< < <
vowels, e.g. PPV he was dap^ ptolP (/(</>, P^V dcplh, p^J; a valley, plain.
Such a stem may be eiiher a verb or a noun, and the language

commonly exhibits both together, e.g. jnt he has soum, Vl.] seed; D3n
he was wise^ D3n a wise man. For practical purposes, however,
it has long been the custom to regard as the stem the yd pars, si^,
Ptrf. Qal (see % 43), since it is one of the simplest forms of the verb,
without any fonnative additions* Not only are the other forms of
the verb referred to this stem, but also the noun-forms, and the
large number of particles derived from nouns; e.g. he was
tighticus, V)^. righiemmessy P^*?? righteous^ Ac
Sometimes the language, as we have it, exhibits only the verbal h
stem without any corresponding- noun-form, e.g. S"?? lo stone, pnJ
to bray ; and on the other hand, the noun is sometimes without the
corresponding verb, e.g. J^K stontf ajj smth. Since, however, the
nominal or verbal stems, which are not now found in Hebrew, for
the most part occur in one or more of the other Semitic dialects,
it may be assumed, as a rule, that Hebrew, when a living language,
also possessed them. Thus, in Arabic, the verbal stem (/
become evmpact, hard) corresponds to J^K, and the verb n'gad {to ie
dey, arid) In Aramaic to ^j.
* On the qmatioiis ditcuMcd in this sectioD compare the Ubtiography tt the

head of { 79.
H a
Digiii^ca by Coogle
lOO Etymologyi or ike Parts of Speech. [ 30*
C Rem. I. The Jewish grammarians call the stem (i.e. the 3rd pers. sing. Perf.
Qal), Chb^ yi0/. Henoe it beCMoe custOTUoy among Chtiidaii gnuBmrfam to
call Uie stem nufix, and tti tiiree oonsonantt Hitrae rtdieaies, in oontiadiitiiicdoa
to ike Uteiw seniUu 0 ftrmUwt iUUfs, Oathecociecttiw of tiieterm*mr, see
letter ^.
U 2. Others refjard the three stem-consonants as a root, in the sense that, considerctl
tavmae/iess and unpronounceable, it represents the common foundation oi the verbal

and nominal &tems developed from it, ju*t a& in the vegetable world, &om which
Um figure iM bofiowcd| stems grow item the hidden root, e. g.
Verb^tcm, he kas nigned.
For the investigation of the actoal condition of the langoage, however, this
hypothedt of nnpronmnoeable rooti, with ittdatermiiiate atanbg, is fraitlas.
Moreover, the tenn root, as it is geDcnlly nndeistood by lingaists, csnnot be applied
to the Semitic triliteral stem (see No. a)'.
g 3. The 3rd sing. Perf. Qal, which, according to the above, h usually regarded,
both lexicographically and grammatically, as the jjround-fomi, is generally in
Hebrew a dissyllable, e.g. ^D^. The monosyllabic forms have only arisen through
contraction (according to the traditional explanation^ from stems which had

a weak letter (^ or ^) lor thdr middk consonant, e.g. from qSwdm ; or fitom
steoM wiiose aeeood and third consoaants are identiesi, .g. *iy and ni^ (compare,
howevcTt beloir^ f 67), The dissyllabic fiNins have thnnsdves 00 doubt ariseOf
throagh a loss of the fiaal towd, from trisyllab1cS| eg. 70^ from fdEAMI, as it is
stiUin Axabie.
f 2, The law of the trilitenl stem ts' so strictly observed in the

formation of verbs and nouns in Hebrew (and in the Semitic languages
generally), that the language has somclioies adopted artificial methods
to preserve at least an appearance of triliteralism in monosyllabic
Stems, e.g. D1! for DT, in the Imperfect Qal of verbs y"y. Even
such nouns, as ^ father^ Dit mother^ nK brother^ which were formerly
all regarded as original monosyllabic forms {^wmma primiUvd)^ may,
in some cases at least, have arisen from mutilatbn of a triliteral stem.
g On the other hand, a large number of triliteral stems really point
to a biliteral base, which may be properly called a {radix

pn'maria, ^'iiraltt), since it forms the starting-point for several
triliteral modifications of the same fundamental idea. Though in
thenaselves unpronounceable, these roots arc usually pronounced

with a between the two consonants, and are represented in writing
* Compare Philippi, *Dcr Grundstamm des storken Verbums iiu Scmiiischcn

and sein Verhiltnist snr Wnrzel,' in MffguUSnduckt fltrukungen, Leipz. 1875,
pp. 69-206.
30] Siems and Roots. lOX
by the sign x/, e.g. -/"O as the root of "^13, 'TJ3, -i^3, npK. The
reduction of a stem to the underlying root may generally be accom-
ph'shed with certainty when ihe slcm exhibits one weak consonant
with two strong ones, or when the sccoTid and third coDSonaQts are
identical. Thus e.g. the stems ^3'^, ij^^, iO^, na^ may all be traced
to the idea of spiking, brtaking^ and the root common to them all
Is evidently the two strong conaomnts *p {dakS^ Wery fieqnently,
however, the extension of the root mto a stem Is effected by the
addition of a strong consonant, especially, it seems, a sibilant, liquid
or gnttural. Finally, fiirther modifications of the same root occur
when either the consonants of tlie root, or the letter which has been
added, changes into a kindred letter, according to the laws of sound-
change (see the examples given below). Usually such a change in
the sound is accompanied by a change in the shade of meaning.
Examples : from the root }*p (no donbt momaiif$ftic, or imitating a soond) which , A
represents the fundamental ider; nf ;-,:r:','i^ fljf, cuffing in puces, arc derived imme-
diately: )*jrp and nyp to cut, to cut off; the latter metaph. to lUcide^ to judge
(whence I'^p. Arab. qaJi^ a judgc^ ; also 2?ti5 to cut off, to sluar, S)i^ to tear, to
break, i'jfi^ /t cut itiio, "\!i*p to cut off, to reaf. With a softer sibilant Dp,
whence DD^ t<3 cut off^ IJ'i^'i^ and to peel off, to rub off. With a lingual instead
of the sibilant, Dp^ 1p, whence to cut in pi<ts, to destroy^ to cut dowttf
9o kill, (0 tear off, to pluck off, n^jj t0<$Um puets, to tUmt, With the initial
letter toftcned, the Hune root beeMues D^t whence npZi to cut off, and Dp3
10 skavt: oompb alto 033 Sjr. to {to Stter(/See), to kUt, With the greeteit
oftming to ft end T3; X^tOftUtsfr,toskoar; TtQ to kno stout; Itt, D^, Pl^,
to tut ojft to tiar ojr, eat tî simtlefly TVk to tut imtOt jrn to etU tfft
comp. also ITI), tl"n, T1S. Allied to thi toot also die ceries of stems wfaidi
intleed of a palatal begin with a gnttnral sound (n), e.g. 1*7n to split, cut;
cnmp also Inn, p^^, -nn, ehn, and further Dvi, pn, mn, nn, aon, odh,
l3n. ^Dn, Don, 5|Dn^ 33fn, nyn, J'Sn, -isn in the Lexicon.
The root DH expresses the sound of humming^ which is made with tlic mouth
closed ijtvot) ; hence Opn, D^H, Htpn^ DHj ^dmhama^ io buzz, to hum,
to snarl, Ac
As developmenlt frooft the root 91ooaip t]ierteawl|l,7]f;), 0^, V^, fTfl,
tfS^ . Not lev nvaDerone ate the devdopnente of tiie root ^ pc, eod
many others.
On closer mveitigatioa of this snhjcct the foUowiiig obaervatioas msfcit
themselves
(a) These roots are mere abstractions from stems in actual use, and are themselves f
not in use* Thej merely represent the hidden germs (semina) of the stems whidt
appear in the bngvage. Yet dieie stems am aooMtimcs so ihoft as tooonrist simply
of the elements of the root itseU; t*g.Gntokt JMtkod, /tf^- The ascertain-
ing of the root and its meaning, alduMsh m many tmj veiy diflienlt and
Digitized by Google
I02 Etymology^ or the Parts of Speech, [ 30.
ttnoatdn. Is <tf giMt IcadcogimpliiGftl impfflrtmoe. It is a wholly diflerent Md

much contested qnestion whether there ever was a period in the development
of the Semitic languages when merely bUitercU roots, either rigidly isolated or
combined \vith inflexions, served for the communication of thought. In uch
a case would have to be admitted, that the language at first expressed extremely
it
Unr demeotary ideas, whidi woe only gradually extoidcd in Older to denote move
delicftle ihada of meaning. At all events thia proeew of tnuafomuUioo wonld
belong to a period of the lai^;iiage whidi is entirely beyood onr critical grasp.
At the most only the gradual extennoB of i/iwtf Iqr meana of sonnd^hange
(see below*' can !ic h:sroiically yiroved.
ll ib) Many oi these monoiiyiiabic words arc clearly imitations of sounds, and
omeliines coindde with foots of a similar meaning In the btdo-Gemanic &mily
of laagnagea (f i. 4). Of other roots theie Is definite evideaee that Semitic
linguistic consdoomesa regarded them as onomatopoetic^ li4lilst die Indo^Gennaaic
instinct fails to recognize in them any imitation of sound.
/ (<) Stems with the harder, stronqer cons mnnts arc in general ( 6. r) to be
tegarded as the older, whilst a number ui iatcr stems probably arose from them,
tllTODgh softening of the COBSOiumts ; compare Hfi and 113, pTiy and pnb,
pSt and prt, \hv >nd dVp ; pp and 1)31 and the almost Invariable change
of initial 1 to ^. In lAhes instancea, however, the harder stems liave only been
adopted at a later period from Aiamaic, e.g. nyp, Helir. nUP. Fmallj in many
cases the harder and soAer stems may have been in use together from the first,
since frequently, by a kind of sound-painting, the inten -> r notion was thus distin-
guished from the less ii)tfn-;ive ; see above )'2fp fiJ cut, to shear, Sec.
fft (iT) When two consonants are united to form n roo( ihcy are ri'tunllv either
botli Liuiihaiic or both middle-haid or both soft, e.g. ^'p^ Dp^ DD^ 13^ IJi never yj^
O^, 0J>, iP- Within (triliteral) stems the first and second consonants are never
ideniicaL The apparent exceptions ate either cases where the root is redopUcated.
e.g nm (Ps. 4,i Afabieinin orresntt from other causes, oomp.
ISi 3t, 15)1
e.g* nsa In the Lexicon. The fiiat and Udrd consonants are veiy sddom Identical
except in what are called concave stems (with middle 1 or *),e.g. p^, pST;
com p., however, |n3, BtoC^, BhC^, and on J^y Job 39, 30, see $ 55./. The
second and tlurd consonants are on tlie other hand very freqnently identica l,
see 67 ,
ft ifi) The softening mentioned under letter / is sometimes so great, that strong
CQOsonaats, especially when In the middle of Ae stenii actnally pass Into vowels:
eompace | s8. 0, and hvx^ for blbjS^ Lev. 8 sqq. Hie anmerons instances
addnocd by Geseains, TTUumrmSt L 393, reqpure a good deal of silling.
0 (/) Some of the c&ssm in which triliteral stems cannot with certainty be traced
bnck to a hiliteral root, may be due to a combination of two roots-^ simple
method of forming expressions to correspond to more complex ideas.
^ 3. To a secondary stage in the devdopment of the language

belong stems of four, or even (in the case of noons) of five con-
' Consonants which are not found together in roots and stems are called
imampaiibie. They are chiefly consonants belonging to the same tln .s, c g. 33^
P3, pa, on, on, *ia, *J0, nt, DT, J1, DX, KK, yn, &c., or in mc rcvcn,e order.
Digitized by Google
{30.] SUm$ and Roots. 103
sonants'. They arise from an eitension of the triliteral stem: (a)

hy addition of a fourth stem-consonant; (B) in some cases perhaps
by composition and contraction of two triliteral stems, by which
means even quinqmlUerah are produced. Stem^forms which have
arisen from the mere repetition of one or two of the three original
stem-consonants, e.g. "^CriOp from iriD, are usually not regarded
as quadrilikrals, but as conjttgational forms ( 55) ; so also the few
words which are formed with the prefix K', as n^nl^B^ flame from 3?^^
corresponding to the Aramaic conjugation iaph*il, SqJhb^
Rem. on {a) The letten'f and /, etpedally, are inserted betiveen tile first and g
teoood mdicils, c. g. ops, DDIS to eat tip; D^^T^s D^S^ sctptre; HSy!)} hot
from ia glmo. The insertioa of an r is especially freqaent in Syiiftc.
Corop. Aram. 73"\p to roll, expanded from ^Sy (coojogation Pa'H^ corresponding
to the Hebre^v PC?l\ In Lntin there is a similar expansion of Jid^ scid, iiul, jug
into Jindo^ scindo, titndo, jungo. At the end of words the expansion is principally
made by ^ and ^, c.g. JITJ , Orchard (from D'ja)!

comp. 85. xi.
Rem. on {b) Forms sach as yT^fiY frog^ H^jon meadaw-sajfron, were lodg t
regarded as compeumfa, though was moeitaia.
the nplanatioa of them all
Many woidi of this daas, whidt earlier idiolars attempted to explain from Hebrew
ooioes* hatve tinoe pnited to be lom^w9rdt (| s. f'), and oooseqnently diop out
oftheqnestioQ.
4 A special dass of formations^ distinct iiom the fully developed s

stems of three or four consonants, are (a) the InUrfeeHons ({ 105),
which, as being immediate imitations of natural sounds, are indepen-
dent of the ordinary formative laws ; (^) the Pronouns. Whether
these are to be regarded as the mutilated remains of early developed
stems, or as relics of a period of language when the formation of
stems followed different laws, must remain undecided. At all events,
the many peculiarities of their formation^ require special treatment
( 3> ^<1-)- On the other hand, most of the particles (adverbs,
pcepositions, conjunctions) seem to have arisen in Hebrew from fuUy

developed stems, although in many instances, in consequence of
extreme shortening, the underlying stem Is no longer recognizable
(see 99 sqq.).
' In Hefafcw th^ aie oomparatiTely nue, but more muneroas ia die other
SeiwWc langoageii cspeciallj In Eddopic*
' Compi, Hq^ld, ' System der semitischen Demonstrativbildting nnd der damit
znsammenhnnêndcn Pronominal- nnd Partikelnbildang,* ia the eiiseAr, tUi
Kunde dts Morgtnl,^ voL iL pp. 134 sq^, 427 stjq.
Digiii^cG by Google
104 Etymology^ or the Paris of Speech. Q 31.
$ 31. Grammafieal Sfntchtre,
a 1. The formation of the parts of speech from the stems (derivation)

and inflexion are effected in two ways: (a) internally by changes
in the stem itself, particularly in its vowels; {6) externally by the
addition of formative syllables before or after it The expression
of giammatical relations periphrasticaUy by means of separate words
(e.g. the comparative degree and some case-relations in Hebrew)
belongs, not to etymology, but to syntax.
^ The external method (letter (^)) of forming words, viz. by nffixing formative
cyUaldes, which ooevzt e.g. in Egyptian^ appem on tiie whole to be tiie more
ndent. Yet odier frnilicB of lugoige, ind puticalailj the Semltli^ at a veiy
enly perioi! Imd recourse alio to the intemnl method, and dnriDg their yontUvl
vigour widfrly Irveloped thfir p<wer of forming derivntives. But the continnons
decay of thi power in ihe later nm Ic syritrictical circntnloca-
periods of language
tiou more su\d more necc&asuy. The same process may be seen also c.g. id Greelc
(indodiB^ modem Greek), and hi Latin wlA its Romanee ollahoots.
C 2. Both mcihods of formation exist togetlier in Hebrew. The

internal mode of formation by means of vowel change*? is tolerably
extensive ^PiJ, &c.). This i? accompanied in

nmneroos cases by external formation also (?^^*}, ^^P??,
and even these formative additions again are subject to internal

change, e.g. ^9Q|riii, The addition of formative syllables occnrs,
as in afanost all hmgnages, chiefly in the foimatiofi of the persons
of the verb, where the meaning of the afoed syllables is for the
most part still perfectly dear (see 44, 47). It is also employed
to distinguish gender and number in the verb and notm. Of case-
endings, on the contrary, only scanty traces remain in Hebrew
(see 90).
Digitized by Goegle
The Personal Pronoun. iP5
CHAPTER 1.
TH PRONOUN.
{ M. 7%i Pertmal Prtmun. Tkt SeparaU Prmmm*

1. The personal pronoun (as well as the pronoun generally) a
belongs to the oldest and simplest elements of the languacê 30. s).
It should be considered be/ore the verb, since it plays au important

part in verbal inflexion ( 44, 47).
2. The independent principal fonns of the personal pronoun serve b

(like the Gk. /y^, vv, and the Lat. ^0, ht, and their plurals) almost
solely to emphasize the Donunative-aiibject (see, however, { 135. s).
They are as follows:
SingtUar, Plural,
I. Com. '1^, in pause I. Gmi. VroW, in /aw^

/.
in ptuiH (ro,in/aw*\3PU),(wit)/
(m. nf.N (nK), jn pause'
J !VW or nni< I
2.
properly 'W).
thou. 2. ^
\/,^m ^^m)\ m^m

in /Mfitf fa^
. mn A# (i3f). U. Dq (Tan),
1/ IWI jAr (//).

\ / ran after^r^^jrer }n, f5 J
The forms enclosed in parentheses ore the less common. A tabic of these
pronoons with their shortened forms {pronomimii suffixu) is given in Paradigm A
at the end of this Grammar.
Remarks,
I. Firti Pirsim.
I. Thefemi^SbK isIcNfaqonttluui^^^ The fomer ooent In FliocnidMW c
'
On the prevalence of ObK ill the eaHler Books oooipare the statistics collccterl
by Giesebrecht in ZAW. 1881, p. 251 sqq., partly contcste<i by Driver in the

Journal of I^hiUl^, xSSa, voL zL p. aaa sqq., (bat cf. his ItUrodrntion to tkt Old
Digitized by Google
io6 The Pronoun. [32.
Moabite and Assyrian, bat in no other of the kindred dialects * ; from the latter
Ae toflixei are derived (f 1^ ^ probably fesnlte btm a obseniing

of aa origiiiai (oomp. Azam. K^, Anb. *iir). Hie panaat form
not onlj with atnall dlânctive accent^ but erco iridi coDjandiTea; ao ^waja in
^ r / Uvtl alao la. i8 with Hnnali, Fa. 119, 35 with Makfaa (which
however has been altered from ]>ht) and twice in MaL i, 6. In all these cases
there is manifestly a di&ngreemcnt between the vocnli rati on already established aod
the ipecial laws followed by the system of accentuation.
d 2. The formatiun of the plural in this and the other persons, exhibits a certain
analogy with tiiat of die noaiir while at the lame time (like Ae pronoana of other
lancnagaa) It ia dbaracteriaed by many difbrencea and pccnliaritiea. The ahoit
fonn UK from which the nlBx ia deriTed oocnst only b Jer.4St6 ATMIiM.
The form (oomp. 1 19. k} only in Ex. i6> 7. 8, Nam. 3a, zm, Lam. 3, 4a
VrU in /HiMse, Gen. 43, 11 ; in Arabic ndhrm is the regular form. InfheMiiDa
UK has altogether snpplaoted the longer forms.
/ 3. The Pronoun of the ist person only is, as a rule in hngiintfes, of the rammon
gendir, because the person who is present and speaking net U n<> lurtlier intîration
of gender, as does the and pcion, who is addressed !îa Greek, Latm, ijigiiîh, olc,
Ola dIatlneHon ia alao lacking), and etill nue the 5rd person who la abaenL
II. StfM^ JPtftOHt
f 4. The forms of the and person HriW, RK, DJRN, nJFlK, &c., are contnicted from
anta, &c. The kindred languages have retained tiic n bdoie the n, e.g. Arab,
'dnta^ Cem. 'dnti^ thou ; pL 'dfttunt^ fem, 'aM/$inHa, ye. In Syriac fU^, fem. ^rO|ft
are wdtten, bnt bolh am pioiiOunced Vtf. fa Waetam Aran^ J<U)( ia aaaal for
both gandeta.
g' W$ (wilboat n) oecBia live timei^ e. g. fa. <^ 4, alwaya aa K*thak, with rtn|C
as (TrA In three plaoea 1PI|( appeaia aa n maaenlinc^ Nan. 11, 15. Dent 5, 24.
luek. 2?, T4.
h The feminine form was originally as in Syriac, Arabic and Ethiopic. This
form is fotind seven limes -is K*thil>h Jud. 17, i. i KL 14, a. a Ki. 4, 16. 33. 8, I.
Jer. 4, 30. Ezek. 36, 13) and appears also in the corresponding personal ending
of verbs ^.stc 44./ especially, and necessarily, before suffixes, as *3*rSdJ?, 59- 1 ,
i"/
Gomp. also t as the ending of the and fem. sing, of the Imperative and Imperfect.
The final I wm however, gradually dropped in pronanctation, just as in Syztac
(aee alMvOt letter/) it waa cvantnaUy only written, not prononnced. The ^ thertfoie
Testamtnt, p. I47, bottom, ed. 6, p. 155,) as well as by Dclitzsch, Genesis^ i88f,

p. 28; fundamentally established by KBnig in Thtohpsche SttiJieit u. A'/i/i^, 1^93,
pp. 4*^4 sqq. and 478, and in his Kinleitiitig in Jas J 7'., \f^'^, S-r. I:i M ine
uf the latent Books (ce the Lexicon) is nut found at ail, and iiaidiy at all
faitbeTafattnd.
i
In Phoenician and MoaUte<the ineeription of MttaV Une i) it ia written *pM^
withont the final waa prooovnoed
In Panic (Plant. /Wm. 5, l, 8)
it mm
ormarJl (5, , 35). Comp. Schroder, Ph 'oniz. Spratht, p. 143. In Asqffiaa the
icairiiM""^"" feim ia wmIm*. in ancicni anitiaa mmI. Conlic wulu ttolL
Digitized by Google
32.] The Personal Pronoun, 107
MMonttt, even ia thcM leven

fimdlj disappeared, and hnce the ptsiagesp have
poinledthemdinflieteztu^J^toiadiartetlie Q'r/JJIIICM Tbenne
final appeait in the zaie (Anoneie) fiwnw of Che nffis ^3JL> ^9*4- (If 9^)'
5. The ptank fin|$ and \Vfl^ wtth the tone on the nltima (oomp. 1 39. ),
aie obtme foirai (conip. i ay. 9) from XS99^ (Aiab. '4Mi(ie Aian. |Via|e)
and or (Arab, 'antimta^ AiaoL pn|(, T??!^)- Henoe, no doubt, the fact,
that the suffixes with the and person plur. perf. are added to thetetmtnntion VI,
instead of Dn, m. The lonn /n^ ia found only in gek. 34, 31 (so ^m^s'
expressly, others |rrK)
; XtlfPf^ (for whidi lome MSS. have nînit) only four limes,
iz. Gen. 31, 6. xek. 13, II. so. 34 17 ; ini3, ao 0^ (before a D) if alio nsed
at feminine.
in. Third Person,
6. {a) In KVt and K^H (î2 and the M (conesponding to the ÊU/tfprêi^ k
Hon in Arabic, comp. % 23. >) might hare been added only as an octhof^phie cIoiin||f
of the final long vowel, as in R^l?:, &c. The N is, however, always written
in the case of the separate pronotins', and only as a toneless suffix , 5 33. a) does
itVl appear as \r\. while becomes H, In Arabic âs in Syriac) they arc MTitten
)n and *n but pronouiiLed hthci and h{y^, and in Vul^r Arabic even hiiwwa and
hijya. This Arabic pionuuciation alone would not indeed be decisive, since the
Towetoompkment might have aziscn from the more eoosoaaatal pronmdation of the
Y and V hot the Eddopic (- ku*a4A) for KVt, yi*tt (- ilt Wf) for len
(compare also the Asipian jw-at-^ IWT^ shew that the M wsa <igfaial and
indicated an eariy consonantal termination of the two words: comp. Nîldekei
ZDMC XT 459. According to Philippi (il irl xxviii. 172 and JOUJU 371 S(|9)
JtVl arose from a primitive Semitic ha-va, {<\1 from ha ya.
(i) The form fctVl also stands in the consonantal t^xt [/vUhidh] of the I'enta- /
tench* (with the exception of eleven places) for the fcm. J>5*'n. In all such cases
the Masora, by the punctuation NIH, lias indicated the n- {<\1 \<^rL' perpiiuum,
see 17). The common explanation rârds this phenomenon as an archaism
(similar to the epleene use of IJfjlbrAer and ^W) whidi was ioconecdj removed
bgr the Masoieles. This assomptioB is. however, clewlj milenable^ if we eonrider
(i) that no other Semitic langmge ia withoat ^ quite indispensable distinction of
gender in the separate pronotin of the 3rd pers. ; (2) that this distinction does
occur eleven tin.cs in the Pentateuch, and that in Gen. 20, 5. 3^, 25. Xnm. 5, 13. 14
KVT and arc clo-c ti) one another; (3) that outside the rLiiia'cucli 11 is found
throoghout the oldest documents, so that the i<M cannut be regarded as having
teCD sobseqnently adopted from the Aramaic ; (4) that those parts of the book
of Joshua which eeitataily iormed a cooslttneat part of Ae originat aovroes of the
Pentatendi, know aotiiing of this qdoene use of KVI . Cooseqeently theie onlj
* In the fascriptioa of Khig Ma* (sse f s. a), Uaes 6 and a;, we even find
Mil for ttVT ; and in the inscription of 'lUmnn'azar, line a a, for K^ri.
' Also in twelve places in the Babylonian Codex of 916 a. d. ; comp. Bser,
Etsekkl, p. 108 eg.; fiohl, Kvim u, Ttfft dts A. T, (Lpc 1891), p. 343.
Digitized by Google
io8 The Pronoun, 033-
remains the hypodietla, l^dtt writiog of KVI far M>n icHs oo an Oftiiographical
peeoliaritj iriiidi in tooBe leoenaioa of Ae PeatatendHleit was ahooet eoadaleDtly
foUowedr bat waa aAerwaida veijr properly rejected by the Masoretes. The
orthography was, however, pecnliar to the Pentateoch-text alone, since it is un-
necessary to follow the Masora in ^Triting V^7\ for K^H in i Ki. 17, 15. Is. 30, 33.
Job 31, II, or K^sn for N^n in Ps. 73, 16. Eccles. 5, 8. i Chron. 29, 16. The
Samaritan recaision of the Pentateuch has the correct form in the K*ththh
throughout. The conjecture of Levy is deserving of every con&ideration, viz. that
originally MH waa written for both fonna (aee letter note), and waa almoit
evoywheie, imêctive of gender, expanded into mn. Comp. for die whole
qneation DeUtisch In the ZdUcMfi fir XMHek* WSutmthe^ uttd XirtkHeku
Lebm, i. 393 sqq., and Kuenen, EinUitung ins A. T., and ed. i. t6 yi. 7
(- Tht Hexateuch, p. 331 f.), [also Driver, Leviticus, in Haupt's Bible, p. 35 f.]
7. The plural forms DH (n^n) and niin (after prefixes f
|n) appear to be fiioned
from K^n and K*n, as DTIK is from nriK. In Arabic, where they are pronounced
hum, huiina, the obscure vcnvtl sound has renmined, while in Hebrew, in the suffix-
forms on and ^n, it becomes an obtuse S'l'Mi (comp. { 37. v). The n in tTi^n
and n|n iias no doubt demonstrative force. In We;tem Aram. p??n^ ilDH
(p3n^ l^3lt\ Syr. henitn (êtttin), Arab, hiimti [ihi- archnic form of hum), and
Kthiop. ii''>mu there is an ^ or ^ apjx:nded, which in Hebrew seems to reappear
in the in K Ileal suffixes to to A ,
to..*. ( 58.^.
H In i iiic passages ntDH stands for the feminine (Zech. 5, lo. Cant. 6, 8. Ruth i, 33 ;
comp. the use of the suffjx of the 3rd masc. lor the 3rd fem., i 1 35. f ami 1 45. /). The
qnhe anomal ooi Drrny a Ki. 9, t8 iboald be attend into Dnnj^ , comp. Job 33, i a.
o 8. The pixNioana of the 3rd penoo may lefier to tkiHgi aa wdl aa pcnooa.
On their aaeanieg aa AmtmiraHvis aee f 156.
f 88i Prmimmal Sufixet,
a 1. The independent principal forms of the personal pronoun (the

teparaie pronoun), given in the preceding section, express only the
noroinative The accusative and genitive, on the contrary, are

eipreeaed by forma, uanally sbofier, joined to the end of verbs, noon%
and particles {firmmnnai tufixts or simply sugSxa); e.g. VI (toneless)
and iftom M) eum and ems, Vt^ffSi ^

m
\
or (with contracted into 4) ikw kast kaUd kirn;

(also, rarely [see 91. vn^) hixemt,
1 he same method is emplojred in all the other Semitic languages, as well as in
the and others ; in Greek, Latin, and German
Ejggpplhui, Beraian, Finnish, Tartar,
we findonly aUght traces of the Und, e.g. GoBMa, trftt^t for tr gut tt; Greek,
var^f ^Nv lor ^tf*eS I^tinf aMvai, aMW, fte> in Plantna and Tcnnoe lor
*uemm, utfiti.
* Ob appaitnt exocpdona aee f 135. a.
Digitized by Google
{340 The Demonstrative Pronoun. 109
S. The case which these suffixes represent is b

{a) When joined to verbs, the accusative (comp., however, 117. x),
e.g. ^.Tri|5C5? I have killed him.
(b) When affixed to substantives, the genitive (like irar^p /lov, paier c
Mtf). Tliey then senre as pmustoe prmmms^ e.g. ('^Â^*) m|r
faiktr^ ^ iloTM, wiucfa may be either tqnut ena or tqwts turn*

(^) When joined to partidei, either the genitive or accnsadve, d
according as the particles originally expressed the idea of a noun
or ft verb, e.g. ^r^, literally ifUersHHum ma, hdwem me (comp. mea
cuiiâ), but *33n behold me, ecce me.
{d) Wliere, according to tlie Indo- Germanic case-system, the daiivc e
or ablative of the pronoun is required, the suffixes in Hebrew are
joined to prepositions expressing those cases (!> sign of the dative,
? from, 102), e.g. to him () and io kimstlf (sUt), ^m

kirn, ^19 (usually /rm me.
S. The suffixes of the and person Ac.) are all formed with /
a i-sound, not, like the teparate pronouns of the and person, with a
/-sound.
So in all the Semitic languages, io Ethiopic even in the verbal iorm i^qatalka^
tkau hast killed'' Hebr. Phh^).
4i The suffix of the verb (the accusative) and the sufix of the nmm g
(the genitive) are the same in most of their forms, but some differ,
e.g. *a mi, V
Buftdigm A aft tiie end of the Gnunnwr gim table of all the fonm of the
KpamU fromttm and the snffuees; a foller treatment of the verM sujltx and the
flftode to the verb will be found in 58 sqq., of the noun-suffix
of attechhig it
in 1 91, of tibe preporitioos with snSmt in f 103, of adverb* with aoffixei f too. .
{ 84. 7^ Demensiraiive Pronomt*
r,.
im.nt} , . Pbar. ctm. ntt (raiely ^) ihtie, a
' In many languages the detn on strn lives begin with a cZ-souud (hence called the
demonstrative sound) which is, however, sometimes interchanged with a sibiUuit.
Comp. Aiam. ?|^ l]*^ fern, (thU); Sauk, m, sS, tat; Golhk ,
masc,
tknta; Genn. da, dor, dk, das; and Eng' /fo, this, ikai, 6v.
That I1| may stand for the fenunine, cannot be pcoved either from Jnd. 16, a8
or from the certainly commit paiM^ in Joe. a, I7>
Digiii^ca by Coogle
no The Pronoun. (J 35.
h Rein< t* Tlw fiHdbdne ferm nift hat vndonbtedly ariaai from f1K|, by obieiiriiif
of an orifinal J to ^ (for KT HT comp. the Ambb naic } for fl at the

/Mf,
ftminine ending f 80), and the foms iit, % both of whidi ave fue\ ue ahottencd
from Tikif by iêcdott of tiie fl* In Pt. t$af la It U wed aa a fulatioe, oomp. V
bdov. In Jer. a6, 6, K*iktNkf PTUlin (with the article and tiie demonstntive
termination H^) it found for l1t(T. The forms and ^ are plurals of Ht and
fM^ by usage, not etymologically. The form ^ oocsn only in the Pentateuch (but
not in the Samaritan text), Gen. 19, 8. 25. 36, 3. 4, &c. [8 times], alwnys with the
article, Vxn, and in I Chron. ao, 8 \vithout the article [cf. Driver on Dcut, 4,423'*
Both tho singular and the plural may refer to things as well as |>erons.
C 2, In combination witii prepositions to denote the oblique case we liiul ni^
to this (comp. for h, loa. g), nt^tfj, T\fkf^ to this (fem.), n^!>, H^N^ to these;
nrnt< hutu, HXTTIK hatrr, nVx'nX hos, also without TlK, even be/ore the verb
Pa. 75, 8 and elsewhere. Note also %X\ "l^nO prctium huius (i Ki, ai, a), dec.
<^ 2, The seoondaiy fi>rm It occutb only in poedc style, and is used
mostly for the relative, like our ihoi for noko. Like ({ 36),
it serves for all nambers and ganders,
i Rem. 1, This pronoun takes the article Cn|nj ni^^n^ according
to the same rule as adjectives, see 5; e.g. n|n t^Kil this man^ but t^KH n|
y a. Rarer secondary form^ with strengthened denwnmattve force, are Gen.

94, 65. 37, 19 ; ItSh ySnw. &k. 36, 35, and shortened T^,aoinetiinct iiMur.,aa ia
Jad. 6, 20. I Sank. 17, 96. a Ki. 23, 1 7. 2^ch. 2, 8. Dan. 8, x6, onoe fem.^ a Ki.
4, 35; cf. I Sam. 14, I [and ao, 19 LXX}. In Arabic the conrqtond ing fonn
^&ll&4t is the relative pronoun.
g 3. The personal pronouns of the 3rd person &Uo often have a demonstrative
sense, sec % 136.
Th Artick,
a 1. The article, which is by nature a kind of demonstrative pronoun,

never appears in Hebrew as an independent word, but alwa)^ in
closest connexion with the wuid which is iK fined by it. It usually
takes the form -n, with a sharply pronounced </ and a doubling
of the following consonant, e.g. B^D^^ thi sun, "iN^ rivtr, D^^J
ike LeviUs (according to aa si for "W^n, E^.^).
^ Kem. With icgaid to the Dmit in J after the attidc^ tho nde 1% 1]wt it it
imected when n n or y foUowt the \, elg. tfygpn tktjmt, Of
ril a Ki. 6, 19, Ec 40^ 45, and ccles. (6 times) ; ^ only Hos. 7. 16, Ps. 13a, la.
* According to Kuenen (comp. above, ( a. ) the form i^K dates from a time
when the vowel of the second sylUble was not yet indicated bjn TOWel letttf
later copyists accidentally omitted the addition of the H.
Digitized by Google
35*} The Article. iii
(0'3^9 4f 3 is an exception), but "riim, ^H^,

/<rr/tf also stands after the article in the prefix D in certain nouns and in tbe
participles /Y7/ and PuaJ (see ( 5a. c) before n, y and "^^ cxc?; t i\Ticn the
gnttnrnl has under it f\ short vowel in a sharpened syllable ; thus IlD^ntDn Ezek. 22, 5,
rnyon M*- cave i^comp. Job 38, 40. I Chron. 4, 41) ; but 1}.VnP[i I^s- 104, 3 (Eccles.
4.15. 2 Chron. 33, 13; before y Ps 103, 4); n^^DH Is. 33, 12. Before letters
other than gnttuxaU this remains without Page^ accordiog to & 30. m,
9l When the ardde stands before a guttural, which (according

to { 33. i) cannot pnîeriy be doubled, the foUowtng cases arise,
according to the character of the guttural (compare 27.
(1) In the case of the weakest guttural, and also with *i
( 22. I and 5), the doubling is aUogelhcr lost. Consf'(;ucai.h , ihc
Paihah of the article (since it stands in an open syllable) is always

lengthened to Qames ; e.g. the /ather, "^f^^^l the other^ D??n the
mo/fur, irt<ri ; ; n^KH the light, OSii^tn ^ ^j,, i>3^n ihc foot,
ih head, i^^n the wicked.
So alio nlDS^n Ndi. 3, 13, beeanie qrncopated tarn DteC'^n (oomp. vctie 14 d
nd Bher on ihe pnisage) ; tTglt^ (u in Nun, 11, 4. Jud* % 41. s Stin. a3 33,
with die K orthogiftplilcslljr letained, for 'Vjj^ Jr. ^4 (fiomp, ÎtQ vene i)
tn^n Eodes. 4, 14 for 'Dlgl; Dl^ll a Clix!)0.83,5 for 'y^ (coup, s KL 8, a^,
(2) In the case of the other gûtturals there occurs either the virtual e
or weak doubling ( 22. i) especially with the stronger sounds
n and n, less often with y or the doubling is wholly omitted. In
tbe former case, the Faihah of the article remains, because the syllable
IS still regarded as closed ; in the second case, the Paiha^ is either
slightlj lengthened into iS^^^ or full/ into Qami, That is
to say:
{A) When the guttural has any other vowel than d ( ) or a (^), /
then
(i) before the stronger sounds n and n the aruclc regularly
remains ^ \
e.g. Wnn thai, ^"I'p'^ ihc mou ih. i'^nn ifi force, the
wisdom. Before n, d occurs only in (}en. 6, 19; 0*9*15*3 Is. 3, 33

0*3BCJj3 Is. 17, 8; before n, always in HDnn, Dnn, njnn.
(3) before V the Patha^ is generally lengthened to Qamef, e.g. ^

m tki gn.'yy^
13, 33; also in Gen. lo, 17
Uk diy, Ijjf? tki sirmmi, plur. I5*TWS
is the more correct readmg.
J Ki.
^ceptions are Ttr^^V^ Ezod. 15, to; Dl^yp 2 Sam. g, 6. 8. Is. 43, 18;
1911 Is, 24, 2 ;
D'31?n Is. 65, II ; Pg^ Eiek. 33, 7 ; D*?tVn ftov.
Digitized by G^^^le
XI2 The Pronoun, [35.
2, 13 and Prov. s, 17; D^S^ i Sun* 16, 7. Eccles. 11, 7 ; but

Gen. 3, 6. Prov. 10, 26. Comp. Baer on !. 43, 18. -
h {B) When the guttural has d (-) then

(i) before a tone^bearing n or ^ the article is always otherwise
it is e.g. D^n ///f people^ "^nn mountain, ^^jn (in pause), nnnn
/awards the mountain,; but (according to 22. r) QÎ'^jJ mouniains,
I (2) before H the article is invariably n without regard to the tone;

e.g. D^*?'^ fh wise man, 3nn /A^ festival,
k (3) When the guttural hag ^ the article is n before ^8^-
Mr auMi/Ar/ n^-Via m Mr woik plaett (without the article 'Hj}) Ezek.
33, 27, comp. a ChnuL a7 4 ; but n before as 0^8? ^ '^Ânwy

Ruth a, 15.
The gender and number of the noun have no Influence on the ionn
of the article.
/ Rem. I. The original form of the Hebrew the Phoenician; article 'H
is generally con&idered to have been ^H, the ^ of which (owing to the proclitic
BBtara of tilt itick) hu hem iimajftblj aMboilafted to Hw following oamoiifiit,
I
as in ng^ from f 19* ^
This view ii cerUdDly supported by tiie fonn of Uw
Ambio article hi (pranoanoed 4/' hf wmw nM>dia Bedftwt, we WalUa in
Ibe ZDMG, xu 195, 217), the b of which It alio aHfanilatad at loik belbie
all Icttcn like s and / and bdbie A and r e.g. *al-Quf'dn bat âs-sSnd (Bed.
has sana) ^ Hebr. n^|^ ^^<ir. It is, however, a '[uestioa whether the Hebr. H
is not distinct from the Arab. V/. and whether tlic sharpening of the following
consonant should not be cx]>laujed in the same way as thi? fihjirpening of the
coDsouant after \ cuiuecuUve 49. // comp. also ca^ like HD^, '"tî,
I tot. k),
m The Arabic article itself perhapt ocean ia the Old TcfltamcBt ia
I Ki. 10, If . 13 (alio 0*lsn!)|C a Omn. a, 7. 9, to. it), probably mndal-wMf, alio
in iu - C^Ârab. iih) Etde. 13, ti. 13. 38, aa. On the otha
hand, in the proper name TI^d!)^ Gen* i^ a6 tiie fint qpllahle may poh^ ht
God, as D. H. Muller (comp. GcMnini* iMeiem, nth ed. a. v.) and NSIddte
{Sittta^gtitr, der Berl. Akad. 1882, p. 11 86) suppose. Dî>^ ProT. 30^ 31,
commonly explained as Arab, alqaum, the militia, is quite uncertain.
#1 2, When the prefixes 3, S, 3 ( loa"' come hrfore the article, the H is rcyncopated,
and Us vowel is thrown back to the prehx, in the place of the ^*wi (( 19. i, aod
In the Lihyanltic inscriptions collected by Euting 'ctl. by D. H. Muller

in Epigraphiuke Dmkmaltr aus Arabim, \\ icn, 1889' the article is n. l>cfoTe
gutturals 3n 'han). The DafjeJ forte in llelircv. uM be due to asstiuiiuiion

of a ^. This J i tlie opiaion ut ilakvy {îxci'uc di.: juiixs, xxiiL p. II7)
"while D. H. MiiUer regards the five forms m dispute as participles Niph'aL
Digitized by QoGlgle
$37-] The Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns, 113
f tl. A), e.g. D^D^ in iki kmn for irp^na (to ft. 36^ 6) ; D^^ for D^'n!)
#9 lAf fmptit Onra Ml XiU JMMMiAmiw, O'C^'ina in tk mMtksK ExetpdOM
to tbb role oeenr dmdtt eadniivelj In
ill* kter Books: Eidc. 40^ 95. 47^
Eodo. 8,1. Dun. Neh. 9, 19. la, 3S. 2 Chron. 10, 7. 25, 10. 39, 27; comp.,
8. 16.
however, i Sam. 13, 31. 3 Sam. 21, 20. Elsewhere, e. g. 8 Ki. 7, la, the Masora
reqtiires the syncope in the Q'r^'. A distinction in meaning is observed between
DVn3 aloui this time (Gen. 39, ii. i bara. 9, 13, &c) and Di*3 ^rj/ a//
(Gen. 35' 3^1 &c.). After the copula \ (and) ^cope of the H does not take place,
e.g. DVi?!.
3. Hie wwdt )nK eartJk, yx HUmOain, 3n /ro;/, Dy /r^;;^, IB always 0

appear dier the wHde with a long (as in pause) pKH, inn,
; :)nn, D^,
n|n; eompm alio ]1l|lr4îlb the ertide always IÎK^^
f 86. T%e RdatiBe Prtmom,

The rclalive pronoun (cf. 138) is usually the indeclinable "^^^
[who. which, &c.), originally a demonstraiive pronoun : see further
138 and 155. In the later Books, especially PIccles. and late
Ptalms, Lam.
also (4 times), Jon. (3 times), Chron. (twice), Ezra
(once), and always in Canticles (cf. Jnd 6, 17. 7, la. 8, 26. a Ki.
6, II ; Gen. Job
6 3. 19, 99 are both doubtful)^ jf^
is used instead;
more rarely Jud. 7. Cant, i, 7 (Job 19, 09 ?); once |^ before M Jud.
6, 17 (elsewbeie before a guttoral before n even Eccles. 3, iS,
and aoconfing to some (e.g. Qimhi) also in Ecdes. a, aa *.
{ 87. 1%e InierrogaHife and IndeftniU Prmount.
1. The interrogative pronoun is whoi (of persons, even before a

plurals, Gen. 33, 5. Is. 60, 8. a Ki. 18, 35; comp. also *P"n3 whose
daughter^ Gen. 34^ 23; ^j' io wham? ^TIK whom?) and ^9 ^^^^
(of things).
The Sam 8dg, (folkMved bjr Ih^/itiiim^tmi,: even hi ^ Hah. 9, i, ftc d

-tV^^ ,
gaiiist I ao. m) may he explained from the rapid utterance of the interrogative
in connexion whh the following word. Most probably, however, the Daê} forte
is rather due to tiie assimilation of an originally audible H (HD, as Olshauacn),
which go<:s back through the intermediate iorms maih^ mat to an original rttant
to W. Wright, Compmtiti9i Grummar cfiki SimHk Lansuagest CBanbridge, 1 890,
p. 134, portfy fbUowing BSttdier MArSkdU Gramimitik, ( 961. Sodn calls
Alto in Ii. 41, a, ratd 1^ inilaul of the impoMble IB!^,

The fn fofn does not occur in Phoenician, hut only ( ^ 7),
pronoanced asse, esse (alw as, es, is, ys, us), or especially in the later Punic and
in the Focniilus of Plautns ^ {sa, si. .y, .rw}. Also in New Hebrew is
the common form. Cf. Schroder, Pkon. Sprocket p. 1^2 sqq. and below, % 155.
Digitized by Google
114 The Pronoun,
attcBtioB to die Anbie mak (k pMM with in aadibk k: ihf^^ 193, S)
Obicrvt (igOwf tfnt
(a) the doaest connexion, by inuis of Maqqepht TTt) standi with i following
DtlgA ({ ao. Oi ^^'"nP '''^ it U to titef and even in one word, as 03^
zcr^la/ is it foyou? Is. 3, 15 ; cowp. x.4 i. Mai. 1, 13, iodevoi before i gnttoiid,
as ano Ezek. 8, 6 KUkil>h.
d iP) Before gutturals in close connexion, by meam of Maqqeph or a conjanctive
accrat, it is either np with a virtual doubling of the guttural \% aa. r), so especially
before n end, in Gen. 31, 36. Job 31, ai, before n, or the dovbling le wbol^
omitted. In tlie letter ca> either J iefiilly IcngHiened to Qamif (oemp. I8g.e)-^
Iweya blore W end V-er helMcngthcned to S^gMl^ eqêdallj before n
(before n however elio n^). The omlNioa of the donUhig alio tekee place
ii a nUe with the hard gutturals, when Uiey have not Qamt^^ and then the
form is either or the latter eqieebUy before (9 or y, when Mof^pk
follows.
0 The longer forms and HIO nlso remain before lettt-rs Avhich arc not îlturals,
if they are not comicctexi by Alaqqt^h but only by a conjunctive auaU. As a rule
no is then used, but HO when at a greater distance from the principal tone of the
sentence, Is, 1,5. Ps. 4, 3 (on HO in the combinations flBJ^ riD3^ and even
I Sam. I, b, comp. J02. k and /).
f (<-) In the principal pause ii used without exception ; also as a rale with the
unaller tSsjmuHvti, and cspechdlj almoit alwaye before gutturals (HD only in veiy
few caiet). On the other hand, more often stands befine letters which are not
fattnrals, when at a greater diitanoe from die principal tone of Uie aentence,
e.g. I Saip. 4, 6. t5 14. a ^ 1, 7. Heg. t, 9 (see Kdhler on the peauge).
20, 13. Job 7, at ; coonp^ howefcr, Pkov. 31, a, and DeUtstch on the peeiege^
g 2. On ^ and no as indefinite pronouns in the sense xsSquicunquei

juodctmgue, and as rdattves, tsfm,ui quod, ftc. see the Ltxkom,
Digitized by CÔgle
39-] Ground-form and Derived Stems, 115
CHAPTER II.
THE VERB^
88. General View.
Verbal stems are either original or derived. They are usually a

divided into
(a) Verbal steins proper {primUive verbs), which exhibit the stem
without any addition, e.g. 'ni'O reigned.
{b) Verbal derivatives, i.e. secondary verbal stems, derived from the b
pure stem (letter a), e.g. 85î? to sanctify, SJ'Îpnn to sanctify oneself from
Bn^ to be holy. These are usually called conjugations ( 39).
(r) Denominatives, i.e. verbs derived from nouns (like the Latin c
causari, praedari, and Eng. to skin, to poll), either in a primitive
or derivative form, e.g. i'nx, Qal and Pi'il, to pitch a tent, from i'HK
tent ; B^^"? and take root, and Bne? to root out, from cnfer
root (52.
This does not exclude the possibility that, for nouns, from which denominative d
verbs are derived, the corresponding (original ^ verbal stem may still be found
either in Hebrew or in the dialects. The meaning, however, is sufficient to show
that the denominatives have come from the noun, not from the verbal stem,
e.g. 1133!) a brick (verbal stem io be white), denomin. p^ to make bricks;
y\ a fish (verbal stem ri3^ to be prolific), denomin. VK^ to fish; S)in to winter
(from C)in autumn, winter, stem 5|"in to pluck) ; to pass the summer (from
sumrturt stem J*^p
to be hot).
39. Groundform and Derived Stems.

1. The 3rd sing. masc. of the Perfect in the form of the pure stem a
(i.e. in Qal^ see No. 4) is generally regarded, lexicographically and
grammatically, as the fundamental or ground-form of the verb ( 30. a),
e.g. he has killed, he was heavy j
jb^ he was little*. From
' Comp. M. Schultze, Zur Formenlehre des semit. Verbs, Vienna, 1886.
' For the sake of brevity, however, the meaning in Hebrcw-Elnglish Lexicons
is usually given in the Infinitive, e.g. HD^ to learn, properly he has learnt.
ii6 The Verb [39-
this form the other persons of the PerfiLl arc derived, and the
Participle also is connected with it. i'b^ or bp?, hke the Imperative
and Infinitive construct in sound, may also be regarded as an alterna-
tive groand-fonn, with which the Imperfect (see 47) is connected.
b In TCriM 1^ (i.e. wtth 1 kn fhdr teoood radical) tbe item>lbni, gives both
in Ludtm ud Grammart is not the 3id ilng. mase. Perfect (consisting of two
consonants), but the fotm with medial 1, which appears in the Imperative and
Infinitive ; e.g. 3%^ /# return (3rd pen. pert 3^ : the sane is the case in most
stems vritii medial \ e.g. p"^ to pidgt,
c 2. From the pure stem, or Qd^ the deriyative stems are formed
according to an imvarying analogy, in which the idea of the stem
assumes the most \ aried shades of meaning, according to the changes
in its form (intensive, frequentative, privative, causative, reflexive,
reciprocal; some of them with corresponding passive forms), e.g.

to learn, "TC!.!? io teach; Mf^ io lie, 3^3fn to lay; OgB^ io judge,
ta^f^^ io contend. In other languages such formations are regarded
as new or d&waiwe verbs, e.g. Gam, /aUm (to iaU),/<X^ (to fell);
trinim (to drink), Mnim Lat lacUre (to suck, Germ.

(to drench);
sa^gm), lacian (to give suck, Germ. AA^m); awlrtf (to throw), ior/rr
(to lie down); yipofuu, ytnA^, In Hebrew, however, these formations,
*
which are Incomparably more regular and systematic than (e.g.) in
Greek, Latin, or English, are usually called, since the lime of Reuchlin,
conjugations (among the Jewish grammarians 12^3*33, i.e. /orMdtions,

or more correctly specits) o[ the primitive form, and are always treated
together in the grammar and lexicon \
d 8. The changes in the primitive form consist either in internal
modification by means of vowel-change and doubling of the middle

consonant (^, bd\p, comp. io /nr, ioUQf; io fail, to fell\
or in the repetition of one or two of the stem-consonants (^^0^,
^^?)* finally in the introduction of formative additions (^î??),
which may also be accompanied by internal change (^^!i,

Com p. 31. ^.
In Aramaic the formation of the conjogations is effected rather by formative

additions than by vowelidte^ge. Hie vocalic dlstinctioiu have mostly become
obsolete, so tha^ e.g. the leflexlvea wi^ the prefix nn, jpK, riK hav entirely
ttsnxped the place of the Passives. On tiie other hand, Aimbic bas pieserved great
*The term CenJngaHem in Hebrew accordingly differs entirely from its meaning
in Greek and Latin grammar.
( 39-3 Ground/arm and Derived Stems, 117
wealth in both methods of formftdoD, while Hbicw in thi% ai in other vgqiect^

bold the auddle place ({ i. 6).
4. Grammanans differ as to the mmber and arros^mnd of these t

oonjugatioiia. The common practice, however, of calling them by
the old grammatical terms, prevents any misunderstanding. The
simple fonn is called Qal (^^ light, becaose it has no formative
additions); the others (D*"!?! heavy, being weighted, is u were, with
the strengthening of consonants or formative addiuons) take their
names from t'ne paradigm of he has done \ which was used in the
oldest Jewish grammatical works. Several of these have passives

which are distinguished from their actives by more obscure vowels.
The common conjugations (including Qal and the passives) are the
seven following, but only very few verbs exhibit them all
Ac live. Passive,
1. Qal h^tokiU. (Comp, 63-

2. Niph'al io kill oneself (rarely passive).
3. Pi'el iQ kiU meo^t U nmtacre, 4. Pu*al
5. Hiphll to emiti to kUL d. Hoph'al

7. Hiihpa'Sl to HU meself [Very raie, Hothpa*al Wrin.]
There are besides several less frequent conjugatioDb, some of which, ^

however, are more common in the kindred languages, and even in
Hebrew (in the weak verb) reguUuriy take the place of the usual
conjugations ( 55).
* This pandigm was borrowed from the Aimbie gnumnariani, and, aooording
t0 Bacher, piroliably tint adcf)led thronghoot by Abnlwaltd. It was, however,
tmsuitable on account of the guttural, and was, therefore, usually exchanged in

later times for IpB, alter the example of Moses Qimhi. This verb has the
advanta ;( , that a;! its conjugations are actually found in the Old Testnment.
On the other hand, it has the disadvantage of iiiJ;suncUiess m the pronunaatiou
of Mne of its forms, Iê paxadigm of
e. g. commonly
On'jSB.
ued sioce the tine of Dans, avoids this defect, and is especially adapted for
tiie oampumtive tieatmat of tbe Semitic dialects, masmuch s it Is lomid wiUi
slight diange (Arab, and Ethiop. hvip) in all of them. It is true that in Hehiew
it occurs only three times in Qal, and even then only in poetic styk (P5. 139, 19.
Job 13, 15. 24, 14) yet it is worth retmrung as a model which has been sanctioned
;
by usage. More seiious is the defect, that a Dumber of forms of the paradigm of
bisp leave the beginner in doubt as to whetbo ia not theie should be a IkfgA
in tbe B'gadk'pkath Ictten^
Ûahki.
^ cooseqiiently u to tiie comet dtvliiov of the
Digitized by Google
ii8 The Verb. [{40.
In Arabic there is a greater Msaieiy of conjogations, and their arrangement

is novo appropriate. Aoeotding to tiie AnUc iMdiod die Hebiew conjagatiou
would itiiid tin*: i. Qalj 1. Mr
and Ptfal; 3. fTH and Pfaiiwte 1 56- ^)
4. iripk*ii and m^*ai,' 5. Hitkpa'H and Hothpa'al; 6. Httkpd'H (lee | 55.
7. NipK'al; 8. HUhpa'el (see 5 54. /) 9. /VV^/ (see 55. </\ A more satisfactory
;
division would be into three classes: (l) The intensive Pi't-l with the derived and
analogous forma Fu'al and Ilithpa'cl. (2) The causative Hiph'il with its passive
HopKeU^ and the analogous forms {âph'el and Tiph'ct), (3) The reflexiTe or
{ 40* Tenses* Moods. Flexion,
<i 1. While the Hebrew verb^ owing to tbese derivative fonns or

conjugatioii8,po88e8ses a certain richness and copiousness^ it is, on the
other hand, poor in the matter of fentts and moodt. The verb has
only two iatse4(mai {Pefftti and Imperfect, see the note on 47. a),
besides an Imperative (but only in the acti.e), two Infinitives and
a Participle. All relations of time, absolute and relative, are exjjri ssed
either by these forms (hence a certain diversity in their meaning,

106 sqq.), or by syntactical combinaiious. Of moods properly
so called (besides the Imperfect and Imptrative)^ only the fusswe and
OpieUwe are sometimes mdicated bjr express modifications of the
Imperfect-fonn ({ 48).
t S* The inflexion of the Perfect and Imperfect as to persons, differs

from that of the Western languages m havin jr, to a great extent, distinct
forms for the two gender^, which correspond to the different forms
of the personal pmnvun. It is from the union of the pronoun wUh
the verbal stem thai the personal inflexions of thew tensis arue,
c The following Table will serve for the beginner as a piovisbnal
scheme of the formative sjrlhibles {ftfumnaHoa and prtformaihes)
of the two Unm. The three stem-consonants of the strong verb are
denoted by dots. Compare ( 44 sqq. and the Faiadigms.
Singular. Plural.
3. jn. 3. c.
3. / ^ n
2. m, 2, m. C3iJI
s./. n a. /. in
I. f. ^ I. r. U *
Digiii^ca by Coogle
4^0 The Strong Verb, 119
Imperfect.
Singular, Plural.
3* M* 3. ^
3./ A 3./ n) A
3* m. ^ A
a. / V A
$ 4L Variatiomfrom the Ordinary F^rm o/thi Strong Verb,

The same laws which are nonnaUy exhibited in sleiiis with strong a
(michftngeable) consonants, hold good for all other verbs; and
deviations from the model of the strong verb are only modifications
occasioned by the special character or weakness of certain con-
sonants, vir. :
{a) When one of the stem-consonants (or radicals) is a guttural.

In this case, however, the variations only occur in the vocalization
(according to 22), not in the consonants. The guttural verbs
({ 63^5) are, therefore, only a varieQr of the Hra^ verb,
(b) When a stem-consonant {radtcal^ disappears by assimilation b
0 19, 3) or when the stem origtnaMy consisted of only two con-

sonants (verbs r^. V% and y% as i!^, S^, Op, 66^ 67, fs).
(c) When one of the stem-consonants (radicals) is a weak letter, e
In this case, through aphaeresis, elision, &c., of the weak consonant,
various devuuions from ihe regular form occur. Comp. 68 sc^c^. for
these ' quiescent' verbs, such as J<^9> '^??*
Taking ihe old pnrsdij^ fyB ns a model, it is nsn?'.l, following the example d
of the Jewish gxanimanîns, to call the first radical of any stem D, the s-econd 5,
and the third h. H- nee the expressioos, vtrh W'L for a verb whose first radical
is M 'ftrimcu ra.ii'.aiis, {sc. liierai] K) ; V'V for mediau rcuiiccUis \\ for
a verb whose secuud radical u rcpeateU so aA to form a third.
I. TbA StNNig Trb.

42.
A? th(? formntion of the strong verb is the model also for the wcnk vn-b, a state-
ni' Jit of the general formative 1a\v5 should precede the trcatmcnl of special cases.
i'aradigm H, together with the Table of the personal preiormatives and afibrina-
ttfcs shn b { 40. oflai & complete nnrqr ef mmml fiNms. ^

All A
cxplaiietloB of thca li gifcn fai flie ibilowiiig leedont (|| 43-95)i ^vlwie cwh
point is elucidated on Its first occurrence those, g. the inflexioQ of the Ftrfecti
^
;
the ImiNiiect and its nodificatiou^ will be fiMod under QMi
Digitized by Google
lao The Verb. [5 43-
A. The Puei Sna, or Qal.

4d. Its Form and Meaning.
a The common form of the 3rd sing. ma&c. of the Perfect Qal is i>95
with a (Pathah) in the second syllable, especially in transitive verbs

(but see { 44. r). There is also a fonn with i (ê, origmally I),
and another with 0 {ffolm, originally ) in the second syllable, both

of which, however, have almost always an miratuilwe* meaning, and
serve to eipiess states and qnalitieii e.g.*i33 io le ktavy^ t^tohe small.
In verb middlt At * verb wtiddle E, and a verb miidU 0 are
PandJgm B a
tccordiagly given ode by tide. The iceood ciampk *133 is choiea at iliowii^
at die same thne, when the tetu is to be iraerted or omitted.
b Rem. 1. The vowd is the pciadpal vowelt and hence

of the second syllable
on it depends the dbtinction between the transitive and intransitive meaning. The
Qames of the first syllable is lengthened from an original J (comp. in Arabic
i^d(dld), but it can be retained in Hebrew only immediately before the ttwe, or at
the most (with au open ultimo) in the cuunter*tonc with Metheg; otherwise, like
dl the pretoolc vowels (J, it becomes vocal ^wA^ e.g. Onbo^ and //air. etfir.
In, die Aramaic dialects Uie vowel of the fint sjrlhdiie is always lednoed to d*wi,
as TD^vHebr. Tfij^ The iatianiitive lamu axe pronoonced in Aialik as gnAtfUf,
qmaid; in Hebrew (after the rejection <if tiw final vowel) f in the tone-^llable
has been regularly lengthened to i, and 4I to
e a. Examples id denminatives in Qal are: U emurtM fUdk, from 1^
fittk; U taltt from salt; ISf^ (nnally ffi^^ taht^m sitt tarn, from
Mm; see abovc^ 1 38*
44. Fixion 0/ tht Per/ict 0/ Qal\
a L The foimation of the persons of the Perfect is effected by the

addition of certain forms of the perBon&l pionoon, and marks of the 3rd
fem.smg.and 3rd pl.(as afformoHves) to the ffôf the vezbal-stem, which
contains the idea of a predicate, and may be regarded, in meaning
if not in form, as a Participle or verbal adjective For the 3rd pers,
sing, masc. Fcrjeci^ ihe pronominal or subject idea inherent la liie
^ Bnt comp. ndi instanoes as Jcr. 48, 5. In Aiabic also^ transitive verba aie
found with middle comtponding to Hebrew verbs with ^ hi the second qrllaUe.
Hence P. Hanpt (^Proctiiiitft of tht Amtrifon Oritnlal Society, iSjMa F ^
prefers to distinguish them as veHm voluntaria and iiwoluntaria.
Comp. Noldcke, 'Die Endun^rii des I'criects fJJnUrsuihungtH hur umii, '
Cramm. //.) in ZDMC^ vol. 32*, p. 407 aqq.

s
(tetheoooaedonbetwasnlhsAyjfSitfaiidthessyAi/Ajfi^^ i$a9-o5o>^*
la intmasitivn verba they both hav oactly the same form, e.g. nj^ ki watjmtt
uAJkUs fbÂtwas small and smalt. In tiaaritivo vofaa the pailUpk "km
.A
Digitized by Google
hi was /mrnigi j Vftre /tarmg^^tH^ in\ The ending
of the i8t pers. plur. (^) is Just as certainly to be connected with
the teimination of uruK , The afformative of the ist pers. nng.
fi?) is to be referred, by an interchange of a and n (cf. 33 /)i
to that form of the pronoun which also underlies 1\ In the
/ht'rd person (origiiudly H--, comp. below, lelicr /) is a mark of
the feminine, as in a great number of nouns ( 80. c), and ^ is the
termination of the plural ;
comp., for the latter, the termination of
tlie 3rd and 2nd pers. plur. Imperl una in Arabic and (often also t^)
in Hebrew, also una (in the construct state as the termination

of the masc. plur. of nouns in literaiy Arabic
2* The characteristic Paiha^ of the second syllable becomes ^
before an afformative beginning with a vowel, where it would otherwise
stand in an open syllable (as f^^^?,, ^ÔP^ but in pause
Before an afformative beginning with a consonant the Pa/hah remains,
with Mtihtg of the counter tone in the Perf. consecutive^ comp. { 49. u
Rem. I. VeilM mUik S la Hebsew (ss la Ethiopie, bat not in Aiabie or C

Anunaic) generally change ^ E-woxA in their inflodoo into Paiha^ (freqnendy
so even in the 3rd sing. mate. Perf.). This tendency to assimilate to the more
common Tcrbs middle A may also be explained from the laws of vocalization
of the tone-bearing closed ^nultima, which does not readily admit of Sert^
and never of a ifireq^ of which the Sin it a lengthening (comp. f 36.
On the other hand, Sa^ is letained In an open qrlUble; rcgnlaily m in the
(I 74* bcfoie toffinet (f 59. t), nid la the pansal fonnt of

the strong etein in an open tooe-eyUshle, e.g. ^ ÂomAI, Job a9 10
(not n|^^)> oomp. % Sam. t, 35. Job 41, 15; even (oootrary to 1 19. in a timd
patual eyUabk^ e.g. Dent 33, ta (out of peaie Is. 3a, 16).
a difloent form (^^); but with ^QQ may be compared the nonn-form Ôj^, which
very fr^^qrently expresses an inherent qjWlitjr, as DS^ ^ MW, 3^ (prop.
bright yclloxo) gold. Comp. 84. a. IL 3.
' According to Noldeke, 1.L, p. 419, the original Semitic terroiaatiMi of the
1st ring. FerC was moat probably comp. the Ethiopic qaialku, Aiabie qaUUtu^
Kaldvj deehuea hiaaielf agabNt the interdmnge of 3 Md At in lis irrlSpUiriUs
dmpmfmi tiwUHqm (M^laqfei Rcnier, 1886^ pb 447 iq.)^
Digitized by Google
The Verb.
d a. In some weak stems middle the Pathal^ under the second radical soroe->
times, in a closed toneless tillable, becomes , and, in one example, r^. Thns
from th^ : m^y\ and tkm shUi fatsm if, Dent 17, 14 ; DTIKn^ Dent 19, i
DR^^^ Drat 4, 1, and frequently; from TtJ ^ bring ftrth^ to beget; 'J^PI']!*^
Fk. it 7(coropw Nam. xi, la ; Jer. a, 37. 15, 10) ; from IfNl ; QAC^ Md. 3, ao; from
S^; l^ribK^ IhoM asMkim, i Sun. x, ao (Jud. 1 3, 6). and fhfee ttnet DTlb^f^
I Siuoi, xa, 13. 5. Job ti, 39. Qimllpi alnady indicates the explazuttioa, that the
f (#) of diCR ibctnt of hllt^ ind th* it Uie edt^Bal
g^ne alto fend i>|^tiidB^(eee the Leikoo)i ThepQibiIityofthke]9lana-
tioo caimot be daiied (etpedallj in die cue of tea f 69, /) ! tiie f ill thcae fonw
might, however, eqnallj well have arisen from an attettwdoB of 4 ( 37. s), such
as must in nny case be asstimed in the other instances. Moreover, it h worthy
of notice that in all tliL' alu vc cnbce, ific / fnvotirrd by the character of the
following cousonaat [a. sibilant or imguai), and in most of them also by the
tendency towaida atrimihuion of the ?owdt (comp. { 54. k, and 64./).
e 3. In vtrbe mitUBi 0, the JffUgm it lelabed in the tone-syllable, e. g. jpi'^ tkm
dida inmHe; in /asM for ^^3^^ tk^ loen obit; bnt in a toneless closed
qrUatde the original thoit iwwel leappeaia in the fonn of a Qamei-baiuph
Vnba^ Ikmn frmmiUd i^thui ktm^ Fa. 13, 5 ; n^y^ (see k 49. k) tkm skalt
tkm be able, Ei. 18, 93; in a tcoeleat open qrllaUo it beoomet vocal J^wd, e.g,
t :lT> JIT*
y 4. Rarer forme* afe: Sig. 3rd /em. in (as in AraUo, Ethiopic, aal
Anunaic),e.g.nb]l< isgom^ Dcut. 32, 36 (but nnjf^JJ Is. 33, 15, which Qimbi
it
and othcn ao explain, la moie conectlj to be taken aa Fattidple) ; firoaa a verb

V*!^, cemp. { 7a. A Thia original lieQunine endfaig -ai ia tegvlarly tetaincd
Î^y
befene anffixea, aee { 59. 1, a; and timilarly in itenia heUk in the Ibnn Si
(which ia fieqnent alio in ttema I 74.^)aad alao with the AOM weakened
to fWM/jWbefete die pleonaitic ending nL^,e.g. nri^ f 75. ^ KaE8ek.3t,5
dke Aiamaic orthography, Mn3| ooewa inatead of nnajj,
g and aKOir. nn for ^ (êiii^ onlj orthognpliiGally), e.g. n^TpS tkm keui
dudi tnackemisly, Mai. a, 14 ; eomp. Gen. 3, la (iWI^ which is twice as common
as run3, comp. { 66. A) ; Gen. ai, a3. a Sam. a, a6. a Ki. 9, 3. It. a, 6. Vusj^ 9
(to also in HipJiU; a Ki. 9, 7. Is. 37, 23. Ps. 60, 4).
h andySm. luu aometimes a Yodh at the end, at hi ^J^3^n thou werUest^ Jer. 31, at
(comp. a, 33. 3, 4. 5. 46, II, especially common in Jeremiah, and E7.elc. 16; see,
howerer, Mic. 4, 13. Ruth 3, 3. 4). 'W^H is really intended, for the vowel signs
in the text belong to the marginal reading (without at in the conresponding
* Many of tiieae ferma, which are uncommon in Hebrew, are usual in the other
Semitic dialect*;, and mny, therefore, he called Aramaisms (Syriasms^ or Ambi<;ms.
Tiiey iimst not, however, be regarded at catet of borrowing, but as a return
to original forms.
* Where the Masora apparently regards the ^ri as the termination of the
and sui^. Jem., e. g. in Jer. a, ao (twice), Mic 4, 13, it haa rather tahan the font
{ 44-] Flexion of the Perfect of Qal. 123
^nt< (^RK) 32 h. The ordinary form has rejected the final j, but it regularly
reappears when pronominal suffixes are ndded ( 58. I, c).
\%i pers. comm. sometimes without Yo<ih, as Ps. 140, 13. Job 43, 2. 1 Ki. I
8, 48. Eick. 16, 59 (all in Knhtbh), Pa. 16, a without a Q're; KL 18, ao
in a
]ao niQM it ically iataDded, as appean from It. 36, 5. The Qf^ leqdtet
Ae evdinaij foim, to which the ?oweb of the text properly bdoof, whiltt tiie
XHhIUi it probably to be leginied the remains of an eadicr ofthogmphy, which

omitted vowel-letten even at the end of the word.
as the tennbririnn of the 2nd ffur. m. for DH F'cV. 31;, 26, might just k
jK^îbly be due to the following n (comp., for an analo^M us ci'^p, Mic. 3, la,
% B7. e)^ but is probably a copyist's error. Plur. and Jem. ai n^n 'according
to others TMV)-) Am. 4, 3, bnt since H follows, it it perhaps merely dae to
dittography ;
comp., however, rUi^|t $ 33. i.
3rd comm, iiat three times tlie termination jV; Dent 8, 3. 16 (each /
time before K, end hcnce> no donbt, if the test it correct, to avoid a hiatnt), end
in Ae still more donbtfU lonn It. s6 i( ; on in the Impeil tee 1 47. w
OD the dBxed M b Jos. lo, 24. It. aS, it, tee | S3.
As most Semitic languages (see 47. c, note), the 3rd fern. plur. in Hebrew
in W
teems originally to have been distinguished from the 3rd meuc. plur. by the
termination as in Biblical Aramaic Noldekc {ZDMG. 1884, p. 411)
referred doubtfully for this to the textual readings in Deut. 21, 7. Jos. 15, 4.
t8, la. 14. 19. Jer. a, 15. aa, 6, where the Meson vnifonnly inserts the terminer
tioa tf, as wdU at Gen.
48, 10 in die Samaritan Fentatewh, and Gen. 49, ts.
I Stm.4, 15. Ps. 18, 35. Neh. 13, 10. Mayer Lambert {Unt^ru de Qeri htHk,
Paris, 1891, p. 6 sqq.) definitely explains all these Knhlbh, as well as Ps. 73, a.
Jer. 50, 6 (?), and (against Noldeke) 1 Ki. 22, 49. T0I1 16, 16, also Jer. 48, 41.
51, 56. Ezck. 26, 3. Ps. 68, I4, as remains of the 3rd jcm. plur. in H. This
was abanduned as being indistinguishable from the (later) form of the 3rd /cm. sing.^
but tended to be retained in the perfect of verbs iY6, as n^n K*th(bh six times
in tlie above examples.
5. The elTonnatiTes n, (n), ^rt, V are gcnenOly tonelem, end the forms with n
these iailexiottt an consequently MitH (b|>6^ dee.) \ witb the other olTormativet
Ibey am MUrtt (f 15. r). The piece of tiie tone may, howewer, be thifted x
() by die fmtu (f S9, 4) whenever a vowd which hat become vocal S*wt under
the second stcoMoosonant it sestoied by the pauu: at n^^^ lor
for n^), and for (ttt% for VtjiO) ; () in certain cases after mto
<KMtwflnM of the Aig^ (tee 1 49b A).
as i&t ptrs. sing. (comp. Stade, Gramm. p. a53); so in Jud. 5, 7, where ^riDg^
on accoont of veiae la, atut either have otiginally been intended as and sing /em,,
er it doe to an emneoes pronandation of the form npp as DDg hutead of
'*
8idjA%>et.re^(asLXX).
' That these examples can hardly be referred to a primitive Semitic ending 4fS
has been shown by Ncikleke in the 7/>.1/f7 vol. 38, p. 409 sqq.
in the 3rd plur. Perf., ,
comp. also ZDAfG., vol. 32, p. 757 sq., where Ci. Hoffm uui proves that the tennina-
tioos in Aun of the 3rd plur. In Aramaic, formerly adduced by us, are secondary
fanna. [SeealaoDriTer, JSr#>*7hRWsr*, p. 6iMr.]
Digitized by Google
134 The Veiit.
<
0 6. Contraction of a final T\ with the Jl of the afformatiTe CKârs e. g. in "^TT^
Hag. 2, 5, &c.; of. Is. 14, 20, S^r. in the Pi rf. /VV/and Dent. 4, 25 in the J/iph'il
of nntT; Is. 21, 2, cSrc. in the Htph il ol n3K^. Contmction of a (uial 2 with the
afformative ^ occurs in Gen. 34, 16 ; in Niph. h/r 9, 7, comp 2 Chron. 14, 10

va.Uipk. aCbrou. 39, 19 ; with the afformative in the Impi-rfccl Chil Y.ixV. 17, 33;
Pi'elYi. 71, a^, where with Haer n3llPl is to be read, accordmtj to others Hî'U'l
(comp. in Pil. nSSipfl Eztk. 32, r6), but certainly not ^33'^n with the Manttia
ed., Opitios and Haim ; with in the Imperat, Hiph. Gen. 4, 33. Is. 33, 9.
45. TTu InfirUtwe.
a 1. The Infinitive is represented in Hebrew by two forms, a shorter
and a longer ; both are, however, strictly speaking, independent nouns

(verbal subslaniives). The shorter form, the Infinitive consiruet (in Qai
sometimes inconectly ^(), is used in veiy various ways, some*
times in connexion with pronominal suffixes, or goveining a substantive
in the genitive, or with an accusative of the object (f 115)^ sometimes
In connexion with prepositions to kill, i ia /)* and sometimes
in dependence upon substantives as gienitive, or upon verbs as accu-
sative of the object. On the oiher hand, tlic use of the longer form,
the Infinitive absolute (in Qal sometimes also ^b^), is restricted
to those cases in which it emphasizes the abstract verbal idea, without

regard to the subject or object of the action. It stands most frequently
as an adverbial accusative along with a finite verb of the same stem
(see further 113, a)*.
h The flexibility and versatility of the Infin. constr. and the rigidity
and inflexibility of the Infln. absoL are reflected in their vocalisation*
The hitter has unchangeable vowelsi while the 9 of the Infin. oonstr.
may be lost For bbjp, according to 93. t, goes back to the gnwuuk
form qutl {qotl)] hence e. g. wiA a suffix, '(jDI? ^^/Vi, my killing,
C Other forms oi the Infin. con.'^tr. Qal of the strong verb are
(fl) ^Dp, e.g. 12t5 to lie. flcn. 34, 7; ^DC^ to sink, Eccles. 12, 4; espedally
with verbs which have 4 in the fiecood syllable of the Imperil : hence sometime*
witfi thme^ wIiom second or thiid ndicil is a guttural (freqnentlj betides dw
Ofdiaaxy fom). All the euinples (escqit 'S^, see above) occur in the closest
conneiloo widi die folloiriBg word, or with snfilxc* (see 61. <). In Ecdu ai> 33
* Comp. the analogoQs forms of the nooil, f 93>

* The terms ahschtte and constntct are of cour?e not to be un 'prstood as
implying that the Tnfia. constr. forms the constnut state (see 8y) of the
lufia. absol. I,^t2|5 groond-form fdtdt). In the ParadiiTns the /nf. cmstr., as the
principal form, is placed before the other, tmder the &ame oi inhoiiive simply.
Digitized by Google
4^0 The Imperative. 125
the Masora seems to treat rDo!) (verae 20, in pome rDo!>) as an Infmiuve rtnoj'
probably rOO^ should be read.
ifi) n^D^ and, attenuated from it, n^>Dj^; H^P^ and HÔ^ (which are feminine d
ibnni' of and i>b^, mostly from intransitive verbs, and sometimes found
along with Ibrms hvAng no femtoine coding In vte), e.g. n^p^!) to be guilty
Lev. 5, s6, rnnK haU; nbn^b, often in Deat//^ >xr;

tme, to
JS9 V; nini? /< MMf (in fVC^ I 19. i); n^^nh il9 aSMP% Lev. ao, 16
nr^b Iff tfiMMi/, Ex. ap, 39; nVT)!) to mvA, Ex, ao 18, ace.; ilM^^ (ntio
asabit. MMiMftMiMwiVy like l^tDOX Ar iMtfAmi Lev. 15, 3a ; TST^ afprmeh^
Ex. 36, 3 and elsewhere; comp. Deut it, 32. Is. 30, 19. Ezeic ai, 16. Hag. l6;
also ni3rn hefaroff^ Ezclt ^ 6f ,
A Ezck. 16. 5; comp. Hos. 7, 4.
On the other hand in Gen. 19, the origiiutl A hu been modified to /;

comp. ni^TH Is. 8, 1 1 and elsewhere.
(c) In the Aramaic manner (^DpO but cf. also Arab. ntaqiaF), there occur as g
Tnjin. Qal: KniO /c? cast mt^ Erek. 36, 5 ; tyhf^ to send, Est. 9, 19 ; fcOpO to call
and yop /<? depart, Nam, 10, a (Deut. 10, II) ;

n[510 /a take, 2 Chron. iq, 7 and
elsewhere; cany, Num. 4, 24 and elsewhere (comp. even n'iSi>'pl? K^ck.
17, 9) ; also with a feminine ending to go Ezr. 7, 9, &c.; comp. for these
forms (almost all very late) Ryssel, De EUhistat FtiUaUtukki strwMH, p. 50,
mul Stxnck in liia Commmkuy en Num. 4, 94.
2. A kind of Gerund is formed by the Injin. constr. with the prepo-

J
sluon J);
asibj?i a</ mkrfictendumt ad cadendum (see a 8. a).
Tbe MrnWf of Ae b with the Ii^Sm, ttmtr. into a dngle grammatiad form ^
seems to be indicated by the firmly closed comp. SJ^j' Gen. 34 7;
syllable,
Pi. 118, 13, with DagtS kite in the ^^lin-pol; hence, also liq-{olt &e.J
bat ^^33 biffphdl. Job 4, 13 i ^bS^ a Sam. 3, 34. Exceptiooa lb^|> Num. 4, 33.
8, a4; Jer. i, la 18, 7. 31, a8; T^frj) Jer. 47, 4; ntopi Jer.
ti, 19, ftc Fa. 37, 14 ; according to aome also ailf Num. ax, 4 and ISb9f>
a Chroo. a8, 10 (Baer on tlie oontxmry Gen, 35, aa; Jer. 17, a.
For the mraninglcn Ear. 10^ j6 read IBh*p.
{ 46. ImperaHve,
is
L The
for an
grotrnd-fonns of fhe Imperative,
original g&tiil), and ^Dp
^
(see below, letter
(properly //iS/, which
the same in
pronunciation as the forms of the Inliii. constr. ( 45), are also the
basis for the formation of the Imperfect ( 47)'. They represent
* Aecoiding to tlie lemafk of Eliaa Leviia in Qimhi's MWkM, cd. Rlttenl ., 1 4 a,

tbeae feminine forms ocenr alaaoat exdni^Tely in ooonexion with the preposition |>.
" The Itffim. oAm/., lilce the On^

Infin., i also aometlmes naed for the
Impentive ( 1 23. M). Comp. in geoeial, Kodi, Z>r smiiiuke I$tf, (Schaihattaen,
1874).
Digitized by Google
126 The Verb,
the mmii perK>ii and have both iem. and plw. forms. The third
person is supplied by the Imperfect in the Jussive ( 109. and
even the second person must always be expressed by the Jussive,
if it be used with a negative, e.g. ^b^R'îS m occidas (not ^Sp"^).
The passives have no Imperative, but it occurs in the reflexives,
as Niph'al and Hifhpa'eP.
b 2. The Afformatives of the 2nd sing. fern, and the znd plur. mate.
and fern, are identical in every case with those of the Imperfect ( 47. a).
In the same way, the Imperative of the anif nng* mate^ in common
with the Impeifect, admits of the lengthening bj the parageg&tm
({ 48. 1}, as, on the other liandi there are certain shortened fonns
of this person analogous to the Jussive (f 48. 5).
C Rem. I. Instead of the form ^Dp (sometimes nlsn ph-nr, c. g. liD^ Ecclcs. I a, 131
before Naqqeph "i'Dp with Qanui-haiuph) , ihrsc vcibs which have an a in the
final syllable of iht Imf>erf. (i.e. especially virl s n i !<lle ?) make their Imperative
of the form ^D^, c. g. arcssl iî cri. UQ^ and ;
33^ I Sam. 3, 5. 6. 9.
. The fint tytkble of fte dag. fern, aad |dar. bikl tie asntUy to be
pronomeed with meOnm (fifit, flfHt, and 10 ÔOf, ftc. witfaoot IMga Urn,
end even with MOktg, 1: za, ai ; bet oompaie ^feDII Jer. 10^ 17, and with
the aune phonetic comhination ^fibn U. 47* a } see aaalocotta cases in 1 93. as);
Icaa fieqoently we 6nd aa S inatead of die e. g. rtdi, Jod. 9, lo;
dnw, Ez. 3a, so; KTf^ Jer. s, is (coinp. Is. 44, S7); oa i San. s8,
(tri; 1^ Jcr. aa, so (oomp. i Ki. 13, 7), see f 10. Tbia 9 axiaea (aee abowe,
letter a) from a singular ground-form qHtHl, not from a retraction of the original A
of the second syllable. We mast abandon the view that the forms with t in the
first syllable (cf. also ^^DK, *^3n^ '**?-V^
i-xi<ic from a weakening of the
characteristic vowel d. They, or at lea^t some of them, must rather be rcganled
with Baith ZDMG. 1889, p. 18a) as analogous to the original r-im|>erfect&. See
further analogies in 47. i and 48. </ 61. 63. ,
The pausal Ibna of the sad plor. niaac ia i KL 3* a6; fion PPjf^,
^yi^, acc; similarly the and alflg. feai. ia /saw ik nH^ Is. 33, 12; ena without
the pa$$te '3^^ Jod. 9, la la, Ar*M.; i SaoL t% 8, XUh. (comp.withtfaiB
also n3i^ &c, f 48. 1) ; from nob, "'vSff Joel a, ai.
/ 3. Ia the sad plur. ftm. ^fP^ oocu* OMe in Gca. 4, a3 (for n^fPfO with leas
of the Hl^ and iaicrtioa of a hclpiog vowel, nnleaa it la aimplf to be poiated
,\T^* Alao inatead of the abaofaial ^K")^ Ex. s, so (for ruin^) we Shonld
perhaps read aa la Ruth i, 30 J^n^ (comp.,|Mytp t| 9 aad ,f3^ i, la).
In Hoph'cil ralivr fovmd only twice Êxck. 33, 19. Jcf.

49, 8}, a&d
' ail Iriij 15
cio^ly appru&imatiog in mcarung to tlie redciivc
Digitized by.CQ0gIe
470 Imperfect and its Injlexion. 127
47. The Imperfect and its Injiexion.
1. The persons of the Imperfect \ in contra-distinction to those a

of the Perfect, are formed by placing abbreviated fonns of the personal
pronoun (prefonnatives) Ufort the stem, or rather before the abstract
fonn of the stem (Ha^. As, however, the tone is retained on the
characteristic vowel of the Stem-form, or even (as m the %nd sing./m*
and the yd and tnd fbtr* sioir.) passes over to the aflbrmatives, the
preformatives of the Imperfect appear in a much more abbreviated
form than the afformatives of the Perfect, only one consonant
remaining in each form. But as this preformative united to the stem-
forra was not always sufficient to express at the same time differences
both of gender and number, the distinction had to be indicated, in

several cases, by special aJfwrmaHves. Comp. the Table, 40. r.
fl. The derivation and meaning, both of the preformatives and the b
afformatives, can still, in most casea^ be lecognised
In the firH peis. ^^99^, pltir. ^fa^, M is probably connected with
and ^ vritfa ; here no indication of gender or number by
a special ending was necessary. As regards the vocalization, the
' On the ate <tf tlie Semitic Perfect and Imperfect cf. io6 sqq. ami the
litmtme died in 1 For onr present pnipoie the following acoount will
niffioe:~Tlie naaie Im^trftct it here vied in direct opporition to the Fetfect,
and k to be taken in a wider sense than in Latin and Greek gnunmar. The
Hebrew (Semitic) Petf. denotes in j^wienil that which is comltuied, completi J,
and pastf that which has happened nnd has come into effect; but at the same
time, also that which is represented ab accomplished, even though it be continued
into present time or evai be aetoally still ftitofe. The Imperf. denotes, on tiie
odier the ^^wMmy, Ae mi^ltiuJUd, end the tÛiimit^t diat wluch ie jtvt
happening, whidi it conceived as in process of coodiig to pen, end heno^ also,
that which is yet future ; likewise also that which occurs repeatedly or in
a continuous sequence in the past (Latin Imperf.). It follows from the above
that the once common designation of the Imperf. as a fulure emphasizes only
OH side of its meaning. In fact, the use of Indo>Gennanic tense-names for the
wts adopted ly the SyMaaader the infhieace of tlie Greek
Semitic tensca, wliidli
gnmmariaBa, and after their example by the Aiahe and finally by Jewish sdioUoa,
has involved many misconceptions. The Indo-Germanic scheme of three periods
of time (past, present, and future) is entirely foreign to the Semitic tense-idea,
wlui^h rc{Tards an occurrence only from th'.' ]v; mt of view of compktcl or incom-
plete aciiuu. III the formation oi Uie two tenses the primary ciisiinctiuu is that
in the Perfect tlie verbal stem preecdea and the indication of tibe penon it added
afterwards for predsion, while in the Imperl the sntgectf from vdiidi the action
ptooMda or ahont wbldh a condition is predicated, is expressed hy a prefixed
pranoiin*
Digili^ca by Google
128 The Verb.
Arabic points to the ground-forms SqliU and nîiU: the IT of the
ist plur. is, therefore, as in the other preformativesi attenuated from a.
The .S^^M of the ist sing, is probably to be explained by the pre*

fcrcnce of the K for this sound (comp. ^22.0, also 51. /) ; according
to Qimhi, it arises from an endeavour to avoid the similarity of sound
between (which is the Babylonian punctuation) and which,
according to this view, was likewise pronounced iqtdl^,
c The preformative n of the second persons (ôî?, ground-form

a^fiUf &c.) is, without doubt, connected with the n of nriK, DW, &c.,
and the ânmUm V of the and fern. sing, ^j^p^ with the i of the
original feminine form (see { 3a. 4). The affarmaiwe ^ of the
and masc plur. Ôi^ (in its more complete fonn, see Rem. 4)
is the sign of the plural, as in the 3rd pers., and also in the Perfect
( 44. /). In the Imperfect, however, it is restricted in both persons
to the masculine^, while the alTormative '"13

(also J) of the 3rd and
and plur. fern, is probably connected with nan ea and ^371^ vos (fern.).
d The prcformatives of the Ihi'rd persons in the masc. ^Î^V,

ground-form ^'Jy////, plur. ^^Ô?*' ZôimdAonn ydqtiHH ; n in the fern,
^'î?'!^, plur. nj!)'^) have not yet met with any satisfactory explanation.
With t\ might most obviously be compared the original feminine
' Compue I 94* #. Bi fftfoor of the above view of Qiii44 ib^T be aiged the
phonetic orthography {{^ Prov. 18, ^4 C^M), a Sam. 14, 19. Hie. 6, 10^
for C';;, and I Chron. a, 13 for ^ (m verse i .> Also n3]n Mie. 6, 11
is probably for '|Kn ='|^n, npBK Is. 10, la for n{?D^ ;

'yOlCm Is. 51, 19 for -icnj';
and conversely (according to Wcllbax!S'?n. Text Jcr BB. Sam. p. 5) "^SCf^ was
written for . Similarly. ^"SU" i Sam. ]
4, 49 is probably for V^K or H'w'N
in 2 Sam. 83, 8 fD^S 38'* is, according to the LXX, an error for ntJ'DC^ ^ DtJQB'iji.
In Assyrian also the simple t corresponds to the Hebrew ^ as the preiornuUa>w
of the Impf. QaL
* Ûi is alio the proper gender of Ae plttml ajrllable 4, In Hebfew,
certaialy, it b tuted in the 3id plur. Perfect for both genders, bnt la the Idndnd
languages only for the masculine, e g. in Syriac ^tdlti, g'tdZ/in, with the fi minine
form ,ftdh'n. in Western Ammnic ^{jUA^ fcm. g*l4id; in Arabic îUUA, fem.
qdtiilttJ, Llhiopic qi)tMil, ifHtaid.
' The usual derivation of the ^ from the \ of the pronoun KVl, comparing
for sen {% 69), haalMk in its favour, anddoet not eiqdain die Vtdh pn/omuh
Hm of the plnral. Rodiger coDjectoied that there formerly eidsted a oomepondfaig
prooonnof the 3rd pers. (>f), and compared the Amharic yfh (tbU) moAya (who>,
on the assumption that these are old Semitic forms. It is desemng of notice,
moreover, that in Arabic and Western Aramaic Kmi| abo appears as the prefoma*
tive of the jid Jem. plur. (see below, letter k).
Digitized by Cangle
47 ] The Imperfect and its Inflexion, 129
ending n_ of nouns, and of the 3rd fem. sing, perfect. For the
afformalives ^ (1^) and see letter c.
3. The characlerisiic vowel of the second syllable becomes S^wd e

before tone-bearing afiformalives which begin with a vowel, but is
retained (as being in the tone-syllable) before the toneless afformative
nj. Thus : ^jibp?, tfpp, iJi)?n (but in pomu &c.). "jj^sp?-
Rem. I. The ; of the leeoiid syllable (at in the iaf* eoMtr. aad imper.), bdng f
tengtliened from an original dl in the tone-ayllable, is only tone^loag ({ r).
Hence it follows that : (a) it is only incorrectly^ although somewhat fteqacntlyy
written pUne; h before Maqqfph the short vowel reappears as Qamfs-hafuph,
eg. DC^SJI-M and he -Mrote there, Jos. 8, 32 (but compare also Kx. 21, 37. Jos.
l?^,20^; (< ; it becomes S'xi'A before the i one- bearing afTormatives ^ aiul ^ (see
above, No. 3 ; but Jerome still heard e.g. ie^bukni *3!^3r; cf- 7.A W. iv. 83).
Quite anomalous are the three examples which, instead of a shortening to iîvd^ g
eihibita long u: DH !DttB^ Ex. 18, 26, immediatdy befoire die principal paase,
but according to Qirahi (cd. RUtiiA, p. 18^, and against our editions, with the
tone on the vltima; lUcewise n^p ^^.^SI^H'^^ Ruth a, 8; DnVOC^n (in prindpnl
paase) Prov. 14* 3. In the iirst two ms 'perhaps %))Bf^ and n^]jn (for
&c.) arc intended, in virtue of a retrogressive effect of the panse while in Ptov.X4,
OnpC'r) is to be read, with Angnst Miiller.
The (" of the seoom! ivlliMe is to be fonnd almost exclusively with verbs miiUle h
a, like bt3ij. latransitivcs middle a and t almost alwnrs keep d {^Fathah) ^, in the
impf., e.g. to iotuh, 228^. 328^^ to lie dr^'ti (ôb, Td!>^ to ham is
also originally intransitive to aitustom oueu-lf \ ^1S, ^"^^ to hecome gr eai [yj\x\.
comp. ISC' and \y<S imperf. pC'^ to dwell and to inhabit, imperf.
U witker) ; also fiom verbs mid0e <?, as jb^ to h$ small, the imperf. Ins the form
Sometimes both forms occur together ; those widk 9 having a transitivei and i
tiaose with d sa iatrsnntive mesning^ e.g. he aUs nff, A* u atl^thte.
it tktrt; impf. 8, t mferramt, Ea. 17, 15 ; impf. d,lie ovenme. Job 14* 10,
More rsrdy both forms are used without any distinction, e.g. Hfh and ^8^
ke kites y ân* and )bn* he is ine lined (but only the latter with a transitive
meaning - he bends, in Job 40, 17). On the a of the impf. of verbs micUlIe and
third guttural, comp. 64. b ; 65. In some verbs first guttural \% 63. n),
y"V 5 ^'7 /\ "''D ( 69. I^, anil K"B ( 68. 1 \ and in yinten from jn3 ta^ve,
instead of dl or ^ a moveable Sere (originally / is found in the second syllable.
A traee of these f-impeifects' in the oidinaiy strong verb is probably to be fonnd in
Xtaa^ i Ki. 7,8, since fOD othenrise only oecnrs in Qal. We call these three
forms of the imperfect after dietr diarsctctistie vowel impH ,

impf. , impf. e.
* This S is, however, by no mesns restricted to intmnsitives in tlie strong verb

apart from verbs third gattnat (| 65.
many verbs K"D and ^"D (SJ 69-71).
it la to be fonnd in ^ and T'Vt and in
* Cf. Barth, * Dm f-Imperfekt im Noidscmitischcn/ ZJ)JifG. 1889, p. 177 iqq.
Digitized by Google
igo The Verb, [47.
k 3. For die 3id mg,fm* (-/^f^ Beer leqeiiee bt Seni. 35, eo C^lfin
(leed with ed. Meat. fte. BÎ|pA).* For tlie and nmg.fim, cJ>D^) the foim
i foend b If. 17, 8. Jer. 3, $. Eedk. sa, 4. a3i 321 in every case after the regular
form; bnt cf. alw Ezek. e6> 14. F< the 3rd flur.fem. n^J>D^ we find in Jer.
49t ir, b panae VIDaPI (for nSHDan), and thiioe (aa If to diartogeidi it 60m the
and pe>.) the form n3>b^ with the prefofmatiTe * (at always in Western Aram.,
Arab., Eth., and Asejr.), in Gen. 30, 38. 1 Sam. 6, i. Dan. 8, 22. On the other
hand* Hjilta^ appeals in fome eases to have been inconectly need even for the
fern, of the 3id peis. or for the maicof the and pers. si$tg. as njUl^^ Jod. 5, s6,
where, however, peihape n|n^f^ is to be read, and Obad. 13, for and sing, roasc,
according to Olsliansen a OMmiption of H^ri ; comp. Prov. i, 20. 8, 3. In Ex.
Ii 10 read \3N^pri; in Is. 37, 11. 28, 3, as also in Job 17, 16, it is equally possible
to explain the form as a plural. This small nnmber of examples hardly justifies
our finding in the above-mentioned passages the remains of an emphatic iurm of
the Impf., analogous to the Arab. AMus fturgkus /, with the termioatioo JFimJ.
/ For we fireqnently find, especially b the Pentateuch and mostly after wim
cfiMsecutwe (see f 49. a), simply 4 mi, e.g. Gen. 19* 33. 36. 37, 7. Ex. 1, 18. 19.
I5p so. Nam, 13, a. Eaek. 3, ao. 16, 55 ; b Arab, alwaya ni. Aoooidiiig to Elias
Levita, ,|f^!lA (a Sam. 13, 18) is the only example of titis kbd b the strong verb.
The form nj^âani (so both Qbihi and ed. Mant.; bnt Beer n^roavn) for T^roani
tMiy icwrr kig/k, Esdc. 1$, 50, is irregnlar* with insetted after tibe manner of
verbs V"V and W, i 67. d; { 7s. i; nccofdbg to Olshaasen it is an error cansed
by the following fonn.
m 4. Instead of the plural forms in ^ there aie, especially in the older

Books, over 300 forms' with the fiiller ending p (with Niin parogiiî'
cum), always bearing ihc tone; compare 29. aiul 44. /; on its
retention before suffixes 60 c; also defectively l^'T. Ex. 21, 18.
22, 8, Sec. This usually e.xpresses marked emphasis, and consc-

qtiendy occurs most commonly at the end of sentences (in the
principal pause), in which case also the (pausal) vowel of the second
syllable is generally retained. Thus there arise full-sounding fonns

such as ihey coUtei, Ps. S04, zZ ;
{VIT (hey iremhk, x. 15, 14
JVtff^ ye thall httir^ Deut. i, 17; comp. Jos. 24, 15, widi SegoUa;
Is. 17, IS twice, in veise 13 wldi Zaqeph qaiw^ 41, 5 after wOw c9mt.
Without the pause, e.g. Fs. 11, a Ff^ f^lT. comp. 4, 3. (Sen.
18, 28. 29. 30 sqq. 44, 1. Jos. 4. 6 (i^^^r^) ; Is. 8, 12. i Sam, 9, 13.
Kuih 1, (J
(pnyp* and |^^); Jud. 1 1, 18 after zvaw constc.
Some of these examples may be partly due to euphonic law<5, e.g. certainly
Ex. 17, 5. Num. 16, 39. 3a, 30. I 5am. 9, 13. 1 Ki. 9, 6, and often, to avoid
' See details in Bottchcr, j^ô; aad ct DriTcr 00 i bam. 2, ij^J
Digitized by Google
$ 48.] Shortening and Lengthening ofImperfect, 131
a hiatu befoie II or y. It was, however, the pane espedaUy iriikh eaerted an
inflaeoce on the restoration of this older and fuller termination (cfl | I$9>î note),
as U manifest from Is. 36, ii : ^TH^ ^^^^tn^'â lA^f see met; may they see
and hccc>me ashamed. .All this applies also to the corresponding forms in the
Imj><."rfect of the derived conjugations'. In Aramaic and Arabic this earlier |^
(old Arabic ^nd) L the regular tenniaatioa ; but in some dialects of vulgar Arabic
it has also become &.
With an affiaed K we find (in the impeif. Klph'al) K^r Jer. 10, 5, evidently n
an cftor for ^cb'S^ , earned bjthe pieaedfaig tCfiEf}.In 04B^ It. 35 i, the endbig
P is dianged into fill hefote die foUowing D.

5. Coxxesponding to the nse of |1 for ^ there oocnn in the and eing. &.> O
alAoagh amda lees frequently, tlie fidler ending (aa in Aram, and Arab. ; old
Arab. fwJ), always with the tone, for generally again in the principal pause,
and almost in all cases w ith retention of the vowel of the penaltima; thus ^S^^
Ruth 2, 8. 31, cf. 3,4. 18. I Sam. i, 14 (P'lSiriB^ri). Jer. 31, aa. Is. 45, to.
6, On the reappearance in pause of the ^ which hiid ^)ccomc ti^zvA in the forms
p
*bpprij i-vc, see above, letter e ; similarly, the iinpt rk-cis wilh <f restore this vowel
in pause and at the same time lengthen it (as a tone-vowel) to a, hence, e.g.
îl^nn This infloence of flie paase extends even to the foems withoot
afibnnatives, e. g. in pause . Only the folkr forms in I0if and Iff have
tiie tone always on the nltlma, since the vowds A and (Tin a dosed final syllaUe
never allow of the lettaction of tiie tone.
{ 48. ShrUning und Lengthmmg of the Imperfect and ImperaHot*

The Jussive and Cohorlaiive,
I. Certain modifications which take phce in the fonn of the a

imi>erfect, and express invariably, or nearly so, a distinct shade of
meaning, serve to some extent as a compensation for the want of special
forms for the Tempara relativa wA for certain moods of the verb.
8. Along with the usual form of the imperfect, there exists also b
a lenfîhcncd form of it (the cohoi tuln e), and a shortened form (the
j'ussivt)*. The former occurs (with few exceptions) only in the 1st
person, while the latter is mostly found in the 2nd and 3rd persons, and
less frequently in the ist person. The laws of the tone, however, and
of the formation of syllables in Hebrew, not infrequently precluded

the indication of the jussive by an actual shortening of the form;
^ It is to be observed that the Chronicles often omit the AUn, where it is found
in the parallel passage in the Books of Kings ; comp. 1 Ki.8, 38.43with aChton.
6, S9k $}; X KL IS, S4. a KL 11, 5 with a Chroo. 11, 4. s$,4.
* The perfect has only otu form, since it cannot be naed, like tiie imperfect,
to cgqêess mood-ieiatioos (see f xo6w/).
X 2
Digitized by Google
13a The Verb.
consequently it often and, in the imperfect forms with atTonnatives,
alwayscoincides with the ordinary imperfect (indtcaiive) form.
In classical Anibtc tiie difference b almost alwayi erident. That language

distinguishes, besides the incHcative ydqfulu, {a) a snbjnnctive, yHqtUlA ; {b)
a jussive, ytiqtul; (c) a double 'energetic' mood of the impf., yifqttlhfnnS and
yiqtaiAn^ in pause ydqtuid, the last form thus corresponding to the Hebrew
cohoitative.
e d. The characteristic of the cohortative form consists in a long

affixed to the ist pers. sing; or plur., e.g. nô^ from ^^31^^ It
occurs in almost all conjugations and classes of the strong and weak
verb (except of course in the passives), and this final has the tone
wherever the afibmatives ^ and ^ would have it As before these
endings, so also before the n__ cohortative, the moveable vowel of the
list syllable of the verbal form becomes S^wd, e.g. in Qal *V(Od^
I will observf, in Pi'el id us break asunder, Ps. 2, 3 ; on 'l^P.^*'^
Is. 18, 4 (comp. al>o 27,4. Ezr, 8, 25, &c.>, see 10. //
, ^îth
the KUhibh of these passages, compare the analogous cases iD^Bb*,
Ac., 47* ^* On the other band, an unchangeable vowel in the final
syllable is retained as tone-vowel before the as (e.g.) in Hiph.

nnâpt / unU praise. Finally (as before 4 and /), the vowel which
became S^wd is restored in pause as tone-vowel ; thus for the cohorta-
tive n'jDB'K the pausal form is 'i"^'^^^, Ps. 59, 10; comp. Gen.
18, 21. Is. 41, 36.
flf The change of H into the obtuse n seems to occur m i Sam. jS, 15,
with Nestle, we
ualess, are to assume a blendinj,' of readings, X'î'KI and nipitl
j
and with the 3rd pers. Ps. ao, 4, in a syllable sharpened by a following Dagel J&rte
tofijunct.
; compare limilur caiet of flw dunge of into the obtuse H n_
\n%9o,d; perhaps, howevefi njfN^with snflBxn lather {ntended. An
cohort, it also found wiUi the aid pen. in 19 (twice); Eiek. as, ao, aad
Is. 5,
again in vene t6 acooiding to the (fri, bat in both these caaea without any
influence on the meaning, as also Prov. i, 30 and 8, 3 ; see above, 47.
<
Probably another instance occurs in Job li, 17, although there HEI^FI might also,
with Qimbi, be icgarded as and maa& The doubly inegnlar form rtfUtlan
Beat 33, 16 (for ntCDTI * ttSPi) is to be explained with Olshanaen and Kon^
as a scribal error, due to a confusion with AK^JT) in verse 14. For ^nNlsn
Job 71, 31 the noon ^0X^311 MiW increase, mipht be meant, but the Masora
has evidentlj intended an imperfect with the ending a/, instead of H- before the
'
Probably this J is abridged from the syllable ati, which in Arabic w nhove,
Kem. to letter &) is used for the furmation of the energetic '
' muuu, axui in
Hebrew (see the foot>aote to 58. often ttaadt before saflKiea.
i*}
4^0 ShorUning and Lengthening oj Imperfect. 133
suffix ; on the analogy of the 3rd sing. fem. pedSect, see 59. 1, a; on ^nt<Jr>1
1 Sam. 25, 34, see i 76.^.
The tahorUUive expresses the direction of the will to an action and g

thus denotes especially sdf-encouragement (in the ist plur. an
ekbottation to others at the same time), a resolution or a wish, as
an Ac, see } 108.
4. The general characteristic of the jusswe form of the imperfect /
is rapidity of pronunciation, combined with a tendency to retract'
the lone from the linal bvllable, in order by that nicaus to express
the urgency of the command in the very first syllable. This

tendency has, in certain forms, even caused a material sliorteninc^ of
the termination of the word, so that the expression of the command
appears to be concentrated on a single syllable. In other cases,
however, the jussive is simply marked by a shortening of the vowel of
the second syllable, without its losing the tone, and very frequently
(see above, letter h) the nature of the fona does not admit of any
alteration. It is not impossible, however, that even in such cases the
jussive in the living language was distinguished from the indicative by
a change in the place of the tone.
In the strong verb the jussive dilTerh in form from the indicalive
^
only m Hiph'il (juss. i*??!, ind. and similarly in the weak verb,
wherever the imperfect indicative has ( in the second syllable, e. g.
from 3?^ impf. Hiph. juss. 3?'^'; from n^D, n^p) and no*; also
in Qal of the verbs ^''V and ^'P, as nfaj, ind. r\'KtT^\ ind. ; in all
conjugations of verbs n^'^, so that the rejection {îôpi) of the ending

1. in QtU and Hiph, gives rise to monosyllabic forms, with or
without a helping vowel under the second radical, e.g. Qfll ind.
juss. i^!; Hiph. ind. n^^:, juss. i>3;; also in the PCil VS[ from the
indie, rns^ (called the apocopated imperfects). But even so almost all'
the plural forms of the jussive coincide with those of the indicative,
except that the jussive excludes the lengthened ending p. Neither do
' According to I'laetorias, however {ZAW. 1885, p. 14 tiq.), those cases in

which the penultima of the jussive, or of the imperfect coasecntiTe (see } 49. a)
besn the tone, we nndvah of the oideit Hebnw tooe-igrsleni ; see notce on
1 44.4*,and 1 75. 44.

* Only ia irt plor. do we find ft few iboftened ibnn, as *1ftfb 1 Sun. 14, 36,
pninlkl witfacoliortntlvet; and Klj Is. 41, 23 AVI.
Digitized
134 The Verb. [48.
the forms of the 2nd sincr. fern., as ,

&c., admit of
any change in the jussive, nor any forms of the singular or plural
<
to \vhich suffixes are attached, e,g. as ind. Jer. 38, i5 as
jussive Jer. 41, 8.
k The meaxiing of tbis fonn Is similar to that of the cohortative,

except that in the jussive the command or vish is limited almost
exclusively to the snd or 3rd pers. On special uses of the jussive,
e.g. in hypotbetica] sentences (even in the xst pers.), see 109. a.
I 6. The imperative, in accordance with its other points of connexion

with the imperfect in form and meaning, admits of a similar lengthening
(by n -_, Arab. impa-. mergii us, with the ending -Cvwa or -an, in pause
-a) and shortening. Thus in Qal of the strong verb, the lengthened
form of "^bB^ gmtd is nnDB'i {^shifnt, comp. ^f^cp q)rii,
46. rf);
^> n3]^ Jer. 49, ti ; , iUSIB^ lu dawn; POf, ri^^B^ hear, in lesser
pause Dan. 9, 19. Comp., however, also rri?9 ffU, Gen. 35, 31,
notwithstanding the impf. ;
Tîsrjf Job 5 (comp.
33, ^9 Jer. 46, 3),
but impf. ^y^. ',
"99if coUecii Num. 11, 16 (for 'Pit comp. 03. / and

the plural but and xnasc. ÎDK; rnw Ps. 141,3. Barth (see
above, 47. ^ note) finds in these forms a trace of old imperfects in 1',
cf. 63. n. On the other hand, n3"]5 Ps. 69, 9, but imj)f. ^"j^,.
Without we have the form go, Num. 23. 13. Jud, 19, 13. The
form i'b^ in pause beconies the form becomes i^^C?, e.g.
iT\un and nja"] (in both cases with ^'tp/tha) Is. 32, 11; nisnj Deut.
33* S3* But also without the pause we find Is. 3a, 11;
Jud. 9, 8 JP/k, and Ps 26, a on which see { 46. 4.
k The shortened imperative is found only in verbs tC^, e.g. in Pi*il

^ from n^. The ahadb of meaning conveyed by the imperatives
with n_, is not always so perceptible as in the cohortative forms of the
imperfect, but ilie longer form is frequently emphatic, e.g. D^* rise up,
up 1 \^ give, n3J^ give up !
I Rem. The form for n>n. .iccepttd in Prov. 24, 14 by the best luthoritiM,
is evidently flue to the innutnce of the H '7/(5 which follows it in close connexion,
and is therefore analogoaia to the cases discussed in as. c, and % 37. d, of an a
passing into S'^hdl ; for other eumplcs of the kind, see ftbove, letter </, % 73. d,
and { 80. '. On tho otber hand, it Is donbtfiil whether na'l Jb<1- 9> 39 (fifom
' On the reading (i.e. Samara, according to the Jewish grammar;n:i>\
required by the Muoia b Ps.86, a. 119, 167 (cf. also Is. 38, 14, and ^nDt^' i s.
*
16, i), tee { 9. 9; on nSlTD, Jad. 9, 8 K*ih., see { 44i. .
49-3 Per/, and Impetf. with Wdw Consecutive, 135
rcn) is intended lor nzci , and not mlher for the oommon fonn of tbe impentive
AV/ nai. In favour of tiie former explanation it nwy be wged that the impcra-
tive mc^ (from (tr) foUowi innedinteiy after; in iaTonr of the latter, that the
cadii^ fl-^, widi imperatives of mbt is not found daewhere, and also tliat
iicie no gnttnrat follows (as in Prov. 941 14).
$ 49. 7%i Per/eet and Imperfeei wUh WSw CmuaOme,

1. The use of the two tense-fomis, as is shown more fully in tbe d
Syntax ( 106. 107, coznp. above, 47, note on letter a\ is by no
means restricted to the expression of the past or future. One of tbe
most striking peculiarities in tbe Hebrew tmsecuiim of tenses ^ is tbe
phenomenon tbat, in representing a series of past events, only the first
verb stands in the perfect, and the narration is continued in the
imperfect. Conversely, the representation of a series of future events
begins wiih the imperfect, arul is continued in the perfect. l"hus in
2 Ki. 20, I, In ihose days was Hezekiah si\k unto (hath (l)erf.), and
Isaiah . . . came (imperf.) in hitii^ and said (itnperf.) to him. Sec. On
the other hand. Is. 7, 17, tht- Lord shall bring (iinpcrf.) upon ihee \ . .
days, &c.; 18, atld it shall come io pass (perf. H'nV) in thai day . . ,
This progress in tbe sequence of time, is regularly indicated by ^

a pregnant and (called wow cansecu/tve)*, which in itself is really only
a variety of tbe ordinary wSw co^lafive, but which sometimes (in tbe
* The other Semitic languages do not exhibit this iKCuliarity, excepting the
Phoenician, the nio&t closely related to Hebrew, and of coarse the Moabitish
dialect of the Af/kt" inscription, which is practically identical with Old Hebrew.
This name hot ezpiCiMS the prevailmg ayntactical idiation, lor by
'
eouemiiue an action is always represented as the direct, or nt least tenqMal

consequence of n preceding; action. Moreover, it is clear from the above examples,
that the 'ciiw lonsauiive can only he thn^ w^^rA in immediate conjunction with the
Terb. As soon as wdtv^ owing to an inscition (,c.g. a negative , is separated from
the verb^ the imperfect Allows nstead of the perfect oMRMiew/Av, the perfect
Instead of the imperfect totu$etUwi* The fact Chat whole Books (Lev., Num.,
Josh*, Jnd., Sam., t Kings, Ezek., Ruth, Esth., Neh., a Chron.) begin with the
imperfect consecutive, and others (Exod., i Kings, Ezra) with wdw copulative^
is taken ns a sign of their close connexion with the historical Book<; now or
orifjinally prccc<ling them. Compare, on the other hand, the independent beginning
of Job and Daniel. It is a merely superficial description to call tbe waw conaecn-
tive by the old-feahtoned name smfw eomenive, 00 the ground that it always
converts the respective tenses into thehr oppMitca, {.c, accoidmg to the old view,
the ihture Into tite preterite, and vice vem.
Digiii^ca by Cooglc
The VeHt.
imperf.) appears with a different vocalization. Further, the tenses
Gonnecled by vuSw cmstcuHve sometimes undergo a change in the

tone and consequently are liable also to other variations.
C 2. The wSuf ennsteuHot of the imperfect is {a) pronounced with
Paiha^ and a Ihgei fwU in the next letter, as ^^bj^ and he kilkds
before N of the ist pers. sing, (according to 22, i) with Qamef,
as '^sj^ ond I killed. Exceptions are, Ezek. 16, 10 according
to the Diqduqe ha-famim, 71; also Vinnbsi 2 Sam. i, 10 according
to Qimhi , bul ;n Jud. 0,9 SJTI^NI should be l ead according to Baer,
and 'f?> in both places in Jiid. 20, 6. Dagtl fork is always omitted
in the prelormative \ in accordance with 20. m.
d (^) When a shortening of the imperfect form is possible (comp.
48. g), it takes effect, as a rtile (but cf. 51. ), after waw consec.^
e.g. in Uipbil ( 63* ^ The tendency to retract the tone from

the final syllable' is even stronger after warn consee, than in the
jussive. The throwing back of the tone on to the penultima (condi-
donal upon being an open syllable with a long vowel, f 29. a),
its
further involves the greatest possible shortening of the vowel of the
ultima, since the vowel then comes to stand in a toneless closed

syllable, e.g. D^P,\ juss. Dp^, with waw Lornu-. and he arose ( 67.
and v, 68. d^ 69. ^ 71, 72. / and aa, 73. r)'.
i In first pers. sing, alone ihe retraction of the tone and even the
reducing of the long vowel in the final syllable (u to ^, / to /) are not
usuaP, and the apocope in verbs lY^b occurs more rarely; e.g. always
(or 0^,1 a merely orthographic diflference), and I orate, Bipk,
:
'f^TRSl
other hand, the form with final
Î taw, more frequently than
n_ is often used in the
M^, { 75.
ist pers. both
/. On the
sing, and plur., especially in the later Books, e.g. nn!>e^K\ andlteni.
Gen. 32, 6. 41, 11. 43, 21. Jud. 6, 9. 10. i Sam. 2, 28. 28, 15. 2 Sam.
22, 24. Ps. 3, 6. 7, 5. 90, 10. 119, 55. Job I, 15 sqq. Ezra 7, 28.
8, 25. 9. 3. Neh. 2, 13. 5, 7, 8. 13. 6, 11. 13, 7-11. 21 sqq., &c.
' Comj)arc. however, above, note on 4S. f.
* The plural forms m \\ aUo occur lc*s fm|ucntly aitcr a/fltt consecuiixft ; comp.,
however, fUn^ Jad. 8, i. 11, 18. Am. 6, 3. wk. 44, 8. Deot. 4, 11. 5, iOw lie
and fern. ting, in p__ sever ocean after itiiter ^msecmtive,
' In the IK plnr. II Neh. 4, 3 is the only instance in which the vowd
lenuUu naiednoed (oomp. 3MBbl, i.e. 3W^, 4,9 K*ih,; (frt Sf^. On the
neatmcatof tfactone ha the imperfect, impenKthre, and iwfinithfeiWjâf, tee 1 5l,ii.
DigiigMlîible
49 ] P^Kf' ^^^d Imperf, with Wdw Consecutive. 137
Sometimes, as in Ps. 3, 6, not without a certain emphasis of expression.

In Is. 8, 2 '"'TV^.I niay have been originally intended; in Ps. 73, 16
'nsi and in Job 30, 26
'"^V
This -\ is in meaniDg a strengthened waw copulative, and resembles in prononcia- f
tion the form which is retained in Arabic as the ordinary copula {wdY. The close
connexion of this wd with the following consonant, caused the latter in Hebrew
to take Dagcs. especially as d could not have been retained in an open syllable.
Comp. rn33, '"'^3, (for il^), where the prepositions 3 and i), and the
particle 3, are closely connected with 7X0 in the same way.
The retraction of the tone also occurs in such combinations, as in HD^ (for P"
nop, 5 102. /). The coincidence of many consecutive forms with jussives of the same
conjugation, must not mislead us into supposing an intimate relation between the
moods. In the consecutive forms the shortening of the vowel (and the retraction
of the tone) seems rather to be occasioned solely by the strengthening of the
preformative syllable, while in the jussives the shortening (and retraction) belongs
to the character of the form'.
3. The counterpart of waw consecutive of the imperfect, is waw conse- h

culive of the perfect, by means of which perfects are placed as the
sequels in the future to preceding actions or events regarded as
incomplete at the time of speaking, and therefore in the imperfect,
imperative, or even participle. This warw is in form an ordinary waw
copulative, and therefore shares its various vocalization Q, \ as 2 Ki.
7, 4, and 1); e.g. after an imperfect, &c., and so it happens=and

it will happen. It has, however, the effect, in certain verbal forms, of
shifting the tone from the penuhima, generally on to the ultima, e.g.
/ went, consecutive form ^^p^'^l and I will go, Jud. i, 3, where
it is co-ordinated with another perfect consecutive, which again is the
consecutive to an imperative; ^^'^^^n, consecutive n^^"=!3ni and it shall
divide, Ex. 26, 33, but this removing of the tone from an / in the
second syllable in HipHil, as well as in the perf Qal of verbs n"S) (see
below, letter k), is exceptional ;

comp. 53. r. See further on this
usage in 112.
As the first of the above examples shows, the Qames of the first syllable is /
retained in the strong perf. consec Qal, as formerly before the tone, so now in the
'
In use the Hebrew 7uiiw docs duty for the Arabic fd as well as zud, on which
see further in the Syntax.
' The opinion of earlier grammarians (shared by De Lagarde in Uebersicht iiber
die . . . Bildung der Nomina, p. 213), that arose by contraction from

te?^ mn = Tn)( it happened \jhat) he killed, is as untenable as the derivation
from Tbp iTnV

13B The Verb, [ 50.
secondary tone, and therefore necessarily lakes Metheg. On the olher hand, the
of the second ^liable in verbs middXi upon l(ing the tone becomes 9, z.g.
rhy^. Ex. 28, as.

h The sbiftug fonrard of die tone after the awhv mutcuihn of the perfut, is
howerer^not coosistentlj carried odL It Is omitted () always in the i st pen. pl^

e.g. 133Eh Gen. 34. 16 ; (a) generally (espeeiallj in Qd^ in verba and n"^,
e.g. Ex. 17, 6. 26, 4. 6. 7. 10 sqq. Lev, 19, 14. 32. 25, 17. 36. 43. Is. 14, 4. Jer.
29, 14. Joel 4, 21. Ps, 19, 14, also rcjnilarly in HipKtl before the aflorniatives
T\. an<l ^ cf. 53. r), and always in the 1st sing, o( verbs JC"^ (but cf. rilH^,
Jer. 2,2, ckc. '.
/ But before a following X the ultima mostly bears the tone on phonetic ijroands,
e.g. "bv^ nK3^ Gen. 6, 18. Ex. 3, 18. Zech. 6, 10 (by the side of riS3^^ etc.
(comp., however, flX'JPI, before K, Gen. 17, 19. Jer. 7, 27. Eick. 36, 21/1 ; DK J^'3ni
Jud.6, 16, cf. Lev. 24, 5 (Imt also nt^ *^^*^5n Lev. 25, 21). Likewiie, btifoie y,
^'R b'*.^'^.
* 33 Ccomp., however, 33
y^'P, see 67. it and ee.
{c) The tone always keeps its place when such a perfect stands in pause, e.g.
f^l&S Dent. II, 16; rk'icm Is. 14, 4. Jud. 4, 8; aometimes even in the teaser
pause, as Deut.3,28. Esek.3,26. iSam.39, S (where see Driver), with Zaqeph
fofm; and freqnently also immediately i^/one a toneâyllable (according to { S9. ),
as in ina nrOB^^ Deut. 17, 14, comp. 23, 13; Ezdc. 14, 13. 17, as. Amos 4. 7.
10* 12but also TknL ax, 11. 23, 14. 24, 19.
60. T/i Parliciple.
a 1. Qal has both an active participle, called PSU from its form
and a passive, /"ai^/ (t>>ya).
PîU is generally regarded as a survival of a passive of Qal, which still ensis

throughout in Arabic, but has been lost in Hebrew however, % 52. e\ just as in
(see,
Aramaic the passives of Pt'el and Iliph'fl ^.tc lost, except in the participle?. But
till- form b^VB is also used actively (sec letter f and instances of the form qntlal
are better regarded as remnants of the ])assive participh' Qal (^see 52. s), so thai
bvi^ must be considered as an origiual verbal uouu ; ct. Barth, Nominalbildung,
p. 173 sqq.
B 2. In the intransitive verbs mid. e and mid. 0, ihe form of the
participle active of Qal coincides in form (according to 44. a, note 3)

with the 3rd sing, of the perfect, e.g. ^
stetpfng, from fd); (only
orthpgraphically different from the perf. ^) fearing: comp. the
formation of the participle in NipKal^ 51.47. On the other hand,
the participle of verbs mid* a takes the form (so even from the
^ The iiregnlaiaty in the tone of these perfects waitiiiMlly resnlts from following
cooilicthig theofie^ not that of Ben Aier alone.
Digitized by G>
The NipKal. 139
irunsitive Wfe' io hate, part. Wfe^). The 6 of the?e forms has arisen
through an obscuring of the and is therefore unchangeable, comp.

9. q. The form ^î? (''^ it^^ a changeable Qames in both syllables),
which would correspond to the forms W\ and "U^, is only in use as
a noun, oomp. 84. a, 3. The formation of the participle in PCQ,
HipKil^ and HithpdH follows a different method.
8. F^rtidples fonn their feminine (f^^ or and their plural c
like other nouns ($ 80, % 84. at Nos. 13, 15, 94),
Rem. I. From the above it follows, that tlie d of the form is lengthened d
from J, sad eonfeqaently chugekfale {e.g. /em. 7\y!r) ; aad that the 6 of
oa the other hand weakened from an unchangeable A. In AnUc the verbal
adjective of the form fdtil corresponds to the form fatelf and the part, ^tl to
In both cases, therefore, the r of the second syllable is lengthened from
an ! consequently changeable (e.g. ^ClJ), plur. D^jÔl?; Tg^, ooostr. pL *T33%
Tl'pin Ps, 16, 15, instead of the form qdtcl, is an sinomnly ; it is possible,
however, that ?|^1n incorrectly written fully) is intended iconip. 3^110 2 Ki.
8, ai), or even the imf-cr/^ct Hiph'il of l]tD*. The form 5)*D^*, which in
Is. 2y, 14. 38, 5. Kecks. 1,18 appears to be a partic. (for f)D*), is better explained
in all these places as the 3rd siug. impcr/. Hiph. (comp. for the construction
Is. %%t 16) ; 7*2^K I Cbron. 37, 30, being a proper name and a foreign word, need
not be consideted. (coiutr. state of with d in the second syllable,
occurs in Dent. 33, 38 (comp. moreover, 65. f). On 0^ I*. 41, 7 (for
oi^n), see I 39./.

a. A MM is sometimes fomed even from itUmmithm verdt, which properly do y
not admit of a passive. It then den>tes an inherent qoalitf, e.g. B^M detpetmUt
Jer. 25, 1^ dec; nra tnutfutt Is. 96, 3. Fa. ii3 7; DUJ tirMî 113^ dmnim.
Is. 51, 31 ; and even from a transitive verb| IVM kandHtnf, Cant. 5, 8; 1I3|
mimt^Mi, Ft, 10$, 14; compi. f 84. 4^ Na 9,
B. Verba Derivativa, or Derived Conjugations.
{61. JVîpi'aiK
1. The characteristic of this ( oniuLîlion consists esseniially in a

a prefix^ to the stem. This probably irom the first had two forms:
(a) the prepositive fiu, as in the Hebrew perfect, although in the
strong verb the d is always attenuated to i: i'Ogi for the original
nâidl, participle infinitive abksolute sometimes ^Jfi ; {b) the
Comp. A. Jvlcdcr, De linguae Ifcbr, verbis, t/iiae z>i\ anSur derii'ata nifal el
^
Gumbinnen ^^Progr. des Cjymn.j, 1884, a list of all the strong Niph'al
hitpael,
fomu (81) and Hithpa'Sl fonns (36) in the Old Testament.

* See Pbilippi in ZDMG. 1886, p. 650, and Barth, ibid. 1894, p. 8 sq.
Digiii^ca by Cooglc
140 The Verb,
proclitic fVr, as in all the fonnfi of the corresponding Arabic conjuga-
tion VII. 'inqaiala , m Hebrew hin^ as in the imperfect ^Pi^^ {{ox y'htn-
qalH with syncoj)e of the n, and assimilation of the J), in the imperative
and infinilive construct (for hinqdtit), and in the infinitive absolute
The inflexion of NipHal is perfectly analogous to that of Qal.
b The features of Niph'al are accordingly in the perfect and participle the
prefixed NUn, in the imperative, infinitive, and imperfect, the Dagtl in the first
radical. I'hcê characteristics hold good ai^ for the weak verb. In the case of
an initial guttural, which, according to 22. ^, cannot take Dagel/orte, the omission
of the doubling iiivariblj cames the lengthening of the pfeoediog vovd
(lee 1 63. h\
c 2. As regards its meaning, NipKal bears some resemblance to the
Greek middle t'ou^, in being (a) primarily rejUxive of Qal, e.g. KD^J
lo thrust onesil/ {against), "^P^'^ to take heed to oniulfy <f>v\a(r(rtr6at,
"Uljpj to hide oneself^ ^H53 to redeem oneself; comp. also '"'^J?,^ to answer
for oneself. Equally characteristic of NipKal is its frequent use lo
express emotions which react upon the mind; oru trouble one'
sel/i nîi) to sigh (to bemoan oneself, comp. ibvfv$aLt lamenlart\ coniris-
tart) ; as well to express actions which the subject aUows to happen

to himself, or to have an effect upon himself (Nipk'ai Meraifvum), e.g,
io tearcht h inquire, Nipb. io albm oneself to be inquired of. Is.
65, I. Ezek. 14, 3 and elsewhere; K3fO io find, Niph. to allow oneself
to U found, lis. 65, i, &c. ;
Vl|3 to allow oneself to be admonished, or
warned; so the Niph. of "'P^ to warn, to correct, Jer. 6, 8. 31, 18, &c.
d [b) It expre-f's reeiprocal or mutual action, e.g. "^^l to speak, Niph.
to speak to one another ; DDB' to judge ^ Niph. to go to law with one
astolher; fT^ to counsel, Niph. io take counsel, comp. the middle and
deponenl verbs iutiKinMoBm (H^), iMjcioBM (00|>^)> aUercari, luctari
(np io sirm with one another) proeHari.
t {f) It has also, like HilhpdH ({ 54./) and the Greek mUdk^ the
meaning of the active, with the addition of lo oneself {si&i), for one-
self e.g. ^^^'^ lo ash (something)/^/- oneself (i Sam. so, 6. 38. Neh.
13, 6), comp. vXrwf^ ae revi*^ Mivoobiu x'^î i<>
P^^ on (oneself)
a tunic.
f (d) In consequence of a )<Misrncss of thought at an early [leriod of

the language, Niph'al comes liaally in many cases to represent the
passive^ of Qal, e.g. 1^ to bear, Niph. lo be bom; to busy, Niph.
' Comp. Haifmynn^ BtitTo^t tuT S/Hiox dcr hebraischtn ^pratke, I. St.,
Digitizecfby
The NipHaL 141
to he buried. In cases also where Qai is intransitive in meaning, or is

not used, NipKal appears as the passive oi Piel and HipKtl, e.g.
to be in honour^ Pi'cl to honour, Niph. lo be honoured (as well as Pu'al
"I??); "^03 Pi*el lo conceal, Hiph. io dcslioy, Niph. passive of cither.
In such cases NipHal may aîn coincide in meaning with Qal ('^^l?
Qal and Niph. io be ill) and even take an accusative.
Eumplet of denorainatim are, n3|3 to be iem a maU, Ex. 34, 19 (from ISn ; ^
but perhaps ahonld here be ie4) ; isii) eonbUum /eri, Job 11, Ts (from
33^ eer) ; donbtleei alto ie eftaim cAUdren, Gen. 16, a. 30, 5.
The oider gnmmarians were decidedly wrong in lepieMntiag M/k'U^np)y A

the pQitiot of C''^; Niph'al has, (as the frequent use of its imperat fbowi,) in
no respect the character of the other passives, nnd in Arabic a sjwcial conjiifâiion
('i>iyJ/J/ir corresponds to it with a passive of its own. Moreover, not only do the
forms mentioned in ( 52. < point to a diiferently formed passive uf Qal, but even
n pMsive of A'i^W itself appean to occur m the form I
Is. 59, 3. Lam. 4, 14,
although Kooig pveftrs to vârd it as ^ferma mixta, in the sense that the punc~
tnatoiB intended to indkate also the posslUlity of another readmg, ^blC^, ^
impcrf. Pual [dL also Wright, Compar. Gmm., p. 334]. Although the use of
Niph'al as a pas;ivc wns iiitrofUiccd at nn early period, and b>ecame toleiablj
common, it is nevertheless quite secondary to the reflexive use'.
Rem. I. The iufin. absoL îDp5 is connected in form with the perfect, to which |
it bears the same relation as ÎDj^ to iÔj^ in Qal, the 6 in the second syllable being
weakened from an original A, Examples are, ()b39 Gen. 31, 30; Dil!>3 Jud.
1 1> 35 ; I Sam. sa 6. s8, all in connexion with the perfect.
Examples of the form (ta^H (in connexion with imperfecta) aiCt Jer. 33, 4 ; k
Lev. 7, 18; once BhUt Ezek. 14, 3, where, perhaps, the snbseqncat Ish'VK
has led to the corrnption of K for n* Moreover, the form is not mfrtqncntly
used also for the inlin. absol.*, e.g. Ex. 33, 3. Num. 15, 31. Deot 4, atf. 1 Ki.
SO, 39. On the other hand, for the whoUjr abnormal ()''l^n3 Ps. 68, 3 (commonljr
explained as being intended to correspond in sound with the subicquent 1^3n,
but probably A ' forma mixta,' combining the readings ^^nS and ^'l^),
should simply be read.
Wittenb., 1888, 3. St. 189a (Gymn.-Programm), statistics of the Niph'al (Pu'al,

Hoph'al, and qatill) forms at different periods of the language, for the purpose of
ascertaining the meaning of Xiph. and its relation to thf passive; the selection of
periods is, however, very qaesiiunable fiom the sktandpuint of literary criticism.
* In other languages, also, thht tiaa^tion from reflexive to pasuve may be
observed. Thns in Sanskrit and Greek it is still easy to see how the mUhlle
precedes the passive form.
But, like i>to|3n, only in connexion with imperfects. Barth is therefore right
in drtrriTjinp {N'ominalbiUutig, p. "4' both forms as later analogous formations

(in addition to the original Semitic ît3i^^)t intended to assimilate the inSmtive to
the imperfect which it strengthens.
Digitized by Google
142 The Verb, [52.
/ Syneope of tiie n ^Stiet pKpoiitioM U neqnired by the Maaom in

^7f^ Fror*
44, 17 (for ins), A^na EkL a6, 15 ud l)D|a Lam. a, 11; alao inmbs'rf^ Ex.
xck 3 (n^)
i 34. li* i i< lii Tcilia (n^);
Job 33. 30 (1^^)' It ia,
however, extremely doobUnl whetbor the infin. Qal of the JCtM^k ianotfatfier
W
intended in all these cxamplca; It certainly it 80 in Lam. a. It, aa appeaialirom
comparison with Ps. 6i , 3.
fn a. Instead uf the S^re in the ultima of the imperfect, the original Fatkalf often
ooenn in pause, e.g. bc3*1 Gen. ai, 8 ; comp. x. 31, 17. a Sam. la, 15 (with final
^)\ 7 '3 (with p) ; Jon. 1, 5 (with D); fee $ 29. ^. In ^ and and 3rd plur.
fern. Paikajt predoounates, e.g. n^nS^fl Is. 65, 17; Sere oceme only in n33^PI Rath
1, 13, from py, and henoe with loaa of the doubling, for n|^^n ;
comp. even
n|^Kn Is. 60, t4.'-With AiMi pmigûm (aee ( 47. m) in the and and 3rd plar.
maac. are fonnd, IHsjs^, l^ThjS\f ice, in âtue p??!^^, \TV$^, dec.; but Job
1^ H
(coDiN a4, a4) p3jn7'
n 3. When the impeifecit the infioitiw (in e), or the hnpeiative is followed in
close connexion by a monosyllable, or by a word willi the tone on the first syllable,
the tone is, as a rule but cf. C'^ft p3K*^ Gen. 32. 2^^;, fhiftfl hack from the
ultima to the penultima, while the ultima, which thus lo?s the loac, takes .VV//*?/
instead of Sere ; e. p. r\2 7p'3* lizek. 33, i 2 ; IP "^y.'l Gen. 25, 3i ; in the imj>era-
live, 13. 9. Su always ^J? "^P^'"!

\since ^^3 counts as 0ne syllable) Gen. a4,6, &c.,
a>mp. 1 Sam. ly, a; and even with raihah in the ultima, jnX 3TyW Job 18, 4
(but comp. DmI^N "^ny*^ 2 Sam. 21, I4 . Although in isolateii cases (e. fj.
Gen.
32, 25. Ezra 8, 23) the tone is not thrown back, in spite ol a tone-syllable following,
the letiaction haa become general in certain fonna, even when the next word
begins with a tonelem ayllaUe; capecially alter ) e;.g. IK^Y Gen. 7, 15;
OnV^ Nnm. 31, X and ebewheie fteqnently, '"^^î 3 > *nd alwmya to in the
imperatiTe *^D^n Ex. 33, ai. Job 36, at, and (before Metbcg of the ooonter-tooe)
Dent 34, 8. a KL d, 9. On the avoidance of panaal-fonna in the impoative
(2^h. a, 1 1), and imperfect (Prov. 34, 4, dec.), ice | 39. >, and note; on the other
hand, always D
O In the impercUim, with the rejection of the initial n, occurs in Ps. 43, 9
(Joel 4, 1 1 in pause ; comp. X^l Jer. 50, 5) for ; but in al! these
examples eithrr the readini,' nr the explanation is dottbtfttl. W'ith parogo^

turn, nyDtfn rwear unto vie, Gen. i\, 33, Sec.
P 4. For the ist sing, of the imperfect, the form Vpi^ is as frequent as i^D^,
c. g. BH/IK / chilli hi- inquired of, Eeek. I4. 3 ; I will s'lu-ar, Gen. ai, 24 ;
cf. 16. a. Nnm. 33, 15. Lzck. 20, 3O, ami ahvavs in the cohort:itivc, e. fj. nopSK
/ Uftii avenge mifIs. l, 44; comp. 1 Sam. i a, 7. luek. a6, 3, and ast ^ 69. /. Tlie
Babyloittaa pnnctaation only adaaita f andcr tiie picfon&ative of the lak penott.
a, PCil and Pu'al.
a 1. Th? characteristic of this conjugation consists in the doubling of
the middle radical From the simple stem â/o/ (comp. 43.^; dic
Digitized by Google
fs2.3 PielandPUaL 143
form (corop. the Arabic conj. 11. fSi/iUl) would naturany follow as
the perfect of the active {Pre/). The Pa/hah of the fir:t syllable is,
however, with one exception (see letter m), always aiienuatcd lo i in
the perfect. In the second syllable, a has been retained in the

majority of cases, so that the conjugation should more correctly be
called Pi'al ; but very frequently^ this a also is attenuated to f, which
is then regularly lengthened to under the influence of the tone.
C6mp. in Aram. but in Biblical Aramaic almost always
On the three cases in which & before a final 1 or 0 has passed into
S^gh^t see below letter /. Hence, for the 3rd nng, mate* perfici^
there arise forms like *12N, IBj}, ;

i^n, ftc. ^Before afforma-
tives beginning with a consonant, however, a is always retained, thus

ri5ep, &C. In the irtfinitivcs [absol. obscured from
qattdi; constr. 1711 perfect ), and parlkiph i^êi^P) the original
a of the first syllable reappears throughout. The vocal ^wd of tlie
preformatives is weakened from a short vowel; comp. the Arabic

imperfect^wâ////, participle muqatHl.
The passive {Ptial) is distinguished by the obscure vowel tfj or very b
rarely 9^ in the first syllable, and d (in pause a) always in the second.
In Arabic, also^ the passives are formed throughout with iB in the first
syllable. The inflexion of both these conjugations is otherwise

analogous to that of Qal.
Rem. I. The prcform.'ilive D, which in the remnining conjnt;ations also i- the C

prefix of the participle, is probably connected with the interrogative or vnUJinite
(comp. 37) pronoun qui$ ( quicunquc (fern. HD); comp. | 85, No. 48.
a. The Dagd> forte, which according to the above 1$ dwnusteristic of the whole d
d Piil and AfW is often omitted (indepcodesdy of verbs mid$ gHttuml,
I 64. (/) when the Diddle radical has S\$ under it (comp. f ao. air),e.g. nniv^
for Eidc 17, 7; Vlf^^ s Chion. l j 1$ (bat in the impemtwe always
I Sam. a8, 7, &c), and so always in ^^jin praise ! The Tocal character of the
^wd under the littra datêssandn is sometimes in such cases 'accor(Unj^ lo 10. h)
expressly emphasized by its taking the form of a Ilatcph, as in HH^S Gen 25,
with owing to the inflaence of the preceding m, comp. ^^J|B for ^^yE, ^vc. ;
Gen. 9, 14. [ud. t6, 16. In the impt-rfeet and participU the ^*uh\ under the
prcfurmativcs ^haitph'/'atkah under K iu the ist sin^. impcrjc<X) icrves at the
same time as a diancteristic of both coajugatioos.
* In all Terba which end b Nun^ and in almost all whidi end in Lamei (Olsh.
P* 53^ Iârth is probably right in saptK>sing {ZDMG. 1894, p. i f^qq '
that the
voweU of Ihe strengthened perfects ttave been inflncnoed by the imptffea.
Digitized by Google
144 Verb, [52.
3. AeeoRUag to the vdvable ragiatioii of BSttcher {AufUMUhes LAr^h,

^904 sqq. and 1099^), many snppowd perfect* of PUal are in reality pasivei of
Qal. He reckons as sach all those perfects, of which the Ptel (which oaght
to express the correspondinfj active^ is cither not found at all, or only ''as in the
case of iV^) with a different meaning, and which form their imperfect from
aiiulhcr conjagation> generally Niph'al. Snch perfects are the quttal form of the
stems {inipcrfea l^SKH Is. 1,20;, ti'an, JJHD, nr, npi, T^V, ^J*^',
^QC', Barth (see below) adds to the list the apparent Pu cUperfects of
-iDK, na, n:i, axn, ma, nw, aty, nc^y, nm, ud of Tcrbt with middle*!
(hence with of the lint lylUble lengthened to 9)^ )nn, nnn, JHT, pit,
DID, tnp, cpb : alio the infinitivei abMlate lah) tlh It. 5% 13. In these eases
there was no need to asuimesBy error on the part of the pnnctDaton; the sharpening
of the second ladtca] may have taken place in older to retain the characteristic i
of the first syllable (comp. Ai nb. ijiitTh'i as passive of qlt^!^^, and the a of the
second syllable would be in accordance with the vocalization of all the other
passives (see 39 Comp, 5a. s and $ 53. u.
2. The fundametual idea of PCilt to which all the various shades
of meaning in this conjugation may be referred, is, to busy omseif

eagerly witli the action indicated by the stem. This intensifying of
the idea of the stem, which is outwardly expressed by the sharpening

of the first syllable, appears in individual cases as (a) a tirengihert-
tng and repeHfim of the action (comp. the nUenshe and iterative
nouns with the middle radical doubled, 84. ^)', e.g. PC^f to laugh,
Pi'el lo jal, /o tnake sport (to laugh repeatedly); io ask, Pi'el
fo b(\!^ : hence when an action has reference to many, e.g. to
bury (a person) Gen. 23, 4, Pi'el to bury (many) 1 Ki. 1 1, 15, and often
so in Syr. and Arab. Oilier modifications of the mtmsive or iteraiive
meaning are, e.g. nne lo open, Pi'el to loose; "^sd io cmnit P'el to
recount: [cf. an?, ^Wi, Kai, few, feW; anfttp, njfiij].
'
As Mayer Lambert observe?, the same view was already expressed by Ibn
(janah see above. %. in the hiftjh rl-hima, p. 161. Cf (^jv'f'iallv Hirth,
*Das passive Qal an i seine Vzj\\c\îGf\, m ihc Pestsihrijt zum J uotiuutn IJiUe-
aUwiKr (Berlin, j8</o). p- 145
Analogons eaamples, in which die doubling of a letter hat likewise an
*
itUensive force, are such Gemum words as, reichen, recken (Eng. reach, to rack) ;
streichen {stnnco), strecken : comp. strich {a stroke), slr,<kc a sfrr/i/i'' :i.'j,k(-r ;
from wcukeii : withers in which it has the (ausati'c sense, are sti.\ h(ti, Tf:-fk,-n;
wachett, weckc/i ; tiaao/ to bring to em end (comp. the stem riK(u to end, m TiKot,
rfX^) ytntAm ;
to igtt, from the stem jtm to com* into being (comp. fipot). The
above esanplea also show tliat in Cennaii when die il is donbled^ in ooBseqacnce
of the pieoeding diphtlioiig becoming a dioit vowel* it takes the form of kk (ri)
similarly in Hebrew, according to ( 13. 3^ an aspicated M^gadlfpluM^ letter^ whea
doubled, neocasarilj becomes a tmmis.
DigitizQdJlpCQÎe
Pi'el and Pu'al 145
The eager punmt of an action may and

also ccmsist in urging g
coming others to do the same. Hence PCil has also(^) a cmaaHw
sense (like BÛ^ e.g. io learn, FfSl to Uaci. It may often be
turned by such phrases as to perm'/ to, to declare or hold as {the declara-
Hue PCil), to help to, e. g. Hjn io cause to live, P!! to declare innocenty
/(? help in child-btaring.
{c) Denominalivcs (see 38. 3) are frequently formed in this conju- h

gation, and generally express a being occupied with the object
expressed by the noun, either to form or to make use of it, e.g. J?!?
to make a nest, to met (from jg), to throw dust, to dutt (from "^0,
^ to gather the etouds together (from ?|f), to dhide in three parts,
or to do a thing for the third time (from ^^^t probably also
to speah, from 13^ a wordi Or again, the denominative may express
taking away, injuring, &c., the object denoted by the noun {privative
pen, comp. our to shin, to hehead, to Bone), e.g. cnj^, from to
root out, to extirpate, 23.1 prop, to injure the tail (33?), hence to rout
the rear of an army, to set upon it; ^'-^ to ravish the fuart; fcH lo
remove t/u as /us to fra from sin (t<9-) '^-V ^^^^^
ones hones (D^^; comp., in the same sense, 013 from DTDJ ^^P
the boughs, Is. 10,33 (from ^^V9 0 bough). Some words are clearly
denominatives^ although the noun from which they are derived is no
longer found, e.g. to stone, to pelt with stones (also used in this
sense in Qal}, and to remove stones (from a field), to clear awqy stones;
comp, our to stone, used also in the sense of tahing out the stones
from fruit
The meaning of the passive {Ptiat) follows naturally from the

above, e.g. C'jJZl, Pi*el io seek, Pu'al to be sought.
Ptel the littrnl, concrete nicnning of the verb has omctimcs been retained, i
In
when Qal has acquired a tigutative sense, the former being regarded as the
itronger and more itrikmg, e.g. nbs, Pi*d to utuooer, Qal to reveal, also
em^nUe, i. c. to make the Und Iwre.
Alio with an intnuMltlve senae oocon aa aa imeniive fonn, but only In k
poetic language, eg. Ann in PrSl i(9 be broken in pieces, Jer. 51, 56; *inB
/<! iremhte, Is. ct, 13, Prnv ?S, I4 j nRB o/rn, ls.48, 8. 60, II ; <S be
dnaUun, Is. 34, 5. 7 ; [DJfO ^ A* pnu, Eccl. 1 a, 3.]
Rpm. I. The (tnore frcqnent> form of the perfect with Pathah in the second /
syllable appears especially l)cfore Ataqqeph (Eccles. y, 15. 12, 9) and in the
middle of sentences in continuous discoarse, but at the end of the sentence (in
pause) the form with Sere is more common. Comp. Is. 49, 31 with 7^
Jos. 4, 14. Eath. 3, 1 ; Dô Ezck. 33, 5 with Eedca. 9, 15 ; l*Vp a KL 8, 16
L
Digitized by Google
146 The Verb. [52.
with J'ifp Ps. 129, 4. The 3rd sing, fem, in pause is always of the fonn nb^,
except nsp Mic. 1,7; the .^d plur. always as ^^J^f? ; the and and 1st sing, and
1st of course as fJî^p, ijlS^j?, ''^^^î? (bnt always ^^î?.

3fd sing.perf.^ 12^ spik^ IB? /tf pardon, and D33 /b twA (aUo
Gen. 4$^ 11) take S^^^t \n3L become in/MMV nn*^, (i Sam. 19, 25);
tiie pau$al fonn of *1B3 never ooeus.
lyf JWM^ in the tint qrllehle (m in Aruneie and Aiabie) oocon 00I7 onee, Gen.
4i 5i Mi made me firgU^ to emphaaiie moie deerly the plajr on the name
H 3. In the imperfect, infinitive, and imperative Pi el (as also in Hithpdcl the

Sere in the final syllabic, when followed by Maqqeph, is usually shortened into
S'ghdl, e.g. li'"l?'|13D^ he seels for himself Is. 40, 20; *|>T5^5 samtify unto me,
Ex. 13, a. Pausalforms with S^ghdl instead of Sere, as f)rn^ Deut. 32, 1 1, OrPK
H08. 3,6 (comp. Ex. 32, 6 in the infinitive, and Gen. 31, 9 in the participle), owe
theic origin to some MasoKtei, and are wronglf aooepted by
paitiailar sdiool of
Bsct; ^
the analogons cases in | 75. m and kk. If the final sytUble of the
imperfect Ft el has Patha^ (before a guttural or it remains in pause / comp.
$ 29. J and 65. e. In the ist sing, imperfect the r-sound occurs in two words
for Ifaifph-Pathah, tinder the ]ireformative K ; H^TX Lev. 36, 33. Kzek. c. T2.
13, 14 and D"}.yDi<1 Zech. 7,14 (in accordance with 23. //). Before the full plural
ending |^ (see 47. m) the Sere is retained in pause, e.g. J^BI^jl Ts. 58, 2 (but
Gen. 32, 20 fpS'iri), comp. 2 Ki. 6, 19. Deut. la, 3; so before Silluq Ps. 58, 3.
Job 21,11 and even before '/.aqeph qaUn Deut. 7, 5. Instead of nJ!5tJ|5n, forms
like n^blî^Jjl arc also found, e.g. Is. 3, 16. 13, iS, in both cases ijeiorc a sibilant
and in pause. Also Ps. 55, 10 occurs as the and sing, imperative (probably
an Intentional imitation of the sonnd of the preceding yâ) and (for qarrabh)
Eaek.37, 17.
0 3. The infiniU aiioltite of JPT^ has sometimes the spedal form TtSjg given
in die paradigm. e.g. *)b^ easHigafidf, Pi. 118, 18 ; compw Ex. i, 19. x Ki. 19, zo
(from a verb ttf^); PS14O, S (from a verb n"i>); but much more frequently the
form of the infinitive construct (^Kj?) is used instead. The latter has also, in
exceptional cases, the form i>B{p (with <f attenuated to f as in the p<-rft\i), r.
iChron. 8,8 Sn^^; probably also Jer. 44, a 1 ; and for the sake of
**
'
<
assonance even for infinitive absolute in 2 Sam. 12, 14 (WW |*i<3\ On the other
hand, Deut. 32, 35 and 13''! Jer.

5, 13 are better regarded as substantives,
while la*!? Ex. 6, 28. Num. 3, i. I.>eut.4, 15 (in ench case after 0^*31, II os. i, 2
(nftcr n^'n^^ . in all of which places it is considered by Konig (after Qim^) to be

in/intttvc- lonsirmtt is really perfect o\ Pi?l.
P The infinitive construct Piel, with tlie fern, ending, occurs in H^D* Lev. 26, t8 ;
rntSl| Ps, 147, 1; withn of the fem., Hj^w' Is. 6, 13; before a suffix !]ri?12f
Esdc j6, 52. On tiie mhal noons after the form of tlie Anun. int BiSU (H^^,
see 1 844, No. as.
q 4. In Fn'al S is sometimes found instead of itf in the initial syllable, e.g.

^tped ted, Ex. 5 ftc. NaL a, 4 comp. 3, 7 n^V^; Esek. x6, 4. 7a, ao.
80;, II. AcoQfdiog to Baec'a leading alio in V1|p^ Pfe. 6a, 4, and so also Ben
f 53.] HipKil and HopkaL 147
A5cr. bnt Ben Napht.ili ^n^-^n. It is merely an <vthognphic licence when

a is written fully, e.g. ^^"^ Jud. i8, 29.
5. As tnjinithu; absolute of Piial \\c find Di^Gen. 40, 15.No instance of tlie ^
inf. constr. occars in the strong verb in Pual,
6. A few example occnr of the participle Pâl without the preformative (D), S
e^g.
iuÛg
^ aie
Ex. 3, 2 ;
distiiieiiiafaed
"T^T" (for n^^D) Jud.
fram the perfect
13, 8 ; n|^b Ki. a, 10.
(as in Niph'al) fay the
Tbeae far-
4 of the final
ayllable. For other examiêa, see Is. 30, 24. Bodes. 9^ la (wheie D^f^ accoid-
itig to { ao. % stands for ^s'g^); hnt^ aocoiding to tiie lAaaora, not s^.
a6i t7dnce n^|vtj1 as JMi/V/ can only be the pafiet. The iêction of the
might be lavonrccl by an initial D as m Is. 18, a. 7 (but alao ; Prov.
,
aj, 19; so also in the partidple Pi'el ytXQ Ex. 7, a7 &c. &c (always after DK,
but cf. also D^JKDn Jer. 13, 10) and inp Zeph. i, 14 (and Is, 8, i. 3?). Notice,
however, Barth's 5TJf;;^gestion {NominalHMung, p. 273) that, as the active of forms
like i)3K only occurs in Qal, they arc perfect participles of former /ajj/fw of Qal
(sec letter e), as Jer. 13, 10, and perfect participles of Pi'el, as in Jer. 23,32. On
yaiD Eiek. 45, 2, see \ 65. d.
63. Hiph'a and HopHal.
1. The characteristic of the active {UipKtl) is a prefixed in the a

perfect 9 (with the i attenuated to 1^ as in PCH\ which forms
a closed syllable with the first consonant of the stem. The second
syUable of the perfect had also originally an A (comp. the Arabic
conj. nr. aqiat&f and in Hebrew the return of the Paika^ in the and
and rst pers. ^^'^ &c.); aAer the attenuation of thb d to it ought
by rule to have been lengthened to e in the tone-syllable, as in
Aramaic beside in Biblical Aramaic. Instead of this,
however, it is always replaced in the strong verb by f but

sometimes written defectively; cf. ^ <). g.
Similarly in the infinitive construct ^P^, and in the imperfect
and I
irticii'lr ^'t^p' and ^Pp?, which are syncopated from and
^^^9 > ^3* ^* corresponding Aratnc forms {jnqiil and mnêuy
point to an original t in the second syllable of these forms. In
Hebrew the regular lengthening of this If to / appears in the strong
veib, at least in the jussive and in the imperfect emsteuihfe (see
letter n), as also in the imperative of the and sing, masc (letter m);
' This / may have been transferred originally from the imperfects uf verbs
at*
conrciilent nMaoa of dkrthiction between the indicative and jussive, to the
impetfed of the atrong verb and afterwaida to the whole of Sipk'tls ao Stade,
PbUippi, PiMtoriaa, ZAfV. 1883, p. 5a aq.
I. a
Digitized by Google
148 The Verb, [53-
on naSjppri, wbppw comp. 26. ^ On the relurn of ihe original
d in the second syllable under the influence of a guttural, cf. 65.
h In the passive (Hoph'al) the preformative is pronounced with an

obscure vowel, whilst the second syllable has a (in pause a\ as its
characteristic, thus:TVr/ ^Qpn or i>6?f!!, ^ff^frf- (syncopated

ftom or Pari. or (from H^^); but the
infinHwe aisobtU has the form TP^n. On the origin of the pro-
formative n, comp. 55. f.
Thus the characteristics of both conjugaiiuns are the SI preformative in the

ptrfcct^ imperative aad infinitive; in the imperfect and participle Hiph'tl, Pathah
tmder the ptefonmitives, In tbe Hofâl Smii.
C 2* The signification of Hiph'fl is primarily, and even more

frequently than in Pi* el (52. g), causative of Qal, e.g. to go forth,
Hiph. lo brif^ foriht lo lead forih^ to dram forth s to be holy,
Hiph. to sarwttfy. Under the causative is also included (as in J*t*el)
the declarative sense, e.g. P^lffJ pronounce Just; ITB^H mti^ 00^
Off w^f? (meaning /(? pronounce guilty); comp. C'py, in HipKUt
Job 9, 20, represent as perverse. If Qal has already a transitive
mcan;i:g, lliph'il then takes two accusatives (see 117. cc). In

some verbs, Pfel and HipHfl occur side by side in the same sense,
e.^. per at, Pi'cl and lliph'il, perdidit ; as a rule, liowever, only
one of these two conjugations is in use or else they differ from one
another in meaning, e. g. "i^S gravem esse, Pi'el to honour, Hiph'tl to
bring to honour, also to make heasfy* Verbs which are intransitive in Qal
simply become transitive in HipHG, e.g. nD) to boat anesdf Hiph. to
bow, to bend,
d Among the ideas expressed by the causative and transitive are included,
according to flie Nêw point of view (and that of die Semitic languages
genenllyt cq>edally Antnc), a aeries (Vf ectioni and ideas, whidi tnr have to
express by periphrasis, in order to understand th^ being represented by die
Hiph'il-form. To these inwardly transitive or infettrirc lliph'JIs belong:
(a) Hiiih'il stems wliich exjiress the obtainiiii; or rcccivinj^' of a concrete or
abstract yiu.duy. (In the following examples the Qal stems are given, for the sake
of birvity, widi the addition of the meaning -which often together with other
meuiings--belonp to the Ifipk*tt.) Thos ^HM, *vn, Vt\ pS to e to
shine (to give fitwth Instre) ; opposed to 1|IS^ to deeome dark; I'Dtt,
to he strong (to develop straigth), F|Oy to be weak; ipK to be hng (to acqniie
length); TOU to be high; D>n to be in tumult, pyt to cry out, jm, }D /<? m4ihe
a uoise, to exult; f^Ti to sprout (to put forth shoots), comp. rPfi to bteom,
1*19, ^ to averjewi IEhn, Hl^n, lUD, TXXt to be silent (silentinm ftoere*
530 HipliU and Hoph'aL 149
Pliny) ; pTs'O to he nvut; n^Jf to have success; to be low; DTK to become red,
to l>cii)inc ii)hiU.
(^) Stems which express in Jliph'tl the enterbg mto a certain condition and, e
fiuthetj tbe beicg in tiie same : jOK t9 hwmijrm, t trust in; 6^3 tc burnt
stinking; bseom MHng, to Mi ooer; nSl t become ill, D^n to btcome
^!
healthy; IDH
come to want; rWI to beeoate hot; VS* to beeomo dry, to
to
beeome ashamed; IIV to attain snfioriority; pD to become fitmiliar; 1)9, pp

to become awake; nt^p to !>c(ou' hard; VH, DpC^ become quiet (to keep qniet);
OCl^ /? be etstonishfit. 'Vhc Hiph'tt forms of some f aiotion constitate
a variety of this class: B'DJ to draw near, 31p to come rtrar ; pm to -withdraw far
off (all these three arc besides used ns causa lives) ; DHp /o come before.
if) Stems which express action in some particular direction : Nt2n to err; p^n f
to flitftr 'to act smoothly); 3t3^ io act wr//, Jo Ôd/ : b^D to act foi'is/)/^,
-t'isely ; D*iy tJ*/ u\ftt!y ; / suhmi^nvcly ; yiH, VKh

/tj <;t/ -.cidciHy, i;odlessly ; firiK', 33JTI ''o comtptly, ihamefuUy ; to oit
peacefuUy^ to be at feace^ to bo siAmissive,

Further, there are in Hiph'tt a eoasidenMe namber of denominatives which g
e3cpreas the brhq;ing ont, the froAteing oi a thing, and so aie properly re>
gardcd as oMsatlves', e.g. USH to set over the treasmy, Neh. 13, 13 (imless
f^Yin is to be read, as in Ndi. 7, a); 133 /a bring forth a Jlrstbom
to cause to rain ; JHT to frr ';i \^ seed; {Hiph'tl pp*n> to ^0 to the right,
c i>*|<Db^ to go to the left ; D'S (0 get or / ilotw pp /t? ^'j / or /<? have
horns ; ^36?' to froJuee abortion; to become snow-white; |D8^ toffromfcUy to

become fat; E^B' /<? /;// yi>rM r<w/j, &c. ; so also according to the ordinary
acceittation ^n^3)Kn Ts. 19, 6, they have become stinking, from n3T6< stinhing
or sicmh, with retention of the X prosthetic, 19. m (bat see below, letter
Of a different kia<i are the denominatives from : (scarcely to prick up tht ears,
but) to act rcith the ears, to hear ; comp. \zh to move the ton^^tie, to sliinder, and
the German uu^cln ^to uiakc eyes) f fusscin, nascin, sehwanzcln ; IHC (0 sell
com ; Q3C^ to set out early (to load the back [of the camel, &c.] ?) ; opposed to
8* The meaning cA HopKal is (a) primarily that of a passive of ^

Hiph% e.g. prmecH, or 1)^>J proiedus esl; {ff) sometimes
HopSal also takes the place of a passive of Qalf as io avenge,
Hoph. tQ he avenged (but see below, letter sr).

Rem. I. The Hiph'H remains, without exception,

/ of the 3rd sing. masc. pcrf. *
hi the drd fern, (in the toiie>syllabIe). That it wis, however, only lengthened
from ft short vowd, and consequently is changeable is proved by the fiwms of
* The same Ideas are also pafsphrased by the verb nbf {fo make), e. g. to mahe
fatf for, to produce fat upon his body, Job 15, VJ\ to make fruit, to make
bran hes, for, to put forth, to yield, T*'t' 14.9. Hos. 7. comp. the Lat. eorfus,
robur, soboiem, divitias facere, aad the IXdX.far corpo,farforse^fwrfrutio*
Digitized by Google
150 The Verb. [ 53.
the inîrutht and imperfect when i (or, nnder the bflacnoe of girttnmls, S)
takes its place. In an open ayllaUe tiie # ia retained almost throughout i onlj
in very isolated instanceahaa it been weakened to S^wA (see letten n and 0),
k 3. Tlie iM^mitive odMlu/t oommoolj lias ^Srtt withont yUkt e.g. ISN^ Jnd. 17, $;
lesa freqoently it takes e.g. Am. 9, 8 ; oomp. Dcut. 15, 14. Is. 59, 4.
Jer. 3, 15. 93, 3a. 44, 25. Job 34, 35. Ecdes. 10, zo. With tt instead of n
(probably a mere scribal error, not an Aramaism) we find D^3p*K Jer. 25, 3,
Rare exceptions, where the form with Sere stands for the ififiuittve cotisiruct, are,
e.g. Dtut. 32, 8. Jer. 44, 19. 25. Prov. 25, 2. Job 13, 3(?); on the oiher hand,
for '^ff'\?^
Deut. 26, 1 2 (which looks like an infinitive Uiph'll with syncope of the il,
for "l**^'!}!)) the right leading U simply ti^y!', since dsewfaeie the n*el alone
OCOUS with the meaning to tithe; for "^byS Ndi. 10. 39 perhaps tibe Inf. Qal
(ib^) waa intended, aa in i Sam. 8^ 15. 17 UA0 fke HiJU), At the same
time it is donbtM whether the present punctuation does not arise Icom n com*
bination of two different readings, the Qal and the Pi'el*
/ Instead of tlie ordinary form of the infinitive construct i>^C)^n the form i^D]^
sometimes occurs, e.g. "T^^^H to destroy, Deut. 7, 24. 28, 48 ;
comp. Lev, 14.46.
Jos. II, 14. Jcr. 50, 34. 51, 33 and rtSfpH for n^YpH I-ev. 14, 43 from Hlf^
scarcely, however, Lev. 7, 35. 3 Sam. 22, i (Ps. iS, i\ i Ki. 1 1, 16 (aflcr 1^), and
in the j)aiisages so explained by Konig (p. 276) where l'i<^n appears after
prepositions [cfc Driver on Deut. 3, 3. 4, 15. 7, 24. 28. 55.]
With (I in the second syllable there occurs D3"t2)n Kzek. 21, 29 'comp. the
aubstautival iutin. IVSn 1 Sam. 15, 23). In the Aram, manner n^ycc'n? found
in Eiek. 94, 26 (as a constmct form) for the v^tUtiue Hiplttl (comp. the
infinUive HUhpiedy Dan. 11, 33). On the qrncope of the n after piefixes* see
letter j^.
Vt 3. In the impmiHm the f is retained throughout in the open syllable, according

to letter 1, and consequently also before suHixes (see 6i* a), and \~ paragogic^
\
e. g. na"'B'pri attend to (but in Ps, xi8, 35 with the tone at the end, nn''5'3fn). On
the other hand, in the 2nd sing. masc. the original f (comp. Arabic '
/'/'.^ is
lengthened to c, e. g. fttB'H mak^ fai, and becomes 6*ghM before Maqqcph, e. g.
6t3"f3Dn Job 22, 31. The form /^Dj5n for ^CpH appears anomalously a few
times: Ps. 94, i. Is. 43, 8. Jer. 17, iS fcomp. 69. v and 72. y) ; elsewhere the
Masora has preferred the punctualiua ^-1^)70, e. g. 1 Ki. S, 6 j
comp. I's. 142, 5.
In Lam. 5, i nD*3ri is required by the Q^ri for D^3n
n 4. In the imperfect Hiph'H the ikortiT fbm with Sert prevails for the jussive
in the 3rd mate and ftm* and and ma, singi, e. g. i^lJFl"^ 0$ake not gnat,
Obad. xa ; IV^2 cut offt Pa. xa, 4; even incotrectly T|n x. 19, 3, and
Tj|! Ecdea. 10, ao; comp. also "1^3! x* 9a A where the jussive form is to be
eiÎained accofding to % X09.>l, and Job 39 36 before the piindpal pause.
Similarly, after 1 conaee., e.g. and He divided. Gen. i, 4.On the other
hand, t ia almost alwaya retained in the ist dng., eg. TCf^Vn Am. a* 9; comp.
' As to the donbtfalness, on general grounds, of this form of the Inf. Uiph.|
see RobeitsoQ Smith in the Journ, of Thilol, xvi. p. 7a sq.
53] HifkU and HopKal
$ 49. and i 74. /, tmt alio 1 in lit plur. only in Neb. 4,3; in libe 3fd
slog. Pk. 105, s8. With 4 in tbe priadiNa patue inin) Rnfb a, and in the
leMcr pame. Gen. 49,4; before a tibiUnt (lee f 29. q) 1**^* ^9 ; in the
letter pause Lam. 3, 5. Before Maqqeph the Sere becomes S^gMl^ e.g.
iarpin*^ JuJ. 19, 4. in the plural, on the other hand, and before fuffixet*
/ remains in the forms ,

^^ÔpR , also in the jussive and after \ consecutive,
c. g. ip'ST^l Jud. 18, aa. The only exception^ wliere the t appears weakened,
in the Aramaic mnnncr, to are ^Î'l?! Jcr. 9, 2 ;

ip21*1 i Sam. 14, aa. 31, 2.
1 Chron. 10, 3 ;
'Kyy^\ Jcr. 11,15; nniflvVl NVh, 13, 13, if it is Hiph'U of but
probably H^lfS^^ is to be read, as in 7, 2 ;
perhaps also 5"^3riri Job 19, 3 (according
to otlicrs, impir/cct Qal). The same weakening occurs also in the imperfect in
3rd and 2nd majw;. sing, before suA'ixes, i Sam. 17, 35. I Ki, 20,33. I'^* ^^t
and in Job 9, ao, unless tbe form be FtH - ^3^^^., sbioe the Iiiph*tt is not
found elsewhere. It is hardly likdy that in these isoUted eaamplea we have
a trace of the ground-iormt jfoqtlL More probably they are due partly to
a misunderstanding of the defective \Triting, which is found, by a purely ortho-
grajihical licence, in numerous other case? (even in 3r(l sing. C^'J'^ I?. 44, 28),
and partly are intended, TLsforrncu: mi.xtac, to combine the forms oi Qai and Hiph'tl.
Instead of the himly closed syllable, the Ma&ora requires in Gen. i ii Kg^*Tn^
with Mtiheg.
5. In the participU, V(f\lO 1 35 7 appeaia to be traceable to the ground* O
form, maqtfl; jtt the Sere may also possibly be explained by the vetractioQ .
of the tone. Tbe Maaora tippeus to require the weakening of the vowel into
S'zvd (see above, letter n) in D^sSnO Zach. 3, 7 (prolxibly, however, D^sbnO
should be read), also in D^jsTO jer. 29, 8, D*"}|yD 2 Chron. 28, 23 (but as
precedes, and accordingly dittography may well have taken place, the participle
Qal is jirobahly to be read in both places; the reading of the text is perhaps
a^jam intcntkd to combine Qal and J/ipA'S/, see above, letter ), and in the
<^rJ D^^no I Chron. 15, 24 &c. (where the X't/ktM D*")ffno i better). The
fern, is oidinarily pointed aa H'îp Num. 5, 15, Lev. 14, ai; in pause
nâto FroT. 19, 14.
6. In the pff*^ tfiere oeeur occasionally soch forms aa VD^sn t Sam. 25, 7 ;
p
oomp. Gen. 41, 38. a KL 17, 11. Jer. 99^ i. ML 6, 3. Job 16, 7 ; with the origfaial
d( in the first syllable wj?) 3 5- ^J!i!>K3K > / Aotv slakud. Is. 63, 3,
It standa at the begbining instead of H, dl above, letter on DP^f^* On the
other hand, VPSTttni Is. 19, 6 (see above, letter ^ ia to be rârded, with
Olahansen and otiieri^ simply aa a scribal error for '^Tll.
* Most probably, however, 'rif'NS '.perfect Pi el) is to be read, and the K is only
an indication of the change of the perfect into the imperfect, as also previously,
by the puuctuaUon, D3"^T5<1 and H (înstead of '"IKI aiid V\) arc made future
instead of past. Jewish exegesis applied these Edom-oracles to the Roman

(Le. Christian) empire. So G. Mooie hi TMtgitck* ZiUraturuHut^, 1887,
ooU 991.
Digitized by Google
The Verb. [53-
q 7. In the imperfect and participle the characteristic fl is regularly syncopated
after the prefonnatlTeSy thos ^C^., ^^D^ ; but it Is retained in the infinUht
*
after prepositions, e. g. ^^D^J). ExotptioDS fai die imperfect are, e. g. y^CîtJ
Ht wiO tttot for 1 Sam. 17, 47. 116, 6 (in patise) ; HTilTj /T* w7/ /ratw
for Neh. ii 17. Fb. a8, 7. 45, 18 (comp. the proper name Jer. 37, 3
for which 38, x \f^t and fl{3;YipnD EKek.46b For examples of tiiis kind from
verba lee | 69. 9 and 1 70; from t Ki. 18, 27. Jer. 9, 4. Job 13,
^^nnri) ; in the ittfiniHvi (where, however, as in IHplCal^ 51. /. the infinitive

QaJ is gcaerally to be read) "Vlo|^ Is. S9, 15 for Tnon!? ; ^B^p Nam. 5, sa;
a Sam. 19, 19; p{)l1^ Jer. 37, la ; 11^^ EccL 5, 5 ; fab^ (doablj anoma*
loos for paSnb) Dan. 11) 35; P>. 3^ 7; anK^ r Sam. a, 33; *Tfi^
Is. 33, II ; hâB^ Am. 8, 4; for *)^$na Fk. 73, ao ; Jer. 39, 7 (a Chron.
31, xo); niriD? Prov. 31, 3; n^ttp^ Is. 3, 8. Fk. 78, 17; Dnim^ JEx. 13, ai;
(see, however, aou A) Is. 33, x ; DsnK")^ Dent 33: compt fiirther, i,
from verbs Num. 3, aa. Jer. a?, ao; on Dent. a6^ xa and 10^ 39^ see
above, letter k,
r 8. WithregudtotheKmeitisto be observed that theaflbimativesând n-îtt

Hiph'tl have not tho inn even in the perfect with wctio consecutive (except
in Ex. 26, 33 before H, Lev. 15, 39 before K, to avoid a hiatus) but the plural ;
ending p (see & 47. m) here, as elsewhere, always lias the tone, c.g.
Deut. I, 17.
J 9. Tlie passive (lioph'al; hai J 01 in ihe first syllable (^DJ>n), in the strong
verb less Ircquently in the perfect and infinitive, bat generally, through the
inflnence of the initial
nWfrl
Is. 14,
3a, 19);^
19); nn^^
iSf^
D,
impf,
in the participle
part. 1j5B^ a
; e. g.
s. x(,4; in the peztic. Hoph. without SfOfiope of the H:

^3|^n Es. 3a, 3a
^, ax (beside
(beside
M^n
nfjntpnD Es. 46, aa ^ on the other hand, verbs y% always have df (in a sharpened
syllable) : niil, "11^ (comp. S 9. ).
/ xa The it^^mHvt tOsohUt has in ffâi (as in Ifi/k*ti) Sire in thS last
syllable, e. g. 7nnn and rffOn Es. x6, 4 ; ^fn Jos. 9, 34. An tn/Snitive tomtmet
does not occur in the strong verb.
U. With r^rd to the imperative Ifoph'al, see above, $ 46. a, note I.
U 13. According to Rotfchcr {Ausfuhrliihcs Lchrhuch, 906^1 and Barth 'sec

above, 52, letter e\ a number of supposed imix'rfects Iloph'al arc, in fact,
impcriecUs of the passive of Qal. As in the case of the perfects suppo!cd by
Bdttcher to be passive of Qal (see above,
5J. */ the question is again of verbs
of which neither the corrc^Mnding cansstive (Le. hoe the Hiphll), nor die
other tense of the same conjngstioa ê. the perfect Hoph'sl) is found;
so with DgJ^ (for Dj5r comp. yuqt&lH as imperfect Qal in Ajalnc) and JTI*
,
^
from 0)53 and fri3 ; HgJ^ from flB^ (comp. % 66. g) \ Num. aa, 6 from n"1|t;
jrr from ;2n ;
igl^ Hos. 10, 14 (cf. Is. 33, I) from TlC^; Barth adds the verbs
^'D ; U'rin F.rtk. 19, 12 from C'n3
; J^R' Lev. II, 35 from )'X\^ the verbs y"y ; ;
^pn^ Job 19, 33 from ppH ;

n?"* &c. from finS ; the verb Vy : ^''ll'* from tT'Vl
;
the verbs bnV, TjnV JIK^ from b^H, 11:^ and n*E^. On ^31* from b3\
i 540 Hithpa'eL 153
tee 69. r; on Db^>^ &c., 73. / In point of fiwt it wetdd be wiy ttnuige,
capedally in di case of and Hg^, tluit of these frequently aaed amongit
11 tbe forms of Hlphll and Hoph'al, onlj Ae imfeifta Hoph'al sboald have been
pmei vcd.
64. IIilhpa'CL
1. Tlie Hithpdel is connected with PCel^ being formed by prefixing a

to the PCU^XAm {âftil, qaftal) the syllable ^ (Western Aramaic fW,
but in Biblical Aiamaic nrt; Syr. </*). Like the prefoniutive 3 (?n)
fs^NtpXalt haa also a reflexive force.

2. The A of the prefix in this conjugation, as also in Hoihpa'al h
(see letter h), Hiihpîl, IliihpdUl and Hithpalpd ( 55), under certain
circumstances, suffers the following changes :
(a) When the stem begins with one of the harder sibilants D, V, or s^,
the n and the sibilant change places (comp. on this Metathesis, 19.
and at the same lime the D after a V becomes the emphatic D : thus
*} i*'> take heed to oneself^ for ^t^t'^'*? J
to become burdensome,
for i>3pnn; P3yn to justify eneself, from pl^. The only exception
is in Jer. 49, 3, with v^ to avoid the cacophony which would result
from the succession of three /-sounds.
if) When the stem begins with a <^ or /-sound (*i, b, A), the A of ^
the pieformative is assimilated to it ( 19. d), e.g. speaking,
conversing; N3"in to be crushed, "^non to purify oneself, J<t??n to defile
oneself DEJnn to act uprightly, (An exception occurs in Jud. iq, 22.)
The assimilation of the n occurs also with 3 and 3, e.g. ^^t^ to
prophesy, as well as '^51^'!' (comp. Num. 24, 7. Ezek. 5, 13. Dan.

II, 14); p;3)n Num. 21, 27 (comp. Is. 54, 14. Ps. 59, 5); nDgn
Prov. s6, a6 ; with Ecctes. 7, 16; with n Is. 33, 10.
Rem. Metalhem wonld Hkewiae be expectedf u hi the caaes nnder letter a, d
when n and t coane tugether, as well as a change of 11 to H . Instead of this,
in the only Instance of the kind (^H Is. i, 16) the M is atrimilatfd to the Tf
nnleo indeed p]n, imfert^hft liiph*al of *pt| >* intended,
8. As in form, so also in meaning, Hithpdil is prhnaril}' (<7) reflexive e

of Pi el, e.g.'^W^n to gird oneself C'^ji^nn to sanctify oneself Although
in these cxamjiles ihe intensive meaning is not distinctly marked,
it is so in other cases, e.g. to show oneself nvengiful {Niph.
simply to take revenge)^ and in the numerous instances where the
^ So also in Uefaiew isnn^ a Chron. ao, 35 ; comp. Fj. 76, 6.
Digiii^ca by GoOglc
1^4 The Verb, [54.
Hii^H expresses to maAe mudf tint whkh is predicsted by the

stem, to emduct cmsdf as such, to shm mise!/, to imagwe onattf^ to
affect to be of a certain character. E.g. ^W"? to make mesdf greatt

to act proudly; D3l]Upn /o show oneself wise, crafty; n^^nnn to pretend
to U ill; "*??^^n io make i.e. to ftgn oneulf rich; "P^^^ Num. i(>, 13,
to make oneself a prince; ^"^l^^ i J>am, 18, 10, to act in an (x cited

manner like a prophet, to rave. The meaning of llithpaH sometimes
( (lificides with that of Qcd^ both forms being in use together, e.g
to mmtm^ in Qal only in poetic style, in HithpdH in prose. On
the accusative after Hitbpa'el (regarded as* a transitive verb),
*
see { 117. nr.
/ if) It expresses reeiproaU action, like JVtph*at, 51. e.g. ntiTinri
to lifok upon one another, Gen. 42, i ; comp. Ps. 41, 8; but {c) it
more oflen indicates an action less directly affecting the subject, and
describes it as performed with regard to or for oneself, in one's own
especial interest (comp. Xiph'al, 5 '<') Hithpa'el in such cases
readily takes an accusative, e.g. j^lf^n Ex. 32, 3, to tear off from
cneietfi D^snn exuit sibi (vestem), nriBTin solvit sibi {vincula); 116^
Jos. 9, 12, take {something) as one's provision; without an accusative,
T^jfyxsy to Ufoik about for oneself {amiulttre); ^^V}*} siH inkrtedere (see
Delitsscfa on Is. i, 15); ut draw a line for onne^^ Job 13, af;
on Is. 14, a, see S 57 note.
g (</) Only seldom is it passive, e. g. nsriB'n to he forgotten^ Ecdes. 8, i o,
where the reflexive sense (/o bring oneself into oblivion) has altogether
disappeared. Comp. Niph'al, 51./!
^ The passive form Hothpa'cd is found only in the few following examples
to /v J,-riJ.''i^ Dent. 24,4; infinitive DS?"^ to be washed, Lev. 13, 55. 56;
HiBîn I
lor niînn , tLc n3 b?ing treate<l as if it were the affoinuUive of the fern,
plur.) it is made fat, Is. 34, 6. On npSfin, see letter /.
t Denominatives with a reflexive meaning arc in'rin to embrace Judaism, from

nn^ (iTI^n^) Judak : n*Cyn to pumsicn otuselj jor a jtmrney, from nT3f
provision for a jour my (sec 72. w).
k Rem. I. As in Ptcl, so in Hithpa'el^ the j>crfcct very frequently (in stems ending
in 3, p, D, D) has retained the original PtUhah in the final syllable (while ia the
ordinary fonn it is attenuated, as in PCcl, to t and then lengthened to r), e. g,

e[S|(nn Dent. 4, 31 and eliewhcie, comp. % Chron. 13, 7. 1 5, 8 ; with ] consmOive
8, ai ; lo aIio in the inpctfect aimI loipentive, e. g. OSnnn Eodes. 7, 16
oomp. Deot 9, 8. 18. i Sam, 3. 10. a Sam. 10, ta. i lU. xx, 9. U. 55, a. 58, 14.
64, II. PS. 55i a s PKViri X KL so, aa. Fa. 37, 4. Eitli. 3, 10.--In Ler. 11, 44.
Digitized by Google
55] Less Comnum Conjugations. 155
90^ 7 and Ezek. 38, 33 / for J occurs before ^ (comp. { 44. and in the last
passage before ^. In the perfedf imperfect (with the exception of Eccles. 7, 16),
and imperativt o[ Hitkpa'cl (as well as of Hithp^H^ HithpdlH, Hithpalp^L 55)
the original d always returns in pmisc as Qamcs, e. g. ^WIIH Ps. 93, I iÎiîkil* ;
Ezek. 7, 37 ; IJ^nTI^ job 18, y j îsi*'^! 3^* 3^ ^S^^'? J*'*- 3* 5 J coP Jol>
33, 5 aud 74. ^. The d also appears before tiie fiiller ending )1 in the plwal of
the imperfect (comp. 47. m) as in Pt. ia 9. Job 9, 6. 16, lOdLUce the JVH
n|))^m ( $a. n), forms occur in HUI^H like n^^nnn Zecb. ^ 7; comp.
Am. 8, 13, and so in MUhpifel, Jer. 49, 3. Am. 9 13; witii / onlj in Lam. 4, i.
In tlie Aramaic manner an infinitive HUhpCU jnionnn ooenrs in Dan. 11, S3
(cf. the Hiph^l inf. H^B'n in Ezek. 34, 36).
a. As instances of the reflexive ^^HH (connected with a few re- /
flexive forms of the verb {to examine) .ire also jirobably to be reckoned,
lustead of a Pathah in a sharpened syllabic after the first raiHcal, these

take Qamcs in an open syllable, e.g. ^pBHn Judges io, 15. 17, tmp>/cct
*1gfin^ 30, 15. 21, 9. The corresponding passive form TIÊHn ako occurs four
times, Num. 47. a, 33. a6, 63. i Ki. 30, 37. According to others, these forms
are rather reflexives of Q0I, b the sense of to prtwU wmdf for musUri^g,
tfiU mmttftd, m the Aiamaie *mp/n (Western Aramaic T^^, Syr. T^^lf^
and the Ethiopic taqafla, Arab. *iqtaiala, the last with die < always placed'siiter
the rir>t radical 'comp. above, Itlter i> ; but they are more correctly explained,
Hithpa'H forms, the doubling of the p being abnormally omitted.
witli K^>nig. as
Such a reflexive of Qal, also with the T\ transposed, occtirs in Dnnlri (on the
analogy of Old Test. Hebrew to be pronounced Dnn!>n) in the inscription of
the Moabite king Miia\ with meaning of the Old Test. NipfCul DnJ)3
liie
tofightf to wage war: see the Inscription, lines xi, 15, 19, and 33 ; in the first
two places in the imfor/oet with wiw censecut^ finn^tl; in line 19 in the
infimth/o with snlfix, ^ SlbnnSns in hisfighting ^^î m.
{ 56 Leu Commm CanjugaHtm,
Of the less common conjugations (f 39.^) some waj be classed a
with PViU others with HipHQ, To the former belong those which
arise from the lengthening of the vowel or the repetition of one
or even two radicals, in fact, from an internal modification or
development of the stem ; to tlic latter belong those which are formed
by prefixing a consonant, like the n of Hlph'il. Amongst the conjuga-
tions analogous to Piel are included the passive forms distinguished
by their vowels, as well as the reflexives with the prefix {ui, on the
analogy of HithpdtL
The following conjugations are related to PiV/ as regards their b
inflexion and partly in their meaning
I. P(FH ^Dip, passive Pffal ^îp, reflexive HUkpltH ^piî corresponding
to the Ambic cooj. iil fUSUl, pass. îflHT/l, and cog. Vt. leflesive Ofdiitai
Digitized by Google
150 The Verb, [ 55-
imperfect hd\p\ , pciriu ipU ^D^pD, imperfect faisivc &c Hence it appears
that in Hebrew the 6 of the first syllable is in all the forms obscnred from A,
while the passive form is distingtnshed simply by the a-soimd in the second
syllable. In the strong verb these conjugations are rather rare. Examples:
participle ^DQ!^ mint adversary, wh0 toatUd contend tuiih m*. Job 9, 15;
^^^^D (denominati've from fi!t^ ike tongue) damdcring (as if wtUnt on utjuring
with the tongue) Ps. loi, 5 A'*M. The Q*n? requires, without apparent reason,
{rn'mnf) ; XOI^} tfuy have poured out, Ps. 77, 18 (if not rather
^Jl]^* / have appointed, i Sam. ai, 3 (unless ^riyiln should be read); lyb*
Hos. 13, 3 ; Enb? to take root, passive Bn^t}', denominative from tJ^.y root (on
the other hand, Bn.B' is to root cut) ; from a verb n'6, *riW Is, 10, ly, HilhpffH
Jer. as, I. 46, 8 \ Is. 5a, 5 {participle for J^KinO).
/VV/ proper (as distingmdied from tiie conespooding conjugations of verbs JK'P
f 67./ and V'y ( 7s. as, whidi take the place of the ordlnaiy cansattw Ktl)
eqmsses an um or endeavmir to perform the action, espedally widi hostile
bten^ and is hence called, by Ewald, the stem expressing the tdm (Ziel'ttamm),
endearwir 'Suche-stamm) or attcuk (Angriffi-stamm) ;
cnmp. the examples given
above from Job 9, 15. Ps. loi, 5. and J'îy i Sam. 18, 9 (probably for I2)J>D,
COmp 5a. s; 55./." seeking to cast an evil eye).
With ^D^p is connected the formation of ciuadriliterals by the insertion of

a consonant bctwcoi the first and second radicals ( 30. 3, 56).
3. J'a'lci, generally with the J attcuuaicd to f^^Pi'lil {rilal), ^,^tp|? and

^^Cp ; the e in the final syllable also arises from i, and this again from d ; ^pOMf
sive Av'ib/^^P^, lefleziTe Hitkpa'iii ^bo^nn, like the Arabic conjugaUons IX.
*iqtAUA and XI. 'iftdlUt the former nsed of permanent, the latter of accidental
or changing conditions, e.g. of coloms; comp. r^KS^ to teat rat, to 6e green,
passive /?tpK to be wtêred, all of them found only in the fetfeet and wiUi
no correqftonding Qtd form. (For the barbarous form *3Vint!))r Ps. 88, 17 read
âvm; for Ezek. 28, 33, whidt has manifestly arisen only from canfnsloa
vrith the following , read i
. These forms are more common m verbs V*^,
where they take the place of Pi'el and Hithpa'el ($ 7a. m). Comp. also { 75.ibl.
3. IâfeU: with repetition of the last two mdicals, used of movements

repeated in quick succession ; e. g. in"inD to go about quiikly, to pa'pitafe (of
the henrt) Ps. 3S, 1 i, from inD to go about ; passive ^piTpn to he in a ferment
to be hcatcii, to he ro/. Job 16, 16. I, am. i, 20. 2, 11. Probably this is also
the explanation of llfiyn (denom, from HlXiiTI a trumpci, hvX only in the
participle, i Chron. 15, 24 &c. K' ih.) for "^Snifn, l-y absorption of the first 1,
lengthening' of J in the open syllabic, and subseijucnt obstuiing of d to d. On
<
the other hand, lor the meaningless \27\ ^HS Hos. 4, 8 (which could only be
referred to ibis conjugation if it stood for DnunX) read >3nK, and fur the equally
meaningless H^D^D^ Ps. 45, 3 read H^DV In both thcbC cases a scribal error
{dittograplty) has been pcrpetiiate-<l by ibc punctuaiiou which did not venture
to alter the JC*tMNk, On the employment of Plated in the formation of mnaa,
comp. I 84^ viiL Closely related to this form ia
Digiii^ca by Cooglc
55*] Less Common Conjugations, 157
4. Pilpfl (pass. Pflpal), with a donbUog of the two essential radicals in stems
f
r'y, y'V, tnd v/y, e.g. U r9lt fifom i)3 = ili3; from i>^3, /ojjw
; rcjltxivt to roll wistlf dnm ; eomp. Ik> K^KD (so Bmt after
Qim^: others KDKD) Is. 14, 23, and with d in both BylUbki owing to the
iBfloeDce of "^GT^ from 1^ Ntun* tA '7 (comp. however, in the parallel
peiMge, Jer. 48, 45 *lt*'1^) ind Is. 9S> 5, in the fartkiple, Pcobablj to this form
also belongs ip!)^^'^ > the emended reading of Job 39, 30, instead of the impomible
ly^s also the participle Xi1fi> Hoc 7i 5 Ibr *iyo (oomp. | 5s. ^ and
nKDKp Is. 37, 8, if that form is to be referred to an im/mthie MgtK) ; perhaps
also KB^ Esek. 39, 3 for KC^KGS^. This form also commonly expreates rapidly
repeated moveTucnt, which all langtiages incline to indicntc l>y a repetition of
the sonnd ^ e. g. to chirf; comp. in the Lexicon the nouns derived from
As Hithpaipti we find j^pB'pn^ Nnh. 2, 5; !?nSnnn^ E5;th. 4, 4; nD^pn^. g

Dan. 8, 7. 11, II. Of the same form is H'n'^Sl Is, 3S, 15, if contracted from
^Hl'^r'^ or rn^nt* (from the root H or H), and also ^nDHDnn /,.v ;j
I&. 29, 9, nonpn*1 (in pamc) Gen. 19, 16 &c., if it is to be derived from "^'HD,^
Only examples more or less doubtful can be adduced of h

5. 2nr>A'r/ (praperly Tt^n*^\ ^fi^, with H pre6zed, comp. ^ri^nri /ôrA
10 wfftt, /uf (denominative from ^31 <x /iv/?) Hos. xi, 3 ; from a stem If'^,
the imferfeet nin|nj contend wUk, Jer. la, 5 ; farHei/ie, a a, 15 (from
^ Avr). Similarly m Aramaic^ Cîn /Ir intotfrat whence also hi Hebrew
the passim ptuHcifit XSFWO sr. 4, 7.
6. .<a/;iW: ê^> frequent in Syriac, e.g.an^ from :ffhtoJhm; whence f

in Hebrew ^mt. Perhaps of the lame fiinn is S^SB^ a smaU (wdcsa
it be from the stem ^31!^), and IiSTÎ^ hollow strokes, comp. ( 85, No. 50.
This conjugation is perhaps the original of Hiph'U, in which case the n, by
a phonetic change which may be exemplified elsewhere, is weakened from a
sibilant
Fonna of which only isolated examples oconr aie:^ k

7. fassioe C^^t u OfDIlD peeUd of, Uhe smtes, x. x^ 4t from
8. ygl^^}Xi^âmiitsXtmer4^faintit(m^^,
' Comp, Lat. Hnmot titiHtmuSf onr tick-tack, dimf^kmg, and ttie Gcman
wirrwarr, Itiingklang, The repetition of the saaie letter m verbs JT'Y prodnces
the same effect ; as in pp^ to h'ch, pp'^ U pound, ^120 to trip alat^. The same
thinfj is expressed al>n by diminutive forms, in Latin by the termination -illOi
e,jj. cantiilo, in (icim.m hy -eht, -em, e. g._/fm/tr;;, Irillrm^ troffcln, to friikli-.
The existence of a Taph'ci is contested on good grounds by iiaith, Nominal-

bUduii^, p. 379.
Digitized by
The Verb.
9- ''^2^? (frequent in New Hebrew*) a form compounded of Niph'al and
HUhpa'el) as tlGfl^l for riDyiJI thai tkey may be iau^t Ezck. 23, 48 ; -iB23
pfoUbly n enor for IBS^ beforgivent Dent ai 8. On nifHB^3 Ptov. 37, 15,
tee f 75. X*
{ 66. QuadriUlerals.
On the origin of these altogether secondary formations oomp. 30./.

While the quadriliteral neunt are tolerahlj numerous, only the foUow-
ing examples of the verb occur
(tf) On the analogy of AV/.- DD"||, imjxrfect 7\}iouyS*^ hi doth ravage it,
P, 80, 14 from DM, comp. Dta . Bassiae B^DDT to grow fresh again. Job 33, 25.
PatHcipU h'Sfyyp girti clothed (comp. Anmaic 733 to bituf) 1 Chran. 15, 37. It is
ttnal alao to ind^de anwog the qaadriliteials Job a6, 9, as a peiftd with
Patha^ not attenuated, in the Aimmaie manner. It is more correedy, however,
ro;>arded, with Delitzsch, as the it^Smtive absolute of a Pi'lel formation, from
fcnfl to spread out, wth enjihonic change of the first b to t!', and the second to t.
Moreover, the rending tb*")S also is very well attested, and is adopted hy Baer in
the text of Job ;
comp. the Rem. on p. 48 of his edition.
(h) On the analogy of Jliph'il: ij'NDb'n , by syncope fj^Ntpbn and \fX^7\
io turn to the L-ft (denom. from ^Kt^) Gen. 13,9. Is. 30, a J, and elsewhere.
On ^n*3]Kn comp. 53.
C. StllONG VUB WITH FftiWOlIIilAL SUFmiS*.
67.
The accusative of the personal pronoun, depending on an active
vcrb^ may be expressed (i) by a separate word, HX the accusative
sign (l)efore a suffix OK, HN) with the pronominal suffix, e.j2^. ^rik ^p^
he /las kilh J him ; or (2) by a mere suffix, or S^^p he has killed
him. The latter is the usual method ( 33), and we are here con-
' [Sec Slrack and Siegfried, Ltkrbiuk dif IftukebrSuekiH S^ke, Leipcig,
1884, 91. .S R. D.l
' This subject nf tlic verbal suffixes is treated here in connexion with the strong
verb, in order that both the form:^ of the suHTixes oiid the general laws which
regulate their union with verbal fonns may be dearly seen. The rutes whidi
fdale to die union of the snffins with weak verbs will he given under the sevenl
classes of dtoie Verbs.
' An accusative snffix occtirs with .Vif^h'cil in Ps. 109, 3 (since Dnf'i is used
in the sense of to attack), and according to some, in Is. 44, ai ; with JlithpaH
14, i iSnjnn to appropriate somebody to oneself as a possession)', comp. above^
S54 /,nd 117. w.
Digitized byÔBgle
1 58.] The Pronominal Suffixes of the Verb, 159
oemed with it alone Neither of these methods, however, is employed

vhen the accusative of the pronoun is rrflexfre. In that case
a reflexive verb is used, viz. Nipb'al or Hithpa'el (51 and 54),
e.g. CÎBTis? he tatuHfid kmself^ not which could only mean
he saneiêd kirn**
Two points must be specially considered here: the foim of the
sufiix itself ( 58), and the form which the verb takes when suffixes
are added to il
( 59-61).
68. Tfte Promrninal Suffixes of the Verb.
Cf. the statistics collected by H. Petri, Das Verbum mit Sujjixtn im Htin;^
part iJ, in the D^JSWI 0*8033, 1-eipzig, 1890.
1. The prmemmal n^xes appended to the verb express the ^

accusative of the personalprommn. They are the following:
B. C.
To a form ending in To a form in the Perf. To a fprm in the Impcrf^
a Vowel, ending in a Consonant. ending in a Consonant,
Sing. I. com. V-l- (in pome *?_;.) ^4. me,

a. m. ^ ^-f- (in /aiMtf ^-7-1 also ikee.
t ^-
3. m. 1 Am.
f. n T her.
1 iur. 1 . etjii!. ^ 1- us {nos).
2. m. j'ou {yos).
f.
3. m. Dn\ D D-^(fromDnJ-).0_^ D ^ (from El'34-) '^'J.
poet
f.
t_
* On the casta where flN is necessary, see 117. t*.
"
J^'""- 7> '9- 34 1 2- ^- 10 are only appareut exceptions. In all these
instances the sharp antithesis Ixrtwecn Crik [t hems fives) and another object could
only be expressed by retaimag ihe same verb; aUo in Ex. 5, 19 Dni< alter an
active wrb tenri to cmphuiBe the idea of tkemsdoet,
* on occm'flidy once u a terM soffix (Dent 3a, >6, vnleay with Kdum,
It^htitme . Pm^Ho^^ p. 13, DiTMBIft from |KB ! to be read), while the Ibrnw
}a (and///.) and and fn (sid/.//.), added by (^n^ never oocnr.
Digiii^ca by Coogle
i6o The Verb. [58.
h 2. That these suffixes are connected with ihe corresponding forms

of Uu personal pronoun ( 32) is for the most part seil-evident, and
only a few of them require elucidation,
c The suffixes ^3, ^, and n (also 1, when a long vowel in an open
syllable precedes) never have the tone, which always rests on the
preceding syllable; on the other band, 09 and 0^ always take

the tone.
d In the 3rd pers. masc* from W^., by contraction of a and u after
the rejection of the weak n, there frequently ariies S ( 33. k), ordinarily
written 1, much less frequently n (>ee 7. f). In the femmme, the

suffix n should be pronounced with a preceding a (comp. below, letter f,
note), as n _ or on die analogy oi dM; instead of H-^, however,
it was simply pronounced with the rejection of the final vowel,
and with Mappiq, since the n is consonantal; but the weakening to
fl-^ is also found, see below, letter
3. The variety of the sufTix-fomis is occasioned chiefly by the ict
that they are modified differently according to the form and tense
of the verb to which they are attached. For almost everj suffix
three forms may be distinguished:

(a) One beginning with a consonant, as ^ (only after t\
19^, (DH) 0, ftc. These are attached to verbal fonns which end with
a vowel, e.g. vi*ri|)Dp, for which by absoiption of the n we
also get Vn^Dip, pronounced q*taU(u; cf. 8. m.
f {V) A second and third with vhat are called canmcting vouitls^
used with verbal forms ending with a consonant (for
exceptions, see 59. g and 60. <). This fontuctitig vowtl is a with
the forms of the perfect, e.g. ^^^9?t * (less fre-
quently 0) with the forms of the imperfect and imperative, e.g. Vijb^,
fi^^; also with the infinitive and participles, when these do not take
noun-suffixes (comp. ) 61. a and 4). The fotm 1 also belongs to the
suffixes of the perfect, since it has arisen from vn,^ (comp., however,
{ (k>. if)* It the connecting sound is only a vocal S^wd^
' We have kept the term tmmtcting vowel, ahhongh It li rather a inpetictel
defcription. Mo$t probably these (onnecting syllaMes are reelly tbe rcmahu of
old verbal terminations, like the in the and pers. /rw. sing, ^n^pfjpp. Observe
e.g. the Ifd'Hu form iffiU ani in connexion with the Arabic qataht-ni, con-
trasted v%ith llctdov (flalal-ni aiid Aral'ii. qalalnt ni. KimiIl; ac'^^rdinj^ly prên
the expression '
vocalic ending of the stent,' instead ot ' comicOiiig jyUabl.'
530 The Pronominal Suffixes of the Verd, i6i
which has arisen from an original short vowel, thus 'J, e.g.
^^9? (^/o^/iî), or when the final consonant of ihe verb is a guttiual,

e.g. ^n^?^. In pause, the original $hort vowel (a) reappears
as S'gMi with the tone ^-^ (comp., however, ^4- '4

frequently; even irithout the patae Jer. 93, 37). On the appending
of snflbBes to the final of the imperfect ( 47. m), tee { 6a
Rem. T. As ran forms may be mentioned 2nd pcrs. masc. Gen. ^

2J, 7. I Ki. 18, 44, &c., in /<7us^ alio rt3 *_ (see below, letter t); ftm.
^3-1- Ps. I03 4. 137, 6. Instead of the form I}--., which is usual even in the
perfect (e.g. Jud. 4, 20. Eadc. 27, 36), "ri oociin ai fm* Is. 60, 9 (u iiMU
DenL 45. b. 30, 19. 55, 5 always in pause) wiA Munak Is. 54, 6.la the ;
3id man, ri Ex. 39, 35. Num. 93, 8 ; in the 3id fum. without Mappiq (oonpu
f 91. #) Ex. a 3. Jer. 44, 19 ; Am. i, iz, with retraction of the tone before a follow-

ing tone-syllable). The forms to^, ^JL, iO.^ are wholly poetic' (with the
exception of Ex. 33, 31); instead of IOlL theie occurs in Ex. 15, 5 On the
origin of these forms, see f 39. m; on the nse of as a singular, ace the 2nd
note on 103./; on and ^ as snffixes of the 3rd fcm. plur. of the im{>crfect,
60. </. In Gen. 4S, 9 N3"Dn^ (cf. DB^D3*1 i Chron. 14, 11 according to Baer),
D- has lost the tone before Aiaqqepk and so is iôrtened to 0..^. In zek*
44, 8 pO*fe^^ is probably an error for D^D^b^flV
a. From a comparison of these verbal suffixes with the noun-suffixes ( 91) we ^
find lhat (u) tbeie is a greater variety of formt amoogst the verbel than amongst
the noniMnffixet, the forms and relations of the verb itself being more varioos
(^) the verbal snfiiz, where it difliers firom that of the noon, is longer; oomp. e. g.
*3 4-, "^^^ * "^y^- The xeasoa is that the ptonominal
object is less closely conn?* -t^d with the verb than the po'^sessivc pronoun (the
genitive' with the noon ; coQscqu^tly the former can also be expressed by
a separate word \^T\k^ &C.).
4* A verbal form with a sufilix gains additional strength, and i

sometimes intentional emphasis^ when, instead of the mere connecting
vowel, a lull connecting-syUable* (iXn) is inserted between the suffix
and the verbal stem. Since, however, this syllable always has the
tone, the d is invariably (except in the ist peis. sing.) lengthened
* In Pfe. a > oceois five times, and only twice.

* It is, however, a questioa whether, instead of a connecting syllable, we should
not assume a special verbal form, analogous to the Arabic energetic mood ^see the
Kern, at the end) and probably also appearing in the Hebrew cohortative fce
the foot-note on 48, r). According to Berliner, Beitriii^c zur hebr. Gramnu
im Talmud u. Afidrasck, the form with N^n is used to exprci>s the simple future
and to lay stress upon the object, while the ordinary Xorm b need to express
the optative or after wim tmsteutiife, a remade which is almost alwap coafiimed
by the&ctSi
X
Digiii^ca by Cooglc
i62 The Verb,
to S'giSt. This is called the Mn tmrgmm ^ (less suitably demtmsira'
timm or epeniheHcum)t and occurs principally (see, however. Dent.

32, 10) in pausal forms of the imperfect, e.g.
<
'^^^nv he mil Hess Mm
(Ps. 72, 15, comp. Jer. 5, 22), '*?^7'?^: '^'^^ honour me (Ps. 50, 23);
rarely in tlie perfect, Deut. 24, 13. On examples like *|3'=t Gen. 30, 6,
comp. 26. g. In far the greatest number of cases, however, this
NUn is assimilated to the following consonant D), or the latter
is lost in pronunciation (so n), and the Niin coasequently sharpened.

Hence we get the following series of suffiz-forms ;
ist /cri. ^14- (even in pause, Job 7, 14 and elsewhere), (for
2nd pers. (Jer. 22, 24 in pause il^-^) and, only orihographically

different,
n3_l (Is. ID, 24. Prov. 2, II in pause),
3rd ptrs. ^4 (for ^n? \)\ fern, ns^ for ru X.,
[ist pers.plur, U-^- (for ^-Û*

In the other persons Nfin energetic does not occur.
^ Rem. The uncontracted forms with N^n are rare, and occur only in ]'<^rtic
or elcvaud style (Ex. 15, 2. Dent. 32, 10, Jer. 5, 22. 22, 24); thev :\<c never
found in the 3rd /gm. sing, and 1st f/ur. On the other hand, the conlracicd forms
sn toleimbly freqiieiit, even ia proie. An esnmple of ^-L. u lit /fur, oocus
perhaps in Job 31, 15 (hnt hmrdly in Ho*. i 5); comp. \a|n iekpUf Mt, Gen.
44, 16. 50, 18. Nmn. 14, 40 for ^sn.In Enik.4, tllh* Mflion reqoiies rU^^H,
'
without Dagel in the NOn.
/ That the forme with N4h energicum are intended to give gietter emphs^
to the wrhal form is seen from their s[>ccial frcqncncy in fause. Apart from
the vfr!). however, A tin entrgicum occurs also in the union of suffixes with
certain particles ( 100. 0).
This Niln is fieqnent in Western Amnalc In Anbic the contspouding fonns
tre the Vmoettefgiik mtedt (see f 48. eiidhie in an end mmh, idtidi eie need
in connexion with suffixes (e.g. yaqhUan-ka or j^tukmm-ka) as wU *
without them.
50. 77te Per/eei with Pronominal Suffixes,
a ! The endings {afformatives) of the perfect occasionally vary
somewhat from the ordinary form, when connected with pronominal

suffiies; viz.:
* So lUoig^ bl!r^. i. p. s6. * Oabastt_ Num. 13, 13, 106167. k

{ 59-1 The Perfect with Pronominal Suffixes. 163
{a) In the 3rd sing, /em. the original feminine ending H- or H-^ is
used for n_.

{h) and titig, nuuc. besides we find A, to which the connecting vowel
is closel/ attached, but the only dear instances of this are with ^3.^'.
(r) snd nng*/m* the onginal form of A; comp. ^J'C^,
Z^'f* I 44* ^* f*" can be distinguished from the ist pers.
only by the context

(</) 2nd plur. masc. VI for D^^, a change which is explained by the
Arabic 'antum, qalaltum '^ Aram. jVIK, JVlj)Dp for Heb. Diîl*, D^S'P?
( 32. t). The only examples are Num. 20, 5. 21, 5. Zech. 7, 5.
The /cm. never occurs with suffixes ;

probably it was not
distinguished in pronunciation from the masculine.
We exhibit first the forms of the perfect HipKU^ as they are h
pronounced when connected with suffixes, since here no further
changes take place in the stem itself, except as regards the tone
(see No. 2).
Singular. Plural
3. m. ^'^\>J\
3. /. nJ'^Dpn
9. St.
s. /. *9êpn
I. c
The beginner should 6rst practise connecting the saflfixes with these HipKil
fionns tnd then go on to tuiite than to tiie Piffeet Qal (see letter d),
2. The addition of the sufiix generally causes the tone to be thrown

forivard towards the end of the word, since it would otherwise
in some cases, on the ante-penultima; with the hionty suffixes (see
ktter t) the tone b even transfexred to the suffix itself. Considerations

of tone, especially in the Perfect Qal, occasion certain vowel changes
(a) the Qamtf of the first sylkble, no longer standing bâre the tone,
always becomes vocal S^wd; {b) the original Paihah of the second
syllable, which in the 3rd sing. fern, and 3rd plur. had become S'wd,
now reappears, and, in an open sellable before the tone, is even
* Even hcR it is extremely probable that the <l belongs originally to Uie verbal
fonn tee $ 58./ note.
* According to Noldeke, ZDMG. 38, p. 415, the gTOllttd>foilll of Uie nAplttr.
mate* piobaUy tenninated in iumH.
u a
Digitized by Google
164 The Verb, [59.
lengthened to Qames ; siniikrly original i (as in ihe 3rd smg. masc.

<
wilhout a suffix) reappears, and is lengthened to i, e.g. ^î}*}
I Sam. 18, 22. Prov. 19, 7.
d The forms of the perfect of Qal coosequeotijr appear as follows:
PbtraL
3. m, i9P
3. / 'li'Ci? (ri^^??, letter

g)
2, m. P^Stop (nSo^, letter ^) 3. V)^D^
a. /. ^nj'cp (nj)^, letter il)
I. c. 'Plf^
The connexion of these forms with all the sullixes is shown

in Paradigm C. It will be seen there also, how the ^re in the
Perfect PTil changes sometimes into S'ghSl, and sometimes into
vocal ^^wd,
f Rem. I, Hie inffiMB of tbe and and jid pen. plor. ud OH, nnoe iSaey end
in n consonant and also always have tike tiOOe are distmguished as /^('arp' soCfixet
(suffixii pavia^ from the rest, which are called Iii;hl suffixes. Compare the
connexion of these (and of the corresponding feminine forms p and JH) with
the ttcu, % 91. With a perfect D3 alone occurs, Ps. nS, 26. The forin ht^p
which is Qsnally given as the connective form of the 3rd sinp. masc. before D3
and p is only formed by aiiiilof^y, and is withont example in the Old Testament.
y 2. In the 3rd sing, ntasc. ^nb'op (especially in verbs H"^ ; in the stronj^ verb
only in Jcr. 20, 15 in PCfl) is mo!tly contracted to ,

according to 33. i; ;
iikcvvisc in tlc 2nd sing. masc. ^nn^Dp to Vl|)Di?. As a suffix of the 1st sing.
occnrs several times with the 3rd sing. masc. perf. Qal of verbs 7}"^, not only
in pause as ^33y 118, 5; ^^^\> Prov. S, 3i with D'ht), hut als. wuh a con.
junctive accent, as >T\T\ Job 30,19; 1 Sam. a 8, 15 (where, however, the

reading is also found).
^ 3. The 3rd siuf^. fern. nScp ( = n^Cp) has the twofold peculiarity that {a) the
ending aih always takes the tone and consequently is joined to those satExes,
which foRn a liable dF tiiemtelves (^3, ^ ,
Xn, n ,
U). witibout * eonncctiiig vowel,
contnuy to the geneial rule, % 58./; (^) befiwe the other soflExes the comiecting
vowel is mdeed emplcyed, hot the tone la dftwa back to the ptmUtima, 10 that
*
thejr Are proooonoed with thoitened voweli, via. ^^ * ^ _ ^
e.g. IfTOnil
the tevtt thtit Ruth 4, 15; Ori|^ ski kas sMem tktm^ Gen. 31, 3a; DDfpi^
U htnv them, la. 47, 14. Joa. a, 6. Hot. a, 14. Pk 48, 7. For ^SH-^, ^~='
'
îl^^Sn Cant. 8, 5 Is an eiccption. would probably even here have the
tone ncttcr / ; Init no example of the Icind occTjr<! in the Old TeiUoieBt la Xs.
31, 3 the impcrfKt is osed instead of \he perfect w ith a su&x.
Digitized by Google
6o.] Imperfect with Pronominal Sujixes, 165
fte.,in famsi^^ U Ibmd, Jer. tu Pi. 69, i<h and ^n_^ Cant. 8^ 5 ; and alio
widwat tbe /saw for fhe nke of tlie aiimiam ^nj^în, tkt wat m trmfaiiwitk
tJUe, in tbc lanie veiae (Cttt 8, 5}. The tarn V^tS^ (e. g. Rath 4, 15) has
aziaen throofh the Ion of the H and the coawqaeot ahaipcning of the n (at hi
0^ end for ^ns^. and . oomp. f 58. t), from the fonn Wri^, which
if -also ANind even in fatm (innsntt i Sam. tS, aB ; elaewheie it teket in /atue
Hkt form mna^ Ii. 59, i<t); 10 nij6^ ftom nn5|l^> oompb 1 Sam. 1, 6.
!* 34* 17* Jcr- 49i 34> Kutb 3, 6 ; in /ause Esdc X4, 15, always, on the authority
of Qimhi, withont Mtfj^ in tlie flf wliich is oanscqiientlj alwaji a mens vowd-
letter.
4, Tn the and si$i^. masc. the form JRl!>Di? is mostly used, and the suffixes have, A
therefore, no connecting vowel, e.g. UHÔ ^3rir^| Aast cast us off, thi>u
hast krokm ms dmm, Pk. 60, 3 : hot with the snff. of the it afaif. the foim
^^ripD^ is naed, a.g. ^jr)"^ Fs. 139, i; hi famut however^ with Qtmii, t.g,
*^?!^ as, a ; Jud. 15 (wMi Zaqtph ^m); oomp., however, also

Pi. 17, 8 widi jUStfÂitf.In the aod smg*ftm is alio written defectively,
^îrnBT] 1 Sam. 19, 17. Jnd. 11, 35. Jer. 15, 10. Caat 4, 9. Oocesloaally the
snffiz & a^wnded to the diorter fonn (A__),Tb. thorn {/em.) datt adjun
m, Canl. 5,9. Jos. a, 17. so; eonp. Jer. o, 27, and, quite abnoimally, with
tAcM {fm.) ^dtt Ut Mt dnm, Jos. 3, 18, wheie Wpin wmdd be
expected. In Is. 8, 1 1 ^JT^G^ b probably Intended as an imperftet*
3. In verbs ataMr t, the / remains even before suffixes (see above, letter r), i
e. g. âjTK Dent. 1 5, 16, VDTianM i Sam. iR, a8, comp. 18, %t ; Job 37, 94.
^rrtK"!*
From a verb middle o there oocnrs VJ^^D^ / h<tve prevailed agaimt Aim, Ps. 13, 5,
from with if instead of # in a syllable which has lost the tone (f 44. ).
{ 00. Imperfict with Pronominal St^fixtt,
In those foinu of the imperfcci Qal, which have no afformatives, die a

voxi'el 0 of the second syllable mostly becomes * (simple vocal S'tod),
sometimes '
(-vr)l ^^^s in the principal pausc^ Num. 35, 20. Is. 27, 3.
62, 2. Jer. 31, 33. Ezek. 35, 6. Hos. 10, 10; before the principal
pause, Ps. 119, 33; before a secondary pause, Ezek. 17, 33; even
before a conjunctive accent, Jos. 23, 5. Before M-r* however,

it is shortened to d (Qamef-îuph), c. g. VPf) (but in pause TJOf^
or W^tfl ; with NiOn tmrgiam, see { 58. 4), OJlof^, ftc. Instead of
n^jiibpn, the fonn ^bo^^ is used for the and and 3rd fim.^lm', before
suffixes; Jer. a, 19. Job 19, 15. Cant, i, 6.
* This form is also found a?; fcmimnc without a saflix, Jer. 49, 11. Eztk. 37, 7.
In the latter ])assagc ^3"|f?riT is probably to be resjErded, with Konig, as a clumsy

correction of tlie original 'pjl, iolcnded to suggest the reading nâTj^, to agree
with the usual gender of ritD3[y
Digitized by Google
i66 The Verb. [60.
It Rem. I. an anomalous form for ^1^31^ (conii.the analogous

^"ÎirP Ps.94, ao is
% 67. n) ajul "î;^ (so Baer other* ^JlB?) Gen. 3a, 18 for ^B^SD^ . To ;
the same category as 'j'^^rP belong also, according to the usual explanation,
"IDyn (from ibyn"', V\ 20, 5. 33, 24. Ucut. 5, 9, and '3^3^ Dent. 13,3. As a
matter of fact, th explanation of theê forms as imperfects of Qui appears to
be required by the last of these passages; yet why has the reiiaciion of the
taken place only in these examples (beii^ aameronf forms like ^H??.) ^ Co")<^
the Maaoia in the two Decalogues and in Ex. s^, 24, (on the analogy of whidi
Oeut. 13, 3 was then wrongly pointed,) have intended an imperfect Mofk*al wtdi
the Wifhx^ thou shalt not allow thyself to be brought to ruorship them t
C Verbs which have a in the second syll.-iblc of the imperfect, and imperative, Qal
(to which class especially nrba tcrliai and niidiac guttur. fxrlong, 64 and % 6$)
do not, as a rule, change the i'athah ot the imperfect (nor of the imperative,
see g ^^.) into vocal Sl^wd before suffixes; bnt the Pathah, coming to stand in
an open qrUable before the tone. Is rather lengthened to Qame^, e. g. ^^Cq!)^
Job 29, 14 J vrtlp 3, 5 ; on^p. Jos. 8. 3 ; ^n^^ Ps. 145, 18; hot also Unpj
Jet. S3, 6.
d 3. As exceptions, though they aie not laie, suffixes with the connecting vowel a
are found with the imperfect, e.g. ^SQB'VI Gen. 19, 19, comp. 29, 32. Ex. 33, 20.
Num. 32, 33. I Ki. 2, 24 <^r?, Is. 56, 3. Job 9, 18 ; also , Gen. 27, 19. Job
7, 14. 9, 34. 13, 31 (in principal pause) ; nySft Gen. 37, 33, comp. 16, 7. 3 Sam.
II, 27. Is. 26,5. Job 38, 27. 1 Chron, 20, a; ^2^^3! Is. 63, 16 (manifestly owing
to the influence of the preceding tt^^; Q^J^l >9i ^> comp. a, 17. Nam.
a I, 30. Deut 7, 15. Ps. 74, 8; ewn dJ?^ "8, 10-12 ; |^?n>^ Ex. a, IJT, and
|n*IT Hab. a, 17 (where^ however, the old versions read fn^rP) ; even IBTI^
{6 from dhu) Hos. R, 3 ;
comp. Ex. I Sam. 18, 1 K*th., 2T, 14
22, 39. Jos, a, 4.
(wlicre, however, the te.\t Sam. 14,6 (where it would be better
is conupt; ; 1
to read or with the old versions T]*\) Jcr. 23, 6 (sec 74. tr). I's, 35,8. ;
Eccles. 4, 1 3.On pausal S'ghdl for ere in Pa^JK"!. Gen. 48, 9 and VT^JFIl
(so Baer, bnt not ed. Mant.) Jud. 16, 6, see 29. ^.
g 3. Soffixes ate sometimes also appended to the plural forma in |^ ,

e.g. ^33VCnn
witt ye brwk m m futesi Job 19, s; ^^^1^*'' (here necessarily with a con-
necUng vowel) 1%^ 60, 7. 10 ; Pror. 5, as : ehiewbeie always without a connect*
ing vowel; ^|^(^ with two other examples Piov. i, s8. Hos. 5 15; comp.
^n-^ PS. 63, 4. 9i xs ; ViaJL Jer. 5, as ; rW Jer. a 14 ^ all in pibelpal
pause.
f 4. In peel, PS'Pl, and Po'lil. the Sere of the Enal syllable, like the Jin Qal,
beconus vocal S'uui ; but before the suffixes ^ and DI3 it is shortened
to S'gh6l, e.g. '^yBi^ Deut, 30, 4. Ps. 34, 12. Is. 51, 2. With a final guttural,
however, e is retained in the tone-syllabic ^H^tJ't? Gen. 32, 27 ; also Prov. 4, S,
where with Qimhi ^13311 is to be read; an analogous case in IIiph'tl\% ^p'Vy,
Deut. 32. 7. Less frequently i^cre is sharpened into IJirtij, e. g. 02?^

Job j6, 5, inp. K.X. 31, 13. Is. I, 15. 53, 1.' ; so in /WW, Is. 25, i. I's. 30, 2.
37, 34. 145. I, and probably also in â/ "^DDN i Sam. 15, 6; conap. 6.S. h.
g 5. la liipA'il the long / remains, eg. ^âi^ job 10, 11 (after a^w con-
6i.] Infinitive njith Pronominal Suffixes. 167
MTMlntf often writtea defecdvelj, e.f. D^!>^. Gen. 3 ai and ptnim). Fonns
like nine^ Mm tnnekest it. Fit. 65* 10. i Sam. 17, 15, are lare^ Comp. f 53. .
6. lattcftd of the toflfot of tiie 3fd plnr. fern. (}), the luffix of the 3id ptor. h
OMsc. (D) is affixed to tbc afformative \, to avoid a confasion with the p< r
cndLnj,' \\; comp. D^xf'PÎ Gen. 26, 15 (prcnously also with a jicrf. D^HD)
Gen. j6, iS, 33, 13. Kx. j, 17 iwhere occurs immediately after) ; 39, 18. 20.
I SaiD. 6, 10 (where also OH^^B is for ^ QCfilect of gender which caa only be
explained by % 135. 0),
OL Infinitive^ Imperalivt and ParlicipU wilh Pronominal Suffixes.
1. The mfinitiue consfruel of an actme verb may be constraed with a

an accusative, and therefore can take a verbal suffix, i. e. the accusative
of the personal pronoun. The only undoubted iusiances of the kind,

however, in the Old Testament are infinitives with the verbal suffix
of the ist pers. sing., e.g. ^Î?^'!^ lo inquire 0/ nif, Jer. 37, 7. As
a rule the infinitive (as a fioun) takes /Kîm-suffixes (in the genitive),
e. g. P^^^*V hi ^5*9 ^'^ ^f^'gning, see X15. <i and e. The

infinitive Qalt then, usually has tbe form qlÛ the short vowel returning
to the first radical (on the probable ground-fonn ^tf/itf, see 46. a).
The result is, as a rule, a half-closed syllable, e.g. ^3roa in hit
writing, Jer. 45, i, not ^3 kSih'Mt see ai.// comp., however, ^9fn
Gen. 19, 21
10; before 1-
; ^ (soed.Mant.; others
and 03-^ also the
^Q^^) Ex. 12, 27;
syllable is completely closed,
i Chron.
4,
e.g. ^Bp3 Ex. 23, lb. Lev. 23, 39 (bui 111 pause Vi^f? Gen. 27, 42),
unless llie vowel be retained in the sccoiul syllable ; see letter </.
Wilh the form îî? generally, compare the closely allied nouns of the
form ^ (before a suffix or ^0^, 84 a, 1 ; 93. f
Rem. I. The which hcve ^ in tbe last tjrlUbte of the imperfut

bfin. of verhe b
of Qoly KMnetimcft takes the fotm before mfiuces, e.^. ^1333 Ex. 31, 8;
eriaO Am. a, 6 (but ni3D Ex. ai, 8), i^JD3 a Sam. i, lo (but i^B3 i Sam. 29, 3),
^fyS^ Ler. a6, 36. Eiek. 30, 18 &c. According to Barth (see above, ( 47.
with the note) these forms with / in the first syllable point to former l impcrfects.
Infinitives of the form ( 45. f) in verbs middle or third guttural 'bnt cf. C
also n33^ (Jen. 19. 33. 35 elsewhere "^^DC^ and 133B^) before suffixes sometimes
take the form qaij, as ISyt Jon. i, 15 I'and, uitlj the syllable mly half cloicii,
ioys Jud. 13, 35), 'JKnp aiid Kick. 35, 6; soiiictmie qiil, wiili the
a attenuated lo 1, especially verbs third guttural; as l]n03, *yi>a, DP??, ^ViS,

'rUTB, rl^3"}.Contrary to ( 58./ ^34. (i Chron. i a, 17) andi)^- (Ex. 14, ii)
aie finnd with the it^f^he instead of ^"'^ ^ ^BTIl my following
Digitized by Google
i68 The Verb.
'H. 38, ai, fat which ^ nqnim eomp. the aukfoweuakiiltt in
f 46. <e.
^ a. With the suffixes ^ and 05 ,

contrary to the analogy of the correspond-
ing noons, forms occur like ^SoN i^y eaitng, Gen 2 17 ;

nr^DX Goi. 3, 5 ;
tJTDJ; (others ÎCyj' Obad. li, i.e. with 3 shortened m thesame way as in
the imf>erfet, see 60. But the a&alug>' of the nouns is followed in such forms
as h2'yi\) your karvestingt Lev. 19, 9. 33, aa (with a return of the original
and OSDMO (read ttUfS^Mhn) your despUing, Is. 30, ii ; comp. Dent ao^ S >
on D2Ki'b3 Gen. 3S ao (for 'SfCa), see 74. A.
e Examplei of the inJmUiot NipKal with inflkea ue, nnSTI Ex. 14, 18 ; Yi9!P?
Dent.a8.ao (in /raw, vene 34); iDDI^ Pi> 37*33l DJ'}^ X^k.
^H?!^?
at, S9: DIDCrn Dent 7, aV In the h^MHm ^^JPiÛ (as nlw in the imftt^t
ace I te./) ^
r befme the snff. D3 becomes JV^>**C*T]?'9 ><^
andwUhashaipaiBgtol'QJ^j^ Is.i,i5(ieef 6a/}. In the M^ffinAsnw /VVil^

DJWHf occurs (with a for / or I) Am. 5, 11, but probably Q^D^S, with
Wellhausen, is the right reading; the oonection D has oept into the tt alongside
of the corrigindum V.
2. The leading foim of the mpercihte Qal before (ÔQ)

J suffi^xes
is due probably (see 46. //) to the retnm of the original short vowel
of the first syllable (grouMj-loim yui'ui). In the imptrattrf also

a stands in a half-closed s} llablc, e. ^. Diiri3 kbthhhan (noi /c/ /-/< "/),
&c.* As in the iniptr/ect 60. d) aiid injiniiive (see above, letter r),
so also in the imperative, suihxes are found united to the stem by an

a-sound; e.g. nari3 Is, 30, 8; comp. 2 Sam. 12, 28. The forms
^09, which are not exhibited in Paradigm C, midei^ no
change. Instead of n^j^^^Pi the masc. form is used, as in the
g In verbs which form the imperaiofe with a, like (to which dass
belong especially verbs middie and tkird guttural^ 64 and 65), this
a retains its place when pronominal suffixes are added, but, since it
then stands in an open syllable, is, as a luuUcr of course, lengthened to
Qames (just as in imperfects Qal in a, 60. r), e. g. me,
Is. 6, 8, V^n? Ps. 26, 2, Ps. 50, 15, Wr' Gen. 23, 8. In
Am. 9, I, (so Bacr, instead of the ordinary reading Dy?a) for
0)f|fa is irregular. The retraction of the tone, which causes the
' ^yyOU^ idm'rcnt required bv the Masora in Ts. 16, i (also rODB' F. 86, a.
119, 167; comp. Is. 38, 14 and ^"jCJ? Obad. 11), belongs to the disputed caises
discussed in 9. f and 48. /, note. According to Delitrsch, the short a, which

i% the value of the Qames ûph of the Masora (see abon^ % 8. d), is here
simply lengthened to long i.
62.] Ferds with Guilurals. 169
change of / to i, is doubtless to be explained, with KOnig, as a case

of Tiasog 'ahor (comp. 29. e, and llie analogous W"Dn|? l:ri;ig them,
J pray ihte. Gen. 48. 9). In the imperative Hiph'ih the form used in
conjunction with suffixes is not the 2nd sing, masc, but ^^tlpn
<
(with i on account of the open si^llable, comp. } 60.^), e.g.

Vi^^]^
present it, IMal. i, 8.
3. Like the infinitives, the participles can also be united with either h
verbal or nonii'^Buffizes ; see { 1 16. 3. In both cases the vowel of the
participles is shortened or becomes S'wd before the suffix, as in the
corresponding noim-foms, e.g. from the form bp^; ivi*!, ftc.;
but before j^mf mobik ^ sharpening Ex. 23, 4

'^'^^^
and elsewhere, ^Bpk a Kings 23, so (coinciding in form with the

I St sing, imperfect Qal, i Sam. 15, 6; comp. 68. h). On the other
hand, with a middle guiiui.il

C^>^\ with a third guttural, '^^13
Is. 43, I, but ^n^-"*, comp. 65. d. The form ^W9, wiili suffix
'Jj^^ ; before S'wd somtnn,< s like Is, 48, 17, D^DPUO 51, 12,
sometimes like MBD^<0 52, 13. In I& 47, 10, is irregular for
^Hp* instead of the quite meaningless Jer. 15, 10, the

true reading is
{ 62. Verbs with Gutturals,
Verbs wiudi have a gnttnral for one of the three radicals differ
in their inflexion from the ordinary strong verb, according to the

general rales in 32. These differences do not affect the consonantal
part of the stem, and it is, therefore, more correct to regard the
guttural verbs as a subdivision of the strong verb. At the most, only

the complete loss of the doubling in boiiie of the verbs rniddU guttural
(as well as in the imperfect Aiph'al of verbs Jirst guttural) can be
called a real weakness 63. h, 64. d)^ On the other hand, some
original elements have been preserved in guttural stems, which have
degenerated in the ordinary strong verb; e.g. the ^ of the initial
syUable in the mparftet QaJ, as in ^to^-* whilst elsewhere it is
attenuated to f, ^^9(^7. In guttural verbs M and n are only taken

into consideration when they are actual consonants, and not vowel*
letters like the K in some verbs k"b ( 68), in a few k"p ( 73. g),
and in most \n,"b ( 74). In all these cases, however, the K was at
least originally a fuU consonant, while the n in verbs n'^ was never
Digitized by Google
The Verb.
anytbing but a vowel letter, comp. { 75. The really consonantal
n at the end of the word is marked by Ma^Sg, ^Verbs containing

a1 also, according to 22. 5, share some of the peculiarities of the
guttural verbs. For more convenient treatment, the cases will be
distinguished, according as the guttural is the first, second or third
radical. (Comp. the Paradigms D, E, F, in which only those con-
jugations are omiued which are wholly regular.)
63. Veris First Gftitural, e. g. TO? to stand.
In this class the deviations from the ordinary strong verb may be
referred to the following cases :
1. Instead of a single Shtfd moitie, the initial guttural takes

a cmpound S^wd (Jâtepk, la^ aa. /). Thus the mfimtioes *lb^,
^bt| to tat, and the perfects, 2nd phtr. masc, 0^1^, O^BH from fon
to be mcUmd, correspond to the forms and I^j'Pi?, and to
^Ô^, and so always with initial before a suffix for an original
according to 22. 0.
2. When a preformalive is placed before an initial guttural, the
two may cither form a closed syllable, or the vowel of the pre-
formative is repeated as a HaUph under the guttural. If the vowel
of the preformative was originally a, two methods of formadon may

again be distinguished, according as this a remains or is attenuated
tof.
Examples : (a) of firmly closed syllables with the original vowel
of the preformative (always with o in the second syllable ; but cf.
letter*): iblj!, I*"!, 1|Wj!, Jer. 9, 3 (probably to distin-

guish it from the name just as in Jer. 10, 19, &c., the participle
fem. Kiph'al of nbn is nbn3 to distinguish it from n^ri: \ &c., and so

generally in the tmpir/td Qal of sicms beginning with n, ahhough
sometimes parallel forms exist, which repeat the a as a ILiitph,
e.g. ^''"0,1, &c. The same form ap()ears also in the iinpcr/al J/iph'il
Tpn' ,<^'c. Very rarely the original a is retained in a closed syllable
under the preformative J of the ptr/eci Niph'al: rwanj Gen. 31, 27;
comp. I Sam. 19, a. Jos. a, 16, also the infinitive absolute DiRTQ
Esth. 8, 8, I Chron. 5, ao, and the partieipkfem. (see above,
letter c), ptur, Prov. 27, 6. In these forms the original i is
commonly kept under the prefoiinative foUowed by JStal^PÔhaki
DigLtiîiiil^^Sg^^
1 63.] yerbs First GuHuraL 171
thus in the perfici of aome verbs ri^, e. g, n)s^, ftc.; in the mJimHui
a^sabOe, ^fBTg sth. 9 t ; in the par/iciple, yyij Ps. 89, 8, Ac.
(^) Of half- closed syllables (where a Hateph follows) with the d

original vowel : ir3n* (but r2n^ Job 5, 18 in pause), D^'n-.,nbv; ,
Din*_,
and so almost always with y and n in the imperfects of (>a/ and

/^//jAY/; in HopHal, npjjn, npJJV
The I of the preformative, attenuated from a, before a guttural ^

almost alwajs (f as. f") becomes S^ghM (comp., however, letter
This S^ghSl again appears sometimes (e) in a closed syllable, e. g.
'^^f "'Ût ^Hî always with ^ in the second syllable, corre-

sponding to the imperfects of verbs Xf% with original f in the first
and ^ hi the second syllable, 67. and also to the imperfects of

verbs l"y, 72. A ; but c also "^bx^ and ; in Niph., e. g. "HBi^J, ^^"^
Am. 6, 6, &c., in II iph.^'^P^'^ , D^S'Vf? 2 Kings 4, 27, &c.: iônietimes

(d) in a half-closed syllable (followed by JJateph-S'gh^l), e. g.
Rem. With legud to tiie above examples tiie following points nay alio f
be noted s(l) The forms with n firmly closed syllable (called the bard combination)
frequently occur in the same verb with forms containing a half-closed syllable
(the soft combination), (a) In the 1st sing, imperfect Qal the |)reform.ntive
K invariably receives S'ghSl, whether in a firnily or half-closed syllable, c. g. COnK

(with the cohortative riB^^), "^DIIX (in pause) dec. In Job 32, 17 nDJ|X must
nnqtiestionably be I/ipA'f/, since daewheie the pointing is always . Coh<ntatives
like n:'^ni< Gen. 97, 41, and n^'lRK Job t<S, 6, are exphJned by the next femark.
(3) The shifthig of the tone towards tlie end frequently canses tfie of the
piefoffmattve to change into S*gMltModvUttimm, e.g. n^p_, hut
ftm.; ibK* , but 'pCHn

;
1^0|H1, hnt with waw consecutive ri^pj'"^ &C.; so
T1pn*\ Gen. 8, 3 the plur. of 1pn*1 ,

comp. Gen. 11,8; and thus generally a change
of the stronger Haiepk-S'gh6l group ( ) into the lighter iratiph-Patlu^h {,Toup
takes place whenever the tone is moved one place toward the end (comp. 27. nr).
3. When in forms like '^^V,., "^V,^, the vowel of the final syllable
g
becomes a vocal ^wd in consequence of the addition of an aiTui ma-
tive (^, V ,
51) or siiffix, the compound S'ud of the guttural is
changed into the corresponding short vowel, e. g. I^^H,-, plur. ÎDJ?.-
{ya-â-m'-dM as an equivalent for ya'-m'-dhil) ; she I'x /ortaAen*

But even in these fonns the bard combination frequently occurs,
e.g. ^^fljC /Aey Utie at a pledge (comp. in the sn^, also ;
(also ^VfH) fhey art ttrmg, Comp. letter m and, in general,
31. SI, ) 28. r.
Digitized by Google
172 The Verb,
h 4u In the infinitive^ imperative, and imperfect Niph'al, where llie first
radical shouM regularly be doubled ^P^".), ibe doubling is
always omitted, and the vowel of the preformative lengthened to

ere; TDg. for ji"dmed\ &c Comp. aa. i. For nf^R Ex. 25, 31
(according to Dillmann, to prevent the prommciadon '"i^^, which
the LXX and Samaritan follow) read *^^T^*
Kbmabks.
I. Om Qai,
$ I. Id yrtOm Htb imJSititwe iomsinut uni uttftrwHee take ff(K^^kîkii ia

the fut qrUable (according to % aa.tf), e.g. ^fK gird thou. Job 38, 3, an|| km
ihtnt, Hot. 3, 1, )hK seizr thoUf Ex. 4, 4 (on ^DN bake ye, Ex. 16, 33, see 5 76, rf);
infinitive with prefix THk^^, ib|?, !>bK| Is. 5, 34; Eccles.
3, 8. Sometimes, however, Hateph-Pathah is found as well, e. g. tHH

1 Ki. 6, 6; C^n Num. 26, 10 (f cfore a suffix ^SsK. D2^3K 6i. ^)
oomp. Deut. 7, ao. 12, 23. Ezek. 35, 8. Vs. ioj, 5. Prov. 25, 7 Job
34, 18, always in close connexion with the following word. ith a firmly
closed syllable after ^ comp. nion? Is. 30, 2 ; ninnb 30, 14. llag. 2, i6; 3feTI^
Ex. 31, 4, &c; "it^^ a Sam. 18, 3 (ifrf, but also "Ity^ 1 Chron. 15, 26.
*nS"inn Jnd. 9, 9. n. 13 is altogether anomalous. According to Qimhi,

OUhausen, and others, the Masora intended a^rfect Hoph'al with syncope of the
pidbnMlitte after the n intcwogatife - Â|nnnn or (aoooiding to OUummh)
with the omiMkQ of the H inteirofKtive. Bnt siooe the Hifh'tt and NîUct
\fy\ aowheie ooenr, it ii diffionlt to bdieve tfiat mdi the inlentiock of the
MaeoiB. We thoold eipect the fnfia Qui, Â|np|1. Bnt einoe the Qm
QDder the H, falling between the tone and counter-tone, ma naturally leM
emphasized than in ^rij^lHi without the ii interrogative, it was weakened, not
to simple S^'wd, but to ,
in order to represent the sound of the Qartus (likewise
pronounced as o) at least in a shortened form. The S*ghM of the H interrogative
is cxpUincd, in any case, from IOC. n (comp. the similar pomiing of the article^
e..bD''5nnn, 35. -t).
/ Alio in the other forms of the iwtferatim the gnttnnl not infitqnentlj
tnllnenoes the vowel* causuig a ehaage of / (on this f cL | 48. 0 hito i, e.g.
n^DK gatktr thMt^ Nam. 11, 16; rTS*)^ set in ordtr, Joh 33, 5; ^t/ff}
off. Is. 47, a (comp. on this irregular Dagd % 46. </), especially when the second
radical is also a guttural, e. g. UHN Am. 5, 15. Ps. 31, 24; comp. Zcch.
8, 19; 'ipfj Cant. 3, 15; comp. also in verbs n"^j ^3|J sing ye. Num. ai, 17.
I**- M7. 7 (comparcxl with XJj; anr.ier ye, 1 Sam. 12, 3) and Joel I, 8.
Pathtsh occurs in Vlblin hold him in pudge, Frov. ao, id, and ptobably alio in
Ps. 9, 14 O^^^p)* ^ paual form for Îl'in (comp. the plur. Jcr. a, la) we
> nsyx Job 19, Maniua

7 (so erea the cd.) is altogether abaormai; read
njJK, wUhBaer.
Digili fiTaagle
Verbs First GuUurai 173
b. 44, a 7 ^3nn (comp. tlie impeif. în
find in with ft icpetitfall of tb # b tlie
toim<^% Hateph-Qama, For other extmplcs of this kind* tee | tObJI and f 46.4.
2. The pronnndation (mentioned above. No. a) of tlie imperfects b M uMl M
S^^Ml nnder the preformstive in a Brmly closed syllable (e.g. f'lTP, ''S'!^
regtjlarly gives wny fo the soft combination in verbs which arc nt the s,imc time
n"?, e.g. n\n\ n^n"* &c. ;but comp. niin^ &c., nnn' Prov. 6, 27, nb^x cd.
Mant., Ex. 3, 20). Even in the strong verb pt^M is found along with pjn'.
Comp. also IBîl) Ezek. 23,5; *32pp*1 Gen. 27, 36 (so Ben-Asher; bat Ben-
eh. 9, aa, and so always in the impt-r/eci Qal of
1]^ with suffixes, Gen.' 49, 35 &;c.^nKjp ProT. i, aa (for UHKn) is to be
expUioed from the cndetvoor to avdd too great an aocomidalion of short soonds
hf Ae insertion of a loo; vowd ; oooip. the aaalofons instanotai nnder letter p,
and snch noons s *l|ia, 3^* I 93. /.On 94 >o fv (acoonUng
to Qimhi, and others, rather Pu'al) comp. $ 60. b.
OOM^ Ps. 58, 5 and D'ly^ /o 'jVa/ suhtilfy, i Sam. 33, aa. Prov. 15, 5. 19, 25, m
maybe explained with Earth 'ZDMG. 18S9, p. T79) as /-imperfects ^sec abo\*e,
( 47. 0 latter for the purpose of distinction from the causative D^*1J^*
Ps. 83, 4. Instead of the unintelligible form CpJ^n*! (so ed. Mant.; Baer as
in 24, 3) I Chron. 33, 6 and 'n>^ 24, 3 the Qal Dp^^n*^ is to be read. Ti e lonn
(|^* Ps. 7, 6, which i9 according to Qimtu (in MikhUl; hot b his Lexicon he
cqdaba it nSithpa il), a composite form of Qal (^jV)^) and J>iil {^T\^), can
onlj he nndentood as a development of (oomp* I64.il on pnv**,, and
1 69. jr on ll^rm Ex. 9, S5. 73, 9). Pathah has taken tiie place of âte^'
Fmha^ bat as a mere helpiQ|^vowel (as b IfljPSif \ aSL , note 4) and without
pnvcntlng the dosbg of the qrUable.
n. Oh mpk'tt and Mppk'aL

3. The above-mentioned (No. 3, Rem. 3) dkange of -^-^^ to ^ ,- occurs b ^
die ferfeci Hiph'tl, especially when the tcww constcutivt prcwdcs, and the tone
ia b oonseqnence thrown forwards upon the afformative, e.g. rilDpH, bat n'lQ]|n^
Norn. 3, r..
8, 13. 37, 19 ; ^nnDJjn ,
hut ^rna^m Jer. 15, 14. kzek. 20. 37 ; even
in the 3rd P^Xni Ps. 77, 2. On the contrarj- occurs instead of
in the t'mft'ra/ivi' Hiph'tl, Jer. 49, S. 30; and in the infinitive }qx. 31, 32. The
preformativc of Ifiy in Hiph'ii always takes a in a closed syllable : Ex. 8, 4
TVWyn ; verse 5 ; also verse 35 and Job a a, 37.
4. In the perfect Hiph'tl Is sometimes changed into _. and in P

Sifk*al-^^^ Into , \ (comp. f 93. k\ the short Towd sopported by Makig
bebg lengthened; ^TlSl^ Jos. 7, 7, n^rT HsIk 15, fi^f^ Jnd. 6, a8. a Chron.
ao, 34. Nah. a, 8. On a farther case of this kbd (Hp^) see f 64. f. ^rniMIng
similar occnrs in the formation of seghoUte noons of the form qi^tl : romp. ) 93. ^,
and (on Sec. for ^D<^ | %â. III. IS. On the Hifph'ai Dn^J^ Ex. so, 3,
and elsewhere, see f 60. ^.
III. rpn
T
and n^n.
T T t
5. In the verbs JTH to be, and n*n fo live, the guttural hardly ever affects the Q
addition of iôrmativcs} thos imperfect Qal iTH^ and HÎV, Niph'al tTHj^;
Digitized by Google
174 The Verb, [{ 64.
hot in the pi-rf;ct Jliph'il H^nn (and plur. Dn"'nm Jos. 3. 13, and even without
wdw consecutive ^ Jud. 8, 19). Initial n always has Ilaieph-S^gh6l instead of
voctti n^n. rt*n. On^^n i Sam. as, 7, Dn\n (except ^''n iAcu! fern.
Gen. 4, 6e). The and if ftm, imptnHoe of iTH is /ibif , Ezek. i6, 6
the Infinitive, with inffix, DTlt^n Joa. 5, 8. After the prefixes \ 3, 3, P (
^ IP)
I*,
both n and H retain the stiw//<; ^vt& (( 38. 3) and the prefix talcea as daewheie
before strong consonants with f^toA ; hence in the perfect Qal DH^tTI ,
imperatnH
^ni, infinitive Th'^th, nVnS &c (comp. % 16./, c). The only exception is the
and sing. masc. of the imferatitu after w6w; SlVn^ Gen. la, 3 and elsewJiere,
n^rn Gen. ao, y,
$ 64. FÂf (hiihsral, e.g. cn^^ shughier,
a The slight deviations from the ordinary iutiexion are confined

chiefly to the following*:
1. When the guttural would stand at the l^ginning of a syllable
with simê &'wd^ it necessarily takes a Jtiaieph, and almost alwajrs

Halipk'Paihah, e. g. peffeti VSnj^, imperftct V^Jf^> imperaHoe Niâl
Wj^. In the mptraihe Qal, before the afibnnatives t and 4, the
oiigina] Pathah reappears in the first syllable, and is followed by
Hateph-Pathah^ since the sjUable is only half closed, thus, , PK t
*c.; in WMJ the preference of the M for S^gMl (but cf. also ^nit*
Jcr. 13, 21) has caused the change from a Xo 2; m ^^ne^ Job 6, 22,
the ; remains even before a hard guttural.
So in the infimtive Qal fern., e. HîlN to /t'rv, HSKT to tine ; and in the
infinitive with a suffix n*TyD<5 Is. v), 6 ; to the same form also belongs, according
to Kooig, HDn^^ Hos. 5, a, which Ewald and others explain as infinitive JVel.
h 2. As the preference of the gutturals for the a-sound has less

influence on the following than on the preceding vowel, not only is
ffolem retained after the middle guttural in the infinitive Qal, both in
the construct DHB' (with the fern, ruling and retraction of the 0 Hvrn
and î^""^,, comp. 45. b) and in llic absolute D^nr, hut also, for the most
part, the Sere in the imperfect Niph'al and Pi" (I, c. g. Dn;*^ he figh/Sy
Dn^^ hi comforts, and even the more feeble S^ghSl after wow consecutive
in such forms as Dêrn Gen. 41, 8 (comp., however,
I Kings 12, 6 and elsewhere). But in the imperative and imperfui

Qtti, the final sjUable, through the influence of the guttural, mostly
* Hoph'al, which if not exhibited in the pandiin, follows the analofy of Qpit
mpk'Uuttgain.
Digitized by Google
}64.] Verbs Middle GuituraL 175
takes Paikah^ eren in tiaiuitive verba, e.g. onB^, BOf^; PH], P^.',
nna, "W; with (according to { 6o.<), imperaHve ""W^f
With 0 in the imperaHve Qai, the only instances are ^ a Sam. 13,17; c
thlt Ex. 4, 4. 3 Sam. a, 21, fern, în Ruth 3, 15 (with the unusual
repetition of the lost 0 as Hateph-Qames ; 2nd /"/wr. //iajr. in pause
^THK Neh. 7, 3 ; without the pause ^tnK Cant. 2, 15); "^^9 Jud. 19, 8 \
Finally "^^Vf for "^^J^J, , Num. 23, 7, is an example of the same kind,
see 63. /. Just as rare are the imperfects in 0 of verh^ middle
guttural, as THk;., i'ycri Lev. n. lo, &c. (but i'yoM. 2 Chron.
26 16); nOf^^ Ezek. 16, 33; ~^fn Job 35, 6. Also in the
cf.
ptr/iii PCHt Pa/Aa^ occurs somewhat more frequently than in the
strong verb, e.g. D?] fa eomfirt (oomp., however, fny, nn^, ^99^;
but K and 9 always have # in 3rd m^.On the mfiniHoe with suflizes,
comp. 61. ^.
3. In /'/W, Pual and Hithpa'el, the Z?<7j^<'/ y<)r/f is inadmissible in
the middle radical ; but in the majority of cases, especially before
n, n and y, the preceding vowel, nevertheless, remains short, nnd the
guttural is consequently to be regarded as, at least, virtually doubled,
comp. { aa.</ e.g. PCil pnfc',
sn^
Jos. 14, 1,
x. 10, 13 (comp., however, "^nK Gen. 34, 19 ;
% 'Fiiya^ x Ki.
14, 10,
z. 15, 13, but
in the imperfect and pariieipk ftc; in verbs n^, e.g nf^, infimiive
Piial (but comp^ Vl^ Ps. 36, 13 from also the unusual
position of the tone in YD^* Eiek. si, 18, and in the perfect Hiihpdll
^njrrnnn job 9, 30); Hithpdel perfect and imperairoe Vmn, &c.; in
pause (see 22. c ; 27.(7/ 29. e// 54.^) ^J^C Num. 8, 7. 2 Chron. 30,
18; on^^ Num. 23, 19, &c.
The complete omission of the doubling, and a cnn<;equpnt e
lengthening of the preceding vowel, occurs invariably only with

n (irnz! Ezek. 16, 4 is an exception; rurnb also occurs, Jud. 6, a8),
e.g. Tl? (in pause TO), imperfect ipaj, Puâl Tp^. Before M it occurs
regularly in the stems "Hja, ^Mp, -i|t|, and m the HithpaUl of
dlca, nm, and m(^; on the other hand, M is mrtuaUy doubled in the
* AUo Jnd. 19, 5 (where Qimhi woald read /<w/1, read fSJ, and on the use
of the conjunctm acoent (here Jiarga) u
a snbstitnte for Metheg, cC f 9. n {f)
and 16. ^.
<
*
I
His ts explained by Abolwalid as the 3rd pcis. per/ut Pu'alf bot by Qimhi
as a noon.
Digiii^ca by Cooglc
176 The Verb, [64.
pfrfectSy (once in the imperfect, Jer. 29, 23) to commit aduUery,

y^} lo despise (also in the imperfect wiLh a, Ps. 74, lo ;
in the participle.
Num. 14, 23. Is. 60, 14. Jer. 23, 17), to abhor Lam. 2, 7 (also
nn^W Ps. 89, 40) and Ps. 109, 19; moreover, in the infinitive
B^! Eccles. 2, 20, according to the best reading. On the Mappiq in

the Ptial Job 33, si, comp. \ i^d.
f Rem. I. In tlie mb i9 fti> Mme forms of the perfia QalvpftMf

to be bamd apon a mcondaiy form midttk eomp. ^j'Mp' Gen. 3s, 18. Jnd.
4, 20; p*. X37, 3 ; 1 sB. 12, 15. 25, 5. Job 21, 29; irrn^
Jnd. 13, <S. 1 Sun. i, 20 (alao mpk*tl VrnWn i Smb. x, 28). Comp., bow-
ever, similar cams of attenuation of an original J, % 69. s, and especially $ 44. </.
Ill the first three examples, if explained on that analogy, the T n'ten^;-^*rr1 from d
wouM hive been lengthened to i (before the tone); in the next Uirec t would
have been modified to
g 2. In Pfel and HUhpetel the lengthening of the vowd bdoie the gnttnnl not
infreqaeatly causes the tone to be diravrn bade upon the pennltima, and con>
seqnesllT the Sen of the ultima to be shortened to S*giM* Thus () befiwe
monosyllables, aceotdiag to 1 29. e, e g. W T\y0'7 to minister ihere^ Dent. 17, i a,
even in the case nf .1 guttural which is virtually doubled, Gen. 39, 14. Job 8, 18
(see i 39. \b) after tx>d-M consecutive, e.g. tj'ji^ OfMf hi btissed, Geo. I, 22
end frequently, C'li^l and he drove out, F.x. lo, ii.
h following are a few rarer anomalies ; in the imperfect Qnl pnV^ Gen.
21, 6 (elsewhere pHi'ri &c., in pauê pnV*, comp, lo. g i^c) and 63. ) ;
nnK) Gen. 32, 5 (for "inXNV ; in the perfect Pi'cl llH^ Jud. 5, 28 (perhaps
primarily for T\f\^ ;
according to Gen. 34, 19 V^nS would \yc expected), and
similarly ^JTlDn* Ps. 51, 7 for ''^TIDHJ ; in the imperative Picl Ezck. 37, 17
(comp. above, 5a. n) ; finally, in the imperative Hiph'tl pnîn Job 13, 21 and
l]fDn Ps. 69, 34, bi both cases probably biflnenoed by the closing conionant,
aod by the preference for Paiha^ in pause (according to | 29. q) ; withont the
pause prrjn Prov. 4, 24, and elsewhere ; bnt aUo nron Joel 4, 1 1.
i 4. As infinitive Hithpdel with a suffix we find DbTrnn Esr. 8, I, and else-
where, with a firmly closed syllable^ also the participle D^rn'np Nch 7, 64;
Baer, however, reads in all these cases, on good authority, Dfe'n'nn &c. The
quite meaningless K*thtbh IKB^WI Ezck. 9, 8 (for which the (T'/t' requires the
equally unintelligible Ît^J^) evidently combines two different readings, viz.
'^^^t^'3> {part. Niph.'\ andlSU^M impcrf. rcttsee.); comp. the exhaustive discussion
by Konig, Lehrgibaude, p. 26654. In ^niNn^ Is. 44, 13 (also ^^7.^t^^ n tlie
same an imperfect PS"?! appears to be iniejidcd b) the Masora {^tk^^rehA

verse)
with an inegnlar shortening of the ^ for '^MH^ ; comp. Oe^^ Ps. loi, 5 (^ri)\
on the Q&er hsnd Qimhi, with whom DelitsMh agrees explains the forat as AT/,
ftki*fikA with an irnfinhr for -7, as In the leading ^ Ruth 2, 2. 7
comp. \ loh.
A few examples in which K, as a middle guttural, entirely loses its con-
sonantal value and quiesces in a vuwei, will be found in ( 73. g.
Digitized by Google
65.] yerbs Third GuUural, 177
66. Verbs Third Guttural, e.g. to send\
1. According to f aa. s, when the last syllable has a vowel a

incompatible with the guttural (i.e. not an tf-sound), two possibilities
present themselveSf viz. either the regular vowel rmaim, and the
guttural then takes furim Paihah, or Paihah (in pause Qames) takes
its place. More particularly it is to be remarked
(a) The unchangeable vowels ^ 1, ^ ( 25. b) are ,
always retained,
even uiulcr such circumstances; hence infinitive ahvlut^ Qal ^yh^^
partiripU fassivc m^K', IliphU n'bli'H, impcrfa t ryh^.^ pariinpU U'bp^.
So also the less firm 0 in the infinitive construct r6c^ is almost always
retained; comp., however, in close connexion with a substantive,
Is. 58, 9, and Pl| Num. 20, 3. Examples of the infinitive with suffixes
are îJT?? Gen- 35, i ;

tojoa Num. 35, 19 ; ^îf Lev. 18, 13, *c,
{b) The impfrfeci and imperaiivt Qai abnost always have 4 in the d
second syllable, sometimes, no doubt/ due simply to the influence
of the guttural (for a tone-long 0, originally iS), but sometimes as
being the original vowel, thus f^bf), ^b^, &c.; with suffixes
^^b^f, see 60. c,
F-xeiptioni, in the ifftpirfed fllt'DN Jcr. 5, 7, KUh. fn^DK Q''^^^; in the

imperative nÔ Gen. 43, 16. On soch cases as
'"^^^f ^
^ '7* 4' comp. 10. A.
(r) Where Strt would be the regular vowel of the final syllable, c
both forms (with /* and ^ are sometimes in use ; the choice of one
or the other is decided by the special circumstances of the tone, i.e.
Rem. I. In the absolute sfafe of the partiapk Qal, Pt'cl and Ilithpaci^ the d
forms nbt? (with suff. ^:j}Z^, but ^nj'b';, 1};^ (with sufT. ^nÛT?) aud ^SfTlBTD
are used exclasively ; on the other hand, the cluê^ connexion in the case of the
eonstrtut stale partidple Qal eaues the sharper pronunciation n^'tr e. g.
]s. 43, 5. Ps. 136, 6f ooinp. 94, 9. Lev. Il, 7 (no example of a emsiruei OaU is
found ia the parlitifU /V7/)i to also in the partidpU Ptâl ya^D Esek. 45, a.
%. Similailj, in the imftrfeet and infinitive NipK^, and in Hhjiperfeel, infinitive

and imperfett Pi'el the (probably more original) form with d commonly occurs
in the body of the sentence, and the fuller form with in pause (and evni ith the ^ w
lesser distinctivcs. c. \r. with D-hi Ps. 86, 4 in the imptrative Pi'fl ; \\\\\\ Ttphha
I Ki. 13, 3 J in the xnjimiizc Pi'?l ; Jcr. 4, 31 imperfect Hithpa'U . Jcr. 16,6
impiffect A'ip/i'al\ comp. e.g. JPr Num. 37,4, with piS* 3^), 3, V^l*'*! Dcut. T, 34 ;
even with rttraction of the lone in the infinitive Niph'al y2|^n Num. 30, 3
* Verbs n'v in which the H is consonantal cbviously belong also to this class,
eg. to be highf Rpjj) to b astoHtsked, nnD ôoiy in HUhpalptl; to delay.
178 The Verb [66.
(eltewheK 999^ J^* 7* 9* twice, in cadi CMe witfioiit the pane) ; *P3^
Habu 9, with JQQfl Eadc. I3 11 ; io ^bwnr-Hab. z, 13. Nimi, 4, 90 with
Lam. 3,8; HUkpÛf comp. la. a8 Jo. The it^Smiive ^solute
for infim'tntt
Pi'cl has the form 7. I KL II, 33 the infimiHot comtriutt on the

Deut. 33, ;
other hand, when without the pause is except Ex. 10, 4 nar Hab. 1, 16
has ?. ihowgh not in pause, and even n3ri 3 KL 16. 4. 2 Chron. 28, 4 ; but a in
pause in the imperathy jyiph'al n^NH I'.zek. 31, ll ;
jussive /'/'('/"MMiTi Ps. 40, 18;
comp. 52. tt. Aii example of d in the imperative Pi'cl iitider the influence
of a final 1 is "^2 Job 36, 3, in the imptrfcd Xiph'al "IJfyrii Num. 17, 13, &c
Zn [TIB^ Job 14, 9 (cf. Ps. 93, 14. Ptot. 14, J 0, Barth (see ahove, $ 63. ) fiodi
an i'imptrfect of Qal, since the hitiansitive meaning is only found Ul QaA

f 3. In the and stmg. mast, of the imperatioet and in the forms of the /Kifftw and
imftrfiet emstnOhe of Niph'tl which end in ^[nttaials, a alone oecnis, e. g. Ivf?
prosper thout MB^ /f/ ibVw trust, ^D^f) omf ta<& ^mv (so in
Ilithpalpel npnOri^ &c., Hab. , 3, 3) ; even in /rrwjif H^lW I Chron. 29, 2.^ (but also
with the pausai lengthening of the J to a R^V i Chron. 13, 17); D?gB^1 ! 35. 4
is to be emended into 'yt*^ ( - 'J^pn^V. In the infinitive absolute Stre remains,
e. g. nSjH to male hii^h : as infinitive consinict PIDin also occurs in close con-
nexio!^ (Job 6, 36); on. as infinitive construct (i Sam. 35, 36. 33)1 comp.
53-
g %, When the guttural with qttutani S^wd stands at the end of

a syUablCt the oidinaty strong form remains when not connected
with suffixes, e. g. ^r"^^. But in the 2nd sing. fern, perfect
a helpini:-Palhah lakes Uie place of the S'wd, Jjina^ Jer. 13, 25

( 28. also in i Ki. 14, 3, ^Dsj' is to be read according to Qimhi,
not nnp^.
^ Rem. The soft combination with .^'wJ occurs only in the isl f htr.
perfect with suffixes, since in these forms the tone is thrown one place farther
forward, e. g. 'j^JH^ voe know thee, IIos. 8, -2 i ruiip. Gen. 36, 29. Ps. 44, 18. 132, 6).
Before the suffixes 'H and D3, the gtitiur.nl must iiavc e. vr. in^^B^ I will send
tkee, 1 Sam. 16, i ; ^mBÎ Gen. 31, 37; 1^0^ Jer. 18, 3.
On the weak verbs K'^^, see especially 74.
n. The Weak Verb'.
66. VerU Primae RadieaUs NUn (|"d), e. g. B^33 io approach.
a The weakness of initial i consists chiefly in its suffering aphaeresis

in the infimHin construct and imperative in some of these verbs
(comp. { 19. A). On the other hand, the asstmiktion of the j (see
CL the Table, ( 41.
Digitized by Google
66.] Ferbs Prt'mae Radicalis NUn. 179
bdow) cannot properly be regarded as weakness, since tiie triliteral
character of the stem is still preserved by the donbling of the second

consonant. The special points to be noticed are
1. The aphaeresis of the Nfin {a) in the infinitive construct. This b
occurs only (though not necessarily) in those verbs which have a in
the second syllable of the imperfect. Thus from the stem B'SJ,
imperfect K^-'V infinitii'e projêrly ^k, but always lengthened by the

feminine termination n to the segholate form HB^*; with suffix ^2^3
Gen. 33, 3; with the concurrence of a guttural to tor/rh, imperfect
W infinitive nyi (also li^, see below); PO) to pla$U, infinitive 1189
(also ti^f see bdow); on the verb ff^ to grpt, see espedally letters
k and u On the other hand, aphaercdf does not take place in verbs
which have a in the impirftci, e. g. ^fi) to /aU, imperfect Hb^, infinitive
, with sujfix î'W, also î'W ;

"iMjjj Nnm. 6, a and elsewhere; comp.,
moreover, T-'f? Gen. 20, 6 and elsewhere, yi3^ Ex. 19, 12 (even ^2!)
Job 6j 7 ;
comp. Jcr. r, 10); with suffix ^y33a Lev. 15, 23. Also Jfto^f)
Is. 51, 16 (but riyD^ Kccles. 3, 2); Kbj Is. 1, 14. 18, 3; with suffix
^kI?33 Ps. 28, 2 (elsewhere comp. 74. 1 and 76.^), 'pf^jj'
a Sam. 20, 9.
{b) In the imperative. Here the Altf^ is always dropped in verbs C

with a in the imperfect, e.g. 1^^, mperoiifH (frequently with
paragagk d, before Moqqeph also'V^ Gen. 19, 9), plur, IC^, ftc.
Parallel with these there are the carious fonns with ^, ^ Ruth s, 14
(with riiarding Metfaeg m the second syllable, and also nasng 'aJhr,
according to } 29. e, before ti^) and v6 Jos. 3, 9 (before nan).
I Sam. 14. 38 (before b!)n) and 2 Chron. 29, 31; in all these cases
without ihe pause. The only instance of I\'/in bcin^^ reuined, as if
in a strong verb, 3^3 2 Ki. 4, 3ri3\ without

is drive, 24 [imperfect
assimilation of the Nftn) ; comp. also the verbs vf'h, which are at the
same time |"d; Ezek. 32, 18, nnj Ex. 32, 34, Ex. 8, i and
elsewhere; the verb k"^, Ps. 10, la (usually Nb). Here also
the opkatruis does not take place in verbs which have 0 in the
imper/eei, eg. "iStJ, fhj, ftc.
1. When, through the addition of a prefirmaim^ N4n stands at d
The law allowuig the addttiou of the femiaine termination to the ualengthened
fonn, instead of a VctH*"g of die vowel, Ufiiitablj cilled hy Buth *the Law
of CompauattCMi' {/fmrnaîUtung^ p. xili).
N S
Digitized by Google
i8o The Verb. [66.
the end of a syllable, it is readily assimilated to the second radical
( 19. 2); thus in the imperfect Qal\ e.g. î^t^, KoT yinpol, he will fall;
^'î'.ôx yingal ; ioT yintfn, fie will give (on this single example
of an imptrfect with original /'
in the second syllable, cf. letter A)';
also in the perfect Niph'al B^S? for ningas ; throughout Iliph'iL
(sran, Ac.) and HopKeU (which in these verbs always has Qibbu^,
in a sharpened syllable, comp. f 9. ) ISîQ.
The other forms are all quite regnlar, e.g. the ptrftel^ mfimtiv^
ahuihUe and parHtifU Qak all PrV/, Pu*ttU Ac.

In Paradigm H, only those conjugations are given which differ
from the regular form.
t The characteristic of these verbs in ail forms with a preforraaiive is Dagel

foltowiBg It fai the aeoond ndieel. Sneh foitaa, howefer, aie mlso fovnd in oetUio
verU ($ 71 ). end even b Teste (t 67). The tt^bdHoi T^fi and the
impwiOiw t^, a1io"B^ (Geo. 19, 9) end }J1, icaemUe the coneqxMding fonns
^
of verbs r'fi (f 69).-6d ng*, and nn|, iram U UHH, aee letter /.^
Id Xi^^ {jimptiftet JfifHTal of np), and in limilar fonns of verbs VH 7a), the
fuli writing of the ^ indicates, aa a rtile, that they are not to be roijarded as
imperfects Qal of 0^3, (Src Also pD (Ps. 39, S) is not to be derived from pD3, 1
bnt stands for P^DK (with a sharpening of ttic D ns compensation for the loss
of the turn t9 tuemdt see 1 19./, and Kantzsch, Gramm. des Bibl. Aram^
44-
Rem. The instances are comparatively few in which the forms retain their
f A'f'm
I.
before a firm consonant, e.g. imperfect ">b5^ j^r. (elsewhere

3, 5
113^); also of "1^3 the pausal form is always Tîf3^ (without the patiê Prov.
ao, a8); similarly in Is. 29, I. ^. Ps. 61, 8, 68, 3 (where, however, fjlSJI
is intended), 140, a. 5. Prov. a, 1 1. Job 40, 34, the retention of the A'un u alwajrs
connected with the pause. In Niph'al this never occurs (except in the irregular inf,
ÎT^ Pa. 68, 3, c $ 51. U), in Hiph^tl and H^td very seldom ; e.g. TpA9n|>
Esdc. aa, ao, ^prt^n Jnd. 30, 31 ; for ^s:^ Nam. 5, aa read aocordtng to
f 53. f. On the other hand, the Ifi^ Is regularly retained in all verte, of whidi
the aeoond nidlcal ia a gnttnral, e. g. blTS^ ht ttiti f0ttess, althongfa there are rare
caaea like Jin^ (also JtTQ^ hi wiU deseeml, Jer. ai, 13 (even ntTR Prov. 17, 10;
without any apparent reason aceented as liit^, plmf. VIFf Job ai, 13 (comp.
I ao. i} the Masora, however, probably regards nfT and mtT| aa in^trfui IHfMml,
from nn^; Ai^W
On? for tSTO^ ht Aat gruved,
g a. Theôf neî^teWuticatedUketheAtfMofTeite |''&(| I9b<f). HcMse
Cf. Mayer Lambert, ' Le fntnr qal dcs verbes V'fi, in the Jltvm
des Pittites Jim*es, xxvii. 136 s<]q.
' At) imperfect in a (fi^^) is given in the Paradigm, simply because it is the
actual form in use in this verb.
Digitized by Google
6?.] Verbs jT'y. i8i
imperfui Qal nj5^, cohortative (5 20. w) nnj?K, imperative n^, in pause and
betoe s^fixts (on M3*0n;^ Gen, 48. 9, see 61.^), pam^ô^c form nn^ ^H^,
;
ftcOwt comp. also ngb Ex. ap^ 1. Eitk.37, 16. Prov. ao, 16, 'npb 1 KL 17, iT;
fjg^dWfir eoMstntet nn^ (<"ce Jinp a Ki. li, 9, comp. 93. A); with J),
nng^-
wiA xi*^ ^nng; Hâl (comp., however, 53. ) imperfect Niph'al,
howcmr, ia alwaji T^^^Ôa "BM/k, 17, 5 and DTI^ Hob. ii, 3, lee abovi^
3. The verb givtf mentioned above, letter it the onlj esmmple of k

a verb }1D with imptifia in i (fn> foe yinemi *}A3 only in Jnd* i6 5, eUewheie
befoie Maqqepk &e.),aDd a conetpooding imperative \F\ or (veiy fnqncntly)
which the Masora must intend even in Ps. 8, 2, although the text Is certainly
corrupt; before Maqqeph '\r\, /em, '>n, Moreover, this very common verb
has the peculiarity tluu iti final JViin. as a weak nasal, is also assimilated ; ^nri3
fOKftd/Adn/t, runo or, very frequently, nnn^, with a kind of orthographic com-
pensation for the atrimilafed Mtm (comp. 1 44.^) * N^'ml ptrftct Dni^l} Lev. a6^ %%.
Ezr. 9, 7.
Id the infinitive eonstnut Qal the ground- form tinl is not lenj,'theQed io tinetk i
(as TWi from but contracted to /iV/, which is then correctly lengthened to
nri, with the omission oi Da^'i forte in the final consonant, see lo. I; but with
suffixes ''i^ri, ^Tirij <Scc.; before Maqqeph with the prefix Ex. 5. 3 r,
and even when closely ccmnected by other means, e.g. Gen. 15, 7 ; however, the
Strong Ibnnation of the infimiw* mutrma abo oocwi in fh^ Nam. ao, 21 and
"jru Gen. 38,9 ; comp. $ 69. m, notes. On the other hand, }nn^ i KL 6, 19 coold
not be an it^mtwt: it might conceivably be an imf*rf*et with j> In a final iease
but probably we ooght simply to read jost as the (Sî, i Ki. iy, 14, reqaiics
nft for |nn.
In other stems, the 3 is retained as the third ndicali e. g. ^^^^1 comp. k

I 29. and. I 44* On the entirely anomalons aphaeicsis of the IfAm with
a strong vowd in nflQ (for Jjtfl)) a Sam. aa, 41, comp. f 19. i--Oa tiie feutim
impetfut )H^, comp. f 53. sr.
67. Verbs ^'n^ e.g. aSD h surrwnd*
! A large number of Semitic stems have verbal forms with only a

two radicals, as well as forms in which the stem has been made
by a reptUtim o/ikt stemd raiieal, hence called verbs jfv*
triliteral
Forms with two radicals were formerly explained (in this grammar,
as by others) on a general theory of contraction from original forms
with three nidicals. It is more correct to regard them as representing
the original stem (with two radicals), and the forms with the second
radical repeated as subsequently augmcuied Iiom the monosyllabic
Digitized by Google
i82 The Verb. [{67.
stem\ The appearance of a goncral contraction of trilileral stems

is due to the fact that in bih'tcral forms the second radical regularly
receives Doges forte before afformadves* except in the cases noted
in 22. ^ and q. This points, however, not to an actual doubling,
but merely to a strengthening of the consonant, giving more body
to the monosyllabic stem, and making it approximate more to the
character of triliteral forms.
The augmentation of biliteral to triliteral stems (y"y) generally
takes place in the 3rd sing. mase. and fern, and 3rd plur. perfect Qal
of transitive verbs, or at any rate of verbs expressing an activity, c. g.
"^^^R* ^^f? : Gen. 33, 5 (but with suffix ^?|n, ver. 11); sonie-
timcs with an evident distinction between transitive and intransitive
forms, as "^1* to mah strait, ">5? to be in a strait ; see further details,
including the exceptions, in letter aa, Tiie augmentation of the stem

must always take place wlierever the ordinary strong form has an
unchangeable vowel in the second syllable (e. g. 3laD, 3^)> or where
the strengthening of the second radical is required by the character
of the form, e.g. îin, n^K^, ftc.
If
8. The biliteral stem always (except in HipKQ and the imperfect
Niph*al, see below) receives the vowel which would have been
iequircd in the second syllable of the ordinary strong form, or which
stood in the ground-form, since that vowel is characteristic of the
form ( 43. b), e. g. DH ans^vering to I^D^j '"'^ ^ ground-form

qdfaJat, to the ground-form qdtdlH ; infinitive, 3b to 5*^^.
c 8. The insertion of Dagel forte (mentioned under letter a), for the
purpose of strengthening the second radical, never takes place (see
f 20. /) m the final consonant of a word, e.g. 09, not Bn, ab

but it appears again on the addition of afformatives or suffixes, e. g.
^ 4. When the afformative begins with a consonant (j, n), and hence
the strongly pronounced second radical \\q\xA properly come at the
end of a closed syllable, a separating vmvd is inserted between the

stem-syllable and the afformative, in the perfect i, in the imperative
and imperfect , e.g. rtap, i3p, imperfect n^îDn (for sabb-ta^
toH'mt, tasobb'-na). The arti&dal opening of the syllable kiy means
'
So (partly following Bottcher) A. MtOlciV ZDMG. xxxIU. p. 69S tqî. j Stftde,
Lehrbuekt f 385. b, c; Ndlddce,
Digitized by Google
Verbs i%
of a separating vowel is merely intended to make the strengthening
of the second radical audible ^
SilAtf),
The petfoeiVeA (for ViBn) Nnm. 17, a8. Fi. C4, 7 (Jer. 44, 18
owing to ombnoa of the lepuatiog vowel, appronnuitei, if the
^ with
text it
e
rights to the form of verbi VP (comp. UDg from tsnp).
6. Since the preformativos of the impirfa t Qal, of the pirfcd

f
Niphal, and of Hiph'U and HopHal throughout, before a monosyllabic
stem form an open syllabic, they take a long vowel before the lone
(according to 27. 2, tf), e.g. imper/ed Hiph'U ^\ for yd-sib^
imperative 3pn for hd-seb^ &c. Where the preformatives in the strong
verb have i, either the original & (which was attenuated to I) is
restored and lengthened, e.g. 3b^ in impirftet Qal for y&'sSbf OX the
f itadf ia lengthened to i, e.g* am ^^r/ ^/jTl/ for M-s^ (see
further under letter k). The vowel thus lengthened can be retained,
however, only before the tone (except the of the fftpkâl, lengthened
from an original , 3p*l for hH-sdb); when the tone is thrown forward
it becomes îvd, according to 27. 3 (under N and n compound
e.g. abn, but '"iri?^*; imperfect Hiph'U 3Dri, but
; perfect
in
Besides the ordin.ir)' form of ihc imperfects, there
Aramaii^ in which the imperfeit Qal is
is another which predominates
pronounced 3D*, the yfrx/ radical, not

g
the second, being strengthened by DaÂ forte, comp. D8'^ i Ki. 9, 8, Ipjl Gen. iJ^, 26,
, <
; ^*ith fi in the second syllable, 13" Ivcv. 11, 7, Dn*
-
(with Z?<7;yI y'^r/^
A- -

impiuiium) i iCL i, i ; in the plural, %3n* Nam. 14, 35, &c (in pause ^QTP
'
No satisfactory explanation of these separating vowels has as yet been found.
In none of the forms can it be said that the original vowel has returned, although
Konig caUs both separating vowels vocalic endings of the stem {yoia/stamm*
Mtsla$ae\ and nguidft the ^_
of the imperfect as diflerentiated from m, i
CooacqncDtlf theie veoudni only tlie mpfMltloo that we have here the iaiertioii
of a really new vowel, as an aid to prODOactation, with the object mentioned above.
Rodiger, both for the perfect and imperfect (Ewald and Stade, for the imperfect
at least), points to the analogy of verbs X\'^ in formations like A^^, t^^^^^^ \ hut
in those instances, the lone-bearing vowel is no new importation, but was there
from the tir&t. On the other hand, Kodiger notes the analogy of the vulgar Arabic
(oimp. Spitta's p. a 16), which for the classical Arabic maJadia, nmdddtif
(7r.,
M0tUdt, tnes the fonna madiH, maditti, madMt, and even maddii. The last of
these fonna might faidieate that tlie ^ hi tlie fiifia of Hebrew verbs It'V Is
obscofed firom an original d; comp., however, G. Hoffmann in ZDMG. xxxit.
p. 75<5, according to whom maddAta hng arisen rather from nuiddauta, which he
holds to be also the gronnd-fonn of t^'^Q, [See also Wright, Comp, Gr* as^ C]
Digitized by Google
x84 The Verb, [{67.
Pb. loa, s8); perhaps atao f1|^ (nnleia diete four fonm aae father
to be vefeffcd to Niph'al, as oertahily Vtf^^ is, i Sam. a, 9); with suffix
occurs (comp. $ 10. A) in Num. 23, 35 ; Imperfect HÛ XSPS^tMofKal T?"' , &c.
This sharpening of the first radical obviously only serves the pnrpose of iMving
to a biliieral &t(.:m at least a trilitcral appearance'; at the snnê tin t , t:;c vowel
of the preforoQative (which before I'agel is, of course, shuri; luliovvs Lac anaiugy
<^ the ofdinaiy stroDg form (comp., also, letters and y). The same method
is then extended to forms with affonnalives or snffixcs, so that even before these
-
additioas the second radical is tiot doubled, e.g. 1*10*1 Gen. 43, aS and elsewhere
for lip*1 Md they iowed the head; Insh atidth^ biot dnm, Deut. i, 44 (from
nns); IDTi*! I>ent. ss, 8; Eiod. 15, t6. Job 99, a I (oomp., however. Uff)
Jud. 18, as, Jer. 46, 5. Job 4, 90). To the aane claas of apparentlf itioiig
formatioDS bdoogs tf^bifii (widioot the aqwmtiiiK vowdt for n^f^fpi, comp.
1 Sam. 3 II and below, letter ihi^y shall H^jfie, a Ki. ai, xa. Jer. 19, 3. On
the various forma of the NipfCal, see Rem. $.
h 6. The rcsloralion of tlic original vowel, as mentioned in No. 5,
occurs (<z) in the preformativc of the imperfect Qal ibj for ju-sulf
(comp. 5 47-^. 63. ^, and for verbs V'v 72); {d) in the ptrfcc!
Niph'al 2p3 for nd-sab ( 51. a), as well as in the impafeci (comp.
on a in the final syllable of strong imperfects Niph'al, zi.m)\
{c) in HopHal 3pVi, with irregular lengthemng for hdidb from
hU'tab, imperfect from jtf-io^, Ac
f On the other hand, an already attenuated vowel (t ) underlies the
intransitive i$nperfecis Qal with <l{ in the second S3dlable (probably
for the sake of disstmilating the two vowels), e. g. ^ for yH-mikr
(see letter />); and in the prefonnative of HipHU from Af-i/^
(ground-form 53. i). In the second syllable of this form the

underlying vowel is /, ailenuated from an oriLjinai a, which in the
strong verb is a! 11 1 tnally lengthened to /

( 53. i). The e lengthened
from / is, of course, only tone-long, and hence when without the tone,
<
and before Dages fork we have e.g. ^liapn. On the return of the
original a in the second syllable, comp. letter v,
h 7. The tmu^ as a general rule, tends to keep to the stem-syllable,

and thus does not (as in the strong verb) pass to the affonnatives n^,
I and (2nd ting,fim* imper/k/)\ e.g. $rd titig. fern, perftci n^?,
in pome nnri \ with 1 and gutturals ^^9 Côf '^)> 44i >^ * ^
on the other hand, with wdm consecutive na^l] Is. 6, sa (but ^^^1
* Possibly the analogy of verba

Y'^ >Miy abo have had aone hUlMnce^ aa
Paal Uattpt haa taggesied veibally to die writer.
Digitized by Google
1%
Ex. I, 16). In the 3rd phr. perftct the tone varies; along wiih
we also find ^"p'n and ^^2, ^1 Is. 59, 12, Hab. 3, 6, &c.;
but in />ause always ^n, &c. The tone likewise remains on the
stem-syllable in the imperfect Qal in per/ta Hiph'il napn,
impaftet *9^> Ac. In the fonns with separating vowels*
the tone is moved forward to these iroweb (or to the final syllable,
comp. Rem. 12), e.g. rrtap, n^ôn, ftc.; except before the endings
on and |n in the perfect, which always bear the tone. This shifting
of the tone naturally causes the shortening of the merely tone-long

vowels e and J to ? and u {0, see letter ), hence Jj'ispr! from 3Dn,
nr3DF! from 2bj : on the vowel of the preformative becoming Sîvd,
see above, ieLier _/".
8. In numerous verbs y"y, instead of iVr/, Pi/W and UUhpdel^ /

the less iieqiient conjugation PS'U ( 55, i), with its passive and
reflexive, occurs, generally with the same meaning S e.g. (otnai

Hit passive reflexive (from comp the HithpSil from
VT) and iQf Is. 24, 19 sq.); in a few also PilpU (55-4) is found,
e.g. to roll, Hithpalpil i!>anii to roU oneself (from to
comfort, to delight m; passive to he caressed (from Vye^). These

forms cannot appear in a biliteral fonn anymore than Pi el, Pxial
and Ililhpdd. For "^JPUn 2 Sam. 22, 27 read, accoiduig to i'a. 16^ 27,

> t
RSMAKXS.
I. On Qal.
I. la ihc perfect, isolated examples are found with JIdlim in the first syllable, ///
which it is custuinary to refer to triliteral stems with middle 5 like ^3^, % 43. a)\
viz. to Cb"1 M^;y </rt' exalted, Job 24, 24; ^21 to 23"^ they shot, Gen, 49, 23;
^"IT Is. I, 6 to 'y^'\ . But this explanation is very doubtful : Vlf especially is
rather lu be classed among the passives of Qal uienlioned ia $ 52.

3. Imperfects Qal with d in the lecond syllable keep the original a in the pre- ft
IbiBMtive, twt lo^hen it to^, m being in en open fyllable, hence |h^, *lb^, Ty^,
}V ; imperfecti with M have, b the preformatite, an ^, lengthendi from /. See

examplei below, letter and $ 63. r and #, 1 7>. h, and q;iedall]r Baxth in
ZDMG. 1894, p. 5 iq.
'
Sometimes both IH'el and P0el are formed from the same stem, though with
ft difference of meaning, eg. J'jrj to break in pieces, J*3n to oppress ; \}n to make
pleasing, [jjin to have pity; to praiMt to maki/BOlitii; to turt to
cMofige, 2^10 to ^ rfiunJ, to tfumpau.
Digitized by Google
i86 The Verb. [67-
Hie jfiffiUSM of the îfCM/nv, imptratiM, and imptifta (db, 30^} is only
tone-loBgi tiMl tbeicfoie, aa a inle, la written defectiiely (wttli a fiew exoepluma,
chiefly in the later orthography, e.g. ifSt hbid m/, la. 8, 16 ; 7^ Pi, 37, 5: Dt^
ver. 7! Yfll^ for tb^ plunder, Estb. 3, 13. 8, 11). When thia closes the tone,
it becomes in the final syllable in a sharpened syllable ;7, or not infrequently
even S (sec above, letter ti). Examples of d are: (a) in a tonclesi final syllable,
i. e. before Afaqqeph or in the imperfect eonsecutivf, "p (rj//) ta rejoice. Job 38, 7 ;
3D*^ Jud. II, I S (once even with ii iu a toneless final svUable, D"!*! Kx. 16, 20);
on the other hand, in the phir. ^30*1, fem. n3"'3Df1V, i.^) before a tone-bearing
afformative or suffix, e.g. impirative md stng. jcm.'^'C\^ (comp. letter ff)\

*3in pily me; n^'?D Jcr. 50, 36 ; D'^JB^ Prov. ii, 3 ^r/; ^nsnn Ex. la, 14; for
the defective writing, cf ^JISD^ Job 40, 33. In Gu 43, 29. Is. 30, 19 (for
|in*) this S is thrown back to the prcformative.
0 Quite abnormal is the infinitive absolute iiyi Is. 24, 19 (as fl follows, probably
only a ca^ of dittography for comp. 3p Num. 23, 35 and Ruth a, 16);
ao also are the imperatives ^Wl3p^ Nam. as, 11. 17, and ^^^THK aa,6. 33, 7, with
n paragBgit. We should expea nil^, rnk (comp. iT^ la. 3a, 11). If tiwtt
forms are to be tend fUdallt, 'Ifralii, they would be aoalofova to an^ caiea as
rnaiQ Cl 9^ 0 ^ addition of the pofug^gk cauiDg no changa hi the fona

of the woid f8b lihe*^ above). If, howefer, aa Jewidx tradition raqoiica
they are to be lead foMf, 'ra//l, then m both caica the Qmt^'mMhatiit to be
CKiâuied, with Stade, as the eqidvatent of an ^ O^Tia^y fto.; comp. 1 9> w).-
Still moie atrildog ia \XS^ mne Aim, Num. 93, 13, for ni^ or '^K
p 3. Esamplea with PtOha^ b the infinUnttt imperaiwt, and impnfid aie
TB (in tJTjaj) il0 /mv M/M, Eccles. 3, 18); trample down, Is. 45, i ; l]?'
Jer. 5, a6: perhaps also Die's in their error, Gen. 3 (Baer, following the
versions and the Masora, DJC'S). Also ^3 take away, Ps. 119, aa; and the
imperfec ts DPI* // is hot, Deut. 19, 6 &c. (on the e cf letter n) ; "ID]^ it is bitter. Is.
34, 9; it is straitened ; ll'V it is soft, Is. 7, 4; DB^JH iV iV desolate, Eiek. la,
19 <,in pause DS^F) Gen, 47. 19) ; u/a^f despised, Gen. 16, 4 (bat else-
II
^
where in the imff. eontte. with the tone on tlie penoltima, e.g. Gen. 32,8 and
elsewhere; l*"'! Gen. ai, ii and elsewhere, comp. Ezek. 19, 7 ;
in the 1st sing,
imptrfect Dn*J<' Ps. 19, 14, contrary to rule written fully for DHX, unless DTltt
is to be read, as in some M.SS., on the analogy of the 3rd sing. Ur\\ The
following forms are to be explained with Barth [ZHMC xliii p 17^ imperfects
(^)al with original / in tlic second syllable, there Ixuig ao iJi^Ûacca oi ihcu Ilipii il
in the same sense : ^1'^ Gen. 39, 10; I.'S.

31, 5, &c. ; T]p*1 fix. 40, 21. Ps. 91,4,
&C.; perhaps also n^^^^ l Sam. 3, 11 and Job 31, a6, &c ; in accordance
' i-of 1J as suffix of the 3rd person a parallel might be found in îC*^, $ 100.
and probably in the iV'W/t uf the Phoenician sufBx ; cf. Barth, ZDMG. xlL p. 643.
* Also in Eaeh.6,6 imtcad of n^GfipjFl, which conld only come from Ud^^ 'C^fl
ia intended, and lOtll* b the aaaw vena ia piofaably only an enor iiar
Digitized by Google
f 670 Verbs y"y. 187
with this last form, ^^n'S) Job 29, 3 would also be an inflnilive Qal, not Hiph'U
(for ^^nn3), as fonnerly cxplauied below, letter w. Finally the very peculiar iorin
Jud. 53 may probably be added to the list.

9,
Imperfects, with on original u in the second syllable, are also found with this ^
4 lengthened to (instead of e. g. if the text it comet, in Pxot. 99,6}
HBfj F>. 9i> 6 (ubIos be simply an imperfect from Itt^ to U pnmfiU, to
fnsaU) ; |^
(if from ^ 4'i 4 daewbete (alao deiectiT^y written
Fk. x8 30; but in Ecclca. 13, 6, according to Baer, fVVIp ; Dnn Eiek. 94, ti
(on the sharpening of the T\ cf. letter g above)
A similar analogy with verbs is seen in the infinitives nttb (for n^) r
Eccles. 9, 1 : ^pn3 Trov. 8, 37 (comp. ip^n3 Prov. 8, 29' for ^pn3. and in the
imperfect Cien. 27, 21. Infinitives in rS (on the analogy of verbs T["h) are
nian inPs. 77/10, rA'm F.zek. 36, 3; also with a suffix N*n *ni^n Ps. 77, II.
On other similar cases, see below, letter ee. For examples of the aramaisittg
imperjei tt see above, letter g.
4. In the ptwticiple, the anunalting fonn I^Piil^ ^"^ occus in K*tbtbh, S

Jer. 30, 16 (tibe (^ri pdnts to a participU htm : b T\yh Pror. 25, 19,
tbeve appcan to be a conttactioD from /or/. ftm^^-htMng im pi$m,
5. Besides the oidioaiy fonn of the perfect 3p| with JJMAa^ (b /a 3D|) and /
fttfik^ 2Di ^MWf in the second syUable^ theie b also another with
the
âod athii4^th/A^, e.g. fetfict
(for n^CD) Esdc.
with
s6, s ; /e/^.
^
DQ}
it ism ^ tJUi^ (also
(comp., however, f 75.
Is. 49.6;
mo/ttft,
r^t, I Sam. 15, 9; with ^,

e.g* thif org rottid t^gttker. Is. 34, 4; comp.
63, 19. 64, s. Amos 3, II.Nab. I, is. Eccles. la, 6^. In the impeifett, on the
analogy verba I^^V (from which Kontg wonld also explain the petftds with 9\
we find ^XSlPi thou shall be brought to silemf, Jer. 48, a (unless this form should
be referred to Qal) ; JTU? (for tirtdf) Ezek, 39. 7 ; with / in the second syllable
^njR she profanes herself. Lev. ai, 9, but ^nKl Ezek. 22, 26, and ^H* Is. 48, it.
Vox infinitives, cf. DSH /^J w^/^, Ps, 68, 3 (as inf. constr.; 3 Sam. 17, 10 as />//.
absol.); moreover, with comjxnsatory lengthening m the first syllabic, ^Pin

Ezek. 30. 9. 14. at, but with suffix i^nn I.cv. 21, 4; also T^H (0 he plundered,
and plHil /<? emptied. Is. 24, 3 ; in the imperaltve only, ^"^211 be ye dean.
Is. 5a, II. On ftSlQ get you up. Nam. 17, 10, impetf., Ezdc. io, 17 and ciicwhcre,
comp. S J2.dli,
Esamply of the /tifiet Ni^*9l with sharpenbg of the initial sylbUe aie, ^n: u
ii ispnfmd Esdc as, i& 25, 3 (from % THiJ (from IKJI) 69^ 4. loa, 4
(also inj Jer. 6, 19); nnj fraOm st (from MaL s, 5i oomp. with this in
the panidfi*, Onp^. (for MiÛmim) Is. 57, 5, and finilj) MaL 3, 9; in the
' According to Stade, GrammatiAf { 95, Rem., the pronnndation with H, Uttoe
it also Appears in Neo- Punic [and in WcsUni Sytiai;, see Noldelie, Sjrr, Grumm^p
I 46], was that of evczyday life.
Digitized by Google
x88 The Verb,
impirai^ and ii^miiim N^4ii tnefa % tiitail douUii^ of die gnttunl afiw
prefoonatives never otxan.'The oocunenoe of uiaetead of a eepeimtuif m
voml in the ptffut VWb Mi& a, 4 is ehoonnal.
III. On IliphH ami HopK al.

V The second syllable in liipK ii has Pathah instead of Sere^ especially under
6.
the inflnenoe of 1 and the gutturals, e. g. perfect ipn he made bitter H^'H he bcwed, ^
TBn he hath hrohen. Gen. 17, 14, in pause, comp. 39. ^; otherwise ">Bn,//r.
TTBn Is, 24, 5; in Tpn Ps. 33, 10. Eiek. 17, 19, conij). Vs. 89. ,
(, am; also in
H^^n Hos. 8, 4 (])crhaps al&o in iH^n^ Hnb. a, 17. but comp. 20. tt) ilicrc is an
assimilatioa to the coficspoudiug forms of verbs Vy, see itlier s, while cuuvcrcly,
In tnn Ic. 18, 5 from Tt^, an ^''y verb is assimilated to a y'^y verb. Also lyn
Deat 28, 52 ; inf. '13njl cleamef Jer. 4, ii, in paute; hot also with other
consonants, e.g. pl^J a Ki. 23, 15, ^gn Is. 8, 23; T)nn Job 33, 16; //r. ^3pn
X Sam. 5, 9. 10 (and so ntoaJly in the 3rd f/ur. perf., except befoie "I and gutturals,
e. g. Ijnn) ; imper. yj^n hesnuar, Is. 6, lo ;
pltir. ^fB/OT\ he astemithed, Job 21,5;
imperfect y^n Theu dest afflict; part, thadet^^mg, Eiek. 31, 3 (but Ij^DD
Jud. 3, 24 is aaslmUated to the form vi verbs So in die impeNiioe

^;e^pn Jad. ztf, a6 ^r<?, and b the infinitive ^Dnn Is. 33, i).
The ^ of the second syllable* when witiumt tone, may become eig. ^
^ ^nn Gen. 31, 7 (comp. also letter x). It is nnvsnal (ct f 53* ^) to find the
? written fitUf as in the iitfiiUtive "^^^1^ Zech. z z, la Instead of ^^^-IWha^
n Jâfeph-S'ghdl b Iband under die FlefiatmatiTe In ^^^n a Sam. 19, 44. and
occnis before n (wtth a virtual sharpeniqg of the n) in tnch forms as
nnnn I,.
9, 3; comp. Gen. n, 6. Deut. a3l. 3| 14. 1 Sam. 22. 15. Esdi. 6, 13
in all these cases before H . (>u )^n^ Job aj^ 3, see abovc^ letter on Â^nni
Jer. 49, 37, sec below, letter dd.
^ 7. In the imperfect consecutive of verbs, whose second radical is a guttural, & is
retaiiied ^ 22. d) in the second syllable instead of e.g. Vl^T 1 Ki. 6, ii: so
also when the second radical is 1, a8*^2f)l * îiron. 28, 20. Deut. 2,9 but cC also
-
Neh. 4, o.
V T
^ 8. Aiamaiidng forms in I/iph'll and Hophal are, 3D*1 Kx. 13, i8; comp.
Jud. 18, 23; ">R"^l< Kxod. 23, 21 : ^TlS*! DeuL 1,44 (comp. Num. 14, 45};
^riK profanabo, Exck. 39, 7 ; DAR Job 22, 3; without syncope of the n (comp.
hi- l)> ^^L*^ I Ki. 18, 27 ; with # in tlie second syllable D*?^^ Jer. 49, 2a 50, 45
comp. D^S*!! Num. 21, 30; in the perfiet Lam. 1, 8. In HopKal,
they are brought law. Job 24, 24 ;
fiSîl* is smiilettf Is. 34, la (J/tr. Jer. 46, 5.
Mic. 1, 7) s in /atue, iprr Job 19, 33, bnt alio \n3^^ Job 44 ao; with # is the
initial i^llable, no^n {infim&iM with sufix^TltS^, comp. 91. e) Lev. a6, 34 sq.,
comp. a Chron. 36^ ai ; HOe^nil , with irregular ajmcope for 1^^$ Ler. t6, 43.
IV. In General.
g 9. Verbs yy arc most nearly related as regards inflexion to verbs V'^ ( 73).
The ûrm of verbs is generally the ihorter (comp. e. ^. aud 0)p^,
Digitized by Google
Verbs vf%
ad D^t?0) '* ^ ^ wmt however, both cImmi exactly coincide, e. g. in
imptrfia Qal toad mfiitl with fwtar mtumihe^ in JSfif/AW and m the 1m
frequent ooojag^tioM (lee nhove, letter I),
lo. The angmcnted forms (with three radicals), as mentioned in letter a, lie (Ui
especially frequent in the 3rd ung. mnsr. antl /t/., and the 3r(l flur. ; i. c. in forms
without an afformative or with an afformative l>ej;inning with a vowel) of transitive
vcrhs, or verbs, at any rate, expressing action, e. g. ^33D (but before
a sutlix also as well as ^JDDO, &c); DDT, HOD^, ÊSX, &c.

Sometimes the contractetl, as -i'el! as the uncontracted form, is found, c. f^. TT3
to ftufuicr, plur. ,
^5jl3 Deut. 3, 35, ai well as \3i^3 Dent. 3, 7 (other examples
of biliteral forms in and sing, mau.. Dent. 35, 13 ; inist sing,^ Jos. 5, 9) ; bat in the
isl pen. ^rtCCt Zech. 8, 14. 1 5 is the ooly histanee of the nagmcnted form.
On the other hand, the bQUetal form* ere the moie common in the 3rd sing, and bb
/Ar. of perfects which ire mirttmidot^ and express a state ; comp. Dent. 9 ai
(Ex. 3s, 30 pn ; dsewlieve ilways 1 transitive verb); r\in,/fm. HFin ;
'^$/fiif.
rPD (for iMorri)', ^J, >6a. n^X (comp. mn) Eaek. a4, xi); Ip^ HB^, ySfJw.
nnc^, DTI, &C. ; //r. VJH USn Ac.

^ ^
(bot on the t<me, comp. tetter M below).
The ititransitive buL auîuLiiteJ perfects ^bb"^ faUo /PH. mi3
(in paus<; mr, "i-iD n'^TL-y in f^MSf ^V7y Pa. 31, n), ^î>V. ^nnj?
(also ^nc*\ almost all have, us Mayer Lambert observes, at least an active, as
opj'Oscd to a st.itive meaning. Trilitcral lornis of the ittfinilivc after J) are,
a^p!? Xiim. 21,4; l^TJ'i? Jcr. 47. 4 ; fxh Gen. 31, 19 falso ih Gen. 38, 13);
comp. also DOn^ Is. 47, 14, in subordinate pause, for DOn^; wilh iujfuc D5??n^
U. 30, 18, and, from the same form |2n, with retraction and modification of the
vowel, H^n!) Ps. loi, 14; also nine? is. 60, 14, tiaa i Sim. 25, 3, Dbc? is. 10, 18,
Piov. 8, iZ,Împerutwt Vllv Jer. 49, aS (comp. { so. and ilHd. also on
33?n Ffe. 7 (Pa. 68, 13 ; comp. Gen. 31, 40)
9, 14); in the imferfictt Iff^^ Nih. 3,
from T13; the strcog fEwrn heic^ liter the lasimilition of the AUi^ wis na-
nvoidahle. On the other hand, tfT^ Jer. 5, 6 for (Pror. it. 3 <>ri)
is anomalous ; the strengthening of the second radical hat been aflerwards resolved
by the insertion of a vocal i^wd. Comp. also Am. 5, 15 (elsewhere fh^). In
Niph'al, the triliteral form i? fonnd. Job 11, \i\ in Hiph'tl, all ihe forms of
fj^, thus imperative ^3*3"in ,

impcrfiit |*3"^ri ; infinitive DCD'H Mic. 6, 13;
parliiiple D^D^X) Ezek, 3, 15. That the au;;mcnted (triliteral) forms possess
a certain emphasis, is seen from their fretiucnt nac in ftutu^ as in Ps. 118, II
^îÔnp'Dj '313p) after a biliteral form.
II. The above-mentioned ^letter neglect of the doabling in arnmnuins:^ forms,

as and the like, occurs elsewhere tolerably often ; in the perfect Qîl îOJTl
for Num. 17, 38 ^Jer. 44, 18; comp. above, letter e)\ if>i perfect ntbJ
I Sam. 14, 36(11 po'ag. without any influence on the form, cornp. letter o)\
even with the firm vowel reduced to vocal S'-wd; Gen, II, 7 for n^3D
(cohortativc from /p3); Ô^^ for ^f^ ibid. ver. 6, they purpose; following the
analc^ of verbs Y'T^^ above, letter r) from intransitive imperfects

^FRn ;
Digitized by Google
190 The Verb.
<?d; rjjg I..49. 19 (jlyr, mau. Job i, 7) J Ek.6.6
(for wfai^ ^B^n OD^t to be seed) niglit alto be eipleiniBd in tiw fame
wf,Perfect Nifal nSDS lor Eadc. 41, 7 Jnd. 5, 5 for ^| ;
for DTf^ Gen. 17, xi (aa if from not \m U eitrmmehi), comp.

Ii. 19^ 3. Jer. 8, 14: Tmperfut Hjl^ Zcch. 14, \t% PvrtiHpU ooin|. ,
lettfr u. So also 1 Sam. 13, 11, nYSD Gen. 9, 19 (comp. Is. 33, 3), ait
perfecU NipKal firom MTD (- MS), not Qal from In J7i>>i7/ n^nn (for
|n[?nn) Jnd i<S, lo (a Sam. 15, 34); for Fkov. 7, 13 (of. Cant 6, xi.
7, 13), and the very strange form MnRl^n^ Jen* 49, 37 (from haâth-tf) from rnn.
No less irregular is the sappressfon of the vowel of the stem-syllable in
D31DnS lev. 26, ]E On the perfect Prov. 26. 7, cornp, 75 letter M.
13. Instances in which the tone is thrown forward on the aflormativcs (see
letter are {a) in the perfect^ the \%\.sing. regularly (bnt of. ^H^Vn^ Jer. 10, 18
before Dnb) after ^ consec, Ex. 33, 19. 22. 2 Ki. 19, 34. &c., also I3. 44, 16
(^ri^Dn before 1^; Ps. 17, 3. 92, II. 1 16, 6, perhaps also Job 19, 17, ^flSn^
(though m Ihls passage, and in Fi. 1 7, 3, the form might be an imjbtîve in 4fA ;
ee above, letter r, and DditEach on Job 19, 17)$ in tbe aBdiM^. nnk^^ (befoi K)
Dent as. la ; In tbe 3fd fkmti, ^ muiH sunt. Fa. 3, a. to4 14. Jer. 3, ti.
I Sam. a5 xo; ^ th^ art stft^ Pa. 53, as; ^ they ear* twifi^ Jer. 4, 13.
Hab^ X, 8 ; ^3} they are pure. Job 15, 1 5. 35, 3. L*m. 4, 7 ; they did Aaw
Hab.3,6; ^Tin they eut hermd,lM,t4,^. Aby>foimof Vi|f^(flf,0(ip.f 7a.iAf)

b WB> Pa. 49. 7h 9-
ff {b) In the imp$raiioe (a oowmaod in an empbatie tone) ^3^ sing. Is. 54, i.
Zcpb. 3, 14. Zecb. a, 14; VI la. 44, 33. 49, 13. Jer. 31, 7 (bot cry met.
Lam. J, 19), *in keep {thy fetuts\ Nah. a, i. Jer. 7, 29; nj^y (n!^) before K,
Fs. 68, 39. On the retom of and / before ^c^^? forUt in
tiie dtort vowela i9 {if)
place of tbe tone-long 9 and see abov^ letter k; on tbe diange of tbe vowela
of the preformative bto S^wA, wbea iStnej m> longer atand before die tone, aee
letter ^.
The Weakest Verbs (Verba Quiesceniia),
{68. FW-^ K^fi, e.g. ^ iS? M/.
0 So far as K retains its full consonantal value as a ruLlural, these
%'crbs share all the peculiarities of verbs primae guiiuralis^ mentioned

in 63. Thrv arc, however, to be treated as weak verbs, when the
K loses its value as a consonant, and coalesces with the preceding
vowel (original!)- short) to form one long syllable. This takes place
only in the following very common verbs and forms, as if thioqg^
phonetic decay :
b ! In tbe mper/tci Qai, five verbs (via. *ny peruke Tt)^ M 6t
wO/Mig, ^ Ai/p leM i^, /0 Mi) regularly aUow the N ta

f 6a] Verbs mT'^ igi
qoiesoe in a long ^ e. g. In a few others the ordinary (strong)

form is also in use, as inih (i8 times) and tHk]*^
(3 times) At taket hold:
^l?* (see letter A), also ^bK*^, he coUects. This ^ has primarily arisen
from an obscuring of d ( 9. g\ and the d from ^-srt the weak
consul uuK N coalescing with a to d ; comp. 23. tf.
In the second syllable the 0 (for the original u) never appears, but C
either or a ; and in pause almost always c, even befor ihc tone-
bearing havy afTormative p, e.g. Deut. 18, i, withoLii the pause

X^'^^ Deut, 4, 38. In the 3Td sinf^. masc. and i st sing, of "ip^ ,
however,
^ is always retained in pause, and "tok, cf. also i^^kn i Sam. i, 7,
ftc. But with conjunctive accents in continuous discourse, ^ (as being

a lighter vowel) is used, e.g. 9t i9> P^"*^
Ps. I, 6; I Ki. 5, 2 ; comp. a similar interchange of i and &
in 65. c.
When the tone moves back, the final syllable of the imperfects of d
and bsx, with a coniunctive accent, always takes Palhah, e.g.
D^^ Job 3, 3, and he did eat; in "ICK the loss of the tone
from the fmal svUable onlv occurs in the form x^nth waii' consecuiive
(but never in the ist sing,,'yQ'^\\ cf. ^?kj^), and then the final syllable,
if without the pauUt always takes S'ghdl, and he said.
In patuet however, the imperfect consecuiive always has the form
^ . i)3kn (but //itr. always "h^, ^boKn), "O^n ; except in the poetic
portion of the Book of Job, as 3, s. 4, i, Ac,, but not in 3a, 6, in the
middle of the verse; comp. also l^^n^ltm prov. 7, 13. The weak
imperfect of Trw is always Vjk^ and but in the 1st Hng^^
according to 49. e, tnki Jud. ao, 6; comp. fei^. Gen. 3, r a. 13 in
pause. nnx and nDN are, al the same time, verbs n"^, hence imperfect
roN^ ( 75. 0-
Before tight suffixes the vowel of the second qfllable becomes vocal *w&, as
f
0^91^, ^^?^ bnt 03j9lin. In a few etset, instcBd of the ^ ia the fint
* So in the vnl^ Anbie at now spoken in South Palestine, ydtud {Ju eats)
becomes yi'huL
On this e (originally f) as a dissimilntion from d (originally cf. 27. jr,
and F. Philippi in the Ztiischri/t fiir Volkirpsychoh^ und Sprcuhwissenschaft,

Bd. xiv. a, p. 178. The latter rightly observes that the existence of an original u
b the imperfect of bsK is indicated b]r the fbim of the imfemtivt bbK, the
AtaUc >a*iw/, end the Aiaineic ^K^. w well as faj the &ct that lh|t^ and i)bg^
are fovnd aloof with tflfe^ and ll|^.
Digitized by Google
192 The Verb, [J^.
syllable an # is fiMud, wbidi is dne to cootraction from tbe gioap (or
_) ia place of e.g. nnMA it tluU etmu^ Mie.4,81 froos nri||n
(ftom nnM)i ar[|( (for an|() / /mv, IW. 8, 17, also ank Mai. x, a, &c, with
saffixea Viank Hos. it, i. 14, 5, ftc. (bat oolj Is ist J^f., otherwise nnK'^ Ac, ,
from ante. ariK): nn^l and I sitgfed, Gvxu 3a, 5. The ii^mtwt fonsinut of
nOK with p is always '>bK7 diteiubf for iSM,^. According to Barth (ZDJIfG.
1889, p. 179) Nam. 11, 35 is to be rcfpirded as an impetfact Qo/, without
the obscnring of M_. to 4, not as imperftct HipKtl^ since elsewhete ocean
only in the ptrfect â/and Niph*(tl: on the original i in the second syllable, see
above, (67./. For ^nbawn job ao, 36 we should simply emend *^'XLT^ ; for
the view that it is imperfect PS el ''which nowhere else occurs) can. as regards the
change of S to !f, bo supported only by the vcr\' doubtlul analogies of P. 63, 4

(see % 52. q) and Ps. joi, 5 Q'rt {uie 55.^), while the view that it is Pi el
(OKJn '3Xn a '3Kri) rests on no analogy whatever. It would be more admissible

to'snppoae that 'ittn standa for "SKH , Pu*ai (comp. ^^3K for f a7.f}i hot
no reason has been discovered for this departnre fimn the natmal panctaaticn
2. Ill the rst pcrs. siriq. mpnr/cct, where two K's would ordin.irily
come logeihor, tlic second (which is radical) is regularly dropped
( 23./), as npNi (for "(PNN), &c., and even plmt'^'^^^ Neh. 2. 7, &c.,
niDiX Ps. 42, 10. In the other cases, also, where the K is ordinarily
regarded as quitscing in ^ or it is only retained orthographic ally,

and on etymological grounds. Hence the possibility of its being
dropped in the following cases
h Always in the contracted forma of t|pM, aa *|Dh for IpKh Fa. 104, 99;
a Sam. 6, i (bat Ibr l|0^^ Job 37, 19 read l|p|^ with the LXX) ; comp. alaoin
tile lal pm Mk. 4, 6 and ^DDiC i Sam. 15, 6, whidi is appaicntly, from the
Metheg with /, intended for an imperfect HipKll ; instead of it, however, read,
with the Mantua edition, "^BDN (with I, according to % (io.f \. Bnt f^DDt^H
Ex. 5, 7 (for 'DiW) and HDI<*1 i Sam. 18, 29 (for f)Di1) are due to a mistake,
since f oth f(->rms must be derircd from the stem P|DV Furthermore. "^D*
Ps. 139, 20 where certainly '*<D* is to be ic'm\) ; S^FI Prov. I, lo (comp. 75. /;/;) ;
Vlbrn 1 Sam. jS, 24 ; ^^3^1 Ezek.4a,5 ;

Htpn 2 Sam. 19. 14 ; \^\FC\ a Sam. 20. 9;
'*^T\ thou r,hiJeU ah.^ttt from !^Tf<\ Jf r. 2, 36 ; NflM Deut. 33, 21 'for nr.NM
accordini' to utlier readings (on the analogy of the cues meatiooed in 75./)
....if
' The regaUflty of this ortbqpaphj indicates that the cootractioa of M|t to 4
ia this 1st /frj; oecorred at a time when in ttte sid and and persons the M waa
atiU andible as a consonant (whidl accordingly was almost always retained in
writbg). Noldtkc {7.DMG., Bd. xxxii. p. 593^1 infers this from the fact th.it also
!n Arabic the 3r<t and and pert, arc still yniiteajfJtJtiiia, titkilii, but tbe ist /crjr,
*dbiiiii, not 'i'ltHia.
Digitized by Google
69.] Verbs ^'t. First Class. 193
Fûrad^ I diows the wnk fonns of the imp^/eei Qal, and merely
indicates the other conjugations, which are regular.
Rem. I. Tn the derived conjagntions only isolated weak forms occur: Perfect %
Niphal ^nt<3 Num. 3 a, 30. Jos. 23, 9, IJifh, Dl^ (for and he laid
wait, I Sara. 15, 5; / listen. Job 32, 11; [6 from A) I girie to eat,
Hos. 11,4; HTSK from / will destroy, Jer. 46, 8; "^rrt*^ 2 Sam. 30, 5 (frf
(for 'n!l<*1) ; the K'thtbh appears to require the Pi' el in^^l, from "tn* as a secondary
form of inK ;
but nn**1 nnj<*^ lor "iriK*1 as imperfect Qal is not inijiossible.
On m^N^ Nch. i3, 13, comp. % 53. n,~ Infinitive bonj) Ezek. 31.3-5 (-'3KnS
tml<^ it is mther i/f. /îÂ. from 7*3) ; Participle ptD giveth ear. Pro v. 17,4.
Imperative Vnn (from HflXl Jer. 12, 9. (On the same form used for the
perfect in Is. ai, 14, comp. { ^6.d.)
a. In the Pi' el the K is sometimes drupped by syncope, like n in ^^p^n^, k

^^p^, thus (as in Anmaic ami Samaritan) Uaehn^f fat Job 35, 11;
b?r for b'P^^ Is- i3> 30; '^TSipi thou hast girded nu, 2 Sam. aa, 40, for
as Fs. 18, 40; ^l|i<\ Esek. aS^ 16 ; comp. 33. d,
^ 08. Verbs First Class, or Verbs original^ i% e. g. acf; diaelL
Verbs which at present begin with Yodli ui iheir .simple form (i.e. a
when without preformatives), are divided into two classes according
to their origin and hence frequently in their inOexion: {a) Verbs

which (as still in Arabic and Eihiopic) originally began with Wiw,
e.g. ''bj io give birth to, Arab, and Eih. ivaladd. In consequence of
a phonetic change which prevails also with few exceptions in the
noun, this Wdw in Hebrew and Aramaic always becomes a ITddh,
at least when it is the initial consonant; but after preformattves it either
reappears, or is again changed into VM, or, lastly, is altogether
elided ;
{b) Verbs which (as in Arabic) originally began with Vddh
(called Verba cum lod originario, see \ 70). A few verbs (some with
original and some with orifînal WCi'v) form a special class, which
in certain forms assimilates the Waw or I'odh to the following
consonant on the analogy of the NUn in verbs f'D (see 71).
With regard to verbs fÔ (i.e. ^'fi with original W&w) it is to be ^

noticed that
1 In the impir/eci, imperaiivi and infinitive construct Qal there is
a twofold Inflexion, according as the is wholly rejected or only

changed into FddlL The complete rejection (or disimi) takes place
regularly In eight verbs (see letter h) on the analogy of the following
0
Digitized by Google
194 The Verb. [ 69.
A. Imperfect VT with an undiangeable * in the first
syllable and original f in the second, wfaieh in the tone-sylUbk

(according to 27. r) becomes i (thus ^V.., ''I!; ÎS^), or under
the influence of a guiiural wiih a in the .second (Vt!, '^Pl, "^D!).
The tone-long i of the second syllable is of course liable to the
shortening to S'i^M/ or rora/ .^wd, 3*^'*1, &c. ; in the same

Vk^y d becomes S"rt d in such cases as VT^, &c., but is lengthened to
<
Qames in p4msi (^!) and before suffixes (DJTJA)*
B. ImpiraUvt ^ with aphaerms of the FTJiv and with tone-long i,

from j; as in the imperftcL
C. Infimtwe TSS^ from original MA, by addition of the feminine
ending (n) lengthened to a segholaie form; as in verbs ft (comp.
$ 66. If) this lengthening affords a certain compensation for loss of the
initial consonant.
The of the first syllable is really i, not tone-long i; ibrnjiM, with the
fint f att^tiftted from <f, after elision of the IVdiv must have been kngthcncl
to yeêh, as it wn* -till explained, with Euald anrl othcfs, in the twenty-third
edition ol' this tirnnimar. The character of this e is seen fioin the fact that
it is retained not merely before the tone, and in the counter-tone (e.g. D^?,!)
14, 10), but also in Ex. 33, 13. 17. Its explanation, however, presents
great difficulty. The view that original ytmO^ became yayUb, and then yiHb^
yHib (so Konig, Lekrgg^., p. 401), seems to be npported by the fiut that,
still
in Arabic, besides such imperftcts as yHUdii, yitfhit (with complete elision of
the Jfaw) we also fiml in the <lialect<; y/l!iJ, yiha!. Sec, ist sinx- nulid, aufal, Sic. :
comp. Spitta, Gramm. dts Arab. VuigdrdiaL v. Aî^'f-d-ti, p. 333 sq.; on the
corresponding strong formation in Ethiopia, comp. Dillmann, Gramm., p. 146
Praetorins, $ 93. Bnt how comes then the almost invariable s<riptio dtftcHum
of ihia a From an original we should expect, according to 1 7. a prevalence

of the scriptio pUtta; in reality it occurs (with the exception of Pn. 7s. 14,
elsewhere pointed ng^) only in Mic i* S and Ecek. 35, 9 K*tk.: in Fs. 138* 6
the Masora prefers to PTJ.AocordingtoStade ((7fwuw., fi 108, ii7)
the origins] f of the second syllable hss exercised a backward influence upon the
original H of the first syllable, '
in consequence of which an Y forces itself in after
this (T, as it were by anticipntion. The two coalesce into a diphthong, which
is then merged into i: D^JJH heqtm for haiqtm from haqim, Ar.iraaic 'aqim;
from maqim,' Arc The latter comparison most indeed be rejected, smce
the i in D^l and D*j?0 is not unchangeable; but Stade's view has the advantage
of attempting to eiq[lab at any rate the nnehangeableness of the first e in
and 9T> which he likewise refers to an original /ad'*.'-~AcooRUng to Philippi
{ZDJifG. xl. p. 653) an original yi^fd, for example (see above), became yiiid
by assimil.itiori nf the vowel of the first syllable to that of the second ; this then
l)ocame jr'/r-i/ in;t. ad of jr/^r/. in an attcmjit to raise the word again io thi* way
(by writing r' iuiUad of c) to a triliteral form.
Digitized by Google
69.] Ferbs Ftrsi Class. 195
(tee hdom, letter m) point to a gzom^- C

tm ât, Udki, we rotut, with PluUpfii {ZDMC. ixxil. p. 49) and Berth (tUdL xli.
p. 6o<S), Mcigii to fto.. the gioiiad^fona (whidh, tberefove, icappeen
in ^fOK^ Ac); tiie eiêieot gromid-feim Ifti# mti upon the Uw thet the t of
the stem-ejUable is changed into a whenever the tyUabk boeomce doubly doeed
by the mdditkn of the voweUeM feminine ending.
In more tfaaa half the number of verbs V^fi the originftl WSw in the ^
mbove-mentioBed forms gives place to Ffdh^ which in the imperoHQis
pin, h!J (see letter f) and infimHw *^ is a strong consonant, bat
in the tmper/tet pio^rly ytyras, merges with the preceding /
into t
In tile second syllable imperfects of this form regularly have a.
(a) That the latter forms are derived from verbs with an original Wdw (not ^
KlUI) ie ebowB partly by the infleuoa of theee verbs in NipK^l, Hiph'U, and Hopk*al
(where the original Wim reappeut thvooghoot), and partly hy the AfaUc, in
which verbs likewise exhibit a twofold focmation ; eomp. wiUdd, imperf.
ySUduy with elision of the WSw, and Ml(^,>aiy^, with retention of the Wow.
(d) Somctiraef bodl forms, the weaker and the ttronger, occur in the same verb ; f
comp. J Ki. 4, 41 and pip pcur, Ezek. 24, 3 (conp. ^pST KL 18, 34 and the
infin. Ex. 38, 27"); Sfh take posstssim, Deit 1, n. i Ki. 11, 15 (comp.,
however, letter 1), gn (in pemm for Bh) Dent a, 34. 31 ; Deut. i , 8. 9, 23,
bet also, with 7\-. paragogit, nch^ Dent. 3? ,

Tn the imperfect Deut.
32, 22 and 15]> Is. 10, 16 it ^hall be kindlfd i "l^^JI it v.'a' fr-ffioui, i S.im. iS, -50
,nrid 'p* 40 o ^romp. "îT* Ps. 72, 14).Tlie iMnn ^DHM Gen. 39, for
ICn^l, beside DjC^n)!} verse ^Sj is lennarkable.
(<) On *n Jud. 19, II for TV and ^VB^ Jer. 4a, 10 for the infinitive absoluU
3iC^t comp. S 19 r T?ut T}^ Jud. 5, 13 a and b is not intended by the Masora
either as pnfect (for *T^^, which reallr should be restored) or as iinpemtive of
bat an apocopated imperfect Pt'el from JTI*) (scfn^^) Aar^ dcmifuon.
{d) The eight verbs', of which the initial r'>M>ônant in the .ibore-menlion^d h
forms alwars snffers elision or aphaeresis, arc fo bring forth, HJT to go forth,
'yO^^ to si/, fo t/:.r//, IT fa descend, also to go (comp. beltiw. letter .r"* ; nnd
with fF in the second syll.-xMe of the iinptfff. t, V*!^ fo krntw, Tf}^ to hf united,
J?fT to /v dis.'ccafid. Examples of the other iorm.ition (C^*^ See.) are
^ weun^d, /<? counself to sleep, {imperfect tO*^ /irar.
* A ninth t]D^ /a is also to be inclnded. For since on the M&a' stone,
L 21, the infinitive is not written n^Doi^ but M&D^ (comp. ^flDO*, 1. 29), we
ronst also read in .ô, i (Num. ;^2, 14. Dent. J9, iS^- riDp for rrtS5p. The
2nd p!ur. masc. imperative ÊJD Is. 29, 1. Jer. 7. 3i coire^^ônHs to thus
in proof of a sxipposed HDD addere, there remains only nBD|( Deut. 32, 23, for
which, according to 2 Sam. 1 2, 8, n^pi< it> tu be read.
O 3
Digitized by Google
196 Jlie Verb, [69.
i 9. The original W9m is retained as a firm consonant : (a) in the
infiniiive, imperoHvt^ and imperfect Niph'al, being protected by the

doubling, e.g. which are consequently strong forms like
î^n, i^^^ ;
[h) in the Ili/Iifâfl of some verbs, e. g. JWIH from P"]^,
f^SyjÔ from na^, ^f-î? Iroiu HT- otherwise a radical Wmtf at the
beginning of a word is now found only in a few nouns, e. g. "l^J proles
from to bear. At the end of a syllable Waiv with the homogeneous

vowel u coalesces into 4: 80 throughout HcpXait e.g. 3S^Vi for
kSwiakhs but with a preceding a the fKnc is contracted into ^0);
so in the perfect and participle N^Hal and throughout HipiHU^
eg. SB'IS from an original jmwmM, from an original Ûfun^lSM.
^ The first radical always appears as YM in the perfect participk

Qal, 3?^^ &c., 3?^, even when 1 precedes, e.g. 3?*^ (but DR3?'*i,
according to 24. also throughout PCil and Pu'al, e. g. A? ;a//,
"1^* to A? ^r)r, antl in the imperfect and participle i>n^, known

(from VX). and, as a rule, also in Uithpdel^ e.g. ik'?'?, B^runn
(as against ITJITin, &c. with Waw).

I The beginner may recognize Terbs V'B in the imptffect Qal partly by the
^re under the prcformativcs ; in Xiph'al, Hiph'il, and Hoph'al by the IVaw
X) before the second radical. ^Tlie deiective writinj^, as in I^Sil, is rare).
Verbs ^"B have form? like (V*^), riS'J', in common with verbs SimiUrlj
Hoph'al has the saiiic lorni as in verbs VV and ^"y.
itt Rem. 1. T)\c inpntdvi Qal of the weaker form (HIIB', groimd-form H/'/, comp.
above, letter c) with suffixes is pointed as *n3E^', 8tc. The masculine form is
very rare, e.g. ^"1 to kn<raj, Job 32, 6. 10, as alo the feminine ending n , e.g.
n^l ' Ex. 3, 4, nnb is. 37. 3 Ki. 19, 3> : Jer. 13, 21. Hos. 9, 1 1 ; HIID '
deuend. Gen. 46, 3, where the chaoge of the J into vocal ov/d is to be cx|iiatncd,
with Kliioig, from its positioa between the principal and leoondary tone. From
yr, under the inflttenoe of the gattunl, nf\ b formed, with tuff. ^Tyif\ &c.;
but from tXP^ TWSi tot f*gih, tee $ 94./ From "T^ there oocnn m P. 30^ 4
in <3^ri ygD (the K*th. reqnira ft veiy lemailcahle case of the rtroog
Ibrm (for ^nYJO). For np i Sam. 4, 19 êneially explained at case of
^ ^riS&h Fs. 33, 6 eaa hardly be intended for an k^trntivt with inflls fiom
ae^, but rather for a ptrfia wmctOioe from SW^; we ahoiild, howerer, tend
I
The infinitim and nil beluiig to the aonree marked (B by Dillmann)
in tlie okodeni criticttm of the Ftentntench. The ame docnment also lias ]J\>
to give, for IITI ;

?j{>n /o for TOî and tllff^ to mtike, for llffc^. See Dillmann,
JHe BB, Jfmm^t DetU^Jet*^ p. (18.
Digitized by Google
{69.] Verbs First Class. 197
assimi1aiir.il of 1 to D in the supposed grotind-form /adV; according to Mayer
//(iV, sec above, letter c) read simplv
' vv
Examples uf the siruug form of the infinitive are yô''* J^- 22, 35, with M
preposition *lb^)> Is. 51* 16 (but s Chron. 31,7 aooonliqg to Bn Naphtali *lb^j>,
whcie the ^ it onlj ntUDed oithographically, but it nslly iwimlliM to die D;

the leading of Ben AAer, *1^0^jl^ aocqitlied by Bfeer, it mttaii^leu) ; f!d^
Eedti.5, It; iH^ 1 Sato, 19 to inepilM; prabefaly, howefitr iHjt (for ih^jl)
it tntendcd. With $mf, ^TP^S Job 38^ 4, oompk Jiid. 14, 15. 0. 3, it; irith
n /m. UtiM$, 14, 16. On rw^, wUch it likewite ntntlly
idecnd to ditt dtii^ oonip. die note on f 3:0. .
3. The Ai^ra/im Qai fieqaeotljr hit the lengthening by nL^ e.g. HSf^ ^
^ HT) ^r<iM/ /iMf From 30^ . Anh. tMM, only the impmiim
it ttMd in Hebieir ; it hat the form an Âtf lengthened nan genenlly with
,
the metabg ge, g$ t (Gen. tg* ti nan beto II to avoid the hiatnt) ; y^ti.
^ Rath
before the tone-syllable
3, 15, MiVra* on the analogy of the plnral
; btit cotnp. Dent. 33, 3), whilst,
OH (in Job
00 the analogy of other
6, a a >QS\
imperatives Qal of verbs IÂ, larj wonld lather be expected. Chi

Prov. 34, \.\, comp. $ 48. /.
The impetfci with elided takes & in the second syllable, besides the cases
3. t "1
p
mentioned above ^, letter / also in l^Pl Jer. 13, 17 (comp. I^m. 3, 48 and in
the pausal form 1J^2 J<^^ (fro ^ letter x); on Is. 10, 16
tee above, letter The J / n the teoond syllable, when followed by the affonB*-
tive Tii (nniTl &c.), is in accordance with the law mentioned above (letter r),
hy which d ttket the place of f in a donbly doied lylltble. Formt with i in

the tecond syllable shorten the / to SVî ^<^^ ^ drawn back (before
n tcoeniyllable or after foSw emueitive)^ e. g. M^TSfJl Oen. 44* 33; "l^,
^{f^;
but / U retained in an open syllable, even with Mii'el'tooeb in Ex. 16, 39.
Jud. ij,
39, in both cases with tiasog *mlff0r, % t^,. The pausal is either of the
fofm^t^'*^ kuth 4, I or "T^*! Ps. i8, !o; the 1st pcrs. sing., whether in or out of
&c., except Job 19, 10, ste letter .r. Fur JH**
Fs. 138, 6 (comp. the note abov^ on letter b and the analogoos cases, % 'jo.d)
jn^ i5 intended.
The :rr!/, r/ftrt of the fomi IJ'l^ is frequently (especially l)efore afTornintives) Q
whttcu defectively, in which case the ( can always be recognizeti as a long vowel
by the Mei/ug (see t 16./), e.g. Is. 40, 30, Is. 65, 33 ; and to alwnyt
)ttn^ th^fmr, as distinguished from*^ they sce \imperf. Qal of ntO)..-0n
fifer^ Gen.50v t6. 14, 33 tnd ?{D^^ Ex. 30^ 3a, ten | 73, iMa/.
From Upmmif it ie M, the imperfect Qal it which can only have r
risen thfoiigh a dcpietsion of the vowel from (ground-fotm /aMM//MK-
JUo/), to distinguish it, according to Qimhi, from 72\H, jnst at according to
I47. ^, ^l9|^ it differentiated from bÔ^. Comp. the Arabic yauru'u {y6rm*m)
from wanâ, yau^lu {yij^M) from wt^^la^ at also the vulgar Arabic (among
towns-people) y{lfal &:c. from ttHstala. Others refârd as an impirfect Hoph'al
(JU is MoHeJÂt tan,, alwaya oicd instead of the impt-rftci Qaii comp., how-
Digitized by Google
198 The Verb. [ 69.
evert f 93> K.^JWI oecun ia Jcr. Si 5 tnd nVisf. fern, for ^ÔVV) Tcwiding
to Kiidg, becmuie the sod /tm. wm alrMdjr nlfidcvtly i ndioited .
4. The attenaatsoQ of ^ to f in th ptifeei (in a toneless, closed syllable)
which is dificn^sed in ( 44. </ (comp. f 64. f) occurs in verbs l^'D in a few forms
jf 1^ Num. It, 12. Jer. 1, 27. Ps. a, 7, &c. (always after as well as of
en^, e.g. DnSn^V, Sec, Deut. 4, i. 8, i. 17, 14. 19, i. 36, i. 31, 3 (always after
*1 for In both cases the attenuation mit'lit he explained from the tendency
to asaimilate the vowels, especiaiiy if the imiiai |

was proijuimced, as in Syriac,
like > ( 47. b). In the case of Bh^, however, a secondary form (compi
i 44. </) is probably to lie eaittmed, iliioe in AraUc bo the mb hai Ite fiwm
wUrfi^ The font Ezek. 36, la and H^^. Ps. 69, 36, Ac, are mott
Btmpljr explained from the retain of thia /.
5. As an exoepliaBy the iMifeiftet Mpti'al tosMtimet has a * instead of the 1,
. g. audhfU^f^t Gen. 8, \t (unless the H'il or , as in ver. 10^ b to

be read), comp. Ex. 19. 13 ; i Sam. 13, 8 JCthtbh. The first person always has
the form 3e^t(, not IIHB^ comp. 51. /.In the ploral of the participle
vfrom n3*, with depression of 5 to jJ, comp. 27. n) 5s found in Zeph. 3, iS;
comp. Lam. I, 4. While in these cases some doubt may be felt as to the
correctness of the Masoretic pointing, much more is this so in the perfect
nuli'dhii, 1 Chron. 3, 5. 30, 8, for Xlt^'i which appears to be required by the xedw
in the initial sjlIabEe.
6. In the imptrfect JH'el &yncope of the first radical (^) sometimes takes place
after vOw com, (aa in the cue of N. f 68. k\ e.g. na^ for n|:p mid hi has
grievti, Laa. 3, 33, MAme for 11}^ mtd tkey hamvene 53 : on the other
tasf,
liand, in
Qal of *1T
^ is
|^ M^r
reqniped
tost Uis,
the context.
Joel 4, j. Oh. it. Nah. 3, io a petfut
So from a verb of the second clasa*
Vwan for mid k9 made U d/yt Nah. i 4; oomp. Dl)^ a Chron. 33,30
CV/(the pobts either to AV/ XrvfT^L Âi*f/ tS^f^-
7. In the iviperaiive Hipk'tl instead of the nsnal form 30^, t is also found
in the second sylUbki WfS\ Is. 43, 8 ; 94n Ps. 94. i (befoiie n, hcaoe pioUbly
a mere mistake for n^^^filn) ; TTS^n Prov. 19, 25. When closed by a gnttnial
the second syllable generally has df, as yT^n^ yCHn, comp. also "Tgh Prov. 15, 17
(as in the infin. consir. PD^n Job 6, 26; see f 65. d . On the other h-ittd,
r alwayt reappears when the syllable becomes open, thus nTWn 'Z'L'in^
nrbhn, and so also before stinfixe* {% 61. ^\ ^f^rn Gen. 8. 1

7 (^ri{K*th. KXin,
sec 70. l>) is irregular. Tlie jussive and the imf^'rfa t lousei tttive Hiph'il when
the tone is eirawn back take S*^h6l in the second syllabic, as in Qal, e. g. ^jDV
Mo/ waj' ina ease, Prov. 1,5, before nj^^ ; cf. Ex. 10, a8. Dent. 3, a6; 5)0*1
(Ô^ Prov. 30, 6 i> anomalous; ; in fausc, however, also t]Dln as jussive, Job
40, 3a (usual jussive in pause &c , which occurs even without the pin-*;
after wow consetutive. Gen. 47, 11. Josh, 24, 3. 2 .Sam. 8, 4, Sec). With a imal
gottural in* and nai* (Jussive) and rolh, &c. : with a final T in /a*/* "inhl
Rnth 9, 14: on DJ^jT} Is- 35, 4, comp. 65. y ;. On fbfms 19ce y^^tT,

Me 1 53. ^.
'
7o J Verbs *"d. Second Class. 199
In Htfml$ tUnds fatM of in91^1 (for Snvt) Uv. 4, 33. a8. ?Uh a Sam. w
10, 13, and pediapt In \/r^ (for nnV) Fkov. 11, 35 but conp. DeliteMh on the
;
|)asiage.->Aii it^M^t Mtpk*alii\^ leminitte ending oocvis in nn^n Gen. 40, 30,
for ni^n 35 ; comp. above, letter t, on Vlhs and { 71 at tile end.
,
8. Tlie verb 1|^n to go, belongs in tome respects to tbe class, for it fonas X
(as if from I^Jl) imperfect vfSw rmMcw/rtv ^J^^ (in pause 1(^*1 Gen.
^{yi, with
24, 61, &c.), 1st ling. IJÎ (but in Job 19, 17 tn/nUhi tmsfmaT)^^
"^^D ;
with rair. ^ri3^, &c;

imftraiive !]^, -!]^, in the lengthened fonn nsV an
faitetjectioa lefarriag even to a femkdmet Gen. 19, js, or 11 plmr^. Gen. 31, 44)
and ^
(Nnm. 93, 13. Jnd. 19^ 13. a Chnn. 35, 17, and the MCia* inscription,
]hiei4); M>l. (also in Ex, a9*^^ and /rat. /M/m^ b to be read
for ^3^^, whidi probably arose aecdjr thioogh codiisiao with the following
Vl^n) ; imptrfeet llfifC>t bnt in the ist sfaig. of the iwtptrfta imuemiam alwajfs
lipiwn Lev. a6, 13. Amoa a, ii &c. Raidj, and alasoat eidttsivdj in the
later Booka or in poetiy, tiw legilUr infleiicna of 1^ aie also foaad : impttf,
1|!n^ <F. 58, 9^ dec; bat IJ^TjA Ex. 9, 33. Fi. 73, 9; comp. { 64, and A);
ijbnN Job 16, sa, also Mcâ' inscription, line 14, I^HM; infin, (Ex. 3, 19.
Num. aa, 13 iq. 16 Eccles. 6, 8. 9), impermHm plur. \3|)n Jer. 51, 50. On the
f 111 r h-tnd, the perfect Qal is always ?l^n, participle T^^, infiniiivt 9bt^9U$
pbn, Niph'al T]^n3 , AV/ ^Wl, Hithpa'el 1].Winn, so that a * never appears
unmistakeably as the tirst radicnl. The usual explanation of the abo\e forms
ii nevertheless leased on a sujiposcd obsolete ?|^. It is, however, more coirect
to regard the apparent forms of "^77^ with Practonus {J^.AW. ii. 310 sqq.)
as originating with the Hipbll, of which the ground-form hakltkk became HMSkh^
and this again, on the analogy of the imperfect Qa! of verbs M*l>, JMHttA.
This MltUk being reCencd to a supposed JUmttkk (properly AawUkk) gave rise
to new Ibnnations after the manner of verba Y'l}.
{ 70. Veris ^ Second Clast^ or Verbs proper^ "^'^

e. g. 30^ io be good. Paradigm L.
Verbs properly '"d differ from verbs ^"d in the following points ; a
1. In Qal the initial V6dh never suffers aphaen^îs or elision; hence
the mfimtive has the fonn B^J \ the imperfect P^^ (in pause
also written 90^, ftc. ; and so always \^'ith a tone-bearing d, in the
second syllable, even after wSm consee.^ e.g. except f^Gen. 9, 34,
'
Comp. above, letter m, second note.
" This may be inferred from ($^3^3
(= '^3) Is- a7, il, which with its fcm.
nS^3^ Gen. 8, 7, is the only example of an infinitive constrvrf f .sj of these verbs.
No example of the imperative Qal is found: consequently 30*^, &c. (in Para-
digm L of the earlier editions of this Grammar), are only iniieared from the
impetfut.
Digitized by Google
200 The Veft.
and *^ Gen. 2, 7. 19, unless *9J is to be indnded anuwg verbs fiD
(comp. Is. 43, lo).
b S. In HipUH the original form 3^9!? regularly contracted to 3WJ
(rarely written ao^n, &c.); imper/rcf Vpty Instances of
the uncontracted form are tW^^ Prov. 4, 25, according to Barth
(see above, ^J.p), an example of an i-inipcrfect of â/, since the
Hipfitl is otherwise always causative ; "'B'^n {imperative) Ps. 5, 9

Cr/ (the iSTV^ requires "Bhn according to the form of verbs i"d ;
comp. Is. 45, 9, nB>m iST'/i, Ig^:* (^'r/), comp. Gen. 8, 17 Q^rf;
tSVWi I Chroo. IS, a, to be explained as a denominative iiom f^;
Di^D^ Hob. is ({ 24^^ note); but perhaps the panctuatkni here
7,
is only intended to suggest another reading D^B^tt.
C Rem. I. The 00I7 verbs of tbls kind re: 31^ to U good (only in the imperfect
QaiwoAva HipKtti in the perfect Qal aÔ, a mh i> md bstmd), pj^
nir^, i owake, n|; /to (bat we above, letter a), ffipk*tl 7^
to bewail, -t|Bf^ tohostmi^, tifJki, also (Aiabk/dlfiil) todiiyQntt HipHfil
3 Sam. 19, 5, on the enalogy of verba Y'hi 00 It. 30, 5, comp^ f 7s. jr),
and the Hi^*tl ftf^ (daominative from pO() ^go io tko rigki,
d a. Li some examples of the imperfect Hiph'tl the pitfonnatlTe hae bees
aubseqnently adde<l to the contracted fonn: ^^D^ Job 34. 21; Is. 15, a. 3.
Jer 48, 31 ;
phir. Hos. 7, 14, comp. Is. 65, 14. Qimî and
others explain the above forms from a phonetic interch.nnge of Y6dk and Hcy
arising from the unsyncop.ited forms ^v^PI*, &c. (comp. Is. 52, 5). It would,
perhaps, be more cuixcvi to suppose that the regular forms were
origiaally intended, but tiiat in the later prouunciation the syllable was broken
up in order to rertoie artificially the prefonnative wbl^ had baoome mcis^
hi tiie fint tadicaL
e Isolated aaomaliet ue: perftd HipHU ^(60^ BmIc 36, ti with lepayalbg
owel (for ^ra^) OD the isalcgy of vtrba V'y \imptifHi 3^ text 1 KL

1, 47 J ^îimptrfkt Qal for ^Vl) Nah. 3. 8; V^^, itiifierfitet' NÛ,
Ex. 2, 9, either an error for 'pSMHit or an iiregnlar shortening of the first syllable,
caused by the forward movement of the tent. Similarly, the Jiipk'U (from
1^) is always vsed for from On VWS^ Nah. 1, 4, see { (i^. w.
{ 71. Verbs Third Chss, w Verht with YM assimilated.
In some verbs "b, the Y6dh (or the original Waw) does not quiesce
in the preceding vowel, but is regarded as a fuU consonant, and, like
Ndn ', is assimilated to the following consonant. These forms,
* These verbs^ like verba (cf. above, note on i 67.^), may perhaps have
been ininenoed by tiie analogy of verba J'iD.
Digitized by Google
20I
therefore, t>eiong properly to the class of strong verbs. Assimilation

invariably takes place in (prop, yvi) /o spread undtr ; Hiphii TV}^
Hoph'al Pin; TSt^ io burn, imperfect nr, Niph'ai W, Htphil Ifin
(in Is. 27, 4 also n|rpy|^ is to be read with Kdnig; in a Sam. 14, 30
the Masora has rightly emended the K*tklbh mnw)* which could
only be the 1st sing. perf. of a verb to the imperative nvi^
in agreement with the context and all the early versions); BÛU
y|n 9 fkett HupKU 3|n I and probably also in the forms ordinarily
derived from 31), via. 3|5 {Niph'ai), ^tn, ST, an ; at any rate
a stem ^T, is implied by the Hithpdel ; instead of the anomalous
aiTVn Fx. 2. 4 read with the baniaMt m 2^^/)^, i.e. SJTÎ. Besides
the conuiioii form we find once pif^ in lb. 44, 3 (from p5P to pour)
with a Irafisi/iv meaning, beside P2r*) mtratisiitve , i Ki. 22, 35.
Elsewhere the imperfect consecutive has the form P^l Gen. a 8, 18.
35, 14. comp. 69./^ where also other forms of VT, are given
^y*! and (I& 44, la. 49, 8. Jer. 1, 5 Q^rt^ from tJI; lo form^
are however, used in the same sense* Comp. also 01|9 Hos. 10, 10
njTji^ (for according to { 47. k) b Sam. 6, la ; a Chron. 3r, 7
(comp. 69. n) and Is. s8, 16. This assimilation is found only
with sibilants (most frequently with y) except in the case of K^l
I Ki. 3, 15 (where, however, others read ^1?^) and in ^'f^*} Gen. 40, 20.
Ezek. 16, 5 (comp. HT^T verse 4), mpiitivt HopKal of ^5J (comp.
Tl^ 69. /).
72. Verbs {ptdgo^'y;^\^.%.X:^ io rise up. Paradigm M,
L According to { 67. a a large number of monosyllabic stems were a

brought hito agreement with the triliteral fonn by a strengthening,
or repetition, of the second radical, i. e. of the amstmankU element

in the stem. In another large class of stems the same object has been
attained by strengthening the vocalic element. 1 he guiund-form
used for these verbs is not, as in other cases ( 39. a), the 3rd sing,
masc. perfect, but always the injimiive construct form ( 39. b), the H
of which is characteristic also of the tnêrative and of the imperfect
imticatiu Qal. These stems are consequently termed verbs l^'tf or
more correctly (see Rem.) V9\
'
The term Y")i was consequent on the view (formerly accepted in this Graiuniai
tluu the iVdw (or ^ in the case of vertw in these stems was originally
Digitized by Google
902 The Verb.
b S. As in the case of verln the monoeyUabic stem of vetiis ^'9
generally retains the vowel which would have been required in the
ucond syllable of the ordinary strong form, since this belongs essentially
to the character of the verbal form ( 43. ^; 67. b). However, it is
to be remarked: (a) that the vowel, short in itself, becomes of

necessity long in an open syllable as well as in a lone-bearing closed
ultima {except in Hoph'al, see letter d), e. c:. 3rd sing. masc. per/. D^,
< < <
fern, HDj?, plur. Îî^, but in a closed ptnullima ritpp, &c. (^) that in
the forms as we now have them the lengthening of the original short
vowel sometimes takes place irregularly. Comp. letter f.
c Intransitive verbs midik J? in the perftci Qai have the fonn Hp

Me it dtad; verbs middle O have the form hDn luxiit Ae wot
asAamed*, Comp. letters n to r.
consonantal. This view Mcmcd tMptaaXlf to be tnpported by the return of the

!f\i7f ill Pi'il n^Jj?, the ) usually passing into ^ as in DJ, cf. Arabic fdwwdmit),
and by certain forms of the absolute stoic of the nonns of such steins, e.g. T\\t^
(UcUh, compared with DSD to die. Hence in explaining the verbal forms a stjpposed
stem qaxvam (in verbs ^"J? e g layat) wa^ always assumed, and D^fy was referred
to an original yaq-uurn, the infinitive absolute D)p to original gdw6m, the particifle
passive D^p to original qdwAm. It mnst, however, be admitted : (i) that forms
like Dii? (letter ni) are only to be found in the latest Books, and are hence
evidently leoonduy as compared with tlie pute Hebrew forms &c- ; (a) that
to nefcr the verbal forms Innulably to tbe ttemOlj^, leads in many cases to phonetic
combinations which are essentially lmpobaUe whereas the assampCion of oii|^naI
miiMMM/wel stems renders a nmide and natural explanation almost always
possible. These steins are therefore to be rigidly distinguished from the
real Vy stems of the strong form, such as fiyi, yu, &c. (see below, letter jy).
As early as the eleventh century the right view with regard to V5 stems was
tftken by Samuel Hannagid (cf. Bachcr, Leben utid Wcrke dcs Ahuhvalt'd, p. i6),
recently by Bottcher {Lihrlmch, ^ ms), and specially by MiiUer and Stadc

(see above, p. 183, note) with regard both to and y"y verbs.
* In Aramaic, however, always ntS^ ; also in Hebrew Grammars before Qim^
Fip{7, ^Pip^, are found, but in our editions of tl^ Bible this occurs cmly in
pauic, e. g. ^nop Mic. 7, 8, UTIO a Ki. 7, 3. 4.
According to Stade Grammatik, % 3S5. e and /} the e in HD is of the nature
of a diphthong (from <u, which arose from the tmioo of the vowel f, the t>ign of the
iatiansitiTe, with Jthe d of the root), and likewise the in *ltoC, Ac (from w).
Bnt i (from em) oonld ima, by 36./, remain in a closed pennltima (n^3, Sec.)
;
coBseqnently the of these Ibnm can only be tone-long, i,e. doe to lengthen ing
of an original iir, and shniUrlylhef of n^tolengtfaenhigofanoclgfainir. This
b coofiraied by the li^t that the ^ in np, 'rif^, b always, and ia 4
Digift^^JiMgle
h^ l Verbs 203
8. In the imperfect QaL perfect NipHal and throughout HipHfl and d

HopHal the short vowel of tlie prcforniatives in an open syllable before
the tone is clianged into the corresponding lone-long vuwcl. In Qal

and NipHal the original d is the basis of the form ami not the /
attenuated from a ( 67.//; but cf. also below, letter h on B^!),

hence D^P^ for yaqHm; 0^3 for naqSm ; on the other hand, in the
perfect U^HU O^gn for%/iii/ partiiipU (on the $ere cf. letter t);
perfect Hc^êU QE^ for Mfom.

A TOfive] Uras leagtiieiicd bdim tle tone is iietiiiaUjr diangeable and beeoittei
9eeml Shud wken tfte tone b moved fefweid, e.g. Wp* ke willHUkim; to alto
ia the 3rd plur. impcrfut Qal with AVm paragogic; IpXW^ (withoot Mtti VAD^),
The wholly afanoniMl scrjptio plena of r hi "V^VIp Jer. xi (beside "Vpn In the
same vene) should, with KBotg, be enended into *Vlpjr{: the inconect repetition
of the intenoeathre^ however, neoesBarily led to the fefm bdn^ pminted as perfut
tasiead of imperfect.
Only in Iloph*ml is the 4 setsfaied throaghout as an nnchange-
able vowel, when it has been introduced by an aboonnal Ifngthffliing for the
tooe-loog ^ (as in the Hoph'al of verbs J^^'.
4. The cases of iiniisaa] vowel lengthening mentioned in letter^ are: /

imperfect Qal 0^ (also in Arabic yaqiimu), but jussive with normal
lengthening ( 48. ^j^),
tp\^ with retraction of the tone {ySq^)i
Dj^^ (in pause Dpf?) ;
imperative Dip ; the normal lengthening of tlie
occurs in the 2nd plur. fern. 'l^Cp, since, according to 26. /, tt cannot
be retained in a closed penultima; infinitive construct D^. In IJipMil
the lengthening of the original i to / (D*W, imperfect U"^^, jussive Dg;,
with retractiaii of the tone 0|^, 0^) exactly agrees with the analogy
of the strong veib (comp. { 53. a).
The following fofms require special consideration : the partkipU g
Qai 0^ is to be traced to the ground-fonn with d unobscured, Arab.
qdlU, 9. q, and 50. b. The analogous form qdfm after absorption
of the f, became tJ^* owing to the predominating character of the 41
The uncharigcablcness of the d {plur. D^?^, cotutr. 'O^, &c.) favours
this explanation.
3id phtr, ferfut, nearly always (Ae inabmecs an ti to s) written defectlvdy.
Fotms like Jlf^ vti, tltK, ftc are therefore to be treated as ofOogn^hic
licences.
* So in Arabic 'prop. qSlm, since the two vowels arc kept npart by the insertion
of an K, CMnp. Aram. DH)^^ ; but also contracted, as tub. hdr, iot lA Ik^ BtC (comp.
Wright's Cramm. of the Arabic Language ^ and ed. vol. L p. 164).
Digitized by Google
ao4 The Verb
k In the imperfect Q<iK besides the fonns with original * (now \ there
are also fojius wiih onguul a. fhis d was lengJiencd to a, and then
further obscured lo hence es{>ecta!ly i^'i^^
K^-î ^^H. <^c from the
perfect he has come. In the imperfects '^'^^l and from
the intramitive perfects (see above, letter r), roost probably
also in 2 KL xa, 9, 1^^^? Gen. 34, 15 from an unused to
cMSimi^ and perhaps in 0*10) i Sam. 4, 5, ftc, as in the cases noticed

in { 63. ^ and especially <i7. , the / of the prefonnative is lengthened
from I (which is attenuated from the original dl) and thus j^f-ASf
became yMf^ ^ yi-bSi, Finally the Of^ {ni-qdm\
mpnjcci 0^ from y/'htnqitm ( 5 . a) =^yiqqam^ arises in the same
way from the obscuring of d lengthened from &
i 6. In the per/tci NipKal and UipHU a i is inserted before the
afformatives beginning with a consonant in the ist and 2nd persons
and ^'T-
regularly in the impw/tci Qal, sometimes also in the imperfict
HipHUt before the termination Tt^ (see, however, the Rem.). As in
verbs jr^V ( 67. iy these ttparaimg vcweb serve as an artificial opening

of the preceding syllable, in order that it may retain its long vowel
in the perfect HipHtt, however, before the \ instead of the f an f is
somewhat frequently found* (as a normal lengthening of the original t\

espîally after iva-v conseculu'e, Deuu 4, 39. jo, i, as well as l>efore
the afformatives DTi and fH or before suffixes, Deut. 22, 2. i Sam. 6, 8.
I Ki. 8, 34. Ezek. 34, 4. For in all these cases the tone is removed
from the ^ to the following syllable^ and this forward movement of the
tone produces at the same time a weakening of the f to thus D^pn,
(or 'pn), but ^fO^f ^* ^* 4> 39*

18, 86 (comp^ honprever, Mic. 5, 4). In the same way in the
I St pers, JMjf. of the ptrfiei NipXal the 6 before the separating vowel
is always modified to 4 (^^^\)\ comp. letter 9. Is^^ imperfect
Qai and HipKU the separating vowel always bears the tone
h Withont the separating vowel and consequently with the tone-long 5 and / instead
of id and / wc find ia imperfect Qal rue(3n<sec I 76./): EmIc. 16, 55
(also V^p^H^ in the hum fcne); n^^to^ 1 San. 7. 14 (oosifk EmIk. a6t 9
' DJn'3*S*n> ! Sam. 6, 7 (comp. a Chron. 6, 25; could onlv U- an ortbognpliic

licence for 'igTH \ perhaps, however, was ongiiuUly imcoded.
Digitized by Google
72.] Verbs v'y. 905
on the K^thtbh T\VSa^V{ corap. aboTC, note on $ 69. ^) ; T\T&^ t Sam. 14, a; from
11K {K*t\tbh n3Kin M^v raw, see 75. 7fj); vxHiph'il, e.fj. nsjn Ex. 20, 35,
alsio ^MD^JH Job 31, 21 ;

''H^Dn^ Jcr. 2a, 26; TOSB'n Job 20, 10 ;
with a sop.irating
Towel,e.g. nj^KÎiri Lev. 7, 30 from Ktl. S'ghd! without occurs lu the impirfect
Qal ill njTflDFl Ezek. 13, 19. Zech. i, 17; and m Hi^h'tl Mic. 3, 12: the DageS
in the iV'<3 is, with Baer, to be rejected in all three cases according to the best
antboritiei. Wholl7 abnotmal is n^'^pH Jer. 44, 35, probably an ecToneoos

tnmapontioD of (for n^^D^), unless it originates from an incorrect spellii^
njoÊ? or njD^pn.
6. The tone as in verbs jl^y (compw { 67. It) is also retained in verba /
before the affbnnatives n^, ^, ,
generally on the stem-sjUable;
thus noQ (but also a Ki. 19, 21, probably for the sake of
rhj^thinical uniformity with the following naj6 ; after waw eomeeutivt
rOfh Is. 23. 17); ^Cf^ (but also *>5' comp. Is. 28, 7. 29. 9. N.1I1. 3, 18.
Ps. 76,6. Lam. 4, 18; I Sam. 8, 11 ; so especially before a follow-

<
ing K, cf. 49./, Num. 13, 32; Is. 19. i; before y, Lam. 4, 14);
*0^pR, , but before a suffix or with NUn paragogk W3D^ a Cbron.
28, 15; 33 1 1, -Ac.
7. The formation of the conjugations PiW, Pftai and Hiihpdil is, l

strictly speaking, excluded by the nature of verbs Vl^. It is only in
the latest Books that we find a few secondary formations, probably
borrowed from Aramaic, 011 the analogy of verbs (with consonantal
1, see below, Ictier gg)\ e.g. the Pfel I^V to iurround, Ps. 119, 61,
and with change of l to \ D^, infinitive D*2 Eslh. 9, 31. 32, &c.,
from np; Dîrn Dan. i, 10 from avi /<? U guiity. The Hithf aH
V^J^n Jobh. 9, 1 2, which belongs to the older language, is probably
a denominative from Ty. On the other hand the otherwise less
common conjiâtion PCUl (properly /ViV//, see 55. 4i), with its
passive and reflexive, is usually employed in the sense of /W/ and

as a substitute for it, e.g. from qikmim with obscuring of J to ^
(comp. 55. V) to set 1^ from ttp\ ll^D to skmgkter^ i Sam. 14, 13.
17, 51. a Sam. i, 9, from WD; DO^*^ to exalt, passive Wrt"* from Wl;
reflexive io stir up oneself (comp. "^î^n^ Job 17, 8 in pause)
from "^V; reciprocal CVann to l>e ashamed before one another^ Gen. 2, 25.
The conjugation Pilpel ( 55./) is less common, e.g. ^pi'D to hurl
awity from b^D ; "ig^g dtsiro}' from "^V,
Digitized by Google
2o6 The Verb
Remarks.
h OnQ0l.
n I. Of verbs mitUle S
and 0, in which, as in the strong vcrf . the ptrfui and
participle have the same form f 50 a") the following are the only examples:
np is dead, ftm. iTTID, aad masi., nfiD (comp. 1 44.^; $ 66. ^) ; ist sing. ^TO,
^jnpl (even in pmut. Gen. 19, 19); /Ar. VIQ^ isl ^^dTip, in >im^
r>r/* amuf, U. i;, ix; MB ^ smu JFIf^ I3ffa, VfS;
^ boteted Bttitialiw in tiie feifttt are : na|h (with tbe original ending of th>iM.
for n^l^ Eaek. 46, 17 (lee i 44-/); Is. 96, 16 pmragag^ with the
>r/E/ eUewheie onty in Dent % 3. i<).În ^ i Sun. 35, 8 (for l3Ka from Ufa)
tbe tt has been dropped contrary to eustom.
MaaoM leems to point to the imperfect
In ^ Jer. 27, 18 (instewl of
the tildiA is what wonM be expected
at YUh pieoedef it is peiliai timply a icribal ervor.
/ The form ocean <c^ 1 9. ^) with M in the ptrfutt DMg Hoi. ko, 14, alio in
the fartie^ QM^ u^fy, Jod. 4, ax. /Mr a Sam. xs, x. 4. Pkwr. xe^ 4,
/bfr. 13, 93; QeM|^ dtuig ditp&i umtt, Eaek. a8, 14. a6;>w. t6 37; alao in
Zecb. X4, 10 rqpin is to be rend witit Ben*NaphtaIi for On the analogj

of pattidplca of terbs midiOe 0 (like t3M^ see aboro) for O^pi^
2 Ki. 16, 7 and even with a transitive meaning t3^^ occnlians. Is. 25, 7; Q^Cto
Zech 10.5. Participle peuaott
. circumcised; but J^D a hmcktlider, Prov. 14, 14,
and rn^D put aside. Is. 49, Ji (cf. Jer. 17, 13 ^'/), are verbal adjectives
of the form qatt^l 50./), not pa^ve participles. For O^^n hastenimgy
Nam. 3a, 17, read D^^cn as in Ex. 13, 18.
^ a. With imprrfects in /? there are almost always the corresponding imperative

and inJiniiiiH emit nut in //, as Q^p^ ,
imperative and infmitive D^p (also defectively
written Dp^^ Dp); l>ut with C*^T thresher iinfitt. C^**!") the imprra'ive ^'^^
ijem.) occurs in Mic. 4, 13; with DÔ* it slifpeth, the infinitive LID 'J's. 38, 17,
46, 3); comp. (also rflj) Nutn. 11, 33 and yii Is. 7, i elsewhere JRJ) with the
imperftctt and J^T; rty^ Is. 30, 2; Josh, a, 16; Dr> Eaek. 10, 17
(vera. 16 Din).
r Where the imperfttt ha* ^ tho imperioHne and inJinUivt also have it; thus
imftrfut K^3; (^2; , n^fM^Pf, fte. M or lb* ; nkl 3 Sam. a. 33, tHtl
Cîy , B'b, dEC.Crip; Job 8, X4 (if it be a vnb at all and not father a snbatantive)
if fomed on the analogyof vetba ainoe dm 4mffKt of Dip nppeaia aa Dlp^
in Ps. 95, 10. On the other hand (as if from occurs aa imperfed
of (*"D), on the analogy of KiaiJ, ftc. The mfirfga JVT , with 6, Gen. 6, 3
probably in the sense of t* rtUe, t ffntm has no eorrespondbg fufeU^ and is
' In I Ki. r4, 12 (HKhS Icforc a gcnltivcj, the text is evidently corrupt: read
wth Klostermann after'the LXX TRjUa.
Digitized by Google
7^0 Verbs ^'v. 207
perhaps btCttliODallf diSeicntlated from the common verb pT u judge (from
X^.,
'^^y)- Or can be a jmsiv after c6 (c f 10^ StaniUtfly D^nn (6
^Tf) ""Tt *S^ ^ M a cue of ft juMive afker t6, wHh irregular wripih
fkma (as in Jud* x6, 3o) in Dent 7, \^ 13, 9. I9 13. ax. 95, la. Eadc. 5, il.
7* 4- 9- 8, 18. 9 la But peAapa in all tlicae eaKB DVin 16 wu originally

intended, as in la. 13, 18. Jer. ei, 7. The u^mtive aislfiitit alwayi baa
.g.3^ Dfpjer.44, 99.
3. Id tlie im/iraiive with aflbmatlTCi (^^^^ ttUp) ^ tone b on the Hem S

pliable; comp. however, Jud 5, la intentionally varied from tlao
Zedi. 13, 7 and Is. 51, 9 beside ^7*1 Zech. 9, 9; ^fys 1m. ai, a.
Pa. 7 liliewiae for rhythmical leasoos. So alao the lengthened fotro,
aa nWB' Jcr. 3, r P. 7, 8, and rn^$ verse 7. But if an K, n or y follows in
dose connexion, the lengthened impertUiv< usually has the form HD^p, &c.',
in order to avoid a iiiatus, e.g. Jnd. 4, 18. Ps. 82, 8; hence alao before nlH^,
Qri ptrptuttm *3hfc< ( \ fs, e. g. Ps. 3, 8. 7, 7 (comp., however, un Aesante
< < - .
verse JTl^V before {< ; HO^p Ps. 44, 77, and nOTJ Ps. 57, 6. 13, before y; nZH!^
before M Jer. 40, 5, and before n 3 Sam. i:, 37', and even liefbre "I Ps. 4^, 1.
74, 33 and ehewhere Tlll^'l).
4. In the jusuv, besides the form Dp^ (see above, letter /), Dip^ also occurs ^
(as snbjnrictivc, Eccles. 12, 4; 3^D3 Ps. So, 19 may aI-.o, with Dclitisch, be
regarded as a volantativc ,
incorrectly written pUne^ and Dp^ (Gen. 27, 31 ; comp.
Jud. 6, 18. Prov. 9,4. 16 ,
which, however, is only orthographically different
from (comp. Is. 46, 6). In tiie imptrfcct CMUteutivt (D^^ in pause &{?M,
aee above, letter f) if them be a gnttual or in the last syllabi^ it oflen takea tiie
place of ^, e. g. tmd k$ reUed; tittd it was mtvtd; *)p|1 md kt tumtd

Midtj Jud. 4p 18. Rnth 4, 1 (dilfereat only in meaning from ffiph'H'Xff^^tutd ke
mtuntJf Gen. 8, 13); igt*! e Kl 5, aj. 17, 5 (bnt also tin both from Hi if
sajwru^ and Hi lo fiar); (to be disdqgmshed from C)^>) and Ae JItw,

Is. tf, 4S) iffi/ itf mar aMtfyy* Jnd. 4, ai. 1 Sam. T4, aS. 31. a Sam. ai, 15, bat
probably b all these caaea for t^y^^ from ia intended. On the other
hand, in an open qrllabte alwaja VSIpJt, mo^, ftc On D^P^ C^RKI)'
Examples of the foU plund endmg ]1 with the tone (aee above, letter /) are U
]VTOnGcn.3, 3.4; }^ Pa. 104,7; |Wnj Joel a, 4. 7. 9.
5. The form of the sat siitg. ptff* îrriD^ps, which frequently oocms V
^nS%3), serves aa n model for the and fing. nlo^pr n^D^P3, and the lApktr.
WH'D given hi the paradigm, althoogh no instances of thcae foima aie fovmd;
1 Comp. Delitzsch's Comnuntary on Ps. 3, 8.
Digitized by Google
2q8 The Verb,
bat of die Md /Int. the only eanunplct Ibaad htve 0 (not vis. Orfirtfi| ^ 4w
ttm tcmmd^ Eick. ii, 17. m, 34. 4t Md Dr|b^ miiy shaU katha imtmhmt
Ezek. 30, 43. 36, 31. To the f (instead of J) of the preformiitive may be titecd
the perfat "I^V3 Zcch j, 17 analogous to the perfect and participle see
below, letter j't'), rw/t / vv Tjy^ iox yV'or. The infinitive con^trml B'ÎH oceans
in Is. 25, 10; in "IIS"^ Job 33, 30, the Masora assumes tlx- syncope uf the H
(for ItJ^nb) ; but probably (Ofl/) is intended (see 5 1. /), ^11^ Is. I4, JI,
2iO^ Is. 59, J 3 axe to be regarded as injuuHves absolute.
ni. (9 î>A7/, Hoph'al, and PPtel

W 6. Examples of the perfect without a stpaialiug vowel (see above, letter ^) are :
nK3n , &c. Cscc further. 76. g) ; rUPIOn (from HTO) for himAtk-td (comp. ( 30. a,
and such cases as HTlpn ^rd /<rw. perfect Hiph'il from rUD or fTD i Ki. ai, 25
USn I St pltir. perfect Hiph'il from }\3 2 Chron. 29, 19), even DTJOrj (J 27. /)
Nsm. 17, 6, and elsewhere; c a Sam. 13, I'i^ also ^îOrp. Ex. I t6, and
n^npn\ Hos. a, 5; bat elsewhere, with iwfnr muecutwe ÂQpl It. I4 30;
eocnp. ^^^^DH) Is. 16, 13, and AUn^ Hx. 29, 24, and deewheieIn tbeee oaiee
the/of the lintqrUnbleitietniDedmtlieiecaiidirjrteiie; dtewfaeie ia the Meend
aylhble before die tone it beoomei . (i Chron. t0 la, fte.) or aoie fie-
qnently and hi the lyllnble befeie the nntqwDoltimn it is necoMrily

(e.g ^flbpH) Gen. 6, i8>. Before a mflix jn the 3rd sing. masc. (except Gen*
40, 13^ and fern , and in the 3rd pher.^ the vowel of the initial syllable is Haêfk^
S'fkiV. in the other persons always ffateph-Pcdhah (Konig"" ; on ^HtepH 2 Ki. 9, 3.
I's. >^<), 44, coHii). Mx. 19, 23. Num. 31, 38. Dent. 4, 39. aa, a. 30, i. Etek. 34, 4,
and above, letter i.
X Ai in verbs V "y with M for dieir fint radical (( 67. tv) all the formt of liy
Ex. 19, a3, ftc, and "VQ^ la. 41, 35. 45, 13, take Padial^ b dieae conju^'ationB
instead of The iir^lar D^nl3^n^ Zech. to 6 Ims evidcntty arisen from
a oombinatioii of two different teadints^ vie. D*n3r)ni (from 36^) and D^ftbS^'H
(fiom afWSO : the latter it to be piefeited.On r*an and iravi asm (metaplastic)
ptrfect Hipk*tttAiff(L^ < f 78.
y 7. In the M|^m^, besides th short form Dgn (on 31^ Is. 44, ss with Silhui,
eoop. I J9. f; -bnt in Eiek. si, 35 for the imfimHM is to be tend)
the lengthened form fflî^ is also found. With smJSx ^^Sff^ff^ Ac Tlie
imfeniiv^ |09n Jcr. 17, 18 is irrcgniar (for K911 Gen. 43, 16); perhaps M9n
(as in I Sam. 20, 40; comp. 3 Ki. 8, tf) b Intended, or it was originally TWKX\.
M In the tnfinilive syncope of the H occurs in t03^ Jcr. 39, 7. 2 Chron. 31, 10
(for K*2ni)); %\fem. is added in nCJn^ la. 30, 28; comp. E&th. a, i8 and the
nnalogous infinitive Hiiph'cl in Hiblical Ar.im.iic, D.in. 5, 20. As inftniUv
eU>s0lute p3n occurs in K/rk. 7, 14 fj crh. also Jos. 4. ^. Jt-r. 10, .' i,'- i he
participles hnve ? as the vowel of the preibrmative, like verbs y"]?. Uu
3 Sam. 5. 2, &c. ,m JP*MH), see i 74. il.
IM On the shortened forms of the imperfect (Dg^, 0^., but always sm aboTe
letter/. If the final radical be a guttural or 1 die last sjUabk gancmlly has
7i.] Verbs ry. 209
< < <
Pa/hah (as in Qal), e.g. he smells, I Sam. 26, 19; nvi Gen. 8, ai ; "IDJI o'k/
axiMiy, Gen. 8, 13. The ist sing, of the imperfect consecutive commonly
has the form Neh. 2, 20, less fnquently the form Jos. 14, 7; IJ^X)
I Ki. a, 43 and elsewhere. For 5]phl Zeph. i, a (after îbK"! and in verse 3, read
*ipt< from *1PX, on the analogy of *1pj{ % 68.^.- similarly in Jer. 8, 13 DDDX
instead of D&^DM.
In the imperfect Pi'lel the tone is moved backwards before a following tone- hb
syllable, but without a shortening of the vowel of the final syllable ; e. g.
*iJ tapilJH Prov. 14, 34 ; ijj ^J^'irUp Jol> 35i 14; comp. also ^3 |^lnn Job 30, ao;
always in principal pause; on the Metheg with Sere, comp. 16. y, 7. As
participle Hoph'cd B^tDH occurs in close connexion, Gen. 43, 1 2 ; comp. 65. d.
Peculiar contracted forms of Pi'lel (unless they are transitives in Qal) are CC
^333n Job 31, 15, âi^JT 41, 2, ;^Dni is. 64, 6 for ^333^, &c.; also Din
Job 17, 4 for DDDnR In Is. 15, 5 Pj^jT appears to have arisen from the Pilpel
rijnjr, the <f after the loss of the T having been lengthened to J, which has then
bet-n changed into the obscure d. The strange form 'J^DDipria Ps. 139, 21 cannot
according to } 52. s) be explained as a participle with the D omitted, but must

be emended to 'pJIOS.
IV. /n General.
8. The verbs Vj? are primarily related to the verbs J^'y (5 67), which dd
were also originally biliteral, so that it is especially necessary in analyzing
them to pay attention to the differences between the inflexion of the two
classes. Several forms are exactly the same in both, e.g. imperfect Qal and
//ipA'fl with Tiidw consecutive, the whole of //opA'al, the Pi'lel of verbs ^"y,
and the /Vrt' of verbs y"y; sec 67, z. Owing to this close relation, verbs Vy
sometimes have forms which follow the analogy of verbs y"y, e, g. perfect Qal T3
he has despised (from T^, as if from TT3) Zech. 4, 10, flO (for T\\!^^ he hath daubed,
Is. 44, 18; perfect Niph'al nC3 Jer. 48. 11 (for 1^03 from )D,âs if from -)1D).
The same explanation equally applies to nDi73 Job 10, 1 for nBp3 (comp. 67. dd)
= nDip3 from D^, and nDp3 Ezek. 6, 9 ,for \aSp\)\ nsil^ tztk. 10, 17 and
^tSi*1 verse 15; ÊHn {imperative Num. 17. 10; 3p^ Mic. 2, 6; Jliph'll perfect
Tnn Is. 18, 5 fortnn (comp. $ 29. g , which is for TJin from rfl. On the other
hand the imperfects ^DJ Erek. 48, 14 (unless it be intended for "^DJ, comp. Ps. 15,
4)
and np^ Hab. a, 3 are to be reg.nnied according to 109. /, simply as rhythmically
shortened forms of TD^ and ITD*
9. In common y"y ( 67.^ verbs V'y sometimes have in Niph'al 6
with verbs
and Iliph'al the quasi-Aramaic formation, by which, instead of the long vowel
under the prcformative, they take a short vowel with Doge} forte in the following
consonant; this variety is frequently found even along with the ordinary form,
e.g n^pn to incite, imperfect n*p! (also n*pn, M^Dp 3^pn, imperfect 3*0^ ;
to remove (from 3^D), also Hoph'al 3pn Is. 59, 14 ôn DgH comp. 29.^;;
sometimes with a difference of meaning, as n^3n to cause to rest\ butTVan
' As the passive of this Iliph'il we should expect the

doubt, to be read for ns^n in Lam. 5, 5.
P
Digitized by Googl
2IO The Verb, [73.
{impeffecl n*i;j, ccnstcutive nj^ Gen. 39, x6; imptrcUive n|n,//i*r. Vtin) /0
dovm; for nn^jn^ (Bmt, Ginsbaig '3np Zech. 5, iz (wbidi at any nte oonld
only be explained as an isolated passive of HifÛ on the analogy of tbe Btblicai
Anmaic np^n Dan, 7, 4) we dionld probably read nh^frn wiUi Kloetennann
and the LXX ; in Dan. 8, 1 1 the K'thtbh Onn is intended for a per/eel Hiph'tL
The same distinction in meaning is also noticeable l)Ctween pf)^ to spend the nigki,
tfirtmahi, bnt pi)^ Ex. 16, 7 Q^r^ {K'thOfh ttl^R; aa the coatrmry, verse a
JCthtbk <3^rS
^'^'^X t^rtiiipU \^ Ex. 16, S. Nnm. 14, 27. 17, ao, U U
stubhemt ^sttMOtii in the latter sense from the form only U Tound, Ex. 1 7, 3.
Other examples are Niph'al he was drcunuiud, Gen. 17, 36 sq.; participle
34, 32 (from i>^D, not ^03) ;

H^y? he is waked up^ 2^h. a, 17 (see abov^ letter v) ;
Hiph'il nî)'^n Lam. i, 8 ; ^T^! Prov. 4, ai.
ff Perhaps the s.nmc explanation :ip|)Ht s to some forms of verbs first guttural with
Dagei forlc intpliiitum, which others derive tiifferently or wonld eni'nd,
e.g. K'nrn fur K^HTO and she hastened ^from ^^Pl) Job 31, 5; Dy*^ (another
reading Dyp), Cyni i Sam. 15, 1 9. 25, 14 (14, 32 from D^y or D*y /jj
at anything. Both, as far as tbe form is concerned, would be correct apocopated

imperfects from and HD^ (H'^^), bot these stems only occnr with a wholly
diffeient meaning.
^ 10. Vetfas with a consonantal
thronghoat like the strong form, provided the
Wdm for thdr second
first or third radical
radical, are inflected
is not a weak
letter, c. g. ^^Pl, imperfect ÎfT.^ to be tvhifc
yi3 ,
impcrfe<t yi3* to expire : m*1 to be
wide; Rl^ to cry; A\7 imperfect to act ivi.kcdiy ; n\y to haul, Ilithpael
n^ynn to hmd cncsci/; aiul thi5 is rspecially the case with verbs wliich arc at
the same time \\''^, e. g. T\\)i, Pi" el H^Sf to command, H^p to 7vait, to drink,
JVii np (on Is. 16, 9, see ( 75. dd) and Hipk'Si n^nn iogivt to drink,8tc
7d. Verbs middU I (vuigo e. g. to discern. Paradigm N,
a 1. I hcsc verbs agree, as regards their structure, exactly with verbs
and in contrast to them may be termed verbs 'ayin-t, from the

chara< tcristic vowel of the impirftct, impi radi i , and infnuiive construct.
In ihc perfect Qal the monos\ llabic stem, as in ^'Vy has a leni-tlirned
from d, thus: TS^ fie has set; infinitive H*?', infinitive absolute TCi^^
imperative n*B^, imperfect Jussive i^*g)t imperfect consecutive

IW^.* The perfect Qat of some verbs used to be treated as having
a double set of forms* a regular series, and others like HipKG without
tbe preformative, e.g. Dan. 10, i; Tlâ Dan. 9, 2, also TO
Ps. 139, a; rtan ihou strives!. Job 33, 13, also naj Ijmi. 3, 58.
The above perfects (?^3, &c.) might no doubt be taken as forms
middle e (properly 1), tlie i of which has been lengthened 10 / (like
Digitized by Google
Verbs 211
the ? lengthened to in the hn^xr/tct Qal of D^P). Ii is more

probable, however, that they are really shortened forms of Hiph'il.
This is supported bjr the fact that, especially in the case of r<? the
shortened forms are few and probably all late, while the corresponding
nndiortened forms with the same meaning are very numerous, e. g.
perf^(
F^v.
m (but n Dan. lo, i), OnSrari, mfimUDt (but mfin. ah.
33, i), imperaiwe \^ (but Dan. 33 }^ immediately before
also M three times, and nya
9,
Ps. 5, 2), participle
Elsewhere ffiph*fl-form% are in use along with actual âZ-forms with

the same meaning, tlius: 3*^9 (also 3*3), D*V^ placing (but only in
Job 4, 20, which, with the critically untenable Ô^bn Kzck. 21, 21,
is ihe only instance of D^fe^ in HipJiil), pVO glancing, also in perfect
As passives we find a few apparent imperfects hophai, which
are really (according to 53. u) imperfects passive of Qal, e.g.
from to smg, Tf^ from fl^ /(? seL
2, The above-mentioned JftpA'H-foTms might equaOy well be 5

derived from verbs ^'V*; and the influence of the analogy of verbs
rnf is distinctly seen in the NÂ*al }b), Fi'lel tfi^ and HiO^m
^jtiUjin. The veiy close relation existing between verbs and '"P
is evident also from the fact that from some stems both forms occur
side by side in Qal, thus from io turn round, impcrafive also ^5wn
Mic. 4, 10; D^S* /t; place f infinitive construct connnonly D'-i^', imperfect
D*b^, but Ex. 4, II tJlfe'^. In other verbs one form is, at any rate,
the more common, e.g. 5'^? to exult (^3 only Prov. 23, 24 KUh{bK)\
from (perhaps denominative from to spend the night, p^J* occurs
six times as infinitive cauiruct^ only in Gen. 34, 23 ; the imperative
is always ftc. Of verbs ^9 the most common arc, n^;^ to set,
3n to sirwet fo Judge^ Îf^ to rejoice; comp. also perfect ^ {middle

in Arabic) io comprehend^ to measure^ Js. 40, 13; (as in
'
Since W3 Ps. 139, a, might be intended for rt3, there remains re-illy no
form of 1*3 which mimt n/-, csârily yîc cxplainerl ns a Qal. Nevertheless it not
impossible that all the abo%e in-itaiice> of Ilipli'il forms, pamlk-l with '^hil-forms
of the same meaning, might be merely due to a secondary formation trdin the
imperfects Qal Cfe'^* which weie wrongly regarded as impcrjats
HipKtli so Buth, ZDMG. xliii. p. 190 iq., and NeminedkUdmtgt p. 119 sq.
* Against the view of earlier gcammarians that all supposed ^''y-forms are
alike to be classed as Vp, compare the exhavstlTe Statement of the case by
Ndldeke in ZDMG. 1883, p. 535 sqq.
p a
Digitized by Google
an The Verb.
Arabic and Syriac) io ruth tên, and the denominative perfici
(from rl) i9 pass ike mmmer. Is. z8, 6. On the other hand, Q^sni
and ih^ shall fish Aem^ Jer. t6, t6, generally explained as perfici
Qai, denominative from 3^ yfxA, piobablj represents a denominative
*
^ CoiTe^x)Diliag to verbs properly Y^, mentioned in 72.^, there are certain

verbs with cowwnnBlil Wh, m ^tohate, to fmmt, fTH to Ueom, t9 he,
d Rem. I. In the Ixffect Qal 3rd fm, sing. oocoti onoey Zedi. s, 4, Ibr
n|^, with the weakcniqg of the toneleis 4 to / Qike the fern. partiHftt TT^
Is. 59, 5) ; oompi. the aaalogons examples in ( 48. / and f 80. .ând mmjt.
nijn^ Pk. 90) 8, (before P; of. } 7a. f); tst n'v. once Pa. 73, aS,
miPret, wiihont any apparent leaaoo; lit /Ar. Jnd. 19^ 13 for Uh'iUL
The Ieim;thened iaêraiivt has the tone on the nltinut befoie gnttaialsp nVl^ Jl^^
P*> 35i I *^ fnrtiier, i 79. /.Examples of the imfimu tiMm^ aie : SS
Ntigamh, Jud. 11. 25. Job40| a; Jer. 42, 15; pottmdo. Is. 29, 7. On
the other hand, an Jer, 50, 34, p^TI pS Prov. 23, i, biri Esek. 30, l6
K'th., are irregular ; for the ln>t the (/^v requires V^nn : cf>mp. $ 113. x
^ a. The thortened imperfect usually has the form p^, D??^,
'î^'J I more rarely
the tone is moved back, e. fj. Jud. 6, 31 ; of. Ex. 23, i. i Sam. 9, 20.
So with warv contf ufive Dt^ and he phid d. p>l and he pcrceiwd : with a middle
{guttural Dna Dy^. 1 Sam. 25, 14 sec "J. fv). As jussivc of }^ is fond
in Jud. i(y, 20 (in pause) and Job 17, 2. for |^n.
f 3. participle active Qal spettamg tlu ni^ht, occurs once, Nch. 13. 31 ;
participle passivt D^S? Num. 24, 21. i Sam. y, 24. Ohnd, 4: feminiui HD^C'
2 Sam. 13, 32, in the Q*rc^ even accortiin^ to the reading ( f ihc Oriental schools
(see p. 36; note a): the X^tktik has no^b. A passae of (lo/ <cf. above, 52. r
and 53. h) from OiS^ may perhaps be seen in Ofe^ Gcn. 50, 96 (also Gcn.
24i 33 Ar*/A/!M 09^ Q'r^ Df^; the Samaritan b both places baa D9n)t
and also in Ex. 30^ 3a, Samaritan *]D1*. Against the explanation of *fD^
as a Jîâl'tm from Barth {JuMtekrifi ...detDr,t. JfitMHmer,
Berlin, 2890, p. 131) rightly vrges that the 00I7 example of a Hiph'tl of !pD
ti the doubcfol Ij^^, which is probably nn Mmpcrfect of The explaoatioa
of 055''^ as a ptissive of Qal arising from yiysam, Bcc^yvysam (so Barth, ibid.,
note r"^ h certninly also nnconvindngf so that the correctness of the tiaditional
reading is open to question.
*
^ 4. In verbs the K almost always retains its consonantal value ; they are,
therefore, to he r^pvded as verbs *Ajnn GmUural ($ 64). The only exception
b m\ thiy are teamtijul (irom miO Fi*tei of nM|, properly 1^) Is. 5a, 7.
Cant. I, io.~>Very donbcinl on the other hand ts yii^ Eedci^ la, 3 as imperfiei
HipKU (Ibr ; if the fonn has been correctly transmitted, it should nUhcr
be referred to and regarded as incorrectly written for f^.
Digitized by Google
74-3 Ferbs K"i. 213
74. J Wis e. g. K|r> /o find. Paradigm 0.

The K in these verbs, as in verbs m"d, is treated in some cases a
as a consonant, i. e. as a guttural, in others aa having no consonantal
value (as a quiescent or vowel letter), viz.:
1* In those fonns which terminate with tlie N, the final syllable

has alwaja the regular long vowels, e.g. IQfb, MSD, MSD, Mên,
i.e. the M simply quiescea in the long vowel, without the latter being
subject to any change whatever. It is just possible that after the
altogether heterogeneous vowel ^ the K may originally have preserved
a certain consonantal value. On tlic other hand, if ihe final N uii.u^
vviih a prcc cding a (as in the perfect, ivifxr/ict, and imptraiiVi QaJ,
in the pt rftct Xjph'al, and in Pual and Hoph'al) this a is necessarily
lengthened to d, by 27.^, as standing in an open syllable j e.g.
jqfD, Kx^:, Ac.
The imperfect nnd imperative Qol invariftbly have i in the final syllable, CO b
the analfi^y of vi.ibs tertiae guituralis ; comp., hoxvcvcr, 75. e. In the imper-
fect Hithpa'H d occtirs in the final svllnMe not only (according to % 54. <6) in
the principal pause (Nom. 31, 33). or immediately before it (Job 10, 16), ex with
the IcBwr ditjnictiTei (Lev. ai, i. 4. Num. 19, 13. ao), bnt eren vitboiit the
peaie with Mtf^kka^ Nam. 7, end even befbie Mafqtpk In Nan. 19, la.
S. When H stands at the end of a syllabic before an afTorniative c

beginning with a consonant (n, 3), it likewise quicsces with the
preceding \owel; e.g. in the perfect Qa/ (and HopHal, see below)
quiescing with a it regularly becomes Qames for ^^TO, &c.);
but in the perfect of all the other active and reflexive conjugations
<
it is preceded by ÔÛff^^ftc.)! and in the imperaiive and im^/tci
by S*ghn, njioo, njwfw?.
(a) The S^gMl of tlwae fons of the fanperieet aad impemtive ougltt be eon- d
eidered thronghout as a moclificetioii, end at the same time a lengthening of an
original d (-ncc R. a^. In the ame way the e of the perfect lotnis in /YT/,
Hithpa'TJ, .nn<i Uiph'ti might he tract<l to an orii;innl I [as in other case:* the
r and / in the final syllable of the 3rd $ing. ntasc. perfect of these conjugations),
elthongh this / may have only been ettennated from an original A Aoooidhig
to another, and perhaps a more oonect explanatioo both the and the .SV^
ate doe to the analogy of vcrha (I 75*/) consequence of the doae relation
between the two classes, comp. ( 75. nn. No form of this kind occurs in Pu'al;
in the perfect HofJk'ui only the and mast, su^ '^9^9(3 EUk, 40^ 4, lengthened
accoTiiinj^' to rule.
<
{^) As bcforr th' lufTixes attached by a connecting vowel .i; ^3t<"^|T) the C
61 retains its coawa.ajital value, so also before ^ and 03 , e. g. ^KVpS ' ani. 8. i ;
^(TlSn Kzek. a8, 13 (comp. 65. A), not ^KX^. Sec, smce ih&ic sutfixcs, by
Digitized by Google
214 The Verb,
1 58./, tue likewlie attedied to the TtrMom \fj oooiwctiiig vowel in the Ibnn
of ^wA nuMU.k% it^ktUhfi Qai with suffix notice yfWXO Eselc 35, 6 ; fiartkifle
with ioffix ^|r^ b.43, 1 ; as infinitine PCil DaMSOa.Instead of the donbty
anomaloas forat tenj^ Jer. 93, 6 (for V1|n|^ pcohaUy HT]^ is intended.
8. When M begins a syllable (consequently before aSbnnatives

which consist of or begin with a vowel, as well as before suffixes)
it is necessarily a firiu consonant, aiul the form then follows the

analogy of the strong verb, e. g. ntiiD moi'd, ^"^^ &c. (in pause
Remarks.
I. Verbs middle like s '^rp to be fully retain the Sere also in the other persons
of the perfeit, e. g. ^HK^JD ;

Critn^ Jos. 4, 24 nn-l ^X^D Est. 7, 5 are dne to
their transitive use. Instead of HKlfD the form Httlp she names, on the analoey
of the Jl'v-forms noticed in 75. m, occurs in Is. 7, 14 (from n|t")P, cotnp.
44./}, and with a different meaning (1/ (c-jai!s) in Deut. 31, 39. Jer. 44, 33,
in both places before and henoe, probably, to avoid a hJatns (on the other
hand, IM^p^ ^ 5i i<^> coold only be the and sing, mau.; the text which is
obvioDsly ompt should probably with the LXX be emended to riK^np

in Aif/A'a/nM^ Ps. 118, 33; in /fi^WnKSn Gen. 33, ii
a.The tig^M. Qai ocean lometimes on the analogy of terbt ff^l {ftb^, ftc.
see I 75. Iff*) in the feminine fetm; so alwajfs PHlbo U JSff (as dirtinpiihd
from t6t) fullness). Lev, 8, 33- iî 4* ^> 35, 30. Jer. 39, 10. Ezek. 5, 9, also
written rhfil^ Jer. 35, 13. Job 30, 32, and cUewhere, and HK^^ Est. i, 5.
Comp. fnrther* nJ^Î? Jud. S, 1 ; niîb Trov. 8, i.^ ;

before suflixes, Ezek. 33, ia
and likewise in M/A. Zcch. 13, 4; also in /VV/ nK^jpS 31. 5. 35, 33, or
Dnn. 9, 2, and elsewhere K'lhibh ; with suffix 2 Sam. 21, 3. On the
;aram.iuin{^ ;
injinitives \^^ffO and fliNlJ^, sec 45. on nSII^S olviam, % 19.
DKVto3 when ye fmd. Gen. 33, 20, stands, according to 93. q, for D3^î'D.
The tone of the lengthened imperative nXD"} Ps. 41, 5 ai JUirra' (.before "'t^DS)
ii to be explained on rhythmical grounds ; comp. the analogous cases in 73. /.
^The and Roth I, 9 haa^ accoiding to Qim|ti the form
fern. plur. imperativ* in
t|K^ and in vene so ^fK^^; on the other hand, the Mantua edition and
Ghisbnig^, on good auAoiity, read tIKYD, Itt^.
3. The ptuiieifit fern, is eommonly contracted, e.g. IWXb (for HMft)) a Sam.
18, aa, comp. Est. a, 15; so Niph'ai Twl^tfl Dent 30, 11. Zcch. 5, 7, and
Hsfi*ai Gen. 38, 35 ; less frequent forms are. HKViO Cant. 8. 10 ; HK^p i Ki.
10, 33 (comp. ( 76. b, nitfe' beside HKb'^ as infinitive construct from K^f
without K (see letter *) DJri* \from NiTi Dent. 38, r;?. fn the forms D'KOn
sinning, \ Sam. 14, 33, comp. V< 09, ^) ; DKlla /^fV'""i' them, Neh. 6, S, the
K is syncopated, and is only retained orthogrnjjhically ( 33. c) after the retraction

of iUi vowel ; i>ec the analogous ca^cs in % 75. oc.
4. Frequently an K which is quiescent is omitted in writing ( 33.7 ; : (a) ia
the middle of word, e.g. XH^ i Sam. a^, 8; ^nVD Nun. 11, 11, comp. Job
75 l Verbs n"i>. 215
I, 9X ; ^jnOJf Jud. 4, 19, comp. Job 3a, 18. In die imptrfe<t n3^R Jcr. 9, 1 7.
Zech. 5r 9. Rvth t, 14 (on the otber head, Uie seme form oocnn with mh
pkoneetic after the maimer of verbs Esek. a3 49, aocotdieg to the
common reading ; comp. | 76. b and Jer. 50^ so) ; in Pi^H V3^T9k Gcn. 3I1 39
and also in Niph'al Q^lpt^3 T cv 1
1, 43 ;
comp. Jos. a, 16. (^) at the end of
the word ; 1 Ki. 12, la iCihibh ; Hiph'tl *pnn a Ki. 13, 6, comp. Is. 53, 10
^3J1
O^nn
^
for K^!)nn per/ccl
*
nipKU
'
of n^n
t t
formed after the manner of verbs N"!?)
v:r.-
v:!'
in the imptrjcct ffiph'(n^\ I's. 55, lO K'thlbh; Ts. 141, 5 ; i Ki ji, 19.
Mit I, 15 ; in the injinitive, Jcr. 32. 35 ; in the partiiipfe, % Sam. 5, j. i Ki.

SI, ai. Jer. 19, 15. 39, 16, all in K^thibh (*3D, always btiorc K, iitucc perhaps
only a scribal cnor).
5. In the ptsshtt imperfUi <vm$iaaive, and imperulht Hiptftt a nnmber of esses /

oecnr with t in the final syllable; eomfib 3tf 14 (in tlie psiallel passages
a Ki. 18, 99. sChron. 3a, 15 M^) ; Mîn NeLs, % (befiMeV) ; MDHh a Ki si, xt
(comp. I Ki. 16, a. ai, aa) ; MSnril a Ki. 6, 29; Dent. 4, ao. a Ki. 1 1, xa.
Ps. 7S, i6. 105, 43; imperativi Jer. 17, 18; K^yin 43, 8 (in both cases
before J?". If the tr.idition be correct (which at least in the defectively written
forms .Tjipiars very doubtful) the retention of the t is to be accounted for by the
open syllabic; while in the closed syllable of the 3rd sing, mate, and Jem., and
the and sing, mate* after \ iomstcutiv* the # is always reduced to *, In the emmples
before P considerations of enphony may also have had some inflnence (oomp.
{ 75. Jli).In Ezek. 40, 3, Beer reads with the Western school K^3^, while
the Orientals read in the A^M^Â 103*1, and in the Q*ri Hgj,
On the transition of verbs K'^ to liDrms of sect 75. m.
76. Verbs n"b, e.g. io reveal. Paradigm P*

These verbs, like the verbe ^fi ( 69, 70), oonprise two different a
dasaes, viz. those originally and those originally which
in Arabic, and even more in Ethiopic, are still clearly distinguished.
In Hebrew, instead of the original 1 or * at the end of the word,
a n appears as a purely orthographic indication of a final vowel
( 23. k) ; hence both classes are called e.g. for î'S has
revealed : nÊ^ for "h^ he has resUd. By far the greater number
of these verbs are, however, treated as originally ^'b; only isolated
forms occur of verbs
Tfyf t^he ot r$tt may be leecgmaed as orlginaUy V^, hi the forms in wUeh ^
the fVaw appears as a strong consonant, comp. ist ting, ferfixt Qai V^l^
Job 3, a6, the participk 1^ and the derivative rest; on the otber hand
the imptfui
(Atsb. tSP)* /(
la (with mi). In VH^ (Arab.
q0ieUd, (^pmai, are to be seen two veibs origually distinct
Û muwer, and n}|
' On the Mesa' storie, line 5, IJJH and he oppressed OCCtUS AS yd sing, imperfect
Piilf and in line 6, UUfi* / will oppress as 1st sing.
Digitized by Google
2l6 The Verb, [75-
whidi liave been MdmiUted in Hebfcw (tee tbe Ltxicm, s. v. n^y).^ln Anrnnk,
tfie ooofnsioa of these fonns is carried still fiutiier, verbs Wr^ lso ccniiadtBg with
verbs Y^, I e. with verbs ^6 and of tbe Aiabtc
Of qntte a diflerent class are those verbs of which (he third mdical is
a consonantal H (distinguished by Ma/>ptq). Tliese are inflected tfalQaghont lilce
verbs tertiae luttttmHs, Comp. f 65 note on the heading,
The grammatical structuie of Tcrbs tfy (see Paradigm P) is based

on the following laws:
1. In all forms in which original YMk or Wsm would have
to stand at the end of the word, it is dropped (comp. 24.^) and
n lakes its place as an orthographic indication of the preceding long
vowel. Such an indication would have been indispensable, even
on praciical grounds, in the still unvocalized consonantal text. But
even after the addition of the vowel signs, the orthographic rule
remained, with insignificant exceptions (see { %,k, and & in ^f^, &c.),
that a final vowel must be Indicated by a vowel letter. In whs n'^,

the n which is here employed as a vowel letter is preceded by the
same vowel in the same part of the verb throughout all the con-
jugations. Thus the endings are
iT-p. in all perfects, nbj, nj)a3, n)S, &c.
n__ in all imperfects and participles, H^^J, n^, &c.

n__ in all imi>eratives, Hâ, n'^, Sic.
1! in the infinitive absolute {jb\, &c.), except HipKU^ Hopk'al,

and generally also Pt'el, see letters aa and jf.
The participle passive Qal alone forms an exception, the original
^ reappearing at tbe end, ^^|; and so also some derived' nouns
( 840, letter /', and elsewhere).
The infinHivi cmsineet always has the ending n1 (with fl /imimtu);

Qal Irt^, Pt*el rtVl, Ac, except nlon Jud. 13, ai. i Sam. 3, i.
d These forms may be explained as follows: in the perfect Qal n^3 stands,
accordinj; lo lljf al>ove, for 0)^3, and, similarly, in Niph'al, Pu'al and Hoph'al.
The rtel aiid Hithpa'il mav be bsuK^d on the forms ^^2^0 v 52. /; and $ 54.^
sad Hifk*U on tbe farm 7Dipn, on the anslogy of l3ie la the second qrllsble
of the Arabic ^dqUlUl (f 53. a). Perhaps, however, the final & of these oonjtig&tioas
simply follows the analogj of the otiier conjivations.
The explanation of Ihe final tone4)earing n-_ of Uie iwêtfict is a matter
of dispute. The least probable is the view that it is a contraction of the original
Viui'h rcsolvcfl into with .1 preceding^ <f; for the Inngnage elsewhere rxlways
has e as the contraction of the diphlhunf; ai, which can only he weakened to /
(see letter /). According to Rodiger the ^ (H ) represents the more precise
Digitized by Google
$75-3 yerbs n"i. 217
wtmeU of the correspoadiog strong formations, which have been

dkamcteiittic
Rluned m Anbic and Etblopie wtih greater parity itt these verbt. Thus
coneqponds to the Aiak jFttiM (vulgar /jf/0, Eih. ^J^^; t\31\ Antb./aM?
Eth. yiUki; n^rr Arab. jm^/J^ Eth. jfifyMnv; TtfT Axmb. jforit Etb. Ââ/.
So alao in JVH Ank .^w^/; ^^7/ HKT, Arab. Ac. Jut a*,
acocMrding to these examples, the cfaaractefifltic vowd hat beeu retained tihtonghont
in Arabic and Ethiopic, so also in Hebrew tt might be inferred that in ihe
imperfects of the several conjugations of n'^b verbs, various vowels were origii.ally
nscfl, which onlv Inter, in an eiuieavour after a cumpletc analogy, imiformly
became -S'^-AJ/. in lavour of this explanatiun is ihe uniformity of inflexion in the
petfeci^ impcrfttt, nnd participk. It may, however, be qoestloiied, whether It is
fiutlicr neceauiy to Mnne an J u the origfaial Towel of the final tyllabk

thiooghoBt die impttfigts^ and, hence, to iûd the tone-bendng -S*^' in all the
Uxms as a modification and partial fengthening of the ^ (as In for mniA)
instead of die full lengthening to v According to Berth, Nmina!hildung, t.
p. XXX s<]q., with 136, Rem., and ZIKMC xliv. p. 695 sq. 'âgainst Philippi's
ohjcctions in the Zcitschrift fur Vblkcrpsychologie nnd Spraihtvissensiha/t, I^90,
p. 356 q.), the termination H in the iriperfect and pMriicipU of the active
conjugations arose from an original iy^ and in the passives from original ay^
as I^JJ from yiglly, n^B^ from yiggmify, H^JJ from yigallty, &c, *, bat 1^
Inm ygiiUdy, n^^^ from yUglay. Hiis theoij has the advantage of tradag the
active pertidplcs of Q(kI not to forms with but, as woold be eapeeted, to fonns
with / in the second syllable. It still icmains nnexplained. however, whj final if
should have become t\ in these forms, and not ^ as in other cases, Nor does
this view snpplJ any satislactaiy expUnattflO of the n_ in the mufruU itait nmf,
of the active putidples.
2. When the original }'<$(/A stands at the end of the syllable before /
an aiiuimative beginning with a consonant (n, 3) tlicrc ari>es (<7) in
the perfects^ primarily the dijihthong ay (W). In the middle of the

word this ought always to be contracted to / ^-Tr\ but this / is only
found consistently in the passive conjugations, whilst regularly in
Qal, and frequently in the other active and reflexive conjugations
(especially in /Te/), it is weakened to / (comp. letters s, and
97. (^) In the in^/tcts and mperativet, ^ with the tone
always appears before the affonnative H}. Here again the qaestion
recurs (see above) whether this is to be regarded as an equivalent
for (i.e. / contracted from ay), or whether after the rejection
of the ySdh (as in the 3rd sifig.) d has been modified to S^ghdL
In the latter case the ySdh^ wliich is almost always written after
' So also M. Lambert, Asiatique, 1893, i. p. 285, but with the further
modification that was alwajs sabstitated for the original ^ (with Yddh radical).
Digitized by Google
3l8 The Verb.
S*gAdlt must be regarded nmply as an orthogiaphic survival of the
original form.
g" Bummaiy. Accordingly before afformatives beginning with a con-
sonant the principal vowel is
III the perfect Qal /, e. g. J?vJ

In the perfects of the other active and reflexive conjugations,
somclimes e, sometimes /, and rp.S)3 ;
n^y^j and n'fe
In the perfect passive always /, e.g.
In the imperfects and imperatives always ^ ,

e.g. '"J^^^f, T^*?'?-
The diphthongal forms have been throughout retained in Arabic and Etbiopic
only as an exception and in the popular lanfjuage is the diphthong contracted.
In Aramaic the contracted forms predomiiiate, yet the Syriac, for example, aho
has in Qa/ and />grs. sing, ^^lait (but ist pcrs. sing. rj^^3)j and so too the \\ eslcrn
Aramaic D^bs, but also n^^-S.
h 8. Before the vocalic afformalives ^^ n__) the y'(}dh is usually
dropped altogether, e.g. ^\ (ground-form gaiqyA)^ '^^^^ partidpie
fm. n^, phir, moic. D^î ; yet the old fiUl forms also not inlxequently
occnr, especially in pamet see letter ar. The elision of the Yidk
takes place regularly before sttfixes, e.g. ^ (letter Zf).
TW- is appended
f 4. In the 3rd sing. fern, perfect, the feminine ending
to the stem ; hence, after elision of the Y6dh^ arose properly forms
like nb|, with a in ihc iiwA syllable with the tone. This form,
however, has been but rarely preserved (see bclo v, letter w). The
analogy of the other forms has had so much influence, tliat the
common ending n_ -was added pleonastically to the ending n_.

Before the n--_ the vowel of the ending ri_-, which thus !o<^f s the
tone, becomes &'wd, and thus there arise such fonns as n^^^, ^'^t
Ac. (but in pamt nn^, ftc.).
For simiUr caiet lee f 70. dj f 91. m.
k 6. Finally, a sUQrjj^ly-marked peculiarity of verbs n"i> is the
rejection of the ending rj in forming the jussive and the imft rfect
consecutive. This shortening occurs in all the conjugations, and
sometimes also involves further changes in the vocalization (see
Rems. 3, 8, 11, 16). Similarly, in some conjugations a shortened
imptraUvt (comp. 48. i) is formed by ôet^ of the final (see
Rems. IS, 16).
/ 6. The ordinaxy form of the imptrfiei with the ending serves

in verbs rCh to express the cohortative also ({ 48. r); comp. Gen. i, 36.
Digitized by Google
750 Ferbs n"i>. 219
2, 18, &c. With a final H there occur only: in Qti/,
Ps. 119, 117, (with the * retained, see below, letter //) Ps. 77, 4 J
and in HUhpdil, H^^^ Is. 41, 33 (with Tiphhat therefore in lesser

pause).
Remarks.
r. The older fotm of tfie fm. of the $rd nt^. petf, tf^ ncnttoned abovcb ^
letter i (cf, 74. g\, also occurs in nfe^ (before t*^ I.cv. 25,31 (comp 2 Ki. 9, 37
A'M/M) likewise in Ili/h'firxpn (before K) Lev. 26, 34; nt<!)n Ezek. 24, la;
and in Hoph'al nS3n before ^) Jer. 13. 19. The 2nd sing.fcm. is nlso written j
thua in the Ttxlus rcceptus n*M1 2 Sam. 14, 2, and always in Jiacr's editions
(since iSya), as iij most other verbs; H^TH and II^^J Is. 57, 8; H'b'V Jer. 2, 23.
Eiek. 16, 48, iStc (so riXXin^ I Ki. 17, 13 from KJT). In the 3rd pti. plur. the
tone, instead of keeping its usoal place ^'l^3, &cOf is retracted in Ps. 37, 20, ^^3^
both on account of the pause and also in rhythmical antithesis to the preceding
; also in Is. 16, 8 XQT\ (according to Delitzsch for the sake of the assonance
with ^P33); and in Job 24, 1 Stn. On the tone of the perfect consecutivt
ee 49-
3. The K|ffiM. tks^, frequently has \ (pfotMUy a iDnpifil of die older oitlio- H
lîmphf) far ni_, e.g. i^n Gen. 18, 18; ils^ Jer. 4, i8j fte. Enk* 31, 11 j lag
* Sem. 34, 34; Gen. a6, aS. li ti. 9 (comp. 1 Sam. 6, is), betide nkl.
The fans nln^ Ii^ aa 13 (beside Vl^ in the same verse) appear* to have been
ehoeen on account of its similarity in sound to Dh^ ; so in Is. 42, 20 <^rt and
Hot. XO 4, ni^K (unless it is a substantive, oaths) and n1*)2li cf. also XtTf^
l|fkb. 3, 13. Conversely, instead of the injitiiiive construct such forms are
occasionally fonnd as ri^3 or i^3, cm p. ni<") Cen. 48, li; nb^ Frov. 16, 16;
nb*y Gen. 50, 20. Ps. Id, 3, also 'ifc'^ (Jen. ^r, (comp. Prov. 31, 4), and even
with the suffix \T\ the very remarkable form \7\V^ Hx. 18, 18^. The feminine form
n^jn (for DiH")) Eêk. 28, 17, analof^'ous to nouns like HJKJ (comp. 45. is
strange, but a^ infin. Ezek. ir, 15 i quite inexplicable. The forms bn and i~)'n
Is. 59, J 3 arc to be regarded with Barth, NomincUbildung^ $ 51.0, as infinitives
^tolutt of the /astive of â/ (see above, ^ 53. w), not of The ind niN;f. /VM
amir. impmOive n^rn occmt in the prinei|sal pawe in Pxov. 4, 4 and 7, a
hot probably tbeae foima are simply to be attriboted to a Maaoeetic sdaool, whieh
in general marked the diflbcnce between certain forms by tlie vse of ^ for f, and
conversely i for t*; comp. the annlogons examples in 52. , and especially
75. hh, also Kautz-sch, Grammatik Jcs Bib!. Aram. 17. 2, Rem. 1. On the
reading nrxi^ Cant. 3, 1 1 (for Hr^lJ, on the analogy of the reading H^XD, &c,
{ 74. A), sec Baer's note on the passage.
' In the Siloam inscription alio (see above* | a. d), line 3, fVn may be read n^n
quite as well as [n}r)l*n,
^ All these infinitives con<;truct in 3, in the Pntatendi beloag to what is
called document E; comp. ( 69. second note.
Digitized by Google
220 The Pêrb, [75-
3. The sk^mhig of the w^njki (we abovt^ letter i ud the note on letter kh)
occasioot hi Qal the following chaii|pi
(a) As a rule the Hrst mdical receives m hdping S'ghdl, or, if the second radical
if ft gnttoral* a helping PaiMa^ (aocording to f a8. c). Thus h\\ fas t^^
and he dcspis$i, Geo. 35, 34; j^n tfmf ^ kmtU kt boh; HQ?! atut JU
destntf^t Gen. 7i 25.
(^) The f of the prefomntive nnder thcee cifcnmetenocs is sometimes lengthened

to i, e.g.K1||[ Jlejiflcy. Thi% however, mostly happens ooly after the preformative 11,
whilst after * the homogencooif lemaias, e.g. hyPti (hot (but }^^; with
middle gattnxsl VtW, HQAI Job 17, 7 (from nTO). The wnsual position of the
tone in M^Ff (Beer and GInsbnig KflA) Zeeh. 9, 5, (Bser and Gmsbnig iAqII)
Hie 7, 10, and MT| (with f) Gai* 41, 33, can only partially be explained on
ihythnical, or orthopbonie groonds. Comp. belowi letter M.
The hdping vowel b elseiHieie not osed nnder the drcnmstanoes mentioned
(je)
to f s8. Nun. SI, x. Jer. 41, 10, comp. fV) Job 31, 37; on other ^
hand, with /lengthened hito I (see letter ffi|>), VfX, Db* The fotm ^% .
HTJ j|f Mw, ooetifs parallel with ICpl oiuf V xow (bat 3rd/#r. always Rll^),
the latter with the original Paihat^ on account of the following and identical
with the 3rd nm- most, of the imperfect consecutive Hiph*!l, 2 Ki. ii, 4.
(</) Examples of verbs primae gutturalis (S 63\ and at the same time
are in pause fe^JI cmd ht made, firona nfe'^; and he anr.t'ered, from
n|!^, the shortened imperfect in such verbs being always identical with the
corresponding forms in /liph'tl. On some similar forms of see 76. J.
<
In the following cnss the initial (hard) guttural does not aifect the form: inM
and he u>as wroth, JPPI and he encamped (3rd plur. ^3niy (with Daêl hne
and ^wd) let it rrjoice, Job 3, 6 ; cL x. 18, 9.On ijj, CJ) (H"^ as well as
yh), &c., sec 76. <J, <-,/
U\ The verbs iTH /r, and rPFI /t? //>r, of which the ^ho^lcncd in. perfects
ouj^ht to be yihy and yihy, change tlicsc forms to ^rT* and TT", the second Irt/A
l>cing resolved into ( at the end of the word; but in pause ^5 29. ^ 'H^^
with the original d modified to .S"^;,//.V wiih the tone, (comp. ol-o fwutis like 03
for lathy, in /atiîr ^33' for >Scc., 840, letter and ^ 93. Jr'- t or *C?n,
*3J?
luiwcver. in Deut. 5?3, 18, since no verb H^K^ exists, we must read either B^FJ, .
or better n>^n ^^.Sauiaritan J<iJnj as impirjcct Qal of ilB'J /<? /<yjf/. Analogous to
ItT
îT from rrn, there occurs once, from
Eocles. 1 1. 3 (on the K see 33. 0.
mn
T
/i> ^, the fonn tHW*
It for VP il' im// it,
Moreover, the full forms ;\vithout apocoi>e of ilic n, comp. 49.f) frequently
occur after wim eomietUhfe, especially in tiie til pers. and hi the Ister Booli%
e. g. HKINl emd I taw, twenty times, and Jos. 7, ai in K^tMtk^ bnt never in the
Fentelench (Knxi fifteen times, of which three are in the Psnt.) ; nb^^ oMd kt
wtadt, torn times (bnt b^>) over soo times) ;

comp. also i Ki. io '9 (n^pV)
Dent. 1, 16 (.nj^^, and Gen. 34, 48. So also frsqnentiy for the jmstiM, comp.
f75 ] Verbs n"i. 221
Gen. I, 9. 6, 14. 41, 34. Jct. aS, 6. For the well attested, but meaningless
^^j?
Job 6. a I (doubtless caused by the following ^S^^Jjll) read î<lPl^f- see.
4. The urijîual ^ sometimes appears before the affurmalivci beginuing with U

vowel (corap. above, letteis h and /), especially in and befoie the pame^ and
before the full plunl eading ^ , or when far toy reason an emphasli tests oo
the word. Pler/ut iron Pts. 57, a ^Dn Deat. 33, 37, ooa^ Pfe. 73, a C*''^;
imptratuM Pff^ Is. ai, 12. Imprfta ^HK^ Job 16, at. 30, 14 (withont the
Pa. 68, 3J); vfe^ Ps, iJi,6. Job ia,6, comp. Ps. 77, 4; J^3T Deut. 18, 13;
Fk. 36^ 9: more frequently like |Vne^ Ps. 78, 44; la. 17, la. aij xa. a6, 11. 31, 3.
35, 7. 41, 5. Ps. 36, 8. 39p 7. 83, 3 : before a suffix. Job 3, as. Also in Pvot. a6,
as /n/. Qo/ from was perhaps fnigtnally intended, bnt hardly

since these full forms, though they may stand Out of pavae, do not begin sentences^
probably pointa to from as the r^ht fcading, sinoe Che aenie
leqniita an intiaasitiTe verb. CC fnrthcr, letters v. 4dt gg*
The faifiafUactivi, besides forass like 1^ Jod. so, 31* jtc, HK*) Prav. ao, xa,
5. v
has also a feminim which retains the 3rd radical ^, vix. f^frtS HS^' -d'fcping^
Lam. I, 16; rWin tumultuous, Ts. 2 a, a (//wr. Frov. i, ai^; njDi^' 'Pying,
Prov. 31, 27, fruitful, Ps. ia8, 3, //wr. ni*nX M*" (hat are to comt^
Is. 41, 33. \\ iU) tlic ordinary strong inflexion * a[>i>(.nrs in iTDV '"^f^t 1, 7f
but perhaps there al>o il^tiy w.ns intended. For ^JNl Is. 47, 10, ^3t<T is to be
read. In the participle passive the 3rd radical still sometimes appears as ^ 34.
corop. mfuie. Job 41, 35, ^B]t Job 15, aa, contracted from l^b^, *t^GV; and
before a formative ending, it even hasita consonantal sound, tt^lTyn (read D^îS^n)
3 Ki a.t, 4; nneV (read *M0t04rJI) I Sett. 35, x8 Ar*M#M, fintU (read if(Mk)
Is. 3, 16 X*Mk, The shortening of the d in riNKn Est a, 9 is Inegnlar.
(k The defective writiog is rate tn ndi forms as a Sam. x$, 33 (comp. w

I 49* 0; ^nâ i KL S, 44, compw i Kl. 9, 3 ; n^^^ Ex. a, 16 (comp. Jer. 18, ai.
48,6b X Chron. 7, 15. Job 17, 5 and elsewhere), and the pponnnciatioo nf^lA
Mic. 7, xo, comp. Jnd. 5, 39 (according to others nt^. with sujf, of the
3rd sing' fern,). Both cases most probably be explained according to | so.
II. On Niph'al.
7. Here the forms with in the 1st and and pers. sing, of the perfeel arc those X
commonly in ose (with ^ only in J1^|p3 Gen. 34, 8) ; on the other hand in the
1st plur nUvays , m i Sam. 14, 8. No examples of the and plur.
occur. With ' retained in pause Vt^j Num. 24/6; once with an initial guttural
?^n3 Cant. 1,6 for ,
probably arising from the ordinary strong foim nihru,
but the harshncs? of n immciliately followed by "l is avuirêd by pronouncing the n
wit!) IJaUph-rathah. In the 3rd snt^. fern. niPti^J Prov. 27, 15 (in patac for
nir)C*3 ^ niul n may be traiispoed fur euphouic reasons ; but probably we should
simply read nniS?3.
8. The apoiapi of the imperfect causes no further chan/i^cs btvond the rejection
y
of the rLy_, eg. from n^|î in one verb middU gutturaU^ however, a form
Digitized by Goagle
222 The Verb, [{75-
OGOiif with the Qamet ihoitened lo Patkd^ to. fllg; (for TO^) Ps, 109, 13,
Mln vnbeV'^; lmtin>mniîntlieiunePMliii,vene 14. Comp. letter M.

The tM/nithf* ahsahiU Tlhy^ emphasizhig an it^nUhe wt^ruet, a Sun. 6, 30
to my cxtraOTdiiuny; probitblf it to snbieqnent eomctlon of an cmmeoot
m^n.On tlie infiniiwi JN^W witii ^ncope of the n lee 51. 1
fcpetition of
The iiTKiilar)^^ Eiek. 36, 3 has probably arisen from a combination of the
readings (î) and ^^F\ {NipkaP). Similarly the solecism ntapj i Sam. 15, 9
might be dtie to a combination of the participle fern. Niph'al (np3) with the
H&fh'al (nnD) ; but it is more correct, with Wellhansen, to ei:|daitt the D from
a c<mfuioa with DD^ and to read, in fact| D^^^^
III. On Pi'cl, PS;l, Pu'al, atui JlWipa'el.
2 9. In the ist and 2nd persons of the feiftd Fi'il the diphthong in the
iCGond syllable is in most of the instanoet weakened to as ri'*Q'^, ^^^(i?;
always so in the first flur., and before suffixes, e. g. ^3^D3 Cen. 37, a6, yri*3'f
Fl. 44, 20. The form with ^. _ is found only in the i;.t sing. (e.g. Joel 4, 21 ;
Is. 8, 17 along with the form with f).Hithpdel has (besides ^ Jer. 17, 16)
as a rule (Prov. 24, to. i Ki. 2, 26, Jer. 50, 24). On the other hand, J^'al
always has e.g. ''XW^ Ps. 139, 15. A 1st sing. prftct PSil '^T^W
( = ^n^piU') occurs in Is. 10, 13.
aa 10. The infinitive absolute Pi'il tnkes the form ilj'S, (like Êp, the more
frequent form even in the strong verb, see % 52. o)\ with 6 only in Ts. 40, 2
with Mh, Hab. 3, 13 Jlh^ (comp. above, letter ). On Ish and t^ll, infiniiivn
aiso&iU of fhK paasive of Qal, not of Ptîl, lee abofe letter m,A% infiuitivt
emuintft oecnit in Pi*ii, Hoi. 6, 9 (only afftfaoeraphically diffierait from
if the text to correct); in JVal rfHtjfF*. 133, i.
M II. The apocopntcd imperfect must faccording tn 10. 1) lose the Dagti forte
of the second radical, hence and he commanded, "lyn (for HiyPI = f'arr?)
Ps. 141, 8 J
comp. Gen. 24, 20; Ilithpa'el and he uncovered hinistdf, (3en.
9, 21; jnnri rrov. 22, 24; comp. Ps. 37, 1. 7. 8. With the kngtlienin:: of
Paihah to Qnmes , and he made marks, occurs in 1 Sam. ai, 14 (rend, liuw-
ever, with Thcnias ^HJI, and initead of the meaningless i3B^ in the same verse,
l^h). In Hithpa'el "mrrW, in close connexion, Deut. a, 9. 19 ; yn&^n

Ii. 41, to; according to Qimhi also ^KH^, Ps. 45, la. Prov. 23. 3. 6. 24, i.
1 Chroo. 11, 17, whilat Baer and Gunburg read w^ the best anthorittef ^tn^,
llirin (comp^howem, Kihiig, X/ArÂMMf,i.p.597)S On ÎHK Job 15, 17
(for ^^ntt) comp. i ;
on î)3K Ex. 33, 3, see 1 17. q; on *r]!J Jnd. 5, 13,
ao.
aee ( 69. ^. Finally, on l^jn, which it lefened to IH*ll by tome, as a snppoaed

imperative^ see above, letter te.
CC 13. Eaamptea of apocopated imperatnm In Pi*el and JUitkpa'il arc: also

rn| command tkau, hi open thau^ Pa. 119, 18. aa; fD prepare than, Ps. 61, 8
* In Num. 34. 7 sq., according to verse 10, ^KiTTl (=^Htnn) is intended to

be read for {.imperfect JH'el from nttH).
Digitized by Google
75-] Verbs n"i^ 223
for nD3 prwe tkou, Dan. i, 12; ^nnn ftign thyself si(k, a Sam. 13. 5;
comp 1>LU1. 2. lAtOn nî juii. 9, a8, comp. 48./. In I's. 137, 7 raff
rV, is found twice instead of ny (for ^^y) lor rhythmical reasons (comp., however,
ill the imperfect, 2 Chron. 24, 11).
13. Examples of forms in which the YdJh is retained are the imperfects dd
Is. 40, 18, comp. verse 25 and 46, 5 ; 5D*D3'' Mr/ carer them, Kx. 15, 5 ; participle
/^'a/ Q^rtDD Is. 35,6; for T|inK Is. 16, 9 {itom tW\) read with Stade, die,
IV. On Jliph'il and l/oph'al.
14. In the perfect Hiph'd 3rd sint;. S'ghdl is found in the first syllal^le t
as well as r (J 53./), especially in H^SH (but perfect (onsrnttive nbiJll a Ki.
a4 14), HKin nubn; also with suffixes, e.g. dSsH 1 Chron. S, 7. *3f<fn Job
16, 7, rrncn^ Ex. ai, 8. The Sî^/s,''/ also occurs in the ist .w/;^- , c.
Mic 6. 3. On ^n''J<ini Nah. 3, 5, cf. 53./. The forms with e in the second
syllable (also written defectively, as Tl^m Jer. 21,6) are found thronj^hout in
tlie 1st sing, except Prov. 5, 13), rarely in the and sing, ffiase., and never in
die Itt //r. In die (Xlir penons they tie ebont equally conniOD with
Befine sttfixu due fbvms with t (Gen. 18, 4, end ehewhere) pgDedominete throii|^-
out ee being somewhat shorter; conp^ however* i in En. 4, la. Mie. 6, 3.
Frov. 4, II. In Hoph'al only occurs.
15. In the infinitive Hipk'tl of na") abundant, besides the infinitive

ff
construct we find H^B'^n the absolute n3"in takinj^ the place of the common
form n3*in, whicli came to be used invariably (,but Kouig calls attention to it*
use as infinitive construct in Ezek. 21, 20) as an adverb, in the sense of much;
in a Sam. 14, 11 the (^ri requires n3")n for the K^lkthh n*3in, an evident
scribal error for nâ^H. Comp. Gen. 41,49- 2^1 17. I^cut. a 8, 63; the pointing
narin Jer. 4a, a perhaps aiieee from regarding thie feim as a nonn. On fl^lOn
Job 1 7, a (widi Dagei f. eBmem) Me { ao. il.In a Ki. 3, 7^ T\\sr\ (befoie K)
itprobably fyifinHiv* ahohiie, naed in older to avoid the hiatnip comp. f 113. jr,
and on a similar case in Qolf see above, letter On the infinitiv$ with qrncope
of the T\t comp. f 53. f.
16. The shortened impnfect Hiph'tl either takes no helping vowel, as WD' gg
let him enlarge Gen. 0, a7 "^T A# shall subdue, Is. 41, a pC^^ and he uaiergd^
^ ; ;
Gen. 29. 10, and elsewhere ; fitl^ and he shcnved, a Ki. 11,4 ^see i 2S.d) : or else
has a helping vowel, as W (for ^r, see i a;, r), e.g. Wl a Ki. 18, it ; -ID>J
Pi. 105, 24 ; nnrn Ezek. 5, 6 ; yn*l a Chron. 33. 9 ; i. c. proJml.ly 2")K}
Joe. a4, 3 A'^thfbh (na"K1 ^r/). Examples of verbs guttural : Num.

3.'^- &c., which can be distinguished as IfipK il trum the similar forms
in Qal only by the sense.
The apocopated imper,itivc Hiph'tl always
(est<~'pt in verbs e. j^. ?|n^ DH, % 76. c) has a ht-li'in!,' vowel, S*gh6l or
Pathah, t.^. y)7\

....
increase thou for 3in, n2^^^
....... Ps. 5 1, 4 i/re, also Jud. 20, 38,
^
whtir. however, it cannot be explained with the context; *)in let alone (for
910f ~i'}D) 9 '4 elsewhere; ^ (for xh^) Ex. 8, i. 33. la j hnt

224 The Verb, [75.
lor V^n I s. 39, 14, wUdi cmid only be impenOiu H^tt

of y^f^ t='rmtar
wer, at in Is. 6. 10), icad with Boetbcen Uoi a^.The imperjut lliph'tl
with KlUt retained oocun only in )l*|1n Job 19. s, from n^. Comp. letter .
V. In Gmral,
hh 17. la Amnde, wheieM bcfoce lenuuked, mbt Tf^ ttid foim ckn.
the impet^t end purHît of all the ooojngMtoiu tcxmhule in M^ or
The Hebiew imfinUives, imperatives ^ {iDd imperfects in n_, less frequently
lt_^ or may be due to imitatioa of the Aramaic form. On the infinitivt

construct Pi'c! ^211. see nhove, letter aa : imperative Qal fctVI Job 37, 6 (in the
sense of fa/f); imperfect S^T let him look out. Gen. 41, 33 (see, however, above,
letter nfe'g^ he wtll aa, Is. 64, 3; n^nPT^X Jer. 17, 17; KOTT^X icnsent
thou twt, Prov. I, 10; n^l|FI"^K <i' tAou not, 2 Sam. 13, n (the same form in
Gu. 26, 39. Joa. 7,9. Jer. 40, 16 ^r<?) ; n^HR (so Baer and CinsKiirj^', after
cod. tlillcl, &c.)/ i7/ de, Jer. 31, i ; nfe^^^B^ Jos. 9, 24 ; nX"Ujl Dan. i, 13.
CoiBkp, also in PHpKol TfS&[ Lev. 5, 9 ;

n^ZlJ|) (aoeotding to Qimhi) Num. 21, 17;
in /VV/n^ Lev. i8 7. 8. ia-17. 30, 19I hk etch case beside n^M
with a minor dirtinedve
np3] (Bsor, however, n^^} Nah. 1^3 1 ITI^ Btek. 5; is
;
(with Zaqfpki Baer IT^). The lact, however, that a gnat nonber of these
forms ooeur hi pmse and represent at same time ^/tusivt or vritnUatH^ ^
(Jm. 7, 9\ suggests the view that the long vowel may be used in order to increase
the emphasis of the paitsnl form, and at the same time to make a (H:-;tinction
in sound betwetn tiie jussive or volu*itiittZf and the ordinary imfcrf,; t '. Else-
where (Gen. 26, 39. Lev. 5, 9. Dan. 1,13; according to Baer also
Jer. 40, 16.
Mic 7, 10. ZedL 9, 5) the pmnaDciation with i is probably intended to soften
the hiatus caned by a foUowing H tu }t\ comp, the analogovs cases above,
I 74-
tt The endiiit,' <>
appears to stand for !!-_ in the impetftct Qal In 0|rl!3Wn
and there hath she played the harltt^ Jer. 3, 6 ; perha|>s, howe%'er, the 3nd sing,
fern, is intended, or it may have bern intro<luced into the text of jLrcmi.ih
from Ezek. 16, 15, &c. Sf.ll niurc strajigc is it in tlie impcrjcit ////'/:':/ ^n'OH'^H
Jer. 18, 33; but the iJA/' W-tone probably points to nOJl as the correct iea<liii^
,Comp. Kch. 13, 14). The stands lor in the perfect Hiph'tl *^nrt he
' Poislbly these examples like the cases of S'ghSI \x\ paust, Icttt r u represent
the view uf a particular Masorctio Thool, which was intended to tu- co isistcntly
carried out. According to Praelonui ^^m ZAW. 1883, p. 35) traces ot the (original)
/Miinv of verbs appear m die fonns ending in n.^, and were already rightly
recognized as snch by Ewald, while on the other band the apocopated mood
of verbs is qdle a late(?) pbenoinenoo and rimply the final resvlt of aetnal
biliteial forms, sodi as ^\ According to this view thertfore, we cannot point
to this mood in confirmation of the supposed tendency of the jussive to retract
the tone, since in its origin it is alto^'cther different from the ju>sivc, a!though
the lanâê us(.s it in the sense of the jussive, which was becoming obsolete,
also 48. ^, note.
75 ] Verbs r\"h. 225
madt siek. Is. $3, 10, which ii probftUj Ibr a aecoodaty

fm of rbn i lee letter rr. The //mt. )tOCtn (6er ]ÔOn) th^ madt to mU,
Jot. 14, 8, it a pmely Aranude fofin*
18. In three verbs the rue oonjngation /V;'/,"/ or its reflexive (5 55. d) occun: kk
mK3 ' an Ps. ov = Masora requires mK3), contracted to niN3 /o
il>e
tiful. from nX: ;

''inpp Gen. 21, 16 ankers (from nHD^ but most frequently ;
in nnsy io bend, I'a'iei tV\TV^ not in use, whence reflexive ninn^'H (0 hmt> one-
self, to prostrate oneself, 2\\\\ peri, in JH^^- ^'"^^ ^''^

A'''^* Tl^'^ -, impcrft\ t
HinRtr*. con'êctiiive ^rd ^/y/^. wrfTr. ^nnC*^! for wayyi'^tahw (analogous ti) tlie
noun forms, like for sahw}\ 3rd //r. ^^HnC'V Instead of the Aramaic
injinuivc witii suffix *riînP1B'n3 a Ki. 5, 18 read with Koni^' *niinn^3j
DTI'innw'P K/ck. 8, 16 is still more certainly a scribal irr^r for Qînnp'D.
19. Before suixcs \i\ ali forms eliding m H, a coimectuig vuwtl ii employed //
instead of the H and the vowel which precedes it ( 58./), e. g. ^5n3 Gen. 34, 27 ;
iiipitise ''3;y 1 Ki. J, .ô, 6^c., even with lesser disjunctives, Ps. JiS, 5. Trov. 8, aa;
or Ns. li ;l corijiir.ciive accent, i Sam. jS, 1^ i^but liacr *33y\ Juh jo, ly; comp.
r9- ' Ji* T]2y, Is. 30, 19 (and even when not m /a//.t' jer. 23, 37)
or like ^3(5 Deut. ^1 ;
^^"j*') (ien. 28,3; cump. also VIJ^^ Di^j imperfect
Only very seldom does take the place of tlie final H or H ^ e.g. VIJH
DiTKDK Dcot. 3?. 26; iO'DZ' I's. 140, 10 (fre; ^rSH iw//*- w/-, 1 Ki. jo, 35. .^7 ;
cotnp. Hah. 3, 2. Is. 38. j6. In these examples, again, a return to the original
ending a/ might be assumed; but [crhaps they are merely due tu a less correct
plt$te writing. In the 3rd sing. rj. fern, the older form (see letter i) U p
nlwnyi med before n iuffix^ e.g. Vl^^ (for V*inÎI) Zech. 5, 4; in pause ^^^^
Job 33, 4; 4a, 5.
VL Tfu HelaiioH betwm Vtrki IT'^ mti W^,

so. The cloae tebtion existing between Terbs end n''^, which in Aiuneic nn
his malted ua a complete similarity, is shown in Hebrew by the fact that the
erbt of one class often borrow Conns from the other* especially in the later
writers and the pnct^.
21. Thus there are foims of verbs K"^ (a) which have adopted the vowi Is 00
of verbs n"/, e. g. perfect Qal I have refrained, I's. IT9, 101 ;
participle
ItDin (fitch) sinninsr, Fccles. 2, 26. 8, 12. 9, a. 18; corap. Is. f^^, 20: XihO
1a cU >. 7, 36; ttJî it tiding, I Sam. a 2, 2; /W/ perfect f<^p he has filu-d, Jer.
51, 34 ; comp. I Ki. 9, 11. Amos 4, 2 (where, however, perfect Aiph. is perhaps
intended), Ps. 89, 11. 143, 3; ^nKQ") I keal, 3 Ki. a, at; comp. Jer. 51.9:
imperfect KD3^ Job 39, 34 ;
Mph'al perfect nnSB3 (like nn!)?^ it was tOMder-
ful, 2 Sam. I, 36 ;
Hiph'll perfect vh^T} Deut. 28, 59 ; nnjann (in the Texius
* According to Buxtorf and others (comp. Noldcke, ZDMG. xxx. i8j) rnK3
is lather N^'ol from nUI.
Q
Digitized by Google
226 The Verb,
neefhu inflomcdy nnft comp. ftbove a Sam. i, 6)M hii^ Jos. <^ 17. On
tbe other hand, fonVlike &|tt9h i Skm. 14, 33, Dtr# Fi. 99, 6, WO
Ktek. 8, *3|^K31Plt according to &e correct reading, Job 19, a (comp. Gen.
31* 39 nattHK), and ^Ml^ imptniht phut, masc, from MT, Jos. 4i i4* ' Sam.
la, 34. Ps. .^4 TO ore due to the syncope of the see f 74. ^ On
Jer. TO. 5 and Ps 1.^9. 20. 2 3-
(*) Forms in n, I nt wiih pointing, e.g. imferfccl QaJ Kfi'^K Jct. 3, aaj
imperative nS") /^/-r?/ Ps. 60. 4 : Niph'al Jcr. 49, to (which must
evidently t>e a pcrf-rrt ; rend with Ewald the itijinitivc ajfsoltitd Hlsnj as in
verse 23), and Hlinn hide onetelf, 1 KL a a, 35, comp. Jer. 19, 11 ; Pi'el
imperfect fl^^ he will fill^ Job 8, ai.
99 (r) Fonns entirely of character, e. g. perfect Qal nDVI and wkm ik&u
artatiirttt Ruth >, 9, comp. a Sam. 3, 8; ^^3 fhey shut up, i S^. 6, 10 ; comp.
H9 33 !
letter ) /
^ 'I'v A^'
Gen. ao, 6 (on
"SaA, aS, x6, comp. 39, a6; inJinUive 1l9n (see above,
see abovoi | 74, letter k) ; imperatht thug,
fern, ^nn Is. 36, so; impafid (for K^^j il iw7/ Am^ bmek^ Gen. as, 6
th^ htaiSt Job 5, z8; ptirtkipie n|1a Prov. la, 18; /nw. KS* Eoclcs.
TSf^ff^
10, 5'; plur, rroSr is. 39, 7
Jer. 51, 9 ; Mm* im/ pnpkenei^

; porHHpU pwwe
Jer. ad,
^
9 (comp.
Ffe. 3s, I
Ps. 139* 74.
; in>;i*/ nijlilj
Job 18, 3^
impttfta a Ki. 3. 33 {infinUhe Jer. 19, 11); Pi'el imperfect ^9*1^ Jer.
8, 11, comp. Gen. 31, 39; Hiph'tl participle Eiek. f^, 3; /AV/7 A;V/ n*33nn
I .Sam. 10, 6; infinitive niS^nn 1 Sam. 10, 13. For the K^lhibh TmTO 3 Ki.
TO, 2f, Jablonsl:! and others require a<? (^n"' the form n'iKB'nf) (so Is. 37, 26" ;
the K'/hfbh would have to be read A^H^, with syncope of the fit and retraction
of the vowel.
IT aa. On the other hand, there are foims of verbs iV^, whidi wholly or in part
follow the analogy of veibs e^ g. in their consonants KTM he ammct, Ts.
sT, la ; ina a Sam. la, 17 {Ttxius rtuptus Itia) ; ^rit!(r\\ Eaek. 43, 37 ; Kdb^
Job 8, II ; ttse^ Lam. 4, i; K^HM a Chron. 16, la; n3W^^ Ex. r, xo. Lev.
io 19$ D^^' i3eat. 38, M (oomp!^ Hos. 11, 7); Vh^ {infitt, tM, Ni^*ut
Ixside ^rtn^)) a Sam. 1,6: 1^ a Ki. 35, 39 ; K|l^ Jer. 38, 4$ Eocles.
8k I : in tteir wwel^ Jer. 3, aa ; ITij^ Pan. 10, 14 ; nâpt t Ki. 17, 14:
in both, trjjp^ Gen. 49, I; comp. 42, 4. Is. 51, 19; QM^FI 3 Sam. 31, 13 ^t^;
KSn^J* ' Chron. 36, 15 (comp. D^NIlOn ^ttnn 2 Sara. 11, 34 A^thfdk)-, HKTb
{partUiph ftm. Qal) Zeph. 3, i; t^^^D^ Hos. 13, 15; D^N^DD Lam. 4, 2.
For niKIB (so Paer, Ezek. 17, 6, cornp. 31, 8\ which can only be intended for
n1it"13 as pir/ici'p/e fern, plur, from tOB = nns, read, according to Kzek. 31, 5,
ftc., nV^tifi branches,
i 76. K^r^f Zfoully Wtak,
a 1. In a tolerably large number of verbs two radicals are weak

letteis, and are consequently affected by one or other of the
anomalies already described. In cases where two anomalies night
Digitized by Google
760 Verbs Doubly Weak.
occur, usage must teach whether one, or both, or neither of them,
takes effect in ilie verb.
Thus e.g. from inj to flee, the imperfed is li^ in Nah. udnT in
3, 7
Gen. 31, 40 (on the analogy of verbs ;"S) HiffeU njQ (like a
; vtrb
the impetfui Nopk'al again IT (as J"B),
2. The foUowing are examples of difficult forms, which are derived b

from doubly weak verbs
(a) Verbs J"D and K"^ (comp. J 66 and 74), e.g. vim to k-ar, imperative
KlS^ (Fk10, IS Kb9, cf which nW Pi. 4, 7 is probably only an orthojjraphic
variation) ; it^niihi eonstrua flMb-(for nWp ; sec the analogoas noun- formations
ia f 93- ^* alM MlS^} la. I, 14. i8. 3 ; Gen. 4, 13 ; Ps. 89, to trtfef (perhaps
ooly a scribal eiror); after the fnfijs ^ always W^J) (the contracted fonn
only oecus in SV^Sp Job 41, 17, with nfectioo of the K) ; imperfect n^^R for
Rttth 14; wholly inegnlar are n|^B^ Ezdc 33, 49 (so Baer after
1,
^1m; Textm rtetftm, and also tbe MaatM ed., and GlnsbwK, ru^^n) and
nttfeo 3 Sam. 19, 4S as Vfifmr ^m/m/^ AS^/IW (00 the analogy of the
iMfimtioi mstnia Qal?) ; most pfobaUj Kfel9 is to be lead, with Driver.
(*) Vcfbs Y% and (comp. f 66 and { 75), as iww, A ine/^, n33 ^

/ jwiV^.
n
Hence im/itfeet Qai IW, t^^pe^pmNd W (Gen. 6, -OJ) amd lu
bowed; (so, probably, also Is. 63, 3 for H) a Ki. 9. 33 md Otnwu ifrmUed
(from ntri ; fêr/.-a Hiph'n n3n //^ sniote, imperfect nS^, o/Vvr^Ârf ip, IJU (even
yi'WÂthnah 2 Ki. 15, 16; but .ilso ten times n31), "ijf^^ Dcut. 3,33; SO also t*1
Lev. 8, 11. 30; Drr^X Ps. 141, 4 (comp. Job 23. lO ; imperative n3n, apocofatfd
Ijn smite thou (like DH indim^ with flttn), infinitivt AiSH, participU n3;
" '
Hoph'al n^n faiikiple HSO
.
JO Verbs K"D and n"^ (comp. 68 and to be willing, HpK ^

to hake, nnx <-<>w^. E. g. imperfect Qui HDX^ nEX\ //zvr. ^Dt<* ; fitfl*! (comp.
68. IVut. 33, a I for HTlt**) (-nriN''V ; impcrfu apocopated HK*^ Is. 41, 25
for WX>1; imperative Is. 2r, T2. 56, 9. la (comp. ÊX hake ye, Ex. 16, 23)
for VIK, VnK ($ 33. h; 75. ) ;
Hiph'fl fcrf.t Vnn for I^JTUn (THKn)
la. 31, 14; imperfect apocopated 7K*1 A/ adjured, i Sam. 14, 34, properly
^^r- ^^"^ ^^^^ whence H^tt^, and, with the obscuring to 4,

instead of the simple apocope :^^f'V the K which bad become quiescent,
alrc.idy
is made .Tiidiblc :\Â\n by the helping S'ghdl (unless perhaps tlicrc is a of>n(Viiqn
with the impcrfcit iouseadive Hiph'tl oi ^K*).
id) Verbs and i<''^ (comp. 69, 70, and 74), as N^*^ /o go forth^
imperative go forth, with paragogic JWJf Jud. 9, 29 in principal pause
for riKV; 2nd /-w //;/r. njNtV Tnnt 7, it; infinitive nSY ;
Hiph'tl N'Vin
Z^? (^/Vw^-^r//; "V /<7 /c<;r, :>r perfect t<y^ and K'J^Jl (or jqj)), impiroHvi m^;
impetfeit Xiph'al }jC\^\ Ps. 130, 4, participle
(#) Verbs ^'fi and iY6 (comp. $ 69, 70, and f 75), eg. /i/w, /
Q 3
Digitized by Google
22S The Verb. [77-
Hipb'tl to con/as, to praise^ and iT)* t9 tktm (both properly verbi 1*16), and HD*
/tf ^ btavHJul. lnJiMUkPh\ niT ; imperative Tt^; impetfut emseemtive
Esdc 3i 7 (comp. also i6, 13) ; with sttffixes XS^^l\ vie haioe skoi tU thgm
(from riT) Nam. ai, 50; perhapt* bcwerer, it shoald be teed with the LXX
and their race (also in Ps, 74, 8 is probably a suistOHtive, and not the
iitêft G/with sujix from TOJ /W for ( 69. 1*). ^TiîlY/ ifl^n,
; W
nîl; infiteUive niin (u itîmtive absolute 2 Chron. 7,3), n^H. imperjket
nr^, comp. Uh*bt^ Jr- 3; eêeopated 1^*1 a Ki. 13, 17.
g if) Verbs VJ and K^, paiticnhrty Mfa te come. Petfut M3, JTlKa, MIC or riMS
(Gen. 16, 8. t Sam. 14, 3. Mic. 4, xo; comp. | 75. m), onoe for l9Ki
X Sam. as, 8; for Jer. 7, 18, which is appaicatly the perfiet, read
In the imperfect Qal the separating vowel oocus (nS^bn instead of the more
common n|ka^, comp. also -rfHsn Gen. 30^ 38) only in Jer. 9, 16. Pft. 45, 16 and
X Sam. 10, 7 K*tktbh,
h For nibl^ X Sam. 25, 34 (the K*tkm ^M3m evidently combines the two
readings J1IQI snd *ttbni; cf. Nestle, ZAW, 14, p. 319), read nSm-, on the
impossible forms Dent 33, 16 and Job as, si comp. f 48. ^. In the petfeel Hifk*U
Iran, nican and (only before a sufBi) nk^n; the latter form is also certainly
intended in Nnm. 14, 31, where the Masora requires ^HK^Sni . comp. 2 Ki. 9, a.
19, as. Ts.43, 33. Jer. 35, 13. Cant. 3, 4. Before sufhxes the / of the fii^t syllable in the
3rd sing, always becomes Hateph-S'ghdl, e.g. ^Nân, ^^K^SH ; elsewhere invariably
â(epA-Patka^, e.g.^3riK3n or ^3riNân. On the other hand, i is retained in
the "^condary tone in the perfect consecutive when without suffixes, e.ff. nttani
Cf., moreover, inXpHI (inkpHT in Opitins nnd Hahn is ahojêther incorrect),
Prov. 35, 16, from N^p; but Vp spKc yc, [or. 25, 27 fperha])^ only a mistake
for *N^p\ is not to he referred to K'p but to a secondary stem n*i?. In the imperfect
Npri^ is fouiid oiicc, Lev. iS, ^5, besides (^ânalogous to ^Q*V. On âtC
(for *3D, see % 74. ;6.
i {^gj The verb ^^y\ to live, in the perfect Qal, besides the orniiâry devclojimcnt
to iTn {fern. nri*n), is abo treated as a verb y"y, ajul ihcu has the form *n
in the ^rdpers. perfect, in pause and with wow cemeeutive ^Tt[ Gen. 3, 33, and
frequently. In Lev. 35, 36 even the cmtraction to ^nj occurs in the perfect
tMsectttiw. The form nj^l stands in Ex. i, 16 in pause for tWTfi (3rd /em.) with
Da^ omitted on account of the pausal lengthening of 4 to 0.
77. delation 0/ the Weak Verbs to one another,
a The close rdation which exists between some classes of the weak
verbs (e. g. between fB and ^^'d, le"^ and tf\ p^y and appears
not only from their similarity or identity of inflexion, or their mutual
interchange of certain forms, bui especially from the fact that
frequently the bame root {radix biltiiera, see 30. g) recurs in
Digitized by Google
Verba DefecHva.
various weak stems of similar meaiuiig. The meaning accordingly
is inherent in the two constant root-consonants, while the third
conf?onant, which is weak (and the particular class of weak verbs

with it), does not establish any diCTereace in the meaning. Thus from
the root ^ there occur with the same meaning TJDT, "qn, lO^ ut strike^
h rmhi and from the root *nu, ni|, n^j lo jUi,

In this manner the roUowing classes are related in foim and h
meaning
I. Verbs Vy and y"y in which the first and third consonants are the same
in both, M beiog essentitl to the meaning; e.g. 1]^ and io bteomi foor;
tfto and bHB^ to feel; 113 and I"]: /^y/<v.
a. Verba ^ and e. g. and aM / fla<e, K'gJ and Srf>^ {ydqof) to Uty C

Moftover, atems belongfaif to the classes mentlcmcd in i. (especially Y%
are fieqnently reUtcd also to verbs ^ and ft* e.g. "Al and lUl* to fear; a)D and
to higoodi nu and T9^to bhw; fV^mAfrnto iosk to jieut. Verbs
Wtt less frequently connected with these dasses, e.g. DS!^, Dp|iând tH^ (9 ti
destroyrJ, B^fct and 1^1 to thresh, &c.
3. Vtrbs t<"b and H"^ (in which the first two consonnnts form the real body ^
of the stem are sometimes related to each other, and sometimes to the above
classes. To each otlier, in t^ST
T
and
T
HST
T T
lo crush, jnp and
' T
mp to meet
T T
(comp.
I 75i letter nn) \ to verbs of the other classes, lu HiD and J*3fD to suck, nn'l and
rftl to thrust. Sec
78* Veria Defectiva*
It often happens, when two kindred weak verbs are in use with a
the same meaning that both are (h/tc/ne, i.e. do rii>t occur in all the
forms. Since, however, those tenses and forms which are not in use
in the one verb are generally supplied by the other, they mutually
complete one another, and thus form together, as it were, an entire
verb^ as in Greek fyx^t i^X^v, fut. cXcvvvyiai, and in Latin /ero,
iuH, UUtm, /erre, icc^ bnt with this difference, that in Hebrew the
roots of these verbs are almost always closely related.
The most common verbs of this kind are i
C'ia to be ashamed. Hiph'il IJ'ân (inferred from r^.L^'^nny, but also i:^2n, Kâ^n,
as if from on the analoj;^- of verbs ^''D; also in Is. 30, 5 the <^ri requires
^'irx, whei the K*th!bh has ^VOT} from \ffm.
^SC to he gooil Per/eel ; but imperjecl 3D''; and Hipftii 3^D^n from
(corap., however, rd'OH a Ki. 10, 30).
iij to b* f^raid. Imperfect "WX*^ (from n%t).
Digitized by Google
230 The Verb.
to awake, only in the impcrf. ; for the perfect, the Hiph'tl |**j5n is used
(from pp).
|D3 to break in pieces. Imperfect pDJ (from pB). Imperative pa. Niph'al
pDl PCel )*B3 (from |D3). /V7^/ J*jna (from pBj. Reflexive J*5ri3nn.
///>AV/ ppn. Also I^BYB Job 16, 1 2.
3^3 ((?</ in post-biblical Hebrew, in Aramaic and Arabic) to plcue. whence

(possibly) Niph'al 33 and Hiph'ny<t7\ (see above, 71) ; but Hithpa'el 3irnn.
nriB^ drink, used in (Pa/; but in Zfi/>^. H^B'n /<? /< drink, from a C**^
n^B' which it not used in Hebrew.
to go, see above, 69. x.
Rem. 1. To the same category belong also, to a certain extent, those cases
where the tenses or moods not in use in one conjugation, are supplied by forms
having the some meaning in other conjugations of the same verb. Thus
5]P^ to add. The infinitive (comp., however, 69. h, note) and imperfect,
imused in Qal, are supplied by the Hiph'tl ^^D^n, P|*DV (on e|Di* as imperfect
indicative, see 109. d, and cf. also 109. <)
to stumble. Perfect from Qal, imperfect from NipKal.
BÛ to approcuh, unused in perf. Qal, instead of which Niph'al 5^33 is used;
but imperfect S?3^, imperative and infinitive T\^l from Qal only are in use.
nn3 to lead. Perfect usually nn3 in Qal, so imperative nn3, but imperfect and
infinitive always in Hiph'tl.
']n3 to be poured out. Perfect Niph'al 1]ri3 with imperfect Qal ?]n^, while the
perfect Qal and imperfect Niph'al are not in use.
a. The early grammarians often speak of mixed forms {Jormae mixtae),

\. e. forms in which are united the supposed character and meaning of two different
tenses, genders or conjugations. Most of the examples adduced are at once set
aside by accurate grammatical analysis some others appear to have
; arisen from
misapprehension and inaccuracy, especially from erroneous \news of unusual plene
forms. Others, again, are either merely wrong readings or represent an erroneous,
though often intentional, combination of two different readings.
Digitized by Google
79-] General View, 231
CHAPTER IIL
THE NOUN,
79. General View.
For the literature, see De Lagarde, Utbersicht uher die im Aramaischn,

Arahiiihcn und Hchniischen Bildung dfr A'onitna, Gnttinpcn, 1889;
ubltcke
Index aiid Additioos, Die Nomittalbiidung in den amitischen
1891 ; J. Bartb,
Sfrachmt fint half, ilu rim^ nmm, Ldpcig, 1889; teoond faalf, neum with
eÔemai adHiiemt 1B91 ; icoiMid edition, with iiidioai of wonk and ialijeets 1894;
E. Konig, //isiorisch-kritisches Lehrgebdude, drv., ii. i, Leipzig, 1895, see above,
} 3. f. Of these three import int works the first two especially have given rise to
various articles. In support of l )c i.sgarde: Hommcl in ZDMG. xliv. p. 555 ^cjq.
(against De Lagarde and Hommel : Harth, ibid., p. 679 st^q.)* dealing wilh the
Index, ZDMG, xlv. p. 340 sqq. Against Bifb (though with many points of
agieement) : PhilippI hi the Zeitsekr0 fSr VSOurpsyehobgit mtd Sprackwistem'
Ska/tt 1890, p. 344 aqq. (aMwered by Barth in ZDMG. xliv. p. 69a sqq.)> and
ZDMG. 149 sqq. (answered aiâin by Harth, ibid, xlviii. p. losqq.), also in
xlvi. p.
the Beitrdgt zur Assyriologie und vcrgUichcnden umitirrhcn Sprackwissensi/iaff,

ii. 1893, p. 359 sqq. 'Die semitische Verbal- und NoimnaU/ildung in ihrem Ver-
hXltnlMe sa dnander/ and fatttfy. In xUx. p. 187 sqq ZDMG.
Cf. also A. MUller,
'SemitliMdieNonlna. Bemetkiiimien m
de La^^vde and Barth,' ZDMG, idv.
p. aai iqq.The main ^)ointa at inne in the works of De Lagarde and Barth
ate indicated below, f 83. d,
1. Since, according to 30. a, most word-stems are developed <$
into verbal iilems as well as into noun-stems, it has become customary

(especially in the Lexicon) to trace back the noun to the most simple
ground-form of the verbal formation, viz. the 3rd pers. sing, pt-rftxt
Qal, and, as it were, to derive it from that form. This is usual, not
(Hiljr in those noun-stems which can be directly classified with
a cOfxesponding verbal stem (Nomina vtrbalia or derivaUva^ 83 sqq.),
but also withiVinmiia primiôa, Le. those of which no verbal stem

is now found in Hebrew (see { 8a), as weU as finally with Nomma
dmamma/ttat which have evidently been derived from other nouns
( 86).
The adjective agrees in form entirely with the substantive. On the foraaatioa
ofa4}ectlvalidcasli7givlngtoahatiaelB ACoaGteteaettae,aee 1 83. <
232 The Noun,
b 2. Strictly speaking, the inflexion of the noon to express the
various cases does not exist in Hebrew; in fact, hardly more than
a few ancient and almost extinct traces of case-endings have survived
( 90). The syntactical relation of a noun can therefore in general

only be inferred from its position in the sentence, or from its being
joined to prepositions. In cither case, the form of the noun
undercoes no change (except for the construct state, 89), and the
representation of casc-relaiions belongs therefore ahnost exclusively
to the syntax (117 sqq.). 1 he comparative and superlative of
adjectives also can be expressed only by a syntactical combination
(f 133). On the other band, several changes in the forms of nouns

are occasioned by the additions of the plural, dual and feminine
terminations, as well as of the pronominal suffixes, and also by
the close connexion of two nouns, by means of the cmslntct siait\
$ 80. 7%e Ittdtcatim of Gender in Nouns,
0 1. I'he Hebrew, like all Semitic languages, recognizes only two

genders in the noun, a masculine and a feminine. Inanimate objects
or things, and abstract ideas, which other languages sraietimes
indicate by the neukr^ are regarded in Hebrew either as masculine
or feminine, more often the latter (see the Syntax, laa. f).
b 2. The masa/linet as being the more common and important
gender, has no special indication. The feminine had originally the
ending n_, as in the 3rd sin^. perfect of verbs ( 44. a). This ^W,
however, is regularly retained only in close connexion with a following
geniiive or suffix (cf. 89. e and 91.0), except where the form has
arisen through the addition of a simple n ^see below, letter d).
Otherwise, the feminine ending of the independent form (the absolute
statet 89. a) is ^ :
>^'^
c (a) Most commonly a tone-bearing e. g. D^D equus, HMD equa.
Of nouns ending in like the feminine (by 34. ^) is njl^,

cf. { 86. h. As in the 3rd smg. fem, perfect (!^^(ti ^c-)^ ^
arisen by the rejection of the final n, and the lengthening of the ^ in
the open syllable, whereupon the n was added as an orthographic
' To speak of these dttnget at a declension of the Hdiiew wNn, as is oaaally

doBc, is aooQidliigly Inoomct*
80.] The Indication of Gender in Nouns, 233
indication of the final long vowel : comp. the exactly similar origin
of such forms as nbs for 'h^, 75. r.
{b) Simple n with nouns ending in a vowel, e.g. Î^T Jau, n^TîT d
Jewess. 'I'he same ending n is very frequently added to stems ending
in a consonant, but only (except before suflixes) by means of a helping
vowd, which, as a rule, is S'ghdl, but after gutturals Paiha^, e. g.
^D^, fim* ^fî kiUing; before suffixes, e. g. according to the
rule given in 69. comp. also 8441, letter s; Tfe^ an acfuainianct
/em, The forms which arise in this way follow in every
respectthe analogy of the sqfholÛe forms ( 94./). The forms
which have been developed by means of a helping vowel are used
even for the connective form {ioustruct s:aU)\ except (for
ri"l^', which is used elsewhere) (kn. 16, 11. Jud. 13. r)-7> comp.
Jer. 22, 23 and 51, 13 Cfre, alô ri">K^' i Ki. r, 15. partinple /em.
/Y//, contracted from m'sdra// = T\m^; also ^JJiy^D (prrf/ fp/r' /m,
PCil with snffiz) arises from the form contracted from ^^9*
Rm. I. The fern, fom in is v^ genersl leu irsqiient, asd ocscnrt aIokmI i
cxdoaively when tiu fonn in is alio in nse. It is only in the pnrtldples and
infinitavea tiuU it it the oonononer, e.g. I1^0|> more common than nÔ^, ni^
than
a. Rartr ftminine endingi axe(a) n... ^th the tone, vis. emtrald, /
Eaek. aSt 13 (aUo Ex. 38, 17) ; D^N^ company^ % KL 9, 17, naleu the
reading it wroi^; more Ireqinently in pioper nnmei, cspedaliy tA pboes among
the Canaanitea or Phoeniciana (in wboie Inngoage n_ was the unal fem.
coding, f a. ^ and other neighboniing tiibea*, e g. nilV Sanfta^ njai GUfaiK
TCSt Q^'y^^t Greek A&ana in Idnmea; HfniC Gen. a6, a6 : on the reading
n^jn cH letter /. Comi. moreover, n^qO Ps. 53, 1. 88, i ; TXf*^ Ft. 61, 1
(prob. originally 11^); n^l (LXX fl^ 74, 19a; Lam. 2! 18; [nsri
wr/l, in Pi. 65, 10. lao, 6. 123, 4. 119, 1. a, ii a fonn boixowed from the
Aramaic (Syriac raMa/A) in which the original f of the /em. ia often retained
to fonn advcri>s, fêe Wright, CmfUim Gmmmar, p. 135.]
{b) n__, which likewise occurs in some names of places, e.g. 0^3, ^^^^ ^
as wtll as in the masc. proper name n^^3 i Sam. 17, 4, &c. 'in 17, 23, and 21, 10,
ed. Maot. has H^j)^), and in the Jem. proper name D^tî otherwise, almost
' lin^9 '> '4 ^ the Mantoa ed.X might itand for finnj^ as
PofUcipU fem. HopfCd; but flH^ (so Baer and Gbsbnrg) is also supported
by gootl autliority.
Com p. tlic Mcs.-i' stone, line 3. HNT nODH kigk piaci j line 36, ni'DDH
the ki^kvHty; [see also DriTerj Tenses^ t8i,
Digitized by Google
234 The Noun. 80.
only in poetay, vli. n^Dt Ex. i5> a. Ii. ia a. Fi. 118, 14 (for ^rrtD|
the abtorptioa of the !*> however, on Kucdy have ' taken place in the Aramaic
manner/ as suggested by Dnhm on Is. la, 2, nor is it due merely to the following
Yddk, but is intended * to facilitate the absorption of ;' so Gciger, Ursihrift,
p. 377 sq.); n^nj keritagc, Ps. 16, 6 (eitiier again for ^flbnj my hcriiaê, or for
nn?n3 comp. , 90. p, as probably a!so HITJ? ^clp, Ps. 60, 13. 108, 13). Comp.
nlso rr^b fecunda (a Jntitful tree) Gen. 49, 22; TTiri^ abundance, Jer. 48,36
(btlorc P; but in Is. 1 5, 7 TTJII*) ; njK' j/fc/ for nJU') Ps. 13a, 4; and in prose
riK^ pelican (which reading is also preferable, in Is. 34, 11, to the form JIK^),
also n^nO the mcrroiv, but in construct state always niHCD n?>nn jcr.
49* ^5 duubt intended to indicate the reading ^j^^nn, parallel to ^^bO

comp. above, on riHD] &c.
h (0 M--. the Anunatc <Hrtliogniphy for diiefly ia the later wiitenr IT^
hathimg^ Nam. il. ton a /^r. Is. 19, 17; loe^ Pk. ts7, a;
0 /MMMr, Eidc. 19, 1 (nmlen K*^^ u iatcmded); aworl, lam. 3. 19;
cf. alio K^N Artthing {partteipie Qat from B^) Jer. 50, 11 ; ITI^ Htttr, Rath
I, 30. On the other hud, according to the weilem Masora. Hfn^ MAtets
is to be read in Ezek. 27, 31 ; see Baer on the passage.
i id) rL__, an obtuse form of n_ . ( 27. only in iT1\t for n"1\T Is. S9y*
comp. nap for nab Zech. 5, 4; naK I Ki. 3, 36, 42 ( 90. if and 5 48. /).
k {() !_ without the tone, eg. ruprn Dent. 14, 17 [Lev. 11, 18 Orn]
n"^^2 ">^ri ^rw t^wi heated, Hos. 7, 4; comp. Ex. 28, 19. Ezck. 7, 25. 40, 19.
2 Ki. 15, 29. In all these examples the usual tonc-l>earing is probably
intended, but the Punctuators, who considered the feminine ending inappropriate,
prodaced a kiad of beaihi form (ee | 90. c) by the retiactioB of the tone. [In
9 Ki. itf, 18* b. 94, 19. Eaek. ai, 31 (note ia eadi eaie the following H), as abo
la Job i%, 13, the text is probably in error.]
/ (/) as an old feminine terminatloo picserved also in Syriac in
Arabic and (contracted to f) in Ethiopic, very probably occors in the proper
name nb, cf. Noldcke, ZDMG. xl. p. 183: also H'^bj; ten {Jem: probably
arises irom an original 'esray ; so Wright, Comparativt Grammar ^ p. 138; Konig,
Lehrgebaudty ii. 427.
whotty incofieot to xîid the emnrAending il^* as the original
3. It is
commmUal cndhig IV__ as derived from it.
tennlaation of the fismlniae and the
The Ethiopic still has the n throughout, so too the Assyrian (a/, A); in
Phoenician also the frmininics end for the most part in n wliich is pronoanoed
* In I Sam. 20, 27 also, where the Masora (see Baer on Jos. 5, 11) for some
unknown reason requires rHnOO, read with ed. Mant., Jabionski, Opttius, and
CHnsburg, mnOD.
' la ending the n 4 cu only be cooddeved consonantal in the sense diat
this
the n was originally aspirated, and afterwards the mute D was dropped before 4, '
jtist as the old Persian mithra l>ecame in modem Persian mihr so .Sociii, who
nlso points to the Arabic jjausal form in ah, and observes that among some of
the modern BeUwan an ^ is still heard as a fern, endmg. In Hebrew this con-
sonantal terminatioa was entirely abandoned, at any rate in later times.
Digitized by Google
8a.] Primitive Noutts, 235
^ die woldi fimnd in Gfeek aad lew ffcqnentljr in M (les
lAtb tnlhois;
GcMoii, Monumm. PAtm., pp. 439, 440; SchiodeTf PJU^ ^taekt, p. 169 iqq.)*
The ancient Arabic has the obttite vowd ending ICaicely anywhere bttt in pause;
in modem Arabic the leletion between the two endings ia Ypj mudi as in
Hebrew.
{ 61 DenwUion of Nmmt^
Noans are hj their derivation either primiHve^ i.e. cannot be a
connected with any verbal stem at present extant (see 82), such
as father, DS! viotJur (but see both words in the Lexicon ;
according
to Stade anil others 3^*, D??, S:c., arc children's words and terms of
endearment, and so really primitive nouns), or derivatives Le. either
Derivativa verbalia ( 5^3 -85) in the sense indicated above in 30. a
and 79. e.g. 3*5 high, non high place, D^"D height, from to bt
high^ or leas frequently Derivativa denminativa ({ 86), e.g. n^^po

ihe place ai ike ftei^ from ^ foot.
Rem. I. The earlier grammarians comldar the iri> alone as stem and, tbeie' $
fore, ff n<Mins as verbals, dividing Format midu, i. e. sncfa as
them into ()
have only the ihne (or fxvo) radically and (jt) Ftrmat auitai\ ^ u h is Imve
formative letters or syllables added nt the beginning or end, c nO^DD, nO^D. j^'
The formative letters used for this purpose are V Xl 3 D K H (VJJU^H^ and
the treatment of nouns formerly followed this order.
According to the view of roots and stems presented in i 30. d, noons (other than C
denominiUwes) are derived not from the verbal stem, bat either from the
(ahstract) root or frcnn the stQl nndefined stem. &i the following pages, how-
ever, the arrangement according to the verbal item ia retained as being simpler
for the beginner. Comp. % 79. a.
2. Compound nouns as appdhitivcs arc vcr)- rare in Hebrew, e.g. i^*^3 'a'orth- d
lessness, baseness. On the other hand, they very frequeully occur a> proper
names, e.g. \matt oj God), D^jJ^VlJ \ \ah-d.'c raises up\ VlJg|JT i^Yahiot
êngthtns\ &C.*
{ 89. PrimUivt Nouns,
The number of priwiiiiot noims in the sense used in ) 81 is smaU,

sinoe those nouns, which in other buiguages are represented as
independent noun-stems, can easily be traced back in Hebrew to the
* From this vox mtmaHaUs the mmkm aueta are also called by the older
grammarians nomina heemantiau
^ G. RamTnrlt {('hrr die iusamment^tetzten jVomina im Hebr., Halle, 1883,
and Leipzig, 1884; retuguues as appellatives only (comp. below, 85. v/)
and niDijJf (the latter certainly incorrectly [sec, however, Noldcke, ZA 7 If. 1897,
p. 183 sqq.l\ In p. 8 si\<] - the author gives a list of ' logical compotmdt,' Le. new
tenns formed by couipoi>iuou with the natives H^^ ^^3^
Digitized by Coggle
236 The Noun,
verbal idea, e.g. names of animate and natural objects, as

he-gcal (prop, shaggy, from "^P^), barley (prop, priekly, also
from ^yfe'), 'TT^pn j/t^r^ (prop. sc. avis\ 3nt ôA/ (from 3riT = DTlJf
/(> j/z/wif, to be yellow). Thus there remain only a few nouns, e. g.

several names of members of tlie body in men or beasts, to which
a corresponding verbal stem cannot be assigned at ali, or at any
rate only indirectly (irom other Semitic dialects), e.g. l"^ Aom,
88. Verbal Nouns in General.
a 1. In Hebrew, as in Greek and Latin, the verbal nouns are

connected in form and meaning primarily with certain forms of
the verb, especially the participles and infinitives, which are them-
selves, even in their ordinary form, frequently used precisely like
nouns, e.g. enemy^ rij^ io know, htewledê. Still oftener, however,
oertidn forms of die infinitive and participle, which are seldom or

never found as such in ihe strong verb, though in use in the weak
verb and in tlic kindred dialects, came to be commonly used for
the verbal noun; e.g. tiie participial form ^Cf^. the infinitives of the
(Aramaic) form (as a noun also ^^\^), further ri^^,

'"^î^*
"^^^Z ( 45- ^) Ac. Others (as the Arabic shows) are properly
Intensive forms of the participle.
b 9. As regards their meaning, it follows from the nature of the

case that nouns which have the form of the infinitive regularly denote
the aciicn or sUUe, with other closely related ideas, and are therefore
mostly aisfrac/; while the participial nouns, on the contrary, .denote
for the most part the subjeci of the action or state, and are therefore
concrete. Moreover, it is to be noticed, that a particular meaning
is attached to nian\ of the special forms of derivative nouns, although
it does not appear equally in them ail.
C Rem. It need not mppear strange, when we coniîcler the UMlogy of Other lan-
gtiafjcs, that a noon which in 'orm is properly ahsfrait afterwards acquire<l
a (ctu rdt sense, and vice vtrs.i. in English, we sny hii a. qitaintatiiw for the
pfTsom with whom be i;* acfuain/gJ ; the Godktad for God himseU ; m Hebrew
yitD acfufimiamce and an atfuatmtamte.
d The inner ooonesdoii io tbom^ between Semitic BOBn>fiociii end the eoire*
tpooding wrbel forau it iam^ted in the worics of De Legaide and Berth
(see the titlci at the head of ( 79) on very difTerent lines, but whh nany
points of nf^rrement. De Lagardc starts from the fact that language consists of
sentences. Tbe sentence which consists of only ont word, is calkd a verb, and
OigilKAHi^CMOgle
Verbal Nouns in GeneraL 237
aoythiog which senres as a complemeot to it, is A noon. olît fom of

the MntcfMe is the imperative. Cloiely related to it aie tiute kind* aentenoet
of ibe nature of Teibal fonns, differing eooording as the property of the particnlar
object of eenie is to be repre-entcd as invariable (form qatula\ or as liable to
ch.-irijê (form ga/i/a), or, finally, as a circum-tance which takes place liefore
our eyes (form qaiala^. Like the imperative, lUcsc three forms of sentences have
also been transformed into nouns, by means of certain phonetic changes,
especially by the omitdoa of the final vowels and the addition of different tei^
niaations to tiie last consonant of the stem. But jnit as the forms of the verbal
sentence undeigo munenms modifications (in the tenses, moods, and conjugations),
so alsK> do the nouns, sometimes by assimilation of the iincs'iffrtinl to the charac-
teristic vowel 'tjittui, qitil), sometimes by the Icnt^'tlienint; of the charnctcristic
vowel {âliii, qatil, qa/dl), or else thruugh tiie displacement of the accent and
the consequent lednction of the noon to a monosytlabic form iqaf/, qui I, qitl)^
or, finally, by formed from the derived iteois (or ooajngations), e. g.

their being
âttalt îdl
; &c. Foithcr modifications arise from the use of
qittil^ qittdl,
the various imperfect ami inriiiitlvc-forms. and also from the cin]tloyiiu'i.t of the
prefix m. Lastly, dinominalia are formed from tieverbalia by appending certain
suffixes.
De Logarde does not, however, claim to be able to show in the caw of cadi
particnlarnoun the lense it conveyed in primitive times; the origin of a number
of noons can now no longer be detected. In those, however, which are clearly
derived from verbs, tlie ordinal meaning is cliiefly determined by the diaractetisttc
vowel.
^ liailh's system is based on the thesis that *

all Semitic nouns, adjectives, and
participles are derived from either the perfect or the imperfect stem.' Thus, e. g.
is the infinitive of the perfect stem, ^^tS^ the infinitive of the imperfect stem,
33|p^ bfinitive of 39^> ^ dissyllabic nonn^forms the second vowel is always

alone characteristic Mid vowel unessential, and therefore
csKntial, the first
variable. Further modifications of the simple form are effected by strengthening

(sharjwnintj"^ the ?;ecrnd nr third consonant, by leii^'thctiing the characteristic
vowel (instead of \vhich, howLver, the feininiiie termination may also be uied^,
or by 'mctaplam,' i. e. by the use of noun-forms derived hom one of the two
intransitive stems for the other, e. g. qui! for qitl^ and vice vena.
In nouns of the perfect stem, the vowels s and u indicate intransitive formaticns,
die vowel a a transitive sense. In nouns of the imperfect stem on the contrary,
M and bein^ characteristic vowtls, indicate a transitive and a an intransitive
sense : f<i yaqtiilu is imperrcct of the transitive perfect qatala, and yaqt^Hi
imperfect of the intransitive perfects qatila and qatuia, 6cc. This explains how
noons apparently identical in form, may yet in sense belong to dilferent clssscs:
a fM//-fonn from a if-impeifect has a tnn^tive meaning but the same form from
a M-periiect has an intransitive meaning. This double system of perfect and
imperfect forms runs through the whole scheme of noun-formation, not only
the forms connected with the conjugations, bnt also the forms with prefixes and
suffixes.
Against the whole thewy it has been urged that

it subjects the development
of the language to a much too abstract mechanism, and further, that the meanings
of words as we find them may in many cases be due to a perversion of the
original sense* But though many of the details (e.g. the alleged unessential
Digitized by Google
The Noun, [840.
duuracter or the vowel of the fint syllable) remaio donbtfnt, yet the agreement
between the duotcterbttc vowel of certain noon CMOuUioBt and that of the
peiiect or Imperiect stem, ia aapported bjr indi a namber of incoateatabk iU'
itanoei, that there can be no doubt as to a rq^nlar, intimate connexion between
the two. At the same time it must be admitted that T>c T-.ipnrde has pat forward
mnriy important and stif^gestive points, and both scholars agree in laying stxeia
on one chaxactcrtsitic vowel as indicative of the meaning.
84 a. Nwm derived from the Simple Siem.
JtvUmitmty temari.fnm the statement made abore, ( 83. d, It followi that

an exteraal dmiUritf between foima it no proof of thdr similar origin, and,
vice versa, external difference does not exclode the possibility of their being
doseiy lelatcd both in origin and meaning*
I. /êmm wUM One Vema original Sêtt,
t. Nonns with one of the Ane short voweb after the 6ist radical, groinid>lbffm
fSfi, flSlf,
The supposition of meitosyllabu groond^fwrns was rendered necessary by tlie
character of form^ now existing in Hebrew, rr; wt-ll as in Arabic. tVc. But there
are various reasons for believing that ong.nally a toneless d was heard after
the second radical. The corresponding ^l//-forms in Assyrian (v. Delitzsch,

Assyrischt Grumm. p. 157 $q.)> Â the caseêndiog, aie ka^, tmrntm, ainm
(a^|, ]2)f bat without the caseîding, JkoM, Umas^ a/km. In

Delitssdi's opiaion the vowel fa only somded after the second radical in order
to avoid the donble consonant at the end. The phwals of the Hebrew segfaolates
however 93 (P and tbc forms mentioned below, letter
'sec <)i. r and point
rather to the f^ronml forms mdlak, siphar, qilJaS ; cf. PhHipi i. rtfitiai:r mr
Assyrioloê und vcrgleich. sem. Sprachvnssenschaft, ii. 373 sqq. lit cxj^laQation, 1
formerly adopted also in this Grammart of qHtl^fonnM as originally ^.i/AAforms

(cf. De Lagarde, Otersiekt, p. 73 sqq.) is supported by the Arabic mdifk (rarely
malk\ and still mote by ^"Jl, 13^, ^fTO, tlie connectiTe foims of TQ, ftc,
from groottd*fonns iSAr, ydrTkh, kMfJ, iJtf/. Even so the a of the plnral
remains as before, anexplnine<l. The same objection applies equally to
deriving' at least wnit- of the segholates from orif^nal mono<,)llabtc forms, cor-
rcspondini; to the Arabic intinitives giifl, qitl, qutl, unless it I'C n^nmc<l that
their plurals have been affecteil by the analogy of the (more numerous) forms
with d in the second sylUble.
() From the strong Stem tlie above diice ground-forms aie Ihither dcvdoped
to \ bog, (comp. f 37. r and in ( 93 the explanations of Puadigm I,
-^) ; wiUiont a helping vowel (f 38. d) Cf^ inUh. If the second or tbifd
radical be a gnttnral, a hdpii^ fnaka^ takes the place of the helping S*gMt,
* It is worthy of notice that St Jerome also (cf. Siegfried, ZAJV. iv. 76)
frrqncntly represents the vowel of the first syllable by et, e g. ^îfrr, ainrn, adtr^
ard. for 11^, 3*111, bvt udem, mtl, dcttr, &c,
1^, for
0^,
V Digitized by Google
84.] Nouns derived from the Simple Stem, 239
according to 3 3. </, e. g. jpf rRf3 eternity, work ; but, with middle H
or n, also Dn^ bread, DnT (as well as DPR) womb, ^ntC /^/, in* thumb ; so with
final t<")B <z Tfi^ axj, 5cc.; with a middle guttural also the mcKlification of
the principal vowel *f to docs not occur, e.g. liTI, 1^3, (exceptions, aj;ain,
DnS. Orn). On the inflexion, corap. % 93, r.aratligm I, a-f^ and the explanations,
in Ndn sin, the K has wholly lost its consonantal value.
Examples of feminines : nsiÔ (directly from the ground -form nialk, iin^), b
JTVnp a ecTi'en'n^ also "VTID), food (also b^N) ; with a middle guttoral
JTJJJ^J girl, nino purity (also inb). Comp. $ 94. Paradigm I.
{b) From weak stems; (a) from stems ^"y, e.g. ^ nose (from 'J/, hence
with form.itivc additions, e. g. ^SK for ânpt, my nose^, ; TJ^ a The-goat (ground-form
'fnz), fern. HBn wheat : (P) from stems yj? ^ 93. Par.adiji^m I, /~n) ;
rntrtcf,
Oy pf<*p!e I'so. when in close conncNion with the next word; unconnected DV ;
with article Dyn DU^, &c,^ ;

3"1 in the sense of much, hnt sn'tat, utimerotts
(also in close connt'xion 3*^) ; JH with the .-iniclc in close connexion PIH,
unconnected y*^n (on the varioas vocalization of DP yi, see further in Stade,
Grammaiikf 193- ^ ; with the 4f almys lengthened to 4, sta; fern, n^n life,
ad with attenuatioo of the 8 to f> iTTO mtetmrgj from tiie ground^fonn ff^f/,
QfC nuHtr, fern. tkearimg ; from die groaad'form fi?f^ ph statmUt fem.
n^. (y) from ttems VP (Famdigm I, g and ^; HID d^h (from jimI'M/, the
paming into the conespondlng comooant, as in ijVPI miMU^ or ^ntracted
0^ degtt tSW vrAi^, a Mi; fem. xfyg pwerumss (also contracted H^P)
from the ground-form qU^ Utt rwri, fem. ttorm. (8) from stems ^
(Paradigm T, 4); Tl^ m tMvt4ru (with n helping j^fWf instead of a helping
S'g/i/l/) from srf-i/, the / passing into the corresponding consonant; or contracted
f^n hosom, V*n 2 ^'i T^, 17 {elsewhere ^jy^ host ; fem. T\y^ grey hair; from
the ground-form qitj, p"! judgemmit fem. mI'^ understanding. () from stems
(Partdij^m T, partly forms sach as nzz ping, njn murmuring, rnS
a present, DlfJ? partly such as ^33 ^
^"Ifct a lion (ground-form biiky, îry) ;
comp. also tlic from- '"'rm ti'cms originally V'^^ Vlb' minirnins^ 'f^TOund-form
sihur' : fem. r,-st, niN3 t:xa!tatiott : from stems H^Sk a /a/ tail, and
with attenuation of J to / n^3lJ' iof-tivity, also H^SB', formed directly from the
m.asc. with the fem. termination D ;
from the ground-form qTfl. (from
h'^y ; f' m. /Vy, n^t^ and nakfiint-ss ; from the ground- fi>rm '/Îr//, ÎTi
(from f>.'/i:i' ; î'T, for fem. n'3>f a i//// directly from a y7a'f).
The m.Tsculines as well as the feminines of these segkolatc forms may have either d
an nhitraci or a concrete meaning. In the form the passive or at any rate
the abs tract me aning is by far the more common (e.g.^]^^ jvutA/iilncss. Abainct of
lya ; h^'il food, .i'c.>.
3. Nouns with one of the three short voweh under the second radictl present 6
ground-form q't<M, q'ffl, (f(i!P, e. p. C'DT hotuy. ^l*^ mkness, nnn terror; and so
always wiiii middle a a xooi/t fif^ sttmh. In reality tiiese
Digitized by Go<
240 The Noun [ 84 a.
fonas, tike the seôlates mentioned in No. i (lee above, letter a% are, probably, for
the most part to be referred to original dissylbbic forms, but the tone has been
shifted from its original plncc tho peniiltim.-i^ on to the uhimn. Thus dibtH
(originally ^///i<jJ" as ground-form of tJ'SI is suiiportcd Ixitli }<y the llcbn w ^Q"!
(with sufhx of the firiit }>erson), and by the Arabic dibs, the principal form;
bi*ir (according to Philippi with assimilation of the vowel of the second syllable
to that of the firrt) as ground^form of "Wa is attested by the Arabic ^'V; for B^Q
(AraMc AwV) simikrly a ground-form hCki may be infiened, just as a gronnd-form
fit{Si nnderlies the infinitives of the form TbD ^
11. A^SMir ttwTA an wi^mtt Skcrt Vowei in boik SyliaUes.
3. The groand>form ^df/, fem. qd/tUdt, develops in Hebrew to ( 93,

Baradigm II, a, 6) and H^Dip (f | 94, 95, Paradigm II, a, 4), mostly adjectives,
as Oan wise, ChTf fuw, upright; bat also sabstantives, as 13*^ a ward, and
even abstracts, as O^piUt, 3^ Atn^per, y^satUty; In the fon. Ircqnently
abstract, as TT^T^' rigktemsnw : with an initial gnttnral AlplK <-arM.Of the
same formation from verbs V'y arc 1*13 aloru, J3y (hud: passive pierced.
In verbs n''i> the final Yddh is almost always rejected, .nnd the J of the second
syllable Icngthcnetl to i. Thus Î'C' fidd, after rejection of the ^ and addition of n
as a vowel-letter, becomes mb' (comp. 93, Paradigm II,/); fem.. e.g. HB^
(masc. nsj beautiful ;
comp. 95, Paradigm \\,<, From a verb \'h the strong
form \y^, afflifted, occiini.
4. The giuuiid-fortn '/J///, fem. jrJ/Mi/, developed to ^0(5 ( 93, Paradigm II, c-e)
aud nbtp^, is frequciitly used as paiUciple of verbs middle e ( 50.^;, and hence
mostly with ui intransitive meaning; comp. old, an old man; 133 heavy;
fem. nDn3 H^DK and fTSB^ darkness, probably also n^^^ tirror if it be
cattle,
contracted
from HD^M. From verbs RDH k$at. HSB^ sleep. Inmlar,
Vrn^pi the htmckts ^ itf Jer. it, 16, &c., genfrally lefened to a sinff. Tl*7\
(stem nH)f and VHl^H Hos. 14, l tkeir women with child (from iTlH, x/. conUr,
f1lt,//r. ahol, and epnar. ni'tn%From a verb with consonantal Wiw:
1^ at taUt incorrectly written pJene Job ai, 33.
5. The ground-form ^<ffi7/, developed to (also written ^D^)* generally

forms adjectives, c. g. D*|( /rn>4r, /rVôA^ pin^ sweet, speckled,
hb^ iiMVnevnM, Ît^rawmT, pl9^î^, 3j>Ât7(|r, îrSSgoUen; )b^4ma//,only in
' On this theory cf. ftade, HebriUKki Grmnmat^, 199. bf De Lagafde,

Cbersicht. p. ,^7 sq. ; A. Millleri ZDMG, xlv. p. sa6, and especially Philippi
ZDMG. xlix. p. 208.
* In St. Jerome's time these forms were still pronounced sadaca (ni^lY),
faaca ;Tli^yi'\ naluiia TiSzyu \c., see Siegfried, ZAIV. iv. 79, Moreover, the
numerous .Thstr.icts of this form HD^p
a splintering^, '""J^V " ^*y^"5^ ^C.)
e g. t-ven
are undoubtedly to be regarded (with liarth, Nominaibildung, p. 87) as feminines

of infmitivcs of the form qd{&l, the lengthening of the second syllabic being balanced,
s in other cascsi by the additioii of the ftminine termination.
Digitized
84a.] Nouns derived from ihe Simple Stem. 241
sing, masc., with a parallel ibnn of the d tieated UDder letter/, fem. HlOp,
phtr. DÎO^. TheK fonnt ave not to be ooafoanded witii dioie in Na III from
the gnmnd-focm fdjfJ/. Fem. nmc, {ghrioms), nns^, n|3^ (dOuaU),
n;^^, with thupcDiag of the tlufd ladictl, in order to keep the original jI
short, and, simUafly, in the plnnb O^^nS, D^^^t ^^9^ '^'i ^

6. The gronnd-fonn fJ|nJ/ develops to i^Dg (oomp. | 93, Pafadigin II, Rem. x), i
e. g. 33^ AMrr 3|J ^mkA tfgrofett 1^ tmûm; firom a verb n"^ probably
of this daat is fify, gencfatty contracted to Jl, frimd^ giooid-fonn
diefiiU focmispicseivdiAin|lilr/Mii/, ferVrf^.
III. Nottm mtk am migmal Skcrt Vawgi in tJk* First amd a Long Vowd
in (he Second SyUabU.
7. The ground-fonn ql^lU ia Hebrew always develops to the form ^DQ, k

the A becoming an obaenie A The fact that this form is also mitten ^tD^, most
not lead to the coofoaion of these forms with those menticacd in No. $> from
the groond-lbim gdtMK Comp. biHi great, IS5*1^ My, pon t^fresting; also
the it^Smtiou abultUe of the form bÔf^ (% 45. a) as repiesentuig the abstract idea
of the verb, and abstract substantives like 1^33 AoMur, ti/>^ feau (Arab. siUdm) ;
also in an active sense, as ftOlf an atrAiteci, fn^ asuyer (of aaetals)> pM an
effressor; fcm. ttftl^ (with Uie change of the short vowel to vocal STted,
wlille in ^11, BtCt he/ere the tone it is lengthened to <f ; rnISS irtaehemu (fem.)
Jer. 3, 7> 10, with irr^;iilar retentioo of the J in the third syllable from the end.
8. The groond'form fiîl develops to (comp. % 93, Paradigm IV, a and h) , /

e.g. "Vnt a firisonci^ (D^?^ an anointed one; besides the passive it has also the
intrat!!?!tiTC sense (probnhly as a -irrr Ic strengthening of the q'sttl-UyxWi), c. ^. l^J^Jf
small, and even the active, e.g. a sfeaker (prophet'^, T^pB an overseer.
From verbs :
f ure, *3y foor, sec 93. it-. Of a ilitlerent kind Aiium
âccordiijg to Dc Lagarde, infinitivts) are ^^pK the inâihcring, "^^JfS virihiê,
8^^n ploughing time, harvest. On ni\{tJl-ioxvcx^ with a kindred meaning,

cf, 84*, letter/.
9. The gronnd-form q&t &t develops to Of this dam are aQ the pasrive m
particiito of Qat^ and (probably as a sdengthening of the fdMEAform) some itative
adjectives (f50w/), like lEûirifniMr, 0^4^^, t^njfstOlH; asrabstantives,
e.g. a fmhr. Fem., e.g. n^VQ virpt (prop, the secluded), Fnrthcr, some
eA the forms mentioned b f 84^* letter/, belong to this dam; see above, the
remark on letter /.
10. The groxmd-form qflAl or qut 'd in Hebrew changes the / to vocal ^^wA, M
and develops to (comp. 93, Paradigm IV, r) or with <f ohscnred
to S (as above, letter i-). Comf). remnant, honour, )2ri3 book iÂrab.
kUAl>), 21p Tfiffr the last three proliably loan-words from the Aramaic'^; of the
* Tn Nah. I, 3 only tlte QTrl requires "^1 (in the constr. state) for the
KHhibk inn}.
Digitized by Google
24a The Noun, [640.
ctber form, Artam^ n)l9n m au (Amb. ^wlr), M(Amb. VZM)

witH M proitQk (| 19. m), 9h}( rNi (twict: vtnaUy î]}- fem. rrt^
gpoi mm (Anb. l%fnl<) ; imi^, fljh^ (Antb. iUMMV) tattwfmg,
Q II, The proimd-form qtM Men to ocenr, e.g. in Hbinr fotUtk^
vamtyt ^"la /amT, T^DB ftt^ a 4wIm (tiie prop, name 1^ points
to the groimd-fona ff]f//, oomp. Aimb. 4fiMl!r).
^ IS. The ground-form Hebr. ^V^, e>g.

qf{ill or î?//?/, a imitdarjf^ y^ct>
a garnunt ; fern. n^^33 strength^ HJ^t^N faithfulness
g Rem. When the form? ^///J/ nrnl ififi! begin with N, they almost invarialily tnke
in the sinjjulnr, instcnd of the ortUiiary Ilaitph-S^ghdl, n Se:^ under the N; comp.
Dâ a |^5< //:mi*/, faithful, A^w/, llIN waist-band, "flDK
a bandf "rifiK aw *tph0d*; comp. 33. and the analogone cases of for
/r<if#/A>5VVui verbal fonos 5s. n, { 63./, f 76. A
IV. Nouns with a Long Votoel in the First Syllahli and origincUly
a Short Vowel in the Second Syllable.
V 13. The ground-form qdttll, in Hebre w, always changes the <i irito an obscure 6
boiP e g- ( 93, Paradigm III, a), Arab. Wilam, cterniiy; DHin

(Arab. hiUf}m) a seal according to I'.arth rather of Kgyptian orijînl, fem. HpTlh
(from hottlmt) ; worm (unlcs* from a stem like from DtJH ; see the
analogous cases in 85. On the participles Qal of verbs \\"^ (comp. % 93,
Paiadigm III, r)i formerly refetred to this dass^ cf. { 75. e; on the feminiiies
of the participles Q^lt îdi are formed with n of the iem., tee below, letter
Rem. Of a different kfaid (probably from a groond-form gaufal) are such forms
as }BfM (or f|flK Esek. lo, 9 ia the tame verse) a wheel; bî a foung iird,
JF 14. The ground-form y^^f// also becomes in Hebrew almost invariably ht^Sp (^Dp).
Besides parliciphs active masc. Qal this class include.^ also feminine^ of the form
ri^Dj), if their ground-form q'talt \% (^g. c) goes back to an original qAtilt. The
substantives of tlji'^ form, such a^> filb piiest (Arab, kdhln^, were also originally
participles Qal. The fem. of the subiitflntivos has e (lengthened from I) retained
before the tone, e. t:. mi>*a woman in trmnUl (comp. also milil the treacherous
woman, Jcr. 3, 8 ;
H^^bifn her that halUtkf Mic 4, 6 sq., Zcph. 3. 19 ; iTinb
a hiekbrt PA. 91, 4); the participles as a rule have the form n*l!)S the
original f having become SSifdj however, the form with ête occnis also in
fbe latter, Is. 99, 6. 8. 34, 9. Pa. 68, a6. zi8, 16 (alt in principal pause; in snb-
ordinate fauu 2 Sam. 13, so. Is. 33. 14 with a conjunctive aeoent. Cant, i, 6).
;
i 15. The gronnd-foim qiitSl, Hebrew (as river, Jer. 17, 8) or

^^p,
c. g. a pipe, commonly and to be so read, with Baer, also in Fs. tô, 4,
V. Noum with Limg Vewels he 60th SyUoNes,
U 16. ^t^^pi g* ^"tolP smoke. The few forms of this hind are prohably derived
from the groandoibnn qtÂt ig^0iT)t i.e< the original d has become an obscnre 4.
Digitized by Google
J 846.] Formation 0/Nouns from Intensive Stem, 243
84^. Formation of Nouns from ihe Inicnsive Stem.
This includes all form* v hich have arisen, either through the a
doubling of the middle radical, or the repetition of one or of two
coDflonants of tbe simple stem.
W. Kouus -uith the Middle Consonant sharpemd.
As in the corresponding verbal stems (comp. 52./^. so ako in some noun-

ibcmations of this class, the Dage^ in the second radical expresses an intensitication
of the idea of tibe iten, dtber empbMbuig die eneigy <^ the aetion or relatioo,
or elae indicatiiig a longer oootiiuiaDce of the relation or condition. Otiier noiina
of this chamcter are evidently only by>fomtt of tbe nottns derived ftom the simple
Mem* which were treated in the last section : cf. the instances adduced nnder
letters /"and ^^ and Barth. Xominalbildung, Introd. p. xi.
1 7. The ground-fortii / J// ?/, in Hebrc w except in infinitives Pi'el, like Fl^, frc), b
is mostly lcn[;thcncd to ^^(5; comp. a stag, fern. \ h'*}^^conslr. si. n^*X (from
^dyydU); comp. also th- f; n. ôriginating from Qal) 70,7^^ a fiame (according to
f 27. q for Idhh,':!/! ':), nZl'jn dry land (for harrdhhd^, D^ând JIH^^ a burning
fever, xWÎ and TSp'T dry land, nySD a seal-ring, TX^h^ amsumptum. Adjectives
of this class ('intensified participles of the active verb,* Barth, ibid., .^.^^ are
n33 tiTfit to gore, jealcus, (for kahhd'i, by 32. c) fying. Nomina
cpificum also, cnrioasly enough, are so treated in Hebrew (at least in the constr.
state of the sing.), althongh the corresponding Arabic form qdttdl points to .tu
original (Qnchangeable> in the second syllable { comp. ai| a a judge

(jmutr, St. )>1 Ps. 68, nsfi a cook, tihq (for lomfl) >&Arr {s^nstr, st. e^n,
but in tike pinr. ^11) ; Bhi ^korseman {fatparrif), toustr> st, thft Esek. a6, to,
18. Tbe gronnd-fonn qFtjai appcan in nn^ diy, n|t| ha^;ity (the f bebg C
knj,'thened to ? according to } %%, c\ if tiiese forms go back to <nigiaat ftîdy^
Sr"dy. On the nna1o^\ ,
however, of the adjectives denoting defects (see letter d
below), we shoiili] rather cxjêct a ground-form qiUtl ; moreover, iwwalt. ground-
form of the fern, vhy^ fooHsInw^s poe> , finck to .nn original ivrwilt^ see 69, c,
19. The ground-form giitldl; com]\ the fem. fiDDS spelt.
20. The groMnd-form (i^ffri; as "in|t alius; from the intensive stem, the ti
infinitives Pi'ef of the form ^J3p.

31. The ground'form tjliili, in IIcLrevv lengthened to ^^p. Of this form are
a considerable number of adjectives which denote a bodily or mental fault or defect.
Comp. n^K disabled, dumb, f|l hump-baeked, Mind, enn deaf (for
iirrtS), lame, nnyg ialdt fervent; Hj^B epmêd foUovrs tbe lane
analogy.
aa. The gronnd-fotm fÂ^l, comp. the remarks in letter b above, on the *
Nomina opificum ; moreover, to this cl.ns:. bclonQ infinitives PV'I of the Aramaic
form iTîâ a searching out; HB'â a request ; with middle t,'ttiiral êe $ 22. r)
nXN*^ couturneh, bat cf. also ^*n1yN3 K/ck. 12, with full lonL-thcnin- of the
original J before K ; H^pn^ comfort. From the attenuation of the d of this form
to f arises nadoabtedlj
R 2
Digitized by Google
244 The Noun, [846.
23. The f<mnd-f<vm ql^M^ e^g. l||jt huskmimmi (Arab. '4CMir).
94. The gnMiiiA>foim q^^t mott pmbably only a TKiiety of the form qS^H
with the J attenuated to f (as in No. 23), and the A obscured to^ (uin letters
ft and r) \
comp. 1133 //^/"<j (Arab, gilbbdr), "liD^ cavilUr, l^lf {pi^ at chirper)
a bird, '^S'S^ drunkard. On the other hand Ti^^ 3i7r probably arises from
yuliAd, an old participle passive of ^<i/, the A being dissimilated in the shaipened
syllabic before- 6: so Barth, ibid., p. 41 sq.
^ 25. The ground-form qiUjJl, ^^Sj?, almost exclusively of persons, who possess
some quality in aa intensive manner, e.g. 1*3^ strong^ p*^^ righteous, n^^B
fugitive (for barrt^^), violent (for 'irrts).
That some of these are only by-forms of the fdSflZ-dass (see above, remark on
letter a) appeals from the cmutr, si. p'lB rawmuKf, 9 (bat
Is. 5$, ^3p*)9
always), and aoooiding to Barth (ibid. 35. a) also from the unOr, a, (bnl dT.
ali I Sam. ai, 8) of l^^. Howem, the form TÎJ, as a name of God,
nay be inteiitionally differentiated from a poetic term for the boll.
In the same way I^DW /mawr, 0**10 eunuch {constr. st. alu .iys 0^0, plnr.
0*0^0, constr. st. *0^0 Gen. 40, 7, but in the book of sther always ^0^0.
with sitpfix always VD^^D, &c.), and p^riy weaned, may be regarded as by-foms
of the gdtfl-clzss with passive meaning, sec 5 -'^4 o, letter /.
^ 26, The ground-form (/dftul, ^^Di^, e. g. f^sn ip-adons, D^rn/// ^ compassion

(with virtual doubling of the n}, )*^"in diligent Tor harrus), probably, again, to
a large extent by-forms of the ^J//i/-class, 84 a, letter m. The same applies
to snbstantives like Ig'jjt a step (in ^15^, as well as VlB^, &c.), "T^y pillar
fern, nntan stripe (also llTian), ninisa security: cf. Barth, ibid., $ 84.
h 27. The ground funu ^MJl; besiidei. the infinilivcs absolute J'i'el of the form
also K>JI2 Jealous (as well as consequently an obscare fonn of gUttd/,
letter ).
I a8. The gronnd-form ^4^/4/, htsp, e. g. *\&y a <-Mr/>^ qfrnOal, tth^ reqmtat,
<ff/l, dtiatM tAi^f; with concrete veednK a diseipii,
stm^; fireqnently in the plural' in an abstmct sense, as b^Cni nr/rvcA,

D^tf^>f//i'i^ (the induction of a priest), 0^9 cmsolatiom, amâssim, XShsjf
a eAiiiUsf sUU*, tS^TI^ dismissalf U^l^ oistrtmiee,
VII. iKmMf vfitA tht Tkird Cmstmuti rtpea/al.
k *9* The ground-form qlftllfl, e. g.

f
JK^ quiet, fern. n|3KJ? (with sharpening
of the second in order to keep the preoedmg vowd short) ; pjp
plnr. 0*33^.
/ 30. The gnmnd-form gdiUI, in Hebrew bh^î of this form aie e.g. the
infinitiTcs /V/g^ (prop. F^Hl) of verbs r'lV, as tich comp. i 7s. iw.
m 31. The ground-form so the plnr. 0*J33| nV^î (with sharpening of the
'
Aite, as m Nob 99).
39. The gôond-lonn îjfiSi/, in nrns a iym/.
33. The gnmndofonn fiB|fl^ in fM.
Digitized by Google
86.] Nouns with Pre/annatives^ etc, 245
34. The ground-form </(?////, e.g. D^p^V plunder, "^^^JD heavy rant, y^tUff
giiitering taptstry, Jcr. 43, 10 Q^re-, with attenuation of the & to 1 D*"]'*}09
qU ihai wtaktA Uuk, Job 3, 5.
35. The froimd-fonn e.g. ITIM^ Jer. 43, 10 0^&^S|O admlUrits,
VIII. AWnM wrA /Af Acmd and Tkinl Cnufitmiit rtpnUtd,
36-39. CWitf, î^f/, ^/<r/irtf/, ^^/, {in/m, and //r. often with n
the tut consonant ibmrpened for thereasuti given in letter a above) ; conip. 1|iOBn
JUxnoms, n>p^j5^n slippery places, ni^^S"]^ ertakut (wajv)* i'^j'Olf pervtrsus ;
also wortU denoting colotirs, D'^Cl'IX (l ev. 13, 42. 49 in pause) reddish, fem.
n^TOTK, plur. nblDlK ; pTjTl^ greenish, plur. fem. npnpri^ j

//a////, n>D*DJ
very fair (to be read in Jer. 46, ao for iTDHD*) ; q^taUM, n^niHS? (fcin/ ^/./.vt/V/^ ;
^DDDK a rabble (augmented from ^^DK collected.. From a verb ^"D with aphaeresis
of the ii)itia] s) liable D''N!WV offspring. Moreover, of the <amc form, probably, are
TJSt^n a intmpei (for comp. ^^^.*) ami PlipngB an opening, Is. 61, i.
Also in Is. 2, 20 ni^B")Dn^ is to be read instead of fll'^B "^fl^ (from the sing,
n^^'^Bn a digging or burrtmdng animal, perhaps the mt^),
IX. Nlnms in wkieh tke WM* {Biliteml) Stem k repeated.
Naturally this class includes only isolated forms of the stems

Tbu:
W and \ q
40. h^l a wheel, and, with attenuation of the fiitf J to r (from

fem. n^|)n Mguisk (from Srior ^n) *\a9 (frn* UHktr) a talent; oomp.
;. also
a j/ar (from idfmU, Aiabie îdtf, for 3^),
V- %)f^
infin. (prop. A^/) from Vfi; fem. n^Jl^ a Mmiing p
(from i^D).
42. liri9 perhapa a (for kd^kOd), from TTd.

43* "1^11^ crown ef tk* heed (for fMdfSd^ from Tip; fom. n^^Jtt o
(for ^^/r), from i>^.
44. ''t^^ girdedt from Tkt; iottlet. from pp9
85. Nmns wilh Pre/ormatwes and AffiMrmaHvts.
These include nouns which are directly derived fruui verbal lorms a
'
having [^rdorniatives {HipHU, Hoph'al, Hithpdel, Niph'al, ^r.), as
well as those which are formed with other preformatives (k, % D, 3, n),
and finally those which are formed with afforraalives. The quadri-
literals and quinqueliteraU also are taken in connôn with these
fonnations, inasmuch as they arise almost always by the addition

or insertion of one or two consonants to the triliteral stem.
* On rrimiee 196 under n||.
Digitized by Goo
246 The Noun,
X. Nouns with Pre/omtaiives.
^ 45. Nouns w N ith prefixed. Corap. the substantives with K prosthetic ( 19. w},
such as yhTN arm (Jcr. 32, 21. Job 31, 22; elsewhere always yVl|) ; JQW
finger, ninift a /j/. In thc-c examples the K is a 'euphonic*
prefix (Barth, ihid., 150. ; in other cases it is ' esbeiitial' : cf. especially the
adjectives, 3p^< deceitful, ip cruel, jn^K permmis (for *aUast) [-the Arab,
'elatii^* used for expreaitng the conpur. ud snperl. dcgiiees]. The fern. TVVBf^
fitignua fart (of the mctl'OfleriBg) is a iwmcw cvrAriir of HipiCU, answering to
die Afamajc bfinitive of the catisal stem ÂflfK^.
C 46. Noons with n prefixed. Besides the ordinary infinitives of HipHtl
and ^pn, of Niph'al ^B^H, ^^gn (for hinq,), and of the conjugations formed
with the prefix nn, this class also includes some rare ttomina vcrhali'a derived
from Hiph'tl (cf. 72. c ,
viz. iT13n appearance (from 133), Is. 3,9; nSiH a swing-
ing (from 5j^3), M. 30, 28; nn3n a rest-giving. Est. 2, 18; H^Jfn dcliveratue
(from ^3). E*t. 4, 14 (nn Arnm. form cf. niTH Dan. : 5, io ;
perhaps also i>3*n
paldic, from haikiil, unlcis it be a foreign word frum the Assyrian ; see the I^^xicon.
d 47. Nouns with ^ prefixed, as nnSP oil, tMpi)^ VMilet^ V&Sfy owl (J) ; from wbs
1"y, e. g. DHpJ /AttV lî^> "^VIJ a nw^ ; from a rtA , an edoersMy,
Of a many proper names which have simply adopted
different diaiacter are the
the imperfect form, as pVfP , Sec 3}>I?^,

e 48. Nouns with D prefixed. This prtformative Mfm^ which is no donbt
connected with ^
4ml0,andni^ whoti (see 37 and 53. c), appears in a very
larpe niun{)er of nouns, and serves to express; the most varied modifications of the
idea of the stem: (Tj D suljcctivc, wlicn preformntive of the participles Pi'el,
Hiph'df Ilithpa'il, and other active conjugations. (2; D objective, when preformative
of the participles /Va^ Hoph*al, and otlier pamiTe conjugations, as well as of
nnmerons nonns. (3) D imimmitUalf as in fWBQ a key, ftc (4> X> hcai, as is
a drive fer eaitie, ftc
y As regsids tlie formation of these nouns, it is to be remarked that the pre-
formntive D was originally in most cases followed by a short df. This d, however,
i:i a closed syllable is freqiiLiitly nttenuated to t; in an open syllable before
the tone it is lengthened to d (so also the f, attenuated from d, is lengthened
to f), and In skieU (with snff. ^^3D) it even becomes unchangeable d. But
in an open ÎtaUe which does nei stand before the tone, the a necessarily
becomes vocal S'tud,
g The following fjoims are especially to he noticed: (a) ground-form mS^îl,

in Hebrew ijDpp e. g. 53p food, fern.
VSfycfQ kingdom, tt^f^ a knifo,
nSK^P Jor nDXilp by 23- ' I /'iisincss; from a *eri> J"D, fflD a gift; from
verbs NXiO a going forth, 36^0 a seat ; from verbs "B, 33*D /o/
(from maitddj ; with ^ (or \) assimilated, yifO fl deJ; from verbs H'^y, TjOD
<j screen, and with ti.e shortening of the .? under the preformative, np6 bitterness
(from II^D developed to a segbolate), fern. H^t^ desoiation; from a verb V^,
^ In D^jlinpp Cant. 5, 16. Neh. 8, 10, the first syllable is artificially opened
to avoid the cacophony; on the J of the second syllable comp. 93. et.
Digitized by Google
85.] Nouns with Preformaiives^ etc. 347
probably of this class is D^pO place, the J Icngibencd to J nnd obscured to 6
Arabic rn,li/iim)\ from vcrlis rr"^, '"tSIP appearance^ (for H^^) prop.
JJg
itUkHiioH, only in jyO^ f aaount of, in order thit,
[6} Ground-form miqtdl \X.h<: usual form of the infin. Qal in Aramaic), Ilebr. h
^9?P. e g- "a^JO' attk-dnm, fern. rqpnjjD wwr, paaiO a rjioyrp/ (with
^,S^W izMtcad of A bst in rfMrr. tf. r^fl? 4. 43 com p. prno distance), ;
D'loe^ a mrfM; Irom mbi e.g. aop fOMM/ (from mf-sOi; f in the
open syllable being lengthened to g; bat comp. alio 33, 4 ea temtr, state
from iHth thupening of the 6m zadical ; oonp. f 67* from verbs ^
njjpp pot^nm, fern. n|^.
(0 Gronnd-fonn mdqtU^ Hebi. ^P^, e^g. a st^fp&rt (fem. ?U||f^), f
n|Dp a xsmM> ftm. H^BbO a rmim; bom. a verb n|||^ on overthrow i from
Wbs r'P, |3D a jA*VA/ (from wdtf^M), ftm. n?3e .t roll (from ^^JS), .TIKO
acnrse (for m*'irrd from I^K); from a verb I'^D, K'piO snart (from rndtuqH).
id) Ground-form mr<//flf Uebr. ^Pi>p , e. g. IfiDD maumittgt C!9]9 ^''"^

{place of sacrifice) ; from a verb Vy, e. g. SDD tOHSttsus ; <
e) ground-form
m&qtul, Hcbr. bbpD, as fcm. nWwC /^W; from a rcrb V'y, fcm. HIDD
a covering (from T[3D), and also accord in to the Masora TiJTD a refuge, with
suffixes VVD and H^yO, plur. D*?VD. Very probably, however, most i( nut all of
tlursc forms arc to be referred to the stem T^V io Jlte for saf&ty^ and therciotc should
be written "^Tiyo, &c. The form TVD, if <lerived from the stem TTP, would mean
stronghold. Cf. also T|"^D faintn&ss, developed to a scgbolale, probably from
^D, for ntdrokh from ÎS*^! as QTID soundness of body, from DOn.
Wi& a long vowel hi the secanid ajUable (/) gronnd-fonn wtagtM, in : Hebr. /
always obscnied to e.g. ifEM^ swm/, nipjlO jAmCf/ from verbs Y^t e< "rtS^
/w/', fern, rri^ and TtyCKf (with the ^ depiciied to i0 hi a toodeis syllable
oomp. { 37. n)t rqptflDt ftc. Is. sa, 5.

(^} Gronnd-form mfgfdl, in Hebr. agaio b'tOî liJlDS j ewert, bWW^
stttmMng^toek (comp. nbove letter t, mdkkUU^ \ fern. rQt33D a fokiug^;
(A) the groond-forms maqttl and miqijl (comp. CiPp) are found only from
participles Iliph'H ; the fem. D^3^|)30, cheerfulness, is a dcQominatiTe formed
from a particijile Hiph'tl ; (i) ground-form ntdqtUt, as B'^sijO a garment.

Hem. Oil D as preforniative of the participles of all the conjut'^tinns except ;//
{>al and Xiph'al, comp. 52. f. Many of these participle* luve become sub-
sunlivcs, as m1D snufffrs, H^TOÔ destroyer, destruction.
49. Nouns with 3 prefixed. Besides the participles Ntph'al (ground-form n

ndqtSl, still retained e. g. in 1^ for lulw^ 1ml comoMXily attenuated to nrqiHl,
Hebr. ^Dp3) and the infinitive Ni^h*ai of the form ^bj^3, the prefix 3 b fonnd m
D^|'\nS3 7vrestlingst Gn. 30^ 8, which is also to be referred to Nifk'ed*
50W With lE^ prefixed, c. g. T\27\b^ a Jlanu. On this !îfKH fonnation, cf. a
* In Jer. s, 31 also, where Baer feqnires la'pn, read with ed. Mant., Ginsboitf,
Digitized by Google
948 "fî^ Noun. [ 85.
(spccrallv trvm wak stems. [?r the purpose of strengthening them pbonctictUy
Vîce Barth, ibiti., p. 183 and aotabty fmm verbs ^'2 and V'y. They may be
c' l'cytieii 3S tblluws: :S the grottcc-iorm in DDfin cstnck(J)\ from
rn5* 2BrW J settigr, lem. n^THFl txptctahom, finpin (from the llipHil
IT^V^' .["^.'WJ* : fwm 1 *"B, W*n t<mth : from verl>s V'D and n"i>,
rr^J^ :.;*.,' cjTtv /It . xuu "^^"^ bciil /rV'-i /V; from a verb V'D and K"^,
n^fcCTP .'.we'j" mibiibiv belwOg:;^ to this ."ujîs. from verbs cotjjuston,
'a4.i.i'.'i^> -.Sif**/ ^^feloped ^ZTt aid DCH-. Irom and ODD)*

.'"I
, ^. ;*;tii. "^"SffiP anii rrjKEB ^ttfy : from a verb H"^, e.g. rnpn
.
^. 1*3C*R -^tptcr iLt-^ îai- r!D^"Wl dfgp sUtp (probably
IMW tJt A^'A rp: ; im verb nfjOtn <f7riN (from the Hiph'tl-
imi^ ltk 's^ ..MH*^ ^ /uMT. ^ ii nB rtlM/ ; fron^cilM n^nipi /nw,
Jt*{^ .! .tf -MM . Ill AfvnMB Himtm^ caostr. it tidmaif is the wtttl word
K>4 '<utiM It t. a ^ 4amE with D rti tMA, yW&^ww<jM> pk, 113, firom the
<4vMl 5i*r* *iK"?V it .VjTii'lc :?ie ixial form of Ac infinitive of conjagation II.
îit<^ s^Nnas." " HiAkw i^S. eg. from a verb fem. nî)3Jni
^':ft.Nr t Tfo-. wjl^ a parallel form n'I"!P; in a passive

>yk.i>^. I .<.<4% i. "^^w"*^, c ^"^3? offit (for tSnf^h); very
i'ê^ Mujit (also hc2), n3njn
- iv>at ^vil>* 'C^jy Ji brvk.in,^ i/i/vn. HEi^n (7 7;'(7r'mf (like
.
>s ''^'i" , j^îii . jmc; very frcûtntly also a!> an
^ ."^'^Sr*^ ^Ht.:ism.i\ w*"!rH3R htitrmss, D^DVUJ? and Jltonan
XL Mr wM .{|8irft^.
< >j. N'-'.-.^x H.:^ t.t>\cvi. IVi'i."^'* ^'CCn vCTBPtT-'^ . and certainly ^n3 irp.
^""^-t^ ! S'tJi c:t* is prola.Lt> an inteQ!>itication of the
^1*. .^.Il s ;i .K v\.v--.v;t*Mci. ^Sf23 '-VWi. CvHUp. 30. <f.
i vt, \. ? i.fi,\w. Wiih an v.ngtnal as afifomuitiTe, vestilmU
r%mmm nKhMMUe). phir. D^G^K ; D|9 a swarm

. , ^ , iiv... 4 .'**M^ stf 7^) : th original affocmative iTm,
v)f iM vvA ^
phv. OnyV^ GcB. 3, 7 paiallel lona DV>^,
(1^^ îvw ^ 4.-Tt> thtt dna ab bdoi the admfas In and Am,
u. itk
I .^'i mi BMURy proper aamii, as Dfc^Tl, alio OfCÎ, od
..v0M. QljS^^ Q'Jiijf, jfcc; oa the other hand, form Ot^ft
, Nuiu. jt. (ivm a vvfb it*^, peohnblr iianda nadj lor the oidiaasy
M i
Nvvtui î,(h }
t4ttru >t rhe I it afdded by meant of a simple helping vowel
lit I .-.u.*/*, ttml I'jl^f J more frequently the addition is made
MMU s4 a HMW Huit^ 4t whkit in liebiew is modified to^^9U/(as
q[]|
m)
850 Nouns with Pre/ormatives, etc. 249
or lengthened to S (bvt dl also IVUhK and ITfl^) ! ^ fvtmsimt
|n|H^ a ttMtt an 9mng. Fram ui original A being dianged into an
obicaie 4 there probably arise lach fonna as o ^tUngawoft ffani (also
19"}^ go<^d; Jto^ hunger; from wba Y'^, |1W /r<if, fion wiV^,
a tnsion ; Jln^ a coat of mail; from a verb |"D, (the only iiistan<
with both D prcfonnative and fin afformativt) ' ;

ver}* frequently from the simple
stem uith an anorganic sharpening of the second radical, c. g. fi'^ST memorial,
P^^3 (kstru(thn {cottslr. si. P"\D1 and fSî'S)), Ac; comp. also fi^'}'! trfnamy
(^for '^n) and
% 93. . Proper names occur with inc termination as
Rem. A laigc number of proper names now ending in JT or \ used to V

be elassed as oouns originally formed with the sdBx ^ The anbsequent .
tejection of the final NA seemed to be confimcd by the form |^'!Tao, onoe used
(Zecb. I a, II) for (and ooomely in Prwr. 37. so K*iMkh

^lât for fns^ dtstnuHsn), also by the Mt that for rft)!^ the IXX give the
form SoAw^ or SaAeiy^y and especially that in the patronymics and tribal
names (S 86. a lHAm appears before the termioaticn I, as Cilomtc from
fhl and '^p'^V from rfe^ (modern nanae SaUM^ Wetistcin, however ;^jn
Delitx&ch's Commmtary on Job^ 1st ed., p. 599), explained the A'/2 in |'n2D
as a secondary addition to the common old-Palestinian termination i> OH^'^^^
toj/,iJiD*)j -^c.), and Barth i^NominalHMung, 224.^) has since shown the
nnsonndness of the prevailing view on other grotmds : the rejection of the NAh
wocdd be mach more likely to occur in the numeroas appellatives hk As than
In proper names; ^j'i'â and ^fr^ are doe to the necessity of av^ling, for
enphooic reaaona, snch fonns as gtU^tt Ulf4, ftc; cf. also from
On the affonnatbca n*_^, see below, f 86. A-i.
Xn. Qtuuiti/i/mUt mid QmrnqmUfrats,
55. IID^JI sieriiis, "''O^n a fiint, and the fcni. HS^'^] a glow, *Scc., have prob- w
ably arisen from the insertion of a ^; î~kn a locust, 0^1^ an axe, n^y^D
a hw$ek, Eiek. 31,5 (venes 6. 8 nfi^D), from insertioa of a Comp ,
moreover,
eîn a tikh vnu^lositms with an initial (),^$| a tat, C^33y
jfider, HSJg vmm, a Jlnw]^ftHi^ ftc Qainqvelitenl, 9T}Dy o
* The plural* 0^383 Jlmer^, Cant, a, la, and D^^fetpp thorns appear to be
formed directly from the singulars (comp. nif3) and b'iDj^ with the insertion
of (which becomes obscured to (';<^. Sec Ndldeke, Aland. Gr., p. if^g, Rem.
si m ila r ly, according to Hoffmann, '
Einige phoniz. Inschriften,' p. 15 \Âohand-
bmftm der GSttwger CesiUschaft dtr Wisstnsch,, xxxvi), D^J^y teares, Eaek,
14* 16, from
3{|f
3|y.
* Derenbottig (it'swr </ri /AviCu JukuSt 1883,
p. 165) infen from the above
examples and a comparison of the Aiabic *uffAr, sparrow (from fa/aria,U ri^X
that y was especially employed to fonn qnadiiliteial names of animals.
Digitized by Google
250 The Noun. [86.
86. Dmominathc Nouns.

a 1. Such are all nouns formed immedtakly from another noun,
whether the latter be primitive or derived from a vrr?t, e.g. pDIB
<
taskrn, immediately from Dn^ /Ae am/ (verbal stem cn^ U^beinfrmU\,
h 9. Most of the forms which nouns of this class assume have

alieadj been given in f 84 and 85* since the denominatives, as
secondary (although in some cases very old) forms, invariably follow
the analogy of the verbal derivatives. As, for instance, the verbals
with a prefixed D ( 85. to m) express the place Ac. of an action,
so the denominatives with o Ucal represent the place where a thing

is found or its neighbourhood (see letter e).
C The most common form^ of denom!nrni\ t s are

i. Those like the pjrHcifU Qai ^ letter j), e.g. ipfe' a f'Ordr, from
*. . . *
a gate; a herdsman, from a herd; D'la a vinedreatf, from Q^3
d . Those like the form qittal J 84 ^, letter b), e.g. <m arcA^r, firom ra'^
a iow. Both these forms (letten and </) indicate coitomaiy oceapwtiens, inhering
in the sabject, like Greek nouns in -nfs, rtvs, e. g. iroXir^;, ffait/MiTtvs.
C 3. Noons with D j
rcfixLî, denoting the place where a thinj,' is (comp.
S 85. c), or its tieighbourhoo<i, e.g. pyO a piiut of fountains from ,
j
the place aî'tti the feet, n1C^*^0 the fhre ahou/ (he luoii, from ij3"<^ CXI;
%W\fO (Air mK^^) a (Hcumber Û, from Jt^J cucunibtr. Comp. d/iirA;in'
from aîr<Aot.
4. Nouns with the termination or p to express adjectival ideas: pOlg
eastern, from D"]!?; I^Qj!? potttrutr^ from ^HK; J^JPH txttri^, from
probably also m/(A/, benoe Ûd mnmal, serpent, from TP^j^ a vdnding:
|n|^^ hraten, btm n^T^ itmst. Alio aistmetSf e.g. iUmbuss, from "^y.
Comp. S 85. With ft double tennination (At or i with /; ^^b*]^ rA^/wA,
kfuntfing (spbit); 3)|fi^ Aaiiluii n^ôrn /Myv^/[fem. plur.].
^ }1 nppean to be used as a diminutive ending (comp. the Sjniac )!} m JÎB^

/ayi^ M (in theeye). 4^ /iU qv, fm B^M; 00 the otlier hand |fa^
[' Cf. Bnrth. 5 211; Konip, H. t, 413. rHmintitive? in Semitic languages

are, li'>\?cv<.r, niosl commonly !ormed by inserting a y after the sccniul radical,
e.g. -Vraiii. ND\^^y, S) r. \ nA.'^v Aiab. a very ycum^ mm. kuuui},
a liHU iios;, Arc. Sine- t )lshrius<.n jSô"*, ^^jj] a little Îs. aS, 10. 13. Joli 36, 2)
has commonly l>ccu rcgardt.^1 asi an example of the same torm, to which others
have added O^^Se^ lii. 3, 18 (as though a foreign dialectical form tat thtmftit,
liitk stm), and pj^Z^X 2 Sam. 13, 20, aa a contemptuow diminntive fum of
f x67,W.Wfight, ^rut. Grumm} L f a69,De Lagaide,
l^^tpl^ ; cf. Ewald, J(MmA
Hldumg, pp. 85-87, Kdnlg, ii. i, p. 143 sq. The ezinenoe of the tbnn la Habiew
is dispBted bx Bnrth, f 192. A]
$860 Denominative Nouns, 251
adder, which was fonuerly regarded as a diminutiTC, is properly an adjectival

jiofm from ^Lfff to mi (hcnoe^ as It were, a rtiMmf creature) ; In tiie aame way
fmf imomnmHve fnm tH!^ ("IC^), and not a dimimmiivi (Jitus Uiik
Is a
pt^t and Uie like), but pto^ly ufrÛ {jriÛmis pt^) finally, I^^Vjb is not ;
iuMulaf but M mitfidal mum (used as an oniamentX and O*^^^ not /riliiriSr mek,
bat necklaei (from "^f^T 't^^^f^)' Comp. Delitach on Cant. 4, 9.
5. Peculiar to this class of nouns is the termination , which converts h

a snbstanttve into nn adjective, and is added csjtctially to numerals and names
of persons ami countries, in order to form ordinals, fâtronytims, and tribal uofttes
"hyi/cotwan, j.lur. D\i>31, from hxi/oct ; cruei, nD3 s/nin^-c, from 13^
straiiiêucss, ^T\r\.r\ Itnifer, from nHTl Ulcw, <cm. fl^nrU? aad H'PinJ^, plnr.
D^'nnn ni'nnn x; âjrto Moabiu, from awo.

tiu sixth, irom i^j^
plur. D'aXb, km. njatrtp and n*3Kip, plur. niUKip; Hebrew, plur.
onay and'irnay, fem. nnay, piur. ninny ; î^ljp^ l*raau, from ij^p^.
When the original substantive' is a comfoumt^ it is resolved again faito two woids,
e.g. ^rPrii BifâmiUt from pip!|}a (comp. on the use of the aitiele in such cases,
f 137- 'O-
Instead of we find in a few cases (a) the ending (as in Aram.), i
e.g. {crafty or, according to others, churlish)
y
if it stands for ^^33 and is not
rather from a stem 01 n^3 ; 'Hin "K^/nV^ f/<;M, Is. 19, 9 in jiausc; perhaps also
^3i3 a swarm of locusts, Am. 7, i. Nah. 3, 17; hardly 'ni3^;3 Is. 3S, 20. Hab.
3, 19; but ccrt.iinly in projier n.imes a3 ^2*11^ {Jerrctts) /uirzillai ^ ; and :7>) H ,
arising truni (fy, in H^'K Ulonging to fire (.B'K), i. t. a sacrifice offered by fire
VOllh (prop, milky) the storaX'Shrub, Arabic luhnay.
(S. AUtrvet nouns formed from concretes by the addition of W , n[* . ] J 95- k
comp. onr tennhiations -îSmir, -keod, -Mess, eg. nni)2 Z^'"/^* riUÔ kingdom.
(the loosely dosed syllable seems lo sImiw
vowel) ; nb^f^lf! wutmiood, from
the SSifS is
wntrnwr, n^p^^
^ wekMd from a foil
In Aram, this
fem. endhig IIA (or % with rejectioa of ibe fl) ts a common tenniaatton of the
infinitive in the derived conjogatioos (comp., as substantival infinitives of this
kind, n^ypC^ announcing, Eztk. 34, 26, and nV^STinn the making of a lca:ûe,
Dan. II, 23) ; ui Hebr. X\\ as a termination to express abstract ideas (as well as
those whiLh npi)ear to l>e directly derived from the verbal stem, as n^3D folly,
roKDT a hailing'') bctume^ more common only in the later Hooks. It is afiixtd
to adjectives ending in / (êe above, letter h) in rrt*^J3|t crueity, and D^^pDli?

upright position (Lev. 26, 13, used adverbially).
The endinji n*__ is luund e.irlicr, e. g. in n^X^ remainder, H'S'tf?. Prin- /

eipium, from C'lO - pnnceps. The termination 6th seems to occur in
nllDSn untdom (in Piov. z, so. 9, i, joined to a sit^miat; so alto ffSSSn Prov.
14, t, wbersb probably, nto30 should likewise be read) and in A^^^n Ecdes.
X, 17, Ac, with the paiallel form Tff?2v} Eecles. 10, 13.
* On "Ls. as an old fem* ending, see above, | 80. /.

' See acomplete list of instances in Kiioig, LtkfgdSuA, iL i, p. J03 iq.
Digitized by Goo
25a The Noun, ^ r 87.
87. 0/ iht Plural\ ^ ^^^"^
a L The regular pbtrai termination far the maseulint gaidtr is fi^-^,

e. g. no A^rx^y phir. O^MD hones; but also very often written
defectively especially when in the same word one of the
vowd letters, \ or precedes, e.g. Gen. i, ar Drin. Nouns in
make their plural in D'?^, c. g. ""l^y a Hebrew, plur.
(Ex.3, 1 8) J
usually conuaclion lakes place, e.g. Dn^V;
crimson ganiunis, from
^ Nouns in n_ lose this termination when they take ihe plural
) ending, e.g. nth sccr, plur. D'tn (comp. 75. /;).! n regard to the ^
. \. lo^'^ r.f the tone from the D in the two old plurais Djp waier and
'^'/^^ D^DB' ^'(n'^w, comp. 88. </ and 96.
^,
^ ^ The termination is sometimes assumed also by feminines
'
^
(comp. ufomitt, {96 under nylli; jtears, from njv^* D^rn
Atier, from 7!T1}, and is employed besides to represent intensive ideas
( 124. e), so that an indication of gender is not necessarily combined

with it (comp. also below, letters m-p).
^ This ending m is alio common in Phoenician, e.g. 09*1^ Siddnii ; Aramaic has
(n; Arabic ttna (nomiaative) and Sna (in the oblique cases, but in vul^ Arabic
in Is alio lued for the nominatiTe); ta Etfaiopic dn, Comp. alio the verbal
ending
g Leas freqtunti or only appaicnt temibatiotts of the plnr. nuMC ar&

(0) M io Axamaic*, finmd almost exclusively in the kter Books of the
Old Testament (apart from the poetical use b tome of the older and even the oldest
portions), vir. p37t3i%/, Prov. 3.1, 3, p3*TJf i Ki. 11, 33, pSH the guard, a KL
" fp<ia/, Ezek. 4, 9; defectively islands, Eltck. 36, 18; days,
1^?C
Dan. 13, 13. Comp. also p*^0 carpets, Jud. 5, 10 'in the North-Palestinian song
of Deborah, which has alio other linguistic pccuUaiitu - ; p>y j^tti/i, Mic. 3, I3
(? caused by the following XS) ;

\'hf0 7vords (from the Aram. H^D), Job 4, 3, and
twelve other places in Job bcsi'le (
D^^, ten tiracs in Jol ;
further, J^^H Job 24, 33,
pinK 31, 10, and l^tppîw' Lam. i,

4, pSiR 4, 3.
The following form is doubtful
y (^) _ (with the D rejt ctcd, as, according to some, in the dual *T for D^T
Eêk. 13, 18, comp. 88. c), e.g. stringtd imirumrnis, l\. 45, 9 for 0^20
' Cf. Mayer Lambert, ' Remarqnes sur la formation da plnxiel h^brcu,* in the
Reum dits iludisjmnfet, udv. p. 99 iqq.

* On the connexion between lUl these endings see IXetiich's Abhoftdl. %ur hebr.
GremmaHk, Leipzig, 1846, p. 51 sqq.; Hal^vy, Rtvn^ dis Huda Jimtt, 1887,
p. 138 sqq.; [cf. also Driver, Tenses. 6, Oh. 2.]
* So also always on the MiitC stone, e.g. line 2 |t?^ (hirtjf; line 4 pÔ
line 5 pi jO* manj/ days, &c.
Digitized by Google
1870 Of the Plural. 253
(unless it is to be so written 1
' ; ""Dy feotlcs, Ps. 144, 2, and, probably, also
Lam. 3, 14 (in a Sam. 23, 44 it may be undcritood as ^QJJ my people ; comp. in the
parallel passage Ps. 18, 44 DV ; also in Cant. 8, a the t of ^3bl is better regarded
as a sujixj ; see also i Sam. 23, 8 as compared with i Chron. 11,11; i Sam. io, 38
JT'/i., and on the whole qneidoB GcMoiaSy LgAfgiMhide, p. 514 sqq. Mote
dottbtfnl still is
(e) (like the coostr. stete in S)nftc)y which is snppoaed to apptu in e. g. ^
princes, Jnd. 5, 15 (perhnps my prima is intended: tend widi LXX tPif)\ ton
Jer. 3 a, 14 (sjcooidiiig to othcfs lAiff/, see | 88. read )1fi^ 1^|^Vf1.
On *3ia and n^n, which were formerly so explained, see above, fi

86.
^6^n (for which the ri^t reading is certainly ^D^b^H) Is. 20, 4 can only be
intended by the Masora as a singular with the formative syllabi ^ = bareness;
in the Lord (prop, my lord, from the plnr. majtstatist DîlS< V

was originally a suffix, f 135. q.
(d) D_ a supposed plural ending in D33 = C'llS ^wo/j (or lice), which, /l
however, is prol>ably rather a collective sing, (from the stem wuh tlie
formative syllable D ; so D^D laJder (supposed by some to be a i)liir. like our
slairs) appears to be similarly formed from b^D; comp. on both, S5.
2. The plural termination of the femmim gmdtr is generally 1

^^(
^ indicated by the termination fri (often written defectively tl* , e*g.
V '
ofpraisi^ psabn, plur.Ttl^n^ (only in post-'biblical Hebrew
0^^, as in the titles of the printed editions, as well as I^Vrin *ifi^
the Bof^ 0/ Psalms)', rniv. a Utter, plur. ll^fK; n3 a well, plur.

rtTita. Feminines in H'-l. form their plural in Trt', e.g. n^lVD
an Egyptian zi-ojnan, plur. ni*^!|ro ; and thoê \n T\% cither make
as n^^JD Lngdi'm, plur. ni3)p, Dan. 8, 22 (cf. n^*3n alls,
Jer. 37, 16), or are inflected like nn^ Ustimonies (pronounced

*edh*w6lh for îdhHwSih),
It is only from a mistake or disregard of these fembine endings T\\ and fl^- ^
that some words ending with them form their jilural by the addition of
or nV_ ,
e.g. n*3n ^pear, plur. D^^''3^ and n^H^Jn ;
-whoredom, jdsr*
D*n^] (by the side of D":^!); D^n^pSs -oUcrwhooJ ; Difl^nC' //A, &c.
The termination -i'th stands primarily for -lith ^^which is the form it has in Arab., /
Eth., in the comlr. it. of Western Aramaic, in Eastern Syriac, and also in
Assyrian, Delitssch, Assyrische Gramm., p. 1S7; on the change of A mto an
obscore ^, see f 9. f)^ On the other hand, it is donbtfU whether this i/i is to be
xc^ôded as a lengthened and stranger form of the dngnlar fern, ending iUh
(comp. f 80. i)*
(f $, m\
* Aocordfaig to some this t is simply doe to a nc8:leet of the point
wbldi in MSS. and elsewhere marked the abbr Lîlti()n of the plnr. ending.
Henoe Chcyne (after Lowth) emends Is. 5, i into 0^*1)1 a ieve<mg.
Digitized by Google
354 The Noun. [{87.
How the changeable vowels of a noun arc shortened or become

vocal ^wd in consequence of the addition of the plural endings
is explained in |{ 9S-95.
tn 8. Words which in the singular are used both as masculine and

feminine ($122. d), often have in the plural parallel forms with the
masculine and feminine termir.aiioiis, c. ir. 3^ chml, plur. D^SV and
n^V; and each fomi may be treated either as masculine or feminine,
according to the usage of the particular wonl. But even those words,
of which the gender is invariable, sometimes have both plural forms,
e, g, *in masc. a {êmration^ plur. Dni'l and rill^l ; fern, a Jfuur^
plur. 0*38^ and niJ^ (see the Rem.). In these words the gender
of the plural forms remains the same as in the singular, e.g. *7IJ
masc. a Itbn, plur. masc, Zeph. 3, 3, nH^ masc.. Job 4s, 16.
^ Sometimes nnge naket ft distiaetloB between tiie two plunl foms of the eeme
WMd. Thns, d^s, X3^^ ymrs are the nftl but Xlte^ (011I7 twice, in the
cmstr. si. DcKt. 33, 7, Ps. 90, 15) tad nlSB^ (elio only in the cami^. j/. end before
suffixes'' are rarer poetic forms.
O A ^'ifTercnce of mcaninq' appears in covcml nanic3 of members of the l.ody,
the dual (sec RS'' dtnotinfj the living memhxTs thcmsrlvcs, while the plur. in HI
expresses something like them, but without life i.'i. \ e.g. Q^T^ hemds,
rtlj artifuial katUi, aUo e.g. the a/ vis of a throne ; 0^33 kaHds, T\SW2 handlts
(Lat. manuhria> ',
D^B foot^ JlteyB artificial feet vof tbeatk), Q^'JB Atf'^W, 111^^
horns (of the allai; ; Dî**!/ ^ts^ Ttd^fountaim,
p 4* A considerable number of masculines form their plural in n1,
while many feminines have a plural in QVr-> The gender of the

singuhr, however, as a rule remains the same in the plural, e.g. 3^
/aiher, plur. ;
rrtjili prtncts^ from IHB ; a light, plur.
D^T^KD and nnxt), comp. Gen. i, i6; ^t: nam, plur. nte; C':^'^?
concubim^ plur. D*^3^B,
Q Feminines endinc^ in T\ which take in the plural the termination D*. are
n^K tcri linth, nt?*N ietror, n^21 a rake of ntSH wheat, Hjsi) a l>ruk,
't-nly in poetry' a wort/, r\HD a ary measure, rpiyk' harh-y, and the following
nanit> of nnimnl? ^^^3*1 a hf? and Pji^ <i r/twr ; also, for D'iTS fein. <*^'.t. a singular
ni**3 is to be ajsamed. TO^X j/ito/ and HJ"* iva/ (see above, letter ij tftkc
both D^__. and T^S \

comp. finally TvplS^ an tar oj com, plur. DyS^^,
r 5. A strict distinction in gender between the two plural endings

is found, in fact, only in adjectives and participles, e. g. CT^tS iom^
nbfD bonae, masc., fem. So also in substantives of the
Digitized by Goo
88.] Of the Dual 255
Bame stem, where there is an express distiiictioii of sex, as //fV,
Rem. I . In some few words there u added to the plural ending Mi a itccond S
mucnllne pliml terminatioD (in tiie fonn of the MW/r. f/ comp. 89. c),
or a dual ending D^4-> ^-g- itil^ ^ plur. AtoSf rMu/r. st. ^nio^
(also bim^tki^ Is. 2^ 14, Job 9 8, &c, aometimcs as to the KnUU
^nwa; see f 95. ) ; t^B^j^P ^<^' ^ Sam. j6, ia ; r^pln ooff,
plur. ntotn JVMMiM, whence dnal O^Wn ^îSr wa/fr. This doable indication
of the plnial appeats also in the connexion of suffixes with tiie plntal ending
rrt Cf 91. m).
a. Some noons aie only naed in the $tngnUr (e. g. 0*1K 'nan, and collectively /
men ; a number of other nonns only in the plur-il. c. Q^HO men (the old sing.
VID is only preserved in proper name s, sec 90. in Kth. the sing, is /wtV, man ;
some of these have, moreover, a sinpiilar meaning ( 134. a), as h'*1^/(ve. In such
casts. li<nv ever, these forms can also express plurality, e. OB means also J'tues,
Gen. 40, J. Eick. 1, 6; comp. OîT^K God, and also ^Wj (^the n^î except
in Job and Daaielj oocnis only ten times. [In Job it oocnis forty<one and in
Daniel lour times])*
$ 88. 0/ tht DuaL

Comp. the literatnie on the Semitic dnal in Grfinert, Die B*gnffs-Prdpo9^*iîm%
tmddie DuaU fotiori im AUarak. (Wien i886) pu at.
1. The dual is a further indication of number, which originated ^

in early limes. In Hebrew, however, it is almost exclusively used
to denote those objects which naturally occur in pairs (see letter e).
The dual termination is never found in adjectives, verbs or pronouns.
In the noun it is indicated in both genders by the tennination 0^-4-
(no doubt connected with the plural ending O*.) appended to the
gniand*fomi^ e.g. both kauds, hoo days* Instead of
the feminine ending n.,., the dual fbnu is always added lo die old
ending a/A, but necessarily with a (since it is in an open syllable
before the tone), thus 0!^.^ e. g. lip, D^nsb dofh hps* From
a feminine with the ending n e.g. HB^ru (from n'husi) the dud
is formed like D^nB'n? double fetters.
With nouns which in the >int;ular have not a feminine ending, the t
dual termination is likewise really added to the ground-form ; but
the latter generally undergoes certain changes in consequence of the
' On dual endings appended to the plual see 87. x and ( 95. at the
beginning.
Digitized by Google
256 The Noun, [{88.
<
shifting of the tone, e. g. ^33 wing (ground-form kanaph), dual D^BJf
the first 4 becoming S'u if, since it no longer stands before the tone,
and the second i being lengthened before the new tone syllable.
In I Ki. 1 6, 34. a Ki. 5, 33 the fonn 0)^39 evidently merely points
to the cMsir, T??, which would be expected before *|D| ; cf.
in 3 KL 5, 33, and on the syntax see J 131. ^. In the segholate
forms (I 84 a, letter a) the dual ending is mostly added to the
ground-fonn, e. g. 731 fooi (ground-form riigl)^ dual DyH ; comp.,
< * <
however, D??'^? (only in the book of Daniel), as well as ^^Tp. from
n\ horn, and rrn) from "ni' iv^^tii' (as if from the plurals 0^^,
C Rem. r. Certain place-names were formerly reckoned as dnal-forms (so in
earlier editions of this (Mamniar, and still in Konig's LchrgeltaucU, ii. p. 437) as
{a) those in \\~ and e.g. ^yp{ Gen. 37, 17. and \Tp{ 2 Ki. 6, 13: fJlljJ
Jos. 21, 3:, identical with DYl*l|> ia i Chron. 6, (n (cf. ako the Moabilc nain^s
of towns in the Mesa' inscription, line 10 in*"^p = Hebrew D^n^lJJ; line 30

\rhi^ na = D^nbai n*? jcr. 48, 22; lines 31. 32 \Tm oâWh is. 15, 5,
&c.) ;
ib) in D_, so DJ^yn Jos. 15, 34 C
= D^rjJ Gen. 38, ai). The view that
and D_- arise from a contractioa of the dual terminations (as in
Wctlem Annw^ cf. also nom. oiv^ accDi. okU^ of the dual in Aiabic) and
teemed to be supported by the M^* iniGiiplion, triieie we 6nd (line ao)
)nMD /ttw Aumdred f^niqp, Hebrew DÎ^M^. Bvt in many ot iheK supposed
dnals either a doal sense cannot be detected at all, or it does not agtce at
any rate with the nature of the .'êmitic dual, as. found elsewhere. Hence it can
hardly be doubted that ^ *^ and D^^V in these j'lacc-names only arise from
a subsequent expansion of the terminations f

and D ; so Wellhauien,
JahrbtKherJur DcutiJu: Thiologie^xxi. /^^y, Phihppi, ZZ> J/ 1/. xxxii. 65 sq.; iiarth,
NommaMlAmgt p. 319* note 5; Strack, Kommentar tm GmusiSy p. 139. TtA

itrong^t aigmnent in favour of this ofîon is that we have a dear case of SDch
an ezpansioa hi the (fri pirfauum (f 17. f) XSî&r^^ for ob^^ ; (so aoeoiding
to Strack, even in old MSS. of the Miâ; cf. Urusalim in the Tel cl-Amama
tablets, and the Aramaic form ) : siniilarlv in the Aramaic 7*108^ HDB^
for the Hebrew fPIC^ Santaria.Vic may add to this list D^r^. D^H^
river countryX, Q^>'lp Kof^t Thoenician Uyxo ; also the words denoting time,
Oyiny midday (^Meia* inscription, line 15 O^rOf), and periiaps O^'^J in tki
evening, if the reijular expression D^B'jyiTpa Ex. 12, 6. 16, 12, Scq., is only due
to mistaking O^B'iy for a dual : LXX vfdt kn^ftm^ r6 JkiAiv^, and only in
Lev. 33, 5 <ii^ niaor rSof iawtpirStv.

Instead of the supposed dual Ezek. 13, 1 8 read O^T. On (generally
taken to be a double window) Jer. 22, 14, see above, S7. g.
f 2. Only apparently dual-forms are the words 0*0 -oafrr and fuavm,
the tcrmin.ition im havinj; abnormally lost the tone, which it otherwise alwnya
takes ^7-^)t &nd become shortened. Only ol is the sing. preserved in the
Digitized by Goo
88.] 0/ the Dual 257
proper lume ÔiriM ; c howefer, Anb. mdun and sSdtuii^ Eth. MMli'ftad amm^S
Angrr. Mil (plnr. and wtAmt) and cMit (plar. Imm^ and laaitfiii/).
2. The use of the dual in Hebrew ii> confined, except in die C .
numerals 2, 12, 200, &c. (see 97), practically to those objects
which are by nature or art alw a} s ft>und in pairs, espeeialh' to the
double members of the body (but not ncces:-arily so, comp. D^jn|
and nlvî arms, never in the dual), e.g. Q^*V toth hands^ DîlK /< ih
ears, D^B^ teeih (of bo-h rows) ; also D^&jJ. a /a/r ^ sandals^ DîJtÔ
a /a/'r ^ ^r<7/(^f, Lat. biianx, &c., or things which are at least thotigbt
of as forming a pair, c. g. O^P^ /kt^ (successive) dayti Lat htduun:
OlSSf^ Ao9 iMvib; I)!n|tt^ /tcv jwrr (in succession), Lat. bitmwm;
fwa cubHs\
Id the fomer ease the dual may be used for a plural, either Indefinite or defined
f
bj a numeral, where it is thought of in a doable anangeaacat, e. g. Q^^^l V?y^
fourftti. Lev. 11, 33; tfj^ (S^ nmi^ (i.e. three pain), la. 6, a, Eiek. i, 6;
ew Dfry nâC' irtvif Zech. 3. 9. Xt^jfh'^ aU hmst Exelc. 7, 17 ; D^Vi^S
di7 Aam6, Eiek. ai, 7 ;
0^ri!)3np r/mî, xr. 3, 10; domkMioaks, Eaek.
40^ 43. ^To exprea a certain emphasia the numeral tm i need with the dital
at in Jttd. 16, 38. Amoa 3, i J.See some other remarks on the aae of the dual
in \ 87. 0 and s.
It is not inijKissiblc that Hebrew at an earlier period made a more externive and g
freer use of tlic dual, aiid that the restrictions and limitations ol its use, mentioned
above, belong' to a relatively later ptiase of dcvclupment in the language. The
Arabic literary language forms the dual In the novo, prononn, and vexb, almoit aa
extenrivelf m the Sansiult or Greek ; bot in modem Arabic it hat almoat eotirely
disappeared in the verb, pronoun, and adjective. The Syriac has preserved it only
in a few stereotyped forms, with which such duals as the Latin duo. amhe, orto may
be compared. In the same way, the dual ut the Sanskrit is lost in the modern
Indian languages, and use iu Old Slavonic has been restricted later,
its full e. g. in
Bohemian, Hebrew, to /s/rr, anch aa hands fiee^ eyes carii

just at in On tlus
Germanic dnal, see Grimm's Gramm.^ and ed., L p. 814.
* Aocoidiag to Baith, ZDMG, alii. p. 341, the Hebrew mily, lam^y also are
only shottcned from original mfy and Samd/^ while the plnmU 0^, urc,
in Us opinioo, fonned on a &lse analogy, dne to the ftct that th^ foim^ with
snffises (19^1^, ^^f') appeared to represent plnrala.
* Bot for O^Bl'n Phv. a8, 6. 18 (which the Maaoia takes as two roads leading
from the crosi>ways) Cl'^Tn is to be read.
Digitized by G^)Îe
258 The Noun. ^. [89.
\^
f 80. 7%t Gen&he and CoHsiruci SiaU,
Pbilippi, Wesm mud Ur^nutf du Stat. CMstr. im Ifiir* Sm BtHrvg mr

Nfimimal/exioH im Stmifisckm iOnkmpt, Weimarp 1871, pt, 98 iqq. : w wUch
cf. Noldeke in tbe GSUir^gitckt Ctl. Amtfgmt 1871, 33.
a 1. The Hebrew language no longer makes a living use of cast*

endings \ but indicates the relaiiom of ease eiternally, either not at all
(this is so for the nominative, generally also for the aeetaative) or by

means of preposiuoiis ( 11 9V while the genitive relation is mostly
indicated l>y a close connexion (or interdependence) between the

Nomcn ra'cns and the Nomm rectum. Tliat is to say, the noun
which as genitive serves to define more particularly an immediately
preceding Nomen regms, remains entirely unchanged in its form.
The close combination, ho^vever, of the governing with the governed
noun, causes the tone firbt of all to be forced on to the latter', and j
'
the consequently weakened tone of the former word, then usually
involves fimher changes within it These changes to some extent
affect the consonants, but more especially the vocaliiation/'sinoe *y

vowels which had been lengthened by their position m or he/re the
tone^syllable necessarily become shortened, or are reduced to vocal
S*wd (comp. 9. a, c,k; 37. a-w) ; e. g. ward^ O^C^^ "^1 word

of God (a sort of compound, as with us in inverted order, God's-word,
in German Goltfmwrt, hou^top, landlord) ; 1J hand, T the hand
of the king; D"'*??"^ ivords, D^H the words of thi people. Thus
in Hebrew only the noun which stands before a genitive suffers
a change, and in grammatical language is said to be dependent,
or in the construct state, while a noun which has not a genitive after
it is said to be In the absolute state. It is sufficiently evident from

the above that the amsimel state Is not strictly to be regarded as
a syntatual and kgiced phenomenon, but rather as simply pkomtic
and rkytkmieaJ, depending on the circumstances of the tone. ,
$ Very frequently such interdependent words are also nnltcd by Maqfefk ($ '
tfai> however, is not necessary, but depends on the aeoenttmtion In the particniar
case. On the wider uses of die evmUr, tt, see the ^tax, f 130.
' On some remains of obsolete casc-codiiig-^ see 90.

* The same phenomenom of the tone taaj alio be easily seen in other iangnages,
when two words are doiely connected in a similar way. Otiserve, for example,
in German the natural stress on the last wonl in 'der Thron dts Konigs;* though
here the other order of the words (inadmissible in Hebrew) *dts /CSm^gf Tkrm*
exhibits the same pecnliarity.
Digitized by Google
90.] Probable Remains of Early Case-endings. 259
2. The vowil changes which are occasioned in many noons by the r .

'
consir uct s/a/e are more fully described in 92-95. Moreover, ihe '
,
terminaU'ons of the noun in the construct state sometimes assume .'\^

a special forni. Thus : {a) In the construci stott, plural and dual. V '^"^
the termination is , e. D*p^D horses, njnD *MD ihe horses 0/ i>"

^ V/ Pharaohs ov* 0^ /A^ king, c
Rem. Tbe of the dual hat evidentlj ariioi from (c O^P* hat the d
origin of the termnatioo in the <VMM/r. st, phu'. b diqmted. The Syrfftc
MM/r X/. in 0/ and the form of the plwal noon before raflizei OQU, ^HB^t Ac.,
f 91. k) woold point to n oontnction of an orijgmal as in the dnnL Bat

whether tlUs f was only transferred from the dual to the ploral (so Olshausen),
or is to be regarded as the abstract, collective temUojUion, as in (letter /)
and nin (so Philippi, ThwkgiKkt LitUratuntUmigt ^890^ col. 419), nuut be left
undecided.
(h) The original n-g. is regularly retained as the feminine termina- e

tion in the construct state sing, of those nouns which in the absolute
state end hi n_>, c. g. na!) queen, fisj^p the queen of Shfha. But
*
the feminine cnJings T\ ^ ,
T1__L, and also the plural ending
rri
J remain unchanged in the construci slaie.
(f) Nouns in n__ (cf. 75. from verbs (93- Paradigm III. f) f
form their constr. st. in >T_^ e.g. nKT j/^r, constr. nxn ;
probably tliis
t^-rr- is due to contraction of the original ^tth n added as a vowel

letter. The same contraction occurs in constr. *3 sujieuney;
^0, constr. 'D 10^ ('|), constr. K2 ('|) mt%.

On the terminations \ and ^-r- in the rMi/r. j/. see f 90.
80. Prolable Memains of Early Case-endings^ n_ locals ^-r- <2</ ^
in the Construct State,
K. U. NyUmder, Cm ITastuandttsenut imMskam, Upida 1883.
L As the Assyrian and old Arabic distinguish three cases by s}>ecial ^

endings, so also in the Hebrew noun there are three endings which,
in the main, correspond to tliose of ihe Arabic. In Hebrew, however,
they have for the most part lost their original signification, and heoce
can only be regarded now as decayed fragments of a fuller and more
vigorous organic period, since the language, in the condition in which
we find it in the Old Testament, no longer distinguishes tbe cases
by terminations.
s s
Digitized by Goc^^Îc
26o The Noun. [9D,
h In Aayrun tiie nile ii dit multi tiie nomfnstive, i die genitiTe and a dio
accnsative, * in spite of the many and vafioas exoeptiont to this lule which occur*
(Dclitzsch, Assyrische Gramm., 66), SidOtlavlyi the Arabic case-endings in
the fully declined nouns {Tri/fofrs) are: -u for the nominative, -j for the genitive,
and -a for the accusative; in the Dtptotcs the ending -a rcjirescnts the genitive
also. In modern Arabic thes endings have almost entirely disappeared, nnd
if they ai now and thea used, as among the Bedftwi, it is done without fegulariiy,
and one is intcrehangfd with another (Wallin, in ZDMG. p. 9, xiL p. 874;
Wetzstein, ibid. nil. p. 1x5 sq., and espedally Spitta, Gramm. da arai. FuJ^^
diakkts von Agypten, Leipz. x88o, 147 sqq.).
p. Even as early as the Sinaitic
inscriptions, their regular use is not maintained (Beer, 5'/W(/r<i Asiatica, iii. 1840,
p. xviii ;
Tuch, ZDAfG. iii. 139 sq.). Ethiopic has preserved only the -a (in
proper names 'hd), which is, however, still used for the wliule range of the
secnsative, and also (the dlsthiction of case being lost) as a tennination of the
tmsir. St* to conneot it with a following genitive.
C 2, The accusalive relation is preserved in Hebrew most clearly
in the (usually toneless) ending whicii is appended to tlie
substantive
{a) Most commonly to express direction tmoards an object, or

moiim io a place^, e.g. sea-wardt wesiwardt Msfward, ^^f^
northward, nviHf ft Attfria. A 1*1? (ftom tcOi
moufiiamf Gen, 14, io nfi(C (he eariht the Hmse, nrnrvn
t0 Tirah (nrin) i Ki, 14, 17 and elsewhere, nnfc to Gaza (njy)
Jud. 16, I ; with the article rnnn (0 the mountain, nn^s^? into the house^
'Tl'lD'!? into the chamhtr, i Ki. i, 15; 'ynNn' into the ittit^ Gen. l8, 6
, <
and elsewhere ; c\ cn wiih the t onstr. st. before a genitive ^pV nJT3
< <
into Josiph's house, (icn. 43, 17. 24 ;
333^ ^^P** tmvard the land of the
south, Gen. 20, i

;
D^XD naPR to the land of lgypty Ex. 4.20;
pb^l rnait? to the wildemest of Damascus, 1 Ki. 19, 15; ^^"^9
toward the sunrising, Deut. 4, 41 j and even with the plural n^^'njj'i
to the CAaideattSt Ezek. ii 24 ; n^PJ99^ towards tAe heavens.
On this meaning of the acottative see the Ssntax, { Y18. d, and cf. the Latin
accnsative of motion to a place* as in Komam pnftetus est^ dmum reugrti^ rm
ire. This view of the locative as an old accusative is, however, not undisputed.
Olsliaiiseii {l.chrhtuh, ( 1 30. a) considers the termination n although * of great
anli(juity, a new invention' in Hebrew; in the opinion of Praetorius (Zy^ /J^. iii.
215 sqq. } it was originally compatihic only with certain fonns of the comtr. st.
(such as iJ'DC' nrniD, &c.) and was then secondarily transferred to the more
common uses of the mUr. ttaU arid to the absolute state.
* n^HNn in Baer's text. Gen. 18, 6, is an enorj according to his preface to
Isaiah, p. t.
Digitized by Google
90.] Probable Remains of Early Case-endings, 261
Ran. Hie above examples are monAj icBdend definite hf the aitkle, or Iqr
a foUoNvIn^' genitive of defiaition, or are proper nuoce. fiat CMti like TB^^
*^T * ^ locative foim ef Us^ poHened a defining power.
(^) In a somewhat weakened sense, merely indicating the place d

whtre something is or happens (cf. 1 18. e.g. ^l^^^jfJjS Makauam,
1 Ki. 4, 14 ; naf^ fAerg (usually ihiiher\ Jer. 18, s, comp. a Ki. 23, 8,
and the expression h turn a tatrifice inio sweet smoke properly
knoards (he altar for on ihs aUar* On the other hand, n^3a Jer. 29,
15, and n^3| Hab. 3, 11, are to be regarded as ordinary accusatives of
direction, to Babylon, into the habilatwn; also expressions like "^^^DJf n^tB
the quarter /OiVnrds the north, Jos. 15, 5 (at the beginning of the verse,
rtoYs '^f the border Immrd the east), comp. 18, 15. 20. Ex. a6, 18,
Jer. 23, 8.
(f) The origiiuil force of (he ending n_ is also disregarded when

it is added to a substantive with a preposition pre&(ed, and this not
only after "^^ or "^y (which are easily explained), e.g. ^J'ypj*
vpwards^ dawmoards, nJnK^ to Sheol^'H,^ 18; T^Wpt /*

ApMq, Jos. 13, 4, raifiXjr^ kward the wrih, zek. 8, 14, comp.
Jttd. 20, 16 ; but also after a, and even after |D, e. g. n^>9 tk the
smUh, Jos. t5i 2f, comp. Jud. i4 t. t Sam. 23, 15. 19. 31, 13.
2 Sam. 20, 15. Jer. 53, 10 ;

^^nap /rom Sady/m, Jer. 27, 16; comp.
1,13. Jos. 10, 36. 15, 10, Jud. 21, 19. Is. 45, 6.
Rem. Old locative hams (or original accnsatiTes) arc, aoomding to the Masora, J"
ttUl to be found in
(") 1^^> ^ /CMM n^^, tbe anal word in prase finr n^ht, whidx it always
oonstrned aa mecoHne. The nominative of tins old accusative appcercd to
be preserved in the form 7y, onljQied in poetry, Is. 16, 3, constr, St. (even
used for the ahsoL st. in paose Is. ai, 11). Most probably, however, is to
be Noldeke and others, to a reduplicated form

referred, with ; cf. especially
the western .Xram.-vi*; tob'S, Syr. h'lyrJ, 8ic, If t!ic lin.il vowel lx-loiij,'s to the
ground-form, the Masoretic marking of the tone on the pcnullima is inexplicable.

Another instftnoe is nOKCD semtthin^, prolably h*m QtHD, CKO spot^ point,
generally with a ncfative 9i^kU^^ Sbnilarly D^PK Is. 8, 33 and (in pause)
Job 34, 13, nri^^D Hob. 8^ 7, and the place-name n^nf Jos. 21, 36, might be
explained at accosatives. Elaewheie, however, the toneless rL_ can be regarded
onlf aa a meaningless appendage or at the most as expressing poetic
emphasis; thns rOPK (in fame*) Job 37, ta ; dsatht Ps. 116^ 15
Otmm, ^ I24> 4* n^9f^ omhiTt Essk. 8, 2 [m t, 4 cf. f 80.

In Jos. 1 5, t a b pcobably only a scribal enor (dittogmphy). In Jnd. 14. 18
instead of the qnite nnsnitable poetic word noinn (towards the snn7Y) itad
noeoiding to 15, i rn*l5n ^ the Mde^kamitr,
Digitized by GciW
262 The Noun, [ 90.
g la die texmittfttioa nr|L4. oAen osed ia poetiy with fanfrriiics vis. HTI^
Urr^- (-n9|e), E. 15, 16 ; XVfffg Aeip (fTjJJ), Pi. 44, a?. 63* 94. 7 J
k. 9, 25. Hot. 10, 13. Ph. zss, 3 ; HT^ Fk. 91, 16 Job 5. 16;
?L 190^ I } dawknutt Job 10, aa ; nn&IDn Jer. iz 15 eomipl, see the
LXX ud Commentaries. These cases arc not to be taken as doable feminine
endinj^*, <;!nce the loss of the tone on the finnl syllable could then hardly be
explained, but they are further instances of an old accusative of direction or intcn-
tion. In examples like nn"JJ^ /or help (Ps. 44, 37) this is still quite apparent,
but eltewbeve bat beemne meaningless and
it u ued maAj for the lake of
*
poetical empbasis^
This termination n usually has reference to place (hence called

n__. locale) \
sometimes, however, its use is extended to time, as in
<
nc'p^^ D'pjp from year io jfear ; probably also (in spite of the tone
on the ultima) in rwy now, at this moment (from HJ), Its ttse in
ôîXy ad .pro/anumlâisUt is peculiar.
I Af the tennfaiation HL-, is properly toneless (eomp., howem, HTiy above^

epn^. St* Dent 4* 41 ; nni and t\t^ Joe. 19, 13, ftc) it genenllji as the
ahove etamj^ shor, emdses no influence wbatem upon the oieis of the
wotd; in the 0tar. sL rra*1D Jos. 18, la. i KL 19^ 15, and in the pioper nainei
nn| I KL a. 40, t^Sfl Sam. 6, Tttjilf a Chron. i4 9, nnllj x XL 17, 9^

n^nriV 1 Xi 4, IS, the d( is* letained even in an open toneÛaUe (coiqih,
howevcTy TfVn Gen. 14. 10, fT^JB Geo. a8 a from f^, with half lengdiemng
of the a to i; also n^DTl^ i Sam. 2$, 5 from bilf^ la icfholnte fimni, as
a general mlot the TL^ beat b joined to the alreadj developed fonn ci the
aSso/. St., except that the helpbg- vowel before H-- natarally beeooMS vocal
S*wd, c. g. nrP3, n^JjlKn Gen. 18, 6, and elsewhere; JT)J['n Jos. 17, ig, rTjjjfa*
Jud. 30, 16, &c., bat also H^nS Num. 34, 5 {eonstr. st.; likewise to be read
in the absolute in Ezek. 47, 19. 48, 38) and rnyE? Is. 38, 6 (with Sillu<j) ;
comp.
nii:3 Erek. 47, 19 and nrill (Tiaer, incorrectly, T^T\\) Mfc. 4, 12 (both in pause).
In the case of feminincs ending in n_ the n__ loiu! is added to the original
feminine ending H _ ( So. b), the J ol which (^since it then stands in an open
tooe-sy liable) is kn^^thened to d, e.g. nriyiH Moreover the termination H

is even weakened to il . in rOj lo Aoi, 1 Sam. 31, 2. 33, 9; whUher^
1 Ki.3, 36. 43 and lUll to Dedan, Ezek. 35, 13.
The form clings also to a few pbieHUunes, as nYs"]! Deut. lOb 7 ; nr^^
I Sam. 9, 4. 3 Ki. 4, 43 ; nnShf Num. 33, aasq.; fUJJ^ vene 33 aq.;
Jos. 19, 43, &c.; nmSK Mic. 5, I, *c]
* So Qimhi, and the Mant. ed. (Text reoept. h^^). i. e. locative from
CIs. 7, 30).
Digitized by Goo
il9o.] Probable Remains of Early Case-endings, 263
3. Less Irequent, and almost exclusively retained in poetic style, k

is the use of two other endings, which, along with the accusative
in n__. at one time probably corresponded to the Arabic case-endings,
viz. the so-called liUrae compagittis ^-, the original genitive ending,
and 1, in proper names also ^ corresponding to the Arabic nominative

ending. The language is, however, enHrdy uncontcious of any sense
of can in these endings, and they remain merely as archaic forms,
which occasionally come to be used in poetry or in exalted styles
and have also been unconsciously handed down from early times
in several compound proper names. In such names, as also elsewhere,
these endings now occur almost exclusively in the closcbL cuimcxion
of one noun with aiioihcr, i.e. in the construct state
(a) The ending ^ , as has been just remarked, is especially fre- /

quent in the constr. st., and almost always has the tone, viz. i^nt^
his ass's colt, Gen. 49, 11 ; ver. 12 D^*y ''i^^fB dark red 0/ eyet
jtîn that leaveth the flock ^ Zech. 11, 17 (comp. the preceding
"t) ; ^? '^?^ ^ ftcKA^ in the bmh, Deut 33, z6; appended

to the feminine ^ wkdher shku iy day or shkn iy
nightt Gen. 31, 39 (in prose^ but in very emphatic speech); ^T^t^fi
plena tusHHae^ Is. i, ai 0? Ô?! full 0/ people. Lam. 1,1; ^rriyfTJ

;
pnjn?!) after the manner of MtkMtedek, Ps. no, 4. To the same

category belong the rather numerous cases, in which a preposition
ib inserted between the construct and absolute stale (comp. 130. a),
without actually abolishing the dependent relation, e.g. Dîn 'nsi
she that was great among the nations ^ Lam. i, i (the removal of
<
tone from the ^-7- is here due apparently to the preceding ^(Ql,
where the retraction of the tone was required by the following tone-
syllable ; but oomp. also ibid, n^nfl ^^^^ and VjOnit Hos. 10, xi);
1$!^ Mtding unio the vmct Gen. 49, 11; comp. z. 15, 6(i),
Jer. to, 17 X*a, 2S, 33 JrVA. 49, 16 (bis). 51, 13 iT'M. Obad. 3.
Ps. 113, 5-9 (some of these in less dose connexion; in ver. 8 even
with the infinitive [but read probably la^B'inJ)). Lam. 4, 21 K'th.;
perhaps also Lev. 26, 42 (ter); Jer. 33, 20 (bis); Ps. ii6, i].
^ In other andeiit combinatioBS of words also, old ending ate often letained
which have elsewhere disap2>caic(), or become rare, e.g. the feminine ending
Jl__ in the emstr. st. (| 89. e), and in the verb before suffixes (( 59. a), in the
snme way various aichaic foims have been preserved in pnîer names and in
poetry.
Digitized by Google
264 The Noun.
ffl Oihcrwisc than in the constrtut state^ Hireq compaginis is also found
in Is. 22, 16 (bis). Ezek. 27, 3 K*th. Mic. 7. 14. Ps. toi, 5. 114, 8.
123, 1. Moreover, with a few particles, which are properly nouns

in the construct state, as 'ni^f (=nb^) / ; / '-P (i)oet.= JP)/roOT,
""^^ not, 'DDK mt (thrice in the fonnula liy 'Ofi(f) I am, and there
is none else Sestde me) Is. 47, 8. 10. Zeph. 9, 15. [The above are all
the cases in which this is attached to independent words in the

O. T. ; it 'occurs, however, besides] in compound proper names, as
pTp^jiO (kirigr 0/ righUausness), ^Nnna {nian of God), {favour
of God), and others (comp. also the Punic name Hannibal, i.e.
felD favour of Baal).
If {b) The ending > (always with the tone) is of much rarer occurrence,
and is found in prose only once, and then in elevated s^le. Gen. i, 94
n^-in;0 the beast of iho earth (=r3^?'7 '^lO ver. 25) ; in poetry, in the
same word, Ps. 50, 10. 79, a. 104, it. ao. Is. 56, 9. Zeph. a, 14;
otherwise only in
Beor, Num. 34, 3. 15;
^
and tt^
ton tfZôr, Num. 33,
a fountain of waters, Ps.
18; ^^ i
son of
r4, 8.
On the ending ^ see the Rem.

O Rem. Although the terminations * and \ ha%t iiuvv wholly lost their case-
meaning, in all probability they at one time in the lan^niage had the force of
Cttie^dings, in die nine wnj es il (letter c), especially n ndakt Anfaic
exhibits cxnctly corretpondins; temtimitioiit m feel
end only flexloiMl endings,
et a later period eonfosed or wholly rejected them (see above). The same
phenomenon also recurs in other languages. In Latin, for instance, we still find
a restricted use of the locative case (in names of towns, rttri, domi, 5:c.^ with the
same endings as in Sanskrit in modem Persian the plural endings
; and hd are
ancient case-terminations, which, however, no longer have any vital existence
as such, not to mention the Romance and Gemaaic languages. Even whete
the ancient Arabic incorporated the cascendings with the stem, and so pronotmced
them more strongly, as in ihu, dbi, db& (with comp. the Hebrew constr. st.
^Z2K from 3X fatht'r), the mcKlem lan|:^9ge, though still usinj; all three forms,
makes no strict distinction between ttie three cnses. Hence also, probably, in the
common lUbrew (omtr. si, ^Sbt, ^'^^ really a genitive ending; and in
Western Aramaic Hebr. VlD în proper names as

comp. also ^s^na), (bwce*), (^x^ê a aomiuativc ending ; and tliis
is the more intelligible as we hnd ^N'3S (Gen. 32, 31) by the side of ^^JXJB
(verse 3a), and ^pVl^t together with ^^*nK,
Digitized by Google
91.] The Noun ixiih Pyonominal Suffixes, 265
81. Ihe Noun with Pronominal Suffixes,
W. Das Prommen pers. snfixum 2 ac 3 prt, fhr,

Diehl, des H*kr, v$ drr
aâOammtiuJkeH ObHi^*nmg^ Gictieo, 1895.
With regard to the connexion of the noun with pronominal suffises, a

which then stand in a genitive relation ( 33. c\ and are, therefore,
necessarily appended to the cimtrmt staU of the noun, we shall first
consider, as in the verb (57 sqq.), the forms of the suffixes them-
selves, and then the various changes in the form of the noun to which
they are attached. The nouns are also tabulated in the Paradigms
of the flexion of the noim in 92 sqq. Comj). also ParadiL,^ A in
the Appendix. We are here primarily concerned with the different
forms of the suffixes when added to the singular, plural and dual
1 The Suffixes of the singular
With nouns ending in a
VouitL Consonant,
^
Sing. I. c. my.
fWf. ^ {pause
1^
(fit, 1 1 (VI), 14L his.
Vawd, ContMotii,
Plur. t. c, V
m, 09
1
m. on (poetic D
3^ (poet. ID) (poet. SrÂr)
I- earum.
Rem. I. There ii leu variety of forms in these UuA In Ihe verhal snflSxes;
the iMurticiiUr foimt Me vied m follows
() Tiioee without a oonoectiog vowel (on tbe derivntiea of these * coniwcrtng e
vowels* from ordinal stem-vowels, see note on $ 58./) nre joined to nowns of
n peenlisr form (see 196), the mmd^, j#. of whidi ends in a vowel, as ^f3^
and fra^ 03*;t, jyaij, Orjâjl, jnai|, sometimes lso to seghokte
foms ending in / from Tf^ stems (see | 93. x,y\ e.g. Dn^B the fruit of thtm.
Am. 9^ 14 (mlao tJÎQ Is. 37, 30 and elsewhere), ]T(^^ Jer. i% a 8 (also J^nB veise 5)
con^h, noieovcf, }na|n Lev. S, 16. 35 and similiu examples with (Ik 3, 17 }rj)
Digitized by Google
a66 The Noun,
Gen. ai, 28. Ezck. 13, 17. ifi, 53* (in other cases, e.g. Gen. i, 11. 4, 4. Ezek,
10, 12. Nah. 3, 8, the Masora by the jiunctuation ftvoid* recognizing
J'J-b-
these sufTixes as allachcd to singular nouns).
d ib) The forms with connectiog vowels ( 58./) are joined to noons ending in
ft OOnaooAiit The connecting vowel is regularly a in the 3rd sing. fern,

(for ofo) and 3rd plur, 0 ,
^2^^, In fbe |rd*^ Mr. \ (ri)( amee
the ^ it contKcted fimn and in the pantal foim cf the and JWODr. ^4.
(ft half lengthening of an original ^Jl).
The foma with ^ in the above-mentioned penona aie common only with nonna
in n.^ (&om sterna ^HMu/r. x/. (ci^ i ^/)t ^ S> (from sadayMi)
khfidd; rf^ its ieqf, la. 1, 30 ; rtK"^ Mr >(^cannKV /im^, 13. 4 (from
ma^9^hamaiÂh&, with tcjcctioo of the KMi and halMengthcning of the J to
S^W\iL the open tone-qrUaUe) i hat TC^ kirjiddt from iAAO^jAa. The ortho*
graphic retention of the \ e. g. ^pfc'j^^ ^^f^ ^ many fonna the appeannoe
*
of plurals; see instances in | 93. ss.
Apart from these fonna the connecting vowel in the 3id paia. oceosa only
in iaolated cases: VinlM his H^, Joh %$, 3; Wph after its kind, Gen. 1,13.
21. as and elsewhere; JuJ. 19, 24. Nah. i, 13. On the other hand in the
and sing. /em. and \^_* in the ist p!ur. are by far the most common formS|
while ?T . ^JL are of rare occurrence; see letter Instead of (n3__
in Gen. 10, 19. I'jc. 13, 16. Jer. 29, 25 and elsewhere, conip. k ^*î-h
D3 _ ,
(with S*7Vii mobiU or Hidiufn), if the last consonant of the noun
ilk a guttural, the fuims are 03, ^'g* jtj^ thy spirit , "jKlla /Ay
tr*ator. Is. 43, 1, D3{;n ymr friend. Job 6, 37 (on soch cases as DSinnS Hag. a, 5,
*' *
aeef xa^. * ' *
a. Race or inconect fonna are

0 Suig* lat pen. hi Each. 47, 7 (certainly only n aoilMil enor,
caaaed by ^SÊh m mae tf).
and pcia. m. in panae HOî e.g* ^919' haitd). Fa. 139, 5, comp. Fkor.
94, xo; once Ifjh Fa. 33,6 (comp. the analogona caaea in theveibalanffix { 75./!0>
yim. ip..^ Eidc 5, la (in 16, 53 aim for I^Q^Sf^ probably ^(ft^ ia intended),
Jer. II, 15. Ps. 103, 3. 116, 19. 135, 9 (corresponding to the Aramaic suffix
of the and /em. sing.; on the wholly abnormal nS-l. comp. letter /
below). Also 1|_ Is. aa, i, Ezek. 23, aS. 35,4.
3rd pers. ri (cf. 0

S 7.
^^HJ! 9' ^' '2' 3* 3$> " C&lwaya
with I^HN) ; HH: Num. 10, 36 ;
nh^ Dent. 34, 7 ; n;>3 Jer. ac^ 7. Nah. a, 1
(^"^t^ nVp a Ki. 19, 33 K'th., for which llfp is read in Is. 37, 84; n^*^ and
nn^:: - en. 49, u, cf V.r 22, 26 (C^r/h^y, in^D); nbO Ps. 10, 9. 37, 5 A'*(h, ;
njlDH Eick. 31, 18 and elsewhere, KUh.; nhK^DTl iiaek. 48, 18 [altogether
foartcen times in the Ttntatcnch, and some forty times ia Other Book.!* ; see Driver,
Sami*el, p. xxxv, and on a Sam. a, 9. ai, ij.
* Also hi Jer. 15, 10 read (aocofding to f 61. ^. end) ^^^/'jp DH^S ; in Hot.
7,6piol)nUyD91fbr.O;;Di(.
Digitized by Google
9i0 The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes, 267
3id>5m kft (with the lolteDyis of theiMgiS^, eompu 19^4, and the
nalogont caiei hi 58. ^
oocim npeatedljr before S^âdklfp^th and other
soft consonants, Ex. 9, 18 (before 1, if the text Is right), Lev. 13, 4 (beCm b%
Num. 15, 2S. 31. I Sam. i. 9. E/ck. 16, 44. 24, 6 (l)cfore 3), i Sam. 30, 30.
2 Ki. 8, 6. Prov. la, (before K\ Nah. 3, 9 (before K), P. 48, 14 (before D),
ck. 47, 10. Job 31, 22 twice ^before n% Is, 31, 3. Jer. o, 17 (before il), Num.
33, 4a. Amos t, II (before Lev. G, 1 (bcfurc y) ; even hi pausc^ Lev. is, 4a
and 5 bf Is. 93, 17. Prov. ai, 39, alio witii Zaqeph* b. 45, 6. Jer. <^6 ({nobablj},
44t 19; on riGB^ Lev. a6, 34andelaeidiere^ see f 47./. Cf. also IL^ Eaek. 3^, 5.
Sometimes the Maaoim appeals to regaid the VL^ iHtii femiaines as a diortcniiig
of ,
e.g. FIW Gen. 40, 10 for rlTlW. 339 Prov. 7, 8 for rtfUS; also tL^
for On__ in 03)ari3 Hos. 13, a, and DDI^ Job 5, 13. The examples, however,
are for the most p.irt uncertain, e. g. in Is. 38, 4 the reading is simply to he emended
to rrj^Ba, and in Zcch. 4, 2 to n^3, Job li, 9 to HTO, Neh. 5. I4 to nriB.
Ptur. istpcrs. ^3JL. in pause Job 2 2, 20 (where, liowcver, ^yC\i m certainly

J
to be rend ;
comp, Kuth 3, a. U. 4a, IQ, and so always all of us, Gen. 4a, 1
and elsewhere,
and pers.yinsw. nXi Eiek. 23, 48. 49.
3rd peis. masc, to_!L Ps. 17, 10 (on io in It^B In the samevmei and in Ft. 58,
see letter / below) ; Dn___ a Sam. 93, 6. JUtm. n|n_^ i Ki. 7, 37. Eaek, 16, 53
{iMkfamu)t n|_l_ Gen. 41, ai ; T\3l^ Gen. 30^ 41 ; Rnth i, 191 dsewbcre
eenerallj ui /siMff (Gen. ai, 39. 4a, 36. Jer. S, 7. Prov. 31, 99, Job 39, a)
iuiall7 fn as snffix to a noun, only in Is. 3,17.
F<Mr examples of singulan with plural snffixet see letter / below.
2. In the plurai masc, and in the t&taJ the suffixes are to be ^

regarded primarily as affixed to the original ending of the cmsiruei
tiaie (^-l** oomp. f 89. d). This endmg, however, has been preserved
unchanged only in the and/im. In 4no8t cases it is contracted to
as in the C0uir* ti, without saffizes (so tliroughout the plur.), whilst
in tfae and mate* and 3rd masc* and fm, sing, (except in the poetic
jrulf. the Vddh, which has really been dropped, is only ortho-
grapliically rclained. The preceding; a is then either fully lengthened
by the tone to d (as in the 3rd masc. sing.), or is modified to luue-
bearing S'ght^/ (as in the and masc. and 3rd /em. sing.). On the
I St pers, sing* see below, letter 1. Thus there arise the following
St^xiS of Phtral Nouns.

Singidar, JHurai.
I. c, ^-B-, pause ^-9- my* t, c, ^-i- our.
^m. v_^, poet Ms* w. I5n^_, poet.

f
^'
i / her*
Digitized by Google
26B The Noun.
i Thus the original V is {a) contracted in
< <
the 3rd sing, masc,
^T]"*^ and throughout the plural ^n'^WD, ^'D^D, &c.; (/y) retained
unchanged in the 1st sing. ''D^D, the real suffix-ending * (see letter V)
being united with the final YSdh of the ending ^ ; and in the
and fm. nag, ^^D^, with a helping-JHiirtq after the FSdh. On the
Other hand {f) the Ydih of ^-s- is lost in pronunciation and (a) the
^ lengthened to a in the 3rd masc* sing, 1^0%), i. e* s6sdw (pronounced
; or (^) & is modified to tone^bearing S^ghH in the snd
sing. 1*M0 from sUsakkS^ and in the 3rd /^-w. j/>/^. n^D from s4sitha.
Rem. I. The fact that ai elsewhere is always contracted to / is agâinst deriving
''j^WD, &c., from susai-ka, Sec. ; cf. the analogous cases of the inipf. of verbs n"^,
S 75. e and Since the YMh in these suffixes (except in the ist sing, and 2nd /em.
Hug.) is Rtaiiied only orthographically, it i oocMioiially oniittedS altiiough tint
in nnpoioted writing easily cawed confiidoD with the sing, noon, e. g. ^S"^*^ for
IJâfl"^ My Ex. 33, 13. Jos. I, 8. P*. 119, 37; for other examples, tee
Joi. ai, XI iqq. (ncn^D; tmt in Z Cfazon. 6, 40 sqq. always rC^) Jud. 19, 9.
I Ki. 8. 39^ Is. 58, 15. ii9f 41. 4J. 98 (prctebly, however, hi all these cases
the sing, is hitendcd) ; ^njl for hisfritmb^ i Sam. 30, s6. Fkov. a9 18
Job 4s, 10 (it is, howeveTf posuble to cxpfaun it here as a c^ketive awsnlar)
rrjOft Nom. ^ 8; nrtiO Jer. 19^ 8. 49, 17; Dan. 11, 6; onr
iniquities. Is. 64, 5. 6. Jer. 14, 7; Ex. 10, 9. Neh. 10, i ; Nam, S9, 33;
Danin jer. 44, 9 ; D3T Ps. 134, a ; tHiX^^tiêrthtir kinds, Gen. i, ai, comp. 4,
and Nah. 2, 8. The defective writing is especially freqnent in the 31 d masc. sing.
which in i^n- is almost always changed to

, , e. g. IJfn his arrows, Ps. 58, S,
O^r/ Vlfn, and so almost invariahlv the I^xiton), only three times Vlfl^.
/ 2. Unusual forms (but for the most part jtrobably only scribal errors) are
S"l>^'. 2nd Y>tis./ern. (after happy ! Eccles. lo, 17, which has become
stereotyped as an iaterjcction, and is therefore unchangeable; comp. Delitz^h on
the passage); ^^J-l. (comp. Syr. 2 Ki. 4, 3, and 7 in A'*M., Ps. 103, 3-5.
(*3J^ b/rOÎn
116, 7 Ecek. 16, 31 ?]^4. (so D3*__ in 6, 8) occnit with an
infin. ending in n), the ftl bebg therefoie treated as a plwal ending; similarlyi
the plnial snffix is sometimes finmd mth the feminine ending HI (Nam. 14, 33.
Is. 34, 4. Jer. 3, 8^ Esdc 16, t$. as, 7, as well as m 16, ao iS^ri, and Zeph. 3, ao),
with the ending fth (Lev. 5 a4> reading IfHBi^), and cmn with ê ordinary
feminine ending ath ; Is. 47, 13. Eiek. 35, 1 1. Ps. 9, 15. ISsra 9, 15.Wholly
abnormal is n^5Kj)D thy mtsscngers^ Nah. a 14, eêotly a case of dittogmphy
of the following H : read IHSfejl^.
> So hi the Mfla* inacriptiott, 1. aa TSsbxS^ Us towen (along with TTm Us

gates). Can it have been the rale to omit ^ after the termination Uhf Comp.
below, letters. In many of the above examples, however, the sing, was oertamly
intended.
Digitized by Google
9.J The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes. 269
aid nuuc, VI*J- Hab. 3. le. Job 34, 93$ Vl4- 1 &un. 30, a6. Ezek. 43, 17.
Nh. a, 4; ^rrt^ ( pnrelf Annudc fonn) Pk. 1x6, ta. 3rd fm Kn^.!- Eaek.
and peta. Nwr. Oa^lltStten (with t, ao Qimhi; Nofii : the vrocd ia.
howmri fcally corrupt) Jer. 35, 34 ^

3id Mur. nipn^^ Eidc. 40, 16 ; ftm, n^H*-^ E>ek. i, 11.
3. The teraiRatm toJL (alao with the daal, e.g. Pa. 58, 7. 59, 13), like
Id and to-l-, occura with die noon (as with the verb) almoit exdoaivdy in
the later poeU, and cannot, thereforei by itself be taken as an indication of archaic
lanqnafê. Bat even in later writings, s Dieh! (see above, before letter a) lias
liointc<i out, it is confined to parlicul ir poets and groups : certain I'salniS,
Ex. 15, Dcut. 32 Olid 33, 26-39, Instances are not to be regarded as
Anunatoma, but aie dne to the artiBdal me of old fomaf aa ia ahown hj the
evidently iatentsonal freqncnqr of then, e.g. ia a. 15. Pa. a and 140, and alao
by the fact that in Ex 13 thqr occnr aa veriial amffixea, in Dent. 3a omfy
aanoon anffixea.
8. It is clear and beyond doubt that the in these suffixes nt
with the plural noun belongs, in reality, to the ending of the cMt/mct
siaie of the masculine plural* Yet the consciousness of this fact
became so completely lost as -to admit of the striking peculiarity

(or rather inaccuracy) of appending those ji<^ji>forms, which include
tlic plural ending \. , even to the feminine plural in Hi (OînlWp,
^"rno^pj &c.), so that in reality the result is a double indication
of the plural'.
Such is the Mile : the singtilar suffix, however better d), also occnrs with the tt
endint^' fli ijirobaljly throuj^h the influence of Aramaic), e.g. ^HÎP Pi. 132, 12
(unless it be iin^, fur Wl^, as, according to Qimhi ia his Lexicon, ^JTlinj]} 2 Ki.
6, 8 is for ^n^nn) ;
"sjrijJD Dent. a8, 59 (treated 00 the analogy of an i>i/fw. T\'^b) ;
^n1^ Pa. 119! 98. SttQ. 9, 5; 1]n1^nM Eaek. 16, 3a. In the 3ni ^mr, thia
i even the rnle in the earlier Booka (aee the instances in Diehl, l.c, p. 8),
OrrtSK {tMr /iftAtn) oftener than DiT*|)!lK (this only in i Kl. 14, 15, and in
Jer., Eara, Neb., and Chron.) ; ao alwaya Qr^Ce^, IÎÔ^ f^îr names, Dnn^l
thtir gerurations. From parallel passages like i Sam. 22, 4^ compared with.
Ps. 18, 46; Is. 3, 4 with Mic. 4, 3, it a[>pe.irs that in m.any caacs the longer form
in On*__ can only subsequently have taken the place of D__
4, The a masculine and feminine noun o

following Paradigm of
with suffixes is based upon a monosyllabic noun with an unchangeable
vowel. With regard to the ending IW* in the cmtstr. tt, of the fem.
it should be further remarked that the short A of this ending is only
^ See an analogous case in % 87. s. Comp. alao the doaUe feminine endug
in tlie 3rd smg,fff, of verba
Digitized by CqI^
270 The Noun, [93,
retained before the grave suffixes 03 and before all the others
(the li^Û sufiixes) it is lexigdieucd 10 d.
Singular,
Masculine,
D^D a horse,
Sing. I. com. my horse* *riwtp my mare,

^DliD ihy horse, ^nWD thy mare,
!|Dtt ihy horse, ?ir'9^9 ^ fi^rf*
(m. 1M equm ews {sum),

'1/ ADto eguus euts (suus), i^np e^tftf tff Iff (fwi).
Plur. t.
:. com,
eon mir horse, our mare,
(m. 03D^p ^<?ir
0: jbrw. 05^0^9
j'<>tfr horse. janp^p your mare.
1 1
9 9^9
DD^D tY'^^'-f corum {sutis). DTip^p equa corum {sua).
equus earum (suus). I^Wp î***^

earum {sua).
^ Plural
Masailrm. Feminine.
Cp^D horses. niD^D mares,
Sing. I. r^M. ^P^D horses, ^niD^p my mares,
(m. T^'Ô Ify korses, ^^Dlp My mortf.
^* Tff^ equi euis n^niD^p equae aus (suae\

(sui).
Plur. I. eom, our horses, tt^niD^p our mares,

im. B3^^9 ^<?<^ horses. Oa^ri^p^D ^âr zar.
"\f. j'or horses, ja^rrtpiD jvwr marcs.
im, Cii'piD egui torum (sui). Dn''riip^D f(7r/<7e- eorum {suae).
|iTîWD tfâwjtf ÔTi^m (ji^).
02. Vmvel Changes in the Noun.
a L Vowel changes in the noon may be caused (a) hy dependence

on a following genitive, (b) hy connexion with pronominal suffixes,
(e) bj the plural and dual terminations, whether in the form of the
absolute state or of the construct (before a following genitive
of a noon or suffix).
Digitized by Google
92.] Vowel Changes in the Noun, 271
9. In an these caaes, the tone of the noun is moved forward either ^

one or two syllables^ while the tone of the evnstrmt siaie may even
be thrown upon the following word. In tl^ way the foll6wli^[
changes may arise:
(yd) When the iom is mmêd forward only one place, as is the case
when the plural and dual endings 0^, T\\ and are affixed,
as well as with all monosyllabic or paroxytone suffixes, then in
dissyllabic nouns the originally short vowel of the first syllable
(which was lengthened as being in an open syllable before the tone)

becomes vocal 4$W, since it no longer stands before the tone.
On the other hand, the originally short, but tone-lengthened vowel,
of the second syllable is retained as being now the pretonic vowel
e.g. "^y^ word (ground^form dâr\ plur. D*T7!; ^ ^f/^ fBoXSat.
beginning with a vowel, â*^, plur. ^3"^, *c.; |33
wtng, dual D^Bja. With an unchangeable vowel in the second

S) lKible: *T^{?fi overseer, plur. D^^pB with the suffix of the sing.
;
&c.: with the sujf. of the plur. "l^fpE, ^''^^^

*1'i?f , vt*??.
an unchangeable vowel in the first syllable: elemiiy, plur.
DôJ^y, with suff. ^^V, &c.'
But in participles of the form ^D^p, with tone-lcngtfjened i C

(originally i) in the second syllable, the / regularly becomes &*wd
mMe before a tone-bearing aflSz, e. g. 3|[iC enmy, plur. Q^^, with
ti^. Ac. Likewise hi words of the form ftc. (with
/ in the second syllable; { 84 letters /, % 85. i andifi), e.g.

fiWt dumb, plur. tW3^.
(^) When the tone of the construct state, plural or dual, is carried d
over to the following word, or, in consequence of the addition of
the grave suffixes to the constr. st. plur. or dual, is moved fonvard
two places within the word itself, in sucli cases the originally short
vowel of the second syllabic becomes vocal S*wdy while the vowel
of the first syllable reverts to its original shortness, e.g. D^n
thewords of (he p&ipU^ DJna'n your tuords, Onna"^ xicnr words (in all
which Instances the I of the first syUable is attenuated from an
(viginal ^.
' The participles Nifh'at ^niD Deut. 30, 4, \Tr\l 2 S.im. 14, 13, and some
plarals of the participic Iviph. of verbs K''^ fona an excepUoa; comp. 93. 00.
Digitized by Go
272 The Noun. [ 92.
0 In tlw sq^holale Ibrms in the singnlaf the stiffix U always appended to the
grOOnd'fonn Of^'P ^"'S' ''^r'r'P> "^^
^ other hand, before the endings ^
D* , fl^ (sometimes also before D|-!_) a Qamtf regularly occurs *, before which
the vowel i-f the first syllnltle then Wcomes vocal X^ri-if (0*2^^ 31^3^01. This
Qanus (on which comp. 84a, letter a) reuiains even bciorc the lij^'Iit sufi'ixei,
when attached to the plur. masc. (^dSd, 'j^SfjD Sec). On the otluT Innd, the
iomlr. St. plur. and dual, regularly, according to letter </, has the form
with grave suffix D^'âJj^ ^c., ^nj^'H from D^n^"^ folding-doffrs.
f {e) Before the S^wd mohile which precedes tlie suffix ^ when
foUowmg a consonant, the a-sound, as a rule, is the only tone-
lengthened vowel whidi remains in the final syllable (being now
in an open syllable befire the tone), e.g. ^tp^, ^li^li (on the
forms with i in the second syllable, see 93. gq), but before
the grave sufllxes D3~^ and \^~r- in the same position it reverts
to its original siioriness, as D^l^l {J''b}uir''khan), &c. In the same

way the tone-lcngihcned <i or / of the second syllable in the conslr.
St. sing, also becomes short again, since the consir. si. resigns lhi
principal tone to the following word, e.g. D^C^K W; flân njfn
(from
Rem. The Maaora (oonp. Diqduqe As^famim, p. 37) feekona thirteen woida
which fctain Qamtt in the constr. st., some of which had originallv d and, there*
fore, need not be considered. On the other hand,
Ezek. 40, 48, &.C. (in spite of the comtr. st. plur. ;
nD2?p i\. 65, 6. Prov.
25, 19 ; 3Vp 1 Sam. 13, 23 (so Ilaer. Imt ed. Mant., Ginsburg, &c.
Ezra 8, 30 and JJjip Prov. 18, 16 are very peculiar.
h 8. The vowel changes in the wAexion of fmmku nouns ( 95)

are not so considerable, since generally in the fonnation of the
feminine eiiher the original vowels have been retained, or they haW
already been shortened to vocal S
f Besides the vowel chan^'os discussed above in lettern a-if, \\liich take place
accordin;^ to the ^jeneral formative laws ( 25 phenomena
aS^, certain further
must also be considered m the inflexion of nouns, an accurate knowledge of

which icqniiea in each caae an investigation of the or^nal form of the wocda
In qveation (tee {f $^-96}. Sach are, e. g., the iîectioa of the n of
before all fonnative additioot (comp. 91. if), the diairpening of the final conionant
of stems in such cases as ph, \'pn, &c.
k There ia tliis striking difference between the vowel changes in the verb and
* P'ur tile rxuc exccpliotis *ee 93. / and ^ first note.
Digitized by Google
93 ] Panidigins of Masculine Nouns. 273
noon, moAjt that in a vnb when tennliuitioas are added. It U nuMilj Hie teoood
of two d>angcable vowels which become* vocal ^Hn^ (^j?^,
'^J?* ^^'p^'
^
in a noon, the fiiat Oa^^ D^"^)* comp. 17. 3.
08. Para^ms Masculme Nouns K

Masculine nouns from the simple stem may, as regards iheir form a
and ihc vi wrl changes connected with it, be divided inio /bur classes.
A synopsis of them is given in the following table, and they are
further explained below. Two general remarks may be premised :
(a) That ali feminines without a distinct! e tf rmination ( 122. A)

are treated like these masculine nouns, e. g. ^'^n y. noardf like m.
kitig, except that in the pbirai they usually take the termination T\\
thus niarin, cmuir, niariri (and so always before suffixes, see f 95).
if) That in the plural of the first three> classes a cliangeaUe vowel b
is always retained before the light suffixes as a lengthened pretonlc
vowel, whenever it also stands before the plural ending Q^-^. AU
suffixes, except D3, Dn, (02^, ^^'^^ are caUed
lighJ. Comp. 92. <r.
* A sort of detailed cotnmctuary on the following scheme of Hebrew declensions

is supplied by K. Konig in his iiui*-krit* Lthrgtiaml* dcr kttraisckm Sprocket
iL 1 vsee aboire, k 3./).
Digitized by Gorfl^ê
274 The Noun. [ 93-
r^ .' V ^ ParaUgms <f

I. ^
a. r. /
1 <
Sing,absoluii
{king) ^saftituary) {ayou(h) {perpdm
<
cwsiruct
'm
Damn
Pbtr, absolute i
comiruci
vnthHghisuff,
Wiih ^rave stiff.
Dyraa
T - 1*

Dual absolute
(/tew Â^) (saMdaI\
[proper name
,y tmstrwi i
1 * "S.
fs r 0
-J N
>
\.
\
--^
e. /
57>x^. absolute
(fluoldmam) {thouUer)
construct !
with light 5u(f.
with grave sujf. uoan

Pbtr.aisolutie
construe/
wi/h light suff. - T-J
wi/h grave suff
Dual absolute
ijoings) {icius)
construct
Digitized by Google
93 ] Paradigms of Masculine Nouns, 275
Masculine Noum,
I.
h. /. L n.
c <
rnu
VT OK ph
r
{death) {olive) \u.'hip) (/ruif) {sea) {mother) {statute)
V { r*
Dana

(/ttv days, (Meth)

mmm)
19
III. IV.
a.
3* njh
{fier) {oversur)
lh 'ana
IT?? ' : IT s
V
Daana
V IT
s r: : :
D<]h
'!
mm
- f 1
V "SI
* : 1
{^rfi/t(Wgs) {twc weeks)
T3 i
iized by Google
274 The Noun,
-< Paradigms of
'
I. J"
d. e.
' snnrtuary) {a youth) {ferf^fni/y)

<
try bps
wWk Ughisuf*
tvith grave suff, D31DD V S ! T V :-|- :

Phtr. absolute :
consiruci " nop

wUh light sujf,. "Si?,
with grave suff. V

Damn
Dual abfoiuU
(AO
[proper luune ]
ctnsimct t
1
C^
* II.
\
a. 6, r.
/
Sdig,ahto!uU MO "If
(tcvir) {oMotdtHon) {skotitder) {cowrie
9mirut TO
- t
Dan
- IB!
,f wilh light suff. t : It
M with grave suff,
Pharâbsoluk o^n
cmtimci *
fian
with light suff. ~r t

*3P!
with grave suff.
Dual absolute - T 1
,. construct
Digitized by Google
93 ] Paradigms of Masculine Nouns. 275
Masculine Nouns,
I.
S' t. L

T
OK pn
{dtatk) {olive) '
whip) {mothtr) ^stasias)
MM
it 1^
V : 1 :
- V
J
* a!
^ IK
tDn*r
* - 1- am
{tjres) (/nw f/ofX| (^cheeks) {hands) {teeth)
53
III. IV.
a. ^. C
ftp aro
T t
{gigrnity) {seer) {poor) iflLfriting)
^? T t
' * : 1
" ! 1
[03*3701
V -
S 1
i/airq/'/OMigs) {balafue) {twowuhs)

'2pto
T 8
Digitized by Google
1
274 The Noun. L 93.
V ^ Paradigms 0/
^
a. b.
jSIn!^. ahsoluU
'
samhmry) f'd yautli" ij^pftttUy) {work)
consirmi 1?3
v : t
- V : :

Plur, absolute T I
T T- !
construci
^ wHk light sujf* ^nx3
wUkgrMituJf, ~ 1^
Dual abtobtte
[pfopcr Mine. ]
cQHsiruct
'\
\ \
. ''11. /'
a.
/
oary
comtrvei Dan IB!
Jtt^. 1
iviih grave suff.

-Piuraholutt
^ ((mtrtui ^9 ..,
with light suff.
with grave sujf. -I -
Dual alfsolule - T t
{Joins) ^thighs)
construct
Digitized by Google
{ 93-] Paradigms of Masculine Nouns.
Masc$iMm Nmmi
o A. f. A, It.
Ph
(/MO ()
nto pn
*
nMc
IB*-
1 ;
MTPt t

foaani
DVT} ^ mDic
^nto mm
D2\-|'T i

V J V " V 1

\ftWt}
III. IV.
jt
a. a. 0. C.
nth ana
T
V f
( itTtlitv\ {jtnemy) {f^f) (cverseer) {poor)
T|>B ana
ôSiy 'TP?
, * ,
T 2
Digitized by Google
276 The Noun. C93-
ExpkmaUms 0/ Hu Paradijgm (see pp 274, 975).
^ 1. Paradigm I comprises the large class of segholak nouns ( 84 a,

letters a-e). In the lir.^l tiiicc examples, from a strong stem, the
ground-forms malk, siphr, giids have been ilevcloped by the adoption
of a helping: S'ghSI to (with a modified to e), *^2p (? lengthened
to /), Cnf) (i^ lengthened to rv). The next three examples, instead of
the helping S'ghdl, have a helping Palkah, on account of the middle
/) or final guttural {e). In all these cases the comtruci siafg
coincides exactly with the aisifiuie. The singular suffixes are added
to the groundoforai; but in c and / 9n if takes the place of the
original iff, and in d and /* the guttural requires a repetition of
the d and if in the form of a Haieph Î'K^) ; before a following
&*wd this Hateph passes into a simple helping vowel (a, according
to 28. c; hence 'I'jyJ , &c.
In the plural an </-sound (which, according to 84(7, letter is
most probably original) appears before the tone-bearing affix D^-r-i
in the form of a preionic Qames, whilst the short vowel of the

V
first syllable becomes vocal S'wd. This Qame^ again in the construct
state becomes vocal S'tod, so that the short vowel under the first
radical then stands in a half-closed syllable 03^, not Ac.),
On the other hand, the pretontc Qanuf of the absnhtk state is retained
before the light plural suffixes, whilst the grave suffixes are added
to the form of the cmttruct itak* ^The ending of the aisûte staU
of the dual is added as a rule, to the ground-form (so in a-d and Ji,
but comp. i). The c&nstruct state of the dual is generally the same
as that of the plural, except, of course, in cases like m.
^ Paradigms g and // cxhibii forms with middle u and i ( 84 a,
letter c, y and d); the ground-forms inaut and zait are always con-
tracted to mA, except in the aisoi, ting,y where u and 1 are
changed into the corresponding consonants ^ and \
Paradigm i exhibits one of the numerous forms in which the
contraction of a middle tr or f has already taken place in the tôl,
sing, (ground-ibrm iaut).
Paradigm is a formation from a stem n"t' (84 letter <r, *)
/ Parad igms /, m, n are forms from stems y'^y, and hence (see 67. a)
originally biliteral, âm^ 'm, Jkug, with the regular lengthening to
Digitized by Google
93 ] Paradigms of Masculine Nouns, 277
DJ, DK, ph. Before formative additions a sharpening, as in the
inflexion of verbs y''y, takes place in the second radical, e.g.
O'OI, &c. (see 84 a, letler
Remarks.
I. A. On I. (J and d (ground-form In pause the fall len^'thening to a ^
generally takes place, thus D73 vineyard, ^V}, JTl^ (from JHt)* and *o always
(except Ts. 4S, 11), in i-ar/'A, with the article, ^^Xn according to 35.0
(comp. also in the LXX the fonns 'AîA, Ic/tC' lor P^n^ HC") However, the
form with <^ is also sometiiaes foond in pause, aloog with that io d, e.g. lon
together with IDPl; and very frequently only the form with S'ghdl, eg. TwQ,
KBn f^flJf, ny3 perpttuity, N^S a xvottdcry righteoustuss, Dlj? /A* Aflj/,
in^ A^, With two .T/i&^/r, although with middle gottnial, we find OH^
D^) and DFtJ wwmi^ (In /okw Dni), besides Xsfi }vA. 5, 30 (in
hntd 0n /sim
/sKwDnp. A helping 5V*âl]^*tn^hef<ife liwdM,MMB^,K)0(^^ ft
^ ^9)*
B.
*Q|
The
^"Tiittcn rr}B), ooept in |tj|, tee letter v.
comtr, st. is almost always the same a* the absolute. Sometimes, h

however, under the infloence of n r1n.1l guttural or \ Pathah appears in the second
syllable as the principal vowel v^sce below, letter s), e.g. JHT (only in Num. 11, 7,
before Maqqcph i, "Tin (Cant. 3, 4; elsewhere ^HPI), JJDJ, "IRD as well as IHt.&c;
comp., moreover, finj? a Ki. la, 9 (for riPIg, >i/f. cmstr. from n[5p .
C. The n Ava/r is, according to $ 90. , regularly added to tbt alrenciy /

developed form, e.g. nX3 Ps. 116, 14, 18: nriTIBn Gen. 19, 6, to the doer; h\\\
also with a firmly closed syllable n3J0 Ex. 40, 24 ; under the influence of a guttural
or rnnn, nsnjt, in pause n)n (of. rnfa i Chron. 14, 16, from nt|).
D. The snfiizes of the singular are likewise added to the groundofonn, bnt forms k
with middle guttnzal talce â(tpk*Fatl^ instced of the S^wA quimtm; &c ,
(bat alio ^tpfl* 9cc), In a lather hiise nwnber of ^/foims, however,

befbie suffixes in tiie siqg., as well w in the amUr. st. plnr. and dual, the df of
the first syllable is attenuated to fy thus my ztttmi, THiVli so in ^3S^ V$^f
15, roj, mo, npi, mi, pny, -05, a^l, iqei^, cto^ and menj othU in
some cases of this Idndbestdet the ftm with them most piobably existed another
with origmal r hi the first syUaUe ; thns oettably with PB^ beside ptr^, nyj beside
ni^ftc (AccofdingtotheZîjfi^vila^Mmw, i3^^
MtaK i; comp. 1^ NtmL 30, 4 (aAm/.) and
takes i, the 50, 10 (Mw/r.)
1^ Ler. 14, to and Amos 6 (Mrlf.). Aocoiding to this theory '
1^ (so the best authorities) Is. jj^ 5 would be the ttmir, a,, although the
aocentnation requires an 4/.)Â half-opening of die firmly closed syllable
' Ptobably only a theoiy of one poitioular adiool and not geocially accepted,
or at any tate not consistently earned out ; cC KSnig, Zc/Iijk^. iL ai.
Digitized by Google
278 The Noun* [93*
occurs in HJS, &c. from 1i3 and '^^^\ Deut. 15, 14, 16, 13, in both cases evidently
owing to the inflaence of the paUtal in the middle of the stem. With S*gh6l
for f: *S)3n, ^ytt^", &c
/ E. In the plural the terminaLion Di is sometimes fotuid along with the termina-
tion D*_-, e.g. niB^3, niOSrg together with CPf'SJ (Ezck. 13, 20), &c, r^/r.
i/. rtSS'Da. Other nouns have only the ending fli, e.g. fllSTIK, foj/r. TiSfyt^
from ^.fef. Without Qar/us before the ending 0*. we find D^ttni {l>07vcls\ vurcy.
On the numerals D^b)? twenty^ &c., comp. the note on 97./. Moreover a is
not inserted before plural sofBzes with the tone on the penultima in ^^"^^l^f &C.|
properly thy happimss I (a woid which is only used in the nfimstr, tt^ sad t sa
early period hecsme stereotjped ss a kind of intajedion), nor In UÂiTf
mcooiding to ( 135. r from irti, nor with the piqpocition nnn f X03.
tn F. Li tiw (msir, si, ûrat a fiimly dosed qrllabte is sometimes foond,
contxiiy to the tvl^ e Geo. 4s, 35. 35 (befoce strfbttt) ; Csnt 8,
Ps. 76, 4) ; ^BH^ Ezek. 17, 9 ^- 5, 10, and so slways
; m *t3Da before
suffixes, Ps. 16, 4 and elsewhere (on the other hand, according to the best
authorities not in nCH Is. 55, 3 and elsewhere, though in Ps. 107, 43 Ginsburg
reads ''IDn) ;
comp. 46, J. Even with a middle guttural |n^!^y3 Est. i, 17. 20.
The attenuation of <l to / also occurs very frequently in this form see above)^
e. g. ^nS], See, even Is. 57, 4 beiide ni)2 Ho. i, 2 and elsewhere.
n G. In the duid absol. beside forms like D^??!/*''* suff.

V^Jl, &c.,
I^B^K /f thousand, D^^Kj). sandals, D^3")3 (!' nt'cnuated to /; camtr,
St. *3")2 with a firmly closed .syllabic), with suffixes ^2*13, &c. (comp., however,
Dn*!;'^Z3 Ttifl. 7, 6 '
; forms with prctonic Qam4S are also found in conseiiucncc
of ihe tendency to assimilate the dual to the plural in form: so Konig, Lehrêb.
* <
ii. 17), as D^J^p Aorm, with suff. (Dan. 8, 3 sqq.; elsewhere always Dîî?,
V3"Vp, &c.), and so always O^nh'l, <'onstr. sf. ^rhl/o/iîn^-doors, D^S'^T ifotti/e 7t>ay.
0 2. On Paradigms b and e. With a final N rejected (but retained ortho-

v^raphically ) we find t<t2n sitt. iVn initial guttural before suffixes generally receives
S''gh6l instead of the original f, e. g. ^pSn^ ''ITJfi &c, so in the lomlr. st. plur.
! forms *tXOT] 3 Ki 10, 29 and elsewhere, retaining the Qames of
Dî<Cn bclorc the weak K .

On n^3^y {constr, st. plur. oi
jp'J;;
Prov. 27, 35
comp. S 20. ii; DMD^ without Qamts before the termination D^__. (see above,
letter I) is probably from the nng. found ia the Milns.
P 3. On Paradigms r and / occurs ia Pttyv. ss, st without helping vowel
Mdth a middle guttural &c., but with il also ^HK ; with a final guttural
.< .<
n^S. VDT, &c., but with N, KDa ; with a firmly closed syllable ^BDK Mic. 7, 1.
Q Ikfore suffi.xes the original sometimes reappears in the sin^. ,

e.g.
(Ps. 150, 2 , beside v^S, from p realms s : (with Da^f'^ forff dirt men f,
and the ti repeated ia the form of a Hattph'Qanus) Is. 9, 3 and clsevvhcrc ;
Ezek. aa, 34. Corresponding to the form Qsi'^B pdifl*khim we find ^30p^ Hos.
13, 14, even without a middle guttural; similarly (so Jablonski and Opitias)
Digitized by Google
93 ] Paradigms of Masculine Nouns. 279
I Ki. 13, 10. 2 Chron. lo, lo, from |C}3 littU finger; but the better reading is,
no doobt, (so ed. Mant., ' the p proleptically assuming the vowel of the
following syllable;' Konig, Lehrgcb. ii. 69), and the form is to be derived, with
Kbnig, from [bp. The reading *3t3i5 (Baer and Ginsburg) is probably not due to
a confusion of the above two readings, but -i^- is merely intended to mark the vowel
expressly as 5. In the forms 1^J|3 Is, x, 31 (for ^bj|B) and YlNri Is. 52, 14 ^^for
i^Nn 1 Sam. 28, 14), the lengthening of the original i7 to J has been retained even
before the suffix; comp. 5 63./ and 74. A (D^KVbS Gen. 32, 20). In the same
wây 5 remains before n locaU. e.g. n3">'3 n^nt<n Gen. 18, 6. 24, 67 and
elsewhere.
In the abiol. plur. the original H generally becomes vocal îvA before the r
Qames, e.g. On^Zl from morning, D^b^B 7corks, DW") latues,
hatidfuls {constr. st. ^bj^C' Ezek. 13, 19) ; on the other hand, with an initial
guttural the -sound reappears as Hateph Qamts, e.g. D'K''in months, D^1BJ|
gazelles, HirnS ways; and so even without an initial guttural, n^Jian the
threshing-fioors, 1 Sam. 23, I. Joel 2, 24 ; D'*Bnp sanctuaries, and D*BnB> rcots
(^qddhaltm. See, with S for __); also before light suffixes 'KHP^ &c., where,
however, the reading frequently fluctuates between 'p and 'p ; with the article
'^n^ '^ji*, according to Hacr and Ginsbarg. Comp. further on these forms,
especially 9. v. From tent, both D^JtiNB and D^J)nk (in the Syriac form ;
comp. i 23. h and above are found ; with light suffixes ^^HN &c.; so from
rPK way, VriniX (also ^ri/TTNl) hence only with initial H, '
on account of its
weak articulation '

(Konig, Lehrgeb. it 45). It seems that by these different
ways of writing a distinction was intended between the plural of nrnN caravan,
and of rr^k way ; however, n^n^X is also found in the former sense (in constr. st.
Job 6, 19) and niniK in the latter (e.g. Job 13, 27 according lo the reading
of Ben Naphtali anil Qimhi) ;
comp. also ni>3iN a Chron. 8, 18 K'th.
(^rt). The constr. st. plural of |n!3 thumb is 0^3)13 Jud. i, 6 sq., as if from
a sing. 1^13: of rlii brightness. Is. 59, 9 nin)l3 (on these g'tol-forms, cf. letter /).
If V3&K Prov. 25, 1 1 is not dual but plural (see the Lexicon) it is then analogous
to the examples, given in letters / and 0, of plurals without a pretonic Qames
cf. 0^303 pistachio nuts, probably from a sing. n3t33 . According to liarth, ZDMG.
xlii. p. 345 sq, V3EN is a sing. 03BN, the ground-form of HSDN, with suffix).
In the constr. st. plur. the only example with original H is *D3"T^r3. 31, ai
otherwise like l5np ^^HK &c.

4. Besides the forms treated hitherto we have to consider also a series of j
formations, which have their characteristic vowel under the second radical, as
is ordinarily the case in Aramaic (on the origin of these forms see further, 84 a,
letter e). Thus (a) of the form (comp. 84 <j, letters); BOT honey, tDyO
little; in pause, B'3''!, 13^; "133 man (as constr. St., see above, letter h), Ps.
iS, 26 (elsewhere always 133', and infinitives like 33B' ( 45. e ; on HPIp^
" <.
'
see above, letter A)

<.''<. Hos, ; D3tJ^ shoulder, A being modified to i (^but in pause D3jy)
*" .
locative n03f also HDSE' 6, 0. With suffixes in the usual manner *?33t5',
n33B' Gen. 19, 33. 35 (an infin. with S'wd medium, not r03C^ . On the other
28o The Noun, [93.
hand, the d^ ii nUined in the plttr. ais^. by shazpeniiif llu final eoaaonut
0*991} (eooclr. ôa|l) manlut, D^ÎT] ff^fvllfev
O^^Bf.
/ (^) Of the fonn
D*a{<|,
^ : ntta weU, uwjf, ftc ;
on the other hand n^nKll, iw/r. ni^Ka
iKotiw THKa , with ^m^. ^Kf^
on the infin.comt'r.
;
n^, cf. h 76. (0 of the form itoj5: JW2 r^mrA (with suff. i8?3, as ^2D
occnrs Jer. 4, 7 along with the constr. st.
74* 5 comp. for the Dagei,
20. /;), perhaps also Dj<[) nation. y\. D^Dxi).
1/ 5. Paradigms -i comprise the se^'holntp forrrs? with middle ^ or ^ : (a) of the
form qitl with Wdiu as a strong cuasuiiaul, in wlucli casts ihc original <i is almost
always lengthened to d (Paradigm thus nj^, vanity^ 7^ miûity, T|in
OTNfti; with final K, falstkood; compb, howarar, alio wmAI. In lh
piMlr. St, contxactkm alwayt oocan, T\\0, Sec (from orighial avMiO, and Ukewiie
beToie wffixes into, ftc.
Qimhi) and with waff.
ExoeptkiQ,
Sb)Tg.
^
ai t^MUifK itf. EidL a8, 18 (acooiding to
The oootnctioD lamams alio in all casea in the
plural ;b.cf, however, below, letter w),
V ijf) Of the form qStl with consonantal YMh (Paradign) k). With final K,
jrs (also in Is. 40, 4 N^S, in the constr. st. (also rt^^p/. Zech. 14,4) IC3
(also plur. 2 Ki. a, 16 and Ezck. 6, 3 A^M. accurdinj; to Haer mtO, i.e.
doubtless fllNS (cf. 1*rrtK*3 Eick. 35, 8 ;

according to another reading [and so
Gimbnrg] DIK^:), i.e. doobtlett HIK^), but in <^ri, and all other passages, Hi^KS.
The nnoontracted fiinn (In the oAm/. 4^. with helping J/ireq) renudns also hefere
TL^ UMlct t,g, ntyi (but In the tansir. st, e.g. C)p1^ niT).^n^^ (from n^)
Gen. 49, II is pecnliari so also iJVB^ la. 10^ 17 (from n^.În Uie fimvi ahoi.
nnoontmcled fwms oocnr, lOce T^T^s^riii^s, t3fXJ^ fmstgassa^ î^J^ lU-goats,
8cc ; as constr. st. Prov. 8, a8 fas JllS^s oomp^for an analogons weakentag
of /to/, 5 75/.
KJ (<} With the contraction of the 1 and ' even in the absoi. sf. sing. (Paradigm 1).
In this way tlierc arise formations which are unchangeable tbronghout; thus
froin the ground-fi;rm (comp., however, 96% 5|^D, Sec, with
middle )oiih, ^^H I Chron. 9, 13 (elsewhere b^h), b")} Is. 21, 11 (elsewhere
in prose n^*^, set' above, 90./); from the ground-form ^/jf/, p"!!, "J^B',
(see, however, 96); from the ground*form î7^/, nn, &c. The plurals
on)*) Q^^lp^
x/r^^//, Dnif^ asm, have a strong fomation (hnt ibr D^rnn
z Sam. 13, 6 read tTfSX aa in 24, 11), Finally, fonns with a qniesoent middle M
alio bdong to this das% such aa tM^ ksmt (obscnrad fini nff, see 1
and|tfyAii^.
jr 6. On Piuadigm k: scôlate fiwins from Besides the strong forma-
tions mentioned in ( 84^^ letter c, *, like n3B ftc. also Vlb^ Kzck. 47, 5, with
the origitial 1 resolved, according to % 2^ d (comp. the constr. plur. (ItftSy
Obad. 3 and elsewhere, and tnds, Ps. 48, 11 and elsewhere, where the
1 become-; again a strong consonant, from ^jn and IJfj? or ^311 ad ^3f^), there
occur also {a\ commonly, of the ground-form y(J//, forms like *")3, *33,
""Vh '3af &c ; in A:,v >- ^33 (comp. % 2i. but n Jnd.
14, 28 i with SttfLxcs âttenuated from fdtyo), bat also &c.
Digitized by Google
i 930 Paradigms of Masctiline Nouns, 281
before a grave suffix DHÎB, but also Dp*^2. I'lur. D""na (constr. \n3, see
above, letter o, ''XOn), D^^">X and ; with softening of the * to N a tlse-
where in Jer. 38, 12, for which there U in vcric 11, according to
iS.i; D*K'31V a Chron. 17, u, comp. 36, 7 A^M.,' probably in D^Kl^'l, riiKj>^
from n\l and ^^^^ ; also D*K3^n Ps. 10, 10 divided into two mdt liy
the Masoim, it to be reftncd to a sing, 'sbn hapkss) D^K^n /ntvir. Cant. 7, a :
(from 'i)n), D^K^D lambs, 1 Sam. 15, 4. Is. 40, 11 (from ^[je) ; but instead of
O'Kne and D^tair (from and tbeMaMOtfequiRtD'^KnB and 0'K3y;

dual : D^'nb, cotulr. si, irith ^Tb &c On 7^ iImt, cf. 95./, and
OQ mdi formatioos generallf, lee Bartli on Uliteral nonw in ZDMO* 1887,
and NmtinaMlAaig (Isolated bodds), p. i sqq.
p. <io3 sqq.*
Fran the groond-fonn qf^ ^yn Aoji; in pmmu ^yn, with soff. ^^fH ftc
(i) ^
Fran atom with middle WSw arise such fonnt aa (from 'tiny ^
plur. D^^K, D^^V dec; instead of the extraordinaiy plvr. tft Num. 34, 34 read
with the Samaritan CPIjtyiJ* and for ETys iak. 30, 9 read probably with Comill
(f) From the ground-form qiitl sometimes forms like \T^T\ (from ttlhw, g
bih'v), sometimes like ^^Tlj ""ij?, and even without an initial guttural ^DJI, '^'^^
(al&o^Dl. ^B' nV), &c.; in Aiusc &c., with suff. V^n. plur.
D^vH. From branchy there occurs in I's. 104. 13 the plur. D^S^ (analogous
to D^KHB &c., sec above, letter jr") ; the A //;. < t \ ;uii>ly intends Q^KD|if (so Opitins
and others). Dual, with suff. ^xum. 24, liusu
7. On i'aradigms segholate forms from stems (see 840, letter c, 0).
(a) In the gd(I-{ona the J of the coDtracted formatimi is sometimes lengthened

in tiw ohtLst, tiag^ aa in CP (to alao in the toiutr. st., except in tite combinatton
ipn^ ^ ^/ >nd even bcCm Mmqqtph, Mtf seM mt), lometiaeB
it icnaina short, e.g. HB mmtm/^ Dy people^ but cfcn ti^cae formadona genemlly
have ôaiMy in pana^ aa wdl aa after the article (e.g. C^H). AdjeetiTcsof thb
daaa (formerly treated aider letter f) are, e.g. ^ /mt, ^ %f/, plur. D*^,
D*}ig nnder the tnflnence of a gnttnral either fcnma like wi^^ 0*fti ariie, or,
with ipiitftiiuMfy in^kmii^, tH^, In the emstr. it, i^, and ^
mJMtti^t are oontiaded to ^R* and ^. Aa alocative form notice TT^ U He
moit$ttau. Gen. 14, 10 (see | #7. g) bende rrvm. The stem ia expanded to
a triliteral form in ^*)in Jer. 17, 3 (on the analogy of the ;î/-forms ; but in
Ps. 30, 8 for
'
mn'-jr
read'mn) and tn^n
'~tr T-:,-
Gen. ^ 6;
14. '
plur.
I
cons/r. nnn
51-
Num.
a3 7i &c, (but only in poetical passages); D*DDJ| Jud. 5, 14. Neh. 9, 22; *DCy
Neh. 9, 24 : elsewhere ITEiy, ^D^.lieibrt sufijpts and in the plor. df is aome>
* *n only in Dau. 12, 7 as constr. st. ; since in tbe asscvcrative formulae
nJnO ^Ô? ""D

(otherwise only ia 2 Sam. 15, 31, after n^n^ ^n, and Amos
8, 14) 'n is a contracted form of the absol. st. (prop, livitit^ is Pharaoh! &c),
in use along with the equally regular ""n (ObN Deut. 33, 40; and
Digitized by Google
282 The Noun. [93-
times attenuated to f, e.g. *WBj D'*ri3, from MB; tJ^Bp and n^BD (also niBD
2 Sam. 17, 2S) from ^0, Before H is rel&ined in a virtually sharpened syllable,
e. g. D^ne traps.
bb (*) ^r//- forms: Q, B'N / (with suff. ^C^X, but comp. alsoD3B?K Is. 50, 11),
\Vk favour, &C. ; of a triliteral form, the plur. ^3Rfn Ps, 77, 18. (r) QHtl-iovcRW
ph, totality^ before Maqqepk "pn, "^3, with suff. ''^n &c., with omission
of Dagii forte (according to $ 20. m)

^pH, Mpl!? ClpH and D3^n are
alwajrs
bracketed in the Paradigm as being simply analogous formations on the model

of ^f^, D3|^, for which ^ and are also found), ^p^n, expanded to
m form, Jnd. 5, 15 and Is. 10, i, generally explained as a lecondary
triliteral
form of "^ppn with abnonnal weakening of the to more pvobabljr to be U

lefemd to a ^^jj^fona i* Axabic
CC The foima with annnilated middle Ukewiie follow the analogy of Paia*
digms e.g. ^ Hou, mgtr dnal t)^^,alio /mce) for 'oir/; 1)0 pa/ate
for AiMkf O^fiUers, gMi, plnr. for Vm, probably alio Ofl^ gnem Ati*,
for 'in6,
dd a* Paradigm II oompiises all formations with original short

vowels, whether in the first or second syllaUe; comp. 84 a,
letters and the general laws of formation, 92. b-g.
Rem. I. On Paradigms a and b: ground-form qiidl. The lengthening uf the
4f to is maintained in the ttmOr, si. tAaa, only in -forms, e. g. feOX <irmyt
May, For the conatroct forms apn miiky 'f3p whiU, Gen. 49, la, inatead of the
ovdiaaiy absotutts 3^1^, a seooodaiy form mast be asMuned;
irom 1^ MMJtf, the pMlr. a. JB^ oocnis once, Ex. 19^ 16, bende ||^. The
plnr. D*^B hcrset^ Is. si> 7 (instead of 0*|lhi, gioand-fonn fdrSt) is no donbt
dne to a confoi^ with the foffdAfoim Bh^ AtfrjsraMw.
<^ Sometimes a sbaipening of the Uiird radical takes place, in order to keep the
preceding vowel short, e. g. D^^| camels, D^SQp smaU ones, fHl^B brooks (see
20. d). The attenuation of the & of the first syllable to t does not take place
in the constr. sf. plur. before a middle gntttiml, c cr.

j nor 'according to
Konig, owing to the iiillucnce of the nasal) in the non-gultural forms ni33] tails,
riD33, and (in the dual) 'p33 wings, from S|33. The tlual Dînjl from
nns river, s.hows an abnormal ooussion of the lengthening of the d before a tone-
bearing temuaation.
ff B. From V'y stems, forms like i>bn, (JV, &c. belong to this class.
C. The few nouns of the ground-form qftt^l follow the same analogy, such as
heart, temdnm, grope, &c. From "(Jjfe' hair, besides the constr. St.
"iy^ tlie form "lyi^ is also found ^perhaps a sur\ival of a secondary form like
those in Paradigm !.</); so from V^5f rib, V^V and even Vî J Sam. l6, 1 3, both,
probably, also old secondary faimi (alio us(.tl fur abioL st .) of JJÎf; comp.
also and as well as the constr. st. plur. T\\V^% \ also from "DJ
strangcmss, the constr. st. "^33 is found, Deut. 31, 1 6.
Digitized by Google
i 93*] Paradigms of Masculine Nouns. ^
a. On Paradigms r-e: ground-form oiitjl, developed to /<?/iV, wilh a final kh
gattural, e.g. salisfied. In the <anstr. si. the oriptnal I of the second syllable,
robably on the aiialugy of the forms dBcus>cd in 69. c\ txcomes J, c. g. ||57^
"!n, before soffixes, *Dri3, Sic, nor in forms from K"^ stems,
comp., moreover, Gen. 35, a6 from 2fy /;t't7, and

35i I4> mcuming. Paradigm represents fonu which in the rt^m/r. st. instead
of the oidinmiy *|n3, &c., hve a segholate fora, as IflK, Til, IfV, ^15,
(Ezek. 44, 9), (omir. st. of !T1K aa//. Tl^ MifA, rsbUry,
MffrwimwiMi In Is. ir, 14 e)n33 would be altogether without precedent as
n ttmtr, st. (for ^)^^) i )tHj->i probably the a^;o/. st. is intended (wrongly) by the
Muont(ccoiiluigtoNSldcke, GStt, Gd. Amtigen, 1871, No. 23 ^p. S96] nnM '33
flÂ sjImiUtr, L e. skoutder U tkmU*t^\ tL Driw, TVmw, f 1901 OAs,
Id the pinr. Ir. tlie i lengthened from / it fseqnenilx letained in verbal it
adjectiveo of thit foimntion, e.g. mif^ no|^, 'D^, ^YSn; comp. nlso
l^^ftft^ (ojider the protection of tiie tecomiefy tone) from "IQ^ Umt-ptg* On the
other hand from N^^ f<^<^^r*St always ; oompw also *y3*l Ps. 35, ao from
^P. With d retained in the initial sjllnble Oomp.'^nNI alius (with a virtual
sharpening of the H). From W stems come forms like VXl der.d fr-'an^ 11
resident stranger, HJ^ witness, with unchange.nble Scri; hence DT.D, ^DC See.
Kindred in character arc the formations from the i^rotmd-form qdtiii. This kk
ground-form is regularly lengthened to qdtdl, e.g. hj'S round, pbj? dtep, QÎK red;
on the other band before f<^rmative additions the sthort <7 returns, protected by the
shaipening of the folWiu^ coosonent (see letter tt above), asD''^3^, &c. (bat
in items with third gnttvral or n, TOpl ,
Qnh&^). The form ^b^, 1 Kl. 10, 19,
is abnocmsl ; likewise Frov. 13, 37, Jablon^ki (Baer snd Ginsburg Hi^!:^ %
3. On Fsradigm/; groimd-foimfkl^from Tf^ stems. As in verbs | 75. h. It

the geneml mle is that before the terminatioas of the plnr. and dual and before
sufExes begun ing with a vowel, the third radical is usually elided altogether. But
besides the form îb', with the final YSdh retained, is also found in poetry
in the same way final 1 is retained in D*^3g the poor, constr. ^3y. The plnr. of
n'Tw' is nnS', constr. UlTb' (also îb', unless this is a sing., contracted from
so iiarth, ZDMG. xlii. p. 351)- The j?.V(J/-form (ste 840, letter 1) nj?"* a.Sam. 15.37.
16, 16. 1 Ki.4,5 is remarkable as a coiutr. st. 'îhc icadin;^ njH of Opitius and others
i& opposed to the express statcmcai oi the Masora). To the category of these forms
also belongs without donbt 0'3B face [pn\y in plur.), ^)B^ ^2B, O^îlB,
In a &w formations of this tcind ttie vowel of the second syllable appears to have Mift
been already lost in the iih$l, st shig.| so according to the ordinary view, in T
Aand, emuir. 1^ with suf. iT, but DaT : plar. HiT, tmstr, nhj, dual
with ffj^ ^T, Da'T, &c.i and in AM <omir. 0*^, with n^, bat
XSSCn (d atlennatcd to plnr. *D^. But perhaps both these noons are
to be icgaidcd as primitive (f 81), and as original monosyllabic formations.
3. Paradigm III comprises forms with an unchangeable vowel fm

in liic iirst syllabk, whilisi uic vowel of die bccund s)llabk iiAb been
Digitized by Google
The Noun
lengthened from an original short vowel, and is therefore changeable.
The special cases are to be distinguished in which the original short
vowel is leimthciicd both in and he/ore the tone, but in an open
syllable becomes vocal ^wd (Para digm a, to which examples like
DÎDiK wheels, for D^??^**, conip. O'^^^l* porches, are to be refcrroci\
the cases in which the vowel becomes vocal S^wd r In/ore the
tone (Paradigm l/)^ and finally, those in which die tcrmioaiion of

the n"^ formations of this class is entirely lost (Paradigm c),
CO Rem. i. On the node! of D^^V (which, moreover, is otMOned from *6Ulm), the
following forms are also inflected : ^DpP ($ ^5* ^ eases with viitual
sharpening of the third radical (see ao. a), as inp2p Jer. 17, 7. Ps. 40, 5.
Job B, 14, &c. ; nouns of this form maintain the Qames in the constr. st. plur.,
e.g. 'X'î^p from toptp ' ; on the other hand, in the plur. of the participles Niph.
( 85. ) of verbs N"^ (which likewise bclonj^ to thu class), arc foond not only
regular forms like D^t<"ip3 but also D*K3n3 Jos. 10, 17, D^KDDl Ezck. JO, 30 sq.,
and so always O^K|J (except 13, a O^K^H) and O^K|fD^ (except Ezra il, 35
Moreover, the other participles d also follow the analogy of DîV as rejârds
Pp in
the final syllabic v^^lSPD ÎDPD; comp., however, UiTân Gtiu 43, la in close
connexion ; see the analogous cases in ( 65. ^ ; also (Hpt^ table 85. u; plur.
nijnSt^, emtdr, ntanb^), jan^, cnstr. jan^, hence in ^nr. 9mir. witii smff,
D.Tiif^ Ley. 7, 38 ; ( 8j. w), plur. 0*31^ (with iharpening of Uw ftpgd
cooiOBMt Ux 0^31^, comp. alfo 0*ry nahd, plur. D^f?^ 3* 7 V!"^ in t ^5

|]nrj|[ iroiii D^;^], tr&n]^ imMmt, s Clm. a8| 15;
Q^, 'j^^D
li. 51, IQ, ^^09} Ii. 8 tq.; even with attenutiMi of the J to ITfJ^b
threshing instruments ^ a Sam. 34, a a. i Chron. ai, 33, from 3*1^0), |Pip (J 85.^),
}^ (i ^5' i)t 1^19 ^5* inasmach as they retain the uf the first syllable,
contrary to rule, even when not pre tonic, c. g. 'S! nV^ ; D'jHD (J 85. ^) ; achn
( 85./), feitstr. 5( r ""U'n 1 Ki. 17, i
;
tinally, also isolated forms according
to 84a, letter /, ami ^4^^|, letters ^, ^, w, , Cf. further, IWJf nfck (from
sdvjilr), ionstr. si. "^S^V J*-'^- ^8, lo 1^4., (emtr. sL j.lur. *"<K^!f Gen. 45, 14, iV;c.
gff 2. (Paradigm t; comp. i i>4 a, letter s.) Instead oi tlte original 1 in iucti forms
as Oay^k CcC s Ki. aa, 39), the second ijllnble more frequently has i, e.g. "^yf
thy tratri with n dodng gnttunl (aooovdiBg to { 91. dj Imt cfL also laK
Dent 3a, a8) fonne eve fbond sometimet like ^Q^, mmetlmet IiIr ^Kna
tuir, St. without negl Pk. 94* 9 (according to { 65.4/;$ with a aiddk
gnttnnl 17; comp^ 43, 14.The leme analogy also is followed in the
Ii. 481
HesioaoftheotfairpaiticiplcawUchhaverinthefiaalsyUableCâGI^, ^^^^fllpkte)*
see forlher, hi f 84 ^, letter el, &e. (hot with exceptions, as 0*$^, O^Dt
* DjTB^pD Ezek. 7, 34 for 'B^^ (from B^^) b wholly irregolar perhaps, ;
boweter, the/ei^, A'Wis Intended, without DeÂ in the 1 (jacooidiag to f aa >.
Digitized by Goo
930 Paradigms of Masculine Nouns, 285
and letters /, / . 85. /, k (rQ]D Ator. MwHSr. jf. na;p, plnr. D^n3]0), nd latter q,
bat heie alio theie axe eaeepttoas like t^f^n^ Jf%. is, 1*.
S. (Pantdigm c: fart. Qal of verba 71^, diffiering from Paradigm I^/la tbe fr
ondiaDgeablenesa of tbe Towel of the lust lyllable.) In Eaek. 17, 15 ^ in
tbe oAm/.s/. is abnormal, and S'^kUbk the r^^txM bi a Sam. 14, 1 1 (^ô OpiUas
Ginsbarg; but Raer nth\ Eccles. a, 15 (according to Baer, bat not the Mantua ed.
mi^tt Fccles. 3, If) is in the akuyf. si.). To this class belong, as regards their
formation, the rT'^J-forms mentioned in 84 a, letter r, { 85.^ (with JSJ^, t*g.

^jjpttn Dcut. 20, z, 7vAtiA i/r&ught thee up), and letter h.
In a few instances, before a saflBx beginoiog with a consonant, the original dy of SS

tbe tcrminatloD has been contracted to and thus there arise forms which have
imoendT //wno/ suffijtit} aa t]n*>r)e^ Is. 5, la. Dan. i, lOb t6; DHWID tkiir
l y/ww iftf, Dan* i 15. Gen. 41, ai, cf. Nab. a, 5; atuM ttreUktd thtm
fifth, la. 43, 5; iûihefy &l1|N|t Hoa. 7, 5 (eomp. firns Eiek. 54, 14); 00 the
other band, the exannples from Is. I4, Ii. Oca. 47, 17. i Sam. 19, 4, which were
foimerly classed with the above, are really plurals. Bat ^jno thy camp, Deat
3* '5 (1?.n? occurs just before), t^^J///'', Is. 30, 33, ^*tinp Cant. 2, 14,
and VK^C Mr si':;ht of him. Job 41, 1 >vilh the ^ here retained orthofTrnphically),
V^JJO Ezek. ô. 31, tScc, arc still to be explained as singulars. On a few other
examples which may porhnps be thu-; explained, sec 124. k. Ikfore the plural
ending the original tcrmiuatiou ay reappears in O^HCtp Is. 35, 6 {fart. Ph.
from VTfO).
4. Paradigm IV comprises the forms with a changeable vowel tt
{Oy 6), or a vowel which ias already become vocal H^wd (r), in the
first syllable, and an imcbangeable vowel in the second. With

Paradigm < (which, however, for the most part consists merely of
fomiB based on analogy, without biblical parallels) are also connected

all the forms which have unchangeable vowels in both syllables, and
therefore (like cannot undergo any vowel changes.
Ran. I. Aaalogooa to (gfoand-fonn /IÎU) aie f 84 letter Jt, uu
^*Tlff ftc (with t, not changeable J foril) ; in substantives like tuS^, tbia S b
demonstrably obscured from d (Arab. Sih'<im); letters I. m, ItDK. y*pH,8cc}
f 85.M, fn2), (omtr. frO\ \

ri^m, constr TTH ; n^^3, cmstr. Jris (comp.,
however, the forms iu the fcvr ^31fy, r*:!^ n with plnral soBlx
zdc. 27, 13 sqq.) ; 85. tv, t^^D^n, {onstr. C^p>n ; 85. /, D^pD, &c.
2. *3y Vround foriTi \hity, stem HIV) represents forms in which a closinf; YdJh VV
has been resolved itu< >
/*
; before formative additions the Y'hth under the protection
of a Daî forte again becomes audible as a firm consonant, whilst the vorigiually
abort)vowd of the fiist ayllable beeomcs Tocal Sfwd; oomp. $ 84 a, letter /, ^^3,
plv.D^?, and (87.0.
3. ana with vMbangeable A In the aaeood ay1bible wbilat tbe ia weakened WW
from aîhort vowel (Arab. kJtdb) ; ctmstr. st. Est 4, 8 (faaduga like 3113
a Chiea. 3$, 4 aie inconecti althoogh "^gj Est. i, 4 and "ana 4 8 are anpported
Digitized by Google
286 The Noun, [94.
by fitirlj good anthority; however, llieae ^tdI4aan in Hebiew tie prabaMy

all loan-words from the Asamaio). The plnml fonna are given in the Paiaifigm
iritbin brackets, sinoe they are not found in the Old Testament. In a narrower
sense the forms enumemtcd in 84 o, letters ti-p, belong to this class ; in n wider
sense all those which have unchangeable vowels ihrougbout, thu^ 84(7, letter
84 h, li tter e (^Sj?, comp., however, the anomalons forms mentioned there),
letterii /-i, m (No. 34 q.), n (No. 39), / (No. 44,, also partly 85. b-w (especially
letters/ and r)
XX In oppoiitian to the anomaloiu shortening of the fonn ^n|g (see aboveX eases
aie also Ibond where jnetoote vowels aie retained even in ttie ante^pennltima
(with the secondary tone) ; comp. above^ letten U and pp, also of the fonn
(properly gSttl) the exanples O^DnD, ttfyf^ ^ÎHf* ^'l^ ^
sing, aocoiding to the rule, changes the J Into vocal S^wd (D^D ,
(These
are not to be ccmfonnded with forms like tyrant, ^\hich is for
P^y, and
consequently has an unchangeable Qamc' ^
Of the form ^^D|5 {qSliih in this
class, are jnac' 'ccck, jilur. D*y3K' and niya'J', constr. myOB^, but with Mttktg
of the secondaiy tone in the fifth syllable from the end, ^SPT^S[^*
84. FcrmaHon of Fmmine Nouns,
a 1. The feminine ending n^, when appended to the masculine
forms treated in 93, effects in almost all cases the same changes
as are fMPodoced in the masculine forms by the addition of a light suffix,
smoe in both cases the tone is moved one place fiuther forward (see
9s. b). The following scheme is based on the same division into four
classes, with their subdivisions, as in { 93 ; a few special forms wiU
be treated in 95 in connexion with the paradigms of feminine nouns.
b Paradigm I: segholate fonns, with the feminine ending always
added to the grouiKMbrm, (<7) ns^jp queen, nb'a?, and with attenuation
of a to I nbna iamb, nSVI hoi sione, Is. 6, 6 (elsewhere always
see T3aer on Ezek. 40, 17), Hf^tn strength (unless belonging to
Paradigm ip) n'^np covering (masc. "^(r), not 10 be confounded
with the iirirhangeable forms with a prefixed D, derived from T{'h

stems, as nifO command, plur. riiXO; run|; grace, pleasure (ni)j
W name 0^6 tMU\ ^'S^ Jood
"1}H3. proper
(18); (/) "f^ "Wft?, ^ wrong (also n^,

pi*rity 0^^) ig)
Paradigm t) ; (i*) Ttft vtefuals (masc. TSft comp. Paradigm A); from
;
iî^Y,
^
(rf) girl
fifl and ^//-foims, nji^ undersian^f^t H^ Umpesl; {k) rp}>t( fat

tail (as if from ^hi), {a attenuated to r) cap/ivt/y {'^), rn!> utm/A
(probably an original îVZ-form) ; (/) HÔ It/e, measure (attenuated
from n^); aujcLUvcs derived iiom ^"y slems also belong in flexion
Digitized by Google
94 ] Formaiian of Feminine Nouns, 287
to this clan, as nari miUia^ with middle guttural mala; (m) nf(
//tfif / (n) rs^ itaiuk (ph).
Pafadigm II: ground-fonn qîfitUU, (a) vengeance (B^|); ^
n^lH irM; (0 nj)?: cor/>s^; (d) T\^:)i langm'da; ( /) HDJ beautiful
rw^ (from nfi^, njf^). From stems aHsc such fonns as nnj;
(roasc. 1J/, proi)erly //7r/. Qal from 1^) ft male iviitu ss. From the
ground-form f ////, Iî?^? profunda (masc. P^V), ^"^"^y, serviiude, Ac.

Paradigm 111 unchangeable vowel in the first, changeable in the
:
^
setond sy liable, (a) nT.^, a woman with child (comp. the examples
in $ 84 dif letter x, and the retention of the ^ in the part, PCely
k. as, If. 23, 26 ; in the Hithpdelt i Ki. 14, 5 sq.)j but also with
the change of the f (originally f) into S^vsd^ VDf^ dmellh^^ Kah. 3, B.
However, in these participial fonns the feminine is mostly indicated
by Tl (see below, letter (r) eapiwiiy (masc. H^),
but also with a recunrence of the final Vddh, nnp^ clamoroast Prov. 7, 1 1,
and the examples in 75. v. On the d of the participles of verbs V^,

which also belong to this class, such as rnt percgrina^ comp. 72. ^.
Paradigm IV: original changeable vowel in the first syllable, ^
unchangeable in the second, {a) nb'ia mafûa, HTDn stork^ properly
pia : nbv^3 virgin, properly sauncta ; {b) njJJ? misera.
2, A n is added as feminine ending in forms

simple like ri^sa /
weeping (masc 'M, 93. 1, k), nna covenant; but feminine participles
of verbs h"^, as nt<3f*, n3fb, may be due to contraction from y4fêi^

iLc^ whilst forms like n^fto, (see { 74. >) may be explained
on the analogy of the fonns treated in 93. /. Apart from the rfb
formations^ the only examples with simple A are 19 (cms/rt/c/ si*)
Gen. iti, II. Jud. 13, 5. 7 for rinj* (Gen. 17, 19. Is. 7, 14), and
rsy^ I Ki. I, 15, contracted from Wil^hp; comp. 80. d.
The forms which arise by appending the T\ feminine to masculine g
nouns With a changeable vowel in a closed final syllable are, as a rule,
developed exactly in the same way as masculine scgholatc iorms.

Thus there arise in Paradigm 1 (a) from JTO^ (for original g''l>irt
<
ITlia mistress (but only in construct St.; the absolute
69. c\ the form
St. is ni^^); from (1)^ ssl)^) quern; in Paradigm 11, (a)
na: kvir, fem. nja; (from ?^); nnna (nnB=ftni ^v) Lev. 13, 55;
{c) yVk waUf n^Tf (from WTT} = ^dtrt; comp. fB) as amstruci of
st.
tSt); on the other hand, is timstmci si. of n)^, with lengthening

of the original i of IJf'^Q*
Digitized by Google
a88 The Noun.
FonnatloQS with a chflogeftble 0 in the second sjpllable belonging
to this class aie brmiMe (from Af^); perhaps also naf^ writing
(unless it be obscured from 93, Paradigm IV, c). Paradigm III,
(a) nonh (from ifionh), masc. DTrtH seal; {b) n^^r (properly tucking)
sprout (in pause^ e.g. Tr\^T\ Ex. 26, 4, &c.), and so most feminines
of the pailiciple On this iransiuon of the grouml-rorm qSlilt to
Tibop (nipî", see above), cf. 69. c ; qStalt regularly serves as
the ground-form before suffixes, and under the influence of a guttural,

e. g. iiyiS feminine of Vl' knowing; in a wider sense, ikuU
may alsobe included here, see 95, Paradigm IV, c.
On the endings m
and IV-p^ see 86. I,
95 at the end.
{ 06. ParatUgmt of Fmhmu Noma,

In accordance with the general formative laws, stated in 92. b-k^
the following cases have chiefly to be considered in the flexion of
feminines also: (i) a tone-lengthened vowel on the removal of the
tone reverts to its original shortness (thus the d of the termination
n.i^ becomes again d in the construct st. On the other hand,
even an originally short vowel is retained as (a long) pretonic vowel
htfirt the ending n.., e,g. n^^; (a) without the tone or foretone
an originally short vowel almost always becomes vocal jW/ on the
other hand, htfore a vowel which had thus become vocal i^wd the
^ tn the first syllable which had hitherto alsobeen reduced to vocal
S^wd returns, although usually attenuated to i; e.g. ngiy from
sddhdqdth; (3) in the plural of the feminines of segholate fbnns
before the termination rii or D* and
, in formations of the latter kind
also before the light suffixes, a pntonic Qamcs reap{>ears, while the
short vowel of the first syllabic becomes vocal ûd. This short
vowel, however, returns in the construct sf., whether ending in T\\ or
; in formations of the latter kind also before the grave suflixes.
The following Paradigms deal only with such of the forms treated
in 94 (with the exception of I, d) as incur some vowel changes

or other. All forms with unchangeable vowels follow the analogy
of Paradigm I, d.
Digitized by Go
95] Paradigms of Feminine Nouns, 289
1.
a. e.
Sing, absolute Tt
nam rrann nm L T : J
(Meen) {^reproacK) {statitie) (mistress)
construct
with light sujjf. *nB-in

T I V
"nam
T
T J
unthgraottuff,
nbjo rtann
WW
Phr* ahsoUUe
cmttruci rtpn
with suff.
Dual absolute - T
{embroidery {cymbals)
on both sides)
IL m.
'
b. c. a. i.
Sing, absolute
{righicousness) {oHicry) {sprout)
cumtruci
withhghtn^.
wiih gram suff.
Phr. absolute T
consiruct
with suff.
Dual absolute L
{lips) {fetters ef brass)
,t ecmiruci
Remarks.
I. Paradigm I: fcmintncs of scgholate forms, (a) The locati^re of this class d
has the form nnyD3 iou'.irds Gibeah masc. y33\ In S(;ini; cases, especially with
an iouial guttural, there is no means of deciding whet her the furm in qnesdon
isto be referred to a qdtl or a qltt base, e.g. n^]n strength (comp. HBin tmder b).
A dual of this form occnn in D^H^^^ seven times (comp. seven^ fern.).
' Only in Ps. contrary to rule, with a firmly closed syllable, comp.
' On nbf^ M * kit freqiiciit (poetic) foim for D|{îee { 87.f1.
Digitized by Google
990 The Noun. [95-
Analogoas tonMsculine fanntUkeC^'^ (f 93./)b HDlTl m/iîSr.->^Fiom mucnliaci

of the form nB (lYO, comp. ( 93. I, it) arise fetninines somedinct like rnK3
,
(see above, $ 94. b), sometimes like 11^33 ($ 94> f) ;

occasionally
the fmnl r> is retained before the plural ending, as if it belonged to the stem
(comp. 87. k), e. ^. n^n^3H spears, l orms like 11^*13 fcomp. ^*3^^, a qiiil iomx)
are derived directly from llie masculine forms kid, îX a Jicet.ijb) From
a stem nen (for nWH), //r. DW'. (<) From n^"J^ fmskin,
Uk oftM/. y (comp. Fkmdigm I,/), rMilh flfV^^.^
% 93
Enonple of a iSmdiiine awghoUte fonn from a stem (gnmnd-CNm fd^,
like rPQ of the fbm fd|A of Ihe form fJjr/) with 9 tot M|n lrrrr, Is.
19, 17 (Aimiaic oithognphy i fOn).
# To the list of seghoUfee fonns Mrith H fern, bdong also the infinitives of verba
and which have rejected the weak consonant at the beginning, as
[{rom 3E^), nyn (from VT), nC'3 (from 1:^33% as well as VXp_ (from ng5}
comp. 69. and 66. ^ and^. The infinitives of verbs are, however, also
found in the form HV^, "l^" ' same orif;in also are HIJ^ cangrega-
tion i^from ny^), njfj^ counsel (from njB? (from constr. RTg, AiK^,
while in the comtr. forms fl^t sweat. Gen. 3, 19 (from JIT Jhw)^ and iTIUf
wxtrment, Ezek. 4, 12, the Sere has remained fiim.
^ From a stem V'V (cf. M^ Ar tsAamt^ is IKî jiAmm, witii ^îf^.

From a stem If^l (n^^, comp^^ however, Baztb ZDMG 1887. P* ^
asBunes a stem br) the msscnline appears to have been toied after the
rejection of the 6nal VMi, and afterwards die feminine 1)^ dt^; in ihcfhirgl
nin^t ^mtr, nfn^t tiie n of the tcxmination is liowem, retained (see above,
letter frifT^Sn). In a dsailar way IrMfpi has arisen (from r^f^t of
which the masc. must have been pb^ ^pK' ; on the otiier faandi the pUtr, MUir.
rrtnpe^ Gen. 30, 38 (again retaining the feminine n as an apparent radical) can
<MiIy be derived from a kindred form (Dp^ or
^ 3. groond-form ^J/JAf/, &c., comp. $ 94. c, Pamdi^jm II, a and I.

Paradij^m 11 :
AnalofjoMs to the masculine forms like fD^, plur. Q^JDp, we fm?! nSCf^ farm.
Sec. Tlie (ons(r. forms, like npl2f {sidh^qdth^, are distiDguislictl hy the .^wi
medium ( 10. </) from the scgholalc forms, like nC'Zlll {kibh-sAih). Conseqnently
the (onstr. si. T\S^ Gen. a8, 4 and elsewhere (fi^m nana blessing), and HT^n
I Sam. 14, 15 and elsewlwie {hem. TTpTl inm&iing), are aboormaL Under
the inflnenoe cX a gnttnral (tee Panuiigm b) the original ^ is retained in the firt
qrUable in die eomtr. U. (comp. also HD'^K earthy T9f^\ ^ other eases it is
modified to S^^M, t,g, smymv, Vn^jf FreqncnUj from an

in TL^ the WKf/r. is formed widi the terminadoa fl, e.g. TtV^ omw, consir.
IVJ^ (from A*^) ; along with fTIS^ aiumUy, ^^fl^ ^ fomd asaallf, even
in die Af/. X/.; (from DQ^ Wr)
before soflSxet is pointed ss in
ÎPd^, and thus completely agrees with tV^^ (Paradigm I, e). From a stem
(fCV^ is formed IHDH tmt^. from 'dEsMM/, and this no doobt for an original
*dmini, 69. () before suffixes ''HD^t &c.
A From the masc form (S^Ô ^ formed, according to ml^ IT|^ wntf*
96-] Paradigms of Feminine Nouns. 291
rf^2i (orpu, oaa^. n^33; nonS ca/tle, conitr. ttQra (for npnS). Mote fie-
qnentlj, hoiwever, ; of tiie seeond qrllablo k letaiacd bcfine the tetmination
o/A of the MMf<lr. sL; tins fiom n^33 once ^^33 It. s6, 19^ and alwayi T\^V^
A< AV. nW wjl? i (with # tM^^gdris, see
1 90. Of J^^ '3 Ôf!!T ' '7 *^ ebewheie (nidi tpicoipt of
the I Sun. i 17) also Job 6, 8.
At dual wt find D^ri3T Hdu (oomp. IfUV Gen. 1 3, fiom the ohaolete naftj f
fenuolne of 1JT) ; the mmA*. if. it perhnpt to be referred to a te^hdate
form (nST, oomp. at tmttr, st, <d unlen the cloied tfUable be due
to the analogy of f1?]a and flTVI (letter^.
Intiie foxnt wiA dmpUnfeiniaittethegtoandpfomfdyi'/lrbdc?^ k
to g'fa/(, and thb again regnlarly to T^j^, Thns the iemhiina of ig/n em/aiUpH
it tV^^t of 'ITA fern, iMiidet ttXUj-^V^ itemt die aegholate fonni
nij fvH and ti(3^ fit (fiom ntt, fjttf) belong to thit daat; BSttcher ifiram. i.
411) lightly dlitingniihed the latter from tlQ^ torvuftim (ttem lin|^) ; in the
tame way nUo J>r| mf' It dlrtiaeft from nn3 HîMnfdnm (Hem nnSX
The lemlninct of iSttt torn fS(lt from ttemt Y^, at nHD aw/AM^ ni|f ion. /
witmm (from n%3, *ny), have likewise an unchaogeable vowel in the first syllable.
Comp., on the other hand, the forma from stems mentioned above, letter e,
tnch as T\^p sleep, constr. st fiiB^; moieow, nCH anger, constr. s!, nOH (but
npn <7 leathern bottle, in Gen. tl* 15, emutr, st, flCMI Gen. ai, I4,
perhaps from a stem nDTI).
The feminines of the form qilhlf, like Hj^DV masc. ptay\ maintain the original
It by sharpening the following consonant (comp. 93. kb) ; on the other hand, by
appending the fern, n, segholate forms arise, Jike HC'TO, before sufT. Dn^fl} &C.
Dual D^JilE'nS (placed under Paradigm III, r); comp., however, ^FIB^HJ Lam. 3, 7.
A few feminines from TV'h stems (Paradigm II, c' arc found with the ending Aih, H
due to the rejection of the final IVdw or } odh and contraction of the preceding &
with the of the tennlnatien m; that n|D porium (for minJiyith or aiMmirA),
riYp îf, plnr. (0/r. jf. Neh. it, 47. t3, 10) and llfK^ (K^ 44)
ntoj^ Ex* 38, 5; eomp. 37, 8 and 39, 4 on A*IO vetUgft^ lee f 93* o.
ntK Jiyii (item nM) it obicnred from lUf, and thit it <ottaeted from
'J70iiy/1tki plnr. fllnkt wiUi double feminbe ending ; comp. above, letter /' and
$ 87. i. The retention of the J in the fint syllable in ^* Gen. 34,41

and elsewhere, is abnormal.
3. Paradigm III, comp. the van'ons forms in 94. rl and The f

D^nWn /toe 'wa/Zs, Is. aa, II and elsewhere, taken directlv from the plur. n^Din,
for D^riOin, is abnormal (comp. 87. .r, and the proper name D'HITS Jos. 15, 36").
Among the forms resembling jmiticiples Qal of verbs such as mi 'masc.

It from dfr, hence with unchangeable d), must be reckoned also HDB îÂ phut
(from D\3) which ha* for its constr, st. plnr. the pleooaitic form ^r)lD3 or written
This etymology it estiemely doabtfril.<-G. W. C]

U 3
Digitized by Google
992 Tke Noun.
dd fecti tgly Vjl^ (MB I 87. 0* ior tliis the Btoora evetyvliCK fcqaim ^QDj^,
which it to be read hSn^thi (not hhn*'th()^ with an momloM shorteninf of tha
^ to _ with suffixes on the contmy ^nlD3, &c.
^ In a wider sense the fetninines of the form btp ' 84/^, letter Ixinnjj to this
class, in so far as they shorten the A of the second syllabic before the terminaUon P,
'
' > -
*
e.g. np^l inflamntation (from dalU^qt , with sufl. TjPl^'^y zek. 16, 52; fiySD
sigtut i also fern, of the forms ^t2p and ^lSf5 ( 84 />, letters f and </y, as n^^S /oily
(for îxuwAU), and of ail the forms which have a changeable vowel in the second
f]rUable wd are fonned with the prefix C ( 85. g-k\ e.g. n^^nX) kingdom^
etmfr. always TX^^fOO ;
rnD]P (not itied in the sing.) pruning-hook, plur. nllDTD;
IT^bb'D rrward, with suff. *R13fe'D ;
comp. also the exami)les j;iven in
f 85,^ and /, as JTl^D birlh {horn K"b, on the other hand, HKXiD ouigoingj,
gmeration, ns^n abomination, constr. n3jhn &c. ,
2 Sometime:! the plorol of these forms is to be traced to a secondary form,
e.g. nnSK a UHf, plur. nh{M (at if htm rnSK) also T\\^'fi\, which is merely ;
Ibfined on the ualqcy of the otiier plur. iSem. of participles Qa^ it to he lefened
to a tiog. nP3^^ Comp^ moieofer, HB^VIp ôitgkska9t, plur. lllShnQ (at if
.
from nehno) ^ ; on the other hand, niins capUaU (of colamitt), and nVl^
rt^rw^s, ave <he regular pinialt of fl^^ ^ nnîn.
r Ib I^SnS the original if of the firtt syllable li atatntdned hy the durpening
of the followiag oontonant (oomp. Arab. iHfiim), with raff. ÎUfQ> the oiutr. s/.,
howeter, it (as alto in the oAm^ si. la x. t8, 39) ; plsr. nfan3, romsfr.
ntan^The form n^^!>l given n Paradigm III, ^ it a /W^4oxm of the stem ^

comp. I 84^, letter /.
S 4. To tlie fonrth dastt fi>r which no Paradigm it required, belong all the
numeroos forms wbldt in classical Hebrew have unchangeable vowels througjkout,
the ori;;iiially short vowel of the first syllable havinfj Ijccome vocal .^tvd, owing
to the tone being thrown ftjrward. Of the forms mentioned in 84 and 85 those
from ]yy stems especially belong to this class, as H^JO xm?//, nWlFt praise, H^DW
prayer 85. / and q), as well as the feminines of the participle liiph' ii of verbs Vy,
e, g. rn*Wp enlightening (from Tt<D), and generally the femluines of VJJ stems
whidi are compounded with the preformtttht D, as nnUD ftst (from nb^),
tee 85* Is from Items perfaapt alto emdmit (nmfr. /. TÛff^ I*> 7> 3
and elaewheie) and HK^ri trmfoU, That all thete fonnt' coincide eitemally with
those which already, at mttcnlinet, have unehangeahle Toweb Ihioqghont (tee
the list of them in % 93. ww).
t 5. Tlic feminine ending fl* (apart from iT'^-forms like n*32, 5 94. /) arises
from the addition of the lieminine D to the ending which it employed to fona
' n")I^C*y Aftarte (plur. H^'TFIB^), which was formerly included amonj^ th<*5e
examples, is most probably dnf to an intentional alteration of the original H'Vi&'y

like 1] Lev. 1 8, 2 1 , &c. ffor Tj^D), with the vowels of flSQ sheum, tile latter word
having been substituted in reading for the name of the goddett.
96.] Nouns of Peculiar Formation, 293
adjectives, &c., see } 86. </, //, and k. The ending fll, mentioned in the same
place, is attached, in segholate forms, sometimes to the ground-form, as T\>F\p^
Job 1 2, 5, sometimes to forms with a half-closed syllable, as rA3|>P ; from H'^^

stems vre find forms sometime* like ni3t^ captivity, sometimes like rfl33 trcfpin^;,
ro^S exile, H^H vision; the latter retain the d of the first syllable even in the
ctmstr. St. and before suffixes. From a qiHtl-foxm is formed DniS difficulty}
from a fd//Aform flYl^B Ac.
In the plond of tiketc' forms dlffietent methods of titstmeat nay he diitiqsaidicd. u
In some casn the whole ending IH i> retained, as if belonging to the item (comp.
above, letter /), e. g. t(j5^9^>|| frmn HOD^, la othen tiiis ending is icsolved, as
in rrt^^ Dui. 8 as (no doubt for mH'Mmmwdai), as wdl as in n^*!^ *idH^k,
from nriy testimony, but only in eoumion with anffiaes, V%> 119, *4>
ftOii IVlt^}! I Ki. 3y ate
i 06. AiMdKf ^ PecuUar Fvrmatinn,

In the following Taradigms', pp. 294 to 296, a number of frequently
used nouns are arranged, whose flexion presents more or less striking
peculiarities, i hese peculiarities, however, are almost always subor-
dinate to the usual phonetic laws, and the usual designation of the
nouns as irrtgidar is, therefore, not justified when once the ground-
fonns are properly recognized on which the present forms are
based
* The only omiiriiiis from Uieie Paiadigms are IHK, OH and Itfop (on which
ace die remariu), and all the fonns which aie not fonnd in the Old TestasMnt
Digitized by Google
294
St'ng, aholuU ate nintc

T T T
{Jat/ur) \i3r0ther) {man) (tvoman)
construct
wtiA suf, ^ I sing, T ~\
n 1 -1
i|ntn|c
T T -X T
iP/. ATOM T
2 masc. OJ MS*
' -t
3 masc.
Plur. ahsthtie
consiruei nbK
with suff, of i iing, - T
% masc.
2 /em.
3 masc.
I PI
2 masc.
DiTITK
3 masc.
tt S/CM,
Remarks.
father; the cmstr. 'ZJIC, like 'nK and *33 (which occars once), may perhaps
be reckoned among the remains of an earlier liiij;nistic period, discussed in 90.^
However, al^ occurs in compuuud proper names, e.g. Dib^3K, b^de
O^bâK, &c; al&o Gai. 17, 4 sq. |\Dn~3{(( for the purpose of explaining the
iHune bnppM . Oa tbe plur. Hbf tee f 87. /.
hrpthtr, Tbe plur. isd, XSft^ Dag^ forU impHeUmm (f aa. 0;

itMidft for MCOffdiflf to the pheoeHc Uw itated in | a7^,aai 10 alio ^QK in
ptmM for ^j1|t. The ihajcpciitiic of the n meidj lerres to keep the piecediBg
PtUka^ ihort, M in D*^. ftc. (f 93. m)>
MM (for Trut, Ukewiie with ZktgtHftrtt impHdhum, | ta. conp. { 27. f),
emsir. Mid otbenriie in doie oooacsdoo^(^ (Gca. 48^ 22. 2 Stin. 17, 22. Ii, 27, 1 2*
ft.
Digitized by Google
J o
S 1
90.J
(4Mw) (jtfw) {daughter) {vessel)

r
na
-:
. I
ntoa

- r ~T
TW TO

rrtia
rvnia
T VT T rT
- t
DiTAa DiToJa o.td;
Zeeh. II, 7; and especially befbie [D] Gen. 3, aa. Ex. ao 14* Nam. i^^ 1$.
Jod. 17, 5. 1 Sam. 9, 5. EMk. i8p 10); fan. nn|C una (for n*|n|C according to
f 19. d), in pause riHM. Oace *Tn masc (by aphaernii* 1 Eidc. 3p,
as ID Aramaic : pinr. OîriK some, bat also iidem.
ItinK sister^ bom^dfidwd/ or 'JhJyd/, with elision of the ^ or and the which
has arisen from <I<f, obscured to ^. In Num. 6, 7 inhX 8tan(Js for \T)hV{ (with
/)aiê1 forte impUcitum in the R). The plur. absol. (ni'rw<) does not hnj)i)cn to
occ'.sr In Frrk I'S, 52 TfnVnbf occur? (for Tj^fl ntji). In the forms *riin>jl
Jo3. 2, 13 A 'ih., T|*n1^^^ Ezck. 16, 51. 55. 6i (to be read also in verse 45 for
!|n\n(<, which has been erroneously assimilated to the singular occurring in
w. 48. 49. 56), and D^^n^pM a, 3 (for which, however, read DDTI^nK) the
third radical has been enttnity lost.
Digitized by Google
The Noun,.
Sing, ahstûk ['?]

(iMMt)
construct
kW I
"1 V
7vM stiff, of isit^.

2 nuisc.
*
IT?
99 ^
3 mofr.
mi
** *
3 wair. T
Plw, abiolutt * T
C0ttiruct
n wUhsuff.tf isn^* W
2 rnasc.
3 masf* T

zfi^'

Daw
Y - i
3 masc.
3/"'
according to the common opinion either incoircctlv lengthened for K'K

(from 'til, with assimilation of the A'lin of the ground-form in} from the btem
t^^K, which again bis been itteoMtcd frooi *aMf), or toftened directly from *mI.
It howerer, probable that a wptiate stan <I8^ / lir Jfriiy ^ is to be amiiicd
for tbe siognlar*; eonieqiiently the stem t9 1^ U toOoNtt woald be coanecled
00I7 wiUi tbe plvr* CTI^ (P^fNjt found only ia
is Is. 53, 3. Ps. I4i 4. Frov. 8^ 4).
2nv, AMdmaidi irilh tbe piv. JlVl^ with consonantal H, comp. bi
Aim. }nail fiihtn^ and fisAUarly in Fboen. IVITI from also Aisb.
> So altea^ Gcsenliis in bis T%a Unguat Hbr, i. 83 sq., and reoenajr afain
Fricdr. Dclitisch, Prolegg., p. 160 qq., Praetorius in Kohn's Otient. L. B.^ 1884,
p. 196; Konig, Lthrgeb. ii. 38; while Noldcke {Z.DMG. j>. 7 iqq,),
against DeliUscb, would connect both B^^K and with the item lE'lK.
96 ] Nouns fjf Peculiar Formation, 297
(liitbm) 'mmmoMdi (iiiotlien)^ with an artificud expusioo into ft triUteral
tCIB>
7L'oman, probably for nZ'^bj, ; ? irora (0 be weak ( = Arabic *<fi7/d0t
and therefore distinct from to be sociabU (aec above, on SJ^K). So DeLagarde,

Uebersuhty p. 6S ;
Konig, Lekrgtb. ii. 159 sq. The fonn DB'K (for 'il/, with Jl fcm.
from 'iH, after v^jecttan of the donbliog and lengthening of the f to compw
Tt^yrs a cviM/r. of H^n /tv) oooni in Dent. %\, ii. x Sun. a8, 7. Ps.
58, 9 even in M i/. [c, howeviert below, f 130. 4,$]^ In Ffe. xa8, 3 ^|R|S^
is loond for ^9^^* Insteed of the plnr. (bj aphaeicdi from ?
according to Friedr. Delitvdi, from another diitinet stem, nCb) we find in

Ezek. 33, 44 nfe^K .
hotue, plur. D'n2 (only in Deut. 6, 11. i Cliron. 28, ir D*n3 without
Methf<:^\ pronounced bdtini The cxplflnntinn of the r>age in the n is still
a niaUer of dispute. Accoidmg to Jewish tradition Delitisch,yiaM, ed. 3,

(^couij).
p. 79), the Dagel forte (after firm Mak^; comp. 16. /. C) serves meidy to
dIsHnpifsh this word from DVIB passing tki n^gM of JUS) ; the Syriac
Uttfn^ however, shows that the Dagii is original, and belongs to the character
of the finrn. According to Wright, Con^rativ* Grammar, p. 88, D^^3 is rimply
contracted from bai-ttm (as |K from i^ft^ D|*y from fi2|^,ftcO, >in(! the Dage^,
therefore, i.s kne ; Konig, Lehrgeb. ii. 56, proposes the name Da^c\ forte orthO'
ionsonanlicum ; rhilippi, ZDMG. xlix. p. 206, assumes for ihv plural a stem
distinct The incorrectness of the formerly common
from that of the singular.
pionnnciaUon Mttm b soflteiaitly shown by the Babylonian ponctnatioo (see S 8. d,
note a), whidh leaves no doubt as to tte A
|a son (Gen. 30, 19 ^^Îp^â), tmttr. ntaally "{S (also with a conjtmctive iceent
as an equivalent for Maqqeph^ Gen. 17, 17. Is. 8, 2, and elsewhere, i Chron. 9, 21 ;
even with smaller disjunctives, especially in the combination |2tD, Ex. 30, 14.
Lev. 27, 3, and elsewhere ["fBD only after DS1 and before B'ln, also in Is. 51, 12;
sec Slrackon Ex. 30, 14]), rarely "|3 (Deut. 25, 2. Jon. 4, 10 twice, Prov. 30, I,
and so always in the combinaiioa and in the projier names 1*0^33 [but
'5^DJ"J3 Benjamite'\ and Hj^fil Prov. 30, 1), once ^2 (comp, ( 90. /) Gen. 49, 1 1,
and to (S 9a ) Kvm. 33* 18. 3. 15. In Qâ. 49, aa |3, for which *|a
ooght to be icad, is faitended by the Masom for the tffcs/. not ^ mitir,
n3 daughter (from kmU, and this agun, acooiding to tiie law stated In f 69.
for bint, fern, of with sofft ^RB for 7^9* fl^> the sing. VS^^
comp. D*33 sons.
DH husband" s father, only with suff. 1]*tpn, H^pn ; and n*lDn husband'i motlUr,
only with suff. Ijnicn, nn^Cn. Comp. and nÔK.
</<ar^ (.\rab. yatim), dual D^CV ; the plur. D*D^ is probably from a difierent
sing. (D^ /a**) *, constr. and (poetically) fltoj, Deut. 3a, 7. Ps. 90, 15.
* Friedr. Delitach (in the Babylooian glosses to Beer's text of Esekid, p. xl)
on Exek. 23, 44, reOHU'ks that the As8yro*BabyIonian forms from tfHote (woman),
the plur. aiidti corresponding, therefore, to M^B^, not to the ordinary plur. 0*^,
The supposition (put forward also in earlier editions of ihi^ Trrnramar) that
the plnr. arose from through elision of the 1, is invalidated by the fact
Digitized by Goo
298 The Noun, [97.
vttsti, la fa$$u (with soff. ji3 Dent 93, 95) fiom mn/^
plnr. (m If from ^3, n^|; icooidiiig to Kdnig, iL63 lim^j ihortenod
from Jkify(m)
wa/iTf conp. on tbe plor. i 88.4^
*V|^ dtftm The plnr. i scarcely syncopated from tTl^* si it is pointed

in Jad. 10,4 (no doubt erroneously, in imitation of the preceding D*^J^ mASt),
but from a kindred sing. which slill occurs in proper names.
na tnouth, ccnstr. it. *3 (for original *B HB ?). Its orij^n is still dispnted.
Accordinf: to Ciesenius and Konig (ii. 103), stands for HKB (jjroand-form
piay) from HNa to breathe, to Maw; according to Olshauscn, for *3, from a stem
rPB or niB. HB arc Assyr. /#J, Arab. /iJ, /am,
But parallel with the Hebrew
fmm, fumm, BiU. Afun. 03, K^S, Syr. pAm, pUmd, so that Bith, ZDMG,
xli. p. 634, unimei two formt of development from tiie tame item (10D)f vit.
and fttf % mmmM, from fi'fi for OH^ we 6iid in Ffe. 17, la 58, 7. 59^ 13
10^. The supposed plnr. M i Sem. 13, ai Is geoeiaUy explnlaed as a oon-
tn^QQ from bat the tent is nllogeUier conqit. The plor. T(t%t for the
#^giofafwoid,oocnniD Flov.s,4; fodaplicited 11^^ 1^41,15. PB.149^6.
e^th (obicnred fiom BMTI - nTI) ; plnr. fi^^ (for t3{^,, | 13. r);
l^|X|h onlj in la. X3 a.
a hmi of small cti^ {fkit^ or gMt^ tmutr, st. hb, with anil'.
Wff
I Smb. 14, 34ând Dent, as, i, according to Konig, ii. 131, from a gronnd-
form ti'aj', but according to De Lsgnrde, CMirtuAi, 81 tq., from m stem 'BH
DC^ name, constr generally 0|B^ (ooly six timcS Tl^)', COmp. |3.
0^ JUavtH (t 88. d).
97. Numerals, (a) Cardmal Nttmiert.
a 1* The cardinal nmnben from a to to, in Hebrew, are sobatantives

with an abstract meaning, like In'as, decas, jttvrat, and were, therefore,
orifiinally attached in the construct si. to the word numbered, e.g.

r.w'^w' iritis filiorum. However, the appofitional construction
of the numerals was likewise in use, side by side with this, at an
early date, e.g. D'i3 riB'i'^, trias, ^c. filii, and from the latter was
developed the use of the abstract numerals as adjectives (placed after
their noun), see f 134. r (ip^ unut^ fern, nn^ una, see f 96, show even
that die a becomes vocal S^wA in the e&mttr. si. The view that tffi is merely aa
incofiect ofascniing of DfJ, and dierefoK distinct from the Arab, yawn, b coa
tmdicted by the invariable spelling tfifi, Ac., notwitlistanding the spelling
(- D*3t?) in the Siloun hiseription, line 3 (cC f 7./). and tfljf" Uob.6, a
CC also the note 00 f 1001.
Digitized by Google
97 ] Numerals. Cardinal Numbers. 299
by their form that they are adjectives, although even in this case
combinations like D'l'^jJ "^^^ unus e montibus are possible). The

consequence of the appositional, and finally adjectival, construction
was, that for numerals connected with feminine nouns a special

<
(and, with the exception of ^^^^ a shorter) form came to be used,
whilst the original forms, with the abstract feminine ending, were
used in connexion with masculine nouns. Hence, with the numerals
from 3 to JO, it comes to appear as if the masculine form of the
numeral were connected with the feminine substantive, and the

feminine with the masculine substantive. For the expression of
duality, dual forms are naturally used, with the usual distinction
of gender. Accordingly, the numerals from i to lo are as follows:
With the Masculine. With the Feminine. b

Ahsol. Constr. A bsol. Constr.
I. T V
nn nrwi
9. OB? 1 D^nB?
-

nB?
4
ri>B^
3- T 1 1 T
4* ya-JK
5* Y BTDTI
--->
6. riB'E'
T :

ny2B? ynf?
8. T
nabB?
-
i t
. <
9- yB^ri yB'n
10.
Shortened from D^ri3B', which would be the regular feminine form of D^3B^.
Nevertheless, the Dagel in D^RB^, &c. (even after |tD
;
Q''PlBip Jon. 4, ii ; comp.,
however, ^flBto Jnd. 16, 38) can by no means be regarded as a Dage} forte arising
from assimilation of the A'/Jrt, for in that case the word could only be D^FItl^ (comp.
Arab, iintdni). It is rather to be read itdyim, Uf (with Dagei lent), comp.
Q^riB^K, representing the later Palestinian pronunciation (Philippi, Z/?J/(7. xlix.
p. ao6), and Arab, 'itnd/dni (with a kind of prosthetic N ;

comp. 19. m), as
a farther feminine form of îhtdni^ duo. Philippi gives a very thorough treatment
of the subject in his article, 'Das Zahlwort Zwei im scmitischen' {ZDMG.
xxxii. p. a I sqq.), according to which the original form was tjny, which, how-
ever, even in the primitive language, was shortened to //. In his opinion,
DOB> goes back to the dual form tinaimd, D^riB' to tinataimd, tjntaintd, so that
in that case D^J^^, which in the Babylonian Codex of 916 has been almost always
substitated by a later hand for D^RB^, would be the more original and correct form.
300 The Noun, [97.
On the eonnectiTc fonnt Vl^* comp. the analogotu forms in ( 93.^1,
The other 5?cinitic languages also exhibit the same peculiarity in the external
differentiation of thenumerals from 3 to 10 as regards gender. The full form
of the numeral abstracts is only rarely found in connexion with femiuinc nouns ',
e.g. D^3 rVC'l^V 7 * i' ^'4- ^êk. 7, 3 K*th.; probably

alao Jos. 17, II, where we should read with Dillmann Ti\tiV\ In apposition,
Zech. 3, 9. 4, 3, comp. Jer. 36, 33. Convenelj in Gen. 38, 24 D*Chn vhf (but
in tlie Samaihao r'^!?CO.~For n^ntp^ ttmti, thete oocan la Job 4a, 13 the
Ewald an old feminine tnbitantiTe (comp.
atfange ftnn fl^l^S^, according to the
Getman nm Âmd^ n Mt of aevea), but noie probaldy a icribal enor.
d 2. The numerals from 11 to 19 are formed by placing thf units,
without the copula ^ before the number ten (in the form masc.,
n^by feiQ.), but without the two words being joined into one.
However, owing to their rapid pronunciation in one breath, the
units almost invariabl)r appear in the form of the amiruct tU (without
pretonic vowels); comp., in the following table, and in the
numeral ii, and the units in the feminine numerals from 13 upwards.
The proper connective forms, however, of the mascolme abstracts,
like Ac, are not admitted in combination with since the
units are merely in apposition, and not In a genitive relation. Also
and in the number is, are only apparently in the emstntct si.,
although formed in the same way (by contraction of the ay, and the
loss ilirough phonetic decay of the D of Q^^^, Q^J!?^'), and for the same
reason, viz. their close connexion with the following noun. In D*2|p'
and D''riB' the language has contented itself w ith ilie contraction of
the ay (without rejecting the D), unless both forms are to he recî^rded
as the Masoretic Q'r/ perpttuum (17), via. îjf', for D^, t^J^f
as really intended by the K'thibh*
e Accordingly the numbers from 11 upwards are
Masadine* Feminine.
* In the vulgar dialects of Arabic, aud in Ethiopic, the (emiiiiae furm of the
numeral is byfar the more common. This form appears also in Hebrew, when
the number istcfuded in the abitnet, ac in the mnlti|ilicatiTes (see ( 97. 4).
* ^1^* which remained for a long time unexplained, was recogniwd (fiiat by
J. Oppert) in the Assyro-Babylonian imcriptions in the form tltin or ilttn ; compc
Fricdr. Delitrsch, Assyn'srhe Grammatik, p. 201 r'Tid P. Haupt, in the Amertian
Jmrnai ^ FhiMiy, viii, 369. Accordingly, *^ i* a compound, like the
hi.
Digitized by Google
97 ] Numerals. Cardinal Numbers, 301
Masadme, Fmiitmi,
.3. -^'np^ n^^B^

ftc, on the analogy of the last. These nmnerals regularly have only
the above form. In regard to their syntax, comp^ 134*/
Very nrety the units appear \n the maic. in the eott^r. st,, m 1^ TlS^*
fi/Um, Jnd. 8, lo. a Sam. 19^ tS: lUjb^ i(plAiM, Jnd. ad^ 15.
3. The tens from 30 to 90 arc expressed by the plural forms f

of the units (so that the plural here always stands for im iimes the
unit, thus, D^V^?1^' 30, D^JQIR 40, Q^^n 50, D^C^ 60. D^Vne' 70,
80. D'yC'R 90. But tiveniy is expressed by D'"}^^', plur. of ten \

Tliese numerals are all of common gender, and do not admit of the
construct state. In compound numerals, like 22, 23, 44, &c., the units
may precede {fwo and twenty, as in Arabic and English), e. g. Num. 3, 39.
36, 14. Very frequently, however, the reverse order is found (Adm^
and twOf as in Syriac, cC Freich and English iweufy*iwo)t e.g.
t Chron. 1 2, 28. 1 8, 5 In all cases the units and tens are connected
by the copuda^ ordinarily 1, but ) before numerals with the tone on the
penultima, \ before ^ before see 104. d, e, g.
The remaining numerals are the snbstanUves ^
100 nttO fern., constr. nwtp.
200 DÔ*^ dual (contracted from Q^D^j^; comp. 23. r).
Sanik. tttddaftmy fi^m, mndeeim (aoalogoiit to Oe eomUaatiim of nnita and tana <
in die oomnals from 1 3-19), and is oied at the uune time in the composition of tiie
feminine numeral eleven. On the gradual sut>fttitutlbn of ^PS^ for'y nnit and
^ nnit see Gicsebrecht in ZAIV. 1881, p. 226 ; ^rigfj occurs only in the
Priestly Code, in Jer., Ezek., in the prologtic to Deuteronomy (i. 3\ and in
passages undoubtedly post-cxilic, so that it may very well \x a loan-word from
the Ebibylonian.
^ For the inÎar plaial foum fi^^, D^]|Î1 (from die Ji^plbto
nb^, V^h)* we thonld eipect D^lb^,

V^, ^^^9^* la thia vaiy
nnoanat deviatlaa fkom die coninoQ formatf00 (see abofe, | 93. /, r) ooonected
widi die apeeUl meaning of these plurals ?
' ArcorHing to the conclusions of Konig {/)e Criticae Sacrae Arptmentn,
p. 6r,
and Lehrs^cb. ii. p, 215 sqq.), the smaller number more commonly precedes in
Ezek. and the Priestly Code, bat the larger always elsewhere. S. Hemer {Syntax
4*r ZakhuMir im A, 7*.. Land, 1S93, p. 71 &qq.) airives at die sune condnsloa
by a inll fframination of the itatiattoij cf. alto his imacfca on Kikiig in
ZAHT, 1896, L
Digitized by Go0ê
302 The Noun. [98.
300 nlKD \thf plur. (but in 9 Ki. 1 1, 4. 9. 10. 15, K*ik fff^ff^
1000 masc.
2000 dual,
3000 D*B^ ri^îp plur., and so on (except D^D^'^* nnjp^ in 2 Sam.

18, 3. 2 Ki. 34, 14 A^'M.; elsewhere always ÎP^)-
1 0000 n^l, in the 1 uer Books n^1, 1^1, M^l (properly muliiiudtf
comp. iWfuas).
aoooo doal (see below, letter h)\ but n^l Nelu 7, 70

(also Miari Neh. 7, 71).
40000 Mtin Sff^ Neh. 7, 66.

60000 TMbrpE^ Esn 2, 69 (Baer and Ginsburg trtl^, as in
Dan. 11,12). ri33") ^b!)K thousands ofmyriads, Gen. 2 4 60. ,
^ Rem. I. The dual form which

<
occurs in some if ti e units has the
<
meaning
of our endinj; -fold^ e g. D^ri^3*)K fourfold, a Sam. i 2, 6 ; D*ri^3C' sevenfold.
Gen. 4, 15. 24. Is. 30, 36. Ps. ti, 7. 79. 12 (comp. 134. r). The dual DTIjll
Ps. 68, 18 (explained by thousands of dupiualion) t& not meant
to be taken in tbe sense of two t^friadt or Iwui tk number tf mj^riadSf but
in a mnltiplicatiTe acme.* Beddet the phml, which denotes the lens, there are
also tbe plnnls sm$t also iidem, and nH9]J dtades (not ^mi)
Ex. t9, 21.^5.
I 2 1 h<L suffixes to nnmcrals are, as with other nouns, properly genitives, although
they are translated in English as nominatives, e.g. D^jPI^^ jfour triad, i.e.
yoH thru, Num. la, 4.
88. Numerals, {b) Ordinal Numbers,
a The ordinal numbers from a to lo are formed finom the

corresponding cardinals by adding tbe termination ({ 86.
before which another V also is generally inserted between the
second and third stem radicals. They are as follows: ^ seemdt
H?^, T?1 (like Jnn, JQ^*, D^ysT, without the prosthetic K, which
appears in &c.), or ^?^n (which, according to Strack,
is always to be read for ^C'pn), ^^^^ ^36^, ^JÔB', ^VT^, This
/*
in the penullima unquestionably results from the tendency to assimi-
lation with the I of the ultima, Konig, Lehrgeb. ii. 225. The ordinal
exj)ressed by jiB'Kl (cf. from head, bînning,
firsi is 27. x),
with the termination 1^ ( 86./). On tbe use of as an oxdinal
in numbering tbe days of the month, comp. 134. p; in such cases
as Gen, i, 5. 2, ti, the meaning of /irsi is derived solely from the
context.
Digitized by Google
98.] Numerals. Ordinal Numbers, 303
The feminine forms have the termination T)'^, more rarely (and d
only in the case of 3 and 10) n^ . They arc employed also to
eipress fractions, e.g. J^^B^n ^///i or ^//h par/, n^lPTJ and Jljl^
ienik part. Side by side with these, in the same sense, there are
also fonns like a third, and S^'J ^ piarUr, a fifth pari,

and with the affoimative (plur. fi^f^ a /or// these
are to be legarded as abstraGts^ and are denominatives from the
cardinal numbers^ Comp. finally ^fOB^ j(S8^f, a week; a decade
(of days), and also the Unih day.
On the expression of the otiier n lations of number, for which the Hebrew has
no vpedal fecn^ tee the Syntax, \ 134. ^ and r.
Digitized by Gocxjie
304 The Particles. [99-
CHAPTER IV.
THE PARTICLES.
4 90. Gtturai Vuw.
1. The particles, which in general express the secondary modi-

fications of thought in speech, the closer relation of words to one
another, and the mutual connexion of sentences, are for the most
part either borrowed or derived from noun-forms, sometimes also
from pronouns and verba ( 30. s). Primitive particlea (apart from
a few demonstrative forms, see { 100. i) can only be so called in tlie
sense defined in { 81 sq.
2. So far as tbe origin of the parddes can be discovered with
oertainty, they are either (i) harrmoed from other parts of speech;
i.e. certain forms of the noun, pronoun or verb, with more or less
loss of their original meaning, have come to be employed as particles;
comp. in the Indo-Germanic languages, e. g. the Latin ccrtOy /also,
parU'm, verum, ajusa, ihc Gciiiiau siall, ansia/l, we^cn, wtg, ami the
Kn2;li.sh ins/,a<}, away; or (2) dtrhed from other parts of speech,
either (<;) by the addition of fV>i rij,LUve syllables, as DO^* hy day, from
Di'' (comp., however, 100.^); or most commonly {b) by abbreviations
effected in various ways, the extent of their mutilation being in pro-
portion to the frequency of their use, SO that in some cases (see
below) the original stem has become wholly unrecognizable.
Conp. ia Gennaa gm^ from g^m^ Ctgmd; teit, from SeiU ; tue& (ori^âally
a pBiti1e of time, like cor wAiU), from rfV/<V.
Still more violent nbbrcviation^ occnr in (Jreck, Latin, and the Romance
lan^nia{,'e$, e.g. dv<i, o^, a; ex, ; ad, Ft. di out, br.oUf luL ; jM/rr,
lul. su \
* Even short pbr.tses are contracted iaio c: word : Lat /arsttan, from
/ors sit an, itiKoviri, SiÂaSq, Fr. ût-itre^ hag. ^'Hthu from / pray tkit^lA
Chiiwtt moit of the jMutidca an veibt or noons; e.g. (to give), and alio the
siga of the dative; I (to make we oQ. bcDCe i^>ftr; M (<l*^ interior), henci i.
IOO.j Adverbs,
The greatest shortening occurs in those particles which have e

entirely lost the character of an independent word, by being reduced
V
to a single consonant with its vowel (generally short) or S'wd.
According to the laws of syllable formation in Hebrew ( 26. w),
such particles cannot stand indef>endent]y, but are united, as prefixes,
with the following word ( 102), very much like the prefonnatives
of the imperfect (J 41.
The view that this tbottening of whole words to tiiigle letters hss actnaUjr taken d
place in the gradual course of linguistic development, is rendered highly probable
by the fact that similar ahhrcviations in later Hebrew and Aramaic, i.e. as the
development of the originai bcmitic speech progreraes, become more and more
striking and frequent. Thus the Biblical Aramaic becomes at a later period '^
;
ia modem Arabic, e-g.^ldKi^ (now) is from hahoaqt; Ifi (whyl) from li-ajyi-iaifn^
Sec. Comp. also the analogous cases mentioiied above from the Western languages.
Kevertheless, the use of tlio tiiiipleil putides belongs already to tiie earliest
periods of the Hebrew laflgnafOi Of, St uttf ntt, to the earliest dncnments which
have come down to na.
9* Less frequently particleB are fonned by cmHpotiHm: a3 ^

VBhtrtfoTif for SVIJ^ ^md ^hctus? (rt or quid cogmiim?
*3|!>a (from ift and TH) beudet; nJ>]^|)D (from IP, {, from
aiove, above.
More frequent is the combination of two words into one without contractioa,
*
e.g. j9TinK/rni?,Dni,rrV3.
100. Adverbs*
"L The negative ^ noi^ and a few particles of place and time, a
as tS^ ikere^ are of obscure origin.
S. Forms of other parts of speech, wkidi are used adverbially b
witbout further change, are
(a) Substantives with prepositions, e. g. li<tQ (with might) very ;
alone (prop, in separation^ Fr. a pari), with su alone

n^Sp from ivithin, within; cf. also "Ô^S (as one) top ether.
{/>) Substantives in the accusative (the adverbial ca-e of the Semites, e
118. w), comp. Ti)v apxhf, d/>fdi', e.g. li<D (might) very, DdA (cessation)
n more, Di*n (the day) to-day (comp. 126.^), ^n: (union) iogdher.
Several of these continued to be used, though rarely, as substantives,
e.g. P^v- C^?^?? uid nta^^D, rfrm/, as adverb aram, around;

odiers have quite ceased to be so used, e. g.
(rqietition, doiaiion) eâm or Juriher, longtr,
^ (length) imig agp;
Digilied by Google
3o6 The Particles, [100.
d {c) Adjectives, esj>cciall} in the feminine (corresponding to the

Indo-Germanic neuter), e.g. njirKT primum, formerly (more fre-
quently '^^'''^'4*7^, also ; "^T^ and fB"? mulium, much, enough;

nwjw wonder/idly (properly mrabilibuSt sc. modis\ n^'pnj Jewish^
i.e. in the Jewish language.
(</) Verbs in the infinitive absolute, especially in HipKd, which

are likewise to be regarded as accusatives ( 113. h\ e. g. nsnn (prop.
a muHipfywg) much, rST^ in muUihides fiSf^ {mam/mmdo) tarly:

{^tpare faewido) in ike aemug.
f Pronouns and numerals, e.g. nj (prop. /Mereâi ihu phei) lure,
J/)
rorj here, hither (also of time, comp. PR nd nai^ jrpy, f^?nj
mi now); nn^ft ,
DîRK^, V2^, HWD >f^, At^/V^, jawm Hms, a hundred Ihut;
nOB^ yf/r Ihe second time.
Z 8. Some adverbs are formed by the addition of formaUve syllables

(most freciuently D ) to substantives or adjectives, e.g. and
iruly (from fOiJ DSH (by favour) ^ra//j (from ?n gratia)',
Dlf^. m Tain,frusira, but also Ruth 1,21, parallel with the /J-w.
n^b^ y// (from PT". ^w^/y, emptiness, vorMvin); O^^^

Lam.
^ (from
an adv. in
Di*)
Comp. also D^pW (an adj. in Hab. 2, 19.
Is. 47, 5) and, with ^ in the last syllable, Qitna, for D^ffjli, in a
HomkUngf suddenly (from 9D& homhltng), and D^B^

yuterday (from K^f^ Mrr), the ^ In both cases being probably
obscured finom an original d* oreoiver, comp. A^fl'TIS hathoard, and
ft'^y, sordidate, Mai. 3,14. In both these cases, the formative syllable
an has been first attached to the stem, and then the feminine ending
iih, which is elsewhere used to form adverbs, has been added to it.
h The terminntion D occurs also in tlie formation of sabst.nntivcs, e. g. dVo

ladder [Uom ^D), and hence the above adverbs may equally well be regarded
as nouns used adverbialiy, so that D-^-, D ,
correspond to J___, p (5 85,
Nos. 53, 54), comp. D^^HQ, eqaivalent to redemption, DkriD3 (with prep.)
* I this D~ JU) instance of the locative or temporal termination (cf. especiAlly
PinV) mentioned io SS. < ? Noldekc, ZDMG. xl. p. yai, considers >cnndary
substantival form (used adverbially like ^^"^ noetu), corrcspondinp to the
Phoenician and Aramaic D0\ Syr. U/ndrnd; cf., on the other hand, Konig, ii. 355
the Fhocn. t3t>* b probMbly plant, and u die osie of die psralld %riw *IImMF,
the deihcd foim (ooeoxring In C3^*>) it tbo vied to expfeif Ajr,heddetlioffdiiiM7
jrjtM.~De lAipa^ opinion {Newn fuM^gr, tdUiomis tfecimm, p. la i^) tiist
XSf^ ehonld be lead tibj le altoflethcr inpiobebic.
Digitized by Go
100.] Adverbs. 307
nNAAMjr a dm.
39, 3^ AceoidJng; to othm, tlib b in dMoIde aecttaatiTC
ending, to be oompanad wttkUie iadetemfntte aficwirtif dag-, in Aa in Anbic
4* A nmnBer af forms standing in very close relation to the i

demonstrative pronoun may be regarded as primitive adverbs, since
they arise directly from a combination of demonstrative sounds.
Some of these have subsequently suffered great mutilation, the
extent of which, however, cnn now very rarely be ascertained with

certainty. Such are e.g. W ihen, r3 thus (cf. n^K, HM^K haw?\
only, {^^ irufy (on all these adverbs, see the Lexicon), and especially
the interrogative n (ffi mierr^gainmm), e.g. t6Q (Deut 3, ii ni)n)
n&mu? EUn num ei(dmf This /Tr tn/errtgatnmm is perhaps shortened
from which is still used in AralHC^ and, according to the view
of a certain sdool of Masoretes, occurs also in Hebrew in
Dent. 32, 6\
The n interrogative takM (1) J^faieph-PathaJf^ generally before non-gutturals h
(even befoie 1), with a firm Towel, e. g. hast iUm sat lee the intetfogative
clmne^ { 150. c Lev. 10, 19 ta an ezceptioD%
(a) Beftnt conaonant with iSnf, nsoaUj Ai/Aa^ withont
foltowing Dagt% /
/0fiSr> e. g. n:3^3n Gen. a;, 3t, oomp. 18, 17. a^, 5. jo, 15. 34, 31 ; leaa frequently
(in about tea paaaages)* PvHuih with a following Dugel forte, e^ g. II'I'IBH num
im via, Erck 20, 30, Gfli. 17, 1 7. 1 8, ax 37, 3a, Nnm. 13, 19. Job 33, 6;
even in 1 Sam. to, 24. 17, 25. 2 Ki. 6, 32.
Before putturals, not pointed with either Qames or Ilattph-Qamfs, it takes 111
Palhah, e. p. -nSxH j/za// / ? HWH / ? QKH www ; niPNn Mai. i, n

also in Jud. 6, 31 read DTlKH (not 'KH), likewise H in Jud. 13, 5. Jer. 8, 19.
Neh. 6, II. In Num. 16, aa, the Masora intends the article; we should
lead ^^(^ and compw

, Deitt. ao, 19 ; in Eccl. 3, ai aead n^^n and DTl^n ; the
article ii n conectUn dne to doctrinal motlvea.
(4) takea S*f^ before gnttnraKi which ham Qamtf or (aa in Jnd*
The n H
99 aqq.) Blattpk^Qamef, t.g,^ttOI^ Mie, a. 7 ; îp^ Job ai,4 ; ntlVin Joel i aj ,
Gen. 34, 5 (comp. the analogous iostanoes in $ aa. e, $ 35. ^ *53, i).
The place of thia interxcgathe particle ia alwajant the b<|pnnii% of the dAOie.
6. Some adverbs occur also in connexion with saffizes, thus

/ om
^ o
ihou art Hurt, 3rd sing. masc. ^^C^, 2nd plur. masc.
n^, and sing. I^^K, fern. 3rd sing. ^33*K, fem. niJ^, and plur.
t)3^>x, 3rd plur. masc. Also ^fj^V (^^P only in "!iy3
and niyg), ^-^ly, IjTiP, *T^y (Lam. 4, K'ih.; T\fAV Qre), Q-Tly.
* The separation of the Fl at tfie hcgin&ing of Dent. 3a, 6, expressly noticed

byC^l^ (ed.Rittaib.,p.4eb) aa anudqne taiitanoe, ia pedu^ a protest iâUiit
admitting n paitide
za
Digitized by Google
3o8 The ParUcks,
when ori (kou? ^ wkert is he? D|l$ when are The nme
applies to }0 and M beMd! (prop. Ar<r, y see 105. b)t
onljin Gen. i9 1
jUiimiA), in /dwisr
with snffizes, VSfi and
^leldi/jm (jkrf tfM /), 1|n
^ (Gen. as, 7 with
Pk. 139, 8)1
i^n, Iw, and vun, \D?n rV and |n, in /otw ttan, Dsan, wn.
^ The Qsaal expkaatioQ ot these suffixes (especially of the forms with N^n
llfemikeiiaim) w
in&ni* wUcb Mcribe* Mme ponrer of verbal govenunent
veriial
eTCn to lofnt oiigiiiallj nlMtaBStnl (e>g.\9^ Mcnr it, Ae it), U 9i laol

iaadrntaiUo for Ibniiff (tUce i^, evidently coopccted with ooniiîfluDet;
evea for the otfwr fonw It is qneilionfthle.
J 101. PreposUtmu,
a 1. All words, which by usage serve as prepositions, were originally
substantives, viz.
(a) Substantives in the accusative and in the construct stale, so that
the noun governed by them is to be considered as in the genitive,

and in Arabic actually has the genitive ending, comp. in German
âU deteen, kra^ detsm, in Greek rovrov x^P^"* in Latin Auws ret
eausoy or graHa^ wumiis imtarK Comp. (hinder part*) bekmd^
after {fiffil in |9 *^n$ Lev. 14, 56. Dent si, 13. i Sam. 10, 5;
n|TnJ a Chron. 9); ^fM (side*) r/me hy: T9 (intermediate space*}
hOween: isl (distance) ÂiW, armmd; r6v, or with /TtW^
compaghUi (removal, want) exee^; 1S! (purpose) i account tf:
^ (i^to <Niljr in Dent i, i) before, over agcmut: *}P (separadon; cf.
I iQ.r) y^'m, out of; (coming in front, that which is over against)
before, over aiâi'nsi / "TJ (progress, duration *) dun/iif, until
(height, upper part*) m)er ; "Cy (connexion?) tt/M/ it is
doubtful wliether tliis is to be derived from the same stem as ^^5^,

TOv!) near, beside, like; TinR (under part *) under, instead of.
h {b) Substantives in the construct state, but to be regarded as in the

genitiv(>, since they depend on prepositions (especially the inseparable)^
e. g. V&i' (in the face of*) before: (according to the mouth,
i*e. the command of*) aecorda^ id; (in the concern of) am
account of; (for the purpose of) on accamU tf,
9. Subatandves used adverbially very ficquentlx become preposi-
' In the examples which follow, meaning of the nom is added in parentiisiei^
and, M'hcn it actaally in use, is markr with rin asterisk. On a similar MS
l
in other laogiufea, see W. von Hamboldt, Uitcr die Kawit^ckCt iiL p. 6ai.
Digitized by Google
fiM.] Prefixed PreposUums. 309
tions in this way, e.g.^!>3, ^!>33, '!>30, ^|>a, fVa, DDifii (with ceaaation)
wiihmi, liVf (in the duration of) dtim^gs *3f , ^ (according to the
zequiiement of) fift tutordnig
108. Prefixed PreposUSom.
1. Of the words mentioned in loi, "iP from^ out of, iVequently a

occurs as a prefix ( 99. r); and even with its Xiin assimilated to the
following consonant (by means of Dage^ /orte)^ e.g. out ^ a

forest.
Rem. The eqMtnte 19 (always with iblttnriiig MkfftfK) is nsual (bat not B
necessary, comp. Jud. ao, 14 with vene 15. Ezek. 43, 6. Sec) onlj before the
article, e.g. jnNrrjD, and sometimes occnrs before the lofter consonants, e. g.
^K"iP Ter. 44, 18, Joel 1,12. I Chron. 5, iS; cf. Ex. 18, 14. Lev. i, 14.
14, 30 Jud. 7, 23. 10, 4. 19, 16 1\ 104, 7 (3 Ki. 23,, 36 hcfore T ; nko before
p m and elsewhere lu ihe later Books â-i in Aramaic;

Ps. 18, 49), there 'î
Is besidct m poetic by<-fbnB (comp. i 90. m) and Is. 30, xi. Its loon
U aoit oommooly imfil foUewiHg Ik^, which may, hmicfer. he oonitted
hi Icttcn which have Shui (oonp. f ea ). With a Ibllowhig ^ the 9 as

a iiil^ oontfaded to t.g, ^y^'^^'jp or (h^t comp. Xfl^^ '*
l}|r|||h^ a Chron. ao, it); helbve gnttanla it heoooic^ D
(according to ( aa, 0>
e.g. CSIKD, 9 occurs before 11 wltii the guttural virtually sharpened in
J^TO p the outside, and in D^fTO Gen. 14, 33; before n in T\S'^r'<rs (comp. 38 f>
and 63. ^. The closed syllable here is incocsiitcnt witli the supposed vi:tL,;i;
sharpening of the H; probably n^^HO is merely doe to the analogy of nvni>, ;
similarly Is. 14, 5 before 1 but in i Sam. 33, a8. a Sam. 18, i6-
; is to be
read, according to ( aa. r.
2. There are also three other particles, the most commonly used c
prepositions and the particle of comparison, which have been reduced
by abbreviation ( 99. to a aii^le piefioMd consonant ivith SHod

(but see bdow), vis.:
iffuurdsf io,/ot, Lat. ad

f
f Wte^ atf têordmg io (no doubt the remnaiit of a anbstantive
with the meaning cf nuUttr, kind^ Avilor)*
WldiTcgaidtothepofaitingltlatobeobeervedtfaat'
() The &*wi muiUtf with which the above pnsfiaee aie unally praoooioed, d
baa lecalted from the weehcniag of a shoct vowd (en ori^^nal 4 aeoovffiD( to
* K^^Miif^, EinUitung im A, T., p. 393 (cf. also the almost exhaii-^tivr statistics
in his Lchrgdhiude, ii. 392 sqq.\ enumerate* eight instances of |Ep betoreaword
without the article in a Samuel and Kings, aod ibrty-five in Cbroniclea.
Digitized by Goo
3IO The Particles, [ loa.
letter /) * ; the short yowel i veettlftiljr tetained befim S*wi : befbn SHkA tki^k*
in the Ibnn of an attcnwitei fiomJ.* before a tbe piefuc takes die vowd
of file Zn^^, e.s.^S> >->H(A;^K3
(omeliiiiei willi the ayllable snbieqaentfy
at a Um, ^
doted, oomp. f sS. b, and tbe
biT^, in ^fiiiim
infinitives
with ^, i 63. /) : before weak eonsonants it follows tiie rale given in $ 34. <-, & g.
nTlnJ> for '"h. When the prefixes 3,
1, 3, ^ precede D^r6
the i'rwi
and jWz/<f/A i'V'^^' if j^larly coalesce in Sh-t, e.g. D*n1jN3, &c., for '^3 ;
so
with suffixes Vn^Nl &c. . (once also in the sing., Hab. I, xi); also rqpilarly
lbK,'b to say, for "ibtl^, see ( 23. </.
^ (P) When the prefixes precede tbe article, the ft is almost always dropped^ and
they take its vowel. Sec further in 5 35-
f if) launediately before the tone-syllable, L e. before monosyllables and dls*
syllables with the tone on the pennltinia (in die fore-tone), they take Qaus
(nndottbtedly a lengthening erf* an original d, comp. aflL <, s8. <), bat only in tbe
following cases:
(m) J befoce InfimtfTes of tbe aboMaentioaed Ibnn, as

/IT Ju4gt, tl^ {0 phmAr, io sJitar, ah^ /tf is^ a /aiaHUi tt^ i9 Mug
forth, td^ to go, Jnnj^ i taiU, except wben tbe mfinitiye (a* a nmm r^mi\
is dosely connected with another word (espedaUy its sabjectj f 115. ) ud
consequently, as being in a sort of constr. state, loses the principal tone, e.g.
n3rb Ex. 19, I, rdo'^ Gen. 16, 3 (in such cases as ain-nnj^ Ex. 5, 21 the
d is protected by the secondary tone; before infinitives of verbs Vy,thc ^ it
retained even in close connexion ; comp. zek. ai, 20. 25. 22, 3);
^ {Jfb) before many pronominal forms, e.g. n]3 ySo aiso iii 1 Sam. 2i, 10; not
n?3), ntb, T\0, nfciP (in close connexion, however, niftb Gen. a, 13; TUkCb
Gen. 45, 33); n^3 as thtsc; and especially 033, D37, 033 (033) and DHS,
D?^, see I o3.
^ (rO bebie aoDosyllables or fore-toned noons In andi combmaticos as HB

asNfCl ii9 siMi0l, sKi. 10,21, 0^^ p3 h^wnnwaitn tmiviattts, Gen. 1,6;
ITj^ ybr a irmik. Is. i, 14, bot always Iwfeie the principal patne^ The
instnetive example in Dent, ty, ^ also ihowi that die panetnadon ^ reqnlfes at
least the lesser panse after it; in Is. 98, 10 and 13 tbe ^ is twice lepeated, even
befeR the small and smallest disdncdm;
I {dd) in oeitam standing ej^msions, wlueh hsTS become stereotyped almost
as adverbs, e. g. to liormty, Shp midtûU, np3^ in security, HYsS to
ilmiity,hniU*rmni^ toaatt9miiy,lM,iî9, CLtiao Hft^fortJUdmd,

Lev. 19, 28. Num. 5, 2. 9, 10.
^ ((/) With the interrogative they are pointed as in 1103 ; in pausi and
before K as in rTO3 ^y what ? (before a following reUlive clause, as in Eccles.
3, 22, HDS; comp. Dclitzsch, /esaia, 4th ed., on Is. 2, 22); HB^ muihf
hot also nD3 2 Chron. 18, ic, in cloie c inncxion, and at a n^pnter distance from
the fattst. The S'gkî in these ionus an&c& from a partial icngiiieniiig of the
* Jerome (see Siegfried, ZAIV^ iv. 79) almost always fc^'ieseats a by M.
Digitized by Goo
103.] Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes, 311
of^;iittl iritile tlie D is fhaipened in order to mtinf in the origiiul S of
the prefixet.
"When |
(prop. Ai) it united to Tt^, it tikcf, accoiding to f 49./^, tiie Jbcm /
TK^ Job 7, 10 m^, I Sam. 1, 8 aU iUfT/i; and henee th i in the tone
titaiKtheiied to^y^rtpitf^f tn^/ Before tiie gnttsitlt II, 11,9, nc|> is used
Ibr euphonic mmom (esoeptions i Sun. a8, 15. a Sun. 14, 31. Jer. 15, x8, before nt
a Sun. a, aa. Fa. 49^ <S, belbie M)| ni}!^, however, reniiia befote fl. Before
lettera vliich are not gattni]% k found in Fa. 4a, 10. 431 a (immediately
after a tone-syllable).
Rem. The divine name Hin^, which has not Its own original vowel?! (probably m
mn'j hxii those of Ô'lK (sec 17. c), takes the prefixes ako, after the manner of
thus n^m rriiTS ninâ. ninô (since they are to be read ^ynsi înK?
*yi3 , ; for the K of , as of , D^:h &c. , (sec below), ûieues
after the prefixes 3, 3^ ^ 1, but is attdMe after D (for \Q), fno instance
ta the O. T.), and H (in D*3hHn, the article, not n interrog., is intended,
since the only ejtample with H interrog^ Jer. 8, 19, is to be pointed nln^n, i.e.
âiKjl , not ninjn). Hence the nUc, K*3riD ifiw/ *rwÂ/ Mtf (i e- o"^ 8^, H
make the K Midible), 0'p 3^3] and CM imght ^ (Le. 1, 3, ^, 3 aUow
It to qnieaee)Âa legaida the other plnnl fiaima of fnn^, Wfneapt of the
M almjB tnkea place aaer 3, 1, 3, ^, eacept in the km, thus V^hK^,
lOdw PrâsUum uftik PrcHmmai Sujpxts and m the Plural Form,

L
As all prepositions were originallj nouns ( loi) in the accusative, a
they may be uniled with the noun-auffixes (91. ^/), e. g. 'S^w (prop,
at my side) by me, (in my proximity) wUk me, DTinn (in their place)
instead of them, like the Latin mea causa, for my sake.
Rem. I. The preposition (usually TIK) near, wiih, is distinguished from h

X% (comp. note I, p. 380), the sign of the definite accusative Ci *'7- ). it
connexion with suffixes, bj n difference of pointing, the fanner maidng ^HK,

^nK, in pause 1|ri, and fan. !]nN ,1s. 54, 10 îriN), \nK, 0301*, Dn (also
in' the htter Booka, eapedally in Kinp* and in Jer. and Eidc., iocontctly
^{riH mlA mt "^fi^ from /Am, i KL ao^ as; Mjg /rm Sim, i KL aa, 7;
Onfc iir4 Mmi), while the latter retaina its otiginal # faefors the light anffixes.
Hence the foliovrine forma arise

Plor.
s. ^ aif. V^mi.
m. S)nK, /aim iirik
/. w I
)
* Another awr awsa^. is

0^ VST^ aU is hidden in km.
Digitized by ^^f>pg[e
312 The Particles. Q 103.
Less common aie the /.Vwi form 5 Tl*!}*
^
^T^^"^ (Num. a 2, 33 HDHk before n),
?irrti< (Ex. 29, 35 nDHK), nniK, dMk. Moreow, for oanx

we find D3ri^K Jos. 23, 15 ; for Dn{<(, five times (Gen. 32, i. Ex. 18, ao,
Dni7tt< ,
and 111 Y.zck. 33, 45 Dr.H'iX ; for |r)t< (only fou;.d m Kz,ck. 16, 54; 35, 26
njriK; 34. ai n^^K) also jnn (Gen. 19, 8, &c [13 times]) and |nn^K Ezek.
<3 47* iiwtMice of the and fern. plnr. prife^
*
occurs in the O. T.; in Cant, a,
7, ftc. DSn^ is ued instead.
C 3, The pfepoiitiQa "D]? wUh (iritlk saffim on the model of stems
^ [t Sam.
witii tlie aofBaei tt
1. 96 n^], in /mm
dj and SH by a
IfGli^; sod lem. 1)^;
(pretonic)
ns^} Is ndtad
ûrcf, wbidi eanaes Ihe
ihaipcniag of die Mim to be distbctfy audible: ISe^, Csaff, DH^ (so m
Nam. ss, ai, and often in very late pessages* odierwise DQ^ is generally used).
In the first peison, besides we also find ^^J^ îrobably from original
; cf. Arab, 'inda^ beside, with).

*
0 9* It is bnt seldom that piepoutions ooenr with verbal snflixcs, as ^)ni^
a Sam* as, 37. 40. 48 (lor which Ps. 18, 37. 40. 48 ^nnn), Hinnn Gen. a. az
and Vi> ia% II (heie piobaUy for the sake of the riiyme with ^jfilB^^
1 When pronominal snffizts are added to lihe prefixes ( 102), there
appears occasionany, espedally hi the case of the ahorter aiiflfaree,
an endeavour to lengthen the preposition, so as to give it more strength

and iiody. Hence to 3 is app' ndcd ihc s) liable Id (see the Rem.),
and ^ and \ take 3 and ^ ( 102.
at least a lull vowel, d, /). The
following deviations from the analogy of the noun Nvith suffi.\es are
to be noticed (a) in the pausal forms Tja, Tj^, ijriN, T]nx, -JD^ (not
btkha, &c.); (3) in the similar form^ \v\\h the suffix of the 2nd sing,
fem. (not bekk, ftc), and in tt^, V^H, Ac. (not bma, Ac.).
f {a) |> Z;;//2 Pronominal Sujjixes.
Siqg. Flur.
I. 49 M< il9 nr.
2.
i.
f.^
A? him.
to her.
Dn^, nonb, poet. iD^*'L
Vf^\^Vb f
^
and Z'/w/ (in me), in \Tilgar Arabic for fi and hi, are compared by Sociju.
XS^ does uot occur in the Old Testament, by a mere accident, no donbt
Exek. 13, 18 n335.
The question whether "ID^ can also stand for the sing, ip, which Rbdiger
positively deni^ must now decidedly be answered in the afinnntifc^ sinoa the
Digitized by Google
103-] Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes. 313
3 takes suQSxes in the same manner: 13 (Ex. 7, 29. 2 Sam. g

22, 30. Ps. 141, 8 naa^ as in Gen. 27, 37. 2 Sam. 18, 22. Is. 3, 6
ro!)), ia, &c.; except that for the 3rd plur., besides Dna (especially
in the later Books) and nBna (only in Ex. 36, i. Hab. i, 16; niSO?
only in Jer. 14, 16), the form 03 is also used; and for the feminine,
besides nana (which occurs three limes), fna is found fifteen times,
and ina, but only in i Sam. 31, 7. Is. 38, 16. Ezek. 42, 14. According
to the Masora, is found fifteen times for (as conversely in
I Sam. 2, 16. 20, 2 ih for ^b), e.g. Ex. 21, 8. i Sam. 2, 3. Is. 9, 2.
Ps. 100, 3 (and, as has been conjectured, also Job 41, 4); comp.
Delitzsch on Ps. 100, 3. In Num. 32, 42. Zech. 5, 11. Ruth 2, 14,
the Masora requires instead of (in all three places before
a following tone-syllable; comp. 23. and the analogous cases of

the loss oi Mappiq in 58.^, 91. ^).
(3) 3 with Pronominal Suffixes. h

Sing. Plur.
1^^? "1 seldom tte2"

2.
I

' ^ as thou. " ^^5?,
' * *
as ye.
\ ^*
1m. Vl^3 as he. Dn3. rDn3, ntsnsl Dn^D3

as they.
/ n^S as she. m\ "?'53
Phoraician safliz of the 3rd pers. sing, in D has been tmiversally recognized as
the groond-form of the Hebrew suffixes in \o (comp. Schroder, Phonit. Sprache,
p. 153 sqq. and p. 154 for Schlottmann's explanation of this 0). It is true that
in such places as Gen. 9, a6. 27. Deut. 33, a. Is. 30, 5. Ps. 73, 10 (all in or
immediately before the principal pause; in DeuL 33, 2 with Zaqeph qaion
at least) can be better explained as plural (in reference to collective nouns)
and in Is. 53, 8 for y33 wc should read with the LXX y33 . On the
other hand, in Is. 44, 15 its explanation as plural would be extremely forced.
Even then there would remain presuming the traditional text to be correct
Vd^^B Ps. II, 7 and ^D^B5 Job 37, 33, as well as to\b^> the last occurring three
times, Job 30, 23. 27, 33 (beside l^b^)i and especially Job 33, 2. In all these
places the most extreme excgetical artifices can only be avoided by simply
admitting a smgular suffix (= VB5, vj>^).
* The form |nS occurs in Ruth i, 13 in the sense of therefore.
' The use of ^3 here for * (cf. above, letter d) might be due to euphonic
reasons. Probably, however, it is a case of contraction from ^JM '"^p* ^
letter k. ^^b3 (defectively) only in the Pentateuch, ^bS Ex. 15, 11.
314 The Particles, [ 103.
(f) "JO with Pronominal Sufixa.

Sing. Plur.
! *I99> poet, in /aiff# also /rm r.
>w. ^DD, Job 4, 12 in pause poet.

3- \^^V? or ^nsoj from Aim. cn^p
Ihm.
/ m^D from fur. pJO]; n|!}D
k The tirUable 1d (In Ambic jwi M^^Heb. nl0 in (probably 6om

nD3, prapuMMnfty JI9 wAd//, Ibr oi /) ii, in poeby, appended lo the tfaiee
ilmple pitfiies |, even widumt nflixe% to that tos, ^D3, tob appear
ai independent woida, equivalent in mffinfng to 3^ |l. Poetry ie here die-
tinguiihed from pnie bj the use of longer forms ; in the case of {O, on tfie other
hand, it prefers the shorter, which resemble the Syziac and Arabic.
/ The form DnS, enclosed in brackets above, ocmrs only in a Ki. 17, 15 (in
Pause^f '"Ô? ^^^^y 3*^' 5^ 103 (Boer following Qimhi jn3)
i^'" /''"Ô;
only in Kzek. i!^, i.j Comp. Frensdorff. Massora Magna, p. 334 sqq. For
D33 as yc Qiiiiia nqiiires D33 (invariablj or only in Job 16, 4?); in Jos. i, 15.
Jud. 8, 3. E/ra 4, a iJacr [jives D33.

ffl With r^ârd to fO with suffixes, *1P fi om me is usually explained as arising,
by a reduplication of Ip, from an origixul ^3D3D, just as ^DO from Aim, from
V1-30^D, identical in form wiih M&O^ /rom us, from ^^^DÔ, while
/ivm ker goes back to tUDBD* Far unpler, however, Is Laadmft
liajcr
explanation (J?mw ifer Hudts jmwti, xxiiL 30* sqq.) that ^f^, Ac, have
ariMn fiom *|ip, &&, and diet the fonns of the eaffixei are to be eyphfawl on
the analocy of îhn n^nn. $ ioo..~The bndkeled Ibm \n3D, Ibr
wUeh Beer, IbUowing Qimhi end othei% vnitee oecnia only in Fk. 68> 34,
end ie tiiere icfaided by Delitnch, Hvplield end othen (ibUowing Sinonia) ea
a nbetantive (jg^^tiiian). The eqmion Ktnp$ (ibr ^f) U. iS, 1. 7
to vcty itranc&r n^n^ ocean only hi Jer. 10^ a. Eedei. it, ta (Job 11, so
Onip): fff^ (eo Beer end Gbdnngb foUoiring the belt anthofitie% balead of
the ORHnaty feeding IQO) only b Erek. 16, 47. $,
ft 8. Several prepositions, especially those which express relations
of space and tunc, are (like the Gcnuan wegen) properly plural nouns
(for the reason, see 124.0), and are, therefore, joined with the
' The Babylonian Masora writet irfp (to diilinciiih ft fron tiie ilnf
which to jmtly blaned bgr Ibn b8.
Digitized by Goo
$ 103 ] Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes, 315
pranominal BuflBxcs in the form of the plnxal consimci siaU, just like
other plvial nouns ({91 ,g) On the other hand, the apparent connexion
of "i'M, "iv with plural suflbces is explained from the ground-
forms of those piepositions (liom stemi rf^) 'bf,
('^K), 'ij;, 'hj
(contracted to ^Jw, &c.)*
Without sufiixes these prepositions are 9

more frequently (pn>p. hinder parit) bekmi,
poet also ^ (r(î0ii, dtreeOoii), hwards, to, according to,
{interval) bUufeen; the suffixes indicating the singular are added

to the singular 1*9, thus *3'a, ^^*a, &c. (Gen. i6, 5 'J'^'?, the second
I'ddh is, however, marked ^vllh a j)oint as critically doubtful;
which occurs three times, is only the Masoretic Qr/ for ^3^?, which
is found e. g. in Gen. 30, 36). On the other hand, the suffixes
indicating a plural are attached to the plural forms ^3^2 or nta,

{fircuif) around, with suffixes always has the plural form, some-
times masa ^^^99* sometimes* and more frequently, in the fem.
Tioy^s^ (surramdn^sy In Ezek. 43, 17 nn)M i abnormal for
"^y (continuation, duration^ from fnj^) as far as, unto, poet.
In Job 32, 12 OanjI, with the d retained in the :>ccondar} tone, is
abnormal. Also in 2 Ki. 9, 18 for Dni^ read onny,
upon, over (comp. the subst. Mig/tt, the top, from to ascend),
poet.
nn^ under (prop, is ieneaih). On ^^nm, ftc., comp. above,

letter
' The reference ol these forms to original plurals has been again cxpresaly
supported by De Lagarde, S/mmieta, IL loi sqq.; NaekrietUen der G. g. G.^ 1881,
376, cf. H^keUun^M, 1884, p. 63; also GGA^ 1884, p. s8o sq. Aoeoidtog
!.
to Bavih ZDMG. xlii. p. 348 sqq., and Nominalbildung, p. 375 tqq., ^fR^,
3ec, was only formed on the analogy of ftC| and <Scc., only on the
analogy of Sec, since tlie real plural fonns OV^t to be ^^Q^î *
cf., boweva, koois, Lihrgtbiude, ii. 305 aq.
Digitized by Google
The Particles* 104,
WUh Sufixes.
tSittg.
{after me) w) {bnuath me) {to me)
<
TO
T 1
3 ^-Z- OT? TO?
iPhtr, - 1 -
Dnnnx
SI-
on^nnn
V " J
T r"
usually Dîrin
104. Conjunctions.
a L The conjuncUons serve to connect sentences, and to express

their relations one to another. They maj be either
(a) Original pronouns, eg. the demonstmtive Ueami,fir,

{b) Original substanthws, which afterwards were reduced to the
rank of pronouns, adverbs or conjunctions ; so probably (see 36),
which is sometimes used to express the general idea of relation,
sometimes as a relative pronoun (=^tt/', quae, quod), and in many

cases stands simply for "3; also "h^ {nothing), thai not; "iB that not
(the Greek /u) of prohîtion), &c. To these may be added the
' As M.iyer Lambert observes, usage fcf. esp. Gen. 26, 2^;' di;tingnishes between
the two forms ^JTIIJO means between us and you, whereas W^JO (Jos.
:
aa, 35. 27. 28 before 03^3^3^) means between us on the one hand.
' The poetical fonn ^D^^ only in i s. 2, 5 ; 10^^^, 00 which see note 3 on
letter / frequently.
Digitized by Google
f lof.] Conjunctions. 317
adverbial combination of substantives with prepositions, e. g. Dâ

{in the mt yet) earUer, before, for which D'JBD is also used. On the
combination of two particles to express complex ideas (e. g. ^^njlt
added to this, thai much more), see Syntax.
if) Prepositions, which with the addition of the coTijunction "^B^ b

or ^ together form one single conjunction, e.g. '^K'K |JC because, prop.
m account of
the fact that; "f^ "^nK, and more frequently ^nj*,
Mo/y "^f^ a9rding at (with |);

^/2rr and 3^ m eaat^ ^
pumt rf ihe fact ihai^ for Ikt riosm /kaf, iecMue, Sometimesy
however, the conjitnction in such cases is omitted, and the prepositton
itself used as a conjoDction, e.g.'hf (for '^^^y aHJiaugk, Job 16, 17.
So, at an/ rate, accordiiig to oar lingoistic prindples. It would, however,
be more concot to mj, that inHead of ^

faitcrmediary idH Uie whole of ^
ancoeeding sentcooe b rqsarded aa me anbataudval idea, uidcr the imaaediate
gofferamcnt of the prepontion. In the aaaui waj, all >piepaaitiona gantamg
the genud in English may be poniphnaed bjr coiîniGtioaa wldi die Jinile verb*
tee ft 114 and n^f/oisim.
2. Besides those already mentioned, thefe ane certain other small c

words now used as conjunctions, of which the derivation or original
meaning is altogether obscure, thus in or^ "DK jf (also or before the
second member of a double question), a/so, ] and, and others.
Rem. The pointing of the ^ (originally 1, as still before Ilauph Pathah, and ct
with a following Da^c\ forteVx Witic ronscru/hr of the imperfect; cf. '\9-/)
is in many respects analogous to that of the prefixes 3,3, i> (S loa. bot
as bciog n weak consonant, the -wdu' copuiaiiv* has some fuither pecallanties
{a) Usually it takes simple ^Wii H).

{b) Before words which begin with a guttural having a compound ^wA, it takes
the vowel with which the !^w& is compounded (according to \ 38. e. g. 0201,
and mt tkout
"hjw andtUkmss, On CTrAKI , ^}fym ,

Sec, see | loa. d; on î^W ,
Sec, aee
I loa. aa; an aa^ cases aa ibf^ Job 4, a, oomp. { a8. A.
(e) dmple .SW mider die fint coMOoaat (except hi the ^

Befoie woida with
caaea mider letter /), the JFiw becomea die Yowd tf, e.g. emd U ^wf^
also (exoept in the caae vndcr letter^) befoie die cognate labiala 3, D, fi, bcnoe
Qtt the caaea b which 4Kw/^j^ haabeconie a ôf^ after Ir^MAi^
(e.g. Gen. a, ta), oomik f loi A,
(if) With a following ^ the 1 coaleaoea to ftwrn ^ according to 1 14. ^1 e. g. f

mui Ut Um it. On die pccaliar pmetnatlon of the wdw ^piU^nm befiofe
faraia with initial S^mA from njn ^ it and ttff (a Hot (eg. 0(f*!^. Joa 8, 4,
n^rg Gen. ao, 7), comp, 1 65. f.
Digitized by Google
3i8 The Particles. [{ T05.
frequently takes Qames, like 3,3,

^ {t) Immedintely before the tone-syllable it ^>
(sec I I02. / , but in most cases onlv at the end of a sentence or clause (but
cf. also Nni 2 Ki. 2 2, 30). e.g. HO) Ex. 21, la (on the other hand, ia TWie ao
rWM is in closer logical connexion with what follows'' ; 2 Ki. 7, 4 DB^ ^PpJJ,
Sam. pN] Sara. 13, 26
tnd -UnO); Ruth a, 1 rODl ; Ps. to, 15 ih(; i 9, 4 ; 2
Cxen, 13. Si i.. 15, 13.

ICI; Ezek.47, 9 comp. also (with Tiphha) 33 ^
The vcr}' freqnent connexion of nr>nn<: expTe;<;in{T kindred ideas, by meams of 1,

isdue simply to considerations of riivtinn for even in such cases the IVdw must
immediately precede the tone-syllable, which must be marked by * diqnncthre

accejit, e.g. ^nij Xrik Gen. i, 3, Gen. 8, (see abo the pieviou
7\V]T[
examples) ; Gen. 13, 14 (thrice^ ; Ex. 25. 3 SriT ; Ps. 96, 7 Tin 1^33 ; Ps. 76,
Dl 23^1; Gen. 7, 13 Vm Dm"DJ^^ rt i Ki. ; 21, lolh^ D^^?^ ? ^T^J
Mj am/ thus; Est. i, 8 B^W'S^K at the end of the w> hot in P*. 87, 5
I^M ffki widi the aeeond ÎK, became it is dosely

IS^K, in spite of tihe
conneded with the Hollowing predicate. Also with tbiee woidt rW) nn&l yt^
la. 34, 17. On the other han4, the rapid proaandatioo oocnn befine a cea- *j
jnnctive aeoeat (and, when farther leoaoved hem the prindiMl pense, even with the
snaaller disjanctives. In spite of a following tone^Hable), e.g. Gen.
the examples given
38, <; comp. (jea. 31, 40. Lev. 7, 33. Dent, a, 21, and amont;
above, Gen. 7, 13 and Ps. 76, 7. (Exceptions: nonp'! Gen. 13, 14, where
evidently the \ is intended to ensure the slow and solemn recitation of the promise,
but also Jos. 15, 55, nrW T9, 7, 19, 25, all immediately
before the
pause.) For the same rh>'thmical reason^ (not \) is used regularly With eeitwn
monosyllables which, by their nature, lean more closely upon the MIowing word,
thns riT), n^t], eih, Ul\ and others (to be distinguished from ^M0f. with
Zaqefh gaddt KI.' 5, 1 7).
{ 106. IfOirjteHsm*
a 1. Among the interjections some (as in all other languages) are
8imply natural sounds, or, as it were, vocal gesticulations, called forth

involuntarily by certain impressions or sensations, e.g. nnK (Ezek. 30, 2
n\\T9iâhl râhal (comp. this also in '^rw and utinam /),
lOM El. 3a, 31, Ac. (Gen. 50, lY *^) */ (from ^ and W),
otherwise written
(in pause Dn, even in the plaral Van
% a KL ao, 3. Jon. i,
kddymr
14* P*
peace I Neh. 8, it)
4 ; also DO
Jbtfil/ (Amos & 16 Vtin) A0/ nxw/ ^, frft (Ps. lao, 5% *K (in
Ecdes. 4, 10; 10, 16) fw/

^ S. Others, however, originally expressed independent ideas, and
become interjections only by rapid pronunciation and by usage, e. g.
\%\ (Kil) or nan heJwldl (prop. HK"! behold! (prop, imperative)
ran, plur. (prop. imperative of 3iT ;

comp. as to the tone,
Digitized by Google
IO50 Interjections, 319
69. o\ the Latin age, agile, com ml n?!' (also ttb (prop, go,
iropenuive of ^^n) with the same meaning ^ n^5n yZir it// (prop.
ad profanumf) ^3 (see the Lexicon) I hcuech^ hear me! lO prqyÎ
used lo emphasize a demand, warning, or cnircaty, and always placed
alter the expression to which it belongs ^.
1 n(fl (Drat i %\ nxt and iisj* aie aho naed in connenoB with die feminine
and the plonl, which pcofci tliit Ihey have become <|nite leteotyped at
ii.i:.. .'ir. ctions.
* scnes to express the most various shades of expression, w hich are discussed
in the various parts of the syntax. It is used esj^cially [n) after the im/crativf,
either in commands or entreaty, see $ i lo.d; (^) with the imptrfut, eiliicr in the
edhortatlve (f ic8. or jussive ($ 109. b) ; (<:) once with ptrftct, Gen. 40, 14;
If)
(4/) after wiooa paitides : K^Trnn bikM ntwf paiticnlaily after tbe coDjmiclions
TIPand DM; I^TTft ikt fnocw and 1^*1111 ifnw, dwtp,4nfn, in a dqnecatoiy
enie, apKiitw of politctw or modeaty. In Nnm. 19,13 lOetanda altera noon;
ii
bnt we ought evitaiiilj to read Kar!)|Kii la polite laagoagc tUe particle la used
conrtantly in a vaiicty of way*, Gen. 18, 3 sq. 19, 7 aq. 19, and $0, tj,
* Against the anal view whkii mgwds feb a* a hortatory particle

fomef analogous to the original impenttim rQn and rtSp and the Eth. ttifd,
properly hiI her, also comt V. Hanpt, in the Johns Hopkins Uniz'ersity Cinuhir.'<,
xiii,no. 114, p. 109, justly observes that we should then expect the particle to be
prefixed to the imperative, &c. He proposes to descrihe W as an emphatic
particle. Haupt's suggested identihcation of this with the Assyrian, Arabic
and Ethiopic paitide mS (which is also an enclitic <tf emphasis), and nltinately
with tlw intenogative awF, we shall not diicnss here.
Digitized by Google
THIRD PART
SYiN'TAX.
CliiVPTER I.
THE PARTS OF SPEECH.

I. Syntax of U10 Verb.
A. Usi OF XHB TtMSIS AMD M001is\
I 106. Uu of the Ptr/uL

a The perfect lems to express actioii^ events* or oonditioiiB, which
the spej^r Irishes to represent as in a state of completion, whether
they belong to a detenninale past tine, or extend into the present,
or, while still fbtore, are thought of in their completed state.
The ciehnitioa formerly given here (' the perfect serves to express comfieUd
adioiis *) appUM, strictly speaking, mmm of tiie wleties of the perfcot
ooly to
dii emcd la lettcn bcace tiieabove modlficalioa bued 00 tbe Bisomaitt
of KnodtsoQ (for the title tm note i and cC finttcr 1 107. c).
More particidarlj the nses of the perfect nay be distinguisbed
as follows:
b 1. To represent actions, events, or .conditions, which, after a shorter
' Comp. the sketch of the tea&es and moo<is used ia Hebrew in 40; and on
the general characteristics of the perfect and imperfect see the note on { 47. a;
also Driver, if TVt&tist m Ilk Urn TWuer Ai JKhMmv (Oxford, 1874; sided.
ikt
1893); Bennat, 'Notes on the Use of the Hebrew Tenses' {Hebraica^ 18^,
vols, ii, iil;. A partial modification of the accepted dcfinitioti of the Semitic
perfect nirl irn[erfect was prr>pos'd by J. A. Knudtzon, Om del saakîMte Perftkium
og Imptrjiklum i Hebmiik, Kristiania, 1890; of which a summary entitled Vam
Mgnmmtm Ptff. mmd
im /Mr. appeued
Imptrf. in the TrtauatUoiu tf tk$
Orknttti Cmgnst ai StttkMm, teetlon eteitlqae p. 73 Wf^ (Lcfden, 1891).
CC also Knndtzon's articles. ' Zur assyrischcn and allgemeia teniliecben
Grammatik ' in the ZtUtcMrifi JUr AnprM^git, tMfOBuJlj vL 4a and
fiL i3
Digitized by Go
io6.] Use of the Perfect,
or longer doratkm, were tennlQated in the past, and hence are finally
concluded, viz.
(a) Corresponding to the perfect proper in Latin and the English b

perfect definite, in assertions, negations, confirmations, interrogations,
&c., e.g. Gen. l8, 15 ihtu Sarah denied, saying, I laughed not
{^r^ \/h) : and he said, Nay, bui ihou didsi laugh
Gen. 3, 1 1 T|n ^9 who told Ihee Comp. 3, 13. 14. 17. 22.
Also pointing to some undefined time in the past, e.g. Is. 66, 8
nito HQB^ who httih {ever yet) heard such a ihmgf
Rem. Id oppontioa to this expiest we of the perfect to emphtabe Uie com- e
pkiion of en erent, the imperfect is not infrequently used to empbeelce that
iwhich is still future, e.g. Jos. i, 5 as I ivas C*n*^n) with Moses, so wHl I be
(rt^nM) with thee ; Jos. i, 17. z. 10^ 14. DeoL 33, ai. 1 Ki. a, 38. Is. 46, 4. ji.
Joel a, a. Eccles. i, 9.
(^) As a simple kmpus hisiorieim (conesponding (o the Greek d

aoris/) in narrating past events, e.g. Gen. 4, 4 and AM, he alto
droughf (^3n), Ac.; Gen. 7, ao Ihe waltrs did prevail O"^^!), Ac;
Job I, I Ihere was a man ("'n tn the land (f Uz, &c.; even
in relating repeated actions, i Sam. 18, 30.
Rem. As the above examples indicate, the perfect olnarrali^m occurs especially e
aithe heed of en entire neimtive (Job 1,1; comp. Dsn. a, 1) or sn independent
sentence (e.g. Gen. 7, ti, 13% bnt in co-ordinate sentences, as a fide, only when
the verb is sepeiated from the oopnlative \ by one or more words (comp. above
Gen. 4, 4 and 7, 30''. In other cases, the narrative is continued in the imperfect
consecutive, accordinfj to iii.rt. Th'- direct connexion of the narrative perfect
with 1 copulative (not to be confounded ^ \\X\ the perfect consecutive proper, iia)
agrees nCber witb Aramaie syntax (comp. Kantsscb, Grtmrn. da BUUfeh-Amm^
f 71, 1. On the examples (which are in many respects donbtfnl) in the earlier
texts, see { ita. jtîMi.
(f) To represent actions, &c., which were already completed in f

the past, at the time when other actions or conditions took place
(pluperfect), e. g. i Sam. 28, 3 now Samuel was {lortj^ sinet) (had^ . . ,
and Saul had put away ("^^pH) {hose thai had familiar spirits ou/ . . .
0/ ihe land. Both these statements, being as it were in parentheses,
merely assign a reason for the narrative beginning at verse 6. Comp.

I Sam. 9, 15. S5, ai. a Sam. 18, 18. Gen. ao, 18 (for Ike Lord had
/asi cbtsed iip,kiii,)\ 37, 30. 31, 19. 34< Bent, s, 10; and in a negative
^ Licorreetljr e;g. In the Vulgate, Samml auiem mertmm ert , . * ei Saad
Digitized by Google
322 The Paris of Speech. [ 106.
sUUemeDty Gen. 2, 5 fir the Lord God had mi (up to that time) eomed
it to ram, Ac This b especiall) frequent, from the nature of the
case, in relative, causal and temporal clauses, when the main clause
contains a tense referring to the past, e.g. Gen. 2, 2 and he rested . . .
from ali his work which he had made ('"l^); Gen. 7, 9. 19, 27, &c.;
29, 10 now whtu Jacob had seen Rachel (flM^ '^K'l^S) . . Jacob wmi
near, &c.; so also in clauses which express the completion or incom-
pleteness of an action, &c., on the occurrence of another event, as in
Gen. 24, 15. 27, 30, &c.; cf. 164. with the note, and letter c.
g a. To represent actions, events or conditions, \\hich, although

completed in the past, nevertheless extend their influence into the
present (in English generally rendered by the present)
(a) Eipresstng facts whidi were accomplished long before, or con-
ditions and attributes which were acquired long before, but of which the
effects still remain in the present (present perfect), e. g. Ps. 10, 11 "îp?
I'^l Msfact (and sHU keeps it Aiddm); Ps. 143,6 'nfriB
hi hath Udden
/ Aave spread forth my hands {and still keep them spread forth). This
applies particularly to a large number of perfects (almost exclusively
of intransitive * verbs, denoting affections or conditions of the mind)

which in English can be rendered only by the present, or, in the case
mentioned above under letter f, by the imperfect Thus, ^Pyi^
/ knoii: (prop. / have perceived, have experienced) Job 9, 2. 10, 13,
'9yX ^ Gen. 4, 9, &c. ; on the other hand, e. g. in
Gen. Num. as, 34, the context requires / knew not;

88, 16.
toe remember Num. 1 1, 5 ; n|ICD she refuseth Job 6, 7 ; it exnlteth;
^nnqp^ / rg'tnce i SanL a, i ; he require th Is. i, is; I wait

Gen. 49, 18. Ps. 130, 6 (parallel with ^9^"^); ^^f^ I delight Ps. 40,
(mostly negative, Is. i, 11 and dsewhere); ^93?^ / Iwe Gen. s7, 4
I hale Ps. 31, 7; WW / despise Amos 5. 21 ;
*3âgn they
abhor me Job 30, 10; *nnp3 I trust Ps. 25, 2 ;

^n^?n ^ p^t ^y trust
Ps. 31. 2 ;
"'f^ril / am righteous Job 34, 5. We may further include
a number of ve rl^s which exj)[ess Ixnlily characteristics or states, such

as tJicii art i;r<a/ Vs. 104, i
;
^^^^b^ ^ ^^^^^^ Gen. 33, 11 ;
' With ri:gaid to the great but very oalural prepoDclcraacc uf intiansitive verbs
(expressing an cxttting coaditioo), cf. the llits ia KnndtiOQ (tee above, note 00
letter ), pp. 117 end iss la tlie Duiiih text
* Ct mvi, edi, memini} tlSfa, fUpmuim^ Imm, >ity, foj^vys; in the New
Teitainent, ikmm, f^fAmît^
Digitized by Go
f 106.] Use of the Perfect. 323
<
Vl3i ih^ an high Is. 55, 9 ;

V'nj ihey siand aloof Job 30, 10
ikey are goodly Num. 24, 5 ; 4ir(f beoMtiful Is. 52, 7 ;

îÛg}
/am Gen. 18^, 13; / am Weary Ps. 6 7; Vlf^b / am

Is. I, II, Ac.
Rem. To the same category probably belong also the perfects after *(Wgny h
Ex. 10, 3 hag htut thott akcady ieen r^tuii^ (and refosest still . . . f
which really amounts to how long wilt thou refuse T) Ps. 80, 5. ProT. I, aa
(co'ordinate with the impeif.), and after H^^]? . 16, a8. Hah. i, a.
(j) In direct narrairion to express actions which) although reaUy 1
only in process of accomplishment, are nevertheless meant to be

represented as already accomplished in the conception of the speaker,
e. g. ^fônn / lift up (my hand in ratifying an oath) Gen. 14, as
^n^pafl IruHar Jer. aa, 5 ; ^n^Vp. T Usiify Deut. 8, 19 ;
*JDVr, / eoumtl
2 Sam. 17, II (but in a different context in vcr. 15, have I counselled);
(prop- '<?>') ^ decide {I consider as hereby settled) 2 Sam. 19, 30;
I declare Job 9. 22. 32, 10.
(f) To express facts which have formerly taJcen place, and are k
Still of constant recurrence, and hence are matters of common
experience (the Greek gnomic aorisl), e.g. Ps. 9, 11 for ihoUf Lord,
hast not fortakm (glljjplh) thim that seek thee. Comp. ver. 13, also
Ps. 10, 3. 119, 40 and Gen. 49, ti (E>39).
Rem. In t (indnded wider tiie English

afanort all the cases dlscassed in Na /
prawnt) the imperfect can be used instead of the perfect, \?hcrever the action
or state in qneôn is regarded, not as alre.i b. nrajilcted, bat as still condnaing
or jiTst takinfj placr (sec 107. a). Thos, xi? / am no! alh Ps. 40, i.^
and Ccn. 31, 35 have pnictically the same mcaninj^'. Hence also
it very frequently hr^ppens th.nt the imjKTfoct corresponds to such jicrfecUi in
poetic or j>rophetic p
arallelism, c. Is. 5, i Ps. 2, 1 sq, Prov. i, %%. Job 3, 17.
8. To express future actions, when the speaker intends by an m

express assurance to represent them as finished, or as equivalent
to accomplished facts:
(a) In contracts or other express stipulations (again corresponding
to the Pjiglish present), e.g. Gen. 33, ii /t^ fidd I gwe CW}) thee;
comp. ver. 13 and 48, as. a Sam. 14, si. 24, 33. Jer. 40, 4; in
a threat, i Sam. s, 16. 15, 3. a Sam. 5, 6 (unless^ with Wellhausen,
TtP\ is to be read). Especially in promises made by God, Gen. i, 39.
15, 18. 17, 20. Jud. I, a.

{b) To express facts which are undoubtedly imminent, and, therefore, n
in the imagination of the speaker, aircaUy accomplished {jxrfecium
Y 2
Digitized by Google
394 The Paris of Speech. [f io6.
confidmtiae), e.g. Num. 17, a; ÎgK tt^^ ^la* 10 iw

perish, we are undone, ive are all undone. Gen. 30, 13. Is. 6, 5
I am undone^ Prov. 4, 9. Even in interrogative aentenoes,
Gen. 18, 19. Num. 17, 38. 23, 10. Jud. 9, 9. 11. Zech. 4, io(?).
Prov. 28, %o\ This use of the perfect occurs most firequentlj in
prophetic language (perftettm prt^ûHcutffy^ The prophet so trans-

ports himself in imagination into the future that he describes the future
event as if it had been already seen or heard by htm, e. g. Is. 5, 13
there/ore my people are gone into captivity 9, i sqq. 10, 8. 11,9
(after as ircquently elsewhere); 19, 7. Job 5, 20. 2 Chi on. 20, 37.
Not infrequently the imperfect interchanges with such perfects either
in the parallel member or further on in the narrative.

o if) To express actions or facts, wliich are meant to be indicated
as existing in t)ie future in a completed state {/uturum exacfum\
e.g. Is. 4, 4 |*nn dm when he has washed autqy = when he shall have
washed away (an imperfut follows in the co-ordinate .sentence ; cf.
the conditional sentences in loy.^r); Is. 6, \a (after DK *ie^ nsf,
as in Gen. aS, 15. Num. 3a, 1x7

; also % Sam. 17, 13 after
Gen. 84, 19 after and elsewhere frequently afker temporal

conjunctions); Mic. 5, Gen. 43, 14 ^^^J *5)L
and I if I am bereaved (orhts /uero), I am bereaved, an expression of
despairing resignation. Comp. Prov. 23, 15. Est. 4, 16.
p 4. To express actions and lacts, whose accomplishment in the

past is lo l)c represented, not as actual, but only as possible (generally
corresponding to the Latin iniperlect or pluperfect subjunctive), e. g.
Gen. ^r, 42 except theGod 0/ my father had been with me, surely .
nozv hadst thou sent me away empty ^'^J^^Yt Gen. 43, 10. Ex.9, '6
I had almost put forth, Ac.); Num. 22, 33. Jud. 13, 83. 14, 18.
I Sam. 13, 13 (r??); 9 Ki. 13, 19; so frequently after DÎD^ easUy,
ahnottf Gen. afi, 10. Is. i, 9 (where is pmbably to be connected
* Ccnnp. the similar use of ikotka (Sicîmr, //. 15, 1 38) and pgrHl On tho
kindred use of the perfect in conditional sentences, comp. below, letter /.
' In Gen. 40, 14 a p' rf. conjidiniiae (after DK as in a Ki. 5, 20. 23. 9)
appears* to be used in the expression of an earnest desire that someliuiig may

happen, b$tt hatfe me im thy remembrancey &c Neither this passage, however,
nor the tiie of the petfect in Axmble to expfcai a wish or imprecation, justifies
ni in atsnmine tiie existenoe of a preeative perfect in Hebrew. In Job ai, 16,
33,18 also, translate the eeunsel tf the wiehed it far from me, Comp. Diivet,
The Use of the Telnet^ p. 39 sqq.
Digitized by Google
107.) Use of the Imperfect 325
with the word after it){ Fs. 73, 2. 94, 17. 119, 87. Prov. 5, 14. Cf.
also Job 3, 13. 23, ro l*??"!)- Rth i, 13 (if I shmdi ihmk, Ac;
comp. 3 Ki. 7, 4); in the apodosis of a conditional sentence, i Sam.
25, 34. So lUu to express au unlulluled desire, Num. 14, 2 ^
would that III had died . . . / with the imperfect would mean
would that ivi might die ! I Sam. 14, 30). Finally, also in a question
indicating astonishment, Gen. 2X, 7. *D voho would have said . , ,?

quit dixtriii Ps. 73, 11.
107. U$t of the ImperftciK

The impetfect, as opposed to the peiliect, represents actions, events ^
or conditions* which are rc;garded by the speaker at any moment
as still continuing, or in psooess of accomplishment, or even as just
taking place. In the last case, its occurrence may be represented
as certainly imminent or merely as conceived in the mind of the
speaker, or simply as desired, ^d therefore only contingent (the
modal use of the imperfect).
Knudtzon (see above, Rem. od 106. a) would prefer the term present rather
than imperfiect, on the ground tfwt the tense expresses what is either actually or
nentaliy picsent In any caie, the essential differenee between the peiftct and
imperfect consists, he argues, in this, that the perfect simplj indlcatet wliat it
actually complete, while the imperfect places the actioa, Ac, ill a t&Oie direct
relation to the judgement or feeling of the speaker*.
More precisely the imperfect serves
L In the sphere past Om:

(a) To express actions^ ftc, which iwUimiei throughout a longer b
or shorter period ^ e.g. Gen, s 6 a misi wtU $^ continually (nJ^X
2, 25- 37. 7- 48, 10. Ex. I, IS. 8, so. 13, 22. 15, 6. If. 14. 15-
Kuin. 9, 15 sq. so sq. S3, 7. Jud. 2, i. 5, 8. i Sam. 3, 2. 13, 17 sq.
2 Sam. 2, 28. 23, 10. I Ki. 3, 4. 7, 8. 21, 6. Is, i, 21. 6, 4 (i*.^!),
17, JO sq. 51, 2 a. Jer. 13, 7. 36, 18. Ps. 18, 7. 14. 17 sqq. 38 sqq.
24. 2. 32, 4. 5 (^JfîK), 47, 5. 68, 10. 12. 104, 6 sqq. 106, 19.
107, 18. 29. 139, 13. job 3, 3. II. 4, 12. 15 sq. 10, 10 sq. 15, 7 sq,
^ Compu the litemtnve cited abote, p. 320, note.

Tbiaismdoiibtedlytheviewof DeLagaidealM(îri&A/
*
dtr NomSma^ p. 6), when he defines the perfect as serving to express that of which
we are immediately sensible, the imperiiect that at which we axrive bj eompaxison
and imagination.
' Comp. the MeJa' inscription, 1.
5, HJOiU fpK* '3 for Chemotk was
empy wiih kis oimtry
Digitized by Google
326 The Paris of Speech, C 107.
very frcqueully alternating with a perfect (especially with a frequenta-

tive perfect; cf. Num. 9, 15-23 and 112. e), or when the narration
is continued by means of an imperfect consecutive ^
C Rem. I. The imperfect is frequently used ia this way after the pnrticlea TK th^n^
one not yet, DneS i'eforc, -^y MtUily e.g. Ex. 15,1 ne^n^Bl^ IK then sang
Moses, See.] Num. 11, 17. Deut. 4,41. Jos. 10, \2. i Ki. 3, 16. Ps. 126, a.
Job 38, 21. (The perfect is uscl after W when stress is to be Liid on the fact
that the action has ically taken place, and not upon its gradual accomplisiiment
or duration in the past, e. g. Gen. \, 36 brnn IK thm Ugan, &c. ; Gen. 49, 4.
Ex. 15, 15. Jos. 23, 31. Jud. 5, II, PB. 89, ao*,) After 0*30 e. g. Gen. 19, 4
\SSf^, before ih^ Itty 4mmi Gen. a, 5. 24, 45. z Sam. 3 3. 7, always
ia the eeoee of onr pbiperftet, (la Gen. a4 15 instead of ihe per r^|l, the
impetf. should be red, as In wae 45: so also in t Sssl 3, 7 {JTt^ en impeif.
is oo-ordinated wiA JTl^.) After 0*103 (sometinies also simply Qr|S Ex. i a, 34.
Jos. 3 I), e.g. Jer. i, 5 MSn O'^.â Aîfv M^k eamst forth i Otn. a7, 33. 37, t8.
41, 50. Ruth 3, 14 (perhaps alio in Fk. 90, % an inq>erf. waa intended instead of
tifi comp. WeHhanaen on Sam. 3> 2). After 'y^ Jos. 10, 13. Ps. 73, 17
{until I went), a Chron. 39, 34 ; on the other hand, with the perf., e. g. Jos. a, aa
1/ 2. Driver { The Use of the Tenses, p. 32) rightly lays stress upon the inherent
distinction between the participle as expressing mere duration, and the impufeet
as expressing progressive duration (in the present, past, or future). Thus the
wor& KSr^ "^n^l Gen. a, to Tepresent the rim of Paxadlae as going oat of Eden in
a continnons, nnintemipted stream, hot T!|^y which immediately follows, describes
how the pszclng of its waters is always taking place aftesh* In the ume way
n^^^ Gen. a, 6 represents new mists as constantly arising, and la 6, 4 new
clouds of smoke. Also those actimis, &c., which might be regarded in themselves
as single or even momentary, are, as it were, broken up by the impeifect into their
component par(, and so pictured as gradually completing themselves. Ihnce
Ex. 15. I i (after a p^rf. as in verse 14) represents the Egyptians, in a vivid,
poetic description, as l>eing swallowed up one after another, and ^JnJ2 Num. 23, 7
the leading on by stages, dec.
According to the Masom snch Imperfects occur in Is. 10, 13 A (where,

howeter, might also mean / am wont H remove^ &c), 1%. 48, 3.. 57, 17.
Ps. 18, 38 ^, ahN) (according to f 49. in a Sam. i, 10 and Esek. 16, la In
some other cases 1 is no doubt a dogmatic emendatian for 1 {fmferf. c0Nr.)
in order to represent historical statements as promises; comp. Lt. 4a, 6* (l, a Hs,
63, 3 sqq. and the note on p. 151.
After TN then (to annonnce future events) the imperf. is naturally used in the
sense ol a future, Gen. ^4, 41. a, 4H. Mic 3, 4. Zeph. 3, 9. I's. 51, 2%.
As after TK, so also after D'^D^ DlDIl and "*iy the imperf. may be used,
according to tlie context, in the aense of tms future, e.g. a KL a, 9. Is. 65, 34.
Job 10, at ; after "TJ e*g. Is. aa, 14. The imperf. is naed in the aense of our
fmetit after tnD in Ex. 9, 30. 10^ 7.
Digitized by Google
107.] Use of the Imperfect. 37
(5) To express actions, &c., which were repeated in the past, either e
festivities); 4, 3 sq. 22, 6 sq. 23, 1 r. 29, 7. 9. 12 sq. Gen. 6, 4. 29, 2.
30, 38. 43. 31, 39 (/ to bear tlie ioss of ii), Kx. i, 12. 19, 19.
33, 7 sqq. (ng^ x^<^ to ialu every time). 40, 36 sqq. Num. .9, 17 sq.
20 sqq. II, 5. 9. Jud. 6, 4. 14, 10. 91, 3S* < ii 7* 22. 9, 9.
13, 19. 18, 5. s7, 9. a Sam. i, sa. la, 3. 13, 18. i Ki. 5, 9$ (of tribute
repeated year bj year). 10, 5. 13, 33. 14, a8. a Ki. 4, 8. 8, 99.
131 5 Jcr. 8- 4. 5- 44 3 78, 15* 40* 03 7-

Est a, 14; even in a negative dependent clause, i Ki. 18, 10.
2. In the sphere of preseni time, again /

(a) To express actions, events, or conditions, which arc continued
for a shorter or longer time e.g. Gen. 37, 15 5J'^.?Jp"tp ivfuil seekest
thou? 19, 19 ^?Vrt<^ / cannot ; 24, 50. 31, 35. Is. i, 13. Other
examples are Gen. 2, 10. 24, 31. i Sam. i, 8. 11, 5. i Ki. 3, 7.
Ps. 2, 2. So especially to express facts known by experience, which

occur at all iimes, and consequently hold good at any moment,
e.g. Prov. 15, 20 a wise t9n makeih a glad /aiher; hence especially
frequent in Job and Proverbs, In an intenogatiiK %entence^ eg.
Job 4, 17 is mpr/ai man jmi htfmrt God? In a negative sentence,
Job 4, 18, Ac.
(b) To eipress actions, ftCj wliich may be r^takd at any time, g
including therefore the present, or are cmtmarily repeated on
a given occasion (comp. above, letter e)y e. g. Dent, i, 44 of iees do
(are accustomed to do); Gen. 6, 21. 32, 33. 43, 32. jud. 11, 40.
I Sam, 2, 8. 5, 5. 20, 2. 2 Sam. 15, 32. Is. i, 23. 3, 16. Ps. i, 3.
So again (see letter /) especially to express facts known by experience

which may at any time come into effect again, e.g. Ex. 23, 8 a gift
blmdeth piiT,), &c,; Gen. 2, 24. 22, 14. Is. 32,6. Am. 3, 7. Mai, 1,6.
Job a, 4, &c. Of the same kind also is the imperfect in such relative
clauses (see 155), as Gen. 49, a7 Benjamin is ^1^' a wolf

thai ravimth (properly, is accustomed to ravin). Finally, compare
also the formulae "^QMI. H is (wont to be) said (to introduce proverbial
' Ik it not alwaji pOMible to cany ont with certainty the distlnctiott between
cmtHnutd and 1 cpeattd actions. Some of the esanplcs given nnder letter /
n^t ei|iUy be lefimed to letter
Digitized by Google
326 The Parts of Speech. [ 107.
expressions) Gen. 10, 9. 93, 14^ and elsewhere; }9 ^^^ft^J^ H it ml

(wont ^ be) M idm (and hence mty not, tkaU mi St, see letter ),
Gen. 9, 26. 90, 9. 34, 7. a Sam. 13, is".
k (c) To express actions, &c., which although, strictly speaking, they

arc already finished, are regaiJcJ as i>ull lasting oa imo the present
time, or continuing to operate in it, c. g. Gen. 32, 30 wherefore is it
that thou dost ask (i'i<^'n) after my name? 24. fiji. 44, 7. Ex. 5, 15.
2 Sam. 16, 9. In sucli cases, naturally, the perfect is also admissible,
and is sometimes found in the same formula as the imperfect, e.g.
Job 1, 7 (3, 2) T^'Q a Jieme comett ihm (just now) ? but Gen. 16,
(oomp^ 43, 7) iTfK^ whence cameU ikon? The imperfect

represents the coming as still hi its last stage, whereat the perfect
represents it as an accomplished &ct.
i a. In the sphere of /Mre time. To express actions, ftc. which
are to be represented as about to talw place, and as continuing a shorter
or longer time in the future, or as being repeated ; thus
{a) From the standpoint of the speaker's present time, e. g. Ex. 4,
they will not believe (\3*D|t)_) me, nor hearkm ('0'^^) unto my voict :
for ihey will say &c., 6, i. 9, 5, &c.
k {b) In dependent clauses to represent actions, &c., whi' h from

some point of lime in the past are to be represented as future, e. g.
Gen. 43, 7 could we in any wise know that he would say (Vth) ? 3, 19.
43, 35. Ex. 2, 4. 2 Ki. 3, 27 lI^PpK ûi regnaturut erat ; 13, 14.
Jon. 4, g. Job 3, 3. Ecdes. s, 3^ Ps. 78, 6 that the gemrtUim io come

mighi htiaw, f^ft the children which thoiUd be hm {pa mucHmri
etsmi; the imperfect here with the coUatera) Idea of the occurrence
being repeated in the future^.
/ (r) To represent a fuhtnm exachem; comp. Is. 4, 4. 6, 11
((XM)rdinated with a perfect used in the same sense, see 106. 0)
so also sometimes after tlie temporal particles "IJ Fs. 132, 5 and
Tg'K "ly until Gen. 29, 8. Num. 20, 17, &c.
fn 4. i mally to the sphere of future time belong also those cases

in which the (modal) imperfect serves to express actions, events,
or conditions, the occurrence of which is to be represented as willed
(or not willed), or as in some way conditional, and consequently only
contingent More particularly such imperfects serve
n (tf) As an expression of will, whether it be a definite intention
and arrangement^ cr a simple desire, viz.
Digitized by Go
1070 Imper/ecL 329
(1) Sometimes in poritive sentences in place of the oohoitative (comp.
e. g. Ps. 59, 1 7 with verse i8 ; 2 Sam. 22, 50 with Ps. r8, 50 Jud. 1 9,
;
1 1
&c.), of the imperative (Is. 18, 3), or of the jussive (which, however,
in most cases, does not differ from the ordinary form of the imperfect),
e. g. '"i^lfl Itt il app'Ctr Gen. 1,9. 41, 34. Lev. 19, 2. 3. 2 Sam. 10, 12
(nnd so frequently in verbs n"i>; eomp. 109. a, note); Zcch. 9, 5

Ps.61, 7 (^*pin); Prov. 12, ij (n^R); 23,1. Job 6, 23
(co-ordinated with the iropenuive), o 20 ATVA./ so probably also
rC Ui him judgtl Pb. 73, a. So also in the ist pers., to eq>re8S

a Irish which shook! have been subaequentlj accomplished at a fixed
point of time in the past e.g. Job 10, t8 7^ I should have (then,
immediately after being born) given up ihe ghosts comp. verse 19

and . Even to express an obligation or necessity according to
the judgement of another person, e. g. Job 9, 29 lam to be guilty ;
12, 4. Comj). Job 9, 15. 19, 16, iji a question, Ps. 42, 10. 43, 2.
(2) To express the definiie expectation tliat something will not 0

happen. 1 iie iniptiiect with ^ represents a more emphatic form
of prohibition than the jussive' with (comp. 109. r), and cor-
responds to our thou shall not de it ! with the strongest expectation
of obedience, while with the jussive is rather a simple warning,

do not thatt Thus ^ with the unperfect it especially used in
enforcing the divine commands, e.g. 16 thou shalt tut sisal
z. 80, 15 ; oomp. verses 3. 4. 5. 7. 10 sqq. So i6 vrtth the 3rd pers.
perhaps in Prov. 16, to.

Rem. Thtjmsive, which it td be expected after 'i>K, does not, as a ntle
p
(accotding to letter n above^ and 109. u, note), differ in form from the simple
imperfe^. That many sapposcd jnsiiTes are intended as simple impeiliects is
pomlble from the occurrence after of what are ondonbledly imperfect forms,
not only from verbs (oomp. for thcs'* 5 i oy. a, note), but also from ^ crbs :
to express a prohibition or negative wish, CjlR*i>^ Gen. 19, 17, llDiR'i'X Jos. i, 7,
C**L*^ I .Sam. 25, 35. Even with the 1st pers. plur. (after an imperative)
(hilt -u'c die not \ Sam, 12, 19. Also to express the conviction that
something cannot happen, DV^'^ he wUl not stumtfcr^ Ps. lai, 3; comp.
Jer. ^6, 6. a Chron. 14, 10.
' As stated b S 46. a, a prohibition cannot be cspiCMcd by '^|< and the Impentive.
' To regaid this as an optatiTe (so Hnpfeld) is from the context impossible.
It is more probably a strong pregnant coDStractlony or fosion of two sentences
(snch as. tto mi ihintk ke will slutnb(r!\ Verse 4 contains the objective con-
Brmatir i I
^ mrans <tf with the impcrf.,of the cocTiction whldi wai fnevioosly
only subjective.
Digitized by Google
330 The Parts of Speech. [f 107.
q (3) In dependent clauses after final conjunctions ( 165. /'), as

^B^, Gen. II, 7 (^ytpf^ ^C'X ihai they may not unda stand); "Ûp
Gen. 21, 30. 27, 4. 19. Ex. 9, 14, and elsewhere; "^8^ lypj' Num.
17, 5; IVoIj Deut. 4, I. Ps. $1, 6. 78, 6, and ly:^ Ez. 12, 12
Ma/'; ^j>a|> Mo/ . . . jw/ s. ao, 20. a Sam. 14, 14 ; also after "fB
thai not, Usi Gen. 3, as. 11, 4. I4^, 15, and elsewhere*. In Lev, 9, 6
such an unpeHcct (or juasive? see the examples in { 109./) is added
to the expression of the command by an asyndeton, and in Iîm. i, 19
to the principal clause simply by ]: wkik (key touglU ihm food
DB^WTIK UÊ^l to rt/resh their souk (cf. also Lam. 3, a6 it is good
and let him hope^ i. e. that he should hope) ; so after an interrogative
clause, Ex. 2, 7. Finally also in a relative clause, Ps. 32, 8 ^^'O ^TTQTa
in the way which thou shouldst go.

r {^) To express actions, *c., which are to be represented as i)Ossibly
taking place or not taking place (sometimes corresponding to the
potential of the classical languages, as also to our use of the auxi-
liaries AW, SM^, s1umld% More particularly such imperfects are
used
s (i) In a permissive sense, e.g. Gen. a, 16 every tree 0/ the
garden ^) thM mayest firstly eat (the contrary in verse 17};
3 9. 42, 37. Lev. 21, 3. 22. Job 21, 3. In the ist pers. Ps. 5, 8.
22, 18 (/ may, or can, UU); in a negative sentence, e.g. Ps. 5, 5.
/ (2) In interrogative sentences, e. g. Prov. 20, 9 "^PJ^"^ quis dixerit/

Comp. Gen. 17, 17. 18, 14. 31,43. i Sam. 11, 12. 2 Ki. 5, rs
Dna |*n"jti"4<i'n may I not wash in them? Is. 33, 14. Ps. 15, i. 24, 3.
Eccles. 5, 5. So especially in a question exprossinj,^ surprise after
Gen. 39, 9 how then can I

e.g. ? 44, 34. Is. 19, 1 1. Ps. 137, 4,
. . .
and even with regard to some point of time in the past, looking
forward from which an event might have been expected to take
* But ''^fr^ III CAUsal sense {because, sime), e.g. Jud. 2, 20 i,as "l^tt
Gen. 34, 97) is followed by the perfect On Jos. 4, 24 see al>ove, % 74. g,
R.V. beemue he shaU mi see.'\
' 2 Ki. 9, 16 "|B occQit with the perf. in a vivid preeentment of the time, when
the fear is realized and the remedy comes too Ute (In a Sun. ao^ 6. daoe
a perfect eonsec. follows, read with Driver VCSCt\ .)
* By this, of course, is not meant that these finer distinctions were consciou<.1y
present to the Hebrew mind. They are rather mere expedients for making
intelligible to ourselves the full significance of the Semitic imperfect.
Digitized by Google
fioS.] Use of ike CohcricUive. 331
place, e.g.Gen. 43, 7 TQ, lif^fi couid we any wise know . / m . .
Comp. 8 Sam. 3, 33 (IW^ was Abmr ia die as afid^ i.e. was he itsHmd
to die , ..i), and so probably alao Gen. 34, 31 (should he deal , ,.i)*
Veiy closely connected vidi this is die uae of ifae imperfect

(3) In a consecative clause depending on an interrogative clause, it
e.g. Ex. 3, II who am I (tlJw *3) fha/ I should (ought, couht) go?
16,7. Num. II, 12. Jud. 28, iSam. 18, 18. zKi. 8, 13. Is. 29, 16.
Job 6, II. 21, 15, similarly after "^0^ Gen. 38, 18. Ex. 5, 2.
Rem In such passages as I Sam. ii, 5. Ps. 8, 5. 114, 5, the context shows that V
(he mipcrfcct corresponds rather to uur present. la iûch sentences the j>erfect
ftlso is naturally ttied in refenlnf to completed mctions, e g. Gen. ao, 10. Jud. 1 8, 23.
a Smb. 7, 18. U. 33 i.
(4) In mgafire sentences to express actions, &c., which cannot or W

should not happen, e.g. Gen. 32, 13 "^^^^^^ "^l?'^ which cannot
U numkred for multitude ; 20, 9 deeds i^^P^^ "^K^) thai ought not
to be done (^conip. above, letter g) ; Ps. 5, 5.
(5) In conditional clauses (the modus conditionalis corres[)onciing x

to the Latin present or imperfect conjunctive) both in the protasis
and apodofii8 or only in the latter, Ps. 23, 4 jri iriîjr^ 0I

yeot Iho^gh I walh (or had to waW) . . /fear (or / wtmld /ear)
no soil J Job 9, so though I he righteous, mine own mouth shaU
condemn me. After a perfect in the protasis, e. Job S3, 10. Very
frequendy also in an apodosis, the protasis to which must be supplied
from the context, e. g. Job 5, 8 dut as for me, I would seeh unto God
(were I in thy place); 3, 13. 16. 14, 14 sq. P.s. 55, 13. Ruili 1,12.
However, some of the imperfects in these examples are probably
intended as jussive forms. Comp. 109. ^
{ 108. Use ofihs Cohortatsve,
The cohortative, i.e. accordinp^ to 48. r, the ist pers.' sing, or a

plur. of the imperfect lengthened by the ending represents
in general an endeavour directed expressly towards a definite object.
While the corresponding forms of the indicative rather contain the
mere announcement that an action will be undertaken, the cohortative
' For the few exampki of oohortstiTa in the 3rd sbg., lee { 48.1/.
* Bnt vnto Tf^, tccocdbg to { 75. even in the cohoitntiTe, ahnott Klwny*
bnve the ending TLi oomp. eg. in Dent 3a, ao t^fyh dtbet flT^^.
Digitized by Google
33^ The Parts of Speech. [ io8.
hjps stictt on the detenninatioii underlying the action, and the

personal interest in it.
Its uses may be divided into
b 1. 1 he cohortative, whether standing alone or co-ordinated with

another cohortative, and frequently strengthened by the addition
of the particle W <

(a) To express self-encouragement, e. g. Ex. 3, 3
'31 KrrnDK / will
him aside noWy and see ... 1 So espeeialljr as the result of inward
deliberation (in soliloquies), e.g. Gen. 18, a i. as* ax (rarely so used
after Gen. ai, 16 lef m mf bok . . / Jer. 18, 18), and also as
a more or less emphatic statement of a fixed detemunation, e.g.
Is. 5, 1 / tmil sing*, . . / 5, 6. 31, 8. Comp. also GetL 46, 30
now let m die (I am mUing io iie\ since 1 kme seen /ky/ace; and
Ps. 31, 8. In the ist pers. plur. the cohortative includes a summons
to others to help in doing something, e.g. Ps. 2, 3 cornel
lei us break asunder! &c., and Gen. 11, 3.
C {^') 1 o express a wish, or a request for permission, that one

should he allowed to do something, e.g. Deut. 2, 27 '"Q??? ^
allowed io pass ihrough {hi mc pass ihrough) ! Num. 20, 17 *<f^3^
may we be allntved io pass ihrough! Jer. 40, 15 lei me go^ I pray ihee!
&c.; 2 Sam. 16, 9 ; so after a Sam. 24, 14. Jer. 17, 18. Ps. 35, a,
&c., 69, 15. After tO"^K Jon. i, 14,
d 2. The cohortative in dependence <m other moodSy as well as in

conditional sentences: (a) In dependence (with wow cepnlaiivet
Ps. 9, 15 after flP^ on an imperative or jussive to express an

intention or intended consequence, e.g. Gen. 97, 4 hring it io nu^
''S!?**! ^ ^<^y ^<'l) prop. Ihen wffl leai; Gen. 19, 5. 23, 4. 24, 56.
27, 25. 29, 21. 30, 35 sq. 42, 34. 49, I. Deut 3a, i. Hos. 6, i.
Ps. 2, 8. 39, 14. Job 10, 20 Q'r^; Is. 5, 19 and let the counsel of the
Holy One 0/ Israel draw nigh and come^ ''^'^^ "^'^y ^'''^^ '^ '
Gen. 26, 28. I Sam. 27, 5. Also after negative sentences, Gen. 18,
30. 32. Jud. 6, 39, and after interrogative sentences, x Ki. aa, 7.
Is. 40, 25. 41, 26. Am. 8, 5.
e (i&) In conditional sentences (with or without DM) to express a con-

tingent intention, e.g. Job 16, 6 rnaitrDK should I determine io speak^
mygritfts not assnaged, njf^J end should Ifvrbew^wkat am teased^
Digitized by Go
io8.] Use of the Cohortative, 333
without Job 19, 18. 30, 96 (where, however, xht^ is probably
intended) ; Ps. 73, 16 (unless should be read), 139, 8 sq. After
the 3rd person. Job 11, 17 ihmgh it U darky &c. So perhaps
also 2 Sam. 12, 38 ^^'^r^^ if liUemUtud io pursue^ tkm . . . , comp.,
however, Ps. i8, 38.
(r) Likewise in the apodosis of conditional sentences, e. g. Job /
31, 7 sq. if my step hath tunud out of the way . .
'"'Î? ihen Ut me
sinv ; coiiij). 16, 4 sq. I also could sf>tak as ye do, //*.../ So even
when tiie condition must be supplied from the context, e. g. Ps. 40, 6
elst would I declare and. speak of them; 51, 18 else would I {gladly)
give tl, i. e. if thou didst require it (comp. the precisely similar Kjl^^
Ps. 55, 13); Job 6, 10. In the I St plur. Jer. ao, 10. To tlie same
category belong the cohortatives after the formula expressing a widi
lerP, *ia?r9, eg. Jer.

I had) shmdd I (or vmU
9, 1 ok, 4hai
I)
I had ,^ '^VjSfl
my p90pUy^,\ Jud.
. , ^ (>
leave 9,. 29. Job

6, 8 sqq., without Wdxo Is. a?, 4. Ps. 5o> 7* Job 23, 4 (comp. also
verse 7).
Rem. I. The qnesdon, wheUtcr a resoluiioii lormcd under compulsioo (a i/ttW/'/y)

g
is also expiened by the )hoitative (ao, acooidiag to tbe prevailing opinioDi
li; 38, 10 ra]^ ; Jer. 3, 25. 4. 19. 21. 6, 10. Fft. 55, 3. 18 (1) ; 57, 5, wfaere^
however, with Hapfeld, nipB^ should be read ; 77, 7. 88, 16, and in the tst plnr.
la. 59, zo), is to be answered in the sense that in tiiete epcamples the
cohortative form is uêd after its meining has become entirely lost, merely
for the sake of its fiilUr sound, instead of the ordinary imperfect. This view
is strongly supported by the r.itlicr numerous examples of tohortaiive forms after
tnAv ^MMT. d the imperlect (comp. 49. e, aa also Pb. 66, 6 nnC||^| Vf^ therw did
we rêue^t Pa. 119, 163 n^^ntO ;
Prov. 7, 7^, which can likeirlee only be cs*
plained aa foima ehoeen merdy for eiq)bos7, and therefore doe to oooaldemtiona
of rhythm.
2. The cohortative is strange after Pfc 73, 17 until I went . . . h
I eonsidered their latter end ; ]iossiMy a pregnant construction for ' until I made up
my mind, iyin^', T will consider,' &c (but n3''3N P'ov. 7, 7 is still dependent
on the precetlint,' ^) ; ny''37l<~iy Frov. 12. 19 is at any rate to be explained in the
same way (for which iu Jer. 49, 19. 50, 44 \ê have 'tf^B with a similar meaning),
as long as J (intentionally) wink with the eye-lasJus (shall wink). On the
other hand, in Ex. 33, 30 ifiSft, with the Samaritan, is to be lead instead of
mB3 after
' Analogous to tliis cnliortativc : ns equivalent to the imperfect) after is the

use of the historic imperf. alter T^, % 107. c,
Digitized by Google
334 The Parts of Speech,
100. Ute 9f the Jussive.
As the cohortative is used m the ist pers., so the Jussive (corrip.
for its form, which ircquently coincides with that of the ordinary
impcrfict^, ^%.f,g) is especially found in the 2nd and 3rd pers. sing,
and plur. to express a more or less definite desire that Bometbing
should or should not happen. More particularly its uses may be

distinguished as follows:
1. The Jussme, dUier standing alone or co-ordinated with another
jussive:
(a) In affirmative sentences to express a command, a wish (or

a blessing), advice, or a request; in the last caiSe (the optative
or precative) it is frequently strengthened by the addition of M|.

Examples: Gen. 1, 3 "'^l^ let there be light f Gen. i, 6. 9. 11. &c.
(the creative commands); Num. 6, 26 the Lord lift up his countenance

upon thee, and give thee peace t comp. verse 25. After j>articles
cxprcssinc^ a wish. Gen. 30, 34 ^ / rvould it might be; Ps. 8i, y

DM i/ thou wouUsl hearken utito me ! As a humble request,
Gen. 44, 33
"ÎIOl . . .
I^^^y ^T^fl let % servani, I pray
thee, abide, &c., and Ut ike ladga 11^, d^c. Gen. 47, 4.
{b) In negative sentences to express prohibition or dissuasion,

warning, a native wish (or imprecation), and requests. As the
prohibitive particle, *^ is used almost exclusively (acoordmg to
f 107.9) before the jussive (in negative desires and requests frequently
Kri>K) e. g. Ex. 34, 3 inrS? Ihk netiher tet any man he seen/ Prov.
;
'i, *! be not Ttnse in thine own eyes! Job 15, 31 ne

confidat. In the form of a request (prayer), Deut. 9, 26 wn^?'"^*
dcs/roy not .'
i Ki. 2, 20. Ps. 27, 9. 69, 18.
Kcm. I. The few examples of l^b with the jussive could at most have arisen from
the attempt to uiodcratc subsequently by mc.ins of the jnssive (voUmtativc') form
what was at iirst intended to be a strict command <^ with imperf. indie.) ;
probably,
howeier , they aie dthcr CMet fai ivUcb the ddeelive writing hM been misimdentood
' With legud to verfct n^. it is trae that the fell fom of the impeifect
is frequently used with the meaning of the jaiaive (as also for the oohortative, see
1 108. a, note 3), e. g. nKn^K Job 3, 9 (but previonsly Ut U look j6r/)
especially in (N'ch, 2, 3) and immcdi^'c^" h-^.-re the principal pause. Gen. 1,9
nxn* ; Tnd. 6, 39 n^n* , T.iit previ(,ii?lv N^-^.T ; Is. 47, 3 njOFI, previoualy \VF\

Ps. 109. 7. C)n the nttempt to distinguish soch josstves from the impofBCt \ff
means ot a special ending n__., see 7$. kk.
Digitized by Google
Use of the Jussive, 335
(at itt I Ki. a 6, Esdc. 48, 14), or (m in Gen. S4, 8) inslaiiees of die porely fbytiunicAl
jonire form treated below, letter k. Moreover, cf. (jCrt^ \lh }oA 3, a Ukd from
the same vcrl) Gen. 4. T3 (unless it is to be referred to letter h) and Dcut. 13, 1.
The same form, however, appears also to stand three times for the cohortative
(see below), and in Nam. 22, 19 for the ortiinary imperfect (see, however, below,
letter i), Thu it it dottbcfid whether ea Imaginar)' by fonn of tlie ordineiy imperf.
Is nof intended 1^ the Mmovb in' all theic cases, and whether consequently *IDV* ftc
shottM Aot be restoied.On tfVtni^t ftc, Dent 7, 16. 13, 9, ftCi Evk.
5, II, ftc, c { 79. r, aoooiding to which: OWlp should probably be read in every
case.The jasdve appears in the place of the cohortative after \lh I San. 14, 3$
co-ordinated with two cohortatives) . 2 Sam. 17, 12; comp. Is. 41, 2.^
K'fh. fmi% i.e. 6<"}3T, after another cohortative); also (sec above) \^
Deut. iS, 16. IIos. 9, 15, and even without ^ E/elc. 5,
3. "[?J< with the jas'?ive (or imj>erf., comp. ^ 107./*'^ is used sometimes to ^
express the conviction that something cannot or may not happen ; comp. Is. a, 9
Dn^ i'^J^'^W fôu canst not possibly forgive them f R.V. ikerefon forgive
tkm not]\ Ps.'346. 41, 3. 50, 3. lai, 3 (in^^lft); Prov.3, 25. Job 5. aa in^n-^|{
mitkir mtdut ikm he ^raid; so, 17. 40, 3s.
2. The jussive when depending on other moods, or in conditional /

sentences
(a) Depending' (with Wow) on an imperative or cohortative to
express nn intention or an assurance of a contin.q;ciU occurrence,

e. ^^ (Jen. 24, 51 lake her and go, am! lei her be (^fVi^ prop, and iht
will be). . .\ 30, 3. 31, 37. 38, 24. Ex. 8, 4 q, 13. 10, 17. 14. 2.
Jos. 4, 16. Jud. 6, 30. I Sam. 5, 11. 7, 3* i Ki. 21, 10. Ps. 144, 5.
Ftov. 80, 22. Also after interrogative sentences, whicli include

a demand, Est. 7, 2 (say) iohai is thy desin . . fc^^ and (i.e. in
order that) d skatt he granted I 1 Ki. 22, 20. ts. 19, 12. Job 38, 34 sq.
Depending on a cohortative, e.g. Gen. 19, ao M nDî&K ok^ Ut
me escape tktlher . . . ^nni) ikai my soul may /rVw/ even after
a simple imperf. (comp. below, letter^), 1 Ki. 13, 33 whosoever would^
he consecrated him . . . ^n'^ ihal he mighl be a priest (read l^b) 0/ the
high pLii fs, but j)rol)al)ly the LXX rcAding *<"H is to be jireferrcd.
Kcra. In 3 Chron. 35. 21 a ncfâtive final clause wi th is dependent on an ^

imperative, forbear from (meddling with) God . . . tkat he dtstroy thu not.
As a rale, however, negative clauses are attached to the principal sentence
and a following imperfect; so after an impenstiye, Gen. 43, a.
I Ki. 18, 44; afler a josiive, Ex. 30, ao. Neh. 6, 9; after a perfect consec, Ex.
3B, 35. 43. Noin. s8, 5; after 16 vith an imperfect, Nnm. 18, 3. Dent 17, 17
' This does not include the cases in which the jussive is not logically dei)endent
on a preceding impemi., bat is nwrelj co-ordinated, e. g. Gen. ao, 7. Fs. 17, 14, Ac
Digitized by Google
336 The Parts of Speech, [ 109.
mt away; i Sam. ao, 14. a Sun. at, 17. Jer. 11, at; fUr with jmaive,
Lev. 10. 9. t6, s. a Sam. 13, 25. Jcr. 35,6. 37, 30. 38, 34 sq. Even nAer n simple
imperfect, Jer. 10, 4 with miii . . tkiy fiatm it
after a participle. Job 9, 7.
A (i) Frequently in conditional sentences (as in Arabic}^ either in
the protasis or in the apodosis, comp* Ps.45. is 1^ should he desire

. . . (hen . . . / IQ4, so ,* Tlf^ if ihmt mahesi darkness^ ihem
ii is mghi; so also in the protasb, Ex. sa, 4. Lev. 15, 24. Is. 41, a8.
Esclc. 14, 7 (^!^). Job 34, 29 ; in the apodosn, Ex. 7, 9 then will ii
(not, then shall it) become a serpent ; Job 10, 16. 13. -2, 28. In
a negative apodosis, Gen. 4, 12 ClDm<!>, but see above, kuer g).
In 2 Ki. 6, 27 ^V^*"^^ (//* ///f J.orti do not help thee^ &c.) is to be
explained as a jussive in a negative protasis.
/ Kem. Undoubtedly this use of the jn<ive (in conditional sentences) is based
on its original vp/ttnfattiY uicaaiiif^; Id soiiKthint; be so and so, then this or that
rou&t liappeti as a consetûence. Certain other examples of the Jussive, however,
ahow that in the conidooineii of the language the vakmUUive baa in andi caaea
become weakened almost to a fêmHid raoodi and hence the Jmsioe serves
to citpress facts which may happen Mnlingently, or may be expecte(^ e.g.
Nam. aa, 19 ^D^TtD, comp., however, above, letter d) ; Job 9, 33 tktre is no
daysman behvixf us. that nti'g^hf fay T\^^, hence plainly a Tuhjuncthê ^ qui ponai
also iu Xuiu. 23, 19 (/uil he should lie is j>robaLlj intended as a jussive);
Ecdes. 5, 14 ; so after interrogative sentences, J^. 9, 11 who is th* wise mam,

f*" in/e/ti^'al hot.
k Moreover, in not n few cases, the jasnve is ued, wiUumt any colhtteral sense,
for the ordinary imperfect foim, and ttiia oocncs not alone in those Ibima, which
may arise irom a misondentanding of the defective writing, as Dent a8, ai. 3(L
3J, 8. I Ki. 8, I. Is. 13, I. Mic 3, 4- 5, 8. l*s. 11, 6. iS, 12. 35, 9. 47, 4. 73, 13.
90, 3. 91, 4. 107, 39. Prov. T5, 35. Job 13, 27. 15, 33. 18, 9. 20, 23 f>. .7, 22.
33, II. 37. 36, 14. 38, 34. Eccle*. ii, 6 ^verse 7 28'^, but iniintdiately afterwards
S^K'FI) ; Dan. 8, 13, but also in shortened forms, such a* ticn. 49, 17. 1 )eat.
38, 8. I Sam. 10, 5. 1 Sam. 5, 34. IIos. 6, 1. 11,4. Ana. 5, I4. Zeph. i, 13.
Zech. 9, 5. Ts. 73, 16 s<i. 104, 31. Job 18, la. ao, 83. a6. aS. a?, 8. 33, ai. 34, 37.
Rnth 3, 4. This ase of the juadve can hatdly be. due merely to poetic license^
bat b rather to be explained on rhythmical grounds. In all the above-cited

ex.imples. namely, the ju<;sivr stands at the bc<;iiining of the sentence (and hence
removed as far as possilJc from xhr [jrincipAl tt>i)( 1, in others u is immc<I;atcly
htioic the principal pause ;!). 42, 0. 50, 3. Ps. 68, 15. Trov. 33, 35. Job 24, 14.'
39. 3. 40, 19), or actually m pause (Dent 3a, 18. Job 33, 9. 11. Lam. 3. 50),
and is tlien a umply rhytiunical ôrtening due to the strong influence of tlie tone.
Moreover, since the jussive in numerous cases is not distinguished in form from the
imperfect ( 4S. it is frequently doubtful which of the two the writer intended.
,
This especially ap|>Ues to tbi>s<- r-^^rs in which a subjunetipt is tO be expressed

by one or other of the forms (comp. i 107. ^ and m-x).
Digitized by Google
{ no.] The Imperative. 337
no. The Imperative.
1. The imperative which according to 46, is restricted to the

and pers. sing, and plur., and to posiHot commands, Ac., may stand
cillier alone, or in simple co-ordinatioii (aa in i Ki 18, 44. Is. 56, i.
6g 18) with other imperatives

(a) To express real commands, e. g. Gen. ts, i get thee out of thy
country; or (like the jussive) mere admonitions (Hos. 10, 12) and
requests, 2 Ki. 5, 22. Is. 5, 3; on the addition of W see the Rem.
The imperative is used in the sense of an ironical request (often
including a threat) in i Ki. 2, 22 ask for htm the kingdom also; 22, 15.
Jud. ID, 14, Is. 47, 12 (with H^). Jer. 7, 21. Ezek. 20, 39. Am. 4, 4.
Job 38, 3 sq. 40, 10 sqq. Lam. 4, 21. The imperative has a con-
cessive sense in Nah. 3, 15 (though thou meJte ikyself many, Ac.), and
in the cases discussed under letter^; e*g. Is. 8, 9 sq. 99, 9.
(k) To express permission, e.g. a Sam. 18, 83 after previous dis* ^
suasbn, (then) run (for my sake)! Is. ai, is. 45, ti.
(r) To express a distinct assurance (like our expression, tAoit shalt C
Jmi' or promise, e.g. Is. 65, 18 6ut he ye glad, &c. (i.e. ye will
have continually occasion to be glad); and Is. 37, 30. Ps. 110, 2;
in a threat, Jer. 2, 19. So especially in commands, the fulfilment
of which is altogether out of the power of the person addressed,

e,g. Is. 54, 14 be far from anxiety (meaning, thou needst not fear
any more); Gen. i, 28 and elsewhere: (for other examples, such as

I KL 88, 12. 3 Ki. 5, 13, see below, letter /). Most clearly in the
case of the tmperaHu* Nâl with a passive meaning, e. g. Gen. 4a, 16

titMfn OR|n and ye shaU be hound; Dent 38, 50. Is. 49, 9 (Is. 45, 88,
see below, letter /).
Rem. I. Thepnrticle fit J a^c/ (105) is frequently added to the impentive, d
o to the jniihe, somctimet to soften down a commind, or to make a nqucst
in n more conrteotH fonn (see above, letter ), Gen. ta, 13. 24, 3, aonetfanes to
strengthen an exhortation ottered as a rebtthe cr Areat ^mn. 16, so, 10)
or in ridicale (Is. 47, 13).
a. The impnative after the desiderative particle )^ Gen. 23, 13 (at the aid of ^
* On the close rclntion between the imperative and jussive (both in meaninif and
form), comp. 46 a:Hi 4S
" Analogous to these assurances in the form of an imperative arc the threatening
Imalae in the Latin comic writeis, c. g. vapula, Ter. Fhoim. t. 6, xoMr/MAw

U tmUo, Plant Cvic vi. 4, is.
Z
Digitized by Google
338 The Parts 0/ Speech. [no.
venet s and 14 also vead ^ for lb and join it to tlte foUoiHi^ impentive) Is doe to
aa anacolntlioo. Instead of tlie imperfect whidi would be expected here after ^
the move forcible imperatlTe is wed n new aenlicBoe;
/ S. The imperative in logical dependence upon a preceding tmpeim-

tive, jussive (or cohortative), or interrogative sentence, serves to express
the distinct assurance or promise that an action or condition will take
place as the cert lin consequence of a previous action. So especially:
{d) The imperative when dcj>ending (with wmv copulative) upon

another im]>crative. In this case ihe first imperative contains, as
a rule, a condition, while the second declares the consequence which

the fulfilment of the condition will involve. The imperative is used
for this declaration, since the consequence is, as a matter of fact,
intended or desired by the speaker (comp* dioUt et imptr^ e.g.
Gen. 43, 18
to live. I
^^ rilll
Ki. aa, 12. 3 Ki. 5, 13.

ihtt dof and
Is.
live. It* thus shall ye continue
36, 16. 45, 92 O^^?^). Jer. 6, t6.
Am. 5, 4. 6. Ps. 37, 27. Prov. 3, 3 sq. 4, 4. 7, 2. 13, zoK^tk., Job 2. 9.
3 Chron. 20, 20; in Jer. 25, 5. Job 22, 21 is added to the firrt
imperative. In other cases, the firpL imperative contains a mocking

concession, the second au irrevocable denunciation, e. p^. Is. 8.
9
Vlhj Q*DV ^Vh (continue to) make an uprwtTt Oyi pcopUs^ andye shaU
be broken in pieces; comp. verse 9 b.
g Rem. I. If a promise or threat dependent on an imperntire be expressed in

the 3rd pers. then the jussive is mtuftUy used instesd of the sod impeimtive
Is. 8, 10. 55, 2.
h 2. In Prov. ao, 13 the second imperative (coataiDing a promise)is attached by
Mjrodctoo ; elsewheie two tmperstives occur side hf side without the eopnls,
where the second might be expected to be snbotdinsted to the fiist, e. f. Dent s, 24
rh bnn (where is Tiitudly. as it were, an object to infl) A^fftM, take in
ponesiion for to take in possession (comp., however, Jud. 19, 6 pf>1 K3"^Kin
he {cml< nt, I pray thee, anJ tarry ail night, and for this kind of co onliii.ition
in pciural, cniiip. f 1 20. J). lUit sach impcrativts as ?|S f^si?), Dip (^?2^p , when
immediately piecedtng a second imperative, are for the most part only eqairalent
to intetjections, come ! up !
$ {b) The imperative, when depending (with wdw cepulaiive) upon

a jussive (cohortative), or an interrogative sentence, expresses also
frequentlj a consequence wliich is to be expected with certaintf,
and often a consequence which is intended, or in lact an intention;

comp. Gen. so, 7 and he thaJi pray fir thee, n||rn attd ik&u skaii fw/
comp. Ex. 14, 13. 16. a Ki. 5, 10. Job ti, 6 Ps. 128, 5 /Ae Lord
ilen /Iflr . . 19 ikai (or mi crdir thai) ihou seesi, &c.; Ruth i, 9.
Digitized by
111.] The Imperjeci with IVaw Conseculive, 339
4, II ; after a cohoitative, Gen. 12, 2. 45, 18. Fx. 3, 10 H?rtni that

thou mayest firing forth; Kx. i8, 22. i Sam. i^, 17. i Ki. i. 12 ;
J^''- 35t ^5 (lifter imperative and jussive); after an interrogative
.sentence, 2 Sam. 21, 3 whcrrd'itJi shall I make atovcmiyit, ^^^.j^^ that
ye may bless, &c. In Num. 5, 19 the imperative without \

(in 32, 23
with p is used after a conditional clause Hi the sense of a definite
pTOinise*
Ren. Hie ind dug. masc, oocuii In Jvd. 4, 20 (^b{| , according to Qim^t n k
infmitife, in which case, however, the infinitive absolute *lb^ sliould be read),
Mic 1, 13 and Ztch. 13, 7 (after in addressing feminine persons ; and in Is.
23, I. 32. Ti the 2nd flur. mast. Moreover, in the Litter place there follow qnite
abnormally four iiniHrrati'c; of the 2nd sitts^. masc Icngtheaed by n_ . These

can only be expl.iiii*<! on tlie .i,'roiin(l that the shtuji commands, followintj closely
upon one another^ remain in the most obvious form (viz. the and siog. masc.
.
imperative), witlHNitany attentioa being paid to the gander or number of thooe
oddicend. b
3, 15 the intetdMnge of moac and km* cetvea to eopieii
Nab.
totality (the nation in all its aspects). Comp.^ moreover, 1 145-/ on other
noticeable attemptt to salistitatc the connpooding ^^'"^ forms for the
feminiae.
111. The Tmptrfeei wUh Wdw Cmstcmiive,
1. The imperfect with waw consecutive ( 49. a-g) serves to express <f
actions, events, or conditions, which are to be regarded as the temporal

or lo^riral seciuel of actions, events, or conditions mentioned imme-
diately *
before. The imperfect consecutive is used in this way most
frequently as the narrative knse, corresponding to the Greek aorisi
or the Latin historic perfeci. As a rule Ihe narrative is introduced
by a perfect, and then contlnaed by means of imperiects with wdw

xameeuihe (comp. for this interchange of tenses { 49. and especially
IIS. a), e.g. Gen. 3, i nm the eerpeni was (n^n) more suHii . . . and
he said C^*!) unto ihe woman; 4, i. 6, 9 sqq. 10, 9 sq. 15. 19.
IT, 12 sqq. 27 sqq. 14. 5 sq. 15, i sq. 16, i sq. 21, 1 sqq. 24, i sq.
25, i9 s jij. 36, 2 sqq. 37, 2.
Rem. I. To this class belong some of the numerous imptrfccti cansfc. after h
various expressions of time, whenever such expressions are equivalent in meaning
to a perfect* (vis. iTn it tame to pass), e. g. Is. 6, i in the year that king l/tuah
On on apparent eseeptlon (the imptrf. emue. at the beginning of whole Boolct)

see ^ 49. ^ note.
* Comp. Is. 45, 4, where the imperf. comee. is joined to an ahnipt st.itemrnt
of the cause, and Job 36, 7, where it is joined to an abrupt statement of the
place.
z a
Digitized by Google
340 The Parts of Speech, [ "I.
i/ii/,/jMv(n^K^,&c.; Gen. it, 4. a;. 34. Jod. ii, ifi. iSam. 4, 19. 17, 57. ai,^
Hoft. iz, 1 : 00 the use of to connect expreflttom <^tiaie, leebdowf letter^.
It i onlj in Ute books or pessaget we Imd tlie
tiiet simple perfiei in n dtnie
following an expression of time an Sam. X7t $5 (cf. Driver on the passage),
I
a Chron. 13, 7. 15, 8, &c Dan. 10, IX. 15. 19; the JPtrftd after | and the subject,
a dron. 7, 1.
C I- The contlnualion of the narrative by means of the imperfect consec. may result
m a series oi such imîcrfects as long as may be desired, e.g. there are furty-uine tu
Gen. I. Ai loon, however, as die connecting I Taw becomee aeparated fiom the
verb to wbieh it bdongi^ bgrdie inaeitien of any woid, the perfect necemaiilj taken
the piece of the Impeilect, e.g. Gen. i, 5 mml <kd tmlhd (M^l^)
mml tks durkmst Ai eaM (K^ ^k^f ^î*^ ^ 3
Ireqtiently.
tl 3. Of two co-ordinate imptrfecfs consecutive the former (as equivalent

to a temporal claii*<.-) \a most frequently subordinate iu sense to the latter,
e.g. Gen. a8, 8 &q. , , . "Iw'JJ U'hen Esau saw that , . . , he ivent, iScc
so also, freqaentlj PO^^, &c., Geo. 37, ai and elsewhere. On the other hand,
ft eeoond imperfeaamueuHvt is aeldoaised in an explanatory sense, e. g. Ex. a, 10
ClOtthi for slu Htit) ; comp^ x Sam. 7, la. (Hher exainides of the imperfeel
eeaieenthre, whidi nppnventlf lepietent n progress in the narrative, in lealitjr only
refer to die aame time, or explain what precedes, see Gen. a, (^'7*1 went
hmt J<.i,9, tLS,S Oeyan); 3fi, 14 3 Ot^)' 44*
^ 4. The imperfect omsecntive sometimes has cadi n merdj external cotmexioii

with an immediately preceding perfect, that in reality it represents an antitheds
to it, c. p. Gen. 33, 31 and {yet) my life is prtserved; 2 Sara. 3, 8 and yet them
ihat^4Jt mi; Job lo, 8. 33,3; similarly in dependence on noun-daoscs, Prov.
ip, 25 iq.
/ 2. Tiie introduction of independent narrativeSf or of a new section

of the narrative, bjr means of an n^/tei censeatiofe, likewise aims
at a connexion, tliough again loose and external, with that which
has been narrated previously. Such a connexion is especially oAes
established by means of V^. (mi <><Wo) and U came 4? pats, after
which there then follows either an imp crfeci ctmsecmthe (Gen. 4, 3. 8. 8, 6.
II, 2. Ex. 12, 29. 13, 17, &c.), or W'aiu with the jjerfcct (sc[>.irated
from it), Gen. 7, 10. 15, 12. 22, i. 27, 30, or even a perfect wiihout
WStv {Cicn. 8, 13. 14, T 40, r. Ex. 12, 4r. x6, 22. Num. 10, n.
Deut. I, 3. I Sam. 18, 30. a Ki. 8, ai, dec.), or iinally a noun^lause
introduced by WSiv, Gen. 41, i.
g Rem. 1. This loose connexion by meani of Vl^ is especially common, wIwb

the nanative or a new sccticm of it begins with any expression of time, see above,
letter ^; comp . In at5diiIon to the above-mentioned examples ,c. g. Gen. 32, i
7f/ fV ciffit to /'Ois atli-r these thniiî, that God did prxn?f Abrnhnm^, tlit- >imilar
cAMn^ ut Gcu. ly, 34. Ji, 3a. 1 Sam. 11, 11. Roth 1, i. Ivisewhere the utcmciu
Digitized by Google
111.] The Imperfect with Wdw Consecutive, 341
of time Iscxpreticd bj or with 9 IsfinitiTe (Gca. la, 14. 19, 17. 39. 39, 13.
f f
15. x8 iq. Jnd. f6, 15) or by m
independent lentenoe with tiio perfect (eqnmlcitt
to B pinpcrfect, corap. ( 106./), eg. Gen. 15, 17. 4* 15. 27, 30, or by a temporal
cknae intiodaced by when, Gen. 26, 8. 27, 1. Jnd. 16, 16, IBâ
Gen. 12, II. 30, 13, tttp frgm the time (hat, Gen. 39, 5 ;
or, f r illy, by a noon*
clause ^comp. ti6. i/\ e. fj. Ki. 13, 31 C'^N D^^Dp DH and it came (< f>,7ff,
as (hey were (jost) burying a man (prop, they burying), that

Gcu. 42, 35. . . . ;
3 Ki. 2, II (the apodosis in bolh these cases being introduced by nsrn) i Sam. ;
7, 10. 3 Sam. 13, 30. 3 Ki. 6, 5. 26. 19, 37 (-Is. 37, 38). In i Sam. 10, ji.
II, II. a Sam. 2, 23. 15, a noon standing absoTutely follows (as the
eqnivalent of a oomptete sentence; see below, letter if), and then an imperfitt
tmsteutive follows.
a. Cloaeiy related to the cases noticed in letter^ are those in which the impeifid h
(0mecutiv, even without a preceding *n^1, introduces the apodosis either
(tf) to whole sentences, or {f>) to what are equivalent tn whole sentences, especially
to nouns standing absolutely. As in certain cases of Uic perfect (omenUitfe (see
i II 3. jr), so the imperfett (onsetutivc has here acquired a sort of independent force.
Corop. for (a) l Sam. 15, 33 Steatut ihou JUui r^tcUd tkt word of tht Lonl^
^DKD^ h* halh rêcUd thee (cooip^ Nam. 14, 16. Is. 48, 4, where the camal
daose precedes in the form of an infinitive with ptepotitioii), Ex. % ax ; for {})
Gen. aa,a4 ICb^'^ mtf (as to) kis mc9iiitu...t Anv, ftc; Ex. 33, 34.
Num. 14, 36 sq. I Sam. 14, 19. 17, 34. 3 Sam. 4, 10. 19, 41 K*th. 31, i6t.
I Ki. 9, 30 sq. 13, 17. 2 Ki. 25, 22. Jer. 6, 19, 38, 8. 33, 24. 44, 25'. In 1 Ki.
15. 13. 3 Ki. 16, 14 the preceding noun, used absolutely, is regaitled as the object
of the following imperfect consecutive, and is therefore introduced by "IlK,
3. The imperftei ctmsecuHvt serves, in the cases treated under 1
letters a-h^ to represent either expressly, or at least to a great extent,

a chrcHohgictU swccessioii of actions or events; elsewhere it expresses
those actions, which represent the bgical consequence of what
preceded, or a result arising from It by an inherent necessity. Thus
the imperfeei emucuHtfe is used
(a) As a final summing up of the preceding narrative, e. g. Gen. 2, r. k
23, 20 '21 nife^n Di?Jl so (in this way) ike field became (legall}) the
property of Abraham, &c,; i Sam. 17, 50. 31, 6.
(If) To express a logical or necessary consequence of lhat which /
immediately precedes, e.g. Gen. 39, 2. Job 2, 3 and he still holdeth
fati hit iutegriiyt îDôn) so ihai ihou Ihus (as it now appears)
> Coup, the WSU hiscription, 5 {pmri) tkt kkig Îtrael, 1. who oppresatd
Moab, 6LCTht peculiar imperfect consecutive in Gen. 30, 37 ^ (in the earlier
editions explained as equivalent to an object-clause) arises rather from a pregnant

brevity of expression : / have ohstrvod and have come to the conclusion, the Lord
haih blessed me, &c.
Digitized by Google
34* The Paris of Speech, C "1.
grwndUssfy nmtdti m agamti km; Ps. 65, 9 t& thai ihey are
afraid . , . / even a consequence which happens conditionally, Jer.

so, 17 ^rtril so that my mother should have been . . . Another instance
of the kind perhaps (if the text be correct) is Jcr. 9 riD^ $9 thai
he dies (must die).
ftt Kem. Such consecutive clauses frequently occur after interrogative sentences,
e.g. Is. 51, I a utho art thou (i.e. art thou so helpless), *Kl*ril that thou art {must
ntids be) afraid? Ps. 144, 3 (comp. Ps. S, 5, where iu a very similar coutcxt '5 that
is naed with the imperfect) ; Gen. 13, 19 (ngNI ) ; 31, 27 ^n^W so that I might
have sent tkte away; Job 11, Z HJ^j)^ so that tkû mockest,
4, As regards the range of time it is to be carefully noticed
9i (tf) That the imper/eci cmucmtive may represent all varieties of the
relations of tense and mood, which, according to 107. a, follow from
llie idea of the imperfect
0 {b) That the more precise determinaiion of the range of time

to whicli an tinptrjui cmiuutive relates iiuiî. be inferred in each case
from the character of the preceding icnê (or tense-equivalent), to
which it is attached, in a more or less dose relation, as temporal
or logical sequence. Thus the imper/eci caaeecttOve seives
p (t) To represent actions, events, or conditions, which are poet (or

were repeated in past time), when it is united with tenses, or their
equivalents, which refer to an actual past.
y Comp. the examples given oh( \ (.-, umicr letters a and /, of the imperfect
consecutive as an hijitoric lease, ihe impcricct couaecutive alo trcqucntl) otxurs
as die eontianation of R perfect (/rofîfrK^ e.g. Gen. 27, i.
Num. II, aok Deat

4, 37. i Sam. 8, 8. 1 Ki. a, 11, 33. s8, 13, ftc.; also in
It. 49^ 7 1|V!S!|| it the continuation of a preterite, oontaiaed, aceoiding to die Muse,
in the preceding jDM} IB^. In Job 31, a6. 34 t' c i: perfect conaecBtive It joined
to an imperfect denoting the past in a conditional sentence. An imperfect
consecutive occurs in dejjcnilencc on a perfect which has the sense of a }iluj>crlcct
106./), e.g. in Gen. 36, 18. 28, 6 sq. 31, 19. 34 [nîv Kuihil had takni the
teraphim^ DCfcljn and had pt$i them, Sec) ; Num. 14, 36. I Sam. a8, 3. a Sam.
3, 33. Is. 39, 1. Finally there are the catet in wUch an infimtival or partidpial
cooitroction reprewDtinc past time, according lo 1 113, r, | i taken np and
continued hf an imperfect ooosecntive.
f (2) To represent prcsttit actions, &c., in connexion with tenses,

or their equivalents, wlitch describe actions and conditions as betnj^
either present or lasting on into the present (continuing in their
effect); so especially,
Digitized
III.] The Imperfect with Wdw Consecutive. 343
(a) In connexion îh the present perfects, described in io6. ^,
e. g. Ps. 16, 9 ihertfitrt my heari u glad and my gUny rtjoketk
(^); Is. 3, 16 (parallel with a simple imperfect). Comp. also such
examples as Ps. 29, 10 (prop, he sat down, oitd has ieen mlkromd
ever since), Ps. 41, 13.
{p) In connexion with those perfects which represent cxpcnunecs s

frequently confirmed (see io6. k), e. g. Job 14, 2 //< comcth up (ttSP)
like a flmver, and is cut down (^M) fw Jleîh (^l^M) also as a shadmOy
;
*1^DS)L and continm/h not i Job 20, 15. 24, 2. 11. Is. 40, 24.
Prov. II, 9.
(y) In connexion with imperfects which, in one of the ways /

described in 107, 2, are used in the sense of the present ; e. g.
Job 14, 10 hii mam dteth (rivs^) and wasM away (^Z^), Ac,
Le. remains wasted; Job 4, 5. 6, 21. Is. 44, 12 sqq. Hos. 8, 13.
Hab. 1, 9 sq. Ps. 3, 5 (/ cry unh the Lord, and he answereth me

cf. 55. 90, 3. Job 5, 15. 7, 18. 12, 25. 34, 24. 37, 8 (parallel
with a simple imperfect) ; 39, 15. In the apodosls ol a conditional
sentence, Ps. 59, 16, so also after an interrogative imperlcxt, i Sam.

2, 29. Ps. 42, 6 C^lill^l for which in verse 12 and in 43, 5 we have
^35'*^ wfy art thou dugtdited?),
(5) In dependence on participles, which represent what at present u

continues or is being repeated, e.g. Num. 33 11. i Sam. 2, 6. a Sam.
19, 2 hehald the hmg wtepOt (ns^) and mmmeth ^W^X^) for Ahsahm;
Am. 5, 8. 9, 5 sq. Nah. i, 4. Ps. 34, 8, Prov. ao, 26. Job 1 2, 22 sqq.,
but comp. e.g. Job 12, 4 9^^^ ^"P who calUd upon God^ ''ÎSSfi, and
he answtnd him.
{*) In dependence on other equivalenls of the present, as in v

Is. 51, 12. Ps. 144, 3 (see above, letter m) ; Job 10, 22. So especially
as the continuation of an infinitive, which is governed by a preposition

(comp. $ 114. r). Is. 30, 13. Jer. 10, 13. Ps* 93, 8, Ac.
(3) To represent /utnre actions, Ac., in dependence on (a) an w

imperfect which refers to the fiiture, Ps. 49, 1 5. 9 4, 2 2 sq.
;
{&) a perfect
consecutive, or those perfects which, according to 106. , are intended
to represent luiurc events as undoubtedly certaiii, and therefore as

thougli already accomplished {per/. propheU'cum); comp. Is. 5, 15
(parallel with a simple imperfect); 5, 16 (comp. 2, ir. 17, where the
same threat is expressed by the perfect consecutive) ^ 5, 25. 9, 5. 10 sq.
Digitized
The Parts of Speech. [I12.
13- 15* 17 sqq. t2, 7 sqq. Joel 3, 23. Mic. 2, 13. Esek. 33, 4. 6.
Ps. 7, 13. 64, 8 sqq.; (y) a future participle, Jer. 4, 16'.
X Rem. An imperfect consecutive in dependence on a perfect or imperfect, which

fepreMBts an action occwnng only coiiditicaially, it likewite nied only in a hypo-
lenw, eg. Job 9, 16 ÎSl^ ^TjgTgTS^ Îludtojttdt
dietical Mamrntrti wd U
mg, jitt., ./ Pa. 239, It ipin i/ 1 skotM
hypoil al impcrfecti aie nied).
^
(pverioudj^ in feiae 8 aq.

În b.481 18 sq. an imperfect conûtive occars
in dependence on a sentence expressing a wish introduced by utinam (*n^

and it or so (hat it were eqoivalent to then should it be). Comp. also the example*
mentioned above, under letter / (Jer. 20, 17) and m (Gen, 31, 37), where the
imperiect cuii&ecutive expresses facts occurring continently,
112. The Perfect with Wdw Ctmucutm.

a 1* The perfect, like the imperfect ( iii), is used with wSw
emseeuHve (comp. 49. a; on the external differentiation of the
perfect consecutive by a change in the position of the tone, see 49. A)
to express actions, events, or conditions, which are to l)e attached
to what precedes, in a more or less close relation, as its iempi^ral
or lexical consequence. And as, according to iii.a, the narrative

which begins with a perfect, or its equivalent, is continued in the
impeifect oonsecuiive, so, vice versa, the perfect consecutive forms
the regular continuation to a preceding imperfecti or Its equivalent;
see the examples.
h Rm. t. TUa alttmaliaD of peifiMt and laBperfcet or tfadr eqnivalaiti it a

ttriUag pccaliarity of the mmcmHe temptnm in Hebnw. It not only affordt
a certain compensation for the lack of fonnt for tenaci and inoodt Irat also givet
to Hebrew style the charm of an expressive variety, an action conceived as t>eing
still in progress {imperfect^ &c.) reaching afterwards in the perfect a calm and
settled conclusion, in order to be again exhibited in movement in the imperfect,
and vice versa*. The strict regularity of this alleraation belongs indeed rather
' Also in Jer. 51, 29 the imperfects consecutive are attached to the threat virtually
contained in the preceding imperatives. On the other hand ^^n^| Hos. 8, 10
would be vny remarkable aa expressing a future ; tile testt it, however, certainly
fiompt, and hence the Cod. Babyt and the Erfmt MS. 3 endeavour to lemedy it
by 'rn, and Ewald leada ltrp|^]ii Eaek. a8, 16 (comp, Jer, 15, 6 tq.) ^b^ni<j)
appean to announce an action inevocaUy detemdncd upon, and Ibemfoie tepMS
tented as already accomplished ; comp. the prophetic perfects in verse 17 sqq.
It is difficult to give a proper explanation of this phenomenon (according to
49. (I, note, to be found only in the Caoaanitiih group of languages), when
we have given up the theory of a spcdal vmu conversivum in the unscientific sense
mentioned in { 49. note* at the end, if we accept tlie lact that the jfeffttt
and
Digitized by Google
1 1 2.] The Perfect zvith Wdiv Consecuii ve. 345
to the higher style, and even then it dependi upon the vieir uA inteatioii of the
qMeaker. whether he wbhet the action, Ace., to be r^rded as the logical conie-
riticnoe of what has preceded, or as simply oo*4Mdtiiate with it, and so. in the
6ame teriie.
2. A sncccssioD of any number of other ferfeits (onsecutivc may be co-ordinated C

vidi a perfect ifinsetuihi (comp. e. g. Ecek. 14, 13. Amos 5, 19. Rath 3, 3, four
perfects in each case, b. 8, 7 five, Ex. 6, 6 sq. dght). It is tme, however, of tike
perfect (as conversely of the imperfect ace. to $ Oi that as soon as the IVaw 1 11.
is scparatwl by any intervening word from the verb to which it belonjjs, an imferfat
necessarily takes the place of the perfect, e.g. Gen. I a, I3 xohen the Egy^f'.ians
shall see thee, thai they shall say (V^DS^, This is his wife: and they will kill me
{>m ']np but they will save thee alive (VRJ Tjnttp,
2. The perfect oonsecntive, like the imperfect consecutive, always d

belongs to the period of time expressed by the preceding tense, or
its equivalent, with which it is connected as the temporal or logical
consequence. The particular cases may be classed under three
heads : [a) the perfect consecutive in imnudiate dependence (see
letter e\ {h) in loose connexion (see letter x) with the preceding,
and (r) the perfect consecutive at the beginning of the apodosis to
other sentences, or what are equivalent to sentences (see letter
8. The perfect consecutive in immediate dependence on the ^

preceding tense^ or its equivalent, serves
(tf) As a frequentative tense to express ptni actions, Arc., L e. actions
repeatedly brought to a conclusion in the past, and follows tenses,
or their equivalents, representing actions which have cwUmHti or

been repeated in the past:
(a) After a simple imperfect, e.g. Gen. 2, 6 H^JT Tt? there went up
a mist (again and again) from the earth. î^K'ni avl watered (as it
were, and it always watered afresh), &c. This frequentative use of

the perfect consecutive is equally evident after frequentative imperfects,
and imperfect emsecutive cannot possibly be osed in a way which contradicts their
fundamental character as described in 106 and 107. In other words, even the
perfect eoftscmtive orir;inally represents a finally completed action, &c., jnst as
the imperfect consecuiivt represents aii action which is only beginning, becoming
or still coDthiaing, and hence in any ease inoouplete. The simplest view is to
suppose, tiiat the ose of the pnfa tomseemtht originated from those cases, in whidi
it had to expiCSS the conclusion (or final consequence' of an action which was
continued '"or repeated) in past time (see the examples abovc% and that this us^j-
was afterwards extended to other cases, in which it had to represent the terii; >>ral
or logical consequence of actions, &c., &tiU in progress, and thus in the end a regular
inteidiai^ of the two tenses bceane recognized.
Digitized by Google
34^ The Parts of Speech. [ I".
Gen. 2, 10 (njrn tmd if hecami afresh every time; would mean,

and it became so once lor all), 29, 2 sq. (four pcrlccts consccut!\c
referring to actions repeated daily) ; Ex. 33, 7-1 1 he used to lake
at each new encampment the tent, nC31 and to pitch it again every
time without the camp; notice, amongst the numerous frequent, perff.
Gonsec., the imperf. in w. 7. 8. 9. 11, always in a frequentative sense
34> 34 sq* Num. 9, 19. ai (among several simple imperfects). 10^ 17.
Jttd. 9 19. I Sam. 19 n^f^ the wed U make , . '^j^p) emd

a,
hrmight it to him from year At year; 27, 9 (Ê^). i Ki. 141 s8. a Ki.
3, as. 12, 15 (in verses 16 sq. imperfects occnr again). So also in
dependent sentences. Gen. 6, 4 i^^^ as a continuation of ^),
Job 31, 29*.
y (^) After an imperfect consecutive, e.g. I'x, 39, 3 (Samaritan IV^Jpl).
I Sam. 5, 7 (r see 112. rr). 7, 16. 2 Sam. 15, 3. 16, 13 and he threw
sipnes ai him, '^Vl and east dust continually; xa, 16. 31. a iLi. 6, 10.
13, II sqq. ig. Jer. 37, 15. Job z, 5.
g Rem. Hie lieqiieatative pexfect ooaseoBdve is Miiiietinies joined evoi wiA

impcifecU oonBceative which nmply expicii one ecdon or occnnence in the
past; tihus Ex. 18, 26. 40^ 31 iq. 1 Sam. i, 4. a Sam. 15, i sq. i Ki. 14, 27
(comp. verê 28); 1 Ki. 18, 4. 2 Ki. 12, !o. For other example* of a loOKly
couuected Irequentative perfect coosecativc, see below, letter dd,
k (y) After a perfect, Gen. 37, 3 (^b nip^, i. e. as often as he needed

a new garment)*; Num. 11, 8. i Sam. 16, 14. a Ki. 3, 4'; in interro-
gative sentences, i Sam. a6, 9 who has ever,Sx*; Ps. 80, 13. Job 1, 1.4.
Ruth 4, 7 ; Gen. 26, 10, to express that which might possibly have
happened, me of the people might lightly . . and thou shouldesi have
brought ûiUifuss upon us,
i (d) After an infinitive, Amos i, 1 1 iDTH'^y because he did pursue his
brother, and (on each occasion) did cast off all pity (liien an
imperfect consecutive); after an infiaiiive absolute, Jos. 6, 13. 2 Sam.
I3> '9* Jr> 33> 14*
* Abo in Esek. 44, i a (whei SCmIc, ZAIV. v. 293, would red and 1^ni*l)
the onusnal tenses may have been intentiottaUy choMO : kumse th^ emtumalfy
Ministered and so always became afresh . .
' Driver, on thii passage, rightly refers to 1 Sam. a, 19.

' Amos 4, 7 would also come uiiUer this head, if *jnOOm is icallv intended,
ami the statement rtitri to the past ; *Ry2D might, however, aio be a perfect
expressing positive assonmce 106. m), aaU the pwmge then belongs to iettcr /.
Digitized by Google
112.] The Perfect with Waw Consecutive, 347
() After a participle, Is. 6, 3 (N"ip"l, Ac, frequenlative, as a con- k

tinuation of DH^V* verse 2); 1 S;\m. 2, 22. 2 Sam. 17, 17 ^
(C) After other equivalents of tenses, e.g. Gen. 47, 22 the prials I
had a poriim /ram Pharaoh^ ^^^\ ^f**^ ^^ y^)*
1 Ki. 4, 7.
{b) To exfmss /rir/ actions, Ac, as the temporal or logical m

coDsequcDce of actions or events which continue or are repeated
in the present, especially such as have, according to experience^
been at all times frequently repeated, and may be repeated at
any time.
(a) After a simple imperfect, c. g. Gen. 2, 24 there/ore a man leaves
(3fgJ. is accustomed lo leav) . . . P^'^"! <iHJ t;Viiirj, &c., here, as frequently
elsewhere, clearly with the secondary idea of purpose, i.e. in order
to cleave ; Is. 5, 1 1 (if <Tni is to be taken as a continuation of 012*1*1-);
Is. 28, 28. Jer. 12, 3. Hos. 4, 3. 7, 7. Ps. 90, 6. Job 14, 9; also in
dependent clauses, Lev. 20, 18. Is. 29, 8. 11 sq. Amos 5, 19.
ip) After a participle, as the equivalent of a sentence representing n

a contingent action, &c., e.g.x. ai, is IQ) 1^ nap (instead of nap
there is in verse ao, &c. tNl nj! smtie a man and (so that)
ie du, Ac., Ex. sr, 16. Is. 39, 15. Amos 6, t. Hab. a, is.
(y) After an infinitive absolute, Jer. 7, 9 sq. wi'/l ye sUal^ murder^ o

and commit adultery (simple infinitives absolute; comp. w^.ee),
DPtCH and then cotne and stand be/ore me * * , and iay, &c. ;
cump.
below, letter u.
(r) To express future actions, Ac, as the temporal or logical p

consequence of tenses, or their equivalents, which announce or require
such future actions or events. Thus-
(a) After imperfects in the sense of a simple futili-e, e.g. Amos 9, 3 sq.
Oîri^ bgnsj / will search and lake ihem out ikeneet ftc;
Gen. Sam. 17, 3s. a Ki. 5, 11. Job 8, 6 sq. (also*
4, 14. 40^ 13. I
with a change of subject, Gen. 27, is. Jud. 6, t6 and elsewhere);

and in interrogative sentences, Gen. 39, 9. Ex. a, 7. a Sam. is, t8.
2 Ki. 14, 10. Amos 8, 8. Ps. 41, 6 comp. also Jud. i 1 1 ; in sentences
; ,
' That nabni, &c., are frequent.itives {the maidsenfont used to go repeatedly and
tttl tkeni) may be seen from ^î?' (necessarily an iiin>erfect, since it is separated
from \
t>y Qn) and ^^3V ; on the Other band iu vene 18 fiCTI and of Ktiont
wtui,h happened but once.
Digitized by Google
34^ The Parts of Speech. [112.
expressing a wish, s Sam. 15, 4 ; as well as in almost all kinds of

dependent clauses. Also in conditional clauses after "QK Gen. 32, 9.
Ex. 19, 5. 1 Sam. I, I I, or ""^ Gen. 37, 26 or 10 Jer. 3, i ; in final
clauses after Gen. 12, 13. Num. 15, 40. Is. 28, 13; afier "12^
Deut. 2, 25 or "|B Gen. 3, 22. 19, 19. 3a, 12. Is. 6, 10. Amos 5, 6;
in temporal clauses, Is. 32, 15. Jer. 13, 16; and in relative clauses,
Gen. 24, 14. Jud. la. i SaoL I7>s6.
q (/3) Aiier the jussive (or an imperfect in the sense of a Jussive or
optative) or cohortative, with the same or a different subject, e.g.
Gen. I, 14 sq. ^ n'ltnp Ni) hi there he UghU . . . amd let
them 6e, &c.; Gen. is, 3. 24, 4. 28, 3. 31, 44. i Ki. t, a. as, 13.
Ruth 2, 7. I Chron. as, x i ; after a jussive ezptessing an impiecationt

Ps. 109, 10.
r (y) After an ini| < r itive, also with the same or a diflfercnt subject,
e.g. 2 Sam. 7, 5 ^JOPJ?) ga and tell (that thou mayst tell), &c.;
Gen. 6, 14. 8, 17. 27, 43 sq. i Sam. 15, 3. 18. i Kl 2, 36. Jer.
48, 26.
s (d) After perfects which express a definite expectation or assurance
(comp. % 106. m
Gen. 17, so ink *^f>n{ \rk ^JgD^ n|ri
and n), e.g.
hihdd^ J have b^sed km^ and wttl make htm /rm(fkl, Ac.; Is. a, ii
5, 14 ; on Amos 4, 7 see above, note 3 on letter h; in an mtemâtive

sentence^ Jud. 9, 9. 11, 13.
/ (c) After a participle, e. g. Gen. 7, 4 /or yet seven days, "*0D0 *3bK
and J will came it to rain . . . *n*nw and I will (i. e. in order to)
destroy, &c.; Jer. 21, 9; also with a different subject, Gen. 24, 43 sq.
ihf maithn ivhich covhih forlh (riKi**n) . H^^X ^rinpsi io uhom

I shall say . . ., "T^^^] and she (then) shall saw Srr. This use of the
perfect consecutive is especially frequent after a participle introduced
bjr ^ 17 with a different subject i Ki 20, 36.
Amos 6, 14; after a complete noun-clause introduced by n^n (c<Hnp.
140), z. 13 ieheid, I came (i.e. if I shall come)

^
3, 02^^ ^l^^fl
and thaH unto them . . . ,
^^'^^tH
(then) shall say^ ftc.;
I Sam. 14, 8 sqq. Is. 7, 14. 8, 7 sq. 39, 6,
u (0 After an infinitive absolute, whether the infinitive absohite serves
to strengthen the finite verb (see 113. /), e.g. Is. 31, 5, or is used
as an emphatic substitute for a cohortative or imperfect ( 113. dd
and ee), e.g. Lev. 2, 6, Deut. i, 16. Is. 5, 5. Ezek. 23, 46 '^q
V (9) After an infinitive construct governed by a preposmon (for
Digitized by Google
112.] The Perfect with Wdw Consecutive, 349
this change from the iuiinitive construction to t!te finite verb, cf.
114. r), e.^. T Sam. lo, 8 '^V"?^'?] T^'^ //// / come unto
ihee (prop, until my coming) and show th<r, Sec; Gen. l8, 25. 27, 45.
Jud. 6, 18. zek. 39, 27 ; comp. i Ki. 2, 37. 42.
Rem, To the snie dan belooK i Sam. 14, 4, where the idea oTtime preoede tt^
evening tmdvBlSi I be aveni;ed, &e., and la. 5i 8. where the idea of plaee
iMlf7 it be
piecedes, in both caiei govemed by
4* The very frequent me of the perfect consecutive in direct *

dependence upon other tenses (see above, letters d'V) explains how
it finally obtained a kind of independent force especially for ihe
purpose of announcing future events and might depend loosely

on sentences to which it stood onlv in a wider sense in the relation
of a temporal or logical consequence. Thus the perfect consecutive
is used
{a) To announce futurt events, Ac., in loose connexion with
a further announcement, e.g. Gen. 4x1 30 V3|jf| and two co-ordinate

perfects consecutive, equivalent to hut ihm thaU artse, Ac; Irequently
80 after ran with a following substantive (i Sam. 9, 8), or a partidptal

clause (comp. the analogous instances above, letter /). e. g. i San) a, 31
Beiold, the days come, ''^'ip}^ that I will cut off, &q.; Is. 39, 6, Amos
4, 2. 8, II. 9, 13, and very often in Jeremiah; after an expression
of time, Ex. 17, 4. Is. 10, 25. 29, 17. Jer. 51,33. Hos. 1,4. Further,
when joined to a statement concerning present or past facts, especially
when these contain the reason for the action, &c., expressed in the
perfect consecutive; comp. Is. 6, 7 lo^ this hath touched thy lips,
191 therefore thine iniquity shail be talien away, &c., Gen. 20, 11. 26, 22.
Jud. 13, 3 (here in an adversative sense); Hos. 8, 14. In loose
connexion with a noun-clause, a long succession of perfects con-

secutive occurs in x. 6, 6 sqq. Also in Amos 5, 26 on^^ may
be an announcement yea, ye shaH take t^; comp., however, below,
letter rr.
Rem. I. Very frcqocntly ihe announcement of a future event is attached by y

mean* of iTn^ and it tkalt come u pass (comp. the analogoua addition of a past
bjr fldcam of ^1^, | iii, a), afi- wbidi the event announced (aometimes after
a long paienthesia) follows In one or more (oo*oidinate') perfecd coaaecative.
Gen. 9 14. la, i j (^3 as in 46, 33. Ex. 1, 10. as, a6 and frequently).
I KI. z8, I). Is. 14, 3 sq. Amoe 8, 9$ or in the imperfect. Gen. 4* 14. Is. 3, a.
3. 24. 4. \ 7. 18. ai VY\. comp. 29, 8); or in the jussive, Lev. 14, 9. It very
raicly bappess that the vctb which is thus loosely added, agieci* in geuUcx and
Digitized by Go^le
nttmber with the following mbiect, m in Nam. 5, 97. Jer. 41* t6 Xftt/SVi (bcfiwe
ainnl and . in Jer. 4a, 1 7 (before D>83rri53).
^ a. The juuhre form *rP1 oeenrt (in the tense described in letter^) instead of iTrn
in I Sam. to, 5. 2 Sam. 5, 34 (! Chron. 14, 15). I Ki. 14, 5. Ruth 3, 4, alt!iough
In the first three |'lnr<.s a jussive is wholly inadmissible as teganls the meaning,
auvi even in Kuih 3, 4 ^vvhere an admonuion follows) iTHl would be expected
(see below, letter bb). In i Ki. 14, 5, however, the form is merely a textual error,
and the pointing ibonld rimply be ^n^. In tiie other peasages (always before
tn Infinitive with n preposttlan) stands nt the bq>^lng of the senfeenee at an
tinnsually long distance from the principal tone, and hcnoe is oertainly to be
explained according to too. except that in i Sam. ô, 5, 8cc, the simply
rhythmical jusdve form takes the place, not of the fall imperfect form, bat
(exceptionally) of I he perfect consecutive.
aa {t>) To introduce a command or wish: Deut. 10, 19 kve yt

ihtrifore iht stranger; i Sam. 6, 5. 34, 16. 1 KL a, 6 (in Gen. 40, 14
the precative perfect consecutive, as elsewhere the oohortative, jussive^
and imperative, is strengthened by means of K)). So, also, in loose
connexion with participial and other noun->cIau8e8 (see above, letter jr),
Gen. 45, IS sq. i Kt. 2, 2 sq. Ruth 3, 3 sq. 3, 9. In Gen. 17, ti

the perfect consecutive (DRS>p3t and ye shall U circumcutd^ &c.) is
used to explain a preceding coiimiand.
bb Rem. As in the cases mcntionetl above under letter the connexion may be
made by means of iTHI. Thus with a following perfect consecutive, e.g. Gen. 46. 33.
47> '4' J"^> 4* Comp. also Gen. 24, 14, where the real wish, at least as regards
the sense, is oootained in the next sentenee.
cc (r) To introduce a question, uliether in loose connexion with

another interrogative sentence (sec above, letter p\ e.g. Gen. 29, 15
art ihou my broiher (equivalent to, Surely thou art my brolher),
skouldest ihou then serve me for naught? or with a positive
statement, e. g. x. 5, 5 (DnSf^ willye then make them reslf)\ i Sam.

25, It, perhaps also Ps. 50, si (^ll'f'lQjll)).
dd (^ To introdace actions frequently repeated (hence analogous to

the numerous examples of a frequentative perfect consecutive, above,
letters), e.g. t Sam.
3 (n^V] of annual festival journeys); 13, si
i,
(where, however, the text appears radically corrupt); 27, 9 (nsrn,

i.e. every time, therefore continued by means of "TJH^ t^S) ; i Ki. 5, 7
(^!?3b31, parallel with a simple imperfect); 9, 23. jer. 25, 4. Din. 8. 4.
In Job I, 4 sq. a series of frequentative perfects consccuiivc is uiler-
nipted by an imperfect consecutive, while a siroi>le imperfect (as the

modut rei repetitai) forms the conclusion. In Jer. 6, 17 a similar
Digitized by Google
{ 112.] The Perfect wUh IVdto Consecutive, 351
perfect is expressly marked, bf placing the tone on the final syllable
(according to 49. A), as parallel with the real peifects consecutive.

Rem. The loose cfmiexiflii of/cm/^fw frequenimtioa by n^ni (comp. the Rem. et
above, letteis y and M) is alio very fireqnent in this sense ; tlnis with a followii^t
perfect coosecotive. Gen. 30, 41 sq. (but in yetse 49 ^ where the mb it tqtarated
from dke WSm bj an insertioo, we find ^ he used mt U fmt (km im,
according to 107. e)\ Gen. 38, 9. Ex. 17, 11. 33, 7 sqq. (see above, letter e).
Num. 2T, 9. Jud. 6, 3. 19, 30. I Sam. ifi, 23 (followed by five perfects coniectit}ve>
3 Sam. 15, 5 ; with a following imperfect (as the modus rei repetitae\ Jud. a, 19.
a Sam. 14, 36. In Jud. 12, 5 iTn\| contrary to what would be expected, ii con.
tnraed by menu of the impeifeet oonsecntin^ ud in i Sam. 13, %%
die perfect (instead of the imperfect).
5. Finally the perfect consecutive is ver}' frequently emj lo} cd with jf

a certain emphasis to introduce the apodosis after sentences (or what
are ttiuivuknt to sentences) which contain a condition, a reason, or a
statement of lime. ISIorcover, such an apodo.sis, as in the cases already
treated, may represent cither future events, or commands and wishes,

or even events which have been often repeated in the past. Thus
(a) The perfect consecutive occurs in the apodosis to conditional
BefkCences ^ (} 159.
(a)
if ihty
AAer Die
9^ i) :
with the imperfect^ e.g. 3 Ki.

km ut, (well then) un skaU hui dk; here the perfect consecutive
7, 4^ ^
is used obviously with greater emphasis than the imperfect (njns)
which immediately precedes; Gen. x8 36. 34, 8. 41. 32, 9. Num.
30, 15. Jud. 4, 20. I Sam. i, 11. so, 6. i Ki. 3, 14. Nah. 3, 12.
Eccles. 4, II.
After witli the perfect (in the sense of a fulunun exactum),

gg
Num. 5, 27. 2 Ki. 5, 20. 7, 4 a. Is. 4, 4 sq. ; as precaiive apodosis after
Kj'DIt with the fur/, preUritum, Gen. 33, 10; as a frequentative

perfect consecutive, to represent past events in the apodosis after
OK with a perfect. Num. ai, 9. Jud. 6, 3. Job 7, 4; after OK with
imperfect, Gen. 31, 8.
(y) After ^9 (m caH^ titfpon thai\ with the imperfect, Gen. 13, is. >iA
Ex. 18, 16. Jud. 13, 17. Is. 58, 7. Ezek. 14, 13*. Frequentative with
* In a number of the examples of this kind the protasis is already loosely

cocinected by means of H^ni, and hence some of them had to be already mentioiied
above, letten bb, ee.
* In 1 Sam.
a question appears to be expressed by the perfect coDsccntive,
34, 19
ffrtf amanJittdkitemtK^fWUi k* Uf kimg^wHtatM^T Probably, however,

with Klostermann, *M should be icad for âj.
Digitized by Goo<^lc
352 The Paris of Speech, [ I".
reference to the past, after ^9 with firequentative perfect, Jnd. a, i8.
^ Job 7, 13 sq.
iV (d) After 1^ with the imperfect. Gen. 44, 9 nD} iRN MS^
yf(^
wHk whoms&evir . , , U he fmnd, kt him He; with the perfect,
Ex. ai, 13 if a man lie not in waity &c.; Jud. i, 12.
kk (f) Very frcqucnliy .ificr a perfect consecutive (one or more) con-
taining the condition, e.g. Gen. 44, 29 DTiTnini , , . nrriX'Di Dr.ni^5)l and
if ye take (or shall have laken) /his one also . . ,ye shall bring J<nvn, Scc.\
comp. Gen. 33, 13. 42, 38. 44,4. 22. 47, 30. Num. 30, 12. Ruth 2, 9,
and probably also zek. 39, 38. Also frequentative in reference
to the past, e.g. i Sam. 17, 34 sq. ^0^|f^) * * ^3
/
^ wkm
there came (as sometimes happened) a Urn . . . weni au/, Ac;
Ex* 33> 10* Norn. 10, 17 sqq. i Ki. t8, 10. Jer. so, 9 (the perfects
consecutive being regiUarly continued in the apodosis by ^b] widi an
imperfect*).
// Rem. The perfect consecutive may be uaetl also iu the piotasij* lo express
a CQodition when the employment of the perfect eontecntive hi the apodocb has
heoome impotttble, owing U> an emphatic wofd having to itand before it; tbnt
in Ezek. 14, 14 on accoont of tVSni 33, 4 on account of to^. In i Sam. 14, 5s
the imperfect consecutive, contrary to what mi^-ht be expected, st.ifnU in the

apodo?i5, am/ 'w/ien Satt/ saw any . . . valiant man, ht took him unto Aim,
where VIDDX^T suggests the special case, rather than a repeatcil occurrence; cf.
a Sam. 15, a. Conversely, in 1 Sam. a, 16. 17.35^ aii imperfect consecutive

fltandt In the prottsii.
mm {() After various equivalents of sentences, which contain a condition^

thus, after a substantive standing absolntrly, or a participle (a casus
pendens). Gen. 17, 14 nmaji . . . nat b^p and /he unttreumdeed maU
(in case such an one be found), he shall he cut eft ftc; oomp. Gen.
30, 38. Ex. IS, 15. 2 Sam. 14, 10. Is. 6, 13, and (after an infinitive
widi a preposition) a Sam. 7, 14; in a wider sense also Ex. 4, at.

9, 19. 12, 44. Is. 9, 4.
nn (^) The t)erfect consecutive serves as the apodosis to causal clauses

thus e.g. after ^3 ^ with the perfect, Is. 3, 16 sq.; after with
perfect, i Ki. 20, 28; after 3^? with perfect, Num. 14, 24; also after what
'
In all these examples (not only in the frcf|ncntativc pcrfcct<? consecutive^ the
original idea of the perfect, which also um'.erlics the perfect cotisecutive, comes
oat vcr)- distinctly. Gen. 44, 29 (see abovel imphe:^ iii the mind of the speaker,
If It ever shall have come to thb, that ye 4mv iahen this one also, then ye kme
thereby brought me down to SheoU
Digitized b^Gc^qlc
ii2.j The Perfect with Wdw Consecutive, 353
are equivalent to causal clauses, e.g. Ps. 25, 1 1 (l?n^W , . , ÎBe* IJojl
for thy name's sake . . . pardon . , . ); Is. 37, 29 after |J?! with an
infinitive.
(<) The perfect consecutive occurs as the apodosis to temporal 00

clauses or their equivalonts, e.g. i Sam. 2, 15 3^nn"nK (TtDp D^Qf
10^ '>K Kn) he/9r ihey bumi ikt fai, the priest's servant came
(naed to come), ftc^ hence a frequentative peifect consecutive relating
to the past, as in z. z, 19 ; also after participial dauses ( 116. w),
e.g. I Sam. 3, 13 sq. naj ^ CÎT^ whenffsvei) atty man
9jfiend sacnyUe^ thin eamt, Ac. (so Jud. 19, 30. 3 Sam. ao* la), with
a frequentative perfect consecutive. The perfect consecutive is very
frequently used to announce future actions or events after simple

expressions of time of any kind : thus Gen. 3, 5. Ex. 32, 34 (,ifter Cri*2
with the infinitive), comp. also such examples as Num. 44, 30. Jud.
16, 2. Jos. 6, 10. I Sam. i, 22. 16, 23 (numerous frequentative perfects
consecutive after the infinitive wiili a preposition; so 2 Sam. 15, 5,
see above, letter ee); i Sam. so, 18. a Sam. 14, 36. 1$, 10. Is. 18, 5 ;
moreover, Ex. 17, 4. Is. 10, 85. 29, 17. 37, 26; even after single
disconnected words, e. g. Ex. t6,6 DQfT) ^ at even (when it becomes

evening) then ye shall know; comp. veise 7. Lev. 9, 16. i Kl 13,
31. Prov. 34, 37.
6. Finally there still remains a number of passages which cannot
be classed widi any of diose hitherto mentioned. Of these, some
are due to the influence of Aramaic modes of expression, while
in others the Lcxl is evidently corrupt. In a few instances wc can
do no more than merely call attention to the incorrectness of the
expression.
(a) The infloenee of the Aramaic coMtrnotion of die perfect with 1 as the
narrative tense, instead of the Hebrew imperfect consecutive (comp. Kautzsch,
Gramm dcs biH. y/r<jw., f) 'ji.b),{^ certainly to ê trncfd in Qohtleth, rtnd sporadi-
celly in other very late Books '.perhaps also in a few passages in the books of Kings,
wUch are open to the sospidoo of bchig due to later interpolation ; so probably
1 KL la, 5a i > KL IX, I A?/4. rVMm ; 14, 14 H^l (in the pendid
* In the whole of QokeUth the imperfect consecutive occars only in i, 17 and

4, 1.7. Several of the perfects vrith \ cnn no doubt be explained as frequcntativcs,
c-g- If 13. 2 5- 9 II 13- 15. 5i 18 compared with 6, 1 ; but this is impossible
ia soch passages as 9, 14 sqq. In Ezra, Driver reckons only tive examples of
historical perfects wllli 1 in NdieaiUi mily six, tad ia Esther lis or seven*
Aa
Digitized by Google
354 The Paris of Speech, [ iia.
pamge Chron. as, a^, the word b wanting); a KL a), 4 Ac.; vone 10
ftcj vene la tTPf^ClV ^ S '5 > Cf. nlso Eiek. 37, a. 7. 10.
qq (6) Tbe text is eertainlj compt in 1m. 40, 6 (read with the LXX and Vvlgate
"ipkjD; Jer. 38* a8, where the nairatiTe brealcs off in the middle of tbe aentenoe
40, 3 (iTrn , &c., wanting in the LXX) ; alao in Jod. 7, 1 3 ^HKH la altogether
redundant; in l Sam. 31,'^ rci with Klostcrmann, thi- 2nd st'/rg: masc. instead of
^Dtim ; in I Ki. 21, 13 O^^n^ ii no doaU* incorrectly repeated from vene 9*
where it is an imperative.
rr Of other questionable instances, (o) the following, at anj rate, may also be
eiplained as freqtientntives Ex. 36, 38. 38, aS. 39, i Sam. 3^ 7. 17, ao. a4, it ^
(but even ao tt^K^ would be expected); la. a8, a6 (pamllel widi an impeifeet);
Amos 5, 26 (nnlett it is nither,^|jtf skaUiaktu^; aee abovui letters); Fa. a63.
Kzra 8, 36.
SS {$) A lonf:;er or constant continuaace in a past state is perhaps represented by

the perfect with ^ âi a variety of the frequentative perfect with 1), in Gcu. 15, 6.
34, 5. Num. 31, 20; also, accurding to Driver, especially Jos. 15, 3-1 1. 16, a-8
(iddmately patallel with an imperfect* aa hi 17, 9 and i8 ao); 18, laâi.
19, 11-14. aa, 2$-a9. 34; moreover, i Sam. z, la. s, ao (both times njni);
la. a 2, 14. Jcr, 3. 9.
// (7) The following are due to errors in the t'-rt, or to incorrect mode- nf
expression; Gen. 21. 25. Ex. .^6, sq. Jud. 3, 23". 16, iS. 1 Sam. 4, 19. 17.38.
2 Sam. 16, 5. 19, 18 sq. (read ^n^V and ^l^V^l). 1 Ki. 3, ii (where phtOSTi
is, DO doubt intentionally, assimilated to the four other perfects); 13, 3. 30, ai.
31, I a (anle the imperative &c., is intended); a Ki. 14, 7 (where, with
Stade,l^fin V^DH'nK^. should be lead); 14, 14. 18, 4 (where, at any rate, "13^^
mi^t be tahen aa a fieqnentative, but not fPOH, ftc; evidently ^ttc perfects aie
oo-oiduMted only in hm with Htl^ Hfff]); Jer. 37, 13 (wlieie isnj, but not
Wfi, might be fieqnenUtive); Eaelc. ao, aa (ravm MtH before an impeiiiDet

cotuecntive); Amoa 7 4 (H^MI after no imperfect oooaecntive); Job 16, la.
UU Finally, in I Sam. 10, 9. 17. 48. a Sam. 6, 16. a Ki. 3, 15. Jer. 37, 1 1. Amos 7, a
is to be read thronghont instead of TtVPfi, bat in Gen. 38, 5 K^nj with the LXX.
* According to Stade, ZAW. v. 391 sqq., where he diaeesses, in cannexion with

a Ki* III I a, n number of critically qncationafale perfects witii the whole aectica,
a KI. as, to veiae 3 Inclosivey is to be rented as a gloas, since die
4 from V^f^
continuation of an Imperfect consecutive by means of a perfect with \ never occurs
in pre-ezilic documents, except in places where it is due to corruption of the
original text At the same time, the pos'îhility of frequentative perfects conscctjtive
(even immediately after imperfects coiistcutivc), which has been supported al ove,
letters / and gt
by a large number of examples, does not appear to have been
taken bto account In a Ki* a3, $ also ri^3K>n], verse 8 ^3), and vene HâflN
may, mt any rate, be undentood aa lepiescnting repeated actionik
* Or doea ^P31, as a frequentative, imply ^stening with leveml bolts t It 1%
nt all events, to be noticed, that in a Sam. 13, 18 also follows an imperfect
consecutive.
Digitized by Google
113] The In/miiive Absoiuie. ass
B. Ths Imfinitivk and Participue,
$ 118. The Tnjimfhe Ahsohttt.
Cf. the dissertation of J. Knhan, and, especially, tlie thorough investigation by

E. Sellin, both entitled, Uibr die vcrlnil nominaU Dop^Hotur dcr hebrdiscken
PartUipUn ttnd Injinitrvt, &c., Leipzig, 1889.
1. The infinitive absolute is employed according to 45 to a

emphasize the idea of the verb in the abstracif i.e. it speaks of an
action (or condition) without any regard to the agent or to the
conditions of time and mood under which it takes place. As
the nam of an action the infinitive absolute, like other nouns in the
stricter sense, may form part of certain combinations (as a subject,
predicate, or object, or even as a genitive', see below); but such

a use of the infinitive absolute (instead of the infinitive constnici
with or u iihout a preposition) is, on the whole, rare, and, moreover,
open to question on critical grounds. On the other hand, the infinitive
absolute frequently exhibits its character as an expression of the

verlfal idea by taking an object, either in the accusative or even
with a preposition.
Examples of the use of the infinitlvr absolute :
b
As subject, Prov. 35, 37 310
() nto"jn BQ*^ fox it is not good to eat much
homy: Ter. to, 5. Job 6, 25. Eccles. 4, 17; at an esplnation of a demoutrative
pronoDii, Is. 58, 5 sq. 2^ch. 14, is.
{b) As predicate, Is. 33, 17 and the effect of rigkiemsness (is) flOSI ^
fuititms (prop. tofindreH) and eenildinee,
(0 At object, Ii. 1, 17 3D^n ntpp kam te de wOj 1*. 7, 15. Fkov, 15, is j d
aooordin|r to the mdm also Jer. 9, 93. 93, 14, as wdl at Ii, 5. j ODH and |^
virtually depend on the idea of the wtdi eontained io Is. sSt 13, when
a long scries of tafinitivet aUoIiite is governed by nin, and $9, 13 (six in6nitlvet
govenied by Q^^^ in verse la); Dent. 28, 56 is strange sbce the object picoedes
tlic infinilivc alisolute which governs it', aUo Is. 42, 24, where the statement of
place precedes the infinitive absolute. In Jer. 9, 4. Job 13, 3 the infinitive nbsolute
as the object of tlic vtrt> is jjl.iced before it for the sake of emphasis (with the verb
nâtived by iib in Is. 57, 20. Jer. 49, 23), so also in Lam. 3, 43 where itistiie
remoter oliject and co-oidinated with a snbstantive.
id) As genitive, Is. 14, S3 *tgfr\ Kt2K:p3 witk ike besem ef destmOwti e
0 perliaps also 4, 4 Hg^ nras comp. fnrtlier, Prov. i, 3. ax, The infinitiTo
1 The infinitive absohite can never be joined with a geniUve or a pronomiiial

affix.
* Perhaps :iYn according to 53. i sboaid be explained as an infinitive coni^ract,
or shuuld be written Jiyn,
A a 3
Digitized by Google
35^ The Paris of Speech. [ 113.
tbgolate it nem Hied In inuaediate coanexiop with prepodtUmt ^ (which as being

origiaally fnbttantfves govern the genitive), but always the inlmitive cottitmcti
bat if a second infinitive is co-ordinated by ^ with such an infioitive cooitnctf it ha*
the form of the infinitive absolute (since it is i clcase<l from the immediate gOTernment
of the preposition .
t-.tj. i Sam, aa, 13 DV^)N3 *h i>iJ<ph , Dn^ 'h fW13 , ,
in thai thou hast i^tvin him I'rcad . . and hast inquired of Godfor him } iek.36t3i
1 Sam. 25, 26. 33 (after JTp ;
nftcr S Kx. 3a, 6. Jer. 7, 18. 44, 17.
^ 'e) c; ivcrninfT nn accusative of the object, e.g. Is. aa, 13 1^ DHCh "î^!! sSn
Uiiying oxen anJ killing sheep; comp. lijt. ao, 8. 33, 30. Deut. 5, li. Is. 37, 19,
and of the examples in -</, Dent. aS, 56. Is. 5, 5. 58, 6 sq. Prov. as, 27. &c.;
followed bj a preposition, e. g. Is. 7, 1 5 3ltSa "tt^ 7^3 D^CD f^g/bM the tvii
HdehiQptttktgMd; Prov. ts, la 0? nzvi).
^ If the object be a penonal pronoun, then, ainoe the infinitive nbiotnte can never
be vnited with a suffix (see above;, note on letter d), it is afhxed by meant of the
accuative^gn |^( (nk), eg. Jer % 33 ^()k yfCt^ and knowetk mt; Esek. 36, 3.
A 2. Analogous to the use of the infinitive absolute as the accusative
of the object, mentioned in letter d, is its einpUn nK iit as a t asus

adverb I alts"- in connexion with some form of the tintte verb, to
describe more p;inicularly the manner or allentlant circumstances
(especially those of time and place) under Avhich an action or condition
has taken place, or is taking place, or will take place ; e. g. Jer. %t, 19
he shali be buried with ike burial ^ an att, X^f^ 3^ a drawing
and eatiing fwrffi^ i.e. being drawn and cast forth, ftc; Gen. ai, i6
(pnrin a remaning, Le. distant; comp. Ex. 33, 7. Jos. 3> 16); Gen.
30, 32. Ex. 30, 36. Num. 6, 5, aj. 15, 35 (where a subject
added subsequently; see below, letter gg)\ Jos. 3, 17. i Sam. 3. rt
(n^31 bnn a beginning and ending, i.e. from beginning to end); 2 Sam.
8, 2. Is. 7, II (PPJ|J? and ^S^'?, proj). </ making deep and
a making high, i. e. whether thy recjuest extend to the world below
or to the height above); 57, 17('V?9'^ in hiding, sc. my face); Jer. 3, 15
(^^j^ ^VfH ^viih knmvledge and understanding) \ Hab. 3, 13
comp. for the form 75. <w); Zech. 7, 3. Ps. 35, 16 (p^, to define
more precisely XST^ verse 15); Job 15, 3'.
' Tirt^ *inMI I Sam. t, 9 b ioipomible Hebicw, and aa the LXX ibowB, a late
addition.
' That tfiii casus ahverbialis also was originally regarded as an accasativc. may
he scm from classical Arnhic, wh< re an infinitiTC of this kind expressly rt t.nin?
tb'^ nccuâtivr cn<ii!i<^'. In I.itin the- alilaitve of the gerund correspond* in maoj
ways to this use ol ihr infinttive absolute.
* AIM in a KL a 1, 1 3 fui :]Dn} nn^ read with Stade tad Xkatmsan lît^ nh^.
Digitized by
1130 The Infinitive Absolute. 357
Rem. To
an adverbial iafinitive abidate of tbii kind, there
I.
be added a casus uiotrHtdu (the acouative of atate or condition), or even

a drcomttantial clause, to define more exactly the manner in which the
action is perfonned, e. g. Is. 20, 3 and he did so ejrri DP^ %t>alking naked
and hnrefoot, prop, in the condition of 0110 nf\kfv! tc. ; Is. 30. 14 r? breaking im
piei(s iâcc. to the reading H^nS ; tlic Masora rcqui:'- -.
nVl2) wilhoitt sparing.
2. A few infinitives of this kind, nil of which are in llijjh'Il, have, through k
frequent use, come to be treated by the language as simple adverbs ; so c>i.ccjally
nSin (comp. IZ-ff) multum faciendo, i.e. muUum, very frcquenily strengthened
hf SkD very and even need witbont ooonexion widi a 6nite verb (see die Lexicon)
alao 39*^ hemjkaenda, i,e. ieiUt naed apedalfy lo expicsi die caiefnl and tlioroiigb
perfbimance of an action (e.g. Dent. 13, 15); in Dent % at. 97, 8 it ia added
epexegetically to another adverbial infinitive absolute, in Jon. 4, 9 it twice precede*
the verb for the sake of emphasis. 1" inally, DStlTl tnane fadendo, i. e. early in the
mornings \X\Qin in general early with the additional idea of earnestness ; in I fc>an.
17, 16 joined with the infinitive absolute 2"^yi"il a dciiouiinative from evening
{mornitig and njening, i.e. early and iate)^ elsewhere (with the excepti<m of
FrOT. 37, 14) always joined with the hi6nitive afaaolnte of the comning verb,
11,7 fcr leanustfy preUUei OC^hj^p) titt^yîtrfathers . . . *iprn 33^
e. g* Jer.
rising Mrly and protesting, \. e. with eaneit protestation; Jer. ^. 5 (wbei

1 ahonhl be omitted twfoie 'n) ; Jer. 39, 19. â^ 33. a Chroo. 16, 15.
8. The iniinittve absolute occutb most frequentlf in immediate /

eonnexion with the finite verb of the same stem, in order in various
ways io define more aeeuraUly or io strengthen the idea of the verh^.
These infinitives absolute joined immediately to the finite verb belong in a scn^ JWf
to the schema etymologiaim treated in f 117. i. c. tbej are objects of the finite
verb in <inestioa, ewept that the iafiaitfve abaolnte (aa a namtw iriml rttow) lays m
stress rather on the actual oocurcncc or the energy of the action (see the examples
below), while the noun ]iropcr cm] hisizes the result or extent of the action;
comp. c. g. Ex. aa, 22 ''^N pyy> pySTDN //"it actually happens that he cries ie r/,
with Geo. 37, 34 (as it were, he cried^ so îiaXagreat cry was heard).
We must further distinguish
(a) The infinitive absolute used befort the verb to strengthen the n
verbal Idea, i. e. to emphasize in this way either the certain^ (especially
in the case of threats) or the Ibrcibleness and completeness of an
occurrence. In English, such an infinidve is mostly expressed by
< Compb A. Rieder, Die VerbittAmg des Inf. ahs, mU dem Verh.Jin, desselhen
Stummes im Heir., Leips., 187a ; also his Qim ed symteueim H^redeam, qmet
ahs, etm verbe fin* eimsdem ratUcis ceniungititr, planierem fadendeun ex lingua
Graeca et Latina afferantur, Gambinnea (Programm des Gymnasiums), 1884.
G. R. Hanschild, Die Verbindtm^ finiter und infiniter Verbalform en dessethen
Stammcs in einigen Bibehpratken, Frankfurt a. M., 189^, discus^ng especially
the rendering of such constructions in the Greek and Latin versions.
Digitized by C'
353 The Paris of Speech.
a corresponding adverb, but sometimes merely by pulling greater
Stress on the verb; e.g. Gen. 2, 17 ritoR TiSo thou shall surely duy
comp. 18, la 18. 33, 17. 28, 22. I Sam. 9,6 {cmelh surely to pass);
34, 31. Am. 5, 5. 7p 17. Hab. a, 3. Zeck 11, 17; with the infinitive
strengthened by ^ Gen. 44, 38 (but 37, 30 and Jacob wasyel scarce
gone Gen. 43, 3
ouif Ac.); ^
he did tokmniy proUti mnio
us; I Sam. 30, 6 t'^^ Jkand eamestfy asked leave jw);
Jos. 17, 13, Jud I, sS HbH^ ^
lîn^ and did nof nUerfy drive
them otti; especially typical instances are Am. 9 8 / wili destroy
itfrtm off the face of the earth ^ 'TO^ }h DDK saving
thai I will not ulkrly dislroy, &c.; Jer. 30, 11 and will in no wise
leave thee unpunished; comp. further Gen. 20, 18. 1 Ki. 3, 26. Joel i, 7.
Job 13, 5.
0 The infinitive absolute is used before the verb wiih less cmj^hasis
(1) Frequently at the beginning of the statement; cf. Driver on

I Sam. so, 6. However, in these cases a special emphasis on the
following verb is sometimes intended; cf. above, letter , on Gen. 43, 3.
I Sam. 30, 6 ; also Gen. 3, 16. 36, 38. 33, 17* i Sam. 14, 38. so, 3.
Elsewhere the infinitive absolute is evidently used only as possessing
a certain fullness of sound (hence for rhythmical reasons, like some
uses of the separate pronoun, 135. a), as in Gen. 15, 13. 43, 7. 20.
Jud. 9, 8. I Sam. 10, 16. 23, 10. 2 Sam. i, 6. 20, 18.
(2) Very frequciuly in conditional scnicuccs aUcr DK, &c. The

infinitive absolute in this case emphasizes the importance of the
condition on which some consequence depends, e.g. Ex. 15, 26 if
thou will diligently hearken, &c., Ex. 19, 5. 21, 5. 22, 3. 1 1 sq. 16. 22
(see above, letter m); 33, 33. Num. 31, 3. i Sam. i, 11. ia 35; after
^ I Sam, 14, 30.
/ The infinitive absolute is used to give emphasis to an antithesis,
e. Sam. 34, S4 m^;

g. 3 I will verily hegf ^) Hof thu^ 6c.
(not receive it as a gift); Jud. t^v^no; hniwe wiU hind thee fast .
hut snrdy we will not hill thee; comp. further Gen. 31, 30 (thou art
indeed gones) ihoi^h then wmldsl needs be gone (Vulg. esto), because
thou sore bmgedst, Ac; Ps. 118, 13. 18. 126, 6 (the second infinitive
absolute as a supplement 10 the first see below, letter r comes after
the verb). Hence also, as permissive, Gen. 2, 16 sq. ^'^'^ ^'-^ thou
mayesl freely eai^ but, &c. (so that verse 16 is in antithesis to verse 17);
or concessive, i Sam. 2, 30 / said indeed . . . I4i 43.
Digitized by Google
The Infinitive Absolute. 359
The infinitive absolute 10 used to strengthen a question, and ^
especially in impassioned or indignant questions* e.g. Gen. 37, 8
Xth^ i]^)nn ij^n thatt thm indeed reign mer ns/ Gen. 37, 10. 43, 7.
Jud. 11,25. iSam. 2, 27. aSam. 19, 43. Jer. 3, i. 13, is. Ezek. 38, 9.
Amos 3, 5. Zech. 7, 5; but comp. also Gen. 24, 5 mus I needs
bring again?
{b) The infinitive absolute after the verb, sometimes (as in letter ) r
to intensify^ the idea of the verb (especially after imperatives and
participles, since the infinitive absolute can never precede either,
e.g. Num. II, 15. Job 13, 17. si, a. 37, 2 t^c^ WpB^ hearken ye
{ttUniiveljy: Jer. sa, 10; after participles, e. g. Is. 22, 17, also elsewhere,
e.g. Num. 33, II. 94, 10 tiim hast aUegether Hessedihem: Jos. 84, 10.
s Ki. 5, II. Dan. 11, io and with the infinitive abeolnte strengthened
by means of &I Gen. 31, 15. 46, 4. Num. 16, 13); sometimes to
express the long cmHnmnee of an action; here again after an
imperative, Is. 6, 9 Sioe^ XSa^ hear ye eonHmtaUy; after a perfect,
Jer. 6, 29; after a participle, Jer. 23, 1 7; after an imperfect consecutive,

Gen. 19, 9. Num. 11, 32.
To this class bcluiig especially those cases in which a second s

infinitive absolute is co-ordinated with the first; the latter then
expresses either an accompanying or antithetical action or the aim
to which the principal action is directed ; e.g. i Sam. 6, la I3!)n
i^) hwing as they went (lowing continually; so after a participle,

Jos. 6,
smiting
13^ ^''OJ ^'* ^ 7 ^
and (i.e. bnt also) keaUf^ again; Joel
^ fi^*:
a,
'9 *a
26 (see above,
letter 01).
Rem. I. Instead of a secoad inBnitive abtolnte (see above) there is sometimes /

found a perfiBct oonsecatlve (Jos. 6, 13 a aod Sam. 13, 19^ in both places as
petftet 6eqiicntativoj Ii. 31, $ sefaring to the intnie, mlot with Stade, ZAW,
vL 189, we itad ^*)tn] and D^^l]), or an impeiftct co Mecu ti v e (t Sam. 19, 93.
2 Sam. 16, 13) or pniddple (a Sam. 5)2 oomp. also letter u,
9. The idea of long coniinuarue is âj frequently expressed hy the verb
to go^ along with its infinitive absolute, or even by the latter alone, and this occars
not only when it can be taken in its literal sense \to go, to 'waUt, as in the examples
given above, Jos. 6, 13. I Sam. 6, 13. a Sam. 13, 19; comp. also, Is. 3, 16,
where both infinitives stand btfort the verb, anil P& 1 26, 6, where precedes),
' In Arabic also, the intensifying infinitive regularly stands aJUr the verb, but
in Sjrinc Jig^dnr tlie verb.
* Alao in Eiek. i, 14 for the involved fom Kttn read iimplj MlS^ ^KX^.
Digitized by Google
360 The Parts of Speech. C "3-
bot also in cases where Tf^H in the sense of to go on, to continutf ttietvlf perfomis
the function of an .nherb. The action itself is adiled in a second infinitive
absoiatc, or sometimes see above, letter t) in n ;\Trtii. iplc or verbal adjective.

Examples, Gen. 8. 3 Tji^n . . . O^TSH ^2*^'^ anJ (he wafers rcttn-neJ . . .
continual!}' ; Gen. h, 5. la, 9. Jud. 14, i Ki. a, 11 ; with a participle following,

Jer. 41, 6 (ttnlcM we read nb^l, as in a Sam. 3, 16) ; with an adjecttfe foUowioy,
Geo. a6, 13. Jnd. 4, 94. i Sam. 14, 19^ a Sam. 5, 10 (i Chron* ii, 9).
3 Sam. 18, a5'.
On the other hand, in i Sam. 17, 41 the participle it used instend of the
infinitive absolute; of a diflercnt kind are the instances in which the participle
is nsed as predicate along with the co-ordinate adjective (Ex. 19, 19. i Sam. 2, 26.
a Sam. 3, i. 15, 13. Est. 9, 4. a Chron. 17, la) or participle (i Sam. xj, la.
Jon. 1, II. Frov. 4, 18).

V 3. The fi^lar place of the negative is between the intensifying infinitive absolate
and the finite verb*, eg. Ex. 5, as ^J^T^^ mitktr Aasi tkm
i^9trtd^ id Jnd. \%, 13. Jer. 13, xa. 30, xx ; coopw Mle. x 10 {^).
Exoeptioos axe Gen. 3, 4 (where the nqpitioo of the tiiicnt pffooonnoed in a, 17
is expressed in the same form of words) ; Amos 9, 8. Ps. 49, 8.
W 4- With a finite verb of one of the derived conjugations, not only the infinitive
absolute of the same conjugation may be connected (Gen. a8, 3a Pi'cl; 17, 13.
Ex. aa, 3. Ezek. 14, 3 Niph'al; Gen. 4<^ 15 Pn'al; Hos. 4, 18 Hiph'U; Ezek.
16, 4 Hoph'al), bat also (espedally with MiphH laieljwith Fi*eland HSphU;
tee Driver on a Sam. ao, x8) that of as tiie simplest and moet general
representative of the verbal idea, a Sam. ao, 18 (with Pi'el), Gen. 44, aS (with Pn'al;
bttt in Gen. 37, 33 Bjnb is a passive of Qal, 53. ; 46,4 (with Iliphll); Ex. 19, 13.
31, 20. 2 Sam. 23, 7. Is. 40, 30. Jer. 10, 5. Job 6, 2 (with Niph'al) ; Is. 24, 19 (with
HitJjpo'el ; in the .s.ame ven>e must, according to the M.isora, certainly be the
infinitive absolute (âl ; see 67. t?"), and so always HDV niD he shali surely bt fut
to death. Eiitewlierc the infiniiivc absolute of a conjugation with kindred meaning
is fonnd, Lev. 19, ao. a Ki. 3, 33 (iloph'al for Niph'al) ; i Sam. 3, 16 (Pi'el for
Hipbtl, unless is to be read) ; Eaek. 16, 4 (Ho|ih*al for Pa*al) Fiaally*
the infinitive ahaolnte may eqnaUy well he represented by n mttiMtwe of kiadnd
atem\ x Sam. x, 6. U. 94,x6. sa. 35, a O^^**}^!^) ; Jer. 46^ 5. Ewk. X5.
' Comp. in Fro^ Z* mai Un^fn avitsmt, it nudatUi tm tMgmn w m

angmmtmUttm emfirm^^ * ctntimuUty imnam witdbeeomes wm$ tmd vtom,*
* Comp. Rieder, Qm ke fcmmUmt m^gtHcmig 1^ 4f emitimtH^ i3|,
ptftitult <sMs ttttimttiQ t^gtaUittr mmnyfin., fiMsv tht/wtiuHi gnunH&ttti
vtgamf, verbo JSmiU tkuAm mdkit tdHto {ZdUekffi fir Qymm.'9Fam, 1679,
p. 395 qq)-
' In three passage* even the infinitive absolute of another stem kindred in sound
occnrs : but in Is. 2S, 28 tJ'iTK is no doubt a mere textual error for BH"^, and im *
Jer.
T
8, 13, actoiuiisg to 72. (ui, we should read DDDK, nnd in Zph. i, 2 CjDK.
* On Uteac wibblaiuives (and on the use of the inltnitive absolute gcucraiiy ai
abeolotn olject, see abov^ letter m\ cf. the ukmn i^mtiîemm tranlid ta
connrvtoa with the govenuwst of the verb itt | X17./.
Digitized by Google
"3-] The Infinitive Absolute, 361
a;, 35. Mic.4, ^, Hab. 3, 9. Job 37, la. In Is. 29, 14 the jiubslaiitive intensifying
the verb i* Ibimd olmg wiih the kfinitive abtolote.
5. Instead of the infiniliTe atMolate immedUtety coonected with the finite verb, X
an infinitiTe conitnict fom appean (cf. 73. Nam. 23, 95 p)) XA\ comp.
Rath a, 16 ^ D3) ; Jer. 50, 34 a*^); Prov. jj, i (fan ^3). In the Imit
instances the infinitive is probablj assimilated to the imperfect, like the infinitive
Niph'al in the forms noticc<l in 51. k and note. Cf. also 2 Ki. 3, 24 fit^
anto-nNi niani (read so with the LXX) before K, hence, no doubt due to the
dislike of a hiatns; so in Ps. 50, ar. Neb. 1,7 all in rapid style; after
the verb, Jos. 7, 7, unless "^^^^p intended.
4. Finally the infinitive absolute frequently appears as a substUuk y

/or the finite veri, either when it is sufficient to mention simply the
verbal idea (see letter s), or when the hurrying or otherwise excited
discourse intentionally contents itself with this infinitive, in order
to bring out the verbal idea in a clearer and more expressive manner
(see letter aa).
(a) The infiniiive absolule as the coniintiation of a preceding finite 3

verb. In the later Books especially it frequently happens that in
a succession of several acts only the first (but sometimes several)

of the verbs is inflected, while the second (or third, &c) is added
simply in the infinitive absolute. Thus after several perfects, Dan. 9,
(comp. verse 11) ufe have sinned . . . and have transgress^ thy taw^
and have turned aside (prop, a turning aside took place); so after
a perfect, Ex. 36, 7(?). 1 Sam. 2, 28. Is. 37, 19. Jer. 14, 5. 19, 13,
Hag. I, 6 (four inimiiivcs). Zech. 3, 4. 7, 5. Eccles. 8, 9. 9, 11.
Est. 3. 13. 9, 6. 12, 6 sqq. Neh. 9, 8. 13. i Chron. 5, 20. 2 Chron.

28, 19 '; after the perfect consecutive, Zech. 12, 10; after the perfect
frequentative, iKi.9,25 (unless "VÔ??! be intended); after the simple
imperfect. Lev. 25, 14. Num. 30, 3. Jer. 32, 44 (three infinitives).
36, 23. I Chron. ai, 24 ; after the imperfect consecutive, Gen. 41, 43
(as a continuation of 33rv|)); Ei. 8, 11. Jud. 7, 19. Jer. 37, ai. Neh.
6, 8. I Chron. 16, 36. a Chron. 7, 3; with 1M or after the jussive,
Deut 14, 21. Est. 2, 2. 6, 9 ; after the imperative, Is. 37, 30 5. Amos
4, 4 sq. ; after the participle, Hab. 2, 15 (strengthened by ^K, and
regarded, like ilie participle itself, as an adverbial accusative); Est. 8, 8.
{ft) At the beginning of the narrative, or at least of a new section aa
' In Erck. 7, 14 a perfect is continaed by means of nn infinitive constnict ; it
it, however, plain that the text is wholly cormpt; Comill reads îpTt
i3'7 ^?g.
Digitized by Google
J
of it. The special form of ihe finite verb which ihe infinitive absolute
represents must be determined from the context* The infinitive
absolute is most frequently used in this way, corresponding to the

infinitive of command in Greek, 4kc.':
llf (a) For an emphatic imperative, e.g* (thou afaalt, ye shall)
obmvt Deut 5, la ; (thou shalt) remember Ex. 13, 3. so, 8 (the

full form of expression occurs in Deut 6, 17 p^^^f^
"lioe^; 7, 18
Tip ; Lev. 2, 6. Num. 4, a. ag, 17. Deut i, 16. 2 Ki 5. 10.
Is. 38, 5. jcr. 2, 2, followed by a perfect consecutive; Jos. i, 13.*
2 Ki. 3, id. Is. 7, 4. 14, 31 (parallel wilh an imperative ; in Nab. 2, 2
three imperatives follow). But t3^?n Ps. 142, 5 may be only an

incorrect spelling of D^D imperative
C (0) For the jussive, Lev. 6, 7. Num. 6, 5. a Ki. 1 1, 15. Exek. 83, 46
comp. also Prov. 17, is {fd it rather hmt/).
dd (y) For the cohortative, i Ki. as, 30 (a Chron. 18, 30), I will
disguise my self and go ^ infy ihe haUU; Is. 2 a, 13^ '^^^ (the
exclamation of the moclcer); EscIl 21, 31. 23, 30. 46; perhaps also
Jcr. 31, 2 fl^^J). J08. 9, 20, co-ordinated by means of J
with
a cohortauve'.
(8) For the imperfect in emphatic promises, e. g. 2 Ki. 4, 43 ye shall
eat and leave thereof; 19, 39 (Is. 37, 30). 2 Chron. 31, 10; also in
indignant questions, Job 40, 2 shall he thai cavilleih contend with the
Almighiy*? (on the addition of the subject comp. the Rem. below);
Jer. 3, X and ihinhesi thou io reium again io mef Jer. 7, 9 sqq. (six
infinitives, continued by means of the perfect consecutive; comp.
{ IIS. 0).
ff (() For any historical tense (like the Latin historic infinitive) in lively
narration (or enumeration) and description, even of what is still taking
1 Comp. who such infinttiTes in Frcneh is Ptir (page m and to, ftc),
ftuiresser . .
. , *r itUfitr des voUurs I
' InElzck. 31, 31, for the infinitives construct "\^Dn, D^H, (beside n33n)
read with ComiU the infinitives nbsolute *^pn, Aec. The KnhtUi protwblj intendi
' Tn 1 Sam. 3, iS the infinitive construct appeMsInilMd of the cohoftadve, bnl

J^B^'lK should certainly be read for JTCnn.
* In Job 34, 18 in a similar question instead of the infinitive con^tr. we should
rather exjicct tlie infinitive absolute C^bl^}T)i unless with the LXX and Vulg. the
parucipk "^CîH is to be read.
Digitized by Google
I "4.] The Infinitive ConstrucL 363
place in present time, e.g. Hos. 4, 2 swearing and breaking /aith^

and ktUmgt f/eaiitf^, and committit^ adultery (in these th^ are
busied); 10, 4 (after a perfect); Is. si^ 5. 59, 4. Jer. 8, 15. 14, 19.
Job 15, 35 ; comp. further Jer 33, 33. Eccles. 4, a.In Esek. 93, 30.
Pxov. 12, 7. 15, 33 and 35, 4, the infinitive absolute is best rendered
by the passive.
Rem. The subject is sometimes

the place of die finite verb, e.g. Lev. 6,
added to the infmitive absolute
7. Dent 151 a. Fkor. 17, 12.

when
Job
it takes
40, a.
^
Eodcs. 4, 9. rt. 9 i (to, probftbly, abo
Gen. I7 10. Ex. la, 4^ atthongli
in
beie ^^1^3 aoootding to f lai, might alio be taken aa an dyitt with a pamve
verb; comp. Eat. 3, 13); the lobject follows an adverbial infinitive abwilnte in
Num. 15, 35 (see above, letter h) and Ps. 17, 5; and in i Snm. 25, 26. 33
it follows on infinitive absolute which is co-ordinated with an iofioitive constnct>
see above, letter t*
{ U4. The Infinitive CmutrucL

L The infinitive constract like the infinitive absolute, may also a
represent a n&mm verbale ( 45. a), but of a much more flexible
character than the infinitive absolute (comp. 113. a). Its close
relation with nouns properly so called is especially seen in ihc readi-
ness with which the infinitive constnict may be used for any case
whatever; thus,
As the nominative of the subject, e.g. Gen. 2, 18 ri^*n alD'î'
S\)
- '^f?* literally, not good is the being of man in his separatim:
Gen. 30, 15. I Sam. 331 so. Is. 7. 13. Prov. 17, 36. 35, 7. 34
(but oomp. statement); Ps. 33, 9,
prop, there it not a coming near unto thu^ but the text is probably
corrupt With a femmine predicate, t Sam. 18, 23. Jer. 2, 17.
{b) As genitive, e.g. Eccles. 3, 4 "rtp"* rij?] l*iBD a time of h

mourning and a time of dancing ; Gen. 2, 17. 29, 7. Neh. 12, 46.
2 Chron. 24, 14. This equally includes, according to loi. a, all
those cases in which the infinitive construct depends on a preposition

(see below, letter d\^
{() As accusative of the object, e.g. i Ki. 3^ 7 liM3f ft6 c

I knm not the gon^ out or the comity m (/ hnow not how to go out
and eome m); Gen. st, fi. 31, s8. Num. so^ si. Is. i, 14. 37, 88
(even with Jer. 6, 15. Job 15, 22 (comp. for the use of the
infinitive absolute as object, iiZ'f)$ as accusative with a verb
expressing fullness, Is. 11, 9.
2 The construction of tiie infinitive with prepositions (as in Greeic, d
Digitized by Google
3^ The Paris of Speech^ [ im-
rai fivai, 8ta to fiiâi, &c.) iTiay usually be resolved in English into
the finite verb with a conjunction, e. g. Num. 35, 19 ^3"iyiD3 in his
meeling him, i.e. if (as soOD as) he meets him; Gen. 27,
Is. 30, 13 03D^ beeaust ye despise; Jer. a, 35 ^11^^]? because

ihau sqyesi/ Gen. 37, i and Ms eyes were dim /rm seeiiigt
t. e. so that he could not see.

This use of the infinitive construct is c^cially frequent in
connexion with 3 or 3 to express time-deteraiinations (in English

resolved inlo a temporal clause, as above the combination of the
infiniiive with tJ?! or 'b^ is resolved inlo a causal clause), especially
after ^njl (see the examples, 1 1 1. e. g. i Sam. 2, 27 D^^^ DTn^nS
whm they were in Egypt; Gen. 34, 30 '31 ^VK^^ . . . DWn-riK nirp NTJI
and it came to pass, ivhen he saw (prop, in the seeing) Âe ring . and
when he heard (prop, in his hearing), ftc.
/ But by far the most frequent is the connexion of the infinitive

construct with *f\
Starting from the fundamental meaning of ^,
i.e. direcHm Ufwards smnethmg^ infinitives with ^ serve to express

the most varied ideas of purpose or aim, and very commonly also
(with a weakening or a complete disregard of the original meaning

of the to introduce the object of an action, or finally even (like
the infinitive absolute used adverbially, 113.^, and the Latin gerund
in -ndo) to state motives or attendant circumstances. See the instances

in tlie Remarlcs.
g Rem. I. The origiiial meaning of the ^ is most pbinly teen in those infiiiitlm
with ^ whidi cx]weid j etate a pnrpoie (henoe s the eqahralent of a final die)i
e.g. Gen. xi, 5 muL the Letd eame down, nîTTIf niT)^ to sa ^ eity; abo
with a change of subject, e. g. a Sam. it, 10 ami thm hast taken the wê of Uriah
the Hittite TV^h "^b nVH^ io he (i.e. that ihemay be) thy wife; comp. Gen. 28, 4.
Jer. 38, 26 (ritt)^). If there is a s])ecial emphasis on the infinitive with ^, it is
placed, with its comiilcmrnt , before the governing verb, e.g. Gen. 42, 9. 47. 4.
Num. 22, 30. Jos. 2, 3. I Sam. 16, 2 (cf. Driver on the passage) with Ki3; Jod.
15, 10. I Sam. 17, 35 with HTy.
t Comp. I 45. ff,

according to which the close union of the ^ vrith the fint
cor'^'^>nnnt of the infinitive (3/13^ with a firmly closed syllable, as oppcsed to
3h33 37133, Slc.) seems to point to the formation uf a special new verbal form.
Quite distinct arc the few examples where the infinitive with p serves to express
time, as Gen. 34, 63 S^V riijsb ai thi eventide (prop, at the time of the rttiun
of evening) ;
comp. Dcut. 33, 13 ; Ex. 14* 37. Jud. 19, 36; 3 Sam. 18, 39 xvken
Joab sent the king's servant.
Digitized by Google
114.] The Infinitive Consiruci. 365
Jut ms dearly tlw idoi of tininf at ft definite pmpon or taming tomudt an
J. k
object BEj be sea in the oomhinarigo of the verb ftf\ if it, wltli ^ and
tn infinitiw. In ftet Jlftf^ rpn may mean, dtber (a) ki tm im tk act tf, k* woi
aitmi (as it were^ be set himseir, 4^ jtns ready, to do something, or (4^ or
it was appointtd Of ttmftUcd, &c., to do the actioa in qoeatioo. In the latter case
nife^ iTil corresponds to the Latin faciendum eratt conip. also the English
/ am to give. In both cam fTH (as elsewliere when copula) is oiten

omitted.
Examples of (d\ Gen. 15, la tJ'P^ ^"^^ (he nun ivas iôing i
dovm (jnst ahont to setl : 2 Chron. 26, 5 D\"1^K i^T^ Î'^l rtwY /:<r j*-/ htmsrlf (o
seek God (here with the secondar)- idea of a continuous action' ; with the omis&ion
of jrn Ts. 58, 20, Ojr^n|) nliT the Lard is ready to save me : i Snm. I4, a I (T).
Jer. 51, 49. Ps. 25, 14 (et foedus suum manifestaturus est eis ; I'rov. iR, 34(0'
CQHseiitturus est) \ 20, 35. Ecclcs. 3, 15 fl^^H^ *^?*^ <]uodfuturum est
a Chron. 11, 2a. 11, 13 (in a negative statement); in a qaestion, Est. 7, 8 (wi7/
ht mm .../). Comp. also i Sam. 4, 19.
Of Jos. a, 5 itoD^ 1^ m audOMgaa wvt^ke tJkmt (had tobe shnt) : k
Is. 37 a5. Ps. ro9, 13 ^ Moitly with the omisiion of rrn, e.g. a Ki. ^ 13
01 lib ntvb no u/W ^ ^ dimr Ar tkut {fhr^'^h \!^r\) wotdiesi tkm h
(lit. b it to be) >^ ki^f, &cf a KL 13, 19 nfsnp U was smiit
eqatvalent to Mm skmldest haw smtttm} Is. 5 4. 10, 33. 3a, 9. 19 ^ (t).
Job 30, 6 {kaditambtm a Ot). Oivon. 9* '5. sa> 5* a Chron. 8, 13 (f). 3<^ 19
i (I)*
Hos. 9, 13. Hah. I, 17. In a question 2 Chron. 19, a.

Of the same kind aico are the cases, in which the infinitive with ^ depends on ^
the idea of an obligation or penni>sion (or prohil)iti<m|; especially in such forms
of expression as a Sam. 18, 11 ^ DD^ it was uôn me^ i. e. it would have

been my duty to give thee, &c.'; comp. Mic. 3, i (a Chron. 13, 5) is it not for
you to '1 e r^re v not bound to) * ^ with a nepntive, 2 Chron. 26, 18 '3^
it perlainctk not uu!o fhee, Uziiah, to imrn iutcrtse unto (he Lord, hut only to the
priests; also S an infinitive ex]>iesscs // is not permitted (ntfas est),
may not, e.g. Est. 4, 3 ^3 for none might enter ; 8, 8. i Chron. 15, a *;
|> with an infinitive ia used in a somewhat different sense, equivalent toitittui
' .Somewhat different are the cases where f> iTHT with the infinitive fwhich is
: T
then used exactly as a substantive) implies (o beiome something, i. c. to meet with

a particular fate, as Num. 34, 22 ^comp. Is. 5, 5. 6, 13) "^JJ^^J for -casting, for
which elsewhere frequently 'TOC'J) and the like; probably ako ni^^j) Ps. 49, ig
is to be explained in this way, the H^n being omitted.
* a Sam. 4, 10 {cuiiamdum erat mihi) appeaii to be similar; it may, however,
be better, with WeUhansen, to omit the *>&^K
' But in I Sam. 23, 30 after ^1 and mtr fairt shall he the infinitive withont |l
stands ae the antyect of the sentence.

* (2aite diifeient of coune are such cases as Is. 37, 3 TT^ }^ fjs\ and there
is mt arenglh to Mt^/srth; comp. Nam. so, 3. Rath 4, 4,
Digitized by Google
366 The Paris of Speech. [$114-
ftasihle, not possible, e. g. in Ps.40, 6. Eccles. 3, 14. a Chron. 5, 1 1 ' W ith either
meaning VO can be used instead of pK, e. g. Amos 6, 10 1^3|n ne/as est,
to make mention of the name of the Lord : but Jud, i, 19 far it was not possible U
drive out, &c , perhnps, however, the text originally stood as in Jos. 17, 12
'7^ î^p^ ^\ i Chron. 15, 3.
tH 3. A further class comprises the very numerous cases, in which the infinitive
wiA |l it vsed M the object* of a governing forb (hence, again, tht dirtdim whidi
an action takes). The verbs (or conjugations) wbidi occnr moit fireqnently fai this
oombiDatioii with ^ and tihe mfinitive are ; ^FVJ (with an Infinitive withont
e.g. Dent a, 35. 31* Jot. 3, 7) ^Mil i Hgin, fjflfin, (piop. add)
to ifntinm, vciy frequently, even In prose, with an Infinitive withont |l, as Geo. 4, 11.
8, iOl la. 57, 5. 1 Sam. 3, 8. Job 97, i, feci Vin to ceato Jrom, io daut;
to iomêUt to fiudit an end ofs tSff^ to bo fadsktd; 3^pri to come nettr to.
Gen. 13, II ; intd
-
to hasten (with an infinitive withont S Ex.
i
3, iS) ; rOH
T T
to be
I
willing (with an infinitive without p Is. a8, 12. 30, 9. Job 39, 9) ; yDH to vnllf.
to desire; jXO to re/use (Jo be unn'ilUng); t^[33 to seek ; to he able 'with an
infinitive withont e.g. Gen. 24, 50. 37, 4. Ex. 18, J3. Job 4, 2); |ri3 with an
accus.iiive of the person in the sense of to give up some nf/e. fo cause, to permit
something to be done, e.g. Gen. 20, 6. Ts. 16, 11 ^with an lulmuive without |l
Job 9, 18), yT to understand how to do something (.in Job 3, 8 ^^l^^^^'^

U analogous) ; to ham; 79^ to expect (widi a change of snbject, e.g. Is. 5, a
/ he looked Htat U ehmUd biingforth grapes),

n We must fiirther mention here a nomber of verbs in Hiphtl (partly deaominativea),
which expieis in acticn in some definite direction (comp. { 53./), as ^'^^n
to do groatfy, Safari to make (it) hw, jq^n io make (it) Aigi, {>19jn U make
(it) deep, p''n")n to make (It) fir, distant^ 3*D^n to make (it) good (wiih an
infinitive without |> Ps. 33, 3, but i Sam. 16, 17, in the same combination, with i){
O'ipl^n anything (Ps. laj, 2, nlongwith its opposite intt /i* 4r something
iate, with an infinitive without ^) ; HSin mai& (it) MÔn SMi (it)
wonderful (even with a i\as.sive infinitive 2 Clirtui 26, t c^ ', &c.
* In 2 Sam. 14, lu (-^t>'> iV />, there is) is used in a similar sense a;kr
Uie negative particle of asseveration, of a truth it is not possible to turn to the
rigkt kand or to the /gf9.
* This view is based npon the ftct, Uiat in nvmeroos cxpiessloos of diis kbd
(lee the ocampleB above) tiie h may be wnitted, and tiie infinitive consequently
stand as an actual accusative of the object (see abov^ letters). However, the
connexion of the verb with the object is in the latter case closer and more emphatic
(hence especially adapted to poetic or prophetic diction), than the looser addition
of the infinitive wi th thus jnr:B^ \^ vkh Is. a8, I a is equivalent to they desired
tiot ohying; but Ezek. 20, 8 rather expresses they could not maJke
up their minJ as to hearkening. When connected with {), the governing verb has
a more independent sense thsa when it directly governs the accnsative of
tiie object
* In almost all these examples ihz prindpal idea Is properly contained in the
infinitive, whilst the governing verb strictly speakhig contains only a snbovdlnate
Digitized by Google
114] The Infinitive Const met, 367
4. Finally, flie infin^ve mth ^ U very freqaeaUy vied in a mndi loowr if
eooneilott to lUte motivct, accompanying cbtimutanoes, or ofherwiae to define

more enactly. In Englisb, sndi infinitive coaatnictions must freqaently be turned
by that or a gemnd; e^g. i Sam. 12, 17 f}^ DJ^ î(f^ ii* adkingyou a king;
14, 33. Gen. 3, 22 :^4, 7 i ; Ex. 23, 2. Lev. 5, 4. 32. 26. S, 15. Num. 14, 36.
1 Sam. 19, 5. ao, 36. i Ki. 2, 3 sq. 14, H. Ps. 63, 3. 78, iS. loi, 8. 103, aa
104, 14 sq. Ill, 6. Prov. 3, 8. B, 34. 18, 5. Neb. 13, 18. Sometimes the infinitive
with ^ Is used in this way simply by itself, e. g. f Chron. 13,8 Mtht roes upm tht
momtiams nnpb (as regards hasting) sv^httss; Gen. s, 3. a Sam. 14, 25
(^în!)); Is. a I, I (î^r^)j Joel a, a6. Fkov. a, a. a6, a and so very freqncotly
tiie infinitive dUendo which has become stereotyped as an adverb to introduoe
direct nanation ^ the sense oiiAut, r,/MI^Mr).
5. In a number of instances especially in the later Books ^the infin. constr. P
with b nppcnrs to be attached by If 'uzv (like the infinitive absolute. 113. z), as the
continuation of a previous finite verb. In most examples of this kind il is,
however, evident, that the infinitive with virtually depcudi on au idea of intention,
effort, or being in the act of, which, according to the sense, is contained in what
has preceded, whilst the eopula, as sometisies also elsewhere, is nsed in an
emphatic sense {ftmdtkM ; thus e.g. Ex. 3a, 39 (if the text be right) JiU ymr
hand to-day (sc. with an offering) for tht Lord and that to bring^ a UtSting . . .
upon you, i.e. that ye may be blessed ;

comp. i Sam. 35. 31 (otherwise in verses
a6 and 33 where the infinitive absolute is used, see 113./); Ps. 104, ai
Job .^4. 8. Eccle*. 9, I. Nfh. 8, 13. 2 Chron. 7, 17. In Lev. 10, 10 sq. b^'ia.ll)^
might be regarded as an explanatory addition to the command contained

in veise 9 b (i^this prohlldtlon of wine before the serviee shall ye observe, and
that in order to put a diffeience, ftc) : bnt probably the text baa been distotbed
by a redactor.In a Chron. 30, 9 depends on the idM of receiving a favour
which lies in D^9nri|>. On the other hand, in 1 Sam. 8, i a it is sufficient to
explain tutd in order to appoint thitn unto him for captains of thousands (sc. he will
take them^. In Is. 44, aS translate and h* (Cyrus) shall ptrform aiimypkasurit
nrn saying ofJerusalem, Sec.
adverbial statement, and is therefore best rendered in English by an adverb;

e.g. Gc-n. 27, ao how is it thai thou hast found it so quickly? (.prop, how thou
liasthastened to find Q* Gen. 31, 37 wherefon didst thw/* secretfyt So frequently
with Win{^îm, akmdatrtfy), Ex. 36, 5. i Sam. i, la. a Ki. at, 6. la. 55, 7.
Am.
Hoc
4, 4.
II, 9.
Pk. 78, 38,
Ena 14;
ftc; with
cf. also a
MSam.
{^^guin), Dent.
19, 4. Jer. i, la.
30^ 9. i Ki. 23, 17.
Jon. 4, a and the
91
analogous instances in laow^; also a Ki. a, 10 hast asM a herJ thing.
* When Delitzsch on Ps. 104, ai, referring to Hab. 1, 17, explains the infinitive
with b *s an elliptical mode of expressing the coniugatio periphrastica (equivalent
to fla^taturi sunt a dco cibum suum), this is, in point of fact, certainly true
in this ami a few other j)laces nuntioned above; but all these pa>->.i^'es, in which
the infinitive with |rt follows, are to f)c distinjîished from the cases tieated above
under letter A, where the infinitive u iih b zvithout Wdxc corresponds to a Latin
gerundive, or is actually used to express the coniuâito periphrastica.
Digitized by Google
368 The Paris of Speech, ["4.
8. The period of time to wliich an action or occurrence represented

by the infinitive construct belongs, must sometimes be inferred from
the context, or the chaiacier of the suborJinate tenses; comp. e.g.
Gen. 2, 4 these are the generations of the haven and of Ihe earth,
DKiana when Ihey were created (prop, in tlieir being created); Jud. 6, i8
'31 until I come unto thee, and bring forth, &c. Cf. I Sam. l8, 19
(:= vjihtn ski should have Um gtwn); 9 Ki. a, i. Uos. 7, i
Rem. I. The coostnictiant of the infinitiTe with a picpoiitioa, described above
in letter J, nre nlmo-st always continned in the further coarse of the narrative by
means of the finite verb, i.e. hy an indcpciicknt sentence, not I'V a co-oniinate
Such a finite verb we reganl a guvemeil by a conjonction, which
intiniiive.
eomqMMdt to the prepodtioii itndiiig before the infiiiltiTe. Thus the infinltitrel
conttrnction (freqaeotly even with a change of nbject) is ooothmed bjr a perfect

(with t6), Jer.9, 12 Uemmse they have Jintm (Da|f^) my Ism,,. XfOf
and hoot net p6^t*d my vrie$i Gen. 39, 10. 1 Sam. tJ. Amot i, 9; witiMVfc
Job a8, as ; by a perfect with ^ (comp. $ 1 3. t and tr) Amos i, 1 1 IDJ)"^ 1
Seceuse ke did pursue his brother with the mord, X\Tf&\ and did Mr/ ^contiBna^
all fity 'a frequentative perfect ; for examp'''- of the ]x*rfect consecutive proper
see Gen. 37, 45. Jud. 6, 18. 1 Sam. 10, 8. a Ki. 18, 7,3 [Is. 36, 17 ,
always after
'K!3"*iy until I com4\\ by a simple iinjK-rfect, e.p. Prov. i, 27 (after 2j ; Is. 30, a6
Caftci DVH in the day, a temporal phrase which has here become equivalent
to a preposition) ; Is. 5, 24 (after 3). 10, a. 13, 9. 14, 35. 45, i. 49, 5. i Sam. t, 8.
Prov. 3, 8. 5, a. 8, ai (always after !>)^ by an imperfect oonsecatife, e.g. Gen.
39^ 18 emd U eetmt te fast, K^^f)> Y^P ^Pîjp ^ liified up my veUe aud cried,
thai . . . ; t KL 10^ 9. Job 38, 13 (after p); i Ki. i8 18. Is. 38, 9. Job 38, 7.
9 iqq. (after9) li. 30, la. Jcr. 7, 13. &eic. 34, 8 (after
The oegatioB of an inibitive oooctntct, on aoooont the piedomhumoe of the
nona-demcnt in its chancer, ia effected not by the verbal negative ^ (except
in the oompoand , which has come to be used as a preposition, rvitkeut.
Nam. 35, 33. ProT. 19, a), but by ^l^lSs* originally a sabstantive (see the Lc i 'n \
with h prefixed (comp,, however, Nam. 14, i6 *rii)3p), e.g. Gen. 3, 11 ^riiî?
Ut3t3i~^3K not to eat of it; in a final ?ense, 4, 15 lest any fnding him should
smite him: only in 2 Ki. 23, 10 U rc-jK-aled before the inf ni'ivc. In I's. 3:, 9
(if the text be fight) ^ Dâtives, not the iAfimtive* but the predicate which
is understood.
*
The great frequency of examples of this kind, especially in the poetical Booles,
is a stririnfj after what is called chiasmus in the arrangement of the pnrmllcl
due to
members in the two halves of the verse, i. e. in the instances given, the timte verb
at the end of tlie second (co-ordinate) clause is parallel with the inhnitive at the
heptmkng of the fint In thia way the verbal Ibrm neoemaiily became leparated
from the 1, and conqttentIy the imperfect had to be need imtead of the perfect
coasccntive. Sach a paralleliim of tiie etctemal and internal members of n wme
is frequent also in other <a^, and wat evidently feU to be an elegancy of
elevated poetic or propiieticstyle.
Digitized by Google
ii5.j Construction of the Infinitive Construct, 369
116. Construction of the hifinitive Construct with Subject and Object,
"L like the infinitive absolute (see 11 3. a), the character of the
infinitive construct as a verbai noon is shown its power of talting
the case proper to its verb, and hence in transitive verbs ^ ike arsr-
satm of ihe oût^ e.g. Kum. 9, 15 jafpHpnTM O^n Dl'â on the day
the lahemaek was reared up; i Sam. 19, i "iiyriK n^pn|) that they
sAdmld thy Dmid ; Gen. 14, 17. 19, 29. Ex. 38, 27. i Ki. is, 15.
15, 4; with a negative, e.g. Lev. 26, 15 ^riiW^bsTl^ nft^ ""^^^f^
that ye will not do all my commandments ; with the accu.salive of the
personal pronoun, e. g. Dcui. 29, 12 ^nj<-D^;?n fyojj ihat he may

establish thee; Gen. 25, 26. Jer. 24, 7; with a verbal suffix, e.g.
Ex. 2, 14 *33"jni5 to kiU me; ]eT. 38, 26 '33*?^n ^nbab />4a/ he would
not caute me h return (on the suffix, cf. letter c). In Is. 49, 6 the
object even precedes the infinitive with j>; on this order cf. the note
on { 114. r. If the verb governs a double accusative, the infinitive
may also take the same, e.g. Gen. 41, 39 Ûf 0*r6M VSJf
m^Tâm^ forasmueh as God hoik ekmed thee all thts/ Dent ar, 16.
Rem. I. The object after the Infinitire construct must also always be r^;arded d
aa in die accnaative even when it ia not expressly btrodooed (aa b all the ahom
cxampica), hf tiie luta mutumiim *ftM, and whoi titeMfoie the mbatantive b
question might easily be taken as the genitive cf the eêtl governed by the
infinitive (the utual oonstniction b
Anbic)| e.g. Prov. 3i, 15 DBB^ rS'V^ to do
judgement. Against regarding it as a genitive, which is in itself possible, {the doin^,
tke fxecuiitii,; 0/ jtuigement,^ is the fact ',a\ th.it elsewhere the nota arrusativi is so
frequently acided ; {i) that io such a ca>c the secoiKiary forms of the ialinitive,
ndk as niri for (^^3B) DtT] Gen. 48, 1 1 (comp. Ps. loi, 3. Prav. 16, 16), would
be nnbtelligible; {e) eeftab infinitive forms, if they were to be n^rded aa
m the eoottnict abte, eonld hardly letab the ptetonlc Qum^ withont esoeptiont
whereas, when connected with seffixes 1,1. e. with real genitives; c-mp M.c\
this Qames necessarily become^; vocal ^wd ; c. g Gen. r8, 35 P*"^2f ri'Dl? fo slny
the righteous (never as D^DH*?; comp., on the other hand, above, *^^''K*n)
2 Ki. 21, 8. Kzek. 44, 30. SimiLnrly in such cnscs as Is. 3, 13 (Ps. 50, 4) instead
ui D^Z3]^ plb we should rather expect pi^, if the infinitive were rârded as in
the oonatract state, and Q^Gy as the genitive. Hence also b cases like la, 58,
for xi^) we mnst asinme, with Seltin, op. cit., p. 78, a merely 'external
phooetie Goonexion* and not the genitive coostniction.
a. The verbal snflixea added to the infinitive aie (with the exception ITMÎn^ e
Jer. 39, 14) only the sollix of the ist pers. ring, (beddea the above examples comp.
also 1 Sam. 5, 10. 37, 1. 38, 9. Ruth a, 10. 1 Chron. 13, 17, &c.) and plural;
to destroy us, Deut. i, 37 (immediately after WlK iV)^, so that
* For examplea of the accuk of the ot>^ with a paM. infin., see f iai*
Bb
Digitized by Googic
The Parts of Speech, [ii5'
is donbtlest a vrkd not a MMm-mOz, altbongh in foim U might be
either) n^pnj) Num. i6, 13. Jud. 13, 33 (after Elsewheie the prooomiiial
; J*^*)*
object is appended either by means of the acewatiTe sign (e.. Gen. 25* a6
0^ iriâ prop, in tht btaring tkem; rik ttf^ Aiwv Jer. 24. 7) or in
the form of a nonn-mffiz (as genltiye of the object). The latter occurs almost
always, whenever 'he c ontext excludes the possibility of a misunderstatidinp
e.g. I Sam. 20, 33 inrn^ (prop, for his smiting") to smite /it'rn, not, as the fonn
might also mean, in enter that he mij^ht smite; comp 1 Ki. 30, 35; with the
suffix of the 3rd sing. fern. Num. 23, 35; of the 3rd plur. Jos. 10, 20. 1 Sam.
31,2, &c. Hence alô the suffixes of the and sing, with the infinitive, as '|n*jn|'
Jer. 40, 14, comp. Mic. 6, 13, and even ^b*^! to magntjy tku, Jos. 3, 7, mnst
certainly be regarded as nominal not verbal suffixes. The connexion îX the noun*
suffix, as genitive of the object, with the infinitive was so felly established, that
It contd be used not only in such strange cases, as Gen. 37, 4 ^hd^ ^
th*y totiU mi speak to kirn ptaeeadfy, comp. Zfch. 3, l Ube an advenary
IÔlB^
io him, but nllimately even in the ist ^g., as hi Num. as,* 13 ^nn{> to give me
Uave, [Deut. 15, 7 'ys* tOI^ 16 *e witt not perform tke dnty ef a huhand's
krotker mUo met S Cbion. 4, 10 âX^ ^ not grieve wu !]
^ 3. The power of govembig Mice a verb is also retained in those verbal nouns
which, although originally secondar}' forms of the infinitive, have fully acquired
the value of nouns, e.g. Is. 11, 9 nin^Tli^ HV^ (p'op- to know the Lord) the
kno'u'ledgi of the Lord ; *rik nK"!*^ to fear me, Deut. 4, 10. 5, 26. 10, la;
an accusative follows njnsS Deut. 10, V2, is. Is. '6, 6 Tcomp. also Hos. 3, 1);
nD3n7 Is. 30, 28; \inK niiT nWb2 Deut. 1, 27: after verbal nouns formed by
prefixing Q
(comp. 45. e), Num. 10, 2. Is. 13, 19. Amos 4, ii. Ezek. 17, 9.
The accusative of the object likewise remahis after infinitives (or their secondary
Ibnns) which have the article* e.g. Gen. s, 9. Jer. as, 26, or a tnffiz, e.g.
Gen. 5, 4 &&, tS, 4. 6. 99, 19 sq. 30, 15. 38, 5. a Sam. 3, 11. Is. 19, 13.
$ 2. The subject of the action represented by the infinitive is mostly

placed immediately' after it, either in the gmittve or nominative.
The subject is in the 1:01:11 tve ( 33. c) whenever it has the form of a
noun-suffix, and when the infmitive has the termination of the consir.
St. fem. sing, (see letter/); probably also in many other cases, where
the infinitive in fonn and meaning is used more like a substantive,
and acccH^ngly governs like a noon. On the other hand, the subject
of the infinitive is certainly to be regarded as a nominative, when
it is separated from the infinitive by any insertion, and according
* - -
' In Gen. 34, 30 the subject of nK~|2) is wanting (bat follows) ; the
original reading was nndonliledly iJttt^p, and the text is now in a state of confusion
vetse 30 a should come bef(e verse 29 h. In Gen. 95, a$. Ex. 9, 16. i Sam.
18, 19. Ps. 4s, 4 the sttlyect, although not indicated, is easily supplied firom the
oontext The InfiaitiTe ia sudi cases is beat lendeied in English by a passive.
Digitized by Google
1150 Construction of the Infinitive Const r lid, 371
10 certam indicatioiiB (see letter g) very probably also in many other

instances.
Rem. 1. Examples of genuives of the subject after inBmtives in the connective f

ûm, axe Dent. i. 37 \}riM n^rP nW\ff2 prop. i$$ iAt^rJ*s kating us; comp. 7, 8.
Qm, 19, z6. I XL 10, 9. Is. 13, 19. '47, 9. Hos. 3, t. Am. 4, it. The tobject
of tlie mfimtive i probably *1eo to be imudcd at genitive in mdi caset as
Ex. 17, I and tktn was m waUr nhf^/br tk*ptt^ / drink (prop, for the
drinking of the people), and m cases like Gen. 16, 16 TCfî Gen. 16^ 3.
Ex. 19, 1. Xum. 20, 3. 4. 33, 38. I Ki, 6, I. Ps. 133, 1. 3 Chron. 7, 3, &c.
2. Examples in which the subject is sepamted from the infinitive by nn insertion
and hence mnst certainly be regarded as a nominative, are Job 34, 22 D'J' "^.TiCm^
\^y3 Ma/ (hf -u'orirrs of iniquity may hide them iehfs there (prop, for the hiding
ihemb^lves there the workers of iniquity") ;c Gen, 34, 15. Num. 35, 6. Deut. 19, 3.
Jud. 9, 3. a Sam. 34,
13. Ps. 76, 10, and below, letter 1. The subject is likewise
to be tepoded as a nmimaHot, whenever the Zamtdk in pi6xed to tiie in^nttiTe
by means of a pfetonic Qamef (comp. letter^ above), e^s. a Sam. 19, so l^^ri tffe^
iajr^y sinoe, if the in6nitive were used aa a nmin r^gnUt we should raOwr
tfk^ aooocding lo { los./. That the subject of the infinitive, b r^^cd
dsewbeie also as nominative, is aûte (see above, letter probable, since in snch
forms as H^jn Deut. 25, 19. Is. 14, 3, TOn Ps. 46, 3, Stc ti c pretomc Qame$
is retained without exception, whereas on the analogy of ^n^DH Ezek. 24, 13,
SO^pn Jer. 33. 20, &c., we should expect n^Jn^ "^^T' '^*^ infinitive were
regarded as a nomen rcgtns. Or was the retention of the Qames (a&suming the
thorough correctness of the Masoretic punctuation) rendered possible even before
a Ibllowing genitive^ liecavsa tiiat vowd was diaiacterblie of the fom t It b at
all events certun that owiog to Uie hu& of csae-cBdrngsS a distincticii between
the genitival and nominatival constructions could not have been consciously made
in the case of most infinitives, e. g. in nnchaqgeable fbims like
8 When both a mhjtet and an fhjtet are connected with the k

infinitive, the rule is, that the subject should immediately follow
the infinitive, and then the object. The huter, hi such a case, is
necessarily in the accusative, but the subject (as in letter f) may

be either in the genitive or in the nomiiialivc. The noun-sufiixes
again are, of course, to be regarded as genitives, e.g. Gen. 39, 18

^P*"?!!^ as I liflcd up my voice (comp. i Ki. 13, 21, and the
examples, Gen. 5, 4, &c., enumerated above, under letter </), and so
also substantives which follow a connective form, Deut. i, 27, Ac.;
see above, letters d and
' In Arabic, where the case-endings leave no doubt as to the construction,

it is equally poîble to say either qatlu iUxidin (gen. of subj.) 'Amra (&cc),
literally Zaid s killing 'Amr, or qatlu 'Amrin (gen. of obj.) Zaidun (noBft. of subj.),
or even fZ-fa/lM (with artide) Zaidun (nom. of snbj.) Uasnns (aoc. of obj.).
Bb a
Digitized by Google
i On the other hand, the subject appears necessarily to be in the
nominative in such cases as Is. lo, 15 vrjno-ntc oats' f)^3n3 as if
a rod should shake them that lift it up (for the plur. VDnn com p.
124. k\ not T?!!^, as uould be expected (see letter g al)Ove), if
were in the genitive; comp. Job 33, 17. And so probably also
in other cases, as Gen. 5, i. 13, 10. Jos. 14, 7. i Ki. 13, 4. 2 Ki. 23, 10.
Is. 33, 7 The subject is separated from the infinitive by an insertidi
(and consequently must necessarily be in the nominative ; see letter^
above)^ e.g. in Jer. at, t.
k Rem. Lets fvequendy the object It placed inuDedktely after the iii6iiitive^
and then the nominative of die snbject, as n sabeeqnent complement, e.(;. Is. SO, I
fijnp SnN r6c*3 - ^ -w Sargm satt him; Gen. 4, 15. Jo. 14, 11. a Sam, 18, 29.
Is 5, 24. Vs. 56, 1. Trov. 25, f. Tn Nnm. 24, J3 the lafagcct foUows SO iofinitiTe
which has a noan'soffiz in place of the object.
lie. The Participles,

Cf. SelUn (tee above at the head of i P* 6 sqq., and Kafaaa, p. ir aqq.
a 1. Uke the two infintdves, the participles also occupy a middle

place between the noun and the verb. In form they are simple nouns,
and most nearly related to ê adjective; consequently they cannot
in themselves be employed to represent definite relations of tense
or mood. On the other iiand, their verbal character is shown by their
not representing, like the adjectives, a fixed and permanent quality

(or condition), but one which is in some way connected with an action
or activity. The participle active indicates a person or thing conceived
as being in the continual uninterrupted exrcis of an activity. The
partkipk pasnot^ on the other hand, indicates the person or thing
in a condition which has been brought about by external aeiions,
t Rem. That the laiigimgc was fnlty consciow of the difleieace between a state
implying action (or eflfected by external acdoa) and a mere passive conditioa,
is seen from the fact, that participles proper cannot be formed from the simple
stative Qal, but only verbal adjectives of the form qdicl iV^, n?3, &c ) or q<i^
(i^bS, &c/), whereas the transitive Q.il \!(^ to hate, altbongh it coincides in form
with the intransitive Qal (as n verb middle E), nevertheless forms a participle active
{<Jw*, and participle passive K^Sfe' (comp. the feminine ^!^îy^?'). In cases where
the participle proper and the verbal adjective both occur, they are by no means
synonomoni. IVhen the Anyiians are called m Is, s8, 11 HD^ \:)J^ mtn ofstammn^
itg lips, a diameter Is aieribed to them is inscpwably eonnected with their
personality. On the other hand 3^5 ii^ Jer. so, 7, describes those about the
prophet as continnally engaged in tbrowmg lidieole npon him. Cf. also 9, iS
Cn;^) with 50, sa onafc^.
Digitized by Google
The Participles. 373
On the fliffcrence hef^we^^n the participle as expressing simple fUimtion and the C
imperfect as expressing progressive duration, comp. what has been stated above in
$ 107. d. Nevertheless the participle is sometimes used especially in the later
Books, comp. e. g. Neh. 6, 1 7. a Chron. 17,1 1 where we should expect the action
to be divided up failo id eevenl paits ukl cooMqeenttj dumM expect the fioile
verb. Bat the subatitiitioii of the participle for the temp$t$ AiOeriatm, which
becomes customary in Aramaic (comp. Kantisch, <SnMMV. As BN, Anm,^
I 76. a. 1^ and 0), is nevertiielesi quite foreign to Hebrew.
2. The period of time indicated by {a) a participle active, eiilier d

as an attribute or predicate, must be inferred from the particular
context. 1 hus HO may mean either mortem (Zech. 11, 9), or moriuus
(so commonly ; with the article HOn regularly =r//4^ dead man), or
mcri/urus (Deut. 4, 2 a); coming, come Gen. 18, 11 and elsewhere,

ventunu i Sam. a, $1 and elsewhere ; fallings but also faUm^
I Sam. 5, %t and ready to fall (threatening ruin. Is. 30, 13. Amos 9 1 1).
For other examples of perfect participles see Gen. 27, 33. 43, 18 (29^
that was returned; comp. Eara 6, ai and elsewhere, O^?^'? which
were come again out of captivity); Gen. 35, 3. Ex. 11, 5. Zech. 12, i.
Ps. 137, 7. Prov. 8, 9. Job 12, 4 ('P}'), and letter m below. For
future participles see Gen. 41, 25. 1 Ki. 18, 9. Is. 5, 5. Jon. i, 3, kc,
probably also Gen. 19, 14. On the futtarum imians (esp. after
ran) see letter p bebw.
(b) Of the passive portictples, the participle Qai (e.g. scr^tus) ^
always corresponds to a Latin or Greek perfect participle passive,
those of the other conjugations, especially NipXdt^ sometimes to
a Latin gerundive (or to an adjective in -^tZr>), e. g. i^^^ metuendusy
to be fearedy Ps. 76, 8 and elsewhere ; TOW desiderandus {desiderabilis)

Gen. 3, 6. Ps. 19, II, S:c. ; cuaiidus Ps. 102, 19; ^5*^3, usually
natus, but also (like "l^n Jud. 13, 8) procreandus, naseiturus i Ki. 13, 2.
Ps. 22,32; P^p. terribUis Ps. 89, 8 ; 3^^?? abominable Job 15, 16 ; 3^"}
aesfimandm Is. a, aa ;
nÔKin ihat may be eaten (an animal) Lev. 11,47.
In Fiialy ^^09 ioudtmdus, who is tooriky to be Raised Fs. 18, 4. In -
BopXal, 2 Sam. 10, x ^fyfO; i Sam. 19, ti. a KL 11, a cnn^^WSn;

Is. IS, 5 GV/ WO*.
Snch examples as tTî^

'^Ît ^f*^ chow gemndtve
> plainly the origin of this
we of the peiticiple passive. A person or thing /eangd, detirtd, or pndud at all
times, is ^wn theiehj to fae UrriUi, dImrMi, or pmutwtH^, and tberefore
also to Ai feared, fte. From sach aaavipks tiiis vie thea appeals lo have been
caSended to other cases.
Digitized by Google
f 3. The participles active, in virtue of their partly verbal character,
possess the power of governing like verbs, and consequently, when

used in the absolute stale, may take after them an object either in the
acciuative, or with the preposition with which the verb in question
is elsewhere usually construed, eg. i Sam. i8, 29 "n^~nN ^ prop.
urn haitng Damd; Gen* 4a, 29 ; with the suflBx of the accusative,
e.g. '^9 ihat made me Job 31, lo ; îf* V seeth us? Is. 29, 15
(in Is. 47, 10 is abnormal) ;
D'p rulhtg them Ps. 68, 28 (also with
the article, e.g. 2 Sam. 22, 33 [= Ps. 18, 33] "ri^KDH ///,;/ gudeth me^
LXX o Kparmcbv ^f) ; DcUt. 20, I. 2 Sam. I, 24. Is. 9, 12. 63, II.
Ps. 103, 4. I Ki. 9, 23 0^3 Dnnn zv/iic/i dan- rule over the people
% Ki. 20, 5 Kfii 'Jjn behold^ I wtU heal iheeK

By an edumstive emnination of the ttatisticB, Sellin (tee the title tt the heid
of f 115), p. 40sqq., shows that the participle when construed as a verb expresses
a single nn'l comparatively transitory act, or relates to particular cases, historical
facts, and the like, while the participle construed as a noun ^see letter g) indicates
repeated, enduring, or commonly occurring acts, occupations, and thoughts.
So also the verbal adjectives of the form qdfil may take an

accusative of the person or thing, if the finite verb from which they
are derived governs an accusative, e. g. Deut 34, 9 Jkll ^
the spirit; i Ki. 9, 23 ; Ps. 5, 5 Mo/ hath feature m
Wickedness,
g As a sort of noun the j)arliciple niay, however, also exercise the
same government as a noun, being in the construct state, and foilowetl
by the object of the action in the genitive (see 89.0; comp. also
{ laS.^r), e.g. Ps. 5, la 'jDC' ^nnx ihat love t/^ name; comp. Ps.
19, 8 sq.; also when a verbal adjective, e.g. Gen. 2a, la 0^f]6M wri^
one fearing God, and Hab. s, 15; with an infinitive, Ps. 127, a; with
a noun-suffix (which, according to { 33. r, also represents a genitive),
e.g. Gen. 4, 14 ^M^rb'^s whosoever finddh me (prop, my finder; comp.

wy maher); 12, 3 T?!!,? /hat Mess thee, that eurseik thee;
27, 29. I Sam. 2, 30. Is. 63, 13. Jer, 33, 2. Ps. 18, 49*.
' Oa the other hand, in Is. ii, 9 as tht waters D^DDD D"^ cavrrin^ the tea,
the h serves only to introduce the ohjcct preceding the participle ;

[cL the Arabic
parallels cited by Driver, Terms, 135, 7 Obs.'] Comp. Hab. 2, 14.
When, as in Job 40, 19, the participle with the noun-suffix he thai
made him, aUo has the article (comp. 137. 1), theanonuly is dithcolt to undei^
stttnd, since a woid detenniiied by a genitive doet not admit of being detennined
\
Digitized by Google
The Participles, 375
Rem. To the class of objective genitives ^>elong also specifications of place after h
the participles inUm and KST^ tgrcdiem, since the verU and in the
sense of nt^cdi, e^redi, can be ditcclly connected with an accusative ; e.g. Gen.
23 la i8 *rf^ itjgt^ HQ tiatwHt % / tht gate ^ kit tity; Lam. i, 4; after
Gen. 9, 10. 34, 94. 46, 96, and elsewhere.l poetic laqgnage the fwiticiple
in construct state may be Connected not only with a genitive of the object,
but also with any other specifications (especially of Spftoe) which othmrise cnn
only be made to depend on the verb in qnestlon by means of a preposition comp. ;
Is. 38, jS, and frequently, *1^2"*"1lV they thai go dmtm into the pit (the grave);
Ps. 88, 6 15i3 ^nab' thai Uc in the grave; Deut. 32, 24 (Mic. 7, 17) ; i Ki. 2, 7.
a Ki. 1
1, 5. 7. 9 those that came in (or went out) on the sabbath, Prov. 2, 7. i Chron.
5, 18, and elsewhere; instead of tiie oonstraction with 'ftp, e.g. Is. 59, 20 [those
who turn /fpm tmtuigranm), Mic a, S,
These genitiTes of nearer definition appear also in the fom of a nomi*mffiz, %

e.g. Fa. 18, 40.
3a, 35. Dent

49 ^ ^ 0^99
33, II. Fk.44>^- 53t
(for
6 ;
*^ agaimt
loa, 9. Prov. a, 19
m; eotnp. Ex. 15, 7.
nHtaîo aU thai
g9 tmt4 h$r; the constraction is eqtecially bold in Is. a9 7 i^^H^ t^?^''^
all that fight agmui ktr and her MtrmtîM (for D^M^KTâ). In
b. ip 30 ox <i ttrdimth n^^ n^^b fadimg as niganb its Ue^, it temaina donbtfol
whether nâjl is in the abaolnte state, and conseqnendy in the accosative, or
whether it is to be unaided aa constmct state, and as the genitive. In the

latter case it would be analogotis to Pvov. 14, a (see letter A).
4. The passive participles also may either be in the absolute state, k

and take the detennining word in the accusative \ or may be connected
with it in the construct state, e.g. Jud. 18, 11. i Sam. 2, 18. zek. 9, s
B'tob clothtd m inim, cooip. verse 3 ; (even with
a suffix rent as regards his coat 2 Sani. 15, 3s ; with the
participle following in Jud. i, 7); but Ezek. 9, 11 tke one
clothed unih Hnm; 2 Sam. 13, 31 Q^^D rmtin respect 0/ chAss,
by the article.^ No lesa lemariuble is the use of the constr. st. of the participle
before the accusative in Jer* 33, aa ^^M /io/ mmister unto me (for which
^0')ff^
there is *mE'D in verse ai^ and Amos 4, where an accusative of the product
follows the ^nitive of the ol.ject, nS^J/ ^nC' Hy'V woXvr 0/ the vioming into
darkness. In Jor. 2, 17 IJDiîD n}J3 is sup[X)ied to mean at the time -when ht
led thic ; jicrhaps the i)crfect ('ijin) shouUl be read as in 6, 15. In Kzck. 27, 34,
the ancient versions read (n)riy noiv thou art broken, instead of the difficult
irjaC'^ ny. in i Ki. 30, 40 read HU'V before nSiTI .
* On the proper forue of this accusative when retained in the passive constructkNI
conpk below, 117. cc, &c., and 1 ai. , So also Neh. 4, la is to be andeiatood,
md ths HtOdin weie r^D-i>y D*n^D i3")n tr^K giriad wry ome with his
sword on his sids, omdMi^^g,
376 The Parts of Speech
equivalent to with iheir clotha rent (comp. Jer, 41, 5); Num. 24, 4.
Deut. 25, lo. Is. 3. 3. 33, 24. Joel I, 8. Ps. 32, i iy^^P'^^'} forgiven
in respect of Iratuigressim, nttcn *^P!3 covered in respect of sin); wiih a
suffix to the noun, Prov. 14, a V^^l ^î ^ ^ perverte in his wayt.
I Rem. The pMiive fmrtidple occurs in the construct itete belbfl a. genidve
of the cause, e.g. In Is. i, 7 nlD")b Immt with fire ; comp. Gen. 41, 6.
Ex. Ti Dcut. 32, 24 ; Vefore a genitive denotiiij; the author, e.g. Gen. 24, 31
nin* l]r\a bUssed of the Lord (but Ps. ug, 15 H^^H'^ see $ I2t./);
comp. Is. 53, 4. I's. a, 7. Job 14, l (15, 14. 25, 4) ; lience nlso with nouu-suffixcs
(which arc accordingly genitivel Prov. 9, 18 0*^0^ hfr itrvited ones, i.c. those
invited by her; comp. 7, 36. Ps. 37, a a.
m 5. The use of the participle as predicate is very frequent in noun-

clauses (which) according to \\o.e^ describe established facts and
conditions), in which the period of time Intended the description
must again (see above, letter d\ be inferred from the context Thus
n (a) As/rMrinipeaklngof trotbswhichhoMgoodt]ltinc%e.g.Ecclei*i
MB Îfll li^ 9m geiurati^ jvrMf and mtvtktr gtmralfym tafn^k ; mid the
earth tMdttk ^twr; coop, vote 7 ; lio to tcpicKot inddcotal
(TPj^
(continiKMu) oceumnoet whidi aie just hmppening, Gen. 3, 5. 16, S (/ am JJeeing)\
32, 12. Ex. 9, 17. I Sam. ifi, 15. 23. i. 2 Ki. 7, 9. Ts. i, 7; also when the subject
is introdaced by the cmpliatic demonstrative nsn behold! ( loo. 0 and % 105. F^,
e.g. (.icn. 16, 1 1 rnn ?I3n behold, (hou art with child, &c. ; 37, 42 ; fit oucntly al<(;
in circumstantial clauses (connected by H^'axv), comp. } 141. e.g. Gen. 15, 3, and
dtewhere.
^ [b) To represent ctiont or states, sometimes ia indqpeadcttt fioMleses,
e.g. Ex. 20p 18 hhpn-nK D^tfh O^n-i'S] attdutttht p$a^ $am iht tkumdenng*,
tec; 1 KL
5; in ocgative statemoits, e.g. Gd. 39, 23 ; sometimei la relative
I,
dMSCt, e.g. Gen. 39, 33 b. Deut. 3, 3, (comp. also the freqacnt combination of tiw
participle with the article as the equivalent of a relative clanae, cg.Gen. 3at10*)Qltn
which midst ; 13,7. 16, 13. 35, 1.3. 36,35. 48, 16. 2 Sam. 15 3t.&c.>; sometimes
again (5<.e letter ) in circumstantial clauses, esi>ccially those rr] ri S4?nti!if^ nctiuns
or btateii which occurred sttnaltaneuaaly with other paat actions, 6cc., y. (^cu. 19,
tmd thi two angtU earn* i9 Stdom and Lot satf &c.; 18, i. 8. i<S. sa.
35, a6. Jnd. 13, 9. 9 Chroa. 33, 9 ; aho with tiie snbjcct intrednoed by n|n Gea.
37i 7* 4i> 17- (Gn 7],^n with a following adjective or pwtlclple lo cspias w
actioB constanllj or oocadooally lecnning, cC f 113. .)
P (r) To attnotnoe fiOnr* actions or events, eg. t IC].s, a. a i6 ml tkit

setam wkm tki time tmmik fMMwf, fS 1(^9^ ijlV dknH emtowrt n tm; ao
after a specification of time, Gen. 7, 4. 15, 14. 17, 19, 13. Is. 13, 15 (where,
however, aftrr "^n^ we should rather ex |>ev:t a perfect consecutive; Qimhi thereibic
explains nn3C'31 us the 3rd sinj;;. fern, of the perfect', Haj^. 2, 6; or 5n relative
clauses, On 41, 25. Is. 5,5 what I am doing, i.e. am in t*"e act of doing;
in a deliberative t|uestion. Gen. 37, 30; but especially olten when the sviên
"6.] The Participles. 377
U Intxodnecd hf (cipcckllj alio if the talyect be ettaclicd as mffiz to
^39ri, 1|iri, ftc), if it Is tatCBded to amowwe the event as innainenty or

at least near at' hand (and nuDa to baj^wn), when it it called fuiurum imtam,
e.g. Gen. 6. 17. 15. 3. 20, 3. 24, 13 sq. 48, ir. 50, 5. Kx. 3, 13. 8, 35. 9, 3.
34, 10. Jos. 2, iS. Jiul. 7, 17. 9, 33. I Sam. 3, 1 1. 2 Ki. 7, a. Is. 3, i. 7, 14. 17, i.
Jer. 30, 10. Zech. 2, 13. 3, 8; with a partidpie passive, a Sam. ao, 21 : cooip. also
f 112./.
Rem. I. As the above examples shoWf a noon-clause with a participle as g

predicate autjr have for Ha satijeGt elAer a wbatantive or a pcnoaal pvonoon
in both eaaea the paiticipk^ cipecially if there be a cmphads vpon it, nay
oexlaiii
pieoede tiie aobject. Also in iioan*daiiaes iwirodnceti bgr n|n the ial|^ may be
'
either a suhatantive, or (e.. G<n> 37, 7) a separate personal pronoun, or a snffix

attached to nSH. In the same way, the subject tnay also be introduced by
{tst, tee the Lexicon) with a suffix, and in negative sentences bf \% est) with
a snffix, e.g. Jud. 6, 36 y*^D ^?^7T3t< if tkau tvilt sam; Gen. 43, 5 13*N"DK
n^"?^ if thcu wilt not setui ; 1 Sam. 19, 11. In such caies as Is. 14, 27 n^blH
the stretched out hand is his, n'^fDBn is not. like TX^WZZ in 9. il. 16, &c., the
predicate (in which cnse the participle could not take the article), but the subject
comp. Gen. a, n. 45, 12. Is. 66, 9. Ezek. 20, 29. Zech. 7, 6 (cf. 126. k), where
die paitidple with the axtide liltewie relers to the present, also Nam. 7, a. Deat
St 4t 3 Ac** I Sam. 4, ttf, where it leftn to the pait. In i Ki I8,
and ti, II even in lelatife dauaes after
a. To gheezpreM eanphasla (o an action continnlng b Ae /oil, the perfect Hjn ^

m tlie corresponding person is sometimes added to the paxttdple, and mUlarly
the imperfect n*T (or the jussive or the imperfect consecutive) is wA
to emphnsize an action continuing in ihc/uiure, e. g. Job i, 14 mc^^n "^^^H
tk ojcen (cows) were planvivg ; Gen. 37, 2. 39, 22. Ex. 3, i. Dent. 9, 24. Jud.
1, 7. I Sam. 2, II. 2 Sam. 3, 6; the same occurs with a passive participle, e. g.
Jos. 5, 5. Zech. 3, 3 ; n*n^ with a participle* is found e. g. in Is. 2, a ; the jussive

in Gm. l d. Pft. 109, 12'; and \m with a participle in Jud. 16, ai. Neh. i, 4.
S The pemmal frmmm which wonld be expected aa Ae anbject of a participial s
daoie ia freqaentlj omittedf or at least (asdaewhere in nowKlaaica, ooiB|pw Ik a6, 3.
Pf. 16, 8. 4;^ $s) the pronoon of the 3rd pen. Min e;g. Gen. 94, 301. 37. 15.
38, 34. 41, 1, t Sam. lOb It. 15, 1 a. Is. ag^ 8 (the partidpie always after n||n)
comp., moreover, Gen. 32, 7. Deut. 33, 3. i Sam. 17, 25. ao, i. Is. 33, 5. 40, 19,.
Ps. 22, 29. 33, 5. 55, 20. Job 12, 17. 19 sqq. 25, 2. if), 7 ; K*"!! is omitted in
Lev. 18, 2S; ntsn in 1 Ki. 5, i. Is. 32, 12. Erek. 8, 12. Neh. 9, 3 ; in a relative
clause, Gen. 39, 22. Is. 24, 2. The personal pionoun of the 2nd pers. masc (IiriK)
is omitted in Hab. 2, 10; the 2nd fem. (J^Wt) in Gen. 20, 16 (where, however,
for the participle finsi^ the and fem. perf. is really intended); the pronoun
of the 1st Slug, in Hab. 1, 5. Zech, 9, 12. Mai. a, 16; the andplor. (DR|t) 1 Sam,
2, 24 (if the text be right), 6, 3. ticic. 13, 7 (I).
* A jnisive is practically to he snpplied alio In the Ibinralae of blessing and

curslQgt Ipn^ Mintdbt . . Gen. 9, s6 and elsewhaes ySMf ursd uri tkou . .
3i 14 ttid elKwhete.
Digitized by Google
The Paris of Speech
/ Of a different kind are the cues in which some undefined sabject it to he
applied with the puutidple; e.g. Ii. JI, tt Klj) there is one calling unto mt
(=ônc calleth ; 144. d); comp. I5. 30, 34. .^3,4 So with 1
nrtici;1t< in the plnr.,
e.g. Lx. 5, 16 (D'npK sc. the taskmasters); Jcr. 33, 5. 3J>, 23. Ezek. 13. 7 0)*
36, 13. 37, II (c<juivalc'nt to sunt t/m' iiitanf).
fi 4. We must mcutiou as a special class those noun-daoses which occur at the

bcginatng of a period, and aie intended to lay ftien npon the fact that the fint
action still continnes on the occairenoe of the second (always mtrodnoed by >); e.g.
Gen. 99, 9. Job i, 16 iq. MS n|{ *^1D f1] Tiy i wtttyel speaMmg, and ( - wAck)
another came, &c.'; comp. i Sam. 9, ti. 2f. 20, 36. i Ri. X4, 1'J she VMU enttr-
ing the threshold of the house, when the child died; a Ki. 2, 33. 4, 5. T>.in. 9, ;osq.;
also in JiiH. 19, 22. i Sara. 9, T4. 17, 23. 1 KL 1, 4a. Job i, iS s<i , ia all which
passages the apodosis is introduced by ilSH^. On the other hand, m I Ki. I, I4
the noun-clausc itacU is introduced by nSH (as in verse aa by n|I1p, and denotes
an action only just impending . Finally, whoi the whole lentenoe ia introdiwed
by meant of (comp. 111.^)1 and the apodosit by nini, Gen. 4J, 35. % Ki.
a, II. 13, 31 ; without itlil In the apodotiii i Sam. 7, 10. a Kt. 19, 37 (it. 37* 3S).
V Bairtkifks active^ whidi are tited in the scnie of the perfect participte, and alio
participles pcusive, in accordance with their meaning, express in such noun-clauses
a state still contintiint^ on the occisrrence of the princip.n! action, e g. Gen. 3S, 25
nnbu' K^n^ nXiOD K'n she was bciui^ brouirkt forth, when she seni^Sf^-t comp.
T;|T "J '
Gen. 50, 24; [sec further in Driver, lenses, f if6-i6y.]
W 5. Ditfeieut from the examples treated in letters u and v arc the instances
in which a participle (cither alone or as the attribate of a noun) stands at the
bighinittg of the lentence at a tasm patdmt (or at the tnliject of a ton^tmid
mmiHlauH^ tee 143. to hidicate a condition, the contingent occonence of
whidi Involves a foither cooteqnence; e.g. (3cn. 9,6 O^MS O"!^*} tS\ !|D|E^
1|D|^ shedding maiCs bUoi% i.e. if any one sheddcth nan's blood, by sM
Mo// his blood be tkid} Ex. 21, 12. Ps. 75, 4. FfOT. ty, 14. Job 41, 18 ; so
especially if "^3 w^ry precedes the participle. Gen. 4, 15. I Sam. 3, 1 1 (2 Ki. 21, I a).
The apodosis is generally introduced by 1 (rmTt' apodosis), e.g. Ex. 12, 15 (with
a following perfect consecutive), Num. 35, 30; i Sam. 2, 13 Pint TVlS Cit^S
^nan lyi t<Zi^ -.v/un any man offered sacrifice, the print's servant came, Sec;
a Sam. 14, 10 (participle with article); 22, 41 (where, however, the text is to be
emended in accordance with Ps. 18, 41) ; 2 Sam. 23, 3 sq. Trov. 23, 24 K*tk.:
* The independent noun-clause here lays strei>s upon the bimultoiieuuii occurrence
(and eonseqoently the overlapping) of the eventt lar more forcibly than coold
be done by a tnbordiaate expresiion of time (at e.g. ^'^STl la EogUah
itmay be represented by ttarcely had he finished speaking mhm ... Aa the
above examples show, the apodosis also frequently consists of a nooOKilante.
' At the same time the preceding liy still shows that what is announced is not
merely a future event, but a future event contemporaneous with something: else
the case thus cnlircly differs from the txamplis },'iven m 113. /, where TMJ*, rctcrs
to the following participle, while here it belongs properly to the apodosis, before
which it it therefore generally placed ; see the eiamplct.
Digitized by Google
J 1 170 Direct Subordinaiton of the Noun, etc, 379
39, 9.<-Afl in the inttancetdbcmied under letter u, aodi lentenoes are sometimea
preceded by ^n^, comp. i Sam. lo, it. ti, if. a Sam. a, 33 ltan~i)3 and
it earn t9 pass, tkat as mat^ as ca$ns, ftcOn the otiier hand Xll3B^3n^ Dan. 8, aa
is a mere catchword (cqniTalcnl to and as fur thai wkieA vmu hvkm) to call
to mind the eontentt of verse 8.

6, On the Qse of the participle after the Infinitive absolute 1|^ôomp. $ 1 13. .
7. Almost as a rule the participial constmctioD beginning a sentence (like the X

infinitival construction nccordinjj to $ 114.'*) is continued by means of a finite
verb with or witiiout 1, before which the English construction requires us to
supply the relative prononn implied in the participle ;

thus, continued by means
of a perfect,
* '
Is. 14, 17

DIH
AT T
njn
T T
nintsa
T
:
- ;
b^Fi

DC
T
Onit made the world as
a wilderness, and overthrew the cities thereof^ 43, 7. Ezek. a a, 3. Ps. 136, 13 sqq.
Frov. 17 ;
by a perfect wiUiont Wdm%
Gen. 49, 11 ; bj a limple impexfect
(as the moAu rHr^kiitaevk the present), b. 5, aj. 4$, 6. Prov. 7> 8. Job la, 17.
19 tqq. 24, 31 ; by an imperfect witiioat W(S, e.f, f Sam. S 8. Is. 5, 8. PTot.
J, 14. 19,36; by an imperfect consecwtive, Gen. 27,33. 3St 3. 1 Sam* 9* 61.
Jer. 13, 10 (after several participles) ; Fs. 18, 33. 136, 10 sq.
C The GovERNiiKNT of thb Verb.
{ U7. The Direct Subordination of the Ntmn to the Verb as

Acauaiive of the OêcL Thi DouMe Accusaiive.
1. The simplest way in which a noun is subordinated 10 a verbal ^

form is by the addition of an accusative of the object to a transitive
verb*. In the absentee of case-endings', this accusative can now

be recognized only from the context, or by the particle 'AK (fiK, before
* On the patallellMn between the external and iniemai memben, whidi appears
hat and in manjr other examples of this kind, see the note on 1 1x4. r.
* The verb in qnestion majr either have been origiinally transitive, or onlj have
become transitive hj a modification of its original meaning. Thus the vocalization
shows that |*Dri (/ have pleasure, usually with 3) to desire, HÔ (to be full
of son^thing, also transitive) to fill, were originally intransitive. Comp. also such
cases as 7133 io weep (generally with but also to bewail with an

accusative; 3*^"^ to dxviU (usually with 3), but al>o to inhabit willi an accusative
(comp. further, letter u below). The examples arc different in which verbs of
motion such as fc<i3 intrare, also aggredi, NJT egreJi (comp. 116. h above),
3^w' rail! f. is. 52, 8, take au accusative of the aim of the motion, while
accordui^ to the Old Semitic usage, even takes an accusative of the person (at least
in poetry* eqmvalent Io Mi3 in prose).
' On traces of these endinp, especially the remains of a fiNmer accnsative
ending in , cf. f 90. r above.
Digitized by Google
300 The Parts of Speech. [J 117.
suffixes also IW, DlH)* prefixed to it. The use of this nota accusatrtri
is, however, somewhat rare in poetry, and even in prose it is not
invariably necessary but is restricted to those cases in which the
accusative of the object is more closely determined by being a proper
name, or by having the article, or by a floUowiiig determinate genitive
(hence ako by the suffixes), or in some other way (see below, letter c),
e.g. Gen. 4, i and skt bare TST^ Cam; 6* 10. i God cnated
JHn n|$ ffu hmom and the tarth (bm 4 ^!'Pf\ TXY*
I, 25 and Gcd made ^(T^ hasi y iii iorik; s, 34.
Rem. t. The raie oocnneDoe of the mto aumoHvi hi poctiG style (e. g. it never
oocmB ia Ex. 15, a-tS. Dext. 33. Jod. . Sun, s Ac. ; oa other head,
i
it is freqaent in the late Psalms) may be cxplehwd fiom the fiKt diet hi ee hi
other respects comi). 3. poetry represcntl a somewhat more archaic stage
of the language than prose. The nee of some cxtc-mal means ol indicating the
i
accusative could only have been felt aiicr the case-eudiogs bad become whoiiy
extbct Even then the DK would probeUy have been need at fint to indicate
only an object placed itfen the verb (when it foUowm^ it aliendy snffidcntly wu
diaiacteiidbyittpoutioQaf dependhigonthenvb),orpiopernBmee*. Fhially,
however, the noia aecusoHwi became so customary everywhere in prose, that even
the pronominal object was exprcssofi rnther In* PlJ* with snfHxes than by verbal
suffixes, even when none of the reasons mentioned under letter e can be aes^ned
' "ntt (tondese owing to the foUowhig Maqqepb), and MM (with a tooe-long e,
"TIN only in Job 41 a6), nit or TtlH befofe the light
,
snflfinee acoordbg to 103. h,
Phoenician i.e probably ^Stk (Cor the Phoenidan fomi, ct G. Hoffmean,

Min^ phSmik, /meAriftm, Gdltiogen, 1889, p. $g iq.)k Pude ftk or (ecooiding
to Enthig^ pronoimced even as a mere prefixed #, Afabi^ before nttxee,
Aram. H!, was no donbt originally a snbetantife^ neani&g ejsemif mbttanrr.
self (like the Syriac j J/^ ; on the other liand, any connexloB with the Hebrew IliK,
Syriac V/.f. Arahie 'oya/, a sign, must, with Noldeke, ZDMG. xL 738, be rejected),
hill now iinitcil in the construct state with a following noun or suffix stands for the
pronoun ipst^ avrvt. [In later A&!>yrian the pronominal suffixes are attached to the
MibilaBtive tssemet and the two together form an emphatic repetittoo of
a pieceding nffix, e.g. cfr^ at-Hha, ry rau, pv^. rmu (whidi it) mm
mUu^ G.W.C.] In common osei however (cf. Wilson, The (mitide UK in Hebrew,*
Hebraica, vi. a, 3), it hn^ Hitle force (like the oblique cases outow, a^f,
ainhv^ sometiirx-s nUo ipsim, ipsum, and the Germ, dtsselhfn. Sec.'' that it merely
serves to introducf a determinate object ; D^|^ DX prop, avr^v ritv ovpavvv
(comp. airrifit Xfwoi}t8a, Iliad L 143) is no stronger than the simple D^j^
rim 9^fa^
* Thu% h) Dent. 35, fW ocenr* only in vene 9 (twice with an object precedmg
the verb), in Gen. 49 in the blonng of Jacob only in verse 15 with a co-ottHoalc
second object (consequently farther removed from the verb). Of the thirteen
instances r f JIK in the Mia' inscription, levtn stand directty and fonr indiraGtly
before proper naniet.
$1170 Direct StAardinatwn of the Noun, etc. 381
for it; comp. Giesebrecht in ZAW, 1881, p. 258 sqq., and the statistics of
H.Petri, dted above at the head of $ 58. Such examples asijlK rUSf IB^
0>r6K Gen. 6, 23 in the Priestly CmUt bede mnj ^n^STie^ ^5? 7,5 in the
Jahvist, aie especially instructive.
a. As accusatires determined in other ways, we have in the place first to
coonder ^ ooUecttvcs introduced by mHrt^^ wiUHmt a following utkle or
detenninatc genitive, inawnndt m the tnetning of h indndek % detennintfiie
erne, conp. e.g. Gen. i, at. 30. 8, ai. Dent a, 34. s KL 25, 9. i4mf it ned
nbsolntely in Geo. 9, 3, eomp. 39, 33 ; dmilnrlj, ^ is debenalDnle of Itael^ tinoe it
ilwqpf denotes n peiton, hence ^pm^ fmmt eg. b. 6, 8. 37, and diewheic^
hot neter H^rn^ ftnit m alio the lelatlve in the sense of mm pd m
ftumf fte.t e.g, l Sam. 16, 3, or id qtud^ Gen. 9, 34 and elsewhere. Comp. also
such examples as Jos* a, 10. i Sara. 34, 19, where UK is equivalent to
tkt cirmmsttmce, that, &c. Elsewhere JIK stands before noons which are detenni*
nate in sense, aUhouf;!i the nrticlc is omitte'i (which arcor^Hng; to 126. ^ is very
frequently the case in poetic or oilier^ i^c elevated style ; lims Lev. 26, f . Is. 4I, 7-
50, 4. Ezek. 13, 20. 43, 10. Prov. 13, at (where the D^p^'^^f are lo be regarded as
a distinct dass) ; Job 13, 35 ; alo Eccles. 7, 7 may be a quotation of an andeot
On the other hand flN oocoia êiy sddom In pioie hefioae a noon actnally d
orappaienily undelennined. In x Sam. 34, 6 t|l3 it mote doedy defined by meant
erf the ibUowing idattie dante; in a Sam. 4, ix CN< lefeis to Uhboiheth
(ts if it wm AiMf wko was am mmemi man); also in 13, 17 tcfen
to a dc6aite peiaon, and m i ICL 6, 16 0^*1^7 to die particnlar twen^ cobi^
In Ex. 31, 28 (otherwise in verse S9) periiapethe ~tlM it ned in order to avoid the
combination C^K iHS^ (as in Nnm. ai, 9 to avoid the cacophony tf^K C^Sn I)
in Lev. 7, 8 and 20, 10 the accusatives are at any rate defined by tlie context.
In Num. 15 DITO inK~nX proltably means even a sini^le oitc (and then eo ipso
a dennite one' 0/ tlum, as also in i Sam. 9, 3 O^yjnG "IHNTlN may refer to some
definite one of the roen-ser>*ants. In Gen. 21, we should read ntJ'^n
T -
yDB^Htt
- V V
s
as in the Samaritan Pentateuch, since the seven lambs have been already mentioned
and in Ex. a I the original xtading piahahly was ^ ril33p n^N ; in Ex. 38, 9
read DnVn with the Stnttritsa; in Lev. so, 14 n^^HK is probably a scribal
error dae to nQM'DK^ ; in x Sam. a6 so lead HTfi: widi the LXX for inK C^SHB
in a Sam. 5, 24 read n'l^yn according lo I Chron. 14, X5 ; in a Sam. 1$, x6 the
is incorrectly inserted from so, 3, where it lefen to the women already
mentioned ; in a Sam. t8, t8 read rPXDil, or omit both Tl^ and ne^M with the
UCX and Lodsn; in x Ki. xa, 31 and Est a. 3 omit 'ni^; in a Ki. 33, ao
probably l3)riV0|jrJ1^ is to be read; in a KL 35, 9 the tett hi obvionsly oomipt.
In Ezck. 16, 3a D**irntt might refer to tk* Orangtrs in fntUUm; see however,
Smend on the passage.
3. The pronominal object must ht represented by HN with a suffix (instead of
a verbal suffix), wlicn (<i) it precedes the verb, e. ^. Nnm. 22, 33 *r3"]n nrJlN
*n*^nn nnlKI / had slain thit; and savai her a/ive ; Gen. 7, 1. Lev. 33, 28.
I Sam. 8, 7. Is. 43, 22, 57, 11. Jer. 4, 17. 22. 7, ; {p) whoi a soflix is alieady
Digitized by Google
The Parts of Speech. C "7-
aUached to ihc verb, and as a rule when a second accnstthe with \ foUowti
e. g. 2 Sam. 15, 35 \m âinrn md k wni skew m nr; Ex. 17, 3 'hk rmrh
^ysrrm t kUl m tmd mr ekUdrms Num. i6, 33. 1 Sin. 5, 11. Sun. 14, 16
(bot Gf alio Dent 11, 5. 15 16, ftc, and Driver on i Sua. 5, 10); (0 aftr
infinitive alwolnle, lee above f 1 13. note ; {d) tiba an infinitive conamt, when
it is inimcdiatcly followed by the subject, e.g. Gen. 41, 39, or when the coinbSnation
of a suflix the infinitive might lead to a miwnderstandirir^, e.g. Gen. 4, 15
inkriisn ^r\p2^ lesf one should smU* Aim, where ÎSH ^Jn^sj) niight also
mean iest he should smffc.
f 4. The pronominai object is ver)' frequently omittetl, when it can be easily

supplied from the context ; so especially the neuter accusative referring to
tomething pievioody mentioned (the English ii) after iwrAa untimH 0?9S^) and
ikimiit e.g. Gen. 9, as, ftc, mtd he Uld (it) ; also after \r\l to ghi. Gen.
18, 7. 34, II and elaewfaere, i4 taie, K^^n to bring, W'p to lay, Gco.9t 33
and elaewhcie tofittd. Gen. 31, 33, and othen. A penonai object is omitted,
eg. in Gen. la, 19. 34, 51 (after ng^>.The omianon of the plnnl object it
iemarieable became it leavea an opportunity for a miinndentanding in Gen. 37, 1
WyofK ^Fiyce^ * / heard ihitm ugfi$if; pcihapa, however, we dionld read D^ROpp^
with the Samaritan Pentateuch.
g 5. In common formulae the substantival o})jcct Is al<?o sometimes omitted (an

elliptical expression) ; thus e.g. n"|2 1 Sam. 20, 16 and elsewhere Tsee the Lexicon)
stands for rin3 fl^S like the English (0 close (sc. a bargain) with any one ;
^03 to kep (sc. anger) equivalent to (0 be resentful, Ps. 103, 9 and elsewhere;
so also ipe> Jer. 3, 5 (beside ; for h\p NC': to lift up the voice. Is. 3,7;
b fctC'^ f<jr ^ Kfe^J to take away any otus sin (to forgive), Gen. 18, 34, 36.
is. 2,9; to put forth (sc. T the hand) equivalent to to reach after something,
9 Sam, 6, 6. Pi. 18, 17.
k 6. jM/tnmdk'flBaytakeaieeoiidobjectfgen^^
or adjective and nccenaiily Indetexminale^ to define aece exactly the netioQ or
condition in iUddn tlie ohject ia perceived, e.g. Nnm. 11, 10 DÎTTIK ns^ Vpf^
md Mmt k$ard HU fgoph wtefu^f Gen. 7, t ^rPMl ^lf t*ti Amw
/ seen righteous. Frequently, however, the second object ia ejniieaied by a
separate clause. This is especially fireqaent with ntn to see, e.g. Gen. i, 4
and God saw the li.^ht, that ii was good ; Gen. 6, 3. 13, 14. 13, 10. 49, 15.
Ex. 3, 3. Ps. 25, 19. I'rov. 23, 31. Job 23, 13, Eccles. 2, 34. 8. 17; so with JTT
to kno7i', Ex. 32, 33. 2 Sam. 3, 25. 17, 8 (with two objects) 1 Ki. 5, 17. ;
t 7. In certain in&tancea flK serves apparently to introduce or to emphasize

e nondnative. Ihia cannot be regarded aa a reappearance itf the oi^nal anbetan*
tival meaning of the fW, sboe all tuMjnestimable examples of the kind belong
to the later Booica of the Old Tertament They aie lather (apart from textnal
cnon or other explanations) cases of virtnal dependence on an implied verhum
regens understood. The constant use of HK to indicate a clause governed by the
verb, necessarily led at length to the use of Hfct generally as a defining particle
' According to the ordinary- rules of syntax (comp. \ 116./) we should translate,
/ ktard M#M owltf md, &c
Digitized by Google
117.] Direcl Subordination of the Noun, etc, 3B3
incspcctiYe of a goveniliig iwib. So in the Hebrew of the MUhna* <iee above*
I 3.0) Ink and nnk are prefixed to a nommative even without any special
empbaiit.
Natnnlly the above does not apply to nny nf the places in which ntt is not the k
netn aowatizn, but a preposition (on JIK with, comp. 103. a"), e. ff. Ts. 57, 15.
I SniTi ]
7, 34 f3^''!n~nW '*r/ wifh a hear : "PS here, hoivrver. has probably
been interpolated from verse 36, where it is wanted"^ ; nor the places in which
the accusative is sabordinate to a paîve (according to % 121. r) or to a verb of
wanting as in Jos. aa, 17 and Kefa. 9, 33, see bdow, letters. In Esek. 45, 17
vhoiti governs like a yeib, lieing followed by n^M.
Other cases are clearly due to attiaotion to a ibUowing relative pronoim in the ^
accusative (rêlc. 14, 23. Hag. a, 5. Zech, 17) or tihe accusative depoids on ^
a verbal idea, virttially contained in what has gone before, and consequently present
to the sj>eakcr's mind as governing the accusative. Thus Num. 3, 26 (the verbal
idea cootainetl in P^CBi'Dl verse 35 is they had (0 take charge of) ; in Jos. 17, 1
implies it vmu ^ven up or ihey gave him; I Sara. a6, 16 vthert
b eqnivalent to uartk now for; in a Sam. 1 1, 35 y^ÎD jn^^K it nsed in the

sense of mU aegre fern*; Jer. 36, 33 mm/ he had iJu hnaUr htfwf Aim; in
Eedes. 4, 3 a verb Ukt I estam is mentally supplied before MM. On Joe.

at, 17. Neh. 9* 39, see below, letter m. Apodopodt occurs in Dent 1 1, %fr mt
your children (do I mean); atiU more boldly in Zcdu 7, 7, where dtber O^j^Gf^
or (îS'Sn) is to be supplied.
Setting aside a few undoubtedly corrupt pasMges* there stiU remain the follow* ^
ing examples, in which TtK in the later Hebrew manner (almost in the sense
of the Latin quod attimt ad) introdtices n noun with more or less emphasis.
Num. 3, 46. 5, 10. 35, 6. Jud. 30, 44. 46. Ezek. 17, 21. ao, 16. 35, 10. 44, 3.
Neh. 9, ly. 34. Dan. 9, 13. a Chron. 31, 17. In Fzelc. 47, 17-19 (comp. also 43,7)
it is easy to emend for "HK, according to vtTse 20. ITowever, even the LXX,
who have ravra only in verse 18, can hardly have Icnown any other reading
than nM ; consequently in all diese passages UK mast be ngaided as vittnally
dependent on some gorening word, sndi as (LXX 43, 7 Uâga\ and 47,
1 7 sqq. as eqaivalent to lUbw skaU kme aa a border, ftc
8. Among the solecttms of a later period is finally the introduction of the object ^
by the preposition jl (pfopb in rtittion ^, in tko dirtetion as sometimes
' Comp. Weiss, rOVIîl pV^ DJBVD (Vienna, 1867), p. 11s.

* So also b I Sam. so, 13 the Qal (30^) is, with Wellhansen, to be rend
instead of the Hiph'll.
* Thus I Sam. a6, 10, where is to be read forHK^; i KL 11, 35, where at
present the predicate of the relative clause is wanting ; in 2 Ki. 6, 5 the HN

is probably derived from a text which read the IIiph'51 instead of ijBi. In
Jer. 33. 33 tnstrad of the artificial explanation what a burden (is, do ye ask?)
wc should read wilh the LXX and Vulg. NiS'Ô Dni<>' are the burden. In Ezek.
10, a a QJnitn Dn^KlQ is nnintelligiblc ; in 37, 19 read with HiUig "^K for fM;
is Hag. a , 17 read with the LXX D31j^ lor tSBe9k>
Digitized by Google
The Parts of Speech. ["7.
in Ethiopic* and very commonly in AntnuJe*. Lm remarkabie it this looitr

ooonexioa of the olyeot with a participle, w with Lam. 4, 5, t]Dl)( Nom. 10, aSi
K[Qr Ffe. 145, 14 (bnt tL 146,8), 'yyt Nnm. 95, i8,*K^bn and Job X3, 93;
the pMiticiple Im, ii, 9.To iatiodnoe a olijiect fnuUng the finite verb
|) i employed in Job 5, > (oomp. alio Dan. 11, 38) ; alio ^fieryvt^ Leir. 19* 18. 34;
Ipljn fl. t9, 3; &n 8, 84. aChron. 15, loj fan Job 9, ii; fjl
1 Chi'oo* a9) ao (faninediatefy befbie wMi an nocmalive); npjn t Onon. 5, at;
Ihrv Ecm 6, ai. i Chaon. aa, 19. a Chran. 17, 13; \fgn i Chron. t6, 36.
a Chron. 5, 13; ain 2 S.im. 3, 30. Ps. 135, 11 (verse 10 with accusative), 136, ig
8?ar| (/<? ^:>/.7 tip) Is. 61, I (Ezek. 54, 4 be/ore the verb> ; VT Ps. 69, 6; 0^
Jer.40,2; ^l^l^Dn and HK^ 1 Chron. 29. aa ; ^>rU a Chron. a8, 15 ; TJDD Pa. 145, 14;
nty I Chron. i6, 37; rh^n Euk. a6, 3; fWa Ps. 116. 16; e)*!*! Job 19, 38;
p*12fn Is. 53, 11; IDw' 2 Chron. 24, la (previously accasatives) ; D'w^ i Sam.
22. 7 (bin probably D^^D^ is to be read") ; 3*t^n (in the oonnexion ^5 -0"^ 3"'U'nj
2 Chron. 10,6 (but verse 9 and I Ki. 12, 9 with an accusative) ; nnC' Num. 3a, 15.
1 Sam. 23, loi rj^l^ Pa. 73, i8j flj^ Ezra 8, 16. a Chron. 17, 7;
2 Chron. 5, ii.
Q Sometimes the verb, on which an accusative of the object really depends,

9.
ia coolalned only in ien$e in the verb which apparently governs, e.g. b. 14, 17
nn^3 nnsi^^ in
kom, Comp.
W
kis prUmen he let mt tout nor sent them back t ikiir
Pa. 74, 15 and on thia cmtOruetio prtuig$umt in general, aee 1 1 19.^
p 2. With the proper accusatives of the object may also be classed
what is called the inlernal or absolute object (also named schema etymo-
logicum or jigura etymologica\ i.e. the addition of an obje< f in ilie form

of a noun derived from the same stem ^ e. g. Ps* 14, 5 in nna ihey
/eared a fear (i.e. they were in great fear) Prov, 15, 37; also with
the object preceding, e. g. Lam. i, 8 Jirusalem hath
sinned a sm; with a double accusative (see below, letter cc), e.g.
I Ki. I, 13 njry W IjifyK Ui me, I pray thee, give thee counsel;
I Sam. J, 6*,
g Rem. (a) Strictly speaking the only cases of tliis kind are those in which the
verbal idea is supplemented by means of an indeterminate substantive (sec
the eiamplca above). Snch n sobslantive, except in the caae of the addition
of the internal otiject to denominative verbs (see below), is, like the inBnitive
' Dillmann, GrammaHk dtr JUkie^hen Sprache, p. 349.

* With regard to Biblical Ammaic, see Kaiitsich*$ Grtmmatik des BiH. Anm,,
p. 151 aq. In other ways, also, a teodettqr nuiy be observed in later Hebrew
to make use of the loo<;er connexion by means of prcpoait tooa instead of the doaer
subordination of the noun in the accusative.
> On a kindred use of the inftnitive absolute as an internal ot^ject^ see above,
113. w.
Comp. fivtOdtt ôsAfifcir, IL x. 147.
Digitized by Google
iiY-] Direct Subordination of the Noun^ etc, 385
absolute, never altogether withont force, bnt rather lenret like it to strengthen the
verbal idea. This strengthening is implied in the indetermioateness of the internal
object, analogous to sticb exclamations as, this was a man^ I Hence it is
intelligible tfiat some inteasifying attribute is very frequently (as in Greek usually)
added to the internalobject, e.g. Gen. a;, 34 *lkD~ny n")Di HÎJ H^^^ pyXM,
hi fki (with) m txtadmg gnat miiiUKir cry; comp. the Gfeek voûr vtf^
mudfft ixjifiow Ttpfiat lujikift (Mat. s, 10); nuigiiam pugnart pi^Ham, tmUanm
vitam vivere, &c.
Fximplrs of an internal object after the verb, and without further addition, arc
Ex. aa, 5. a Sam. la, 16. Is. 42, 17. Ezek. 26, 15. Zech. i, a. Prov. 21, j6;
with an intensifying attribate, Gen. 37, 33. Ex. 33, 31. Jud. 13, 8. a Sam. 13, 36.
I Ki. I, 40 (comp. Jon. Chron. 39, 9); Is. ai, 7. 45, 17. Jon. i, 10.
4, 6. i
Zedk 1, 14. 8, a a. Dan. 11, 3; tloog witii an olject proper the internal object
oceni wiUi an attribnle in Gen. la, 17. a Sam. 13, 15 ; comp. alto Ii. 14, 6.
Jon. 4, I.An internal ot^jact with an attribute la found Ufort the verb, in
Jer. 14, 17. Zech. i, 15 (comp. also C>n. ;ô, Jqx. 32, 19. 30, 14. Ps. 139, 22").
Instead of the substantive which would naturally be expected, another of kindred

meaning is used in Zech. 8, 3.
{b)Only in a wider aoaie can nlmia tiymologiemm be aaade to lodnde r
cases in wbich the denoaainalive vcrV is connected with die noon from whidi
it is derived,eg; Gen. i, 11. 9, 14. 11, 3. 37, 7. Ezek. 18, a. Ps. 144,6, probably
also Mic. 3,4, or where this substantive, ma''c' r!r!crminate in some way, follows
its verh, e. g. Cen. 30, 37. Num. 25, II. a Ki.4, 13. 13, 14. Is. 45, 17. L.'^ra 3, 58*
and, determinate at lea:>t in sense, Jer. aa, 16; or precedes it as in a ivi. a, 16.
Is. 8| IS. 6s, 5* Zedi. comp. also En. 3, 9. In boUi cases
3, 7 ; sabstantiTe ^
is osed nithont any spcdal emphasis, merely for dearness or as a more coavenient
way of ooonecthig the ireib witii ether members of the sentence.
9. Verbs which denote speaking {crying out, weeping), or any external s
act, frequently take a direct accusative of the organ or means by which
the action is performed. In this case, however, the accusative must
be more closely determined by an attributive adjective or a noun
in the genitive. This fact shows the close relation between these
accusatives and the internal objects treated above, letter />, which also,
according to letter mostly take an intensifying attribute. On tbe

other hand, they must not be regarded as adverbial (instrumental)
accusatives, nor are they to be classed with the second (neuter)
subjects treated below in 144. /.
Examples of the aoensative following the verb are ^Î'Mi^

ttmdpeiu i.e. with a load voice, Esek. 11, 13. a Sam. 15, 25
^ vp
(after the
^
proper
'
' The Aral) prrtmmarinns ns-rfgii to the inrictcrminate cn-cs {jcnrrally an

intensive sense inmany inst-ir c^; hence the commentators on the Qordu nsoally
explain such cases by pre^xmg and tvAai bind of ! see 135. ^. . . .
* Also in Ps. 13, 4 list I sleep the sleep oi death, flJ^T is only used pregnantly
for njen nj^ (comp. jcr. 51, 39), as nipny is. 33, 15 for nipny if^^,
c c
Digitized by Google
object. Dent. 5, 19. i Ki. 8, 55); Ps. 109, a they have spoken unto njxy pw'b
a tongue of deceit , i.c. with a lying toiê; Prov. 10, 4 he becometh poor nfe^
n^'pjS dealing a fiiuk kand, i. e. wha dealeth witha kck handcomQ. the German ;
ting sekSmt vng a fine voice, fine tikhtige Klinge schlagen,

Sfimmt tingen, to
to smite a tnisty sword, SeMUiukuhe Umfm, to nm skates (i. e. to skate), and ovr
ic -i'n'ie a good Aattd, to hall, ftcExamples of the aocnaatife pRoediiig are
^B-i>^n^ n\3f] motith skaU praise {thee) with j'oxftU Hpty Fs. 6$. ;
oomp. Fs. IS, ^ where a tana iMStrumtmd with S follows the aocosatiire.
4. Manj veibs originally intransitive (sometimes even in fonn;
see above, letter a, note 2) may be ased also as transitives, in con-
sequence of a certain modification of their original meaning, which
has gradually become established by usage; comp. e.g. 3n s/rivey
but also with an accusative causam alinn'us ngerc (so even in Is. i, 17,
&c. ; elsewhere with j> of the person for whom one strives)
absolutely io he able, with an accusative to prevail over any one;

h ie incUtttd and TtC\ to have pkasure (usually with 3), with an
accusative to wisA fir tome tm or sameihing; cuhart^ then in the
sense of cMcttmien, originally always joined with "QV turn, but in later
Hebrew also with the accusative. Gen. 34, a, equivalent to cmprmere
{Jeminam)y &c.
V Rem. T, It is certainly difTicult to decide whether some verbs, which were
aherwjirds used absolutely or joined with prepositions, were not iicvcnhclcss
originally tnmsitive, and coosequently it is only the supposed original meaning,
vsvally aangned to them hi ^glidi, which causes them to appear imhvmiineK
In that case there is of course no syntactical peculiarity to be condideted, and a list
of such verbs wouM at tlie most be requisite only for practical purposes. Moreover,
it is also possible that certain verbs were oriRinnlly in use at the same time both
fii trn;: itive and intransitive, c.^. perhaps to he chtked along with to put
on (a garment), Finally the analoj^' of certain transilives in constant use may
have led to intransitives of kindred meaning being also united directly with the
aocnsatife, so that, in other word% whole daases of veihs came to be legatded
in a pafticnlar aspect as transitives. See bdow, letter^.
W 9* The modification of the origfaial meanfa^ hecomes espedally evident when even
leflexiTe conjugations {Niplt^ ffithpdel, &c) take an aoensative (cf. f 57* note 3) i
e:.g. 113^ to prophesy, Jer. 25, 13 ;

(prop, io pmt oneself round) to surround, Jud.
19, aa ; Dn^J to fight, Ps. 109, 3 (where, however, the Qal ^3^n|)J1 should he read
comp. Ps. 35, i) ; also H^jlTin toihave (somethiiig)yS>r mtstlf^ Num. 6, Ô^n
' Thus e.g. n3y to reply to ;^d/x*tô6ai jiva), to answer ay one ; n^X to command
(inhere aliquem) ; "12] ^ remember ; T\\\> (also with S) io wait for any one (to expect
any one) ; to hritit^ glad tidings to any cue (see the Lexicon) ; ^lt3 and P|it3
to (ommit adultery tâdulterare matronam) j 13^ to sene (^colere) ; y^)^ to becomt

suretyfor . and many others.
Digitized by Google
117.] Direct Subordination oftlie Noun, etc, 387
U takt MHoe coe fir omtt^ at a f^ssadm, Ii. 14, ^S^nn to mate wonut one ;
am otjta tftr^t Gd. 37, 18$ ÛlTin strip a thing pffoHtta/t Ex. 33, 6;
la^nn t^hrmgrn <MMW^/Ar 4M^r of aay one, mjKrhim; IJ^n 0MJaSir iSff
somethings Job 37, X4. Cf. I 54./

3. So also it onlf owing to modification of the original meamng of a verb X
(except where the expression is incorrect, and perhaps derived from the popular
lanjâge), when sometimes the remoter object (otherwise intro<luct;(l by b) is
directly subordinatcil in the form of an accu<?ative suffix, e.g. Zcch. 7, 5, DiVH

'inpV didyc fast at all tiiilo nu^ even
^3t< to vk ? as though to say, have ye bt-Jasted
me? have ye reached me with yourfastingt Still more slranjê is
he (the orphan) grew up to me as to a father; comp. Is. 27, 4. 65, 5. Jer. 31, 3,
and in Anmuk Dan. 5, 6 ; bot ^3riri3 33|3n )nK Jo&. i.^, 19 b to be ifded at
a doable aceonliTe after a verb of giving. In Is. 44, ai, instead of the Niphlal,
lead ^JBbn ; in Exek. i% 3 either Vnl9^ b to be leod with Olshansen or O^jrHp'S
(and pteviontlr nkj) with Smend; in Ps. 4a, 5 n^tl or OT^.
4. Whole classes of verbs, which, according to letter v above, are regarded as
y
transitive, either on nccotmt of their original meaning or (for tiae sake of analogy)
by a modification of that meaning, are
(a) Verba indmndi and f.xiiendi, as C'S^ to put on, C2"'S to put off a garment.
HTy to put on ornaments, to adorn oneself with (cf. also 2"! D*i'3'J 0 ou/osid
hi Îd, Ex. a8, 20). Al&o in poetic expressions such as Vs. 65, 14 ^'<i'27
ft^Vn pasturu an datkii wUh Jheks, comp. Ps. 109, 29 ; 104, a (HC^)
Verba rtyîor and inopiae (also called verba ajsMsAwft* and defkUmii), as
{b) jer
U fuB of somethbg, Ex. 8, 17 ; here^ and also freqnently elsewhere, consUned
with TIK, and hence evidently vrith an accasative; Gen. 6, 13; with a personal
object, r,x. 15, <) my lust shall he satisfied upon them with an ncctisativc /m ; <
the verb for the sake nf emjihasis, e Ts. T, 15 your handf ^nSd D^C^ y//// of
bhod, comp. Is. aa, 2 ; so also the P>'iph. to fill oneself 7vith something, e.g.
Gen. 6, 11. Ex. i, 7 (where the object is connected by rifct) ; Is. a, 7 sq. 6, 4-
Prov. 3, 10; fructified with. Num. 5, 38; swarm with.
Gen. I, 30. 31. Ex. 7, aS; ya"^ (J?') ^ full of Is. i, 11. Joel a, 19. Prov.
13, II; 13| heWHt stirmgy t9 wax mighty in something, Job ^1,7; {HB t atter*
yCpflp wiik something, Prov. 3, 10 (with the object preceding) ; prop, fa descend,
poetically also ia pmr dmm, U aoeirfiaw with something (oomp. m Gnck mp^piw
Msigp, tixim arifw), e. g. Lam. 3, 48 ^y^f lÂ ^^J'S
'"'^''^ 9* rumteiA dtwn
wiik riven ef water; i, 16. Jer. 9, 17. 13, 17. Fs. 119, 136; so also^^n ^ nm
aver with, tejhw with, Joel 4, 18 ; bl^ta gush out v it/i. Jer. 9, 17 ; 5)03 to drop,
to overflow with, Jud. 5, 4. Joel 4, 18 / rPB /o ^râ>t forth, Ex. 9, 9;

/o overflaiv, to pour forth, but aho (transitively) to overflow with. Is. 10, aa;
2^3 to bud with, Prov. 10, 31 ; so perhaps also ">2V to pass over, to overflow with.
From the idea of eoverin^ oneself with something, we might also, if nccessar)-,
explain Ex. 30, ao ^.^^1! ^^^y tkemsehes with water; bnt the
reading b ^ply to be enendcd to the ordinary
c c a
Digitized by Google
a88 The Parts of Speech [117.
Jer. 5 a8 ; X fi^^ Anot 5, 3.Eipadidly bold, bat still oa the

aaalogy of tbe mbove examplei^ b Is. 5, 6, wbere it is said of a vineyard
rrttft ^^pe^ bta a shall come up (it shall be overgrown) wUh Mtn and tkoms;
comp. Prov. ?4, 31, and still more holtlly, Is. 34, 13.
(tit With tlie opposite idea, "tDH to be iu rra/// cf^ to lack, Gen. l8, aS;
btrtaved of (as fhongh it were to lose). Gen. 37, 45. Tn Jos. 22, 17 even
(prop. VMS there too little for us of . . .7) being equivalent to a verbum inupiae
(had we too little of ... 7) is coostnied with a accosative; c,Neh. 9, 3a.
hh (0 Several verbs of dm^kî tiie accmative is ibii caae ezpreea dfher the
plaoe or the thing 4tf which or teiA whidi any one taniea; thaa Gen. 4, ao after
cf. f ttS./; Jnd. 5, 17. Is. 33, 14 after 14 Is. 33, 16 with \Slf\ or even
;
the pers<Mk (the people) with whom wsf one dweUs or is a guest* as Fs. 5, 5. ito, 5
after lU.
ec 6. TUv aectuaUffa (usually one of the person and one of the thing)
are governed by
(a) The causative ebnjugaiions (Pfih HipKU^ sometimes also
Pilptlt e.g. ^2)|>3 Gen. 47, 12 and elsewhere) of verbs which are
simply transiiivc in Qal, and hence also of verl/a mducndt and fxumdt,
&c. (comp. above, letters a and w, and also j*, z\ e.g. Ex. 33, 18
'i'lbSTiS ^3Snn show me, I pray ihee, thy ghry. Thus very
frequently TT'"" to came some one to knau) something ;
li?!' ^/v,
oHquem altquid, &c.; comp. further, Gen. 41, 42 fc'ir^Tp SX) V'^^
and he caused him to put m vethires of Jim Hum {he array^ km m
veshtret, ice); comp, in the opposite sense* Gen. 37, 93 (both accusa*
tives alter introduced by HM); so with kVd to fU, to fill ^
with something, Gen. si, 19. 96, 15. Ex. a8, 3 ; ^ to gird 9im^
one with something, Pft. 18, 33 "^^Jf to ermm^ Ps. ; 8, 6 and elsewhere
isn to catise some one to lack something, Ps. 8, 6 ; to feed some
one with something, Ex. 16,32; to make some one drink
something, Gen. 19, 32 sqq.
dd (^) Many verbs (even in (Jiu) which express an influence upon
the object through some external means. The latter, in this case,
is attached as a second object They are especially
a (a) Verljs which express amerimg, eUthimgt aoeriayiHg't *>29 Ex. '9^ 9* nif
Ex. a6. 39 and elsewhere, nÔ Ezck. 13, 10 sqq., *1D^ Ps. 5, 13; oomp. also
on Jos. 7, 25 and ebewhere; hence .-ilso verbs which expicas so-jdng
Crit Ja(1. 9, 45. Is. 17, 10. 30, 23)* pittniiMg (Is. s, a), atmmHi^ (Pa. 45. 8) with
anything.
{0) Expreiaions of giving, thos |ri3 Jos. 15, 19 wbere the accasativc of the
thing precedes ;
endowing, HQT Gen. 30, ao ; and its opposite taking away, as
Prov. 23, 33 ; f Ueu some erne with som^hmg^ Geo. 49^ 25. IM. t, 14 g
Digitized by
1170 Direct Subordination of the Noun, etc. 3P9
to giv graciously, ]ZT^ Gen. 33, 5 ; to sustain (i. e. to support, to maintain, tu
fiuniBli) tuiih anything, e.g. Gen. 27, 37. Ps. 51, 14 ^TJpp): Jud. 19, 5 OJ?9)'
to do aomethiitg to otu, Gen. 50, 15. 17. i Sun. 24, 18; comp. also
tOomo to meet <n^ om witA wcmdHtdag, Ft, at, 4, to r*p^ tome one iritk
soioetlriDg (withtwo Aociuttives, Ps. 35, la. Pniv. 13, ai), tnd for the tecnafttive
of the peiaOB oomp. fZ, kocom vpmrtip nvi. In a wider sense we may alao include
such phrases as ihejf hunt every mam Mis brother rcilh a mt, Mic. 7, a; to shoot
at one with arrmvs, Ps. 64, S ^though this is againat ihe accents'', iSrc.
(7) Expressions of asking some one for something, desiring something from
ome one (^^^ DenL 14, a6. Fa, 137, 3) mumering any one anything (H^^ Mic.
;
6, ( tnd elaewheie; comp. ia Ho/t other ooojneatioiiB 13^ prop^ frâi

rtdien with an accnaative of tiie penoo, i Ki. la, 6 and elaewheie, also in the
sense of anfumncing; sometimes also TVS to dulart aomeîng to some one,
Job 36, 4 and elsewhere, for ^ T|ri); tV^ teeiyoinapenonwome^biag,Ex,34,î.

Dent. I, i8. 32, 46. Tor. 7, 33.
(8) Expressions which mcin to make, to builJ, to fonn something cut 0/iomtihing \ hh
in such cases, besides the accusative of the object proper, another accusative is usctl
for the matciiai ol which the thine is made, eg. Gen. a, 7 D^hSn niPl^ ">Jf'*l
n^p^rrfp na^ O'lMjTTl^ and Yakwtk Godformed man of the dust of the ground;
ao wi& ijr also b'î KL 7, 15; fiiither Ex. 3S, 3 nC'TO nbj '^
flMMfr tkemfmaie he of hast (for another explanation of the acenaative fW^,
ItognJarieally poasibte hot exdnded bf the contest, see below, letter ii with M)
con^. Ex. 35, 18. a8. a6, i. i4aq. 39^ a^, l. 36, 8. i Ki. 7, 27 ; with a preceding
accusatfre of the material, Ex. 25, 29 ?q. 2. Deut, 27, 6 TODFi frtobjp^ 0*3Q||
rrin^ na^pn^ ^ uukemm stoma Shalt thou build the odtar of the Lord,
(r) VerbB vhich expfcss makings prârmgt fimimg Uq aiijrthiiig, it
along whh the object proper, take a second acciuatiTe of Ihe product,
e.g. Gen. 27, 9 n^rpsoQ onk ri&^ I wtV make Ihem (the kids) into
savoury meat ; comp. Gen. 6, 14. 16. Ex. 26, \h, 30, 25. 32, 4.
Is. 44, 15. I Ids. 8,4. I Ki. 18, 32 nan? D*33Krrn n33>1 and he built
the stones (inio) a?t altar; so also "^^K, with two accusatives, to bake
something into something, Ex. 12, 39. Lev. 25, 4; (prop, to sit
up for something, comp. Gen. 27, 37. 28, 18. Ps. 39, 9, and
Dnn Gen. 31, 45) to change inio something, Jos. 8, 28. Is. 50, 8.
51, 10. Mic. I, 7* 4, 13 with two accusatives of the person (to
t^potHtt prtmole any one to the podtion of a . . Is. 3 7; is also

used in' the same sense with two accusatives, Gen. 17, 5, and
I Ki 34 ; as a ruk, however, the description of the position, and
II,
also frequently of the product, is Introduced by I' io, 119. /; also
[* This occurs also in Syziac, see Knos, Chrest, p. 87, 15; and adll more
extensively in such languages as the Dyak. The Seoiitic lai^pagea dislike
adjectlTol fomuitioas to indicate the matecial*G.VV.C.]
Digitized by Google
390 The Parts of Speech. Ci "7-
riT io make a thing so and so (Is. 5, 6. 26, i ; with a personal object,
Ps. a I, 7 91, 9); } to make dark, Am. 5. 8. Of the same class
also are instances like Job 28, 2 n0ru 19^ a shne ihty smdt
inh hrasa i KL 11, 30 tr|^ tTjf^ ''<^
gannent) ^tWrf / cf. Is. 37, 36,* accusadve of tbe product

before the object proper, after Xi9$!&Th to lay wasU, On a second
object with verba smHtndi (as VT^ to know something to be something*
Eccles. 7, 25 ; ntn to see ^ find to he, Gen. 7, i ; SB'n to esteem one to be
something, Is. 53, 4, elsewhere always construed with ^ or 3), cf. letter h,
hk Kem. At first sight some of the exnini'lcs ^'ivcn above apj^)ear to be identical
ia character with those treated under letter kh ; thus it is pa&$ible, e. g. ixi
I Ki. 18, 32, by a translation whidi eqoally suits the sense, he builtfrom the status
em edtOTt to explain nixo at the neater object end D'j:i(<n'ntt ee aa aocuudTe
of the mateilaly and the oonstnwtion would then be exactly the Mune aa in Dent a 7, C
In lealitf, however, tiie fundamental idea ia by no meant the aame; Not Uiat
in the Uving language an accusative of the material in the one case, and in the
other an accusative of the product \verc consciously distingtiished. As Driver
(Tf'rfs^s, 195) rightly observes, the remoter accusative in both cases is, strictly
speaking, in apposition to the nearer. This is especially evident in such examples

aa Ex. so, 25 tkem Mlt not kmU ihem (the ilonea of the attar) H^l as keim time*,
c<Hnp. also Gen. i, 27. The main
whldi of the two accoaativea, aa bong
point is,
prinuurtty affected (or aimed at) by the aaion, is to be made the more prominent
and on thu point neither the position of the words (the nearer object, mostly
determinate, as a rule follows immediately after the verb), nor even the context
admits of much doubt. Thus in i Ki. 18, 32 the treatment of the stones is the
primary object in view, the erection of the altar for which ihey were intended
is the seoondary; in Dent. 27, 6 the caile ia rerened.
// {d) Finally, the second accusative sometimes more closely determines
the nearer object by indicating the part or member specially aflected
by the action e. g. Ps. 3, 8 /or thou hast smiiim all mine enemies
^ (as to) the cheek bone, equivalent to upon the cheek bone; comp.
Gen. 37, %i lei us noi mik him in ike lefe^ Le. let 11a not kill
him; Dent, aa, a6. a Sam. 3, 37; also with Gen. ^ 3, 15; with
Jer. a, 16 ; m poetiy the object specially concerned is, by a bold
construction, even placed first, Dent 33, 11 (with X^)-
* Comp. the very pn^gnant ej^ression of the aame character in V% 21, 13

09E^ ^Dn^J[l "^f^ fhem skaU make them (as) a neeh, L e. then thalt enmie them
to turn their necks (badcs) to me; similarly Pg. 41 (2 Sam. 22,41. Ex. 23, 27);
*1?.V nrina ^ît then hast given mine enemies nnte me or a baeh; comp.
Jer. 18, 17.
' Analogous to this is the (7xÂ<a xaO' ôp ttol arl iUfo$ in (jreek epic poetry,
e. g. voiuv fff iiro$ ^vyt tpttos Hoyrvt^.
Digitized by Google
ii8.] Looser Subordination 0/the Accusative. 391
{ 118, The Looser SuiarduuUtan ^ iAe Aceusaiiot to ihe Verb*
1, 7 he various forms of the looser subordination of a noun to the a

verb are distinguished from the different kinds of the accusative
of the object ( 117) by their specifymg not the persons or things
directly affected by the action, but some more immediate cireumianee
under which an action or an event takes place. Of such circumstances
the most common are those of phece^ ime, measure, cause, and finally
the maimer of performing the action. These nearer defimtions are,
as a rule, placed a/Her the verb ; they may, however, also precede it
Rem. That the cases thus loosely subordinated to tb.e \ erN arc to be regarded ^
as (ucvsaiives, is seen first from the fact that m certaia msiances the ncta
aeemttOvi (ntt) may be prefixed ; secondly from the fiiet that in one foim of the
^ easHs led a termination Is employed, in which (according to ft 90. ^

the old aocnsatival endio^ It preierved ; and finally from the conaitency with
whidi classical Arabic puts tlMW neaier defimtiooe to die aoeuMdve (which may
be recognized by its form) even under circumstances wfalch one WOOld be m
rather inclined to expect a nominative in aprnsitinn.
The relatioa subsisting between the circumstantial accusative and the accusative C
of the object is especially apparent when the former (as
a statement of the e. g. in
goal after a wb
of modon) ii immediately connected with its verb. But even
Ae mwe looa^ ccmwctod dicnmstential definitions aie certainly to be rûded as
originally objects of a fOfcmlng word habitually omitted, only that the coMdoae-
ness of this closer {government was at length lost, aiul the accosadve mose and
more acquired an independent value as a cams advtrbialis.
2 The accusative serves to define more precisely the place d

{aceus, loci), either (a) in answer to the question whHher? after verbs
of motion', or (5) in answer to the question where f after verbs of

being, dwelling, rcsling, &c. (but also after tiansitive verbs, see the
examples), or finally {c) to define more precisely the extent in
space, in answer to the question haw far? how high? how much ? &c.
Instead of the simple accusative, the locative (sec above, 90. c) ' is frequently g
found in the cases mentioned under letter /(sometimes also in those under letter^)
or the preposition "^K", especially before persons as the aim of the movement^
or 2 usually
,
to express being at a place.
Examples of â) : iTl^n tt3f3 l^t us go out into the Jield, i Sam. 20, 11; comp. f
(Sen. a7, 3. 31, 4. Job 39, 7; l^^tN? '^^^ S''
Tanhisk, 2 Chron. 20, 36;
^ So commonly in Sanskrit; in Greek only poetically, e.g. 11. L 317 xnaffij

d" oi/pavdr tKv : Komam proJUisci.
in Latin, c. g. rus ire,
* Hence e. g. in i San. 9^ a6 the Uuora leqiuiet nain instead of theiT'M. 3in.
< So in Jud. 19, 18 ibr ^ DT'^K the hettcf feadlDgb/ri^.
Digitized by Google
392 Tke Paris of Speech,
comp. Gen. lo, ii. 13, 9. 24, 37. 36, 33. 31, 21. Ex. 4, y, 17, la Jud. i, 36.
a Ki. II, 19. Nah. i, 8 Ps. 134, 3 ; with fHj Jos. 6, 24; wifh (lie orritf. /(Mf
emphRticallj pieoeding (cf. Driver on i Sam. 5, 8), i Ki. a, a6. b. 23, 1 3. Jer*
a 10. so^ (S. 3a, 5 ; widi Kfa (m the sense of oggndi equivalent to KiS,
compb ( 1x7. 41, note a) the pmomai aim also is poetieally added in tiie accusative,
Esdc 33, II. 38, II. FroT. 10, 34. 38, aa. Job 15, 31. ao, as; but in the last
passage it is better taken as an nccusative of the object (comp. the German einm
ankommcti, uberkommen). See also Ncm. 10, 36 (where D'C* can hardly be
transitivt) ; Jtid, li, 39. I Sam. 13, 20. Finally, comjx also the use of T.J'Ji for
n^t^ . . . whifher, Num. 13, ay. The accus. loci occurs after a passive,
e.g. Gen. Ii, 15.
g Examples of (^) : Glji. 38, II remain a ividow n*3 in thy Jaihcrs home ;
comp. Gen. 24, 33. i Saa;. 17, 15. 3 Sam. 3, 33. Is. 3, 6. Hos. 12, 5. Mic. 6, 10.
2 Chron. 33, 20; ^nkn nria im /pi/ 4oor^ Gen. 18, I. 10. 19, II and fre-
qaently. At observed by Driver on i Sam. a, 39, accnsatives of tiiis Idnd aie

almost without exoeptfoo (but cf. 16, J. a Chron. 33, so) connected vrith
a noun in the genitive. In all the above examples, however, the aoensative may
have been prefiened to the natural construction with 21 for euphonic reasons, in
okIct to avoid the combination of such sounds as '33 and 'EJ3 ;
comp., moreover,
Gen. 2, 14, 4, 16. Ex. 18, 5. Lev. 6, 8 (n^TOTI instead of the usual nnSTOH
Ex. 29, 13 &c.) ; Dent, i, 3. 19'. 1 Sam. 1;, 26. i Ki. 7, 8. Pror. 8, 3. 9, 14.
On Is. I, 30 sec 116. /; on 2B'J, with the accus. Uxi, see 117. bb. On the
other hand, in Dent 6, 3, according to the LXX, a verb of giving has dropped
out before fl^.
j| iamp1ct<^(^): Gen. 7, 20 fifteen embits upward did tke wattnprfoaU; Gen.

31, S3. 41, 40 iqo HjK M@9n pn Mffy in tke tkrMU tnU I be greaier tkan
tkom; Dent, i, 19 we went (tbrongh) all ikai great a$id ierr&le wUdemest; comp.
Job 29, 3. Of the Sune kind also arc such cases as Ex. 16, 16 (tucordiHgio the
number of your persons, for which elsewhere "iSDob is used) i Sam. 6, 4 (with ;
the accus. preceding); 6, 18. 2 Sam. 21, 2a Job 5. statement of weight

is pot in the accusative in 2 Sam. 14, a6.
I 3. The accusative is employed to detennine more preciseljtbe Urn

{flcctis, iempan's), (a) in answer to the questioii terto? e.g. ike
di^, le.an tke (in qtiestion), oi thai tme, but also on ikit deg^t
i. e. lihdqy^ or finally by day, equivalent to lilce ai eveningt
nociu, "t^l3 fVf Ike mornings early, Ps. 5, 4 and elsewhere, D^'^}? at
noonday, Ps. 91, 6; comp. also "^n^ tS^ on one and iJic same day^
Gca. 27, 45: also in slap, Ps. 127, a; D^Vb n^p n^nn {^{^rf
'^13 at the btginntng (/ barley harvest^ 2 Sam. a l in Stating a date,
)
9j
Gen. II, 10. 14, 4 tn the UUrlemik year.
k (h) In answer to the question hm hng? e.g. Gen. 3, 14 and
In Ps. 2, 1 3 7|^^ is not to be taken as an amis, loci {on the way), bot as an
(ucus, oj respect {juUh regard to the way) ; see below, letter m.
Digitized by Google
1 18.] Looser Subordination ofthe A ccusative. 393
elsewhere, TJ? 'PJ^l aî ike dqyt if iky life; 7, 4 y^rij^ ^1 oik/ *
ftriy mghis; 7, 94. 14, 4. 15, 13. ai, 34. 29, 18. Ex. 30, 9 (fir
fix days); 23, 15. 31, 17; D^^V for ever^ i Ki. 8, 13; also with
the accnsative made determhate, Ex. 13, 7 twn nyne^ throughout
the stvtn dayi in qucbiiuii, mentiontd immediately before ; comp.
Jud, 14, 17. Dcut. 9, 25.
4. The accusative is sometimes used of abstract ideas to state the /

reason {accus. causae), e. g. Is. 7, 35 ihou shaU not come ihilher ri^^
"^Vf fir fiar of briers*
ft. Finally the accusative is used very variously (as an aecus, m

aiverhiaUs in the narrower sense) in order to describe more precisely
the manner in whicli an action or condition takes place. In English
stich accusatives are mostly rendered by in, with, as, in the firm or
manner of . , according to, in relation tOy rvith rtgard to. For
more coiucnient classification we may disiinguish them as
(a) Adjectives expressing conditim, placed afUr the veib to describe more fi
accurately sonic bodily or other external state, e.g. Is. ao, a Vfalking^^r^^ D*l"i^
naktd and barefoot ; comp. verse 3. 8, 31. Gen. 15, 2. 33, 18 (0,^^)* Jud. 8, 4.
Mic. X, 8. Ps. 15, 3 (uolm Dipn be a mtbstaotive and directly dependent 00
- he that wtdhah in uprightness) ; 107, 5. Job 30, a8 ; after an accnifttive,
e. g. Dent 15, 18 ; to ipcdfy some nental ftnte, e.g. Gen. 37, 55 i?gif^'^Bffert
die vert) (and then with a certain cmphaiit), Am. a, 16. Job i, ti. Eodei. 14;
Lev. 20, aOi Job 35. 37, 19. 31, 26 (unless be a snbitantive) ; Rntb i, at
(HK^D parallel with the adverb D^^.)* ^ 7 text is clearly corrupt.
Those examples are especially instructive in which the adjective expressing a

conditioaj, althonph referring to several, is nevertheless used in the singular, e.g.
Job 34, 10 ^D^n D*ny riaitd, i.e. in the condition of one naked, they go cUtoiU
comp. verse 7 in 1 3, 1 7 and Is. 30, 4 the singular occurs afUr a ploral
; object.
This coottnictioa clearly proves that the tern expressing the condilian is not
oonodved as being in apposition, bat as an indeclinable adverb.
C^) Pkotidples, again dtber efier Hbn mb, Gen. 49, 11. Nam. 16, 17. iSani.
^
J, 18. Jer. 3, 37. 43, 3. Ps. 7, 3. Job 34, 3. Csnt S, 8, or Ufore it, Ex. 3, 18. Is.
37, 19. Exek. 36, 35. Ps. 56, 2. 92, 14- Prov. 20, 14; comp. also the substantival
use of the participles Niph'al niK"]i3 in a fearful nmnner (Ps. 139, 14) and
in a "wonderful manner, Job 37, 5. Dan. 8, 24 - Al o participles in
connexion with genitives, as 'Î.i'nnp Gen. 3, S (comp. also i Ki. 14, 6), are
to be regarded as expressing a coudmon and not as being in apposition, since
in the latter case they wonU have to take the artielew>-In a Sam. 13, ao. 1 Ki. 7,
and Ibbw a, 10 the ej^HioHve WSm (eqaivalent to the Gennaa und tmar) is
also prefixed to the paxtidple. In Pa. 69, 4 for ^Tfff nad ^n^.
{c) SQltantive8^ in tihe most varied nhtioBt: thas, aa describbg an external q
' Comp.
above, f loa on certain substantives which have completely beeome
adverbs; and f 1x3. il and i on the adverbial use of the bfinitive absdnte.
Digitized by Google
394 The Parts of Speech, H"8.
oonditioD, e-e. Mic i, 3 T(dr\ ^sbn mdihmr skaU walk htughtily (u
oppoMd to nfn^ Is. fc^ 14); L(nr.6, (iocbb. before the veibas wUeavemi^tkii)^
Dent 3, 9. 4, IX. Jnd. 5, ai. U. 57, a. Pkov. 7. 10. Job 31, 96. Lam. i, 9;
sUting the positloa of a disease, i Ki. X5, S3 Ju dismted lySTÎ^ wa ^ ^
fctt (a Chron. 16, la v!>!ll2l) aoalogoiiB' to the cases discussed in { 117. /T and
f lai. </((/); as dcscribinjj a spiritual, mental, or moral condition, e.g. Num.
3a, 14. Jos. y, 3 OC^? "^3 offoni, I Ki. aa, 13 ;
comp. Ex. a4, 3. Zepb.
3, 9), I Sam. 15, 3i. 2 Sam. 33, 3. Jcr. 31, 7. H08. la, 15. 14, 5. Ps. 56, 3.
58, a. 75, 3. Prov. 31, 9. Job x6^ 9. L4ua. i, 9; Lev. 19, 16, &c., tn the exprcft'
sion ^^21 IJ^n to go md dawn as a taUrktartri alio fl^ wnemansy Gen.
up
34, 35. Esek. 30, 9; D^l^ v^rigkifyt Pk. $8, a. 75, 3 (in both plaoes btftre
(he Terb); as stating the age, .g. z Sam. a, 33 (if tfie text be right) XS'^f^ WDJ
ih^ skalldU^ MM, Le. when fhey be tnen; oomp. I Saflft. a, iS C1||Q).Ib.65, so^
and Gen. 15, 16; as spediying the nnmber more accnntel/f e.g* Jer. 13, 19
D^li^f^ mheUifi comp. Dent 4, a;, a KL 5 a. Jer. 31, 8; as statiqg the oob>
sequence of the action, Lev. 15, 18, &c.
^ The description of the external or internal condition may follow, in poetry,
in the form of a comparison with some well-known class, e.g. Js. Ji, 8 JT^tt '^P!!
and he nud as a lion; comp. Ps. 22, I4. Is. 22, 18 0^13 Itkc a hair ; Is. 24. aa.
Zech. a, 8. Ps. 11, I (unless l^Bif be vocative"); tS, 9 /> unless the force of the
preceding 3 is carried on, as in W. 90, 4; ; i s. 144, a. job 34, 5 ^CK'JS, before

the mb) ; 41, 7 shut up togtthtr as with a close seal^.
S 0. To the expressions describing conditioii belong finally those
noans which are introduced by the comparative particle f\ since the
7 is to be regarded as originally a substantive * in the sense of awiwmi,

kmd (tJifAir), standiiig in the accusative (so that f is equivalent to
0$ a kind of, a/ier iht mamur ^ accvrdmg to\ while the following
noun represents a genitive governed by the From this, which
is the proper meaning of the 3, may be explained its power of
representing a great many pregnant relations, whith in 1 n-liali
* It is, as a matter of fact, permissible to speak of the above examples as

(omparaiio dtcurtoia, but must not be assumed that the comparative particle 3,
it
which is otherwise regularly prefixed (sec letter /), has actually dropped onL
*Ontheaieof3asa prefix, cf. $ xoa. r.
* Schwabe tmh seinem Wtsm tmd GdnuuA um mUtetUm, JCamm ^

vmrdigtf Hall^ 1883) has recently again cwrtetted diis eqtlanation (which is
defended eq>ecially by Fldtdier). He, with Gesenius and fiw^, placet ^ as

a preposition on the same footing as 21 and f>, and believes it to be probably
connected with the stem }YS as well as with ^ and The above view of 3 as
a substantive of course docs not imply that the language as we have it is still
in every case conM-ious of ibe sub'stnntivnl meaning. On ^ in nomencal State*

mcQts, m the scusc of aifoui, nearly^ sec the Lexicon.
f 1 19.] Subardinaiton o/Nouns to ihe Verb, etc. 395
can only be rendered by the help of prepontions'. Thus the
compftrison may refer to
(a) The fbtu, e.g. ts. 5, 17 D^3*73 after HU mmtmr ^ ie, ox im theirpasimn ; t
33, i$mei}xiiweMl^mihsemg^(kekmrleis s8, ai. 99, 7 fli^njp i dhMM.
{b) The time, eipedally in the conneiifm tlSm Ûr the manner the day, ^
eijuntlcnt to m in the dtfy, I>* 9i 3. Hoa. 9, s ^ ^ - 5i> 9*
Hos. 2, 17. 9, 9. 12, 10. Am. 9, 11; comp ,
moreover, Lev. a), 13. Is. 17, 6.
Job 5, 14. 29, 2, and the expressions D^fa DV3 as day l>y day = as in former
days, I Sam. iS, 10; DyD3 DyD3 as at other times, i Sam. 3, 10, Sec, il^KG
as in jormcr years, 3 Ki, 17,4; cf. i-'3. <. Of a different character
is the use of 3 as a simple parucK of time, e. i^. Gt-n. 18, 10 n*n JIJ^S <// /-'i/j
time (not time), whca it lives at;aiii, i.e. at the end of a year;
ITID n^fS to-merrm at this tim* ; comp. ^3, 5, and the ftequent coonexioa
of 3 with the infinitite construct to otprest a dtefinlte time, Goa. la, 14. 37, 34.
Ex, 9, 39, &c
{e) Thitferten,^g,Geai,iî\dk0uldhedeaivHtheursiaerayn^kaharl^ V
id) The /Amv* Ii. io 14. Fa. 33, 7. Job a8, 5 KMriOp or a /re, le. at
it were by fire (comp. Is. i, 35 or with Job 39, 93 "^p^ ox for /Af
n?;;/ they waited for me) ; Job 38, 14 in garmeni) % 38, 30 faKf oito Hm*
(the waters are contracted in freezing^.
Rem. According to the earlier grammarians, 3 is sometimes tised pieonastically, X
i.e.not to indicate a similarity (as in Lev. 14, 35 as it were, Le. something Hie),
but simply to introduce the predicate ijâ^ veritatis), e. g. Neh. 7, 2 for he was
flOM 1^^(t^ a faUHM mani
Sam. ao, 3 yb'D3, Ijun* i, ao nit33.
cf. x Such
ft pleonasm ia At tite moat a Ka^ veriMis can
of cotine oat of the qnestiOD.
only be admitted hi the aenae that the compariaon ia aomedmea introdticed by
f
with a certain empharis (eqnivalent to in every respect like) ; thtis t^K3
in Neh. means simply of the nature of a faithful man, i. e. as only a faithful
7, 1
man can be; comp. Num. 11, i. Is. 1, 7. 13, 6. Hos. 4,4. 5, 10. Ob. 11. Job
24, 14. 37, 7. Lam. I, ao. 2, 4; also D^pS in such passages as Ps. 105, la yea,
very few ; but e.g. in Is. i, 9 only just, a very small ,
119. The Subordination of Nouns lo Ike Verb by means of

Prepositions,
L In general As is the case with regard to the looser subordina- a

tion of nouns to the verbal idea ({ 118)^ so also their subordination
by means of prepositions is used to represent the more immed iate
* It would be altogether unsuitable here alao (aee above, note on letter to
assume a loss of the preposition. Such examples as Is. i, a6 (n3btP33 and

n^nrinS), Lev. a6, 37 (*3Ep3) are to be explained from the fact that here the
preposition and substantive had already become simply one word before the 3
was pretixed. We find also ^y3 Is. 59, 18, 63,7. Ps. 119, 14, and a Chron.
3a, 19; cf. Driver on i Sam. 14, 14 ^^33), where the text is wholly corrupt.
Digitized by Google
396 The Paris of Speech. [119.
circumstances (of place, time, cause, purpose, mea.ûrc, asscH-icition,

or separation) under which an action or event is accomplished. In
the case of most prepositions some idea of a relation of space underlies
the cdistructton, which then, in a ^v!der sense, is extended to the

ideas of time* motive, or other relations conceived by the mind.
On die orig^ of llie pvepoMtions and the original cMc^relatfon in which they
stand to the notins governed by them, comp. % loi, where a list of the pvqxisitioas
is given with their original meanings. Comp. also f TOa on the pirefizcs, and
% 103 on the tmion of prepositiona with aaffizea.
b 2. A not miimportant part is pkiyed in Hebrew by the cmpwnimg

of prepositions to represent more accurately the relations of pkice,
which may either precede or foBow the action. In the former case
and in the latter (which is not so frequent) "^^^ occurs before
other prepositions of place; comp. e.g. Amos 7, 15 the Lord iook me
|6(iri ^n^V/rom behind the flock; 2 Ki. 9, 18 turn tha '^^'^^ to behind
nUt le. him ihte behind me; 'QPO, HND from with . as in French .
4e chn^ ôuprh, gueigu'ua \ For further examples, see letter e,
C Rem. I. We must not regard as combined prepositions in the above sense either
those substofUives which ) nvr become prepositions only by t^f ir ^;nion with
prefixes, as ^3sS before, ^ÊD^ accmnt of (but c.
IJ/P^' '^^ from before^
Gen. 4, 1^, 5.C., is such a compound); nor adverbs^ which are also formed by
combioing words which were originally substantives (also used as }:irepusitions)
with prcpositionS| as pnO wUkoiU, Unnt) in the sense of below", abentt
^ In other caaet French, a well as English and Gennan, CAn only emphasise
oiu of the two combined ideas; thna, aoch expressions as U pnnd U ckapeau
sur la table, German and English er mmmi dm Hut vom Tisch, he takes his hat
from the table, all regard the action from ot e j oint of view only; the Hebrew
here brings out both aspects of it by means of "byo from upon, comp. e.g. Is. 6, 6.
Hence not nnriD from under, in such ex amples as
to be confounded with
Prov. 22, 37, which is a real compound preposition. In the above-mentioned
adverbs also the "flD was originally by no means pleonastic; HniRD denotes
properly the locality, regarded primarily as a place from hmtnih which something
proceeds^ and so OB* This original sense of the however, has become ao
mach obscured bj its regular combin.ition with words of place to form
independent adverbs, that it is even prefixed (evidently only on the analoj^y of
such common abverbs as "^yO, nPIDD) in cases where it is really inadmissible,
owing to the meaning of the adverb, e.g. in nj?!53lp, ^3^^D without, comp. also
such examples as *T3|tp, [t/iere), &c Since a ""JD is not
usually repeated after it appears as if "ID^D by a transpostuon of the *jO
stood for the usual "jD 13^. In reality, however, the preposition which forms
the adverb into a preposition is omitted here, as in ^^fD, nHTlD, without a

foUowing p (see above). Properly has a purely adverbial meaning ttiAm
Digitized by Google
iti^.} Subordination ofNouns to the Verb, etc. 397
(to alfo ia Gen* 27, 39. 49, 35, not from eAove). These adterbs of
place^ however, nuty beeome piepodtions bjr tiie tddltion of jl, e.g. ^ f'Vip
mtside a* rtifftrdt . . Le. outside tfsom^kinfs |> TSnPfO Mcw'm rârds . . .
i. e. under tomdJung (cf.

^ nilHUriy iMiltf /iU;' c(MW Mubr . i Sem. 7, 11),
b vr tmetkii^t frc; Tall prop. n sipwr^tUn m Mpamtkm /rom,

\. e. a/^r^ y^VM* besides. Only mely in such a cese is the b omitted for the sdce
of brerity, e. g. Job a6, 5 DJ HHTlC) beneath the waters; Neh. 3, 28 ("i^JD).
a. Real combinations of prep'-îti'^r's 'cnch retaininfj its full force) occur d

With "|D, in "inSD, nn^'D (see above) from behind something; flNO
(o)
and Dyp from 7uith (see above) p2D or niJ''3p from hctween something (with
;
motion in either direction, see e.g. CIcn. 49, 10) from before (see above) ;
sometimes also and elsewhere; "'/'yD from upon, i.e. /> from;
Iirir.*3 away from under (see foot-note 2, on p. 596).
(/3) With "bx, in ^"iHN-IjS to behind, n'lrn't'K to between; |) n*3C-'>K y^M ^

between, 2 Ki, 11, 15 ;
^ jnnp"^K without, i. e. m front of Num. 5, 3;
nnR*^t* down under ^.Jjx Job 5, 5 the two prepositions of motion are combined
in a peculiarly pregnant oaulniclfoB, Dîytr^( (he goes thither and takes it)
fittt eifthe thorns, L e. he taketh it even emteftke tkorm.
3. A general view of the union of certain verbs, or whole classes J"

of verbs, with particular prepositions, especially in explanation of
certain idioms and pregnant expressions'.
(a) "!j|t towards, properly an expression of motion or it ?rnst direction g
towards something (either in the sense of up to"!^, or into = T]in"i)Jt), is nsed
after verbs not only in answer to the question whither? bnt by a specially pregnant
construction, in an<!weT to the cuestion where? e.g. Jcr. 41, 12 they found him
0^31 D^D'bt? by the great -waters ; comp. Deut. 16, 6. i Ki. 13, ao, and a &till
MOW remarkable instance in 8, 30 DÔ^'^K QhpO'h. This combination

of two diJieicDt ideas, of motion to a place and being or acting in the place
(very plainly seen in Dent. 16,6 M to the pUtee wkkk the Lord thy God Ma//
choose . shalt thon bring thine offering and there shall thou saerifictf ftc*)* >S
the same as the Greek use of tU, If for If, the Latin in potestatem, in amicitiam
ditionemque esse, manere (Cic Verr. 5, 38; Div. 2, 14^ and elsewhere); cf. also
the conunoQ German expressions su Uansef tu Leipzig sein, u Bette liegen, &c.
itself, like Hî^hs (Syiiae mom IdH) ei6oite (adv.)i m distinsuidied

from b ^900 or fr^^D (Syriac Wit snen) ever, upote eotmilUmg.'-^k\
from . . . omoard is not Ibr |r|9, bat the aervci mcvdy (jvst like the Latin -
$tsfue in mgrne o, uspie ad, usfue ox) to indicate cqvessly die starting-point in
question, as an exact terminus a ouo Xpi place or time)*
' Al;o in i Sam. 21, 5 nnj1"7X by a pregnant constmction is irtoally de
pendent on the idea of cornim;" into, contained in the j
rectding "pNt.
' A sommary of aii the relations and senses in which a preposition may be
nsed, belones not to the Grammar but to the Lexicon.
' Cf. Mitchell, 'Tbe preposition ei* ia the JourtuI the Sodety ef BibHeal
Literature and Exegesis, t8S8 p. 143 sqq.
Digitized by Google
The Parts of Speech, [ 119.
h (^) 21 \ Underlying the Teiy tbiIou nies of tUs piqKwition b eitber tlie idea
of being or moving within some definite Tegioo, or some sphere of tpaoe or timey
or else the idea oifasUnin:: on something, dose conmxim tmfil tomeUung (alto
in a metaphorical sense, following some kind of pattfm, e. g. the advice or
command of some one, or in a comparison>, or finally the idea of relyingot deptttd-'
ing upon . . . , or even of merely striking or touching something.
t Thus the use of 3 is explained

(i) In the sense of among (in the domain of), e.g. Mic. 7, 2 ^tt ^1?^
there is none upright among men; in the sense of consisting of^ in spcctfjii^
tiw ooMtitnents of a eoUeedVe idea, c. g. Gen. 7, %\ and aU jAtfl ikd
(< Jbwlf tact* Also aHer ideas of appeatirin^j wum^tsHs^ nuH^^
oooiistfaig of)
r^nsmtii^t Mi^, tn the sense of as, in the exactly 0/ (prop, hi die sphere,
after the manner of, see above), consisting of. . tanquam, the 3 tssmfioi of
the earlier grammarians, corresponding to the Greek iv, the Latin m*, and the
French en, e. g. Ex. 6, 3 I appeared unto Abraham . . . ^^B'
Ps. 68, 5 toC^ n^3 his name is /ah (comp. Is. 26, 4^1 ; Job 33. 13 inXD WHI
but he is (manifests liimself ns'i one, i. e. he remains always the same ; Dent. 26, 5.
28, 62 CyiO ^nD3 in the condition of being fetv ; Is. 40, 10. Ps. 39, 7. 55, 19.
Comp. also such examples as Ex. 18, 4 ( Ps. 35, 2. 146, 5) ^)J^*3 as my help ^
ProY. 3, a6, perhaps also Ps. 31, 32. 37, 30 (102, 4). For the origin of all these
forms of expression Ps. 54, 6 is especially instnictiTe, since ^2003
is not meant to refer to tlie Lord as belonging t tiie D^SDD, but onlj to asoribe
to him a simfUr cbamcter, Le. tJU Lord is me whe up^M mj eomif so also
Ps. itS, 7. Jnd. IX, 35 [the plur. as in | iS4.^-f}.^Gomp. Gcsenios, Tket,
Linguae Hebr., i. 17459., and Delitzsch on Ps. 35, 3.
k (3) To introdnce the object after transitive verbs, which denote Imching, striking,
reaching to (thus to some extent a fastening on, see above) something, in English
sometimes rendered by at, on, 8cc., and in German generally by compounds with
an^ e. g. an/assen >3 ;ni< , anrSknem * 3 ftc. To the same catôry belongs
also the coostnictioii'of mbs denoting uutAerity (1]^, HT), the last
prop, ie iread cm , .*.) with a, inasmnch as die eaerdse of the andioiity is regarded
as a laying hold of the person loled; so also, the introdnction of the object bj
f
aiter certain verkt dieeudij or when the mental action is to be represented as
extending to some one or something ; e. g. 3 IClj^ to call on some one, 3 VSE^
iurare per aliquem, 3 btttS' to enquire of some one. Again, 3 iltO to look upon^
3 ypC' to hearken to (but of. also letter w), generally with the secondary idea
of participation, or of the pleasure with which one sees or hears anything, e<!pecially
pleasure at the misfortunes of others, hence 3 ilJO to sec his desire on any one or
- anything ; comp. however. Gen. 21, 16 ict me not look upon the death 0/ the chiid;
1 Sam. 6, 19 dertmte they had leaked [irreverendy] at ike ark of the Led
Closely related to this is the use of 3:
/ (3) To introduce the person or thii^ which is the object of a mmUU ac^
> Comp. Wandel, l>e paHiemlae Heir. 3 iVmMSt, s, mu, Jena, 1875.
E.g. res in fraeda eaptae^ L
* e^ things taken as spoil; see NSgdsbach, Lai*
SHUsHk, 1 133, 4.
Digitized by Google
119.] Subordination ofNouns to the Ferb, etc, 399
e.g. a P9S[v ^ cleave tnistiogly to) iomebody or loinclhiiig;
a T9SS^^kaifeOiîdeiuoin^,,; 3 nob to rgmi imw^ toinetbiiig, ftc; 3 13^

to speak of {ahouf) some one or something, Deut. 6, 7. i Sam. 19, 3 sq. &c.
(4) The ick-.i of nn action a^: r-t'ending something, with at the same time the ftl
secondary idea of participation in something, underlies finally the pariitivi use of 3,
e.g. 3 to thare in eating something, Ex. 12, 43 sqq. I^v. 22, 11; also simply
to eai, to taste of something, Juu. 13, 16. Job 21, 25 ; so also 3 DH^ to cat of, and
a nrit^* to drink ^something, Prov. 9, 5 ; 3 ypC^ to hear a whisper of stmeikingt
Joba6, 14; 3 Kb'l hoetr a short of something, Nom. tl, 17. Esdc. 18, ao>
Job 7, 13. CcMBp. also 3 to give a sMan of somethine. Job 39i 17 ; 3 n|a
to do MldiHigio, Ndu 4, 4.
(5) With the idea of toucktHgf striking against anything is natnrally coooected H
that of proximity and vicinity mar, and further that of association n ith something
comp. Gen. 9, 4 ^C'p33 with the life thereof; 15, 14. 32, it ^!>I5p3 rt'/V// my staff.
Sometimes 3 combined with a verb of motion {to come zaith somclhing") e-xprcsses
the idea of hinpfn:, e. g. Jud. 15, J Samson visited his wife with a kid^ i.e. he
brought her a kid ; Chroo. 15, 19 sqq. 16, 6.
Deut. 23, 5. I
(ti) From the idea ofcoimeadon with some^gybdog accompanied by someUiii^ O

(see letter is). Is developed, finally, die mstrwmtitai nse of a, which repiesenti
the means or instrmnent (or even the personal agent), as something with wkseh one
has associated himself in order to perform an action; comp. Mic. 4, 14 t336^
they smite 'fifh the rod; Is. 10, 24; Ps. 18, 30 ^3 by thee (so also 44,6,
parallel with "^DCB) ; Is. 10, 34. Ho?. 1,7. tj, 14 : comp. also 3 *t3y io labour
hy means of some one, i.e. him to labour at it, Ex. 1,14 .and eUewbcre.
to cause
On 3 with the passive to introduce the means or the author, see % \ i\.f.
A variety of the 3 instrumenti is 3 pretii (the price being considered as the
p
means of acquiring a thing), comp. (Sen. 33, 9. 39, 18 (''Dl?^! 3^> î' ^9*
34) 15 (^^^t3 on tkb comfition) ; 37, a8 ; alô, in a wider aense^ Gen. t8, 28 3 ySir
tko sate of; 39, 18. x Sam. %, 13.
Rem* The use of 3 imtrtumitti to introdnce the object is peculiar in andi ^

ezpicaicms as Fs. 44, ao assd tJkou iomndtt over us rm^jiya w(tk tho skadem of
death; Job 16, so On'QS n^Q th^ Aaoe opmed wide'their saoath agaissst
me (prop, have made an opening with their asauth); comp. Fs. as, 8. Ex. 7, 20
he ^fi^np ntpD3 the rod; Jos. S, 18. Lam. I, 17. Analogous to some English
expressions wc find both to f^nash the teeth, Ps. 35, 16, and to tâsh with the
teeth. Job 16, 9 ; to luink the eye, I'rov. 10, 10, anfl to wink with the eye, Prov.
6, 13; to shake the head, Ps. 22, 8, and to shake with the head, Jer. 18, 16.
Job 16, 4. In all these instances a has
the ^b ^transitive) construed with
a greater independence, and oonseqnently more emphasis than the verb con^rved
with a direct accnsatlve; the latter conveys a sort of necessary spedfieatiott of the
action, wliile the nonn introdoccd hy 3 is nsed rather as a merdy adverbial
To be distinguished
*
from 3 nJTlB^ = to Jrink from (a cup, &c., Gen. 44, 5.
Amos 6, 6), as in .\rabic and Aramaic (Dan. 2). Comp. also Iv voryjplotf (Xen.
Anab. 6, t, 4), Ik xpvawnaai nlvtiy ^3 Ezra 3, 6), in ossibus l>it>ere in Florus, and
the French boirc dam une tasse.
Digitized by Google
40O The Paris of Speech, [119.
complement. An instructive example of this is Irtp ^3 meem emiture, to utier

a voia, Ito to thunder, while in |nj i s. 46, 7 (68, .h- Jer. 13, 8), jn| has
an independent wue - he tkundereJ ivUh his tma (i. e. mightily).
f (e) tff, z leiy feoetal expreitioQ of dinetigm towards anjrthing, is used to
lepieient the moit varied reltuitns of an action or condition with regard to a penon
or tittng. On the me of !) as a periplmnfa for the gmethms fotutmis or Mtt/am
(the idea of hdonging to)i tee { 199 ; on ^ with paMive, to introduce the antfior
or the cause, see f on ^ in a purely local sense (e.g. 1|3^j> 4tf r(pA/
hand, prop, tcnoards thy ri^ Aa$td), or temporal (e.g. ntmiHig', fte.) ^
or distribatire, see the Lexicon.
The following nses of!) properly hxlong to the government of the verb:
^ (1) As a ittrfa daftz i' to introduce the remoter object ; also
(a) To introduce the dativus commodi. This dativus eommcdi (or imommodi,
e. g* YadL. 37, 1 1) is used especially in colloqoial language and in later style-
in the fonn of a pronooa wiUi ^ as an apparently pleonastic dativus sthteutt widi
many verhsp in order to give emphasis to tiie signiScanoe of the occnrrcnce
in question ftr a particular subject. In this construction the person of the pronooA
mast ahva) <; agree with that of the verbal form ^ By far the most fiteqocQt nie
of this b is with the pronoun of the snrl person after imperatives, c. g. ^V^V go,
ji^f thee away. Gen. 12. t. 22, 3. Dcut. 3, 13 (nlso in the feminine, Cant. 3. jo. xy, ;
^{j nD3 turn thie aude, 2 Sam. 2, 3i; QD^ ^VD t-jbc your jourmy, Dcu'. 1,7;
^^2V piss ye ovi'r; ^fjTTlIl fiee ! 'to save thyself). Gen. 37, 43; T|!?~'*i>J^
get thee up. Is. 40. 9; C!!^ '.38 /wr/s Dcut. i, 40; return ye, Dcut.
f, 27; T;^ "P^P r;/*- j^/. I

ant. 3, lo ; CD^ ^3E^ abide ye. Gen. 23, 5; "^jS blH
forbear thee, 2 Cliron. 35, 31 (in the plural, Is. 2, 221 ; 13n tale you, Deot.
1,13. Jos. 18, 4. Jnd. 20, 7. 3 Sam. 16, 20. and so almost rcjjularlv 'ji) "TD^H
(see above, % 5i.) tave tibi'. and ^"^0^1} take hud to yourselves ; 'jb ITO^
hi îm iiti. Cant a, 1 7 (cf. verse 9). 8, 1 4, is renwAable ; after a perfect conseentive,
I Ki. 17, 3 r Sam. s, 5; after aa imperfect oooaecative, e.g. Is. 36, 9 nOSTl)
and fmttest tJ^ tmtt^lst the jrd peiKm e.g. 3|^rn ontf m< Jwr ^bmis.
Gen. ai, i6{ oomp. Ex. t8, 96. Ps. lao, 6. 4. Job 6, 19; even after

a paitici]>le, Hos. 8, 9. In the 1st person plural, Exek. 37, 11.
/ (3) To introduce the rc^;ult n'trr '
t rbs of makiiifj. forminfj. ch.infjing, appointing
to something", ( stccming as sf>methinj; ; in short, in all those Caaes in which, accord*
ing to i 117. /Y, a second aeeusattve may also be ued.
U (4) In loose oonneiiaD vritb tome verbal idea in tfie teme of n rtfireiuo to,
with rtgard to,,<,{\ 143. i) \ to after a vtf^tm dkondi. Gen. to 13; efter
a droamslantial expression, i Ki. 10, 33; comp. Is. 36, 9; even before the verb,
Jcr. 9, To t!ic sinic clas?; belongs also the Z(Zma2I imcriptionis (untranslatable
* Comp. Gicaebreciit, Du hohr. JMpos. Lctmtd, Hille, i87<S.

* Jnst as in the Romance langnaget the Latin preposition md (Itilian before
vowels adt Fiendi 3, Spanish d) and in English to are nsed aa n periphnda for the
dative. On the introduction of the nearer object by ^, cf. { 117. n.
* SiTch expre-sions as the nnalofôus En;^H^h he phtched me ofe kit domhlotf hmt
tru tuf ^s, and tl^ like, are aocoidingly inadmissible in Hebrew.
119.] Subordination ofNouns io the Verb, ek. 401
in English, and hardly more than a mere quotation-mark) which introduces the exact
wording of an inscriptioii or title ; thus Is. 8, i wHU upon U (the words)
*inp (comp. verse 3, where the h nttiually Is not used) ; &ek. 37, 1 6*
(VN.*^ (</) \Qt origioally (according to S loi.a) prop. sât^tOion^ rcpreKiits tiolh V
the ides of iU^me, separoHm or nmvUimx frvm tomethingy snd tiut of mtHm
amayjrom something, hence nho deseti^, ^rif^/rm n pbce, Amos i, i.
(i) From the idee of t^fmr^îm b netovsUy derived on the one hend the tense w
of iiiakm)frm amt^ . . # nmrnir^t e.g. Gen. 3, t suMl as mru other 0/ ike beasts.
See; comp. 3, 14. Dent 3^, 24. I Sam. 15, 33- Ju'. 5, 24 ''so epf^rially after
the i ira of choosing out 0/* a larger cl.nss, 1 Sam. 3, 38; comp, Ex. 19, 5 and
elicwhere), and on the other hand, the &eQse of without (separated, free from . . .\
e.g.I^ 23, 3 riGK Tt^^ witkmt the bcw (i. e. without one needing to bend n how
ngsinst diem) they were made pHsMtn; oomp. Jer. 48, 45 nbO wUkna strength ;
Mic. 3, 6. Job ti, 15. 19, 36. SI, 9, slso snch exnvples as Nnm. 15, 34 far
from the ^fttf 1. e. nnobierfed bj the eoogicgsllon ; Prar. so, 3.
Here elio belongs the nse of |p after tiie idess of rtOrmttuigt wUhhohUnfJram, x
rtfuehfg moj one, fteqnendj in pv^nant expreanons, whidi we can lendsr only
hy complete final or consecutive clatises, e.g. 1 Sam. 15. 33 he hath refected thee
Tfyttp away from (being) king^ instead of ^ fli^nD (as in verse 36), thai thou hi
no longer king; comp. i Ki. 15, 13. Is. 17, i l^yp so that it is no longer a city;
Jer. 17, 16. Job 38, 11 he bindeth the streams ^330 thai they trickle not; Gen.
16, 3. 33, 6 IZjilp thai (hou ^hmlfst not bury thy dead; Is. 24, to.
The JO has a still more pregnant force in those examjiks in which the idea of y
precluding from anything is only indirectly contained in the preceding verb,
e.g. Gen. 37, I his eyes were dim DN'IO away from seeing i. e. so that he could mt
tee ; Is. 7, 8 Ephraim shall be broken in pieces QVp that it he not a people (just as
in Is, 33. I. Jer. 48, 2. 4:. I s, 83, 5 ; Lev. 26, 13. Is. 5, 6. 49, 15. 54.9-
'
Cf. O. Molin, Om frepositionen min * Bibelhebreishcn, Upsala, 1893, and
especially N. Zerweclc, Iîe htbr, Praep. min, Leipzig, 1893, who, instead of the
partitive meaning (formerly accepted by us also), more correctly takes '
separation*
as the starting-point of its various snes.
* All the partitipe mes of fD cnme nnder diis idea of lepsiatlon otiiif% lafger
Tbtts IP is nsed
efatfls. b dm smse of me^ tomithing, snd even ontt in snch
eaprendons ss and he skw . . .
^nf^ ^(^9 ('^''Ô *f*^ prvnett ef Isnul,
also
SI, 4; 4 Kt 18, 5: lUn Mnu of ihe bkod of

the huttoeh, Ex. 29, 13 and elsewhere Job S7, d my h^t doth not reproach tne
;
for any, i. e. for one, of my days; 38, r 2 ^^îp one ^ thy days, i.e. OPtr in
thy life (this ex{)lnnation is coiifirnied by i Ki. 1,6; comp. also I Sam. T4, 45.
35, In this way nlso, the frequently misunderstood 1 Hebrew (and Aml ic)
idiom IS to be explained, by which JD before IHJt^ TST^^ is equivalent to uiius;

e. g. Lev. 4, 2 and shall do nS^D riHt^D any otw 0/ these things ; 5, 13. Deut. 15, 7.
Eêk. 18, 10. "fD is used in the sense of the Arabic min el-hiydn or explicative
min (often to be simply translated by namely)^ e. g. in Gen. 1, 22 of ail that Mr,
1. 1, $0 far as it was, pcobnUy also Gen. 6^ s tidimsttaer ihty ehoss),
Dd
Digitized by Google
403 The Paris of Speech, '
Em a, 6a ^ (for other pregnant conatnictioiis with |p ice below, letter^ ; on ^^39

and \^ tpitkotti, cf. f 15a./*
Z (3) On the seme of molim wegffr^m anything depends the use of }S after sndi
ideal as to go away from, to bnvarf^ to be afra^ of to ftee^ to escape, to hido Û'
self from (comp. aAt/ffrw ix6, custoiitre ab), sometimes again in pregnant
expressions, e_ Is. 33, 15. On the itiea oi startingfrom anything depends finally
the very liecjueut iuumtive nse of jD en account of, in consajuence î^comp. our
that comes from . prae, e.g. ^'Qfor multitude, i Ki. 8, 3.
aa if) The two original local meanings of this preposition are upon (^ri)'
and ovot (yvip, super).
(i) Ttcm the original meaning upm is'explalned the nse of alter ideas of
tommattdu^t tomtnissiotUng IgB), ftc, inaiinnciias the command, obligatioo,
ftc is laid upon the object The constracdon is self-evident in the caae<rfAA!r
rest, lean, rely, pnss iÔH something; comp. also, for the last, sodl examples aa
Is. I, 14. Job 7, 30.53, 2 and especially 2 Sam. iS, Ji propb ai9 woold
it have been, it would have been incumbent upon me, Sec.
1)1)
(a) From the original meaning over is explained the use of after ideas of
covering, protfititig, guarding'^^
'"'P?' 1^?
combinations "^y Dni
to have compassion upon . . 7pn to j/a/r some one, arise from the
idea of a compassionate or protective bending over something. Comp. also
"bj? DnijJ Jud. 9, I'j to fght for iome one, i.e. in his defence.
CC (3) Moreover is used after verbs standing and going, to express a towerii^
Mr some one or somethmg, sometimes in phrases, in which tiie original local idea
has altogether fallen into die background, and which are therefore to be rendered
in English by means of other prepositions {by, with, before, near), e.g. Gen. 41, i
and elsewhere, Pharaoh . . stood "^tOnr^y by tho Nik (above the water level
comp. P?. 1,3), and so especially "^y 10^ in the pregnant sense to stand serving
before some one (prop, cfzêr one who sits or reclines at table) Zech. 4, 14 (comp.
Is. 6, 2, where b byt20 IS used for ; y 35rnn to present oneself hy command
before some one, Job i, 6 and elsewhere. Comp. also 12"'^y> '1^*>y (Job I, 14}
near, at ion) the side of i>ome one or something.
i
On the nse of to express dw comparative, which likewise depends on Ihe
lAtîA distanu from .,comp. bdow, i33-a; on }p as expressing the distance
(
of time from a fixed limit, in the sense of after, e. g. Ps. 73, ao f^priO after awaking
(comp. afAffTov, all ilincre), or after the lapse of. ., e. Gen. 3S, 24. IIos.
.
6, 2, and very frequently from the end of i. c. after the lapse of . . see the
Lexicon ; also for the use of jD to represent resting beside anything, like the Latin
prope abesse ab . .
* Comp. Budie, Die JMr, Mpos, *Al (^), Halle, t88a.

* Since the placing /0jf anything is an addition to it, also implies
us addition to somediing, comp. Gen. 38, 9 (31, 50); 30, 40. 3s, la (probably
n pfoverbial saying = mother and ehiidreii) ; Dent, as, 6, Abo notwitkstatidii^
is no doubt properly in addition to, c. g. Job 10, 7 although thou knowcst, prop.
in addition to thy knotvtng. From the original meaning upon is also derived that
of on account of (prop, upon the ground of) and in agreement with, according to,
since the pattern is rârded as the foundation upon which a thing stands or rests.
Digitized by Google
i 119.] Subordijiaiion oJNouns to the Verb, etc. 403
(4) Froin the original meaning aA<wr(aot, as foriiirlyexp1aiiied|mil0s^^ dd

0t lomclhing) that ariae finally all the wiona eonatntctloiui with in the lence
of itwanbf tfgumst. The origbal idea (which in manj of these coBitructtona has
hecome wholly vnrecogoitable) ttaitt fnm the view that the asmiler endeaTooit
to take up his potttion over the person attacked, so as to reach him from above, or
to ^rpower him comp. ;
especially Dip to rise op ever i. e. agaimt some one,
then with a transference of thought applied to any kind of hostile approach,
"^y DOr'^ ''^
/'V'''^
t7;^rt/f/ . . , ~hv J^^n /o encamp against . . "hv to l>e
gathered (oêthfr. to assemble ai;ainst ^Mic. 4, ii : comp. Ps. 2, 2), ; c\cij atter
verbs wiiich exprei^s a maital action, e. g. "^JJ H^n K'n to imagiiu cvii against
anyone^ fte.
4* Somelimes a preposition appears to be under the immediate ee

government of a verb, which, by its meaning, excludes such a union.
In reality the preposition is dependent on a verb (generally a verb
of motion), which, for the sake of brevity, is not expressed, but in sense
is contained in what is apparently the governing verb.
Various examples of this imOrmtio praegnam have been alteady notteed above
in ktteia x and y nodei *)0; ixa "[l^ comp. also Ps. st, aa tTDl *^'1@DI
^^ri^3^ and thou host answered and saved nu from hems tf the wild oxen
ike
(in Is. 381 i7,iriiidi Delitisch translates by thm kasilewed and delivered my tml
/rem the /r, read nsbn with the LXX) ; Gen. 25, 93. a Sam. 18, 19. Job 28, 1 2
comp. also "IP TWi Ps. 73, 27 to go a whoring from any one i. e. to be unfaithfiU
to him; '\0 V^*^ Ps. 18, 22-/0 depart wickedly from God; "^Q tSHQ fis. aS, I
to be silent from one (to turn away in silence") comp. Job 13, 13. ;
Pregnant constructions with ^"IHX : Num. 14, 24 tquivalcru to "'""HX n3^^ NjJD^
and he made full fo walk i.e. walked fullv afftr me; 1 Sain )
7 1'nr!>t VT\T\
they trembled after him i.e. uent after him trembling ; with ~pS Uen. 43, 33
"^tt RDR to twn i>! astonishment to some one (comp. Is. 14, 8); "i>{< Jjn"^
Is. 11, 10 and ( 1 '.rtiiere, to turn tm/uiringly to suinc one; "/K SjHinn Is. 4I, 1
to turn ui nieme to some uae J

lin Gen. 42, 28 to turn trembling to some
one (comp. rtttlpb to come trembling to meet, I Sam. 21, 2) ; comp. further
Jer. 41, 7. Ps. 7, 7. 2 Chron. 32, 1 ; with 21 Ps. 55, 19 he hath redeemed and
hath put avy uml in peace, exactly Itte Fk. J18, 5 ; with |} Ps. 74, 7 they kme
f.'ofaned and cast . . . even U ikegrewtd; comp. 89, 40.
5. In poetic parallelism the governing power of a preposition Ah

is sometimes extended to the corresponding substantive of the sônd
member*; e.g. 21 Is. 40, 19. 48, 14 ^ shali perftfrm hit pUamn ^333
on Bafyhn, and Ms arm shall be ta^ljf^ (for D^^jf^) tm the Chaldatam;
Job 15, 3 ; !> Is. 28, 6. Ezek. 39, 4. Job 34, 10 (perhaps also Gen,
* Similarly the force of a negative is sometimes extended to the parallel member

see 1 15a. a.
Dd a
Digitized by Google
404 The Parts of Speec^. [{ tso.
45, 8 ; may, however, be regarded here as a second accusative

according to 117. //); Is. 48, 9; "JO Is. 58, 13. Ps. 141, 9;
"T^ Is. 15. 8; nnn is. 61, 7.
ii 6. Adverbs which have acquired a substantival value are sometimes
governed bf prepositions, e.g. t^KT^ vaiih sek. 6, 10; |a>**inii
after ihu; 133 (Eccles. 8, 10. Est 4, 16) Mm/ xif and ên/ore;
ITDT hitherto.
{ ISO. VerkU Ideas tender the Gaoenmettt ef a Verb* C^^dmatim

of Compkmeniary Verbal Idea*,
a 1. When a relative verb (incomplete in itself) receives its necessary

complement in the form of a verbal idea, the httter is;, as a rule,
'
subordinated in the infinitive construct (with or without leas
frequently in the infinitive absolute, in a few instances in the form
of a participle (or verbal adjective)> or finally in the imperfect without
the copula. In these combinations the principal idea is very frequently
represented by the subordinate member of the sentence^ whilst the
governing verb rather contains a mere definition of the manner of
the acLiuii ,
coinp. letters d and ^j^^ below, and 1 14. , note 3.
b (a On the sabotdioation of an iDfiniUve constnict as aa accusative of the

object, and at the compkunt of fdathe veilisl idCM, Me abov^ 114. i-,
and tbe mmieraitt eumpla given in f X14. at; on tlM infinitlTe abaohite as
object, see ( 113. d.
The complenent in the form of a participle (as in Greek,
and also frequently in Syriac) occurs tn Is. 33, I I^C^ ^nn3 (comp. for the
form, 67. v) trA^ft ihau hast i(astJ as a spoiler, i.e. to spoil; Jcr. 23, 30
Îff^ , . . hJY* ht shall never prcsftr, sitiins^. i.e. so as to "ît, ?ic.; Jon. I,6
what meanest thou, steeping? i.e. that thou &Icept-st ' ;
by a verlial adjective,
I Sam. 3, 3 now his eyes T\ST0 ^^HH had begun as dim, i. e. to wax dim.
C {t)Examples of the anboidlDation of die complemcntaiy verbal idea in the
impcifect* (in Ek^^ ogoallx rendered by Ht; mi mttr ie or Mm/) aie(t) wldi
both verba in the tame penon: after the perfect, k. 4s, at , ftin rr^n^
a pUaud ike Lmt. nmgmify; Bic\ Job 3a, at nfpll VPUfT }lh I kmem mi
. . ta
to give /tattering titles; after a perfect consecutiTe, I Sam. 30, 19 (where for
Tin we shonld read with the LXX tG|n) ; after an imperfect, Pa. 88, 1 1. loa, 14.
* In fl30 jn* I Sam. 16, 16, which appears to be a case of this luiid, two
di0erent readings arc combiQcd, \}}^ fMD. ^be simple
* This kind of sabordinatiun is frequent in Arabic and in Syriac (comp. e.g.
the FWttl^ Lnke 18, 13); aa a ml^ however, n coojnnctioD (corresponding

to oor thai) ia iDierted. Comp., nofeover, the Latin fuUfdsfaehmt TetCMes
viff0 Aoe oTMteei emiingat, Ciocio, Brat 84; and oar IwettU Uwere: Ithee
keme$$ldph
^
i2o.j Vabal Ideas under Government of a Verb, 405
Job 19, 3, 94, 14.^9) with m diffimnoe in the penom : after % perfect, Lev.
skmU do; % negative imperfect follows in Lam. i, lo; tiler tiie iaperfect,
^fc 47 I (S)
ikey call thfr,

^^"'K'l^
i.e. thon
''^y 'D*P^J^
"^hnlt no lonpêr
*9 M
be called,
'^'^î
A-c. ;
o imr* cmtiime (that)
NtjT! 22, ^ pfradvtnture
J shall prtvaii (that) ttv "..rv i.viite them, and tliatt / may drive them out of
the land niay, however, be a sciibr.1 ciiur due to the preceding
and in that case the example would belong to Ao. 1) ; alter a participle,
9 Sam. 21, 4- A perfect is possibly snbordinated in Lam. i, 10 ; bnt the explana-

tion of Uta a rebitlve davae is prelSenible.
2. Instead of subordination (as in the cases mentioned in letters a-<r), d

the 0-orimaUm of the oomplemeiitaiy verbal idea in the form of
a finite verb (cf. above, letter c) frequently occurs, either
(0) With the second verb co-ordinated in a foim exactly corre-

sponding to the first (but see below, letters) by means of \ (1, X)\
As a rule, here also (see above, letter a) the principal idea is
iiUroduced only by UiC second verb, while the first (especially 3^,
*I?>I*> T?^'*') contains the definition of the manner of the action,
c.g. Gen. 26, 1 8 "^^nM and he rtturtud and digged^ i.e. he

digged ngain; a Ki. i, 1 1. 13; in the perfect consecutive, Is. 6, 13;
with ^^9^1, e.g. Gen. 25, i and Abraham addtd and look a wiftj
Le. again took a wife; Gen. $8, 5 and frequently; with bnn
Gen. 9, so; with la the jussive. Job 6, 9; in the imperative
(comp. no. A), Jud. 19, 6 \h\ i^^-^Kin ^ canlmi, J pray ihety and
tarry all night (comp. the English he was persuaded, and remain^
for io remain); 2 Sam. 7, ^9; with ^no Gca. 24, i3. 20 and else-
where ; with Cant. 2, 3.
Rem. LulBtd of an exact agreement betwreen co>ordtnate vnlial forms, other g

I.
combinations sometimes occur, viz. imperfect and perfect consecutive (comp.
{ 113. d), e.g. Dcut. 31, 12 thai they Hjn^'nX ^XTl may Uarn, and fear
the Lordf Lc, to fear the Lord ; Is. i, 19. Dan
IIos. a, 11. E-.t. 8, 6. 9, 25*^;
perfect and imperfect, Job 33, 3 {fi that I knew how J might find htm) \ perfect
and imperfect consecutive, Jos. 7, 7. Eccles. 4, i. 7 jussive and imperative, Job ;
17, 10; comp., finally. Gen. 47. 6 DB'Sh riyT~DK1 mud if tkm kiuwmi ami
/Aifv rv 4nmfi(f i e. dial fbm
Comp. the English colloquial expression / vn/t try and Jo it.

*
Of a difiieteat kind are the caict in which C|D^ with a negative ie eomidinated
*
with a twh to emphaiiie the noa-ieciinence of dw ection; cf. Nma. ti, 95 ikty
pnpkioti ami added ml, we* U prtpke^, Le. kH Ik^ did so mm; Dent m
fi> 19. Job 97, 29 (ieediiip9lt l6p.
Digitized by Google
4o6 The Parts of Speech. [ 120*
/ a. Special mention mnst be made of the instances lu which the natural com<
plement of the first veib is suppressed, or is Added immedUtely after in the fonn
of n Gen. 43, 95 ikm Joseph iommamdtd and tktyfitttd*^
liistoiicBl sUitcment e.g.
(prop, thnt thy slionld fill, nod thej filled . . comp. the fiiU fonn of expression
in Gen. 50, a) a farther command is then added by meant of |> and the infinitive
;
Ex. 36, 6 ; another instance of the same kind is Gen. 30. 27 / have divitud and
th$ Lord hath blessed met &C-> i- ^- ^^^^ ^-"^^ bUssed me for thjr lakti
S {b) With the second verb (which, accordhig to the above, represents
the principal idea) attached withtmt the copula* in the same mood, ftc.
In this construction (cf. iio.il) the imperatives f^?V> ^9V>

&c.) and ÎS'
(nab, âj*, &c.) are exceedingly common in the form
of interjections, before verbs which express a movement or other
action, e. g. u'c'O^'!' arise, walk, Gen. 13, 17. 19, 15. 27, 43; in
the plural, Gen. 19. 14; Ex. 19,24 'VT^ go, get ihee down; i Sam. 3, 9;
with a following cohortative, i Sam. 9, 10 npbj na!) come, let us go;
Gen 31, 44 and frequently. Also with VPVI, Hos. i, 6 1^ ^'9^ ^
/ will not add further and hsaye merey, i.e. will no longer have
mercy; Is. 53, i. Prov. 33, 3^ ; (likewise a periphrasis for again) in
the perfect, Zech. 8^ 15; in the unperfect, Mic. 7, 19. Ps. 7, 13. 59, 7.
7X, so; in the jussive, Job 10, 16; in the cohortative, Gen. 30, 31
in the imperative, Jos. 5, 2. i Sam. 3, 5 lie down again; b^Nin (some-
times to express the idea of wiUingJy or gladly) in the perfect, Deut.

1,5. Hos. 5, 1 1 ; in liie imperative, Job 6, 28 ;
n3in-=^f/r//, i Sam. 2, %
pny nSTn do not multiply and talk, i.e. talk not so much
arrogatuy ; in the imperative, Ps. 51, 4; i>nn, Deut. 2, 24 i!^ ^'nn
b^,p9ssess; i>b;, Lam. 4, 14 w wUhoui vuris being able h
loucA, Ac; "^^ptickfyt in the perfect, Ps. 106, 13 ; in the imperative,
Gen. 19, sa. Jud. 9, 48. Est 6, 10. Other examples are: Hos. 9, 9
P*9JiJ=^//y, radical^/ Zeph. 3, 7 ^^^f7)ssearly (even in the participle,
Hos. 6, 4. 13, 3); Is. 29, 4 bpf=fyw, comp. Jer. 13, 18; Jos. 3, 16
^J^=wlwllj' ; Vs. 112, 9 "^^J^pkntifuUy.
h Rem. This co-ordination without the copula belongs 'as being more vigorous
and bolder) rather to poetic or otherwise elevated st)le (comp. e.g. Is. ga, I.
Hot. 1,6, with Gen. 35, i, &c.). Asyndeton, however, it not wanting evai in
pnMe; besides the above examples (especially the impeiativet of Dip and !{^ri
Gen. 30, 31. Dent, i, 5. a, 34. Joa. 3, 16* i Sam. 3, 5) cf. alao Neh. 3, aa
Comp. the aniilo<jou> examples in KMxAMScbLBCramm. des Bibl. Aram., loa.

To be distinguished, of course, from the cases in which two cqu.illy important
and !n<!ependent verbs arc used together without the CopuU in vigorous poetic
imagery, e.g. Ex. 15, 9. Job 39, 8^ and eliewhere.
Digitized by Google
{ xatO Cansfruciion of Passive Verbs, 407
f CbnMl. 1%, % For spedtl reasons the yerb representing the principal idea may
even come first; thus Is. 5.^, ii VBb'^ '"I^T ^^^^ ^^'^^ ^ satisfied (sc. ^
with the sight), for the satisfaction does not come until after the cnjoymeat of the
sight; Jer. 4, 5 ^^jip Ui'lj^ ^r^'i L e. cry with a full (loud) voice.
lai. Consiruciwn Passive Verbs*
! Verbs which in the active take <me accusative (either of the a

proper object, or of the in/ernai object, or of nearer definition; comp.
117.0,^, u) may in the passive, according to otir modeôf expression,

be construed personally, the object of the active sentence now becoming
the subject, e.g. Gen. 35, 19 "^î^ni hrr\ norn and Rachel dud, and
was buried, &c. The passive, however, is very frequently used im-
personally (in the 3rd sing, masc), either absolutely, as Deut. 21, 3 sq.
zek. 16, 34 (with a dative added, a Sam. 17, x6. Is. 53, 5. Lam. 5, 5),
or with the object of the active construction still subordinated in

the accusative \ e.g. Gen. 37, 4s ^^^^ "UJ and there
were Md (i. e. one told) h Rebekah the wtrdt oÊsm: a Sam. si, 1 1.
I Ki. 18, 13.

Other CBampIei are; after Niph., Gen, 4, 18 Tl^]^^ ^
Enoch was iorm Irad (comp. Num. 36, 60, and after an infinitive, Gen. 3i, 5)
Gen. 17, 5. at, 8 (after an infinitive) ; 39, 37. Ex. si, aS. 35, aS. Lev. tf, 13. Nam.
7, 10 (after an infinitive) ; 26, 55 (comp. verse 53) ; Num. 16, 39. Deut. ao, 8
(where, however, for D^ the iliph. DO! should be read, according to 1, 28) ; Jos.
7, 15 ; with the object preceding, Ex. 13, 7. Lev. a, 8, 19, 20. Is. 16, 10. Dan.
9, 24*. Also after Pn'al, Jer. 50, 20; before Pu'al, Is. 14, 3 ("^tJ^tt equivalent to
the internal object fTIZy = 7uhich ihey have caused to be performed Ity thee)\ Job
11, 9; according to the Masorctic text also Gen. 46, 2j, where, however, the
Samaritan and LXX read HIT for "XT : the Samaritan in Gen. 35, 26 and 46, 27
also nftda TlJ>J, and this (or thonld certainly be read inttetd of Xxf^ in
3 Sam, 31, 31.After Hoph., Ex. 10, 8. 37, 7. Lev. 10, 18. t6, 37. Num. 32, 5.
I KL 9, 31. Job 30, x$; after the infinitive Hoph., Gen. 40, sa Esek. x6, 4iq.;
btfore Hoph., Is. 17, x. st, 3. Ho. X0| 6, ZedL 13, 6. Pk. 87, 3; after the infiai*
live Ilothpa'el, Lev. 13, 55 sq.
' When this is not reccîaable eitlier by the nota aeemaOvif or by its disagree-
ment virith the peasive foim in gender, nmnber, and penHu, it natnmlly cannot
be dctennined wlictlier the coostraction is really impersonal. The coostnictioQ

Itidf can only be explained by supposing that while using the passive fotm
the speaker at the time thinks of some author or authors of the action
%i\v(\e
in question, just as on the theory of the Arab graramarians a concealed ae^nit

ii included in every passive. Tiiis accounts for the pu:>sibiUty ^comp. 144.^;
of natng tiie active wiUiout a specified nbject as a periphraMS for the passive.
* In 3 XL x8, 30 is to be lead of "H^ is to be omitted, as in the paiallel
passage Is. 36, 15.
Digitized by Google
The Paris of Speech,
e 2. Verbs ^hich in the active take two accusatives (according^ to
117. cc) retain in the passive construction at least one accusative,
namely that of the second or remoter object, whilst the nearer

objectnow becomes the subject. Thus, corresponding to 'W^t
which I mil show thee (Gen. 12, i) the passive is nrt^ (z.
35> 40) ^xihich Ihum hast been shown^ i.e which has been shown to
thee; comp. Ex. s6, 30 (but in Lev. 13, 49 with an accusative of the
person); Job 7, 3* In Pa. 33, 16 ^p^^ d^nds on an assumed
transitive VV^^ governing two accusatives (= my tongue is made to
cltave to my Jaws); also in Is. 1, 20, ^^^^ ^nn $kaH be devoured
with the sword, y)J!} is not an accus. tnslrumenti, but mob;^ |)fobabl)'
an accusative of the object retained from the active construction

d Rem. I. Examples of the retention of the second accusative are (a) with
verba induendi and exucndi ( 1
1 7. ff), Ps. 80, 1 1 Hîf 0^"^ mountains
vtert cffvrcd with the shadow of it some of
(the vine); Prov. 19, 33. So also
the examples in t 116. i: i Sam.
of passive participles of these verbs, Jud. 18, 11.
s, 18. 17, 5. 1 Ki , |a ick.9, s. 3*; with the ocusati've pveceding. Neb.
4, iSii(4) with vtria eofiae and inopiae^ Ex. t, 7. Ii 38, 10 (eqahmlcnt to

/ must forego the residue of my years) ; lib 40, ao. {f) an accusative of the
result ( 117. /V) with the passive, Is. 6, 11. 2Jech. 14, 4. Job 38, 2; with the
accusative prccetling, Is. 24, 12. Mic 3, 12 (Jer. 36, 18). Job 15, 7. 22, 16'.
Also in sek. 40, 17 and 46, 2^ the accusative preceding (in 41, 18 following)
cm only be taken at the aocoMtive of tiw nmlt ; tome genenl idea, nadi
as that of /ler. It to be vndentood as tfte fBlject of {d) an aocniative
of the member or part spedallx affected hj the action {% 117. B), Gen. 17, xi. 14.
a4. Jnd. x, 7 (aeonative beftre part, paiiw) ; a Sam. 15, 3a (accnaative with anfiix
after tiw part. peas.).
i a. Both accusatiTce aie xetained in an nmisoal manner after the passive of

a verbum impUndi m Nnm. 14, ai instead, however, of the Nipk. Mb@^ the
;
^ In the active, the sentence would be / will came the sword to devour you ;
hj the rule atated abovc^ letter this wodd becoaae ia the passive, the nmd
(aom.) skaff be made to devour you (ace). lartead of thla the leaaoter oljeet
is here made the subject, and the nearer object is Detained in the accusative.
Othtrwisr-, the f n!y possible explanation would be, according to the Arabic idiom,
to cause one to devour the sword (remoter object), i. c. to give him over to it.
' Analogous to D*ian B^^H who was chthed in linen, Ezck. 9, 3, would be
n?n f^Dnn'DK "vn\Sni a Chron. 31, 10 ; but we must certainly read there "tfliS^
with the LXX. Still less can Ps. 87, 3 be so explained, fl^HMJ bemg not an
accusative, bui iliC i.ubjt;ct ul a auuu-clause. On the Other hand, fT^Ê^ i Ki. 14, 6
may be explained with Ewald in the sense of being charged with something, so
that, like n^^, it may be eonatnied with an accnaatiTev
* In nality tPgi Ea. x6, ao. a6 (A beeame poirit^ It eqnlvalciit to a pamiva
{fi teas ehamged), to which ia added aa an aeeaaative of the fatalL
Digitized by Google
i 122.] Indication of the Gender of the Noun. 409
Qui (which is sometimes usetl traiiîtively el^-wiiere) should simply be read with
the LXX; limilailj k 7a, 19, although tbeic tbe LXX alao tnnslale fhe
8. The cflScient cause (or personal agent) is, as a rule, attached f

to the passive by p (thus corresponding to the Greek and Latin
dative), e. p Gen. 25, 21 njn^
.
'nyl Vahiveh Ut himself fu mlt aUd s
by him; comp. 14, 19. Lev. 26, 23. 2 Sam. 2, 5 (Ps. 115, 15). Ps. 73, 10;
before the verb, Prov. 14, 20 and frequently* Less commonly by "X^
(called "19 of origin min^ e>g> Gen. 9, zi. Job 18,4;
Af/^f the verb^ Ps. 37, S3. Job 94, i ; by 9 (B fiif6mn/lr% Gen. 9^ 6
('ÎW il' 3^> i4i 3* Hos. 14, 4, always to intzodnce
a personal agent-Ôn the connexion of the passive participle with
a genitive of the agent, cf. i\t,U
n. Syntax of tho Koim.
IndkoUm rf Oi Gender 0/ ihe Mum.

{ 12a.
Ct F. Schwabe, Die GemubesHmmmtg des Nomms im NU. ffebr.^ Jena, 1894,
and opedally the thoroagh inveittgatloa by X. Albiccfat, *Dai Gddilcdit der
hcbr. Haitptwofter/ la 1899, p. 3131119., rad 1896, p. 6t iqq.
1. According to 80. a, Hebrew, like the other Semitic languages, a

distinguishes only a masLuIme and feTinnint gender. To indicate the
latter a special feminine ending is generally used ( 80. b and 87. i) ^
both in the singular and plural (see, however, 87./), its use being
most consistent in adjectives and participles; oomp. 87. r. The
enploymeot of these special endings is most natural, when by means
of tfaem the feminine names of persons or animals are distinguished
from the masculine of the same stem and the same formation, e. g.
/^"yy, ^ brotherf rfn sister; D^J a young man, nobp a young wman^ maid;
^
^ iuoencus, rOB iuvenca; ^3)? vitulus^ n^jp vitula. On the other
hand, the feminine plays an important part in denoting the gender
of whole classes of ideas (see below, letter /, &c.), which the Ildbrew
regards as feminine. The language, however, is not restricted to the

use of the feminine ending either for the purpose of distinguishing
the t*x of animate objects (see letter h\ or as an indication of the
(figetraUvi) gender of inanimate things which are regarded as
feminine (see letter il).
S. The distinction of tex may be effected even without the feminine b

ending, (a) by the employment of words of different stems for the
Digitized by Google
410 The Parts of Speech. [123.
masculine and feminine ;

{b) by the dilTcrcnl construction (either
as masculine or feminine") of the same word {commuma). But the
distinction mav also, (r) in ihe case of names of animal?;, be entirely
neglected, all examples of a species being included under one par-
ticular gender, eitbecjoasculine^r feminine (iôena)*
C EnuBplet of (a) *re : SK f^tkm', DlC matkir; !^ nm, ewt ; BNR he-goat,
n sk*'goeU; lien he ass, jinM ik^s; nni( Iton^VC^ litn^, Sometimei with
the .idditioQalliBininine r: rinq;, e.g. ma/f sUofe, wtaH-senfOi^t niôrn^Bf^
^
femcUe slave , maid; {Tin IniJegroom, ni>3 ^riiiJe.
^ Y^*^ ^/ Of (Jb): ^tM rafflK*/ Plar. D*^03 construed as nuMcnline, Go. 94, 63;
feminine, Gen. 32, iC; collect, cx(n, Ex. 21, 37, construed as masculine, but
Gen. 33, 13. Job i, 14 as feminine. In Ter ?, 24 the construction of rT^Q ivilJ
ass, cli.mqes directly from the nia^culiue (iatcndcd AS cpiccnc) to the femminc.
Conjj). Ill Greek o, ^ vais- 6, ^ /8oOf.
0 Of (r): analogous to the epicene nouns of other languages, many ipeciet of

animals wltich are stroog and conxagcoiH^ are segaided in Hrimv as alwajt
masculine, while tfie weak and tiBMd are fitmniiiie; oomp. 6 Ai&vof, i( x*AiMr,
and the German tfi-r T.owc, der Tiger, der Panther, der Wolf, dfr Adler, &c.,
but du Katze, dii Taube, die Biene, &c. Similarly in Hebrew, e.g. ox
T44, 14 even rcferrinj:^ to covrs in calf), 3*1 />ear, ilo.s. 13, 8 ^^32^ 3^1 (a bear
that is bereaved of Jur whelps ; comp., however, 3 Ki. 3, 34. Is. 11, 7), 3Kt ^votf,
3^3 doF, nil masculine; but rO)"^ hare^ HjV HI^Dq x/flrA, m^3'q A,
an/, feminine.
f Rem. Masculine nouns which ettber have a sqMuate fieminine form or might
I.
easily form one, are but seldom used as epicene such are, itefT 2 Sam. 19, 27 ;
for I^ntt ; bX h art, Ps. 42, 2 for H^'K. In Cren. 23, 4sqq. HO a dead body, rt-fcrs
more especially to the body of a woman; D^H^N ôd, is used of a goddess, i Ki.
II, 5, eliiewhere always masculine; j^DH a master workman, in Prov. S, 30 refers

to wisdom (n03n feminine, comp. Plin. 3, 1 natura omnium artijex ; and our
use of friend, teacher, servant, neighbour ^ either as masculine or feminine ; io
Getman, GemtM^ stands also for CemeMin, &c).
g 3. Of woids denotiog peisons soTr, acooidlng to tihe eommcoly reodved
opinion, was in early times ased as epicene (see, however, above^ f a. ) The
use of the plural D'*1^3 in Job I, 19 and Knth a, 31 in the sense ctjftm^peefie
(of both genders) does not, howefer, pmve this. In this and in similar
' So in early Arabic, AaV 'lord) and 1

conjux) are used bith for man'iHS
and uxor ; aruj lor bridegroom and bride; the later huigaage however, distiU'
gnidMB the fiwilniiie fitora the masealiM in all diate eaict gptnaUy by the cadiag
a (/). bi early Arabic also the feminine ending is oommooly omitted la mA
paiticiples as ^tnii, ba(in (gravida), and the like, which fiom the mraning of
the word can only be used of females. Thus also jOk, at kast in Num. n. ij
< l^. 49, a^t} probably means nurse (for a Sam. 4, 4, &c.), not murd^
/other.
Digitized by Google
laa.] Indication oJ the Gender oJ the Nomu 411
vcomp. e.g. bnk Gen. i, a; and Dnn^ 3a, i) the mucaline n frim- gntdtr
indttdet the feminine ^.
3. The ful. owing classes of ideas are usually regarded as

feminine ^ although the substantives which express them are mostly
without the feminine ending':
(a) Names of couniries and iawns^ since they are regarded as the
mothers* and nurses of the inhabitants; e.g. "t^B^ Asîa^ Dh||
fdumoio, *)V jyrt; conp. also such expressions as

dOHghier of BohyUm^ iamghier rfZien, Ac.
^ TB, 1^
Rem. The seme proper noons, which as names of conntiies are f^gaided as
names of the people, and may then, like
feminine, are fteqne&tly nsed also as
national names in other languages, be construed as masculine ; thvs H'lin^ masc*
Is. 3, 8, and elsewhere, yWoî; bat Is. 7, 6, fern., /udata; 0^ masc., Idumarit
Num. 20, 20; fom., Idumaea, Jer. 49, 17. Nevprthc!css, it sometimes happens
that by a very common transference of thought (like our expression Tic-hry
concludes pteue) these names are construed as feminine, even when they denote
not the country but the inhabitants ; so H'l^rP Lam. i, 3 ;
comp. Gen. 41, 8.
Ex. 10, 7. I a, 33. I Sam. 17, ai. % Sam. 8, s. S4, 9. 7, a. ai, a. 4a, 11. Jer.
50, 10. Job 1, 15. Hcnoe the frequent personification of nations (as well as of
countries and towns, see below, note 4) as female betags, e*g. Is. 50, 1. 54, T sqq.,
and the transference of the expressions Is. 47, t sqq., 1)3 ftc (see
above) from the town to the inhabitants.
(^) Appellative nouns, which denote a circumscrAtd tpact^ such as
rW tartk, land,
the Jordan valley), "I'V

world,
a town,
^ Oeabode 0/
a
the dead,
well, pS2f Ihe north,

^^ cirek (of
^9iUh,
* The Arab grammarians call this use of the mascnlinc plural and dnal (e.g.
*t!-aha'iL'cini, the two fathers, t. c. farentes'} taghlil' or the making (the masculine)
prevail (over the feminine). Comp. M. (Inincrt, Di Beffriffs-JHrapcmkruHi und
di* DuaU a potiori im Altarab., V ienna, 1886.
* The masenline gender is attribnted ' I17 the Hebrews and the Semites generally
to whatever is dangerous, savage* coniageovs, respected, great, strong, poweifril . . .
the feminine to whatever is motherly, productive, sustaining, noorishing^ gentle,
weak, . . . subject, &c.' (Albrecht, ZAW. 1896, p. laosq.).
' When, on the other hand, words with a feminine-ending, snch as H!I*n3 brass,
a I'oxv ^'stcm B'ip'^, HJ? time (see the Lexicon), are sometimes construed as
masculine, this is owing probably in some cases to a misunderstanding of the
formation of the word, the 1*1 of the feminine being regarded as a radical.
* Comp. a dip and a mutktr (DK) m Inrm^, 2 Sam. ao, 19. In tiie tame
way, DM (lake Mv7/>> maitr) on Phoeuidaa coins stands for mtihtT'dty, lOffipAroXis.
The ame figwe Is used m snch expreanons as iwu Zim, Ps. 149, s ; wts tf
Babylon, zek. as, 15, &c., as also in speaking of the suburbs of a city as its
daughters, e.g. Jos. 15, 45 sqq., and elsewhere. The comparison of Jerusalem
to a woman is especially frequent in allegorical descriptions, e.g. zek. 16.
Lam. I, I, and elsewhere.
4" The Paris of Speech
I In the majority of noans deootiag place ihe gender b variable, e.g. H^k and
a way (osoally feminbe ; the mascaline gender only begins to predominate
with Eiekid; ct Albredit, 1. c, 1896, p. 55^ (^|) valUy, \\
garden (fern. Gen.
a, 15, wdas Xhy^, ftc^ is to be lead), paktu^ im^, HS^ tmwi, Dn3
fnlKmwn^ ipi^ da9r\ ftc; bo D^fp ff^* *^ (lefetxing to 1^ ^> M
Sodom), Job ao, 9^ and s Sam. 17. la jnHik, h cooatnied as feminUie. The
mountains and hills commandiog the surrannding comtiy are almost wtthont
exception m asc uline (see Albiecht, l.c, p. 60 sq.%
m The tames of mtinmm/f, uimsiiSf and (on the sune analogy)
(c)
mmigrs and /ari!r ike beiy in man or beast, since these are all
regarded as subservient and subordinate (consequently as feminine).

U Thus a^n nwn/; 19 bucket,
*in^ tint-pegt cup, ^3 \ryf ftc;
in otber case^ as |ilK Mx/, of^ HIA mw> the gender is variable. (* Instrnmeats
far bindtiig or liolding, girdles and the like, as eoostmini^g and mastering, are
masculine, ' Albrecht, I c. p. 89.)Also ))k ar, yaXf /V" C*"^ *<> pcobablj }nb
ammb,gnatUt\ Taod^ l^r^ W,^97>r, ITX'^
as a rale also ^"^TTrm (masc Is. 17, 5 anddsewhere), tongue (roasc Ps. as, 16
and elsewhere), '}^]} e^ (masc. 2ccl). 3, 9 and elsewhere), pib iAÂ (mase.
^ {d) Ortain names of natural forces or substances are feminine,

being fuobably regarded as instrtmients, while in the names of the
heavens, the heavenly bodies and natural phenomena, the masculine
generally predominates (cf. Albrecht, 1. c, p. 3 S3 sqq.); thus feminine
^
are stm (but often also mate,, Ps. 19, 6. 104, 19); 6^ (Eth. Iiî)
fire (rarely masc.)) HJi brighimss^ IW a stom^ as a rule also wimd,

spirit ; breaih^ soul; ako "^W iighl in Jer. 13, 16. Job 36, 32,
'
and others.
p 4. The following classes of ideas, which are also regarded as

feminine in Hebrew (see above, letter h), are usually indicated by the
feminine form, notwithstanding their occasional transference to mascu-
line persons (see letters r and *) i
q {a\ Abstraets' (sometimes along with masculine forms from the ^me stem,
as vimgtMt*^ as wcU as , rqgf ktip, as weU as yfi, e. g. TifOI^/rmmmt
* nSDD (amp is feminine only when it is a collective deaodog the persons

in a camp.
HCjy
* rjK nose, 3^} tail, rQfQ forehead,
tucJt, also Onj womtf

^ keel, ^"^kKk
except in Jcr. 90, 17, aie iawuiably
tftki mtk, ssawrt,
ow iliied as
* C the list of SMScnliDe and femisine Sfastraeti in AlhredH^ Le, 1890.

p. lit sin.
Digitized
{ 123.] Indicaium of the Gender of the Noun. 473
faithfulness, nn3 sinngfk, rfynigrea/mss, rtH^fu/Zfuss, rfyfafdmMm,9ce,
Similarly, the feminine (sing, and plur.) of adjectivet and participles is ued
substaotiTally in the sense of the Latin and Greek neuttr, e. g. n^33 siedfastmsff
Ps. 5, 10, roiO gocdtuss, T\yr\ evU^ Gen. 50, ao, H^pa a light thing (i.e. a triflii^
ihin^'), Jer. 6, 14; so especially in the plural, e. g. Tlh^l j^rtal things, Ps. il,
4;
niD'^nSil the rutned places, Ezek. 36, 36, along with n^STIH that which was
desolate, ni3b kimlnesses, a Ki. 25, 28, ninbj uprightness, honesty. Is. 26, 10,
n^D^V3 amoena, Ps. 16, li (but in verse 6 in the same sense 02*y3\ DIKt'Si
xvondcrju! thmgs, Ex. 34, 10 and frequently, T\\^^ hard things, roughly. Gen.
43, 7. 30 t^îit cf. also D^j>n vain fhrn;;^. Prov, 12, IT. 28, 19). Comp. more-
Over, the very frequent use of HNl, t<i\l ,.is well as HI and K^H), Jud. 14, 4. Ps.
f 18, as and eliewheie, in the sense of hoc, illud (also n|n equivalent to ilia.
Is. 51, 19) ; also the vie of the feminine fonn of the verb in Is. 7, 7 D^pn ^
iTnn t<71 it tkatt standi ntUktr skatt U wm to pass; Jod. 14, 41. Jer. 10, 7
10 too tbe fuffixes Gen. 15, & Ex. 10, 11. Job 38, 18, referring back to % whole
sutemcnt*.
(^) Titles and designations of office^ properly a snbdiviiion of Hie abstract Ideas T
treated abovei nnder letter and qiedallj noticed here only on account of thdr
peculiar tnnsjfefence to oonoete niale petaons. Thns wo have A^r^ Ecdes. t, 1,
ftc* (as a title of Soloaien)i propeiljr no donbt Mn/ vtkidt. (mJUs furt in or sfieaks
in a reiîgni assembly, hence LXX litkkâmtT^t, i. e. contknator, pretuHr;
the proper names DIDD Ezra 2, 55. Neh. 7, 57, and n"12'9 Esra a, 57, Neh. 7, 55,
and the liMreign word nnB viceroy^; in the plural prop, eogrtomina, then
named, colleagtus; HllTlB princes (if this be the tzne meaning) All these
words, in accordance with their meaning, are construed as masculine (in Kccles.
7, a7 instead of nnOM the words should rather be divided as 'pn IQî

comp. I a, 8).
* While ui all these fantanoes it is simplest to speak of the/nnittiW in Hehtew
as being used fKt the iKstftr^ (wldcb in Latin, Greek, and German is commonl/
employed for similar purposes), it must yet not be forgotten that since the language ^-S''
I
is wholly wanting in neuters, the Semitic mind regarded the above-mentioned forms
primarily actual femininrs. Hence the Arab commentators arc accustomed
to explnui ibc feminines of adjectives and participles (which would be neuter to
Latto, &c.) by the addition of a fenunine substantive.

[' An Assyrian woid, found at least as early as the time of Saigon, who
appointed paî over South Babylonia. The view that it is of Persian origin b
a mistake : see .Schrader*s Cmmfirm Insariptians and tkt Did Tuiament, on i KL
to 15. G.W.C.]
' This use of the feminine form is far more freqnent in Arabic, Ethiopic and
Aramaic; comp. e.g. in Arabic haltfa 'fern, from holif, following after, takinpj
the place of) in the sense uf the successor or representative (of Muhammad >, and
*tdlSmn ilgnat wi$dnn) as a title oflettfBed men. Anakgons to this is the Latin
magistrmfns, magisirag^, for wufgisindit, and our iUEr MaJtHly, sr<Unuy,
Highness, Bto,
Digitized by Google
414 The Parts of Speech.
S Abstract ideas iaclude also
{<) CoUaiots in the feni. fom\ generally fem. partidplet VMd fllbsU&tivany,
cqtedallj as the comprehensive detigiMtioii of nnmber of pentms, e.g. nrnk
(fon. of inauUim^, propb the trantUmg (company), Le. tmvdliiig posoai
(a caravan); n^l (fem. of mm grimg iiU9 txU*) the com^tmy txUa (alao
frequently nsed of those who had retmned home again); Vi^Sf^ (that which inhabits)
Le. tJu population^ Is. 12, 6. Mic. i, it sq. ; HIl^K (prop, that whidi is hostile)
the enemy, Mic. 7, 8. 10 (comp. 4, 6 sq. the halting, cast off, driven anmy i. e.
those -vho halt, &c.); n^T (the abject) the poorest '("-t ,
of living beings which ate
not persons, comp. n*n ;lhat which lives) in the scnbe ol cattle, beasts ; HJ^ a shoal
ojjish, Gen. i, 26 (buuin Jon. 2. 2 as a uofnrn unitati^^ coinp. letter /, for 31 a fish^
which in versos i and 11 is used as a tiomoi umlatis). Comp., moreover, n!?^
dead iMkiy, a6, 19, and elîcwhere (construed as masculine), fur a heap of dead
li>.
Mus,'~Oa the poetic personifications, comprising the mass of a nation, by meana

of na dm^giiier, in nSi ^QJ^ r\2 (equivalent to my eoutUrymoi,
see above, letter i.
t (d) Conversely the feminine form of sabstantives is sometimes used (as in Arabic)
as a nomeH unitatis, i. e. to indicate a single example of a class which is denoted
by the masculine form ;
comp. ^^X a JUet (i Ki. 9, 36), D'jK a single ship (Jon.
t, 3 sqq.) ; hair (coll.), rOJf*^ a single hair (Jud. 20, 16 ; in the plural, 1 Sam.
14,45. Ps. 40, 13); a poem, frequently collective, TP^y^ a single soui;; so prob-
ably also njNH a fig (ihe corresponding masculine tin is collcclive in Arabic i
j
TMWV a lily (also |BÊ^) ; HSnS a brick (Arab, libina, but libin collective), &c.
U () The feminine is also used for things witliout life (as being weaker or leas
important), which are named from their resemblance to organic things expressed
by the conespooding mascoline fonn; comp. Tj'V side (of the body), thigh, nsi^
or n|12 it^k fori, herder (of a conntiy, house, ftc.) ; VCSOfrntkiodi nn^D gnmtet^
On a ^roilar dtstinctioo between tiie nasealine for natural, and the foounine for
artificial objects, see 87.
V Rem. The juxtaposition of the mascoline and feminine from the same stem
serves sometimes to express entirely; e.g. Is. 3, 1 HJ^Ô^ f}f^ ^/f/ ^.f^d sfaf,
i.e. every kind of support. For similar groajnngs in the case of persons, sec
Is. 43, 6. 49, 22. 60, 4 {sons and daughters)', 49, 33. Ecclcs. 2, 8.
123. The Reprtseniation of Plural Ideas by Means of CaUec/ivt,
and fy (he Repetitim qf Words.

a Besides the plaral endings treated in 87. a-t\ the language employs
other means to express a plurality of living beings or things
{a) Certain words employed exchisively in a collective sense, while
the individual members of the class are denoted by special words

{nomina unilaiis, but not in the same sense as in 122. /).
'Comp. in Greek ^ iinrot, the cavalry (as well a& tu imKuv), ^ xdnijôs, iidt.
If 80 and elsewhere, the caml corps.
Digitized by Google
{ I33-] The Representation ofPlural Ideas, etc, 415
Thus catds, oxm^ (even joined w ih numerals, e.g. Ex. 21, 37 "^{53 H^Ôn
fof4 keoti of cattle), but TC' an ox ; JKi' small (ottU, i.e. &hcp and goats (fiâ)*
comp. Job 1 , 3 Iciv^S^K nySB^ tevm ik^md shops but nt? a single head of
swM^ eattU (a sheep or a goat^ Other mm or lew oonmoD colteetivcs iet
n (P^' which prowb or fooma) ndU

gnm kerhf
leasts, ^ ^pethapt profk iri/^ngy
nmmbir tf iUtU thUdrm ; N frtsk i. e. yooog plants, p'V Le.
tcgetetioa io general; t|\y ^<in/i, fn^s 39^ ^^*^*^' ^ tavakadt, n&\ wormSf
feVl erupii^ thiifgs {fiiwaoMSl creaturea)* auanmi^ iku^,
(6) The coUcciivc use of subsiaiuuts wluLh ai the same time serve d
a.'ifiomi'/ia uniiiilis ; (never in plur.) means both man (homo)
and men (homines); a man (vir) and men (viri); HB^N woman and
women (Jud. 21, 16. i Sam. 21, 6); n^lK a /ort/^/, but usually a swarm
of bcutis; B'^J s&id and (persons); i'S? tU^ and xAnv^ (Gen.
30, 37); a hirdtfprty and ^/r^ rf^9: î^Sk and n>^r (Jud.
19, 12. Jer.4, 29); nj^ a iSr^;/' and fîage; abp a //ow/ and plimis,
herbs; fS tf /r and irees (as it were foliage); *12 yri/ and frmU;
Tfp a shrub and shrubs; in isolated instances also nouns like
man-strvanty nnCE' mmd-servanl^'y^Vt ass, lie* (?a- (comp. Gen. 32, 6).
On the singular (especially of gentile names) with the article to include
all individuals of the same species, comp. 126./. On the special
meaning of the plurals formed from certain collectives^ see 124./.

-
(c) Tlie feminine ending; see f 122.1.
{d) The repetition of single words, and even of whole groups c
of words, especially to express entirety, or in a distributive sense.
The following cases are more particularly to be noticed
I. The lepetitioD of one or more words to express the idea of every, all,
as Dt^ Bt* Gen. 39, to, fte., day by day, every days y^^ y^r,^
Dent 14, sa ; tS^K B^K eoery man, Ex. 3^, 4s nHth 3 beitove the second word
(but only in late passages), e.g. Df^ Eri^ day by degf, i Chroa. is, as ; ^^^r^
year byyear^ Dent 1$, so. t Sam.
t, 7 (bnt in verses flÛ^ 0^9!?)>
D^^l
Nnia. 94, I. Jud. 16, 20. 20,30sq. i Sam. 3, 10 or <t/ eiker times s befoie both ^
words, as "^{^33 16, si, every morning (so before a group of words,
Lev. S4t S); in the same sense also w ith the distributive !>, < Chron.
5>, 27; with a single plural, D^^^?^ 73 '4t or D^^sb Job 7, 18 along with
D'V3l!^ every mement. Also with the two words united by menns of mfw copulative,
B^^5 B^K P*. 87, 5. or jy^Kl B^K Est. i, 8; >ni "ill ail gemratums^ Deut. 33, 7
* The jilural form 0^*1^2 from "^[^11 is found only in very late Hebrew,
Nch. IO, 37 (where according to the Mantua edition, Ginsbiug, &c., U^pt^Y
ikeep^ is nisu to Lc read : Bacr, however, has O^tiST), aad 3 Cbrou. 4, 3. In Amos
6, 12 read, with Hitzig,
Digitized by Google
I
416 The Parts of Speech, Q 124.
tiC\ Dt^ Est. 3, 4; comp. Eft. 8, 9. Em 10, 14. i Chron. 26, 13 (cf. Cheyne*
Bampim LtOures, p. 439, and Driven FtOfti. p. 505, No. 35); aoasliibei (bat
with the esoeptkm of PIl 4$, 18 onlj io very late pusages) with a pkooaitic ^79
pieooUngv Fi. X45, 13. Eft. a, ti. 9^ 8. s Cfavoo. ii it aod elaewhere.
d t. Repetition of woidt in an expicflaly disirHutivt tense* (which ninj to eonie
extent be noticed in the examples under letter c) eqoiwdent to m Mcl fte.
e.g. Nam. 14, 34 forty days H^^^ D)^ cffmn/ing- for every day a jtor;
comp. Ezclc. 24, 6. Ex. 28, 34 (three words repeated); also with the addition of
apart, 113^ 11 "^ly mery droz'f hy it^df, On 32, 17 ; comp. Zech. 12, 12.
Most frequently with the addition of a numer:il comp. for the simple repetition of
numerals for the same purpose, 1 34. q)^ and with the words not only in groups
of two (Lev. t\t 8. Nun. 13, a. 31, 4) or three (Num. 7, xi. 17, ai), but even
of six (Ex. 36, 3) or eeven (Ex. 35, 33. e6, 19. ai. ag) ; in Ex. 35, 35 five weeds
even thiee tines lepested*.
$ 3. Repetition to express an exceptional or nt least snperfine quality; e.g.

3 Kl. as, 15 which were of gold, of sihtr^ silver, i.e. made of pure gold
gold,
and pure silver; Dent. 2, 37 IJÎS T^.lt? along by the high way; comp.
Num. 8,16 thrv are given, given to him. i. e. piven exclusively for
3, 9. his service,
for hi* very own. Also with a certain hyperbole in such examjilcs as 2 Ki. 3, 16
D*aa D*aj nothing but trenches i Gen. 14, 10 "IDn TS^fJi niNS ail asphalt-pits.^
Repetition sexves to intensify the expicasioa to tiie higliest dcgiee in JndL 5, as

bf nasoH ef the violeni fremingt ef Aie strong must Ex. 8, 10 {foimtUts
heaps), and Joel 4, 14 {countless multitttdts\ ; cf. niso OptD CÔ Ex. 13, 30
bf little and little, very gradually ; cf. | 1 33. k.

^ 4. Repetition with the copula to express of more than one hind : thus Deut. 25, 13
(Tiov. 20, 10 pK* pj< f7 -!'eig/it and a weight, i.e. two kinds of weight (hence
the addition great and small) ; Ps. 12, 3 3^3 with (wo kinds of hearty Lt.
with a double-dealing heart; cf. ZI^ 3^ \/b^ i Chron. la, 33.
m. Th Vartata Uses 0/ ike Plural-/otrm\
a , 1. The plurat is by no means nsed In Hebrew solely to express
a number of individuals or separate objects, but may also denote them

collectively. This use of the plural expresses either {a) a combina-
tion of various external con.stituent parts (plurals of local cx/cnsion),
* Comp. in the New Testament St. Nfark vi. 39 sq. ovftmuota avia69a, wpaaud
wpaatai (Weizsacker, tischwcise, beetweise),
* Iheae repetitions of larger groups of woids heloog entiiely tothe/Vwir/^ Cede
in the Pentateuch, and me unqnotiooably indications of a late period of the
Isngnage. Of quite a difletcnt Idnd aie such examples as Ezek. 16, 6, where
tlie tepetition of four words serves to give greater solemnity to the promise, unless
here, <; certainly in i 30^ It is a ntere diitegrapky; the LXX omit the lepetitioa
in both passages,
* Comp. Dietrich, ' Uber Begnfi uiui l orm des iicbr. Piurais,' in the Abhandl.
ntrAebr* CnmmtUik, Leipzig, 1846, p. a sqq.
Digitized by Google
f 124.) The Various Uses of the Pluralform. 417
or a more or less intensive focossing of the characteristics inherent

In the idea of the stem {phshract plurah^ usually rendered in English
by forms in -hood^ -msSi -ship), A variety of the plurals described
under {b), \n which the secondary idea of intensity or of an internal
multiplication of the idea of the stem may be clearly seen, is {c) the
pluraiis excdhntiae or pluralis maitstatis.
Examples of (<7) : Plurals of lo<al exttnsim to denote localities in general, but b

cspccinllv level surfaces (the them the idea of a whole
surface-ij^XyxtiiX), since in
composed of innumeraMe separate parts or points is most evident, as DÊ^
( 88. */) i4ai/<r (comp. also D^Di"lD heights of heaven, Is. 33, 16. Job lO, 19;
elsewhere DV^D) ;
water; D^Q2 C^lie broad surface of the sea) poetically for
0^ ita; 0^39 (prop, the side turned towards any one, then' surface in general,
usually face ; Dn^ns the kuk^ Ex. a6, i j. 33, 33, &c., DHW? necky nape of the
mchî also n^C^K^D the place ed the head, rfhiy^ place at the feet; on^^
fUtu m the other side (of a rim); D'ipO^ depthHi^XT^y^ (also prno) dUtemee^
D^3|B'P hed^ Gen. 49, 4 (nnless, with Dillmans, it b to be explained in the sense
eAêMe bed, i.e. temi)^ Q P>> 4^* 5> vbA Tf^'^W 13a, 5, dwelHttg (peiiupt
also O^j^nte enemnfinent, in passages like 1 Sam. 4, 10). The last fear bdong,
however, to poetic style, and are amongst the plurals of amptijia^
better reckoned
tion treated under letteis d-f. So perhaps D^yjT bed (Ps. 63, 7. Job 17, 13;
but Gen- 49. 4. Ps. r^j, 3. and eUewh< re, in the singiilar) probably, bowever, ;
D^yjf* (prop, slrala) refers to a number of coverinj^s or pillows.

The plural of cxti nsion is used to denote a lengthened period of time in Q^^^^
eternity (everlasting ages .
Kern. The plural of extenaioa includes also a few examples which were formerly c .
explained as simply poetic plurals, e.g. Job 17, i W^"^^ graves are (ready)
fir me, i.e. the place where there are many of them (as it were the graveyard)
it my portion. Job si, 32. a Cbron. 16, 14; cC a Ki. aa, ao.
Of i^) : the tolerably nmnerons abstract plnrals, mostly <tf a particolar fonn d
{(fftUtm, fitttUtwt, ate.) may be divided into two classes. They sum up either
the conditions or qualities inherent in the idea of the stem, or else the various
single acf.^ of which an action is composed. Comp. for the fir>^t class, O'l^na
and n'llins ; D'3P] oU ns;c, Qn^'i youlh ; Dî^^na maidenhood, rihh^
bridal state ; D^'l^JD condition of a sojourner, Dnb*3 flcshliness (only in Prov. 14,30;
cf. Delitzsch'); D^*n life ,the abstract idea of the qualities of a living being);
C'Ij^K' (hildic^siKss, D'l^l.^D blindiuss, D^V^V perverseness.
* Comp. the siiinc use uf the plurai ui ortpva, ra yujra, rd rpd^^Ka, prae'
eorHOf eervieeSffauuji ; on pluialt of extenttco in general, comp. the prepositions
of place and time in the plor. form, 103. m. D^'^^D is not a case in point,
in the sense of Ar/Hr (properly a sheet folded into several pages; elsewhere also
*WD) I KL ai, 8sqq. a KL 10, i. 19* 14 (Is, 37, 141 relened to afterwarda by
the Mûiar toftx); It. 39, i. Jer. a9, 35. 3a, 14 being folded, pievioiialy
Digitized by Google
4i8 The Parts of Speech
f There are also a nnmber of plands, found alnioet eiclnvvelf in poetoy (tome-
times along with the singular), which are evidently intended to intensify the idea
of the stem, as D^:iK might, Is. 40, 26 ; D*3^Dl as well as HJ^N) and n'ii^!:!*
faithfulness ; (according to 93. /, only in the construct state jdur.il or

with suffixcs = M<' happiness of), happy ; n^}"!! Is. 27, 11 and n^J\3n Is. 40, 14,
&c. '^keen> understanding ; Job 37, 16 and H'iV'I i Sam. a, 3 (thoroagh)
knowUdge ; JlintSB Job 12, 6 and D^nDQD Is. 32, iS (full) canfidenee i n^3^3
(tbandant) blessing, Ts. 21, 7 ; pH"! Ps. 5, 10 (very) destruction ; n^^^D^ Dan.
9 23 (greatly) beUmd i fiton Ps. 76, 11, &c. (fierce) wrath ; n^S'jn Dan. It,
(ntter) tmtvnfi; ntppGen. 46, 2 ;an important) fft^Mi; D*n^D uprightmss;^
nbsnn ptrvenUy ; D'rirn and D'SC^H'D (tbidk) darhuui D^riDD a (elote)
htdi^.plaas tHy^ noiiHiy; 0*SI^ la. *8, i /aAww; nlnxn; (com-
plete) ariddfjtf meHmtt; 0^!^ frttUtumssj fi^]^^^ dtiigkt;

0*71^ and 0^3)^ fUasMrt; TOfn trnfasmn; HhOD Ft. 3, 3 m/, rg^TnA*
rbViD Am. 3, 9 htmuU, On the other hand, flÔSn wisdom 'Vtov. i, to
and elsewhere) can hnrdly be a plural {^'^Hm tmeuot of witdom, or wisdom per>
50ni6ed), bat is a sinQul.ir (see $ 86. /).
^ The summing u}) of the several parts of an action is c.\pre?sed in D^p3n f':e
i-ntbalming, nicnfrntnt, 0*J<^ (proft. filing, &c. of the hand) ordinaiim

to the pricslhcod, D^nÊ' dismissal, D'D^C^ retribution, D^nRD engraving (of
a teal, &c.); D*3nK/wi^^V, D*3\3| whoredom. D*DK3 a</w//rry ; 0*1003 (prop,
no doubt, warm compassion) consokaion, D^SUnn suppliealioH Job 7, 4

(lettleit) /)Mfta|f to and Jro^ T(h^ gUaniMtgf perhapt also friS^S Pi^ 4> i. 6, i,
and eltewbei, if it meant ike âgfing on strimgid imstrnmonis, and fi^3b^
Is.1.23 bribery, unless it be a plural of number
flf \/'\ : the pliirah's extcHi-tifii-tf or inaiisfafis. m has bên remaTkcd .nbove,
/ is propcily a variety of the .'i!i>tr.nct plural, since it sums up the several charac-
'
teri&tics' belonging to the idea, besides possessing t^like some of the substantives
under letter e) the secondary sense of an mtetuiJUafion of the original idea;
*o etpedally Godkoadt God (to be distingnidied from the ntmierical plural
gods, Ex. It, It, and elsewhere). The mppoilticii that 0*r6K b to be D^gard
^
at merely a remnant of earlier polythdttic viewi (Le. as originally osly
* Mayer Lambert in the Rovm des Hmdot juivis, xxiv. p. 106 tqq., ennmentet
no less than nioety>fiTe woidt endbg in fiw, which in hit oj^lon aie to be tegaided
as pluralia tantum,
' Tlie T' wish jjrammarians call Ftich phirals n^nbn plur, zfirium or
virlt4tum ; later ^r.nnm.irinns call them plur. rxcelUntiae, magniiudinis, or plur.
maiestatictis. This last name may have Ijeeu suggested by the wc used by kings
when speaking <rf themtelvet (comp. already i Mace 10^ 19. i', 31) and the ;
pinml nsed by God in Gen. i, t6. ii, 7. It. 6, 8 hat been inoorreetly explained
in this way. It is, however, either eommnnicaHvo 0neltidfaig die attendant ngela;
so at all cvrnt.<5 in Is. 6, S, comp. also Gen. 3, 22^, or according to others, .an
indioition of thf fuHnr^^ if power and might implied to D'7^l< (>ce Pillmann
on Gen. i, a6) ; but it is U-^t explained as a plural of selfdeliberaii&n. The nte
of the ploral as a form of respectfiil address b quite foreign to Hebrew.
Digitized by Google
1240 The Various Uses of the Plural-form. 419
nmnetical plnnl) it at iMit highly improbafalet aady HMWeovcr, wodd not oplftin
the analogous plnmb (lee bdow). That the language hat entneljr igected the
idea of aamerical plniality hi D^ri^t (whenever it denotes omt God), ii proved

espedaHy by its bebg ahnoit invariably jofaied with a sfaignlar attribute (compb
f 13a. h), e.g. p*ljr ^ 7> elsewhere. Accordingty, O^rifwi

nnst have been nsed originally not only as a numerical but also as an nb>tr.ict pltiral
fcorrespondinf^ to tîc Latin numen, and our GoJhcad), and like other abstracts
of the same kind, have been tnuisferred to a concrete single god (even of the
heat !i en).
To the same class (and probably formed on the analogy of belong H
the plurals O^CHp tht MoH Holy (only of Yahweh), Hos. xs, I. Prov. 9, 10. 30, 3
(oomp. D'l^^ D'nr^K Jos. 34, 19, and the Anun. p3^^bf th Mnt ffi^ Dan.
7, 18); and probahly t^D'^n (unally taken in the sense of femaUi^ the image of
a god, used especially for obtaining oracles. Certainly in i Sam, 19, 13. 16 only
ont image is intended ; in most other places only one image may be intended ^
in Zech. 10, a alone is it most natnral to suppose a numerical plural. In Ecclcs.
5, 7 supremus (of God) is doubtful ; according to others it is a numerical
plural, superiores.
Further, D'ihg, as well as the singular (lordship) lord, e. g. HB'i? D^J^K /

trmi M, pKn
'^hK th* lord 0/ thi land, Geo. 43, 30, comp.
1%, 19. 4;
Gen. 3s, so; so especially with the salRxes of the and and 3rd persons
V^hlt, Ac, also tt^;!^ (exeept i Sam. iC, x6); but b ist steg. always
So also ufyf^ (with snAxes) lord, master (of slaves, catde, or inanhnate things;
bat m the sense of marihUt always in the stngnlar), e.g. ^^^^ Ex* sx, ^9.
Is. 1,3, &C.
On the other hnnd, we mTt;t regard as duul lful a niimVcr of participlr?; in the k
plural , which, btiiif^ used as attributes of God, resemble //uni/^s exi<I!cntiae
thus, ^b'y my Afnkn-, Job 35, ro; ?;^B>y Is. 54, 5 ; Vfe'J? Ps. 149, a; r,^b>5? K
a2, 11; DH^Cij stretching them out. Is. 43, 5; for all these forms may also
he explained as singular, according to $ 93. .fx'. V^3^ Is. 3, 12 might aUo be

regarded as another instance, unless it be a nvmerical plural, tkiir tfprtsson;
mmeovcr, )^^0 kim who UftOh it m^, Is. 10, i 5 ; Vn!>b^ him who satdah Aim,
Prov. 10, s5. S3, SI. 35, 13 (in parallelism with V^TK). These latter plnra]s
however (inelodbig 1^ty*1D), may prohaUy be noie simply explained as indicatfaig

an indefinite indtvidnal, comp. letter 0 below.^For ^fJCfe^ Ft. x si, 5 (textns
receptns) and Eodes. za, x (textos receptus) the singnlar should be read,
'
'
with Baer. *
Even in (kn. 31, 34, notwithstandiiig the pltiral saffix in OCbni and nn'h^,
smoe the ooastmetion of diese abstracts as numerical plunds is one of the pecu-
liarities of tlie Eôeument of the Hexateudi ; comp. Gen* ao^ 13. 35, 7, and
f 145
.
On "anti (for ^JlXî as a name of GoH, cf i 55. a.
'
^?y!ll which in Is. 54, 5 IS in paralleii&m with ^^^ miut then l>e eiqpUined
as merely formed on analogy.
le a
Digitized by Google
420 The Patis of Speech, [124.
/ Ken. I. () Colieitnt tabrtincw, ftc, am oMitly rcfttded s stn/fii, md ie,
MCOfdiBgiy, abnoik ftlwtjs represented bjr noiut In Ae pQM.^Gw

Mngnlar, eoinik
iAm#,
fwlfili XO-
-M dwUr,
^'"^> "'t^V
ns UMtm,
''''''' '''^
^yni& had, isn^fM,
grmmif )^ wmmT.
^ sUtur, 71B^ krmul
Plurals ai^ liowem, foraied
3^
from Bome of these words expressing materials in order to denote leparate portions
taken from the whole in Tmnnfactiire {plurals of the result) or parts otherwise
detached from it; thus, D^*12 /infn ârmtuts ; D^C03 silver pieces, Gea. ^t, 35. 35;
D*riB'n3 (dual) fetters of brass ; D*ifJJ ligna {timber for bnilding or sticks for
burning) ; also in a wider sense, alloy to be "separated by .smcltinp. Is.
I, 35 ; T\T\t'^ fragments of earth, Prov. 8, 26, comp. Job a8,6 3n| npsy dust
of gold.
m {J>) To the cUss of plurals of tJu nsmlt belong aim n few name* of natural
prodncto, when repmented in an aidfida] oonditioii ; tbot, D^^n mlM/ in grain
(Ihieibed wheat), aa dbtincnidied from n^n wUat (vied colleetiTdy) in the car;
oomp. the same distinction between D^Da and HDD 3 spUt; tTCn^ and nen^
(the tingnlar onljr pteeentd in the Midma) inUits; D**))ljf^ and tariff j
also 0*r)B^B AWm, ft^ (to be iniened from Â^) jfeur.
ir (0 Finally, the distinction between Môd and nqnirea to be specially
noticed. The singular is always used when the bluo t is regarded as an organic
unity, hence also of menstrual blood, and the blood of sacrifices (collected in
the basin ami tbcd sprinkled), and in Nam. 33, 24 of the blood gushing from
wounds. On the other h.iiul, D^"^ rs a sort of plural of the result and at the same
lijr.c of local extension, denotes dIpoJ whith is zhed, when it appears as Wood-
stauis (Is. 1, 15) or blood -marks (so evidently in Is. 9, 4). But smcc l)lotKi-
stains or bloodmarks, a^ a rule, suggest blood shed in murder (althoi:^!. 'pi

also denotes the blood which flows at cfaildbiith or in cifcnrndsiuu), D^D^ acqoiicd
(efcn in very early passages) simply the icnae of a Uood^ dttttt and especiatly of
MiM^psnZteVMcr, Ex. 93, 1 sq. and clsewheie.
O a. In some few caaes tlie pineal is nsed to denote an indefinite aingnlar;
eettainly so m Dent 17, 5 TIMf^^ ""^ ^ ^"î 7

^ hMf, L c in one of the eitiei y <;f2Mif ; Zedi. 9^ 9 nUh^
Cant. 2, 9) ; Ex. ai, aa (iriieve evidently only oe child ia Ihongbt of, thon^
certainly in connexion with a contingency which may be repeated) ;
comp also
EcdeSb 4, 10 (if me of tktm fall). Sô probably aLo Gen. 8, 4. i Saui. i;, 43.
Neh. 3f 8. 6, a ; bat not Gen. 19, 29, since the same document (Gen. 13, 12)
makm Ixtt dwell in the eitiet of the jfofdan valley; in Gen. 31, 7 O''^^ denotes
the clam with which tlie action is concened.
P a. When a substantive is followed by a genitive, and the compound

idea thus formed is to be expressed in Ute plural, this is done
(a) Most natunlly by using tbe plural of the nmm rtgmt^ e.g.
^llai mighiy mm ^ vahur (prop, heroes of strength), i Chton.
7, s. 9; so also in compounds^ e.g. i Sam. aa, 7, aa the
phir. of BenJamtU; but also
125*] Determination of Nouns, 421
{h) By using the plural of boih nouns *, e.g. *li2l| i Chron. 7, 6; q

D^K^3 aif^ in prison Awses, Is. 42, as ; comp. x. 34, i, ftc.
(D'^ nh^^ /tero /oMes of stmu: but Ex. 31, 18 jSQ nH^); Num.
13, 39. Deut. I, 38. Joe. 5, 2. 6, 4. 9 Ki. 14, 14. 25, 23. Jer. 41, 16,
Esra 3, 3, &c. ''^*ll5iJ W the people of the cmmUy; a Chron. a6, 14;
so perhaps tsh^ '33 stms of God^ Ps. 29, i. 89, 7 (according to others
sons of gods)\ or finallv even
(r) By using the plural of ihe mmtn rectum; e.g. T\Mk\^ n*a Ex. r
6, 14. Num. I, 4 sqq. and elsewhere, as plur. of

2. n^3 father s
house^ famih : ni3n n'3 the houses of the high places, 2 Ki. 17, 29
(also nto3n 'ri3 23, 19); Drra|^ /A< j|0Mr ^ Heir idols, i Sam.
31, 9. zek. 46, 24 ; comp. also Jud 7, 25 ihe head of Orei and Zeeh,
i.e. the heads, ftc.
Rem. When a a distrilrative teme) with a suffix nfen iMidc to X

sulntantiTe (in
a plaial, the riognlarfbnn of tiie tabstantive tnfltoe^ iinoe the idea of plurality
it already adeqoately expresMd by the wnSBat, . g, m (for 0f) Mmm^ Ft,
17, to ; tSfia* ikiir rigU hand. Ft. 144, 8 [to in the English RV.].
126 Dtiermmaiim of Nouns in general, Deiermination of
Proper Names,
1. A noun may either be determinate in itself, as a proper name (i
or pronoun (see below, letters d and / ), or be made so by its context.
In the latter case, the determination may be effected either by prefixing

the article (see 126), or by tbe connexion of the noun (in the
construct state) with z following detemunate genitive, and conaequentlj

also (according to 33. r) by Us union with a pronominal suffix
({ 127. a). It is to be taken as a fundamental rule, that the deter-

mination can only be effected in one of the wa3rs here mentioned;
the article cannot be prefixed to a proper name, nor to a noun
followed by the genitive, nor can a proper name be used in the
construct state. Deviations from this rule are either only apparent
or have^ arisen from a corruption of the text.
Ren. Only few passages It a noun made expressly inditermincUe bj the

in a h
addition of IHIC in the sense of onr indefinite article comp. Ex. t6, 33. Jud. 9, 5|.
;
13, a. 1 Sam. 1, x. 6, 7. 7, 9. la. 37, x. x Ki 13, 11. 19, 4. ao, 13, aa, 9. a Ki.
Cf. Konic^, ! fhr^thaucie, ii. 43R sq., accordin( to whom the plnral of the
principal word exeicises an influence on the determining genitive.
Digitized by Google
422 The Parts of Speech, [ 125-
4, 1. 7, 8. 8, 6. la, lo. Eiek. 8, 8. 37, 16. Dan. 8, 10^ 5 (in 8, 13 EHn^ nn^
Le. mu, vis. a ^^pr b opposed to another).
e It is futlwr to be noticed, that in Hetnew the phenomenoa sometimes occurs
which the Arab gramniarians call indcte,'minaUness for the sakt ampSfieatum;
e.g. Is. 31, 8 and he shall Jlee 3"in~'pEp from a sword, i.e. from an irresiilihte
sword {God's sword' ;

comp. Is. 28, 2 1^3; i Sam. 6, 2 Up; Hos. 3, i
a 'u'ctnau, without doubt to be referred to the Goiner mentioned in cap. i ; Ainos

(}, 14 ''iiS ; Ts. 77, 16 jn|3; Prov. 31, la P'''J5f, if with Dclitzach it is to be rcferteti
to God Job 8, 10
;
meaning important words, but in 15, 13 reproachful
words, Comp. on this point, 117.^, note i, and Delteesdi* AmAmm, ed. 4, p. ;v.
d 8 Real pra^ nouiu, as being the names of things (or persons)

only once met vdth, are sufficiently determinate in themselves. Such
names, therefore, as njn:, Spjf,, , thtf do not admit of the
article nor can they be in the construct state. On the other hand,
not only GenHUe names (as denoting the various individuals belonging
to the same class), but also all those proper names, of which
the appellative sense is still ûfliLiLULly evident to the mind, or at least
has been handed down from an earlier period of the language,
frequently (often even as a rule) take the article (according lo 126. r),
and may even be followed by a genitive.
i Examples. Like the above-mentioned proper names of individaals, coontries,

and cilici, so also national names, which are identical in form with the namr of
the founder of the race (e. g. /lOfe'^ D^N, DN^D), arc always delcrminaic in
themselves. Of Gcntilic names (e.g. ^*13yn the Ilcbrnv^ D^3yn the Htbrrui,
Gen. 40, 15; *35^33n the Canaanite) the plural D"!!??^, even wWw nuaniDu
the Philistii es, i^, gtaerally used without the article ^but cf. i iSam. 4, 7, .xc, 'BH) ;
so always D^'}hQ3. Evident appellativeB (analogons to such modern names as

th Hague, le Havre) are n^3|n iki kUl, in the constnict state n^3|, ie.
the GiMk named oJUt Saml to diatingniih it from othen; HD'tn tk$ ^kMt;
^]^n the whUt moumtedm) tJU LOamem; yKp (prop.
Atap; |iJ3pn (prop. tMe
thl rhfif) iki P/m; comp. Amos 8, 8 Dn3 itK^ /Of ikt river Egppt; ^
|T1>n ih Jordan (aocoiding lo Seybold, MitthiU, umd Naehr, dd DPV^^ 18^
p. iXj probably, originally iht drMimg-ph^
f Rem, X.
character of leal proper names,
In n few instances oiiginal appellatives have compleldy assnmed the
and nro tboefoic naed witbont the attide; thns
^ Cwiseqaently, nÔjl Deut 3, 13. Jos. i, la, &c. the Dentcrononist) in

the combination Plfjo^ D^K^ (for which elsewhere H^D D3Bf) is to be regardi
not as a proper name but as a Gentilic name {~thi tribe of (hf Mana<$ites\, for
whicli in Deut. 29, 7 ^B'iDp i& used, as in 10, 8 ^l*?!! X' ihe tru>c 0/ the Lcz tUi,
and in Jud. iS, i "HH 'B' the tribe of the DaniUs,~-lik Jos. 13, 7 TV^^f^ (like
Geutilie names io ^__.) is even used adjectivally.
{ 125.] Determination of Nouns, 423
God, to denote the one true God (as elsewhere iDiT) Gen. I, I and so
geneiallj in thU docament of the Pent, iqp lo x. 6^ eUewhere lometiinet 0^n?|(n
4 9Us (comp.
Mtf
S 1 36.); tlso the sing.
Almighty never take the
nl^M
article.
M
Moreover, D*1K
iht Mcst High
/^</<j<
(after
from Gen. 5i
^N), and
t
onwards (previously in 2, 7, &c., CINH //i^ first man) \ JCfe' ô/OM, i Chron* 31,
(but Zech. 3, I. Job i, 6 and elsewhere i^trn Mt' oihfrsary).
To tlienouns originally apixllalive, which the language regards as
class of
g
proper names, and which consequently never take the article, belong also certain
archaic words mostly used only by poets, such as îXy* JIaiks, ^"2^ worlds Dinn
octan, of the body of water which encircles the earth, Gen. i, 2 and cLiewhcre
bnt la. 63, 13. Ps. 106, 9 n\Dnri3 through the de/tAs, vis. of the Red Sea^
3. When noons whidi tiie usage of the langnage always tieats as pcoper names M
occasionally appear to be connected with a following genitive, this is really owing
to an ellipse whereby the noun whidi really gOTenos the genitive, Le. the
appellative idea contained in the proper name, is suppressed. So evidently in the
case oi r\Sn2) nin^ as an abbreviation of the original (2 Sam. 5, 10, See), Hin^
Yahiveh, the God 0/ hosts. So al.-.o in geographical names such as

0**^^3 "^^K f > (the city) 0/ the Chaldees, Gen. n, 38; U^yy} DIN Aram ^thc
region) of the t-,vo rivers; HlîT Dn^ Bethlehem (the cily) 0/ judah; ^K
nS^lp 2 Sam. io, 14, ik.c^ tu diûuguiiih it from O^D t'ZI^t Aifel by iJu xvaier,
3 Chion. 16, 4 ; nyba 1 Sam. 11, i, &c. ;

plT Nam. 22, i. 26,3. 63, &c.
n^pn iTiB^ Jud. 8, 32 (but in 6, 24 niD^*)"i njlT B^^^ ;i>3t thtZimtftht
holy Oue of israd. Is. 60, 1 4 ; D'D^^' D^HD^n 1 Sam. t, i. Some of these examples
(comp. also Amos 6, 3) come very near to the actual construct state (comp. above,
n83l), since e. g. the addition of the genitive serves to distinguish the place
from fonr othem called Aiam (see dae Lexicon), or firom another Bethlehem.
Aimm, Bethlehem, &c, are accordingly no long^ names found only in one special
scns^ and therefore abo are no longer pcoper names in the strictest sense.
8. Of the pionouuiis, the personal pronouns proper (the separate %
pronouns, 32) are always determinate in themselves, since they can

dciiuLe only definite iiKlividuals (the 3rd person, aUo definite things,).
For the same reason the dcmonslralive pronouns ( 34) arc alô
determinate in themselves, when they stand alone (as equivalent to
substantives), either as subjea (Gen 5, 29) or as predicate (e.g.

D^*n m Out U the day, Jud. 4, 14; O^l^lO ihm are the wordSt
Deut I, iX or as object (e.g. ni<rn^ a Sam. 13, 17), or as genitive
* That various otiier words, such as siaii^ Ttf^diepAuitMeUt ]fl frime^
^ fUli^ n>enn eêttuU worhif^, are always found without the article
to he attributed to any special ardtaism, but is to be explained from tlie
is
&ct
not
that
th^ lielong solely to poetic language which avoids the article ; in ottier cases,
such as n^T]Q deep sUef, there is 00 occasion for the article in the passages we
possess.
Digitized by Google
434 Parts of Speech, [ 126.
("J ^^'!^ 1 Ki. 21, 2). or finally when joined to a preposition C^l*
Gen. 2, 23; I Sam. i6, 8, see \02.g).
So also the personal pronouns ^^'7, On, HT^n, nsrt when thejr
are used as demonstratives (= t'd, tile, &c.) are always deter-

minate in themselves, eg. "^^'^n jwn M/j /> /A^ thing, Gen. 41, 28.
Thej are made detenninate by the article, when they are joined tike
adjectives (see 126. u) with a determinate substantive, e.g. n}n c^n
Mix ffumy nJltT El^^^j? Mfx rtt/ Wl? TSg^ nonn Q^M /i|i)f
dqytt and in thai time, Joel 4, i. The demonstrative, however, even

in this case, is frequentljr used w&kout the article, as being sufficiently
determinate in itself.
196. Detirmmaiion by Mams f Ike ArtieU.
1, The article {''I'l 35) was originally, as in other languages
(clearly in the Romance ; comp. also o, 17, rd in Homer), a demonstra-

tive pronoun. The demonstrative force of the article, apart from its
occasional use as a relative pronoun (see $ 138. /'), appears now,

however, only (tf) in a few standing phrases, and {p) in a certain class
of statements or exclamations.
() Comp. tf.n thu day, kcdie (f 100. this niffiU Gen. 19, 34;
OSfin this Hme, Gen. j, ^3 ; n|||^ this year (-in this yeir) Is. 37, 30. Jer. a8, 16.
{$) ioeivdes tboae instances in which the artide, mostly when prefixed to
a participle, joins on a new stntement conceminp; n preceding noun. Although
such participles, &o, arf no dorbt primarily n^'ardc'l always as in apposition to
a preceding subslaiuivc, ihc article nevertheless ha* in some of these examples
shnost the fovoe of HVt ((TH, non) as the snlgect of nowi>etause ; c. g Vs. 10
the judgmtnti Îht Lard art tnu . . ., vcne 11 O^l^nn ^ a p. tJu mart
i0 be disirtd than gMj Lt.iAey art aunt ta bt dtsirtdf or even ikty^ that art mart
; comp. Gen. 49, si. Is. 40, 32 sq. 44, s/sq. 46, 6. Amo* s, 7.
i9 be desired\ ftc.
5, 7. Ps. 33. 15. 49, 7 (D^nC^n in the pstallel half of the ver^ continued bj
a finite verb); T?. 104, 3. Job 6. 16. 28. 4. 30. 3. 41. 25 nnd fri-cpicntly. Whoi
such a parliciiilc has nnothcr co-orilinalc with it, ihc latter j^> used 'ithout the article,
since according to the above it strictly speaking rcprci><.nti a second predicate, and
as snch, nooonling to letter t', lemains Indeterminste ; e. g. Job 5, 10 wka âdk
(|nln) rain, ftc., and $endeih (0^71), ftc.
* The tftide is sometimes vsed with shnilsr cmphasn
* tttbetantfw^ which beftne
icrva M the mtject of compoud sentence (| 140. d)\ e<K>
l>ciit. 3a, 4 ^ttn
OMpn L e. as a fresh statement (not in apposition to the pracedinf dth\

really equivalent Xa kt is a rtck, ftrfiet ii kis work (Le. wkau work is Jof^Sniî
comp. Vi. id, 31.
On the ftud^gotts nse of the article befove participles which hafc a vMl
tnBx, as in Fk. 19, 33 aad elsewhere^ comp. above, 1 116./.
i ia6.] Determination by Means of the Article. 435
2. The article is, generally speaking, employed to determine a d

substantive wherever it is required by Greek and English ; thus
(a) When a penon or thing already spoken of is mentioned again,

and is consequently more definite to the mind of the hearer or reader;
e. g. Gen. i, 3 and God said. Lei there he Ught: verse 4 and God taw
ike i^ki ('rtMn'Tltl); i Ki. 3, 94 feich me a sword: and ihey droiîi
the sword; Eccles. 9, 15. (In a Sam. la, a therefore ^JjJ- must
be read.)
(^) With a title midcrslood and recognized by every one, e. g.
nt^*^ "nÔ o ârrxKixi XoXm^mv: Gen. 35, 8 under the oak (the well-known
oak which was there).
(f) With appe11n:tivcs tn denote persons or natural objects which are

unique, e. g. biian jnan the high pritsi^ ^S^Df'O the sun, H^? earth.
{d) When ideas relating to whole classes are restricted (simply by

usage) to particular individuals (like 6 trm^r^r, meaning Homer)
or things, e.g. }^ adversary^ }Df|rn &e adversary^ Satan: ^ hird,
Betal as proper name of the god; Dnttn the (first) many Adam;
CTii^Mn' or i the me true God (comp. also 6 Xpun^ in the
New Testament); also the river, i.e. the Euphrates; "^3?n

the circle, sc. of the jorJan, the Jordan plain [Gen. 19. 17, clc.j.
it) As a rule, wiih the vocative, e.g. 2 Sam. 14, 4 'H^^l' ny;^n
hdp, 0 king; Zech. 3, 8 ?nbn yB^^nj O Joshua the high prial;
iSam. 17, 58. 24,9, aKi. 9, 5; in the plural, Is. 42, 18. Joel 1,2.13;
but cf. and H?); 23, 16. Hos. 13, 14.
also Jos. 10, 13. Is. I, 2 (tJ^S'
Joel 1, 5. Eccles. 10, 17. 11, 9 (see KOnig, LehrgsiHude, ii. 6). The
vocative occurs withaut the article in Is. as, 2, since it has been
already defined by a preceding accusative.
Rem. Sliictly speaking io all these cases the snhrtuithre with the article f
is really in apposition to the penonal pronoun of the 2nd person, vhidt is either
expressly mBtk>ned or virtually pitescnt ^ the imperative', e.g. I Sam. 17, 58
thou, the young man. But such passages ns 1^. 42. 18, uhcrc the vocative precede*?
the imperative, prove that in nch cases the substantive originally in apposition
eventually acquired the value of a complete clause.
(/) With vords denoting classes (see more particularly under g'
letter I),
{g) In a peculiar wayj to specify persons or things, which are
On the subsequent change of Q'lK, Q^?^ proper names by the

omIssioQ of the article, of. above, 1 95./
Digitized by Cc
426 The Paris of Speech
so far definite as :<> be naiurally thought of in connexion wiih a given
case, and mui Ix; assumed accordintÎy to be there (see letters q-s).
{K) With adjectives (also ordinal numbers and demonstrative pro-

nouns used adjectivally) which are joined to substantives detennined
in some way (see letter ).
k Rem. The article may be omitted in poetry in all tlie abore-mentiooed cues;
in general it occurs in poetry far Icsi frequently than in prose. Its use or omissiou
probably often rests on rhythmical grounds^; il is omitted also for rhetorical
reasons. Comp. c.j,'. for ^KH Fs. 2, 2 ; D^3^D as vocative, verse 10 ; !|^D
for IJ^BH 21, 2 ; fi<")^JJ ^DS' ^contrary to letters , 99, 3. In the instances
in nîch the n of the article is omitted after a prefix ( 35. n), the vowel of the
article ia oltes retained after the prefix even hi poetry, e. g. D^^^ Ps. a, 4 aad
elaewhere.
i (/') On ilic QLlicf hand, the article is always omitted when a j)erson
ur thing is to be represented as indefinite (or indcfmable) or as }et
unknown ;
consequently also before the pretlicate, since this is from
its nature always a creneral term, under which the subject is included,
e. g. Gen. 29, 7 OVn liy as yd ihe day ts gnai^ Le. it is yet high
day; 33, 13. 40^ 18. 4a, 26* Is. 66, 3.
k item. At exoeptioD* to the above rule It b onial to sopad Ihoae examples in

which a deteimhiate adjectiye or participle (equtvalcttt to a relative danae) is wed
apparently aa a predicate, e.g. Geo. a, IX S^Sil MH it is ike compassingt Le. that
utiwhiih compasseth; 42,6. 45, 12. Ex.9, ^7- DeuL 3, 21. 8, 18. ii, 7. i Sam.
4, 16. Is. 14, 27 (cf. in Greek, t.^. St. Mat. 10, 20, where Winer, Gram.desneutesi,
Sprtuhtdionu, \ 2, Rem., cxplaini* vi AoXovvTf t as a predicate with the article),
lu reality, however, these supposed predicates are rather fobject* (ace to f 116. ^y,
and the only peculiarity dL these cases ia that the subject is not sabsmned onder
a geneial idea, bnt that the predicate is equated with it.
/ / 3. The use of the article to determine the class is more extensive

in Hebrew than in most other languages. In this case the article
indicates imiversally known, ciearly circtunscribed, and tiierelore
well defined classes of persons or things. The special cases to be

considered are^
() The employncat of general names as collectivea In the singidar, to denote
the mm total of Indiridaals bdcmguig to the class (whidi may, however, be done
jost ai well by the plural) ; e. g. /i righteous, tht wkkcd mcH, Ecdes. 3, 1 7 tkt ;
waman, i.e. t^c female sex, 7, 26; iê cttemy, i.e. ihe eucmies, Ps. 9, 7;
îkn the lUr in watt, i.c. tJU tiers i wait; p^HH tlte armed man, Le. soieti$rSi
> Cf. the useful sutistics of J. Ley in the Nttti JakrUkktr fOr FkiMl^ mml
Fddagoigik^ ate AbCeiloDg, 1891, Heft 7-9.
i 126.] Determination by Means of the Article. 427
*|Pl<Dn the rearguard; H^riB'Gn the spoiler ^ i Sam. 13, 17*; so also (as in
agUh) with Qame^ of animals, wbeo somethiDg i;> asserted of them, which applies
to tlie vhok tpeeies, & g. a Sam. 1 7, 10 Of #if tMuragc of n^Kil the Um. Especially
alio with Gentilic names, e.g. tfu Ctmaattdi, Geo. 13, 7 (comp. 15, 19 sq.);
ao in Engliah tkt Jftmsicm, tk* Turk, ftc. In Attic writm 6 'Afipaibf, 6 Jvpa^
muaio%, &c.
(Jb) Names of materials known ever}nvhere, the elements and other vfords fit
denoting classes, even though only a part and not the whole of them is considered,
in which case in other languages, as e.g. in English, the article is usually omitted
(comp., however, our i0/aa inio the water, into the Jire, &&), e.g. Gen. 13, a
andAbrttm was wry rich 2T\\Z\ C)D33 HSjpQB in tattk, in silver a$ul in gM;
Jof. II, 9 ami As htmt their chariOs with Jire; comp. Gen. 6, 14. 41, 4a
(unless this mei, the ham neoemrily belonging to the oflkial dreiB) ; Ex. a, 3.
31, 4 (35, 33). Is. I, aa, &c Similarly the article is useddth terms of measnie*
ment, as n&KH Ex. x(, &c: "T^hn and nSH iek. 43, II ; Ex. 16, aa
73rQ
V V-
a Sam. 8, a.
(r) The exi^rcssion of abstract ideas of every kind, since they are likewise used
to represent w bole cks;>es of at tributes or conditions, physical or moral defects, &c.
e. g. Piov. a5, 5 (pllf3} ; Oen. 19, 11 and they smote the men . . . vdth
Uinûss; la. 60, a 1|B^n darhuessf Amos 4, 9, ftc.
{d) Cofn/ar$t9tu, met the object compared ia treated not (aa nraally In Eogliab) q
iaidividnally bat aa a genecal torn, e.g. Ia. i, 18 tohiu as smew,
*>^JQf3
as weeij red ybinj Ohe crimsm; 4 and the heavens shall be relied together
Is. 34,
laâsaurelii comp. Nnm. 11, ta. Jnd. 6, 18. 26, 9 as nny|n~i'^nD a stris^
ef teiw is hrekem; i San. a6, ao. t Ki. 14, 15. 1%, 10, 18. %^ aa aj, la a9, 8.
53, 6, Nab. 3, 5- Ps* 33i ? 49^ ^S! comp. also such examples as Gen. 19, a8.
Jud. 14, 6, where the object compared ia detcnnined by a detennioate genitive
which follows (according to 1.17;.
Examples of indeterminate coinjârisons, such as ^^"!^^^ Ps. 17, la, "i^3i3
p
Job 16, 14, 2tt3 31, 18, "033 3^1, 3, arc rare, and perhaps due only to the Masora,
>so at least in the case of singulars, while in such plurals as tlioae in Gen. 42, 30.
Joel a, 4. 7, the omiaaicn of the article may be esplidned by the ordinary mica.
On the other hand, the artide ia regnlarly omitted, when the object compared
ia already defined by means of an attribute (or relative danae. Pa. 17, la),
e.g. Ia. 16, a n^&i} )g T1^9 as wanderiMg birds, (as) a scattered tust (bot
comp. 10, 14 \^y, 14, 19. a9, 3 -9)} 1^ (but Pa. 1, 4 ftoj)? Jer. a, 30. Prov.
a7, 8. Job 30. 14*
4. Peculiar to Hebrew* is the employment of tbe aitide to denote

q
a single person or thing (primarily one which is as yet unknown, and
' Bat in Ex. la, a3 TX\ ia either to be eaplamed aa<fei<<rp!rirîow mentioned

for thefiiat time) according to letter or a paiticnlar angd ia meant whoae icgnlar
fimction it was to inflict pnmthmwita. Othera again take isn even ia x. i a, a3
impersonally = destruction.
' Comp., however, analogous examples in Biblical Aramaic in Kautuch'a
Gremm, des BUtl, Aram.^ \ 79.7^ e.g. Dan. a, 3, a, and elsewhere.
Digitized by Google
therefore not capable of being defined) as being present to the mind
under given circumstances. In such cases in English the indefinite
article is mostly used,
r Thai Amos 5 19 or 9^ mm didJU fnm a lUn C^P* ^ ptrticnlv
lioh pursuing him at the time), and a bear (3^) Aim, &&, comp. 3, la.
I Ki. 20, 36 (John 10, la); also Gen. 8, 7iq. 14, 13 (td^^fin, i.e. om that
had escaped, the particular one who came just then ; so also Ezek. 24, 26. 33, 21 ;
comp. 2 Sam. 15, 13); Gen. r;, i. iS, 7 the sct-'anf, who is regarded as being
tonslantly at hand and awaiting his commands; comp. 2 .Sam. 17, 17 fbnt ^J?|n
Num. II, 27 is used like t^'SsH above); DipT33 Gen. 2S, ir, accortiin^ to
Dillmann, upon the place suitable for passing the night, or the right place, but
it may possibly also refer to the sanctuary of Ikthcl afterwards so sacred and
oelebrated; Geo* jO, a6. Ex. a, 15. 3, 2. ai, 20 (2 Sam. 23, 21). Lev. 34, 10
(Sunaritan vlTlf^ withoot the article) ; Nnm. 17. 11. ai, 9. 3$, tf. Dent 19, 5.
Jos. a 15. Jnd. 4, 18. 8, 95. 13, 19. 16, 19. 19,39. 30, 16. i San. 17, 34. 19, 13.
91, 10. 3 Sam. 17, 17. I KL 6, 8. Is. 7, 14 (np^JH, i.e. tlU fwrticnlar mtddoh
durough whom the prophet's aimonncement shall be faUiUed; we should saj
a maiden [cf. Driver on r Sam. 1,4. 6, S. 1 9, 13].
S So always to icriie in the hook (or cn the scrcH. Nnm. 5, 23. Jer. 32, 10 , i.e.
not in the book already in use, but in the book wiuch is to be devoted to that
purpose, equivalent to in a book^ on a screJl, Ex. 1 7, 14. I Sam. 10, 25. Job 19, 23.
Especially instrnctiTe for this use of the article is the phiase 0^ ^ which does
not simply refer bade to the piwiovs tuurative in the tense of (At sami day^ bqt
Is twed exactly like oar (properly meanmg on the particular day when
it happened, i.e. m a certain day), i Snm* 1, 4. 14* I* e Ki. 4, 8. 21. 18. Job
I, 6. 13. In Gen. 39, 11 eren T\V\ Di*n3.
/ The sometimes used I'n this way before colleclives in the singular, which
article is
are not meant to denote (like the examples giren under letter /) a whole class, but
only that part of it which applies to the given case; thus H^'^yn Ex. 33, 38;
Bân Nunu a I, 7.
u 6. When a substantive is defined by the article, or by a suffix,
or by a following genitive determinate in any way (see the examples

below), the attribute belonging to it (whether adjective, participle,
ordinal, or demonstrative i)ionoiin) necessarily takes the article (see,
however, the Rem.), c. ^. Gen. 10. 12 ^^V'? ihe great tiiy : 28, 19
Wnn D^pon Ihaf plaec ; Gen. 2, 2 ^V"?^ ^1^*3 on the seventh day;
Dcut 3, a4 ihy strong hand. A genitive following the sub-
stantive may, according to 1 27, be determined either by the article,
e. g. I Sam. 35 bân 1^ ihis worikUtt man (propw tint man

95,
of toerthlessttess ; comp. also such examples as a Chron. 36, 18, where
the article is prefixed only to a second genitive following the noun);
or as a proper name, e.g. Deut if, 7 njnj nfc^ the grtai work
Digitized by Googl
5 126.} Determntation by Means of the Article, 429
îkiLord; or by a suffix, e. g. Is. 36, 9 D^sojn 'ahit najr the bast
rf my maste/s tervants.
When several attributes (either connected by Wow or added by y
asyndeton) follow a determinate substantive, each of them takes the
article, e.g. Deut. lo, 17 6<li3ni ->22n ^lan ^Kn /}u great Go<t the
eighty y and the ttrr'ikle* Comp. also x. 3, 3. Deut. i, 19, in both
of which places a demonstrative with the artide also follows the
adjective
Rem. I. The article is, howevr not infreqacDtly wed also^

(a) With the attribote alone* when it is added to as originally mdelwite snb- W
stantive as a sabseqoent limitation; so especinlly with ordinals after Di^*, e.g.
Gen. I, 31 (comp. 2, 3. Ex. 30, 10, and elsewhere) ^^^^ Di^ the sixth day (prop.
a day namely the sixth; but D^^ a second day, Gen. i, 8); Ex. 12, 15
^SJ'tnjl Dl*D from the ftrst day orurard ,not before Dan. 10, u ancl Neh. 8, 18
is pB'N'in Di*n"fO nsed instead of it ; on the other hand, the article is always
found after a, hence 'l^'U^n D^*2, &.C.; ; in Jud. 6, 35 the text is evidently corrupt
(sKre verse 26). Especially also in certain frequently recurring combinations, as in
particolaiiting gates (Jer. 3S, 14. Ezek. 9, a, anddsewlieK; Zech. 14, 10) or courts
I Ki. 7, 8. la, and elsewhere; Eaek. 40^ s8), and ytaj often when the attribute
ooDsists of a participle, e.g. Dent, s, 33. Jod. ai* 19. i Sam. 35, 10. Jer. a7 3.
46^ 16 y\pr\ Snn Ou sw0rd wJUeA 9ûtst iek. 14, is. Zech. 11, a K^th,
Prov. 36, iS. Ps. 119, 21.
Of the other examples, r;en 3i, 39 ("where, however, the Samaritan Pentateuch X
reads niC'^Dn), 41, a6 <but ct. verse 4), .Num. 11, 35. Jud. iG, 37. I Sam. 17, 17
and ao, 3 may at any rate be explained on the ground that the preening cardinal
nmnber is eqnivaleot to a detemttnaot; in Gen. i, St. >8. 9, 10, and elsewhere,
the snbstantive is already determined by ^7^^ and in i Sam. 14, 19 (tlb'^) by

D^.In I Sam. is> 93* > Sam. iSj s. 4. b. 7, so (where, however, niâfePH
mi||^ also be nnderstood as a subsequent explanation of IJIIS) and Ndk. % 35,
the omission of the article after the preposition is certainly doc merely to the
Masora. In i Sam. 16, 23. Zech. 4, 7. Ps. 104, x8, the omission of the article
(before "1, H) may be due to a regard for euphony (see letter % bclowj.
' The demonstrative used adjectivally is ffenerally placed after the a(ijective
proper \ in such cases as bil|n n|n 0^^'l the adjective forms a further (fresh)
addition to HTH D^.
" Cf. Driver, Ttrn^^ 3rd cd., % 309.The onussion of the article from the
sabstaative is not to be regarded in this hulaooe as an hidication of late style,
and c(nsequently canuot be put Ibfward as a proof of the late origin of the
Priestly Code' (comp. Dillmann on Gen. i, 31, and especially Driver in
the Journal of Philology^ xi. 329 sq., against Giesebrecht in ZAW. 1881,
p. 2655(1.). On the other hand, the common omission of the article from the
subaiaative before a determinate adjective (e. nSilJn r\1^j3 thereat syna^ûe,
in the Hebrew of the Misbna) is certainly a later idiuut.
Digitized by Google
The Parts of Speech, , [126.
On the other hand, in i Sun. tS 18 (to be read I^KH). 17, xa (Hjn is a later
Kdditioo). 19, 99 (comp. the LXX). a Kt. ao, 13' (of. It. 39, a). Jcr. 6, aa 17, a.
3a, X4. 40, 3 ATVil. Bide a, 3 (omit Dîa with CoraiU). MlCi 7, zr. Pa. 6a, 4,
cither the text is corrtipt, or the expression incorrect.
)* {b'^' No article with the attriLiite, while the substantive is determined either
by the article, or a sufhx, or a following f^cnifive. Thus the article is sometimes
omitted with demonstratives, since they arc already to a certain extent determined
bj their meuing (comp. also the Mfibi* inscriptioni 1. 3, riKl nsflil this higk
plaa) ; thus ivith Kin Geo. 19, 33 (evidently for eophonj, and so piobaUy often)
30, z& 3a, a3. X Sam. 19^ xo ; with 11*11 CSen. 38, ax ; with 9 Pi> xa, 8 (aecording
to the Maaoim IT is a idatiTe pronoim liere, as always elsewhere) ; with il^
I Sam. a, 93, aecordinf to die present oomipt text (the original resding TNi^ 0S"79
became D^n^K Tsrh'^ tod OVI^K was then corrapted to rhu)
, ; so, almoit with-
oat exception, when the snbstantive is determined only by a snffix, e.g. Joe. a, aa
Jnd. 6, 14. a Ki. x, a and 8, 8aq., xo X9, arises hy contrao-
tion Irom or we should simply read (in all these passages with Ml) ; (>en.
24, 8 (with n^<t); Ex. 10, 1. 1 Ki. aa, aj. Jer. 31, ai (with H^).
S Of the other remaining examples I^. ri. 9 explains itself; the direct connexion
of the attribute with its snb^tantive is interrupted by the insertion of C*^. In
Ezek. 34, 13. Hag. 4. Fs. 143, 10. Cant. 6, ia(?) the sulântive is also ;see
above) determined by a suffix, and consequently the demonstrative is less closely

attached; the same applies to Gen. 37, . 4a, 19. 43, 14. Ps. 18, x8 except
that in tliese passagea the omisaion of tlie article before *\ M, y may at the same
time be due to considerations of euphony (as also in Jos. 16, i before Gen. 7XX
cf. Jos. II, 8. Am. 6, 3. N'nm. 14. 37 before 1, 2S, 4. K/tk. 10, 9 before K, 21, 19
before H)'. In Num. 38, 4. Sam. 13, sq. (^^^t) and a
i Ki. 25, 16 Qî^ after
a determinate substantive;, the attribute aj^flin. being a numeral, is determinate in

itself (sec above, letter x) ; finally, in 2 Chron. 26, 15 D^^TTQ and O^ÎiKB are to
be read, as in Jer. 2, 3i ^Dl| for |D|n, in 2a, 26 for 'Mfl; in a Sam. 6, 3
omit n^n, and in Exdk. 39, 27 omit D^31. Withoot any apparent reason the
artide is omitted in Dan. 8, X3 and ti, 31.
aa a. When as fai Mic 7, la (MVI fiV in tAst dayH), the article b omitted from
both substantive and demonstrative, and in Ezra 3, 12, the deroonatiative
precedes (n^3n Ht equivalent to H^TI n^3n), this is obviously due in boA
to a ra<lical cornijtion of the text (not only in the words quoted). In J*)*, o, I*
^3Cn^ is cither in apjio.sition to the iiuUpindent demonstrative HI [ = th:s cur
/>read, &c.^, as in verse 13 fiHW is to H^tt, or they are comj-letc sentences, ikt's
is cur breads 8cc. So also in Ex. 32, i nS'O (kal [tste^ Moses, &c.), in
I Sam. 17, 53 ")$|n, in Ps. 48, 15 D^n1>K are to be taken in apposition to n|.
On Pa. 68, 8 and Is. 23, 13, comp. 136. i,
' The same reason no doubt also favoured the omission of the article before
Km and n^K, as also in such cases as x Ki. xo, 8 (wheve a vowd pwcedea die flV
Alao in Is. a3, 7 (> tMs X9itr jpytm . . .t) the aitlde Is omitted before rv()l^
probably only for enplumy.
127.] Noun determined by Determinate Genitive, 431
127. 2ê Noun deiermimd fy a /o/imt't^ JDeêrmtnaie Gemfofe,
When a genitive, detennined In any way, follows a nmm regms, a

it also determines the nomen regens, which, according to 89. a,
is always in ihc construct state. Moreover, every pronominal suffix
attached to a substantive is, accorchng to 33. c, to be considered

as a genitive determinate by nature. An independent genitive may
be determinate
(a) By its chaxacter as a ^cper name (according to 135. a\ e.g.
njn; to the word of ihi Lord,
(^) By having the
war) the soldier (but nDn5>p
article, e. g. n^p^W ^ (prop, the man
ncnSon ^p}^
of the
b?^k Jos. 17, i, a soldier);
Nmn. 31, 49, M<r soldiers; Kâsn W the word of the prophet, Jer. 28, 9
ihuL on the other hand, ^"J^^
e.g., D^^J^^ fll^T? a commandment
of men which hath been taught^ Is. 29, 13 ; word offalsehood^
Prov. 29, 12).
(r) By the addition of a pronominal suffix (see above), e.g. ^^^^^
my father's house,
(d) By construction with another genitive determined in some way,
e. g. Gen. 3, a giTT? of the fruit of the trees of the garden.
Thus in Is. 10, 12 four, and in 21, 17 even five, members of a series
are determined by a concluding determinate genitive.
Kcm. r. The nbove explains also the various meanings of ^3 (prop, a substantive b
in the scnê of azp fgîd', whole), according as it is followed br a dcfcrminnte or
indeterminate genitive. In the former case ^3 has tht.' mennin^,' of the entirety, i.e.
all, the whole ' like the French tons les hpnirncs, toufe la vill/), c. g. int^rrbs
the ivho'e jii'op. the entirety of the forth. D"lX"~/3 all men^ : cf. also K.x. 1,22
prT/S nzn"/3 nil daughters); iS, 2i. Num. 15, 13. Jer. 4, 29,
all sons,
and cases like Num. 4, 33. 47. ai, 8 where ^3 is followed by a singular participle
with the article. On the <êr bandf before u
indetenniiiate genitiTe is used
in the more indefinite (ladiTidaelizing) sense iA ef att kmdSt ony (eomp. tout
hommst ^ tet^ P*^) ^ distribatiTdy eaek^ eneiy, e.g. f^"?! every (kind of)
(;en. a, 9; comp. 4, aa. 14, xe.
O^r^â etfery dytt ettry time,
i Chron. 99, 9;
Pk. 7, xa.
*19T^ ^ thing, Jad. 19, 19;
It is, howerer, to he ofaaeifed c

a) That the article may in this case also (see ( ia6. h) be omitted in poetic
style, althoagh the substantive in qiiestioa is to be legnrded as detenninte
e. g. n):rij>^^ att (the) toMes, Is. a8, 8.
' OTiMtl heinea coUeclife: in itielf DUCTTTS CMld also ncsD the whole utam,
Digitized by Googie
432 The Parts of Speech [5 127-
That the meaning eveiy i freqneot even before singulars ued fiotledlfely
(^)
afterwards the Idea otfitis^w pmt% naturally into that of totality, e.g. ^rr^3 each
living things i.e. every (not evtry kind of ) living ^^'ing; *1B'3"^3 all /Ush, i.e.
all men or all Hviug (natures (with the article only in Gen. 7. 15 before a rela-
tive clause, and in Is. 40, 6; ; sometimes also l^^h^ ^l trui^ tM Hrds;
finally
(f) That before the names of members of the human body, "^3 Irequently
(as being determinate in itself) denotes the entirety, e. g. Is. i, 5 the v>hU head,
tkt wMt heart (the sense required by the context, not every hmi, &c., which the
tstegxtaAaa im Ue^ might also mean) ; 9, ix* a XL 13, 3. Eidc. %% 1 alli^^fhi
tahdt a/) their shoulders .,,aU{the vhele f) their Mns; 36, 5.On ^ with
a suffix when it follows a noon in appoaition (e.g. Is. 9 8 D^n the feefle,
e^ ef itt L e. the whele nettieMt move empliatic than 0^n~^3 ; c Driver on

t Sam. a, 9), as wdl as when it follows abaolnlely in the genitive
every one, e. g.Geo. 16, la) V ma die Lexicon.
1/ 2. Gentilic names (or patronymics), derived from compound proper names
(consistin<^ of a ncinen rc;êns and genitive'), are determined by inserting the article
before tlie i>ccuad part of the compound (since it contains the original genitive),
c.g. (s<= *^3^jn-f3 Jud. 3, 15 and elsewhere,
5) ^ Benjamitc ;
the BemjamiU; ^'O^'Ti'"'! the BethUhemite, i Sam. 16, t and elsewhere (comp.,
however, i Chron. s}, za Q^rf ; ^^^n'M^B the Beth-shemite, 1 Sam.
% 14; '^Vf.\l the AHetrite, Jud. 6, xx and elsewhere^ cf. t KL x6, 34.
i 3. In a few instances die nomen nêna appears to be used hidefinitely notwith-

standing a following determinate genitive; it is not so, however, in Gen. 16,
7,
where the reference is to a wcll-lciiown fouiit.iin 21, 2S, where in the <.rij;iiial ;
context there must have lx;eii some reason f>>r (he seven cu-<: lamh cf the jice':
2 Sam. 12, 30 the ipcii found in the city ; but piobably (unless the article is to be
omitted as a texflud error) it is so in Lev. 14, 34 & heme^ &c. ; Deut 22, 19
virgin ef Isradg i Sam. 4, ta o mom ef Benfamim; wo also in X Sam. so, so
thfwe 0rrms a Sam. 33, it n'](ffn P(S^ * *f greuMd (hot see Gen. 33, 19.
Jos. 34, 3}); Jud. 13, 6. Jcr. X3, 4, 41, x6i Pfc 1x3, 9. Prov. 35, 1, an ! rc }>eatedly
in Cant, (i, 11. 1354. 5, 13. 7,3. 8, a; a, X. 3,9). On the other hand,
ni^jran in the titles of Psalms no to 134 (except lai, i rii!?J?B^ was

most probably orityinally (he title of a collection, in the sense oi^ the pilgrimage-
songs' accoi liii- i.> r , and was subsequently added to thoe Psalms
severally, so Clicyue, Hampton Leitures^ p. 59.
The deviations mentioned under letter , from a itindamental rule of syntax,
J 4.
are in someopen to tospidon on textual gronods, hot much more doobtlbl
cases
are the instances in which the artide is lonnd before a noon alieady dcteimined in
some other way, as
{a^ Tlefore a noun wliiih ajipears to be deternuiieti by a foll')^v^n.' indej-endcul
determinate genitive. The least questionable are the instances iu which the geottive
is a proper name, !>tiice these may be elliptical forms of expreasioa like the apparent
construction of proper names with a genitive, noticed in | ta^. il, ejg. Num. ai, 14
fcr^ Xshtyvy ihevaUtiyStnemAj^'nlUtynÂman; a Ki. a3, i77|riV9 n|]^
> In Lira to, 17 initcad of 0^ tend simply D^jiyr^.

127-] Noun determined by Determinate Genitive. 433
the altar, namely the altar of Bethel (i.e. with the suppression of the real nomen
regens, n3|p without the article; by the pointing rOTtSn the Masora evidently
intends to allow the choice cither of reading n3TQn or correcting it to n3TTp)
^K'n-a i>Nn the God of Beth-en (equivalent to '3 i'K S^Nn), Gen. 31, 13; -q^Qn
n^tTK the king of Assyria, Is. 36, 16 (probably a scribal error due to verse 13;
it does not occur in the parallel passage, 2 Ki. 18, 31), comp. a Ki. 35, 11.
Jer. 38, 6; in the vocative, Jer. 48, 32, Lam. 2, 13. On the other hand, ^DN TT^
Gen. 24, 67 is no doubt only a subsequent insertion ; so also ^K^^^ 2 Sam. 20, 23.
2 Ki. 7, 13, n*pnn Dan. 8, 13, and K*3|n 2 Chron. 15, 8. In Ex. 9, 18
read with the .Samaritan Qi^b ; in 2 Sam. 19, 25 113^ might possibly be taken
in apposition to Di*n Ô^,
A similar ellipse must also be assumed in 2 Ki. 23, 17 the sepulchre is the
^
sepulchre of the man of God (but most probably 13i5 has dropped out after nSj^n)
and Ps. 123, 4 (comp., however, the LXX, and ol>ser>c that in the parallel member
the genitive is paraphrased by f)).
In Jos. 3, 14 n*'13n has been added to the original
jl'^Kn by a redactor ;
comp. similar syntactically impossible additions in verses
II and 17 (also in i Sam. 4, 3 and elsewhere, where the LXX still had simply
miT fr\H) ; in nri*ri Jud. i6, 14 the Masora evidently combines two ditferent
readings in*n and y)Hn and similarly in Jer. 25, 26 (where |*^Nn was only
subsequently introduced into tlie text), the two readings niS^DGH and 'NH nisfjOO
are combined. In Jos. 8, 11. 1 Ki. 14, 24. Jer. 31, 40. Ezek. 45, 16 the article,
being usual after "^3, has been mechanically prefixed, and so also in 2 Chron. 8, 16
after iy ; in 2 Ki. 9, 4 the second "^yiH (instead of ">y3) is occasioned ly the first
in Elzek. 7, 7 nD*ntD belongs as a nominative to what follows; in Itjra 8, 29 the

meaning perhaps is in the chamhcrs, in the house of the Lord, or the article is to
be omitted; in i Chron. 15, 37 the text is manifestly corrupt.
Of another kind are the instances in which a determinate noun is followed by h
a definition of the material in apposition (hence, not in the genitive ;
comp. 131),
e.g. Zcch. 4, 10 ^nsn (3Nin the -weight, the lead, i.e. the leaden weight ; Ex. 39, 17.
3 Ki. 16, 14. (Hw^nan, both here and in verse 17, is probably only a later addition,
while n^33Cn nn^DDH in verse 7 has arisen 1 from a confusion of two readings,
ni33t2n nniDD and nwacnp nnaOCn). in jer, 32, 12 al.ô n:i^QT , unless the
article is simply to be omitted) is in apposition to nSDH.

{b) Before a noun with a suffix (which likewise represents a determinate genitive ; i
sec above, at the h>cginning of this section). This does not apply to cases in which
a verbal (i.e. accusative) suffix is affixed to a participle which has the article, e.g.
orison Is. 9, 1 3, the one smiting him; in Deut. 8, 15. 13, 6 also ^ in a verbal suffix,
but hardly the \ in VB^H for ^nb^H Job 40, 19, nor the n_ in rTli)^.! Dan. 11,6;
( 116.^. In Lev. 27, 23, the suffix, as appears from verses 1. 3. 5. 7. 13,
'|3"}^[J!
' According to Philippi {Si. Conslr., p. 38) ^N'n*3 is rather a case of

'
sab-position ' in the accasative, as also pîin 'n"^"^'!'
Lzek. 47, 1 5 (for which,
however, in 48, i there is the correct reading ji^nn l]"!"!) by the way to Hethlon;
and In fact, Ezek. 47, 15 may without difficulty be explained in this way ; so ^ff^
Ex. 39, 27 as an accusative of the material.
rf
434 The Parts of Speech, [ laS.
must have entirely lost its meaning (comp. also % 128. d). Of the remaining
examples nrJlIljlS Is. 24, a (probably an intentional allitemtion with the eleven
other words beginning with 2 ,
"^"^y^J^ Prov. 16, 4,
and ^^.VB fso Baer, following
the best aothorities) Ezra 10, 14. rest only on the authority of the Masoretes, not
of the authors. So also in ^^JHiin Jos. 7, ii, iîfnp Jos. 33 (previously ^^JfH),
n^rtinn a Ki. 15, 16 (dittography of the n), the article is simply to be omitted
as tyntactically impossible; the ^ of Mic a, is is the copula belonging
to the next word.
128. The Indication of the Genitive Relation by means 0/ the

Construct Stale,
CL espedalljr Philippi's woik dted at the head of 1 89.
A 1. The genitive relation is regularly expressed (see 89) by the close

connexion of the mmm rtgens (in the construct state) with the mmm
rectum (in the genitive). Since only one nomen regens can be
immediately connected with one nomen rectum, it follows that the
same genitive cannot depend on two or more cihwdmak nouns,
but a second (sometimes even a third, &c.) regens must be a ided
Willi a buliix rcfriTMiL' lo the noincn rectum, c.z- H"! *D3 M/-
sons of David and his daughters (not niJ^'t comp. i Ki.
8, 28'. The lansruagc even prefers to avoid a series of several
co*ordinate' genitives depending upon one and the same nomen
regens (such as occur in Gen. 14, 19. Num. 20, 5. 31, 54 [i Cbron.
13, ij. Is. as, 5. Ps. 8 3), and rather tends to repeat the nomen
regens, e.g. Gen. 34, 3 Ô^*?- God heaven
and the God the earth {so in Jer. 8, i the regens is five times
repeated). A lengthened series of genidves may, however, be formed
by a nomen rectum serving at the same time as regens to a genitive
dependinLr on it (comp. 127. a [</]); e.g. Gen. 47, 9 'ribK
the days <f iht years of iht lif of my fathers ; comp. Job 12, 24, where
there are three genitives, Is. 10, 12 four, and ai, 17 five. As a rule.
* Veiy rare, and only posil)Ic in vcn.- rapid utteraaoe, are such exceptions as
Ezek. 31, 16 (Jiaair^ln*) "^nDp) ; Frov. 16, II. In Is. u, 2 the spirit ^ knowtedgt
and of the fear of the I orJ, ny^ may at any rate also be taken as an ahaohrte
genitive, so also "*Sp Pan. i, 4.
' In !V 114, 1 .1 sccomi trcnitivc is mided even without the copula, boi the
porxdiciiiim of the members renders any mistuuierstandin|* impostiUe.
las.j The Indication of the Genitive Relation. 435
indeed, such an inconvenient accuniulauori of genitives is avoided by
means of a circumlocution in the case of one of them (see 129.^/).
Rem. As the fundamenLil rules stated above nre the nece<5^nnr conseqnence not h
merely of logical but morf especially of rhythtnical relations Tsee 89. a , we must
feel the more hesitation in admitting the examples in which genitives are sop-
poied to be looidyattaclicd to fonts other than tbecoostrnct^^ Someof thcM
examples (the snppoeed geoltnei followliig regens whidk is determined \fs tbe
iti^) haw been elreadj discnsaed in 1 \^,f-h> Compare, moreover
(a) Genitives after the abeolvte state, e. g. Is. a8, i Dâpf^lPI tktfia C
valley of tfuni that ar$ overcome with 7vine. The ustial explanation, according to
which D*3D;'~N'3 forms one single idea (in German Ffffi^L-dtsthaPi, on which the
genitive f** ^C^^H then depends, in reality explains nothing; the text is almost
certainly corrupt. In Jos. 3, Ti D^lBTl is a later addition; in Is. 32, 13
and Pj. 68, 22 ("I^B'), the absolute for the construct state prob-ibly rests only un
the authority of the Masoretes. In Jud. 6, 35 sqq. the text is obviously ia
coafnuoo. In Jud. 8, 32 (cf. 6, 34) rnp^3 should come either after TSi^ or at
tile end of the verse: m Is. 63, 1 1 is probabW a firloee on bpilHD^ which has
crept into the text ; in a Sam, 4, a T9ff3rJff^% aocordhig to the LXX, has dropped
oot before )}; TdSTi Esek. ^
ii is to be omitted with the ; if otigballj in LXX
the tex^ it eoold only be genitive ahmirutHom 9/ evils\ not an adjective
Prov. ax, 6 the text is altoigethcr uncertain (the LXX read ^0^D for ^fB^j^D); in
I Cbron. 5), 13 the preposition (after a has dropped oot before Jljt^ (compL
13, 35). Elsewhere (Deut 3,5. 1 Ki. 4, ij. a Chron. 8, 5) the supposed geni-
tives are to be taken rather as words of nearer definition stnnf'in;^ in apposition,
i.e. with hi:;/i '<(a!/s, gates and l>ar$. In Jer. 8, 5 is cither in apposition to
nin Dyn or is Ix ttcr ^since not in the LXX) omitte<l as a gloss.
(b) Genitives after a noun with a suflix (where the suHix prevents the direct d
government by the nomen regtns), Thns in Lev. 37, 3. 5. 6, where *\2|n after
^31^ might be taken, oontraiy to the accent!, aa snbject of the following dense;
however, from verses 13 and 33 (lee above, $ 127. 0 it appears that the suffix
In tiiis word had entiidy lost its meaning. In Lev. 6, 3 *n tllp ki$ gurmmit
namely the rrnrmcnt of linen, unless simply in apposition, comp. | I31. d ; Lev.
ati^ 4s, where '131 3p^, ^^^^3 could at most be explained as an elliptical form
of expression for 3{5jr n*"}!! ^H^S, comp. 125. h (probably, however, it is
a case of dittop^raphy of the ^, which w.as repeated also before DHUX ; so Valcton,
ZAW. xii. 3); similarly, Di*n ^ri''']3 Jer. 33, 20, &c. On the other hand, Dt<
rrfrP D3H*33 n^n* Num. 13, 6 could not 1

ossibly mean if your prophet be a
prophet of the Lord ; tlie text is manifestly corrupt (probably nin^D "SlttÎU
is to be read, with Marti). In Ps. 55, 7 ''jKO? (usually explained as thy

diaime tifome), D^H^K is most probably a later addition. In Jer. 53, so two
teadinga are probably combined, DJTl^ns^ wilhoot any addition, and ns^nsjt
(0 The mterposition of a word b assumed between (ike whole; comp.

I 127. S) and tbe genitive governed by it in a Sam, i, 9^ Job ay, 3 (lijf),
and Hos. 14, 3 (Kto). In reality, however, k all three places the genitive
Ff J
43^ The Paris of Speech. [ 128!
feUsioB u dotnêd l^t^ tnmpiMitioo of tte wdi (liu(e>d of lis;, <S^c<)>

- and it father to be taken adverbially (equivalent to tMJy\ t. g. a Sam. x, 9
iMutse my Ufi isjftt wkolfy aM, i.e. my whole life; comp. Phnippi,
C^HOr^ p. 10.-On ^ inttanoea in whieh the original comtmct ftate mmi-
ixistaut vk nted without a following genitlTe, ice ^ nqâtive lenteneea, i i%t, .
f 2. The dependence of the nomen rectum on the nomen regens

by no means represents merely what is, properly speaking, the reniti\-e
relation (see the exanÎes tmder letters g-i). Very frequently the
nomen rectum only adds a nearer definition of the nomen legens,
whether by giving the name, the genus or spedes, the measure,
the material, or finaUy an attribute of it {geml. epexegeikut^ see the
examples under letters
Examples. The ncmm reeium lepreaenta

^ {(i) A subjective genitive, specifying the poneuor, author, &c., e. g. l|^^'n^^
the kings house ; njilj 'Q'^ the -wcfJ of the Lord.
h An object ive genitive, e.g. Ol.ad. xtr. 10 TTIN DDfTD for the violence done
to t'ny brother^ ^but in Kzek. \2, 19 DCnJO is followed by a subjective genitive);
I'rov. 20, 3 HD'K the terror of a king ; Gen. iS, 20 D'ID IT^T the cry
concerning Sodom ; Is. a 3, 5 '\'S VpiJ' the report of {aikfut) Tyre, comp. a Sam.
4, 4 ; Am. 8, io l^n^ ^3NI tJic mourningfor an only son ; Deut. io, 14 ^*2*k
pracda hostibus iuis erepta ; comp. Is. 3, 14, In a wider scuic ihii ijicludes
such examples as D^HH "jJlT the way of (i. e. to) the tree 0/ life. Gen. 3, ^4
oompw Prov. 7, 27. Job 38, 20 ; D*n IJ"!^ the way of {by) tki sta. Is. 8, aj ; ^rp|
0îp|t tk menses of {i.e, pUasifg to) Gcd^ Ft. 51, 19 ; njrp tki iath i^
(Le. sworn i^n) tki Lmrd, i Ki> a* 43>
i if) A partitive gmithu ; this includes espedalljr tfie catea in which an adjective
in the conttract state is followed fay a gcnoal term, eg. *^fT(C^ flfOOQ tki
wisest of her ladies, Jad. 5, 39 ; comp. for this way of eqwettlng the snperiativ^
I 133. h, and .lUo letter r hclow.
k Merely P^tinal genitives {gi'ttii. cjc/iicaiivus or ipeMgttieits) are those ndded
to the ci<nrtruct state as nearer definitions
(,</; Ul the ttinic, e.g. TT^B ir"'^ ^^^'^ river Euphrates ; (^33 the land e^'
Canaan ; the virgin Israel (not of Israel\ Am. 5, a.
/ (f) Of the genui, e.g. Prov. 15, ao (21, 2o"> tJHtt i>*pj fool of m mam (-
/miuk MMit}; comp. Gen. 16, la. Is. 39, 19. Mic. 5, 4, &c.
m (/) Of the jpeeiis, e.g. Q^nn ^K^^ mem (thedass oQ minkamit, 1 Xi lo^ 15 $ y
r^rni a pmuttkm ^
a imyitig-plaut Le. kind&my u^pmbkn, Gen. 13, 4,
ad elsewhere hhSSn ^Sfif/gt 9f (the chnt KX)finl ri^ Mr, Jer. 24, a.
;
* Comp. in Latin a )imilar use of the genitive after iniurta (Cae. U. G. i,
Mster (iMfjvav, Pmpeii, &c.), j/rr, and oUicr words. In Gieek, eaaf^ elaam
ffiâr, wlant tev itoS, 4 A^yar k row tftmyeS, 1 Cor. x, 18.
128.] The Indication of the Genitive Relation. 437
(^) Of the measure, weight, extent, number, e. g. "^BDD 'Hp people of number, ft
i.e. in number. Gen. 34, 30. Deut. a6, 5; comp. also Ezck. 47, 3-5 waters
few
of the ankles, waters of the loins, waters of swimming, \. e. which reached up to
the ankles, or loins, or necessitated swimming ; but in verse 4 in apposition
(A) Of the material of which something consists, e.g. fenj} ^1'? a vessel of earthen- 0
'
ware. Num. 5, 17 6JD3 ^^3 vessels of silver (comp. the French des vases cTor)
; ;
n? H"^ "f "^^î ''n? " 9f i*"on, Ps. 2, 9; comp. Gen. 3, ai.
6, 14. Jud. 7, 13, &c.

(1*) Of the attribute of a person or thing, e.g. Gen. 17, 8
lasting possession; Prov. 17, 8 <z precious stone; comp. Num. 2S, 6. Is. 13, 8.
28, 4. Ps. 23, 2. 31, 3. Prov. 5, 19. 14, 5. Job 41, 19, and the examples of the
genitive with a suffix given in 135. . Such a periphrasis for the expression of
attributes frequently occurs, even when the corresponding adjectives are in use.
Thus especially B''1*p holiness very frequently serves as a periphrasis for the
adjective E^lj? (e.g. Ch|3n ^33 the holy garments, Ex. 29, 29), since
is used almost exclusively in reference to persons (hence also with and ^3
people, and with the name of a person) ; the only exceptions are lîli^ D^pO
holy place, Ex. 29, 31, and elsewhere ; DÊnp holy water, Num. 5, 17 ; COlj^
as the predicate of Di^ day, Neh. 8, 10 sq., and of n^no camp, Deut. 23, 15. So
also the use of p^'^T^f righteous is always confined to persons, except in Deut. 4, 8 ;
elsewhere the periphrasis with pny or Hi^lY is always used, e. g. p"iy j"^^
balances. Lev. 19, 36.
In a wider sense this use of the genitive also includes statements of the purpose g
for which something is intended, e.g. nnSD sheep for the slaughter, Ps. 44, 33;
^pli>B^ np^C the chastisement designedfor our peace. Is. 53, 5 comp. 51, 17 {the cup ;
which causes staggering). Ps. 116, 13; finally, also, the description of the material,
with which something is laden or filled, c. g. i Sanu 16, 20 nfc^31 DnS ^bn an ass
laden 7uitk bread and a bottle of wine (but probably H^fe'J^ is to be read for ^bn)
comp. Gen. ai, 14. Prov. 7, 20, imd elsewhere.
Rem. I. Certain substantives are used to conwy an attributive idea in the r
construct state before a partitive genitive ; thus "^H^P choice, selection, as in Gen.
33, 6 ^ri^ "^D^P choice of our sepulchres, i. e. our choicest sepulchres

Ex. 15, 4. Is. 23, 7. 37, 24; other examples are, Is. i, 16 the evil of your doings,
emphatically for your evil doings ; Is. 17, 4. 37, 24 i^^the tall cedars thereof).
Ps. 139, 22. This is the more common construction with the substantive ^3
entirety, for all, the whole, every, see { laj. b; it is also frequent with 0^0
a little, for few, 1 Sam. 17, 38, &c
3. To the periphrases expressing attributive ideas (see letter p above) by means s
of a genitive construction, may be added the very numerous combination of the
construct states B^^K a man, ^y3 master, possessor, "[3 son, and their fcrainines
'
In the almost entire absence of corresponding adjectives (TV^M meuie of cedar,
a denominative from \1H , and tT^TO brazen are the only examples), the language
regularly has recourse to the above periphrasis. On the form qatldl, as
expressing an inherent property, comp. 50.^ ; comp. also the proper name^
*^p3 ferteus.
438 The Parts of Speech. [J 8.
ttd plnnlt (inetiidiiig ÎJD mm, naed onlj in the plural)^ vith tome ftppdUdve
noon, in order to represent a person (poetically even a thiDg;^ as posscssbg some
object or qnality, or beinj^ in some condition. In English, such combinatioOf re
sometimes rendered by single substantives, sometimes by dmimlocution.
Examples :
t (ai Of trx,&c. : Dna'l &''i< aft cbijucnt matt, Ex. 4, 10 'but D*nrb B^îC
Job II, 2 a tnan of lips, i.e. a boaster); pCv C'^S a slandcrt-r, I's. 140, 13
ny^ ti'^N a man of kiunuUdge, Prov. 34, 5; nDH E^'fr! *i wrathful man, ProT,
15, 18; 0*0"^ B'^K a man of blood, 2 Sam. 16, 7. Ps. 5, 7 ; comp. further, i Sun.
KL 3, 36. Is. 53, 3. ProY. 19,
16, t8. 1 tf. a6, ax. 99, i. Esra 8, 18; niso OB^K
trrnp a amtmHms wmm, Piot. 37,15; in Uie plural, e. g. Gen. 6, 4 ^Vi^
mm ^mwWHtfmmss comp. Gen. 47, 6.
tht Xi. 41, 11. Job 34, 8. 10 (33^
MM ^ undirttandimg)% with ^rtD, e.g. Ii. 5, 13 (3^ ^00 famuked mm);
Job II, II.
If (^) or bja &c: ^ ikuVf* a Ki. I, 8 ; nfoArn ^ /Af iâ/<'r, Gen.
37, 19; comp. Nah. i, 7. Prov. 1.17. 9 {a destroyer). 22, 34. 33, 2 {di,fcêd
18,
to (at, p'e^dy^. 24, S ;
feminine I2iX~n!)y3 a woman thnt hath a soothsaying spirit^
I .Sam. 38, 7 ; comp. Nah. 3, 4 ; in the plural, e.g. D'Jfn "'^yS archers^ ^2K5
confederates, Geii. 14, 13; nyi3C' su'ortt su/fo iters, Nch. 6, iS.
t; (,0 Of-fa,&c.: Vn-?3 rrarriar ; p'fD']"^ hdr, (ien. 15, i,

yearling, Ex. 12, 5, and elsewhere; HJK' nXD't^ ^-^w/ww <j/;<?j iiatus. Gen. 3i, 5 ;
nilj"|3 'jforthy to die, I Sam. 20, 31 (^Luther, i Sam. 13, 5 >i A'lW des Todes) \
comp. Deut 35, 3 Disn |a worthy to be beaUm} feminine, e. g.
wmant l Sam. i, 16; frequently alio

^^{^ C^K, O ^33, O "B^^lt, and even
simply ^^3, like the Latin udut for tuUsHmmUi, a Sam. 13, 6. Job 34f 18;
plural maacdin^ e. g. Q'lp'^â ehiUrm iff tht taU, rUmtah$ ^^S ckildtm
f reMfimf Nnm. 17, 35. n naed poetieaUy of things without life* e.g.
If. 5, 1 }Q|r|3 A /b/, Le. a fmitlnl (hill); Jon. 4, 10 f^y^fa i.e. ^vwvw mi m
m^kt; Job 41, ao J0M tkt hew (i.e. an arrow) ^
10 alio VjBh sfarki. ;
Job 5, 7; Lam. 3, 13; JliSS Ecclea. la, 4/4 dmÛnoft*^, pfobably meaning
the individnal notes.
24 3. Special mention must be made of llic not infrequent idiom by which
adjectives (sometimes also orditiab, n&i 134.0; arc nddcU in the geattive, as
ulMtanUvei rather tban aa attribnies in the same itate, gender, and nnmber
as the noun which they qualify ; thua,
fidu, for which iwn 1 has ^

Is. a8,
ike
4
fada^ Jhweri comp.
^ TSp% ike JUmeraftkat
(tuther, la. aa, a4.
wkuh
Jer. aa, 17 (I). 53, 13. Pa. 73, la

49 ; also the nae of PI as a anb* 74, 15. 78,
stantive^ e.g. in Prov. a, 14^. 6, 34 (JTl flf^) and elsewhere, analogona to the
New Testament phiaiea otKovofiot T^(d8iiciaf, Luke 16, 8, and the French un kcmmt
de bien Finally, an adverb (treated as a sui stantive) may likewise be used as
I
On the other band, in auch paAges aa Is. 36, i (a Ki. 18. 17). Zech. 14, 4.
Eodea. 8, 10, and others, there ia no ai^fMient reason why the Blaaom leqoiica tm
oooatmct state instead of the nbaolate ; hence and 1^1 Zech. 14,
la. 36, 3
must be intended aa forma of tlie abiolnte state, ahoctened in OQMei|Mnos CB tnir
eloee connexion.
$ 129.] Expression of the Geniiive, 439
an epexefetlcal genitive; oomp. Djn ^Q'^ ôod Me^ wiikomi tama^ i Ki. 31;
PtOT. S4, j8. a6, 9; Eiek. 0O 26 CD^^.
8. The epexegctical genitives include finally the Yramerous nearer X
definitions winch follow the conslruci. stale of adjectives (and of active
and passive participles, or verbal adjectives, comp. 116, f-f). For,
while ilie word of nearer definition is added to the verb in the
accusative (e. g. ^^^H'J^? he ivas diseofed in his feet, i Ki. 15, 33),
it majrf with participles and verbal adjectives, be cither in the accusa-
tive ( x 16./ and k) or in the genitive, the case of a word depending

on a noun. Such a genitive relation is usually termed an improper
atmtxion. The nearer definition contains a statement either of the
material^ e. g. Ex. 3, 8, &c. B^"]^ Awk' Jlmtnng with
miUt and hmey; or of the means, e. %. 37ri-\^^n slain with the swordy
Is. 22, 2; or the cause, L aiu. 2, 5 sitk of love ; or of the stopc of

the attribute \ e.g. Gen. 39, 6 fair of form; cf. Gen.
41, 2. 4. Ex. 34, 6. 1 Sam. 16, 12. Jer. 32, 19. Nah. i, 3. Ps. 119, i.
Job 37, 16; or of the manner e.g. Ps. 59, 6

^
njJa faiihUss ones
of wickedness (wickedly faithless).
Especially frequent is the use of this genitive to name the part y

of the body described as being affected by some physical or mental
condition, e.g. Ps. 34, 4 0^ ^| clean as regards Aands, ftc;
a Sam. 9, 3. Is. 6, 5. }ob 17, 9; Is. 19, 10 gnated in soul;
I Sam. I, 10. Job 3, 20. Also such examples as Amos 2, 16. Prov.
19, I, where a suffix is attached to the substantive, must be regarded

as instances of the genitive construction, on the analogy of Prov. 14, 2,
see iid.k,
120. Expression of ihi Genitive by Circumlocution.
Besides the construction of a nomen rectum dependent upon a

a nomen regens in the construct state ({ 89 and 128), the connexion
of two nouns may also be effected otherwise, either by simply
attaching the dependent noun by means of the preposition \y which,
according to 119. r, expresses, besides other ideas, also that of
belonging io\ or by the addition of a relative clause (S> IK^X, see
letter h below).
^ Comp. the Latin SMUsgtr vUae setlensque purus ; trisUs onimi,

' Cotnp. the x9iMi KoAAfJuriM' in Gieelc, e.g. ^ MfoX^ Mpiiw^ for roS
Mpttwu (Bemhntdy** Symtax, p, 88). The Arab granmuujau dUttogutih
440 The Parts of Speech, [$129.
^ I. The introduction of a genitive by b sometimes occurs even when the construction

with the construct state would be equally possible, e.g. i Sam. i
thewaichmen of Saul; Fs. 37, 16. 2 Chron. a8, 18 i^where indceti the circumlocuUcwi
makes the scasc much plainer).; as a rule, however, this use is restricted to the
following cuef :~
C (tf) To pfCTcnt a nomcn rtgfiDA hcag determined IbUowing detaniaate
genitiTe, e.g. 1 Sun. 16, 18 |B a som ^Juu woold according to
137.4, the son 0/Jesse) i oonp. Gen. I4, x8. 56, X. 4lal3. Num. 16, 32 (a7,x6j.
I Sam. 17, 8. a Sam. 19, 21. I Ki. 2, 39 t^t'0 sen-ants of Shimei; Ps. 122, 5.
Hence, regnlarly lllb IID* ^Ps. i, &c.) a psalm of Dai id 'properly bclongirij^
to David as the author), for which 'Vrh of David is useiD|P 11*1^ C's. 24, i and
elsewhere'^ is not to be rcg.irded as a transposition, but "îDTO is used epe.xegt tically
for Ue general term omittcî before (as it were, a poem of David, a pialm .
Moreover, the introduction of the author, poet, &c., by this Lamed auctoris is the
caitonuuy idiom also in fhe oUier Semitic dialecti* eapcdally in Arabic
d (') When a genitive ie to be made dependent on a nomen icgent, wbldi is itself
composed of a nomen rêns and rectum, and represents, as a compound, one united
idea, e.g. tybb nnjf^n the portion of field belonging to Boaz (Tyi nnb 'H
would be the portion of the field of Boaz) 2 Ki. 5, 9 at the honsc-dcor of Elisha.
;
This especially applies to the cases in which the compotmd regens represents
a term in very common use, the fixed form of which cannot be altered, c. g.
1 Ki. 14, 19 DTDn nai nOD-i^y in the hock of the ehrtmules if

tht kings if Itrtul; 15, 23 and claewbere ; comp. also Jos. 19, 51.
i (e) When foranyreaton the constrnetion with ^ nomen r^cns
in the eomtnict
state U Impomible ; comp. e.g. Lev. x8 20, where ^fAX^t on account of the suflRx,
cannot be used in the construct state; but Lev. 15, 16 sqq. and elsewhere,
pnT"rD2C'; Jud. 3, 2S the Jordan fords of Moab {\TS\ as a proper namf cannot
be used in tle construct state) ; Ex. ao, 5 upon the third and upon the fourth
generation of them that hate me : D*y3^'^y^ must be kept in the absolute state
fur the sake of conformity With Q^^P^^f and for the same reason also
J {d) .\fter statements of number in such cases as (icn. 8, 14 DHU'^ n^31!*2

C5nn^ on the seven and twentieth daj> of the month; comp. 7, 11. 16, 3 aud
freqneRtl]r,oratin Hag. i, i ^l^f^^ ^ the stcomdyear ofDarius; the
nnmetal here is alwaja one eompwnd idea widi the Mbstantive nnmbered, and ooii>
aeqncntlj (as to the examples under letter If) does not admit of being in the oonstr. st.
with a genitive. The same natmally applies also to tnch examples as I Ki. 3, 18
^JRTj^^ î)B^n D^3 on the third day ofmyghutg Hrth (i.e. after my giving biith).
Comp. also' the standing phrase m tht first {dKj) ^ tki mmKh,
Gen. 8, 5 and frequently.
a twofold genitive, one of which may be lesolved by and the other by |p, [see
Wrighfs Arahie Gramw$ar, voL iL { 75 sqq.G.W.C.] The of the Roenaace A
langoages is a development of the latter idea; the Gascon, however, says eg,
UtfiUe h Mr. N., laying streu open the iiSmvlLMmgmetf end not that of r(pin,
as in AiyCASr . . . of the literary iangnage.
} i3o0 Wider Use of ihe Qmsirud State. 441
Rem, In cntes like t Sam. 3, a atid kit /irsAom was Amnon Dyrnxj? tf g
Alumotmt the genitive expressed by circumlocution with ^ is in reality dependent
on a regens which is omitted (Dyi^HN^ "^1 a son of Ahtncam) ;
comp. 2 Sam.
3, 3. 5, I Ki. 14, 13. Am. 5, 3, and the remarks on "liOTO in letter c above.
2. The periphrastic expression of the genitive by means of ^ '^B'Jt is used h
principally to state the fossrfsor, e.g. Gen. 29, 9 n^^wb "^B^ |^^2f^ her father's
sheep (prop, ihe sheep -which belonged to her f(UAer) \ Gen. 47, 4 and frequently.
So aleo (according to laS. a) when a genitive dq>eiids on more than one

fnbitantiv^ e. g. G^. 40, 5 M hitler and ihe baker wka (belonged) tke king
9/ Egyj^ (Dn|9 ^y^^. "^'^'f^ indicate only tiie baker as belonging to the
king); or wlien a genitive (as in the examples in letter d above) is added to
a compound, which expresses one united idea (Rath 4, 3) or when, n fixefl ;
tprm re. g. a title), it appears aiirayt in tike same fonn, e. g. Cant, i, i D^l't^n "i^lp^
nb>E^p i^j^X the Song 0/ songs, efSehmms t Sam. ai,8. a Sam. 8, 8. 1 Chion.
11, 10 i comp. also Gen. 41, 43 \
180. Wider Use 0/ the Construct State,
The construct state, which, accofding to 89. a, primarily represents a

onlj the immediate government by one substantive of the following
word (or combination of words), is frequently employed in rapid
narrative as a connecting form, even apart from llie genitive relation
so especially
(1) Before prepositions, particularly in Biore elevated (prophetic

or poetic) style, especially when nomen regens is a participle.
the
Thus before f, the jqjf mike harvest^ Is. 9, 2. a Sam. i a i.
Pft. 136, 8 sq.; in participles^ Is. 5, 11. 9, i. 19, 8. Ps. 84, 7, and
espedaUy often when 9 with a suffix follows the participle, e. g.
Ps. a, 12 to *P^n-b comp. Nah. i, 7. Jer. 8, 16 (Ps. 24, i); Ps. 64, 9
^
(unless should be read); 98, 7

ntt*! Before IIos. 9, 6. Ps. 58, 5I
(before Ô^); Prov. 24, 9. Lam. 2, 18 (before '^); i Chron. 6, 55,
23, 28; in participles, Ezck. 38, 11. Job 18, 2. 24, 5 ; before S> with
an infinitive, Is. 56, 10, and again before ^ with a suffix. Gen. 24, 21.
* In New Hebrew (derived from ^C' - i> "iB^* see 36, and comp. Cant.
is used like the simple relative in Aramaic, zn an
indqwndettt sign of the genitive.
* In Jnd. 8, li tike article is even naed before a coMtiuct state followed by 3,
hi Older to detemdne tbe whole eombinatioB trbnMS ''1X3^ tettt-dwaiers, Uken
aa one wofd ; comp., Iiowever, the lemaiks in { on similar gmmnatical
Digitized by Google
448 The Paris of Speech. [ 190.
Is. 30, 18. 64, 3^* before Is. 14, 19. Ezek. ai, 17; before
ipUh), Is. 8, 6; before IP, Gen. 3, as. Is. 38, 9 (a participle);
Jer. S3, 33. Ezek. 13, 3. Hos. 7, 5; before Jud. 5, to; before
*?^9t Is* i4> 6 ; before the mia actus, nte, Jer. 33,22; before a locative
(which in such cases also serves as a genitive), x. 27, 13. Jer. 1,15.
b (2) Before waw copulative^ e.g. Ezek. 26, 10; but rip3n Is. 33, 6,
î**? .^S* 2. and 51, 21 may be cases of an intentional reversion
to the old feminine endinj^ ath, in order to avoid the hiatus (J) ]
n__.
C (3) When it governs the (oriirin:\lIy demonsiralive) pronoun 'iS'i*

;
so especially in the combination DiPtp ihe place where (prop, of ihat

which) . . Gen. 39, so. 40, 3 ; or O^P^ Lev. 4, 34. 33. 3 Sam.
15, 31. I Ki. 21, 19. Jer. as, 13. Esek. at, 35. Hos. a, i. We should
expect QfpttI, as in Gen. 35, 13 ftc, ai ike place
which . . ., cf. 138; "^s^ is treated as a nomen rectum instead
of as an attribute. C also ^ followed by a perfect in i Sam.
29, 8, and 'K 'OJ Lev. 13. 46. Num. 9. 18; also ^JK-iJ-np W (/^^
matter of that which, i.e.) whatsoever he shoivcih Num. 23, 3*.
(4) When it governs independent sentences (cf. 155), which

virtually stand to the construct state (as nomen regens) in the genitive
relation, e.g. Ex.4, J 3 n^K'rn!3 prop, by ihe hand of him whom

Ihm w3i tend; Is. 39, i *in n^^ T\T^ the ci^ where David encamped;
Jer. 48, 36. Ps. 16, 3 (if the text be right). 65, 5 (Prov. 8, 33)^ Ps. 8t, 6.
Job 18, 31 âce of htm thai h$ioweth not God; Job 39, 16. Lam.
t, 14 (if the text be right) into the hands of those against whom Ica*
notice} In Gen, 39, 4 (iî^'^'^B) the ^ takes after it a noon-dause, and
* These are to be distioguished from the cases where p follows a construct itite,
wUdi ia conjonction with }D (tnd the following b) has become a sort of preposi>
tioQ or adverb of place; thus, we have jri^Btp Ex. a6, 33 (for which ia Ezek.
1, 97 meielj |> n^3) meaning ttmplf within ; |>

pO^tD (a Ki. 23, 13. Enk. 10, 3)
om the right hmd (i. e. toath) of; b f\tXQ (Joe. 8, n. 13. Jud. a, 9) m the nerfh
efl conp. alio Joe. 15, ai and ]p "^vi} Neh. 13, 4.
* In Dent 33, 5 the construct ttate govent a entenoe fntrodnoed by the
ooojnaction Ci0( ^3y^ reason ef the fact thit, t.e. keemse) \ to also
in I Sam. 3, 13.
* Ptobably Gen. aa, 14 it also to be so explained (eootnuy to the BMeala),
and certainly (contrary to the vefj nnnataral division of the verses) a Qwoa.
30, 18, which should read on thus : ppn 133^^3 lya "^B^ 3tttn niiT tht feed
1 orj âtiLm n'try one that ^ctitth his heart to suit Cod, [See Wickes' AunTke^
tioH 0/ tht T-mnty-me iû Boeki 0/ thi Old Ttstamentf p. 140.G. W. C4
Apposition. 443
in Ex. 9, 4, still more boldly, a subst. with ^. Very often a iime'deier-
nUnaiitm governs the following sentence in this way; thus, ÎB}}. followed
by a perfect, i Sam. 5, 9 ; D^^f Ps. loa, 3 (before a noun-clause). z. 6,
38. Hum. 3, 1. Deut.4, 15. 9 Sam. 22, i. Fs. 18, i. 59, 17. 138, 3 (in
every case before a foUowing perfect). Ps. 56, 10 (before an imperfect);
ri*D followed by the perfect, Jer. 36, 2 ;
*9)"i'3 Lev. 14, 46. i Sam.
aSi 15- Job 29, 2 (^3 as in the days when . . .; comp. nlD^3 and
ni3^ before a perfect, Ps. 90, 15); nj/3 before a perfect, Jer. 6, 15
(cf. 49, 8. 50, 31); before an imperfect, Job 6, 17; n^nri before a
perfect, Hos. 1, 2.
(5) Comiected with a following word in apposition ; certainly $

SO in such cases as 't^T^ I^^Via ike virgin, the daughter 0/ Zion,
Is. 37, 32 ; comp, 83, 12. Jer. 14, 17 ; also t Sam. 38, 7 a^nis{3 ne^
a wman, pasHssor <f a toaihtqying epirii,* comp. DeuL 81, 11. Gen.
14, 10. Jud. 19, 33, 3 KL 10, 6. 17, 13 Q^r/; Jer. 20, 15. 46, 9.
35, 16 (?). 78, 9. Job 20, 17 ^ (unless ItjJ or ^^^}. be a gloss)
Dan. II, 14.
Rem. Some of the above paaâgoi may aUo be explained by supposing that
^
there exbts ft real genitive relation towards the preceding constrnct state, which
has been, as at vntt, provistomlly left in tuspemo, in consequence of th Insertioii
of some inlCRvptuig word, e. g, Xi. 37, 22, ftc; Job so, 17 Elsewhere (Dent
33, 19. Ps. 68, 34) the mmen ngms probftbly gorcns the foUowing conatnct
state directly ^
(6) The numeral yyi^ one for in close connezioDy and even g
with small distincdves, e.g. Gen. 48, 23. 2 Sam. 17, 33. Is. 37, 13.
Zech. 1 1, 7.
The character of these passages shows that the numeral here cannot be in tfie
constnict state, but is metely a rhythmical shortening of the nsnal (tone-Iengthcoed)

fonn. Analogous to tills are the apparent constnict states ^ê^, ^riK^, Stc^
ia the compoond nnmesals from eleven to nineteen, see ( 97. d,
181, Apposiiion,
1. Apposition in the stricter sense is the collocation of two sub- a

stantives in the same case in order to define more exactly (or to
ccnaplete) the one by the other, and, as a rule (see, however, below,
letter g\ the former by the latter. Apposition in Hebrew (as in the
* So also la, a8, 16 a comer stent ef (he preeiemnees (JT3]^ is a sutetantive not
tiinuljectiv) of a groundedfoundation , i.e. a predons coiner stone of surest founda-
tionerIn a Sam. 30, 19 the text is wholly coxmpt; in FS. 119, 1 a8 read
Digitized by Google
444 The Paris of Speech,
Olher Semitic languages^) is by no means confined lo :i;ose cases
in N\iiicî It is used in Kno^lish or in the classical languages. It is not
infrequently found wiien either the subordination of one substantive
to the other or some more ckcumstantial kind of epexegetical addition

would be expected.
% The prindpo] kinds of appositioa of doudb in Hebrew are the
foUowing:
B (^r) The ooUocalion of gtnm and speeitt, e.g. 'W!'^ ^ womam
(who was) a widow, t Kl 7, 1 4 ;
i^^Vin rnj|3 a damsei {^ScaA. is) a virgin,
Deut. 22, 23.28. Jud.2i,i3. iSam. 30, 17. iKi. i, 2; corap. Gen. 13,8.
21, 20 (where, however, is probably an explanatory gloss); Ex.
22, 30. 24. 5 (i Sam. II, 15). Lev. 6, 13. i Sam. 7, 9. 2 Sam. 15, 16.
I Ki. 3, 16. 5, 29 (but probably S'^D should be read instead of i*??);

Is. 3, 34. Jcr. 20, 1. No doubt also t^HTT jna priest (who is) iht
chief man, a Kir 35, 18, In a Sam. so, 7 read *^ ^^T^?

theLXX.
c {i) Collocation of the ptrsom or iking and the ai/HBuk, e.g.^Job
so, 29 (27, 13) 9{H trwrp^n ni ikisii iht poirOm man, (who is)
a wicktd man; comp. Prov. 6, is. Prov. as, at HDI* OnoK liHfrds
(which are) truth; comp. Ex. 30, 2. i Sam. 2, 13. Mic. i, 11 (where,
however, moat probably a gloss on 'T]^); Zech. 1,13 { = com-

TtO'^ is
fortabk words)) Ps. 45, 5(.^). 68, 17 (comp. verse 16). In a wider
sense this includes also such cases as Fs. 60, 5 n^D5 C vnnc which
is siaggtring (intoxicatinn^ drinlt), which causes staggering*; t Ki.
as, S7 (I& 30, so) 0^ wakr which is 4i^fkiimt drunk in troable
(imprisonment). Sd]l more bokUj, t KL 5, 3 ^ ^ mmh which
were taken out of the patiurtt, and i KL 6, 7 wukressid sitmts
which come from the quarry, probably a corruption of 9BQp.
I
On oertiiB met of appoiittoQ pecnliar lo the Senltic Ungnaget, conp. the
exhanitive discussion by Fleischer, Ueber einige Arten der NomiamUtppositioD
'
im Arab.' {Kleine Schri/ten, ii. i6)[and see also DriTcr, Ttmes, Appeodix IV.]
;
' Unless it is to l-t- translated thcnt i^vext us inferieatwn to drink as

tuim (.mil in i Ki. 22, ^7 ^ve him ajllultott to fat as bread, (Sfc/ comp. :
Fs. 80, 6 and the aaaloguusi examples of apposilioo in tiic loriu uf a tiecomi
Monathre in f 1 17. /U, Ifonover, hnviag regard to n^n s^*i teim. Cant.
8, i, and tOB "^^V a wild atii eolt. Job II, 13 (hi which passages and
atut oeitainlj be hi the ooiMlznd itale) we eaoaol but uk wbcUicr the Maseia
does not intend lbeIînPi.6Gk$lobe taken as fioostiaot state (for wUsh
dsewbcie f^*
Apposition. 445
A person and a condition arc in apposition in F.zck. 18, 6 (unless
iVilia b to be read). In i Sam. 4, i read 'V^ ^9$, according to

5, I. 7, la.
({) Collocation of the person (Deut 281 36) or ihwg (form) and d
nuUeriai^, or of the fiaci or mature and its eonienit, e.g. i Cbron. i5i 19
unYk cymbals which were irasst i.e. of brass; Esek.
22, 18, comp. Ex. a6, 25. Dan. ti, 8. i Chron. aS, 15. 18; Ex. 28, 17
/our raws, namely stones (for which 39, 10 has I^JJ ^1^) comp.
;
2 Chron. 4, 13. Lev. 6, 3 (see, however, 128. </); 2 Ki. 7, i H^D HND
a J^îA of fine flour ; comp. 2 Ki. 7. 16. 18. Gen. 18, 6. Ex. 16. 33.
Lev, 3, II. Ruth a, 17. i Ki. 24. 2 Ki. 5, 23 ^D3 0^33 two talents
silver^; comp. 5, 17. zek. 32, 18 (if the text be right). With the
makriai placed before the measure^ Ex. 30, 23 sq. A period <f time
and its contents are placed in apposition in a month of
ôfv, le. a month's tiroes for a whole month. Gen. 29, 14. Num.
II, 20. 31, comp. Deut 21, 13. 2 Ki. 15, 13, and fwo
yeari Hme^ i.e. two fall years, Gen. 41, i. 2 Sam. 13, 23. 14, 28.
24, 13. Jcr. 28, 3. II. Dan. 10, 2 sq.
Finally, under this head may be included all the cases in which
a numeral (regarded as a substantive) is followed by the object

numbered in apposition, e.g. D'^^ n^^|^ irias sc. filii^ $ 97*
and 134. b*
{f\ Collocation of the MiVr^ and the measure or exknt^ number^ Ac, e
e.g. Num. 9, 20 "^yoo iays^ (a small) number, i.e. only a few
days; *|D3 money, repeiiiion, Le. twice as much money,

Gen. 43, 12; 0'3na w water which was of the measure of the
knees, wliich reached to the knees, Ezek. 47, 4 (also ^\IJ}^ V water
that was to ihe loins, in the same verse). This likewise includes the
cases in which a noun is followed in apposition by a numeral (see
134. c) or an adverb, originally conceived as a substantive, e.g.

Neh. 2, 12 t^VD 0^3K men, a few, i.e. some few men; i KL 5, 9
niT? rum nnderstandsng, mtKh-malung, ie. much understandrng:
comp* 3 Sam. 8, 8 and elsewhere.
(e) Collocation of the thing and its namt, e. g. ^1^'?? ibiir
/
mmaUaineus Ustriet, Seir (perhaps only a subsequent gloss), Gen. 14, 6;
* Comp. also the examples trc.nted above In 127. h.

* On the anomdons fonn D^39
'
(ioilCAd of 0^3? i cf. 0^1? immedimtelj
*
before), d. i 88. ^.
Digitized by Google
44^ The Parts of Speech. [{131.
'?J?
^^^^ Canaan, Num. 34, 2 ; comp. Ezra 9, i. i Chron.
5, 9 (see letter g below). ^For examples of nouns in the construct

state before a noun in apposition, see { 13a ^ above.
g Kem. I. Only in oettaia oombtnations does tbe nom of neater defiaitioii cone
fint, e.g. nfc6# DaoU^ Mmg Sbmm (Im fieqncBtljr
^^99 Ac a Sam. 13, 39. z Ki. a, 17. i, s. KL 8 99. 9 15, frc.)
j| Wlien the ntta aettuoHm (tiK, "nit) or a pnpmtlon precedes Ae fint

a.
nbitantivef it mt^ be repeated befoce ttoon in apposition, e.g. Gen. 4, a. ^

aa, a. 24, 4. 47, 29 T-^ 66, 21 this usually occtits when the nearer definition
;
precedes a proper name. As a rule, however, tlie repetition does not t.ikc place
(Dent. 18, I. Jer. 33, 18. i Sam. a, 14). A noun m ai p

osition is made deter-
minate even after a noun widk a pnfix, in tbe otdinary way, e.g. 2 Ciirao. i a, 13
n^j^n D^3^'? Jenuattm, ik* tity wkkk^ ftc.*
I 3. Sometimes a seoond adjective Is need in appositioB to a preceding adjeedve.

in Older to modify in tome way ^ meanii^ ^the fin^ e.g. Lev. 13, 19 '^T^
nDjmit n|3|> wkHf-rttUkk (light red) bH^ tpU.
h 4. Permutattm it to be rcgaidcd as a yariety of apposition. It is not com-
plemfntar^' like apposition proper (see letter a above), but rather d<Jines the
prcccdiiMT substantive (or pronoun, sec below), in order to prevent any possible
misunderstanding. This includes cases like Gen. 9, 4 tviih the life thereof (which
is) ^ UMd tkinrf; Dent, a, a<SL a Ki. 3, 4 on kimini tktuumd rtm*, Ai
flMM/, i.e. the wool of the runs; Jer. af, 15 this et^ tfthe tdnt that is ^Jmf
(bnt n^njl is probably a gloss) ; la. 4af 95 ht pvund him fwy, namely kit
angnr*; but espedally flie examples in which sneh a pennntative ts added to
a preceding pronoun, vir.
/ (a) To a separate proaoon, e.g. z. 7 11 ; with rqrard to the vocative, comp.
% 136./
m {b) To an accusative sufTu, c. g. Ex. 2, 6 shi saw him, iJic child (unless 'VSTl^
be a later gloss); Ex. 35, 5. Lev. 13, 59 ^. i Ki. 19, ai (where, indeed,
appears to be a late ôss) ; 31,13. a Ki. 16, 15 jfC*th. Jer. 9, 14. 31, 3. Esek.
3, ai. Prav. 13, a4 (comp, however, Delitxseh on the passage) ; Eoclca. a, at
(aoeoiding to Dclitcsch rather a doable accusative) '.
^ (r) To a nooMaflix, e. g. Ezek. ic, 3.BNffn iHlU sfÛii ki turn/ im, iki mam;
4a, 14; comp. Prov. 13, 4(t). Ezra 3, 13; so also after a preposition with
saJlix, e, g. Eceles. 4, 10 HtJI^ out aUmt; with a tepetitMB
In I Ki. II, 8 participles after VB^'âS), as in 3 Ki. 10,6 af^cr \'b^S"n>?

"l*J?n, in 19, 1 after a determinate ncaisativc, and in Hag. i, 4 after Q3^JH33
are usc<l u ithaui the article ; these, however, are probably to be ezplaioed not as in
apposition, but according to nS./.
^ Bat D*P Gen. 6, J
7 (comp. 7* 6) is to be regarded as a iaicr gloaa upt>n the
archaic
' For Ifl^ 1 Sam. ai, 14 either is to be read or the K^tkOk is to be
explained accotding to { 75. note. Also IS^sj^^ ^xvs, 5, as has hardlj preacned
tlie collect form*
^ J . ^ci by Google
Apposition. 447
of the preposition, Num. 3a, 33. Jos. i, a ^pllb DH^ to them, to the
(hildren of Israel ; Jer. 51, 56. a Chron. 26, 14'. Comp., finally. Cant. 3, 7,
where the suffix precedes the genitive periphrastically expressed by (as ^3 in
Ezra 9, I, where the genitive is expressed by f))
Of a different kind are the cases in which the permutative with its proper suffix 0
follows as a kind of correction of the preceding suffix, e. g. Is. 29, 23 when he (or
rather) his children see, Sec. (but VlS* is clearly a gloss); comp, Ps. 83, la,
perhaps also Job 29, 3.
5. Cases of apposition in a binder sense are those in which the nearer definition P
added to the noun was originally regarded as an adverbial accusative ; on its use
with the verb and on the relative correctness of speaking of such an accusative
in Hebrew, cf. $ 118. a and m. Owing to the lack of case-endings, indeed, it is
in many instances only by analogies elsewhere (especially in Arabic) that we can

decide whether the case is one of apposition in the narrower or in the wider
sense ; must remain quite uncertain.
in other instances this However, the follow-
ing are probably cases of a})position in the wider sense :
(d)Such phrases as ^03 HJC'D a double amount in money, Gen. 43, 15 comp. ; ^
a Sam. 21, 20. Jer. 17, 18; i Sam. 17, 5 Jive thousand shekels in brass; certainly
such cases as Job 15, 10 older than thy father in days, and the expression of the
superlative by means of HKC) (originally a substantive), e. g. "JNO 3^0 very good.
Gen. I, 31 (comp. also Ecclcs. 7, 16 n3in righteous over much), and the
very frequent IND n3")n prop, a much-making exceedingly, i.e. exceedingly great.
Gen. 15, 1 and elsewhere, also Prov. 33, 29 D3n D*yVB wounds without cause',
perhaps also Gen. 34^ 25 (PIDS).

(6) A few examples, in which an epexegetical substantive is adfled to a. f
substantive with a suffix; thus, Ezek. 16, 27 i\tb] 1\'31'1'0 0/ thy conduct in Uwdmss
(but it is also possible to explain this according to letter c, of thy conduct, which
is lewdness) ; cf. Ezek. 24, 13. 2 Sam. 2a, 33 T^H ^WyO my fortress in strength,
ie. my strong fortress (comp., however, Ps. 18, 33); Hab. 3, 8. Ps. 71, 7. While
even in these examples the deviation from the ordinary usage of the language
(comp. 135. w) is strange, it is much more so in 3in ^ribbn Ezek. 18, 7, i.e.
according to the context his pledge for a debt ; Ezra a, 62 D^fe^n^non D3ri3,
i. e. their register^ namely of those that were reckoned by genealogy (but perhaps
^'JltSn is in apposition to the suffix in 0303), also the curious combinations
But in Is. 17, 6 we should certainly dinde the words differently and read
n^l'gn DyD3, and in Prov. 14, 13 nnOB'n H^nnN; in Gen. a, 19 nn trD3 is a
late gloss upon v.

Some of the examples given above are textually (or exegetically) doubtful,
whilst in the case of others, especially those from the later Books, we cannot
help asking whether such a prolepsis of the genitive by means of a suffix (as e. g.
Ezek. 10, 3) is not due to the influence of Aramaic, in which it is the customary
idiom; comp. Kautzsch's Gramm. des Biblisch'Aram., 81. ^ and 88.
In Ps. 69, 5 Dan (like -ijr^ in a false way, falsely, Ps. 35, 19 and iS, ao) is
used as an adverbial cucusative with a participle ;

comp. ( 118. q.
(mendoiied in { laS. d) of ^(1^ * P">PV aMm^ (Lev. 43), aad ift Jer.
g 6. In Dcut. 33, 4 (nehto, perhaps '^^^dJ) is to be mui), 53, a7 (713^).

Jud. 7, 8 (ni3r), ud Job 31, 1 1 (fi^), the absolute sute appears to be itied inelMd
of t!ic construct to govern a following logical genitive ;
this, however, ctinnot
be explaineti tilhor as a special kinil of apposition, or (with Hitrig} as a peculiarity
of the dialect of Noithern Palestine, but merely as a lexiual corruption. On the
other haad, the lemarkable combination fltotSSf 0^r6M Pa. 80, 8. 15 ariaea from
the fiwt, that in Pss. 43-83 D\T?K haa almoat thioqghoiit been snbaeqnenflf
anbfititnted bj some ledactor for tfie divine name HtfT; on mn* oap.
f 115. k. In Pa. 6. 80, 5. jo and 84* 9 miT haa been reinstated in the teat
before ntlQfD^rpll'.
/ 7. Lastly, the nearer definition (qaalificatioo) of n noon may be cfiieded by

means of a preposition (cither with a sufi"ix or with an indcpcntlent nonn), *but
must then be distinguished from tlie cases in which the preposition is dcpcnJcnt
on a vcib or verbal idea, e.g. Gen. 3, 6 anJ she i;ave a!so PIQ]/ HC^xS ""ô ier
husboful with her (= her husband who ivas with her) ; in Gen. I jiwtf
9, 16 \thai
nmmker Ik* everlasting covenant between God and every living crealmn all
Jletk) and other places^ Che qtialification of the noon is itself also qoalifiedl
{ 182. Coniuxton 0/ the Substantive with the Adjective^,
a 1. The adjective (like the participle used adjectivally)^ which serves

as an aUribute of a substantive, stands afkr the substantive, and agrees
' But in Nnm. 15, la 0*^^^^ nuiy also be oqplained aoeording to letter r, aa
really in apposition. Comp. on die whole question Dditaschf /Wmww, 4di ed,
p.ao3,note i.
Without this flssumption it would be inconceivable that D^KZty *nSt? mft*

should not have been written ; that the author of these Psalms regarded H^KSl
already as an independent name of God (so Gesenioa and Olshaoaen) is oat of
the cjuestion.
* On the expression of attributive ideas by substantive^ comp. above, % 137. A,
and I laS. 0, with the note; f 135. m aad f 141. ^ (snbstantivca for adjeetivei as
and | 15a. u (peripbrasea for nâtive qwditlea^. On
predicates of nonn-elaiises)
the nse of the feminine of adjectives (and participles') to express abstract idens,
see $ 132. q. It remains to mention further the emplovTnent (mostly only in
poetry) of ceitaia epithets in place of the substantives to which the quality
in question belongs; e. g. thf strong ok, i.e. Gcd ; the strong cru, i.e.
the bull (Jcr. 8, 16, and elsewhere, ih^ /wrst ^ ivoift ^ the ruttiur (of the
horse ^ Is. 30, 16); T\V^ alba, Lc. luna; nna {/ructi/em) a fruitful tree. Is. 17,
(so JTjb Gen. 49, aa; ; flh a ertmeker^ le. ermeking beast of prey. Gen. 4, 7-
Compb also ]f\ {grm, ai^gtisettt) and K'b*: {clatus ?), i. e. a frinet. This ie off
adjectim and paitidplct for tobatantim is noch more cxtendve in Arabic. In

Gredc and Latin poetical langnaiêomp. inch eianplesas iyf^^tkt eta ; aaamae
for mmam, ftc;
132.] Connexion of Substanttve with Adjective. 449
with it in gender and number^ e.g. S'^lf C^'t< a great man^ HQ* n^K
a beautiful woman. If the substantive is immediately connected with
a genitive, the attribute follows the latter, since, according to 89
and 128. a, the construct state and the absolute state belonging
to it are inseparably united, e.g. Est. 8, 15 ^fTj ^ great

crown of gold. On the attribute when attached to a determinate
substantive, see above, 126. u.
Rem. I. Where an adjectival attribute appears to stand before its substantive ^

(according to the usual explanation, for the sake of special emphasis) the relation
is really appositional in character ;
thus. Is. 10, 30 D^D^JI n*3^ O thou poor
one, Anathoth! (but probably n*3J? answer her, is to be read); comp. 23, 13.
53, II (a righteous man, my servant ; but in a8, ai "IT and np33 are predicates
preceding the substantives); Jer. 3, 6. 10 sq. Ps. 18, 4 him who is worthy to be
praised will I call upon, the Lord; 9a, la (apposition after participles). But
D*3T and n^3"l many, are sometimes placed, like numerals, before the substantive
I
Jer. 16, 16. Ps. 33, 10. 89, 51. Neh. 9, 38 ; in Ps. 145, 7 3*1 is a subst. regens) ;
an appositional relation can scarcely be intended in these instances.
a. In a few expressions (mostly poetic) the adjective appears not as an attribute C

after the substantive, but in the construct state governing it ; so in the singular,
Ex. 15, 16 (unless should be read) ; 1 Sam. 16, 7 {the height of his stature);
in the plural, 1 Sam. 17, 40 D*33K ^p^H smooth ones of (among) stones, i.e. smooth
stones; Is. 35, 9. Ezek. 7, 34. Ps. 46, 5, and with a following collective instead
of a pinral, e. g. Is. 39, 19 0*18 *3^'3K the poor among men, i. e. poor men ; Jer.
49, 30. Zech. II, 7; comp. in Latin canum degeneres. However, in almost all
these cases the adjective which is made into a regens is strongly emphatic, and
is frequently equivalent to a superlative (see below, 133. ^).
3. When two adjectives follow a feminine, sometimes only that standing next d
to it takes the feminine termination, e.g. i Ki. 19, ii p]rn H nVl ; 1 Sam.
I5i 9 (comp., however, on this passage $ 75.^) Jer. 30, 9. Ps. 63. a. A similar ;
dislike of the feminine form may also be observed in the case of verbal predicates
referring to feminine subjects, comp. $ M?- / ^"^^
Allien an attribute qualifies several substantives of different genders, it agrees

with the masculine, as being the prior gender (c \ 146. </), e.g. Nch. 9, 13
D3^D T\>riXSK Dîpn ; Jer. 34, 9. Zech. 8, 5.
When three atlribntes follow a substantive, the first two may stand without
a conjunction, and the last be attached by waw copulative, comp. Zech. i, 8.
4. After fcminines plural ending in ( 87./) the adjectival attribute (in
accordance with the fundamental rule stated above, letter <j) takes the ending Jli,
e.g. Is. 10, 14 niSTJI D*3r*3 forsaken eggs ; Gen. 3a, 16. For a strange exception
see Jer, 39, 17 (differently in 34, a).
5. With regard to number it is to be remarked that f

(a) Substantives in the dual are followed by adjectives (or participles) in the
plural, e.g. Ps. 18, 38 (Prov. 6, 17; D*3*J; haughty eyes; Is. 35, 3. Job
4, 3 sq., comp. 88. a.
{J>)
Collective ideas are not infrequently joined with the plural of the adjective S
or participle {construclio ad sensum) ;
thus, e.g. U'^'^men, \ Sam. 13,
^gSm^^^^^^
450 The Paris of Speech, [ 133.
^S-lf-'-S? all the rsraelitcs, i Sam. a, 14 ; Tlbi^Hii tJcUts, Jer. a8, 4 OMDp.
also DîJT 5J*D3 itvo souls, Gen. 46,
^ 27
vr I
/r (f) The pluralis excelUniiae or pluralis maieitatis is joine<l, as a nile, to the
singular of the attribute, t.^. P. 7, 10 p^'ÎV D^H^K ; i Ki. 19, 4. 16 f Îs. 37, 4.
17); Is. 19, 4; comp., however, D'*n D^hSk' Deut. 5, 23. 1 Sam. 17, .'6. 3O. Jer.
DînK D^H^N ^Mtather god, and Jos. 34, 19

10, 10. 33, 36, perhaps also Ex. 20, 3
D^Ch^ 0^r6|( (comp., however, abwe, i \2^,g-k). On the other hand, I Sam.
4, 8 is to be expUdned at faavtag been lald bgr the Philisrinei, who mppoied that
the Itraditcs had aeveial gods. On the connearioo of UTCJ^ mth a plml
attribute^ tee f 245. 1.
On the adjective (in the oonstnick state) governing a foUowiog

genitive, comp. 128. for the pattidple in the same con8tnictki,
. see 116./-/.
{ 188* The Omparhm of Ad/tcHvet. {PeriphrasUc Expratim

Ihe ComparaUot and Supertatwt^
tif 1. Hebrew possesses no special forms either for the comparative or
I superlative of ihc adjective \ In order to express a comparaiive, the
person or thing which is to be represented as excelled in some
particular quality is attached to tlv^ attributive word hy the preposition
e. g. I Sam. 9, 2 D^n~^|tp 13)31 higher than tmp 0/ Iht pepk.
The fundamental Idea evidentlj away from aU Iht ptepU
t8 tali
(beyond
whai is
all
sweeier
the people); oomp. Jod. 141 18 ^Hjp V V^S^ piniprnp
ikon honey? and whai'is sirmiger iham a Hon? Eaek.
^
* Bat it b impoiaible to take XX^W in Ecek. 46, 6 as an attiibote of
p-obably it is a correction intended to htrmcfUSe the paiMfe witii Num. s8, II,
where young bullocks are reqtiired.
t-vo
' Comp. 1 Sam. 2^, 13, where D'n"SN (in the sense of a spit it) is followc\xi not so in Gen. 31, 34^, as in I's. 46, 4
to the plural of amplification O^D* sea. On the other band, it is very duuhtfut
whether 7X11 Ps. 78, 15 is to be regarded as an atuibute of nîin and not rather
as the adverb, ahundamtfy,
* There is in Aimbie a spedat form of the adjective (the elcuive) for the com-
parative and saperlative, which ia Hebrew would have the form ^pC1^> Tnslancrt
of itf perhaps are dariitg^ ermel, 1^0$ detente (of a brook 6rfktg p), aad
its oppoiiie }JT^ (contracted from *ai$Mi) eem^MUfy /Uwing, pertnms. These
forms are, however, used without nny perceptible emphasis, and cannot be
regarded as more than isolated relics of .nn cliiive formation which has become
ol)soIete, much as the Latin comparative di&a|)j)cars in Italian, and stiU more so
in French, and is supplanted bjr the circomlocution with pik^plus.
1330 The Comparison of Adjectives, 451
28, 3. Amos 6, 2. Frequently an infinitive appears as tKe object

of the comparison, e.g. (ien. 29, 10 // ts bclkr ihui I gire her lo ihet\
than that I should give her^ &c.i x. 1 4> 1 2. Ps. 1 1 8, 8 sq.'
Rem. I. TUs we of it alio very common vben the attritNitive idea is b

icpresented by aa fiitxtniltiTe verb, e. g. i Sam. 10, 23 D^TTÎO tH9>*T 4wn/ ^
wof higher than any of the peepU; Nah. 3, 8. Job 7, 6. Etiewheie, C^pecfally
after transitive verbti "J^ rather represents (on its different senm* see $ 119. o-s)
the iflca of a reparation, disttucdon or superiority of one person or thing
or over others ^ This is evident in such cases as "|t) ina to choose some-
thing (to prefer it) before something else, e. p. Job 7, 15, comp. Deut. 14, a (also
"jp I^TJl^ tht excellence of . . over . Kccles. 2, 13); it is also seen in
examples like Gen. 37, 3 V3|-^3p ^Dl^T)^ SHK bvrtyi new Isimdttwd Joseph
mr tAoH dii Ait (odier) JuHdrem ; 29, 30. i Sam. a, 29. Hos. 6, 6*.
a. A somewhat diffeicnt Idea naderlies flie use of ~|tp after adjectives, or c
intmositive verbs pomesdng an attritmtive sense, when tlie fhon^ht to be ezpfcsscd
is that the quality is Aw iSftU or / mucM b force for the attainment*of a partlcnlar
aim or object, e. g, ft. 7. 13 DSD iOgaS} St H a tmail My (1. e. too little) /r

you to . . .t Job 15, II ; after an intransitive verb, e.g. Gen. 32, u T am fiw
insigniftcant {^T\yCi\ for all the mercies (I am not worthy of .\ &:c.; comp. . .
also the expressions "fD 133 to be too heavy for one, E. 18, 18. Num. 11, 14.
Ts. 38, 5; "Jp r\^^ to be too hard for one, Deut. 1, 17; "JD Dyo to l>e too f -u>
for something, Exod. 12, 4; "fD 133 to b'. tco strong for one, I's. 65, 4; D^*^
to be too mighty for on4, Ge. a6, 16; "JD DV^ to be too high for otu. Vs. 61, 3;
}D "tJt to be too narrow for one, Is. 49, 19 ; "^D to be too short for something.
Is. 50, a, and very frequently ~)p lyb} i At ita wonderful for ont (and, coo*
seqvcntly Incoooeivahle or wmttainable), Gen. 18, 14. DenL 17, 8. 30, 1.1. Jer.
37i 17. Prov. 30 18/This nse is especially seen in the nnssefoiis instances in
which the attribnte is followed by *)D with an infinitive, e.g. 1 Kl. 8, (S4 tkt
ffttaem aitar . . . wot ^
iittU to netwt (to 1>e aUh to leceive) the
Atumt ^tru^t comp* Gen. 4, 13. 36, 7 ^grtai fer tkm to dweU iigttker; after
verbs, e. g. x. la, 4. Is. a8, so. Fs. 40, 6. Fhially, c *]D 31, followed by
the infinitive, it it tno^gh (ptop. too mtuk) farym /s . . ., meanfa^ ^ ^mw . .
* In Jod. XI, 35 the adjective is specially intendficd by repetition, art (Mom
m marM Mttr than Batakf It would also be possiUe, however, to translate

art thou really better . . .?
* Comp. the Latin ablative with the comparative; also the etymology of sach
words a<; eximius, egregius, and the Homeric it wdyretr fjL&XtaiOf IL 4, 96; l
waatw, 1$. 431.
' On the other hand, the phrase **|P p*}t expre sses not a eoanpaxison, bnt only
a relation casting between one peksoo and another; tho^ in Gen. 38, a6
^fSO n^*iy means, the it im the tight at ttgaitttt mes comp. Job 4, 17. 3s, s.
In ProT. 17, I a rather (to meet with SO and so) thatt ... is ea rcssed ^ by
before the second monber.
Gg9
hngencu^h, i Ki. 13, a8; cf. Ex. 9, 2S and Ezek. 44, 6 (~]D loUowed bjr > sob-
taatife)*.
d In all llieie instanoes *)p expcenes dtber the nmamti of a thing /hm a person,
or the septnmet of the pefaoo Iroin tone aim or olgect; comp.
alao the expveadoa
131 il^^ DHD unattainaMt for iJUm (piop. there ahall
'^SG^''^ tt^himg sra7/ ie
Dot be cut ofTfrom them anything which, Sec), Gon. 11, 6. Job 43, 3.
f 3. The attributive idea, on which "jD logically depends, must sometimes, in
consequence of a prej^snt use of the "|p (see the analogous examples in 119. Jf^,
be strpplied from the context, e.g. Is. 10, lo D^^C'Î^D Dn^!^*DD^ -whose grai-^n
images were more namerous than those at Jerusalem, &c.'; Mic. 7, ^ worse than
a ikam hedge ; Ps. 62, jo lighter than a breath; Job 11, 17 dearer than tJU
n9omittf} Eccles. 4, 1 7 better than,
f 2. The correlative coniparati\'e.s greater less {olderyounger) are

expressed by the simple adjective with the article {/hegreatt equivalent
to the greaier, 1> i^* i9 31* 34* ^7' 15* ^9* i^* iS*
^ 8. To express the superlative it is also suffident (see above, letter /)

to make the adjective detenninale, either by means of the article
or a following partitive genitive (or suffix); in this case the article
or genitive indicates that the attribute in question belongs especially
to one or more definite individuals*; e.g. 1 Sam. 9, 21 '"ny^ the
Ifasl ; 16, n ^Di5n /////f i. e. the j'(>tt//^vj/ of eight sons ; 17.14
David was JDj^T the yoiwgcs/, and the three greal, i.e. elder, &c.;
Gen. 42, 13. 44, 2. Canl. i, 8. So also with a qualifying adjective,
e.g. Gen. 9, 24 |0n U3 his youngest son ; comp. Jos. 14, 15 j also
vith a following genitive, a Chron. ai, 1 7 ^^^3 ihe youngest of his
sons: Prov. 30, 34 the least upon the earth; with suffix, Mic. 7, 4 OJto
their good one, Le. the best of them; Jon. 3, 5 DfO^^^yj D^SD from
the greatest of them even to the least of them; comp. the inverse order
in Jcr. 6, 13. 31, 34.
h Rem. I. The above examples apply only to the most common relative attributes
êat, smalt, good) and to ezprowioat which by usage easily aune to be recogniaed
i
aa periphratea for the soperktive* Other adjectival however, when IbUoved

by a partitive genitive, alao aoquiie the aenae of a auperlatiTe this a|îean froa ;
the context, e.g. Deut. 33, 19 the most hidden treasures of the sand ; Jud. 5, 19
the wistst amongit her todies iIs. 19, 11.. aj, 8 sq. 39, 19. Jer. 49, ao. Exek. aS, 7.
'
Comp. also 2 Ki. 4, 3, where the i'?cn of ,Mn^ ^crnetkin^ tec little is para-
phrased by the Hiph. D^^^ do not too little, sc. hitS^ in borrewing emp^
vessels.
* On this comparoHe deemrtotOf c the still bolder pregnant constructiQO in
Ps. 4, 8, TliQ greater giadness ikon ot the timet &c.
* Comp. alao fl^ the one ahve, Le. the Most High.
1330 T'A^ Comparison of Adjectives, 453
Zcdu II, 7. P*. 45, 1 3- Job 30, 6 (i tk* mostfrightful of valleys). 4 1, a a ; probably
alto Pi. 35, 16. On this govemroent the adjective geoefallx, cf. f 133. r.
Moreover, the combinatioD of a substantive id the ccHUtrncI state with an adjective
used substaDtivally (diacoiied in laS. vt^ sometimes serves as a periphrasis for
the superlative, e.g. U. aa, 34 fO^T \'b3 /3 oil thu smalhst vessels ; Cant. 7, 10
Sitdn p]^3 lUu tk btst mm (where indeed Jlitfin may have been orieioaUy
intended).
3. Other periphrases iur lite superlative are the use of a substantive in the t
c<mstnict state before the plural of the same word (which is naturally to be
nfuded as a partitlTe geniUve; cmnp. oar Mk ^ Mks), t,g, Ex. 36, 33
O^^^^^n ike mast Aofy /Uun; tflyy^S} (Cant t, i) tMt matt autUttU
smgf omnp. 35 {^ûrvus strvorum, the lowest servant); Num. 3, 33.
Gen. 9,
Dtut. 10, 17' (Ps. 136, 3' ; T Ki. 8, 27. Is. 34, 10 (comp. r.al. 1. 5. Rev. 22, ;
Jer. 3, 19. Ezek. 16, 7. 36. 7 /in^ of kings, of Nebuchadrc^r-ir comp. Tim. ;
I
6, 15. Rev. 17, 14. 19, 16, and another kind of drcumlocution in Ps. 95, 3);
Eccles. I, 13. Similarly in Jer. 6, 38 two partidples are oomUoed, and io Hob.
10, 15 two substantives in the sii^lar. Finallj, Uie same olgect is attabed
bj eoniMClInc one snbstantive in tlie eoostroct state wtdi another of the same
stem (ffnai^ TWf a Math ^ gdmm rai, ie. an obUgatocj day of lest, Ex.
31, 1 5, &c.) or of the same meaning (e.g. 1|E^ a tkuh darkfust, Ex. 10, a i).
3. The intensification of attributes bj means of repetition belongs rather to rhetoric k

than to syntax, e.g. Eccles. 7, 34 pb^ pb^ exceeding deep ; 1 Sam. a, 3. Prov.
30, 14; the adjective is even nsed three times in Is. 6, 3. Comp. the repetition
of adverbs for the same purpose in Gtn. 7, 19. Num. 14. 7 (HNtp TKD exceeding,
also "TNp "lkD2 Ex. I, 7 and elsewhere) ; tzek. 43, 15. On the other hand, in
DeuL a8, 43 the repetition expresses a continuous progress, i. e. higher and higher
. . . Unvtr and Urwer ; in Deut a, 37 (sec 133. 0 {nothing but Justice)
the oooatancj of the actioo. Comp. Ex. S3 30 Oytp very gradHaOf^K
The repetition of safastantim senres also as a pctiphcans for the superlative /
in such cases as ^Hf (Ex. 3 I^t0ik9 roMiest gemeruHtm j coup. 17, 16.
Jer. 6, 14. 8, 21 iprfiei ftaa) ; Esck. ai, 31 (n)} repeated three tioMa)'; 33, 7.
Nah. I, a. Sometimes the completeness of an action or conditioo is expressed

by placinp; together two or even three substantives of the same stem and of
similar sound, comp. Kzek. 6, J4 (33, 38sq. 35, 3) ; 33,15. Nah. 3, 11. Zeph.
I, 15 (Job 30 3. 38. a?).
* Cod of gods, and Lord of lords, just as the supreme god of the Babylonians
is called bel h:li Tide, Compend. der Ri-l.-Cesch., p. 87 .
Adverbs of the same stem are connected in lliis way in Num. 6, 9. Is. 39, 3.
30, 13 ; of different stems in Is. 5, 36 and Joel 4, 4. In Num. 1 3, 3 the particle*
pi appear to be placed together for a similar purpose, equivalent to j*ai{^
' DifGersBt in Itiad from the thriee repeated exdansatioii of the same words in
3 Sam. 18, 33. Jer. 7, 4 and ast >9f the double exclamation |n Jer. 4, 19 and
Lam. i 16 (0
^ J . ^ci by Google
454 ^/^^ Parts af Speech. [ 154-
134. Syntax of Ihe ^'umerais.
Cf. the exhaostive stmliitici coUected bgr Sfcn Henier, Spttax der ZakiwirUr
im A. T, Lnod, 1893.
a 1. The numerals from 2 to 10, as being originatty abstract

snbstamtives, may be connected with Chdr substantives in three
different ways. They may stand either

(a) In the construct state 6e/ore the substantive (the object
numbered being consequciuly in the genitive), e.g. D'OJ Pfoh^ a triad

0/ days, i.e. three days; D^î<n >ip the Iwo mm; or
b (^) in the absolute state before it (the object numbered being

in apposition, 131.^, e.g. ne^ê^ a Iriadt viz. sim^ ie. three
sons; DIP^^ 0^^^ two mat; or
c (r) In the absolute state (likewise in apposition) after ibe obfect
numbered, e.g. rAia. So especiaOy in long lists, since in these
the substantives naturally xome 'first, Gen. 32, 15. Num. 7, 17.
e.g.
28, 19. Apart from such cases, the frequency of this order In the
Uter Books is due to the fact that the chiiractcr of the numeral
tended more and more to become adjectival rather than substantival \
d Rem.. hi Lev 31, 2a in>t follows the construct state tSBC'D, but here as in
Nam. IS, t6 tTEJ^D shoald be read. In Gen. xi, 10 iriK is in a'>no>.ifif>n to

n ?;abtnntive with a suftix {= cm of you brethren; but verse 33 M*: one of you
i'rcihrtn). In Num. .î, 38 TIIX precedes the suhstnritive in the Ammiiic manner
(.
= one each). For H^^-'TIND ^Gtn. 7, 17, &c.) \vc find regulaily in the Piiestly
Code (except in Gen. 17, 17. 23, i) H^B^ (Gen. 5, 3, &c.) an hundred years.
On the connadon of ftbctnct nonerals with suffixes, as Dn*9^ their dttality^ i.e.
ihîWy Gen. a, 35 and elsewhere (also with a ttrc;;^:hci;in|^ separate ptoaoim,
as WVt^ 1^*3^ t Sam. so, 48), comp. 1 97.<l.
e 2. The numerals from 2 to 10 take tlie object numbered in the
plural ^ with verv few rx( epitons, such as Ex. 16, 22 (where "^PV^ ^3?'
' ! roiu iicrner's tables (op. cil., pp. 55-66) it appears, according to p. 68, that
in the docnments J, E, D of the Pentatench, in Jos. i-ia, Judges, Samael, Isaiah,
JereokUdi, the Minor Ptophet^ Psalnt, MÛoth, end Job, the nninenl nevcri
or very niely, stands efitr its noun ; in KJngf and Esdciel it stands several tines
after; in the Priestly Code and Jos. 13-24 nearly always after; in Chronicles,
Kzra, Nchcmiah, and Daniel, neaily as often after as hcfore the noun. In Ex*
28, 10 the Masora makes the nunural in the genitive follow the construct state of
the substantive numbered; we should, however, read n^g'n nit^S^flfitl; for the
ominion of the article before i 'V^, cf. i6. nr.
' On examplca tnch as Gen. 46, tj
^\ tvM fOfUs), comp. fi 133.^
(collectlvea joined with the pluml of the adjecttve).
Digitized by Gogle
1 134.] Sy)i/cL\: of the Numerals. 455
= tht iMt if an mer), a Ki. aa, i. Eiek. 45, i, comp. a Ki. 8, 17

and 25, 17 The iramerals from 11 to 19 geneialtj take
the plural, but with certain substantives frequently used with numerals
the singular is more common (see funher, under letter y). The tens
(from 20 to 90), when thcv precede, take ihe singular (in the
accusative, comp. 131./) 01 certain nouns frequently used with

numerals a thousand, JTK, Dl\ na, B^D3, but only in Fzeklel
and the Priestly Code), otherwise the plural, as 0^33, ni:a, on^ (but
cf. also Jud. II, 33) Ac.; on the other hand, the plural is necessary
when they follow the object numbered in apposition (e.g. Wiff VdS^
twenty cubits, a Chron. 3 3 sq.; with the exception of a Sam. 94, 34,
only in hte Books). After and the substantive numbered
may be used cither in the singular or plural, see further, letter g
below.
DV
Rem.
(iiiy,
I. After the numerals from ii to
tXy^ year. man, K'DS soul person),
tg the singular
/"Af,
is used, as a rule, with
HDiT) pillar iiLx.
^
J4 4V, snm?-fin!cs with nGS luhit, J/"in month, 7j>3* shekel compare oor
Jaut -jiiif-out ami the German sechztj^ jy'und), e.g. l>eut I, a DP ib*^' IHtC
(comp., however, soch exceptions as Dcut. and elsewhere). i, 33. Jos. 4, a,
Substudvei other then these are aied In the ploral with the oamerals from 11 to
19, and the nunenl maj even follow the sobitaotive, eipecuiUy ia later ptiiagc%
as Nmii. 7, 87 tq. 1 Chron. 4, 37. 35, 5.
3. After n8<p (HKO [so almost exclusively in the Priestly Code, e.g. always
g
nttp], hifctO, DTIKO) and |Jk (0'B^, *pS\ ^'i^) substantives
B^K, êxcept in Ezck. 40, 37), Dl\^531, HDS are regularly used in
the singular, genernlly also HiK', "^33, "^3, (with the exception of Jos. 7, 31.
2 Sam. 14, 26 nnd tUcvvhcrc'i ; comp., moreover, Gen. 33, 19. Fst. i, i. Jud. 21, i j.
I>ciit. 7, 9. I Ki 5, 13. i Chron. 9, 15. Examples of the plutal after iTXD aie
Gen. 26, 12. 1 .Sam. iS, 2;. 1 Sam. 16, I. 1 Ki. 18, 4; after flJtO Ex. 38, 27;
after niXD Jut!. 15, 4. 2 âm. 8, 4. I Ki. 10, 17. Eiek. 42, 17; after D*nXO
I Sam. 35, 18. I Ki. 7, 30; after P|^6t 1 Sam. 35, 3. i Ki. 3, 4. 5, 6. i Ki. 3. 4.
Ps. 90. 4 ; after 0*D^ l Sam. 17, 5. Job 43, 13 ; after *pj)|t Mic. 6, 7 ; after D^gSj^t
Is. 36, 8.~In Dan i a, it the plural D^C^ precedes the nmneral AwAur ifwuAv^.
8. Numerals compounded of tens and units (like at, 63) take the k
object numbered either afkr them in the singuhr (in the accusative),
e.g. Gen. 5, 20 TSff ^^^f^ Iwo and sixty ysars (nse^ in the singular,
according to letter since it conforms to the ten inmiedlately pre-

ceding ; but also n^bcn XS^^ Deut. 2, 14), or btforc ihcm
in the plural, especially in ihe later Books, Dan. 9, 26 and cli-cwhere;
or the object is repeated ^but onl)r in i Ki. 6, i, and the Priestly

45* The Paris of Speech. H 34
Code; sometimes even several times, e.g. Gen* 23, t. 25, 7. 17 thrice)
in the plural with the units (according to letter and in the singular
with the tens (s<o leiter e) and hundreds, e.g. Gen. 12, 4 0*3^^ Bôn
nae^ D'V?^t snu nty and five years ; Gen. 23, i njc' Dnb yi r^yj* ntto
0^36^ an imndred and twenty and seven years, Comp. Geo. 5, 6 sqq.
> Rem. I. It may fotther be remarked with rârd to the order, that the thottfuid
or thousands always precede the hundreds, &c., and the hundreds almost alwajrs
come before the smaller numbers (in Kings and Ezelciel sometimes, and in the
Priestly Cude usually, after the smaller numbers), the tcuit in the earlier
Books ^documents J and D of the Pentateuch, Joshua i-i3. Judges, Samuel, Isaiah,
and alio in Ena and Ndiemiab) bdbfe the uniti, Imt in Jereniab, EaeUd, die
Priestlf Codev Joihna after die nnltt (see Hcmer, <^ dt., p. 73). After
the hundreds the snuUer number is very freqncntlj added dtfipWnrt, without 1,
especially in zra, Nehemiah, and Daniel.
On the syntax of the cardinals in general :
k 1. The caidinals arc determined by the article, when they refer back (without
being connected with the object numbered; comp however,
,
Lev. 35, lost]. Nam.
16, 35, Jos. 4, 4. 3 Sam. 23, 13) to a number or list already mentioned, e.g. (Icn.
J, 1 1 ;'.U '3 "inxn D5J^ the name of the oiu i^thc tirsl riihon ; Gen. 14, 9 four
kings aguittii tfu five (enumcr.atcd in verse 2); comp. 1 Chrou. 11, io^., and
the determinate tent in Gen. 18, 29. 31 sq. A demoitttiathre with the article may
also be added to a nameral determined
way, e.^. Dent* 19, 9 (but oomp. In this
also Gen. 9, 19. as* %%t where the auneral and dcmoQtoative are pnctically
detcrminafe in themselves). In the case of the numerals from ii to 19 the
article may stand cither before the unit i Chron. 25, 19. 27, 15^ or before '^fe'^ ^
(Jos. 4, 4); it is used before all thre members of a compound number (373)
in Num. 3, 46.
/ In appositite widi some determinate snhMaalife the caidinal nnmber b naed
wUhmU the article, not only when it precedes the substantive, as In Jcs. 15, 14
<P}^n
in itself;
^ nif^^f^lf , where Tlfh^
comp. Gen, 18, %%, Jos. 6, 8. ss.
is eqnivakot to a mbstantive detennmate
1 Sam. 17, 14. i Ri. 11, %\, and the
passages discussed above in { is6. jr; Gen. si, 39, Ac), btt also when it fellows
the snbalantive, e.g. 1 Ki. 7, 37. 43 sq. and ; the omimlon of the article
may here, as in the cases noticed in % 1 36. s, be also due to the dislike of a
hiatus. This would also be a very simple explanatloo of Num. 38, 4. i Sam.
13, >
7 ]^^' ^4' sek. 10, 9, instead of the more nsnal "tn^, and of nn|l
1 .Sam. 1 2 for Dnjen.
|T
HI .Such caîes as D'tp^H nyZU* Ju<1. 14, 17 which detcmiincd by a following

determmate genitive) arc explained from M'.b: i Chron. 9, J5 perhaps from
f 126. q ; in Is. 30, 36 probably the light of all the seven days of the week is
meant; on the other hand. In s Sam. 9, so and 25, 38 the aitide is, with WelU
hanaeo. to be omitted,
n 3- Certam apedficatlons of aiiiwiv, sMffijjpl/, or /m, asecommooly omitted after
anmerals, e.g. Gen. so, 16 C|^ a thtmsatid (shd(]a) ^ silver ; so also before
an| Gen. 24, sa. i KL 10^ 16. Is. 7, S3, comp. Pk. 119, 7* HoBeovcr Rath 3, %%
le
134-] Syntax of the Numerals, 457
^ six (cpfaahs) ^ barley} DH^ nib^ ten (ftooording to

i Sun. 17, 17
where bcfoie f$ a meame, or pcrfaapa
10, 3 hams) krauts eompi. a San. t6>
aome tern like atkes, is to be aapplied. The namber of cahits it stated in tte
Priestly Code (Ex. s6, a and elsewhere) and in l Ki. 6 and 7 (otherwise only in
Ezek, 40, 5. 21. Zcch. 5, 2.

47, 3, i Chron. 11, sz- 2 Chron. 4, a sq.) hy the
addition of rrT2K3 prop. (^_>' fuMf. Also in Ex. 27, II the Samaritan and LXX
read TtO^ after 1}'^, and in i^, 15 7V^ after n^^.
4. The ordinals above 10 have no special fornis, but are expressed
by the corresponding cardinals, which may then stand either before

or after the object numbered, e.g. Gen. 7, 11 tf"* "^b^ nâiffa
snênteenth day; Deut. i, 3 nJC* D'yanKS / fortieth year ; comp.

(itn. 14, 5. 2 Ki. 25, 27, and, with rej)elition of rUB^ in a compound
number, i Ki. 6, i ; such a cardinal occurs without 3 (and therefore
in the accus. iemporis, according to 118. X) in Gen. 14,4 (the
Samaritan, however, has B^3l); with the article (but without
a numbered object, see above, letter k\ i KL 19, 19*. On the
position of the numeral as a genitive following its noun, comp. e.g,
t KI. 16, 10 SOe^ trjflf njf^ in ike noeniy and seventh year, and
with a determinate numeral, Ex. 13, 18. Num. 33, 38. Deut. 15, 9.
In this case, however, n3e^ is very frequently repeated, e. g. Gen. 7, 11.
2 Ki. 13, 10; after a determinate numeral, Lev. 25, 10 ^

Rem. In numbering days of the month and years, the cardinals are vcrj' fre- P
qucnlly used instead of the ordinals even for the numbers from i to 10,
D^nt^ ni^3 1 ki, 15, 25; 2 Ki. iS, i, &c., comp. i>eui. 15, 9. The
months themselves aie always numbcicd by the ordinals (PK^'^B, ^^y:'3, dec,
np to^^fe'ga), but not the days of the month, e.g. B'^h^ 1f?^2l Gen. 8, 5 and
elsewhere, B^nH^ n^")!?? Zech. 7,
1 Ehh^ H^ns Esek. I, z and elsewhere,;
l^h^ n^9â J KL ac, 8, Chn^ n^trna Lev. aj, 3a (always, however, 'iV^'SL
iNl^ m
the UtHk day of tht month). On the omission of D^^ in all these eases
see above, letter ; only in late panages is Xi^ added, e.g. s Chnm. 39, 17
K^hJ^ nateB' Diâ; Esn ehh^ nn d1>D.Finally, when the year is stated
3, 6
by lUf^ goveinliig a determiaaie oidlanl, eg. s Ki. 17, 6 H^j^t^n rUBâ
* Somewhat different firam this is Ex. 15 reedy DTCIJ T^"^^ pmp* efier
ikrse dcffn, \.t.entki third de^ (in verses 1 1 and 16 and in Ezra 10, 8 the ordinal
b nied), alio i Sam. 30, 13 n^6f^ ^n^^rf ^ heeams three eignse I feU
riek, prop, te-de^ tkne (days).
' All these expressions may indeed be explained by snpposmg that, e. g. in Lev.
25, 10, the proper meaning^ is i he year of the fifty years which it completed, i.e.
the filtieth year; but it is more correct to rej.,'ard VTJ^ or n3lJ*3 in such cases
not as a real twmen regem, but simply as a connective form to be explained on
the analogy of the cases moitioned la is8.4
Digitized by Google
458 The Parts of Speech. ['34-
in the ninth year (comp. 25, i. Jer. aS, i K*th. 3a, i K'th. 46, a. 51, 59.
Ezra 7, 8), T\Vdli in such cases is again (see note 2 on letter 6) to be explained
according to 128. k. This is supported by the fact that the Masora on
Jer. 28, I, 32, I, requires in the (frt for nJJ5'3.
q 6. Distributives are expressed either by repetition of the cardinal

number, e.g. Gen. 7, 9. 15 D^.3K^ D^3^ two and two; 2 Sam. 21, 20
E^K' six each; with the numbered object also repeated, e.g.
Jos. 3, 1 2 MK'i) nriK S5^K nn b^^n /,r every tribe a man; Num. 13, 2.
34, 18 (n? "THKj as in Neh. 1 1, i, one out of every ten); comp. 123. d;
or a periphrasis with ^ is used. Num. 17, 18. Deut. i, 23, comp.
Is. 6, 2 after wings twice repeated; the simple distributive
^ is, however, sufTicient (as in Dn^3i, 123. r), e.g.

rttôS?
by hundreds and by thousands.
r 6. The multiplicatives are expressed either (like the ordinals
above 10, see letter 0 above) by the cardinals (in the feminine,
probably owing to the omission of DV?, D^PVB ; so Konig, Lehrgeb.,
ii. 228), as QînB' twice^ Job 40, 5; VSK^ seven times, Lev. 26, 21. 24.
Prov. 24, 16; comp. also nnw once, 2 Ki. 6, 10. Job 40, 5, for which
in Job 33,14 r^D^S^ along with ^l^p^ (the latter also in i Sam. 18, 21);
or by the dual of the numeral, thus D^riy3E^ Gen. 4, 15 (in verse 24
along with the cardinal 77 for 77 times) ; Is. 30, 26. Ps. 12, 7. 79, 12 ;
D^ri]^3"lS 2 Sam. 12, 6'; or periphrastically by Dys a time (prop.

a step, with the article, Oyan /his time; comp. also T)ii^T\ Dy33, with
3, like nn3 above), as nriN DyS once (Neh. 13, 20 DW> Dys once
and twice), O'^V^ twice, D^PV? (^^^ which in Ex. 23, 14. Num.
22, 28. 32 D^S'J'l K'i'B') three times; comp. Ezek. 41, 6 thirty-three
times; 2 Sam. 24, 3 an hundred times; Deut. 1, 11 a thousand times;

I Ki. 22, 16 DÔyD nD3"iy untit how many times, i.e. how often.
Cf. also D^^to niby ten times, Gen. 31, 7. 14, and D^f^V rii31 many
times, Neh. 9, 28. In Gen. 43, 34, Jive times is expressed by ircn
(prop, ^ve hands)^, and in Ex. 16, 5 the double is expressed by

"^y nicio (prop, a repetition over and aboi'e that which, S:c.). Of the
ordinals ri^?K' is used as a numeral adverb, Gen. 22, 15, &c., a second
' Hut nn{<3 Num. 10, 4 is to be translated on one (trumpet).

' Probably also Dî>p3 Job 1 1, 6 (from doubting) does not mean doubled
but manifold.
' But nn*n ySlX Gen. 47, 24 means the {o\ht:t)/our parts; comp. 2 Ki. n, 7.
Neh. 11,1.
I35-] Tf^^ Personal Pronoun. 459
lime, comp. the Latin tertium consul ; T^&hlîJu third h'nu, i Sam.
3, 8 n^K^pn Dye a fifth time, Neh. 6,
;
Pf^^ at thi sevauh ;
(time), I Ki. 18, 44, and 'BÔ DyB:^ Jos. 6, 16.
Rem. The collocation of r numeral with the next above it same S

(either in the
or in different sentences) is a ihctorical device emplojed in numtHeal mjangs

to express a nnmber, which need not, or cannot, be more exactly specified. It matt
be gathered from Hht context whether such formulae are intended to denote onlj
a insigoificaat nnmber (e. g. U. 17, 6 /n r at the mott tJkttt), w cdnndeiable
nntnber, e. g. Hie. 5, 4. Senetimcsy howem, thU jaxtapodtkm lerm to expreit
merely an indefinite total, widioot the collateral idea of a gradatioo from a lower
to a higher number. Thus cnt and /wo are connected by ], Dcat. 31, 30. Jet. 3,14.
Job 33, 14. 40, 5 (without V Ps. 62, la); t:vo and /hra-, Is. 17, 6 (Sir.ic. 23, 16.
26, aS), and wLlhoiit 1, a Ki. q, 32. IIos. 6, a. Amos 4, 8; t/irê .iiul /our,
Jer. 36, 33. Amos 1,3. : , .\. J'rov. 30, iS. il. 29 ^Sirac. 26, 5), and without ),
Prov. 30, 15 ;
/our and jive, witlioul ). Is. 17, 6; stx and seven, Job 5, 19.
Frov. 6, 16; $<vm and eight, Mic. 5, 4. Eccles. 1 1| a ; and /m, Siiac. a^, 7}.
m. Syntax of tlia Pxonoim.
185. 21n Personal Pronoun.
1. The separate pronouns, apart Trom their employnient as the <f
subject in noun-clauses (comp. 141. <r) and the idiom mentioned

under letters rf-A, are used, according to 32. ^, as a role, only
to give express emphasis to the subject; e.g. Gen. 16, 5. 2 Sam. 24, 17
i.e. / myself, so albo 2 Sam. 12, 28. 17, 15 (after the verb).
Kzek. 34, 15. Ps. 2, 6'; but i Sam. 10, 18. 2 Sam. 12, 7. Is. 45, 12
/ and none else; cf. also ^3*t *3N /, // Hos. 5, 14, &c.; nn|t
Gen. 15, 15. Jud. 15, 18. i Sam. 17, 56 (as in 20,8. aa, 18. F.x. 18, 19.
Deut. 5, 34. J ad. 8, a i, after the imperative); i Ki. at, 7; OnK Gen. 9,7.
x. ao, 19 (after the verb, Jud. 1$, la); Gen. 31. 6 ; KV) i Sam.
fern.
a a, 18; Gen. 3, ao. Jud. 14, 3; HOn Jer. 5, 5. Sometimes,

however, the separate pronoun appears io be placed before the verb
'
Alio NVl, {<*ri ht himself she her set/ (of persons and things), e.g. Is. 7, 14
Mn tike Lard himsel/; Est. 9. i rm D'lVVn ihi Jews Oemuives. In the
sense of the same (6 aMx) or (fw amdj the same, W\ it nied m It. 41, 4.
43, 10. 13. 46, 4. 48, 12 (always Wn W^t llCfrl rUR^t), and probably
nlio Job 2, 19.The position of n&H, at an aocmntive of the object^ before
a perfect in i Chnw. 9, 2a, can at moat be cqplaincd on the analogj of Aiamaic
(Eii5,ia).
more on rhythmical grounds, i.e.in order to give the statement a fiiUer

sound than that of the Imre verbal form (cf. the similar use of the
iniaiuiVL absolute, 113. f), T hus Gen. 14, J3. I s. 139, 2, and most
clciirl}' in such passa^'es as Gen. 21, 24. 47, 30. Ex. 8, 24. Jud. 6, 18.
II, 9. I Sam. 12, 20. 2 Sam. 3, 13. 21, 6. i Ki. 2, 18 (in sulernn
promises). The same explanation applies to at the beginning
of sentences, e.g* Gen. 34, 45. Hos. 5, 3. 10, 11. la, 11. Ps. 39, ii-
8a, 6. Job 6,3.
If Rem. I. Different from this )s the pkoiuftic addition of the sepente pronoim
immediately aîr the Tcrb (iccocding to Delltiach on Cant. ; perhaps a trace
of popular language), e. g. i Sam. 33, (f). Cant. 5, 5, and (like other
indications of the very late origin of the book) \txy frcqvu ntly in Ecclcsbstcs, c. ^.
1, 16. 2, I. II. 15. 3, 17 *q. &c. ; comp. l>fX\\2si^f Vas JJohetud und KoheUth,
p. ao7 ; in Araoiaic, Dan. 5, i6.
> Sttbittitfivnl whiectt alsonie lomewhnt fieqnendy icnmed, and thasezpfemly

emphasized, by the inieition of the conespending separate pranonn of the jid person
before the ]>rci!icate is stted, e.g. Gen. 3, 12 tht tewnMit 'mkm thou gavtst to be
xvilk me, she (KTI) gatte me, 8cc. ; 14, 24 (QH) ; 15. 4. 24, 7, flee; bat IttH in
Is. 7, 14 after the predicate and subject is eqaivaleat to Ai hims*^\
d 2. Not infrequently the separate pronoun serves to give strong

emphasis to a suffix of the same person w liich i)recedes (or sometimes
even to one which follows), whether the suffix be aitaclied to a verb
(as accusative) or 10 a noun or preposition (as genitive). In Kngh>-h
such an emphasis on the pronoun can generally be rendered only

by laying greater stress upon it, or sometimes by repeattng it; oomp^,
on the contrary, the French nun Iwre i moL The separate pronoun
in such instances is not to be regarded as a casus Mqtms (accusative or
genitive), but as the subject of an independent sentence, the predicate
of which must in each case be supplied according to the context
g Example* of cniphasis :
(a) On a verbal suffix by means of (^3N^, Ccn. 27, 34 'sA'DJ ^33^3 ^'^-^-f
even me also (prop. l>Uss me, I also would be blessed ; Zcch. 7, 5; comp. alstt
Ezek. 6, 3. 34, II. io *;3n ;

by HTlK (J\m) Vio\. 22, 19.The separate
pmnoim precidu in Goi. 24, a? ; 49> 8 (nn|( not Judah, thorn art kg ti^^t
'
.\s early the Mesa' inscription (line J I t.qq.^ *pH Creqnently Stands at the
beginning of a new sentence after the dividing stroke.
Analofons to thb is the vesnmptieii of a noon dependent ca a prepoation,
*
hf menna of a pfoooniaal snIBs nnited with the tame ptepodtioo, e.g. Gen. s, ty.
a Sam. 6, as. a Ki. as, 18, or of an object by means of the mota memmSmi JW
with soffix, Cf. 1 Sam. 15, 9. la. 8^ 13.
* 35 ] Tlie Personal Pronoun, 461
but Judah thu^ the* thy brethren shttil praise ! but the vocative would also be possible,
Judah t thmt Mjr hretkrut tkall prait$ thnl m in 34, 60}, and Ecdes. a, 1 5 >3K Q|
{If) On a Boiin*iiffix widi tobatantive, by means of ^9|{ a Sam. 19, i. Pfov. 33, 15,
f
perhaps abo Lam. i, 16 (against the aooenta); bf SirM t KL si 19 *^pil*nK
nnK"Di M/ hUtdt even tkim$ by (On a Sam. 17, 5. Jer. 97, 7. Mic. 7, 3;
by VrOSI I Sam. so, 4a, after KP^t but withoot special stien; Neh. 5, s(?);
by DM
Nnm. 14* 32; by Dn Fik 11 (without fecial tfiess), Tt^ Fk. 9, 7.
The separate pronoun pntÛs in Job 9i, 4 (*^!>K) ; Gen. 40, t6. b. 45^ is. i Ciiran.
aS, 2 C"??^); Zcch. 9, II (WK); Joe. 13,9 (DTIK); Ezek. 33. ^7 (HDriy. In
Ps. 89, 48, where ^3|t might be taken as strengthening (cqnivalent in sense to
*'^f)n^, we should read *3hit for as in verse 51.
(<) On a suffix united with a preposition, 1 Sam ?; ""JX "â upon me, upon ^
me; i Ki. 1 , 26 ifct . . , *f>; 2 Chron. 35, 21 .TTIK flji:a/>/x/ fhee;
1 Sam. 19, 23 S^n D3 )^>y Wy'^" a/jiJ; Deut. 5, 3 \JXW *3 uiM kj,
n>eH us; 4 QPSK UZO for you yourselves Jcr. 35, 14 nn~D3 D3- The
Hag. I, :
arate pronoun precedes in 1 Sam. 12, 33 . ^DbS; I Ki. I, 20
SCJ
^'^^ . nri|$ . ,
Mic 5, I ^Qp ... nJPlK, and i Chron. 28, 10 D3Dj^ OFIK.

.
The same principle also explains Gen. 4, a6 K^rras to Seth, to him also k
(aoti^D3) comp. 10, ai, and Ex. 35, 34. Num. 4, 33.
;
S. The oblique cases of the personal pronouns expressed by means i

of a preposition (or the noia acats. ntc) may be used either in
'
a demonstrative or reflexive sense', as *h to him, but also lo himself
(r3i% e.g. Jud. 3, 16 and Ehud made 1^ fmr himself a sward, comp.
Gen. 33 17 ; so 'also OQ^ s&i^ Is. 3, 9; fnM wilh him, and Gen. aa, 3
with himself; RB]^ with her^ and i Sam. i, 24 with herself; unlo
him, and Gen. 8, 9 unle himself; also apparently as a pleonastic
dativus eihicus (see 119. j), Job 12, 11. 13, i.
Rarely, and only when marked emphasis is intended, is the accusative k
of the reflexi\c pronoun represented by the nota accusativi nx with
a suffix (this being ordinarily expressed by the reflexive conjugations

Niph'al and Hithpael*); thus, iTtK himself and bis habitation, 2 Sam.
15* 35 i *f ipscs, Ex. 5, 19. Jer. 7, 19 in sharp antithesis to ^nkn
Ezek. 34, 2. 8. 10. Comp. $ 57 at the end, together with note 2.
Rem. There Is a similar emphasis ia Is. 491 a<( en O'^bll and QD^ in the sense /
of iheir owm fiesh, ikeir enm Uood, On the sometimes demenstiatlve, sometimet
n:flexive meaning of noon-suffixes of the 3rd person singular and plnxal, cf. | 91.
/ and f, m other drcnmlocntioos to express the idea of self, see $ 1 39./
' As in Lutiier's Bible jm if Am), Jr \îkr) for sieh, and in our version him, her
keno^
for himulf,
> Niflfal acconling to $ 51. # (like HiihfdH aocovding to f
iaetttde the ehHsie of the reflexive pionona.
H*/) ^1 ^
4. The possessive pronouns are. according lo 33. c. expressed
by the sirffixes of the noun (in the genitive) ^ which may represent
cither a subjective gemttve, or (hi;e the genitives projx?r, f 128. h)
an objective geniiivi, e.g. ^DDH iJu wrong done against me, Gen. 16, 5.
Jer. 5i35; comp. Gen. 9, 3. 18, 21. 27, 13 (2 Sam. 16, 12 K'tJL)\
Gen. 30, 23. 39, 81 (oomp. Ex. 3, ai and elsewhere); 50, 4, x. 20, 30.
ai 35* Jw^- 4i 9' >3i O^^W treatment ef him); Is. 56, 7.
Jcr. 9, 7. Nah. 3. 19. Prov. i, 27. 24, 33. Job 30, 39. 33, 14. 34, 6.
Comp. also such pregnant exprcssionft as F^. 20, 3 ^1]^ he vail
send thy help {helpfor thee), i.e. he will send ihec help; Gen. 30, 1 8. 39, 2 1
J'.x. 2, 9. Is. 1, 26 {and J zvill restore judges for thee); Kzck. 37, 15.
When several substantives are co-ordmiled. the prononiinal suflix must be

attachcil to each singly,
*****e. g. Gen. 36, 6 anJ Esau took "ni<^ Vr3"n8<
V : T T V : T T V
Vriia his wivS and his sons and Ass daughters, &;c. ; 38, iS, dec. lo a Sam. aj, 5
the text is hardly correct.
5. When the genitive, following a construct state,, is used periphias>

tically to express the idea of a material or attribute ({ 128. 0 and p\
the pronominal suffix, which properly belongs to the oQmpound idea
(represented by the nomen regem and genitive), is, like the artidc
($ 127), attached to the second substantive (the genitive), e.g. ^Ch^n

prop, the hill 0/ my holiness, i.e. my holy hill, Ps. 2, 6 and elsewhere
*^*V thy holy city, Dan. 9, 24 ;
^BD3 \'t*SK his idols of silver^
Is. 2, 20. 30, 22. 31, 7'; conip. Deut. i, 41. Is. 9. 3. 28, 4. 41, 11.
Ezek. 9, I sq. Ps. 41, 10. 150, i. Job 18, 7 his steps of
stren^rfh 38, 6; after an adjective as nomen regent^ Is.13,3 (Zeph. 3,11)
my proudly exulting ones. On the same analogy is the use
of e.g. Deut. i, 41 ^/f his wtapems of war [c Is. 41, is];
Is. 2(5, 7 aiy hutst of prayer^ although the genitive here
does not convey the idea of an attribute.
* Like the tnliiteatinl genitive aoooidJng to f 129. A, the potieiiife pioBooa

may alto be pomphiated fay a letative cUme, e.g* RttA s, si 0*1^ ^ 1^
the young men, wkieh are to me, i.e. my young men; so es|H:dalIy, when the
substanti'- 1* I \'-hich bhould take a genitive snfTix, is nlrfidy followe<l by a genitive,
c I Sam. 17. 40. Ill tlui case, however, the suffix alio it t'tmetitnes attached
pieonastically. c. ^. Cant. I, 6 "'y vineytird, which belonj^s (0 me.
Comp. Cant. 3, 7, and the aaalogoas pleonasms in a Sam. aa, a (but see 18, z)
and P*. s7, s.
On the other hand, am espUdtly la prose, Gen. 44, a ()^3n
T^"'^
mfimPt tkesUoirtMp
The Personal Pronoun 4^3
Rem. Hirongh an inaccuracy, which probably passed from the colloqnial O
I.
language* into tluit of Uteritiife, wusatlim nffixci (especially in the ploml) ae

not infircqnoitly vied to refer to fmmine mlHrtuitives ; thus a Doan-fiiffiz In the
ingnlar, Ex. it, 6. 35, 19. Jud. 11, 34*; in the plnral, Gen. 31, 33, 16.
4r, 23. Ex. 1, ai. 3, 17. Num. 27. 7 'but tlic femininesuffix twice immediately
after); 36, 6; Jud. 19. 34. 21, 22. i Smi 6, 7. 10 /' Dn*33' ; 9, 20. Is 3, 16.
Kzck. 23, 45. Amos 4. 1 sq. (but alterwards a feminine siifiix) ; Job i, 14. 39, 3
(DH'^nn in iKirallclism with inni?') ; 42, 15. C ant. 4, 2. 6,6. Kuth i, 8 tqq.
(aluiig with feminine .suffixes) ;
verbal suljfixcs in the sinj^lar, Ex. 22, 25 ; in the
plural, Juil. 16, 3. i'rov. 6, 31. Job 1, 15. But Gen. a6, 15. 18. 33, 13. Ex. a, 17.
1 Sam. 6, 10 a are to be explained according to 60. h. On non as feminine,

lee f 3s. *. On the we of die mMcnUne la g^ncfil m the fritr gmdtr^ wtt
a. The tnffix of the 3fd person singular feminine (as al->o the separate pronoun P
K^n Num. 14, 41. J08. 10, 13. Jud. 14, 4) sometimes refers to the verbal idea
contained in a preceding sentence (corresponding^ to our it) ; thus the verbal suflix,
Gen. 15, 6. Num. 23, 19. I Sam. 11, a. 1 Ki. 11, la. Is. 30. 8, Amos 8, 10;
comp. Gtu. 24, 14 (n3 ihereby), 42. 36. 47, 26. Ex. 10, 11 (iiriN that), Is. aa, 11.
47, 7. Elsewhere the suffix of the 3rd singular feminine refers to the plurals
of things, e. g. a Ki. 3, 3. Jcr. 36, 23. Job 6, ao. 39, 15 (but previously DQnn)f and
to the plurab of name* of animal*, li. 35, 7. Coovenely, plaral solBiea refer
to collective singulars, e. In Gen. 15, 13. Nnra, 16, 3. i Sank a, 8. 2Seph. 2, 7;

and to a verbal idea contained in the preceding ctawe, in Etdc. 33. 18. Job aa, si
(DTQ thtrehy\ Eiek. 18, s6, 33, 19 (DTI*^ on thai account, tkertfy)\ But the
snBx in SlT\i Dent ai, 10 refers to the collective idea contained in ; in Jon.
I, 3 Dnsy refers to the sailors included in sense under the term In

Joe. a, Vrc"<^ cp^^rm: m Is. 30, 6 (OriQ). 38, 16. Ps. 19, 5 ^D^) the test U
most probably corrufH.
3. In a few cxamjilcs the force of the nmin-snffix or possessive pronoun has g
become so weak that the lanjûagc appears la be almost entirely unconscious of it.
Thus in my Lord from the pluralis maiestatis D -JIK ( 1 34- ) with the
suffixof the lit linguUi (always with Qamef and thttS dtlth^nlshed firom ^^'iK my
hritf Gen. 19, a), ued exdnsivelj of God, not only in addicsaiog lilm (Gen. 15, a.
18, 3. Fi. 35, S3), hot nitiaatcly (see, homver, the note beloir}, without any
According to Diehl ;scc the title al the head uf | 91. a), who adiluccs numerous
instances on pp. 44 sqq. 54 sqq. 67 sq., many of theae cases may be set down
to corruption of the traditional test, while the sodden (and sometimes repealed)
change of gender in suffixes is mainly due to the influence exercised on the copyists
by the Mishnic and popular Aramaic dialects, neither of which recognises snch
distinctions
' The Masora reckons six instances of ^2G?3,
V
whcie rtStS^ would be expected
TV' '
(Jud. II, 34, where, liowcver, the Icxt is most probably corrupt), Ex. 25, 15(?).
Lev. 6, 8. 7, iS. 37, 9. Jos. 1,7; almost all these passages can, however, be easily
esplalaed In other ways.
> In 3Ki.7, ioforlCfB^(theIJCXRadlB|^wedioldread^.
tcârd to the prmioon, as equivalent to the Lord On as a Q^ri perpttuum
of tiw ICatontet for nwi* tee 1 17 and | let. m.
r A similsr loit of vitality in die oecnn most probaUjr In 1*^2 W^V' ^ ^
tofllui
u$ntmlmstity Le. ^ &c togtthtr, eg. I^n: D^n*^3 Ex* 191 8f ilwnt wllUont ic|{anl
totbe saflix, eien after tlie istpenon Ôns^ s Ki. 18 in refeience to two
women ; Ii. 41, i. Job 9, 31. Noh. 6, t, and pecwn, U. 45, ao and
7 ; after die
elaewheie. Also in prop, iheir emHnfy, bat abo ali the and penoo eqnh^dent
to all togethtr, i Ki. 22, 38. Mic. i, 2 hâr, ye peoples, all 0/ you, even before the
2nd person. Job 17, 10 fin r Sam. 6, 4 read D3b with the LXX). On the rednndant
suffix in "^S^p Lev* 27, 23 and elsewhere, comp. i 127. .
186. 73i^ Dmmsiraihe Prwunm.

a The imomtrative pronouns axe n|, fern. iV^, plur. ( 34),
Arir, Advr (^m), &c., and the personal pronoun KVi, likewise used
as a demonstrative, fem. KNi^ plur. masc. im, fem, Hfn ( 32.^),
M (/), or fZfif, te., fi, or UUt ftc. The distinction between tbem
in usage is that n] (like hic^ ^) almost always points out a (new)
person or thing present, while MV1 (like ^, (7, oMr, AcrM) refers to
a person or thing already mentioned or known (see the examples
below)*
h Rem. I. Compare on the above the instructive examples in Gen. 32, 3. Jud. 7, 4
of whom I say unto thcf, (his {J\\) shall go irith thee, he (K^H) shall gQ iL'iiJi true
(so afterward* with ncfjatives). Moreover, T\\7\ D^^H this day, i.e. the actual day
on wtiich one is speaking or writing (Gen. 26, 33 and eUewbere), but KVin Di*n
* Comp. the same weakeninj* of the force of the posseiisive pronoun in *3'1 prop.
my tfuistir, from the isccund century A. D. onwards the master; so also in Syriac ^TD
my lordf and ultimately as a title tk* terd; in Italian mado$uut French Madams^
Jtfytrt Damtt Mmntur^ Jlfyiu(giiimr, Ac. It it, however, SBOie dian donhtfal,
wiietlicf die i^gvlar dlidnction between *>3hM a* a lioly name, and ^fxtlt at aa
ordinary appellative is not merely dae to the practice of the later Rabt^
G, H. Dalman, Der Goitesnanu Adonaj und seine Geschichte (Berlin, 1889), in an
shows that apart from the hook of Daniel and the
e>ch;?5tive discussion, eiijht
i ritiLally doobtfnl passages, in winch ^STK is nsc l by ( lud himself, there is nowhere
any necessity to rejârd the MifTix as entirely mc.ininji^k'ss, since is always u*ed
either in an address to or ^likc ^^1^; 1 which abu '\% never a mere phra^ ur title)
in reverent language <iAom/ Godas the Lord of the speaker like the Assyrian
b^-4a, my Ltfd, Against any original dittinction between and it may

be tuged etpedalty that when naooonected wiUi teffiset the tingdar pntt it always
oaed of God, and not the pbinli$ mmutoHs pvetoppoaed by
* On H! and Km atanding lepaiately at deleiminate in tiiemaelvei, tee f its.
On the nae of detemfaale demoottiativet at adjccttvet, tee i ia6. m.
136.] The DefHonstrative Pronoun, 465
the day or period of which the historian has just been speaking (Gen. 15, 18. a6, 3a)
or of which the prophet has just been foretdling (Is. 5, 30. 7, 18. aosqq.) and
ofwhichhecoirtmaestospaik<fon^. Nevetthelen{ttid nânalsofoiiiid
in certain common combfatatioos where MTI and VOISPi wonld be expected, and
vice versa ; thns almost always n?n ,
plur. n|Mn D^STl , bat HDnn 0^t3*3
(or Dnn D*tDJ3), and only tn Zech. 8, 9. 15 njNn D^p>3, Est. i, 5. 9, 28 rpn
n^n.With a Mooiâiy sense of contempt (like Latin n] occnrs, e.g. in
t Sam. 10, 37. ai, x6. i Kl. aa, 37. Is. 6, 10, &c.; in the tense of the iieiiter
Mar, nt(t is more oommon than n|, as Is. 5, 25. 43, 9, Ac, but KKl morn eommoa
than mi.
a. Bolh nt and KVl *xt foroethnes used almost aa cnelitica to emphasise C
intcnogaUve w(ds (like the Latin mm in qmimam} comp. also pdt Umdtm)\
e.g. Job 3S a n| ^ who nm (daikeneth, ftc) . . .t i Sam. t7, 55 sq. Is. 63, i.
Jer. 49, 19. Pa. a4, 8. 35, la, and elsewhere; wkai nmf t Sam. 10,
II ; horn nowt Gen. 37, ao; why mwf Jnd. 18, a4; hnt befim the veib
it is tmally ivlrnp Gen. 3, 13. la, 18. Ex. 14, 5. Jnd. i5 1 1; whtn-
fun fumf Gen. t8, 13. %it aa. i Sam. I7 aS. a Sam. la, a3, and elsewhere.
So also MVT^ Is. 50, 9^ Job 4, 7sq<|.; atid stiU move emphntically ll^'lQn ^
Ps. 34i 10. Jer. 30, SI.
3. n] is likewise used as an eneUtic (see letter c above): () ^place. In snch d

passages as Gen. a7, ai n| nnKp whether thou (that art here) bi my JM
Esau? a Sam. 2, 20 is it thaut HpllH MMd, htre, i Kl. 19, 5. Is. 21, 9'; cf.
also the strengthening of the separate pronoun by Kîl Is. 43, 35 I Sam.
7, 38. Is. 37, 1$. Ps. 44 5 (n^), and DH this an, Gen. 35, 16^ i Sam. 4, 8.
(*) 0/ time: HJ nH^ ww, I KL 17, 34; nowy 2 Ki. 5, aa, and rather fa-
qoeotly before words denoting nsmberi e.g. Gen. 37, 36 tf^Slj^ Ht twiet, mm:
comp. 31, 38. Job t, la. 7, 3. 19, 3; separated from the numeral in Gen. 31, 41
^^**n] elliptically for this, i. e. this prefent period, is to me, or makes altogether,
iwaUy years. Sec The other examples are sfanilarly elliptical.
^ On the other hand, it b very questionable whether n| to Ps. 104, 35 (Q^n Hp,
Is. 33, 13 (D^n np, Jud. 5, 5. Ps. 68, 9 {"yp np can be taken, aecordmg to the
comSMQ ex]danation, simply as a prefixed demonstrative paitiele (the seajmder.
Sec). In Ps. 104, 25 D^n (unless in apposition to n|; comp. { ia6. aa, and
Zech. 5, 7, where nn(jt 7\^H is m apposittOB to T\Xh depending on nin, and also
Esek. 40, 45, where HBp'iin is in appodtioo to nf) is most natvratljr taken aa the
tnbjeet, Mar is the sea. Is. 33, 1 3. Jud. 5, 5, and Ps. 68, 9 wonid be most natnrally
explahied in the same way ; but in these passages the text is idmost certamly
oomipt. In Jnd. 5, 5 in iact ri| is most probably to be regarded with Moom
as a very early gloss, which Sttbscqnently fimmd its way from this passage into
Ps.68.
Bh
Digitized by Google
The Parts of Speech.
137. The InUrrcgaiiot Prcumm,
a The interrogative pronoun ''P w/io may refer ciiher to a masculine

or feminine person (Cant. 3, 6), or even to a plural, e.g. D^t? 'vho
are ye? Jos. 9, 8; n^*p Gen. 33, 5. Num. 22, 9 (more minuiely,
'0 Ex. 10,8, i.e. who exac/ly, who in particular f). It is iTêd
of the neuter only when the idea of a person is implied, e. g. QD^r^

who an the ShechmiUsf Jud 9, s8. 13, 17. Gen. 33, 8. Mic z, 5;
even more boldly, ivith the xepetition of a ^ used penonallj, In
I Sam. 18, t8. 2 Sam. 7, 18.
b Moreover, ^ may also be used In tbe sense of a genitive, e. g.

ri ^"na whose daughUr art thouf Gen. 24, 23. 1 Sam. 17, 55. 56. 58 ;
*p whose luord ? Jer. 44, 28. i Sam. 12,3; in the accusative.

*D"nK quemnam ? i Sam. 28, 11. Is. 6, 8 ; with prepositions, e.g.
I Ki. 20, 14 (in an abrupt question hy whom?); Gen. 32, t8 ;
*9 nri? I Sam. 24, 15. Similarly no, ~np, no wha/J* is used for tbe
nominative, or accusative, or genitive (Jer. 8, 9), or with prepositions,
e. g. n^p'^ whereupon ^ Job 38, 6 ; wJ^ / n^ny quouspu? Ps. 74, 9.
C Rcna. BoUi ^ ind TO^ ue med Iio Id indlicet qnotiooi (on the meiely idative
distincdoo between direct aad indirect qnestioot in Hetweir, see iht Inietrcgaiive
Stmiefues), e*g. Gen. 39, 8. 43, sa. Ex. 3s, i On the meaiUag of and
at ittterrogttim it baaed alio tfaeb nse as ittdtfimH ptvmoiuu (eqvhaleat to
fuisyuis, qitodcunqm or quicquam), e. ^. Jud. 7, 3. i Sam. 19, 3. ao, 4. Prov.
9, 4. I'S even ^tpnipt^ have a care, whosorc'cr yc l>, Slc, a Sam. 18, la ; so also
;
,
no whatncr it be, Job 13, 13. aSam. 18, 22. 23; comp. Nam. 23,3 *35n^np "^211
apui %i.'kaisover h< shffivtth me, A still farther weakcuiug of the indeJimU usc ot
riD is the combinatiun ^TTD thtU wkuh, Eccles. 1,9. 3, 15 (ja like the Syriac
T On nCWp
KD). ' qiiiequamt anything at all (usually with a nâtive), ami
as an adverb m wy tifay t Sam. ii, 3, see the Lencon*
188. Jhe RdaHve Prmmn.

The text of this section (and of 155) ha been entirely remodelled on the
basil of V. BRD]nann*s eaoeOent enay HtMuehe JtâUvsmUt Leipzig, 1894.
a Relative clauses are most frequently (but not necessarily; cf.
'SS'^') introduced by tbe indeclinable "^f^ (see 36) ^ This is
\} Comp. the Assyrian ma-am-ma, anybody; and mi-im-ma, anyUuug.

G. W. C]
* Tbe etymology of tbe wofd Is still a OMttcr of dlspate. Against tbe idcntificft-
tion of ne^, ai an original rabftantiine^ with the Aimbk 'tf^, tew, Ann. "in^t
138.] The Relative Pronoun. 467
not, however, a lebtive pronoun in the Greek, Latin or English

sense, nor is it a mere mâ r^(Uioms\ hot an original dtmomtraHvi
pronoun [as though iste, isHus, &c.]*. Hence it is used
(i) In iiijinedialc dependence on \\.c lubslantival idea to be defined,
and virtually in the same case as that (hence belonging syntactically
to the main clause) ; e. g. Gen. 24, 7 ^^f^j* 'î*^^
ihe Lordy ts/e, he iook me . . . /? .'/ ;7 x ;, / &c. {=zwAo took me);
I. 37. 4 ôrds o/Rahshakeh, iyo inJyrie^K istius, the king
of Assyria hath stni him {^whem the king of Assyria hath stn/);
Gen. 2, 2 and God finished n|f^ le^ IraM^D his fvork, istud, he
had made (it). Such qualiîng clauses may be called d^tendent
relative clauses.
Rem. I. In the above examples "^^^ Gen. 24, 7 is virtually in the nominative, ^
4 in the genitive, Gen. a, a in the accusative. A farther distinction between
Is. 37,
the ecamples is that in Gen. 34. 7 the nudn idea (mn^), to which nc^K is added
In apposition, is only lemmed in the qualifying danse by die svbject (he) inheient in
*^n^S> in Is. 37, 4 it is resnmed hj the accusative sdfiz of while in Gen. s, a

it is not lesomed at alL This mppmsioa of the feln>q)ectie pronoon* taiws
place eqacdally when it (as in Gen. s, a) would iqpivsent aa accusative of the
object, or when ft would be a separate pronoun rcpn^^f-ntint^ a nominative of tlie
subject in a noun-clause, e. g. Gen. i, 7 JT^p^^^ rinPiD "IK'X D^rsn the waters, those^
Uttder ihe finnamtnt, &c. In negative sentences, however, the retrospective
plcue, trace, NoWeke urges {ZDMG. 1886, p. 738) tliat the expression trtue of . . .
oonld liardly have developed into the lelative oonjnnction, while tlie meaning
of ^ttu has been evolved only in Aiamaic, where the word is never need as
a felative. Acconding to odieis, is really a compoond of several pronominal
roots: cf. Sperling, Die Nota relationis im Ilehraischen, Leipzig, 1876, and Konig,
Lehrgeb., ii. 323 sqq., who follows Ewald and Bottchcr in rcferriDg it to an original
According to Hommel {ZDMG. xxxii. p. 708 s^jij.) is an original
snbstanlive, to be distinguished from and (an original jironominal stem),
but used in Hebrew as a nota relationis, or (as HI and X{ are also sometimes
vsed, see below, letten g and A) simply for the relative frmmm. Bamnsnn (op.
dt., p>44) sees in the Anyxian Is, Phoenidan, Pimie, and Hdmw y^, the gnnind*
Ibrms, of which the Fbccnidan and Panic (see above, 3(S, note) and tiie
Hebrew "^2^ are developments.

' Some what like Ijither's J, e.g. dU /rmdcH Gdttir, umter tuch sind.
Gen. 3;, 2.
This is the necessary conclusion both from the analogy of the Arabic 'alladi,
winch is clearly a deiuonstrative (like the Hebr. l^H^ Ht^ri;, and from the use
of m and 1( aa relatives.
* The instances in wliidi, instead of a retrospective prononn, the vain idea
itself isrepeated (Gen. 49, aou $0, 13. Jer. 31, 32) are most probably all dtie
to subsequent amplification of the oiigiiial teat another iiand.
Bb a
Digitized by Google
pronot^n is not infrequently added, e.g. Gen. 17, u N^H ; 7, 2 t{*n ; i KL 9, 30
man ; Dcut. 20, 15 nsn ; but cf. also ^FT K^H Gen. o, a. The additioa of
KM in a verhal clause, a Ki. 33, 13, is unusual.
The very frequent omission of the retrospective pronoun is noticeable in cascj
where the predicate of the qualifying clause is a verbum dicendi. c. g. Num. 10, 29
we are jourm^'ing unt0 tkt pUut^ D3^ \ni( Hin^ npX TJ'K thai place, fir
Lord said (of it), // wiY/ 1give t >mr; cf- Num. 14, 40. Gen. 3, 17. Dent >8, 6S.
Jad. 8, 15. I Sam, 9, 17. 93. 94, 5. i Ki. 8, 2^ Jer. 3*, 43.
f a. When the snbslantiTe followed by and the qnalifying dame expresses
n idea of jA&mv, it may also he resumed by the adverha of place tkere,
Td^^ thither, nnfO thenee^ e.g. Gen. 13, 3 lipm '^fT^ BipBOng wtt*
the place^ tk^ ette, h is tent had been there, i.e. nkere his tent had been Gen. 3, %i
; of.
Ex. 21,13 fTtSK'. But even in this caie the retmspf live word may be
omitted, cf. Gen, 35, Num. 20, 13. Is. 10, where D' would be expected,
aiid Ccn. 30. 38. Num. 13, 27. 1 Ki. ra, 2, where H^C^ would be expected.
When the appositional clause is added to a word nf time, the retrospective
pronoun is always omitted, e.g. 1 Sam. 20, 31 for atl (nc diys, ^PI *"'*"p "IS'X
/hose the son ofJesse is living [in them) j cL Gen. 45, 6. Deut. i, 46, 9, 7. 1 Ki.
1 1, 4a ; see Banmann, op. cit., p. 33.
4 3* If the governing snbetanUve forms part of a statement made in the 6iit

or second person, the letrospective pronoon (or the subject of the appositional
dense) is in the same person, e.g.Gcn.4$, ^ J am Joseph^ "n6< Dn"^r!^*n^ he
ye sold me, i. e. whom ye sold; Num. 22, 30. Is. 49, 23; 41, 8 iJtou, Jacob, "^WC
'l^rrina he I hoTê chosen thee; Jer. 3^, 19. Eccles. 10, 16 sq.; Gen. 15, 7 I am
the Lord, 1'n2rin he/brought thee out, &c, Ex. ao, a (Dcut. 5, 6).
i (2) Not depending (adjectivally) on a governing substantive, but

itself expressing a substantival idea. Clauses introduced in this way
may be called indtpendttU relative clautes. Tl)is use of "^f^K is generally
rendered in English by he who, he whom, &c. (according to the context),
or lhal 'iVhich, Sec. In reality, however, the is still a demonstrative
belonging to the construction of the main clause as subject or object,

or as a genitive dependent on a noun or preposition, e.g. Num. 22, 6
l^V* nicJi nK'K is/e thou curses/ (him) ts cursed, i.e. ht whom ibou
cunes/t &c.'; Ex. 22, 8; *^w^ as Gen. 44, i. 49, i. i Sam.
object.
16, 3 sqq. Mic. 6, i flM), and even preceding the verb^ e.g.
I8 $3* '5- Ps* 69, 5 ;as genitive, Ezek. 23, a8 / will deliver
Otee T| in/0 Ihe httnd 0/thoseikm kaUsi (them) ; i Sam. 7,7;
depending on a preposition, e.g. Gen. 44, 4. 9 Ki. 10, 22;
"^^xj?
'B^Na Gtn. 21, 17, wn in thai (place) is there, i. e. zi-hfre
*
The absolute use of is very peculiar in the formula ~i>K 13T n*n
this (is it) it came as the word of the Lord to Jer. 14, i. 46, 1. 47, i. 49, 34.
Digitized by Googl
i3S0 The Relative Pronoun. 469
h- r>; cf. Jud. 17, 8 and Ruth i, 16 Y^S"^ wAi7JUr\' i Ki. 18, 12
îi^; 'r^lP El. 5, 1 1.
From thc<;e examples it follows that in independent relative clauses the retrospective
snffix. or adverb of place, may be, and in fact genrrnlly is. omitted. As a rule,
however (a in the dependent relative clause), thii> duc not apply to cases in
which the retrospectiTe prooonn, by the construction of the sentence, depends
on a preposition \ l. g. Gen. 44, 9

ufmmdwitk kim.'-^skaU dit (for fhe Wiw of the tpodotis in
sq.
cf.
TlDJ * ^ VOffl Ae^tt (the cup)
143. </).
neb eues "XO^ preceded by the prepoeitlon ii qnite anomalont, at In Geo.

SI, 3a VXCf\ D]? with tokmsoevtr thm Jbtdtst, wheie I^K is a idative
fwonoiin in the îgliah aeme; on the other hand, in Is. 47, la (and ptohabty
also 56, 4) "Wâ is to be explained (with Baumann, op. cit, p. 37) by reference
to 47, 15, as a demonstrative pronoun, siand mm wnik (A$t$e 9mka$tttnmti .
wiih (hose thou kasi laboured (with them).

[With regard to the preccdu ;' e xplanation of IK^K, the student will of course
V S
nnderstxmd that, in Hebrew a we know it, never occurs as a mere deroon-

fttrative. A particle which, whatever its origin, is uniformly nsed with reference
to fomcthing in another, coatigttoas daiise, wilt natarally have acqniied in pimctice
that force which we denote hy the term ' lelatiTe.']
Lake the original demonstrative pronoun the demonstnuives

proper n|, ^t, (the last commonly)', and sometimes the article, are
used somewhat frequently in poetic language to introduce boih
dependent and independent relative clauses. With regard lu ilie
construction of &c., the remarks on "i^Sj, in letters a and also
hold good.
Examples :
(a) nt in apposition to a goreming substantive in the nominative, Ps. 104, 26
Fn^n~nt Wi^'h (there is) levialhan, he ihott kasi jormcd (him i, \. c. whom thou
hast formtd; Is. 43, 34. Jer. 30, 2 1 ; in the accusative. Is. ag, 9. I's. 74, 2 (in both
caaci with a letioepective pronoun ^ ; is nsed without it in Ps. 133, li) ; in apposi*
tion to a genitiic dependent on a prepodtton, Ptot. 33, PD^ aa H) ^^3Kp

kmrkm M1U9 tl^ father, himhe kspxi tkie, c WA0 /Aiv ; Fi. 17, 9 (V).
\.
In 104, 8 Dn^ Pr\D\ r\\ D^ptr^ mUa the ptuf wkkh Hum kadstfimUkd
far Hum (cf. f 130. r), H] is" is the genitive after the oomtract state OipD t9 ikt
place of that, iheu hadst fatmded (it) for them ; on the same analogy we may
alio take, widi Banmaon (op. dt., p. 48), Ps. 78, 34 ^ ^ 5> < 3 (^TO^
exam-
15, 16. Ii> 43, ai. Fk. 9, a. 10^ a. 31, 5. 3a, 8. 14a, 4. 143, 8 (all
ples of H).
'
In Zcch. 12, 10 also, instead of the unintelligible "IK^K fttt ^^K, wc should
probably read and refer the passage to ihis class.
' Such a strong ellipse as in Is. 31, 6, where UDD would be expected after
ipoyn, is only possible in elevated poetic or prophetic language.
* The etymological eqaivalent ^ In Aianude is always a idatbe^

470 The Parts of Speech, [1 139,
h ToiBtxodiioe]iid^ciidaiiti!itthrednisesri{isitaedMAiiom
as acouative, Job 15, 17 and Fi. 68, 39 (after a piepoaitioo, Ex. 13, 8; bat the
text is evidenUj oomipt).
f (/') More certnin exnmples of the use of the nrticle as a relati^T prononn fmore
correctly, jieihaps, of the demonstmtive which is otherwise used as article) are
I Chron. 26, 2S C^'ipnn ^3 oil that Sumuf/ haJ dedicated, fire; 2 Chron.
39, 8 (where N^'D^ can only be perfat A'lfh'al); 39, 36. Ezra 10, 14. In cun-
fkexioD with a plural, Jos. 10, 24 the chiefs of the men of tvar ^j'pH
UffHf with Aim; Ezra 8, 35. 10, 17. zChron. 99, 17. Finally, in tbe ittse of
id qucdt Jtt. f 13 (where, however* we shoold leod wfth the UCX "^^^î)* Cdmp.
moreover i Sam. 9, 24 fke thigh rf^^'H^ and that which was upcn it (bat see
below); a Chrao. 4 pna eqifivaleiit'^to fSSi IfMa t9 tkt ptatt^ ikat k* kmd
pttpartd*
Jt In all the examples adduced except i Sam. 9, 34 (where iT^KHl should probably
be read for n^pUm) the n is followed by undoubted perfects; almost all the
examples, however, belong to the latest Books (Ezra and Chron iclesX On the
other hand, another scries of instances (even in the older texts) is extremely
doubtful, in which the Masora likewise requires perfects, either by placing the
tone on llie penvltima, as in Gen. 18, si. 46, 37. Job 2, 11 HKIin; Is. 51, 10
rnp^n ; Ezck. 36, 17 n^^np; Ruth i, 32. 3, 6 and 4, 3 n3^n, or by the pane-
tnatioiv Gen. 31, 3 Kl. zi, 9. Dan. 8, i nhnfl; Is. 56, 3 rn!)dn, while
no dottbt the authois In all these cases intended ptitldples (and indeed perfect
partictples, oomp. f xi6. J) with the arUde, thns HKBH EidE. tS, 17 n^^nn
for n^^non according to 5s. and In tbe other eaamplca 'i^^^,
138 Expression of Promminal Ideas by means of Substaniivts,
a Analogous to the periphrases for eipressing materials and attribates

by means of substatitivis ( 128. 0 and />), is the use of subsiamives
to represent certain kinds of pronominal ideas, for which no special

expressions exist. Thtis
d I. C^tt, ni0< ia, ttwwow, are used to express '

/
The idea of rarh, every (in the sense of each screrally'* vnth reference
to peiwas', and even animals (Gen. 15, io\ e. r. Clcn. 10, 5, feminine Ex.3,
B^tt is the object, e.g. in Jer. 13, 15. On C' N iTN comp. 133. c.
C In a few passages in tiie above sense is placed for the sake of emphasis
befom the goveining nonn (alwap a substantive with a snfiix), thus vnK CÎC 1*1^
Gen. 9, 5, aoooiding to tbe nrnal ^pianatu, stands for ^mt *l*D at tke
hand ^ thM Mktr ^ wry wum, Bnt althoagh this cxplanatioii seeas to be
* As a rale lE^ b nsed hi die paitioilarisittg sense of mek mam, with dm plnal
of the verb, e.g. Gen. 44, 11; soflMtuoMs, however, as subject to a verb in Iht
siofolar, t,g. Gen. 44, 13.
$ i39>] Expression of Pronominal Ideas. 471
supported by Gen. 4a, 35 and Num. 17, 17, it is inconceivable that such an
iairenloD vtnmm r^gms and rectum ihonld occur. It is more likely, either that
the aeoood tofaitanthe it in appodtion to B^K QxtootGvBuîat ikihmutofeveiy
mam, Au bntitr, who it really liit bvotlier and it Ibeidbie ao mnch the move
Le.
guilty ; so 15, 10 and he laid tack or, moie enctljr, am fiete tf U, fte., and so
probably also Num. 17, 17 every one, sc. his name), or B'^K precedes as a kind of
casus pettdem, and only receives its nearer definition from the followinij subblantive
with sufHx; thus Gen. 41, 12. 42, 25 (according to the context = to every one in
his sack); 42,35, where iBDJI^Sf is virtually the predicate of t?*N Ex. ;
12, 4. 38, 21. Nmn. 5, ID. 26, 54. 9 KL 23, 35, and especially iZech. 7, 10 ^
(b) Any one, soma one, e. g. Gen. 13, 16. Cant 8, 7, with a negative no one*; d
ao after *^ Ex. 16, 19. 29; befoie }fo Gen. 33, 6 and freqnently.Inttead of C^M
we aometiniei find in a dmHar tenae iMtm, homot e.g. Lev. z, a (oomp.
B*Wn nnK3 as tuône else, Jod. x6, 7. 11), ifonl) person. Lev. 2, i. 5, i
ftc., and in a neater aenae IS^'H (prop, woidt thing) equivalent to mg^ku^, Gen.
14. or TO-fo Lev. 5, a. Nnm. 31, 33. lH^tfa a negative lOn meant nothing:
thus after "i^ Gen- i9 8; after ^ Ecdet. 8, 5.C finally, Ht^SgO any one.
Dent. 151 7; anything, Ezek. 18, 10 (but in Lev. 4, a. 5, 13 JiriKp) and the
The latter include also instances like Kzck. iS, 32
expressions noticed in 144. ^.
/ have no ^casurt HOn nto3 in the death 0/ him that eUcth, i.e. ^
any man.
(r) In connexion with VnX his brother or VlJH AiV neighbour, BÎC wr, masc. ^
(as wi^, fem., in connexion with HTl^njl her sister or rlTl^P") her neighbour)
it ued to represent the ideas of edUsraUer^ the ometke o^ter* leiaence

to pecMMb animalt, or thinga without life; aee the Ledcon) w the idea of one
anoUer, e.g. Gen. 13, 11 and th^ uparated iAemeehet X*n(f Tj^Q tJie one
from the other; Ex. 96, 3 fioe tmiaini (nSnj feni.) te eomfiod tegaher
Pirjni^hlfXVflhonoioemother,
umi,pemn expresses the se^, both
a. idea of in tiie aingalar, Prov. 19, 8.
y
t6. 18. 99, 94. Job 18, 4 (in all cases WB3 equivalent to himu^, and hi the
* Comp. on the whole question the thorough discussion by Budde, Pie bib/.
Urgeschiehte, p. 2R3 sqq.: according to him, VnX B'^X came to be treated by the
language as expressmg a single idea '

one another and the words in Gen. 9, 5 are
tobe lendeted a/ the hemd efone emother (from men mntnally) wiU I require it,
[Intnpportorthitview,BaddepolnUtoZedi.7,io UB^nn'6|K X*nif C^M TtSn]
D;3n|4,whieh hi the light of 8,17, C3232|)a ^3fnn-bic B^'K], ^rr^
can only, be obtervet, be lendend *and deviie not tkohnrtône another in your
heart' So alao KSaig, Syntax, | 33.]
* Omip. also B^K"|^ Gen. 39, 11. On the expression of the idea of 110 one
by means of with a following participle, see the Negative Sentences, f 152. /.
* Elsewhere ni , . . are used in a similar sense, Ex. 14, ao. Is. 6, 3 ; also
V
nnitn
T Vr
. . . nnxn
T V IT
2 Sam. 14, 6, or the substantive it repeated, e.g. Ceo. 47, ax
{from one end . . . to the other end).
* On the representation of this idea by pronouns, separate and suflixed, see
i X35. a and h.
472 The Parts of Speech, [S 139.
plural, Jcr. 37, 9 and elsewhere. Similar to this is the ose of rQ'1]p21 Geo. i8 it
g 3> Q}^ f>oiu (thai nuetapihoricftlly for exiHtmcij cacprenet tiie fdn of jcj^
same, very same, in itftftnoe to iAsHsgs (aa ISf^ to pefsons)^ e.g. n?n oivi
Ml /Atf u(/m0U tUgtf Gen. 7, 13, oomp. Jot. lo^ 37. Eaek. 34, s ;
019|f^ DS^j)
TYb^ AT ii wen the vity kiovm firdemnuss^ "Bai. 24, 10; tfilj
^fff "'CT
fiiUnas his *trtitgth (eqoivilent to in tht midU f ku ^fnU Urmgth\ Job
^ 4. The simple ploral of words denoting time sometimes includes also the idea
of a Jew, someî thus D^D^ a /cu> days, Gen. 24, 55. 40, 4 (here evea of a longer
period, "^r/owf time); Is. 65, 20. Dan. S, 27 (on the other hand, Gen. 27144. *
OnriK D^D^ ; sec i 06 aiid nntt); D''3E' i<?///r years, Dan. 11, 6. 8.
'
In a similar way the idea of iclf in Arabic, as in Sanskrit {Atman), is para-
phrased by soul, spit-it ; in Arabic also by eye ; in Rabbinic by body, D"l3 or
Di*^' ^vt;//r, in Ethiopic and Amharic by head, in EgjpUan by mouih, nand, ate.;
comp. also the Middle High Geiman mIi Hp^ dtm Up, for Uh^ du. However,
e^D j in sttch cases b never (not even in ^
46* a &K^03 tfuy tkemsUvet) n mete
otiose periphmsli for thepenonal prononn, boi always involves n lefeienoe to the
mtnM peisonality, aa affected hy the lenaeiy deiifta, ftc
' Some in reference to persons in Ex. 16, ao is expressed fay 0*^1^, and in
Neh. 5, a-4 by "ipit *tHt pti, with a participle followio.
Digitized by Googie
ti4o.] Nom-clauses, VerbaMauses, etc, 473
CHAPTER II.
TU SENTENCE.
I. The Sentence in QeneraL
140. Noun-clames, I Wbal-ciames, and the Compound Senknce.
P. Dfwald, *Ziir hebr. Syntax (dcr hebr. Salt)/ In Neuejakf^ker /ur Pkih'
itgii umd JWmt^t 1890, iL p. 1 15 tqq.
1. Every sentence, tiic subject and prcdicue of which are nouns a

or iheir equivalents (esp. participles), is called a fioun-clause, e.g.
X:2^ nin; fhr Lord {s our king, Is. 33, 22 ;
D'K^ni D'iTJ DID now
Ihe men 0/ Sodom were wicked and sinners.Gen. 13, 13 ;
Dl^ HB
a mouth is ibeiri, Pt* 115, 5 ; see further, 141.
S Eveiy sentence* the subject of which is a noun (or pronoun b
inchided in a verbal-fonn) and Us predicate a finite verb, ts called
a verbal'claiutt e. g.
Hmded^ I, see further, 142.

^Ql^) a$td God said. Gen. 1,3; ^^
7 ;
Rem. la the last example the prouotninal subject is at least indicated by the C *
prefoffmative (*}, and formt of the perfect bf affonuUivei. The

in almott all
3id pen. ting, peil however, whidi contains no indication of the mbject^ must
also be nigaided as a foil verfaal-datise.
8. Every sentence, the subject or predicate of which is itself a full d

clause, is called a compound sen/cnce, e. g. Ps. 18,31 ^2ni tn^ ^Kn
God his ivay is pcrfecty equivalent to God" s way is perfect ; Gen.
34, 8 D3n32 \^^\ ni^c'n 33 my son Shechemhis soul lotigeih
/or your daughter; see further, 143.
4. The above distinction between different kinds of sentences g
especially between noun- and verbal-clauses is indispensable to the .
more delicate appreciation of Hebrew syntax (and that of the Semitic

languages generally), since it is by no means merely extenal or
formal, but involves fundamental differences of meaning. Noun-
clauses with a substantive as predicate, represent something fixed.
Digitize^^MB^glc:
474 The Sentence. [$ 141.
a siatty or in short a heit^ so and so; verbol^clanaes on the other

handi something mmeahk and m fir<igrm^ an ewni or aeitm. The
latter description is indeed true in a certain sense also of noun-clauses
with a participial predicate, except that in their case the event or

action (as distinguished from that expressed by the verbal-clause)
is of a fixed and abiding character.
^ Kent. ByArab grammarians every clause beginning with an independent

the
nbiect is regarded w
a noun-danw, and vnsj dftnse beginning with a finite terb
as verbal. If a finite verb follows the noiia-sub)ect the two together (aaoe the veri>
CNimpriaes its own tnbject and is thas a complete verbal- clause) form a compoond
noun -sentence, just as when the predicate consists of an independent noun-clause.
Though this definition of the difTercnt kinds of sentence, which we formerly
accepted (in 144. a of the 2 and to the a 4th editions of this Grammar), i& rejected
above, nos. x-3, we must, nevertheless, mention here the point in which this more
oomplicated view of Uie Aiab giammarians may be regarded as at Icsst relativdy
correct, namely, in cbasi^g vcrbalolattses accoidii^ as the mbjcct precedes
or follows the verb, a distinction which is often of great importance in Hebiew
also; see initbo^ in { 14a. .
i4L The Nowhdause,

a L The m^fect of a noun-clause (see 140. a) may be
(a) A substanthre, e. g. J"])?? N3f* "in3] a rmr weai oui (was
going out) 0/ Edm, Gen. 2, 10.
{V) A pronoun, e.g. Gen. 7, 4 "**PDP ObX / wHl cause it to rain
14, 18 |nb and he was priest; 2, 23 (Ht^T before a feminine
predicate, as n^K before a plun 1 m; J \. 32. 4); ^^^'Ô who is wit^

Hos. 14, TO. In I Chron. 5, 2 ^'^>|>^ and 0/ km one became
a prince^ the subject is contained in \
b S. The predieait of a noun-clause may be
(a) A substantive, e.g. Deut. 14, i On|l 0*)a ye are ckHên
of ike Lord your God; Gen. 42, 13. Specially characteristic of the
Semitic mode of expression are the cases in which both subject and
predicate are sul)stanii\cs, thus emphasizing their identity ('the thing
is its measure, material, or equivalent'), e.g. Ezek. 41, 22 Dl]*?

vni'P] . , , j'j; the altar (was) ivood , . and the walls thereof ^were)
woody i. e. of wood. Cf. below, letter c,
{b) An adjective or participle, e. g. Gen. 2, 1 2 3it3 \Tn J^n 3nj(J
and the gold oflhai land it good; ^ j^lGfl nm Ephron was siiting, Ac^
* For other remarkable iustance^ uf ellipse in the Chronicler, see i>nvcr,
IntroductioHy p. 504 ed. 6, p. 537], oo. 37.
The Noun-clause. 475
CiLii. 23, 10 \ Very frequently such noun-clauses, aUached by Wow
to a verbal-clause, arc used to represent a state conUmporamous with
the principal action ; comp. letter e below.
(f) A numeral, e.g. Gen. 42, 13 ^^19^ ^^2^ iht imbx (of us)
are thy servants.
(4/) A pronoun, e.g. Gen. io ta (M^), z. 9, 27 Gen. 94, 65

(^).iKi.9,i3(n9)
(^) An adverb or (esp. if formed with a preposition) anjr spedfication
of time, place, quality, possessor, Ac, which may be regarded as
the equivalent of a noun-idea, e.g. n^ân DB^ there is the bdellium^
Gen. 2, I 2 ;
ban *K ztfA^rr^ ;> Abel? 4, 9 ;
^lon oSiyb w^rry endureth
a)cr, Ps. 136, 1 sqq.; n^']; riches are / A/j /it^wj^-, Fs. 1x2,3;
un:K ii> ^/-^ Ps. 100, 3 ^r/.
Rem. 1. The cmplojTncnt of a substantive ns predicate of n nonn-clause is C
especially frequent, cither wht n no corresponding adjective exists ^so mostly with
words expressing the material; comp. laii. oj or whea the attribute is intended
to receive a eeztain emphasis. For in all cases there is a much greater stress upon
a snbetantival predicate *, where it representi tonetbing as ideiUkal with the nt^cct
(lee above, letter k than upon an adjectival or veibal predicate comp. Cant ;
I, 10; Ps. 35, 10 ail the paths of the Lord art fl^l^ 'Ipn Icvingkindness amd
truth i. c. wholly lovingbindmss, &c. ;

comp. Jer. 10, 10) ; Iizek. 38, 5. Ps. ic, 5.
19, 10. 33, 5. SS, 19. Prov. 3, i7. Job 23, 12. 23, 2. 26, 13. Ruths, 3. Some-
times the empbaiiis on the predicate is obi.iined by the uje of the plural form
(according to 134. e), c.g. Ps. no, 3 thy people are â^3 altogether wiUing-
na$i Cant 5, 16, Dan. 9, 23.
Sometimes the bokhneis of sttch combinatioos Is modified by the repetitloii d
of the niliject, as rtgem of the predicate, e.g. Job 6, la Vib D^3a|C rt^TOM U
Urtngth tfu strength ef sionut Pniff 3, 17. That tbe language, however
especially in poetry
is not averse even to the boldest combinations in order to
emphasize very strongly the unconditional nlation between the subject and jiredi-
cate, is shown by such examples as Ps. 45, 9 myrrh and aloes and cassia are all
^ Comp. the numerous examples m Ii6. n~p.

* Why in tiieae esamplca the prooomis, notwitfaatanding appeaiincca to the
eootnuy, are to be considered aa ptcdicales and not as sabject^ may be aeen from
what has been remarlced above, it6. k.
' The same naturally applies to most of those cases which are not simple noun-
clauses, but have the substantivâl predicate connected with the subject by n*n
(e. g. Gen. i, 2 atui the earth zvas a -waste and emptiness i comp. Ps. 35, 6. Prov.
8, 30. Job 3, 4) or where a preposiiiun precedes the substantival predicate, as

Fib a9 4 Iht veiei the Lord is with power ^ i. c. power/tsL
here, as hi Job 9t, 9, is evidently a sabstantive after a platal sabject;
on the other hand, it is doabtiiil whether in sadi pasmcca as Gca. 43, a;,
a Sam* so, 9. Ps.iae^7, fte., is not latiwr to be regarded as an adjective.
47^ The Sentence. [141-
/Ay garments (i.e. so perfumed wuh them that they seem to be composed of
them); Cant i, 15 thitu eyes ore 4tMS, i.e^ dove's eyes (but 5. la D^3^^3)^ Pi.
as, 5. 109, ^ Job 8, 9. la, la. b proie^ eg. Ex. 9, 3X. Em 10^ 13 D^pip3 n^n
jAUMt ia ftnAi sktwrSt i*e. fA nmvjr uasoH} with a bold enallase of the
miinber, Gen. 34, 30 IfD^ mid t (with my ftnifly) a >^ i
numier. For linlbrly bold expvesnoiis with ITn ct Gen. 11, i. la, a. Ex. 17, la.
Is. 5, 13. Jer. 2, 28, and aâiii with a bold endlage of the number, Job 29, 15
/ 7ms eyes to the hlind, and feet was J to tht lame. Also in proa^ Num. 10, 31
arui thiUi shalt be to us D^3^^b.
t a. The noun-claase connected by -vdw (emulative to a verbal-clause, or its
equivalent, always describes a state conttmporaneow with the principal action, or

(when the piedieale it a tmuitive participle) an action lepreieBted is oonctant
doration (comp. { 107. as well a f xi6. and e. g. Gen. 19^ 1 wad the two
atigtlt tamt to Sodm ai tpm, wkMe Lot sat, Ac.; 18, i. 8. 16. aa.
as, a6. Jad. 13, 9. aSam. 4, 7. 11, 4 (always with a participle); with an adjecti^
predicate, Gen. 18, la; with a snbstantivid predicate, 18, 37 with an adTcrbial ;
predicate, 9, 23. Not infre<uiently such a circumstantial clatisc indicates at the

same time some contradictory fact, so that 1 is equivalent to ivhfrgas, ^vhilst,
although^ c. g. Gen. 15, 2. 18, 27. 20, 3. 4S, 14 .aitfiough he -ivas the younger) ',
Jttd. 16, 15 how canst thou say^ J love thee, ^rit< whereas tkino heart u
not with Sam. 3, 39. Ts. 38, 3 whilst miMki^ i* sm thoithoartt. These
mof 9
elaases describing a state ate, however, only a snbdividon of die large dass of
circumstantial clanaes, on whidi see { 156.
y 3. As the examples given under letters a and d show, the syntactical

relation exislinp' between ihc subject and predicate of a iiouu-cUuse,
is as a rule exprcs&cd by simple juxtaposition, without a ceptiia of
any kind.
To what period of time the statement applies, must be inferred
from the context; e.g. i Ki. 18, 21 D^n1>n njnj /ê Lord is Ihe true
God; I Sam. 9, 19; Is. 31, a ICirro3 yet he also is utite; (jen.
4 a, 1 1 ; on and (= while) Lol saS;

the other band, Gen. 19, t 38^ tfh\
Ezek. 28, 15; Gen. 4 "^fp^ ^pbK / am raining^ i. e. / wiU <ause ti
7,
io rain. Sometimes even a jassive or optative is to be supplied as
predicate, (5en. 27, 13 upon me be ihjt curse; Gen. 11, 3. 20, 13,
Ex. 12, 2. Cf. 116. r, note.
g' Not infrequently, however, a connexion is cslablished bciwien

subject and predicate (a) by adding the separate pronoun of the
' As a nile, in snch comparisons 3 which 1

is then to be regarded as ttominative)
stands before the predicate, e. g. Is. 63, 2 -wherefore are (hy garmc-nts T\y-1 ?ph3
like thoic of one thai treadeth in the wim-press ? (prop, the like of one that
treadeth, instar aUamtis) ; Jer. 50, 9. Certainly, however, the comparison is then
mndi less emphatic tlian in the nonn-cUnses dtcd above.
Digitized by Google
The NouH'clause. 477
3rd person singular or plural, expressly resuming and therefore

Strengthening the subject, or {b) (especially for the sake of a more
exact specification of time) by the help of the verb n^n.
sttten goti Hme nan 0^:^ Vrf

Examples of (a) : Gen. 41, a6 the e wmm k
years }Dent i 17. 4, 24; Ecclec 5, 18 ITH D^r6{t nnp rt| ikisii it a gifi
af Cods Nmn. %t ij OH H^M in a qnestloa. Gen. 97, 38. Sometiines MV1 it
;
nwd in thii way to sticngthen a pronominal subject of the 6fst or second penon S
e.g. Wn ^DbjJt Is. 43, 35 /, even I, am Mrt/ &C; 51, xa;
KVl nritt 3 Sam. 7, 28. Is. 37, 16. Ps. 44, 5. Nch. 9, 6. 7; in an interrogative
sentence, Jer. 14, 33 in Jer. 49, I3 NVl in a f^r^-ciaase strengthens rtPX.
Of {^): naturnlly this does not apply to the examples, in which H^n, in the i
sense of /o brionu, to fart:, to exist, still retains its full force as a verb, ami where
accordingly the sentence is verbal, and not a noun-clausc ; especially when the
predieste precedes the subject. On the other hand, such examples as Gen. 3 and i ,
ike utrtk was (HlTn) was/t and emjîness^ can scaroely be reganded as properly
verbal danaes; is used hcie really only for the pnipose of referring to past
time n statement which, as the description of a condition, might also appear in
the fony of a simple notm-cUuise ; comp. Gen. 3, i. This is especi a l ly true of
the somcwhnt numerous instances in which nîl occurs as a connecting word
between the subject and the participial predicate; e.g. Jud. 1, 7. Job i, x\
(immediately afterwards a simple noun-clansc). The imperfect of Hjn announces
what is future in Num. 14, 33 and elsewhere; comp. % 116. r. However,
especially in the latter case, n^n is not wholly without mbal force, but comes
very near to being a mere copula, and this use to more frequent in the later
Books* than in the earlier.
Rem. On employment of ^2 existeme^ and |*K nm- existence^ which were

the k
originally substantives (on thdr tendency to be nsed as verba, equivalent to 9si
and MM sHy cf. I loa 9^ and the NtguHv* SetUnuest 1 153) as a connecting link
between a pronominal subject and a participial predicate (especially in conditional
and interrogative sentences, Gen. 24, 42. 49. 43, 4 and elsewhere), see above,
i 116. qt and the various kinds of subofdinate clauses mentioned in { 150, 159.
4. The natural arrangemeni of vords in the noun-clause, as describ- /

ing a state, is subjeci prtdkatt; the principal stress falls on the former
siiice ii is the object of the detcripiioii. Very frequently, however
(and not merely in poetry, where greater freedom is naturally allowed
* On a similar use of ihc separate pronoun of the third person in Aramaic

(Dan. 3, 38. Ezra 5, 11, Gramm,dss BiU, Aram., 87. 3.
&c.} see Kautzsch,
* This is of course to be distiugnidied from the nse of M^n (to be infened from
the contest) as ptcdicate in the sense of 6 a^rhi see above, p. 459, note; or
in such cases as Deirt. 3a, 39 seo N^n mm
ihU /, torn I, am hi; ^
I Chron. 3T, 17.
' According to Albrecht, ZAiV, 1888, p. aga, especially in Deuteronomy and in
the Priestly Code.
Digitized by Google
478 The Sentence.
in the arrangement of word'- ), the reverse order is found, x.e.predicalc
subject. The latter order tnust be used when special emphasis is laid
on the predicate \ or when it consists of an interrogative word ; thus

with a substantival predicate, e. g. Gen. 3, 19 nn|^ dust thou art;
4, 9. 13, 13 (my mltr^ not my wife) ; ao, a. la. 99, 14. Job 5, 24.
6, la; with an adjectival predicate} e.g. Is. 6, 3. a8, ai. Jer. 10, 6;
with a participle. Gen. 30, i. 3a, la; with an interrogative pronoun,
e.g. Gen. 24, 65'; with an adverbial interrogative, e. g. Gen. 4, 9.
#1 Rem, Comp. on the above the exhaustive investigations of C. Albrccht, Die '
Wortstellung im hcbr. Nomioalsatze,' ZA W, i8S8, pp. ai8 sqq. and 249 sqq.; with
. a complete Uit of the exceptions to the order subjettpredicate ^ P> ^54 )>4^> "^be
pndlctitv MMuf pieoede Inr the fOttons itated {jant^îeHoalp^dSeaU ii paitfenUiiy
empbatic when it hu the force of a companitive, ;g. Gen. 4, 13; the pndiGsle
eapvetied by means of a preposition precedes with especial frequency when it
serves to convey the ideas of having, possessimg^ e.. Gen. 18, 14. 29, 16 aod
elsewhere; comp. also 26, 20, 31, 16. 43'^.
H The predicate may precede (a when the subject is a pronoun, tor lUg }>crsoo
: )
'
n beh^ evnnied to be gcnerallj known, doei not ezdte the nme iniemt ea that
which is Hated abont him (^) 'in order not to be a meie appendage to a Mbfeet
which oeiuists of several words,' e.g. 9lQ.eo,l9; () in intenogative wntencei
(with a substantival or adjectival predicate or one compounded with a prcposifir.n).
e. p. 1 Sam. 16,4 ;
finally (</) when the predic:\te is adverbial or compounded with
a preposition, in a relative clau!>c, as a rule clui>cly united ^by Maqqeph) with ,
e. g. Gen. a, 1 1 n*f-3' ; 1, 39 sq.
i 143. THe VerBai-clause.
a 1. By { 140./* there is an essential distinction between verbal*

clauses, according as the subject stands before or after the verb. In
the verbal-clause proper the principal emphasis rests upon the action
which proceeds from (or is experienced by) the subject, and aoooid-
ingly the verb naturally precedes {ntassarify so when it is in the
perfect consecutive or imperfect consecutive). Nevertheless, the subject
does sometimes precede even in the verbal-clause proper, in the
coritiuuation of the nai;auvc, e.g. Gen. 7 r9' 2 Sam. 19, 12;
especially so if there is special emphasis upon it, e.g. Gen. 3, 13
(it is not I who am to blame, but) the srpni btguikd mt, comp.
* For the same reason ^pcxifications of j

lacc (c. j^. flen, 4, 7) or other mdvetbial
qualifications may s'aad at tlie t)i ;;iriirmL^ of the sentence.
The only exceptions, according to Albrccht (sec the Rem. above), arc Ex.
16, 7. 8.
le
{i4a.] The Verbal-clause, 479
Gen. 5 and elsewhere \
2, In the gieat majority of Instances,
however, the posittoo of the subject at the beginning of a verbal-danse
is to be expbuned from the fact that the clause is not intended to
introduce a new fact carrying on the narrative, but rather to describe
a siaU, Verbal'dauses of this Irind approximate closely in character
to noun-clauses, and not infrequently (viz. when the verbal form might
just as well be read as a ]
aruciple) it is doubtful whetiier the writer
did not in fact intend a noun-clause.
The putlciilir iW vîeieiitcd in the verb nuty comist h

() Of ati act complefeed long before, to which reference is made only faecanae
it is necessary for understanding the sequel of the prindpal action. If the pfcdi-
cate be a perfect (as it almost always is in these casei?^, it is generally to be
rendered in English by a pi n perfect ; comp. the examples discussed above in
lo6./ ;i Sam. 28, 3, &c.l ; aUo Gen. 6, 8 (not Noah fouttd gr<ue)\ 16, J. 18, 17.
30,4. 34, 1. 39, 1 {find joi./h in the meaowiille had itm hmigki dmm t Egypt)',
41, 10. Jndg. 1, 16. I Sam. 9, 15. 14, *f, 35, ai. 1 KL i, i &c. In a wider
sense this applica alao to sndi verbal-clanaei as Gen. 3, 6 (lee fiutiier, ( tia. <),
w here they enre to r<>pr?<^^n' an Mtioo eoOttnalng fof a lOQg pcxiod in the paSt,
aiul thus to some extent a state.
(b) Of n fact, contcmporancons with the principal events or continuing^ ns the C

result of them. To the former class belong all those instances in which the
predicate is combined with H^n (provided that iTH has not, as in Gen. i, a. 3, i,
dtCf been weakened to a mere copnla, in which case die pcecedenoe of tfie snbjcet
ia fully esâined 60m the duuracter of the danae as a aovn-daaie; eonp.
1 141. i, and the eiamplea (tf , Ac, with a participle* | x 16. r) ; as an example
of the second class, comp. e.g.' Gen. 13, i a fP^JSYJIja 3C?^ D"ia|J Akrkam
accordingly tmiimiid to dwdi in tk* land ^ Caauum^ bnt Lat dweltt Ac
Rem. I. The dose relation between mbal-eUraaes iMginning with the snfaject d
and actual nmm-clauscs, is seen finally from tlie fact that the fonner also are some*
what frequently added with ] for subordinated) to a preceding sentence in order
to lay sires'? upon some accompanying circumstance; on such noun -clauses
describing a sitUe or cinumstafue, cf. 141. This is especially the case, again,
when the circumstance which follows Involves an antithesis; comp. Gen. 18, iS
seeit^ that nevertheless AMkam
skaff smrefy dtam^t >4t 5^* ^ '7- !* ^>
19, 13. Jer. 14, 15. Fa. 50, 17. Job 9i sa, and sndi examples as Gen. 4, a. 4.
39, 17, where by means of ^ a new subject is introdaced in express antithesis to
one jttst mentioned. Moreover, in the examples treated above, in letters 6 and c
(i .Sam. 2S. 2-,^c.), the subject is frequently introduced by 1, which then corres-
ponds to the Greek 5i, used to interpose an explanation, Scg., see Winer, Gramm,
dts muitU, SprathidiomSy % 53. 7. b.
* This of course applies aho to the cases, in which the subject consists of
a stron^dy emphasized personal prooouo, e.g. Gen. ^3, 13 nn|t thou thjfulj;
33, 3 ht kitnstlf.
48o The Sentence.
i a. By a pecn1ir ooostindioii vnbal-elaQiet My be jdned by meaiif of 1 and
t foUotriog mbject to poitldpial ckvws, e.g. Gen. 38, 35 n^;^^ KMtl nMRD* mi
tht was abtaJy hrot^ Jîf^t vthen she sent, 44, 3. 4. Jvd. i ^ 3 19, ^
2 Sam. 20, 8 ; for other cxnmplc?, sec 1 1^>. (accordinfj to the remarks tliero mnde.
note I, the ap<Klo?is also frequently appears in the form of a mv/w-clnusc, a further
proof of the dose relation between verbal-clauses bînning with the subject and
nomi'cUiiies proper). Without donbt there is in all these cases a kind of invetsioB
of the principal claaie and tbe temporal subordinate clanse; tiie latter for the sake
of greater empheiis being raised to an Independent non<clanBe, while the leat
principal action is added as though it were an accompanying dfounstance, and
hence in the form of an ordinary circumstantial clanse.
/ 2. According lo whul has been remarked above, in letter a, the
natural ordtr of words within the verbal sentence is : Verb Subject,
or Verb Subject Object. But as in the noun-clause ( 141. /) so also
in the verbal-clause, a variation of the usual order of words frequently

occurs when any member of the sentence is to be spedaUjr emphasized
by priority of position Thus the order may tie :
(a) OêciVerb Subject: Gen. 30, 40. i Sam. 2, 9. 15, i. s Ki.

23,19 and frequently. Naturally the examples are far more numerous^
in which the object precedes a verbal form which includes the subject
in itself, c. g. Gen. 3, 10. 14. 18. 6, 16. 8, 17. 9, 13. 37, 4. Ex. 18, 23.
Jud. 14, 3. I Sain. 18, 17. so, 9. 21, 10. a Ki. 32, 8. Prov. 13, 5
and elsewhere.
(b) Verb Object Subject: Gen. 21, 7. Num. 5, 23. i Sam. 15, 33.
2 Sam. 34, 16 (but iMôn is probably only a subsequent addition);
Is. 19, 13. Ps. 34, 33.Job II, 19 and elsewhere.
(r) SvbjHtÔbjeciVerh: Is. 3, 17. 8. 13, x8. Hos. 12, 11.
Ps. 6, 10. It, 5. Job 39, 35*.
'
Not infrequently also the striving after chiasmus mentioned in f II4. r, note,
occasions a departure from the nsaal arrangement of words.
* This sequence occnra eien in prose (Gen. 17, 9. 23, 6 and elsewliere); it is,
. however, more donbtlnl here Aan in tlie above propheHcal and poetical passages,
whether the preceding subject should not be regarded lather as the subject of a
componnd sentence ( 143 pre(!icntc of which is an independent vcrb.il-claasc
'>
this would explain why the verbal- clause i^ usually separated from the subject by
one of the greater distinctives. On the other hand, the sequence Suijtct Object
yerb is quite common in Aramaic (e.g. Dsn. a, 7. 10); comp. Gcnenhis, C^mm,
on b. 4a, 34, and Kantisch*s Grumm. da BUL Amm^ 84. t. 3. The pure
Aramaic nsag^ of pladng the etjtU before tlie itifimtitfe occnra in Hebreir in
Lrr. 19, 9* SI, ai. Dent. 38, 56. a Sam, 11, 19. Lb 49* 6. a Chran. sS, 10. 31, 7.
36, 19(1).
Digitized by Google
Tke Compound Sentence,
(d) Object Subjeci^Verb (very rarely): a Ki. 5, 13. Is. 5, 17/
a8, 17. Ps. 5i 5*-
(e) A substantival complement of the verb rm b placed first in

U. 18, 5 nn TNP V0 and a riptmh^ grape /Ar fmoer kcameilL
Rem. Of êdSoitioQS compoonded irftli a prepodttoo those of plaa Hand
regolariy after the mb, unless they ue ipedallj emphatic as e. g. Gen. 19, a. 30, 1<S.
Hic/5, 1. Est 9,xa; in Gen. 99, 35 bfHS with f /rtfu precedes for the sake
of emphasis. Comp., however, in Gen. 35, 13 the order verb specification of
pioie subject. The remoter object precedes for the sake of emphasis, e. g. in
Gen, 13. 15 (j6, 3). 15, 3; even before the interrogative, (ien. 27,37 (c^* J**"*
32, 15 where the subject precedes an interrogative, and I Sam. 30, 8. Job 34, 51
where a prepositional specification prceedes). Pkepodtkitiat spedficatioos of tim^
snch as n^Câ (Gen. i, 0. D^'^. Mnn fil^ Sec (bat not ns^'K^B. nor the
simple n}^n, ^fC*??! '^?*1'P)> *^^nd, as a mie^ before the verh, provided it be
not in the perfect oonsccutivc or imperfect consecative; so also certain adverbs
of timoi such as 11^, whilst others like icfoUrly follow the verb.
{ 14a. J%e Cmnpouud Smience.

A compound sentence ( 140. J) is formed by the juxtaposition
of a subject ' (which always precedes, see letter c) and
(a) An independent noun-clause, which (a) refers to the principal
subject by means of a pronoun, e.g. Nah. i, 3 i3"^1 nMD3 njnj
Lord in Uu tt<rm is Ais way; 2 Sam. 23, 6. Ps. 18, 31. 104, 17.
ia5, a. Ecdes. a, 14 ; comp. also Gen. 34, 23, where the predicate is
an interrogative clause. A personal pronoun is somewhat frequently
used as the principal subject, e.g. Is. 59, ai nitt and
at for mtf Ikis is my covmani mih tkemt ftc; Gen. 9, 9. Is. 1, 7.
17, 4. I Chron. 28, 2'; with an interrogative noun-clause, Gen. 37, 30.
Job J I, 4. 38, 19
:

or O) is without a retrospective suffix (in which
case naturally the connexion between the subject and predicate is
much looser), e.g. i Sam. 20, 23 and as touching the maitcr
' This sequence occurs more freqaently in noun-clauses with a participial predi-
cate, e.g. Gen. 37, 16. 41, 9. sSam. 13, 4, ftc., in interrogative sentences, e. g.
s Ki. 6, aa. Jer. 7, 19 ; in all which cases tlie empharixed object is placed before
the natural sequence subjectpreduate. [Cf. Driver, Tenses, % 308.]
' In Gen. 31,40 a verbal-clause (^H^H / tvas) occurs instead of the rabject,
and is then explained by another verbal-clause.

' In I Chron. 38, 3 (comp. al-ô J3, 7 ^33frny n^PI ':X mif^ht also be taken
s'. rcrigthening the pronominal suiiix which follows (equivalent to / myself
had ti in my mind), as e.g. Ezck. 33, 17 whtreas their own way is net etfuai;
comp. { 135./.
li
482 The Sentence, [f t43*
ttultri, ftc. . . . A is behvem Ate and m for eoer;

Prov. 27, a.
h {b) An independent verbal-clause : (a) with a retrospective suffix *,
e.g. Gen. 9, 6 (comp. 1 1 6. 7^^) ; 17,15 asfor Satai Ihy wi/e, thou shall
ml call her name Sarai ; 26, 15. 28, 13. 34, 8. Ex. 30, 37. 32, i.
I Sam. 2, 10. 2 Ki. 10, 29. Is. 9, i. 11, 10. Ezek. 33, 2, Hos. 9. 1 1-
Ps. II, 4. 46, 5. 65, 4. 74, 17. Dan. I, 17 ; with a pronoun as th-
principal subject, Gen. 14, 27; (3) without a retrospective suQix,

Is. 19, 17 etfery Mi that meniumt it (Judab) to it (Egypt), it (Egypt)
it tifraid,
Rem.
I. In all the above examples prominence is fiiven to the principal snhjeel
(by meie separadon fram the conlexl bjr means of a greater distinctive, as
Its
a<4ntf /MudSmr*) in a manner which would be quite impossible in a simple noun

or verbal-clauw Ce. g. Nab. i, 3 if it were n2lD3 rtjn^ ^"!"^) comp. the French J
ifft moi tjtion a ad us/. lUit tlie statcimnt or qiirstioti contained in the clau<r
which (onus the predicate also receives greater weight. For the same purpose
Othermembers of the sentence also are sometimes placed at the beginning and
Ksamed agahi Iqr a following snffix; thus the object, Geo. 13, 1$. ti, 13. 35, is.
47, St (with the Samaritan and LXX read "Pajjjl); i Sam. 15, 29; a pedfication
of place, Gen. s, 17. t Ki. as, 18 and elsewhere; a snbstantive with i Sam.
9, 10. a S.im. 6, 33; comp. the examples in f 135. a. In Num. 15, 29 a dati^
is co-ordinated with the <usm fetuUtUt Le. there is a transition to a difiietcat
construction.
d 2. i o cotnjKiund sentences belong also tlic numerous examples already ireaic<l
in the aeeonnt of the tenses, where die piedicate of a iabw- Mm pnuUm is
dnced bjr the wiw apcduis. The isolation and promfaiettce of the priadpal
subject is io this case still more marki <l than in the instances treated above S <m
the c^nis patdem witli .1 following imperfect consecutive (e.g. Jer. 6, 19. 33,
cf. \ \\. h; with a following perfect consecotive fe. j. Ex. 4. 21. 12, 44, Nam.
33, 3. 1 Sam 25, 37. 3 .Sara. 14, 10. li. 9, 4. 56, 6sq.), | H3. / and mm ; on the
participle as caius fendms^ % 112.00 and 116. w. In Job 15, 17 Ufdru afidosi
follows with the cohoitative; in Job 2$, la. Ps. 115, 7 the tmperleet is separated
by from the wiw podnit; hi Job 4, 6 as for ti^ Mtpt, it is /Jb inHgrily
t6 y
thy wySt and 36, 36, an incomplete noun-claase is appended by tt>dw afiadous.
(>n rfv7?' af'cJosis after disconnected specifications of time, romp ! i ? a? at the
end, and Clen. 40, i}. 2 .Sam. 15, 34 ^^3? *3S1 firipi ami turn (so far as the pre-
sent is concerned) / lutll he thy servatU, Nam. I3, 13.
g isomctimes a subtanti\e introduced by S [in raptit to; comp. 119. u\

serves the same purpose as the casms pendens beginmng the sentence, as NnoL
' Coniji. the Mc>.-i* inscription, 1. 31 nnJ ffcronain. thereiN J-iyU, Sec.
But this term must not any more than th.it formerly used 'the subject pre-
ceding absfiluuly^) be misuadasiood to mean that the principal subject is, as u
were, floating la the air, and that the whole sentence lesnlts inan enaeelnthen.
On the contrary, to die Semitic mbd, raeh aentencct appear qoite as eoweertj
fionBed as ordinary nooa end verbal^laaaes.
144] PeculiariHes in Representation of Subject, 483
18, 18 (mileas the p heve tenres to introduce the objieet, ocoidine to*( 117. );
It. 3a, T (where, however, O^fen ahould most probably be read); Ecde*. 9, 4.
I Chion. 7, I. 24, 20sqq. 2 Chron. 7, 21, On the other hand, Ps. 16, 3. 17, 4-
3a, 6. 89, 19. 119, 91 are very doubtful. The suggestion of P. Haupt
{Johm Hopkins University Circulars, xiii. no. 114; Baltimore, 1894) also
desenret attention, that in passages like Eccles. 9, 4, and in bib Gen. 9, 10. 23, 10.
Ex. 37, 3. 19. Esdc. 44, 9, &c., h h not the preposition, but an emphaiidng
pazticle, antwering to die Arab. U, surely, Assyrian 1&; with it 1* equivalent
to d skrt* Cf. also !> dm^^^ tt^-a^ Joi. 17, t6. Eoa t, 11, Asqnian
Ui, PteuHarHies m the Heêteniatim of Oa Sub/tci

{especially in the VerbaMause).
1. According to 40 sqq. most forms of the finite verb include a

a specification of the subject in the form of personal afformeUivtt fin
the imperfect also in the form of preformatives). Not infrequently,

however, masculine forms are used with reference to the feminine,
e.g. OnfTi Ezek. 13, 49 ; 01^1^ Ruth i 8 ; in the imperfect, Joel a, as.
C&nt 8, 7; in the imperative, Amos 4, i. Zech. 13, 7 (for other
examples, see f no. k). On emphasizing the pronominal subject by
the adilitioM of thr >(i irate pronoun, see 135. a and h.
On the masculine as / .'< ' iî'ttder, cf. 5 122. : on similar anoivialies in the use
of the personal pronoun, 135. 0, in the connexion bciweea substantive and

adjectire, $ 132. d, between subject and predicate, 145. /, t, u.
2. The third person singular is frequently used impersonally, b

especially in the masculine, e. g. *n?]L and it came to pass, HJiT} and it
thall come to pass; n^p followed by i^, &c., // l>ecame iwt to him,
i. e. he became angry. Gen. 4, 6 and elsewhere ; 1^ "^jPl lit and it ieeame

strait tc him, he was distresstd. Gen. 3a, 8 * ; even f9! like the German
es gie^, there is (followed by an aocasative)* Ptov. 13, 10. Job 37, 10
on Gen. 38, 28, see letter d below; also in the feminine, e.g. i Sam.
30, 6 (Jud. 10, 9) Tn!* "^W-'' 39 Jer. 7, 31. Ezek. 12, 25.
Joh 15, 32; comp. also the impersonal passives, Is. i, 6. 29, 6.
Prov. 15, 6. Somewhat different are the instances in which' the
3rd singular feminine occurs as the predicate of a feminine subject
^ In Atabic and Gthiopie the maacnlbe la commonly wed in thii case, in Syriac
Che femhiine. The forms DH 3to ioed, well,

hat, bitter, If Morretv, Tgy evil
(freqnentljr joined widi v, &c)t which manj regard as impcnonal, are no

doubt to be regarded In moit cases not as fofas of the 3rd pen. sing. peiC, but,
with Hnpfeld on P. 18, 7, as adjectifes.
1 i a
Digitized by Google
4^4 The Sentence, 144.
which is not mentioned, but is before the mind of the speaker, e.g;
Is. 7, 7. 14, 24. Jer. 10, 7. Job 4, 5. 18, 15 (in s KL 24, 7 "f^tf^'?
is used in this way with a feminine predicate, and in Jer. 19, 5 "^^^
alone) ;
different, too, are the instances in which the jrd singular
ma;?culine refers to an act just mentioned, e.g. Gen. 17, 11 ^J] and
this (the circumcision) shall be a token 0/ a covenant^ &c.
f Rem. The fxprrssions for natural phenomena mny txi cither in the 3r(l sinj^.
masculine or feminine, e. g. "l^K il heeomts light, Sam. 1 29, 10 (hut with an explicit
SObject, Gen. 44, 3 ; "(^K^l and ii becamt tight ; so also TISJ^H' // gri^-i-s Jark. Jer.
13, 16; but nzpm Mic. 3, 6; riDJjn though there U darktuss. Job ii, 17;
TDCn it rains, Amos 4, 7 (where, however, the context Teqnires the reading
n^D^); Ps. 50, 3 nrjJI^W it is tsmpesttum.
d 3. The indefinite personal subject (our thiy, me, the French on, and
the German man *) is expressed
{a) Bj the 3rd person singular masculine, e.g. cue (sc. any me
who named it, see the Rem.) calkd (or calls). Gen. ti, 9. 16, 14.
x. 15, 33, comp. Is. 9, $; am said. Gen. 48, i. i Sam. 16, 4.

19, 22*; other examples are Gen. 38, a8 om put otU a hand; Num.
23, 21. I Ki. 22, 38. Is. 6, 10 'h KD^^ and tme heals them; 8, 4 (^^^;
46, 7 (Py^); Am. 6, 12. Mic. 2, 4. Job 27, 23; by the 3rd singular
feminine (f'^fc) Nutn. 26, 59.
t Rem. The Jewish commentators, following the Arab grammarian?, ninially

explain these singul.nrs by the addition of the jiarticiple (jênerally dtterniinate)
of the same item, e.g. K^pH t^P- ^"^^ a luaUtr of fact, such a coispk-ment
sometimes occurs, e. g. Is. 16, 10 IJl'în the trtotier treads out, for mu trmds
0tU ; 38, 4. 34 {doth MM flom emtimmll/ ?) \ Deut. 1 7, 6 (Eidc 18.32). Deal. as. 8.
2 Sftot 17, 9 (Eaek. 33, 4). Jer. 9, 33; widi aa indetenDiute partidple (u la
Arabic, e. g.fAb fffilun, a sayer says^ i. e. tome says), e. g. Num. 6, 9. em Amot
9, 1 ; cf. above, 1 1 16. /. [Corop. Driver, on t Sam. 16, 4.]
/ (h) Very frequently by the jrd plural masculine, e. g. Gen. 29, 3

for out of that well ^Pf^ they wakred (German HrSnile man) the Jloch;
26, 18. 35, 5. 41, 14. 49, 3r. I Ki. I, 2. Is. 38, 16. Hos. 12, 9.
Job 18, 18. 34, 20. i>t. 2, 2. Neh. 2, 7.
'
Id I Sain. 9, 9 S^MH (prop, the man) 'a useii iu exactly the Mme m-ixm: a
our MM.
' laew1ieK ta indi caiet l^tpe^, ttsaally oecnn (bat not la the pcifed, e.g.
1Sam. 33, 33), so that It is doubtful whether the present veaiUog of Gen. 48, i.&c, .
would not be better explained accordinj; to | 7. </, note 3. In Gen. 48, 3 for '^^c
extraordinary the common form is to be read; so in 50, a6forQ^r^
(/Uter a ploiml) citber or the 3rd plor.; ia 3 Ki. ai, 26 ^^3^*
{i44.] Peculiarities in Representation of Subject. 485
Rem. The 3rd plur. also is sometimes usc<l to express an mdetinite subject,
^
where the cootext does not admit of a human agent or at least not of several,
eg. Gn. 54, 97. In tudi a cue the 3rd jdor. oomes to be cqnivalent to a pamv^
u ve7 commonly in Anunnic (see KanUsch's Gramm, dts BiM, Antm*, i 96. i. ^)
eg. Job 7, 3 inutrisfffru nights V'ÎP th^ allptted mt (equivalent to wert
allotted to me ; to make 'invisible powers' the subject is a merely artificial device);
Job 4. 19 5 18. 18.

19, 26. 34,
2. aa Ezclu 3a, 35. Pa. 63, ix. Prov. a, aa (in
parallelism with a passive); 9^ il.
(c) By the aod singular masculine, e. g. Is. 9, 95 n^f^ Kbrn6 A

one wi/i (or row) / come ihUkir (prop. /Iw fl0f7/ . .
.) ; Jer. 93, 37.
Prov. 19, 35. 30, a8 (unless the reading should be iBIB^). Comp.
also Î'^'^J or simply "^^^ (Gen. 10, 19. 30, 13, 10 ^^^) prop. tmi&
iky comings i.e. utUff one comes,
{d) By the plural of the parlicij)lc, e.^:. Jer. 38, 23 and atl ihy ii'ives i
and Ihy children D^Nirirp (prop, art they bringing oul) they will bring
out, &c. ;
comp. Is. 32, 12. Ezek. 13, 7. Neh. 6, 10 {/or seme art
coming to slay the) and ibe passages discussed above, { 116. In
I KL 5, I the text is corrupt.
() By the passive^ e.g. Gen. 4, 86 ^0*1 /Im (imk u k

h^ffm s) wten to catt upon, Ac,
4 A peculiar idiom, and one always confined to poetic language, /

is the not infrequent occurrence of two subjects in a verbal sentence
one of the person and the other of the thmg. The btter then serves
whether it precedes or follows to stale the instrument, organ, or
member by winch the action in question is performed, and may be most

oftpn rendered in English by an advcrli, :is a nearer definition of the
manner of the action. All the examples of this kind have this in
common, that the subject denoting the thing talies a suffix in the
same person as the personal subject K They are thus distinguished
from the accusatives treated in ( 1x7. t, with which they are often
confused.
> That this form of exprenion also (tee letter^ comes to be eqshralent to
a passive, is seen from the analogy of such Aramaic passnges as Dan. 4, aa,
which exclnde rrny idea of human agency. Comp. Kautzsch, Gramm. dis Dibl.
Aram., 76. i. e at the end, and in post.-bibL Hebrew, eg. Jîr^ Abtk a J16.
3, 5 and elsewhere.
' Two subjects occur in a noun-clause in Ps. 83, 19.
* Ka Ex. 6, 3 "^Cff b sobordioatcd to the following pemive **t\yr^ (f lai. b)\
in 1 Sam. 35, 16.33 *"l>!Me ^ die infiolttve abeohUe {B^l, acooidiiig
to 1 113. gg. In Fk. 69, IX read n|yN) for n|3Sl1.
486 The Sentence,
fft (a) Examples where the subject denoting the thing precedes, K']J5K V^?
my voiu / try unto the Lord^ i.e. / cry aioud unto the Lord, P*. 3, 5- a?, 7.
142, 2 ; TiKî^'â my mûikI erifd, Le. / crM oiW, Fk. 17 (cooip.

17, 10); Is. 26, 9 with my mk/, i.t, fervattfy^ and parallel witih it ^rATt)^;
bat ^B'SD Ps. 57, 5 it ndier a periphniiis for the Itt pen. /.
(^} Where the subject deoottng the thing MXomn, ay^kf Pic
(Le. alood), Is. 10, 30; to also after an impemtive, Pft. 17, 13 C^^'NI) and 14 CT!!^>S
60, 7. 108, 7 OfJ^P; After a perfect* Hab. 3, 13 OpDO); eller a cohoitatife,
Fi. 108, 3 (*lt^r||l}. Hie sabject dcnotiDc the tHng stands between tbe
penonat snbiect and tbe predicate in Ft. 44, 3 nni^^*
// Rem.Sometimes (as in other languages) an action is ascribed to * Stthiicct

I.
which can only have been performed at his direction by another person comp. ;
e. g. Gen. 40, 3 2 (4 1 .
13). 41, 14. 43, 34 {md ht <mmamUd to ut bifon tktm, &c) ;
46, 29. Sam.
2 l i, 9.
0 3. Supposed ellipses of a definite subject are due either to a misandentanding

of tbe passage, or to a oornipdon of the text Tbns in t Sam.24, 11 tiler onrn
cttlier has dropped oot (thronyh confusioD with ^^^^) or we should read witb
the LXX Ons) . In a Sam. 13, 39 (y^ ^n^) the text is obviously cormpt
p In poetic (or prophetic) language* lime sometimes occurs (supposmg llic
3.
text to be correct) a more or less abrupt transitioa from one person to another.
Thus from the Jnd to tlie jrd iiers. (i.e. from an address to a statement"). Gen,
49, 4(?). Is. 32, 19. 3t, 6 (?\ 42, 20. Mai, i, 15 (where, however, for 133^ we
should undoubtedly read HJIIF^); Ps. 23, 9 ; in a relative clause, Is. 54, I, comp. also
U. 2a, 16. 52, 14 sq. 61, 7. From the 3rd to the and pers., Deut. 33, 15. Is.
i29 ;?). 5, 8. Jer. 39, 19. Job 16, 7, comp. also Deut. 32, 17. From the ist to
the 3rd pers., Lam. 3, i ;in a relatife cteuse). In Job 13, s8 the 3rd pers. KVn
is probably employed SiierMdf for the ist.
{ 146* Agrttmmi ieiwtm the Members 0/ a SmUme, espeeiaUy Mmeem

Mfect and Predkale^ in respect of Gender and Number*
a 1. As in other Jangûages, so also in Hebrew, tbe predicate in general

conforms to tbe subject in gender and number (even when it b
In seven! of the csampica quoted above it mi^t natnially be tuppoeed

that the subject dettotbg the thing (especially when It foUowi the verb) b to be
explained mthet as a ouwr insirumentalist i.e* as an accusative, analogous to tibe
adverbial accusatives treated in ( \\%. q. But although it is true that the subject
denotinp the thing often defines more closely the manner in which the action
IS yierformfxl, aud although in similar ^but still diftorcnt . examples. Ts.Sy, 3. 109, 30.
Job 19, 16, *9 occurs with 3 instrumtntaU, the explanation given above must
ncvettbckas be accepted.
In proee. Lev. a, 8; Int n^n^l^ here is hatdly the original feadii^. IlitiiiH
from this is Gen. a6, 7, where there is a tiunsitioo tio direct naimtion.
fi45.] Agreement between Members ofa Sentence. 487
a pronouD, e.g, ^n*T3 JTfed Miir i> my covenant, Gen. 17, 10). There
aie, however, numerous exceptions to this fundamental rule. These are
due partly to the evmtrueih adtemum (where attention is paid to the
meaning rather than to the grammatical form; see letters h-l below),
partly to the position of the predicate (regarded as being without
gender) hefort the subject.

9. Singular nouns which include in themselves a collective idea b
( 123.^7), or which occasionally have a collective sense ( 123. Z*),
may readily, in accordance with their meaning, be construed wiih the

plural of the i)redicate, whether it precedes or follows. This is also
ibe case, when the collective is itself feminine but represent^ exclusively
or at least generaUy, masculine persons.
Eiamplet:
(a) or collective* pmpcr: (a) with the predicate prcceiiing, Geiu 3O1 58 C
}l^gli}t^3^ {fiomp. verse 39. 31, 8 and 33, 13); Jud. i, 33 sq. TS^ representing
persons belonging to the tribe; Mic. 4, 3 ; a Ki. 25, 5 army; Prov. 11,3$
Olt ike people; Num. lo, 3 rT1);i"^3 all the congregation (comp. i Ki. S, 5);
iKi. l,^0- Is. 9, 8. 25, 3. Amos 1 , 5 Dy ; lijam. 17,47. Ezra 10. 1 2 ^np awwî/K.
Comp. also the construction of national names, as 01|< laa. 1), e.g. i Ku zo, io
OnW to^n '"^'^ Syrians fled; i Sam. 4, 5. with the predicate follow-
ing, I Ki. 8, 5 np3^ JNY sheep and oxen, construct} with the plur.-il in the following
relative clauac ; Job 1, 14 n^B^'jn X'TK "î^^n the cattle (cows) were ploughing;
a Sam. 3, i and i Chron. 10, 6 flâ ^family, and in a place*name, 1 Sara. 6, 13:
Hot. II, 7. Etim 4, 4 D]^; Fs. 68, 11 T^X\ ktrd; b. 36, 19 n^33 a heap of tUod
AmISSu; tt boughs f i Sftin. 4, i ^tn'p^, preceded by a predicate
in the tingobur.
(i) Of rafaiteiitivcs occasionally used as collectives : (a) with the predicate d
pcecedtng. Gen. 34, 34 naj; Jud. 9, 55. 15, 10 S^K ; Is. 16, 4 DDT ihe treader
d(fwn.~{p> with the piedicate following, Job 8, 19 "Tl^ ^ others } Eiek. 38,
DVID a secret.
T
iV^j Of fcminlnes as collective terms denoting masctiline ]h rsons: (a) with the e
predicTtc preccdinfr, 1 Sam. 17, 46 ^nNH'^S ihat ali the earth nmy know,
i.e. all the inhabitants of the earth; cf. Deut. 9, 38. Ps. 66, i. 96, i. 9, &c.;
AiBoe 1, 8 nnK|p^ rtmmamt,^{0) with the predicate following. Gen. 41 , 57* ^ Sam.
15, 33. I KL 10, 4. Pa. 33, 8 (n^n*^!) ; Gen. 48, 6 i Son. t, 33
nâip "^ ff tki utatrnt! Job 30^ xa nrna roMe, In Hag. 2, 7 lead fl^n
with'theLXX.
For ^
Examplea of piedJcates in the lingular, ttotwithatanding the collective meaning
of the stibject, occur in Gen. 35, 11. Ex. 10, 34. 14, 10. Deut. 1, yj. <tc.
examples of bold cnaltage of the number in oottn-clanaes with a aubstantival
predicate, see above, 141. f.
Rem. Not infrequently the construction begins in the singular (capecially when ^
the predicate precedes; see letter o below), but is carried on, after the collecttnt
488 The Senience. Mo-
subject has I>een mentioned, in the phvil; e.g. Ex. I lO TfcPttyjy^ 0^ ^^tH^
m$d tkt fetpU mulUfiUd, a$ki vMuced very miîty: 33, 4.
8, On the other hand, ptuFals which have a singuhr tneanin;

( 124. a) are frequently construed with the singular, espedaUy the
fhtralit exceUeniiae or nutiesiaHs ( 124.^-1; on the union of these
plurals with attributes, cf. 132. A), as D^n^'ft Gen. 1, i. 3, Sec. (sec,
however, llit: Rem.), D^^hlC masUr, Ex. 21, 4, ?uasi,r, owner

Ex. 21, 29 ;
comp., moreover, D^^B with the sintûlar, 2 Sam. 10, 9.
Job 16, 16 K*/h., D^pn^ Pj'Ov. 12, 10. So fenanine forms with a mas-
culine meaning are construed with a masculine predicate, e.g. Eccles.
IS, 9 09? ^^7^ '"^Q preacher was wis*.
Ren. The constraotioii of D^nS|l Ged widi the plnnd of die ptedicate way
be explained (apart of coarse from such passages as i Ki. 19b S* so, 10, whrre the
speakers are heathen, and D^H^ n>ay, therefore, be a numerical plural) partly
as an acquiescence in a polytheistic fonn of expression, partly from the pecoltar
usage of one of the early documents of the Ik-xateach, called E by Wellhausen,
B by Dillroann; comp. his commentary on Numbers ^Joshua, p. 6j8,
and ebov^ f 134. note a. So Gen. so, 15 (but In conveiaatifln with a
heathen); 35* 7* eonik. aho Jos. 34, 19.
jt, 53* That tiiis emai l iwl lon was
aftenvaids studiously avoided from fear of misconception, is dumn SOCib
p.assafjes a Nth. 9, iS compared with Ex. and
32, 4. 8, Chron. 17, 21 compared
i
with 1 Sam. 7, 23. Cf. Strack's cxctt rwia ia Die BiUker Gen, Exod. Jx, tmd
Aum., Munich, 1894, p. 67 sq.
4. Phirals of names of animals or tbmgs, and of abstracts, whether

they be masculine or feminine, are frequently construed with the
feminine singular of the verbal predicate ^ (on the collective sense of the
feminine form, cf. f iss. ; thus Joel i, so sS^j? nib r\\ryr\^ ike hosts
of ihe field long; Jer. 12, 4 (where the predicate precedes), comp. also
Job 1 2, 7 names of things with the predicate preceding occur in
;
2 Sam. 24, 13. Is. 34, 13. Jer. 4, 14. 51, 29. Ps. 18, 35. 37, 31.
73, 2 K'th. 103, 5. lob 14, 19. 27, 20; with the predicate following.
Gen. 49, 23 = branches) ; Deut. 21,7. i Sam. 4, 15 (n^ Vjlfl) *.
* Comp. in Greek the construction of the neuter plural with the sinjûlar of the
pre<licatc tu itp60aTa fiait-ti ; in Attic Greek the plural of fhi? prcfliratc is allowed
only when the neuter denotes actual persons, as rd drdfyiMc^n t\a0or. In Arabic
alio the pluralis imkummus (i.e. not denotine persons) i rc|;almrly construed
with the feminine ibgiilar of the attiibnie or predicate, as ait all the fbmUt
frtttH (ooUecthre fonat).
* On the possibility of explaining forma like 710^ as 3rd ploial fesainine, cf.
above, t 44. m; but this explanation would not apply to all the cases sadar this
head, ct Joel l, so. Ps. 37, 31. 103, 5.
i 145.] Agreement between Members ofa Sentence. 489
Is. 59, 12. }er. a, 15 KUh.; 4^ 14. 481 41. 49, 24. Prov. 15, aa.
ao, 18. Job ao, it. 41, 10
d. Moreover, the plurals of persons (espedaUj in the participle) /
are sometimes construed with the singular of the predicate* when
instead of the whole ckus of individuals, each severally is to be
represented as affected by the statement. Undoubted examples of this
disiributivf singular are Gen. 27. 29 (Num. ^4, 9) ^'33)301 "WT^ ^'J'^k
îTG ihose lhat curse ihce, cursed be every one of ihem, and those that
hless theey blessed be every one of them; Ex. 31, 14. Lev. 17, 14 and
19, 8 (in both places the Samaritan has Is* 3, la unless VB'J^
is to be regarded as a pluraiu matestaHs according to { 124. Prov.
3t 18. 35 (?). 18, 31 (?). ai, 27 6, 27, 16. a8, i i, 38, 16

Rem. Anatogoiit to the enaplet above meattondl b the somewhat fitqnent* Iff
UK of suffixes in the tingiikr (diitribntively) referring to (dnimlt; oooip. the

verbal-tafTiKes in Deut. 3i, lo. a8, 48. Amos 6, 10; and the noun-snffixes in I&.
a, 8. 30, 23. Jcr. 31, 15. Hos. 4, 8. 2^h. 14. 12. Ps. 5. 10 (where, however,
is clearly to be read with nil the carlv vrrtîons); 63. 5. 141, io(n. Job 38, 33.
Ecclcs. 10, ; finallT, the huirixto uiiij prcL.o>itions in Is. a, 20
fAey moiic each one for himself; accordiag to others, which they {the makers)
made for him; 5, a6. 8, 20. Job 24, 5, iu each case ^ ; in Gen. a, 19 ^ refers to
the collectm n^n and 9(\V\ comp. fnzther, Is. 5, 23 after Dîp^'HlT, and
1 Sftin. 5, 10 ^ after D^p^^H. CoBvcnely ia Mic. 1, it ^13^ [cf. Jer.
13, o JI**M.], hat the text is nndonbtedly cofrapt.
6. Subjects in the dual are construed with the plural of the predicate, H
since verbs, acijcc^ves, and pronouns, according to 88. a, have no
dual forms ; thus ^\TV., Gen. 29, 1 7 ni31 HkS ^3*^1 and Lcalis eyes were
dull ; 2 Sam. 24, 3. Is. 30, 20. Jer. 14, 6. Mic. 7, 10. Ps. 18, 28.
38, II (on the other hand, in i Sam. 4, 15 the predicate is in the

feminine singular afUr the subject, and in Mic. 4, ii he/ort it; comp.
for both, letter h above); so also tart, a Chron. 6, 40; fi^lj
handt^ Is. 1, 15. Job 10, 8. ao, 10 (in Ex. 17, la even with the plural
masculine la^l^Q ; cf. letter p)\ D^C?^ 1 Sam, i, 13. Job 27, 4;
breasts, Hos. 9, 14.
7. ^'arKL[ions from the fundamental rule (see above, letter a) very 0

frequently occur when the predicate precedes the subject (denoting
' la I^. 14, 1 an abitnict plual fitoori (to be read timt with9,i,ftc.,iiutead
of nitoon) i> ooutroed witii the abgnlar ; bnt oomp. { 134. .
' Is Kveral of the aboro eiamplet the text is doubtful, and hence Majer
Lambcn {fietm4 its Mbs Juiva, xut* 110} lejccts the theory of distiibntive
dngdan geoeimUy.
Digitized by Google
The Sentence,
animals or things The speaker or w riter begins with the most
simple form of tiie predicate, the unmflecLed 3rd singular masculine,
and leaves us without indication as 10 which of the following subjects

(and so which gender or number) is to define the predicate thus left
temporarily indefinite Thus inflexions are omitted in

(a) The verb vith a following singular feminine, Is. 17
QilMn fWI^ and bowed dmm shall be the hfimess if man; 9, 18. 14, 1 1.
a8, 18. 47, II ; I Sam. 25. 27 (see note i below); i Ki. 8, 31.
22, 36. 3 Ki. 3, a6. Jer. 51, 46. Ecclcs. 7, 7 ; with a following plural
masc., Is. 13, 22 n3^^ and thne shall cry wolves, &c. ; Jud. 13, 17
K'/h. 20, 46, I Sam. i, 2. 4, 10. 2 Sam. 24, 15. i Ki. 13, 33. Jer.
51, 48. Ps. 124, 5. Est. 9, 23 (see note i below); Gen. i, 14 H^XD NT
hi there be lights; with a following plural feminine, Deut. 32, 35.
is. 8, S. Jer. 13, 18. Mic. a, 6. Ps. 57, a ; before collectives and mixed
subjects, e.g. Gen. la, 16. 13, 5. 30, 43. 3a, 6, ftc ; before a following
dual, Is. 44, 18. Ps. 73, 7 (where, howeveri with the LXX toflj^ should
be read).
Kem. I. The instanoes b which a preoeding piedicate appcan in the pknal
maiculine before a plural (or collective aingDlar) feminineof pefMOS (Jud. 31, ai.
1 Ki. II, 3), of animals (Gen. 30, 39) or of things (Lev. 26, 33. Jer. 13, 16. Ho*.
14, 7. Ps. 16, 4. Job 3, 34. Cant. 6, 91, ur lH,fore a ilual 13 Sam. 4, i. Zcjih. 3, 16.
3 Chron. 15, 7) are to be explaiucd aot on the analugy of the examples under
letter e, bat from a dislike of using the 3rd plur. fern, imperf. (for this is the
odIj fonn eottcemed in the above examples; comp., however, Nah. 3t 11 ^TVI
inilead of ^nn); oomp. the exampica of a foUowiof predicate in the 3id plor.
maic, instead of die lem. nnder letters / and n, and 00 an analogous pheaonienoo
in the imperative, see i 1 lo* ^*
a. As in the case of verbs proper so also the verb iTH, iriien nsed as a oepaIa
frequently remains uninfected before the subject; comp. On. 5. 33 sqq. 39, 5.
Deut. 31, 3 (accordint; to the accents'! ; as, aj. Is. 18, 5 iTH^ 7^ "V^f
and a ripening graf^ the Jiower be(omtth.
(^) The adjective in a noun-clause, e.g. Ps. 119, 137 T^ff'?'^

upr^hl are thy Judgemenit; comp. verse 155'. In German also
the adjective as predicate remains uninAected. On the other hand,

Only rarely does an aninflcctcd predicate precede a prrsonnl suhject, as 1 Sam.
25, 27 (but nW1^3n should probably be read, as in vrrê 35 ; Vm. 9, 23 (lx;<ore
a plur. masc). Such examples as Job 43, 13 are to be explained according to

f 131. a.
* In a ceitahi sense this is aaalogoos to the Gcnnan kmml em Mmm, mm
' Thbdoes not loclode such cases as Job 34, 7. 10, wheie tityf is nUher to
be explained as an accasalive ^**""*'" a states f 118. m.
{i45-] Agreement between Members ofa Sentence. 491
*^ in }^ *^ ify servanis are duphtrds^ Gen. 47, 3, is either
an unosua] orthography or simply a misspelling for
Rem. t* A* 1000 as %_ lentence whidi faegint with an iminllected predimte it S

canled on mftcr the mentioo of the snhject, the gender end number of the rab-
sequent (co ordinate) predicates must coincide îth th >^c> of the subject* &g.
Gen. I, 14 rni . . n^KD ^\\\ (see letter above); Num. 6. Ezek. J4 I
comp. also Gen. 30, 39 (se letter / above).

2. The dii-like mentioned in letter / above, of osing tbe feminine form (comp., /
further, 144. with the sections of the Grammar referred to there, and below,
letter u\ is exemplified sometimes by the fact that of several predicates only that
which ctands nest to the fenunhie subitantiTe is inflected as feminme} thes in
Is. 14, 9 nT3'j|, and afterwaids9 }nK n^)npK i>3N mmrmthy lan- Tl^; 3$,
guisheth the Umd, Comp. Jer. 4, 30, and the cxampte (f 47. A) where only the
earlier of several consecutive fonns of the and nng.fem. Imperf. are provided with the
afformalive /, Is. 57, 8. Jer. 3, 5. Ezek. 22, 4. 23, 32 (n\in after ^PC'JI) on ;
the converse seqtirnce of genders in imperatives, Nah. 3, 15, comp. ( iio. k.

Of a different kaui arc instances like Lev. 2, i. 5, I. 20, 6, where K'W person
(fem.) as the narrative continues, assumes (in agreement with the context) the
sense of a mascnline peison.
3. The instances in which the gender or nnmber of the fUhwing predicate u

appears to differ from that the subject, an due pnrdy to manifest enon in the
tcitt, 9 lead wiA the Samaritan in^n instead of nn|lp ; njni
.g. Gen. 3a,
then follows correctly t Sam. s, so read wttii 'WelUiausen îj^, according to
;
r. 38, instead of ^K^; i Sam. 16, 4 read TUDKM; a Sam. 14, 10 read inRani;
Ezek. 18, 29 instead of fSPI^ read the plural as in verse 25 ; so also Ezek. 20 3S
for Kto^S and in Job 6, ao for n|^3: In Lam. 5, 10 read and comp. in
general, $ 7. d, note a; I Chron. 2, 48 read ; in Jer. 48, 15 the text is
certainly corrupt. Other itistanccs are dne to special reasons. The variations in
Is. 49, II. Hos. 14, I. Prov. 1, 16 (after vb?"!)' P^- 4 (after ^^yy), Prov. 5, 2.
10, 21. 32. 18, 6. 26, 23. Job 15, 6 (all after D^riDfe^), Prov. 3, a (after ^n^Jrtp ,
Ps. 102, 28. Job 16, 3 2 (after Ti\VV)y Dan. 11, 41 (read n\311), and perhaps
GoL ao, 17 iue also to be explained (see letter /) from the dblike of the 3rd plur.
fem* impetf.; moKorer, in Jer. 44, 19. Pror. a6, as even the plar. masc. of a
participle occnn instead of the plur. fiem. In Gen. 31, 8sq. n^rp, after a plnnl
subject, is explabed as a case of attraction to the following singular predicate*.
In V.'-n, 4, 7 is a substantival participle {d lurker^ a ctmcker)* In Gen. 47, 24
n\T remains undefined in gender (masc.), although the noun precedes for the
sake of emphasis; so also in Ex. i J, 49. 28, 7. 32. Num. 9, T4. 15. 39. Jer 50, ^fi.
Eccles. 2, 7 (^|) n*n as if the sentence bcj;aii afresh, am/ senuints born m my
* probably an error for The Masora on Lev. 1 1, 34 reckons lourteen

instances of where we should expect the plural.
' So also tiw prooouB MVt emphatically rcaamiug subject (see % 141. ^)
is attracted
tkt ^0rings tftki Luni ,

to the predicate in number in Jos. 13, 14 Ul^ra
ikai is Ait iHkiriiMti; in
tiie
^ * * *
number and gender. Lev.

.
5. 33 C^*^/ Jr. 10, 3.
Digitized by (.ibogle
492 The Sentence, [$146.
kctui . . . there fell to my lot this postessitm also). In Job ao, 36 riBTt^ may
(anlcsi (S^ is regarded as nMCBline, 1 1 Ji. be taken impenoiially, Jlre, witkottt
its Mtq^ Motm upon Itla It. 16, 8 and Hab. 3, 1 7 the predicate in the aingnlar
is eipiajoed fiou tlie collective ehancter of nto^ (lee letter h above); on the
odier band, die masculine form of the predicate Is abnonnal in Fk. 87, 3. Pirov.
a, iol ta, 5. 99, 95. Job 8, 7.
1 146. CoHSlnicium of Compound Subjecis*
a ! When the subject is composed of a nomen regens (in the construct

state) with a following genitive, the predicate sometimes agrccii m
gender ami number not with the nomen regens, bul with the genitive,
when this represents the principal idea of the compound subject \
Thus I Sam. 2, 4 D^rin Denial npi? /he bow of the mighty men is broken,
as if it were ike mighiy mm with their bom are broken; x. 36, la. Lev.
I3i 9- I Ki. I, 41. 17,16. Is. a, ti. ai, 19. Job 15, ao. 21, ai. 2% 10.
$a, *i
(0^>y^ 3^ equivalent to nwtyymrs); 38* ai ; with the pradlcaie
preceding, a Sara, to^ 9, unless it is to be explained according to
J 145-
^ Rem. I. The cases in which (tviV^, sound) with a fc^lowing genitive itands
at the bînning of a sentence apparently in Uiis conatnclion, aie leally
of a diffcfcttt kind. The Is theie to be taken ea an exclamation, and the
supposed predicate as in apposition lo tlie goiltlve^ e.g. Geo. 4. 10 the vcue of

thy I'rothers blood, v/hith crieth (prop, cu crying, 108. / '
. . . ! = hark / thy brothers
blood is crying, Ac; Lev. 13, 9. Is, 13, 4. 66. 6. In Is. 5:. 8 an independent verbal
clause foiluwii ttie exclamation the voice ef thy wuickmen ! in Jcr. 10, 22 atid Cant.
2, 8 an independent nonn-claose ; in Is. 40,3 bip the voice of one thai erieth t
i.9,Aark/ tkiro is om crying is followed immediately by the diiect discoene;
in Mic htttkt may be used disconnectedly (cC the almost adveridal vse
of hp in f 144. m) and rrtiT be taken as the snbject to IH^.
9. When the mbstantive iniirtty ia nsed in oouKxioo with a genitive
aa snbject of the sentence, the predicate nsnally agrees in gender and nnmber
with the genitive, sfaioe ^ is eqnlvalcnt in sense to an attribute (sniefr , of
the genitive ; hence, e. g. with the predicate preceding, Gen. 5, 5 'DJ'^S IVI^
Mftf eUl the days f A4am wre, &c. (in 9, 29 ; but the Samaritan reads VT^
here also); Tlx. !;, 20; with the predicate following, Ps. ifo. 6 and elsewhere,
txccptions are. c. {j. Lev. 17, 14 (hot cf. I45. I). Is. 64, 10. I'rov. 16, 1. N.-\h.
3, 7- ^he other hand, in such cases as Lx. 12, 16 the agrecineol of the predi-
cate with ii explained from the strciut laid upon the latter, ^ n3K^~^3
being equivalent to mthit^ at all of tôrh.
' Somcdmca, however, the attmdion of the predicate to tiie gemtive waj be
merely dne lo jaxlaposition.
146.J Constrticiion of Compound Subjects, 493
S. When the subject of the sentence consists of several nouns d
conneclcd by wow copulative, usually
{a) The predicate follmtnng is put in the plural, e.g. Gen. 8, 22

seed iime and harvest, and cold and heat . . . shall not cease i^VtilK'^ K^)
after subjects of different genders in the masculine (as \\itâr gender,
cf. f 132. 4/), e.g. Gen. 18, 1 1 rQtfn txrp^ Abraham and Sarah
were Deut. 38, 3s. i Ki. i, at.
Rem. Rare esoeptloas are Prov. 37, 9 a^'lll^^ '^'S^ ointmitti emd 9
ferfiamt rgfmt ikt JUartf where ^
piedieate agrees in gender with the maacalfaie
fO^l on the other hand, in Ex. ax, 4 (where n^*]^ the labjects)
it agrees with as being the principal person ; in Ihe compoand sentenct^
la. 9, 4, it agrees with tlie feminine sobject immediatcljr ptccedlng ^
(^) The predicate pnetding two or more subjects may likewise /

be used in tbe plural (Gen* 40, t. Job 5 and elsewhere); not
3,
infrequently, however, it agrees in gender and number with the first,
as being the subject nearest to it. Thus the predicate is put in the
singular masculine before several masculines singular in Gen. 9, 23.
II, 29. 21. 32. 24. 50. 34, 20. Jud. 14, 5; before a masculine an^l
a feminine singular, e. g. Gen. 3, 8. 24, 55 then said pCNM) her brother

and her mother; 33, 7; before a masculine singular and a plural*
e.g. Gen. 7, 7 0^ and Nêth wmt in, and his tms, Ac;
Gen. 18 (where feminines plural also follow); 44, 14. Ex. 15,
8, i.
a Sam. 5, si ; before collectives feminine and masculine, s Sam. la, a.
Similarly, the feminine singular occurs before several feminines g

singular, e.g. Gen. 31, 14 ^^^.^1 ^Dl then annuered Rachei and
Leah; before a feminine singular anil a feminine plural, e.g. Gen.
24,61 ;
In fore a feminine sintûlar and a masculine singular, Num. 1 2, i
pinNI D'îp "^îri) //u/i sf-<jkr- Miriam ami Atuon ; lud. i : before
a feminine singular and a lnai^culine plural, e. g. Gen. 33, 7 (comp., on
the other hand, Ps. 75, 4 dissolved are the earth
and all ihe inhabitanis thereof). The pliural feminine occurs before
a plural feminine and a plural masculine in Amos 8, In
13^ Jer. 44, a$
for DJI^ read Dn|C with tbe LXX, and c verse 19.
if) When other predicates follow after the subjects have been k
mentioned, they are necessarily put in the plural; comp. Ex. at, 3a,
24, 61. 31, 4. 33, 7, &c., and 145. X.
Similarly with a mhted object. Gen. 35, a iW // . . . Leah and her ehiUtrtn
*
î^^Sf 'S^' D*3*inN agrees with the masmHnf imncdialely pieosdhig.

494 The Sentence.
147. IncmpkU Senfencef,
a 1. Sentences are called incomplete^ in which either the subject or the

predicate or both must in some way be supplied from the context
Besides the instances enumerated in 1 16 x (omission of the personal
pronoun when subject of a participial clause) and the periphrases for
negative attributes { 153. ir, this description includes certain (noun-)

clauses introduced by nan ^see letter h below), and also a number of
exclainations of the roost varied kinds (see letter c below).
b 2. 1 ho demonstrative particle i^, HSn en, ecce m^y be used either
absolutely (as a kind of interjection, comp. 105. d) before complete
noun- or verbal- clauses, e.g. Gen. 28, 15 "Jp^V f^t'hold!
J am with thee; 37, 7. 48, 21. Ex. 3, 13. 34, 10, or may take the
pronoun, which would be the natural subject of a noun-clause, in the
form of a suffix, see f 100. o. Whether these sufllxes are to be regarded

as in the accusative has been shown to be doubtful in 100./.
However, in the case of n|9 the analogy of the corresponding Arabic

demonstrative particle 'irnia (followed by an accusative of the noun)
is significant*. If nan with a suffix and a following adjective or
participle (see the examples in ir6. />and^) forms a noun-clauie.
the subject proper, to which nan with the suffix refers, must, stricUy
speaking, be supplied âin lêfore the predicate ^ Sometimes,

however, the pronoun referring to the subject is wanting, and the
simple nin takes the place of the subject and copula (as Gen. 18, 9
W behold she is m the knt; 4a, a8), or there is no indication

ngn with
whatever of the predicate, so that the sentence is limited to
the suffix, as in the frequent use of ^||n her$ am /, io answer to
* Thb does oot apply to such cues m Geo. 33, 8, where an infinitive
wiUi |l appears slone in wiswer to a question, Hut snbstsnoe of tiie question

being presupposed as a main cUnse; eomp. also Gen. 7, where mntt
again be supplied after îjl^M.
* On the same analogy any substantive following n3n would hare to be rcgaxded
as originally a virtnnl acoisative. Since, however, Hebrew does not possess case-
terminations (as the Arabic does, and uses the accusative necessarily nfter 'inmt).
it is very doubUul whether, and how far, substantives following n|n were (dt to be
Mcnsntives.
* That tiicse are real noon-clauses and that the paitidple (e.g. DC in riD ^3n
Gen. so, 3) cannot be taken as m second accnsatlve (something like iue a
m9rii$trum), is also shown by the analogy of Arabic, where alter VfCM with an
nccnaativc tike predicate is eqnessljr in the ncminaiiug*
Digitized by Google
I47-] Incomplete Sentences, 495
an address. Ebewhere a substantive follows (or IQ Gen. 11, 6.
Job 31, 35), and nin then includes the meaning of a demonstrative
pronoun and the cupula, e.g. Gen. 22, 7 D^V^j^l here is tht
fire and ike wood, &c. ; 12, 19 heboid thou hast Mj' wife ! Ex. 24, 8 ;
with reference to the past, e.g. Amos 7, i '31 nani a</, /<?, it was the
latUr growih, &c. By a very pregnant construction the simple n|n is
used as the equivalent of a sentence in Job 9, 19 /i?, here am It

8. Examples of exclamations (threatening, complaining, triumphing, c
especiall/ warlike or seditious) in which, owing to the excitement of
the speaker, some indispensable member of the sentence is suppressed,
are {a) with suppression of the predicate (which has frequently to be
supplied in the form of a jussive), e.g. Jud. 7, 20 a swordfor the Lord
andfor Gideon I (verse 18 without ^1") ; 2 Sam. 20, 1 and 2 Chron.
10, 16 (comp. also i Ki. 22, 36) eiury man to his tents, O Israel
(i.e. iet etjery man go to or remain in his lent); tlie same exclamation
without B^H I Ki. 12, 16 ; moreover. Is. 1, 28. 13, 4 (on the exclama-
tory equivalent to karitl cf. } 146. b); 98, 10. 29, 16 (Osafin
Oyour perversiiy! i.e. bow great it is I); Jer. 49, 16 (if ^^BA be
equivalent to Urrw be upon Ikee!) Joel 4, 14. Mai.
; i, 13 ((^^^
behold what a weariness/)] Job 22, 29; perhaps also Gen. 49, 4
D^5 in? a bubbling over as wafer (sc. happened), unless it is better to
supply a subject nri^< {thou wast). {b) With suppression of the

subject, Job 15, 23 ?l^H where sc. is bread? (f) With suppression of
both subject and predicate, jud. 7, 18 (see above); i Ki. 12, 16 (see
above); 2 Ki. 9, 27 ^ni< Da him also I explained immediately after-

wards by Vian smile html Hos. 5, 8 a/ier ihee, Benjamin I sc.
is the enemy (diffeientfy in Jud. 5, 14); Ps. 6, 4. 90^ 13. Hah. a, 6

'TfTî Ps* 74t 9 On ^ and if wA^ % Sam. 13, 36. a Ki.
5, 17, see 159- dd.
Rem. 1. To the class of incomplete sentences natarally belong exclamations d

introducedby iatcijectioiu nnM, ^K, ^n, DH comp. % 105. The olQect of the
' ;
tkreai mimfneeakn (with ^M) follows regularly (except Eidc24,6.9) with b

(oomp* tw /iW), e.g. 13^ w tm/* i/ i Sftm. 4, 8. Is. 6, 5; on the other hand,
the object of epmmisereOien (widi ^) follows mostly In the vocttlTe, or radier hi the
accusative of exdamatioii (comp. vae t$ In Plantos) ; so in kmcntation for the dead,
Vlf alas, m/btvtherl, 1 Ki. 13, 30. Jer. as, 18; MCh ^1 âhsittfuluaiiem!
^ We do not consider here the cases m which these Inteêelions (e.g. Dn

Jod* 3, 19* Amot 6, 10) stand quite disconnectedly (so always ni^ and fl^).
Digitized t^Looaie
496 The Sentence. Cf
Ik 1, 4. 5, 8. ti. 18. SQ. 3*, Ac (with Jcr. 48,1; ^ 50, J7 Ecek. lit. 3;
jl Eiek. 13, 18), nrac occm ia the expioaioo (nirO ilftT Rn|| Jot. 7, 7,te
(10 limes); and in Qi^ nn|( /<z5 /^r the day I Joel l, 15. For DH oomp. HftU
3, 20. Zeph. I, 7. Zech. a, 17 absolutely, Jud. 3, 19. Am. 6, 10. 8,3.
2. Finnlly, instances of noun clauses shortened in nn nnnsiial manner may perhaps

occur in Dn*T 5
and D>tS3">
...... I's. i 15,
V' 7,
t '
for DH^
y^,-,^
D"*"!' they have hands. Sec. ;
comn. '
verses 5 and 6 OnyTIS, &c. Perhaps also iC'3[)*S^ Gtn. aa, 24, and TiMTj
FIccIes. 5, 16 but hardly 0^l|*3} Noin. 13, 6i cf. ( d above) are to be
rârded io the same way.
II. Special Kiuda of Senteuoes.
f 148. Exckmatims*
a The originally interrogative is used to introduce exclamaiions

expressing wonder or indignation =0 hmt or ridicnlet uî ham!
by n| or T9fo according to 136. r. Astonish-
strntetimes strengthened
ment or indignation at something which has happened is introduced
by how (likewise originaUy fnterrogadve) with the perfect; the
indignant refusal of a demand by (but also by TO Job 31, i)
wiih the imperfect ; an exclani.uKju ul lamenUition by '"9^, less
frequently ^1*8 haw I in Joel i, 18 by no.
Examples :
b HD (or "no with a following Dagei, sec 37) expressing admiration (or astonish*
ment) before vcrhal-clanses, e. g (Icn. i;, -io Tlf TO' ; 38, 29. Num. J4, 5 ' him^
goodly are . ; Cant. 7, 3 ; bciorc llic predicate of noun-clauses, c.jj. Gen. 28, 17.
Ps. 8, a; mockingly before the verb, a Sam. (>, to \ ht>w ^loriens was . . J); Jcr.
22, 23. Job 26, 2 sq. ;
indignantly, Gen. 3, J3 n^rno ; 4, 10. ao, 9. 31, 26 what
kati ihm dmit
ip|( witit the perfect, eg. Gen. 36, 9. Fi. 73, 19; ia loonifiil eiâouitioa,
b. 14, 4. 13 ; ia a lament (osnally nQ*|l), 3 Sam. t, 35. 37 s with the imperfect,

ia a reproachful qoestion, Gea. 39,9. 44, 8. Pk. 11, x. 137, 4; in a moddag
imitation of lament, Mic. a, 4,
with the peifect, Is. i, 3i. Lam. x, i ; with the imperfect, Lam. ^ t. 4, t.
f Rem. t. The close relation between a question and an exclamation appears also
in the interrogative personal pronoun T> in such ca^cs a*? Mic. 7, 1 8 )iO^
rt'ho is a CoJ lite unto thee? and so in feneral in thelonml questions as the
expression of a forcible denial ; similarly in the use of an interr<âtive senteaoe to
cxprcs a wish, see ( 151.0.
^ 3. A weaker form of exclamatioo it lomctimes produced by the insertion of

a oonohoiatife ^
vmfyt mnly, before the predicate, Geo. 18, so ; oomp. 33, xi.
Ii. 7, 9, aad the aaalogoas caaet hi the apodotei of cooditiooal lealCBOca^
|x39.r.
1490 Sentences which express an Oath, etc, 497
149. Smtemes which express an Oaih or Asseveration,
The partide in the sense of ttrlainly not, and fi6lMC (rarely ^ ^

Gen. 98, 16) in the sense of cer/amfy, are used to introduce promises
or threats confirmed by an oath (especially after such formulae as

'^lÔ, 1?'93''PS ''^f^ &c., as well as after imprecations,
see below), and also simple asseverations, e.g. 2 Sd.in. 20, 20. Job 27,
after H^^jjrf Jar bt ii from me^ but mostly without any introductory
formula.
Rem. No certain explanation of these particles has yet been given. According b
to the nsiial view, phrases cxpre^sincf an oath depend on the suppression of an
imprecation upon oneself e. the I.orJ do so unto tm, if I do it cqatvalent to
I certainly wiU not do it; then naturally ii^~OX properly if J do it not equivalent
to iurtainly wiU doit. It 1ft indeed difBcnlt to niidentsiid mch ielf>iBpfeeatiom
iqpolccii by Yahweh, as in Deut i 34 tq. I. 14, S4. sa, 14. Jer. aa, 6. Ecdc 6.
35, 6. Pi. 95, IX* Poiiibly, however, the conscionsness of the letl meaning of the
formula was lost at an early period, and t^^'QK simply cnme to exprew Vtntf^
OK verily not. In i Sam. 35, 33, where, instead of a sclf-imprccatiOQ, a cnne
ia pronotiDocd apoa otben read "nn j> with the LXX for nn *3J^^.
Ex nm pies:
(a) The particles OK and li^M med after the ntterance of an oath and after C
formulae of swearing, e. g. 3 Sam. 11, 11 (see note on letter a) IS'D? ^ni nin^"*n
nri Q'^C'riK nb^X-OX as the Lord liveth, and as thy soul liveth, I will not do
this thing; i Sam. 14, 45. 1 Ki. 5. \(t (after P^H^ ^T\\ in i Snm. 14, 39 anfl 2>^, 6
is followed by a simple *3j; Cant. 2, 7. 3, 5 (after 'ny^C'n I adjure yoii)\

comp. also Gen, 14, 33. 31, 23. 26, 29; spoken by Yahwch, Dout. i, ,^4 sq. I Sam.
3, 14. Ps. 95, 1 1 ; similarly t^^"DK Gen. 24, 37 sq. ;
spoktn by Yahweh, Is. 14, 24,
where K^"Dt< occurs first with the perfect in the sense of a prophetic perfect,
% 106. , but io the p.arallcl clause wiih the imperfect; Jer. 23, 6; in Gen. 3I1 5^
the negative oath introdoced by ^^K'DK, nn|(''Dt5 is immediately afterwards
cootiaaed by l6 with the imperfect. In Eek. 34, 10 the threat introdaeed In
verse 8 by l6*DK is, after a long parenthesis, resnmed with ''^sn.
(^) DK and tl^SM after formulae of ending, e.g. i Sam. 5, 17 ^Wtb^jL nb d

'jlk "On *3t3tD in3n*DK n^D^^ nbl DVl^K God do to to tJUe, emd moii Uot ikom
j^kiSf N0/ hido at^fthh^Jrvm mo. Sic ; oomp. i Sam. ag, aa. On the otiier hand,
^9 introduces the fiicts sworn to, in i Sam. 14, 44- i Ki. a, 13 (here widi
a perfect), and in aSam.3, 35 OK ^9; in i Sam. as, 34 tliepfccedingâ is repeated
before DK; in i Sam. 30, 13 the purport of the asseveration b repeated (after the
insertion of a conditional sentence) in the perfect coosecntive.
' A\>o combined tj^DJ *n| niiT~*n i Sam. 20, 3. 35, aT) as the Lord liveth, and
as thy soul (i. e. thou^ liveth f (Also in 2 Sam. 11,11 read nin^"^n instead of the
impo&sible T|^nv On and in these noun-claacs ^prop. living is the Lord,
dec), cf. S 93. aa, note.
xk
Digitized by Google
49B The Sentence^ Sxso-
e (0 DK and kHsW as rfmple partidM of Miefentioa, eg. Jnd. 5, 8 Htn^lTQM
^1 '^wd't Ai'M m skUU and spear 9tc, U. S3, 14. Job 6, s8
(in the middle of the seatcnoe); sAer n^J>n oMf, twioe lepeated^ sSan. so^ so;
l6~0^ with the perfect, Job ss, so.
f 160. ImitrreâirPt SaUmeu,

a 1. A question need not necessarily be introduced by a special
interrogative pronoun or adverb. FrequeiiUy ilie natural emphasis
upon the words (especially when the most emphatic word is placed
at the beginning of the sentence) is of itself sufficient to indicate an
intenogative sentence as such; conip. Gen. 97, 34 n] itn|l
ihw art my son Esau? Gen. 18, is. Ex. 33, 14 x Son.
II, la wj^ i?ai iMt|^ Saui shaU r^gn ever mt? i Sam. as, 7.
1 Sam. 16, 17. i8 ap Hid rtif $s a weU tke yoimg mam?
I Sam. 16, 4. I Ki. i, 24. Zecfa. 8, 6 {should it also he marvellous in
mine- eyes?). So especially, when the interrogative clause is connected

vith a preceding sentence by e.g. Jon. 4, 1 1 DinK \h ^3Ki and I should
not h.rrf f rh? Ex. 8, 22 will they not stone us? Jud. 11, 23. 14, 16.
I Sam. 20, 9. 24, 20. 25, II. 2 Sam. 11, ix. Is. 37, 11. Jer. 25, 29.
45, 5. 49, 12. zek. 20, 31. Job 3, ID. 10, 9 ; or when (as in some
of the examples just given) it is negative (with 16 lor l6n nmsui%
e. g. a Sam, 23* $ Tt'Oft 16^9 verify wHl he not mahe it h grew?
a Kl 5 86. Lam. 3, 38
h IteoL The onUiiioQ of the intenoftlive particle (n ^
n) occurs especially befoce
m folhmiiig gattnval for tiie sake of euphony (comp. % 136. t); thn befoic KtGca.
18, IS. 27, 24. 1 Sara. ao 8. 1 KL 1, 24. si, 7. Job 14, 3 (as Dan. 5, 13 ia Avmraak);
before n, i Sam. 22, 15. 2 Sara. 151^23. Hah. 2,19. Job 38, 18; before H, iSara.
31. 16; before V, Gen. T9. 12. Ex. 9, 17. Job 2*9; bat oonp. also Job 37, 18
and 39 2 (t)efore A); 40, 30 (before
c S. As a role, however, ibe simple question ts introduced by Me

ittierregalHfe (9; aa to its form, cf. { loo. i-f) ne? mm? the
disjunctive question by n {num? ninm?) in the first dause, and DK
(also OKI, less frequently 1k) an? in the second*, e.g. i Ki. 22, 15
shaJ/ w< go . , . or shall we forbtar ?
' But in l Sam. 37, 10 instc.id of 'iJi* (which .nccoHing to the usual explanation
wonld expect a negative answer) read cither *D"b4< (*D"^) with the LXX, or
better, (n^) w4iir4r, with the Targum.
* Qnite exceptitxial is die aae of Ibe particle fit mmt (oonuttoa b Aiaraale)
ia X Sara. 21, 9 nhTB^ pK] num est hicf The* text ii^ howcm^ Mdeahla<l|
^ J . ^ci by Google
{150.] Interrogative SenUnces, 499
The particular use* arc as follows :
(a) The particle n stands primuily before the simple qnestion, when the ques- d
tioner is wholly tmcertain as to the answer to be expected, and may be used either
before noun-clauses, e. g. Gen. 43, 7 PIK 03^ ^Vj D3âK T^n w your father
ytt alim ? have ye another bmthtr f for tJ'^n comp. Gen. 24, 33. i Sam. 9, 1 1
for ""Sn is it that ? Job 6, 2 a ; for is there yet ? 3 Sam. 9, 1 (but in 3 Sam.
23, 19 for ''3n read i^H with 1 Chron. fl, 25); for }*^n w M^-r^ fw/.? i Ki. 22, 7
and elsewhere ; or before verbal-clauses, e. g. Job 3,3 hoit thou comidertd
Ojap VfC^T^ my strvoMt Jtik^f oUmt catei n (eqoivilciit to mfffif) is mcd
Wote qmtlioaikto whldii from tiielr tone and oootenti, a native raswer Is expected,
eg. Job 14, \A if a man die, ttjfn skatt ke indeed Htn agftia! Sometimcf
a qucitioil is so used only as a rhetorictl form ioiteed of a negative assertion,
or of a surprised or indignant refusal *, e. g. 3 Sam. 7, 5 T\]2 îrn33n HTHtn
Âd// huiid mt an house? (in the parallel passage i Chron. 17, 4 '21 nTIK ((^
thou Shalt not, &c,); Gen. 4, 9 ÎlK ">Cb*n / my brother's keeper? comp.
3 Kl. 5, 7, and the two passages where H is used before the infinitive {comtr. Job
34, 18, absol. Job 40, 3 ; comp. for both, 113. ee, wirh the note). 0 the (êr
hand, in l Ki. 16, 31 for (after read bjîH-
Rem. I. A few passages deserve special mention, in which the use of the i
interrogntive is aUo{;cthcr different from our idiom, f?ince it serves merely to
express the conviction that the contents of the statement are well known to the
heaicr, and are OBCoodillofkallj admitted bj blm. Thus, Gen. 27, 36 tC^
prop, is it mtkai mi mamut ftc, equivalent to ^ a imik hi is rightly nanud
Jacob i Gen. 29, 15 vtrily then art my brothtr; i Sam. a, 37 I didimAtd^ Arc.;
J Ki. 33, 3 y* know surely . . . ; Job 20, 4. In i Sam. 33, 19 (comp. Ps. 54, a)
a surprising communication is introduced in thit way (by ((bn) in order to show
it to be absolutely true, and in Amos 9, 7 a concession is expressed by
/ have, it is true, &c. Finally, we may include the formula of quotation K'n
n3\n3 Jos. 10, 13 or DÎlVl3 Dn^K^n equivalent to sureJy if is, they iix- written
(the latter in l Ki. 11,41. 14, 29, and very often elsewhere in the Books of
Kings and Chronicles), synonymous with the simple formula of assertion n^Vl3 nin
a Sam. I, 18, and O^SVlp OJn I Ki. 14, 19* 1 KL 15, 11. a Chroo. 37, 7. 32, 33.
corrupt; accoidinj^' to Wellhausen, Text drr Bucher Sam., the LXX express the
reading C'^n HNl"}. The above does not apply to interrogative sentences introduced
by inlerrogative pronouns ( 37) or by the interrog.itivcs compounded with
what? such as r.D3 how many.' Hcb why? (see 102. J/HD w/iy ^ ( 99. ),
or by n^K where? HS^K how? ( 1481, &c. On the transformation of pro-
nonns and adverba into inteirogative wofda by meaaa of a prefiied see the
Lexieon.
' On the tiae of fbe iwîtfset in delibcfatlte qveatioii% lee f 107. /; 00 tbe
ao>caUed peifeetum m^Sdmtiai in inteno^tiTe entcncet^ see 1 106.
* Analogous to this is the use of the interrogative HD in the sense of a reproach-
fol lemonstrance instead of a prohibition, as Cant. 8 4 tl^JPTHD why shtmU
ye ftr up f comp. also Job 31* 1 ; see above, i 148.
ska
50O The Sentence,
Of very frequent occurrence also are qo ert ioas introdticcd by which really
uoatam ao atBrmatioo and are used to state the reason for a reqtiest or warning, e. g.
t Stai. a aa turn tkaandt, . . wttr^pn sktmUismUe tksg i tkegnurndf i. e.
rtktrmiti IwUl{ot mmU) trntte^ ftc.; c i Stam 19* Jj, and Driver 00 the paanfe;
a Chrofi. a5 16; alao Geo. a/, 45. Ex. 5a, la <Jeel a, 17. Fa. 79* 10. ii5 a);
Cant z, 7. Eoclea. 5, 5. 7, 17. Dan. t, 10.
y 2. The rare cases in which a simple qaestion is introdticcd by (as sometiTnes
in Ijitin by an? is it?) arc really due to the snpprr;'*ion of the first rocmbcT of
a double question ; thus 1 Ki. i, 37. Is. 39, 16. Job 6, u. 39, 13.
^ (b) Disjunctive questions are, as a rule, introduced by DX H {uirum an ^ or

sometimes by DKV H, e.g. Joel i, 3. Job 31, 4 (even with n repeated after DfiO
in a question which implies cUsbelief, Gen. 17, 17). In Job 34, 17. 40, 8sq.
apecial coaphaaia ia given to the fiiat ncmher bjr prop, is it tPimf Tke
aecQod aaeoiber ia introduced hy 1K r ia Job 16, 3. 38, aS. 31. 36, la eadi caae
before D, and bcnoe no donbt for enphonie leMOoa. to Avoid the oooabiantiQB
A Double qaesttons with (DtO) QH H need not always be mutually exclosive;

frequently the disjunctive form serves (epecii!ly in poetic paralle1iim ; but comp.
also e. g. Gen. 37, 8) merely to repeat the same question in difTcrctit words, and
thus to express it more emphatically. So Job 4, 1 7 man h Just
sAa/l mortal
b^tn Gmit or (Di<) shall m man Ac pun b*fars kit Maigrt Job 6, 5 sq. 8, 3.
1% 4aq. II, a. 7. aa, 3. b. lo^ 15. Jer. 5, a9. The aeoood member mny, Iheie-
fen^ jiMt na frdt be connected by a simple 1, e.g. Job 13, 7. 15, 7 iq. 38, 16 aq.
aa. 3a. 39; comp. also Ps. 8, 5 after HQ; Job 2t, i7cq. after or evenvi^
oat a conjunction, Job 8, 1 1. 33, 4 ; aft^r HD Ps. 144, 3.
I (r) With rqgard to inJirtct questions' after verbs of inqnirlnp, doubting,

eaamininp', &c., simple questions of this kind take cither n li-'helkfr, G( n. %, 8*,
or DN (>cfi. 15, 5. 2 Ki. I. 2. Cant. 7, 13; even before a noun-clause, Jcr. 5, I ;
in I Sam. ao, xo the in<iirect question is introduced by ){tj, i.e. probably if per*
* Oin ooeeia in Prov. a7, a4 afler a negatiee atatcBwnt; we should, hewever,
with D^paerinck read f^. Not tea tnegslar b {6n inatead of 16 DR in the
aaeood dnnae of Jud. 14, 15, but the text can hardly he correct (comp. Mooee,
Judges^ New York, 1895, p. 337): in i Sam. 33, 11 the second n introdaoas
a fresh qne^tion wliich is only loo<;ely connected with the fn^t. In Num. 17, aS
and in the third tlausc of Job 6, 13, DXH is he<t taken Kwald in the sense
of N'^n , since C(t from its use in oattis (see above, ( 149. b) m.ay simply oMan
vtrtly not.
* It ônld here be remarlced that the dilthMtion between direct and indirect
|Bcationa cannot haw been recogniaed by the Hebrew mind to the aane extent
aa it la in l^tin or Engliah. Hebrew there is no difference between the two
In
kinds of sentcnct , either as regards mood (as in Littin) or in tenae and poaition of
the woids(as in I'-nf^li^h). Comp. nUo 137. r.
* In Cell. ^ tlie n after "t^^nS explained from the fac'. that the latter,
accoiriing to the context, implies to giV4 tn/ora/a/i^n upon a qtt<rsiion.
* Also in EccUa. 3, ai we shouid read n^'yn and HJ^^n {whttktr wAetJUr)

inatead bf the article which ia aianaed by tlie Maaoea.
151.] Desiderative Sentmces, 501
ckOHce. In disjtinctiTes {wkdiAsror)
P| DK
Num. 13, 1 8 at the end (or ^<^J"L:frC
Gen. 34, 31. 27, 31. 37, 29. Ex. 16, 4), and nn Num. 13, 18, which is foUowed
by OX n ; also Vk H Ecdet. a, 19. The fbtninla DK has an affixmathe ^
feroe, w4 AuMVf whether . . like the Latin neith am, Eit. 4, 14.
In Jon. X, 7 and 8 the relative pronouia and ne^x owbg to the following k
have bccone alio Inteirogative, Jir whse etttuef
\d) T\\ and W\ (oomp. 1 136. innediatelj after the ihterrocetlve tcrve to /
give vividncii to the qaestion ; so also KifiK (for which 1&K five tiawi in Job)
thin, now, Gen. 27, 33 Wn K^Dl<""p who ihm htt Jad. 9, 38. Is. 19, la. Job
is
17, 15 ; ÊX n>i* where then is . , .? However, KiD*t may also be placed at
the end of the entire question 'Ex. 3.^. 16. Is. 22, i also Hos. 13, to, since
; either
VIX is a dialectical form of rt>N , or nX should be read instead of it) or at the
beginning of the question proper, after a strongly emphasized word, as in (icn.

37. 37'.
(#) Sometimes one interrogative govenit two co-^nHnate cbtttes, Uie first of 9tt
which should rather be subordinated to the second* so that tiie interrogative word
strictly speaking affects only the second; thus Is. 5,4 after ^PCV^ where/ore looked
I, ..and il brought forth, equivalent to, wherefore brought it forth, while I lo<.>ked.
&c.; I^. 50. 3 ; after H Nam. 32, 6. Jcr. 8, 4, also Nam. 16, 23 read ; atter
tti^n Jos. 22, 20; after TO^ Is. 58, 3. 2 Chion. 32, 4'. But H Job 4, 2 and
4, 31 are separated from the verb to which they belong by the inseition of a
conditional clause.
3. Tlie nfTirmative answer is generally e.\pre>sed, as in Latin, by //
repealing the emphatic word in the question (or with the second
person changed to the first, Gen. 94, 58. a7 94. 99, 5. Jud. 13, 11),
Gen. 29, 6. gf, 39 sq. i Sam. 93, 11. 96, 17. i Ki. 91, la Jer. 37, 17.
(On ^ if it he so in the corrected text of a Kl 10, 15, see { 159 dd.)
As a negative answer the simple (6 is sometimes sufficient^ as in
Gen. 19, 9 and elsewhere; comp. 152. c/ and in Jud. 4, 90 the

simple equivalent to 00 oriftf one.
{16L DttOeraiivi SeiUmeti.
A wish may be expressed not only hy the simple imperfect ( 107. n). a
cohortativc ( 108, especially with W 108. c\ jussive ( 109;
with JO 109.^), imperative ( iio.a), perfect consecutive ( iia.od)
or by a simple nomi-datise ({116. r, note, and 141. ^) but also in
the following ways:
* On the other band, in Job 9, 34 and 34. \fi(( u not prefixed to the
but appended to the conditional sentence.
* Comp. the analogous sentences after |y2 ^camt, k. 65, I3. Jcr. 35, 17 ; after
causal nerft i Sam. 26, 13: after Is. la, i ; likewise aAer D| 153 at the end;
after "JB Deat. 8, ia-14. 25, 3. Jos. 6, 18.
502 Jhe Sentence, [ 151-
1. By exdamatkms m ihe form of itUerrogatiot dauaes e.g. 9 Sun.

ig, 4 DD^ ^JDfe^-'^ who makah me judge? i.e. O thai I were modi
Judê! I Sam. 20, 10. 2 Sam. 23, 15. Especially frequent is the use
of WT'^ (pfop. who gives?) to introduce all kinds of desiderative
clauses (see letter b). In Ma!, i, 10 the desideraiive clause proper

is co-ordinated with an intenogative clause 0!?^'^
ihat one were among ym mti would shHi She doori, Le. O that one
would shut the doors I
b Rem. Sometiinct tlie odginal teme of f^po it itUl pkiafy diManiUeii c^f.
O thai ti^ people were ghett into myhandl eomp. Fi. 55, 7. Li thew
lent tOt
eamplet, however, j^l^'^D is still equivalent to 0 had I! and in oumeroos otber
instances the idea of giving has entirely disappeared, JFIÔ having become
stereotyped as a mere desiderative particle [utinam). The const ruclion is either
With the accusaiive (in accordance with its oricrin:\l inLaxiing) of a substan-
(a)
tive, Deut a8, 67 would that it were even! . . . tnommgl juU. 9, 39. Ps. 14, 7
(53, 7). 55, 7i with an afiGnaatheiBdafollowinKaiinithre^ Job 11.5; with two
a Sam.
c { 135./)
i ^pQIlD ^
aceoiadm, Norn. 11, 39. Jer. 8, 23 ; with the aocnsative of aa hifinitive, Ex. liS, 3.
fHT^ taMdV tUi I had died far thee (for
of a participle. Job 31, 35 ; of a poaonal proootm (as a suffix), Job
;
^
39, a (with a followbg 3 ; but ^3^r)^^ Is. 37. 4 and Jer. 9, i with a following
causative is not simply eqni\alent to ]P^^p bat is properly wAo endows
me with, &c. ; comp. % H/.iD- W ith a still greater weakening of the original
meaning *r^"*D is uscî with an adjective in Job 14, 4 cotdJ a clean thin<7 but c&mt
umlcan! i.e. how can a dean thing come, &c.; suiuiaxiy m job 31, 31
out 0/ an
wieemmjlitdemeihai heUhmfieemeaiiffitdt
C (^) With a following perfect, Job as, 3 (oomp. | laou ); with a perfect eon-
ecntiTe, Dent. 5> a6 O that they had sueh an.Wetuit
d (f) With a following imperfect, Job 6, 8. 13, 5. 14, 13 in Job 19, a3 the ;
imperfect is twice added with Wdtv (comp. letter a above, on Mai. i, 10).
On the cohortaliTe in the apodosis to such desiderative dansei^ comp. i 108./.
i % The wish may also be expressed bj the particles ON (Ps. 8i, 9.
95> 7* i39> 19* Prov. a4, 1 1. i Chron. 4, to; always with a following
imperfect) and (for which in Ps. 119, 5 we have ^^n|(> a KL 5, 3
'5*?*?, from ^ ah! and '^ = ^5'; both with a following imperfect)
si, 0 si! uttnam ^ is foliowed by the imperfect, Gen. 17, 18.
'
The transition from a question to a wish may be seen, e.g. in Nam. II, 4
who shall give usJiesh to tai i i. e. 0 that we had JUsh to eat I
' Comp. n ahnilar tianntioa from a oonditional to a dcaideratlve pnrtide, la
oooieqnanoe of the aappflcwion of the npodoriii hi the fiagUdi, O 4f i krndt
and tiie like; e.g. Num. aa, 19 if there were ^> a twerd itt wg^ kemd mem
*
hadlemfefyaUediheel
Negative Sentences. 503
Job 6, 2 ; by the jussive, Gen. 30, 34 (rather concessive, equivalent

to let it be so) ; by the perfect, as the expression of a wish that something
might have happened in past time (comp. 106./), Num. 14, 2 ^SXf^ ^
uwiUl ikat we had died; ao, 3 and Jos. 7, 7 (both timet on
the other hand,Is. 48, 18 and 63, 19 (both times Mt^ to express
a wish that somethiog expected in the futore may already have

happened On ^ with the imperative (by an anacoluthon) Gen. 23, 1
comp. no. ^. On the perfifict after ^9 Gen 40, 14. 2 Ki. 5, 20,
comp. X06. 72, note 2.
162. Negative Senimeet.
1. Independent sentences are made negative by the adverbs

(Job 6, 21 A'VA. perhaps preserved as a substantive) = the Greek ov, not,
~^^ = tbe Greek m (Job 24, 25 as a substantive), (it is) not;
noi^, wi, '9fi|^ (comp. 90. m) aa/L The forms h^,
Ââ not belong ahnost entirely to poetry. Widi regard to t6 and

the main distmction is that verbal-clauses (rarely noun-clauses, see
letter e) are regularly negatived by t6 (besides its use as negativing

single words while is used exclusively with noun-clauses (see the
examples below).
I
EspecUlly in eompoandi^ e.g* ^)p6 lit. a nU'Ctd (Genn* Otng^t) who is
indeed called % fod bat is inytliiiig bat really a god, Deot 39, ai ; ^^3^ 16
comp. Jer. 5, 7. a Chran. i|, 9 ; XXflt} Ut. a n^tft^ (Gcnn. CAmdSi),
veiae 17,
Deat. 33, 31
e^'tni^, ir^rt^^lit mt-mam,
; W fi6 mtlkimgt AnuM6, 13; |^ t6 lit mt-wood. Is. lo^ 15;
iu^kmmm (of Co<\\ Is. 31. 8; pnp6 urn-
rifn'ccmsnett^ Jer. aa, 13, comp. Ezek. aa, 29; On'ID'fiî* disorder, Job 10, aa ;
Otj^ '^h not-vioUnce^ 16, 17; after !> Job a6, asq. (nbT^^), tiTN^ hcIphssnesSf
insipierttia) ; comp. also Is. 55, a nynbfj KiSa for what is unsatisfyittg;
Ps. 44, 13. Job 8, II. 15, 3a. I Chron. 12, 33.-In Num. 20, 5 a construct state
with several genitives is negatived by als>o used with an infimUve,
Nam. 35, a3; with an adjective, Q3n ^ unwise, Deut. 33, 6. Hos. 13, 13;
l^prn^^ impius, Ps. 43, 1 ; and HOtstro$fgt Pot. 30, as sq.
mumitably, a KL 7, 9; atol6 mt-good, Is. 65, 3. Eiek. ao^ 35, &c; l^n^
ntitlnm, a Chfon, 30, 17 ; with a participle, e. g. Jer. a, a {muawm) ; 6, 8. Eadk.
4, 14. sa, 94. Zeph. a, i. 3, 5; the Maaoia, however, nqaiiw ftOQ}^ in Is. 54,11,
in tfa, la, nSfe^ in Jer. 6, 8, t, 61, L e. alwap 3id ring,

n^p$l in Hot.
fem. peif. in pante wwf Ml eomftrted,
and oonaequcntly not conpouidt,
ftc,
bat cidicr relatiTe daoiea or (b. 5^1, 11. Hot. 1,6, and especially a, 35) main
clauses instead of proper names. On the above compounds generally, c the
dissertation mentioned in Hi. d, note 2 ;
on their ate in sentences I ipii
a state, to convey attribative ideas, see letter u bdow.

The Sentence,
The conjunctions "|9 and that not, serve to negative dependent
clauses. The particular uses of ibese panicles are as follows :
(fl) (1f>^ frequently Ki^), like o5, ow, is used rcpilnHv for the dyectiptt
unconditioual negation, and lience is usually connected with the perfect oi' imper-
fect (as indicative); on with the irapeifect to express; an unconditiooal pro-
hibition, sec loi.o; on iU use wiili the jussive, see \ 109. J. On tiWor (î>n
mttne, in interrogative sentences, comp. 150. a. In connexion with !>3,
( s any), \jh is tued to espresc an t^^mU negation, tntUuSf tume wkaUver (comp.
the French m . ./frmew, im . . . ritm), omallj in the order K7, e. g.
3, 1
^f*!!
^ ^ skaUmi m/ êi|r 1^ ^tkggardm; 9, sx>
Ex. ie 15. so, 10. Ler. 7, 13. Dent. 8, 9. Jcr. 13, 7.- 3e, 17 O?'^'^^ 16
lutking 9i 0O; comp. the aune atntenent in n dMtorical qneidon, Jcr. 3a, a7);
FkoT. ia ai. 30, 30 pb'^^D l(b end tuneth mti away /or a Chnn.
3a, 15; hut comp. also the inverted order, Ex. i a, 16 nb'^'K^ ruK^DT^ m
immntr ^ work tkatt be done ; ra, 43. 15, a6. aa, ai. Lev. 16, 17. Job 33, 13.
Ban. It, 37. The meaning is different when by being determinate is used
in the sense of whote, Num. 33, 13 H^t^ Mm shalt tut m tktm tdl^
but only a part.
Analogous to ^b is tbe use of . * C^K Gen. 23, 6 and eLbcwhcrc^
in verbal-clauses in the sense fit no one at all, mt a sin^ mt.
Rem. I. The examples in which ^ is used absolutely as a negative answer,
cqtiiTalcnt to eeHoMy not! ml mvat be regiided a$ extremdv short terbel^
dnnaei, e.0. Gen. 19^ a (16 noooiding to tbe context for ItoS MS> Ac); ii.
4a, ta Hag. a, la. Job a3, 6, lonietimea with % followhig ^9 hmi, Gcs. 19, a (aee
ebove); Jos. 5, < Ei. 3, aa.
a. The negation of if^t/n-clauses by (as opposed to the regular begation by

always includes a certain emphasis, since the force of the negation falls rather
upon a particular word (comp. e. ^. Ezok /i. ,
thnn npon the whole clause.
In 2 Sam. 3, 34 thy hands were not bound, a participle i-s; thus

specially mgatived by
L ;
'
cf. Ps. 74, 9, where, however, \s)

-L
is 5i)nrated from the
participle by XDHN, and Job la, 3. Ai a rule, noun-clauses with a pronominal
subject are thus negatived by Gen. 30, la. Num. 35, 33 fDent. 4, 4a, 19, 4) ;
I Sam. 15, 39. 2 Sam. ai, 3. Jer. 4, aa. Ps. as, 7. Job a8, 14, panlld with p^;
genemllj with |6 before snbatantival predicete, e. g. Ex. 4, 10 0^3"^ tfr
/ am MMT o Man 18.Noufdiuce with t ittbilnnlifnl
of words; Amos 5,
anbjiecty Gen. 39, 7. Nun. a3, 19. Is. aa, a. 44, 19. Hag. i, a. Fl aa, 3. Job 9, 3a.
18, 19. ai, 9b aa, i6b 36, a6 (witb ] of the npodods); 41, a; in Job 9, 33 eiCB
ef* IP iSMv It naed Instead of f^.lo Ftor. t8, 5 16 ia nied beftne an adjec-
tival predicate; in i Sam. ao, 36 (where a preceding nonn- clause is negatived
by ^n^3) read nnb }ii> with the LXX, for iVl^ On ((^ far p)C in dm-
atantial clauses to express attributive ideas, see letter u below.
x. As a rn Ic }h stands immediately before the verb, bnt sometimes is separated
from it (frequently to bring into special prominence another word which loUows
it) ; thus Job 33, 7. Hccles. 10, 10 before the object and verb ; Num. 16, 39 before
the Bnb}eot and verb; Dent 8, 9. s Saa. 3, 34. Ps. 49, 18. 103, to. Job 13, iC
.1 6*0 Negative Sentences. 505
34, 23. before a complementary adjunct. In Deut. 32. 5 \s? according to the
accr-ntuation even stands at the end of the clause [they ojTetid him nai); but
imdoubUiily D^}^ tfh are to be takcu together. On the poi>iliou of with the
infinitive dbiotnte, te 1 13. ft
(^) is ued like ft^ md m to ocpiai n jmlîhn iwd emdi/imul Mgatioo, i

y
. Dd henoe ctpeciftUy ia oouiexion witb tlie jiusive (t 109. c and ) to introdooe
probibitioDi, warnings, negative desires, and leqtietts. On with the imperiect,
Me $ 107./; on a Ki. 6, 37, see 109. /i.
Rem. I. "^N like N^, see letter a, note, above) may be used to form a com-
pound w urd, as in I'rov. li, a8 fl^D'btjt mt-d(a(h , innnoitality) ; though all the
early versions read mc"^^. The instances in which appears to stand

abssolutely. equivalent to uo, certainly not Jike \ir) for /it) ytyrjTOi), c. g. Ruth 1,
^riiS w^y, />' daughters, and Gen. 19, 33, 10 arc also due ^!ee
letter c) to extreme bbortening of a full clause ^tn 2 Sam. 13, 25 such a clause is
repeated immediately afterwmrdt); thus in a Sam. i, ai. Is. 6a, a. Ps. 831 a NT
is evidently to be supplied, and in Joel a, 13. Amos 5, 14. Prav; 8* 10 the
fiorresponding jussive f^m the pveoeding impeiatives (in Pmv. 17, la from the
preceding infinitive absolute).
regularly stands immediately before the verb, but in Ts. 64, S. h
Jer. 10, 34. 15, 15. Ps, 6, a. 38, a before another strongly emphasixed member of
the sentence
((f) pK construct state (anless it be sometimes merely a contracted form, cf. i
D'*3w' for D*3E') of not being (as also the absolute state, sec below 1
is the
negative of being; comp., for example. Gen. 31, 29 with Neh. 5, 5. As t?"
(Ar, fA/, it is^
indndes the idea of mi being in

waSf See.) includes the idea of ieing in all tenses^ so
all tenses. Heace~
JJ^t, ^
(1) The absolute state with an evident transition to the mraning of a ^
verbal predicate. Hurt does nai xist, a.\w9jt /fllaws the word acgatived, e.g.
! 37f 3 (2 Ki, 19, 3) n'iSi) nb] and strength does not exist to hing forth .
Gen. 3, was not pieaent ; Ex. 17, 7 H^^Dtt or is he not ? after X^J\ is ho , . ,1
5 l^ljt
cf. Num. 13, 30); Lev. 36,37. Num. 30, 5. Jud. 4, ao (pN no). In i Sam. 9, 4
and 10, 14 is used in reference to a plural; 1 Ki. 18, 10 I?. 41, t; 45,
59, n. Mic. 7, 2. Prov. 13, 4. 35, 14. Job 3, 9 nnJ let (hnc /v r.one, let
none come ! (comp. Piov. 5,17); Eccles. 3, 19. AUo coaip. finally J^N"DN if it be
not so, (ien. 30, i. Kx. 32.3a. Jnd. 9, 15. 2 Ki. 2, 10. Quite anomalous is Jot)
35f 15 bebre a perfect as sm emphatic negation j the text, however, can hardly
be correct.
(a) The construct state stands in its natuial position immcdbtely before /
the substantive whose non-extstence it predicates, or before the subject of the
sentence which is to be negatived. To the former class bdong also the very
iiiim rnv.^ in 'nrces in which J^X joined to a participle, c g. Sam. a6kia
^ 1
is
(MP vmnttMt suit^, Ac, i. e. amf m mm

' In Jcr. 51,3 the pointing "^X oc urs twice Instead of "^K. ^nd is thus, in the
opinion of tiie Masoretes, cquivaleat to against him that Undethj bat undoubtedly
we ahoold read "Tft. *
The Sentence.
jaw Ut mr kum it^ ntitktr dU m^tmalu ; to especially witli ft partkipte
dftrnmUmHal or dncfîm Hmua, mdi m
1q tnbordiiuitie 5, 39 D^|>C!1
VtO ptO aiM/ ir thattwff Utm^, wbito tlioe It none ddlming, ie wrW
di^r 0n^s dtU^^rUtg it; 7, J* ftc.; Lev. s6 6 aod ebewherei *1înp fKl
iiCilw/9'm/f iialuy/iW4^^^ is vwd as the o^tioo of
an entire mnui^laitie, Geo. 39, S3. Nam. 14* 4s DSf^pS njnj piC ike ZW
i:r mi amcMgyeu; Gq. 37, 29 itilA l|Dtn*K.A*!i^ tkepii,
fft (3} When the subject which is to be negatived is a penonal pronouD, it is joined
OS a sufTix to aceording to 100. o, e. g. / am not, tms not, shall mi i$ ;
^yvt, fem. !;2K, /Am art not, &c.; XkTVi, fem. JTjyK is not, fitc; also
absolutely, Gen. 42, 13 V (5, 24 he was) no longer alive ; D3*X they are not,
&c. When the accompanying predicate is n verb, it follows again (sec letter /) in
the form of .1 participle, since pN always inlrcxlttces a noon-claoaef eg. tlx. 5, lO
fn!) ^33\S I will not give ; 8, 17. Dcut. i, 32.
// Rem. la Keh. 4, 17 ""aX f^X for îl3*t< is due to it<; bcin^^ co-ordinate with
three other (sobstantival) subjects; these are again expressly summed up in
WSK^pK. In Hag. 2, 17 the pronominal comi U tvitnt of pX apy>ears
to follow with the sign of the accnsative'; bat most probably we should read with
the LXX DZnC' for DmK.
O (4) The fact that pX (like alwaj-s mcludes the idea of a verb {is not, was
not, Sec) led haally to soch a predomiaance of the verbal element, that the
original character of as a construct state (bat cf. letter s above) was forgotten,
and aooordingljr it is very frequently separated from its on (sabUmtive or
paiticiple)! eqiecially so bv tlue insertion of shor^ words (of the nstnve of
enditici), e.g. 13 2s. i, ^ 1? Lev. 11, 10. ts, Gen. xx, 30^ 0| 14, 3,
Jod. i8k xo. Ex. xs 30; bat oomp. also Fs. 5^ xo. 6, 6. 3s, s, and noed
absolutely in Ex. as, a. x Ki. 8| 9. RnA 4, 4. Hence, finalty the transposition
of pK and its noun was even possible, e. g. Gen. 40, 8 and 4X, X3 ink p)t
anJ there is nom that tan interpret it ; Gen. 47, 13. Jud. 14, 6. 1 Sam. 2 r, 2. Is.
1,30. Jer. 30, 13. Hab. 3, 19. Frov. 5, 17 (p^^ iMtv sint ; comp. ktler k
above, on Jub 3. 9); 30, 37. In Gen. 19, 31. 5, 16 is placed between
the subject and predicate.
P Rem. I. Like . , . i above) so aUo ?3 pX

expresses an absolute negation , e. g. Kccles. 1 , 9 Cîn"^3 ptt

there is no new thing,
* T T T
&c. ; Dan. 1, 4 i^comp. also H^Kt) |^ there is nothing, i Ki. 1 8, 43. Ecdes.
5,13); as also PN . . * "b^ Hab. a, 19 ;
comp. ptt noUtD Jud. 14, 6.
q 2. Undoubtedly akin to pK In origin is the native sylUlde ^ ooconteg in

the two compovnds ibS (as a proper name, i Ssm.4, ai ; Baer llsaîK) and
not Umoeent, Job as, 30; bnt the proper name l^^M is doobtftd, and
the fem. fofK very doobtfiiL In Ekhiopic tlda ^ is (be most oonmon iorm o
nqîon, prefixed even to verba.
* According (o De Lagaide, A^war fseUterU graeH i^Himns sptcimm, p. a6,

nrif ^ Pik 3, 3 is also an accnsative after p|^.
{i58.] Nâiive Sentences. 507
{d) D'lp mi ytif when referrmg lo past time is used, as a rule ( 107. r), with f
the imixrlcct, Gen. a, 5 D'^D ... ^3 nime ...yet ; see letters b and / above;
Gen. 19, 4. 24, 45. Jos. a, 8. i Sam. 3, 3; with the imperfect m the sense of
a pidCBt, Ex. 10, 7 ]nn D'lOn kmmtsttkou ntiyttt Ex. 9. 30.
<) DfiK (prop, a subttantiTe, MSMlte} iw /Mg>r, Indndiiig the veriwl id s

^txisUitg^ comp. Dent. 31, 36. ]i.45 6^ 14. 461 9 ; oied abiolately* Aiiim(S, 10;
med intenopitively
''W? ^ UftttK^ sSMii.9,3; inqiieDtly
also in tho wiue of mm nisi; with patagogic (| 90. at) p|y It. 47, 8. 10.
Zeph. a, IS pfi|l) ^3K /am, dm it mom 9tsi.
(/) f^S m
poetic and prophetic style, and with a certain empluni< t^b, is t
used with the imperfect, e.g. Is. 26, 14. 33, ao. 33 (immediately afterwards with
a perfect); llos. 7, 3. I^. .^9, 13 Pmv. to, 30 (but Is. 14, ai before the jniiiTe,
equivalent to before an adjective, I'rov. 34, 33.
with a perfect, Gen. 31, 20. Is. 14, 6 ; with an imperfect. Job 41, 18 ; to
negative a participle, H05. 7, 8. Ps. 19, 4 ; to negative an adje(^ve, 2 Sam. 1, 31.
{h) *rib3 to negative aii adjective, 1 Sam. 30, 36; on '^ph^. Ezek. 13, 3, see
letter jr; on ^^h^b as the regular negative with the infinitive coustruct, see
114. s; on ^wSd!? as a conjunction, see letter x below.
On as a negative paxlicle in oaths {verify ru>i), see 149. c above.
Rem. on tkbt ^|>3. To the catôry of negative sentences belongs also the ifi
eapKMon of nq^the attribntet bf meant of l(!>, net (both 10 nied almott

cadnii^y in poede langnage) or with a foUowmg tiibitantlve, moettj la
the iimpleat ibnn ofdicnrnitantial Giaiiee,e.g. t Sam. 13, 4 nil^ Hb a 1^ mm^
V when there aie not cbmdt, Le. a domUas momingi comp. Job la, 14. %b,
38, a6 (Khri6 whtvt no mam fr, L a. nmmkaiHtd); t Chron. a, 30. 3t tT^
kiUtess; 10 alto ^
eg. J<^ 94, 10 and }^ e.g. Fk 88, 5 / ae on a aM
^TgyÔonitnotki^t^tÛJhaMfimmam: Is. 47, i. H01L7, 11; "1|D0rptf
eommtlfss. Cant. 6, 8, Sec, but usually (Ps. 104, 35, &c.) like a proper circumstantial
clause (comp. $ 141.^) connected by IVdw, IfiDD'pKV Less frequently such
periphrases; take the form of relative clatises (comp. 155. e), e.g. Job 30, 13
"^l)? they /or xvhom there is no helper^ i. e. the helpless (but probably "IT^
is only an intrusion from 39, I3, and we should read 13?^ without any ones
restraining them; in 29,
kirn; in Ps. 7a, la
Is. 43, 9 thy work it
XPÎ]
I
tiiat
^
of a
^^^
a translate the J'atheriess
man who JUUk m Aandt; Zcch.

and him
lente);
that
Hab.
had none
i,
9, 11
14: with
to
pK
ontîit
help
waUrku
How far sndi compoonda finally came to be icgaided by tike langttage simply v
aa nqpithe adjectives, may be seen partly from the fact that they (as also reUtdve
clauses analogous to the above) are frequently co-ordinated with real adjectives,
Joel 1,6. P.7a, I a. Job 39, la; comp. also Is. 59, 10, where Dâ^JfpK^ it
* Evidently from H^B (0 ~u.<aste away, from which stem also ^j>âad (whence
90. ni), originally substantives, arc formed.
' In Prov. 9, 13 (perhaps also 14} 7 ; but see Delitxsch on the passage) a veri)ai-
clanse is used co-<dinately in this way at a periphia^ Ibr an adjective.
Digitized by Google
The Sentence, i6a.
parallel with Dniy3; partly from their being iiurodnced by the sigu of the
dative e. g. Is. 40, 39 and to the p<nfferUss)\ Job 36, a a. 3. Neh. 8, 10.
W (0 'if iest, that not, at the banning of a danse expressing a fear or fncaiitiOD
bence espedallj after radi Ideas aa fiark^^ Gen. 3a, xa and eltawliere (eoinpk
8ISwM> takiti/^ Aadf fitqucntly after tc^, ^Î'f'? Mf ^ 3<9 M
and daewheie, takm^ tmre, a Ki. 10, 33, Ac Not bfieqaently tibe idea on
wlii<^ "JB depends, is only virtnftlly contained in the main clause, g. Gen. 19, 19
iseafi U the mMn$Um$ (becaase I am afraid), f^^^t *369*|n")B ieU jmbw
epit overtake me ; Gen. 26, 9. 381 1 1 ; also in Gen. 44, 34 from the rhetorical
question how shall I . . .? we must understand / tannot, governing |B Thi u .
especially the case after an appeal to do or not to do an action by which some-

thing may be prevented ;in wiiich case ~|9 is bimply equivalent to the final tie) ;
corop. e.g. Gen. 11,4. 19, 15. Num. 20, 18 (where "JS hst is sej<.-irated from
the verb by a strongly emphasized substantive); Jud. 15, l i, alUr su\ iir unio me ;
Frov. 94, >8.In Gen. 11 mid new, ksi he put feirtk kit hand, &c., ~,B ia to
be regarded aa virtually dependent on a cobortativ^ wbieb inunediatelj afterwuids
(vene 13) is ehanged into an bistorlc tense ; cC nbo Gen. a6 7. 31, 31. 4a, 4. Ex.
13, 17. I Sam. 13, 19. 97, II. Pa. 38, 17, in every caae after ^9*161^ nQM ^
ftc. Itiou/^f dcCi, / mt$a beware Ua^ Ac
Rem. According to | 107. 7, *} b nntnnlly followed by the Impciftot (oe
jtUttive); for the exceptions, i Sam 30, 6. a Ki. a, 16, see $ 107. note 3; ampu,
moreover, 3 Ki. 10, 33 n3~t^~fa looi lest there he here. Sec
X (*) ^^"^^ with the imperfect, Ex. 30, aa 2 Sam. 14, 14 (in Jer.
23, 14 read' the infinitive Z^V for ^2^*, in 27, S ^K^^ for Tn Kzek. 13, 3
^tO ^ri^3 is a relative clanae go vented by |)

* according to tixiags which heme
not seen.
y S. Two negatives in the same sentence do not neutralize each

other (as in ntmmiUt\ non rnim), but make the negation the more
emphatic (like ovx oMf&, o^k o8a|ic, nuUimm, imiv); e.g. mm
I KL 10^ 91 t'l^^^ * i6 \% sU9tr wot atcomded as
noikmg at alt (in 2 Chron. 9, 20 without Zeph. 2, 2 (if the text
is correct) Kb^'t^^ be/ore there shall (not) come. This esi>ecially
applies 10 the compounds formed by liic union of T?? or with

"PO without (% ii9.>'), e.g. Is. 5, 9 (6. 11) SC*^* P^<D (for which in
jer. 2, 15 3^ ^r^r^P), prop, without no inhabiiant, i.e. so that m>

inhabitant is left there. On the other hand, in Is. 50, 2 DJ? PW?
the ~|P is causative, becmist Uure is no water; as also in Ex. 14. ti
"TV Î'fon i> r because there were no s Ki. i, 3. 6. 16. In Ecdes.
3,ti ^y^^ ixcept that (jnt so iMatwum cannot, itc.y
s a. The negati?e sometnnes extends its influence from the fim

to a second negative sentence parallel with it (which maj or naj aoi
Sentences connected by Wdw. 509
have Wiittf)', e. pr. i Sam. 2, 3 hiik not so much arrogancy; fft (not)
boasling fomt- oui of your mouth; Kx. 28, 43. Lev. 19, 12. 22, 9.
15 set Num. 16, 14. 23, 19. Deut. 7, 35. Is. 23, 4. a8, 27. 38, i8
47, 14. ack. 16, 47 Ps- 9 19 5- 35. I9- 3^, a. 44, 19. 75, 6.
Job a8, 17 (so ^ f&4v . . . w4? in Job 3, 11 also affects the

puallel claase)*
U8. Ritirictioe Mul Inienswi Ciautet, 1
The particles PI only, serve to introduce restrictive clauses,
and D3, C]H besides, even, intensive clauses. It is to he observed,

that the force of these particles does not necessarily affect the word
which immediately follows (as is the case with Gen. 7, 23. 34, 15;
n Gen. 6, 3. Amos 3, a ; even VS\ haih he indud ofUyf Num. I8 a;
Oi Gen. a 7, 34. Job 7, it; W Dent, tg, 17), but very frequently
extends to the whole of the (btlowing sentence. Thus with W> e.g.
Num. 14,9. 1 Ki. 17, 13. Pfov. 17, ri. Job 13,15. 14, 38. 16,7. 23,6;
PI Gen. ao, 11. 84, 8. Ps. 32, 6. Prov. 13, 10; 33 Gen. 27, 33.
3a, ax (nin Da); 1 Satn. 22, 7. 28, 20. Zech. 9, II. Prov. 17, 26.
20, II* ^ Job 14, 3. To, 4. In Mai. i, 10 and Job 2, 10 is
plactnl before two co-ordinate sentences, although, strictly speaking-,
it applies only to the second. Comp. the analogous examples

in { 150. M.
{ 164. Sentences cmmecki hy Wdw,

Waw copulativum'^ (^) seiAcs to connect together two or more <i
sentences, or single words (on its various vocalization, cf. 104. d-g\
* For further puticakis of the nae ofwaweaÛUivum, see Gesenias' 7'jkiSMtntt,
i. 393 sqq. On
hs use in the eo-ordinfttico of limilar tcatet and moods (eg. five
Imperfcctf ooDieaitive in Gen. 95, 34, five perfects with tSjep wdl atof dtadinttar m
tenses and moods, the remarks made in the trentmeot of the tenses will Miffico.
With regnrd to the interconnexion of single nouns by 1 (which strictly speaking
is always; reall) n contraction of so many clauses into a single sentence) the foUoW'
ing observations may be made :
(a) Contrary to EnKlitli* usage, which in lengthy ennroenttionf oms the emd
to connect only the last member of tiie series, in Heb rew polysyndeton ^ eosetomuft
as in Gen. 1 3, 16 wiw copalativnm six^times, 24, 35 seven times, 15, 19 qq. nine
times, and in ]o<>. 7, 34 ten times. Sometimes, however, oiily the last two words
are joined (so in a series of three member?. Gen. 5, 3a. 10, i. n, 26 13, 3. 14. t.
.ô> .10. Sec; the last three out of a scries of fotir, Ter. a, 26); less frequently only
the first two, Ps. 45, 9; cf. 13a. d. The formula Di&'i>B' ^SCJ^ yesterday (and)
HU day before yesterday^ Ex. 5, 8 and elsewhere, is always without the copdn.
414 The Parts of Speech. [123*
if Abstract ideas include also

(r) CeUudims in the feiii. fonn \ genenllj fern, putldplet nied inlMtutiinftlly,
eqyeeiaUy at the comprehensiTe detigfuUion of % munbcr of ffrsms, e.g. nrnk
(fem. of traoeUit^t prop, tke tmeffit^ (compa&y), Le^ tnvdliitg penon
(a ouavan) ; (fem. of n^k Mtf g^mf W xitt) tJU wmpany tf jtila (alto
frequently used of thoie who had rettnned home tgaill); 1138^ (that which inhabits)
Le. /i popul(U{on^ Is. I3, 6. Mic. i, ii sq. ; flll^^k (prop, that which is hostile)
the enemy, Mic. 7, 8. 10 (comp. Mic. 4, 6 sq. M<r halting, cast off, d> ivtn aiuay i. e.
those who halt, Sec); H^T <

the abject) the poorest sort ; of living beings whicli are
not persons, comp. n*n îhat which lives) in the sense o{ cattle^ beasts; njT a shoal
o/Jtsh, Gen. 1, a6 (but.in Jon. 2, a as a fs-orptm unifatis, comp. letter for 3*1 a Jish,
which in verses i and 1 1 is used as a nouuti uuj/uiis). Comp., moreover, ("1^23
deaJ body, Is. 26, 1 9, and elsewhere (construed as masculine), for a htap of dead
boi,Qti the poetic personifications, comprismg the man of a natioii Xtj means
ofna dauf^tr^ in n3, (equivalent to ^^11) mj^ ipmitirymen,
ut aboveb letter .
/ Conwrsely the feminine form of substantives is sometimes used (as in Arabic)
(4/)
as a nomen unitaiis, i.e. to indicate a examjile of n il v, ',ich is denoted
by the masculine form comp a Jlut (i Ki. 9, 26), n*3X a single ship (Jon.
;
I. 3 sqq.); "^"^ hair 'coll.'*, iTnyU' a single hair 'Jud. 20, 16; in the plural, I Sam.
14.45. ^^s. 40. 13); "^'t^ a poem, frequently collective, rH^â single sott^; so prob-
ably also niNJl a fig (the corresponding masculine tin is collective in Arabic);
rUU'lS* a lily (also ?15'Ê^) njlS a brick (Arab, libitta, but lioin collect! vc\ .Sec
;
U (e) The feminine is also used for things without life (as being weaker or less
important), which are named from their resemblance to organic things exprcs^d
by the conesponding mascnlino fonn ; comp. sid* (of the body), thigh, nsi^
or nsi^ pari^ imkf (of a conntiy, house, fte.) ; n|Dy^4Aitf, nnypirMiwr.

On a similar distinction between die maacnline for natural, and the feminine for
artificial objects* see | 87. o.
V Rem. The juxtaposition of the masculine and feminine from the same stem
serv'cs sometimes to express entirety; e.g. Is. 3, i HiJ-'lJ'P^ ^^'^y ^^^/^t
i.e. every kind of support. For similar rrou|)in<>s in ihe case of peiSODS| KC
Is. 43, 6. 49, 3 2. 60, 4 \soHS and daughters); 49, 23, iicties. 2, 8.
f 128. The R^tsmialion of Plural Ideas by Means 0/ CoUeciiim,

and by the RepetUim Words*
a Bside the plural endings treated in 87. a^t\ the language employs
other means to express a plurality of living beings or things
(<;) Certain words employed exclusively in a collcclive sense, while
the individual members of the class are denoted by special words
{nomma u/tiAilis, but not in the same sense as in 122./).
'Comp. in Greek 1} tnv, th cai^tlry (as well as Ivwur^), 4 ini^Xot, lidt.

It 80 and diewheic^ ihe tamd mft^
Digitized by Google
} XS3'] The Representation ofPiurai Ideas, etc, 415
Thns *1p3 eattk. oxrn'^ fevcn joined with ntimerals, e. c. Fx. il, "ip^ nU'tDn
yJi'tf ^ra</ ^ (attU , but 111^ a <'jr; [4<3f small t aille, i. e. sheep and goats (/i^Xo)i
comp. Job I, 3 jt^Sr^D^K ^lyilB^ ;nvf thousattd shup', but a nVr^ head of
twuiM tattU (a sheep or a goat]. Other moie or ktt cammao colkcdvei aie
(prop, that whidi prowb or roans) wild Uuis, ^ ^wrfaapc prop, ir^fi^g)
c mtmtir tfUttk tAUdrm; t<&^/ruk gnm yoong plants, P'V grem^ Le.
ktrh^ i. e.
tcgetalion in gaeial ; ^ 4mftv

trîmg tkmgs (of mall creatBiei), fne^ jriM|gr /'Aiiiipr.
US'! tkariots or mMlemU, HBT} mrMW,
tsnpi
{^) The collective use of suLstantives wliich at the same time serve d
dsnomirm um'tatrs ; thus, D*}^ (never in plur.) means both man (homo)
and men (homiiKs); CTN a man (vir) and men (viri); H^K woman and
wmm (Jud. 2 1, i6. x Sam. 21, 6); '1$']^ a iocusi, but usually a swarm
of locusis; B^) sout and (persons); siajf and jAi9r (Gen.
3^1 37)1 ^ ^ ^''"^^ su^<l ^'''^ ^fP''^: *^ ^'iSi^ (Iu<l*
19, 12. Jer.4, 29); a leaf and fcHage; a /Am/ and pkmts,
her^; Yi a tree and /r* (as it were foliage); frmi and fruits;
Tfv a shrub and shrubs; in isolated instances also nouns like *V3$
man-strvant^ ^C??^ nuiid-srvant^^\'C:n ass, ^j.v (comp. Gen. 32, 6).
On the singular (especially of gentile names) with the article to include
all individuals of the same sj)ecies, comj). 126./. On the special
meaning of the plurals formed from certain coliectiveSi see 124. L

(r) The feminine ending; see { las.x.
{d) The repetition of single words, and even of whole groups c
of words, especially to express entirety, or in a distnbative sense.
The foUowing cases are more particukirly to be noticed
I. The repetition of one or more words to express the idea of epetyt aU,
s tri^ lA^ Gett. 39, 10, &c., 4Ai|f by 4Sî HS^ jtear by jmr, .
Dent 14, as ; t^K mny man, Ex. 36, 4; with 3 before the second word
(bnt only in late passages), e.g. fif^ bj i Chron. xa, as ; n^tb
juMT byyMTt Dent 15, ao. 1 Sam. x, 7 (bat in versej TVOW^ BSâ OJBf
Num. 34, I. Jud. 16, ao. 20, 30sq. x Sam, 3, 10 as at ctner times g or before both
words, as 1^133 "^^33 Ex. 16, ax, ivery morning (so before a group of words,
Ler. S4, 8); in the same scnsf n1o with the distribtitivc !>, "if^^ "^Pj^ ^ Chron.
9, 27; with a single plural, Cnj^sp Ps. 73, 14, or D")f^3i) Jot) 7, 18 along with
D*y;i^ every moment. Also with the two woids united by means of wJw copulative^
B^K} S5^ Pi. 87, 5, or B^'W Est. i, 8; n^l nil aU generations, Deut 33, 7
* The plural form Dnj?3 from 1^3 is found only in very late Hebrew,
Neh. 10, 37 (where according to the Mantua edition, Giusburg, &c., \3*3tftf
skeep^ is also to be read ; Baer, iiowever, Im and a Chxoa. 4, 3. Id Amo

6, Ia read, with Ilitzig,
"^S^*
4i6 The Parts of Speech.
Di^ Est. 3, 4; comp. Est. tS, 9. Ezra 10, 14. i Chron. a6, 13 (cf. Che)'ne
Bampton iMturUt p- 439, and Driver, Introd. p. 505, No. 35); sometimes (bot
with die CMeptkm <rf Pk. 45, 18 only in very late passages) with a pkoUMdc *^
preceding, Bk 145, 13. Est* 11. >8* > Chnm. xi, xa kl etoewhene.
a. Repedtioa of words in aa czpiessly distrihUwe scute* (whidi may to some
extent be noticed in the examples under letter c) cquiTaknt to om tfk, ftcp
e.g. Num. 14, 34 forty days Di'> CA^ cmmting for every day a year;
comp. Ezek 24, 6. Ex. a8, 34 (three words repeated); also with the additioa of
nab apart, iâi) nij; my ;<rj' //rwtf by itself Gen. 3a, 17 ; comp. Zech. la, la.
Most freqnently with the addition of a numrral 'comp. for the simple repetition of
nnmerals for the saine purpose, 5 17,4 y ,
.m l with the words not only in groups
of two (Lev. 34, 8. Num. 13, a. 51, 4) or three (Num. 7, 11. 17, ai), but even
of six (Ex. a6, 3) or teven (Ex. a^, 33. a6, 19. 31. 35) ; hi Ex. 2$, 35 five words
even three timet repeated*.
g 3. Repetition to express aa exoeptioaal or at least tnpetfine quality; e.g.
a KL a5, 25 which were of gold, go!J, of tiHur, silver, i.e. made of poit gold
and pure silver; Dent, a, 37 '5)111? along by the high vtay; comp.
Num. 3,9. 8, 16 thfy are git en, given to him, i. e. given exclnsivcly for his service,
for his very own. Also with a certain hyperbole in such cx.implcs as a Ki. 3, r6
D'2S 0*33 nothing but trenches; Gen. 14, 10 "lon n^K3 ri^K3 ail asphalt-pits.^
Repetition serves to intensify the expression to the higbai d^;ree in Jud. 5, aa

if nasem, ef tkt vioUmt pnmsings of his $tvmg miS, Ex. 8, to {emmtius
kiaps), and Joel 4, 14 (etuniltts mtUtiiudes) i cf. also DÔ Ex. 33, 30
iy HUte and l^te, very gradually f cf. f 133. k.
y 4. Repetition with the copula to express of more than one kind; thus Dcut. 25,13
^Frov. ao, 10) pKl a weight and a weight, i.e. two kinds of weight (hence
the addition p'cat and small : Ps. la, 3 3^1 3^2 tvith two JUm/t / Aiart,Lt.
with a douhle-deaUng hearty cf.
3^ 3^ fei^S t Chron. la, 33.
UM. 2^ Van'tms Uses 9/ the Plural'/orm\
a , I* The plural is by no means used in Hebrew solely to express

a number of individuals or separate objects, but may also denote them
collectively. This use of the pkiia! rxpresses either (<;) a combina-
tion of various external constituent parts (plurals of local extension),
'
( jmp. in the New Testament St. Mark vi. 39 sq. avftwoaia ovftw6cuit wpaatai
vpaaiai (Wcirsackcr, tischweise^ beetweise),
* These repetitions of larger groups of words bdoDg entirely to the/VMr/^ C0d$
in the Pentatench, and are nnqnestiooably hidicttioos of a late period of the
language. Of quite a diflerent kind are tach examples as E<ek. 16, 6, where
the repetition of four words serves to give greater solemnity to the promise, unless
here, a< certait^ly in i, 30^ it is a mere dittegrapign the LXX omit the repetition
in both passaf,'es.
Comp. Dietrich, ' Uber Ik^rill und Form des hebr. i'iurais,' m the Abhamii.
mrMr GrammOik, Leipzig, 1846, p. a sqq.
Digitized by Google
1 124-j The Various Uses of the Plurai-JornL 417
or (b) a more or less intensive Tocnssing of the characteristics inherent
in the idea of the stem [abstract plurals, u>inllv rendered in English
bv iorms in -hood, -ness, -ship). A variety of the f)lurals de^cribed
under {b)^ in which the secondary idea of initnsity or of an inlernal
multiplication of the idea of the stem inaj be clearly seen, is (r) the
pbiralis excelitntiat or pluralu mamlatit,
Eiamples of (tf) : Plonls of toeat txiMsitm to denote localities in genenl, bnt d

espcdaUj level surCtm (the stu^Ki-plmi), wbnot m them the idea of a whole
composed of innnnenble separate parts or points is most evident, at
( 88. ti) heairf! Vo-np. also DTpVlD heights of heaven, Is. 33, 16. Job 16, 19;
elsewhere DViDj ; D^D wtder; D*0* (the broad sarlace of the sea) poetically for
D* sta; D*39 ^prop. the side turmd toxvarJs any one, then' surfare in iêral,
usually faa- , D^^'inX (he Inick, Ex. 26, i i. 33, 23, 5cc., DnXiV tHik. nape of the
neck*, also n^rS^D fî<- phiu at the head, Jl'l^no place at the Jut : Onaj
place on thi other sijf [oi a river); Q*J50Jff3 iLpth, D^J^TniS (also pfTlt?) distance^
D'I12w p led. Gen. 49, 4 l
unles^, uilh Dilltiiann, it is to be explained in the sense
oidouhh bed. i.e. iorus ,

D^JZti^p Ps. 46, 5 , axid H^JSLi'D 132, 5, dweUing (^perhaps
also O'SnX encampment, in posâgck like i Sim. 4, 10). The last four belong,
howcvti, to poetic style, and axe better ledkoncd amongst the pbtnds 0/ ampii/ica^
turn treated under letteis d-/. So perhaps Q^jnr (Ps. 63, 7. Job 17, 13; M
bat Gen. 49, 4. Ps. 13a, 3, and elsewhere In the singular) ; probablji however,
D^fX^ (prop, strata) refers to a number of coverings or pUlowi.
T%e plmal of cxtennon is ssed to denote a lengthened period ^time in
Hirnity (eveilasling agcs\
Rem. The plural of extension includes also a few examplt s which were formerly c
explained as simply poetic jjlurals, e.g. Job 17, i D*")3p ^<.v<irrj- are (ready)
for me, i.e. the place whtrc there are many of them :as it were the graveyard
is my portion. Job 21, 3-'. 2 Chron. 16, 14; cf. i Ki. a, 20.
Of {b): the tolerably numerous ab&lract plurals, mostly of a pailicular form d

{^t&lSm, qitjMim^ &c.) may be divided into two dasscs. Tliqr snm up either
the ^HdiUem or fMoHiUs inbcient in the idea of the stem, or else the various
single aett of which an action is composed. Compu or the fiisl dass, D^îlB
and r/nm ymHh, M tî Onxg^ yûth; maidenhood, Tlb^
bridal state; W^yOlO coftdition of a sojourner, D^b'S fleshliness (only in Prov. 14,30;
of. Delitzsch) ; Q^H life (the abstract idea of the qualities of a living being)
D^^^ <hHdieuiusM, tTt^ ilindtuts, pennrsttuu.
* Comp. the same use of the plural in rh. a-rlpva, tk varra, rd rp&xriyâ, prae-
tordia, renn'ees, fataes ; on plurals of extension in {general, comp. the prepositions
of place axid iium in the plur. form, 103. n. D^^SD is not a ca^ in point,
in the sense of letter (properly a sheet folded into several pages ; elsewhere also
1DD) I Ki. SI, 8sqq. a KS. 10, t. 19, 14 (Is. 37, 14; reibred to afterwards by
the nngular snSs) j la. 39, i . Jcr. S9, 35. 3s, 14 {afiir being folded, pievionilj
se
4i8 The Paris of Speech,
f Tlwre aie also a mimbcr of plaials, found almost esdnshrdy b poetiy (some>
tiraea aloQg with ttie sragnlar), which axe eridentlj intended to intensify Uie idea
of the stem, as 0^3^lt might. Is. 40, a6 ; D^3n^ (as well as nmt) and T\\S>tCllk
faithfulmss ; (according to ( 93. /, only in the oonstnict state ploral or

with suffixes = happiness rf\ h:if'f>y; ri^*3 Is. 27, 11 and HÛH Is. 40, 14,
dec. (keen) u^yi-^-^tanding ; D'yi i( h 16 and fl^P^ i Sam. 3, 3 (thoront^h)
knowledge ; ninm Job 12, 6 and CHDnD Is. 32, l8 (full) confidence ; n*1213
^'abundant) blessing, Ps. 21, 7 ; TiSVT^ Ps. 5, 10 (very) destrudion ; n^HDH Dan.
i>. 23 (greatly) beloved ; nten Ps, 76, 11, Sec. I'ficrcc^ wrath ; Jl^D'jn Dan. 12, 2
utter) contempt ; VXCIO Gen. 46, 2 an important) vision; DHB^D uprightness ;

nb^nn perversity; D^ZB'n and D'SrnO (thick) darkness; DÎTIDD a (close)
hiding-place ; DH^JS nobility; D'3C!^ Isu aS, i faincss ; n^JTXnV (com-

I)lete) aridity; Xj^PJOO sweet nets ; u'^gnp preciousness; D^yS^S' delight;
0*3Tg and D^JJjp pleasure; D^pm comfassim; flhUp Ps. aj, a m/, r^/>-i*.
MM/; mbViD Am. 3, 9 Awam/A On the other band, nÔDn wm^Smi (Pkov. i, ao
and elsewhere) can haidlj be a //trm/C* the essenoe of wWdom, orwisdimi per-
onified), bat Is a dngnlar (see f 86. 1),
f The summing np of tiie several parts of an action is expressed in Q^t33n the

emMmiMg, 0*^93 atonement, D*K?P (prop, filling, sc. of the hand) ordination
to the priesthood, D dismissal, txtril'uticn, D^nHB evjâr-ing (of
a seal, Sec); SX'Sit^^ fornication, D^3\3| 7uhoreihn: D^Si<3 adultery; t3*pn3 (prop,
no doubt, warm compa<:sion) consolation, D'*^*3n"l suf^plii-ation, D'T13 Job 7, 4
(restless) tossim^ to and fro. gleanint,^ ; perhaps also ni3*33 Ps. 4, I. 6, X,
and elsewhere, if it means the playing on stringed instruments, and 0''3b|^

Is. T, 23 bribery, unless it be a plural of number*.
;Of (r) ; Uie pImrtUis txtetlnUiat or maiesiatUf as has been remarked above,
is property a taxiety of the abstract ploral, since it soma np the several diarac-
teristics' belonging to the idea, besides possessing (like some of the substantives
/ under letter e) the secondary sense of an intensification of the original idea
I so especially Gcuihead. God \\q be distirjî'^hed from the numerical ph1r.1l
\ g(*ds, Ex. 12, 12, and cUewliore). The supposition that D%1^X is to be regarded
j
^
as merely a remnant of earlier polytheistic views (i.e. as originally only a/
' Mnvcr I.nnibcrt in thf Kn^tt! dty /tuffs Juiver, xk\v. p. 106 sqq.. ennmcmte?
no less than ninety-five words ending in im, which in his opinion are to be rârded
as pluralia tanlum.
' The Jewish grammarians call snch plurals Jl^flbn *^3"1 plur. virium or
vtrtmHtM ; later grammarians call them pint. txeeUenttae, m^gitiiudims, or /Afr.
maiestaliciu. This last name may
have been suggested by the snr osed by kings
when speaking of themselves (comp. already i ^facc 10, 19. 11, 31); and the
I)!ura! iisfd by dod in Gen. !. 2<>. Tl, 7. Is. 6, S has been incorrectly evplnine<l
in this way. It is, however, either eommunicative (including' the attendant augcis;
so at events in Is. 6, 8, comp. also Gen. 3, 2a), or according to others, an
all
indication of the fullness of powtr and m^gkt Implied in wi>fi (see Diltmaan
00 Gen* i, s6) ; bnt it is best ciqtlaioed as a plnml of ulf-deUdtntim. The nae

of the plnml aa a iSofm of respectful addicm b ^te for^n to Hcbiew.
X
Digitized by Google
124 ] The Various Uses of the Plural-Jorm, 419
numerical pinral) is t least highly improbable, and, motcover, would not explain
tiie analogom plurals (see below). That the kognage hat entinelj rejected the
idea of nnmerical plomllty in D^r6K (whenever it denotes otu God), is proved

especially by its being ahnost invariably joined wi& a singalar attribute (comp.
f 13** P*9 '^^^ 7' elsewhere^ ^

Acooidingly, OVjS^
mat have been naed oriâlly not only as a nnmerical but also as an afastmet pinral
(oone^KNidinc to the Latin numen, and oar Godkiad), and like other abstracts
of the same kind, have l>een transferred to a concrete single god (even of the
heathen).
To the same class (and probably toimed on the analogy of beloDg *t
the plurals D^r*1p ihf Most Holy (only of Yahweh), Hos. 12. I. Prov. 9, 10. 30, 3
(comp. D'Cnp D^"}>|>^ Jos. 24, 19, and the Aram. P^''^);
(he Afost High. D.ia.
7, ih); and probably D^&'^r) (usually taken in the sense of ^nairs) the image of
a god, used especially for obtaining oracles. Certainly in i Sam. 19, 13. 16 only
Mr< image is intended ; in moat other places only one image may be btended *
in Zech. 10, a alone is it most natnral to suppose a nnmerical plural. In Ecclcs*
7 DVlbS suprtmus (of God) is doabtihl ; according to othem it Is a nnmerical
ploral, su^riores.
Further, D^31K, as well as the sin^kr HordshiiO lonJ, e. g. HU'i'^ D'31bt f
a cruel lord. Is. 19, 4; ^''^KH *y^S (he lord of the land, Gen. 42, 30, comp.
Gen. 3a, 30; so especially with the suflixcs of the 2nd and 3rd persons ^j'SlK,
rjlX, &c., also (cxcfpt I Sam. 16, i6) ; but in ist sing, always ^3hfct'.
.So also C'H'^ (with suffixes) Icid, master (of slaves, cattle, or inanimate things;
but in the sense of maritus^ always in the singular), e.g. Ex. 21, 29,
Is. 1.3, ftc
On the other hand, ive mttst vîfd as doubUhl a number of participles in the ^
pinral, whidi, being nsed as attribntes of God, resemble phtniii exctUenHaes
thns^ "9 Maktr, Job 35, 10; Hfjfi 1*^^ ^ M9 i
as, 11 ; DH^pi^ siretchh^ thtm put, Is. 4a, 5 ; for all these fonns may also
be ei^lained as singular, according to S 93. XT '.^Vfe'^) Is. 3, I3 might also be

rârded as nnother instance, unless it be a numerical plural, /Aeir oppressors;
moreover. VDÎD him who lif/ctk it ttf, ^s. to, 15^ Vnf'b' him rvho sctidcfh him^
Prov. 10, 26. 22, 21. 25, 13 I in jtarallcUsm with VyiS'. These latter plurals,
however (including VDÎD), may probably be more simply explained as indicating

an indcfmite individual, comp. letter 0 below. For 'piOfe' Ps. lai, 5 (textus
rcccptus) and ^^K^â Eccles. la, i (textus receptus) the singular should be read,
with Baer.
'
Even in Gen. 31, 34, notwithstanding the plural suffix in DCfe'llland Dn**^,
since the construction of these abstracts as nnmerical plurals is one of the pecu-
liarities of the E-document of the Hexateuch; comp. Gen. ao^ i^. 35, 7, and
h 145-
On *3h|t (for âiK) as a name of God, ct 5 135. q.

'
!]'3i!a > which hi la. 54, 3 b in parallelism with mnst then be explained
as metdy lianned on analogy.
ICS
Digitized by Google
420 The Paris of Speech. [124.
/ Rem. I. (0) Coherent idMtaiicea ftc, m noetiiy regltfded mifAr, mid aie,
aoeordinglj, ftlauMt ilwaje lepreMnled by noons in die lingttktr, eottpi (IDK /^fM
(Aki/, *ib9 19 4mm*, m; ani^, sUmt, ra^ 3^
1^ mKr,
iMrGI, ^lu/, M gnmnd^ PlamU liowfer fon&ed
from some of these words expreiting materials in order to denote Mpante pctions
taken from the whole in manafiMtttie {plurals pf the result) or parts oUwnriie
detached from it ;
thus, D^''!3 lintn gamunis ; D^fiD3 silt/er puces. Gen. 41, 35. 35
D^RB'n3 (dual) fetters of brass ; D*2fy It'pia {timber for building or sticks for
burning) ; also in a wider sense, D^!'''']2 alloy to be "separated by smelting. Is.
I, 35 ; T\Y^^fraim4nU of earth, Prov. 8, 36, comp. Job %%,(s 3n| Jli')Dy dust
of gold.
Ill (^) To thr class of plurals of the result belong also a few names of natural
products, wlicn represented in an artificial condition ; thus, D^Cjn whcai m gram
(threshed wheat), as distinguished from Jlten wheat (used collectively) in the ear;
comp. the same distinction between Dn9D3 and HDSS spelt-, D'Bhy and nehv
(the singular only preserved in tbe Mislma) htUUs ; D^yb and barley
also D^rif^B limn, n^Q (to be Infencd from ^ri^B) JUuc,
n if) Finally, the distinction between hlatd and D^D'l requirca to be specially
noticed. The singnlar is always nsed when tlie lilood is regaided as an oiganic
uni^, hence also of mcnstraal blood, and the blood of sacrifices (collected hi
the basin and then sprinkled), and in Nun. a3 S4 <tf the blood gushing from
wonnds. On the other hand, as a sort of plnial of the lesnlt and at the same
time of local extension, denotes blood which is shed, when it appears as blood*
stains (Is. i, 15) or as blood-marks (so evidently in Is. 9, 4). But since bio -d-
stains or blood-marks, as a rule, suggest blood shed in murder (although Q^p"!?
also denotes the blood which flows at childbirth or in circumcision), D^CI acquired
êven in very early passages) simply the sense of a bloody deed, and especially of
blooiiguiUiness, Ex. 22, i sq. and elsewhere.
O 3. In some few cases the plural is us<<l to denote an indefinite singular ;
certainly i>o Deut. 17,5

in
TvV^'"''^ "''^^ ^^^^ / Ju^' I2 7 ^î'S
*' the cities, i.e. in one of Uxe cities of Gilead; Zech. 9, 9 ril3hl<"|a (comp.
Cant a, 9) ; Ex. a 1, 33 iT"^^ (where evidently only oiu diild is thought of, though
certainly in connexion with a contingency which nay Im vqieated) ; comp. also
EcdeSb 4t 10 {if 01U tf Am
faU\,^ probably also Gen. 8, 4. i Sam. 17, 43.
Neh. 3p 8. 6, a but not Gen. 19, 29, since the same dociment (Gea. 13, is)
;
make?! l ot dwell in tin cities of the Jordan valley; in Gen. St, 7 D^33 denotes
the class with which the action is conoenied,
/ 8. When a substantive is followed by a genirive, and the compound

idea thus formed is to be expressed in ihc pluial, this is done
(<i) Most naturally by u>ing the plural of the nomen rrgfns, e. g.
mighly mm of valour (prop, heroes of strength), i Cliron.
7, 2. 9 ; so also in compounds, e.g. T?) I Sam. aa, 7, as the

plur. of ^^îpf}| Bittjamite; but also
Digitized by Google
}i35.] Deiermination of Nouns, 421
{p) By using the plural of both nouns e.g. O^J>^J i Chron. 5; q

0'*^? i /rwn j|<Mttff, Is. 4a, S3; comp. Ex. 34, i, ftc.
(ta^ nh^^ /ad/r o/stim; but Ex. 31, 18 IJ^ nh^); Num.
13, 33. Deut I, 38. Jos. 5, 3. 6, 4. 3 Ki. 14, 14. 35, 33. Jer. 41, 16.
Ewa 3, 3, &c. l^^^nicn the pcopk of the couiUry; 3 Cbron. 26, 14;
so perhaps jm ^ (jod', Ps. 39, 1. 89, 7 (according to others
sons of gods)] or finally even
{c) jij using the plural of the nomm rectum; e.g. HUK n^^ Ex. r
6, 14. Num. I, 2. 4 sqq. and elsewhere, as plur. of 3t< father s

house^ fatriifv
: nlD3n n*3 houses of the high phicts, 2 Ki. 17, 29
(also nican ^na 33, 19); nrnîx riâ the houses of their idols, I Sam.
31, 9. Ezek. 46, 34 ; comp. also Jud. 7, 35 the head ofOrtb and Zeehf
i.e. the heads, Ac.
Rem. Whoi a sabttontive (in a distributive tenie) widi a mAx lefen bade to S
a plural, the nngnlar Ibtm of the tabrtatttive snffices, since the idea of pluiality
it already adequately expressed by the suffix, e.g. SU*B os (for ord^ 09mm, Pfe.
>7i 10; OfOl their r^ght hand, Ps. 144, 8 [so in the English RV.].
I25. Determination of Nouns in general Determination of
Proper Names,
1. A noun may either be dctcrniinate in itself, as a proper name

or pronoun (sec below, letters d am! /'), or be made so bv its context.
In the latter case, the determination may be effected either by prefixing

the article (see 126), or by the connexion of the noun (in the
construct state) with a following determinate genitive^ and consequently
also (according to { 33. e) by its union with a pronominal suffix
( 137. tf). It is to be taken as a fundamental rule, that the deter-
mination can only be effected in one of the ways here mentioned;

the article cannot be prefixed to a proper name, nor to a noun
followed by the genitive, nor can a proper name be used in the
construct slate. Deviations from this rule are cither only apparent
or have arisen from a corruption of the text.
Rem. Only in a few noun made expressly inditenninate by the h

pas!?afê is a
addition of irw in the sense of our indefinite article; comp. Ex. 16, 33. Jud. 9, 53.
13, s. I Sam. 1, I. 6, 7. 7, 9. is. 37, i. i Ki. 13, 11. 19, 4. ao, 13, 22, 9. t Ki.
* Cf. Konig, Lehrgtbaude, ii. 43H sq., according to wbom the plural of the
principal word exercises an influence on the determining genitive.
422 The Parts of Speech, [ "5-
4, 1. 7, 8. 8, 6. 12, 10. Ezek 8, 8. .^7, 16. "Dan. 8, 3. lo, 5 (in 8, 1$ ^h^^ ^^flC
i. e. ottCf y'xz. a holy one, is opposed lo oiiothcr;.
It ii fnrtlMr to be noticed, that in Hdiiew the phcnemcnon tomeUnice occurs,

vhidi the Anb gnunmuUuit call indeittminatmess ftr iki sate ^ ump^^Hmi
e. If. 8 ai *kaU JUi 3irr^3BO Jrmn a swords i. e. ftom m irruistiik
mcrd (God's twoid) ; comp. Is. 28, 3 1^3 ; 3 Suo. 6, 2 XUff ; Hoi. 3, i n||W( smck
a woman, without doubt to be referred to the Gomer mentioned in cap. i ; Amos
6, 14 ; Pti. 77, 16 yht2 Prov. ai, 12 P'H^, if with Delitzsch it
; *o be referred
to God ; Job S, 10 D*^D meaning; important words, but in 15, 13 p?D reproachful
worth, Comp. on this poiat, % 117 ^, note i, Delituch,yVa/ivMM, ed. 4, p. 79.
d 2. Real proper nouns, as being the names of things (or persons)

only once met with, are sufBciently determinate in themselves. Such
names, therefore, as nin^, HH, ^PV\, WP, ^ÎD do not admit of the
article', nor can they be in the construct blalc. On the other hand,
not only Gentilic names (as denoting the various individuals belonging
to the same class), but also all those proper names, of which
the appellative sense is still sufficiently evident to the mind, or at least
has been handed down from an earlier period of the Umguage,

frequently (often even as a rule) talce the article (according to { 126. e),
and may even be followed by a genitive.
f Examples. Like the above-mentioned proper names of individuals, countries,

nd cities, so alio natiooil Dnws, which e IdentlcAl in foxm widi the UMne of
the founder of tfte nee (e.g. (tO^, Q^K, 2KiD), are always detenninate hi
themselves. Of Geotilic names (e.g. n3];;n the Jfebrtw, IfOrnun,
Gen. 40^ 15; ^î!:3n /Ae CMuutiHe) the plntal D'ncrba, even when meaning
tk Fhiliitines, b generally tued wHhont the axtide (but cL x Sam. 4, 7, dec., 'An)
so always DînCS .Evident appellatives (analogous to snch modem names as
the Hague, U Bavre) are H^^n the hill, in the construct state b^'Wff ny3|, i.e.
the Gibcak named after Saul to distinguish it from others; HDIH the height;
the heap; |l33^n (prop, the white mountain) the Lebanon; "IKVI (prop.
the river) the Nile; comp. Amos 8, 8 D^")>*r5 ">it<^3 like the river of Egypt;
JUI'n the Jordan (according to Scybold, MUtheiL und Nachr, des DPV^ i8j^
p. 1 1 ,
probably, originally the drinking'pleue).
f Rem. I. In a few instances original appellatives have completely assumed the

character uf real piopcr names, and aie therefore used without the article \ thus
* Coosequently, nE^3Dn Deut. 3, 13. Jos. i, 12, &c (in the Deuteronomist) in
the combination HK'jpn CDb (for which elsewhere ni?:p DDEJ*) is to be regarded
not as a proper name but as a Gentilic name ( = the tribe of the MoHOfiites) , for
which in Dent 39, 7 ^B'iOn is used, as in 10, 8 nj^n V the triU of the Lnita,
and in Jnd. 18, i î^l the tribe of the Danites.ln Jos. 13, 7 n^^DH (like
Gctttilie names in ) is even osed adjectivally.
Digitized by Google
{125.] DeUrminatioH of Nouns. 423
D*n^K G0J, to denote the one true Clod (as elsewhere TWTT i Gen. i, i aud iu
generally in tuis document of the I'ent. up to Ex. 6, elsewhere sometimes
6 0(6i (comj). 126.^) ; also the sin-;. ni^N 6W, the Most Jligh .after bx), and
///c' Alniighty never lake the article. Moreover, Dl{< Adam from Geo. 5> 1
oinvards nreviouslv in 2, 7, Src, D'SNH Z/*^ first WiZ//; ; fcb' Sa/an, i Chron. 3J, 1
(but Zcch. 3, 1. Job 1, 6 and elsewhere aJicrsary).

To the class of notms originally appellative, which the language regards as g
proper naiiia ftiid which coaftcqncntly never take the article^ belong alio cenain
archaic words moetly used only by poetv Mcb as
of the body of water which encircles tlie earth. Gen. t a and elsewhere;
bt Is. 63, 13. Pi 106, 9 ntoiVia /^(fintfsl /4 vis. of the Red Sea*.
a. When noons which the usage of the language always treats as proper names h
occasionally appear to be connected with a following genitive, this is really owing
tu an tllii)->e wlicreby the noun which rrnlly governs the genitive, i.e. the
appellative idea coutaiucd m the proper uame, 1^ suppressed, bo evidently iu the
case of ntay rriiT^ as an abbreiMon of the original (s Sam. 5, 10, &c.), mn*
n^K33r N]pM Yakwî tk^ (kd of iasts. So aLo in ^geographical names such as
tr*^ -flK ^ (the city) of the ChMett Gen. 11, sB; D^-in: Q^k Amm (the
xegion) <f the two rhorti ni^.T BUkkhMt (the ciiy) ^Judaki 7^
a San. ao, 14, ftc to distinguish it from ilJtf/ fy tko water,
a Chnm. 16, ;
*1f
|l|
B^^J i Sam. zi, i, ftc; ; Irn^ JTT Nam. aa, x. a6 3. 63,ftc;
nHfn ^SK rrifi^ Jnd. 8, 5a (hot in 6, a4 niDf) ; rijnj li^np )t>;r Ziom oftkt
Holy OmÎsroii, Is. 60^ 14 ; tTCtl DÎIÎH i Sm. i i. Some of these examples
(oomp. also Amos 6, %) come very near to the actual constnict state (comp. above,
f^S^)* ahice e. g. the addition of the genitive serves to distinguish the place
from four others called Aram (see the Lexicon), or from another Ikthlehcm.
Aram, iJcthlchem, 6ic., arc accordingly no longer nanus found only in one special
and therefore also are no longer proper names iu the strictest sense.
sense,
8* Of the pronouns, the personal pronouns proper (the separate |
pronouns, 33) are always determinate in themselves, since they can

denote only definite individuals (the 3rd person, also definite things).
For the same reason the demonstrative pronouns ( 34) are ako
determinate in themselves, when they stand alme (as equivalent to
substantives), either as subject (Gen. 5, 29) or as predicate (e.g.
Dil m this is the day, Jud. 4, 14; O'l^lO '^'^ these are the words,
DeuL I, 1), or as object (e.g. HKrnK a Sam. 13, 17), or as genitive
* That various other words, such as IB^\3M mOHj TW^h^ deep darkness, jp prince,
*Tfe^ field, n*enn effutual working, are always found without the article is not
to be attributed to any special archaism, but is to be explained from the fact that
they btloT'!,' solely to I
'xtic language, which avoids tlic article; in other cases,
such as HD^'Vn deep sicep^ tiiere is no occaaioa fur the article iii the passages we
Digitized by Google
(nt Tnp I Ki. 21, 2), or finally when joined to a preposition (Hwi)
Gen. 2, 23; nra i Sam. 16, 8, see 102.^).
So also the personal pronouns t<^n, K*n, DH, TOn, nan when thejr
are used as demonstratives (=/V, ea^ id^ tile, Sec.) are always deter-
minate in themselves, e. g. wn this is the thing, Gen. 41, 28.
They are made determinate by the article, when they are joined like
adjectives (see 126. u) wiih a determinate substantive, e.g. B'^KH
this man; n^n Dê>3T //ê-x^- mrn/ K^nn nj;31 nnn Dpj3 / those
days, and in that time, Joel 4, i. The demonstrative, however, even
in this case, is frequently used without the article, as being sufficiently
determinate in itself.
126. Determination by Means of the Article.
1. The article ( n, n,
35) was originally, as in other languages
(clearly in the Romance comp. also 6, 7, rd in Homer), a demonstra-
;
tive pronoun. The demonstrative force of the article, apart from its
occasional use as a relative pronoun (see 138. /), appears now,
however, only {a) in a few standing phrases, and {h) in a certain class
of statements or exclamations.
(a) Comp. D'*n this day, hodie ( 100. ; H^^^n (his night, Gen. 19, 34:
Dyan this time, Gen. 2, 23; n^^H this year (=în this year) Is. 37, 30. Jer, 28, 16.
{b) includes those instances in which the article, mostly when prefixed to
a participle, joins on a new statement concerning a preceding noun. Although
such participles, &c. are no doubt primarily regarded always as in apposition to
a preceding substantive, the article nevertheless h.-is in some of these examples
almost the force of KVl (80n, non) as the subject of a noun-clause; e.g. Ps. 19, 10
the judgements of the Lord are true . . . , verse 1 1 '31 D^TDn^n prop, the more
to be desired than gold, i. e. they are more to It desired, or even they, that are more
to be desired^, &c. ;
comp. Gen. 49, ai. Is. 40, 22 sq. ^4, 275^. 46, 6. Amos 2, 7.
5, 7. Ps. 33. 15. 49, 7 (D^npan in the parallel half of the verse continued by
a finite verb); Ps. 104, 3. Job 6, 16. 28, 4. 30, 3. 41, 25 and frequently. When
such a participle has another co-ordinate with it, the latter is used vilhout the article,
since according to the above it strictly speaking represents a second predicate, and
as such, according to letter , remains indeterminate ; e. g. Job 5, 10 who giveth
(jnin) rain, &c., ami sendeth (nVtJn), &c.
The article is sometimes used with similar emphasis before a substantive, which
siervcs as the subject of a compound sentence ( 140. d] ;
e.g. Dent. 32, 4 "^^JfTI
ibjJS D*pri i. c. as a fresh statement (not in apposition to the preceding dative),
really equivalent to he is a rock, perfed is his work (i.e. whose work is perfect) ;
comp. Ps. 1 8, 31.
'
On the analogous use of the article before participles which have a verbal
suffix, as in Ps. 18, 33 and elsewhere, comp. above, Ii6.y.
Digitized by Google
{ ia6.] Determination by Means of the Article. 435
a* The article is, generally speaking, employed to determine a d

sobBtantlve wherever it is required by Greek and EngHah ; thus
(0) When a person or thing already spoken of is mentioned again,
and is consequently more definite to the mind of the hearer or reader;
e. g. Gen. 3 and God satd^ Let there be Ught: verse 4 emd God saw
the light (i1t<n"nK); i Ki. 3, 24 /etch me a sword: and they hroi^ht
the nvord ; Kccles. 9, 15. (In 2 Sam. 12, 2 iherefore musi

be read.)
{b) With a title understood and recognized by every one, e.g.
Tj^n h QwrxKtvi ZaX|ir: Gen. 35, 8 under the oak (the well-known
oak which was there).
(c) With appellatives to denote persons or natural objects which are

unique, e.g. fnbn the htgh priest, B^Qf^ the sun, fyfn the earth.
{d) When ideas relating to whole classes are restricted (simply by e
usage) to particular indivkhiats (like 6 mofrfit, meaning Homer)
or things, e.g. ]^''^* aJiirsary, (C|*n //,c (iJrtrsajy, Sahin; lord,
Baal ziS, proper name of the god; DINH ///, (first) tti'IU, Adorn;
^"^f^f-J}
^ or bxn ^ Btoiy the one true God (comp. nlso 6 \piar6's in the
New Testament) ; also "^V;}"^ the river, i.e. the Euphrates ; "090
the circle, sc. of the Jordan, the Jordan plain [Gen. 19, 17, &c.].
(e) As a rule, with the vocative, e.g. 2 Sam. 14, 4 l}^? HfC'tn
Ar^, O hnig: Zecb. $, 8 în }nbn Joshua the high prust;O
I Sam. 17, 58. 34, 9. a KL 9, 5 ; in the plural, Is. 4a, 18. Joel i, a. 13
but cf. also Jos. 10, 12. Is. 1, 2 {tfp^ and n9); 23i Hos. 13, 14.
Jot ! T, 5. Eccles. 10, 17. 11,9 (sec Konig, Lchrgcbaude, ii. 6). The
vucuuve occurs withvui the article in Is. 22, 2, since it has been
already defined by a preceding accusative.
Rein. Strictly speaking in nil thcê cases the srbstantive with the nrticle
f
is really in apposition to the personal j^ronoun of the and pcison, which is either
expressly mentioned or virtaally present (in the imperative), e.g. i Sam. 17, 58
Mm, the young mam. Bnt soch puagn as Is. 43, 18, where the vocative precedes
the impcmtiire, prove that in eh caaci the s^bitantive ori|g;iiiaUy in appoeition
eventnallf acquired the value of a complete clause.
{/) With words denoting classes (see more particuiuriy under g

letter /),
(^) In a peculiar way, to specify persons or things, which are
^ On the snliseqncnt chaoge of ]0^, 01^, '^'^ proper names hjr the
omission of the article, cf. above, | IS5./
Digitized by Google
so far definite as 10 be naturally thought of in connexion with a given

case, and must be assumed accordingly to be there (see letters q-s).
{h) With adjectives (also ordinal numbers and demonstrative pro-

nouns used adjectivally) which are joined to substantives determined
in some way (see letter u).
Rem. The article may be omitted in poetry in all the above-mentioned cases
in general it occurs in poetry far less frequently than in prose. Its use or omission
probably often rests on rhythmical grounds'; it is omitted also for rhetorical
reasons. Comp. e.g. px for }nfi<n Ps. 2, 3 ; D^D^D as vocative, verse 10 ;
^^tD
for IJTOn ai, a ; N'^^^l 7V>1 "^"V (contrary to letters , v) 99, 3. In the instances
in which the H of the article is omitted after a prefix 35. ), the vowel of the
article is often retained after the prefix even in poetry, e. g. D^D^ Ps. a, 4 and
clsew here.
(/) On the other hand, the article is always omitted when a person
or thing is to be represented as indefinite (or indefinable) or as yet
unknown ;
consequently also before the predicate, since this is from
its nature always a general term, tmder which the subject is included,
e. g. Gen. 29, 7 Sna Din niV as ytt the day is grea/, i.e. it is yet high
day; 33> 4, i^- 4i, 26. Is. 66, 3.
Rem. As exceptions to the above rule it is usual to regard those examples in
which a determinate adjective or participle (equivalent to a relative clause) is used

apparently as a predicate, e.g. Gen. 3, II 23bn K^H iV is the compassing^ i.e. that
is it whiih comfasseth; 4a, 6. 45, la. x. 9, 17. Deut. 3, ai. 8, 18. 11, 7. i Sam.
4, 16. Is. 14, 37 (cf, in Greek, e.g. St. Mat. 10, ao, where Winer, Gram.dts neutest.
Sprtuhidionis, 58, 2, Rem., explains 61 KaXovvrn as a predicate with the article).
In reality, however, these supposed predicates are rather subjects (acc. to 116. /),
and the only peculiarity of these cases is that the subject is not subsumed under
a genet al idea, but that the predicate is equated with it.
' 8.The use of the article to determine the class is more extensive
in Hebrew than in most other languages. In this case the article
indicates universally known, clearly circumscribed, and therefore
well defined classes of persons or things. The special cases to be
considered are
{a) The employment of general names as collectives in the singular, to denote

the sunt total of individuals belonging to the class (which may, however, be done
just as well by the plural) ; e. g. the righteous, the wicked man, Eccles. 3, 1 7 ; the
woman, i.e. the female sex, 7, 36; S^N'T the enemy, i. e. the etumics, Ps. 9, 7;
^^Kn
IT
the Her in -Mait, i.e. the tiers
'
in wait;' Y\PT\7\ the
T ,V
armed man, x.c. soldiers:
* Cf. the useful statistics of J. Ley in the Neue Jahrbitcher fiir Philologie und
radagoîJk, ate Abtcilung, 1891, Heft 7-9.
Digitized by Google
} 136.] Determination by Means of the Article. 427
*lDt4pn the reargiiurJ ; n^nchsn the spoiler, i Sam. 13, 17*; so also (as ia
English) with uaaic^ ui animals, whea somethmg is asserted of ibem, which applies
to tbe whole species, e. g. a Sun. 17, 10 or ik 9urage of nn^H th$ Hm, Especially
also with Ge&tilic nsmesy e.g. fU
Ctuuumtif Gen. 13, 7 (oomp. 15, 19 sq.);
SO in ngllah i*4 XmsHoM^ tkt Turk, ftc. In Attic writen 4 'Af^rmubt, 4 S^m-
{b) Names of materials known everj'^^'here, the elements and other words ///
denoting classes, even though only a jiart and nut the whole of them is coajtidered,
in Huich caiic in olhei: kuguages, as e.g. in English, the article is usually omitted
(comp., however, our t^faU im/o ih* waier, inip the fire, &c.), e.g. Geo. 13, %
mdAbnm was wry Hck ari|3^ rjop in tattk, im stlur and u$ ffii;
Joi. II, j and At iumi ihtir eharwts with firt; oomp. Gen. 6, 14. 41, 4s
(unless this means, thi chain necessarily belonging to the official dress) ; Ex. s, 3.
31, 4 (35, 32). Is. I, 23, &C. Siur l irl , the rricle is used with terms of measure-
ment, as HDvSn Ex. 16, 36, Ac.: *^^nn and Ezek. 45, 11 ; IDVn Ex. 16, aa
^3ra
V V-
2 Sam. ti, 3.
{() The expression of abstract ideas of every kind, since they arc likewise used
to represent whole clas:>ai ol ailrihuiei> ur conditions, physical or moral dcicclb, 6cc. I
e.g. ProT. 35, 5 (piy3) ; Gen. X9, 11 and they smote tke mm , , . ir*}>30a mtJk
tUndmtsf U. 60, 2 T)3^ri darkmssi Amos 4, 9, &c.
(^) C(0Mi!ârM0m, shice the object compaied is tieat^ 0
Individnally bat as a geoeral term, wkiU 3^6^ as snw, ^^fS
e.g. Is. i, 18
at wpffl; red jÂJ liki crimsen; Is.3^ 4 and the Aeavens skiui be rHUd tegethtr
l^DS as a seraU; oomp. Num. xi, 13. Jnd. 8, t8. 1^9 as tV^jl^p^yiyf a siriifg
^/<ru'is brtien; X Sam. s6, sa i Ki. X4, 15. Ia. xo, x8. S4, 30. 37, 10. 19, $.
53, 6. Nah. 3, 15. Ps. 33, 7. 49, 15; comp. also such examples as (Jen. I9, aS.
Jud. 14, 6, where compared deieroxined by a detcimiuate g^tive

tlie object u
which follows (according to 127).
Examples of indeterminate comparisons, such as iTlKI) Ps. 17, is,
p
Job 16, 14, 3^ 31, 18, 38, 3, arc rare, and perhaps doe only tO the Maaoca,
*-so at least in the ease of shigulars, while in snch plnials as those in Gen. 4s, 3a
Jod s, 4. 7, dke omissioa of the article nuy be explained by the ordinary nles.
On the other hand, the article is regularly omitted, when the '
c.t compared
is already defined by means of an attribute (or relative clauM.-, Fs. 17, la),
e.g. Is. 16, 3 nW*0 |g SîlP as wandering birds, (as) a scattered lUst (but
comp. 10, 14 \ 14, 19, 39, 5 -Qjj J*(jJ (but Ps. 1, 4 fSSit Jer- a, 30. **'ov
7 8- Job 30.
4. Peculiar to Hebrew* is the employment of the article to denote q

a single person or thing (primariljr one which is as jet unknown, and
1 But in Ex. IS, S3 ^ is dther to be expkunedaa/î<tflrlr(pow mention

n paiticnlar
for the fiist time) aococding to letter ^, or angel is meant whose icgnlar
function it was to inflict punishments. Qtheis iâia take 'DH even in fix. xsi 33
impersonally = destruction.
Comp., however, analogous examples in Biblical Aramaic in Kaotrsch's
Cramm, acs Swi. Aram.f 79.^^ e.g. Don. a, i^, 3, a, and elsewhae.
Digitized by Google
therefore not capable of being defined) as being present to the mind

under given circrnnstancea In such cases in English the indefinite
article is mostly used.
f Thus Amos 5, 19 as if a yuan did Jiee from a lion (^KH, i.e. the particular
lioh pursuing him at the time , and a bear (D'Hn) niet him, &c., comp. 3, I a.
I Ki. 20, 36 (John TO, 12); also Gen. 8, 7 sq. 14, 13 (t5*Ên, i.e. on iAa/
had es(aj>d, the particular one who came jnst then ; so also Esek. 24, 26. 33, ai
comp. a Sam. 15, 13) ; Gen. 15, i. 18, 7 the stwvatU, who I* rented as bdng
constantly at hand and awaiting hit coramandt; comp. a Sam. 17, 17 vhot ny|n
Num. II, 27 ia used like tih%T\ above); DipDS Gen. %%, ir, according to
DtUnuum, upon /Ar place anitable for passing the night, the right place, bot
it may possibly also refer to iht sanctnaiy of Bethel afterwards so sacscd and
celebrated; Gen. 50, a6. Ex. a, 15. 1. ai, 30 (a Sam. 33, ai). Lev. 24, 10
(Samaritan without the nrticle) ; Num. 17, 11. ai, 9. 25, 6. Deut. 19, 5.
Jos. 2, 15. Jud. 4, 18. 8, 25. 13, 19. 16, 19. 19, 29. 20, 16 I Sam. 17. 34. ig, 13.
21, 10. i Sara. 17, 17. 1 Ki. 6, 8. Is. 7, 14 (nD!)yn, i.e. th( particular maiden,
throtii,'h whom the prophet's announcement shall be fulhUed ; we should say

a maiiUn [cf. Driver on i Sam. 1,4. 6, 8. 19, 13].
S So alwajs wriU in iht book (or on tht Jiriv//, Nnm. 5, 33. Jer. 32, lo), i.e.
not in tlU book alieady in nse, bot in the book which is to be devoted lo that
purpose, equivalent to m a Apw^, oh a stroll, Ex. 17, 14. 1 Sam. 10, 15. Job 19, 23.
Especially instinctive for this use of Ae article is the phrase D^*n ^n^, which does
not umply refer back to the previous narrative in the sense of ihe same day, but
is used exactly like our one day (properly meaning on the particular day when
it happened, i.e. on a tertain day), I Sam. t, 4. I4, I. S Ki. 4, 8. II. 18. Job
I, 6. 13. In Gen. 39, 11 even n?n D^*n3.
/ The sometbnes used in this way before collectives in the singular, which
article is
are notmeant to denote (like the examples given under letter /) a whole class, bnt
only diat part of it whidi ^>pUes to the given caae; thus nynyn Ex. 35, aS;
ISfri|f1 Num. at, 7.
H 6. When a substantive is defined by the article, or by a suffix,
or by a following genitive determinate in any way (see the examples

below), the attritnite belonging to it (whether adjective, participle,
ordinal, or demonstrative pronoun) necessarily takes the article (see,
however, the Rem*), e.g. Gen, lo, 12 njhan T]t?n the great city ; 28, 19
Wnn Dipon thai place; Gen. 2. 2 T??^ I3l3 m the seventh day;
Deut. J, 24 "îîrip strong hand. A genitive following the sub-
stantive may, according to 127, be determined either by the article,
e.g. I Sam. 25, 2?; n?n by*^2n C^n worthless man (proj). ihis man
0/ worthlessness ; comp. also such examples as 2 Chron. 36, 18, where
the article is prefixed only to a second genitive following the noun);
or as a proper name, e.g. Deut. ix, 7 7^ n|p]p she gnat setfri
Digitized by Google
i 126.] Determination by Means of the Article, 429
of the Lord ; or by a sutlix, e. g. Is. 36,

9 D*|D|)n nnjj the least
of my master's servants.
When several attributes (eitlier connected by Wdw or added by v

asyndeton) follow a detenninate substantive, each of them takes the
article, eg. Deut 10, 17 iniinj tain hin b^n Mr gna^ God, the
mightyt and the terrikk* Corop. also x. 3, 3. Dent i, 19, in both
of which places a demonstrative with the article also foUows the

adjective
Rem. I. The article is, however, not infrcqnently used aiso

(a) With the atUibute alone, wheu it is added to ao originally indefinite sab- W
taative u
% mbieqaeiit limitatitMis to ^qpedaUy with oidinds fker 0)^^ c. g.
Gen. 1, 31 (comp. a, 5. Eil lOb nd dwwheie) tkt sixth da^ (prop.
a day nAmely the sixth; but XHl* a ucond dtgf. Gen. i 8); Ex. ia 25
}b^n Di*p from tkM JUrst mward (not befote Dia. 10, i a and Neh. 8, 18
is i^fiStC^n Oi^'fD used instead of it ; on the other hand, the article is o/imgv
found after a, hence D^^S, &c); in Jnd. 6, 35 the text is evidently compt
(see verse 26;. Especially also in certain frequently recurring combinations, as In
fmrticiilarizing gates (Jer. 38, 14. Erek. 9, 2, and elsewhere ; Zcch. i.f, !o or courts
I Ki. 7, 8. 12, and elsewhere ; Ezck. 40, 281, and very often when tlie atlribule
consists of a participle, e.g. Deut. a, 23. Jud. 21, 19. 1 Sam. 35, 10. Jei. 37, 5.
46, 16 n|^>n snn tke swsrd wkkk offnssss; Sselc. 14, as. Zech. it, a K*th,
Piov. a6, 18. Fs. 119, ai.
Of the other examples. Gen. ai, 39 (whete, however, the Samaritan Pentatendi X
reads IDBOan), 41, a6 (hot cf* vene 4), Nam. ii, .s5. Jnd. z6, S7. i Sam. 17,
17
and ao, 3 may at any rate be explained on the groand that the preceding cardinal
number is cquiv.ilcnt to a determinant; in Gen. I, 21. 28. 9, 10, and elsewhere,
the sabstantive is already determined by "^3, and in i Sam. 14, 29 (^Jl) by

Dyp. Tn I Sam. 12, 23. 2 Sam. 12, 2. 4. Is. 7, ao (where, however, DlOfeTl
might also l>e understoo<l as a subsequent explanation of lynS and Neh.
*
9, 35,
the omission of the article after the preposition is certainly dne merely to the
Mason, In t Sam. 26. 23. Zech. 4. 7. Ps. 104, 18, the omiaaion of the aidde
(befote \ n) may be doe to n regard for euphony (lee kCtef s below).
' The demonstrative naed adjectivally is genenlly placed after the adjective
proper; in such cases as n|n the adjective fotms a farther (fresh)
addition to n|n b^n.
Cf. Driver, Tenses, 3d ed., $ 209.The omission of the article from the
substantive is not to ht regarded in this instance as an indication of late style,
and consequently cannot be pot forward as a proof of the late orirnn of the
'Priestly Code' (comp. Dillmann on Gen. i, 31, and tb)>ccially iHiver in
the foumcU of PhiloloQf^ xi. 229 sq., agaiat Giesebrechl iu ZAiV, 1881,
pb a65sq.). On the otiier hand, tlie cosamon mission of the article from the
sabstantive befote a determinate adjective (e. g. n^l|n nD^3 the great symigogus^
in the Hebrew of the Mishna) is certainly a later idiom.
Digitized by Google
430 The Parts of Speech, ,
[ia6.
On the other hand, in i San. ^, 18 (to be nad |3Kn). 17, xa (f^ ia a later
addMoa). 19, aa (comp. the LXX). a Kt aoy 13* 39, a). Jcr. 6, aa 17, a.
(cf. la.
33, 14. 40, 3 K*tk, Eieh. a, 3 (omit QMa with Comill)* Mia 7 it. Pa. 6a 4,
either the text is corrupt, or the expression incorrect.
y (Pi No article with the attribnte. while the substantive is dcterminecl cither
by the article, or a sufTix, or a following genitive. Thus the article is sometime*
omitted with demonstralives, since they are already to a certain extent determined
by thdr meaning (comp. also the M^* inacription, 1. 3, HKl DDan ikis high
place) ; thna irith KVl (Sen. 19, 33 (evidently for euphony, and so iHobably dten)
30, x6. 33, 33. I Sam. ifh lo; with Wf\ Gen. 38, ai ; widi 9 Pa. la, 8 (according
to the Maaont It la a ftlative pronoon herei aa always elaewhere) ; with
t Sam. 2, 23, aocordhigtothe praient compt text (the original leading nin^ Dy~^
became trn^K Dy^3t and ONl!>|| waa then cornipted to n^K) so, almoct witb- :
ODt exception, when the anfaataotiTe ia determined only by a anffix, e.g. Joa. a, aa
Jnd. 6, 14. a Ki. x, a and 8, 8 sq., where aa in Jcr. 10^ 19, arisea by contrac*
tioQ from "t^l)!!, or we ahonid simply read (in all these paamgea with i^) ; Gen.
a4, 8 (with nfi<t)i Ex. to. i. x KI. 33, as. Jer. 31, ax (with
Z Of the other remaining examples Is. 11, 9 citplains itself; the direct connexion
of the attribute with its substantive is interrupted by the insertion of D*^. In
Ezek. .!^4, 12. Hag. I, 4. Ps. 143, 10. Cant. 6, 12 (^) the substantive is also see
above) determined by a suffix, and consequently the demonstrative is less closely
attached; the same appliea to Gen. 37, 3. 43, 19. 43. 14. Pa. 18, iS, except
that b these passagea tiie omiasion of the article before It K, y may at the aame
time be due to considerations of euphony (as also in Jos. 16, i before y, (Sen. 7, tt
cf. Jos. 1 1, 8. Am. 6, 3. Nnm. 14, 37 before 1, 38, 4. Ezek. 10, 9 before t<, 21,19
ficforc T\y. InNum. 28, 4. i Sam. 13, 17 sq. (IHS and 3 Ki. 25, 16 after
a determinate substantive), the attribute again, being a numeral, is determinate in
itself (see above, letter x) ;

finally, in 2 Chron. 26, 15 Dîfn3 and CJIIK!! are to
be read, as in Jer. 3, 3i jD3 for *S;n. in 22, 26 )nSl for 'XH ; in 2 Sam. 6, 3
omit nîn, and in Ezek. 39, 27 omit D'^Zt'}. Without any apparent reason the
article ia omitted in Dan. 8, 1 3 and 1 1 , 31.
aa a. When, aa m Mic.
in ikat day ?), the article is omitted from
7, t 3 (KVt DV
and demonatvative, and in sra 3, xa, the demonstrative even
botii aubstantive
precedea (Fran n{ eqniTalent to njn H^n)* tUa is obiionsly doe ia botii caaea
to a radical corroption of the text (not only in the words quoted). In Jos. 9, la
is either in apposition to the independent demoosttative SI) ( = M/x cur
hread, &c.\ as in verse 13 n^^tb is to H^N, or they are complete sentences, this
is mtr hreaJ, S<x.. So also in Ex. 33,^ i n*J*tt ( = that \iste'\ Mosts, &'c.>, in
I .Sam. 17, f s "ysn , in Ps. 48, 15 D^H^N are to be taken in apposition to n|.
On Ps. 6S, S and Is. 23, 13, comp. 136. </.
' The same rraon no doubt also favoured the omission of the article before
6<\n and H^N, as also in such cases as i Ki. 10, 8 (where a vowel precedes the TW
Also in Is. 33, 7 {is this your joyom . . . f) the article is omitted before Tfj^
pvobnbly only for euphony.
Digitized by Google
127.] Noun determined by Determinate Genitive, 431
127. 2^ Noun dekrmimd by a /tUkm'ng Ditermifiatt Gemiwe*
When a genitive, determined in any waj, follows a nomm regms^ a

it also determines the mmm regens, which, according to 89. a,
is always in the construct state. Moreover, every pronominal suffix
attached to a substantive is, accordin^^ to 33. c, to be considered

IS a genitive determinate by nature. An independent genitive may
be determinate
(a) By its character as a proper name (according to { I2$.tf), e.g.
mrn W ihe wardo/ihe Lord,
(h) By having the article, e. g. ^l^K^jw Bh< (prop, the man of the
war) ihe stMer (but n^îo Vhh Jos. 17, i, siUdier); nonbisn
Num. 31, 49, the soUiers; K^33n w the wwd of the prophet^ Jer. 28, 9
(but e.g., on the other hand, 'TIJ^^ D''?'^^ a commandment'
of men ivhich hath been taught^ Is. 29, 13 ;
"^^^^^"^ word 0/falsehood,
Prov. 29, 12).
(^) By the addition of a pronominal suffix (see above) e.g. ^^f)^?

my fafhtrs home,
(d) By construction with another genitive determined in some way,
e.g. Gen. 3, s X^Pt^. ^fO of ihe fruit of ihe trees of the garden*
Thus in Is. 10, is four, and in 21, 17 even five, members of a series
are determined by a condoding determinate genitive.
Rem. I. The above explains al>o the various mcaninpj^ of ^prop. a substantive b
in the sense of aj^êgate, XL'hoIf^ according as it is followeti by a cictertninatc or
indeterminate f^cnitive. In the former case ^3 ha*, the meaning of ihe eniircty, i.e.
the whole like the French tons hi hommcs, fauU la viik), e. g. jnNn~^3
flu VL-hole vprop. the entirety of the, earth, D"1Km"^3 <// men*; cf. also Ex. 1, 22
(|3n"i>3 alt tens, n3n"^3 att daughters); i8, 9a. Nmn. 15, i.^. Jer. 4, 29,
and cases like Nm. 4, 23. 47. 21, 8 when i followed by .1 i gular participle
with the Ttide. On the other hand, before an tndetermfaiate genitive 7^ Is nsed
in themore indefinite (individualizing) sense of alt kinds, atty (comp. toM ^
homme, A tout prix), or diatribativelj eaeh, every, e. g. fS*^3 every (kind ol) tree.
Gen. 3, 9; comp. 4, 3). 34, 10. i Chron. 39, 9 ; ^^79 any thing, Jad. 19, 19;
1^33 every day, every time. Ft. 7, la.
Tt h, however, to be observed C
a) That the article may in this case also (sec 12^. /;) he omitted in poetic
style, although the substantive in question is to be regarded as determinatei
c, g. nu^j5'-^ ati (the) iai>tej, U. 38, 8.
*
Cnyn beh a collective; initieUO'lttrr^ cotildalaomcaB/^ ari/# mm.
{b) That the meaning every is frequent e^-cn before singulars used collectively;
afterwarils ihe idea quisque passes naturally into that ol totality, cp. *n~^3 eath
living thing, i.e. evtry (not every kind of ) Ihnni^ thing; "^^B'^S all Jlesh, i.e.
all men or all living creatures {with the article ouly in Gen. 7, 15 before a rela-
tive clause, and in Is. 40, 6) ; sometimes also f*iri>3 all trces^ "jliri'S all bireU;
finally
{c) That before the names of members of the human body, "iâ frequently
(as being determinate in itadf) denotes the entirety, e.g. Is. i, 5 the whole head,
tk* wM$ heart (the lenie reqoiied by Che oonmt, not ettery heae^ 6bc, which the
eiqweicioD im Uu^toi^ also mean) ; 9f ix. a KL 93, 3. Eaek. 99, 7 // (L e. iMi
wMe 0f) their shMtUiert ,,aff {the wheU af) their Mm; 36, 5.On ^with
a suffix when it follows a noun in appoiitioii (e.. Is. 9, 8 ^^3 D^H the pt^pU^
all ^ it, i e. the vhele tutioH, moie emphatic tlian D^nrâ ; c Driver on
a Sam. a 9), as well as when it follows absolutely In the genitive ( mcw,
everff one, e. g. Gen. 16, la) ^, see the Lexicon.
2. Centilic names (or patronymics"!, derived from compound proper names
(consisting of a uoaicu rtgcus and genitive are deteimined by inserting the article
before the second part of the compound (since it contains the original geuitive;,
e.g. ^W"F3 (see 86. 5) a Benfomite ; ^T^^T^ Jud, 3, 15 and dsewben^
the Betâmite; ^^n~nâ the Bethlehemite, I Sam. i6p 1 and elsewhere (eomp.,
however, x Chron. a;, xa (S^ri ; vÛîVJl*^ the BUhshmite, i Sam.
^1 14; ^T|^n the AbUtrite, Jud. 6, ix and elsewhere, cf. x Ki. x6, 34.
g 3. In a few inttanees the nomen regens appears to be used indefinitely notwitb

standing a following detenninatc genitive; it is not so, however, in Gen. 16,
7,
where the reference is to a will-kiiown fountain; 21, 28, where in the original
context there niubt have been bomc reason fur (he scT'en ewe lambs cf (he Jfock
i Sam. I J, 30 the spoil Jomui in the ctiy ; but pi obably (unless the article is to be
omitted as a texflial error) it is so in Lev. 24 m a hmue, &c.; Dei^ aa, 19
14,
a virgim ^
Israds x Sam. 4^ la a man of Bemjemini so also in x Sam. ao^ ao
thru arrmsg a Sam. a3, xx ?n|[^ rgjtn a ptet ef ground (but see Gen. 33, 19^
Jos. 34, 3a); Jnd. 13, <S. Jer. 13, 4. 41, x6. Pli 113, 9. Prov. ^5, ], and repeatedly
in Cant, (i, n. I3sq. 5, 13. 7,3. 8, a; a, X. 3.9). On the other hand, TB'
nit'y'Sn in the titles of Psalms 120 to 134 (except 121, i niH*^^ "^T)
most proliabl y originally the title of a collection, in the seiise ol' the pilgrimage-
soH^' iâccorUiiig to % 124. r), aad was subsequently added to these Psakos
severally, so Cheyne, Bampton Lectures^ p. 59.
y 4. The deviatioos mentioned under letter ftom a fundamental rule of syntai^

e,
are hi some cases open to suîcion on mueh more donbtiul

textual grounds, but
axe die instancfii in which the article n found befoie a noun already detennnied in
some other way, as
{a) Before a noun which appears to be determined by a following indcpendt-nt
determinate genitive. The least questionable are the instances in which the genitive
is a proper name, since these may be elliptical forms of expression like the apparent
names with a genitive, noticed in 1 135.
construction of proper e*ff. Num. ai X4
l^lK D'bnsn the vtOUys, namely the valleys efAmant a Ki. a3, 17 Strn^ na)Qn
' In 1^ xo, X7 instead of EI^C^ read simply D^)|tir^^.
Digitized by Google
127.] Notm determined by Determinate Genitive. 433
tlu Ûur^ munely die altar of Bethel (i. e. with the npiifeMioQ of the leel nomeii
regtw, nSjO without the article; by the pointhis the BCasom evidently
intends to attow the choice either of reading n3{)pn or correodng it to nap)
birnâ bn tkt C9d tfBttk-il^ (efiaivalent to 'a ^ ^KH), Gen. 31, 13; !)^Qn
IV^ the king f As^nia^ Ii. 36, 16 (probably a tcrilMl mor dte to vene 13
it doe* not occur In the partUel paitsce, a KL 18, 31), comp. a Ki. 95, it.
Jer. 38, 6 ; in the vocative, Jer. 48, 3a. Lam, a 13. On the other hand, lISM iV^
Gen. 24, 67 is no doubt only a snbsequent insertion ; so also ^Nf^b^ a Sam. 20, 33.
a Ki. 7, 13, Dan ^ i ^ and K^H TTj^ 3 Clirnn. 15, 8. In Ex. 9, 18

read with the Sannrit^ i
'^^^('i a Sam. 19, 25 might poesibly be tidscn
in apposition to D^Nl JD?.

A siruilnr ellipse must also l>c as!;umed in 2 Ki. 23, 17 //;<- scfûUhre is the
^
sepulchre of the rmin of God bul most prohahly "^Dp has clro]HJcd out after "13|5n^
and Ps. 133, 4 (coinp., however, the LXX, and observe that in the parallel member
the genitive t paraphrased by I?). In Jos. 3, 1 4 n*")3n has been added to the original
pIKn by a redactw; oomp. umilar syntactically impossible additions in venea
II and 17 (also in 1 Sam. 4, 3 and elsewhere, where the LXX still had sfanply
)hM) ; in Wn Jnd. 16, 14 the Masora evidently combines two difTerent
readings *in^ and IH^; and similarly m Jer. aj, a6 (where y'^MH was only
tnbieqaently introduced into the teat), the two readings TtdrOI^ and H^diiCip
are combined.In Jos. 8, 11. i Ki. 14, 34. Jer. 31, 40. Ezek. 45, 16 the artide,
being usual after , has been mechanically prefixed, and so also in 2 Chron. 8, 16
after "IJ? ; in 2 KL 9, 4 the second ^^271 (instca<l of lyj) is occasioned !
y the first
in Ezek, 7, 7 TO^HO belong*; ns a nominative to what follows; in l^^ra 8, 29 the

meaning perhaps is in the t hami<:rs, in the home oj the 1 oni, or the article is to
be omitted; ia Chron. 15, 37 tlie text is manifoktly corrupt.
i
Of aoodier hind are the instances ia which a dêimhiate nooa isfollowed by h

a de6nition of the material in, apfositien (hcno^ not in the genitive ; comp. 131),
e.g. Zech. 4, 10 7^3n ja^n the wagkt^ the tead, i.e. (Ae ifaden weight} x. 39, 17.
a Ki. 16, 14. (IW^n^, both here and In veise I7 is proliaUy only a later addition,
while 111331^ nr\30Dn in vene 17 has arisen from a confusion of two readings,
maacn rmsoD and nuDcno nnaoon). in jer. 33, 1 2 also niêii (unless the
article is simply to be omitted) is in apposition to ÔDil.
{h'^ Before a noun with a suffix (which likewise represents a determinate genitive ; i
see ahovc, at the hcînnin;; of this section). This does not apply to cases in which
a verbal (i. c. accusative) suffix is affixed to a participle which has the article, e.g.
ina(|n is. 9, 1 3 , Mmiting Aim; in Dent 8, 15. 13, 6 also ^ ia a verbal suffix,
hot hardly the ^ in Wjfn for ^nb^n Job 40, 19, nor the jSL- in i^n!)Vl Dan. it, 6;
f lid. g In l^* >7> >3 suffix, as appean from venea 1. 3. 3. 7. 13,
* According lo Fhilippi {St. Constr., p. 38) ^KTi^^ U rather a case of

'sub-position' in the accosative, as also }i7nn Tf}^ Ezek. 47, 15 (for wliich,
however, in 48. i tibere Is the correct reading fhnn 1)^1) tA* wqr io HÂhm;
and in iict, Exdc 47, 15 may without difficulty be explained m this way ; so
Ex. 39i ay aa an aocwative of the material.
Ff
Digitized by Google
436 The Parts of Speech, [ 128!
Tehdon is destioyed by the tranqtotitloii of the words (inslesd of ^1 *t\iP, dte.),
and is rather to be taken adfri)ia]ly (equvalent to tMfy\ e.g* s Ssm. 9

k^MS$ mjf life is yet wkoify in me, i.e. my whole
oomp. Phtlipplt Stai,
life;
Ccmir,, p. 10. On the instances in which the original oonstract state }^ mis*
existence is used without a following genitive, see the negative sentences. ( i$s. 9*
f 2. The dependence of ihe nomen rectum on the nomen regens

by no means represents merely what is, properly speaking, the genitive
relation (see the examples under letters g-i\ Very frequently the
nomen rectum only adds a nearer definition of the nomen regens,
whether by giving the name, the genus or spedes, the measure,
the material, or finally an attribute of it {gemt eptx^tHcut^ see the
examples under letters k~q)
Examples. The nomen reetum represents
g (a) A inbjective genitive, specif) ing the possessor, author, iScc, e.g. IJ^^^H^^
the hittgs house ; nin^ "13^ the word of the Lord,
k {h^ An objective genitive, e. fj.
Obad. ver. 10 "^^HN DDHTO for the vioUme dom
to thy brother^ ^but in Kzck. 12, 19 DEn?3 is followed by a subjcctne {enitive);
I'ruv. 30, a T)^ np^N the terror of a iing ; Oen. iS, 20 Dip F^t the cry
comerning Sodom ; Is. 33, 5 ~iif yip|;' the report of {about) Tyre, comj). 3 Sam.
4, 4; Am. 8, 10 Tnj ^31* the mourningfor an only son ; Deut. 20, 14 ^"j'N ^Sgf
praeda keatWus tms erepta ; comp. Is. 3, 14. In a wider sense thb includes
sndi examples as IJ^nn the way of (i. e. to) the tree of life. Gen. 3, 34
comp. Prov, 7, 87. Job 38, so ; D*n ^jni the way of {by) the sea. Is. 8, 33 ; 'n3}
0*n1> the saerificettf{i,9, pleating ta) Gtd, Ps. 51, 19; njn^ nj;3p the Mtk If
(L c swm hefinr) the Ltrd, i Ki< a* 43>
i (r) K partitive gtnitive ; this includes especially the cases in whidi an adjective
io the construct stnte is followed by a general tens, e.g. H^nil^B^ llfDSn the
wisest of her ladies, Jud. 5, 39 ;
comp. for this way of capucssing the saperiadv^
S 133. and also letter r below.
h Mcrciv formal genitives {genit. expUcativus OT epexegetictu) are those added
io the cuastruct state as nearer defmilioub
{d) Of the name, e. g. n"JB "n3 the river Euphrates; fT tk* land
Canaan f ^JJ^ T\^V\2 the virgin Israel (not of Israel), Am. 5, a.
/ (f) Of the gmuSf e.g. Prov. 15, 30 (ai, 20) DHN ^*p3 a fool of a man (
feeiuh irmm); comp. Gen. i(, la. Is. 39, 19. Mic. 5, 4, &c
m CO Of the îet^ e.g. 0^1 nB^?|t men e/'Cthedass oQ menhante, i KL 10^ 15
n^nK a pastettianef a hiiyiitg-âee, Le. keredUaiy se^nlekne. Gen. S3, 4,
and elsewhere ; ^
nVân ^^/gs (the dass of) first ripe mm. Jet. 24, a.
> Comp. in Latin a similar use of the genitive after iniuria (Cac&. B. G. i, 30),
mtm {kutium, JPSmpeU, ftc), spet^ and other words. Jn Gicek, comp. tISmm
rfir ffiUir, slsns nw #w0, J A^Tsr 4 reir vraiyoii, t Cor. I, l8
Digitized by Google
i 128.] The IndtcaUion of the Genitive Relaiian, 437
{g) Of the measure t -weight, extent, Humitr, e.^ T'P A^/^ ^ numUrt n
i.e. Vrc in numbi-r, Gen. 34, 3a
Deut. 26, 5; comp. also Lzck. 47, 3-5 n'at^rs
f th ankles, waUrs of the loins, imfcrs of su'imniitig, i.e. which reached up to

the ankles, or loins, or necessitateil bwimmiog; but in verse 4 in apposition
(i) Of the maienal* of which fomething consists, e. g. iTjn ^^3 a vesid /tartkm- C
want Nan. 5, 17; ^^3 vessels 0/ sUtnr {comi^ ^'Ftm^des vasit uToryi
)^ fn^ am ark tocod, blSs ^ a nd irm,

'
a, 9 ; ocnnp. Gen. 3, ai.
6, 14. Jod. 7, 13, &c.
(0 Of the attrikuU of * penoa or things eg. Gen* 17, 8 n$[JK m fr*

^
tasting pofsesaen; Prov. 17, 8 a preeioMS stemi comp. Num. aS, 6. Is. 13, 8.
28, 4. Ps. 23, 2. 31, 3. Prov. 5, 19. 14, 5. Job 41, 19, and the examples of the
genitive with a suflRx given in 135. n. Such a jv"riphrasi5 for the expression of
attributes frequently occurs, even \vhen the coriesponding adjectives are in use.
Thus especially tjnj) holiness very frequently serves as a periphrasis for the
adjectiTe (e.g. Chpn ^T33 the holy ârments^ Ex. 29, 29), dnoe C'Vl^
Is used slmoit exclmiTely in lefeience to penons (hence also with Oy and ^
pee>plit and with QB^ the leaate of a penon) ; ihe only exceptions are C^hg D^p^
Ex* 99 3if and elacwhere ; Q^p M/r, Nmn. 5 17 ; BHT^
as the predicate of Oi^ d^, Ncfa. 8^ loaq., and of H^np roaif^. Dent 33, 15. So
alao the use of ri^kteom is always confined to penons^ exoqpt in Dent 4, 8
daewbere the periphiasis with or is always used. e.g. plf ^<!t^ P"^
halames, Ler. 19, 36.
In a wider sense this use of the genitive also includes statement.- of the purpose ^
for which something is intended, c.g. nHDD f?^2f sheep for the slaughter, Ps. 44, 23;
^P^ the hastiscment designed for our pea4.e, Is. 53, 5 comp. 51, 17 {the cup
i
;
which causes staggeriieg). Ps. 116, 13; finally, also, the description of the material,
with which something is kden or filled, e. g. 1 Sam. 16, ao DH^ itin an ass
tadcn wUk hnad amda heUk fwim (bat probably rnb^ is to be read for ibn);
comp. Gen. ai, 14. Prov. 7 ao^ and dsewfacK.
Rem* I* Certain substantives are used to convey an attributive idea in the T
oonstruct state before a partitive genitive ; thus ~^n3t> choite, uUetieu^ as in Gen.
*3> 6 ^3*7.3p "^n^D the choice of our sepulchres, L e. our choicest sepulchres
Ex. 15, 4. Is. 3 2, 7. 37, 24; other examples are, Is. i, 16 the nnl of your doings
emphatically for your evil doings; Is. 17,4. 37, 24 { = ihe tall cedars thereof).
Ps. 139, 22. This is the more common construction with tlie substantive ^3
entirety, for a//, the whole^ every, see \ 12 j. 6; it is also frequent with tSgQ
a Hultt totftw, I Sam 17, 38 ftc
s. To the periphrases eapressiag attrlbntife ideas (see letter p above) by means s
of a genitive constraction, may be added tiie veiy nnmerotts oombinatlan of the
coQStnict states Bhjt a Mfi pjja timUr^ fautsstr, "^3 tm, sad tiirir fianiolnes
' In the almost entire absence of corresponding adjectives (IV^X made of ledar,
a denominative from T^S V^T\^ bmzt-n arc the only examples), the language
regularly has recomse to the above pcnphrasij>. On the form qd(Al, as

ezpresslQg an naberent property, comp. 5a /; comp. also the proper name,.
and plurals (including ^flD fmn^ used only in the plnral), with lome appellstfftt
noun, in order to repreient n person (poetically even a thing) as possesiing lonie

object or qoality, or being in flome conditton. In EnÛi, nidi combination are
sometimes rendered by sugle snbitanttvei, sometimes by drenmlocotion.
Examples:
/ (a) Of B^K, ftc.: OnS'^ e^K on doqueut uum, Ex. 4, 10 (but OTIfib CNjB
Job ti, sa maH if Hp, i.& a AMU/dr); jlB^ IS^ a shmderert Fs. 140, is;
B^K a man rf kmawUdge^ Prov. 34, 5; nOR Bht a wrathful man, Pror.
I5i x8 D^pi B^K a numtf bbtd^ a Sam. 16, 7. Ft* 5, 7 comp. further,
;
Sam. ;
1
16, 18. I Kl. 2, a6. Is. 55,3. Ptov. 19, 6. 26, 21. 29, I. zra8, 18; also n'J>K
tS'TâcanUntiem wmatit Fkovs7, 15 ; in the ploralj e.g. (kn. 6, 4 n^7\ 'p^:i<
/A* aiMW ^
renown, famous ; comp. Gen. 47, 6. Is. 41, 1 1 .
1 4 ,
^ 10 (33^ 'K'3t<
men of umUrstauding) with ^HD, e.g. Is. l$ ^XID Jamuhtd men);

Job li, II.
|# (*) Of ^J?a> Sec: i)jr2 â/ry, 2 Ki. I, 8 ; moSnn the drcamfr, Gen.
37, 19; comp. Nah. i, 7. 9 {a destroyer). 32, 24. 23, 2 ^dii/cifJ

Prov. 1,17. 18,
to eat, greedy). 24, 8 ; feminine 3^X"n^j;3 a woman that ha/h a soothsaying spirit,
f Sam. aS, 7 ; comp. Nah. 3, 4; hi the ploral, e.g. D'iTn arthars, D^l^ ^^^3
OHfttUraUs, Gen. 14, 13 ;
nyi3e^ ^b^3 juvrw supporting Ndi. 6, 18.
V O Of-f3, &c.: ^W|3 a warrior; pi^"|3 4r, Gen. ij, a; n3Br||
ytarling^ Ex. 13, 5, and elsewhere ; fH^'i^ ^<f9ttm atmos naius. Gen. ar, 5
ni0'*|3 worthy to dUt 1 Sam. ao, 31 (Lather, a Sam. la, 5 eiW AiW ToJu) \
comp. Dent, as, a Jl^n |9 nwr/iy 6e beaton ; feminine, e. g. h^t^'STT^-a mektd

^
iS
woman, i Sam. i, 16; frequently also K^M, '3 ^^3, ^3 ^tî

simply i^S^lyf , like the Latin udus for seiksiissimm, a Sam. aj, (k Job 34, t8;
plural masculine, e.g. D1^2^ thildrm if the iost, oruntah; "^y&ckiUrtH
of rebellion, Num. 17, 25. ~|3 is used poetically of things without life, e.g.
Is. $, I I^B^â a fatf le. a fruitful (hiU); Jon. 4, 10 l^^|3 i.e. gr^wn a m
**(S^l ! Job 41, 30 son of th^ bow (Le. an arrow) so also flKH ^33 = sparks, ;
Joh 5, 7 ; Lam. 3, 13; nua Eccies. la, 4/Atf ebmghten of songt probably meaning
the individual notes.
IL' 3' Special mention must be made of the not infrequent idiom by which
adjectives (sometimes also ordhials, see 1 34. 0) are added in the genitive, as
svbstantive^ rather than as attrilMites in the same state^ gender, and number
as the noon which they qualify; thus, Is. a8, 4 tkejloworoftkat wkiek
fadost for which veise 1 has the fading fhwert comp. fhither, la. aa, 34.
Jer. aa. 17 (f). 5a, 13. 49 ; also the use of ))1 as a tub-
Ft. 73, 10. 74, 15. 78*
stantlve, e.g. in Ptov. a, 14^. 6 34 OH fW^) ^nd elsewhere, analogous to the
New Testament phrase 6 oiKov^futs rrj^diiidat, Luke 16, 8, and the French un hommt
de /';V '. Finally, nn .idverb (treated as a substantive) may likewise be used as
* On the other hand, in such passages as Is. 36, 2 (2 Ki. 18, 17). Zech. 14, 4.
Eodet. 8, 10, and others, there is no apparent reason why tlie Masont lequiies tlw
construct state instead of the absolute; hence b*n Is. 36, a and Zech. 14,
must be intended as forms of the absolute state, shortened in ooosequence of Ihetr
dose connexion.
Digitized by Google
iia90 Expression of the Genitive, 439
an epexegetical genitive; comp. D3n ^D*! bkcd shtd wUkmi ostur, I XI. 3, 31
Pfor. 34, 28. a6, 3; Eiek. 30, 16 (QOt^.
3, The epexegetical genitives include finally the numerous nearer x

definitions which follow the construct state of adjectives (and of active
and passive participles, or verbal adjectives, comp. 116./-/). For,
while the word of nearer definition is added to the verb in the
accusative (e. g.
it maj, with
^jm^
participles and
^ he was biased m kit feeit i Ki. 15, 23),
verbal adjectives, be either in the accusa-

tive (f 116. y and k) or in the genitive, the case of a word depending
on a noun. Such a genitive relation is usually termed an improptr
annexion. The nearer definition coniains a statement eitlier of the
material, e.g. Ex. 3, 8, &c. sj'" nsj a land Jiowing with
milk and honey i or of the means, e. g. ^'^n^'Slin slain with the suKfrd^
Is. 33, a; or the cause. Cant. 3, 5 sich rf hue; or of the scope of
the attribute', e.g. Gen. 39, 6 ^^nDJ fair firm; cf. Gen.
41, 3. 4, Ex. 34, 6. I Sam. 16, 13. Jer. 33, 19. Nah. i, 3. Fs. 119, i.
Job 37, 16; or of the manner, e.g. Ps. 59, 6 TJS faithkss ones
0/ wickedness (wickedly faithless).
Especially frequent is the use of this genitive to name the part y

of the body described as being affected by some physical or mental
condition, e.g. Ps. 24, 4 0^ dean as regards hands^ &c.;
3 Sam. 9, 3. Is. 6, 5. Job 17, 9 ; Is. 19, 10 Bêpi^Jtf grieved in soul;
t Sam. 1, 10. Job 3, ao. Also such examples as Amos a, 16. Prov.
19, 1, where a suffix is attached to the substantive, must be regarded
as instances of the gmitive construction, on the analogy of Prov. 14, 2,
see ii6.i.
{ 120. Expression of the Genilive by Circumlocution.
Besides the construction of a nomen rectum depenclenl upon a

a nomen regeos in the construct state (f 89 and 128), the connexion
of two nouns may also be effected otherwise, either by simply
attaching the dependent noun by means of the preposition j', which,
according to 119. r, expresses, besides other ideas, also that of
bdonging lo\ or by the addition of a relative clause (j> see
letter h below).
' Comp. the Lfttin itîgier vUoe se^msqtu purus; irises animi, &e.
* Comp. the crx$/ia KoAo^Minoi' in Greek, e.g. ^ ic fipaX^ Tf Mp^/w^ for roS
MpAnv (Bemhrdy*s Syntax, 88).
The Anb gumnuurtaat distinguish
Digitized by Google
440 The Paris of Speech, [129-
I) 1 . The introduction of a genitive by b sometimes occurs even when the construction

with the construct state would be equally possible, e.g. i Sam. 14, 1 6 i'^KC'b D^CifTI
thewatchmtn of Saul; Ps. 37, 16. a Chron. 28, 18 ^whcre indeed the circumlocution
makes the sense much plainer) ; as a rule, however, this use is restricted to the
following cases :
C {a) To prevent a nomcn regens being determined by a following determinate

genitive, e. g. i Sam. 16, 18 |3 a son offesse i^t^^'l^ would be, according to
127.0, the son offesse) ;
comp. Gen. 14, 18. 36, la. 41, 12. Num. 16, 22 (27, 16;.
1 Sam. 17, 8. 2 Sam. 19, 21. 1 Ki. 2, 39 two servants of Shimei ; Ps. 122, 5.
Hence, regularly inb ^^DIO (Ps. 3, i,&c.) a psalm of Davul (properly belonging
to David as the autlior), for which of David is used alone clliptically in
Ps. II, 1. 14, I and elsewhere. Such a case as IIDTD "inb (Ps. 24, 1 and
elsewhere) is not to be regarded as a transposition, but "îbjO is used epcxegctically
for tlie general term omitted before inb (as it were, a poem of David, a fsalm .
Moreover, the introduction of the author, poet, &c., by this Lamed auctoris is the
customary idiom also in the other Semitic dialects, especially in Arabic.
d {b) When a genitive is to be made dependent on a nomen regens. which is itself
composed of a nomcn regens and rectum, and represents, as a com{>ound, one united
idea, e. g. tyiai) ni^n npS^n the portion of field belonging to Boat (Tyb nib 'R
would be the portion of the field of Boaz) 2 Ki. 5, 9 at the house-door of Elisha. \
This especially applies to the cases in which the compound regens represents
a term in verj' common use, the fixed form of which cannot be altered, e. g.
I Ki. 14, 19 ^K-lb^ 5i)pi) DnDn na-l ISp-ijy in the book of the chronicUs of
the kings of Israel; 15, 23 and elsewhere comp. also Jos. 19, 51. ;
(f) When for any reason the construction with the nomen regens in the construct
state is impossible comp, e.g. Lev. 18, 20, where 'nri33K*, on account of the suffix,
;
cannot be used in the construct state; but Lev. 15, 16 sqq. and elsewhere,
jnrrQSC' ; Jud. 3, 28 the Jordan fords of Moah (|T^* as a proper natm cannot
be used in the construct state) ; Ex. 20, 5 upon the third and upon the fourth
generation of them that hate me; D*y3")"^yi must be kept in the absolute state
for the sake of conformity with D*E^'^*B'"by, and for the same reason also
f {d) After statements of number in such cases as Gen. 8, 14 D^* D^^^^l H^DC'll
on the seven and twentieth day of the month; comp. 7, n. 16, 3 and
frequently, or as in Hag. i, i K^Vl^b Deris' riiB*2 in the second year of Darius ; the
numeral here is always one compound idea with the substantive numbered, and con-
sequently (as in the examples under letter b does not admit of being in the constr. st.
with a genitive. The same naturally applies also to such examples as i Ki. 3, 18
on the third day of my giving birth (i.e. after my ginng birth).
Comp. also the standing phrase Uhh^ ^î) of l^ month,
''C?^ fi*'^*
Gen. 8, 5 and frequently.
a twofold genitive, one of which may be resolved by h, and the other by \0, [see
Wright's Arabic Grammar,
75 sqq. G.W.C.] The de of the Romance
vol. ii.
languages is a development of the latter idea; the Gascon, however, says e.g.
la file A Mr. A% laying stress upon the idea of belonging to and not that of origin,
as in lafilU . . . of the literary language.
Digitized by Google
\
i ijo.] Wider Use of the Cmsiruct State, 441
Rem. In cases like a Sam. 3, 2 and his firstborn was Amnon DjIrilKp of g
Ahiticam, the genitive expressed by circnmlocvtion with |) i in reality dependent
on a regens which is omitted ^Dy^ a son of Ahittoam)', comp. 3 Sam.
3, 3. 5. 1 Ki. 14, 13. Am. 5, 3, and the remarks on "liOTO
'^'^'f?
in letter c above.
2. The pcrijthrastic expression of the genilive by means of S '^C'X is used h
principally to state the pcssf^sor, e.g. Gcn. 29,9 n^Sxi) ^B'K ^JTH hir Jathtr^s
sheep (prop, the sheep whieh belonged to her fatA^r) ; Gen. 47, 4 and fre<iuently.
So also (aorording to 128. a) when a genitive dcpendt on more than ooe
fttbatanttve^ e. g. Gen. 40* 5 tMt hUUr and thi Mtr wk9 (belonged) tkt king
vf Egypt CD^|P vottld indicftte only the baker as belongiiig to the
king); or when a genitive (m fat the txamplts in letter d above) is added to
a compound, which expnSKS one united idea (Rath 4* 3); or when, a-; n fixed
tprm (e. g. a title), it appeaiB always in the same form, e. g. Cant* x, i D''"}^&'n
nb^J) the Song of Mn^, ^Sohmom; i Sam. ai,8. sSam. 9, 8. 1 Cbfon.

11, 10; comp. also Gen. 41, 43 K
ISO, Wider Ust ihe Consiruct Slaie,
The constnict state, which, accoidtng to 89. a, primarily represents a

only the immediaLc government by one substantive of the following
word (or combination of words), is frequently cmplo)ed in rapid
narrative as a coimecUng form, evea apart from th genitive relation
so especially
(i) Before prepoôns, panicnlarly in moist elevated (prophetic
or poetic) style, especially when the nomen regens is a participle.
Thus before |,
'^^^3 nnclE^ the jpyin the harvest^ Is. 9^ 2. 2 Sam. i, 21.
Ps. r36, 8 sq. ; in participles, Is. 5, 11. 9, i. 19, 8. Ps. 84, 7, and
especially often when ? with a suffix follows the participle, e, g.
Ps. 2, 12 ^3 'P^n-b; comp. Nah. r, 7. Jcr. 8, 16 (Ps. 24, i); Ps. 64, 9
(unless HNn should be read); 98, 7 I Before ^, Hos. 9, 6. Ps. 58, 5
(before Prov. 24, 9. Lam, a, 18 (before ^^); i Chron. 6, 55.
23, 28 ; in participles, Ezek. 38, 11. Job i8 2. 24, 5 ; before ^ with
an infinitive. Is. 56, 10, and again before {> with a suffix, Gen. 24, 21.
* In New Hebrew ^ (derived from "yj^ , see 36, and comp. Cant.
I, <5. 3, 7 nb'SK'^L"; is used like the'ttmpie relative in Aramaic, ai an
independent sign of the genitive.
' In Jiid. 8, II the article is even used before a construct state foUowwl by 3,
in order to determine the whole combination D*^>nND ''i^^^^ tent-d-celUrs, taken
as one word ; comp., however, the remarks in ii-j./'i, on similar grammatical
ftolecisnu.
Digitized by Google
442 The Paris of Speech, [ 130.
Is. 30, 18. 64, 3'; before Is. 14, 19. Ezek. 21, 17; before
{wiih)y Is. 8, 6; before P?, Gen. 3, 22. Is. 28, 9 (a participle);
Jcr. 23, 23. Ezck. 13, 2. Hos. 7, 5; before Jud. 5, 10; before
^^"^t 6 ; before the noia accus, fUC, Jer. 33, 22; before a locative
Is. 14,
(which in such cases also serves as a genitive), Ex. 27, 13. Jer. i, 15.
^ (2) Before wSw copulafivf, e.g. Esek. a6, 10; but TV&St^ Is. 33, 6,
35> 2, and TTSS^ 5i> 21 may be cases of an intentional reversion

to the old feminine ending alh, in order to avoid the hiatus ()) y n
C (3) When it governs the (orijînaily demonstrative) pronuun "^2^;

so especially in the combination "'tJ'^* Dipp th place whit e (proj). nf that
which) . . Gen. 39, 20. 40, 3 ; or "^*< 0lpD3 Lev. 4, 24.33. 2 Sam.
15, 21. I Ki. 21, 19. Jer. 22, 12. Ezek. 21, 35. Hos. 2,1. We should
expect OV^?, as in Gen. 35, 13 ftc, ai ihi plac9
which . . ., cf. { 138; is treated as a notnen rectum instead
of as an attribute. CC also ^ followed by a perfect in 1 Sam.
29, 8, and ^ Lev. 13, 46. Num. 9, 18; also *??nr"0 "^1 (M*
matUr of that which, i. e.) whiitsorjcr he showeih me^ Num. 23, 3 *.
^ (4) When it governs independent sentences (cf. 155), which

virtually stand to the construct state (as nomcn regens) in the genitive
relation, e.g. Ex. 4, 13 Thfir^l"! prop, by the hand of him whom
thou wiU send; Is. 29, i ^ when David encamped;
Jer. 48, 36. Ps. 16, 3 (if the text be right). 65, 5 (Prov. 8, 32). Ps. 81, 6.
Job 18, 2 1 the place of him that htiaweih not God; Job 29, 16. Lam.
I, 14 (if the text be right) into the hands of those against whom /can-
not &c.' In Gen. 39, 4 i^'V^h'S) the takes after it a noun-clause, and
'
These are to be distinguished from the cases where p follows a construct state,
which in conjunction with \0 (and the foUowinj^ has become a sort of preposi-
tion or adverb of i*lace; thus, we have Ex. 26, 33 (for which in P'zek.
I, 27 merely b i^'?) incaiiiii4j simply within ; J) ptp^ (a Ki. 33, 13. Lzck. 10, 3)
on the right kmut {\. e. south) of; !> [ifiXO {Jo^. 8, 11. 13. Jud. a, 9) on tht mrik
of; comp. also J06. 15, a I and |tp ^^sj) Ndi. 13, 4.
' In Dent. 23, 5 the cotutrncC state governs s sentence latiodaced hf the
conjunction (l^ '^^'^'^9 ^ the fact that, i.e. heeami) \ so also
in I Sam. 3, 23.
' Ftabably Gen. ss, 14 is also to be so explained (contrary to the accents),
and certainly (conttaiy to the vcty unnahiTal division of the verses) s China.
which should read on dms:

30, x8, '^V^ ^^^D ^J^^
Lerdparden every em that sttMh his Jkeart seek Gcd [See Widccs* Aeeenhm'
OeH of the 7\eeniy-pne Freu Beoks efthe Old Testament, p. 140.G.W, C]
Digitized by Goo<^l
131*] Apposition. 443
in Ex. 9, 4, still more boldly, a subst. with Very often a time-deter-
nUnaUiM governs the following sentence in this way; thus^ followed

by a perfect, i Sam. 5, 9 ; Of^f Ps. loa, 3 (before a noun^^lause). Ex. 6,
28. Num. 3, 1. Deut. 4, 15. a Sam. S2, i. Ps. 18, t. 59, 17. 138, 3 (in
every case before a following perfect). Ps. 56, 10 (before an imperfect)
D^*0 followed by the perfect, Jer. 36, 2 ; Lev. 14, 46. i Sam.
25, 15. Job 29, 2 as in the days ivJien . .
.; comp. n^D^3 and
ni^K' before a perfect, Ps. 90, 15); H}.'!! before a perfect, Jer. 6, 15
(cf. 49, 8. 501 31}; before an imperfect, Job 6, 17; f^nn before a
perfect, Hos. z, 2.
(5) Connected with a following word in apposition; certainly /

so in such cases as A^Wa ihe virgin^ the ÔMghkr of Zm,
Is. 37, 22 ; comp. 23, 12. Jer. 14,17; also i Sam. 28^ 7 SilTDT^B nfvt
a unman, possessor of a soothsaying spirit; comp. Dent. 21, 11. Gen.

14, 10. Jud. 19, 22. 2 Ki. 10, 6. 17, 13 Q're; Jer. 20, 15. 46, 9.
Ps. 35, 16 (?). 78, 9. Job 20, 17 ^ (unless or ^^nj be a gloss);
Dan. 11, 14.
Rem. Some of the al>OTc passages may also be explained by sapposing that
f
there exists a real genitive relation towards the preceding construct state, which
has been, as it were, provi?ionally left in si4s/niso, in conseqacnce of the insertion
of some interrupting word, e. g. Is. 37, 22, &c.; Job 30, 17 . Elsewhere (Deut.
33, 19. Ps. 68, 34) the momcH regens probably goveiM the following conitxuct
state diTectly\
(6) The numeral int< one for in^? in close connexion, and even g
with small distinctives, e.g. Gen. 4S, 22. 2 Sam. 17, 22. Is. 27, 12.
Zech. 1 1, 7.
The character of these passages shows tliat the numeral here cannot be in the
construct stale, but i:s merely a rhythmical shortening of the usual (tone-lengthened;
form. Analogous to this are the apparent construct states *3B^j ^^^t 6cc^
in the compound numerals from eleven to nineteen, see 97. d.
m. ApposiHon.
1. Apposition in the stricter sense is the collocation of two sul>* a

stantiyes in the same case in order to define more exactly (or to
complete) the one by the other, and, as a rule (see, however, below,
letter g\ the lormer by the latter. Apposition in Hebrew (as in the
'
So also Is. 28, 16 a corner ilouc of tlu preciomnas (n"]p* is a substantive not
an (uijcctiv) oj a grounded/tiunaaiwH^ i.e. a precious corner stone of surc:>t founda-
tioo.--&i 2 Siub. ao, 1 9 the tat is urirallj oonupi ; in Ps. 1
1 9 i a8 lead ^^"l^S'^S
Digitized by Google
oiher Semitic languages') is by no means confined to those cases
in ^hich it is used in English or in the classical languages. It is not
infrequently found when either the subordination of one substantive
to the other or some more circumstantial kind of epexegetical addition
would be exp)ected.
%, The principal kinds of apposition of nouns in Hebrew are the

following :
h {a) The collocation of genus and spicies, e. g. n^5)l< n^tc a woman

(who was) a widow, i Ki. 7, 1 4 ;
^J'VD rnj3 a damsel (that is) a virgin,
Deut. 23, 33.38. Jud.2i, 12. I Sam. 30, 17. i Ki. i, 2; comp. Gen. 13, 8.
21, 20 (where, however, ri^^p is probably an explanatory- gloss); Ex.

23, 30. 24, 5 (i Sam. II, 15). I>ev. 6, 13. i Sam. 7, 9. 2 Sam. 15, 16.
1 Ki. 3, 16. 5, 29 (but probably should be read instead of ^3?);

Is, 3, 34. Jer. 20, 1. No doubt also ynb the priest (who is) the
chief man, 2 Ki, 25, 18, &c. In 2 Sam. 10, 7 read ^'^^
the LXX.
c (d) Colk)cation of the person or thing and the attribute, e. g. Job
20, 29 (27, 13) D'J^rp^D fhis is the portion of a man, (who is)
a wicked man; comp. Pro v. 6, 12. Prov. 22, 21 JTOK D'^Dtjt words
(which are) truth; comp. Ex. 30, 2. i Sam. 2, 13. Mic. i, 11 (where,
however, nSQ is most probably a gloss on "^ri?)! Zech. i, 13 = com-

fortable words); Vs. 45, 5 (?). 68, 17 (comp. verse i6). In a wider
sense this includes also such cases as Ps.6o,5 nbru? r wine which
is staggering (intoxicating drink), which causes staggering"; i Ki.
22, 27 (Is. 30, 20) D!P water which is affliction, drunk in trouble
(imprisonment). Still more boldly, i Ki. 5, 3 "^Q^ oxen which

were taken out of the pastures, and i Ki. 6, 7 undressed stones
which come from the quarry, probably a corruption of yDGD.
' On certain uses of apposition peculiar to the 55emitic lan^juages, comp. the
exhaustive discussion by Fleischer, '
Ueber einige Arten der Nominalapposition
im Arab.' {Kleine Sthriften, ii. 16); [and see also Driver, Tenses, Appendix IV.]
' Unless it is to be translated thou gavtst us intoxication to drink as
wine (and so in i Ki. 22, 27 ^'ve Aim affliction to eat as bread, &c.); comp.
Ps. 80,6 and the analogous examples of apposition in the form of a second
accusative in $ 117. kk. Moreover, having regard to Hpin spiced wine, Cant.
8, 2, and K^S "^^y a wild ass's colt, Job 11, 12 (in which passages and "yy
must certainly be in the construct state) we cannot but ask whether the Masora
does nut intend the 60, 5 to be taken as construct state (for which
elsewhere P*).
Digitized by Google
\
Apposition. 445
A person and a condition are in apposition in Ezek. i8, 6 (unless
ivim ig to be read). In i Sam. 4, i read 'pn according to
5, 1. 7, 12.
(r) Collocation of the persm (DeuL 28, 36) or Mig (form) and d
malrial\ or of the âee or mastire and its coaieiUs, e.g. 1 Chron. 15, 19
n^n^ D^nJyyDa m'/A cymbals which were hrass^ i.e. of brass; Ezek.
22, 18, comp. Ex. 26, 25. Dan. 11, 8. i Chron. 28, 15. 18; Y.x. 28, 17
/our rows, namely s/ones (for which 39, 10 has '''7^13)
;
comp.
2 Chron. 4, 13. Lev. 6, 3 (see, however, 128.^/); 2 Ki. 7, i TÔ HND
a seah of /w^ /(wr,- comp. 2 Ki. 7, 16. 18. Gen. 18, 6. Ex. 16, 33.
Lev. 3, 1 1. Ruth 3, 17. i Ki. id^ 24. a Ki. 5 23 13^39 iwo UUtnts
of silver* i comp. $ 17. Ezek. 22, r8 (if the text be right). With the
wuUeruU placed l)efore the measure, Cx. 30, 33 sq. period ef time
and its contents are placed in apposition in tnplj B^h a mmih of
deg^Sy ie. a month's time = for a whole month, Gen. 29, 14. Num.
II, 20. 21, comp. Deut. 21, 13. 2 Ki. 15, 13, uiul D'PJ DÔJ^
^farj //>//r, i.e. two full years, Gen. 41, i. 3 Sam. 13, 33. 14, 28.
34, 13. Jer. 28, 3. II. Dan. 10, 2 sq.
Finally, under this head may be included all the cases in which
a nmneral (regarded as a substantive) is followed by the object
numbered in apposition, e.g, ta*3a trios sc. fiUi^ 97. a
and 134. h,
(d) Collocation of the thing and the measure or extent^ number, &c., i
e.g. Num. 9. 20 "IBDO (îJys, (a small) number, i.e. only a few
days ;
ni^D f]D3 money, rcpi iition, i. e. twice ai> much money,
Gen. 43, 12; D^Jl? wu/ifr which was of the measure of the
ktues^ which reached to the knees, Ezek. 47, 4 (also *9 water
thai was to the toinst in the same verse). This likewise includes the
cases in which a noun is followed in apposition by a numeral (see
{ 134. c) or an adverb, originally conceived as a substantive, e.g.

Neb. 2, 12 oyo men, a few, i.e. some few men; i Ki. 5, 9
nain n^^sn understanding, much-making, Le. much understanding:
comp. 2 Sam. 8, 8 and elsewhere.
Collocation of the thing and
{e) its name, e. g. "i''V'f?'
^"I'î'J^r^
^^^^'f
f
mountainous district, Seir (pcrhnj)s onl^ a pul si (juf nt clnss), Gen. 14, 6;
' Comp. also the examples treated above in $ 1 37. A.

" On the anonudotu form tTl?? (inaletd of D7}33 ; cf. D^^l? imiMdlately
bcfoieX cC f 88, 4.
Digitized by Google
444
other <
' *hi
/ 4tr
toth<
7^
wou'
3
foJJ
*4 4
^^^^^ to
the
'
'

f V '^^x^^tt rw
fie
; . 131.] Apposition. 447
'f the preposition. Num. 3a. 33. Jos, i, a '^^^ DH^ io ihem^ to the
^ ^
^"kiUnn of Israel ; Jer. 51, 56. a Chron. 36, 14'. Comp., fioally. Cant. 3, 7,
^bere the nffiz precedes- the genitive periphrastically czpieMcd by (as in
z * X Ezra 9, i, whcie the genitive it exprened by ^) ^
Of a diBerent kind are the cases in which the peimntatiTe with its proper raffia ^
follows as a Icind of oorrection of the preceding snIBz, e g. Is. S9, S3 wAmAtf (or
" * '
ntber) i
perhaps also Job so, 3.
(hUdren ftc. ^ is clearly a gloss); comp. Fa. 83, is,
5. Cases of apposition in a wider tense are diose in which the nearer dc6altioii
P
"
added to the nonn was originally regarded as an adverbial atcusative ; on Its me
- with the verb and on the relative correctness of speaking of such an accn5ative
- ** in Hebrew, cf. iiS. a and *v. Owing to the lack of case-end ini":, in<]erd, it is
in many instances only by analogies elsewhere (especially m Arabic) that wc can

dedde whether the ease one of appoiition in Ubit namwrer of in tbc wider
is
-<s.. mast lenndn qnite nnoertain. However, the follow-

sense; in other inatanoes this
tngaieprobably esses of appoiitioo in the wider sense:
-5 (a) Sodi plnies asi|^9 r^ftoo^Mli^nmaiftfiie ai^|^^ ^
3 Sam. 91, M. Jer. 17, 18 ; i Sam.
thousand shekels in brass; certainly
17, 5 Jive
^ ; such cases as Job 15, 10 older than thy father in days, and the f^xprcssion of the
- saperlative by means of IKD (originally a sabstantive), e. g. HKD 2^0 very good

Gen. I, 3T (comp. also Ecclcs. 7, \(^ HBin riqhfeai4S over much"^}, and the
.,* ver}' frequent TND n3"in prop, u h-making cxciffdingly, exi fcdingly great
Gen. 15, I and elsewhere, also Prov. 33,29 DSH Dî^^fi vmtnds without came*t
perhaps also Gen. 34, 35 (1103%
{fi) A few examples, in which an cpcxepctical substantive is ad lcd to a f
substantive with a suffix; thus, Euek, 16, 37 HD] '^'ir\'^y^ of thy conduct in lewdness
(but it is also possible to explain this according to letter c, of thy (onduct, which
is Uwdmss) ; cf. Ezek. 34, 13. 3 Sam. 33, 33 *?1J^ my fortress in strength,
ie my strong fortress(comp., however, Fk. 18, 33) ; Hab. 3, 8. Ps. 71, 7. MThile
even in these eiamplss tiie deviation from the ordinary usage of the language
(comp. { 135. n) is much more so in 3^ ^f'^D
stnmgef it ia 7* **^*
acooiding to the contest for a dMg Ezra s, 6s O^brrnon D3ftJ,
ku pUdge
I e. iiiir ngisUrf namdy of /Aar<r iiat wert rtekuud by gtmakgy (bot periiapa
^Tietn is in afipontion to the tnffiz in B3ril^)f also the caiiotts combinations
* But in Is. 17, 6 we shonld certainly divide tlic words dificrcnlly and read
ri*'\3n ^"^^ Vtoy, 14, 13 nno^'n n^njt; in Gen. a, 19 iTQ e^DJ is a
late gloss upon i^.
* Some of the examples given above are textnally (or exegetically) doubtfnl,
whilst ia the case of others, espedaUy those from the later Boolcs, we cannot
lielp asking whetlier sodi a piolepsis of the genitive by means of a saffis (as e.g.
Esek. 10, 3) is not due to the influence of Aramaic, in which it is ttic cniteaaiy
icUom; comp. Kautzsch*s Cramm. des Hiblisch'Aram., 81. and 5 88.
* In Ps. 69, 5 Din (like in a fake way, falsely, Ps. 35, 19 and 33f 3o) is
nsed as an advtrbial aumativ* with a participle; comp. i ti8. f.
Digitized by Google
448 The Parts of Speech. [f 131.
(maitioiMd in | isS. i/) <f ^TjT^ with proper aame Qjct. 26^ 43), and ia Jec
33, ao with DlWl*.

J 6. In Deut. 33, 4 (HBhiD, perhaps ^\oh is to be read), 33. a; (Hjinj).
Jud. 7, 8 {JT\t^ and Job 31, 11 the absolute sute appears to be nied inatoMi
of the construct to govern a following logical genitive ;
this, however, cannot
be explained either as a special kind of apposition, or (with Hitzig, as a peculiarity
of the dialect of Noithern Palestine, but merely as a lextaal corruption. On the
i>Lhcr hand, the rcuiatkable combination Ps. 80, S. le. arises from
the &ct, that in Pss. 43-83 D^7^N baa almost thxonghout been sabseqnently
sttbstitnted by some redaotor name niiT; 00 nUOY mTT eon^
for the divine
i 12$. h. In Ps. 59, 6. 80j 5. ao and 84, 9 nin* has been reinstated in the text
befoK rtov fi^hiM*.
i 7. Lastly, the neater definition (qnalificatioo) of a noon may be effected by
means of a preposition (either ivith a snflix or with an independent noan)/bitt
must then be distinguished from the cases in which the preposition is dependent
on a verb or verbal idea, e.g. Gen. 3, 6 and she gav^ also HSy Hl^K^ un(o her
husband with her ( her husband who iinu with her) in Gen. 9, 16 {^(hat I may ;
remember the everlailini^ arjenant hetwctn God and cvtry living cnature of ail
Jiesh) and ulher places, the qualiticalion of the noon is itself also qualified.
132, Cmtuxum of iht Svbsianiive uM the AdjecHveK
a 1. The adjective (like the participle used adjectivally), which serves

as an aitnbule of a subsUuuvc, stands after tlie subsianuvc, and agrees
' But in Num. 35, 12 Vih^ may also be explained according to letter r, as
really in apposition. Comp. <hi the whole question Delitnch, Psalaun^ 4th ed^
p. 303, note i.
Without this assunptfoo it would be inoonodvable that ntax ''^X^ nVT
should not hsTe been written ; dint the author of these Pisabns râided frtlQ^
already at an independent nnme of God (so Geaenius and OUiauien) is out oif
the question.
' On the expression of attribntivtt Ideaa by aubstantives, comp. above, | lay. 4,
and 128. 0, with the note; 135. n and 141. e (substantives for .ndjcctives as
predicates of nouo-clauses) and 152. u (peri iili rases for negative qu.ilities'. On
the use of the feminine of adjectives (and participles) to express abstract ideas,
see % 132. q It remains to mention further the employment (mostly only in
poetry) of certatn epithets in place of the substantives to which the quality
in question belongs ; e. g. ^ Onrngom^ i.e. Ged} n^SK tJu strmg mu, Le.
iht Mt (Jcr. 8, and eltewhere, tlu k0ru)\ swift miJU rumur (ol the
htru, Is. 30, n33j> o/Ao, te. hma; npll (Jruetiftnt^ a fruitful iru. Is. 17,
(so TT^ Gen. 49. 33) ; * emuhcr^ i. e. a crouching htasi of prey, Gau 4, 7.
Comp. also {jfl {grams, atûsim) and K^bO (elatus\)t i.e. a prince. This use of
adjectives and participles for substantives is much more extensive in Arabic. In
Greek and Latin poetical laogTiage comp. such examples as irff^^tJU sea$ mtrum
for viHuntf &c
Digitized by Google
{ 132.] Connexion ofSubstantive with Adjective, 449
with it in gendur and number^ e.g. a great tfum, HD^ n^H
a Uauhjul uHmum^ If the substantive is immediateiy connected with
a genitive, tlie attribute follows the latter, since, according to { 89
and { i98.a, tbe constmct state and the absolute sute belonging
to it are inseparablf united, e.g. Est. 8, 15 nîs snt d'^dj; a great
crmon of gold, On the attribute when attached to a dekrmiMU
substantive, sec above, 126. u.
Rem. I. Where an adjectival attribute appears to stand before its substantive ^

(according to tbe usual explanation, for the sake of special emphasis) the relation
it feftUy appoiteioBtl in character ; thnii Ii. 10, 30 nV)^ n^3^ O thou poor
omi, Anaikttkl (but probftbly n^^^ a$$twer htr, is to be itd); comp. 23, la.
$5, XI (fi rigkUom mm^ mfstrvani; hot in aS, II and n^s: are predicmtis
pieceding the mbstantlTe*); Jer. 3, 6. loaq. Fa. 18, 4 kirn who is worthy io he
fmised -.uill I call f/M^ the Lrd; 93, 12 (apportion af^cr participles). Bat
0*31 and n^3"1 many, arc sometimes placed, like numerah ! fore the substantive
(Jer. 16, 16. Fs, 33, 10. 89, 51. Neh. 9, 38 ; in Ps. T45, 7 31 is a sttbst. ngtm)\
an apposittonal relation can scarcely be intended in these instances.
a. In a few expressions (mostly poetic) the adjective appears not as an attribate C
afiir the tubstantiTe, bet in the consttuct atate governing it ; so In the aiogular,
Ek. 15, 16 (unless sboald be read) ; i Sam. 16, 7 {the height of his staturs) ;
in the phital, z Saa. 17, 40 D^SM *^^n mvmM ot$es ^ (among) j/mmt, i.e. smMtk
simss; 35, Eidc. 7, a4. FS. 46, 5, ud with a foUowing collective instead
of a plnral, e.g. Is. 39, 19 11^ mwitg mm^ i,^poerim; Jer.
49, ao. Zech. it, 7; comp. in Latin tanum digiemns. However, in almost all
these cases tbe adjective whicb is made into a regens is strongly emphatic, and
is frequently equivalent to a supcrlativti see below. 133. ff).
3. When two adjectives follow a feminine, sometimes only that stnndinrj next (i
to it takes Llic ieminine termination, e, j;. 1 Ki. 19, 11 131 ptlTI nb'lS r\\~\ ; 1 Sain,
15, 9 (comp., however, on this passage 75.>') Jer, 30, 9. Ps. 63, a. A similar
^
;
dislike of fenainine form may also be observed ia the case of verbal predicates
referring to feminine snbjects, comp. 1 145. / and /.
When an attribute qualifies Beveral substantives of different genders, it agrees
with the masculine, as being the prior gendsr {fL 146* 4), e.g. Neh. 9, 13
D3^3 n^>'p^ Dîpn ; Jer. 34, 9. Zech. 8, 5.
When three attribntcs follow a siibstantixe, the first two may stand without
a conjunction, and tbe last be attached by -omw lopulative, comp. Zech. 1 , 8.
4. After feminines pinral ending in 87./) the adjectival attribute (i (in

aocofdanoe vritb tbe fiindamental rule Mated above, letter 0) takes the endii^ TK
e.g. Is. to, 14 nfSI^ ffrsetkcH sggs; Gen. 3a, 16. For n strange ezoeptioa
see Jer. a9, 17 (differently in 34, a).
5. With regard to number it is to be remarked that f
(a) Substantives in the dual are f >11 avc ! by adjectives (or participles) in the
plural, e.g. Ps. 18, 38 (Prov, 6, 17; nion D^^^ haughty eyss; U. 35, 3. Job
4, 3 sq., comp. 88, a.
{jb) Collective ideas are not inffequtnily joined with the plural uf the adjective ^
or participle {constructio ad ssHsum) \ thus, e.g. ^^men, i Sam. 13, 15. Is. 9, i
Digitized by Google
lotênoi^ I Ki. ii, a8 ; ct Ex. 9, 28 and Seek. 44, 6 followed a Mb-
staative)
1/ In alltiieseiit8tanoes*)pesprasiesdther tt rMRMia/of
or t!ie severance of tlie person from some aim or object; comp. also the espveeioD
'^Jl i>3 DTO nothing will be unattainabU for them (prop, theie ihall
not be cut an" from them anjthing; which, &c.), Gen. ll, 6. Job 42, 3.
/ V I he attributive idea, on which "JD logically depends, must sometimes, in
consequence of a pregnant use of the "jD (see the analogous examples in $ 119. ff),
be supplied from the context, e.g. I5. 10, to D^^B^^^D DH^'b^DDl whose graven
images were more nnmerous than those at Jcrmalem, &c.'; Mic- 7, 4 worse than
a th0m kni^j Ps. 62, lo lighter lhau a breaihi Job 11, 17 clearer than the
moomU^; Eccles. 4, 17 better fte.
y 2. The correlative comparatives grea/er less {olderyounger) are

expressed by the simple adjective with the article i^the great, equivalent
to (htgrtattft ftc.); Gen. i, 16. 19, 31. 34. 37, 15. 29, 16. 18. 26.
g 8. To express the s$^lative it is also sufficient (see above, letter /)
to make the adjective determinate, either by means of the artide
or a following partitive genitive (or suffix); in this case the artide
or genitive indicates that the attribute in question belongs especially
to one or more definite individuals'; e.g. i Sam. 9, 21 "njwni the
hast ; 16, 1 1 (Oi^n //;, /////^ one, i. e. the j'ww^fw/ of eight sons; 17. 14
David was 1950 joungcsl, and Ihe three great, i.e. elder, &c.;
Gen. 49, 13. 44, 2. Cant, i, 8. So also with a qualifying adjective,

e.g.Gen. 9, 24 i33 his yfnmgtst sm; comp. Jos. 14, 15; also
with a fdlowing genitive, 2 Chron. 21, 17 fb^ ike ymmgtst of his
sans; Prov. 30, 24 ihe least upon ihe earih; with suffix, Mic. 7, 4 DSiD
iheir good one, i. e. the best of them ; Jon. 3, 5 DlPipiy*] D^nsp from
Ihe grcaksl 0/ Ihtin even to the leasi 0/ ihtm ; comp. the inverse order
in Jer. 6, 13. 31, 34.
h Rem. T. The above examples apply only to the most common relative attribntet
great, small. ffoecT), and to expressions which bjr usage easily came t 1 he recognized
as periphrases for the superlative. Other adjectives, however, when followed
by a partitive genitive, also acquire the sense of a superlative ; thii appears from
the eontext, e.g. Deut. 33, 19 the most hidiem treasures of the sand; Jud. 5, 39
the tnsest amongst her todies ; la. 19, iz. 93, 8sq. 39, 19. Jer. 49, ao. Eaek. a8, 7.
t
Comp. Uo 3 Ki 4, 3, where the idea of doing something ieo Uttte is para-
phiaaed bf the Htph. O^^'l ^demt too Uttle^ ic. hvS^ m bonvmng empty
' On this comparatio decurtatn, cf. the- still bolder prcigiuuit OOOitmcticil ia
Ps. 4, 8, T!'jn^ greater gladftiss than at the time, ike.
* Comp. also )i^!>^ the atte a^Sf L e. the Most High,
Digitized by Google
i3a0 Comparison oj Adjectives, 453
Zech. 1 i
, 7. Ps. 45, 1 3. Job 30, 6 (i M< moj/ /righi/ul of vaUeys), 41,2a; probably
ftl*o 55, 16. On tikb govmnienl by the adjective gcnecillyy cf. h 132. r.
Monover, the oombliuitioa of a anbalaative b the conMnict ttate with an adjective
naed sabitantivallj (difcaiaed ia f ia8. io\ sonketimca eerm at a peripbrads for
the miperlative, e.g. Is. Ji, 24 7b aU tki smaiUit vesalt; Cant 7, to
aten the hat wim Cwbeie iiêed a)ttn may have been or^siaally
intended).
a. Other periphrases for the superlative nre the use of a substantive in the t
construct state before the plurnl of the same word (which is naturally to be
regarded a partitive geiiilive; comp. our bock of books)., e.g. ILx. 26, 33
r?hgn the most kOy ptodf D^^^hl (Cant. 1,1) thi most exceUent
sot^î comp. Gen. 9, 35 {^servus urvorumj tie lowest servant) ; Num. 3, 33.
Dent 10, 17' (Pa. 136, 3^ ; i Ki. 8 37. Is. 34, to (comp. Gal. t, 5. Rer. ss, 5);
Jer. 3, 19. 1^ 16, 7. 36, 7 ('NW^ it/' ^m^, of Nebncbadretzar ; comp. X Tim.
6, t5. Rev. 17, 14. 19, 16, and another kind of drcomloctttion in 95, 3);
Eccles. I, 13. Similnrlv in T<-r 2^ two particii">les are combined, and in Hos.
10, 15 two snbstantives in the singular. KinTlly, the same object is attained
by connectinj^ one substantive in the construct slate with another of the same
stem îin2U^ JIB^ a sabbath of soUttm rest, i. e. an obligatory day of rest, Ex.
31,15, &c.) or of the tame meaning (e.g. H^CH !j|^n a thick dirhness, Ex. 10, 22).
3, The intendfication of attribotei by means of lepetidon beloogs rather to ibctoiic k

than to syntax, e.g. Eccles. 7, 34 pb^ pb^ exending dup; 1 Sam. a, 3. Ftov.
90, 14; the adjective is even nsed three times ia Is. 6 3.-^cinp. the repetition
of adverbs liar the same pnipoae in Gen. 7, 19. Nto>. 14, 7 (11^ *1M^ exteeiingt
also ikD *YieDa Ex. 7 and elsewhere) ; Ecelb 4s, i5->On the other hand, in
Pent, si^ 43 the rtpetitUm expresses a oontbnoaa prepress, i. e. hiêr tmi higher
^,nUfWermd lower ; in Dent 3, 37 (see f 13.-^. e^: and 16, 2<i {ftothing but justice)
the constancy of the action. Comp. Ex. 33, 30 Oytp D^D very gradually*.
The repetition of substantives serves also as a periphrasis for the superlative /
in such cases as (Ex. 3, i^)^ to the remotest generations ; comp. 17, 16.
Jer. 6, 14. S, II imperfect feace) ; Ezck. 21, 32 (n^y reicatcd three times)'; 35, 7.
Nah. Sometimes the comnlet'-ness of an action or condition is expressed

I, 3.
by placing together two or c\i.ii three substantives of the same stem and of
tfmflar soond, cranp. Eadt. 6, 14 (33. ^Ssq. 35, 3) 32, 15. Nah. a, 11. Zeph. ;
'
God of gods, and Lord of lords, just as the supreme god of the Babylonians
IS called bel bili ^Tiele, Compend. dtr Jiel.-Gesch., p. 87).
* Adverbs of the same item are connected in this way Nom. 6, 9. Is. t% 3. b
13; of different stems b
Is. 5* 36 and Joel 4, 4. In Num. is, 3 the particles
1^ py appear to be fdaced together for a similar pnrpoae, cqnivalent to sim^
emiset^,
* Different b Idod from the thrice repeated exclamation of the same words in
3 Sam. 18, 33. Jer. 7, 4 and 33 39, and the double exclamitloo b Jer. 4, 19 and
Lam. 1, 16 (t).
Digitized by Google
134. Syntax of the Numerals*
Cf. the exhaustive Utiitick collected by SfW Hermr, Symtax dtr TSahMMtr
im A* T,, Laod, 1893.
a 1. The numerals from a to to, as being originally abstract
substantives, may be connected with (heir substantives in three

different ways. They may stand either
{a) In the coiisLiuct state l>(/or the substantive (the object
numbered being consequently in the genitive), e. g. r\&^^ a triad
ofdegft^ i.e. three days; XS^^ the two men; or
b (3) Jn the absolute state htfcrt it (the object numbered being

in apposition, { 131. <0> ^^99 '^V^ ^ ^^^^ ^^^'^
sons ; O^^K D^:^ tzoo men; or
c {c) In the absolute state (likewise in apposition) q/}er ihe object
numbered, e.g. nto. So especially in long lists, since in these
the substantives naturally come first, e.g. Gen. 32, 15, Num. 7, 17.
28, 19. Apart from such cases, the frequency of this order in the
later Books is due to the fact that the character of the numeral
tended moie and more to become adjectival rather than substantival ^
ti Ren. .-In. Lev. js *in^ follows the conttract state DQf^, bat here as in
Norn. 15, t6 tS^fp dionld be lead, hi Gen. 43, 19 is in appOMtloci to
substantive wiUi a sofiix mi# fntkrm ; bat vefie 33 the ene tfym
hrthren). In Num. 31, a8 "intt precedes the snbstantive in the Aramaic maDoer
{m fine ea/:A).~oT rUS^nttp (Gen. 7, 17, &c,) we find regularly in the Priestly
Code (except iu Gen. 17, 17. a3, i) n3K' HWD (Gen. 5, 3, &c.) an hundred yemv.
On the connexion of abstract numerals with suffixes, as DH^Py' their duality^ i.e.
tliey ttvo. Gen. 3, 25 and elscw here (.ilso with a stren^cning separate pronoon,
as UnOH IÔB^ I Sam. ao, 4a), comp. 97. 4.
e a. The numerals from j to 10 lake tbe object numbered in the

plural*, with very few exceptions, sucb as Ex. 16, a a (where ^
'
From Hemer's tables (op. cit., pp. 55-66) appears, according to p. 68, that
it
in the documents J, E, D of the Pentateuch, in Jos. i-ii, Jud^'es, Samoelj laaiah,

Jeremiah, the Minor Prophets, Psalms, Megilloth, and Job, the numeral never,
or very rarely, stands nftt'r its noun ; in Kinj^r^s and Kzckiel it stands several times
after ; in the Priestly Code and Jos. 13-24 nearly alwaysi a/ier ; in Chronicles,
EsAy Nehemiab, and Daniel, nearly as often e^ter as be/ore tile noon. In Ex.
2%, 10 the Ifasora naakcs the nomeial in the genitive follow the oonstxact stale of
the sabitantlve nnmbered; we shonld howereri read Vlff^ TliCfS^TIItt; for the
omission of the article befoie 1^, c ( ta6. w.
* On examples such as Gen. 46, 37 (p'y^ C^DJ ttvo SOtilt), comp. f 1$*.^
(collectives joined with the plnial of the adjective).
Digitized by Google
5 134'] Syntax of the Numerals. 455
= the double of am &mer). it Ki. aa, i. Ezek. 45, i, comp. 2 Ki. 8, 17
and 25, 17 A"7A. The nunurals from 11 to 19 genemlly take
the plural, but wilh certain substantives frequently used with numerals
the singular is more common (see further, under letter y). The tens
(from 20 to 90)^ when they precede^ take the singular (in the
accusative, comp. } 131./) of certain nouns frequently used with
numerals (|^ a ikoMumd, f^, 0)\ nb, B^, but only in Ezekiel
and the Priestly Code), otherwise the plural, as 0*33, tSTifj (but
cf. also Jud. II, 33), &c.; on the other hand, the plural is necessary
when they follow the object numbered in apposition (e. g. D^")^ nStSH
tweni)> cubits, 2 Chron. 3, 3 sq. ; wilh the exception <if 2 Sam. 24, 24,
only in late Books). After nSD and the substantive numbered
may be used either in the singular or plural, see further, letter g
below.
Rem. I. After die Doinenli from 11 to 19

tiie aingqlar is need, % rale, wiA f
VWf yettr, yhk tm, mm/ (peiMn), }SS^ iriie, raQpiibr(^
4, 4), sometime* with i18|t ciMt, B^Th mmtM, ifijf eUy, sktiul (compie oar
fiur-yutr-oM and the Genun ucAw^ i^mnO), e.g. Dent i, a tit* ito>^ *in|C
(comp., howoer, snch exceptioos as Deut. i, 33. Jos. 4. 9, and elsewhere).
Substantives uther than these are nscd in the plural with the namerah from ii to
19, and the numeral may even follow the substantive, espcQtally in later pasMge%
as Num. 7, 87 sfj. i Chron. 4, 27. 25, 5.
2. Alter nxp (riKtp [so almost exclusively in the Pnesily Code, e.g. always g
fj^K nKtD], fliNO, D^nKD) and (D*B^, 'bS*, Dâijlt) the substantives
Bft<, nB (except in Ezck. 40, 37), Di\ ^JjjV 1D5P are regularly used in
the singular, generally also nje', "ISp^ lb, (with the exception of Jos. 7, ai.
sSm. 14, 26, and elsewhere); comp., moieo?cr Gen. 33, 19. it. x, i. Jud. ai, 13.
Dent 7, 9. I Ki. 5, 12. 2 Chron. 9. 15. Examples of the /Aim/ after iJUfQ are
Gen. 26, 12. I Sam. 18, 25. s Sam. 16, 1. i KL 18, 4; after HKtS Ex. 38, 27;
after T(Wg
Jud, 1$, 4' > Sam. 8, 4. 1 Ki. 10^ 17. Bxek. 42, 17; after Q^riND
1 Sam. 2$, 18. I KL 7 20; after r)^^ i Ssm. 25, 2. i Ki. 3, 4. 5, 6. s Ki 3, 4.
P$. 90. 4; after D^fi^K 1 Sam. 17, 5. Job 42, 12 ; after ^cS>K Mic 5, 7 j after tt%^
Is. 361 8d In Dan. X2, ix tlie plard pneoedes tbe numeral hveive kwtdrtd,
8. Numerals compounded of tens and units (like 21, 62) take the k
object numbered either a/ler them in the singular (in the accusative))
e.g. Gen. 5,
according to letter
30 ^ 0^9V)
^ since it
two and sixfyyears
conforms to the ten immediately pre-
in tbe singular^
ceding; but also WB^ njbfil tt^^ Deut 2, 14), or be/are them
in the plural, especially in the later Books, Dan. 9, 26 and elsewhere;
or the object ib repeated (but uiii| m i ivi. 0, x, and die Priestly
Digitized by Google
45^ The Paris of Speech. t 134.
Code; sometimes even several times, e.g. Gen. 23, i. 25, 7. 17 thrice)
in the plural with the units (according to letter h\ and in the singular
with the tens (see letters) and hundreds, e.g. Gen. 12, 4 D*3B^ Bôn
Tm D^V??i sa}enty and five years; Gen. 2;^, t n3B^ D^b^n nJB' HKO
O^ê^ y38h an hundred and twenty and seven yean, Comp. Gen. 5, 6 sqq.
f Rem. 1. It may Airther be lemaiked with rôrd to tiie order, that die thousttd
or thonsands always precede the hundreds, &c., and the hundreda ahnost alwajt
come before the smaller numbers (in Kin^s and Ezekiel sometimes, and in the
Priestly Code usually, after the smaller numbers), the tens in the earlier
Books (documents J and D of the Pentateuch, Joshua I-I3, Jndges, Samuel, Isaiah,
and ako in Ezra and Nehemiah) before the units, bat in Jeremiah, Ezekiel, the
Priestly Codti Jodma 13-34, after the anits (tee Uener, op. dt., p. 73). After
the hundreds the smaller number is ^ry freqtiendy added dvM'S^Taft, witboat \
especially m na Ndimtahi and Dinid.
On the ayntax of the caidinab in general :~
k 9. The by the article, when they refer back (without
cardinal* are determined
bci connected with the object nnmbeied; comp., however, Ley. 35, losq. Nam.
1;
16, 35. Jos. 4, 4. 2 Sam. 23, 13) to a number or list already mentioned, e.g. Gen.
3, 1 1 "inxn DC' the name of the one (the first) w Pishon; Gen. 14, 9 four
kings agaimt the five (enumerated in verse 2>; comp. i Chron. 11, 30 sq., and
the determin.ite tens in Gen. 18, 39. 31 sq. A demonstrative with the article may
also be added to a numeral determined in this way, e.g. Deut. 19, 9 (but comp.
lao Gen. 9, 19. 33, 33, where the nmneral and demonstrative are ptactically
determinate in Uiemselm). In the case of the nnmends from it to 19 the
article may stand either before the unit (i Cluon. 95, 19. 97^ 15) or before itofj
(Jos. 4,4); it is used before ell three members a conpoond number (973)
in Num. 3, 46.
/ In appositidn with some determinate substantive the cardinal number is used
-without the article, not only when it precedes the substantive, as in Jos. 15. 14
(p:yn ""jn ncni^K^riK, where nc^(?c' is equivalent to a substantive determinate
in itself; comp. Cen. 18, 28. Jos. 6, 8. 21. i Sam. 17, 14. 1 Ki. 11, and the
passages discussed above in 126. x; Gen. 21, 29. &c.), but also when it follows
the substantive, e.g. i Ki. 7. 27. 43 sq. and Tr\yjf^ ; the omission of the article
may here, as in the cases noticed in 1 36. z, be also due to the dislike of a
hiatus. This would also be a very simple explanation of Num. a8, 4, l Sam.
13, 17 sq. Jer. 34, a. Esek. 10, 9, instead of the more usual aad of XirttC
I Sam. 9 fornnKH.
I,
- -r
Such esses as tT^n flja^ Jud. 14, 17 (which is determfaied by a foUowUig
determinate genitive) are explsmed from ( 197. ^; i Chron. 9, 35 perhaps from
1 196. f ; hi Is. 30^ 96 probably the light of all the seven days of the week is
meant on the other hand, in 1 Sam. 9^ ao and 95, 38 the article Is, with Well-
;
haosen. to be omitted.
ft 3. Certain specifications of measure, weight ^ or time, are commonly omitted after
numerals, e.g. Gen. 20, 16 îps a thousand (shekels) of silver ; so also fjefoi e
Gen. 34, 39. I Ki 10, 16. Is. 7, 33, comp. Fs. 119, 73. Moreova, Rath 3, 15
Digitized by Google
ij4-J Syn/ax of the Numerals, 457
D**)iJ^ Ete^ six (ephahs) of barley ; i Sam. 17, 17 Dn^ "^^^ (according to
10, 3 havs) ofbreadi oomp. a Sun. i6, i,wlMie bcfbie meMVie, or perfaapt
ome terra like edUst it to be sepplicd.^The number of cvbits is stated u the

Priestly Code Êx. s6, a and eliewheie) and in Ki. 6 and 7 (otiierwise only in
1
E2ek. 40, 5. 31. 47, 3. Zech. 5, 2. 1 Cliron. 11, 33. aChron. 4, 2 sq.) by the
addition of mSKB prop, by the cubit. AUo in Ex. 27, ii the Sanaiitan and LXX
feed nfV} after' V^Ki m 37, 15 no^ after n"]^.
4. The ordinals above 10 have no special forms, but are eipressed ^
by the corresponding cardmals, which may then stand either before
or after the object numbered, e.g. Gen. 7, 11 DV "b^ on the

,sevmUmlh day; Deut. i, 3 HJC? D'^^Sl'Ifcta in the fortieth year ; comp.
Gen. 14, 5. 2 Ki. 25, 27, and, with repetition of HiB^ in a compound
number, i Ki. 6, i ; such a cardinal occurs without 3 (and therefore
in the accus, temporit, according to 118. ii) in Gen. 14, 4 (the
Samaritan, however, has with the article (but without
a numbered object, see above, letter i), i Ki. 19, 19'. On the
position of the numeral as a genitive following its noun, comp. e. g.
1 Ki. 16, 10 y3Bn On^?y roc^ / the twen/y and seventh year, and
with a detcniiiiiate numeral, Ex. 12, 18. Num. 33, 38. Deut. 15, 9.
In this case, however, n^C' is very frequently repeated, e. q. Gen. 7, ll*
a Ki. 13, 10; after a determinate numeral, Lev. 25, 10'.

Rem. In nomberiog days of the month and years, Hne cardbals are wy fie- p
qncntly ii<;ed instead of the ordinals even for the nombeis from I to lo, e.g.
D^ri^' mpa
i Ki. 15, 35 vbv rUBâ a Ki. iS, i, 8cc, comp. Deut. 15,9.
; The
months themselves are always numbered by the urdinnls 'pW13^
Dp to *TbT3), but not the days of the month, e.g. inKB (icn. S, 5 and
Cnh^
elsewhere.
^V?")*??
7' ' >
^^hb "'^'^Q^ and elscwhcrt ,
Cnh^ nynba 2 Ki. as, 8, mh^ n^fiS'na Lev. ^3, 3a (always, however, ife^g
îrb ti'tifh day of the month). On the omission of D^* in all these cases
see above, letter ti ; only in late p-ass-i fê*? i<; Di^ added, e g- 2 C'hron. 39, 17
m\DB' DV2 ; Kzra 3, 6 C^lhi? Tns< U^^t;. 1 uially, when the year is stated
by ri3^3 goveriiiriL; a dcf frminnfc ordinal, e. i Ki. 17, 6 n^JTlCfTin 7130^3
.Somewhat different from this is i x. 19, U ready D'tp^ nC'^JT^ prop, after
tnrcc days, i.e. the third dtiv (in verses ll and if* and in Ezra 10, S ihc urJiiial
is used), also 1 Sam. 30, 13 Dw''!?^ DIM ^H^J'n ""S betause three days agone I fell
tick, prop. /^</a|^ three (days).

* All ttese czpiesdens may indeed be ezpli^ned by supposing that, e.g. in Lev.
SS, xo, tile proper neaaing b
/Ar year of the fiffy yean whkh it completed, Le.
the fiftieth year; bat moie ooneet to leîd TSXf or flflf^ in meb cases
it is
not as a real nmm reguut but simply as a connective fbim lo be explained on

the analogy of tlie cases mentioiied in 138. h.
Digitized by Google
in nUUh yttar (oomp. 35, i. Jer. a8, 1 ATVA. 3a, i K'tk, 46, 3. 51, 59.
S*** 7i 8)t n3f^9 ^ soch caaes te (aee ttoie a on letter to be eaqilaiiied
ccordlag to { laS. il. This is auppottcd by the &ct tfiAt tlie Mmoi on
Jer. a8, x. 3a, i, reqoiiea in the Q^ri Uxt fOB^S.
g 6. Distributi-Lcs are expressed ci'l er b^* repeiition of the cardinal
number, e.g. Gen. 7, 9. 15 D^^^ d;::^' /t^-tj two; 2 Sam. 21, 20

Bâ^ jflr i-iTr/^; with the numbered object also repealed, e.g.
J08. 3, 1 2 c:3iri> nPiK B^^ ng /or ecery iriU a man; Num. 13, a.
34> 1 3 ({9 ir^t, as in Neh. w^xôiu of evety im); comp. { 123.

<mi
or a periphrasis with |> inf is used, Num. 17, 18. Deut i 23, comp.
Is. 6. 3 ''J^^ after six wtfijfft twice repeated ; the simple distributive
!* however, sufficient (as in OnB??* 123.^), e.g.
is, ^^^^^
by hundreds and by thousands.
r 6. The viultiplicatives are expressed either (like the ordinals

above 10, see letter 0 above) by the cardinals (in the feminine,
probably owing to the omission of t^ya, O^ffi; so KOnig,
it. 328), as O^ne^ hmct^ Job 40, 5; P^^^mvn timn^ Jjcy. 26, ai. 34.
Prov. 24, 16; cOTip. also 3 Ki. 6, io Job 40, 5, for which
inJob 33, 14 riHR? ^ along with D^)^ (the latter also in i Sam. 18, 31);
or by the diuai of the numeral, thus ^Sf!ff(f Gen. 4, 1 5 (in verse 34
along with the cardinal 77 for 77 times) ; Is. 30, 26. Ps. 12, 7. 79, 12 ;
D^JIYaiyi 2 Sam. 12, 6"-; or pcriphrasiically by Dys a iitne (prop.
a step, with the article, Oysn fhis tiim ; comp. also riXTH with
a, like nntt!i above), as T\xysk Dya ow^-^ (Neh. 13, 20 ti^Sf^ OJ?i ww<
iwu\ D^DJJB /zr/irt-, Dnp^B B'i'^ (for which in Ex. 33, 14. Num.
23, 38. 33 CT^") Bî'^) Mrr //ffl^^ry comp. zek. 41, 6 t^riyîknt
times: 2 Sam. 24, 3 an hundred timet; Deut. i, 11 a (hemand times;
I KL 22, 16 neanf im/f? numy times, i.e. how often.
Cf. also D*3b n^bg /f/z times, Gen. 31, 7. 14, and D*nV ^^31 wtz/iy
//>;/^\r, Neh. 9, 28. In Gen. 43, 34, Jirc /I'mrs is expressed l^y HIT B^n
(prop, handsY, and in Ex. 16,5 the doulk is expressed by
(prop, a repetition over and above that which, &c.). Of the
ordinals is used as a numeral adverb, Gen. 22, 15, &c., a seamd
^ Bnt nn|ta Nam. 10, 4 is to be translated on ont (trumpet).

' Probably also O^B^ Job 1 1, 6 (irom dmMingi does not mean demUed
but manifrl'l.
* But nn^n I^'l^ Geo. 47, 24 mwAthe {p\hit)/mr /wis; comp. a Ki. ix,
Neh. II, 1.
Digitized by Google
I36-] The Personal Pronoun, 459
time, comp. the Latin tirtium consul; nB^b^3 the third time, i Sam.
3, 8 ; nê^^pn Oyg a fifth time, Neh. 6, 5 ; IT^^fâ at ihe sevenik
(time), I KL 18, 44, and 'B^ DSfia Jos. 6,
Rem. The collocation of a numerftl mtith tbe next aboTc it (either in the tame s
or hi diftrent sentences) is a rhetorical device employed in nmmtrical sayings
to express a nnmbcr, which need not, or cannot, be more exactly specified. It roust
be gathered from tlie context whether such fonmrlae are intended to denote only
an insignificant number (e. g. Is. 17, 6, /tw or at the most three), or a ct nsidt rable
number, e. g. Mic. 5> 4* Sometimes, howeTcr, this juxtapositioti serves to express
merely an Indefinitetotal, without the coUateral idea of a gradation from a lower
to a bighv nnmber. Thus m and two are connected hj \, Dent 33, 30. Jcc 3, 14.
Job 33, 14. 40, 5 (without 1, Ps. 63, la); tw and thm^ b. 17, 6 (Slxac. 33, 16.
3<f, a8), and withoait 1, a Ki. 9, 33. Hoa. 6, 3. Amoa 4, 8 ; tkm and yfaur,
Jer. 36, 33, Amoa i, 3. 3 4. Prov. 30, tS. at. 39 (SSiac 36, 5)^ and without
I*n>v. ^ 15 ;fmr and jftv, without 1, b. 17, fi; jir and uvm. Job 5, 19.
Pcor. 6, 16; uwm and Mic 5, 4. Ecelca. ii| a ; (utiw and /m, Sixae. 35, 7).
HI. Syntax of the Pronoim.
{ 185. The Ptrstmal Prmmm,

1. The separate pronouns, apart from their employment as the a
subject in noun-chtuses (comp. j 141.4) and the idiom mentioned
under letters aie used, according to 32. i a nxle, only
to give express emphasis to the subject; e.^. Gen. 16, 5. a Sam. 34, 17
i.c. / n^selfi so also % Sara. la, 28. 17, 15 (after the verb),
Eaek. 34, 15. Ps. 2, 6 but i Sam. 10, 18. 2 Sam. 12, 7. Is. 45, la
^ xiOiit else; cf. also *3K /, // Ilos. 5, 14, &c.;
Gen. 15, 1.5. Jud. 15, 18. I Satn. 17, 56 (as in 20, 8. 22, 18. Ex. 18, 19.
Deut. 5, 24. Jud. 8, 21, after the imperative); i Ki. 2 1, 7; DWtt Gen. 9,7.
x. 20, 19 (after the verb, Jud. 15, la); fem. Gen. 31, 6 ; K)n i Sam,
33, 18; Ksn Gen. 3, 20. Jud. 14, 3; non jer, 5, 5. Sometimes,
however, the separate pronoun appears lo be placed before the verb
* Also Ktil, hi himself, she hereof (of persona and things), e.g. Is. 7, 14
MVl the Lord himselfi Est. 9, i non Qn,wn the Jews themselves. In the
sense of the seme (3 oMt) or (m and) the same, KVi is used in Is. 41, 4,
43, 10. 13. 46, 4* 48* 13 (always MV1 ^^), Ps. loa, 38 (M)n nn{C), and probably
also Job 3, 19,The position of nOH, aa an aecvsatite of the object* before
a periiecl in i Chron. 9, 33, can at most be eiplamed 011 the analogy of Anmaic
(Earn 5, 13).
Digitized by Google
more on rhythmical grounds, i.e. in order to give the statement a fiiUer
sound than llial of ilie bare verbal foim (cf. the similar use of the
infinitive absolute, w^r^.o). Thus Gen. 14, 2v r*s. 139, 2, and most
clearly in such passages as Gen. 21, 24. 47, 30. Ex. 8, 24. Jud. 6, 18.
II, 9. I Sam. 12, 3o. a Sam. 3, 13. 91, 6. i Ki. a, 18 (in solemn
promises). The same explanation applies to at the beginning
of sentences, e.g. Gen. 34, 45. Hos. 5, 3. 10, 11. la, 11. Ps. 39, ii>
8a, 6. Job s, 3 *
^ Rem. 1. DiiTeient rom iui& is the pleonastic aUditioti of the separate pronoun
immediittely after the Tcrb (aooofdtag to Delitncb on Cant 5, 5 perhaps ft tiaoe
of popalar Ingiuige), e.g. i Sam. 23, 82 (f). Cant 5, 5, and (like other
indicattOBt of the ^cry late ongin of the book) very fieqaently in Ecdetiaitcs, e. g.
1, 16. 3. I. 11. 15. 3* 17 >q> Ace.; oomp. DeUttschy Zîw HoktUii wtd KthtUtk^
p. ao7; in Aramaic, Dnn. 5, 16.
C a. Substantival subjects alio arc somewhat frequently resumed, and thus cxi>rcrssly
emphasized, by the insertion of the conespooding separate pronoun of liie 3rd i^rson
before the piedieate ii itated, e.g. Gen. 3, \%tki toeman wkmn thou gavtstiÂg
taitk mt, she (K^) gMH Mr,&c.; 14, 34 (DH) ; 15. 4. 34, 7, ftc; but KIH in
Ii. 7, 14 after the predicate and tabjeGt it eqeivalent to ke kims*^,
d 2. Not infrequently the separate pronoun serves to give strong

emphasis to a suffix of the same person which precedes (or sometimes
even to one which follows), whether the suffix be attached to a verb
(as accusative) or to a noim or preposition (as genitive). In English
such an emphasis on the pronoun can generally be rendered only
by laying greater stress upon it, or sometimes by repeating it ;
comp..
on the contrary, the French mon livre h mot. The separate pronoun
in sucli instances is not to be regarded as a casus oblt'quus (accusative or
genitive), but as the subject of an independent sentence, the predicate
of which must in each case be supplied according to the coniexL
Example* of emphasis :
(a) On a wrMnSbt, hy meant of OÂ), Gen. 27, 34 ^J^-OS I4tss tM,
evem m uiso (prop. Mwi mt^ I aito would be bleated) Zech. 7, ; 5 ; oomp. alao
>dE. 6, 3. 34 11. 20 ^33n; by npl|jl (HFIK) Ptor. 22, 19Hie tepaxatc
proD(nm/rrrfitr io Gen. 24, 27 (^^K) ; 49^ 8 (nn|C notJiidak, tkmt art Mi
' As early at the Mfla* inacription (line 21 aqq.) "j^N frequendy ttanda at the
beghmiqg of a new tentenoe after the dividing itroke.
* Analogoo* to this It the retnmptioo of a nonn dependent am a pi e otitt ca
p
by means of a pronominal taffix nnited with the same preposition, e. g. Gen. 3, 1 7.
a Sam. 6, 32. a Kt. 23, 18, or of an object by means of the jmAi ommmIpw UK
with tufSix, eg. 1 Sam. 13, 9. Is. 8, 13.
Digitized by Google
i <35 ] TAe Personal Pronoun. 461
but JuJah thf'. fh't fhy ^r.'fhrrn shall praise! but the vocative would also be possible,
Judah! thcnt! ihy brethren shall praise theel as in 34, 60), and Eccles. 2, 15 Q3.
i
On a noun-suffix with a substantive, by means of a Sam. 19, i. Prov. 23.15, J
perhaps also Lam. 1, 16 (against the accents); by Hfltjl I Ki, 21, 19 'jD'jJ'nt^
nriK"D3 Ihy blood, even thine; by N^H 2 Sara. 17, 5. Jer. 27, 7. Mic. 7, 3;
by UnSK I Sam. 20, 42, aftei bui wuhont special stress; Neh. 5, 2 (?)
by DRK Num. 14, 33; by DH I's. 38, 1 1 ;.without special >trr -s , nrSH Ps. 9, 7.
The scfmnite prononn precedes in Job 21,4 O^bX) Gen. ; 40, 16. is. 45, 1 2. 1 Chron.
a8, 3 0D); Zech. 9, 11 (Wyi); Jos. 33, 9 Esek. 33, 17 (nBn).-Iii
Fli. 89^ 48, where ''3^t might be taken m strengthening *T^n (equivalent b senfle to
n^), we ahonld raid '^hK for a in vene 51.
{t) Ob a soffiz united wfth % piepositioD, i Sam. 95, 34 ^3(t ^3 upon mtt upm g
m; IKL s, 36 ^^|t . . . 3 Cbrao. 35, sz t)T^ i^pnmt tJUe;
I Sam. 29, 33 Min Dl vbT^ upon kim abof Dent 3, 3 UnSK Unit Sta wkk m,
nten tit; Hag. i, 4 tJTlW 03^ /ttr/pm yourselves i Jer. 35, 14 nn"D| D3-The
aeiaiate igxunmakpntkks in i Sam. 13, 33 ^J). * ^SbM; i Ki. I, aot|^ , viPiî
Mic 5* I TfQ and 3 Chron. 38, lo tDBfdMI.
The same principle alio explains Gen. 4, 36 MVTDI to Seik, ia Aim 4Us h
(not ^Ê]|) ; oomp. to, sz, and Eac 35, 34. Nnm. 41 33.
8. The obUqve cases of the personal pronouns expressed by means f

of a preposition (or the nola arc us. nx) may be used either in
a demonstraiive or reflexive sense \ as 'h fo huu, but also io himself

{sibt\ e. g. Jud. and Ehud made
for himself a sword^ comp.
3, 1 6
ên. 33, 17 so also Dni> sibt\ Is. 3, 9; toK wilh him^ and Gen. 32, 3
;
with himstlf; îth her^ and i Sam. i, 34 with hersdf; unto

him, and Gen. 8, 9 unto himself; also apparently as a pleonastic
datious ethiirus (see ii9>x) Job la, 11. 13, i.
Rarely, and only when marked emphasis is intended, is the aecusaiive k
of the reflexive pronoun represented by the nota accusativi riK with
a suffix (this being ordinarily expressed by the reflexive conjugations

Niph'al and Hithpa eP ) \
thus, ^riN himself and iiis iiabitalion, 2 Sam.

15, 25; Dnjt se ipsos, Ex.5, 19. Jer. 7, 19 in sharp antithesis to ^riKH
zek. 34, 3. 8. 10. Comp. 57 at tlie end, together with note a.
Ren. There is a similar emphasb b Is. 49, 36 on and XXf^ b the sense /
of Oir 0umJlesh, their Uotd, On the sometimes mm demonstrative, sometimes
reflexive meaning of noun-suffixes of the 3rd person singul.ir and plural, cf. f 91.
/ and q. For other circumlocutions to express the idea of self, see 139 /
* As in Luther s iiiblc jm {ihm), jr {îhr) ioi sieh, ami m our version him, her
ivK himself, herself
* Nipk'ea accoiding to $ 51. (like HUhp^H aoooiding to | 34*/) ^1 lso
ioctnde the daHut of the reflexive prooonib
Digitized by Google
The Paris of Speech [35-
ffl 4. The possi-ssive pronouns arc, according; to 33. f, expressed

by the suffixes of the noun (in the genitive) which may represent
either a subjective genitive, or (like the genitives proper, { is8. k)
an (jHêetiot gmHiott e.g. the wrong done againsi m, Gen. t6, 5.

Jer. $ii 35; comp. Gen 9, 3. 18^ 21. 27, 13 (a Sam. 16, la JTVA.);
Gen. 30, 23. 39, 21 (comp. Ex. 3, 21 and elsewhere); 50,4, x. 20, ao.
21, 35. Jud. 4, 9. 13, 12 (^nbjÔ fhe treatmmi of him)) Is. 56, 7.
Jer. 9, 7. Nah. 3, 19. Prov. t, 27. 24, 22. Job 20, 29. 23. 14. 34, 6.
Comp. also such jjrcgnant expressions as Ps. 20, 3 ^")|^' nê*^ will
send thy help {lielpfor Ihee), i. e. he will send ihee help ; Gen. 30, 1 8. 39, 2 1
Ex. 2, 9. Is. 1, 26 {and J wiU restwe judges fm- iheey, Esek. 37, 15.
When levcnl mtNtaativet tie co-ordinated, the prooomioal suffix tmat be
attached to each singly, e.g. Gen. 36, 6 and Esau took "JIK} V^S^DKI ^^6^^
vnba his wives tmd his sons emd his doMfÛers^ 8k* ; 38, 18, ftc. In 2 Saau 23,
the teat is hardly concct.
u 5. When the genitive, following a construct state^ Is used periphras-

ticall} lo exjtress the idea of a maieilal or aiinbutc ( 128. 0 and />),
the pronominal suffix, which properly belongs to the compound idea
(represented by the nomen regens and genitive), is, like the article
({127), attached to the second substantive (the genitive), e.g. ^^5^

prop, ihe hill qf my hîtsess, i. e. my holy hill, Ps. a, 6 and elsewhere
IfTi "^"V ify ^(y* IÂn. 9, 24 ; toDa his idols of silver.
Is. a, ao. 30, aa. 31, 7*; comp. Deut i, 41. Is. 9, 3. 28, 4. 41, ti.
Exek. 9, I sq. Ps. 41, 10. 150, i. Job 18, 7 ^îK ngv kis steps of
slrertglh; 38, 6; after an adjective as nonun regens, is. 13,3 (Zeph. 3, 1
1)
my proudly cxuUing ones. On the same analogy is the use
*jniKa \r>>5f
of e.g. Deut. 1,41 inonJ^D v3 his weapons of war [cf. Is. 41, 12];
Is. 7 Ji'? my house of prayer^ although the genitive here
does not convey the idea of an attribute.
' Like the snbstantival genitive, according to 1 39. A, the possessive pronoun
may also be paraphrased by a relative clause, e.g. Ruth a, ai Ifi^X Onpsn
the young men, which are to me. i.e. my young men; so cJix-cially, when the
substantive, which should take a jênitive safiix, is already followed by a pt-nitive,
e.g. I Sam. 17, 40. la Uni^ case, however, the suffix also \% sometiiucs atiadted
lAeoBtitically, e.g. Cant, i, 6 "^fO my vineyard, which belongs me,
Comp. Cant. 3, 7, and the analogous pleonans in a Sam. 33, a (but see Ps. 18, a)
and Ps. ay, a.
* On the other hand, moie explicitly in prawj Gen. 44, s *)DW1

9^ ^y*?!'*'^
uty cup, the siluer emp.
Digitized by Google
fi3&] The Personal Pronoun. 463
Rem. 1. Through an inaccuracy, Mrhich probably passed from the colloquial 0
language' into that of literature, mutscu/tw suffixes (especially in tiie plural; are
not infrequently used to refer to feminine substantives ; thus a noan-sufEx iu the

ingnlar, Ex. xi, 6w 35, 19. Jod. 11, 54*; in the plural, Gen. 31, 9. 33, i6.
41, 3$. Ex. I, 31. 3, 17. Num. 37, 7 (bot the femitune cnflbc twice immedrntdj
*^)t 36, 6; Jud. 19, 34. 31, 33. 1 Sv. 6y 7* 10 h (OtTja); 9, 30. I. 3, 16,
Etek. 33, 45. Amof 4* i tq^ (but afterwaids feminine suffix) ; Job i 14. 39, 3
(OrpSan in paralleUsm with frfnjl^lf 43, 15. Cant 4, 3. 6,6. Rulii 1, Scqq.
(along with feminine suffixes) ; verbal suQixes in the singular, Ex. 33, 25 ; in the
l^nnl, Jnd. 16, 3. Pror. 6, ai. Job i, 15. Bat Gen. 36, 15. 18. 33, 13. Ex. 3, 17.
1 Sun. 6, 10 a are to be explained According to \ 60. h. On nD1 as feminine*

lee $ 33. n. On the me of the nMcaUne in gencnd ns the prior gmekr, see
132
2. The suffix of the 3rd person singular fcmiiune (as al-o the separate pronoun P
K^n Num. 14, 41. Jos. 10, 13. Jud. 14, 4) sometimes refers to the verbal idea
contained in a preoeding sentence (cotreqwndkig to onr ^ ; thns tiie verbal snffix,
Gen. i$,6w Num. 33, 19, i Sam. zx, 3. i Ki. xx, X3. Is. 30, 8. Amos 8, xo;
com]). Gen. 34, 14 (r^ tker^), 43* 36. 47, a6. Ex. 10, xi (HTlk tkdl)^ IDl 33, ix.
47, 7.~Elcewhere the suffix of the 3rd singnlar feminine xefets to the pitnals ,
of things, e. g. 3 Ki. 3, 3. Jer. 36, 33. Job6 30. 39, 15 (but previously DBnPI) and
to the plurals of names of animals, Is. 35, 7. Conversely, plural suffixes refer
to collective infjular5. e.g. in Gen. 15, 13. Num. 16, 3. r Sam. 3, 8. Zcph. 3, 7;
and to a verbal idea contained in the preceding clause, in Ezck. 33, 18. Job 33, 31
(Dn3 thetehy)^ Ezek. 18, a6. 33, 19 (DH*^ on that account, thereby)*. But the
suffix in 1303 Deut. ai, 10 refers to the collective idea contained in ^3^k ; in Jon.
I, 3 DHTSy refcri to the sailors included in stnse under the tcrtn n'3X. In
Jos. 2, 4 lead D3B2fri1; in Is. 30, 6 (.DHD). 38, 16. Ps. 19, 5 \,Dn^y the text is
most probably corrupt.

3. In a few examples the force of the nonn>snffix or poaiessive pronoun ha* g
become so wesk that the language appears to be almost entiidj unconsdons of it.
Thus in >pl^ Lord from the pitiralis mmiatu (f 134. 1) with the
suffix of tbe xst singular (always with QoMUf and thus distinguished from ^^^R ^
lords, Gen. 19, 3), used exclusively of God, not only in addressing him (Gen. 15, ,
x8, 3. Fs. 3$y 33), but ultimately (see, however, the note below), without any
* According to Diebl (see tbe title at the head of S 9 > . a) , who adduces numoons
instances on pp. 44 sqq. 54 sqq. 67 sq., many of these cases nmy be set down
to cormptiott of the traditional text, while the sodden (and sometimes iq)eated)
change of gender in suffixes is mainly due to the influence exercised cm tlie copyists
by the Mishnic and popular Aramaic dialects, neither of which recojîses sncb
distinctions
' The Masora reckons six instances of ^JQD, where H^Qp would be expected
(Jud. II, 34, where, however, the text is most probably corrupt), Ex. 35, I5(!).
Lev. 6, 8. 7, 18. 37, 9. Jos. 1,7; almost all these passage can, however, be easily
explahied In other ways.
In 3 1U.7, xoforn3||^(tiiLXXxeadlJKB^weshoa1dxelnj;b^.
Digitized by Google
regard to the pronoun, as equivalent to the Lord '. On ^J^K as a (^ri perptfunm
of the Masoretes for Hin* see 17 and 102. m.
f A similar loss of vitality in the suffix occurs most probably in ^"^n* prop, in his
unitedtusseSy i.e. he &.C. together, e.g. nn^ D^H'^S Ex. 19, 8, then, without regard
to the suffix, even after the ist person HFI^ ^D^K i Ki. 3, 18 in reference to two
women ; Is. 41, 1. Job 9, 3a. Neh. 6, a. 7 ; after the and person, Is. 45, ao and
elsewhere. Also in D^3 prop, their entirety, but .ilso after the and person equivalent
to all together, i Ki. aa, a8. Mic. i, 2 hear, ye peoples, all of you, even before the
and person, Job 17, 10 (in r Sam. 6, 4 read with the LXX). On the redundant
suffix in ^jSIJ^n Lev. 37, 23 and elsewhere, comp. 127. 1.
138. The Demonstrative Pronoun.
a The demonstrative pronouns are nt, fern. Hl^, plur. ( 34),

hie, haec [hoc), hi, &c., and the personal pronoun Wn, likewise used
< <
as a demonstrative, fern. 6<^n, plur. masc. "TDH, fem. njn (| 32.3), is,
ea {id), or ille, &c., /V, eae or illi, &c. The distinction between ihem
in usage is that ni (Hke hie, Sfit) almost always points out a (new)
person or thing present, while t<V1 (like is, Hie, avros, txtivos) refers to
a person or thing already mentioned or known (see the examples

below)
d Rem. I. Compare on the above the instructive examples in Gen. 32, 3. Jnd. 7, 4
0/ whom I say unto thee, (his (HT) shall go with thee, he (K^H) shall go with thee
(so afterwards with negatives). Moreover, njn D^*n this day, i.e. the actual day
on which one is speaking or writing (Gen. a6, 33 and elsewhere), but KVlH Di*n
' Comp. the same weakening of the force of the possessive pronoun in prop.
my master, from the second century A. D. onwards the master ; so also in Syriac
my lord, and ultimately as a title the lord; in Italian madonna, French Madame,
Notre Dame, Monsieur, Monseigneur, See. It is, however, more than doubtful,
whether the regular distinction between as a holy name, and as an
ordinary appellative is not merely due to the practice of the later Rubbis.
G. H. Dal man, Der Gottesname Adonaj und seine Geschtchte (Berlin, 1889), in an
exhaustive discussion, shows that apart from the book of Daniel and the eight
critically doubtful passages, in which ^JHK is used by God himself, there is nowhere
any necessity to regard the suffix as entirely meaningless, since ^3"TK is always used
either in an address to or (like ^Îtt , which also is never a mere phrase or title)
in reverent language about God as the Lord of the speaker like the Assyrian
htli-ia, my Lord. Against any original distinction between and î'lX it may
be urgetl e;p( cially that when unconnected with suffixes the singular I^HN is always
used of God, and not the pluralis maiestatis presupposed by
^ On nt and KV1 standing separately as determinate in themselves, see % 135. f.
On the use of determinate demonstratives as .adjectives, tee % i a6. u.
Digitized by Google
f 13^.] The J)emonstrative Pronoun. 4^
the day or period of which the historiao has just been speaking (Gen. 15, 18. a6, 3a)
or of which the prophet h.is just hecn foretelling (Is. 5, 30. 7, 18. aosqq.) and
of which he continues to speak or forclell. Nevertheless HT an<l n^X are also found
in certain common combinations where KiH and nSH would be expected, and
Vict versa : thus almost always rm 13"in, piur. H^n DnDlH, but HanH DÔ3
(or Dnn D^M), and only in Zech. S, 9. 15 n^XH D'O^, Est. i, 9, 28 typn
M^Xn. With a secondary sense of contempt (like Latin iste) T\) occurs, e.g. in
I Sara. 10, 57. 21, 16. I Ki. 33, 37. Is. 6, 10, Sec, in the sense of the neuter,
MiV, nt^T is more common than n|, as Is. 5, 35. 43, 9, &c.| but KVT more coouuoa
than K^n.
a. Both riT and X^H are sometimes used almost as enclitics to emphasiie C
interrogative words (like the 1-atin tuim in qttisnam ; comp. also quis tatttlem)',
e.g. Job 38, 1 who new (darkentia, uc.) . . .1 1 Sam. 17, 55 sq. Is. 63, i.
Jer. 49, 19. Ps. 24, S. 35, 13, and elsewhere; n?~nD what now/ 1 Sam. 10,
11; how now? Gen. 37, ao; why now? Jnd. 18, 24; but before the verb nb'y
it is usually nXrnO Gen. 3, 13. 13, 18. Ex. 14. 5. Jud. t?. U; ^^"113^ whtn-
fore now? Gen. 18, 13. 25, 2i. i Sam. 17, 38. a Sara. 12, 23, and clîewhcrc.
So also bnrr^p is. 50, 9. job 4, 7sqq.; atid still more emphatically n|'KV1 1p
Pi, 94, 10. Jer. 30, ai.
3. n| is likewise used as an enclitic (see letter c aboTc) : \d) of place, in such d

passages fts Gen. 37, 31 ^ Dt HniCp mÛstker tkim (dut art here) U my sm
Ssamf a Sam. 2, 20 is H iJbuf nplin Aîbitf, Arri i Ki. 19, 5. Is. si, 9*; cf.
alio the strengtbening of the separate pronotm by Is. 43, 25 (^3bX). i Sam.
7, 38. Is. 37, 16. Ps, 44, 5 (nrilt), and DH M^M are, Gen. 25, 16. i Sam. 4, 8.
(A) of time: HT rUR^ now, i Ki. 17, 24 ; just now, 3 Ki. 5, aa, and rather fre-
quently before words denoting number, c.^j. Gen. 37, 36 D^J^2 /wirt, now
comp. 31, 38. Job I, 13. 7, 3. 19, 3; separated from the mimeral in Gen. 31, 41
elliptically for ihts, i.c. thb pretent period, is to ms, or makes altogether,
twenty years. Sec The other examples are sImlUrijr ellipdcaL
^ On the other hand, it is veiy qoestiooable whether n] in Pi. X04, 95 (Q{n Tip,
Is. 2$, 13 (Dyn nt\ Jnd. 5, 5. Pk. 68, 9 0^*0 iH) can be taken, according to the
common explanation, simply as a prefixed demonstrative particle (MM/MdSrr,

ftc). In Ps. 104, 15 (unless in apposition to ni; comp^ { ia6, aa, and
Zech. 5, 7, where Iin^ is in apposition to Jltd depending 00 ITiri, and also
se1c.40, 45, where n32^k^ is b apposltioo to nf) is most natnrallf taken as the
subject, this is the sea. Is. 13, 1 3. Jud. 5, 5, and Ps. 68, 9 would be most naturally
expUiined in the same way ; ^t1t in these passages the test is almost certainly
corrupt. In Jud. 5, 5 in fact ^^^p is most probably to be regarded with Moore

as a very early gloss, which subsequently found its way from this pasnge into
Fs.68.
Hh
Digitized by Google
137. The Inierrogative Pronoun.
a Tbe interrogative pronoun ^ wkn maj refer either to a mascnline

or feminine person (Cant. 3, 6) or even to a plural, e.g. ORM ^
are ye? Jos. 9, 8 ;
n^N^ Gen. 33, 5. Num. S8 9 (more minutely,
^01 *D Ex. 10,8, i.e. who exactly, who m parHeularf), It is used
of the neuter only when the idea ol a person is implied, e. g. tâ^"*
tvho are the Shcchcmites ? Jud. 9, 28, 13, 17. Gen. 33, 8. Mic, 1, 5;
even more boldly, with the repetition of a ^ used personally, in
I Sam. 18, 18. 2 Sam. 7, 18.
h Moreover, ^ may also be used in the sense of a genitive^ e. g.

W13 whose daughter art thou ? Gen. 24, 23. i Sam. 17, 55. 56. 58
^ "^^^ wÎam ttir</? Jer.44, a8. iSam. is, 3; in the accusative*
ÔTIK guemnam? i Sam. a8, 11. Is. 6, 8 ; with prepositions, e.g.
I Ki. 20, 14 (in an abrupt question by whom?)] Gen. 32, 18;
^'Q I Sam. 24, 15. Similarly no, "ID, PID what? is used for ihe
nominative, or accusative, or genitive (Jer. 8, 9), or with prepositions,
e.g. HD'^y whereupon? Job 38, 6 ; why? n^^^y quomque? Ps. 74, 9.
f Rem. Both ^ and ni|^ aie naed also in indirect qnestiooa (on tfie meiely idatiw
distinction between direct and indirect qtwstioiis in Hetttcw, tee the IwterroigaHoe
SeitUtuis), e.g. GeiL 39, 8. 43, aa. Ex. 3a, i. On the ofteaning of ^ and nO
as taterragatives ia based also their nse as indefinite pronouns (eqniyalent to
guisquis, (juodcunque or quicquani), e. ^. ]vl^. 7, 3. i Sam. 19, 3. ao, 4. Prov.
9, 4. 16 ; even ^DTÔ^ hcnê a iar,\ -rkoson'cr yc be, Ac, 3 Sam. 18, la so alio ;
no (wkntn'er it be) Job 13, 13. 2 Sam. 18, 22. 23; comp. Num. 33, 3 ^35<1"np "^T^X
and \^'hals<Hver he showeth me, A still furtlicr weakening of the incUfiiiite u:sc ot
no is the combination B'"np that which, Eccles. 1,9. 3, 15 (just like the Syriac
T KD). On nC^ND ' quiciûam, anything at alt (usually with a negative), and
as an adverb in cuty way, i Sam. a i, 3, see the Lexicon.
$ ISa The Relative Pronmau

The text of ihis section (and of 155) has been entirely remodelled on the
basis of V. Baamann*s excdlent essay HeMOsche RetnttPtStte, Leipzii^, 1S94.
a Kelaiive clauses are most frequently (but not necessarily ; cf.

'
{ 155. 0) introduced by the indecUnable (see 36) ^ This is
Comp. tiie Assyrian ma-am'tntt, anybody; and mi-im-ma, anyHiing.

G.W.C.]
' The etymology of the word is still a matter of dispate. Against the identifica-
tiuu ui ^^^1 &s ^ original substantive with tbe Aiabic '<^zr, trace, Aram. ~inK
Digitized by Google
138.] The Relative Pronoun 467
not, however, a relative pronoun in the Greek, Latin or English

sense, nor is it a mere nota relaiionis ^ but an original demonstrative
pronoun [as though iste, istius, &c.]'. Hence it is used
(i) In immediate dependence on the substantival idea to be defined,
and virtually in the same case as that (hence belonging syntactically
to the main clause) ; e. g. Gen. 24, 7 . . nJiB^ \^^7^ . , . *3nî) ninj
the Lord^ iste, he took me . . . he shall send, &c. ( = who took me)
Is. 37, 4 the words of Rabshakch, "i^B^X "H^D ^H^^B^ isliuSy the king
of Assyria hath sent him {= whom the king of Assyria hath sent);
Gen. 2, 2 and God finished "^B'X ^nSN^tp his work, istud, he
had made (it). Such qualifying clauses may be called dependent
relative clauses.
Rem. I. In the above examples IK^K Gen. 34, 7 is virtually in the nominative, b
4 in the genitive, Gen, a, a in the accusative. A further distinction between
Is. 37,
the examples is that in Gen. 34, 7 the main idea (mn^), to which lE^N is added
in apposition, is only resumed in the qualifying clause by the subject {he) inherent in
^3np!>, in Is. 37, 4 it is resumed by the accusative suffix of n^C, while in Gen. a, a
it is not resumed at all. This suppression of the retrospective pronoun' takes

place especially when it (as in Gen. 3, a) would represent an accusative of the
object, or when it would be a separate pronoun representing a nominative of the

subject in a noun-clause, e. g. Gen. I, 7 y^p^^ ^^D^^P '^V^. ^^^C waters, those,
under the firmament, &c. In negative sentences, however, the retrospective
Nbldeke urges {ZDMG. 1886, p. 738) that the expression trace of . .

place, trace, .
could hardly have develoi>ed into the relative conjunction, while the meaning
of place has been evolved only in Aramaic, where the word is never used as
a relative. According to others, 'IS't^ is really a compound of several pronominal
roots: cf. Sperling, Die Nota relationis im I/cf>raischen, Leipzig, 1876, and Kcinig,
Lehrgeb., 323 sqq., who follows Ewald and liottcher in referring it to an original
ii.
According to Ilommel {ZDMG. xxxii. p. 708 sqq.) lE^X is an original

substantive, to be distinguished from K' and 'tT (an original pronominal stem),
but used in Hebrew as a nota relaiionis, or (as H) and ^ are also sometimes
used, see below, letters g and h") simply for the relative pronoun. Baumann (op.
cit., p. 44) sees in the Assyrian la, Phoenician, Punic, and Hebrew K*, the ground-
forms, of which the Phoenician and Punic (see above, % 36, note) and the
Hebrew IS'X are developments.
* Somewhat like Luther's so, e.g. die fremden Gotter, so unier euch sind.
Gen. 35, 2.
* This is the necessary conclusion both from the analogy of the Arabic 'alladi,
which is clearly a demonstrative (like the Hebr. T^n^ HT^ri), and from the use
of n) and X\ as relatives.
' The instances in which, instead of a retrospective pronoun, the main idea
itself is repeated (Gen. 49, 30. 50, 13. Jer. 31, 32) are most T^^j^^ ^1 due
to subsequent amplification of the original text by another ^^
^^^^^^
h^
H h 2
prononn is not infrequently added, e.g. Gen. 17, r a ; 7. 2 K*n ; i Ki. 9, 20
nrsn ; Deut. 20, T s nan ; but cf. also *n Wn "?K Gen. o, 3. The addition of
J<\"I in .1 vcrhal clnusc, 2 Ki. 32, 13, is nnnsnal.
The very frequent omission of the retrospective pronoun is noticerible in cises

where the predicate of the qualifying clause is a verbum Juendi, e. g. jN'utn. 10, 39
we art journeying unto the flace, D3^ jriK njn^ "D "TB^ that place, the
LpntstUd (of it), // will I give to you; ^f. Notn. 14, 40. Gen. 3, 17. Dent a8, 68.
Jnd. 8, 1$. X Sam. 9, 17. 93. 34, $. i KL 8, 39. Jer. 31, 43.
C 9. When the subitantiTe followed by 1^ and the qnali^ring clause expresses

an idea of //!ar, it may alio be retmncd bjr the adverbs of place fJkirt,
rvf^^ tkitker, tlUiM, e.g. Gen. 13, 3 r6nNi n;n"^8^K D^pDnn; mHa
fkt/iacittJkataiUthu UtU had itm then, i.e. wktrehisimt had bem; cf. Gen. 3, j
tSffit Ex. ai, 13 T(&^, Bet even in this case the retrospecdve word may be
oini'.ted, cf. Gen. 35, 14. Num. Jo, 13. Is. 64, 10, where fiC' would be expected,
and Gen. 30,38. Num. 13, 37. i Ki. i3, 3, where rrc&^ would be expected.
When the appositional clause is added to a word of time, the retrospective
pronoun is always oniilte'i. e. f,'.
1 Sam. 20, 31 for all ihc days, **J^~p "llTX
/hose the son of f ssc is living in ihem)\ c Gen. 451 6. Deut. i, 46. 9, 7. i Ki.
II, 4a ; see Banmann, op. cit., p. 33.
d 3> If the governing snbstanti've foems part of a statement made in the first
or second person, the letraipeotive pronoon (or the subject of the appositional
cUose) is in the same persoui Gm. 45, 4 / oat Jau^^ ^nk DPnSDlS^ kt^
M me,
^^Pnna AeI have chasm
i.e. wham ye
e. g.
seid; Num. as, 30. Is. 49, S3; 41, 8 tAamy/aeeb,

thee; Jer. 3a, 29. Ecclcs. ic^ 16 sq.; Gen. 15, 7 / is
the iardf Âinrtn keÎ brat^JU thee out, ftc, Ex. ao a (Dent. 5, 6).
g (2) Not depending (adjectivally) on a governing substantive, but

ilsclf expressin{3^ a substantival idea. Clauses introduced in ihis way
may be called indipcndcnt relativf clauses. Tljis use of "^t??? is têncrally
rendered in English by he who, /u whom^ &c. (according to the context),

or that which^ ice In reality, however, the is still a demonstrative
belonging to the construction of the main clause as subject or object,
or as a genitive dependent on a noun or preposition, e.g. Num. 93, 6
"V* '^J'^ isie^fficu
(ursesi (him) is cursed^ i.e. he whom ihou
evrtesii Ac.'; Ex. 22, 8; "^S^ as object, Gen. 44, i. 49, i. i Sam.
16, 3 sqq. Mic. 6, i pc^J* n), and even preceding the verb, e.g.'
Is. 52, 15. Ps. 69, 5; ^S'K as genitive, Ezek. 23. 28 / will d.-hrrr
/fu-e nNp:? ipS 1:2 info the hand of those thou halcsi (ihem) ; i Sam. 7, 7;
dei>ending on a prfpcîrion, e.g. Gen. 44, 4. 2 Ki. 10, 22;
Gen. ai, 17. 0^ kvi n^K^ in that (place) is ibtre, i.e. where
* The absolute use of itS^ is veiy peculiar in the formula ^ *nT nv, nefX
this (is ftf nme as the word ef the Lord i,.*, Jer. 14, i. 46, i. 47, i. 49^ 34.
Digitized by Google
$138.] The Relative Pronoun, 469
he is; cf. Jud. I7 8 and Ruth i, i6 l^^lf^ whUhtr^: i Ki. 18, 12
Tj'lf^ whiiher; Ejl 5, 11.
From these examples it follofw that In fadqpendent iidati?fe eUmet the retrospecti^ f
saffix, or adverb of place, may be, tad in fact generally is, omitted. As a rule,
however (as in the dc{)endent relative clause), this does not apply to cases in
which the retrospective pronoun, by the construction of the sentence, depends
on a preposition', e.g. Gen. 44, 9 sq. DOJ , , , \nt< N!f^* he it (the cup)
is found with him,

shall die (for the \\'d7u of the apodosis in flC^ cf. I43. <3^;.
In SDcli cases "12^ preceded by the preposition is quite anomalous, as in Gen.
31, 3a KYtpn Dp nnth whomsoever thou findfst, where "I'J'K is a relative

pronoun iu the Englbh sense; on the other hand, la la. 4;, 12 (and probably
also 56, 4) is to be expilMiied (with Benmann, op. cit, p. 37) by refeience
to 47* I5i u it demoDstmtlve pfonooa^ Hamd mm
mUh tkUti gitdUmimmU .
wiiA tkMtikMt kast hkourti (with tbem).
[With legud to the preoedisg expbnttioo of IEM, the itndcnt will of course
understand that, in Hebrew as we Idunr it, never occurs as a mere demon*
y -J
strative. A particle which, whatever its origin, is uniformly used with reference
to something in another, contiguous clause, will naturally have acqtured in practice
that force which we denote by the term '
relative.*]
Like the original demonstrative pronoun demonstratives g

proper H}, ^t^ H (the last commonly) \ and sometimes the article, are
used somewhat frequently in poetic lang;uage to introduce both

dependent and independent relative clauses. With regard to the
construction of &c., the remarks on in letters a and ^, also
bold good.
Examples :
(a) n) in appottdoB to a goveninc rabstantive hi the noninativi^ Pi. 104, a6

m^-m \n;h (there is) Uvkakm^ Uîkm hast formtd (him), Le. vAeM thou
kaa firmid It. 4}, 24. Jer. 30, 11 ; in the aocuMtivei Ii. 35, 9. Fk. 74, a (In both
';
cwet inth a fetioepective piottoim; II it nwd without it m Fk 132, la) ; hi appoei-

tioo to a geoitiTe dependent on a preposition, Prov. 23, a a 'jT^ T\\ ^^SKp VD?^
htaHuH unto thy father, him he begat thee, e. who begat thee; Ps. 1 7, 9 (^T). i.
In Ps. 104, 8 on? nnp^ n) D^pp"i>K unto the place which thou haiist founded
f^them (cf. % 130. 0, nt is in the genitive after die conitniGt itate D^ptp to the
place of that, thou hadst founded (it) for them ; on the same analogy we may
also take, with Baumann ;;op. cit., p. 48), Ps. 78, 54 (HJ "n) and Lx. 15, 13 C^fDy
riJjKJ). 15, 16. 18.43, 21. Pi. 9,
3. 10, a. 31,5. 3a, 8. 14a, 4. 143, 8 (aU exam-
plei of 9).
*
In Zech. 12, 10 also, instead of the uuintellitjiblc IB^K JIN ^>6<, we should
probably read ip'K'^K, and refer the passage to this class.
' Such a strong ellipw: as hi Is. 31, 6, when UBD woald he eipected after
only poMibte in elevated poetic or prophetic language.

Ip^tsyn , is
* The etyiBologleal eqalfakot 1 ia Axanaic is always a idative.
Digitized by Google
470 The Parts of Speech. [ 139-
To introduce IndepoideDt ffdatNe danses n] ii used m a nomiiMtiTe in Job 19, 19

as accusative, Job 15, 17 and Fb. 68, 39 (after a piepotttioOf Ex. 13, 6; but the
text is evidently corrupt).
{b) More certain examples of the use of the article as a relative pronoun [more
correctly, perhaps, of the demonstrative which is otherwise used as aidde) are
I Chron. 26, 28 b^K^'\^ ^^'^^^np i^<^ Samuel had dedicattd, &c.; 2 Chion.
29, 8 (where M3n33 can only be pcfj'ca Niph'al)\ 29, 36. Em xo, 14. In ooiip
nexion witha plnral, Joe. xo, 34 tkt chiefs of ike mm ^ war I^K ^J'j^'^
went with him ; Ezra 8, 35. xo, 17. i Chzon. 39, 1 7. Finally, in the oenae of
id quod, Jer. 5, 13 (where, however, we should read with the UQC Comp.
moFeoTcr x Sam. 9, 34 tht t^ffh iî^^V'? wJUcA was mfam it (but see
below); 3 Cbzmi. i, 4 p9na eqdivalenrto fOn IKâ ta Mr ptau, that it had

prepared.
In all the examples adduced except i Sam. 9, 34 (where iT^ltlin ^^^^^d probably
be read for ST^^np the n is followed by undoubted perfects; almost all the
examples, however, bclonjj to the latest Books (Elzra and Chronicles). On the
other hand, another series of instan<^ (even in the older texts) is extremely
doubtlul, lii vviiich the Masora likewise requires j-terfccts, cither by placing the
tone on the pcnultima, a^ in Gen. 18, 31. 46, 37. Job 2, 11 HSGin; Is. 51, 10
nO^rt; Ezck. 26, 17 nb^DH; Ruih I, ii. 2, b and 4, 3 HQ^n, or by the punc-
tuation. Gen, 31, 3 nân,- i Ki. II, 9. Dan. 8, i ntCjin; Is. 56, 3 rn|)3n, while
no donbt the authors in all these cases intended participles (and indeed perfect
participles, comp. u6. d) with the axtide, thns nKSn dcc^ Eiek. 26, 17 nbSnn
for nî'ilDH according to and in the otlier examples *lf})^\},
{ 138 Expremm of Pr&nmfyia! Ideas 6y mans ^ SnisUm/wes.

Analogous to the periphrases for expressing materials and attributes
by means of substantives ( 128. 0 and p), is the use of substantives
to represent certain kindls of pronominal ideas, for which no special

expressions exist Thus ^
X. wtam, wfioum, are vsed to ezpreas
(fi) The idea of tack, eviry (in die saise of each serenlly) with lefa euce
to persons', and even animals (Gen. 15, to), e ^ r,cn. 10, 5, feminkie Ex 3, sa;
B^t< is the object, e. g. in Jer. 12, 15. On T^N UTK comp. 123. c.
In a few passages in the above sense is placed for the sake of emphasi*
before the governing noun (always a substantive with a suffix , thus VfiN t?*^f<
Gen. 9, 5, according to the usual explanation, stands for t'^N ^riK *1*D af the
hand of the brother of every man. But although this explanation seems to be
'
As a rule is used in the particularizing sense of each man, with the plural
of the verb, e. g. Gen. 44, 1 1 ; sometimes, however, as subject to a verb in the
singular, e.g. Geo. 44, 13.
Digitized by Google
139-] Expression of Pronominal Ideas, 471
sapported by Gen. 4a, 25 and Num. 17, 17, it is inconceivable that such an
inveision of nomen regtns and rectum should occur. It is more likely, either that
the second substantive is in hand of every
apposition to {T'N (hence Gen. 9, 5 at the
man, his brother, who
really his brother and is therefore so much the more
i. e. is
guilty ; so 15, 10 and he laid each or, more exactly, one piece of it, Sec, and so
probably also Num. 17, 17 every one, sc. his name), or K'^N precedes as a kind of
casus pendens, and only receives its nearer definition from the following substantive
with suffix; thus Gen. 41, 13. 42, 25 (according to the context = to every one in
his sack); 42,35, where ipbs iEDSI^lif is virtually the predicate of t^^N ; Ex.
12, 4. 28, 21. Num. 5, 10. 26, 54. 2 Ki. 23, 35, and especially Zcch. 7, 10'.
{b) Anyone, some one, e.g. Gen. 13, 16. Cant. 8, 7, with a ne^'ative w^? <7^'; d
so after "fjK Ex. 16, 19. 29; before Gen. 23, 6 and frequently. Instead of C'^K
we sometimes find in a similar sense CIK man, homo, e.g. Lev. i, a (comp.
DHNn TnK3 as any one else, Jud. 16, 7. 11), {soul) person. Lev. 3, I. 5, 1,
&c., and in a neuter sense "^3^ (prop, word, thing) equivalent to anything, Gen.
18, 14, or ^3'T'i)3 Lev. 5, 2. Num. 31, 23. With a negative 131 means nothing
thus after "?fi< Gen. 19, 8 ; after Eccles. 8, 5. Cf. finally, TriKO any one,
Deut. 15, 7; anything, Ezek. 18, 10 (but in Lev. 4, 2. 5, 13 nriKD) and the
expressions noticed in 144.^. The latter include also instances like Ezek. 18, 32
/ have no pleasure npn n^D3 in the death of him that dieth, i. e. of
any man.
if) In connexion with VriH his brother or ^HJH his neighbour, K^K one, masc. e
(as n^N onet fem., in connexion with nn^nS her sister or HH^jn her neighbour)
is used to represent the ideas of alter alter, the one the other^ (in reference
to persons, animals, or things without life; see the Lexicon) or the idea of one
another, e.g. Gen. 13, 11 and they separated themselves ^yo the one
from the other; Ex. 26, 3 five curtains (rir*}^ fem.) shall be coupled together
one to another.
T V T
2. 8J'D3 soul, person expresses the idea of self*, both in the singular, Prov. 19, 8.
f
16. 18. 29, 24. Job 18, 4 (in all cases IB'W equivalent to himself), and in the
* Comp. on the whole question the thorough discussion by Budde, Die bibl.
Urgeschichte, p. 283 sqq.: according to him, Vntt L^N came to be treated by the
language as expressing a single idea 'one another;' and the words in Gen. 9, 5 are
to be rendered at the hand of one another (from men mutually) will I require it.
[In support of this view, Budde points to Zcch. 7, 10 13trnn-5)l< VHN npl
0333^3, which in the light of 8, 17, D333S3 ^3B'nri-i)K ^Hjn njp-nK B'W,"
can only, he observes, be rendered '
and devise not the hurt of one another in your
heart.* So also Konig, Syntax, \ 33.]
' Comp. also {5^'K"PK Gen. 39, 11. On the expression of the idea of no one
by means of with a following participle, see the Negative Sentences, S 152. /.

' Elsewhere nt . . . nT are used in a similar sense, Ex. 14, 20. Is. 6, 3 ; also
T V
nnxn
T V |T
. , . irtKn
T V IT
a Sam. 14, 6, or the substantive is repeated, e.g. Gen. 47, 21
[Jrom one end , to the other end).
*
On the representation of this idea by pronouns, separate and suffixed, see
135. a and k.
jitized
472 The Parts of Speech, [ 131^.
plunl, Jer. 37, 9 and eliewhete. Similar to this Is the use of Gen. I0, it
(prop. Ml htr i9mardpa9i) in flie tenie of triikin kmt^*
g 3. XSif hme (then metapiiorieally for exisUnfg) txpwuu the idea of icj^
same, very same, in refennoe to fJkiti^s (as to penons), e.^. H^n Di^
in th selfsame day. Gen. 7, 13, comp. Jos. 10, 37. Ezek 34, 2 ; D*p^
flj fV were the very heaven for clearness, Ex. 24, 10 ; iDH 03f^3 m w^'J'
fullness of his slrengtk (equivalent to in the midst of his full stnaigih). Job
ai 33-
Jj[ 4. The simple plural of wuiUa denoting time sometimes includes also the idea
of a Jcxv, some thus D^D^ a fnv days, Gen. 24, 55. 40, 4 (here even of a longer
period, ^forsome time); Is. 65. ao. Dan. 8, 27 (on the other hand, Gen. 27,44. '9 ^
OnriK Dnp^ ; see $ 96 and iriK) ; Q^3B^ some years, Dan. ix, 6. 8.
' In a similar way the idea of self in Arabic, as in Sanskrit {Aiman), is paia-
phrased by soul, spirit; in Arabic also by eye ; in Rabbinic by PJI5 body, Dia or
bone, in Ethiopic and Amhaiic Irf totf, in Egyptian by mouth, hand, &c.;
coup, also the Middle High Geman mUs Hp, dtm Up, for ich, dm. However,
in audi caaea ia neirer (not even in la. 4$, a tkeiy thtmselves) a mere
otioie periphrana for the perMoal pronoun, but alwaya involves a reference to the
mental petsooality, aa affected bjr the aensca^ desires, ftc.
* Some in reference to persons in Ex. 16, 20 is expressed bj D^|t and ia
Neh, 5, a-4 by ne^|C sunt fui, with a participle following.
Digitized by Google
{i4o.] Noutt<lauses, Verbal-clauses, etc, 473
CHAPTER II.
THE SENTENCE.
I. The SoitttiLoe in GenmL
140. NoM-clauses, Verbai-clmueSt and ike Cmpatmd Senience,
P. Dorwald. '
Zur hebr. Syntax (dcr hebr. Satz)/ io NtmJaht^mhtr fur JPhilo-
loît und J'adagogtk^ i8t^, ii. p. II5 sqq.
U Eveiy sentence, the subject and predicate of which are nouns a

or their equivalents (esp. participles), is caUed a mimrcUmH^ e.g.
Kfi^ rtn; the Lord is mr king. Is. 33, sa ;
DWri) ts^yry did ^p^^M now
ike men of Sodom were wicked and sinners^ Gen. 13, 13; tJn^ HB
a mouth is their Pa. 115, 5; sec fun her, 141.
2. Every sentence, the subject of which is a noun (or pronoun b

included in a verbal-form) and its predicate a finite verb, is called
a verbal-clause, e. g. D'^^^! ôtiM and God said. Gen. i, 3; and ke

divided^ i, 7; see further, 143.
Rem. In the last etmple die proooaiiiMl sobjeet ii At least Indicited hy die f -
pidbnnative (^), and in ahnost all forms of the perfect by afformatives. The
3rd pcrs. sing. perf. however, which contains no indication <tf tlie >ub^^ must
also be regarded as a full verbal-daose.
8. Every sentence, the subject or predicate of which is itself a full
dauae, is called a compound senUnce, e.g. Ps. 18, 31 ^3^^ 0^ S^n

God^kit way is perfect^ equivalent to Go^s way is perfect; Gen.
^4, 8 Dî'p;^ ni^c^n ^33 my son Skeckem-^kis smd kn^fiik
/or your daughter; see further, 143.
4. The above distinrtion between different kinds of sentences e

especially between noun- and verbal-clauses is indispensable to the .
more delicate appreciation of Hebrew syntax (and that of the Semitic
languages generally), since it is by no means merely external or
formal, but involves fundamental differences of meaning. Noun-

chtuses with a substantive as predicate^ represent something fixed,
Digitized by Google
474 The Scnience,
a staUt or in short a heif^ so and so; verbaI<claoses on the other
hand, something moveable and in progress, an eveni or action. The
latter description is indeed true in a cciuun .sense also of noun-clauscs
wilh a pariicipial predicate, except that in their case the event or
action (as distinguished from that expressed by the verbal-clause)
is of a fixed and abiding character.
f Rem. By the Arab grannnatiMis every cUnie beginning with an independent

subject is regarded as a noan-claase, and every clause beginning with a finite verb
as verbal. If a finite verb follows the noun-subject the two together (since the verb
comprises its own subject and is thus a complete verbal-clause) form a compound
noun -sentence, just as when the pre<licate consists of an independent noun-clause.
Thon^ of icntence, wbicb we fonierly
this definittoo of the different kind*
aecqiled 1 144.0 of the and to the 34th editions of this Grainiaer),b lejeeled
above, noe. 1-3, we must, neverthdeWt mention here the point in wbidi this more
complicated view of the Arab grammarians naay be regarded as at least relatively
correct, namely, in clas-îfying verbal-clauses according as the subject precedes
or followi; the verb, a distinction which is often of great importance in HeUcw
aUo; see further, in 143. a.
141. Thi Noun-clause.

a ! The nd/tci of a noan-clause (see 140. a) may be
(a) A aubstantive, e.g. tVPS ^ a rwer toeni out (was
going out) 0/ Eden, Gen. a, 10.
{h) A pronoun, e. g. Gen. 7, 4 "Tpoo *3bK / will cause it to rain;

14, 18 |nb HVW cjul /!c uas priest; 2, 23 (flt^ before a feminine
predicate, as n^6? l)eli >re a plural in Ex. 32, 4); D3n who is wtfej'
Hos. 14, ID. In I Chron. 5, 2 Dp 1^335^ ami of him one became

a prince, the subject is contained in
b 2. The /rA/fro/iT of a Donn-clause may be
(tf) A ye are chUdren
substantive, e. g. Deut. 14, i 191 tSPf$
Lard your God; Gen. 4 a, 13. Specially characteristic of the
the
Semitic mode of expression are the cases in which both subject and
predicate are substantives, thus emphasizing their itkntiiy (*the thing
is its measure, material, or equivalent'), e.g. zck. 41, 22 n3]B^

yV. ^^^'^'Pl *f'J^ ifie altar (was) wood . and the walls thereof (were)
wood, i. e. of wood, Cf. below, letter c.
{b) An adjective or participle, e. g. Gen. a, la îD (Cnn f}Kn osxix

and the gold of thai land is good; SC^ now Epkron was sitimgt Ac,
* For oth I r'j:iia:k iblc instances of ellipse in the Chronicler, see Driver,
Introdtuium, p. 30^ êd. 6, p. 537], no. 37.
Digitized by Google
The Noun-clause. 475
Gen. 23, 10 ^ Very frequently such noun-clauses, attached by Wdw
10 a verbal-clause, ve used to represent a state conkmporamms with
the principal action ; comp. letter t below.
{f) A numexaV g> Gen. 42, 13 T7?3! twelve (of tis)
are iky servatUs,

{d) A pronoun, e.g. Gen. 10, is (MVi), Ex.9, 27 ^5
CP), I Ki. 9, i3(^)*.
(^) An adverb or (esp. if forincd \uili a preposition) any specificiuiou
of time, plnce, (juality, possessor, &:c., which may be regarded as

the equivalent of a noun-idea, e.g. n^Jîan 3^ f.fj.re is the bdellium^
Gen. 9, X9 ; ^ where is Abel? 4, 9 ; ÎDH Oîvi' yû m^rr)/ endureth
fir ever, Ps. 136, i sqq. ; *^ riches are m ^> Ps. iia, 3
^555 v tfr^ iSfjr, Ps. 100, 3 ^r/.

Rem. I. The employment of ft labitaatlve tt picdicftle of ft noon-cltnte b C
eipedftlly fmjneott either when no eom>poiiding adjective existi (so mostly with
wofds expMnJng the material ; comp. % ia8. o) or when the ftttribttte is intended
to receive a certain emphasis. For in all cases there is a much greater stress upon
a substantival predicate where it represents something as identical with the subject
t^see above, letter /' [a]), than upon an adjectival or verbal predicate; comp. Cant.
I, 10; Ps. 25, io ail (he pcUlu of the Lord are riDKl^ TDIl Ijvingkittdtuss and
tnUh (i. e. wholly loviftgkindness , Sec. ;
comp. Jcr. lo, lo); Ezek. 38, 5. Ps. 10, 5.
19, xo. 33, 5. 88, Prov. 3, 17 \ Job 22, 12, 33, 2. 26, 13. Ruths, 9. Some*
times the emphasb 00 the piedicftte is otrtained by the ue of die plnnl foim
(according to 134. $), eg. Fi. no, 5 tAjf peefie are H^*}) cUegHher wiUu^
ness; Cant 5, 16. Dan. 9, 23.
Sometimes the boldness of such combinations is modified by the repetition ilT
of the svibject, as rfi;if!-: of the predicate, e.g. Job 6, I3 TIS nb~D4< is my

strength the strength of stones f Prov. 3, 17. That the language, however
especially in poetry is not avcr&e even to the boldest combinations in order to
emphasize very strongly the unconditional relation between the tabject and piedi-
cate, is shown by inch examples as Ps. 45, 9 myrrh and aloes and eassia are aU
^ Comp. flie nnmeioas examples in f 116.

' Why in these examples the pronouns^ notwithstaadii^ appearancea to the
contrary, are to be considered as predicates and not as sntjectSi may be seen from
what has bern rem irked above, % 126. k.
^ The same naturally applies to most of those cases whicli arc not simple noun-
clauses, but have the substantival predicate connected with the subject by iTH
(e. g. Gen. i, 2 and the earth was a waste and emptiness i comp. Ps. 35, 6. ProV.
8, 30. Job 3, 4) or where a prepoddon precedes the snbstantfval predicate, as

Ps. 99,4 the peiee efi^ Levdis wUh potoer, L e. pcwafiA
* tib( here, as in Job at, 9, is evidently a substantive after a plnml subject s
on the odier hand, it is donbtfhl whether tll^ in anch passages as Gen. 43, ay.
aSam.aq,9. Ps.iao^7,ftcisnotikfacrtobercg(udcdas inadjedife.
Digitized by Google
476 The Sentence, [ I4i.
thy garmetUs (i.e. so perfumed with them that they seem to be composed of
them); Cant, i, 15 thine eyes are doves, i.e. dove's eyes (but 5, la D^3^^3)'; Ps.
33, 5. 109, 4. Job 8, 9. la, 13. In prose, e.g. Ex. 9, 31. Eint 10, 13 D*0B^3 njjH
the season it mâi iiiraiwrv* !., $ki redsty uouh; with a bold eullage of the
nnmbo-y Gen. 34, 50 "ttDD V1D ami I (with my fiimily) am fern m
numher. For siiniUurly bold expracions with rrn cC Gen. ti, z. is, s. Ex. 17, ta.
Is. 5, IS. Jer. 3, 38, and agiin with a bold cmllage of tbe munbcr. Job S9, 15
/ was eyes to the hUnel, and fia Vfos lu
th* kme. Also ia prase Nam. 10, 31
and tkou sMalt iitous D^*î.
a. The nonn-c!aase connected by wdw cofuhtiz'e to a verbal-clanse, or its
equivalent, always describes a state contemporaneous with the principal action, or

(when the predicate is a transitive participle) an action rcprcsenteti in constant
duration (comp. 107. as well as i 16. and o^, e. g. Gen. 19, i and the two
angels came to Sodom eU evtn^ "Sff* while Lot sat, &c.; iS, i. 8. 16. S3.
85, 26. Jud. 13, 9. s Smb. 4, 7. it, sn adjeettnl

4 (alwsys with a participle); with
predicate. Gen. tS, is ; with a sabstantWal predicate, 18, 37 ; with an adveibisl
predicate, 9, 33. Not infreqaenUy sodk a Hnumstantial daase indicates at the
same time some contradiaory fact, so that 1 is equivalent to wlUrtas, whilst,
edthous^h, e.g. Gen. 15, 2. i8, 27. ao, 3. 48, 14 (a/tkoui;h he was (he younger) ;
Jud. 16, 15 hoii< can';! (hou say, I Iv,' fhee. 'HK ^3^1 /j;-,'7"ij M/wtr heart is
not tvith m( t 2 ham. 3. 39. I's. 28, 3 xvhiist viischicf is in their hearts. Tlicsc
claui>ei describing a state arc, however, only a subdivision of the large class of
circumstantial clauses, on which see 4 156.
f 3, As the examples given under letters a and b show, the syntactical

relation existiog between tbe subject and predicate of a noun-clause,
is as a rule expressed by simple juxtaposition, without a cppula of
anj kind.
To what period of time the statement applies, must be inferred
from the context; e.g. 1 Ki. t8, 21 D*n^>Kn njnj ttu Lord is Ike true
God; I Sam. 9, 19; Is. 31, 2 Dsn WrrD5 yet he also is wise; Gen.
42, 11; on tlie other hand, Gen. 19, i 31?*' t3ii>l and (=while) Lot sat
Ezek. 28, 15 ; Gen. 7, 4 "^^ptpp / am raining, i.e. / will cause tt
io rain. Sometimes even a jussive or optative is to be supplied as
predicate, Gen. 27, 13 upon mt be iky curu/ Gen. 11,3. so, 13.
x. IS, a. Cf. ii6. r, note.
^ Not infrequently, however, a connexion is established between

subject and predicate (a) by adding the separate pronoun of tbe
' As a rale, in such oomparisoos^ (which ia Uien to be fcgarded as nmii$aiie)
stsnds before the predicate, eg. Is* 63, s wksrr/art are ify ârmmti TiSf
Hki those of Me thai treaditA im th$ wimfnat (prop, tk* Ukt tf am that
treadeth, instar eakimHs); Jer. 50^ 9. Certainty, however, the conparisotk is then
much less emphatic than in the nooa-danses dted above.
Digitized by Google
i 141.] The Noun-clause, 477
3rd person singular or plural, expressly resuming and therefore

strengthening the subject, or {b) (especially for the sake of a more
exact specification of time) by the help of the verb n^n*
Examples of () : Gen. 41, a6 tk* seven goed kine nsn tkey tre smn k
years: Deot. i, 17. 4, 24: Eccles. 5, 18 K^n D^nSt nnp fff tkis-ît is a î/i
tf Gods Krnn. 3, a? cn rî<; in a qaestloD, Got. a7, 38. Sometimes KVl Is
tised in tiiis wsj to stxengtheo a pnwominftl subject of the fiirt or second peraon *,
e.g. KVI â)M ^îte Is. 43, S5 /, evm /, tm Ae ikat btHMh Ac; 51, is;
Mil TiPf$ 2 Sam. 7, 98. Is. 37, 16. Ps. 44, 5. Neh. 9, ti.
7 ; in an inteirogative
sentence, Jer. 14, 33 *; in Jer. 49, is Kin in n WfiAaAclanse strengthens T^Pf$.
Of (^): natnndly this does not apply to the examples, in which n^H, in the i
sense of to become, to fare, to exist, still retains its full force as a verb, and where
accordingly the sentence and not a noun-clarsc especially when the
is verbal, ;
predicate precede*! the subject. On the other hand, such examples as Gen. I, 3 and
the earth was ^nn^n} WiuU and emptituss, can scarcely be re^jardcd as properly
verbal claoses; n^^n i* used here really only for the purpose of referring to past
time a statement wbidb, as the deseriptiaB of a conditioi), might alto wpfitu ia
the fony of a simple nonn-clanse; conp. Gen. 3, 1. This is especially tnte of
the somewhat nnmerona Distances in which HVl ocean as a caanectiQg word
between the bubject and the {Mirticipial predicate ; e. g. Jud. i , 7. Job t, 14
(immediately afterwards a simple noun-clanse). The imperfect of n^n annoonces
what is fQtare in Xnm. 14, .-^^ and elsewhere; comp. 116. r. However,
especially in the latter case, is not wholly without verbal force, but comes
very near to beini; a mere copula, and this use is more frequent in the later
Books' than in the earlier.
Rem, On the employment of existence, and non-existence, which were k

originally substantives (on their tendency to be used as verbs, equivalent to est
and non est, cf. % loo.o, and the .Veiâlii"' Scufeticis, 152) as a coiiuecling link
between a pronominal subject and a paiiicipial predicate (especially in conditional
and intcfrogative sentences. Gen. S4, 43. 49. 43, 4 and elsewhere), see above,
{ 116. f, and the various kuds of snboidinate claoses mentioned in %% 150, 159.
4. The natural arrangement of words in the noun-cIau.se, as dcscrib- /

ing a stale, is subject predicate; the principal stress falls on the former
since it is the object of the description. Very frequently, however

(and not merely in poetry, where greater freedom is naturally allowed
^ On a similar use of the separate pronoun of the third person in Aramaic

(Dan. a, 38. Ezra 5, 11, &c.) sec Kaurzsch, Gramm. des fUbl. Aram., 87. 3.
This is of course to be distinguished from the use of to be inferred from
the context) as predicate in the icnse of i5 auros; see above, p. 459, note; or
in such cases as Deut. ji, 39 see now Wn ^3t< ^5 that /, even I, am he
I Chron. si, 17.
* Aceordkg to Albiecht, ZAH^, t888, p. 352, cspeciaUy in Deateronoray and in
the Friestly Code.
Digitized by Google
The Sentence.
in the arrangement of words), the reverse order is found, i.e. predicatt

subjeeL The latter order musi be used when special emphasis is laid
on the predicate ^ or when it consists of an interrogative word; thus

^th a substantival predicate, e. g. Gen. 3, 19 nn|l duMi ihou arl;
4, 9. 13, 13 {my mkr^ not my wife); so, 3. is. 39, 14. Job 5, 34.
6, 12 ; with an adjectival predicate, e.g. Is. 6, 3. 28, 21. Jer. 10, 6
with a parliciple, G* n. 30, i, \z, 12; with an iiUcrrugacive pronoun,
e.g. Gen. 24, 65^; with an adverbial interrogative, e.g. Gen. 4, 9.
fM Rm. Comp. on the above the ezhaastive investigntions of C. Albredit, ' Die
Wortstellung im hcbr. Nominalsatze,' ZA W. 1888, pp. 2 1 8 sqq. and 149 jq.; with
a complete list of the exceptions to the order mbjectpredicafe, p. 254 sqq. The
pre<licatc must precede for the reasons stated {âdjectival preJuaie is particislarly
enaphatic when it has the force of a comparative, e.g. Gen. 4, 13; the predicate
cx^csied \tf tueaiit of a preposition piceds with eêdal frequency wbco it
serves to convey the ideas of Jumngt pmetHmg^ e.. Gen. 18, 14. 99, 16 and
daewheie; eomp. alto 2(S, so. 31, 16* 43).
H The predicate may precede : (a) when the subject is a pronoun, for ' the persoa
as being nssumed to be generally known, does not excite the same interest as that
which is stated about him ;' ;/) '
in order not to be a mere appendage to a subject
which consists of several words,' e.g. aKi. 20,19; in interrogaiive sentences
(with a substantival or adjectival predicate or one compowidcd with a prepositioo),

eg. I Sam. 16,4; finally when the fHredicate ia adverbial or compounded with
a pcepoiitioD, in a relative claose, aa a role closely nnited (by Maqqeph) with ,
e.ff. Gen. a. it DISHSTM ; i, ao tq.
142. TAe Vtrbal-elausi,
a 1. By 140./ there is an essential distinction between verbal-

clauses, according as the subject stands before or after the verb. In
the verbal-clause proper the principal emphasis rests upon the action
which proceeds from (or is experienced by) the subject, and accord-
ingly the verb naturally precedes (necessarily so when it is in the
perfect consecutive or imperfect consecutive). Nevertheless, the subject
does sometimes precede even in the verbal-clause proper, in the
continuation of the narrative, e.g. Gen. 7, 19. 2 Sam. 19, is;
especially so if there is special emphasis upon it, e.g. Gen. 3, 13
(it is not I who am to blime, buO the sirfnnt btguiled me^ comp.
' For the same reason specific-it ions of place (o. f^. Gcri. 4, 7) or other adTerhial
qualifications may stand at the beginning ot the seiUcnce.

' The only exceptions, aocmding to Allnedit (see the Rem. above), are Ex.
16, 7. 8.
Digitized by Google
14^0 The Verbal-clause. 479
Gen. 2, 5 and elsewhere ^ In the great majority of instances,
however, the position of the subject at the beginning of a verbal-clause
is to be explained from the fact that the clause is not intended to
introduce a new fact canying on the nanative, but rather to describe
a staU, Verbal-clauses of this kind approximate closely in character
to noun-clauses, and not infrequently (viz. when the verbal form might
just as well be read as a participle) it is doubtful whether the writer
did not in fact inLeiid a iioun-claUbC.
The partlcnlar tUUt repicMated in the verh may consist b

(a) Of tn Mt completed long before, to which reference is made only because
it is necessary for unrfcrstnnrlin^ the sequel of the principal action. If the predi-
cate be a perfect (as it almost always is in these cases , it is generally to be
rendered in English by a pluperfect ; cotup. the exatnples discussed above in
106./ (i Sam. 28, 3,&c.); also Gen. 6, 8 (not Noah found grace)\ i6, i. 18, 17.
so, 4. 34, X. 39, 1 {findJoseph hi tiie nesanîile had ham brought down to Egypt);
41, 10. Jvdg. I, x6. I Sam. 9, 15. 14, 17. 35, si. 1 KL i, i, &c. In a wider
sense this applies also to sodk verbal-datnes as Gen. a, 6 (see fiiidicr, 113. ),
where they serve to represent an actlcii continiiiag for a loDg period ia the past,
and thus to some extent a state.
{b) Of a fact, contemporaneous with 'lie principal events or continaing as the C

result of them. To the former class belong all those instances in which the
predicate is combined with njH (provide<l that il^H has not. as in Gen. r, a. 3, I,
&c., been weakened to a mere copula, in which case the precedence of the subject
to fiiUy explained froon the disiacter of the danae aa a nonn-cUnse; comp.
f S41. i, and the examples of fTH , &c, with a paiddple, | zz6. r); as an example
of the lecond dass, comp. eg. Gen. 13. is |^^3~)nKa ^
D'^nK Abraham
accordingly tmdmted it dumU in tlU land af Canaan^ hut Let dat^, te.
Rem. I. The close relation between verbal-daiises beginning with the subject d
and actual nonn-daiises, is seen finally from the fiKt that tilie former also are some*
what freqnentlj added with 1 (or snbordhiated) to a preceding sentence In ofder
to lay stress npon some accompanying drcnmstance on snch noim-danses ;
describing a stafe or circumsfance, cf. 141. e. Thij; is especially the case, agdn,
when the circumstance which follows involves an antithesis; comp (len. 18, 18
seeiftg that nevertheless Abraham shall surely become^ &c. ; 34, 56. 26, 27. Is.
29, 13. Jer. 14, 15. Ps. 50, 17. Job 31, a 2, and snch examples as Gen. 4, a. 4.
39, 1 7, where by means of 1 a new sobject is introdoced in express antidiesls to
one jnst mentioned. Moreover, in the examples treated above, in letters b and c
(1 Sam. s8, 3>^)> the sobject to frequently introduced by 1, which then cot lies*
ponds to the Greek used to interpose an explanation, 4fcc, sec Winer, Gnmm.
da m$H4st, Sprachidimst % $3. 7.
' TUs of coarse applies also to the cases, ih which the sobject consists of
a strongly empbastocd personal pronoan, e.g. Gen. 33, 13 IW^ theu tfyulf;
33, 3 Mm h himttlf.
Digitized by Google
480 The Sentence.
g a. By t pectiliar oonstructipn verbal'daoiet may be joined by OMiitt of 1 tnd

a following tnbject to participial cUnsn, e.g. Gii. l%, %i nnbtB^ KVl^ mWD ITTI
she was ahtady hrau^ f^^% when she sent, &c.; 44, 3. 4. Jvd. 18, 3. 19, it.
2 Sam. JO, 8 ; for other examples, sec 1 16. // (according to the retnarTcs there itinHe,
note I, the apotiosis aho frequently appears in the form of a //iiMW-cUuse, a further
proof of the close relation bcfwet n vcrhnl-clauscs begiiiaiug with the snbjccl and
uoun-clauses proper). Without doubt there is in all these cases a kind of ioveraoa
of tbe principal clause and tfie temporal subordinate danse; the latter for the take
of gteater emphaiii bebg raised to an independent ttovttclaiiee white ^ mi
principal action is added as thongh it were an aoooupanyiBg dicwnstanoe, and
hence in the form of an ordinary drcnmstanrial clanse.
/ 2. According to what has been remarked above, in letter <2, the
natural ordtr of words within the verbal sentence is : Verb Subject,
or Vtrb Subject Object. But as in the noun-clause ( 141./) so also
in the verbal-clause, a variation of the usual order of words frequently

occurs when any member of the sentence is to be spedally emphasized
by priority of position Thus the order may be :
(tf) Object Verb^Subject : Gen. 30, 40. 1 Sam. a 9. 15, i. s Ki.
23, 1 9 and frequently. Naturally the examples are far more numerous,
in which the olMect precedes a verbal form which includes the subject
in itself, e.g. Gen. 3, 10. 14. 18. 6, 16. 8, 17. 9, 13. 37, 4. Ex. 18, 23.
Jud. 14, 3. I Sam. 18, 17. so, 9. ai, 10. s Ki. as, 8. Prov. 13, 5
and elsewhere.
(b) Verb ObjectSubject: Gen. at, 7. Num. 5, 33. i Sam. 15, 33.
a Sam. 24, 16 (but iM^tsn is probably only a subsequent addition)
Is. 19, 13. Ps. 34, 22. Job II, 19 and elsewhere.
(f) Subject Object Verb: Is. 3, 17. xi, 8. 13, 18. Hos. la, 11.
Ps. 6, 10. II, 5. Job 29, 25 ^
* Not infreqnently also the striving after ehiasmus mentioned in { 114. r, note,
oocasions n departure from the nsaal arrangement of words.
This sdjucnoe occurs even in prose (Gen. 17, 9. 33, 6 and elsewhere"^; it h,
however, more doubtful here than in the above prophetical and poetical pa&!>age$,
whether the preceding subject should not be regarded rather as the subject of a
compound sentence (f 1 43), tbe predicate of which is an independent verbal-claose
this would explain why the verbal-daose is usually separated from the subject by
one of the greater distinct ivcs
On the other hand, the wtojfuiwt Stikjeet Object-^
Verb is quite common in Aramaic 'e.g. Dan. 3,7. lo); comp. Gesenins, Comm.
on Is, 4 J, 34, and Kautzsch's Gramm. dfs HiM. Aram., 84. i. b. The j?ure
Aramaic uâge of placing the objitt before the infinitive occurs ia Hebrew in
Lev. 19, 9. 31, 31. Dcut. 38, 56. 3 Sam. 11, 19. Is. 49, 6. 3 Chroo. aS, 10. 31, 7.
36, 19(1).
Digitized by Google
The Compound Sentence, 481
(d) Object Subjeci Verb (very rarely): 2 Ki. 5, 13. Is. 5,

17.*
a8, 17. Ps. .^r, 5

{(t) A substantival complement of the verb n^n is placed first in
Is. 18, 5 ns) iTrr i>Di nj^))) ^mm/ a ripmxiggmpt ihe JUwer buonuiJL
Rem. Of tpedfictttioQf oompomided irlUi a pnepodtion thoie of /ff# stand ^

r^pkrly after the verb, unless thcjue specially emphntic as e. g. Gen. 19, a. 30, 16.
33,5. Mic/5, 1. Yjit. 9, 1 a ; in Gen. 39, 35 b(T^3 with 3 pretii precedes for the sake
of emphn-i^. Comp., however, in Gen. 35, 13 t)ie order verb sj)ecifica(ion of
plate subjeit. The remoter object precedes for the sake of emphasis, c. g. in
13, 15 (a6, 3). even before the interrogative, Gen. 37, 37 (cf. Jcr.
15, 3;
SS, 15 where the subject precedes an intenogative, and i Sam. 20, 8. Job 34, 31
where a prepocidoiwl ipecificttion pieoedes). Prepositional spedficatioas of /mm,
snch'M n^^pWia (Gen. i, i), D^â, fm Ito ftc (but not n:b^na, nor the
simple nj^^, i^^C??, D^y^)* ctand, as a rule, before the verbt protlded it be
not io the perfect consecutive or imperfect consecntive ; so also certain adverbs
of time, sneh as Vf^ nn^* whilst others lilte TQ^ r^larly follow the verb,
f 148. Thi Compound SaUence,

A compound sentence ( 140. </) is formed by the juxtaposition
of a subject* (which always precedes, êe letter c) and
{a) An independent noun-clausc, which (a) refers to the principal
subject by means of a pFOnoun, e. g. Nab* i, 3 ^STji n^D3 nirP
the Lordin the thrm is his wtfyi 2 Sam. 33, 6. Ps. 18, 31. I04 17.
125, 3. Ecdes. 8 14 ; oomp. also Gen. 34, 33, where the predicate ifl
an interrogative clause. A personal pronoun is somewhat frequently
used as the principal subjeci, c. g. Is. 59, 2 1 DHK ^n*13 r\\k\ and
as for mc^ this is nij covenant with them, &c.; Gen. 9, 9. Is. r, 7.
17. 4. I Chron. 28, 3'; with an interrogative noun-clause, Gen. 37, 30.
Job 21, 4. 38, 19: or is without a retrospective suffix (in which

case naturally the connexion between the subject and predicate is
much looser), e.g. i Sam. so, 33 and as touching the matter
* This sequence occurs more frequently in nonn-claii=e<; m ith a participial predi-
cate, e.g. (icn. 37, t6. 41. 9. 3 Sam. 13, 4, &c., in interrogative sentences, e.g.
a Ki. 6, 22. Jer. 7, 19 ; ni all which cases the emphasized object is placed before
tlw natanl sefioence td st^feet^predieate, [Cf. Driver, Tenses, 308.]
' In Gen. 51, 40 a verbal-danse (^^n / was) occurs instead of the sal]geet,
and is then explained by another verbal-clause.

In t Chrai. s8, a (comp. also as, 7 'âb^D^ nvt might also betaken
as ttiengtiicnlng tfie pronominal suffix which follows (equivalent to / n^fsdf
had U in eey mind), as e.g. sek. Zh <7 mkereas their own is not eqmai;
Digitized by Google
48a The Sentence. D143
whuhf Ac. . . . beheld ihi Lord is iettotm ikee and me for evtr;
Prov, a 7, a.
b (3) An independent verbal-clause : () with a rettoq)ective suffix \
e.g. Gen. 9, 6 (comp. 1 16. 17,15 asfor Saraiiky wife. Hum skal/
not eatl her name Sarai; 26, 15. 28, 13. 34, 8. Ex. 30, 37. 32, i.
I Siim. 2, lo. z Ki. 10, 29. Is. 9, I. 11, io. Ezek. 33, 2. Hos. 9, 11.
Ps. II, 4. 46, 5. 65, 4. 74, 17. Dan. I, 17; with a pronoun as the
principal subject. Gen. 24, 27; (3) without a retrospective suffix.
Is. 19. 17 fvery one that meuUons it (Judah) to it (Egypt), it (Egypt)
IX afraid*
e Rem.I. In all the above exftmplcs proniDcnce it fiiven to the piindpal fat^cct
(by mere separmtlOQ from the context by means of a greater distinctive, as

its
a (asm pendens'*) in a manner which would be quite impossible in a simple noun

or vcibal-clause 'e. tj. Nah. i, x if it were nE^D3 JTin^ comn. the French ;
(tittmi ijuon a a<> us^. But the statement or question contained in the clnuv
which forms the For the same purpose
predi.:ate al&u receives greater weight.
other members of the sentence also are sometimes placed at tlie beginning ami
resnmed again bjr a following snfllx; thm Uie object. Gen. 13, 15. ai, 35, la.
47, at (with the Samaritan and LXX lead n^n^n ) i Sam. 25, 19 ; a apectficaUoa ;
of place. Gen. a, 17, and ehwwheie; a snbatantive with ^, i Sam.

a KI. aa, 18
9, aa a Sam. 6, 23 ; comp. the eiamples in | 135. a.In Nnm 15, 39 a dative

is co-ordinated with the easms pendau, i.e. theie is a tiansttion to a difietcat
construction.
d 2. 'I'o compound sentences helonjj also the numerous examples alreadv treated
in the account of the tenses, where the predicate of a casus ptndtns is intro-
daced bj the warn aptdosis. The and prominence of the principal

isolation
subject is in this ease still move marked than b the inataaoes treated above; m
the tasns pendens with a following imperfect conaecntive (e. g. Jer. 6, 19. 33, 34^
cf. S III. ^; with a following perfect consecutive (e.g. Ex. 4, ai. 12,44. Nvbl
2,^. 3. I Srtm 25, 37. 2 Sam. 14, 10. I5. 9. 4. 56, 6sq.), 1 1 a. / and mm ; on the
participle as cams p)id<n< , % w i.oo ami 116. 7U. In Job 1 5, 17 tvn'v af-CKi^'tii
follows with the cobortaiivc ; in Jul> i3, la. Ps. 115, 7 the imperfect is separatni
bjr from the wAw apeduis; in Job 4, 6 as for thy hope, it is tlu intesrity ef
thy ways, and 36, 26* an incomplete noon-clanie is appended bjr wdw apodtsis.
On wSm epodesis after dlscoanccted specifications of tim^ comp. f 11s. w at the
end, and Gen. 40, 9. a Sam. 15, 34 ^^3} and new (so far as the pre-
sent is concerned) I will be thy servant. Num. la. la.
g 3. Sometimes a in respect to: comp. | TI9.

suh^tantise introduced by S
serves the same purpose as the casus pendens beginning the sentence, as Ntun.
* Comp. the inscription, 1. 31 tmd ôrmudn, therein dwett, ftc.

Bat this tenn must not (any more than that formerly used 'the subject pie-
cedint^ absolutely') be misunderstood to mean that the principal subject is, as k
were, floating in the air, and that the whole sentence results in an anacoluthon.
On the contrary, to the Seaiitic mind, such sentences appear quite as corrcctt/
formed as ordinary noun and verbal-clauses.
Digitized by Google
Jx44.3 Peculiarities tn Representation ofSubject, 483
18, iS (unloi die |> here tenet to introdnoe the object, according to ll 117. m);
It. 33, I (where^ howerer, D^fe^ should most probably be reed); Eodet. 9, 4.
I Chion. 7, 1. a4, aosqq. a Chroo. 7, ai. On
the other hand, Pt. 16, 3. 17, 4.
3a, 6. 89k 19. 119, 91 ue very doobtfid. The tttêttioQ of P. Henpc
{J^mt Hopiins Univirsiiy Circulars, xiiL no. 114;, Baltimore, S894) alio
deserves attention, that in passage? like Eccks. 9, 4, an 1 In hbh Gen. 9, 10. 33, lo.
Ex. 27, 3 19. Ezck. 44, 9. &c., {5 is not the prept si'aon, but an emphasirinjj
prirtirl'-, ai.swering to the Arab. /<f. 'are!}'- ,*l5s; riaii lii ; with ^3 it is cqvivalent
to :ri yhort, Cf. also j) ^ tv ftvCf </, Jos. 17, 16. Ezia I, II, Assyrian
144, Feculiarities in the Representation of the Subject
{fspidaUy in ike Veriat^tauu),
1, According to 40 sqq. most fonns of the finite verb indade a

a specification of the subject in the form of personal afformaiivts (in
ihe imperfect also in the form of prcformalives). Not infrequently,
however, masculine forms are u>c(i with reference to the feminine.
e.g. DFiyi'). Ezek. 23, 49 ; DQ^fc'^ Kuth 1,8; in the imperfect, Joel 2,22.
Cant. 3> 7; in the imperative, Amos 4. i. Zech. 13, 7 (for other

examples, see iia i). On emphasizing the pronominal subject by
the addition of the separate pronoun, see f i35' and h.
On the luaaeulbe at pH^rgendtr^ cf. i laa. g; on timiUr aaonudiet In the ate

of the pcneciel pconotin, f 135* in the codnexion between tnfattantive and
adjecdv^ % 13a. between nt^ject and piedicate, 1 145. I, .
S. The third person singular is frequently used impersonally, b

especially in the masculine, e, q;.
^n*). and it came to pass, t^^, and it
shall come to pass; H'jn foiiuwed by &c., it became hot to him,
i. e. he became angry. Gen. 4, 6 and elsewhere ;

"^3f*1 lit. and it became
streni to Mm, he ivas distressed, Gen. 32, 8 \ even like the German
agiebi, iitre is (followed by an accusative), Prov. 13, 10. Job 37> to;
on Gen. 38, 98, see letter d below ; also in the feminine, e. g. i Sam.
30, 6 (Jud. 10, 9) iJfWl; Jud. 11, 39. Jer. 7, 31. Ezek. la, 25.
Job 15, 33; comp. also the impersonal passives. Is. i, 6. 99, 6.
Prov. 15, 6. Somewhat different are the instances in which' the
3rd singular feminine occurs as the predicate of a feminine subject
^ In Arabic and Othiopic the matcnline it commmly ated in thte eaae, in Syriac
the fembine. Tlie forms DH hot, 3^0 good, well, kitter, narrm, Vlevt't
(lieqnently jirfned with ^|>, Ac.), which many regard as impersonal, are no
doubt to be regarded in roost cncs not as foimt of the 3rd pen. uag, perf., bat,
with Uupfeld on Ps. 18, 7, as adjectives.

I i 2
Digitized by Google
484 The Sentence.
which is not mentioned, bat is befoie the mind of the speaker, e. g.
Is. 7, 7. 14, a4. Jer. 10, 7. Job 4, 5. 18, 15 (in a KL 24. 7 if'ir^
is used in this way with a feminine predicate, and in Jer. 19, 5 *^
alone); different, too, are the instances in which the 3rd singuhr
masculine refers to an act just mLiuioiKd, e.g. Gen. 17, 11 HJITl
this (ihe circumcision) shall be a ioken 0/ a covenant^ &c.

Rem. The expressionf; for nntural phenomena WKf be either in the 3rd sing.
mascoUac or feminine, e.g. "liK it becomes light, i Sam. 39, 10 (but with an explicit
subject, Gen. 44, 3); l^K *1 atui il became light ; so also Tjt^n^ // iôws dark, Jer.
13, 16; but niB^ni Mic. 3, 6; HD^H though there be Jarkiuss, Job 11, 17;
l^Dt:rl it rains, Amos 4, 7 (where, however, the context requires the reading
"I^QDK) ; Pt. 50, 3 rn^D it U UmpiUmtm,
3. The indefinite personal subject (our th^, me^ the French cn^ and
the German wmn ) is expressed
(tf) By the 3rd person singular masculine, e.g. mu (sc. any
who named % see the Rem.) catted (or calls). Gen. it, 9. 16, 14.
Ex. 15, 23, comp. Is. 9, 5 one said. Gen. 48, f i Sam. 16, 4.
; .
19, 22"; other examples are Gen. 38, 28 one put oul a hand; Num.
23, 21. I Ki. 22, 38. Is. d, 10 *h one heals them ; 8, 4 (6^^);
46, 7 (Pyf!); Am. 6, 12. Mic. 2, 4. Job 27, 23; by the 3rd singular
feminine Num. 26, 59.
Rem. The Jewish commentatoiSp following the Arab graminwians, tisnally
explain these sinjjulars by the addition of the participle (generally determinate)
of !he same stem, e. K^PH As a matter of fact, such a complement
sometimej* occurs, c. c;. Is. 16, jo Ij').''!!! ?pT the trcaJer (reads cut, fur out t> aaJs
out ; 28, 4. 24 \dolh o>ic f'cru continually ?) ; Dcut. 1 7, 6 (Kzck. 18. 32). Deut. iZ, 8.
2 Sam. 9 (E2ck. 33, 4). Jer. 9, i3; with an indeterminate participle

17, (as in
Arabic, e. g. gala qailun, a sayer says, i. e. JMPM em says), e. g. Knm. 6, 9. Amoc

9, I ; cf. aliove, f 116. /. [Comp. Driver, on t Sam. 16, 4.3
{b) Very frequently by the 3rd plural masculine, e.g. Gen. 29, 2
/or oul of thai well ^pB'I tluy itakred (Cierman Irdnkle man) the flocks;
26, 18. 35, 5. 41, 14. 49i 31- I ^* i 2* ^s. 38, 16. Hos. 12, 9.
Job 18, 18. 34, 20. Est. 2, 2. Neh. a, 7.
* In I Sun. 9,9 C^ltn (propw M Mm) is uaed in exactly the tame aoaie m
our one.
' Elsewhere in such ca?es T^tDN*1 usually occurs (but not in the perfect, c. g.
I .S.im. 23, 22), duubiful whether the prtôt reading of Gen. 48, i, &c.,
so that it is
woald not be better explained according to f 7. note a. In Gen. 48, a for the
extnoidinary *13*1 the oonnott foim is to be letd; ao in 50, a6 for Qfef^J
(after a pliml) ettlier XigV\^ or Ihe îd plnr.; in 2 KL 21, t6 V>a^.
Digitized by Google
{1440 Peculiarities in Representation of Subject, 485
Rem. The 3rd plur. also is sometimes used to express an indefinite snbject, ^
wHerc the context docs not admit of a human agent or at Icabt not of several,
e.g. Geo. 34, 37. ca^ the 3xd plur. comes to be eqaivaient to a passive,
Li such a
u mjr commooly Axvmtic (see KaotisclL'B Gnmm, da Bi6l, Aram., \ 96. i. c) ;
in
e g.Job 7, 3 wearisMtg ni^s ^^"lllp hve th^ aUPtUd to nw (cqnivilcnt to flm

tdbaed tomti to nnke* Invisible powcn' the ntject is a meieljartiiieial device);
Job 4, 19. 6, 3. 18. 18. 19, a<K. 34, Mu Eiclc. 3s, S5. Pi. 63, ii. Fkov. a, aa (la
pexiUeUsm vitii a passive); 91 it,
(r) By the and singular masculine, e.g. Is. 7, 25 H^^rrx^ k

one wilt (or can) not come thither (prop, thou witt . . .) ; Jer. 23, 37.
Prov. 19, 25. 30, 28 (unless the reading should be te'DWFI). Comp.
also or simply (Gen. 10, 19, 30, 13, 10 ^H'^) prop. tmtU
tky comings i.e. until one comes.
(4/) By 23 and oil tkjf mvet

the plural of the participle, e.g. Jer. 38, i
and tfy ekUdrm DN^CVto (prop, mrt tkgf hrmging cut) Aey wHl ir^
out, ftc.; comp. Is. 3a, sa. Esek. 13, 7. Neh. 6, 10 (/or tmt are
(omiug to slay thee) and the passages discussed above, ii4S. /*, In
1 KL 5, I the text is comipt.
(e) By the passive, e.g. Gen. 4, 26 hrm T|t then i^was it k
begun =) began men to call ufwn, Slc.
4. A peculiar idiom, and one always confined to poetic language, /

is the not infrequent occurrence of two subjects in a verbal sentence \
one of the person and the other of the thing. The kuter then serves
whether it precedes or followsto state the instrmnent, oigan or
member by which the action in question is peiformed, and may be most
often rendered in English by an adverb, as a nearer definition of the
manner of the action. All the examples of this kind have this in
comm n, that the subject denoting the thing takes a suffix in the
same person as the personal subject They are thus distinguished
from the accusatiots treated in 117. with which they are often
confused.
* That this form of expceiiion also (see letter comes to be eqaivalent to

a passive, is seen from the analogy of such Aramaic passnges as Dan. 4, aa,
which exclude any idea of human .if;ency. Comp. Kat7'=ch, Gramm. dcs Bibl.
Aram., 76. ^. e at the end, and iu post.-bibL Hebrew, e.g. IHrqe Aboth 3, 16.
3, and elsewhere.
* Two satgects occur ia a Bom-daine in Ps. 83, 19.
* Lk Ex. 6,
3 npf' is snbordinated to the foUowing paiaive "^Tfft^ (I x. h)\
in t Sam. S3, a6. 33 aie snlgeGts to the infinitive abeotale (gS^, aoooid^
to 113.^. In Pk. 69, ti lead 10^11 for naOl^.
Digitized by Gobgle
486 The Sentence, (}i4$
fft {a) Examples where the subject dcaoting the thing precedes,
my voice / cry unto the Loni, i.e. / cry aloud umo the I ord, Ps. 3, 5^ 17, 7.
143,2; Titn|5"^B n*y mouth / cried^ i.e. / / alouu^ Is. 66, 17 (comp.
17, 10); Is. 36, 9 wUh ioul, i. t. fervent iy. and parallel with it ^nTTfJI^ ;
but ^C'uJ Ps. 57, 5 is rather a periphrasis for the 1st pcr. /.
ip) Whei the subject denoting the thing toWovi^, ?|J^p ^bnv crythy vtieM
(ue. aloud), Is. 10, 30; so also after an imperative, Pa. 17, 13 (^31(1) and 14 CT]^)J
60, 7. 108, 7 OjrtD^); after a perfect, Hab. 3, 15 CT9^)i * cohoftative,
Fk. 108, a The tubject denoting the thing ttaadt between the
penonal lobjeet and the piedieate in Pa. 44, 3 nnt$\
n Rem* I. Sometinea la ascribed to a mbfect
(aa in oUier languages) ao action
which ean only laave been peribrmed at hia diiectton by another penon ; oomp.
e.g. Gen. 40, aa (41. 13). 41* 14* 43 34 {pnd ht tommamdtd to set iân tigm, &c)
46, 39. a Sam. is, 9.

0 J. Supposed ellipses of a definite subject are due cither to a mistinderstanding
of the passage, nr to a corruption of the text. Thus in i Sam. 34, Ji after DHTn
cither *3*Jf
has dropped out (through confusion with "^^^^j or we should reati with
the LXX DHKI. In 2 Sam. 13, 39 (in b^Tt)) the text is obviously corrupt.
^ 3. In poetic (or propheLic) language' there sometimes occurs (supposing the

text to be eomct) a more or teas abrupt tmndtion firom one person to another.
Thna irom the and to the 3id pera. (i. e. Ikom an addreaa to a statement). Gen.
49i 4(0> Is* If)* Ih^ (}) 4*t Mai. a, 15 (wheie however, for *T)Q> we
should ondonbtedlj read *liQft) ; Ps. aa, 9 ; in a relative danae, b. 54, i, comp. also
Is. aa, i6w 5a, 14 sq. 61, 7. From Dent 3s, 15. U,
the 3Td to the and pers..
I, a9(t). 5, 8. Jer. 39, 19. Job comp. also Deut. 3a, 17. From the ist to
16, 7,
the 3^ pcrs., Lam. 3, i (in a relative clause). In Job 13, a8 the 3id peek MVn
is probably employed SmcTixm for the ist.
146. Agrcemml between the Members of a Sentence, (sprcially between
Subfeci and Frtdkate, in respeci of Gender and Number,
a 1. As in other languages, so also in Hebrew, the predicate in general

conforms to the subject in gender and number (even when it is
' In several of the examplea qnolcd above it might oatnimUy be anppoaed

that the subject denoting the thing (especially when it follows fbe verb) b to be
explained rather as a mfr instruntentalisy i.e. as an accusative, nnnlogous to the
adverbial accusatives trcaied in 118. q. Put aUhoU{;h it is true that (he subject
denoting the thing often dchncs more closely the manner in which the action
is perfcM^med, and although in simiUr (bat still different) examples, Ps.89,
3. 109, 30.
Job 19, 16, ^ oocais with a instmimnteiie, the explanation given above nmt
neverthdcsa be aceepted.
* In piose. Lev. a, 8; bntR^n^heie is hardly the otigfaial leading. Diliacnt
from this is Gen. a6, 7, where there ia a transition to direct nnnntion.
Digitized by Google
1 45.] Agreement behveen Members ofa Sentence. 487
a pronoun, e.g. '^'"1? ihis is my covenant, Gen. 17, 10). There

are, however, numerous exceptions 10 this fundamental rule. These are
due partly to the constructio ad sensum (where attention is paid to the

meaning rather than to the grammatical form ; see letters b-l below),
partly to the position of the predicate (regarded as being without
gender) before the subject.

2. Singular nouns which include in themselves a collective idea b
( 123. a), or which occasionally have a collective sen.se ( 123.^),

may readily, in accordance with their meaning, be construed with the
plural of the predicate, whether it precedes or follows. This is also
the case, when the collective is itself feminine but represents, exclusively
or at least generally, masculine persons.
Examples :
\a) Of collectives proper : (o) with the predicate preceding, Gen. 30, 38 C
[KJfnT|i43ri (comp. verse 39. 31, 8 and 33, 13); Jud. i, 22 sq. representing
persons belonging to the tribe; Mic. 4, 3 ^13 ; 2 Ki. 25, 5 ^^Pl army; Prov. 11, 26
the ptopli ; Num. 10, 3 mj^n"^3 all the congregation (comp. 1 Ki. 8, 5);
1 Ki. 1 ,
40. Is. 9, 8. 25, 3. Amos i
, 5 Dy ; 1 Sam. 1 7, 47. Ezra 10, 1 2 ^rtf? assembly.
Comp. also the construction of national names, as DIK ( 122. i*), e.g. I Ki. 20, 20
and the Syrians fled; i Sam. 4, 5. (^) with the predicate follow-
ing, I Ki. 8, 5 "^^21 sheep and oxen, construed with the plural in the following
relative clause; Job 1, 14 rfSJ^'in VH "^j^BH the cattle (cows) were ploughing;
i Sam. 3, I and i Chron. 10, 6 n^3 =/amily, and in a place-name, I Sam. 6, 13;
Hos. 11,7. Ezra 4, 4 DJ?; Ps. 68, 11 TVH herd ; Is. 26, 19 a heap of dead
bodies; Iv 27, 11 *^*5fp boughs; i Sam. 4, r preceded by a pre<licate
in the singular.
1^) Of substantives occasionally used as collectives: (o) with the predicate d

preceding. Gen. 34, 24 "^31; Jud. 9, 55. 15, 10 B'^K ; Is. 16, 4 DDT the treadtr
down.{fi) with the predicate following, Job 8, 19 inW> others ; Ezck. 28, 3
DV)D a secret.
T
(f) Of feminines as collective terms denoting masculine persons : (a) with the e
predicate preceding, I Sam. 17, 46 jnNn"^3 ^y*1^^1 that all the earth may know,
i.e. all the inhabitants of the earth; cf. Dent. 9, 28. Ps. 66, i. 96, i. 9, &c.;
Amos I, 8 ri^TKB^ remnant. (i3) with the predicate following, Gen. 41, 57. 2 Sam.
15, 23. I Ki. 10, 14. Ps. 33, 8 (jnKrri>3); Gen. 48, 6 nn^D issue; i Sam. 2, 33
n*31P"^3 cdl the increase ; Job 30, 12 niTIB rabble. In Hag. 2, 7 read H^Dn
with the LXX.
Examples of predicates in the singular, notwithstanding the collective meaning
f
of the subject, occur in Gen. 35, 11. Ex. 10, 24. 14, 10. Dcut. 1, 39, &c. For
examples of bold enallage of the number in noun-clauses with a substantival
predicate, see above, % 141. r.
Rem. Not infrequently the construction begins in the singular (especially when g
the predicate precedes; see letter 0 below), but is carried on, after the collective
488 The Sentence, 145-
sabject has liem BMDtUcd ia the plond; e.. Ex. i, flO*lkD VSpp D^n
4tMi/ /i multiftUd, and wojud viry migkiy; 33, 4.
h 8. On the other hand, plurals which have a singular meaning^
( 124. d) are frequently construed with the singular, especially the

pluralis excellmtiae or maits/d/is ( 124.^-/; on the union of these
plurals with attributes, of. 132. A), as Gen. i, 1. 3, &c. (sec,

however, the Rem.), tJ*pi{ lawj/tr, Ex. 21, 4, D\i'^3 masUr, owner,
jL. 81, 29 ; Gomp., moreover, O^jf with the singular, a Sam. 10, 9.
Job 16, 16 ^Vil., typnj Prov. 18, za So feminine forma with a mas-
culine meaning are construed with a masculine predicate, e.g. Eccles.
1 2, 9 D3n n^n}3 my the preacher was wise,

i Rem. The construction of God wiih ihe plural of lUe predicate may
be explained (apart of coarse from such passages as i Ki. a. ao, 10, where the
speakers are heathen* aod D^rk!>|t may, therefbic, be a nnmerical plmal) partlf
at an acquietoence in a polytheitdc foim of cxpitidoo, partly from the pecoliar
nsige of one of the earlj docnmentt of the Hesatcndi, called bj Wellbaiiaea, M
&c., B ooop* bis commestaiy on NumbersJoibna, p. 618,
by Dilbnann;
and above, f 134.
a. So Gen. 20, 13 (hut in conversation with a
note
heathen); 31, fj. 35, 7, comp. aUo Jos. 24, 19. That this construction was
afterwards studiously avoided from fear of misconception, is shown by snch
passages as Neh. 9, 18 compared with Ex. 3a, 4. 8, and 1 Chron. 17, ai compared
with a Sm. 7, 93. Cf. Strack^s excacns in IHe Bmeker Cm, End. Le, umi
Num^ Monidi, 1894, p. 67*1.
k 4. Plurals of names of animals or things, and of abstracts, whether
they be masculine or feminine, are frequently construed with the
feminine singular of the verbal predicate *
(on iho collective sense of the
feminine form, cf. { laa. s) ; thus Joel i, ao ti}^ n']lp niDiQ Mr beasts
of the field long: Jer. la, 4 (where the predicate precedes), comp. also
Job 13, 7; names of things with the predicate preoedmg occur in
8 Sam. 84, 13- Is. 34, 13. Jer. 4, 14. 51, 29. Ps. 18, 35. 37, 31.
73, 2 K*ih. 103, 5. Job 14, 19. 27, 20; with the predicate following,
Gen. 49, 22 (ni33 = branches) ; Dcui. 21,7. i Sam. 4, 15 (no^ ^^JT!)
* Conip. in Greek the constructii)n of the neuter plural with the sin^lar of the
predicate rd vpifiara tiaivi; ia Attic Greek the plural of the predicate is alluwed
only when the neuter denotes actual persons, as ret &wipAwo9a tKafiov. In Arabic
also the fluralis inhmmanm (i.e. not denoting persons) is regularly oonitnied
with Ae feminine angular of the attribnte or ptcdicate, as aie aU the fbereks
fracti (collective forms).
' On the possibility of explaining fomu like ncj^ as 3rd plural feminine, cf.
above, % 44. m; but this explanation would not appljf to all the cases onder this
head, cf. Joel i, ao. Ps. 37, 31. 103, .
Digitized by Google
f 145.] Agreement between Members ofa Sentence, 489
Is. 69, 18. Jer. 2, 15 K*tk.! 4, 14. 48, 41. 49, 34. Prov. 15, as.
20, 18. Job 20, It. 41, 10'.
6. Moreover, the plurals of persont (especialljr in the participle) /
are sometimes construed with the singular of the predicate, when
instead of the whole class of individuals, each severally is to be
represented as affected by the statement. UmU ubtcd rxamples of this
distributive singular are Gen. 27. 29 (Num. 24, 9) l*3"^3tp^ "inN Tll^
tjna those that curse theti cursed be every one of tbeiu, and those that
bless thee^ blessed be ever)' one of them; Ex. 31, 14. Lev. 17, 14 and
19, 8 (in both places the Samaritan has K) ; Is. 3, 12 unless
is to be regarded as a phurdlis nmtstaHt accordiog to { 124. g: Prov.
3* 35(0* i^t 31 21, 27 ^. 27, 16. 28, 1 ^. 28, t6 KUh.

Rem. Analogous to the examples above meotioned is the somewhat ixequent' Ml
tiae of mffixcs in the singular (distribotivelj) Kfening to plumls; oomp. the
ftfrlia/-iDffiies in Dent, ai, to* a8, 48. Amos 6, 10; and the nonn-snffixes hi la.
a, 8. 3^ as. Jer. 31, 15. Hot. 4, 8* Zech. 14, ts. Pi. 5, 10 (where, howerer, \S%
is clearly to be read with all the early versions); 6a, 5. I41, 10 (n. Job 3'', 32.
Eccles. 10, 15 ;
finally, the suffixes with prepositions in Is. a, \Q "^3^ which
they made each one for himself; according to others, 'a-hich they {the makers)
made for him ; 5. 26. 20. Job 24, 5, in e.ich case ; in Gen. 7, 19 "l^ refers to
tile collectives n*n and Cj'iy ;

cotnp. further, Is. 23 ^30 after D*p^l3f, and
J Sam. 5, 10 *i>t< after D*pp|?n. Conversely in Mic- i, ii D3^ Id, Jer.
13, 20 A 'M.}, but the text is undoiibte<l!y corrupt.
6. Subjects in the dual are construed with the plural of the predicate, n
since verl>s, adjectives, a nd pfonounsâccordtng to 88. a, have no
dual forms; thus D^]f, Gen. 29, 17 frtai n^^ >f attd Leah's eyes were
dull; a Sam. 24, 3. Is. 30, 20. Jer. 14, 6. Mic. 7, 10. Ps. 18, 28.
38, II (on the other hand, in i Sam. 4, 15 the predicate is in the
feminine singular after the subject, and in Mic. 4, 11 be/&re\X) comp.
for both, IcLicr k above); so also D^3W ears, 2 Chron. 6, 40;
hands, Is. I, 15. Job 10, 8. 20, 10 (in Ex. 17, 12 even with the plural
masculine CinnS; cf. letter DlOpp lips, i Sam. i, 13. Job 27, 4;
Oyw breasts, Hos. 9, 14.
7. Variations from the fundamental rule (see above, letter a) very c
iinequendy occur when (he pretUeale precedes the subject (denoting
' lit Prov. 14, 1 au abstract I'lurnl JTiOSn (to be read thi!s withy, I, &c., instead
of ritosn is construed with the siiêûlar; but comp. 124. e.
In sevesa! of the above examples the text is doubtful, and hencf Mayer
Lambert {Aevue des etudes jutves, xxiv. Iio) lejeclb liie theory oi diâtabuLive
ringolnii fenenttj.
Digitized by Google
490 The Sentence. [ 145-
animals or things ). The speaker or M'riter begins with the most

simple form of the predicate, the uninflected 3rd singular masculine,
and leaves us without indication as to which of the followini,' subjects
(and so which gender or number) is to define the predicate thus left
temporarily indefinite \ Thus inflexions are omitted in

(a) The verb^ with a following singular feminine. Is. 8 17 nb)
DlMn nvi31 and bowed daum shall be the Iqftmess rfnum; 9, 18. 14, i f
28, 18. 47, 11; I Sam. 35, 27 (see note t below); i Ki. 8, 31.
22, 36. 2 Ki. 3, 26. Jer. 51, 46. Eccles. 7, 7 ; with a following plural
masc, Is. 13, 22 D'lN n3^^ and tJu re shall cry wolves, &c. ; Jud. 13, 17
K'lh. 20, 46. I Sam. 1,2. 4, 10. 2 Sam. 24, 15. i Ki. 13, 33. Jer.
51, 48. Ps. 124, 5. Est. 9, 23 (see note i Ixlow); Gen. i, 14 n^KD ^
let there be lighlsi with a following plural feminine, Deut. 32, 35.
Is, 8, 8. Jer. 13, 18. Mic. 2, 6. Ps. 57, 2 ; before collectives and mixed
subjects, e.g. Gen. 12, 16. 13,5. 30,43. 32, 6, Ac.; before a following
dual. Is. 44, 18. Ps. 73, 7 (where, however, with the LXX tsg^^ should
be read).
P Uem. I. The iiiBt>nce> in which a preceding predicate appeals in the plural
mascaline before a ptniat (or collective singular) feminine of penoos (Jud. ai, St.
1 KL II, 3), of animtb (Gen. go, 39) or of thiaga (Lev. a6, 33. Jer. 13, 16. Hoa.
14, 7. Pi. 16, 4. Job 3, 24. Cant. 6, 9), or before a deal (3 Sam. 4, 1. Zeph. 3, |6.
a Chron. 15, 7) are to be expl.iincil not on the analogy of the examplrs under
letter o. but from a dislike of using the 3rd plur. fcm. iniperf. (lor tlm U the
only form conccnied in the above exanijiles; coinp., Ix ) .vi \cr, Nah. 3, 1
instc.nd of ^^HTI); comp. the examples of a following prc licate in the 3rd plux.
masc., instead of the fcm., xmder letterti / and u, and ou an analogous pbenomeaoa
in the impentive, lee 1 110. i.
q a. As in tlie caae of verbs proper 10 alio tbe verb rPH, when ued aa a oopnia,
frequently itmalna uninflected liefme the subject ;
comp. Gen. 5, 23 s^jq. 39, 5.
Dent 21, 3 (acooiding to the accents) ; ss, 23. Is. 18, 5 nvs iTH^ tdI "^Db^
iMf a ripeninggrafe ike JUwtr i^mneth,
r (^) The adjective in a noun-clause, e.g. Ps. 119, 137 ^^^ff'^'^?^
upright are thy judgements; comp. verse 155'. In German also
the adjective as predicate remains uninflected. On the other hand,
Onlj nrely does an nriaiceted predicate precede a personal snlêct, as 1 Sam.

>5, 37 (but n|j^ riionld probnUy be read, as m Terse 35); Est 9, a3 Oêfoie
a plnr. iiias&). Sach emaiples aa Job 4s, 15 are to be caplained aeoonUng to
f 121. a.
> In a ccitaia sense this is analofoos to the GeraMUi et kemmt mn Abum^ eim
FraUy &c.
' This docs not include such cavrs Job 34, 7. 10, where 01"^ i* rather to
be explained as an accusative denoting a state, % 118. n.
Digitized by Google
' 45-] Agreement between Members of a Sentence. 49
nyi in 1*"33JJ |^<2f nyi iky servants are shepherds, Gen. 47, 3, is either
an unusual orthography or simply a misspelling for
Rem. I. As soon as a sentence which begins with an uninfected predicate is
carried on after the mention of the subject, the gender and number of the sub-
sequent (co-ordinate) predicates must coincide with those of the subject, eg.
Gen. I, 14 Vni 4 * n^ND ^n* (see letter 0 above) ; Num. 9, 6. Ezek. 14, 1 ;
com p. also Gen. 30, 39 (see letter p above).

2. The dislike mentioned in letter / above, of using the feminine form (comp., /
further, 144. a, with the sections of the Grammar referred to there, and below,
sometimes by the fact that of several predicates only that
letter ), is exemplified
which stands next to the feminine substantive is inflccteil as feminine; thus in

Is. 14, 9 rn?"!, and afterwards ll^V ; 33, 9 nî^DN i>3K moumeih, lan-
guisheth the land. Comp. Jer. 4, 30, and the examples ( 47. k) where only the
earlier of several consecutive forms of the and sing. fern, imperf. are provided with the
afiormativc /, Is. 57, 8. Jer. 3, 5. Ezek. 23, 4. 23, 3a (H^nri after "Wri) on ;
the converse sctjucnce of genders in imperatives, Nah. 3, 15, comp. S wo. k.

Of a different kind are instances like Lev. 2, I. 5, I. 20, 6, where B'W person
(fem.) as the narrative continues, assumes (in agreement with the context) the
sense of a masculine person.
3. The instances in which the gender or number of the following predicate //
appears to differ from that of the subject, are due partly to manifest errors in the
text, e.g. Gen. 32, 9 read with the Samaritan iriKH instead of nnHH ; n^ni
then follows correctly ; i Sam. 2, 20 read with Wellbansen /KC^, according to
I, 28, bstead of 1 Sam. 16, 4 read ; 2 Sam. 14, 10 read inKDHI.
Kzek. 18, 29 instead of read the plural as in verse 25 ; so also Ezek. 20, 38
for Ktaj', and in Job 6, 20 for nD3 ; in Lam. 5, 10 read 1033, and comp. in
general, 7. </, note a; I Chron. 2, 48 read ; in Jer. 48. 15 the text is
certainly corrupt. Other instances are due to special reasons. The variations in
Is. 49, II. Hos. 14, I. Prov. I, 16 (after vbiD, Ps. 11, 4 (after ^'rj?), Prov. 5, 2.
10, ai. 32. 18, 6. a6, 33. Job 15, 6 (all after D^ns^), Prov. 3, 2 (after ^JTlto),
Ps. 102, 28. Job 16, 22 (after niJB'), Dan. 11, 41 (read nâ")1), and perhaps
Gen. 20, 17 are also to be explained (see letter /) from the dislike of the 3rd plur.
fem. imperf.; moreover, in Jer. 44, 19. Prov. 26, 23 even the plur. masc. of a
participle occurs instead of the plur. fem. In Gen. 31, 8sq. HÎT, after a plural
subject, is explained as a case of attraction to the following singular predicate*.

In Gen. 4, 7 J*3T is a substantival participle :
a lurker, a coucher). In Gen. 47, 24
n\T remains undefined in gender ; masc.), although the noon precedes for the
sake of emphasis; so also in Ex. 12, 49. 28, 7. 32. Num. 9, 14. 15. 29. Jer. 50, 46.
Eccles. 2, 7 (î) n^n as if the sentence began afresh, and servants born in my
'
t03^ probably an error for ^KD*. The Masora on Lev. ii, 34 reckons fourteen
instances of where we should expect the plural.
' So also the pronoun emphatically resuming the subject (sec $ 141. h)
is attracted to the predicate in number in Jos. 13, 14 ^n^HJ KVl . niiT
the offerings of the Lord . . . that is his inheritance ; in number and gender, Lev.
25. 33 Q'rSi Jer. 10, 3.
Digitized by G
49^ The Sentence, [f 14^

houu . . . thtre Jeli to my lot this possession also . In Job ao, 26 nB3"l^jj may
(unless is regarded as masculine, 122. 0) be taken impersonally, fire^ vnfhHU
it* Mttg bbmm npoii itIn It. 16,8 mod Hab. 3, 17 the predicate in the singular
is explained from tbe collective duuraeter of TfXP^ (see letter k above); on tfae
otber hand, fbe maicnline fens of the predicate is almoimal in ft. 87, $. Frov.
a, 10. IS, S5. 35. Job 8, 7.
{ 146. CotulmcUon of Cmptnmd Subjicis*
a 1. When the subject is composed of a nomcn regens (in the construct

state) with a following genitive, the predicate sometimes agrees in
gender and number not with the nomen regens, but with the genitive,
when this represents the principal idea of the compound subject'.
Thus I Sam. a, 4 WW\ 0^ ne^ Mr bow 9f On mighiy mat it brokof,
as if it were the m^k^ mm wiih thar bow are broken ; z a6 xa. Lev.
13, 9. I Ki. I, 41. 17, 16. Is. a, IX. ai, 17. Job 15, ao. 31, at. 39, 10.
32, 7 ip*^ 3** equivalent to many years) \ 38, 21 ; with the predicate
preceding, 2 Sam. lo, 9, unless it is to be explained according 10
145-
If
Rem. I. The cases in which '7<c{ct, souttd) with a following genitive stands
at the beginning of a sentence, apparently in this construction, are really
of a different kind. The îp is there to be taken as an exclamation, and the

supposed predicate as in apposition to tht i^ctutivc, e.g. Gen. 4, lo the voue of
thy I'fî^tHoed, nfJUeJk aÛih (prop, as crying, 108. /) ... I karb I Ay krUheiî
Heed is tfyvi^fStci Lev. 13, 5^ It. 13, 4. 6. In It. 5, 8 an independcntveffael*
clause follows the exclamatioii Ae vma ^ thy wauknun I in Jer. zo, sa and Cant.
3, 8 an independent nonn-danse ; in Is. 40, 3 tkt voice of om that truth I
Le.harkf there is one crying is followed immediately bv the direct discoi!r-e ;
in Mic. 6, 9 hsp hark '

nmy l>r disconnectedly (<:(. ihe nlmost adverbial use
of h\p in $ J 44. m) and TWTX^ be taken as the subject lo S^^jp^.
C 7. When the substantive entirety is used in connexion with a <^'enitive
as subject of the sentence, the predicate usually agrees iu gender and mutt, her
with liie genitive, since i>3 is e<^[nivnl< nt in sense lo an attribute {tvkoie, all) of
the genitive; hence, e.g. with the jirc liLntc preceding, Gen. 5, 5 D*1N *p^~!?3 ^n*1
ami all the days of Adam ivere, &c. 9, jy >
Samaritan reads Vn*1
here aUo); tx. 15, 20; with the predicate following, l\. 150, 6 and elsewhere.
KraeptioDS are, e.g. Lev. 17, 14 (but cf. 145. i). Is. 64, 10. Prov. t6, s. Nah.
^7. On the other band, in such cases as Ex. zs, 16 the agieemcnt of the predi-
cate with is explained from the stiew laid upon the Utter, l6 n^N^D'^S
beiiig equivalent to mtkiiâtaii ^ nvrl.
* Sometimes, however, tfie attiaction of the predicate to die genitive nay be
merely doe to jostapoiidoo.
Digitized by Google
{ 1460 Construciion of Compound Subjects. 493
2. When the subject of the sentence consists ol several nouns d
connected by waw copulative^ usually
(a) The predicate /ollmm'ng is put in the plural, e.g. Gen. 8, 22

sttd iim and karvtfit and cold and heat . . . $haH noi ciose <V1^ ^) \
after subjects of different genders in the masculine (as the pritir gender^
cf. 132. e.g. Gen. 18, ii D^9E!I ^T^^ Abraham and Sarah
were old; Deut. 28, 32. i Ki. 1, 21.
Rem. Rare exceptions are Prov. 27, 9 fCI^ ointnutit and C

^rjumt rejoice Ike hearty where the predicate agrees in gender with the masculine
en the oUier hand, in Ex. 31, 4 (ivhere rp^l^. n^KH ate the tibject&)
it agicct witfi n|în belBg the principal person ; in the eomponnd lenteiiee,
Ifl* 9, 4, it agrees with the feminine rabjeet imnediately pfecedlng ^
(^) The predicate preceding two or more subjects may likewise f

be used in the plural (Gen. 40, i. Job 3, 5 anil elsewhere) ; not
infrequently, however, it agrees in gender and number with the first,
as being the subject nearest to it. Thus the predicate is put in the
suigular masculine before several masculines singular in Gen. 9, 23.
II, 29. SI, 32. 24, 50. 34, 20. Jud. 14, 5; before a masculine and
a feminine singular, e. g. Gen. 3,8. 24, 55 then said 0^^.) her brofhtr
and her mother i 33, 7; before a masculine singular and a plural,
e.g. Gen. 7. 7 ni Najl and Noah went in, and his sous, &c.
Gen. 8, 18 (where feminines plural also follow); 44, 14. Ex. 15, i.
2 Sam. 5, 21 ; before collectives feminine and masculine, 2 Sam. 12, 2.

Similarly, the feminine singular occurs before several feminines g
Gen. 31, 14
singular, e.g. tS^. then answered Rachd and
Leah; before a feminine singular and a feminine plural, e.g. Gen.
24, 6t ; before a feminine singular and a masculine singular, Num. 12, x
fnT\H\ Dnn nairjl then spake Miriam and Aaron; Jud. 5, i ; before
a feminine singular and a masculine plural, e. g. Gen. 33, 7 (comp., on
the otlier hand, Ps. 7f>, 4 n'Û'^'bl r?X Q^:b3 dissolved are the earth
and all the inhabUanls thereof). The plural feminine occurs before
a plural feminine and a plural masculine in Amos 8, 13. ^lu Jer. 44, 25
for oan^ DP! read tS^ DA|^ with the LXX, and cf. vene 19.
(r) When other predicates follow after the subjects have been h
mentioned, they are necessarily put in the plural; comp. Ex. 21, 32.
24, 61. 31, 4. 33, 7, &c., and 145.1.
> Similarly with a mixed object, Gen. 33, a 4 put . . . Leak and k*r ekUtkm
B*ahn|l afiers tPt\ffH agrees with the mtKnlinr immediately pieoeding.
Digitized by Q6ogIe
494 The Sentence. L '47-
147. Incompleie Smiences.
a ! Sentences are called immpUU^ in which either ihe subject or the

predicate or both must in some way be supplied from the context
Besides the instances enumerated in 1 16. i (omission of the personal
pronoun when subject of a participial clause) and the periphrases for
negative attributes 152. i/, this description hicludes certain (noun>)

clauses iniroduced by nan (see letter b below), and alô a number of
exclamations of the most varied kinds (see letter c below).
b 2. The demonstrative particle 10, "lO ft^ce may be used either

absolutely (as a kind of interjection, comp. 105. b) before complete
noun- or verbal-clauses, e.g. Gen. a8, 15 ^^H^ ^'TJ ^md^ hthoidl
I am wUh One; 37, 7. 48 ai. Ex. 3, 13. 34, 10, or may talbe the
pronoun, which would be the natural subject of a noun-clause, in the
form of a sufTix, see 100. 0, Whether these suffixes are to be regarded
as in the accusative has lieen shown to be doubtful in \oo. p.
However, in the case of nsn the analop:y of the corresponding Arabic
demonstrative partif Ic mna (followed by an accusative of the noun;
is significant^. If lUn with a suffix and a following adjective or

participle (see theexamples in 116./ and ^) forms a noun-clause
the subject proper, to which nin with the suffix refers, must, strictly
speaking, be supplied again before the predicate'. Sometimes,
however, the pronoun referring to the subject is wanting, and the
simple nan takes the place of the subject and copula (as Gen. 18, 9
^nkll nsn behold she is in the iaii ; 42, 28), or there is no indication
whatever of the predicate, so that the sentence is limited to '"I2n with
the sufi^, as in the frequent use of ^^"7, l|n here am J, in answer to
* Thib does not apply to such cases as Gen. 33, 8, where an itihnitive
with ^ apixiars alone in answer to a qiK<;lion, the substance of the question
t>cing presupposed as a mala clause; comp. also Gen. 26, 7j whcic &<^n mu&t
gain be supplied after ^FIC'K.
* On the same analogy any substantive following t\lT\ would kave to be regarUct:
as originally a virtittl aocnnitive. Hebiew does not pooesi caae-
Since, however,
terninntiont (as the Arabic does, and nies the accnaative neoenariljr after *imm\
it is *vciy doobtfol whether, and how &r, snbatantives ibllowlog nin weie felt to br
accnsatives.
' That these are real noan-danses and that the participle (e. g. nO in XXQ
Ccn. JO, 3) cannot be taken :\ <;<?con<:! ncoiisfttive ^fsinrthi-;^ like errr If
moritnrum , is also shown by tlu analogy of Arabic, where after inna wîth a&
accusative the predicate is expressly m the nominativi.
Digitized by
$1470 Incomplete Seniences, 495
an address. Elsewhere a substantive follows nan (or fn Gen. ii, 6.
Job 3r, 35), and nsn then includes the meaning' of a demoiKsi.rative
pronoun and the copula, e.g. Gen. 22, 7
D^>')^;~^. ^'^J) "^flO here is the
fire and ilu wood^ 9lc.\ ta, 19 behold thou hast ihy wife! x. 24, 8;
with reference to the past, e.g. AmoB 7, t njini and, it was Ike
laUer grmoth^ Ac. By a very pregnant construction the simple njjn \%

used as the equivalent of a sentence in Job 9, 19 lo^ here am It
8. Examples of exclamations (threatening, complaining, triumphing, c
especially warlike or seditious) in which, owing to the excitement of
the speaker, some indispensable member of the sentence is suppressed,

are {a) with suppression of the predicate (which has frequently to be
supplied in the form of a jussive), e.g. Jud. 7, 20 a sword/or the Lord
andfor Gideon I (verse 18 without 3"}^); 3 Sam. 80 i and 2 Chron.
10, 16 (comp. also i KL sa 36) every man io his tents, O Israel!
(i.e. let every man go to or remain in his teni); the same exclamation
without I Ki. ta, 16 ; moreover, Is. i, 28. 13, 4 (on the exclama-
tory equivalent to hark/ cf. 146.^); 28, 10. 29, 16 (D23Bn
O your pervtrsily! i.e. how great it is!); Jer. 49, 16 (if ^riifÊn be
equivalent to terror be upon iheef)\ Joel 4, 14. Mai. i, 13

h,hohi what a iveariness l)\ Job 22, 29; perhaps also Gen, 49, 4
109 a bMUng ever as waier (sc. happened), unless it is better to
supply a subject {ikm was/). {h) With suppression of the
subject. Job 15, 23 where sc. is bread? {e) With suppression of
both subject and predicate, Jud. 7, 18 (see above); i Ki la, 16 (see
above) ; 2 Ki. 9, 27 ^Hfc D3 him also I explained immediately after-

wards by ^nan smite him ! Hos. 5, 8 affrr thee, Benjamin I sc.
is the enemy (differently in Jud. 5, 14); Ps. 6, 4. 90, 13. Hab. 2, 6

'n^nj?; Ps. 74, 9 ncny.On and if not, 2 Sam. 13, 26. 2 Ki.
5, 17, see { 159.^4/.

Rem. I. To the elm of Incomplete tenteoces natnmlly belong exdsmatioitt d
introdiioed by intetjections ^^^^^^ *in, Dn ' ; comp. % 105. The object of the
threat or in^rteation (with ^)|t) follows regularly (except Eiek. 14, 6. 9) with b
(comp. vae tibt), e.g. vh îK tvae v*t'o us! i Sam.4, 8. Is. 6, 5 ; on the other hand,
the object of commiseration (with VI) follows mostly in the vocative, or rather in the
accTi?5ntive of exclamation (comp. vaf ff in PlnntusV so in ]nm t tation for the dead,
^mt alas, m/brgthert. 1 Ki. 13, 3a Jer. 22, i8i KOh ^3 ahsittf$tlttatioH!
' We do not consider here the cases in which these interjections (e. g. On
Jud. 3, 19. Amo 6, xo) stand quite disconnectedly (10 nlways n|t and ni^n).
Digitized by Google
496 The Sentence. [ 148.
Is. X, 4. 5, 8. It. 18. 10. aa, (witli Jcr. 48* x ; ^ 50, a?. Ezek. 13, 3;
^ Ezek. 13, 18). ;:|n|| occur* in the expRMioo (rnn^) rrtrp^ RnK Jofl^ 7, 7,ftc
(10 tines); nd in Of*^ nr.K o/ox yir /4 4riStf / Joel i, x$. For OH
3, ao. Zeph. x, 7. Zedi. a 17 absolntelx, Jnd. 3, 19. Am. 6, xo. 8,3.
a. Finallff instances of noun- clenaes shortened in an unusual manner maj pethapa
OCCDT b Dnn^ and OiT^^l Ps. 1x5, 7, for XS^ tktgf ham kamtU, See. ; compw
veiaes 5 and 6 Dnb^d, 8ic Pcrhapt atso iB^^M Gen. aa 24, and i4>ni
Eccles. 5, 16 (bnt baidly OJIf39 Nam. xa, 6; cf. { ia8. d above) axo to be
refunded in the same way.
n. Spjsoial Kinds of Sentenoea^
148. JSxclamaiions.
a The originally interrogative is used to introduce exclamations

expressing wonder or indignation =O howt or ridicule, why I hcmt
sometimes strengthened by nt or HXt according to 136. c. Astonish-
ment or indignation at something which has happened is introduced
by how (likewise originally interrogative) with the perfect; the
indignant refusal of a demand by (but also by no Job 31, i)
with the imperfect; an exclamation of lamentation by na^, less

frequently hmo I in Joel x, t8 by rqp.
JSxampIes:
b HD (or Tip widk a foUowiog Dagei, see 37) expressing admifition (or astonish-
ment) before verbaUcUnses, e.g. Gen. 37, ao (HfTip); 38, 39. Num. 34, 5 {km
goodly an...f)i C$aL
before the predicate of noon-claoses, e.g. Gen. 38, 17.
7, a ;
Fs. 8 a; mockingly before the verb^ a Sam. 6, ao (Jkow gtmom was ,,./); Jer.
2i, 33. Job 36, 3 sq.; Indignantly, Gen. 3, 13 nt^TTIO; 4, xo. ao, 9, 3X, a6 wUt
hast thou done !
!J*X with the perfect, e.g. Gen. 36, 9. Ps. 73, 19; in scornful exclaniatioa,
Is. 14, 4. 12 ; in a lament fnsnnl!y HD^K), 3 Sam. i, 35. 37 ; with the imperfect,
in a reproachful question, Gen. 39, 9. 44, 8. Ts. II, I. 137, 4; in a marking
imitation of lament. Mic. 3, 4.
HD^tC with the perfect, Is. i, 11. Lam. 1,1; with the imperfect, Lara, a, i. 4, i.
C Rem. T. The close relation between a question and an exclamation appears also
in the interrogative personal pronoun ^ in such cases as Mic. 7, 18 tjlOS Hc"^
ivho a Uod iiU unto tlue? and so 111 general in rhetorical questions as the
ts
expression of a forcible denial ; similarly in the use of an bterrogative sentence to

express a wish, see I X5i.a.
4I a. A weaker form of ezelamatioa Is sometimes prodnced by the insertioa of

n conobomtive ^ vmfy, sitnfy, before the predicate. Gen. x8, ao
; comp. 33, ix.
Is. 7, 9, and the analogous cases in the apodcaes of oonditiooat lentcnoci^

|i59.M.
Digitized by Google
X4j^] Sentences which express an Oath, etc, 497
$ 148. Sentences which express an Oath or Asseveration,
The particle OV^, in the sense oXctrhinfy mt, and t^^Mt (rarely ^ a
Gen. S2, 16) in the sense of ctrfainfyf are used to introduce promises
or threats confirmed by an oath (especially after such formulae as

rrtrr^n, ^C'W'^n*, ^n, ^rilfSC'a ^2, &c., as well as after imprecations,
see below), and also simple asseverations, e.g. 2 Sam, 20, 20. Job 27, 5
after ^ /rom nu, but mostl/ without any iutroductory
formula.
Rem* No eerttb espUaataoii of tbeie pttieles hat yet been given. Aceotdl^ ^
to the nsnal view, pbtaset expressing an oath depend on the suppression of an
ini]'rrcitton apon oneseU e. p^. //if / orJ Jo so uttto me, if / do if equiv alent to
T certain ly 'vill not do it ; then naturally N^'DX properly if 1 do 1! not equivalent

to/ certainly will do ii. It is indeed UillicuU to understand such scii- imprecations
spoken by Yahweh, as to Deut i, 34 aq. li,. 14, 34. aa, 14. Jer. aa, 6. zek. 3, 6.
35, 6. Ps. 95, XI. Pooihlji however, the comdonsaess of the reml metnlng of the
fonnnU was lost at an early period, and t6ÎC simply came to eiqîess verify^
DM fwrs!^ Maf.bi i Sam. s$, as, where, instead of a selfimprecation, a cnrse
te pRmonnoed npoo othcn, read with the LXX for ITl Îjk^.
Examples:
() The paitides DM and tfr*DK nsed after the ntteranoe of an oath and after C
fbfmnlae of swearing, e.g. s Sam. ix, zi (see note on letter ) ^:^D3 ^ni rnn^~^n
rs^ lanrrri^ nb^N-DK r th* Itrd liveth, md at thy sptU livii, I tktt mt eh
this tkimg; t Sam. 14, 45. s KL 5, 16 (after n}rT> ^n; in i Sam. 14, $9 and s8, tf
'^n is followed by a simple ^9) ; Cant. 2, 7. 3, 5 (after ^Jnâfîl ladfun jmt) ;

comp. also Gen. 14, 25. 21, 2^ 26, 29; spoken by Yabweb, Dent, x, 34 sq. x Sam.
3, 14. Ps. 9$, It ; rimilariy fiiV'DK Gen. 24, 37 sq.; spoken by Yahweh, Is. 14, 34,
where Ni>~QK occurs first with the perfect in the sense of a prophetic perfect,
1 106. w, bnt in the parallel clause with the imperfect ; Jer. aa, 6 ; in Gen. 31, 52
the negative oath introduced by *3N"Dli<, nriK"Dt< is immediately afterwards
continued by tih with the imperfect. In Ezek. 34, 10 the threat introduced in
crse S hy N^^DN is, after a long parenthesis, resomed with ^MH.
{l>) and xb~DN after formulae nf cir>jn|r, c.f^. i Sam. ^, 17 ^^'"nb^l', nb <^
'Jl 131 'S'Sp inrn"DX C]p^^ nb] D^^>^^ God do so to thee, and more also! thou
shalt not hide anything from me, &c. ; comp. i Sam. 25, 22. On the other hand,
^5 introduces the facts sworn to, in I Sam. 14, 44. 1 Ki. 2, 23 (here with
a pcrfecO. and in 3 Sam. 3, 35 DK ^3 ; in i Snm. 15, 34 the precetling *3 is repeated
bcTore OK ; in 1 Sam. ao, 1 3 the purport of the asseveration i& repeated, leaner the
insertion of a conditional sentence) in the perfect cooseentiwt
^ Also combined iJf'U ^H) ninpn i Sam. so^ 3. 25, 26 the Lu^ Hoetky and m
f tt^ uul (i e. th^m) Uveti/ (Also in 2 Sam. xx, xx read Ttvrrm instead of the
impossible ^n). On VI and VI in tbeae nowi-clnnset (prapi Uvinif Is ihi Zsnl,
ftc), cf. S 93. M, note.
Digitiz^ by Google
498 The Sentence.
e (0 DM and m rimple pftrtklei of MKmtion, e. g. Jod. 5, 8 ntnnSK
'y\ np^J trt^f tktn was mi a skidd mtd spear sem, fte. ; Ii. aa, 14. Job 6, s8
(in die middle of the tentenoe) ; after n^J>n ahsit^ twice repeated, a Sam. ao, to
Vt^TDK with the perfect. Job as, ao.
$160 InUrrogalroe SmUmctt,

a 1. A question need not necessarily be introduced by a special
interrogative pronoun or adverb. Freqnently the natural emphasis
upon the words (especially when the moit emphatic word is placed
at the begiiuiing of the sentence) is of itself sofikient to indicate an
interrogative sentence as snch; corop. Gen. 27, S4 l^T nr nn|
ihw ari my sm Esau? Gen. 18, is. Ex. 33, 14 ('^ ^^6); r Sam.
Saul shall reign cnnr us? i Sam. 22. 7.
2 Sam. 16, 17. 18, 29 "^yii* Di/'f ^^''^^'^ "îi^ ihe young man?
I Sam. 16, 4. I Ki. i, 34. Zech. 8, 6 {should it also be marvtUous in
mm eyes?). So especially, when the interrogative clause is connected

with a preceding sentence bj \, e.g. Jon. 4 1 1 wn^ t/h ^^mi and Iskmili
not have fily? Ex. 8, as wiU ikQf noi tUme us? Jod. 11, 93. 14, 16.
1 Sam. so, 9. 24, 20. 25, 11. 2 Sam. 11, it. Is. 37, 11. Jer. 25, 29.
4S> 5- 49 Esek. 20, 31. Job a, 10. 10, 9 ; or when (as in some
q[ ihc examples just gr cn) it is negative (with >6 for *<^n nonm?),
e.g. 2 Sam. 23, 5 n*p>*: t<i^3 veniy will he not make it to grow?
2 KL 5, a6. Lam. 3, 38
^ Rem. The omission of the interrogative particle (H ^ n) occurs espedallT before
a following gnttHrnl for the sake of euphony (comp. 126. ); thus bef< K Gen. .
18, 13. 27, 34. I Sam. 30, 8. I Ki. i, 34. 31, 7. Job 14, 3 (as Dan. 5, 13 in Aramaic);
before n, 1 Sam. 3a, 15. 3 Sam. 19, 33. Hab. 2, 19. Job 38, 18; before I Sam.
21, 16; before Gen. 19, la. Ex. 9, 17. Job 2,9; but comp. also Job 37, 18
and 39, 3 (before H); 40, 30 (before
C 2. As a rule, however, ihe simple question is introduced by He

interrogative 3(0; as to its form, cf. 100. k-rC) ne? mm? the
disjunctive question by n {num? utntm?) in the first clause, and DK

(alsoMn^ less frequently 1M) an? in the second*, e.g. i Ki. as, 15
?^n3' DM shaUwego . , or shaUwe forhear?
* Bnt in 1 San. 37, 10 instead of (which aooording to the nanal explanatioo

woold expect a native aoiwer) lead either *tri>K C^"^) ^tb the LXX or
better, }K (n|M) wkUhir^ with the Taiguni.
* Qoite exoeptioDal is die me of the particle pM moat (oohiiimni in Annaie)

hi I Sam. 31, 9 tihTB^ pK) mm esi lUef The' tent it, however, aodonbtedljr
Digitized by Google
fijio.] Inierrogaiive Sentences. 499
The particnlar uses are as follows :
(tf) The particle H stands primarily before the simple question, when the ques- d
tioner is wholly uncertain as to the answer to be expected, and may be used cither
befoie nonn-clanses, e. g. Gen. 43, 7 037 B'Vj D^ÎlH "T^Vn if your father
yet tUhtt Mmre jv aaotber brother f for comp. Geo. 34, 33, i Stm. 9, n ;
for ii it tiatr Job 6, 9^1 for "C^ ^3n iV /^tv jr/ j Sun. 9, i (but Id a Sam.
S3, 19 for ^sn read \in with i Chroo. fl, 15); for IImv ndt I KL aa, 7
and daewheile; or befbie verbal-cbuiieay e. g. Job a, 3 4m/ /iim tamuferul
0|ap ^^n) 0^ anmnt Jtht In other euet n (eqniTalcBt to numf) is used
liefoie qocsdonst to wliicbi ftom tkelr tone and contents, a negative answer is expected,
eg. Job 14, if a man dU, H^n^n shall he indeed live again? Sometimes
n question is so nscf^ nnlv as n rhetorical form instead of n negative assertion,
or ol a surprised or indij^nanl refu'^^nl *, e g. 2 Sam. 7, 5 *^n33n riPKH
shall thou build tire an house? ;in the parallel passage I Chron. 17, 4 '31 nriN ^
thou shall not. Sec); Gen. 4, 9 ^HN "Cb'n / my brother s keeper? comp.
a Ki. 5, 7, and the two passages where H is uêd before the infinitive {consfr Job
34, 18, ahsol. Job 40, 2 ;

comp. for both, 113. ee, with the note). On the oUier
hand| in i Ki. 16, 31 for i|2jn (after ^JJI) read S'pan.
Rem. I. A few pftssajKs deserve special mention, in which the use of the
interrogative is altogether difTerent from our idiom, since it Pervev merely to
express the conviction that the conteots of the statement are well known to the
bmer, and are unconditionally admitted by him. Thus, Gen. a;, 36 K*!^ ^fj
prop, is itM ikai mu mmesf ftc, equivalent to of a truth kt it rigktly mmtd
Jaaikt Gen. S9, 15 wrify thou art ugr h'lrtAtrj 1 Sam. a, a7 / did imdttdi ftc;
I KL aa, 3 Tir know jmrely . . . ; Job so, 4. In i Sam. 33, 19 (oomp^ PS. 54, a)
a suprialiig commonicatikm is introduced in this way (by in order to show
it to be absolutely tme, and in Amos 9, 7 a concession is expressed by

I hnv, it is true, &c Finally, we may include the formula of quotation K^H
n^TD Jos. 10, 1 3 or Dâ\n3 Dn"ii^n equivalent to surely it is, they are written
fthe latter in l Ki. 11,41. 14, 39, and very often elsewhere in llie Books of
Kings and Chronicles), synonymous with the simple formula of assertion H^VlI) nSH
3 Sam. I, 18, and 0^3^n^ 0|n i Ki. 14, 19. a Ki 15, 11. a Chron. a?, 7. 3a, 3a.
corropt; r^^c uHng to Wellhansen, Text der Biieher Sam., the LXX express the
reading Vhri rWf*]. The above does not apply to interrogative sentences introduced
by interrogative pronouns (| 2,7^ or hy the interrogative* compounded with

what? such as nD3 how many? HB^ why? (see | 102. k), JJI'^p u-hy? ( 99. e),
or by n*K where? T|*Xj HS^N hoiv? {% 148 , &c. On the transformation of pro-
nouns and adverbs into intezrogative words by means of a prefixed see the
Lexicon.
* On the use of the imêrfett in deliberative qnestions, see ^ 107. /; on the
so*called perfectum confidrntia* in interrogative aenlettoes, see ( 106. is.
^ Analogotts to this the ue ol die intenogative HD in the sense of a ireproadi-

fiil semonstrance instead of a prohibition, as Cant. 8, 4 TV^rrnp why shmM
jftr upf comp. also Job 3lt 1 ; see above, 1 148.
Ek2
Digitized by Google
50O The Sentence, [150.
Of my frequent occurrence also are qaettioM intndnoed hj HD^, whidi leoDf

eootdn en sSiraietion and are need to ttate the leaaon fora reqnert or warning, eg.
a San. a, as tmm tka tuidt . . wker^mr* MmiAI / smUe tkm U ikegrwmdt i.e
Hkarwui J will <cf mmi) md*^ ftc; cf. i Sanu 19, 17* and Driver 00 the pesMce;
s Chron, 25, 16 ; alio Gen. 37, 45. Ex. 3a, la (Joel a, 17. Fh. 79, 10. 115, t);
Cant I, 7. Eccles. 5, 5. 7, 17. Dan. i 10.
^ a. The rare cases in which a simple qnestion is introduced by (as sonactimes
in Latin hy an f is it}) are really due to the suppression of the first member of
a double question ; thus t Ki. t, 27. Is. k), 16. Toh 6, 12. .^^q, T t\.
^ {b) Disjunctive questions are, as a rule, introduced h) W^-i\ jtiyHM - attT) or
someliincs by DnV H, e. g. Joel i, 2. Job 21,4 (even with H repeated after OKI
in a question jwhich implies disbelief, Gen. 17, 17). In Job 34, 17. 40, Ssq.
Special emphsds hi given t fStut first member by ^|(n prop, sir it tomt The
second member is introduced by ^ b Job 16,
3. 3$, aS. 31. 36, in each case
befbve and hence no donbt for eophonie leaioos, to avoid the oomUnation
h Double qaestions with (DMl) DM-n need not always be rontoally exdnsive;
freqnently the disjunctive form serves (especially in poetic parallelism ; but comp.
also e. p. Gen. 37, merely to repeat the same question in dilTf rent words, and
thus to express :t nion' rmphattcally. So Job 4, 17 'fâH mortal man hr Just
be/are God I or (DN) ihali a man bt pure before kts AlaJceri Job 6, 5 sq. 8, 3.
10^ 4sq. II, 3. 7. 23, 3. Ii, 10, 15. Jer. 5, 39. The Second member may, theie-
foRb jnst as well be connected by a simple 1, e.g. Job 13, ^. 15, 7 sq. 38, 16 aq.
aa 3a. 39; comp. alio Ps. 8, 5 after TS^y Job at, 17 sq. alter noa; or even whh-
ottt a oonjnnction. Job 8, 11. aa, 4; after np Ps. 144, 3.

f (f) With regard to ituiirett questions' after verbs of inquiring, doabtiag^
examining', &c, simple qn^tions of this kind take either H wkttAer, Geiu 8, 8%
or Gen. 15. 5. 3 Ki. i, 2. Cant. 7, 13; even before a nonn-claase, Jer. 5, i
in I Sam. 20, 10 the indirect question is introduced by iKj, Lc. probably if per-
' DK\ occurs in Prov. 27, 24 after a negative statement; we should, howerer,
wah Dy&crinck read pM. Not less irrog\ilar is K^H instead of K^? DX m the
second clause of Jud. 14, 15, but the text can hardly be correct (comp. Moore,
Judges, New York, 1^5, p. 337); in i Sam. 33, Si the second n introdnces
a fresh que>tion which is only loosely connected with the fint.-În Nuaa. ty, a8
and in the third clause of J(^ 6, 13, DKTl it best taken with EwaU in the scnae
of i(ijn sbce DM from its nae in oaths (see above, | 149. ^) may simply mean
verify net.
' It should here be remarked that the distinction between direct and indirect
qaestions cannot have been lecognized by the Hebrew mind to the same extent
as it is iu or English. In Hebrew there is no diffcirncr iKtween the two
kinds of sentence, either as reganls mood (as in Latin) or in tense and position of
the words (as in Eaglish). Comp. aUo f 1 37. t,
la Gen. 43, 6 the H after Tin^ is enfiatocd from the fiict that the latler
according to the oooteat implies itgim ittftrmalim ttfrn a ftiesiiM,
* Also in Eccks. 3, ar we abonid read rfyjgn and JlinVj {wMJitrwAiii$r)
instead of the article which is asaamed by the Mason.
Digitized by Google
{i5i0 Desideraiive Sentences, 501
chance. In disjunctives {whether or) DN H Num. 1,^.18 n the end (or t^!j"CK
Gen. 14, ai. 27, ai. 37, aa. Ex. 16, 4), and H H Num. t3, 18, wliich is foUowefi
by DK n ; also ^N~n Eccles. 2, 19. The formula DN Vli'' has an a&rmative
force, who knenus ivh^lhsr . . . not, like the Iâtin nesrh an. Est. 4, 14.
In Jon. 1, 7 and b the relative pronouns and nK'H owing to the foiiowmi;; i'
have beocMne also interrogative, /or whose cause /

n| and Kin (comp. ( 136. c) immediately after the interrogative serve to /
ghre ividneii to tbe qoestioQ ; lo aUo M^fi^ (for lAMk f fiK five times in Job)
/Am, tmu, Gen. Kin K^fiK"^
37, 3.) f ^/ Jnd. 9, 38. Is. 19, i a. Job
i7i 15: ^ Wikr /Am is ..J Howem,
the end of tbe entire qaestion (Ex, 33, 16. It. 92, i ; also Hos. 13, 10, since citbcr
niaj aIm be placed at
^ is a diakcticil fotni of rr|^, or rWj^ should be lead Instead of it) or at tbe
bc^^tng of tbe question ptoper* after a strongly emphssiied word, ss in Gen.

7 37*-
(e) Sometimes one interrogative jjovems two co-ordinate cI.ittscs, the first t>f Wl
which should rather be subordinatetl to the second, so that the interrof.'.itive word
strictly s[)cakin;; affects only the secoiid ; thus Is. 5, 4 alter wherefore lo<>ked
I...and it brought forth, equivalent to, wherefore brought it forth, while I looked,
ftc; Is. 50, a after n Num. 33, 6. Jer. 8, 4, also Noflk 16, aa (read E^^MH) after
: ;
t6n Jos. as, ao; after ns^ It. 58, 3. a Chron. 3, 4* But n Job 4, a and fi6n
4^ SI are leparated from tbe verb to wbidt tbey belong by the Insertioik of a
fiondlliona] danie.
8. The affirmative answer is generally expressed, as in Latin, by //
repealing the emphaiic word in the question (or with the second
pcTbun changed to the first, Gen. 24, 58. 27, 24. 29, 5. Jud. 13, 11),
Gen 2f),6. 37, 32 sq. iSam. 23, 11. 26,17. i Ki. 21, 10. Jer. 37, 17.
(On if Hie so in the corrected text of 2 Ki. 10, 15, see 159 dd)
As 8 negative answer the simple ^ is sometimes sufficient^ as in
Gen. 19, 3 and elsevbere; comp. 152. c; and in Jud. 4, ao ibe

simple equivalent to or 9m. m m
f 151. Disidiraiwe Sen/mces,
A wiivh may be expressed not only by the simple imperfect (107. ). a

cohortative ( 108. especially with W 108. c), jussive 109;
with ^ 109.^),
imperative (110. rz), perfect consecutive 112. aa)
or by a simple noun-dause ({116. r, note, and 141. ^) but also in
tbe following ways:
* On the other hand, in Job 9, 34 and 34, 35 is not prefixed to the

bat appended to the conditional sentence.
Comp. the an.%logous sentences after j^^ decame. Is. 65, la. Jer. 35, 17 ; after
I ; likewiie after D| t ^53 die end
Digitized by Google
502 The Senience.
1 By eclamation8 la the form of iiUerrtgathfi dauaes ^ e.g. a Sam.
15, 4 }M 'JI^J"* who mMh me juigtf i e. O Ikai I wen made
judge! I Sam. 20f 10. 3 SanL 23, 15. Especially frequent is the use
of \^fr^. (prop. irA^? gives?) to introduce all kinds of desideralive
clauses (see letter 3). In Mai. i, 10 the desiderative clause proper
is co-ordinated with an inicrropâlive clause D^n^)*! I^p^ 032133 would
ihai one were among you and would siaU ihe doors^ i.e. O that one
would abut the doors 1
h Ren. Sometimet tlie ongiiiftl leue of jn^^D is ititt plainly diioeRublek e.^.
lent to, O thmt this people mn given into iny hnndl compu Fi. 55, 7. In tlm
examples, however, |ri^D is itiU equivalent to 0 had 1 1 and numerous otlier b
instances the idea of giving has entirely disappeared, iri^D having become
stereotyped as a mere desiderative particle (uttKam). The construction is either
(a) With the accusative (in accordance with its original meaning) of a substan*
tive, Deut. 38, 67 would that ii were even !morning! Jud. 9, 39. Ps. 14, 7
. . .
(53> 7)* 55> 7* an accusative and a following infinitivei Job ii. 5; ^tb two
iccoMtives,
% Smb. 19,
c i 135./) *
Num.
1 ^^nn
^
1 1,
^
29. Jer. 8, 23 ; with the aocuMtive of an fn6nitiTe Ex. 16, 5.
womid Oat I Ami died fir thee (for
e paxticlple, Job 3i> 35; of e pexaonal prauoun (aa a aiiffis)^ Job
^
19, a (with a fbUowii^ J; bat îgFI^^ ^
37, 4 and Jer. % i with k foUowii^
aceuatlTe ia not rimply equivalent to fAT^* ^^ P'^'pcily ^(''^ emdoms
mi triik, &c ; comp. ( 117.^. With a still greater weakening of the original
meaning fri^"^ is used with an adjective in Job 14, 4 couU a clean tiling Imt comf
out of an unclean ! !. c. h<nu can a clean thing come, &C} similaily in Job 31, 31
Vfko can find one tliat hath mt been satisfied!
C C^) With a following perfect.Job 33, 3 (comp. ( lao. f); with a perfect con-
lecndve. Dent. 5, a6 O that thty Aad stuh tm.WMti I
d () With a fbllowii^ impeifect, Job 6, %. 13, 5. 14* 13 ; Job 19, 33 b Cfae
imperfect is twice added with Wdw

(comp. letter a abofeb on VUL I, lo).
On the eohortative b the apodoaia to such deslderatlfe clanae% eompb f 108. /,
$ 2. The wish may also be expressed by the particles (Ps. 8i, 9.
95 7' i39i '9* Prov. 34, n. i Chron. 4, 10; always with a following
imperfect) and 'h (for which in Ps. 119, 5 we have î^nn, 2 Ki. 5, 3
from ah! and ''i'rs^^; both with a following imperfect)
A, 0 eil uHnam\ ^ ia followed by the impeifect, Gen. 17, tS.
The tranaition from a qneitioa to n wiah may be aeea* e*g. b Nun. 11,
'
m
who shattgtM Jlesh to eat? \.e.O that we had fiesk to eat I
^ Comp. n similar transition from a conditional to a desiderative particle, in
consequence of tiie suppression of the apodosis, in the English, O if J had'.

and the like; e.g. Num. 23, 39 if there were ^fB^* ^b; noord in my hand now
had [ surely killed thee !
Diqitized by Google
153.] Negative Sentences, 503
Job ; 6, 2 by the
Gen. go, 34 (rather concessive, equivalent
jussive,
vakttibeto); by the perfect, as the expression of a wish that BOinething

tnight have happened in past time (comp. { 106./), Num. 14, 2 vrip x>
would thai we had died; so^ 3 and Jos. 7, 7 (both times ; on
the other hand. Is. 48, 18 and 63, 19 (both tfroes M^) to express
a ^vibh thaL something expected in the future may already have
happened. On with the imperative (by an anacoluihon) Gen. 23, 13
comp. 1 10. e. On the periiect after ^9 Geo. 40, 14. 2 Ki. 5, 20,
comp. 106. , note a.
f IftS. Negative Senienca^

L Independent sentences are made negative bjr the adverbs t6 a
(job 6, St JT'/I. perhaps preserved as a substantive)sthe Greek o^, mi,
vVsthe Greek fi^ (Job S4, 25 as a substantive), \% (it is) not;
one not yet, DDK not^ 't?B|t (comp. 90. ni) not. The forms ^3,
not belong almost entirely to poetry. With regard ^ and to
Pf< the main disiinclion is that verbal-clauses (rarely noun-clauses, see
letter e) are regularly negatived by ^ (besides its use as negativing

single words \ while is used exclusively with noun-clauses (see the
eiamples below).
* Especially in compouuds, e.g. i^tOCb lit. a not-God TGerra. Ungott) who is
indeed called .1 god, but is anything but really a god, Dent. 33, 21 ;
verse 17, comp. Jer. 5. 7. 2 i hion. 13, 9; Oys!? lit. a not-ptpIe {Germ. Unvolk),
Deut. 32, 21 ; IZIT n'p a noihiiig, Amos 6, 13; 8 disorder^ Job 10, aa
Uarn!^ nat^titkmt, 16, 17; after b Job a6, asq. (r6~(<b, Xynf? helpletsmss,
ncsn ^ inîeiiiia)\ comp. alto Is. 55, a n^Sbb 1(1^3 wlM is unsatisfying!
Ps. 44, 13. Job 8, II* 15, 3a. I ChrM. la, 33. Nun. ao, 5 a conatniet Hate
with aeveial genttivaa it negntifcd tt alio mad with an infinitive,
Nam. 35, 13; with an adjcctiw, DSn \lh umwisi. Dent. 3a, ^ Hoib 13, 13;
TDrrîjl^F^43,i: and (MTpîMrj^^, 1^.30,35 sq.; fa-t6
umtduOfy, 1 Ki. 7, 9; ^tUCrU!? mtôod, la. 65, a. Ecdc ao^ 35, &&;
iM^^diaMi, a Chrott. 30* 17 ; with a participle, e. g, Jer. a, 3 (tmsawn) ; 6, 8. aak.
4f 14. aa, 34. Zcph. a, i. 3, 3 ; die Maaora, however, requiret n^pfio in la. 54, il
n^l^ in 6a, la, tP^f^ in Hoa. 1,

in Jer. 6, 8, L e. alwaya 3id aing.
fern. perf. in pause = sAe was mt comforted^
Sec, and consequently not componnds,
but either relative clauses or (Is. 5.^, xr. Hos. i, 6, and especially a, 35) main
clauses instead of
proper names. On the above compounds g'encrally, c the
dissermtion mentioned in & 81. note a ; on their tuc iu senteacxs expressing
natala, to oobtcj attribotivi ideait lea kttsriK bdow.

504 The Sentence, tJi5-
h The conjunctions *?i and ^jci^ ihai mi, serve to negative dependent
clauses. The particular uses of ihese panicles are as follows :
'(^"s k'? (less frrqir ntlv Kî?), like oh, ovKf is used regularly for the ebjective^
unconditional aegatioxj, and heace is usually connected wiih ihe perfect or impcr-
HBCt (fts indicadve); on li^ with fbft im|Mrliect to aqiicn an uomdltioiuil pio-
hibitioQ, tee f 107. ; oo its me with jnsure, see 109. <On l6 forftC^
nMMw, in iateirogative lentences, comp. 150. a. Li ooonexioa with "^3
Mr|')t (6 It med to express an ttkntuU negatioo, mtUm^ mm whatmr (comp.
the Ficnch im . . . pcrsomu^ . . . fiiM), imiallj In the order * t(7 eg.
Gen. 3, 1 fin fji ^to ^^3C<n ti!> ikMmt mt rfat^ tru rftk$gfdm; % 11.
Ex. 10, 15. ao, xo. Lev. 7, 33. Dent 8, 9. Jer. i3 7. 3a 17 O^V^S 16
miAii^ r Zf / comp. the sane statement In a Aetorieal qneition, Jer. 3a, ay);
Frov. IS, SI, 30, 30 ^b^Hflp ttfy nd timieth mtt away //r tu^; 2 Cbiwk
38, 15; hotcomp. alao the inverted order, Ex. la, 16 TtB'ifplh rOttSurbs m
maimer vf work shall be done ; la, 43. 15, 26. 32. 21. Lev. 16, 17. Job 35, 13.
Dan IX, 37. The meaning is different when by being determinate is used
in the sense of wMi, e. g. Num. 13 ti? iko tkmt shaii net m thtm ctf,
hat only a part.

Analojjous to 73 is the as^' of N'S , , . Gen. 23, 6 and elsewhere^
in verbal-clauses in the sense oi no one li! aii, not a single one.
Rem. i. The examples in which is used absolutely as a native answer,

equivalent to ttrtahUy wot! ml most l>e legaxded as cxtremclv short verhal-
daoaes* e.g; Gen. 19, 2 \^ according to the eootest for ItoS ftc); 23, ix.
42, 10. Hag. a, xa. Job 23, 6, tometimea with a following butt Gen. X9, a (see
above); Joa. 5, 14. x Kl. 3, aa.
^ a. Tlie negation of iMMi*danses by 1^ (aa opposed to the icgatar iM^tion by
}^ ahrajt hidadcs a certain empbasb, amee tlw force of the ncgatioQ fidls latber
npon a particnlar word (comp. e. g. Ezelc. 36, 33), than npon the whole danae.
In 2 Sara. 3, 34 Dll^DKI^^ ^^T tky hands were mt hound, a participle is thus
specially negatived by t^^} ; cf. Ps. 74, 9, where, however, is leparated from the
participle by vriK, and Job 12, 3. As a mle, nono-daases with a proooffiinal
subject are thus negatived by Gen. 20, 12. Num. 35, 23 Deut. 4, 42. 19, 4);
I Sam. 15, 39. 2 Sam. 21, 7. Jer. 4, 22. Ps. 22, 7. Job 28, 14. parallel with pX
L;! n< lallv with ^ before a substantival predicate, e.g. Ex. 4, 10 D^")2*n vh
'JilS / am mt a man of words ; Amos 5, 18, Nonn-clau&cs with a subslauiival
subject, Gen. 29, 7. Nam. 23, 19. Is. aa, a. 44, 19. Hag. i, 2. Ps. aa, 3. Job 9, 3a.
x8, 17. ai, 9. 32, 16. 36, 26 (with 1 of the apodosis); 41, 2; in Job 9, 33 even
gn tC7 MMi atf is used instead of pK.-În Ywf, i8 5 before an adieo*
tlval predicate; in i Sam. ao^ a6 (where a pieeedbg nonn<clause is aegatlvdl
by ^â) lead LXX, fofllnDli^. On t6 for Pl^ In dxauf
-)rib lib with the
ttantial clauses to express attribotive ideas, see letter u below.
i 3. As a mie ifo stands innaediatcly before the verb, bat sometimes is seponted
from it (frequently to bring Into speeial prominence another word which follows
it) ; thus Job 22, 7. Eccles. 10, 10 before the object and verb; Num. 16, 29 before
the sabject and verb; Dent. 9i 9> * Sam. 3, 34. P& 49, 18. 103, xo. Job 13, x4.
Digitized by Google
figaO Negative Seniemes. 595
34, 33, before a complementary adjunct. In Deut. 32. 5 according to the

accentuation even stands at the end of the clause {they offend him not)\ but
undoubtedly 0*33 Nt? are to be takeu together. On the pMitioo of \lh with the
infinitive absolute, see 113. t/.
(^)
ind hence cqiednlly
is
ia
1*^
oonaodon with the junive
express a subjective and condi/iamai nqpttioo,
109. r and e) to introdooe
y
prohlbitiona, waniiiigi oegattfe desite^ and leqoests. On with the impeiliect
see 1 107./; on a Ki. 6, 27, see 1 109. k.
Rem. I. "Îfl (like fiCî sm letters, note, above) may be used to fonn a com- g
ponnd wordf as in ProT. 28 niD'^K ntt-death (immortality); thongh all the
early versions read The instances in which appears to stand
absolutely, equivalent to no, certainly not (like /o^ for /i^ ylvrircu), e. g. Ruth i, 1
^riba ^tC nay, my daughters, and Gen. 19, 18. 33, 10 are also due (see
letter <) to extreme >hortening of a full clause (in a Sam. 13, 25 such a clause ia
repeated immediately afterwards); thus in a Sam. 1, 21. Is. 63, a. Ps. 83, 3 NT
is evidently 10 be supplied, and in Joel 3, 13. Amos 5, 14. Prov. 8, 10 the
corresponding jussive from the preceding imperatives (in Prov. 17, 1 3 from the
praoeding infinitive abaolnte).
a. "^1, like (6, regularly staoda immediately before the verb, but Ui Is. 64, 8. k
Jer, 10^ 14. 15, 25. 6, a. 38* a befofe another stronglj emphasiud member of
thetentence^
(0 }^ oonttnict atate (mileia it be sometimes merely a oontiacfted fbim, cf. i

tl^ for 0^90 of mt'ktu^ (aa also the abaolnte state, see below) is the
negative of Anatf; oomp., Ux example Gen. 31, 39 with N<h. 5 5. As

{he, she, it is^ teas, &c.) includes the idea of Uimg^ in all tense% BO p|jt, pK
includes the idea of not being in all tenses. Hence
(1) The absolute state pjt, with an evident transition to the meaning of a A'
verbal predicate, there does not exist, always follows the word negatived, e.g.
!* 37> 3 19, 3) iTlSl) Hb^ atui strength aoa not fu/jV to bring Jorlh;
Gen. 2, 5 ptt was not present ; Ex. 17,7 p.>;"D4< or is he not? after is he . . .1
(cfc Num. 13, 20J ; Lev. a6, 37. Num. ao, 5. Jnd. 4, ao {])^ no). In i Sam. 9, 4
and 10, 14 is nscd in reference to a plnral; 1 Ki 18, 10. Is. 41, 17. 45, ai.
59* II. Mic. 7, a. Prov. 13, 4. 35, 14. Job 3, 9 amd Ut tken it Htm, ia
nme tome! (comp. Pror. 5.17); Ecdes. 3, 19. Also oomp. finally H^nOM îiU
mt^99t Gen. 30f 1. Ex. 5a, 3a. Jnd. 9, 15. a KL a, le.^ôite anomaloos is )^ Job
35, 15 before a perfect aa an emphatic negatioa ; the text, however, can hardly
be correct
(2) The construct state f|t stands in ita natmal position immediately before /
the substantive whose non-existence it predicates, or before the subject of the
sentence which is to be negatived. To the former class belong also the very
numerous instances in which pX is joined to a participle, e.g. 1 Sam. 26, la
r??! yi^^ '"^^^ there was not one seeing, &c, i. e. and no man
* In Jtr. 51, 3 the pointincf 'PS occurs twice instead of "^K. and is thus, in the
opiniou of the Masoretcs, cqmvaicut to against htm that bendeth; bat uadoublediy
we should read '*b((<
*
Digitized by Google
The Sentence.
sata it, wr knew d, neither did any atixike ; o especmlly ptO \vi'h a participle
in subordinate urcumsianiiai or descripiive clauses, sucii aa Is. 5, 29 D*i>fi!l
pH^ and he shall carry it away, while there is none delivering, i. e. xvUktmt
at^ 9n^s delivering it; Pk. 7, 3, &c; Lev. a6, 6 and diewlieiai T'VUJ ptO
witkmtt any one's snaking you afraid; comp. 1 41 . is mad as the ne^tioo of
an andre Donn-clanaet e.g. Gm. 39, 23. Nam. 14, 4a D3Illi>2 rriil^ ikslMsd
is mi amsstgymsi Geo, 37, 39 nl3a *)Di^f K ^7^^^ tew nistitsAe pU,
1H (3) Whan tliasabjeet whicliistobeiiagatitad iaapenondproi^^
as a stiffis to aooordbgto i ioow, a. g. Mafi taax imT^ sJlaU meiie;
'^TH , fen. /Am tfrf im/, tt}^, fern. n|}^ ilr, îb is met, frc; also
abaolateljr. Gen. 4s, i^Hgis (5, 94 lis teas) m longer oAmr; 03^ /i^ ar/ naf,
4bc. When tiie aoeompaDying piadicata is a mb it foU<mi again (ice letter/) in
tlie liMai of n participle, sinoe ft^ always introdnoss % nonn-^niae e. g. Eiu 5, 10

|{^ Itsiiimsigivts 8, Dent 1, 3a.
n Rem. In
tiivee
Nek 4, 17
otlier (sabstantival) snlgeets;
^ |^ for is doe to its being oo-ofdioate witli
theM are apin espiessly sanuned op in

^)naM"PK.In Hag. s, 17 DOTI^ tbe pronominal complement of f|( appears
to follow with the dgn of tlie aooMatlva^; but moat probably we sboold read witli
the LXX D3aiS^

V IK
for DSTIM.
VV t
O (4) Tha fact that f^ (like )^) always indndea the idea of a mb {is msi, mu
net, Sec) led finally to each a predominance of tlie verbal element, that tlie
original character of as n oonitract stale (but of. lettr i above) was forgotten,
and accordingly it is very freqaently separated from its noun (substantive or

participle); especially so by the insertion of shorter words (of tbe nature of
enclitics), e.g. 13 Is. i, 6, if) Lev. 11, 10. 12, Gen. 11, 30, D3 Ps. 14, 3.
Jud. 18, 10. Ex. la, 30; but comp. also Ps. 5, 10. 6, 6. 32, 2, and pti used
absolutely in Ex. 33, 3. I Ki. 8, 9. Ruth 4, 4. Hence, finally, the transposition
of and its noun was even possible, e.g. Getu 40, S and 41, 15 irif< psf "VT^^
omf iJkere is none that can interpret it j Gen. 47, 13. Jud. 14, 6. 1 Sam. 21, a. Is.
1,30. Jer. 30, 13. Hab. a, 19. Pkov. 5, 17 - iWBir sinig comp. letter M
above, on Job 3, 9); 30, sy. In Gen. 19, 31, Ex. 3, 16 pK is pUoed between
(he snigect and predicate.
/ Rem. t. Like , . 16 or if b * ^ (aee letter S abofo) so also

eapreiiei an ofoaAtfr negation, a.g. Eodea. i,9Chrr!o iMss is lie new tkisigt
ftc; Dan. 1, 4 (oomp. alio H^KD \% tkens is mikiiig, i Ki. tS, 43. Eocka.
5, 13) ; as also }^ *!l9 Hab. s, }^ iMtD Jnd. 14, 6.

19; oomp.
q a. Undoabtedly akin to p|C in origut native Ûable ^ oocnnhig in
is die
the two componnds *llQJ (aa a proper name, i Sam.4 ai ; &cr liaanil ) and
not itmceenii Job aa, 30; bat the proper name donbtftd, and
the iiem. Jx^W nxy doobtftiL In Etliiopic this ^ is the most common Ibim of
oqiation, prefixed even to verlia.
* According to Da Lagarde, Nevae jpuUferU graed ediiiaisis ttfedmsmg p. a6,
nf^JV^ 3, 3 is alio an accaaative after
Digitized by Google
f 159.] Negative Sentences. 507
(tf) Q^p 7io! yely when referrin to past time is used, as a rale ( 107. r), with f
the imperfect, Gen. 2, 5 D^t2 . . . i?3 tiotu . . . ye( ; see letters b and / above;
Gen. 19, 4. 34, 45. Jos. 3, 8. i Sam. 3, 5 ; with the imperfect in the sense of
a present, Ex. 10, 7 yiTI O'^Cn knovotst thou not yeti Ex. 9, 30.
(0 DSK (prop, a snbitaDtive, eissoHm) hngtr. Including the toImI idea s m
oi sxistittg-f comp. Dent. 33, 56. Is. 45, 6. 14. 46, 9 ; wed abaoliitdy, Amos 6, 10
used mteniQKiliTely " ^ ' 9> 3 ! frequently
alM in the leaie of mm nisij with ^_ peiigogic (| 90. ) ^pfi^ It. 47i 8. 10.
(/).>3S m poetic and piophetie style, sod with a oertnla cnphaaii^*lC!>, is /

ued with the imperfect, e.g. Is. a<i 14. $3, aa 33 (tmoaediately afterwards with
a perfect); Hos. 7, a. Pb. 49, 13- Pôv. 10, 30 (but Is. 14, ai befoie the jusiw,
equivalent to 'b^)', before an adjective, Prov. 34, 33.
() **^2l with a perfect, Gen. 31, 30. Is. 14, 6 ; with an imperfect, Job 41, 18 ; to
negative a participle, Hos. 7, 8. Ps. 19, 4 ; to nef^fttive an adjective, 2 Sam. i, 31.
{A) 'nSs to ne^âtive an nf^jtctive, i Sam. 20, 26; on ^J^h^ Ezek. 13, 3, see
letter jr; on ihc le^L'i.h^r ni'griiivc with the iohnitivc coostnicty see
i 1x4. s; on ^nÎlb as a conjunction, see letter x Ulow.

On DN a-i -i ncQitive particle in oaths {verily noi), see 149. r above.
Rem. on K^, To the c.itq;;ory of negative sentences be!nnf^^ also the 1^
expression of negative attributes by Hieans of "hn not (both so used almost

excltisivcly in poetic language) or pX with a following substantive, mostly in
the simplest form of circumstantial clause, e.g. 2 Sam. 23, 4 TsSlV {^b lp3 a morn'
ing when there are not cwuui, i. c. a cloudless morning; comp. Job 12, 24. 26; 2 6.
38, 26 (t'ÎTHij where no man is, i.e. uninhabited) \ I Chron. 2, 30. 32 C::!
childless; so also ^^3 e.g. Job 34, 10 and pjt e.g. Ps. 88, 5 / am as a man
V|rptt tAnv is not helPi i.e. lik$ a htlpless man; It. 47, i. Hot, 7, 11 ; "tBDD'pM
tMmtieUt Cant 5, 8,ftC| hnt osnally (Fa. 104, 35, Ace) lilce a proper drcunstantial
cfamse (eomp. f 141. #) connected by fVSm, "^BDO'pKJ. Less fieqtiwntly sndi
peiiphiases take the iatm of idafive cHanses (comp. | 155. e.g. Job 30, 13
fO^ Igr t6 they far wkm ikin it m
Ai^, i.e Oi Mpim (but probably Hjf
is only en Intrasion from 39, la, and we should read wHkmU a$vf mit
restraining tkiae* in 39, 1 3 translate the fatherless and him that had mne to help
him; in Ps. 72, 13 'IT^KI is used in the same sense); Hab. i, 14; with pNI
h. 45, 9 ihy work is that bf a man who hath no hands; Zech. g, 11 otti tka
waterless pit *.
How far such compounds finally came to be regarded by the language simply V
as negative adjectives, may be seen (>artly from the iiact that they âsalao icktive
clanaes anaktgooa to -the abewt) are fipe^pni^y oosMrdioated wldi real adjectives,
Joel JI tf. Fa. 7a, xa. Job 29, xa; oomp, also Is. 59, xo, when 0â^pK3 is
^ fidentily from ^ luasit tnvt^f from which stem also "bz and nâ (wiMoee
1 90. m), originally snbstantive^ axe Ibnned, ^
* In PXov.9, 13 (perhaps also X4, 7; bnt see Delitssch on the pasmge) a mbel*
way as a periphxasis lor aaadjectiTe.
Digitized by Google
5o8 The Sentence. [{15s*
parallel with D^")^V3 ;

partly from their bcinfj introduced by tlic si<;Q of tbc
dative i>, e.g. Is. 40, 29 ^^^^ and to the pivt'>less)\ Job a6, 3. 3. Neb, 8, la
W (0 "fS ^^^^y ^^'^^ ftt beginning of a clause expressing a fear or prccaQlion,

hence esix-cially after sach ideas as fcaritjg^ Gen. î, 12 and elsewhere (comp.
^'iliu njj, vercor <:), taking hccd^ frequently after "^CB^^ TnDl^n Gen. 34, 6. 31, 24
and elsewhere, taking care, 2 Ki. 10, 33, &c. Xot mlrcqucntly the idea ou
which 'JQ depends, is only virtually contained in the main claase, e. g. Gen. 19, 19
lmHâap$ t9 th* mmuUain (became I am ifisid), nyin ^jgsnn'ja Ua stmt
mt; Gen. 26, 9. 38, 11 ; alio in Gen. 44, 34 from tbe xbeloricil
qnesdon Jktm skaO /. . ,t we most ondenUnd /formtif goTeraisg Thk h
especiallj llie caie tfter an appeal to do or not to do an action by wbieb aonie*
thing may be pierented (in wUob case "jB is simply equivalent to the final m)i
comp. e.g. Gen. 11,4. 19, 15. Nnm. ao, 18 (where "}B UH is sepanted from
the verb by a strongly emphasized snbstantive) ; Jud. 15, 12 after stacar unio me:
Prov. 24, 18. In Gen. 3* 22 and now, lest he put forth his hand, Sec, "fB is to
k regarded as virtually dependent on a cohortative, which immediately afterwards

(verse 23) is changed into an historic lenst- ; cl. aUo Gen. 26, 7. 31, 31. 43. 4. Ex.
13, 17. I Sam. 13, 19. 27, II. I's. 38, 17, iu every case alter 'FIIDfit "^DH *3
ficc. = I thought, &.C., I must beware lest, &c.
Rem. According to 107. tj, ~|Q is naturally followed bv the imperfect (or
jussive;; for the exceptions, a Sam. 30, 6. 2 Ki. 2, i6, see io>.y, note 3; comp.,
moreover, a Ki. 10, 33 n3*C^^~;| lo<fk Ust thtrt ti ktrtt 9k.
X the impoiect, Ex. ao aa 1 Sam.
{b)
23. 14
^nba
^
^^^^^
is a
-
the infinitive
relative clause
for
governed by
in ay, 8 ^fT for
14, 14 (in Jer.
In Eaek. 13, 3
ottording to things whidi tkigr hmt
|>
y 2. Two nciiâtives in the same sentence do not neutralize each

other (as in nonnulli, non nemo), but malce the negation the more
emphatic (like oIk ohhtU, oU o^dn/ivr, nti/h non, nemo non); e.g.
I KL 10, 21 rro^ôh . . a^nj sOoer was accounted as
nothing at aU (in a Chron. 9, 20 without ^^); Zeph. 9> 2 (if the text
is correct) Kbp(^ t))fia Be/ore there shall (not) come. This especially
applies to the compounds formed by the union of or with
TP withoul ( 1 19. J'), e.g. Is. 5, 9 (6, 11) 3^^' P?*? (for which in
Jer. 2, 15 SK'* *5*3P), prop, ivifhou/ no inhalntant, i.e. so that no
inhabilant is left ifurt. On the other hand, in Is. 50, 2
the 'TO is causative, because there is no water; as also in Ex. 14. 11
'T^ ^r'i^Pi] is it becaute there were w . . ./ s Ki. i, 3. 6. 16. In Ecdes.
3* II "f^ except thai iyet so the^ man cannot, Ac).

M 3* The negative sometiines extends its influence from the first
to a second negative sentence parallel with it (which may or may not
Digitized by Google
154] Sentences connected by Wdw. 509
have Wait))', e.g. i Sam. 2, 3 talk not so much arrogancy; let (not)
boasting come out of your mouth; Ex. 28, 43. Lev. 19, 12. 22, 9.
15 sq. Num. 16, 14. 23, 19. Deut. 7, 25. Is. 23, 4. 28, 27. 38, 18.
47, 14. Ezek. 16, 47. Ps. 9, 19. 13, 5. 35, 19. 38, 2. 44, 19. 75, 6.
Job 28, 17 (so ^ n^b why ... not ? in Job 3, 11 also affects the
parallel clause).
163. /Restrictive and Intensive Clauses. %
The particles PI only^ serve to introduce restrictive clauses,
and 33, also, besides, even, intensive clauses. It is to be observed,
that the force of these particles does not necessarily affect the word
which immediately follows (as is the case with Gen. 7, 23. 34, 15
PI Gen. 6, 5. Amos 3, 2; even p"]n hath he indeed only? Num. 12, 2;

D| Gen. 27, 34. Job 7, 11; Deut. 15, 17), but very frequently
extends to the whole of the following sentence. Thus with e.g.
Num. 14, 9. 1 Ki. 17, 13. Prov. 17, 11. Job 13, 15. 14, 22. 16, 7. 23,6
P^ Gen. 20, II. 24, 8. Ps. 32, 6. Prov. 13, 10; D2 Gen. 27, 33.
32, 21 (nan Oa); i Sam. 22, 7. 28, 20. Zech. 9, 11. Prov. 17, 26.
20, II ; Job 14, 3. 15, 4. In Mai. i, 10 and Job 2, 10 D3 is
placed before two co-ordinate sentences, although, strictly speaking,

it applies only to the second. Comp. the analogous examples
in 1 50. m.
154. Sentences connected by Wdw.

Waw copulativum^ (]) serves to connect together two or more n
sentences, or single words (on its vaiious vocalization, cf. 104. d-g\
' For further particnlare of the use of waw copulaiivum, sec Gesenins' Thesaun*s,
i.
393 sqq. On its use id the co-ordination of similar tenses and moods (e. g. five
imperfects consecutive in Gen. 35, 34, five perfects with DiV^ as well as of dissimilar
ten<es and moods, the remarks made in the treatment of the tenses will suffice.
With regard to the interconnexion of single nounf by \

(which strictly speaking
is always really a contraction of so many clauses into a single scDtence) the follow*
ing observations may be made :
(a) Contrary to Enj;lish usage, which in lengthy enumerations uses the attd
to connect only the last member of the series, in Hebrew polysyndeton customary,
as in Gen. 12, 16 waw copulativum six times, 34, 35 seven times, 15, 19 sqq. nine
times, and in Jos. 7. 34 ten times. Sometimes, however, only the last two words
are joined (so in a series of three members, Gen. 5, 32. 10, i. 11, 26. 13, 2. 14, 1.
30, 39, &c. ; the last three out of a series of four. Jer. 2, 26): less frequently only
the first two, I's. 45, 9; cf. 13 2. d. The formtt|ft'.C'^w' hS'CT) yesterday (and)
th^ day be/ore yesterday, I^x.^^^^HmImB^' ^îfi}'^ without the copula.
5IO The Senience, [Jisi-
Its use, however, is by no means restricted merely to joining together

sentences which are actually co-ordinate. Frequently the language
employs merely the simple connezioii by Waew, even to introduce an

Job 6| s$, and veiy frequently
antithesis (Gen. 17, s 1. 19, 19. Lev. a, 13.
in drcnmstantial nomi-danses), or when one of the two daiises is

not co-ordinated* but subordinated to the other. On the nse of ) to
introduce cfrcmnstantiftl clauses, cf. especially 141. r and 142. d;

introducing causal clauses, 158. (J; comparative clauses, 161. <7/
final clauses, 165. ay consecutive clauses, 166- a. On wau?

apodosis^ comp. 143. </, and the sections there cited ; on the use
of Wdw in numerical sayings^ comp. { 134.4;
On the other band, the cmsirmtif aMjmddoi in leriei cf cri>t it used ai a

ilietoiical cipcdicBt to pndiioe a hmried and to aa iaapatMcned dectiptioo ; eg.
Jod. 5, 9f ai Air fui kt ittvtd, kt fitt, ki Uî Si. 15, 9. t Sam. 15, 6. Jcr. 4, 7.
Amot 5, ti. Ft. 14, 1. Job ao^ 19. a8, 4. tj^ 8. Cant a, 11. 5, &
(5) Ffaqncntly wdm copulativum is also explanaitiy Qike isqutt ttûidem, and
the German und z-far, Fn^^lish 7mf), and is then called wdw expluativum, e.
Geo. 4, 4 and (i.e. namely) of the fat therctf ; Ex. 24, 13. 25, 12 {to '^vit two);
37, 14. a8, 33. I Sam. 17, 54 and thai too with the Uar ; 2 Sam. 13, ao. Is. 57, ii.
Jer. 1 7, 10. Amot 3, IX. 4, la Zech. 9, 9. Prov. 3, la. Nch. 8, 13. a Cbnm. 23, 10
(but in T SaxL a8, 3 the bcTore it to be oodtled with die LXX); cL aho
andioombiimdonaaa "?yi |p>9vNi . ..m#<twM . Gen. 13,3. 14,33. 19^4.

it, 3ccJu X Sun, 6, xi (tee Diiver on the passage), a San. t, as, 1 it
eqniiralcnt to jm, and; in la. 3a 7 mm; i Ki i, ai. Job 6 14 aba.) ia mad

to eipiett emphaiit amdapedalfy), ef. in Gen. 3, x$ b a, 1. x8, i,
perimpa alto in Job 10^ 17 ytm, 0 whole Most; a Chfon. 1^ X4Ân ondonbled
cxampk of what ia called ww eMamiiaitiia oocm in Job 41, ta steHtit^ptt
fOfS^ tnih burning rushst; cf. Ex. 10, 10 {with your tUtlt awcr), ta, 8. Lev. i, la.
It. 4a, 5. In Axmbic tbia wSw concom, it followed by the accusative. it wed is
the sense of both and in Ft, 76, 7, Din. i, $. 6, 13. On )1 aa ncaiiiii^

sive, comp. 5 163. b.
{e) See the I-exicon on adverbs used in n ropalati%'e sense, such as D3 aho^
moreover, ramming up a number, c, p D'":^"L3a both toother, Gen. 27, 45. Prov.
J7 '51 ^b'DI (ill tos;ether ; as an intensive and, t.^. Gen. 30, 8. 37, 7. I Sam.
30, 8; comp. also such exami U^ as 1 Sam. 24, la ^te. y<a sec! D3 D| or D3l D3
Gen. 44 ^0/^ ami ; Da occurs three times id Gen. 34, 25 and 32, ao;
34, also
^K, which i geoerally still more intensive, in the sense of aho, in addition to thitf
tven, and bdongt father to poetry, and to the later language ; frequently alto
cquTalcnt to a mere ami/, hot tometioMa adveiaative hit nw. Pa. 44, 10 and
ebewheie; and *|^ (alao three tfanat lepeated), eqnifalent to Mk^-md;
oomp. 0| *||t1 Md
aawn, Le?. a6, 44$ ^9ri||t prop, ^dd t9 tkit lw /Jla#, eqaivaleat
tomett9 wtaOkm, aooordinK to tihe context eitlier fMON/a m^s or puuiio mm$n.
Digitized by Google
Relative Clauses. 5"
Rem. Sometimes waw copulativum joios a sentence apparently to what immed- b
lately preoedes,, bnt In icaUCy to a tentenoe iriiidi it rappieaed and whidi mut,
tfaoefofe, be rapplied from the eooiext. So ctpeciallj 1 widi impeiatives to
tMopttm vakKoeet, e.g. i Ki. 9, as î'Keh ask mow vathir; &ek. i6, 3a ferlhmt no
fkanm m tkg dttUk ^fkim that dktk . . vAtr^r* turn younôu,
Alao at the bepiming of a qieedii in looie conncxioD widi as act or speech
of aaoUier penoot e.g. Ex. 3, aa a Sam. 18, 11. 34, 3. a Ki. 4, 14. 41. 7, 13.
a Chron. 35, 9; comp. also Jos. 7, 7 (^!n>. Pa. a 10. 4, 4. Is. 8, 7. Sometimes
the suppression of the protasis is due to passionate excitement or hn'ste, which
does not allow itseli Utce as it were for the full ex]'ression of thi tljoiij^;lit ; this
is especially illustrated by Num. 12, 14. 20, 3 oSV). 1 Sain, to, i j, i ;,, 14. 32, 14.
38, 16. 2 Sam. iS, 12. 24, 3. r Ki. 2, 22 (msbl). 2 Ki. i, jo. 7, 19 (comp.
Verse a) ; Is. same time a circumstantial clause
3, 14. Zecb. a, 10. Fs. a, 6 (at the
wkinat / maud fit / iave, ftc.); comp. alao a new dauae bcguming with the
fomola of wiaUng ^
Nmn. ii, 39. Jnd. 9, 39; <n the diacoonectcd nae of
and cf. 1 159. dd
i 156. Jfeia/ofe Ckmus,

See V. Bavmaan, BkkHistko RdatiosSiu^ Leipzig, 1894 (cf. the heading of
1 138 above).
1. By 138. a, e, relaiive clauses are disided into two classes : those a

which are used for the nearer definition of a noun (substantive
or pronoun), and those which are not dependent on a noun. The
former may be called mempU/ef the latter tmpleit relative clauses.
Complete relative clauses, as a rale (see the ezceptioDS under ^
letter ), are introduced by the originally demonstrative pronoun *^
see further in 138. Similarly, incomplete relative clauses may
also be introduced by "^1?, or by some other demonstrative pronoun;
see furtlicr in 138. a and g-k. Very frequently, however, e.spccially
in poetic style, the attributive relation is expressed by simple

co-ordination K
The governing substantive or pronoun is frequently (m ceitam c
cases alwqyjt) resumed by a pronominal suffix or an adverb. The
resumption may however, be omitted, just as in relative dauses
introduced by "^B^, &c.; see 138./
In Arabic a distinction is made between relative clauses used for the nearer d
definition of a deiermimtU sabstantiTe (/i7a), and those which axe attached to an
* The old view tiiat all theae casca ariae from the ^nissiom of llM la nniatla-
frctoiy. Theae co-ordinated attribotive danaea are rather a mere anbdiviiioii of

the variona Idnda of dicanatantial danaea (aee | igfi) whidi may be attached
to a Momm ngfiti* C in Etagliab this is tiU Utttt (whidi) Mi tarwCr ta ev.
Digitized by Google
513 The Sentence, [Jiss-
mdttirmimU tabitantive C^). The bj Che denoa*

foRuer arait be iatiodnoed
ilxitiw pronoim 44fiii^, the letter eve elweys simply ooKrdiiieted. The eeine
distmctloo wee no doobl originelly observed in Hebrew, since simply co-ordinetcd
rrlntive clauses are most commonly fonnd after indeterminate substantives (see
the f-xamples below% and in cases like Dciit. a?', 49 (i:b'i) yCC'TTN^ "^'J*?*
a nation whose tongue (kou shall not itnderstand ; cf. Is, 66, 13, and especially
1 Sam. 3, 11), the addition of "C'^l is explained from the special sire>5 laid on
the indeterminate substantive', a nation of such a kind, thou understandat net
their tongm. On the other hand, in poetic style at least, irK is someirhet
frequently ooiltted even after a determinate nomii bat only rarely in prose (except
by the Chnmieler; cf. i Chron. 12, 33. 39, i. 3 Chnm. 15, 11 ; alter ~!)3 i Chron.
99, 3. a ChcoD. 30, tSsq. 31, 19. cm t, 3); so Ex. 18, so. Jed. 8, x. so, 15.
1 Ki. 13, IS. a Kt. 3, 8. a Chron. x8, S3. Neh. 13, 33; after a pronominal subject,
f Sans. 6 9.
$ 8. If the nearer definition of a substantive or proftoun is effected
by simple coordination of the relative ckusej it may take the

form
(</) r)f a noun-clause, e. 2 S im. 20, 21 a man of thr Jtill courUry
of Ephraim ^DC' ySE' whose nam^^ ivas Sheba; i Ki. 13, 2. Zcch. 6, 12.
Job I, 6, 3, 15 with princes DQ^ 3i^T that had gold; Ps. 11, 4. Prov.
22, 1 1; when referring to a noun-suffix,e.g. Ps. 49, 14 OHl

thh is ihs nu^ of than who htm {sitM-yconfidenee, On periphrases of
this kind to express negative attributes, as in Job 38, 36
on a land where no man is, see $ r52. and comp. for this very
short form of the relaiive clause, Gen. 15, 13 Dnb tt^ Tl^^ ^'^"'^
that is not theirs; Deut. 32, 17 (oi'g ^ Q'l&i*); Hab. i, 6. Prov. 26, 17
f (b) Of a verbal clause*
Here we must distinguish the cases in which the retrospective

pronoun
(t) Is the subject of the relative dause, and is contained in the
verb so after a determinate substantive^ Ps. 34^ 9 happy is the man
;
teTIDn^ thai Irustdh in hwi ; Job 3, 3 ^ ipK nb^j'n ihe night which
said; after N^n i Sam. 6, 9. Is. 50, 9. Job 13, 19; after '^'^ Ps. 71, 18;
after an indeterminate substantive, e. j^. Job 31, 12 /*/ is a fire (thai)
dri'ourrfh unto Abaddon; Deut. 32, 17 ^ Is. 55, 13. 56. 2. Ps.68, 31.
78, 6. Prov. 30, 17. Lam. i, 10. a Chron. 28, 9; leferring to tlie
preceding suffix in Is. 28, 16, prop, behold me, who have laid,
Ac; 29, 14. 38, g. Ezek. 25, 7; depending on a vocative, Is. 54, i;
* So fiannuum, op. dt, p. 14 sq^ Ibllowiiig Bottcher, Lekrhmk, ii. Soi,
Digitized by Google
155*] Relative Clauses. 5x3
oa a noun-suf&x (see letter e above), Ps. i6, 4. The relative clause
18 used in this way, especially to supply the place of an adjective,

e.g. Gen. 49, 97 3^ a wolf that rmmUh^ le. a ravuimg woif:
Is. 51, It; to express a negative qualitjr, e.g. Is. 40, so. Hos. 4, 14
r?r^r' ^ undiscermng people.
Rem. Veiy frequently such relative lentences are attached to substantives which g
have tfie pwtide of compftrifon 3 , e. g. Job 7, 3 ^STfjKB^ ^ ' f^f^nit
that eamesify desirak Ik* shadow, ftc; Dent 31, 11. la. 6a, i. Jer. 93, 39. Hoc.
6, 3. Fk. 4a, s. S3, 25. 235, 1. Job 9, a6. 11, 16 ; so alio after \Cljf Fi. 58, 5;
after a determinate substantive, e.g. Is. 53, 7. 6x, loiq. Hab. 3, 14. Fs. 49, 13. 3l
see also the examples under letter h. Sometimes it seems simpler in such cases,
to take the verb directly as predicate to the preceding substantive, and to explain 3
(for sec Comparativt Clauses, ifii. h) as a conjunction a view which
even Hupfeld was ready to accept, at least as regards Ps. 90, 5. 125, i. Is. 53, 7.
61, II. In all such cases, however, the Masora has provided rightly for the
correct understanding of the passage by the u:e of greater or lesser distinctives
at the sane time, in judging the aeoents, the rale mentioiied in ( 15. as to die
change of certain diiftinctives hito Gonjanctives, must not be foifiotlen.
(2) Tlic casos in which the retrospective pronoun represents an h

accusative of the object, or would do so if not suppressed, as it usually
is in such cases in relative clauses with '^B'K, cf. ^ t^h, h. Kxamples

with the retrospective pronoun are, Deut. 32, 17 D^yy, 0\Ti>|j godt
whom ihey Anew not (see also the end of the verse); Jer. 5, 15 ; after
a substantive with f (see above, letter g\ Jer. S3, 9. Job 13, 28.
Witboat a retrospective pronoun, after a determinate snbstantive,
Jud. 8, I. I Ki. 13, IS ( Ki. 3, 8. 2 Chron. 18, 2 3) ; Ps. 33, 12 (pre-
ceded by a relative clause with "'K'l^); Prov. 23, 8. Job 23, 17. 28, i.
Other examples of this kind, though the article is omitted according

to poetic usage, are Is. 15, 7 (nb^^ rnn*, for which Jer. 48, 36 n^p^ T\y\\
with the substantive in the construct state governing the relative clause,
see f 130. d)t Ps. 7, 16. 51, 10. Lam. x, si. Without the retrospective
pronoun, after an indeterminate substantive, 6 fi^n^ji^?

e. g. Is. 6, 'VP
^J|D a AW co^ whkh ke had taken with the tm^ from off
the altar; Ex. 15, 17. Is. 42, 16 (48, 17. Ps. 25, ts, all after ;
but Ps. 32, 8 l^n ^"Jlia); Is. 64, 2 , Ecclcs. 10, 5 (in 6, i the same
clause with moreover, in Jer. 14, 18 read with the LXX H?"^?
into a land thai they know noi.
(3) The cases in which the retrospective pronoun is dependent i

on a preposition, or its pUue is taken by the adverb D(^, as in Jer. a, 6
end. Thus after a detenmnate substantive^ Ps. 18, 3 ^'^^KHr ^

r
Digitized by Google
514 The SenUnce, [155.
my rork in which I iake refuge ; Kx. i8, 20. Is. 42, i ; in Job 3, 3^
also, the omission of the article with 0^* is only a poetic licence.
After an indeterminate substantive, Jer. 2,6, last clause but one;
k In this case also the retrospective word is not infrequently snp-

'
pressed, giving rise to extremely short, bold expiessions, such as
Is. 51, I look wUo the roek D!!'3??n (whence) ye were htum^ and to tin
hole of the pit tlFHS^ (whence) _> ivere digged; Job 21, 27 the deviciS
(wherewith) ye ad viohnily agatttsi me. A retrospective adverb is
suppressed in Job 38, 19 where is the way (to the place where) Ike
light dweiieth? cf. 38, 24.

/ Rem. I. The of the letrospective word occnn moct frequently ia
oiiiissi<m
relative clauses which are (iôvemed by the construct state of a preced'mtj aubstan-
tive (especially an expression of time nnd hence are virtually in the {genitive.
In addition to the instances already îvcn in % 130. d, cf. the fuUowing after :
D^*2 Lev. 7, ê^. Ps. 56, 10; after Di>tD Jer. 36, a; after simple Di* Ps. 56.4
U\* OH (he day when / am afraid) ; after nj?3 2 Chron. J9, 27 \^T\T\ nVS
at the titne when the burnt offering bcân)\ ao, 23. ^4, 11 ; after n>0
Dcut. 32, 35. Job 6, 17 ; after HJfny Mic, 5, i ; after n^D Ps. 4, S thi>u luisi put
gladmss in my heart more than (their gladness) at the time (when) their com and
iheir wtMe an increased, hk a wider fcnae also Job 8, 13 it is yet in its grunruss^
(while) it is Met cut deem,
m a. The agiceaieiit (f 138. d) ^
lint xetrMpective pronovi with a pRnoauael
regens in the 1st or 2nd person also takes place in a simple co-wdinated idatife
clause in 1 Sam. 26, 14 7ttho art thou (that) criestf Cf., however. Is. 63^ X9
are bueme as th^ eiver whom (DS not U^) then never barest rule.
n 8. OccasionaUychiefly in poetic or otherwise elevated style even

independent relative clauses are simply co-ordinated with a regens,
whereas we should expect them always to be preceded by a demon-

strative pronoun, on the analogy of the examples in 138, e. The
suppressed pronoun would stand
(a) As subject, Is. 41, 34 on alHnmmUum (is he) that chooseth ym;
Job 30, 13, cf. f 152. If.
(3) As object, Is. 41, 2, witfa a retrospecdve pronoun; MaL 2, 16

nS3^. and him thai cmereih; Job 29, la Idelwerid , , , the /atherttu
also, and him thai had none to help him.
(ir) In the genitive governed by a substantive, Ex, 4, 13 W*n^
n^L*'ni!2 send, I fray hand of him whom thmi wilt send,
thee, by the
i.e. by the hand of some one else Ps. 65, 5 and Prov. 8, 32, verbal-
;
clauses after 0 the happiness 0/ the man, &.; Ps. 81, 6, 141, 9.
>
Digitized by Google
156.] Circumstantial Clauses, 515
Job 29, 16. Lam. i, 14; after '^3 Gen. 39, 4, but in verse 5
"'F^'''? ; Ex. 9, 4 ; verbal-clauses after "bs i Chron. 29, 3.
30, 18 sq. 31, 19. Ezra i, 5.
(</) Governed by a preposition ; so verbal-clauses after ÎT)** Jer.
2, 8; after "ij^^ (=/<? ihe place where), i Chron. 15, 12, but Ex. 23, 20
before the same verb "^B^S Dipon"5) ; after 3 Jer. 8, 11. 2 Chron. i, 4
( =m the place where) ; after
J>
Is. 65, i ^^XK? K^bb by them thai asked not
for me . . .
''32'^3 J<^5> ihem fhal sought me not; Ezek. 13, 3 that
which they have not seen; after ^ Ps. 119, 136, cf. 158. b; after
I3y 2 Chron. 16, 9. A noun-clause follows ^ in Neh. 8, 10'.
156. Circumstantial Clauses,
1. The statement of the particular circumstances under which a

a subject appears as performing some action, or under which an
action (or an occurrence) is accomplished, is made especially (apart
from relative clauses, see 155) by means of noun-clauses connected by

Waw with a following subject (see further on this kind of circumstantial
clause in 141. e\ and by verbal -clauses (see 142. d). Very
frequently, however, such statements of the particular circumstances
are subordinated to the mam clause by being simply attached without
Wdw, either as noun-clauses, sometimes extremely short (see letter r),
or as verbal-clauses (see letters d-g).
Rem. Among relative clauses of this kind the commonest are the varioas noun- b
clauses, which are most closely subordinated to a preceding substantive without
"ItJ^, e.g. Gen. 16, la also statements of weight, Gen. 34, 2a
; of name, Job i, i ;
(also introduced by iCB'^ Gen. 34, 29. i Sam. i, 1, and elsewhere, or PIDE^^ Gen.
16, I. nnd elsewhere); of a condition of body, Jud. i, 7, and others.
22, 24,
Notm-clauses which begin with wd-tv and the predicate have a somewhat more
independent character than those introduced by wdw and the subject (Gen. 19, i,
&c.). The former, however, are also to be regarded as circumstantial clauses,
in so far as they describe a condition which is simultaneous with the principal
action ; thus Is. 3, 7 / will not be an healer, in my house
is neither bread nor clothing ; Is. 6, 6 (Amos 7, 7); a Sam. 13, 18. 16, i.
^ An analogous instance in Aramaic is Ezra 5, to one whose name was Shesh-

bazsar.
' In Deut. 33, 31 this form of sequence appears to be selected for another
purpose, and indeed our enemies are judges thereof, with wdw emphatic ; to take
it as a circumstantial clause is too artificial.
l1 2
56 The SefUence.
c ClHBaclienstk of drcumstantial n(mrt-c\3me& are
Geo. II. 8 W fitM in kmi filQD "sn} ^7^3 imiA i^dEM

At wtti omdAi m At tasi; Nam. 2t, 24. a Sam. tS, 14 /Irîfl
lir AMff y ^teiw, ^ în|lP while ke was jw/ o&W; Jer. 30. 6.
Eiek. 9, 2 (comp. Cant 3, 8). Nah. 3, 8. Zech. 14, 5. 2 Chron. 23, 10;
with the predicate preccdine, e.g. i Sam. a6. 13. Ps. 32, 8. In
Gen. 41, 29 a DOUD-ckusê serves to announce a future condition. We

majr also include here certain set phrases, as D^3g-5>^ r:B /ace to fact
(prop, while foit was turned towards fact). Gen. 32, 31. Ex. 33, 1 1.
Deat 34, 10, and claewbere^; so also io atsi 9tusi(f dtatm, n^^M tfff^
ike face being tunied to tki tarth. Gen. 19, i, and elsewhere (lor
ftfi|t we find in I Ki. I, 31. Is. 49, 23)*. Comp. fiiuUlj the
formula 0^33*!'$ DX mother with children. Gen. 32, 12; comp. Hos.
10, 14 and 119. diiy note 3.
Rem. On cirmmlocutions of this kinil to express negative attribntM bymcutt

of sboit aoon-claases (complete or incomplete), comp. ( 152. u.
d 8. As ciTcnmstanttal tKer^foAdaases', we find (i) sometimes affirma-

tive clauses (see below), but far more frequently {2) negative clauses
(see letter and among these (3) a certain iiiiniler of expressions

which m^y be regarded simply as equivalent to negative adverbial
ideas (see letter^).
Examples of (i) Is. 5 ii ^ woe onto them, that tiny late ia the evening,
DK*^ ihetn; Is. 30, 31. Jer. 7, a6. 30, 15. PS. 4, 3.
5, 12. 62,5. The circumstanti.nl verbal-clause is used to particularize an action
which has before Ixtn expressed generally, c. ^. Gen. 44, 12. 48, 14 crossing
his hands; Dent. 2, 27. Jud. 6, ly; antilhelically, i Ki. 13,18 ^ when-
ti'ith howrt'er he lied uuto him. The vcrbal clau<ie seems to assign a reasoo in
Ps. 7, ; TVVi t^^^'P stfue thou hast commatuicd judj^ment ; a consequence
in I's. 103, 5.
Rem. On the ca"^cs in which an imperfect in the sense of a final claose is
subordinated to a verb of motion (generally 0V) see ( 12a ^. Comp. also
' The expression D*3S nWVin io look one another in the face i.e. to contend
in combat) a Ki. 14, 8. ti. a Chron. 23, 17. ai is probably only a shortened fonn
for D*3i-5K T V
D*3D
*T
Hjonn.
T T .
That n2f"lK (^nK"* is reaiiy to be regarded as a virtual predicate to D^BJi, and

not D^SII as a casus instt^menti, is seen from Is. 49, 23, where 0^9*:!^ prccedfl
the verb.
* Sont nramplci f dttm have been alieady dtscusaed in another eae'
ab(fe, { iao.4w.
1 157.] Object'Clauses, 517
examples like Is. 5, a /Aaf they may f^kw Strong drimk ; Habw
1 1 16 VTO!*^
thai he may ittvade them ; Job 16, 8. 30, 28.
Of (2), subordinate verbal-clauses with (in Lnj^lish i^sually rendered by
^
7itithout aud ihe genind. if the snbject be the sauie as lu liit principal clauise,,
e.g. Lev. 1, 17 i)"''^^^ n!? withoui dividing it asunder ; Job 31, 34; ^ with the
perfect is so used ia Gen. 44,4. Ex. 34, 28. i Sain. 30. 2. Job 20, 26 {^wUktmt Us
kdng bi0wm t^m With a difTeiettt tabject* eqaivdent to a eonscaitiiw clause la
Engliili, c if. It. 37, 9 ID^pl^ that tk^ skali riu up ma jmwv.Moreover,
Terbal-cliinet in the same senee (fnihmU ddng* ftc.) are ftcqnentlj ooonected
by t6); coaph i Sam. so, a. Job a4 aa* 49> 3$ hi a oooceitive tenae. Is. 35, i.
Ps.44;t8.
Of (3), coinp. yr t^7 (prop, kt knows U mf) uMowarts, Pi. 35, 8. Pkov.
g
btsn^ ^ untfaringly^ Is. 30, 14 (after an iaiioitive absolute): Hab. 1, 17. Job
6, 10 (but îacyi \h\ Job 2J; 'see / at the end); nns
(prop.
^
Mo' W
restrains nof) unceasingly^ Is. 14, 6
16, 13. 17,
IM/) ^m//> Is.3,9(bnt Job 15, iS
; DitS^bs Job
letter
HOa t^^^l);
41, 15 (Ps. 93,

IjJ'n ^Ssltprop.
i Dltan"^?)
ttj)
and C^t3^ Is. 40, 20 equivalent to without toUtring^ immowMjt; oompw also
Ij^DK without wawriugf P. a6, 1.
{167. Obji(hClasttS,
Clauses which depend on a transilivc verb, especially on whai are a

called the zr/îi cordis, i.e. verbs denoting any mental act, such as
io see, lo hear, to knew, to perceive, to believe, to remember, to forget^
io say, to think, &c., may be subordinated to the governing verb

without the help of a conjunction by simple juxtapoeitkm ({ 120. a),
or they may be co-ordinated with it either with or without waw
ctîulaim ( 120. ^^). As a rule, however, the objective clause
is introduced by the conjunction ^9 Ihat^ less frequently by thai*
Examples :
(a) Object-clauses >viihout a conjunction. Besides the passages mentioned

in f 130 (especially under letter i) there are in which a nnmber of examples,
a danie depending on a ver6um dieoudi or smdmdi (the onatio oblipiu of the
Latin and English Grammar) is added in the form of an independent nonn^lanse
or Terbal-clanse ; e.g. Gen. la, 13 riK ^nhtt KT^CK say, I pray thee, tkou
art Mj^sisier; Zech. 8, 23 (after VOV); Ps. 9, 21 (after JTT); verbal-clauses, e.g.
Fli. 50^ 31 thou thoughtest îf(G^fPn^niVI I was altogether Hht ikjtselfi Gen.
41 15'' Jq<1' 9> 48 Tifhat ye have seen me do ; Is. 48, 8. Hos. 7, 2.
f
(Jt) Object-clauses introduced by e.g. Gen. 6, 5 njTl HBT ^3 njrT N")*!

^
DIKH and the Lord saiv that the wickedness of man 'ms g-reat, &c. Direct
narra::> ri nlso is very frc(iuentiy introduced by *3 (analogous to the ort recita-
tivum ; Irequently, indeed, with the secondary idea of a particle of asseveration,

as in Gen. 26, 9. 27, 20), e. g. Gen. 21, 30. 22, 16 sq. j6, 22. 29, 32. 37, 35. Jos.
a, 24, Sec, even mdltt direct narmtioo ^ b
not expressly faidieated. Gen. 4, 2 5.
Digitized by Co^j^
5i8 The Sentence, [158.
It, 31. 41, 51 iq. Ex. i8 4.On the expicnioii of b mcoimI olyfect mtam of
a clause inttodnoed i by ^p, see f 1 17.
C if) OfcjecKUntes introdoced by ns^, eg. Est 3, 4 MVrnB^ cn^ TiTT^

^^n^ 4f fold ihem that hg was Jew; X Sam. 18, 15. Ecck. to, a6k.
Eccles. 8, 13', even before direct narration. 1 Sam. 15, 20, 3 Sam. i, 4. Some-
what frequently "^-'N preceded by the twta acrusa/iri "jRit (cquiralent to ike
rinumsfame, the fiut, that^, e.g. Jos. 2, 10. i Sam. ^4, ii. 19. 2 Sam. ti, ao
U. 38, 3, but in Cicn. 30, 39. Dcut. a9, 15 equivalent to the way in whuk.
f 168. Causal Clausa*
a A complete clause, which assigns the reason for statetnents,
demands, threats, &c., sometimes follows with the simple waw

copulative, e.g. Ps. 60, 13 give us kelp efgainst the adversary, and
(for) vain is the help 0/ maa; Gen. Job aa,
aa, 12. x. 23, ^ la,
perhaps also Fft. 7, 10; or even without Wiw, e.g. Gen. if, 14.
As a nik} however, special conjunctions in various combinations are
used to introduce causal clauses.
1} The most common causal conjunciions arc *3 jJT Is. 3, 16 and elsewhere, and
"y^tk |y* btcaitse, pioji. on aaaunt of the. fact that ; bv>th, however, may also ht
shortened to tlic iimpk JJ^

Nam. 30, la and elsewhere, or to "a because , Gen.
3, 14. 17 and elsewhere, or to IK'S Gau 30^ i8, 31, 49. 34, 13. 27. i i>aia. 15, 15.
aor 4a. atf, 33. I Ki. 3, 19. 8, 33. Hos. 14, 4. Zecb. i, 15; also "HifKa Gen.
39. 9- 23> On the other hand, the rimple ^ sometimes repeated for emphasis,
1^3^ 1^! German eimiemcl und etiUkweil) Lev. a6, 43. Ernk.
(something like the
i3,'io (witboot \ 36, 3); also tS^K'^y a Sam. 3, 30, and ^9^' Dent. 31, 17.
Jod. 3, 1 a, MsL a, 14 on the ground that; l*^|t beeemse of ike cimrm-

stanee that. Dent a3, 5 ; nhirâri^Jf >^ lAt> twj cwu that, Jer. 3. 8.
Bnt jnst as the simple is nscd for fgl, so also the simide "Sj with the
perfect stands for idwh'^ Fs. 119, 136. Esia 3, 11 ; comp. ^Jiar^ Gen. 31, ao
' Instead of a complete objective danse we sometimes find a kind of accusative

and infinitive constmction, especially after (prop. ^ give up) in the sense of
teallew,t,g. Nun. ai, a3 l!>2Da !)|n^nK }h>p Ppif^ oud Siheu did
not suffer Israel to pass thrmgh his herder; 20, 21; followed by an infinitive
with !>, e.g. Gen. 30, 6. 31, 7. Ex. 3, 19. Comp. also the analogous examples in
Deut. aS, 56 (after r.^l r > rrnture; see f 113.^; Jud. II, ao (after t9
trust) ; I Ki. 19, 4 (alter t'KB' to ret/uest).

' In Jer. a8, 9 a jaMîf^/*claase is thus introdnced by ifH instead of the
Ui>ual ^4).
' Also ^"f^y^^S prop, fof t/unfine, Geu. 18, 5. 19,8. 33, lO. 38, 26. Num.
TO, 31. 14, 43. 2 Sam. 18, 30 (^rS, and |3''i>g ''1* Job 34, 27 always mean
forasmuch as.
Digitized by Google
Conditional Sentences, 519
and y30 Deut. iS, 55, both with the perfect, cqaivalent to because . . . noL
Comp. farther, TJ'S 2p^ Gen. 22, 18. 26, 5. 2 Sam. 12, 6, all with the jK-rfect,
and ^3 SpJ? (2 Sam. 12, 10 with the perfect; Amos 4, 12 with the imperfect) prujj.
in nturn lor the fact Ouit ,

jmnlarly again the simple Dpy Num. 14, 24 with the
perfect, and Deut. 7, 1 2. 8, 20 with the imperfect ; finally, "^S'Kp Is. 43, 4 arising
from tike Aiet /Aol^ ^btiiaue ; "Ê^ linn i Sem. ax and elaewlicxe and ^9 nnn
Dent. 4, 37. Piov. 99 muvw thaU
Rem. I. The preposition "^JJ? J'f cause of, on accouHi oj) witli the infinitive T
(S J 14. ^) is frequently used as the equivalent of a full causal clause; comp., e.g.
Amos 1, 3. 6. 13. a, x. 6. Sneh a oonstnctioQ with the jnfinitiTe tavft however,
according to XX4. r, be continned by means of a finite vcrb in whidi case
governs the verb at a conjnnction ; e. g. Amos x, 9
iUjrdiH9tdup.aitdremeiiAtndnottBcc*\ ^^4; withont H^Jai^ Is. 30^14.
a. The choice of tense is regulated by the general principl > tited in ( 106 sqq., d
viz. the i>crrccl ^comp. especially 106./) refers to causes .ilrca-iy hroiij^ht fully into
effect, the imperfect to those which may contingently arise; comp. e.g. Deut. 7, 12.
8, 20. 1 Ki. S, 33, where the imperfect leaves the possibility still open that the
persons addressed will perhaps escape the threatened punishments by avoiding
disobedience. Comp. iitrtber, 1 1x1. A on tiie imperfect cooaecative, and ixs. my
on the perfect conaecntive hi the apodosls to eaoaal danset.
159. CondiHonal Senfeneis.

'
Comp. H. Ferguson,' The Use of the Tenses in Conditional Sentences in Hebrew
{JIntmal of the Sociciy of Bibl. Lit. and Extg.^ Middletown. Conn., June and
September, x88a}.P. Fiicdrich, Dw
kthr, ComdUiimaisSiUt Konigsberg, 1884
(Inang.-Diseertation). Driver, Utt^ the Timu, 3id ed., p. 174 sqq.
1. The great variety of construction in conditional sentences is a

owing to the fact that it frequently depends on ilie subjective judge-
ment of the speaker, whether he wishes a condition to be regarded as
capabU 0/fulfilmm t (absolutely* or at least possibly), thus including

those already fulfiUed, or as incapM of fidfilmmi^ On this dis-
tinction depends the choice both of the conditional particle to be
used (see below), and especially (as also in Greek and Latin) of the
tense. The use of the latter is naturally determined according
lo the general principles laid down in 106 sqq.* In the following

sketch, for the sake of clearness, condiiioiial sentences without con-
ditional particles will be first discussed (letter b)t and afterwards

sentences with these particles (letter /).
'
It may, moreover, happen that a different idea is Intiodvcad in tiie apodosis,
from that with which the protasis started aooroe of many farther variatioaa.
Digitized by Google
The Sentence.
^ 2. The relation between condition and consequence may be
expressed, as in English, by the simple juxtaposilion of two clauses.
At the same time, it is lo be observed in general, as a fundamental lule
(in accordance with the origînal character of the two tenses), that
^ tmpufect, with its equivalents (the jussive^ cohortative, impenidve

perfect consecutivey and paiticiple), is used to express a conditioii
and consequence which are regarded as being ctâÛ of/ti^lmmt

in present or fiimre time, while the perfect represents a condition
already fulfilled in the past, and its consequciicc a^j an accomplished

fact The other use of the perfect to represent conditions regarded
as impotiibk occtirs only in connexion with particies.
Ettmplca:
e (a) Impcrftct (comp. % 107. in protatb and apodoos, Jos. aa, 18. Fl io4
aSsqq. PJ^}*^ '^H^ jr>ri if thou givtst unto tkmîk^ ffither, &c.; Ps, 139, 18.
Job 20, 24. Ecclcs. I, 18. Nth. i, 8; with an interrof^ntive imperfect io the
apodosis, Jud. 13, 12; with the jussive, Job 10, 16; with the cohortative, Pto%-.
I, 23; with the perfect. Is. 26, 10 {yet 7vill he not learn righteousness ; the aj".>
dosis forcibly denies what the im|>erfect in the protasis had repre^nted as aull
conceivable i oomp^ Hot. 8, la); with the perfect coosecntive^ Gen. 47, 25. Ex.
33* 5 f ^ piolanf tappvcMed, Job 5, 8 (ee 1 107. jr).
d (P) m protaiis (comp. f 109^ t) and apodowi* Fa. XC4, ao l^^tTT^
Jusswt Jl,
U is mgAi; imperfect in the ap<iJoMa> PL

if tkeu wiakai darkmss,
104, a9 k Atao in Ex. 7, 9 )*|n|l ^n^ H sJiaU fiuMm a Mfpent, is the apodods to
a snppressed protasis if tkott cast it cUnvn; so in 3 Ki. 5 lo Sfc^ is the apodoBS
to a protasis if thou wash, coDtained in what precedes.
g (c^ Cohortative (see 108. e) in the protasis*, perfect in the apodosis, Ps. 40, 6:
imperfect consecutive, Job 19, 18 ^^"1131^ HDpN ij I aris, tk^ speak against
me ; on the cohortative in the apodosis, comp. loS./
f {dj Imperfect consaittive in the protasis ( ni. jr\ Ps. 139, 11 IDW if T say.
&c (with a noon-clause as the apodosis); with a freqaentative perfect consecutive

in the apodosis, i Sam. a, 16.
g (tf) Ptfftct eoiwcmtive in the protaaig and apodoaii (aee the examples, i ii2,kk
aAU), Gen. 44, aa m\ 3T^. amd OmUt ki im his fmther, his father
wtmUii*; 9, 15. 44, 39. Ex. 4. 14. la, 13. i Sam. 16, a. 19, 3. a Sam. 13, a8. i KL
8,30; with frequcntatiw perfect^ Ex. 16, ai ^tftifiag to the paat, Jer. aob 9);
with hnpcrfeet in the apodoitt (being aepaiated from tfaefl^4^
1 On the lenninatioo ]1 comp. \ 47. ai. In vena a8^ also pysb^ is probMly to
be explained from itsfanmediatdy preceding the greater /MMf. Theae tendnalicna
in veraea 98-30 and Ps. 139, 18 can loaroelj haw any connexion %rith the con-
ditional sentence, although it is strange that ^ in Nun. 3a, a3 appcaii after ift'W
even in the protasis. In Num. 16, 39. 3a, 30 before M (aa in Job 31, 10 in tiie
apodosis) is to be ea^lained from the dislike of biatna.
Digitized by Google
{ I59-] Conditional Sentences. 521
Job 5, 34; separated by

an iafinitive absolute, i Ki. 2,37; an interrogative clause
ia tile ftpodoHs, Lev. xo, 19 ; a novB-dAtisc, Ps. 37, 10. Job 7, ai.
(/) A simple perfect (to lepreient actions which ave to be refafded as completed) h
in the protaiit and apodoiis, Prov. 18, afO VCfO Hj^ K2C^ iasptu fpuml
u hi has fpumd a goodthn^j a^ 10; an imperlect in the apodoiis, Job 19^ 4*
33, 10; an imperfect consecotiTe, Ex. ao^ a^ PkoT. 1 1, a. Job 3, 25. a^, l^h, >ft n
an interrogative clause, Nnm 12, 14. Job 7, 20 if I have sinned (prop., well, now
1 have sinned 1) what can I do unto thul ai| 31. 35>6. Amos 3, 8; a Dotm-cUuse,
Job 27, 19.
^S) participle as casus pendens (comp. 1 43. and the sections of the Grammar f
these rdened to) or a complete aooiMibutse in the protasla ; the apodosis mostly
introdnoed by wSm apodosis, t Ptov. 33, 34 jlT*/^ tft no(^ Dsn if om
h^ftiMh a wise child, he shall have jejf efhim ; with perfect fteqnentative in the
apodoiia, i Sam. a, 13 and elsewhere ; but also with a simple imperfect, e. g. Ex.
ai, 13 (comp. 1 1 a. ) with an intenogativie imperfect, a Ki. 7, a. 19; with an
;
interrojjative perfect, Jnd. 6, 13,
(/i) Infinitive ivith preponticn (also as the equivalent of n contlitional clause) k

in the protasis, and a perfect consecutive in the apodosis \^comp. 113. ww), e.g.
2 Sam. 7, i4isqq. 01 VProh^ ini^na if he commit iniquity ^ I will correct him
with the rod of men ; Ex. 34, 34 sq. (with imperfect| followed by perfects frequen-
tative in dte apodosis).
Rem. On the expression of condition and consequence by mûis of two co-

ordinate imperaHves, see % tio./
8. Particles used to introduce conditional sentences are DJ* (lor /
which in the Utter and latest Boolis sometiiDes see below, letter w)
and (i Sam. 14, 30. Is. 63, 19 Eccles. 6, 6* Est. 7, 4
from ^
lhai (Lat td),
DK)
m
negative 16 DM and
ease thaiy sometimes used almost in the
^ wUmi ^9 n^ptmng
same sense
as W. With regard to the difference between and 'h
(^.^^), it is to be observed, as a fundamental rule, ihal Di< is used

if the condition be regarded cither as already fulfilled, or if it, together
with its consequence, be thought of as possibly (or probably) occurring

in the present or future. In tlie former case, QK is followed by the
perfect, in the latter (corresponding to the Greek with the present
subjunctive) bj the hnperfect or its equivalent (frequenUj in the
apodosis also). On the other hand, ^ ^f^) used when the con-
dition is to be represented as not fulfilled in the past, or as iwt eapeMe
oj JulfilmaU in the present or luiure, and the consequence accordingly
as not having occurred or never occurring. In the former case, ^
and ^ are necessarily followed by the perfect (mostly also in the
* On 6 cf.KoUerittGe<gci's2Mllfrir.>rfrtt.i^
Digitized by Google
4
522 The Sentence,

apodosis) corresponding to the Greek fl with the indicative of an
historic tense, and the Latin imperfect or pluperfect subjective. In
the latter case (which is extremely rare) tli perfect, or the participle,
or even [he imperfect, may be used.

Rem. Since it aâin frequently depends on the subjective judgment nf the
speaker (sec kttcra , whether a coiiditiun is to be regarded is poaaible ur laipoii-
sible, we cannot wonder that the distinction between and lS is not always
consistently observed. Although naturally and cannot take the place
of DM and }^ DK (on the strange luc of in Gen. 50, 15, see below), yet con-
veraely DK is tometines tued whese i> would ceittinly be expected ; oomp. e. g.
Fs. 50, la. 137, 5. 139, 8. H08. 9, la (comp. vane 11). Theie examplca, indeed
(EM with the Impesfecfc), may withoat difficnity be explained from the fiMt that
theeoonexion of^ with the imperfect was eridcntty avoided, becanse the impeifrct
by ita nature indicates a still aniinished action, and consequently (as opposed
to a still open possibility. But DK is also used for in connexion with the
perfect, especially when an imprecation is attache<l \>y th'- npodosis to the condition
introduced by DX , e. ^. Ps. 7, 4 ^^\^\. '31 ei'^T^ . . . HNI ^H^b'^DN ij I have dent
this . . let the ciicfuy pursue ''ul. See, comp. Job 31, 9;qq. Tl\c sjKakcr
aûmes fur a moiucxit ast pui&ible and even actual, ihal which he really rejects
as inoooceivable, in order to invoke Uie moat aeveie punishment on himaelf^ if it
should prove to be the ease.

On the frequent addition of an infinitive abaolnte to Ae verb in danses with
Ml see f 113. above.
Examples:
ft A. OK I. with perfect in the pvotasia to express eondlttons, &c., which have
been completely fulfilled in the past or which will be completely fulfilled in the
future the perfect ia here equivalent to the futurum exacium, 106^ o). The
apodosis ' takes
{a) A pcvj'at also, eg. Truv. 9, u 'J'^^'P V^- Q"^^ ^^^'^ tWj<r, thou
art wise for thyself ; Ps. 73, 15 (see below on 1^).
(*) Imperfect^ e.g. Deut. 32, 41 ^fliSC^'Dl* if I wket my gliitcting svmd,^.

/ vtUl rtmter vengeance^ &c.; Job 9,1^ sq. and 30 (in both cases we should
expect ^ rather than "DK; ao also I^t. 44, ai aq. with an interrogative impcffect
in the apodoala); Job ii 13 (the apodosis is in verse 15).
(r) Jussive (or ifftaihn), e. g. Job 31, 9 sqq. (see letter m above); Gen. 18, ^
{J) Perfect cmseemtiM (see the examples in i i ia.f), e.g. Gen. 43, 9 l6rt)M
'a> IÎJlitâil ^/ him not .. . then I shall have sintud, &c; Jud. t6, 17,
2 Sam. 15, 33. 2 Ki. 7, 4, On the other hand, e.g. Gen. 47, 6. Mic. 5, 7.Job 7, 4
refer to actions already completed ; in Gen. 38, 9 and Num. ii, 9 the perfect
with 1 is a periect fre<iuentative and refers to past time.
* We are not here coucerntd with the fact that the logical apodosis (the coo-
aequeooe of the condition) is scHoaellmea mentlcaed before the cooditioa; as ia
Gen. 18, a8. 30. Jnd. 11, to, 63, daq. 137, 6, and accordk^ to DtUmann
Is. 4, 4.
Digitized by Google
15^] CondManal Sentences, 5*3
(e) Imptrfed conseciUivt (see ill. e, g. Job 8, 4 if thy children have sinned
(?KDn) , , , DH;)!:?^) he has deHvered tJu m, &c
(/) Imperative, e.g. Ccn, 50, 4 '31 Krna'l D3*Vy3 fn ^r.NYTp xrDK if nru/
I have found grau ui your eyes, speak, J pray you, 6cc. ; ihc imperative precedes
in Gen. 47, t6 and Job 38, 4. i8
Cf) A (complete or Inoon^tlete) notm-danae, e. g. Jcr. 14, tS (a vivid realiiation p

of the fatnie) ^/ Amv gnu forth imto theJliU ftc), ihm, MOd, tht
sigim with the sward! 8cc; Prov. 34, 14 with wdtv apodosis).
2. DK with imperfect in the protasis, to erprf^? what is possible in the present
q
or future, as well as (according to 107. ^) what has coutiooed or been repeated
in the past. The apodosis takes
{as The fcr/ed, e.g. Num. 32, 23 OnKDH HSH |3 pbj?n fc<^5"DW f'ut if ye wiil
ttvt tio ye have sinned ; here the apodosis represeuLs Liic time when
so, behold,
the coofeqnenoe hat fCmAj taken pkoe ; 10 also Job to, ij-14. On the other
hand, Nam. 16, 29 (as also i Sam. 6, 9 and i Kt. aa, aS) ia a cue of a pn^gnant
construotioD, tkm mm m
4k all men .dU^ thm (it will follow from this) ikt
J^rd hath not sent me.
{b) The imperfect, c. g. a Ki. 7, 4 HNTI} UjprtJK if they save us alive, we shall r
live, &c.; Gen. 13, 16. 18, 28. 30. 28, aosqq. Ex. 20, 35 (the second imperfect i&
equivalent to a jussive); I.s. i, 18. 10, 23, Amos 9, 3-4. Ps. 50, 12 (where
ironically represents an impossibility as possible) ; Job 8, 5 sq. Cwith the insertion
of a second condition xu the form uf a nuun-clau^); 9, 3. 3o. 14, ; ; a frequenta-
tive imperfect referring to the past, Gen. 31,8 "ipt^^ nb'OK i/(cver) ht mid Ikus
*
'
'*
^"^frt
^^^^ * * *' ^ ^ ^ ctmaeqncnee (on
Jl^^ c % 107. s) precede* the condition.
\ê) Thejmtwe (or ttpMive), e.g. Pa. 13;, 5 comp. 109. il. ;
(d) The (lakarttttiwt e.g. Gen. 13, 9. Job 31, 7; comp. f ioS.f,
(f) The f*9fu$ eonûtwe (tee the examples in i iia.^ aad^, e.g. 1 Sam. s
ao^6 nripM^ fyk 'Pif^ if^ fi^^ miss m* audi, tkm skaUthm
say, &c. : Gen. 24, 41. Jud. 4, 30; with a frequentative perfect consecutive^ Gen.
31, 8 if he said (as ofitn happened) . ., then, &c. .
(J) The impcrfn t <onsuHtive; SO perhaps Ps. 59, 16, if î^^J*) is to be explained
according to 111./.
(^) The imperative, e.g. Gen. 31, 50. i Sam. 30, 21 (with wow apodosis, but
in verse aa simply 21, 10. Job 33, 5.
(il) A nonn-clanse, e.g. Gen. 4, 7. Ps. 139, 8. Job B, 6. 31, s6sq. /
3. DK with eg. Gen. 30, 31 ;
comp. the passages in 108. e.
4. DK with iisfiMitSf Job 9, 27 nON-DK prop, if my saying is (probably, u

however, we should read ^n*^).
$. OK with a nomi'Glaiiae e.g. Dent 5 as (in the apodoato a peifect with V
fcvw apoduis), Gcn 27, 46. Jnd. 9, 15 (imperative in the apodosb) ; ii9 (imper>
feet in the apodosis); 2 Sam. 12, 8 (cohortative in tho apodosis); Hos. la, la;
especially if the stibjcct of the conditional clause be a personal prononn. In an
attirmative sentence this pronoun is oftru joined to iM a negative scntrnce to
pit (eomp. on both, ^ 100. o"), whiic tiie i)redicatc ,cl. 116. tj) is rcjiresentcd
by a participle, usually expressing the future, e.g. Jud. 6, 36 sq. y^^D ^^'DK
Digitized by Google
524 The êttience. [^59-
if thou -vilt save, Sic; Gen. 24, 49 D'b'y D2t^''"DK tf ye iciu deal, <xc.; 1 Saui.
23, J3. In Gen. 24, 42 sq. ibe comiitioa is expressed in a more humble form
by the addition of K3. With pjC Gen. 43, 5 nWo ^3\S-DI hut ^ thou wU
not send, &c.; 20, 7 (with imperfttive in the apodosis) Ex. ; 8, 17. 9, 2 sq. i Sam.
19, 1 1 (all with a parttdple alto in the apodosii). Bot and }^ may also be
ttsed after DM without a tuffix; thus Gen. 13, 8. i Sam. 30, 8. a KL 15,
and dsewheie, HITDM (>/ iV it not ik ew) Gen. 30, 1. Ex. $>, 5a. Jnd. 9, 25.
9 Xi. a, 10; eomp. also |3~0l{t ^ iiSeJt, Gen. 95, a.

ttf B. )n ^ aoooiding to tlie common opinion originaltj identical witb )n Mddl
Piobably however, |n ^ is a pnie Axamaism, and since die Aramaic won! never
bas the meaning iekM, it is at least improbable that it had originally any
connexion wiUi |n or 7\IT\. Comp. Ex. 8, 2a. Is. 54, 15. Jcr. 3, i. a Chron.7, 13.
Bntin Job 12, 14 and 23, 8 the meaning behold is to be prefened.
I, With perfect in the protasis and apedosia (comp. % to(./),e.g. i San. 14, 30
Dyn E3in b?t W!> *| 4*w mueh more, if the people had totem
fruly . . ., had then mi iieu a^reat (^^muck ^reaier) slaughter f 8cc. ; Jud. 8, 19
l^jK is nsed in the same sense as in Est. 7, 4, comp. Eccles. 6, 6 ^with aqoestioo
in the apodosis). With the perfect in protasis and apodous after Gen, 31 , 42.
43, 10. Jud. 14, 18. I Sam. 25, 34. 2 Sam. 2, 27. Is. 1,9. On the other harn!.
in Deut. 32, 29 }h with a perfect is followed by an imperfect in the apo<lusi>. /'/
ihejr were tvise, they would understand this; in Mic. 2, n by a ])crfect consecutive
y 2. W ilh impirf ct after nI^S Dt-iit. 32. 27, '^^;^5 probably as the modus rti
rep<:titaf, tmre it not ihat I ever and ai^mn fared, 5cc.; so also the imperfect after
with the apodosis suppressed, Gen. 50, 15 supposing thcd Joseph should hate us ;
since, according to the context, the danger was real, the use of \b here is ânge
convendy hi ottier casesr e.g. Ps. 73, i^. Job 9, 1554. 30, \b would be more
natural than DM.
g 3. A noiui<ctatise occnia after l!l a Sam. 18, xa. a KL 3, 14. Pa. 81, 14, all
with unperfect in the apodosis ; Job 16,4 widi cohortative in the apodosis.
D. ^ snjfonng ihot,
aa 1. ^9 with petfeei in the protasis, e. g. Num. 5, ao fl^D^ ^ nxi lutihom, if
thou hoH gone cutray y &c.; with a frequentative perfect consecutive in the apodosis,
Job 7, 13 sq. ; with an imperfect consecutive, Job aa, 99*
hb 3. ^3 with imperfect in the protasis, e.g. Ps. 23, 4 '!|.^''^3 Di/M* thongh
I ':-aIk have to walk) . . ., / will fear no (ftO'ttTli^) ovil; 37, 24; Ex. 31, 2
'31 Îiy n3pri"^3 '/ thou buy an Hchrcrt' servant, six years shall he serzw
(but in verses 3-5 a series of definite conditions with definite consequences 1-
introduced by DN; so also the *3 in verse 7 is followed in verses S-ii by the

special caês with DfcC ; cf. also \ ( rse 1
7 sqq.); comp. Gen. 4, 24. 24,41. Job 38, 5;
with a pertcct ccmsecuUve m the apodosis. Gen. 33, i8sq. Ex. 18, 16; with a
nouo^lanse, Is. i, 15.
3. ^9 *itik a Mtnn^hnu (and Imperfect in the apodo^), a Sam. 19, 8.
Digitized by Googl
Concessive Clauses.
RlMARKa.
1. Id a 5, 13 the particle ^HK (Masora ^M, probably in the sense of my CC
father) appears exceptionally for ^ ; its meaning here is onqnertionable, but its
origin is obsctire. Coinp. the exhaostive discussion of Deliusch and Wtt/stein

on Job 34, 36, where this *3i< appears to be used as a desidcrativc particle.
Sometimes wlien one case hai> betn rdrtidy di^Qi3e<i, another of the same
diMictcr is added by meuif of ^^^ or, c. g. Ex. 31, 36 'SI or (another
pOMtble case) it is kmwn iknt, \.t. imt if U he kmrnt^ BLCt LXX idv U,
Vulg. nn amtem; ecnnp. Ler. 4, 33. j8. 5, i. 95, 49. s Saan. ]8> 13; widi a
following imperfect, Ezdc. 14, 17 sq*On the hypotiietical me of "US^ (wbtch
is interchangeable with ^3 in other sensa also) Lev. 4, as (ia veiaea 3 and 17 DM),
0eut. IT, 27 (verse 28 DK), Jos. 4, at, see the Lexicon.
2. The conditional sentence is frequently found in an abridged form, where the (Ui
suppressed claust"; can be easily supplied from the context; coiup. Gfii '3,9.
24, 49. 1 âin. 2, 16 K^"DN1 ami if not^ equivalent to and if thou xvtit not
îxK it to met '^'^^ ^ it according to { 106. n) by force ; comp.
(perfect
I Sam. 6, 9. The use of alooe in Jad. 6, 13 is peculiar, as also in a KL 10, 15
(where we should read wiUi the LXX Min^ 10(^1) ^1 in the sense of
^ fir m; so in a Sam. 13, a6. a Ki. 5, 17 tK7\ looe is used in the sense
eitfmi^ . . nar, in cedi ease with a feUowuig jnisive equivalent to mtgf iJktrt
M'iuuf, ftc (c I X43. li). In I Sam. 13, 13. Job 3t 13 the condition most be
supplied from the preceding clanse to complete the sentence introduced by
nny ^3 (job 31, ^8 hy >3, 2 Ki. 13, 19 by TX>.The apodosis also apj)cars some-
times in an abridged form (e.g. Gen. 4, 34. Is. 43, 2) or is entirely suppressed,
e.g. Gen. 30, 27. 38, 17. 50, 15 (see letter y above), Ex. 32, 3a. Ps. 27, 13. Job
iS, 5, where properly Ipjn must be supplied with yiA as in verses 4 and 18
cf. ( 167. iw^Jn Ps. 8, 4, instead cf the ^Mdoiis / txekdm which we shoiild
eapecl, die CTrlamaHon ilKlf followt.
3. The abeoiute certainty with whidi a result is to be detected, is Ircquently it

cmphaiiied bjr the bsertion of 9; T^-*^ s Sam. 2, 27. 19, 7. Job 11, 15;
It, 7,
or ttPiy ^2 turn vtrify. Num. aa ag. 1 Sam. 14, 30 after ^P, Gen. 31, 4a. 43* 10
after Job 8, 6 after DK. On this tmvd^ratim ^9 compsi each pamsffes as
Gen. 18, ao^ &c, and ( 148. J.

4. Sometimes the force of a hypolheticnl j
nrticle extends beyond the apodosis
to a second conditional clanse, as in the case of DK Prov. 9, la. Job lo, 13. 16, 6.
22, 23. and ^3 Is. 43, 2.
5. In iui. 33, 20 a negative statement takes the place of a condition with a ^

negative consequence, >Sr a mmi doth mot suwu mid Omt, mstead of for ifa mam
sees mo, ho does not live} oomp* the similar paassgei^ Dent, aa, 4 x. thorn thedt
jM/ is . . . mtd hide tfys^, instead of ^ thorn seost . . . thou shaU not hide thyse^,
{lOO* Concmwe Clautet,
Besides the use of tlic imperative in the sense of a concession, a

meant either seriously ( 110. a) or mockingly 110,/), and of
Dlgitizea b/ CjOOgle
526 The Sentence, [ 161.
concessive drcamstantial clauses ( 141.^, f 141* ^> and 156./).

concessive clauses may be introduced
(a) By a simple if : thus Job 9, 15 with pericct, if {=i}u>ugk) I had btK
in the right; Is. i, 18 and 10^ 22 with imperfect in reference to a contingent eveot.
b {b) By 3 yea thau^, Is. i, 15 with impetfect; for which we find imply
Qd in Is. 49, 15 with imperfect, yea, though iXw may forget, yet on die otlier
hand, with perfect, Jer, 36, 25. Fe. 95, 9. Ndb 6, i finally D3 evm ^, ik^t^j
;
Eccles. 4, 14.
C (e) By the prepoeitlon *^ governing a complete noniMlante^ as Job 1$, 17
"^Jpa ODI^'M^ b'S nttw^hHmiing HanX m

vidmce t in mine hmtdt, or a Yerbal-
clause, Is. 53. 9- On with the iafinitiTe ia a similar sense (eqaMeDt to in
additsm to tki/aci that i- naiwHAstandi^g that), oomp. S 1x9. note s.
f lOL CmparaHve Chmtn,

a 1. A comparison between two facts is sometimes established by
simply uniting them with ivaw copulative, especially in gnomic poetry,
when facts of a moral nature are compared with those of the j)hysical
world, e. g. Job 5, 7 man is born unto trouble, and the sons of fiame
Jly upward^ i.e. as the sparks by nature fly upward, so man, &c.;
Job IS, II (in an interrogative form; in 34, 3 the same comparison
as a statement); more commonly in the opposite order, 14, 11 sq.
Prov. 17, 3. 25, 3. a6, 3. 9. 14. 1^7, si, Ac.* Even without the
connecting \ Job 94, 19 drtn^ht and heai ctmsimu the snow waters^
mn ^Kf^ so doth She^ those vho have sinned (comp. 155. n);
comp. Jer. 17, 11.
t 2. The conjunction (comp. i^^^g i the simple "^^^ occurs
in the same sense in Ex. 10, 6. 14, 13. 34, 18) as, quemadmodum,
is used as a comparative conjunction (Obad. 15), frequently with
}3 tfy, conrespcmding to it in the apodosis, Is. 31, 4. 5s, 14 sq.
Sometimes, however, }9 {ô ttiso) occurs even after independent state-
ments, Is. 55, 9. Jer. 3, 20. Exact coincidence of two focta is
expressed in Eccles. $ 15 bj -B^ tf^lgr^ m all pamis at,
* On this wSm tuUuptationt K, and in general on these J^rative i*iw>* of

comparison, see Delitzsch, Das Salomonische Spnuhhtuh, p. 9 sq. Moreover,
iiT^tead of entire clauses, the nouns alone ; without predicates) are freqnently
grouped together, e. g. Prov. 25, la. 25 &q. (called by Delitzsch, the 'embkmatic
Masbal The expressions D]^ P'^^P* ^ counted with some one, Ps. 88, 5,
and 09 Vl^3 tc if Hkmtd with som* one^ Ps. 28, i. X43, 7, also arise from the
idea of comparison injîed in grouping things loi^cther. On this ess of c
Job 9, s6, where with Is eqnivalcat to Uhe,
Digitized by Google
{16^.] Adversative and Exceptive Clauses, 527
Rem. On the use of 3 as, with single noons or prononns to introduce com- C
parison$, comp. 118. s; on the alleged use of 3 as a conjanction (equivalent to
Hp^^jD)! comp. $ 155-^. It is to be further remafked tliat 33 when used in
correspondence with one another, as so (e. g. Lev. 7, 7. Is. 24, 2. llos. 4, 9;

ftlsoivOf, Gen. x8, 25. 44, 18; in Jos. 14, it. z Sun. 30, 34 343; P<- ia7, 4
f3 3 comp. , Joel 4), MPt not to be r^juded as conjnnctiona, but as- viitnel
mlietentivee with a follonring genitiTe ; iTil^ na3 D33 Nun. 15, 15 property means
ikt Uke tfyoH skatt HtktKki^tke Mira^ggr, jwur duty skUl 6* (also) II0
strm^gier's ditfy; cC Lev 24, as.
{ 102. Disjumtwt Smimcet.

The introducdon of another possible case, excluding that which
preceded, is effected by He ^r, e.g. Ex. 21, 36, equivalent to the
Latin vel ; but also equivalent to aut with an exclusive antithesis,
2 Ki. 2, 16; so Is. 27, 5 i{< = // would Ihm happen thai, lor w hich
elsewliore ^3 ix.
In the sense of sive sive we find or DM, or DK} OK b

(see the examples m the Lexicon), also 1
\ Lev. 5, 3. Num. 9, 14.
Deut. 24, 7. Is. 3, 13 sqq. Jer. 32, 20. Ps. 76, 7. Job 34, 39, peihaps
also Ex. 2 1, 16 (but not Prov. 29, 9 ; comp. Delitzsch on the passage),
and ^^ (see $ 143, ); cf. also Pi EUj (in Gen. 24, 44 DS> D|)
boihand; but A Di-l6 Di (in Gen. 21, 26 A IUU-t6 D^^; Zech.
1, 18 fei^
D2) neither <>r. On disjunctive questions, see 150. g.
{ 168* AduersaHve and Exceptive Clauses.
L After negative sentences (especially after prohibitions) the
antithesis {but) is introduced by D4< e.g. i Sam. 8, 19 and they
saidf Nay J
but we will have a king over us; Ps. i, a and elsewhere;
frequently also by alone, e. g. Gen. 18, 15. 19, 2, or even simply
connected by], Gen. 17,5, n;n{ as perfect consecutive ^ 4S loj
cf. Ex. 5, 18.
Renu Sometimes tiie ncsadon is onljr vtrtaally contained in die pieeediag sen- t
tence, e.g. in die fonn of a ilietorical qnestion (Mic. 6, 3 sq.) or of conditions

which are to be rq;arded as not having been fulfilled (Job 31, 18); or OK ^
becomes equivalent to nay, rather.
in such cases
2. Exceptive clauses, depending on another sentence, are introduced C

by ^9 DD^ except that^ and (again after negative sentences, see letter a
above) DM unless especially DIjt ^ with the perfect (equivalent
* Very probably this use of ^3 arises from the original meaning for if,
mrely ^ îp in an a&rmative sense); so evidently in Ex. 2a, a a as a Xorcible
Digitized by Google
528 The Sentence.
to unUs$ previously) after imperfects which contaui a declaration, e. g.
Gen. 32, 27 I will not let thee go, except thou hast previously blessed me;
Lev. 22,6. Is. 55, 10. 65,6. Amos 3,7. Ruth 3, 18. Finally, OX ^njja
unless. Amos 3, 4 (with perfect after a rhetorical question), or simply

Gen. 43, 3 with a noun-clause, except your brother U with y<m;
Is. 10, 4 after a rhetorical question, with a verbal-clause.
d Rem. Tbe pnnclpal stotemeiitt to whldi DK ^ appeiidt aa exceptioQ, nuut

cometimes be sopplied from the context ; thus, Geo. 40, 14 (I desire nothing dae)
extept that thou remember me, equivalent to only do ihou remember, Sec. (comp.
106. ;/, note a). Comp. Mic. 6, 8, where DJ^ ^S, equivalent to nothing but^ is
used before an infinitive, and Job 42, 8, equivalent to only^ before a nonn.
164. Temporal Clauses,
a L The relatioiis of time eiisting between two diffierent actions
or events are frequently expressed without the aid of a conjunctloQ

simply by juxtaposition
(a) Action* or evorta are repreiented as wholly or in pail HmuiHmeom by connect-
inga nonii'Chiiue with another oom-danae or verbal-clanse introdaoed by \ (or n|np,
e.g. Gen. 7, 6 and NmA waa six Mtmdnd years eii (pn^ a sm efnx ksmdni
years), njn \fSaB8r(\ aud vhen) tkejhod was. Thia la capedally die caw
(i.e.
when the predicate of the nonn-dause (freqaently introduced by Tiy still) is

ezpraned by an active participle, cg. Job X, l6aq. feO iT{| ^^^yif n| T^J
he was yet speakinj;, and there came another^ &c.; see the numerous examples
in 111.^ aud 116 n. Instead of a complete nouu-clause there often occurs
a simple casus pendens alter "^3 with a participial attribute in the sense of -vh^n'
ever any <we . . e.g. i Sam. a, 13 KIl^ Pint fut w^'N~^3 wJutuvr any trMn
offered sacrifice, them eaate, &c.; a Sam. 2 23 and elaewbere; see the examples
(in wfaidi tlie second member ia genciaUy introdnoedfay tmJwi^îfldSMKr) in 1 116. v.
^ (i) Seqnenoe ia czpiemed by the juxtapontion (i) of two imperfects consecutive,
e.g. Gen. 34, i9*1Dl(n) ^^{^^ ami when she had done ghtng kirn drfy$kt
she said, Ac, aS, 8sq. 29,31, 30,9. 3a, a6, &c; comp. tii. <// (a) of a
noun-clause with a passive participle as predicate, and a verbal-clause attached
by e.g. Gen. 38, 25; comp. | ir6. v; in Gen. 49, 29 an imperative follows
witiiout 1 ; 7,^ of two perfects (irequeatly with the secaadar)' idea of rapid sncces-
alon* of the two actions or events in past time), e.g. Gen. 19, 23 . K3P fi?^|ln
resnmpdon of the pieoedii^ bit. Thos, e.g. Jnd. 15, 7 is simply jurtfy when
I have bem aSMmgsd ^yaa, e^ter that I will teau, eqniTalcnt to, I will not cease,
nndl I have, ftc. When the exception follows, an ellipse must be assumed, e.g.
Ruth 3, 18 mrtly (or for") when hi Li'- finished it (then the man will re^t\ Tt !<;
far le^ natural to assume such an ellipse with OK but (before entire clauses
as before single nouns) ; see letter a above.
^ This seoondaiy Idea b implied here by the mere eo-oidbtaticii of two independent
feHtfAelnnses, just as the ideaof stmnltaneona oCGnmnoe (aocording to 1 116.
Digitized by Google
Temporal Clauses, 529
th<- 'lo! -j77s ;!/si' rhen . . ., Z^/ cafne, &c., comp. t Sam. 9, 5.
a Sam. 2, 24 ;
39 &q. in ail these examples the
Gen. 44, 5 &q. j ud. 3, 24. 15,14*
tiit(iecl foUowi i mwdBttdy after die eoBBcetiire Wliv, end then the (limple)
perfect. On tiie oAer bend, (4) a perfect coueentite follows enoUier perfect
consecutive toCspBOi the contingent succession of future actione, Oi^ Ga*44j4
OS^ rnpKI Oria^l and wkm thm ektt einrimki tkm (as soon as thoa shnit
have overtaken), thou ihalt say unto them. Naturally, example- of thi? kind are very
closely related to conditional sentences ;
sec, therefore, the rxampics in iii.kk
and 159 /. On the connexion of an imperfect consccative or a perfect with

detached expresaons of time (as equivalent to complete clauses), cL iii. ^;

OB the imperfect comecnthre after and a itafiement of t&n^ c % iiug; on
die perfect coniecatlve felloiriiig detached etatencnt of tiiiie, as in Ex 16, 6,
Mi--In I Sain. s9 10 an impemtiYe widi ^ foUowt Ae peifeet conKcati^
d*. f 119.
The fact that one action or event has not yet taken place on the occurrence C
(5)
of another, is expressed by Q^D (an adverb, not n conjunction) with the imperfect
(according to 107. c). The apodosis, which may consist of a subject and perfect
or even of a noun-clause (Gen. 34, IfiOi ^ ^^^^ connected by \
(or HSrO) as in the
example above, under no. 3, e.g. Gen.

4 (comp. 19, To?:. 2, 8) ^K'pKI ^^2^ 0*10
in Xap3 . . ^*yri they had not yet lain dtwn^ and when) the nun of the
city . . . compussedy &c.; Geo. 24, 35.
8. Conjimctioiis used to introduoe temporal daiises aie ^ and * d

whin with the impeifect ako as At oflm as, Pg. 8, 4); less frequentljr
BK* (jouied with a perfect), e.g. Gen. 38, 9. Num. 9t, 9. Jud. 6, 3.
P9. 41, 7. 94, 18, comp. also Is. 94, 13 = quoHeseunque ; also in die
same sense with an imperfect, Num. 36, 4 ; with a perfect equivalent
to the fulurum exactum, Is. 4, 4. Other conjunctions of time are the
comj>ounds to3 when, Gen. 19, 15; "^B'^S whcn^ after thai; '^B^t'Ty^
until (also the simple "^S, e.g. Gen. 38, 11. Jos. a, aa. i Sam.
I, 22 [with the imperfect = when^ as in 2 Sam. 10, g]; a, 5 and
dsewbere; especially in the ibnnula ^ "^^^1$^ ^9^?^ unMl ên was
none rmoAwig h Mm,
Nam. 31, 35. Dent. 3, 3. Jos. 8, as. 1 1, 8
but I Sam. 14, 19 whUe, as hng as); i6 1$ he/an ikat, Ecdes.
la, I. a. 6 with an imperfect^ as in Prov. 8, 26 *Vi with a perfect;
Dnf DK TB^py , un/i'l the time when; "^îj'^K (for which in Eaek.
note I) la implied in the co-ocdination of a nomMlaaie with anodier danae.
In Gen. %1, 30 tlw inunediaie enoceirion la eipeeially cmphaaized by

infinitivr al solnti?, Jafob was yet scarce gone out
and the
. then Esau hit h^ttksr mm* .
^
in Ps. 48, 6 by p and the addition of two more perfects without '\.
* On the perfect in the protasis, which is critically doubtful, comp. 107. C,
' On "yp^ as an original demonstrative, cf. 138. a; hence S^C^j "^^^^J

is properly u/> to that (moment) we shall retuf-n.
' Ajoalogoas to the ireqaent me of wenn [prop. if\ fortnaum [w^] in Gennan.
Mm
Digitized by Google
539 The Sentence,
40, I "f'lpW;
Jer. 41, 16. Job 42,
Lev. as, 48. i Sam. 5. 9 simply
7 simply
; Lev. 14, 43.
">n) a/ier thai; tl (prop, tmce ihat

^
time; the dependent clause is attached to it in the same wzy as the
attributive clause to the demonstrative '>B'K 138. e) since. Gen. 39, 5

D-iDS (and simply QÔ 107. c) be/ore;
ngng (for "ÎJ np-^) ^Jgâr^,
Ps. 129, 6.
^ Rem. 1. With regard to the tenses used with the .ibove conjunctions, the nalcs
are practically the sannc as those given in 15S. for ciusal clauie>. The
perfect indicates actions completed in the past or future (in the former case
corresponding to the Latin pluperfect, io6./, and in the latter to the Latin
/kiumm iMUtum, { 106. the impeffect denotes aetioBt oocuninf cootingently
in tbc fatore. On WVQ^ ^'^9?* "d iy with the impedectns a itmftts kiOniemm,
comp. 1 107. f
f 2. Chntes introduced by ly, ^2P1J>, or '^B^^y, sometimes express a limit

beyond
which is not absolute (termmatiog the preceding action), but only relative,
which the action or condition described in the principal clause still continues;
thus, iy with the imperfect, Pa. 110, i ; *3"ny with the perfect, Gen. a6, 13;
l^îy with the perfect. Gen. 28, 15 ; with the imperfect, Ps. 112, 8. Like Uic
Arab. may even introduce a main clause; e.g. Ex. 15, 16 "^^JT'^tp
prop, no doubts thus it came to this they passed (wcr^ i. e. so they passed over,
g 3. The cemtroet governed by a prepositioa ( 114. </, ) is very

infinitive
fitqnentljr used as the eqnivalent of a tempoial elanse; (he infinitive with a nay
Bioally be leodeied io ESglidi hy smlm, of, or tMiUs the infinitive witii 3 by

wkmt at torn as (in Pror. 10, 35 followed by a noun-clause introduced by wim
e^Mtfisis), or, when referring to the future, by i/f tlic infinitive after \0 by situe.
According to i iii.^ such statements of time are generally preceded by "tiys
and the apodosis follows in the imperfect consecutive; hence in i Sam. 17, 55
(cf. Driver on the passjige; ni6<"121 with a simple perfect following, is unusual.
On the continuation of these infinitival constructions by means of the perfect
consecnttve, comp. iii.v, and in goieral, S 114. r. With the participle 3
appeals to be nsed as die equivalent of a conjonctira In ypD^ as keebwkuk,
29 (anless we should read ^^t^ro), and in nrribs wkm U iudied, 40, 10.
{ 165. Finai Clauses K
a ! Like moat of the dependent clauses hitherto treated, the final
clause may also be joined by a simple waw copulative to the main

clause, unless the nal clause is directly subordinated to the
governing verb.
Examples of the connexion (a) of a final imperfect (or jnssireT) with a
; perfect
by means of 1, Lam. i, 19, see % 107. q; with an interrogative senieoce, a Sam.
* Comp. B. G. T. lOtcheU, Flmd Caiuirueikm ^ BOUtai Mmt> Leipzig,

l79'
Digitized by Google
Final Clauses. 531
9, I. 3. Job 38, 34; with an optative, Ps. 51, 9; (tf) of a cohortative with an
imperative by 1, Gen. hj, 21. 1 Sam, 15, 16, or a juasive, Nch. 2, 5 ( 108,
(7) of a jussive with an imperative by ) , Ex. 9, i. aSarn. 16, 11. i Ki. 5, 30. Ps.
59, 14. 86, 17; with a jussive, Job 21, 19, or cohortative, 109./, ^ (comp. alio
a San. 14, ax the infiaitfve wisk Jon. i, 11 with the lit plur. impeil, and
a ChroD. ap, lo which ate cqnivalent to eohortatim); (JS) of an unpen-
tive with a jiKlve cohortative, or interrogative aentence by ; () of a V $ iio>
peHect oooaecntxTe after another perfect conaeentive* Lev. 14, 36 ; alter an Iraper*
fe<^, 112. m and /; similarly after a jimive { Ita. ^; after an imperative,
113. r. On negative final clauses joined by to the imperfect (so Ex. 28, 43.
30, 20 ; and 1 Sam. 13, 25 after with a jussive in the main clause) sec the
Rem. on 109.^. Tn Ex. 28, 32. 39, 23 tlie nefritive final clause is simply con-
nected byii^. On the use of historical statement alter verbs of commnndinjj,

where we should expect a 9 then I commamudy and
iinai clause (e.g. Neb. 13,
tk^ eltanud, equivalent to that th^ skamld ctamstt and thty etumstd; in Job 9, 7
a negative final clanae is connected in this way by comp. f l^f
For eaampks of the direct snboidinaticD of the iinal imperfect (without 1) see
f tao. e.
2. Final conjunctions are to ifu end that; also simply b

Geo* 18, 13. S7 35. Ex. 4, 5. Ps, 51, 6 and elsewhere ; "Aajg
yio'p^firfke purpost thai^ Gen. 27, 10, and simply Gen. 37, 4.
z. % 14. so, so; also the simple "W^^^ Deut. 4, 10.40. 6, 3. 3S 46.
Jos. 3, 7. Neh. 8| 14 sq.; negativelj, i6 Gen. 11, 7. 24, 3.
I Ki. 2S, i6; or Eccles. 3, 14; also negatively, ^laT^^y
for the matter {purpose) thai . . , not, Eccles. 7, 14 ; ^vh"^ witli imperfect,
Ex. 20, 20. 2 Sam. 14, 14 thai . . . not. Quite exceptional is the use
of "IP (if the text be right) in Dcut. 33, 1 1 with the imperfect,
equivalent to thai .mt\m prose, 0^].
Rem. All the conjonciiotts here mentioned are natnrally always used with the C
imperfect, see % 107. q (on Jos. 4, 24, see | 74. g), On the negative conjunctions
b|t and |B tkat mt, lest, see i and w. On the infinitive with b * (also fff^
Gen. 18, 19. 37, 22 and elsewhere) n< the rquivalcnt of a final clause (Gen. ti, 5.
38, 4, &c.), see 114-/, h,p. On the continuation of such infinitival constructions
by means of the finite verb, sec 1 14. r. On the nejâtion of the final infinitive
by ^ri|)Ili), 114- J. On the preposition JO with a substantive or infinitive as the
Si *
equivalent of a negative final clause (Gen. 31, 39. i Sam. 15, 33, &c.), see % 119. or
and J'.
' In Ezek. 36, 37 a final clause is introdnced bgr*^^ ri^,thns at the sanae time
taking the form of an object'-danse.
On i as a supposed conjonction (equivalent to the Ambic /i) i KL 19, see
M m 2
Digitized by Google
532 The Sentence.
$166. Comecuiive Clauses,
with the jussive ^ especially after negative and interrogative sentences^

e.g.
thai
Num.
lie
23, 19 en^n^^ Dlîi''
should In, inui (i. e. neither) ihe son
^ ^ is
of man, ihat he should

not a man,
repent; Is. 53, 2 ^HlDn:] ; Hos. 14, 10 DV7:'! f"^ n^^.s: Dan p
K'///? 7J ivise, thai he may understand these things ? prudent, thai he may
know them? In Gen. 16, 10 a negative consecutive dause comes
after a cohortative, and in z. to, 5 after a perfect consecuttve. On
the other hand, in Job 33 the Jussive in the sense of a con-
9, 5a.
secutive clause is attached without W9xo to the preceding negative
sentence (in verse 33 a second jussive follows, likewise without Warn,
for he is fi^ a man, as lam, thai T shmU answer him, that we shauli
come together in judgement). On ihe imperfect consecutive as expressing
a logical consequence, see 111. // on the perfect consecutive as a

consecutive clause after a participle, see 112.
b 2. Conjunctions introducing consecutive clauses are again (see
{ 157.^, note 3) ^9 and "^=10 ihat; espedaily again after interro-

gative sentences, according to 107. / comp. Num. x6, 11, ^9 with
the imperfect, ihat je nutrmsir/ on the other hand, in Gen. so, 10
with the perfect in reference* to an action already completed. On
"^B^ with the imperfect (or jussive) equivalent to so that, comp. furtiier
Gen. 13, 16. 22, 14; with perfect and imperfect, i Ki. 3, la sq.,
with the demonstrative force clearly discernible, depending on 3^;

on = ut non, comp. Deut. 28, 35. i Ki. 3, 8. a Ki. 9, 37.
On IP with a sobftantiTe or infinitive m the eqaivalent of oomeontive gUmc*

see i 1 19.jr.
167. Aposiopesist Anacoluihon, Involved Series 0/ Sentences,
a "L Apotiepesis is the concealment or suppression of entire sentences

or dauaes, which are of themselves necessary to completed sense*,
and theiefm must be supplied from the context This is especially
^ That such examples as are to be regarded as jussive, is probahlc from the

analopTv of Hos. 14, xo and Job q,
' On the other hand, those cases arc cot to be regarded as examples of .iposio-
pesis, inwlikh the tBtwer beiag doedy omneded with the ^nation, is given
dmplj in the inSnitiTe with p ; oomp. f 147. a, note 1.
Digitized by Google
167.] Aposiopesisy A nacoluthon^ etc. 533
frequent arter conditional clauses ; besides the examples already given

in 159. cf. also Ex. 32, 32 (the LXX and Samaritan supply Kb);
Num. 5, 20. Jud. 9, 16 (in verse 19, after a long parenthesis, an
imperative follows as the apodosis to this conditional clause); i Sam.
12, 14 sq. 2 Sam. 5, 8 (where indeed the text is probably very corrupt;
comp. the addition in 1 Chron. 11, 6); 2 Sam. 23, 17. Ps. 27, 13.
I Chron. 4, 10. For other examples of various kinds, see 117./,

and especially 147. On Gen. 3, 22, comp. 152. w at the end.
2. Anacoluthon is the change from a construction which has b

been already begun to one of a different kind. It is found
especially after long parentheses, because the speaker has either
lost sight of the beginning of his sentence, or for the sake of clearness
purposely makes a new beginning; thus Gen. 20, 13. 31, 52 and
Kzek. 34, 10 (comp. 149 at the end); Num. 14, 21 sqq. 32, 20 sqq.
Deut. 17, 2 sqq. 24, i sqq. 29, 21 sqq. Jud. 10, 11 (where, after
a series of intermediate sentences, the predicate / saved you is sup-

pressed) ;
perhaps also Is. 66, 1 8 (comp., however, Delitzsch on the
passage, which is certainly corrupt)'. On Gen. 23, 13 with the
imperative), see \ \o,e,
3. We may mention as instructive examples of involved series of C

sentences Gen. 24, 14 and 42 sqq., and Gen. 28, 6 sqq.
* On the other hand, &om the Semitic p>oint of view the various kinds of
compound sentences are not to be regarded as instances of anacoluthon, e. g. Gen.
17, 14. 17, nor even Gen. 31, 40 (comp. % 143).
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
P. I9i oote a, Imt 9, afifr *ZDMG 1895, i aqq.* add 'and 335 aqq.*
i 5. compare Datman, ArumaisdU GrtmnuOikf p. 99, note t, and especially
Kikiig, LehrgOandi, ii. ago iqq.
f 9. line 5, omit c^.
{ la^, last line, for HDl^H rM^ '"^l^P ^ ^ >> is a tratioas
reading).
15. <J, add '

J. M. Japhet, Die Accente der heiligen Sthri/t, Frankfurt, 1896.'
% a8. a, line 11. for vfyehMd' read *vfyhMa.^

*
\ 45. b, line 4, read 'according to 84 j. ^, jjoes back to the ground-form qUAl'
45.il iuie 7, /7//rr ' (Baer E^j}) ' aa>i in 2 Chroo. 34, 10 Bacr and Ginsbiug
read pinsS'-'
f 49. line 8, 28, 15.
$ 49. /, line 5, a/?<rr * a Sam. 15, 33' odSf ' bot Baer and Giasburg readn^/
f 51. Mt ^pan Amos 3, 10 (for WSlJjl) should also have beea owatiooed. .
I 5s.<, line a; J 55. </, line 9; S 55./ line a; f 4{6., Une<; f 67. e, Une3,
f 58. ^ line 5 ' Dent.' oi^ *6, 17 IQ^.'
S 6a, tine 8, Mm/ '64, e.*
f 63. , line a end, ' letter ^ '

; in line 6, read '
| 67. ** -
P. a34, line i, a//er < Ps. 118, 14' nod < bot this ia probably for/ dec.
i90.d, line a, rmx/ rn9'>3nc.
P. 285, line I, read *
pita, rtnaiO.'
P. 389, under G*jnO^ read a duMk piece of richfy
*
uwm 9h^!
P. 396, mukr srd plar. maac, nad D^^^^,
P. 308, line 5, >- ra/ up.
Digitized by Google
THE PARADIGMS.
In the paradigms of the verbs, those forms which are to be
especially noticed by the beginner are marked throughout by an
asterisk as model forms. Thus e.g. in the strong verb the 3rd sing,
fern. is the model for î'PiJ, which likewise has only a vocalic
afformative, and >s the model for ^)'^P^, ^^^^^ and ^^S"?^, which
in the same way have a toneless afformative beginning with
a consonant. On the other hand, the forms Dî>Op and iriSÔ?, where
the affix beginning with a consonant has the tone, stand by them-
selves. In the table of the pronouns the asterisk has a different
meaning; see the foot-note there. The bracketed forms (from

Paradigm G onwards) are merely analogous formations not occurring
in the Old Testament.
Digi
536 Paradigms.
A, The Personal
Nominative of the Pronoun, Accusative of the Pronoun,

or Pronomen separatum.
A,
Simple form.
Sing. I . comm. ^3iN , in pause ;
î^J, in pause /.
m. nriN (rn<)^ in pause 1; Vt-, in pause

3. nriK
T T
m. KVI
'^-T-; her (earn).
P/wr. I. f n3|j{ (n5) av.
D3 ; )
2. you.
1/ r?'^?,
^
m. on, rran
(D.;.), <D^*M {eos).
1/ D ,
0W /-^; (M ''-^'^
I
,
Google
The Persoftal Pronoun. 537
or Suffixmn Virh\ Genitive of the Pronoun, or Sufixum Nominis

(Pron. possesstvum).
A.
With ndn mergicum. Attached lo a sing, Attached to a noun
noun. plur. or dual.
V y (prop. gen.
ami).
1, 1^, in j ffy
pause I (prop.
not found. 1|, (^)J /to).
in, 1; W^J
{eutt and iwitr).
7; 'V; '7-^
-5^?(see58.ifc)
these forms are
not found.
I?, 10, Ur\
FoMfrilhaiiaifcaiifcaieexdiiiivdy]Niette,aMiebp^^
Digitized by Google
538 Paradigms,
B. Strong
Qal. NipKal. PCH.

^
Per/. Sing. 3. m. |b?* 7p?, tJpi?*
3/ : i
nJ>Dp3*
2. m. nbppa*
T - t
J
2./. ;- T
p5>pp
1
I. c. ^n!)DP3 ^nijop
:- T
Plur. 3. c. Ut3p
V I
2. nu UJ
V
1
! ~ S
DnsDp*
r T :
... . -
2./.
<
I. c. - T
:
Inf. na3*
Inf. absol.
Imp. Sing. 2. m. 133*

- 1
a./ n33* : 'rr

P/ur. 2. m. n33
2.f T : - : t: - '
Impf Sing. 3. m.
I
^*
L
3/ i>b|?n n33n ijp^n >ppn

2. m. i>bpn i33n 7ppn
2.f n33n*
I. f. n33K
- V I
^P2
Plur. 3. m. : I

3/ n3i33n*
T - : :

nji'ppn*
2.
2./ T :- :

n3!)p|5n niinspn
1. f.
Shortened Impf. {fussive).
Part. act. n33T

Ib^ i'PPp*
pass. iwi5*
'
Google
Strong Verb. 539
Verb.
Pu'al. HipKU. Hoph'al. Hithpdel.
n!rDpn* njtjpn* ninspnn*
ni)opn* jni)6pn*
T
< - i
nSepn ninDpn
: - "it
:
nlnspnn
- *jni>opn
-
^jni>iDpnn
:
'-s

t "it
iT'Dpn 5 T
:
Dn!>Dpn cnbopn
^jbepn
wanting. wanting.
"It
!)K>pnn*
înspnn*
wanting. wanting.
î>Dpn
T
nîjBpnn*
;
r
7BpJT*
7pnn
. I. - i>epn
"IT i>i3pnn
^S'Dpn* 'Stppnn*
S>ispnK
njfjDpn*
T ~ ;- wbopn*
T -'it
:
n3!)opnn*
t: X

I V ( : : T
njjjcpn
i)DpD
533 Paradigms.
Ptr/.Sing.^.m. bwj* fla?*
3 / n^p* ^* "5^*
3./. J?l?|* J^^sfe* J?SPP3*
^133
Pib-.a-r. %
QPiboi?*
VIM
tmxxs* Qjsop*
^
Dri|)p|53 Dn5(?
a./ injjpi? IPiiaa lâop |rij)Di?3 jnh??
absol. hhX^*
Imp, Sing, a. m. ^b^* op*

a,/ ^!>pp*
PiSw. a. . App
a./ wSlD?*
Imp/. Sing, z,m, ^* lâ^ . jD?!* !wBf
Phr. 3.
i,c,
w. a3?
^ ^
3./ njifipn* fwaan* njSw^n* naJjeeR*
a. /. r^'fc^ Junbi? njj)i|n n^j)e9
Shortened Impf, (Jussive).
Digitized by Google
540 Paradigms.
C Sirot^ Virb
Sufixa x5%. zSaig.m, ^Sing.f, ^Sing,m.
Pnf, Qai 3. m.
T ; - ;
a./
I.
Phtr, 3. ^. 1%
a. ]Vf.
I. r.
In/. Qal
(from an Im/fr/, in a 'Ô^f)
/jNg^ Qal 3. JR.
M.
3.
with Aiin energ.)

1 - !w
Plitf* 3*
Per/. Pfil m, ^H^t i? ^

Digitized by Google
Strong Verb with Suixes. 541
wiik Suffixes.
3 Sing./. tPbfr. 3 Plttr, m.
X*
waating. wanting.
\ T "J /
wanting.
waating.
trn|>p wanting.
wanting.
wanting. wanting,
irantiiig. wanting. wanting.
wanting. wanting.
wanting.
wantingi * t * wantinflr.
^
wanting. wanting.
mndng. wanting.
Digitized by (AOOgle
542 Paradigms.
D, Verbs primae gutiuralis.
Oal HipKiL HopHaL
Per/. Sing* 3. m. nop*

mopn*
3./ <
a. fiL
I. . t-f5 :
Plur. 3. ^? far
a. /. VT.*
/
I. r.
In/.
wanting.

: IT
Imp/Sing. 3. M. ibj?;.* nor*

'^to??^
3./.
a. mi
a./ Itpyn* *TDyn
I. c. itojJN*
<
3./ nntosp "TO

a. , îti^rj
a./ ru-]% njnoyn njioyn mnoyn

I. ^, TOg. pTn3 now
Shariened Imp/ {/ussivc).
Part. aeL 1#
pass. TfSIf
ft
Digitized by Google
Verbs mediae guUuralis, 543
E. Verbs mediae gutiuralis.
OoL HithbetiL
Per/, Sing, 3. m. Ilia*
3/ T -:|T
nana
<
3. m. TO lann
/ - J

nana nanann
:
1. c. . . - , .
nannnn
:r
^na: 1
nann
DFonnin
../
< <
I. \33na oana ttanann
In/
wanting.
InJ. absol.
Jttit. Sitt^. m.
inann*
'ana* ânannl
~i>t
wanting.
PUitm M. -II-
ttna runann
/.
/Mj^ 5m^. 3. m.
3/ ipann
2. M. Dne'n ipann
2./ ' -tIT ' . -j|T J
I.
- - ,
- - ~ :
- T -.- -- T -J -J
^:i2n
T T S
Plur.y,m. WSf^ ônj^ 13nj;

^l^J ttna^
3./n}pnfn njehf^ n}??aj? nja^
9. 3nt^n êrnsfh lanan lailan lanann
2. / niDTC'n natsne^n naanan naanin naanann
or^3 on^3 iin^ ijna^
Part. act. nrp ti^^^ T|naD
Digitized by Google
544 Paradigms,
F. Viris
Qui. PCeL
^ T
3-/
K.t
a. m. Wr <
'/
I. c.
PImt. %. r.
onnW
a. / 1*1
WW
Inf,
- 'J
* t
/ :

Plur, m. : |T
/
* -
a. m
a./ : - 1
f. ^.
Plur. 3. m. : ~ t
3./ T : * ;

a. 1 IT
a./
^ ^- -
I. r.
Shortened Imp/, {/ttstwe).
Imff. wiOi Suff,
ParL aci.
pass.
Digitized by Google
Verbs teriiae gutiuralis, 545
uniae guihtralis>
PttaL
T t
T 1 ^- ;

t?
^ I?
J * >. * 1 * - t

V * s. r : * t T
*
I I T 1 1
-
-
' ^
- , . npripjt*
.
' I
-
wanting. wandng.
*s t 0 rr * - - ;
: T
T 1 * :
-
:
- s

T t ' V, :
t - -
... . *
J
>.
M n
Digitized by Google
54^ Paradigms.
G. Verbs tmdiiu: gcminatae
Per/, Sing. 3. m. 0, aap* Dej. ap|
a. m, rriap* rriapa*
a./ ntoo ntoj
3b aon*
M _
3./. ab9 Rem. 3) abn aen

a.M. sbn 3bri aen
a. / *3Dn 'aen*
/>Arr. 3. . efa; ?! ttj!
3./ ny|5^* [ninen] [r^^]

2.M. n uipn la&n
a./ [nj^lpn] [njabni [nj^Dn]
T. r, 3b3T 3D3

303
-
Imp/, with Waw conuc, 39*-* (p^^se ^'1)
Part. acL agb dp)
Digitized by Google
Ferbs mediae gemtMaiae or double v. 547
4fr douhli 9*
HipHSL Po'al,
IQQ1D
- ^M-
WW
- i :
- : :
-
ortapq 1- T
jrtopn V : - I
uaalo
aon* asto
aon agte taate]
aw aalo
waotiDg.
af!,ap;* aD* , 3DV* aaiD' aa^Dj]
aon
~ T apvi] aa^DPi aalon
ae" aateFi aaton
aoKT

a^D*
nrion* ruaalon
T - :t
<
na^top
aw
a^Jt
^laaiD^
Tq It
aDD a^ôD
ao aa^DD
T
Nn 1
Digitized by Google
546 Paradigms,
G, Verbs mediae gemmaUu

Oal Nihh'al
Per/, Sing. 3. m.
3./. T -
. <
a. M. f
a./ ni3D
I. e.
Plur. 3. c.
a. HI. Dn\3D onuo:

a./ vr(QD
I.
Inf.
Inf, aSsoL a^Bn, Dan
wart*
JrlMtr, in*
wA laan
Jf
J'
Imp/, Stag, 3. m.
3./ abn ReiiL3) ^bn am
2. m. 2bnT abn
a./ T J

3bit aidK aeK
< *
*
3/
2. m. " '
<
a./ p
I.
//o^. M/iM /f^Jit; consec. (pause ^M)
Imp/, wiih Stiff,
Pari, aet. aab aw

pass.
Digitized by Google
yerbs mediae geminaiae or double v. 547
et doMi %
AMmM ll>
nA
nsDn*
T T" 1
rrtaon*
*j - 1
'jprtapn
snaato
frtopn V : - 1
a3fo
'I
aate
apn aa^D [aate]
aon agio
^SDn
*
â^D]
wantiiig. w8ntii]|g
\aato
[nr|pn]
aaiD^ aaiD^]
aaloi^
aM
^
2DK [aaiDK -%
nf|pR* naâwn]* [waaiDn] ruaaion

r - : t
\apvi
nâlt^
[apo [ajloj [aatej
aDD aa)0D
am a^DD
T I
una
Digitized by Gobgle
543 Paradigms.
H. Verbs ft.
Niph'al. Hiph'U. Hoph'al,
Per/, Sing, 3. m,
3-/ !
* Trio
a./
I. c.
regular.
Plur, 3. c.
8. l.
t. r
Inf. its*
Inf. absoL "X
Inip. Sin^'. m.
/ wanting*
Plur, M.
/
Imf/^Sing, z,m ^. ^:*
3/
2.
2./
^/vr. 3. Kgdar.
3-/ r
3. m. ^ : >.
2./
I.
Sh'^rtt'Titd Imp/. {/ussiTe). ^!*
Part, act.
pass.
Digitized by Google
Weak Verds, 549
/. maJif Verbs, t'^
Qal. Niph'a!. HipKtl HopKal
Fir/. i^lft* i>8|Kl*
Like Verbs primat gtUUiralit,
In/, i!Ji?
In/ aitoL wanting; wanting.
/ ^ ftc. Ac wanting.

Im^, iiing. ^. m, ^JSt^^* (in j.ause
i^ptf/ i^g;
lit
3./ i>3J<') Ac. fte. Ac.
a./
1. 1. w
3./. njiito
./ [nji>5Hii]
I.
/Off.
Digitized by Google
550 Paradigms.
K. Weak Verbs,
Qal. NipKal.
Perf, Sm^. 3. m.
3./
a. nr.
./ rorb
1 - :
I.
regular.
Âir. 3. f.
2. m,
I. c.
//
wanting.
Imp. Sing, m.
/
PAfT. it.
/
In^/,Sitig, 3. SI.
3./. ghvi
a./
I.e.
Pbiur* 3* av* tie?*

; I-
: V
3/ T : - -
2. w.
a./.
I. r.
Shorkned Imp/. {Jussive).

Imp/, with Wdwcmuee.
/Off. att^
Digitized by Google
yerbs properly ^'b. 551
^(/ivf'fi). L, Verbs properly
Utphd, HopHaL Qal HipKtl.
3^*1* 30^* ao; a^^*

n^P^m 'TTi
It- : :
- FiaOM
1 - ~
:
... . . -
! - f
<
3b^ aw*
al
atHn*
a^ ae^m aÂ aw
a^l^ atta amn a^^î
âifftoi ^^^'^
. **
la^ lafNn
[nja&ta] [njai^]
at^ ag^ a*j [a^
ap^ a^D'D
afto*
Digitized by Google
552 Paradigms.
Qai.
Ptrf, Suig* 3. M.
3/ nnD*
a. m. T -
,./.
1. r.
m
Pktr. 3. 5
2. m,
2./.
I.
VP*
Jttf, absol.
Imp. Sing* m* Dip*
/
Fiur. m.
/'
Jm^, Sing. 3. .
3/
a. m.
1./ [1?*?]
l.r. Ditoii
^^^^^^^
P/kt. 3. m.
3./ .-me^n, n:^*

*
a. m* to^P9
2./ r\}*5(f9
1%
Shortened Imp/. Dj)J
Pari, oeL
past*
Digitized by Google
PVeak Verbs, ^jr. 553
Verhs, nr.
pern, pûa. NipHaL
Drrtp*
ni*
TT
<^
T -
;
^DO^P
Verb6 rp.
0M>
wanting.
[njDD^p]
139"
Dcrtpn T
^pp'iipn T
[PEW figlpi; [D0ipM
mDDfp^ njpplpn
[OQipa]
OQlipD
554 Paradigms.
Qal, Ftel.
Per/, Sitig, 3. m. T T ' - T
3./ T ! P
a.m.
./ iw|9 [WW]
I. c.
T T * J

Plur. 3. c. : r J r
a. m. DnK|ro DTttttD
I. r. ttici^
Inf. tihoL
Imp, Sn^. m. VtXD*

1 1
f' [W]
Phtr. m. I IT

/. f13IQ(D*
Imp/, Sm^, 3. m.
3/ t
.. -
a. nf
T :

Mitpn
/
I. c.
w MUM
Piur, 3. JK.

3/ T V T T r - 1
a.
: i : XT
a./.
Shorietud Imp/. {Jussivt).
In^.wUhSuff.
ParLaei,

pats.
Digitized by Google
IVeak Ferbs, Wb. 555
Verbs, MCb.
Pu*aL nUhpa'il.
nMTO mcvcn "WW

* 1 sJ t .. - }
" N
[nKifpnn
"s
rnrarDnn
*
wanting. wanting.
waiiung.
.
t
- 2

wanting. wanting.
I - 1

vacf*
Nl
Kinpnn
V J J
TIN
FKlRDnM
-IV
i s L
r
- !
T T I
L V vt r ts
Digitized by Google
556 Paradigms.
P. Weak
Pi"!]
Ptf/, Sing. 3. m.
3/ i
^ T
- f
I. C,
Pbtr, 3. r. *?
2. m.
3./ b *
I. ^. r * <
Inf. T
Inf. ahsol. T
Imp, Stng. m. J
/
rmtti
f-
3-/
a. m.

1
I. r. IK, nbitt
3./
a. in.
Am
/
1.
Sk^lemd Imp/,
ParL acL "is*
Digitized by Google
Weak VerbSf n"i, 557
Verbs, r<\
Pu'al. HipKiL HopKal. Hithpdel.
n^* nân* n^jn* n^nn*
"OK* n^J*}"* "O^jn*
wji wSn wfen ^;i*&in
[^\^. wSJi? [\?3n p*Snri
nip*
wanting.
"fe* ^)r* "^5^?^*
nân
%
nâri n^jjn
[n^??]
n^snn
[%
*S "hii
ro^]* na^ân* na^Jan*
^Van î)an ^ân t^snn
na^âri na^Sfjn na^^> [na^^Wj
.,- ) If,
nân* nbao*
Digitized by Google
INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
The ntnnbers refer to the pages, except where otherwise indicated. N.note.
A-sonnds, 38 sq.,
Abbreviations, 28.
^
sq. Aramaic language and Aramalsms,
14-16, sq., ma sq., 123.
2^ Ij
liS n.
Absolute cases, ^82 N. 3. 2 and 3j Pi'el, 143 : Ndn
epenthe-
Abstract for concrete, 236 : expressed by ticum, i&U Aramaic forms of verbs
the feminine, ^12 sq. by the plural,
: VVt 183 q.; of verbs V'p, 205J of
417 with the article, 427. verbs lYv, 224: Aramaic termination
Accents, i& names and laws of, 56 sqq.
:
of the fern., 233 sq. ; of the plural, 252.
of the poetical books, sq. ^
Accusative indicated by the tennfaiation
Archaisms, supposed, in the Pentateuch,
3-
n__, sqq.: by flK, 322 sqq.:
Article, 1 10 sqq.: syntax of, 424 sqo.;
use of,379 sqq.: accusative of the with demonstrative force, 424 : de-
object, 37v sqq.: double accus., 388 termining the class, ^36 sq. in com- :
sqq.: accus. of the product or result,

parisons, 27 : with the attribute, 429 :
389 sqq. looser subordination to the

:
used as a relative, 469 sq.
verb, ^ sqq. : accus. of place,
of time, ^<i2 sq. ; of cause, 393 ad-
> Ashdod, language of, 12.
verbial,
verb, 408.
^sqq. : accus. after a passive
Aspirates, 3i sq., ^ 23
Asseverations, 497.
Assimilation, 67^ 153, 1 80 sq. : of 1 and
Adjectives expressing condition, 393 : 200 sq. : * Kiickwarts- Assimilation,' 63.
periphrases for, sq., 463, 475 sq.
Assyrian language, a n. 3.
with the article, ^^g : in connexion Asyndeton, see Construction.
with the substantive, 448 sqq. as :
Attribute, its determination, 439 sqq.:
J>redicate in a noun-clause, 400 sq. its connexion with the substantive,
verbs, 305: expressed by the verb,
448 sqq.
366 N. ^^06 sq. with suffixes,
:
Attributive ideas expressed by "13
352 sq.
Adversative clnases, 527.
AfTormativcs of the imperfect, 122
, m^ tiic genitive,
by a substantive, 42S sq. : negative,
^
462 ;
of the noun, 245 sqq. expressed by a noun-clause, 507.

Agreement of members of a sentence in
gomlcr and number, 486 sqq. Babylonian punctuation, 40 S.
Alphabet, old Hebrew, 12^ 23 sqq.:
origin of, 26 sq.
B'gadk- jjhath, iî S3i 23 W 1^
Alphabetic poems, 27.

Cana.nnitish ijlosscs in the cuneiform
Anacoluthon, 533.
tablets of Tell cl-.\mama, II N. 2<
Answers, affirmative, 501 : negative,
Cardinal numbers, 2^ sqq.
501. 504-
Casie-ttrminations, remains of, 2^ sqq.
Aphaeresis, 62 sq., 128 sqq.. 1^ sq.
Cases absolute, 482 N. 2 : instrumental,
Apocope, fifi.: in verbs H'O, iiA.
486 N. L
Aposiopesis, 532 sq. Casus pendens, 378, 482, 521.
Apposition, 433, 443 sqq. : in the wider Causal clauses, 322, 352 sn., i8 sq.
sense, 447- Chaldec, incorrect use of the term, 2a
Arabic language and Arabisms, 2^ 2^*> Changes of consonants, 66 sqq.
78, 80. 112, lii sq., 128. Chiasmus in the arrangement of words
560 Index of Subjects,
in parallel members of a verse, 368 n., Dative, 400.
480 N'. L. Dativns commodi fand ethicns), 4001
Circumstantial clauses, 474 iq., ;15 sqq.: expressed by a suffix, 387.
nouD-claases, ^15 sq.: verbal, 479, Desiderative sentences, 501 sqq.
S16 sq. Determination of notins, 421 sqq.: omis-
Ciution, formulae of, 400- sion ol, 384 sq., 429 sq.TdcterminatioQ
Cohortative, Lil 311 "qq- of proper names, âa sq. determina- :
Coins, Hebrew, IQ. tion by the article, 434 sqq.: by a fol-

Collectives, 414. 415 sqq.; their syntax, lowing determinate genitive, 431 sqq.
487 : with the ploral of the attribute, determination of numerals, 456 sq.
44Q sq. : with the plural of the pre- Diminutives, atjo N- l.
dicate, 487. Diphthongs, 3i 44 Si sqq.
Common gender, 410- Distributive numerals, 458.
Comparatiodecurlata, [^94 N. I. 452 >f. i. Doubling (or sharpening) of consonants,
Comparative, expression of, 450 sqq.
Comparative clauses, â6 sq.
5j sq., 62 sqq.: in gutturals, sqq :
virtual doubling, 76 serves to mtensify :
^
Compensatory lengthening, 8^ S<^ the idea of the stem, virtual :
Composition of words, 104, 235, 503 doubling of K, 125 SR*: omission of

N. I ; of particles, 305. the doubling in verbs 183 sq..
Compound ideas in the plnral, âo sq. 189 sq.
with the article, 43a sq. : with suffixes, Du'aC sqq. : with the plural of the
463. ,
attribute, \of the predicate, 480 :
Compounds formed by }jO with a sub- in the numerals, 303, 458.

stantive or adjective, 503 N. L
Concessive clauses, 35 sq. E-sounds, 33 sq., 38^ sq.
Condition, adjectives expressing, 393. Elative, 346^450 n. 3.
Conditional sentences, 331. 336> 35' sq., Ellipse of the pronominal object, 3^
^2sqq. other cases of ellipse (real or appa-
Conjugations, or verba derivativa, 115 rent), 3222 3242 395 N. 45^ sq-, 4^ L
sqq. : number and arrangement "of. 511 N. L
Ill xi-i L22 ^q^'' common Emblematic Mashal, 536 N. L
conjugations, 155 sqq. Emphasis on indeterminate nouns, 384
Conjunctions, 316 a^q. sq., 4.?3.
Conseculio tcmj>orum, 135, 344 sq. Enallagc of the gender, 463, 483.
Consecutive clauses, 331, 531. Epicene nouns, 410.
Consonants, a^^fn changes of, 6<5sqq.:
- Epithets, poetical, used as substantives,
pronunciation and division of, iiisqq. 448 > I-
transcription of their names, N. a Era, Jewish, ifi.
' weak consonants, 33 : softening of,
' Ethiopic, L
69. Exceptive clauses, 537 sq.
Constructio ad sensnm, 487 asynde- : Exclamations, 493, 495 sq., 503 sq.
tos, 406, fioi N. I (a): praegnans, Extension, plurals of, 417.
401 sqq.
Contraction of vowels, 33 sq. ; of con- Feminine, terminations of the, 333 sqq.:
sonants, 62 sq. fonnation of, a86 sqq. in the constr. :
Co-ordination of verbal ideas instead of state, 250 in the plural, 3^3 saq.:
;
subordination, 405 sq. paradigms, iSS sqq.: use of the fem.

Copula, su Waw copulativum : verbal, form for abstracts and collectives, 41a
how expressed, 4^ sq. sqq.: dislike of using the fern, form,
Cuneiform inîcriptions, Assyro-Baby- 449, 490 sq. fem. forms of the infini-
:
lonian, 2 sq., 6 n. ij j n. L. tive. 1 25, 179, i8i. 194 sq.

Feminine pronoun - îglish it, 463,
Dagei forte, 53sq.,67 ; ortbophonicum, 483 sq.
S4 : nccessariiun, compensativum, Figura etymologica, see Schema etymo-
characteriKticum, cuphonicnm, 6^ logicnm.
conjunctivura, 70: diriroens, Jl sq.: Final clauses, 330^ 335 sq., 530 sq.
afiectnosum, firmativura, 7a : implici- Formae mixtae, 330.
tnro,75 omission of, â sq.; in
sq. : Formative letters, or litterae serviles,
the gutturals, 75J inl, jSj in verbs 100^ 335. 345 sqq.
y^, sq. Future tense, I32 N. 1 : futurum exactnm,
DageS lene. Si i 22 ! 314. 3j8.
Index of Subjects. 561
Ga'ya, 6j sqq. Indogermanic languages compared, ^

Ge'ez, au 4 sq., 50 N. I, 73 N. L, 75 N., q\ N. 3,
Gender of nonns, in the con> lO.^, loSj IA
lAH N., I2
nexTorv
486 sqq.
of sabject and
sqq. :
predicate, N.
464 N.
\A^-
304, ^
^88 N.
N. 3, 4I N. 2^
Ij 490 N. 2,
^
aOO N.
N. Ij
a,
Genitive, expression of, 258 sq., 434 511 N.
sqq.: epexefjctica!, 436, 430 sub- : Innnitive, 4sqq.: with suffixes, 167 sq.:
i-2
jective, 436, 46a : objective, 436 463 : use of the intin. abs., sqq.; as a
partitive, 436Texplanatory, 436 sq. casus adverbialis, 356 sq.; to strengthen
periphrasis for, 439 sqq. the idea of the verb, 3!;" sqq.; in place
Gentilic uames, a^t, 4^2, 43a. of tlje finite verb, 361 sqq. syntax of :
Geographical names connected with a the infin. constr., 363 sqq. : infinitive
genitive, 43.3. construction continued by a finite verb,
Gerand, la*;. 368: connexion with subject and
Government of the verb, 379 sqq. object, sqq.
Gutturals, a^ sq., 25 sqq., sqq. Instrument, introduced by 3, 399 : ac-
cusative as a supposed casus instni-
Ha(eph-Pathah, 50 sq. shorter than
:
mealalis, 48-;, 4S6 n. l.
Hateph-S'ghul, ga, 171.
Intensification of attributive ideas, 450
Ha|epb Qame$,
Hajcph-S'ghol,
^ sq. sqq.
50. Interjections, 103, 318 sq.: syntax of,
He interrogative, 307, 4q8 sqq. 496.
Hebrew language, Li 8 sqq. : remains of Interpunctuation, the accents as marks
the literatare, 2 sq., L3 s^ll- dialects
of, 17 : resources of, 17 : grammatical

of, ^ fii.
Interrogative sentences, 330 sq., sqq.
treatment of, 17 sqq.: system of disjunctive, foo; indirect, jjoo sq.:
writing, la, a^ sqq.
expressing a wish. yo2.
Hebrews, 8 sq.
Interrogative words and particlcs,4g8 sqq.
Hclptnjj vowels, 4fi 21, a^S sq., 376.
Involved series of sentences, j;33.
Him).iritic, i.
Hiphtl, sqq. Jussive, Lil xi * LSi sq.. 334 sqq.: in
Hireq, different kinds of, 38, 44 sq.: conditional sentences, 336. 520 purely :
compagiuis, 263. rhythmical jussive lorms, 336.

Hithpa'el, i3 sqq.: sometimes governs
an accus.itive, 3S6 sq. Kaph veritatis, 395.
Hithpa'lcl, 156. Knh!bh, 64.

Hithpalpel, 157.
Lamentation metre, if.
Holem, 22 sq., 4f sqq.
Letters, forms and names 33 sqq-:
Homogeneous consonants, ^ : vowels,
final, 25 sq.
of,
Si sqq.
Litterae majuscnlae,
dilatabiles, a6 :
Homorganic consonants, 3 a.
minusculae and suspensae, 28 ; spi-
Hoph'al, 147 sqq.
^^
rantes, sq.: liquidae, ^2_: quiesci-
biles, 7K sqq. incompalibilcs, :
I-sonnds, ^S^ 4^ sq. : for <, 138, 13Q,
102 N. ; serviles, 100. 23^ : compaginis.
142. 24^ 222, 363.
Imperative, 125 sq. : shortened and
Loan-words in Hebrew and Greek, 5.
lengthened Torms of, 134, aiS : with
Locative, idi sqq.
suffixes, 162 sqq. : syntax of, ^HH-
other tenses and moods use<i instead Mandaeans, a.

of it, see under Jussive and InBnitive Mapplq, 43 N. L ! Si
absolute (362).
Imptcrfect, the name, 127 ^' i - formation
Maqi jcph, 62. ^
Masculine as prior gender, 410 sq., 493.
and inflexion of, 127 sqq- shortened Masora and Masorctic text, ifi sq.
and lengthened forms of, iji sqq.; Material, expressed by the genitive, 437
with waw consecutive, Li5 ^q-> 339 462.
sqq.: with safhxes, 165 sqq.: its
l
syntax, ^ sqq., 3^ sqq.
Impersonal construction of iTH, &C.,
Matres lectionis, 41 N.
Mesa' inscription, a, 9 sq. : final vowels
Imprecation, formulae of, 497.

K?n, 102 N. I ; waw consecutive,
InUeliuile subject, how expressed, 484 sq. N. 1 : the forms DITn^n, &c, 1A5
O O
562 Index of Subjects.
T\ixhy m. J*-; ^3yK, an ^ fcm. Onomatopoetica,

Optative, 3.34.
4, mi sq.
sing. abs. in H-,
3^3 N. aj plur.
Oratio obliqu.i, ^l^.
masc in I
22 N.a; snfTues, afiS N.
.
Order of woid>, 36S N. (chiasmus): in
the imperfect, ^25 N. 3J impf. consec,
nonn-clauBes,477 sq.: in verbal-clanses,
341 N.: article omitled with HNT , 450:
478 sqq. with the infinitive, 370 sq.
:
use of the separate pronoun, 460 N. 1

Ordinal numberi, 303 sq., 457 sq.
casus pendens, 48a N. L.
Metathesis, lee Transposition.
Metheg, ji, iiJ sqq., ^ 86 sq., 94, Pa'lel, li>6.
Parallelism, poetic, ijj ?oo.
Mil'el and Milra', 57, 70 sq. Participles, ij8 sq., .^26 with snffixes, :
Mixed forms, 2.^0. 169, 374 sq.: s>-ntax of, 321

Moods, expression of, n8. 3ao sqq-: passive, 37^ ^78 : participial con-
modns rci repetitae, 327. struction continued by a finite verb,
Multiplicative*, 458. 379-
Particles, 30^ sqq.
Nabataean inscriptions, 2. Passive, 117 sq., 140 sq.: probable pas-
Names, proper, with the article, sive of ^l, 144, 1 47, 1 3 construction :
41 1 :
433 with a following genitive, 4^3-

:
of passives, 407 sqq.: expressed by
Nf^'ative sentences, 50^ sqq. means of the active participle, 485 n. l
Negatives, ô^sqq.: several in a sen- Pathah, 38^ 43 sq. preferred with : gut-
tence, S08: alkcting a foUowbg turals, 26 : luriivc, 40^ 2^ IZ2*<1 ^
clause, 508 sq. a helping-vowel, qv, 93 N. 338 sq.

Neuter, wanting in Hebrew, 233, 4i3l!L-L in the imperfect of verbs rKO, aao.
Niph'al, 122 sqq. 333 : in pause for sere or s^hol, 2
Nomen regens and rectum, a^ sq. 142 in Pi'el for ere, I43-
:
Nota accusativi, sq., ^23 sqq. Patronymics, 351.

Noun-clauses, j^^sqq., 473sq., 474 sqq-: Pause, 96.
shortened unusually, 436 n<âtived : P-'al'al, i6,
by and t^!?, 503 sqq. : relative, f la. Pentateuch, linguistic character of, 13.
Perfect. ii8, LiQ sqq., 132 N- : '^'i'h waw
Nouns, derivation and various kinds of,
consecutive, 135 sqq., 122 sq., 344
335 sqq.: primitive, 100, 2.sr. ^^5 sq. sqq. : with 1 as a narrative tense, 353
denominative. 350 sq.: with pro-
nominal suffixes, 26^ sqq.: paradigms sq. as a frequentative tense, 345 sq.,
:
of, 272 sqq. pecuTiM^ forms, 233 sqq.

:
350 sq. : with suffixes, 16a sqq. : syn-
tax of it, 330 sqq. not precatirc, 3^4
syntax ^09 sqq. appellatives, ^\\
:
of, :
sq., 433 sq. : nomina unitatis, 414 :

N.a: f)erfectuin * confidcntiac,' ^,24 ;
abstracts, 413 sq. prophetic urn, 334.

Number the connexion of subject and
in
Permutative, 440 sq.
predicate, 4^6 sqq. Phoenician and Punic language, a^ LL
Number of words iu the Old Testament, 50 N. Ij lOfi N. L, 113 N. 2, 13.'i N- I
12 N. 233^ 2t,i : writing, 6, 34 N. 2.
Niiraernl adverbs, 458 sq. Phonetic system, Hebrew, 3a.

Phonetics, afi sqq.
Nuuiuuils, 2^
s-qq.: s}'ntax of, 454 sqq.
Numerical sayings, 459. Pi'el, 1^ qq.
Numerical Pi'lcl, 156.
sif^ns, 27 sq.
Nun |>ara,s;ugicum, 130 sq. : assimilation Pilpcl, 1^2:
of Ndn, l8o sq.: energicum (dc- Pleonastic use of the pronoun, 460 : of
nionstrativum,epentheticum), 161 sq.: the negative, so8.
inversum, aiL Pluperfect, 321 sq.: pluperf. conjunctive,
314
0-ounds, 3Q, 45 sqq.
Plural, terminations of, 3^ sqq. double
;
plurals, a
use of, : 416 sqq. con- :
Oaths, formulae of, 4Q7.
struction 488 sq. : plural forms of
Object, in the accusative, 37Q sqq.: in-
prepositions, plural suffix
314 sq.:
troduced by i), 483 sq. : absolute, or rtkrring to collective singular, 463.
internal, 384 sq. : remoter obj. ex- Pluralis excellentiae or majestatiî, 418
pressed by accusative suffixes, 387. sq.: its construction, 450 plural of ex-
Object-clauses, 512 sq. tension, 417 intrusive. 41 2 ^*
Old Hebrew, 6j 8 sqq. result or product, 430.

Index of Subjects.
Plnrnls of compornd icTens. 420 sq.
Qnestions, double, 500 sq.
Plurals of names of animals or things,
Quiescent letters, see Letters.
construed with the fem. sing., 488.
Quinqueliterals, 102 sq., 249.
Po'el, 155 sq.
Poetic style, 1^
Polpal, i2i Radical letters, 99 sq.
PolysNTideton, 503
Raphe,
i (a).
Potential sense of the imperfect,

Relation of different kinds of weak verbs
^30 sq. to one another, 225 sq.
Precative, 334^
Predicate, wTtliout the article, 436 : iu
connexion with the subject, 485"sqq.
Relative clauses, 511 sqq.,
constr. state, 442
after the
sq.
^ :
attracted to the principal idea of a Relative pronoun, 1 1 3, 466 sq.

compound subject, 492 sq. Repetition of words to express entirety,
or in a distributive sense,
Prefixes, see Prepositions. 41^ sq.: to
Preformatives of the imperfect, 122 qq. exoress the superlative, 453.
of the noQO, 245 sqq. Rhythm of Hebrew poetry, 14 sq.
Prepositions, 308 qq. Root^ IQQ sqq.
prefixed preposi- ;
tions, 305 sqq. under the government

:
of the verb, 295 sqq,: compound, Sabean, 2, 6 n. l

sqq. Samaritan, 2.
Present, expressed by the perfect, ^22 sq. Schema etymologicum, 384 sq.
Preterite, see Perfect Scriptio plena and defectiva, 41 sq.,
Preton ic vowels, 8^ 3 ro, 312. , .
S^sq.
Prohibitions, expressed by or 6<7 Seal-stones, engraved, m,
with the jussive or impcrf., 32^ ^q., S*gh61, 38 sq., 44 sq., go sqq.: as a
helping-vowel, 91^ 9^, 338 : in the
505-
Pronominal ideas expressed by substan- imperfect of verbs TV'?, iifi sq.,
tives, ^
Pronouns, 10^ sqq. : syntax
sqq.
of, 459 sqq.
uai with gutturals, 12 before gut-
turals with Qames, 91 : in pause for
'
perjional, êre in Pi'el, 146.

105 sqq..
cases of,
the verb,
^ :
oblique
with
sqq.; with the noun,
sq.:
suliixes, loii sq.;
Segholate forms of nouns, 238 sqq.,
276 sqq.
265 sqq- ; with adverbs, 307 sq. ; with Semitic languages, 1 sqq.: their gram-
prepositions, îi sqq.; referring to matical structure, 3sq. : their relation
entire sentences, 46^ ; demonstrative, to one another, 3^ 2 sq-I to other
log sq., 464 sq.; used relatively, ^69 langnages, 4 sq. their age, iS sqq.
:
sq. : relative, 113, 466 sq. : indefinite,

Semitic writing, 5 sq.
113 sq.: interrogative, Sentences, 473 sqq.: compound, 473,
sq., 466
reflexive. 461 : possessive, lo^, 462 :
481 sqq.: incomplete, 494 sqq.: re-
as genitive, subjective or objective, strictive and intensive, 509 : connected
462 separate pronouns emphasizing
:
by Waw, 509 sqq.
a suffix, 460 sq. Separating vowels, 183 N-, 204 sq.
Pronunciation of Hebrew, aS sqq., 133. ^re> 3^ 14 &q- iQ pause for s'^ghol in
'
Prosthesis, verbs tVw, 224.

Pu'al, 143 sq., 145 sqq.
Pn'lal, 56,
^ Servile letters, see Formative letters.
S*wfi, simple and compound, 45^ sqq.,
Puncta extraordinaria, a&. 74*q i Z2sq.> Si qt lyosq.: medium,
Punctuation, Babylonian, ^ n. l 49 sq., 89 s<^. mobile, 49 sqq., 11, 74^
:
Punic, see Phoenician. 72, 89 sq. simple, under gutturals, Ht

:
178: quiescent silent, syllable-

1 70.
Qal, form and meaning of, L2> sqq.: divider). Si sq., 89.
probable passives of, 144. 152 sq. Sibilants, 30 sq.: transposition (meta-
Qamcs, ^
42 sq. its pronunciation, 39
Qamcs impurum, 84.
: thesis) of,
Sillnq, with
6S
Soph pasuq, 57.
sq., 153.
Qames-hatuph, 39, 47: how distinguish- .Siloam inscription, lo, 34 sq.

ed from Qamc>, sqq.
Q^rc, 64 sq. perpetuum, 65.
:
^ Siraultaneity of actions expressed
noun-clauscs, 528.
by
Qibbus. ^
4j sq.
QuadriUttrals, uaa sq. : nouns, 249 :
Sinpjular, distributive, 489.
Softening of consonants, 6^
verljs, 1 58. Spirants, 31 sq.
Quantity of vowels, 38 n. 4. Square character, 23 sq.
0 0 2
5^4 Index of Subjects,
Stem -consonants, or radicals, mosq. Transition from oac person to ancêr,
Stems, to be distinguished from roots, 483.
Transposition (metathesis) of conso-
Status absolutiis of the nonn, 258. nants, 68 sq., 153.
Status constructus, its form, sq. : its
U-sounds, 39> 45
use, 434 sqq. wideruseof it,îsQq.:
:
before prepositions, sq.: before sqq. : its syntax, 320 sqq. : Hs

Verb,
relative clau&cs, 4^
: with the article,
government, 222 *<19-' êak verbs,
43 a sq. 1 19, 178 sqq.: verbs middle E and
Subject, omitted in participial clauses, middle O, laQ: derivative, if^ Conju-
377 : peculiarities in the rtprcscjitaiion gations : denominative, ii.g, 1 20. 141,
of the subject, 483 sqq. : two subjects
145, 140, 154: transitive and intransi-
in a verbal-clause, 48^ sq. : construc-
tive. I 20. 3^6 with suffixes, 158 sqq.
:
tion of conipouxxd subjects, 4g J sq. doubly weak, a 26 sqq. defective, 22^ :
Substantive, its connexion with the

sq. verba induendi et exuendi. 3^7^
:
adjective, 448 sqq.: as predicate of

copiae et inopiae, 387 sq.: with pre-
a noun-clause, 474 sq. positions, 3(2^ sqq.
SufBxes, see Pronoun their syntax,
:
Verbal-clangs, 42i sq., 478 sqq. rela- :
sqq. heavy (or grave') and Upht. 164,

:
tive, 12 sqq.
270, 273 : masculine suffixes referring Verbal ideas under the govern mmt of
to fcminines, 463. the verb, 404 sq. co-ordimlcd with ;
Superlative, expression of, ^2 sq.

a verb. 405 sq.
Sureq, 3Q. 4fi so. Verise arrangement of j>octicpassage<;, r^.
Surface '-plurals, 417. Vocalization of the text, sq. Baby- ^ :
Syllables, theory of, 8^ sqq.

Syncope, 68, LL2 sq., 14a, 152 of the
lonian,
Vocative with the
^ N., 314 N.
article, 425.
article, i_La sq. ; of the H in' Hiph'il
and Hoph'al, I47
Vowel
Vowel
letters,
signs or points,
33
sqq.
sqq.,
^ sq.
Syriac language, a, Vowel.*, 33 sqq., 8^ sq., 84 sqq. : firm or

Syriasms in pronunciation, 82 : of. immovable, 8^ sq. : changes in them
Aramaisms. as regards quantity, 82 sqq. : impure,
84 N. L
Tell el-Amama tablets, 1 1.
Temporal clauses, ^2^ 340, 353, 528 Waw adaequationis, 526 N.: ap>odosis,
sqq. expressed by infin, constr. with
: 482 : concomitantiac, 510 N. (^): con-
a preposition, 530. secutive, sqq.; with the perfect,
Tenses, L 18 sqq. : use of, 330 sqq. ; tem- 137 sq.; with the imperfect, 136 sq.;
pns histrtricum, 331. copulative, 3 1 7 sq., 509 sqq. : explica-
Text of the (Jld Testament probably tivum, io N. C^).
derived from a single archetype, ifi. Weak consonants, 33: N and n , 2^ sqq.
Titles indicated by the feminine form, 3 and ^, ii sqq : weak verbs, 1 19,
128 sqq.
Tone of Hebrew words, 9^ sqq. : marks Weakening (or sottening) of consonants,
of, ^ sq., 5o sq. 69.
K, as a consonant and guttural, 2*} sq., woe! i\% : a negative, 506.

sqq., 78 sqq.: prefers Hnteph-
496.
hol, 2^ 1 aS as a weak sound,
28 sqq., 150 sqq.: as a vowel letter, pw, 477. 503, 505 q-
Sqj interchanges with H, 1j ^, 79 ;
'^^^ 323.' .go.i. .ô.';-
dropped, So : prosthetic, 68 virtually :
doubled, 125 sq. "^K, ."îr. 39^ sq.

ILL. 463. 464 N- L D^n^K, 433. 4.SO. 488.
W.
ai2i M
.307. .336.
sq-. 5*7-
to be distinguished from v
in desidcrative clauses, 502 sq. : in
^l^^t preposition with suffixes, 316. conditional clauses, ^21 sqq.: QX io

Index of Subjects, 565
doable questions, 500 : as a particle rprn as a prophetic formula, 3^ sq.

of asseveration, 497 sq.
*n*l as a narrative formula, ^40 sq.
|1 with the perfect, 123 with the im-

1^ , as a relative proooon, 113, 466 perfect, 130 sq.
sqq L1 sqq- as a coDjaoction, 1 57. c,
:
% 158, $ 164. </, f 165. bf % 166. b: HY, nt^T, 109 sq., 464 sq. : as a relative
pronoun, 469 sq.
demonstrative, 110 : relative, 46^ sq.
nK> the nota accusativi, ^11 sq., 379-
38.^ the preposition, 311.
n, virtually doubled, 76.
p*rnD *nK, 70 sq.
n^n
tT
{set rrn^,
^ TT
aia.
2, the preposition, 309, 312 sq., 2^qq.: DID with the imperfect, 326.
21 esisenti.ie, 398: partitive, 399: pretii,
399 instrumental, 399 sq- as a vowel letter, 2^ N. 1, 33 sqq., 33

:
^
p3, preposition with suffixes, îj sq. sqq., 81 sqq. pronunciation^ )ii sq.,
:
128 1.
to negative an infinitive, 368.
nin^ , 65 : how pronounced with prefixes,
toa, 314.
^^lii: niD3f njiT, 42.^-
D3, 509,
^
?n!, 464. "
Bf]J, 422 suffixes, 302 sq.
P^n'i, 70.
D^-n, 420, 3 with
, suffixes, 313 : its meaning, 309,
224 sq., 426 N., 513.

n with Mappiq,
,
53, 55, 80 sq.: as a weak
ItyKS, 26 sq.
letter, 80 sq.: interchanges with) and \
&j : as a mere vowel letter, 30^ 3^ sq., ^3, corroborative, 525 : as a conjunction,
8q sq.. Hi, ix6 sq. S L&2i LfiSi i 159- imd , 163,
Qj the article, i m sqq., sqq. $ 164. d, % iM.

a interrogative, 307, 498 sqq. Dt< ^3. 537.
0 T
, the termination of the cohortative iri^y '9. 58 N. 3.
and imperative, 132, 134 in the with a negative, 50^: in connexion
Wn
noun,
(KVI),
2^ sq.,
6^ 102
sqq., 277.
sq.: how different

with substantives, 381J 4^1
with participles, 32! sq-
sq., ^ :
from n), 464 i Wn and nt to empha- to3,33.

size a question, 46.^, 501.
preposition, Uf, 305 sqq.: with suf-
jrn (and rrn), 63, 173 sq., 1201 with i>,
fixes, 312 ; its meanings, 309, 400

the participle, 222 w^*** ? before an
as the sign of the dative, 400 intro- :
infinitive, 365 sq.: as the copula, 477. ducing the object, 383 sq. as the sign :
D^*n ow day, 428. of the genitive, 4^9 sqq.: with the

passive, and passive ideas, 409 Lamed :
i^^n in assertions, 499. inscriptionis, 400 sq.

auctoris, 440
1|i>n, 199. 359 sq. distributive,
tive, 364 sqq.
^ ;
sq. : with the infini-
fc<b, 305. 503 sq-. 50^ sqq-: prohibi-
tions,329: vrith the jussive, 3Hsq-:

n?in, 357- = that . . not, sî.
^
.
1, as a vowel letter, 25 N. Li 33 sqq., lb, 50a sq.,521 sq.,
41 sq., 45 sq., &I sqq., 8^ sq.: as a

firm consonant in the verFT a 10. 215.
1 (!), see Waw copulative, consecutive, ni>,
TT
3" I 5>-
top, 214..
566 Index of Subjects.
(in poetry, for \P and Dnb), il 1 N. 3. I
y, its pronunciation, 30 : virtually dou-
bled, 26.
ng^, lSq sq.
^y. preposition with suffixes, 316.
O, as prefonnative in participles. 143, preposition, 308, 402 sq., i8 sq.:
147: prcformative in noons, 3^ sqq.; with suffixes, 316.

afformative, 348. "Dy preposition, 308: with suffixes, 316.
D for no, 10, v\. *rii:'y, 300 n. 2.
conjunction, 508.
no, 7o "3 sq., 466, 496.
b^B used
, as a model of conjugation,
19, 1 17 N., 119.
IP, preposition, 508
with suffixes, 314:
;
hark, 421:
its meanings, 401 sq. : writh the com-
parative, 450 sqq. doubled, jS.

1, 30, 32_:
\ ,
see Nfln. pronunciation, 30 sq.
b^, its
319, 3Mi 337-

B', B', the relative pronoun, 113.
n , ri , the feminine termination,
3'3p, n^3*IlD, with suffixes, 315 sq. nnJI with suffixes, 3^6.
INDEX OF PASSAGES.
The references are to the sections and their marginal letters, except
where otherwise indicated, n. ^ note.
Gteneais Genesia Oenests

L 1
5 , 21 135/, 2, 14 118 4,^ .91^,106(^,154/1,%'.
LS LlAi 6 20/ 144
ifi . 360. N. Li 11.^^ Z 145 ^<
.... 109* 12 . 6i</, ii3, 114^ 9

.... iijA 1^ N. 2^ 143 < . 146^, 148 ^
gSa, 111 c iS . . . 75 /, 114 fl L3 109 </, ll^ff*
. . laiA, Ll^r 15 . 70 tf, 107^, 131 , LI
_
14 . . 113 j>. 116^
. . L2&tU . . u io3</ 15 .97 A, 114X, 115*,
7f,f, 107 , 109 a 33 . 10 A. 20f, 53</,
ao/ 53 . i7'' 102J25l,I36^, lA 118^
. . . 30/, </ 141 a II ?^
112^1450, 145 J 24 . -107^. 113 w Ifl 131 b

. .
. .
15 OT, 117 s
ml 35 . 72 W, 85 ^, Q.^//".
107^, I34</
2Q
22 127 ^
n7 bb
9i</, 117 f, 8^ 1 . Ilia, 119 Tt/, 143 33 . . . . 440, 4^/
I5a<> 34 . 39;?-, 134 r, i .;9/><^,
. . . 6^(^ a 107 X i59i/</

. . go/< 3 L? 2^ QK, 16/. 260, N. I,
LUX, 124^, 4 i^^v 157~?^
N. a 5 . 6i</, oo. ii6 /t, 2^ 107 135 A> 144 A
t . . 1151,1357;
....
,
.... HOC 6 . . . 3.S;r> Llfi^ 3 IM^

liS m,a, Lfi6 7 . 5'.9A^ to. .... liÂ
....
.
.... 13
.
8 . . . 118A 146/ 145^

. 6 . . . 1 2 IV m 14a/ 2^ 153 m
. .mi . . u 114X 6, 2 117 A, ii97e>
. . 106/, 138 a Li . ._AAj.6&e, i35<^ 3 . . .67>>.7ar
w
.
5
. 1
106/, 107 c, l4in.

^
14 i?, L26
i'4y
L3
14
.
.
136<', 143a, i48<^
Lifi r, N.,
II9t6>
118 5
8
107
.
.
.
.
113^, Li&i
146^, 1S7^
. . 14a
153 *. isar L5 T17// 9 . . . . iA
107*, lo^d, me, 16 . . . .
154 a, N. .... ii7
142 <^ 17 . . . 10^, 1 .^S <^ li .... 117*
. . 70a, wj kh 19 . 29^ 05_f, 141 / lA 75/, 112 r, 117 II,
. .115*/, I37<^ 21 . . .
60 X!^. i_2Si>
107 1 1 2 , a . 76 107^, n3/>,
, 112/, 116/, 131 k,
116^,136^, 1^4 ^ I 14^, 24^. N.2,
1 N. 2
141
.
.
.
a
10^, 1^ ^
360, N. Ij $8 a ^
3^
^ .
130a,
.
XV
11^ h
. 131 h, 143 </
.
.
....
.
. .
49
.
/,
^
72tf
XL:
568 Index of Passages.
Qenesis Genesis
ii7ir,ii7/4,ii7iV
. . . .ij8*

11. fi . 67^,67 ^/</, 133 rf.
147^
15, 10
L2
. . . 139*, 139 r
1 iia/,ii6/,ii8ib, 7 L3 . 113^, I3i> A tff /

I4i Ml/ N. a. 16^^ 14
6 8 63/ 15
i
.
.146/ 0
mz
.
1 ' . .
2 . . . .134'/ 12
u 126 z,
. I2q/, 17,40 is . . iâi. 1 36 A
13 .97 c, 104^, 139,4' 3Q 146/ le, I . . . 142 />, 156 ^
1 37 ^0 2 . . iî fi, IIQX
in 1 11 /{
31 4 . . . 67 102
ao . . . .ii84 . . . 1 19 X, 1 ? I ^
21 . , .not 2 . 63^. 1 101, 141^ 135 w
. 117 ^, iig w 3 . . 112^. nor . . . 6q</, I27
KIM 7* a 1^4 A g . loib, 76jP', 107 A,
0, a . /ia /" 1 1 a M 7 ii6
.1 a^ 0 a . . . 01 /, i<;6f IQ
5 . .lag/, 134 /> 0 . .wxu LI .Sod, 04 f, 1 1 6 If
z 70 /2. N a. 1 1 ax. LI . . . . 114m La . 127^, laS/. 156^

U . iiaoiia/, f\ihk Hi lis/
fi I CO 1 . nod. Hip, 141 /, 17i . . ,iji 163a
0 . 1 4^ > I57 1
f t fit\ t I II/, II 7 A. 118 0 143^ N. 2
Li . .
lA \t. I 7a / 7a aa . . iiaMM, 118 IQ

Â 'A ^450 LI . o7<u, 1 1 2^, 1 i I (/,
17 - 6q z/. 70
f
n . . .
niij . 1443
ifi . 1I16
15 . iii,ii7/;i47d 14 3(k7.679. 1 1 3 IMIW.
13^ 2 . . . . i-ifi m 158 *^ a,2 167/'.
1 1
N.
aa . 10^ ^. 14.6 d 138^, I54,IL 15 143^^
0. a .
5 145 J7 4-
. 06, 100/, 107/,
. 1 1 7 f. I i S 134^, isor
4 iinM 131 10 . . . . . 40/
la 2Q
? . ii6z(/.iai f.iAXb II 139 21
u 26 . . . . 72**
L3 18i 1 1 160, 118/, me
T I lai^ isay(
lA 104^- A
1^
t .
' Aa^. iia y. ii7r L5 . . . 143.^, I43f . . ie,Sl>, N. 3
.
ifiO . Qoc, 00 i, 131 </

l .... 131 / LZ 7 . , . 117/, 126 r
i2 14, 4 . . . 118 1, 134 0
20 . 10
ai . . . .93aa, 131/ 11 . . 116 d, 146
La . io6m, lag^ 141*.
34f
33 . . .141*, 146/ . 27^, goc, 901, I SO a. iso^
2^ . . . 70a, I33A' 123*, 130tf I ^ ... 106 1 16 f
as .
13 . 2 6, I2&r, laSM 14 . I33f, 1 3g< i4X/
a6 . . . ii6r, N. 17 15
SC.
. . 106^, 163 a
a2 . 'Ibgg IS 17*
10. 5 . . . .139* 12 . . . lai/, LlSa lE 75* H"'

2 .... 107^ ai aa

l38A,i4S</,i5gf'<'
a3 . ioa^,i35a,i49<-, 21 . ioo/,io8^,i35JW,
. .
35f 154 a, 5L 138^
. . . ^ </, k ?4 2*
. . .117^, 122J
. . . .135A 15, I . . L2fir, 131 <7 . 112 V, 1153, i6Lr
2^ . .... 35>w 2 . ii6n, iiSff, uE 112/
11^ 1 . V, 141 e 4'
3_: . .ii7r, 141/ H .47ihii7<ia,ii9/,
4 . loj q, ij^ w . iiajj,i22^,i35/ 134/, if>9, N.
5 .... i
Mi' 1
I . 29/, 66*, i^Sd 32 iM*
Genesis 7, i 28, 6. 569
Oenesis Genetis Oeneaii
10, 1 . 1 16<?, ii ^, 141/, . 138* 24.60 . . . 63 ^, gjx-
i2 di . . .
~.
. 146 jg-
2 . ao</, ao^, 100 2Q . .131* 63 ... . .114/
.ao/, fiitf 65. . . . TmZ
^ Ill/
4 . uV, 102 15a r, . . i6a * 25, I I30(/
154 a, N., l64f 28 91 127 g 5 i6a
5 ih 136^/
^ 93 30 1172, 157 * 21 . . . 51 2 121/
8 .
34 103 I39</ . . 1384 ?3
9 . . . 66^, 113 r 3 . . 135
U ia6n 5 . . 1 19 J 26 . Ilgg, Il5f,ll5g
u 150^ 2 . .1^ 31 . . . 35 4
. . . iog, ii6d La 34
15 lh2W L4 30<'# 3 26j 2 144AN.a,i42a,
^ ^g/^ ^î 55 11 . . 75f N. I
23 134* 9 .I48*,i53w,i57*
17 102^ lA III A, 147 IQ . 106/, llÂ
.
\sig 23, I 134 </, 13^/% L3 . ii3 164/

.
19 . 6q^, 22 n, 15a a/, Sa/. I a a/. 128 w L5 . 1350

16 133 (
ao . . . io2i5i02/ 14a/. N. a, I S, 3 ^ 18 III ^, lia^
ii &i a 8 . . . . 61^ 2^ 76^
u lao^ 9 . . . . ii9j> afi . 75. >o3^ N. 1
35 164^ 10 116 A, 141 6,14^ e 39 . . .65 A, 7i>^>4
28 ia6d li . idom, 15a f 27. I .111^,114*/, 1 19>'
3^ . . .115a, 12^0 12 .... nod 3 118'
11 ' . .133/. 15^0 . . 112 CC
. . 4 . 30*, Ifid/^r 108 </
2Q. . .
. Ill A . 2 &8^
21 5< 47/, 6ir,Q3J, 24. 3 . ._Laa<j, 165 d a "7"
laiTy 5 . .ioo, ii3f 12 113>>
^ 6 . .51 f, 152
.138a
^ L3 . . . 10^, 141/
wd
20. I 9or Z . . . 19
5 . .aii . . a 25 Jr, lo^d, \26y 2fi .11^^,136^148*
6 . 66<J,25^,ii4w, 9 , . . . lAh ai . . . 67 r, 1 36
157 ^ N. I 113**. 13^1^ 34 150 a
I ' ' 63 1 10 I 15 . . 106/ 107 c ao 10^
2 107 tt> Ui 2& 2Qm
U2 . . . 107 V, iMiA 15 . . 1000, 164* 39 . . . . .
u . . . 112 I .S3 20 . . . . Z^M 30 . 1 13 ff, 164*, I

" 152* II . . laog, ij>o> 3i 2li
12 . 113 , la^ ^, ii . .I34ff, 156* 33 . io7f,ii6</,ii7v,
N.I. 141 /T ufi I. 23 . a2iLll^. 150A liJ
107^ 26 .... 62 3^ . U3 . LL2 2i
lis . . 1 34 it
i2 75 'A lis 143* liii
17 UAX 39 . . . . 156 * 36 .63>w, 136</. I50<
ifi . . .106 / 113 30 . . 115^, ii^x 32 . 103^, ht/m
T?
aii 1 . . . . . iiig^ 31 .... uiii *, 142^. ij>o/
3 Laii 33 . . . . r3/ 38 .
10^, 16^ ifiai
....
5
6
7
.
.
.
lof-,
106 jo,
.lai d, ia8
64 A, 114^
1340, 14a/
11
41
.
.
.
.
. .
159 , 167 f
149^
95
29
41
43
.
.
. . ao , 1 19 <
&ia, I2ia
. .
^
B 43 . . . . LLa^ 43 119 J
2 S2 44 154 a, N.^ 16a * 45 .ii4d, ii4r, iiz
10 ... . 14^ 45 .... I35fl oa, Ii8f, iôe,
u 67 ^ 49 .... I59P l.'i4g. N.
L3 14.U &i .109/. 117/ 28 3 . . . iÂ, got

14 95 ^ 1^ . .139 A, 146/ 3 25
U . 75^)^, 1087,113//, .... 1437 4^ . 954^. "4^
iig>^j 119/ i .... 150 1> 6 167 <
570 Index of Passages,
Qenesis Oenesis QneBiB
28. S 81,34 . Ill ^, 134/^, N. L
2 . . . 11900, N. 3 1^3 A, N. 35 . . 118^, 131^
II 35 106/ 22
5 . . . lq6 0, 147^ . . . 20d, 30 . . 12S fl, l^X d
. 23 /. 74 k, 00, 31 . . .107/. ii8t>
u 90 A 107^ 85, I
IB 40 . 67CC, 76 a, 104 F,
3
20. a . . .Ill ^, 144/* i4â,N.2,i67A.N. 2 . 134 A, I| 145'
d i5o 41 I2^d 8
I . L26 1, 153^/
. . 4> 11 . . . .145/
9 . ii^M. laoA
.
44 13
m <>7A 75^ io<>/ 45 L4 138^
14 47 * * 21 . . 5A45^
15 150^ . . . 142 <r, 167^ 2fi
11 S3 . . . 145*
. . 86. 2
i i'9/ 32, I . . . 103*. 133^ 8L 2
19 133 3 136^ * AUC
. . . 69 165 a 5 . . . 64>*, 68/ 4
. 40^.1 104 Q
XZ r.^ 13.^
*J
b 2 4lA 11^^
26 107^ 8 . Ii3^> 150 A
37 8 . . . 67 144 ^ A L5 . . .107/, iifi/
30 1.33* 2 . . 112/, i45tt p. 481, N. I
6od IQ 11
LI . 106^, I I9n, 133^
a6,^ 12 , ac If 19 138m
a . 85, 117^^, 154a, ai 117//
N. 13 . . . . ivicc
L3 15 134'' 22 Ii>3/
1^ .2&b, 123 133^, 30
31 , . .dod. 103 e
11
. 9r, 10^, 60*, 38i . . . . LL2.acK
ii7# 64/ i.;^7 Q I3r, 661, 169*
1.^5 ao . 20 /, 2 , 61 </, 11 . . Ii8r, I53W
n . . .111^, lao/ 24 A, 1341 11 , . . . if,qdd
5" 21
3i . . .lao^, 120^ 32 . 60/. 6.^^. \6%c 34 , torn, Q7 c, iihs,
Zl . . . 113. mm 30 119/, N, I
. . 109^,
. e
w . 90 tf, 1 1 K, 1 56 ?5 .33/, 741, ii6,
32 . , .lljr, t2î> 143
38 . lOjf, 47*, 76 jf, 83, a . . . 1^^, N. 1 afi . - ^ N. 3
qfi/î2,^c/, 145 <
3 28 44''
39 . . .69/145/ 4 2^ . . . 2od,
40 . ii9<M, K.3, 142/ 5 .
37 <i, 67 fl, 39. I
41 . . . 91 /, 1_L3 37 4 . . 130*/, 155

8 . . . 142 ^ N. I
Z IQ . 112^. 158*, N.3 6

8 . 14^ u, I5Qr. 159 J li 74^ 8
2 13 .60 A, i04>r. i3f. 9 . . 107/, 1 13 fi
U 1261, 1350 10
14 11 . . . 3, ulLt
15 "3'' 134^ . . 2 ^ 39^, 64^
15 84, 5
1 -45^.45^ 18 lU*-
22 . 63<-, III OT, ii4. 8 ao
159 dtf L5 . . . 72>4, 119/i 33
25 77 lii 44^ 49* 13 . . .1160, 153/
?9 i5 9 tXd 40. 4
30 . . . 511, ii3>> 33 &
59^ 2i 143 1 . . .84b/ 81/
Genesis 28, 8 Exodus 4, 21. 571
OenesiB OenesU
40^ & . . 48.16 6A 49,15 . . . 117A, N. a
2 Hid 9or 17 . . . 20A. 109 >^
Ifi . . ifi 1 16 <^ is iQ^g
13 . 7_? " 49* ai 1265
105 ^ N. 2, m6 , afi 14 r/ aa .
44 ^. Sq^, 96,
N. 3, 163 </ 27 . . . I4I N. 4
. . .2Jl -tS 67^ 23 ^2 i
25 62 35 II7#. iiQf
^ '44"
. .
20 . 6910, 131? 33 ... . Ii9;gr 21 . 29/, 2QK, 107 Jf.

U 3i . . I34r. 144 1SZ
41, I 44. I . . . 47Wt 138/ 30 . . . 138*, N. 3
6 llfLi a . . .
L3Sf N. a 50.13 . . . 138 ^ N. 3
S 64 ^, uai a 142 e, ijA <
. . . 15 . . "7 /;
4 .I2ê, 156/, 164 ifi 58^
L2 5 ... 1 19JW, N- ao 75 n
LU
L5
11
2 ii6d
2
12
l5
.
.
.
. .
M, 13 /
20dy 58
l^c/
2^
^ nA 144'/.
ii6v
^
26 141 A 23 i59^
2& 137^ 1, 1 . . .
49 ^, N. a
19 . . 1^6 7 28 ... . IIST^' 2 . 117Z, i2iV,i33it
a? 29 . . . . i\2kJI: lii .47>. 75>y.
33 33 . . . 69 A 109^ La 107 e
. .ii5 3 . . . . IS2W r4 ii9<7
. .118A 46, 4 I38</ 16 . 67 i, 72 IP, 76
43 . . . . 1 1 8 . . . . 119^^ la 47*
42 85^. I'3g| I3QA 14 23^ 15 . . . H2C0
102^ ^
.....TsT
49 . . . 23 IA&.
&i &aifi 46, a I34<f ai 135 0
51 ... .145' 3 69 m aa 137 5
42, I 54/
. . 4 . . . . iiszt/ 2, I ii7</
J .... 109^ Li uu b a 1 i_z i
4 . . . 3 .-isiA, j>8^r. 126m
6 .... ia6A 20 . . ; . 108^ 4 . . .
21
1 . 123^
. . . 47. 3 145^ D . . . . lii x
.... "4^ 12SLC 9 . 69 -r, 70 g, 135 w
U2 .... 163a 9 128a m
II . ZlA 911 II 69V ifi
La VL 91i 12 . 6o</, 6qA, 135 0

IIO^ ifi 62^ ao^ . 4^/> '54^
1& 110/ ai . I39* N. 3, 143 r 3, a . . ' fiiSt Li6r
IS J34<^ 21 112/ 3 . . 108 5, la^
25 .93W1, n6,i2o/, ^ 14i a La&j:
124/, lao f 48, 1 144</ 9 uu:
afi ' . "9/5' a . . . I44</, N. a 10 not
30 . 1 24 1 ,
126/ 9 . 5^^, 6o</, 61^ II io7
31 Li . . 75 "5*
. L3 J-a^
35 tn^, 139' 14 . . 141 e, isfid If IMl
36 9/. iyr,P aa . 96, Lflfi 130^ lS . . .
49 /, 1 18 p
37 49. I 75 rr 15 . 6qx, 1575, HLJ
43,3 . ii3, 163^ a 2 20 63OT
.ii6</, 159V 4 'SlWi 1 34^,144/, 22 139*
i 150/, ii. 3
.
14L 4j 1 102
7 107^, Tor ^, I J3^, 8 135' -2

ill
150 </ IQ loh 4 . . . 29^, 6^f
9 .... I5Q< II . 7f, ;2/.Qo/, 91 LQ . 6ir, 128/. 15a
I_Q 106/ L2 75^*
La . 72 A^. M
Q.^
2^M,
111 c
106 La
Ii6x, ii8/ la . . i30i; 155
. . . . . 90 /, 93 dtf
. 14
1^ . . . 20c, lyf li S^jL ai . .jiimm, 143 </
Index of Passages,
OenesiB Genesis Gtonesis
28. a 8134 III i2h,-s. L 34.24 M.^''
S . . .1190^, La 13a >t. N. a. as . . ii8<?. 1314^
u 35 106/ a2 44J?;
. . . 106 g, 1473 . . . 201/, 37 30 , . La8 i 141 a
^, .107/, ii8f
.33/. 74^. Zi'v, 31 . .
n iqA QO/. 107^ 85. I
Zl 40 .67r<-, 76a, 104^.

89. 2 . . .111^144/ i43a,N.3,i6;^.N. Z . 134^, N. I, 145 t
6 i50 41 ij^d a i6d
u
I
Q
.
67
.
A
. 136
Il6tt.
75^.
i, 153 </
1 30 A
o<>/
42
44
45
^
Jo^/
L3
14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.145/
.138*/
13^ 42 22 . '5A45X
15 150^ . . . 149 167 b
11 45 3 145' 36. 2 .33'
ifi "9/ 32. I . . . 103*, 113^ 87, 2
12 3 . . . . . . . 1 13 A, 133*
11 . . . 69 i6f . . . 64-4.087 4
$
15 6 .40^ 104>f. 133 /J
Z . .
47 LAhO
/,
107^ 1 8 . . TI3-/, I50A

8 . . . 67/, 144* l| , . . 107 /, isAs
30 133* 2 . . 113/), 145 iS p. 481, N. I
a 12 7 "7/
so, a ij . 106^, 11911, i33<- lE
6 aS^" L2 . I I(;tM.N.3,153tC/, 12
8 .
8f w, 1174^, 154a, 1561: 2J .
N. L3 23 . . . . nice
li L5 34<' 12 15a/
If 16 . iSi^, i2ar, 133 ^, 30 . . 116/, 143a
ifi 33 . . .6o</, 103
17^. L35W 12 i& . . . .ii8
is .91', lo^r, 60^, 88. 5 . . . . Ii2ar
"7/ 64/. 137* 9 . 130 661, 159*
3a i.^S w 20 /, 3 i DI tf
. It . . Ii8.e. 153 w
. . . lu A, 130/ 24*. 1241 12 . . . . i^gdd
?2 liiX 5 21
aj . . .liO^, \2oh 32 60/, 65 A, 163 f
.
24 20m, qjî
.
. . . Âlimm 30 119^, N. I
. . .109^, 151 g ai .90*, 111 ^, 156 25 .33/, 741, ii6r,
. . .Ii7r, 133* 143 e
a? 47 *f 26^, 83, a . . . 146 <, N. 1 26 ' . . in^f N. a
05/, 138 < 14? 3 28 144''
39 . . . 69/ 14=/. 4 5 22 . . . 20d, 164^
40 . Il9aa, 142/ .37 a, 67 a, 117/; 39. I 142^
4 . . . 91/, iia^"^ i37 4
la?*/, 155
31, fi
li 8 . . 147 /z, CL 1
.
5
2 m . iia/y. i.sS^.N.s
& II 74^ a 37<^
9 35r 18
. 63<-, III ii4ff, 8 20
15 . . . 72A. no/) 22
28 77 . . . 440, 4^ la . . . 116 tf, 153 /
?2 ?2 40. ^ 39^
30 5
33 '
aa 7
Genesis 28, 8 Exodus 4, 21. 571
Genesis Genesis Genesis

40, 8 . . .117^, tL^
9 . . . 9rr, i43flr 12 . . . 20 n, logk
_ ^
la La 18 J06^
21 21
lO ^, N. 2^ 106 ffj 22 ^fw, 80^, 96,
N. 2, 163 d 22 . . . II f, N. 4
t
15 28 ^7<f ?3
i . . . . . 135/ 29 . . 117/; 119^
20 . 69 W, 71, LU ^ 33 . . . . 119-Qr 32 . 29/, 29 M, 107^,
22 31 - 34''f 44
41, I . ii6j, ii9r^, 131^ 44, I . . . 47 i, 138^ 30 . . . 138*, IL 3
2 . . . 1^5 , ISU-2 60,13 . . . 138*, N. 3
0
. . . 64 ^, 1 22 t 3 . 142 e, 144 c
. .
li "7^. >59/
Li 49' 4 . 138^. 156/, 164 <> l8 58A
12 . . . 1 1901, N. 20
15 . . .i52(>, 157a 9 . . LLau, 138/
. . 91/93^^ La 26
73/ Lll'A N. a
m . . . 2Qa, 50 jP
2Q . . 1 36 X, r^j ^ 22 159^ xodus
hll 33 ^11^ 1, 1 . . . 49 d, N. 2
2-Q . . . . 1
13 2 . 117s, i2i</,i33A
ao 29 . . . . \\2kk 10 47^1 75 "aj*
2A2S^^ 33 . . . 69 A 109^ 12
3^ 3i . . . . 152 ft; i4
0 2.
40 40. 4 16 . 62 23 ' 2^
0 iigAA
41 Q . . . . 18 47
43 . 85 A, I13r, I20>i 19 . . .* . 112 C0
.JIT
49 20
51 46, 2 2i J35*
_ _ f
3 22
42, I . . . . ti$w 2j I
2 J09^ 2
TTj: 1.
22 . . ^^132^ 3 -20-^, ,s8r, 126W
30 ^ . . .09 w, 21
ill 3 t- . . . . 131 m
S Q 9 .6gx, "joe, 135
_ ^ 0 _
I_Q 9
U u
ID
. . . 32</, 2i/
12
i9
^ \L
12
2fi
.
.
6o</,
. . 46/
25"'
6qA, 135 0
l54i>
l8 21 . 1^^, N. 3i 143^ 3, a . . . 52 J, 126 r
19 22 3 . . 108^, I.3&4(
?i . 93in, i\6u,i2o/, ?1 Mi5 8
124/, 139^ 48, 1 9
28 . . . . 119^ 2 . . . l44<f, N. 2 10
30 . . . 1 24 1, 126 9 sSjT, oorf, 61^ u
33 34'' LI . . 75. I5<^ . 13
35 . . .111^, I39<r . . 141 150 tf 15 133'
36 . . .91/. i3fi/> 22 . 96, ifl^m, 130 jf 18 . . . 49/, 118/
32 19 69 jr, 157*, ILJ
43, 3 . . .ii3, i63f 3 ao
. .116^, 1591/
.
4 53. 1 34^.144 A 21 139*
1501, N. 3
. .
2 .107^, 102 A 1 13^. S 135 f 2 m.

29^, 6^c
m4
. . .
9 U 7<-, 52/, 90/, 91 ^ . 61 C, 128/, I2</

m 9^f, 96, liifiit, L2 75
La 72 M, 93 /A liir n6 jc, 1 1 S
^ L3 . . 130*'. 155
Li > . 29 1060
. L2 .
9 23 <^ L4 ^S>9^
. , ioc, 131 q
.
li 11 . .All mm, 143 </
Exodiia xoduB Exodus
112 cc 12.48 . . ^ 00 18.31 . . . . 07 A
1* 6S . . .I45 aa . . . 1 27 f>
t '} #il . . . &3a aa

T aft ^ a6
ff
113
74^c^ 110/, i.n-ff t
i .llSJt, L2I ^ lA I 103 f
1 ft H . . . . .
a AT
1 Q . N 3. IÂ>( c .
/" lac r
a1
AX 66 f 102 8 . . . .
1 1 ^ V 14,11 . . . 6j r, ! ^2 y I a . . . 69/
Tint \aaI n 1 . 139 ^ a -
18 . . . .^dd
1 1 a 15, 1.2*, ao ^ 21 A TO 1 I 1 M
TO 107 r, 146/ aa .
f^ I r a . 58 80^, 117-?- 20, i .
fi 2 /J 1 ?o d 4 . . ^ *
, .109A, is9(/ 5 c
a *
1 1^1/ Z 8 . . . . I I
ao . 1 in /
8 . . . . . ii n . . . . ii8i
ta J 9 .1171t, iao>r, I ft . 107 0
A 1
154, N. iS \\f% a
A 6% ao . 1 H lf. I C2 X
122^ II . . . 2Qe, 20 ae 72 it II7>(ifr
T t 1 1 T s 21 a I CO M
u 150 a, 159W 13 . ao<r, 64 rf, 138^ i . .
T e Jl
*4j .A I ^
"1 i^vr
6 A. I ao i/. I es M c . 1
i\ 1 1 7 J i2 . 30 67^, qo/r, g 61 3. 7ft lO? P
1 e 106 t 10 . . I a6 r
ii Hi. 17 . . 10^^. 1 1 30 116 w
iB . ao . . .
47 146 c
til
na M no 18
a*? . I20J 3i . . a8 . . lif d. I2li>
a 1 I ^ I aft . . ao I a^ (
in T
16, a . . . 51 ft 72 31 ... 29 , I^
3 . . 51 /, ufiA 6 . . . . . 125
I ftorr
1 'Jtld, 12 ee, 141 /,
t . . . i50 N. 2 21.
* . at f. \2xa
1 1 ca f* 99 I I a^ ft
8 asf a I i(. I 1 ^
. . .
a .
* l(
0 . . . . yl ^ . . . fiXn
10 . * 5 * ae ' . . . . 1 1 7 </
T 3e ^ 67 W, Lllrf, * *
21 . . . 13.V N. LJS'^.N. a
11 6 I 3& 0 2J . . .123'-. 15';.^ Ll
a
a
n vi 2a TTaiM i6a<r N
12 A I a3 /" ao ^
1 . 63 . 76 '
t ac 0
:
12S V ao :
i
I N.
M '
ao/, 125^
ao
3S ^ .31*
.
33 . . . . .
I a IL 1 . . . "5/" 3 *
....
.
I 3 . IltO^ 3 . 7a 117 ^ 8 107^

T 9
L& 20^, Il6f,I26lV 6 . . ili .
ifi . . . 146^, i?;2

2 31 . . . SI n, 67
ifi . Ll . . .I4i</,i46it ai .
21 . 14 . . lA .... "Ei
32 . . . I a6 /, N. I 26 .
5 . . . . . 118^ 32 . P" 39<^' ^* ^

ai .
9 . . . 25'- as . .... 126/
34 14 . . 30 . ..133*, 133*
32 iS . . 75. 133*^ 31 .... s|/
2Q . . 24,2 .
Exodus 5, 5 Numbers ii, 25. 573
Exodus Exodus Levitious
-^m/ . . . . 6qA 25,10 . 134 N. a
. . 'î9ff 2i . 49 ^. 75 w
L2 . . . .i54a,N. 33 . 145 , w. a
Levitioua 26 . . . 761
15 . . 135 g N. a . . 49 ^, l!L 2
as . . 30/, 117^^ iB
_ f
ai 2, 1 . . .139*/, 145/" 33
_ _
8 . . 144
. A 2 34 <>7J'f25'
4, a . II9W, N.3, 139 32 . 118/. N. L
43
3 . 61 Q . . . . .75Ayi 43 ... 67 J'
12 . . -53^ 13 . .ii9i</, N. a 3 _ _ _
ifi . . . .133</ ?3
33 49>^> 51^ 133* 3 . . . .I38</
. 34 1 ' . "3i^ Numbers
a "8^, 1350. N. a .
49 3, a
ifi . . . 134 N. I 9 a
i5
. . . .ii7> 35 53A 155/ 42 ' ' '
. . . . 1 39 f 3,33 . . . Hi
32 . .... 91 <r 3, 1
29, I . .... 66^ 9j d . . . 107 12S1C 5
. . . .114/
31
IS . 75 rr, 100 >t 4^ 117 w> 134*
35 U, 2 . .... 67 J- 45
30,20 . . . 117^, N. 4,17 . . .IS2
.... 73/ 35 . . . . . 53 33 VzK
41 . . . .
s_ 6, 1
43 .... 744 3
12 . . . I
44 117 w, iMf
32. I . . laooa, I37<- 13. 4. .
12 t Ia8 /
. . . . M/ 15 .
15
20
. .53>*3<f 14,3^ . 22
.... 53/ 12
1 2 . .74*, 96
25 .133*, N. a, 144^
aa . . "4/ . . 53'-
32 . i59</</, 167 a 16. a ,
. 5
....
. .
34 . . . 11200 17, 14 . 145/ 12 . . .I33</

. . . .
2Tq 18, I . . . . .TiAA 8* 2 . 37<7. 64<f
21 . . . .95^N. 34 45^
lOjCf ll2t. 9, 2Q . . .L3i'
10 . . . . ll2kJl 10, 3 . . .145^
10, 0. 6i</, 143 /, N. a 4 . I34r. N. I
'75gg^ 39 . . .138*
13 . . . 09^. 91 2& .
35 . . . 5
20. 7 . .... 36
15 IQ. .
4
ao . . 6o</, 159 L4
5 . . .106^
13 . . . .Z>iA 2
84, I . . . . .134^ 2L 4. 10
10 .
t .... 126/ II
15 . . 51^ 5 L2 . Ms, 133/V
lA .... 51/ 21 . . . 143 /, N. 2
M . . . . . 1 59 28,17 . H
-ôSi?; 23 . . . , . <^d 12 . . 119OT
2^
35 2a
88. 3 . . . . wihh . 2ld, 68/ 12 q.
25, 5 iao</,N.3,i36x
Nximbera Numbers Deuteronomy
11^ 22 ^ aa,33 . . 103 /'
2,2i 136 to
1 54 h 23, 3 21 20/, 75 rr, 110 A,
13^ I 146^ 2 64^670, 93aa
a . . .
liiA N. 2 s 32 . io8f,ia3 M33^,
4 971 L3 iQo, 481, i^f,
6 12% d 69 or, 1 53 ^ afi 49 m
12 . . . io)^. N. a 15 51^ 3i 62 w
lA 154^ iS . . . . 90 96 31
18, 37 1
is
27^ 64</. 1091, 3i 3 . . . 73^, it^d
aa ..... 13/ 5 128c
14,
l6
2 .
. .
. 106 p, 151
. 69^, ii^j
20
34 . .134M
M u
L3 . . 125
100
N.
<
12 10^, 67. il I26i&

21 16^ <^ 24 J
I . .I33r 4, 1 . . .
44 J, 69/
34 ... . 119/gr 3 . 90 w. 0^ 8 128 p
22 24'^ i . . li 6/(
-
LQ . . . 115 </, 165^
ai . . 148^ L& 1^
33 9^ 1 . .
2i Ti?
2A I3.^</ 2 SASi 93 s 54^
35
40
^ iSZ
^ ID
2
aa
. .1x3''
HS 11
2fi
39 72W
90
16^ If line ?4 23J^ 62 3 '3i>;sr
. . . . ii9Z(; 25.13 5 , 131 r, N. I 6 . '5 A 138
?2 M3<^ 26,63 . ... 47 9 60A
3i 5'-* 27i 7 . . . .i35< Li 113^^
16. 54# 81.38 . . . i34t/
. 1^ . . . LiQ j/, N. a
L5 82^ fi . . . I.so m 23 . . .126 s, t32 A
12 . . loom, 150m H . ... 69 A 24 325"
159 N., 1^9 ^ 12 . ... 23^ afi i.m f
17, 6 2i!
30 159 N LS9 f 2 . . .118^, 1654
m . . . 67/, jidd 30 . . . . (î 2 USil
12 Iiil 32 . . . . 32^ 11 96
ao 72 . . . .102^ Ii 5 52
35 I38t/ 34 < z . . . .ml L5 60^
82 io^ Z ifi . . . 73 r, 109 </
ifi .67^,67 50/, y 23<: 21 til
m
. . . .
N. I
18. iB 14.^ g Deuteronomy If 27l
19.13 74^ Ij 1 liiJLa ^ 44<

10, 3 . . .65 a, 154 <^ a "8^, 134/ 15 106
5 59. 152 a, N. 3 53^. r^4g 8
l8 . . . . 1 ;3
" ty i3o^, lafiA iî 5
21t 1 1^ 2 119 J
1 19 J
12 . . .126 p. 133 1
i-Laod
5 L3 . . . .
lA "7/ 16 IL a 117/
12 12 47 ,5ii 13i 16. 49 w
2Si . . . . 112 Sf lE 117^^ 13^ 3 2
33. . . 157 N. I
15 118 A. 1361; 18, 1 l oqd
22 54 Z5 2i 69/ 3 6a4
30 76/ 23 lil/ 9 109 </
aa,
35 >^^ 22
2S
i5^. I5/ 14,17 Sq*
I 125 .134. 16j a i3r
6 . 30</, 53 , 31 149^
65 g, 2 . 119W, N. 2, i39</
130f, 138^ .135
^. 14 03*
13 . . . 69 X, 115c 67^, 62J^, 107^ 16 .~5 119^
12 67 <? 46 L3 93'"
21 lO.^f a 75 3*, ii8<^ 2Q 133 A
?3 "7' 13 . . 119 J 17. 2 1674
32 . . . 151 N. a Li ^34^ 5 24(
Numbers ii, 27 Joshua 21, 11. 575
Deuteronomy Deuteronomy Joshua
17. 6 144 e 32. 1 afi<- 2,17 . 34. ?i 59^
8 \siih 13.. >53^ ~iB 59^
14 . . . 49 I 20^ iflQ , 3i 5 ^34i
12 109 r l.S2a, N.
Ifi, I . . . 68 c. lai A 2 60 /, 87 , 123f 9 6^c
15 25 8 S3ii 09* LL IlS (T
lA 109^ . . 5811 58^ " mi

80. a II
S m lii
^ 15
14
ID
'ayi'
120^^
14 11 3 21*
3 Ll5y 155 ^.'5,*/.' 55 -4 4 Ii4i
7 i 6 42 '
S 20 . ]o8<r, 167 6 2 91^
5 21 . 152 fl, N. 14 52/
10 22 ... 62/ 34 74^
...
22i
LI
13
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.49
.
r/i,
101 a
iSQjg
96 13
Ii 58 g W.3, 75
ilfiii,
697
116/
6^
6j ^
2
S
.
.
.
.
.ijo.r.
.1121, 113 /
^
134^
9 2 . . . ifioy L2 L5_^
2a 50,23^ 7i 2 . 6.i/>, 120^ lS4g,
33 131? 12 .If2 N.
5 . . . L30<î N. 2 30
.
.
.
. . IMl 9 75 M
Ii 2qA 31 156^, N. a " . . .137^.1.34^-
. . . 93 liSp 31 . . . 2qA 25 ii7^<r
24. ^ .*
167^
35
36
ti^ i4A^
Ij^V,
ml
I?i2 J
81II
a&
"7^
ao^jo^
. . ! ! 44/, . . . . .
32 4Z) 33 37
8 3<^ . 141 h, N. 2 9i a 118^
1! 93. N- 8 L3Za
L3 581 . . -iSQw L3
54/ 73W, I26aa
25.
23
2 (j6^
LLi*
JjiHv
i 117/^, l^L*
nor
afi
34
. . . . widd
75
. . .
52 . . .
L2 62 f 83 3 I
. . . ii6j
13 "3/ 4 . . . 131^ LZ 93 f*'
26. 5 119 I
9 19 117 ^, N. 2 2^ . . . 2ii Li8
La 11 IIDI, 117//, 165^ 36 90^
27. 6 . . . . 1 1
12 ... 44^ U.14 SI/
^ 1^^ US . 4^d, 90/ 12j Q 2f
88,2^ 58/ 12 I30g. 1 33 A 13. 7 i25</
36 13' d 2-1 . 68 A. 76 </ . . . 145 u, N. 2
43 121A ?3 . 48 , 69 / 14, 1 64*/
48 3/ . . 11910 2 72 <M
43 153 ... 91/ 8 2Ai?
22 . . . Ljij LI i5i7
^ . 113^/. 143/, N.a 84 . 2 . . . rt6/ 15, 3 ... . LLa/x
tl ILL 5 90d
S9 21 " Joshua L2 90/"
62 119 1 1, 1 . . . 45 ^ N. 2 14 IM^
iifi Hirr 2 13 iS i67
62 1^1 6 5 106 <r 19 . . l\TXy iiYff
29, IS ii2f 2 107/, N-2 zi 90 e
ifl , . . . 62^N. 8 9Ji 36 lie
21 ... . .167 * Ll 12f ^ 38 . . . 21 N. a
aS 5 2i 4 . . . 6o</, I i^tj /> 16. 2 II2X/
80. 4 Si2^ 5 LLL* lli LI . . . 97 f, 117/
81. 12 120^ 6 59^ 18j 12 . . . 901, 113 /I
^ 93^ lii . . . 1 1 7 f. 157^ 30 42/
74 13 . . . r^<y. 96 19,11 LLaxr
32^ I . . 2 J, 91 A I ' 7 ^ La Lair 13 90
3 69<? 16 .
6l, 72^, 21. II 91 A
Kiimbers Numbers Deuteronomy
S9 aa m3 A
I A 30<:, rj7 c
24 aO/T, 75 iio/r.
19 r I * M <T *
Z 04 f, o7<>, 93 120^
0 a7
-a
-Ifiac, 133*, i<.it
A W/ JO Oy jW.J
40

li , /
u t
1 aST?
o u 28
L3
t /%e A M 1
15 . .... 51 a
f
ii * IHA & * //f
t\r\
19 37 I n ^ 3 /i Of
3* 71 / 2 I
14, a . I 00 6 I K I on t /\ dr 1 I AO f
*
A<i M
" ^
T
A I
1 ^ Jr
.J 24 1 a^ M I a .
17 ^ ft 2e TO A ^7 ir f
a I .... 167^ 24. I . . . . . 12^C 4 I 44 g, 09 J

tA - -
T T A trtr
**9 ... yw w.
M An f\n e
Q .
fx 7a 1 r\
. .1 a, IUh Q
aI 76 A 1 aH A
15
ai . . . Ql/ i 20 7a I
a^ 1 aa //
Z_i
A
54
t. f
' 93a *
fi 2T RX i
15 . .... 67^ 10
I *T
1 1 a **
art
e 1 &
A\ . I ae ^ ^ T
15 i . ini c a^ 5 a 1 5r tr
... I ly w 0,I3 .
i*a* TAT ^
5 "1 Li?
Ikl V
'
29 . .... f OA /\t
.... 54V
Til
27 7 . . .
T 9 e /I
i Sri V 1 9
16. 13 . . . . . SI aS 1 } ^ // in I an ti yi t
32. 6 . . . . 150 m a I 1 afi f T aa i&
LUU m
T Mt y Af C ^ /rf
Mf
14 . . . . 69A
59 *i '59y 12 .... 73/ it' T r 1 ^
17.^ . . ya tp 20 . 52 3 . .110/; 105*

1 A*. / <
5 //// 30 . . . . .681 T 1 rk /
I 1 an ^ 3a .
T T
2Q . . . 73 ^ 43 . . . .103^ 7 R
3C . . . I38 34. 3 . . . .13'/ f g ^//
27 I oA M
z . . it^bb, N. 111 . 3 r, 109 "
zS 5? ^ 67 //// 1 RO I' 33f aA c 1 /
.
14 . . . . .
IR 18 T j< 9 ^ Deuteronomy 1 1 1 ** *
10 Ta 7J />
2 .
ff n f '
a
i . . ?3^^. 1.^40
10 .
1 F 1 Mt
15^ 5 . 130^, I2S1A 10 C
t 7
2L 1
m
. ' ' ' 75y 1 12 .I20t/f 133'
L3 .
12 * 1 * Uw
1 J
1^ . . . 75 A iiAJ* 11. a 117/
I 7 6^ / 12 42^, 16
.
Si'', L33''
iS . . , . 117 19 t
2a I e7 ^ N I
m .
....
118//. 1361; 13 1
27 .
62/ a
.... 76/ ^ . . .134/ . 2
25
12 . . .ii5f. 115/ 14,17 . . . . . So-t
32. I . aS . . . .134^ 16, a . . . -^ngs
6 . 20</, 53 , 67 <7,
24 . . 65^, 14Q? Z iigw, N. 3^ I3,qd
u . . . .
.i.35 ....
li . . 6q X, 1 1 fi (T 67^, 67>', 107^ . . . .119^
II 46 . . . . .i.^8</ LI
9 . .
75 3*, LlS V
11 17, a . . . . . 167*
33 . . . If I g. w. a L4 . . . .134A 5
Numbers ii, 27 Joshua 21, 11. 575
Deuteronomy Deuteronomy Joshua
VL 6 M4 f
32, ^ 2,17 34. J'- 2i 59*
8 . loa A 5 la 59*
14 44<î 49 6 30^, Tf//. lQQi 3i 5 ^54l
12 . 109^ 153/1, N.
18 68 f. lai h 2 60/, 82 If, 121' 2 ~5d7
. 25 8 5l5 .09* LI La8^
i . 109 </ ID " IMl
20..
Ll
a
8
.
.
ti-d
lai ^
.128A
LL
15
12

.
. ^ I^
53 ,
[MA 16
ii 3
14 >27ir
1
21i
30^
2L 3 1 55^.155/.' 55>j 4 114^

Z .44J i 5 47 m
8 55^ . 108a, 167 6 2 9V
9 . i\7 (/ 11 1^2 a, N. 14 53Z
1_Q Li^ la ... 69/ 24 74^
II 13 . . . 6i2 5j, 2 . . .lao^, 134^
13 . un a iiÂ, 1 16/ 8 . . . . . 634^
22, 1 159^ It i N. 3. 75 mm 6, 1.^ . . JJji. 1 1.1 1
9 ,
121 32 I59i: U
19 28 50^ 91^^ L 2 . 63 A 1 30 ^ 154a,
33 IT, I b 39 . .L59 N.
23 5 i3or, N. 2 30 . .114 9 25M
u 20 h.
31 1^6*. N. a 21 . . .I37^.i34jf
15 93 js, 128P il 3^ 117''
5 . ,cf6 53 g 145". 155/ 8^1 112
24 , I . 1671 M 39 r 44Z La^J afi ao^
4 ' SAi 32 3a/i 25_f? 33 112J
8 . 5' 39 141 A, N. a 9, a 1 18 V
. as^ 40 N. 8. . . .
.L12^
Ll . 58' 41 .ISQ . L3 . 54/, 73 w, laOflg
21 . 1
15 46 17^. 25i asj . . . . iiit/d
25, 2 96, 12S t' . . LLQ<r 24 75>*A
1_2 . 62^^ 38^ 3 . . lift f
11
1134 4 . . nil 11
26, 5 . 115 I
2 I9f 117*, N* 3 34 . . .331, 1381
u 1 161, I I 7/A 161;, A 36
27, 6 13 IL 14 51/
2 16 48*/, 90 / 12. 9 3
28.3 58/ 12 13. 7 135</
11 21 68 A. 76 14 . . . 145 N. a
ii 1114 13 481:62/ 14. I 64d
.532 U 1 19 w 2 73 Oil
49 . . 21/ a 757?
. 62_ n . . L31 J li 161 f
II 42^ N.a 34. 2 . . 116/ 16, 3 . . . . 113 jx
. 2a1 5 90^
59 Joshua " 22/
1. I . 49 ^, 2 L4
66 .
25 a 131 iS i67
62 . lal ^ 5 106 r 19 . . 1174:, 117^
. ;52^ 2 . o7A 135 g. 2-1 9og
iS 69 ^7n. a 91^ 36 ai
21 .167 6 La 135 * 38 . . . ai SL a
aB 5 2j 4 . . . 6o</, t.^5/> 16, a iiajj
80. 4 . 93 6 5 ILL* 17i u . . . 97/. 117/
31,1a . i2oe 6 .S9^ ISjia. . .901^112 XX
93r ifl . . .ii7f, i57<- 2fl 42/
. 24^ 13- . 63 7, 96 19. II II3XX
82, I ax, 91 /, III* 15 ia6 r 1 901
. . . 69 16 . 63<-, 73 y, 74^' 21. II 91 >fr
Joshua Judges Judges
681 . . . . 20^
12 . . . . 1170^ 20 34/ 4 . 122 f, 135^
20 . . . . 150 m . . ii6w, 128 r fi . . . . .153/
. . . 103 tf, N. I aS 63/ 8 . . . . .i33
ai . . . 73 1S3Q fn 15 .
L5 . . ii6y, 159 12
Ka
. ... 134
24,14 75 ^ L 3 137 <^
i& . . . QO/ Q3X
is . . 124 A. 145 23 15. I . . . . ii9
8 3i ^ 2 . . i6ic, N.
Judges la 3^ L2 . . . . 152W
. . .
49 ^, N . a L3 . . . . \ 12 gq
. . . 106 m 12 16, 5 .
3 IQ
13 2
2 . ii6i&.uj</.i4ii. 2 . . . .îdd
74*' 155^
La . . . . LL2lf 2 11 . . aSc, N. I
15
13 10 15 . . . .Ml*-
aa LI . . . 130a, N. 2
2B i2 . . ^^,159* i& .
2. I aS
2 . . . I2f A, 12&C a6 .
iS . . . . U2-Ai 9, S 27 .
12 2 . 63 /b, IOQ, I06ff 28 .

34 a, N. 2, 88/,
3,23 10 . . . 46^/, 46^ 92*, N.
ill 30
12 .
. . 119**
. 12, 2 . .... 32A
aS 18, 3 .
8 49 29 .48/, 76 ^, 151 ^ 19
iB . y J, 72/, 126 r 23 . . 67^, 67 J'

12 lAi. 39 69/ . . . .527
IQ fiS^, 64^
1 10*; 41 35 30 . . . . . 5
If 0/1, IS3 i& 45 . . . . ii7 lOi 5 . . 9 M, 64 e, N. I
21 . . . 72/>, 72 ^ 48 . . . . 157a . iioA, unJ.
. 2J, 117^,146^ 3 . 210,67 p, 125* a , . . . . 64r
9 . . ... 91*
. 67 </</, 136*/, N. 10, 4 -9$ . . . . 1^-
. . 201. 36, 44 A Li
i >49'f
130
111 5
10
u . 69X, 73*/
ij8*, n. 3
. . . 87 ^, <z . . . 159 , N. l8 . . .
la 71 J i& 47 ao . 29ff Zi
L5 2Q . . . 157 N. 1 . . . . 54f
Lt 11 51 h 153 a, N. I 20, a . . ... 22/
15 10^,87^,93** 29 54 A 557
12 . . . . 117 M 3i II-
21 118^ 34 35f 135 ^ N. 2 3i . .... 66/
aa . . . 20 A, 123 e 35 32 .
U . . . . iigw 32
loom, 112 cc
44* 38 .
26 12^ 12, 5 . .
y
aS
. . . 154a, N.
64A
6 M . . . 1 17 w
Z
22 . ^w.iaSi, 133A 18i a
. . . ^(ir, 49 g 5 12 . . .
Li . 44 J, 64/, I27g
. . . i$gdd 8 51i
L2 . . . . 13*; w 1 Samuel
tS ii9 1, I 49^. N. 2j 125^
12
IS
: : : : :^ 21
, . . .
a
.
.
I25A, 156*
. 134 A 145*
Joshua 22, 9 I Samuel 15, 2. 577
1 Samuel 1 Samuel I Samuel
L 2 llldd Sxii Ii 10, 16 ii3tf
4 . . 113^, 136^
. 4, I . . . 131 MS *"
ifi 135 a
6 . 20 A, la /, 5Q .e, 3 "7^ 33 133^
iijtf, ii7/> 5 . . . 73 A, L4f a^ . . . 22X, 100/
7 . . . 107^, 133^ fi
34Z a^ 126/
8 . . . .37^. m2i 2 "5' 37 136*
9 . Qi e, ii%e, J 8 . iÂ, 136*/, i^d 11. 1 135*
m i38j> 10 . . . 134^, I45<7 a 135/
II 1130 La 137^ 5 107 f
La . . .\\2ss, 11411 .44W, I45 A. U5 "
iOg I26i- L2 150a
\A 41^ 19 69 m, Ml tt ISi 3
..... 131*
. . .
ifi 13Sz/ ai 152 2 5U?

11 123/95 A 5j 3 1 16 d L3 . . 44</. 047
2Q . . . .
44 a, 04/ 2 iiarr 14 167 a
U IV2 00 9 . 67, i3o</, i64</ 17 II4<?
?i IMf iQ-^ . .I15<-, 145^ 19 107/
as 148^ LI 117g ao 135a
n "5^ 4 . . . 118A, I35r 32 . . 136 X. 135^
2a .... . 64/ 2 1350 34 75 7
2, I . .ax, 106^, 117^ 35 . . . ago. 1130
a . 103^. lao^, 134^, m . . . 6siA, l^qq 18^ 3 ^
LI . . . . 154 a, N. & 93W
4 146 fl la .47A, 71, 75 . 2 . . . 119^
& . . . Ill tt, Lmjr 8 69/
5 . io7;g-, n6jf, isfi^ 14 137*/ II 6XM
9 . . . 67^ 14a/ IS I36jr 13 ... . i59<i/
13 . ii aag.i i6w,i3i f, 19 119 A 15 n^g
ifi9'> 164 a L 2 L38i 17 . 136/. ia6, 134/
14 . . Lli^ i33a^ 9 I3 * 19 ... . 15311;
15. . . . .1X2 00 12 . . . ii6, iiQr aa ii8^
lii a3' 103 ^ 106 OT, 14 HA ai . 35 UAdd
LLa //. iS 112/ 22 ... LU ^
ifi .
^^Q/. 159
113
116 ^, Llfi /, q,
L2
aa
. 39
iiid
/, N.
14,
?3
I
.
^
L257
131 </ 8,11 2li 13 2a
19 113^ L2 114^ 14 . . . ii8j, N. I
ao L45 19 . . . ao^. 163a
aa ink 2 133 a if I3g ^
33 136/ 3 . .^117//, isa J 19 HI A
2 ii6j 4 '04^, IiaA 21 IJl
2ft 113 9 107^ 22 53
10 1 30^ 34 . . .l6d, i\2v>
. 40g. ii3. i9?^ II ii6m 27 73 A
?fi laii 13 35 . 42 2fl 73/
32 . . . 113 A 17 13S b 39 I36x
II . . .l\2X, lihd afi .
73#, 134 w, J43f 30 . Io6/,ii3o,i59x
3i . .S3<7. 145' " 33 . ?li74, Z^*^
3i 2 . . .107 1>, 130 b z . . . 1381, 1 38 A
3 . . . 107 f, 153 r lOi 3 92^ 3^ -48^1*, 3, 67^
5 . 46^, 130^, 5 ag .r. loi a, 109 k,
Z . . . . io2r iiaz 38 66 <
LQ . y4 >p. ii8, 133 c S Hil 33 I4a^
^ ^r,c- ^7 X16 8 II2V 43 113^
9 II3MM 44: U'j^'
i-a 113A 11 . 2qA. I Hi', iifij, 45 . . . 1 19 tc, N. a
Ll .113^^, I30f, N. 3j 1 l6 136 ^ 42 41*
119^ La 154^ ^ flag
14 L4a L3 75W 15, I 99
IZ L4!^ \A UilA 2 . . . . lOOMT
pp
Index of Passages,
1 Samuel 1 Samuel 1 Samuel
Ifij 4 93 18,31 134 >- 23. 28 23J
5 W 52^ 24, 6 II7</
5 . ao^, IAS, 6o/, 33 ii4 u .9, LLa rr, 144*,
6S A, 154a, N. 2& I5I
' ' '
59f 59* >
a -67^ 2L 23 . . . 69 n
6is it, U . 114 r, I54tf, N.
33</, Las'" 19. 1 Ufa iS ii7jf
11 . . . a2ii 2 . . . 51 , 63<- 12 iiaAA, N. a^ 117^
li5 a
i6fi 3 119/ 25^ I 2id
an 157/ 4 93 2 6fcc
33 39^, ^ II A, IQ ia6>' 5 44 ^> 64/
^
' /, 1 . . .
IIQX 13 .124A, 133 A, N.a 2
3a 1X&^ 12 . . . mA, 150/ 8 . .730, lA^Wk

33 ii9' 13 116 .r 10 . . 62, i36tf
16, 1 . . .^h, 137 <f 23 . . .113/, 135^ U . . . . 113
20, I ilC)S L4 nff
3 ^Tfif 2 . .103^. 15
. V li
34^. 75 f
130^
4 .i4i,i45i#,i5oa 3 118 X,
. Ll^ j:, ifi . . .
2 35^. f 142 1, !L 2fi . . .47^^, iiajj

8 135 6 .51*, 5i_i, ii3> 13 149^
11 ^^3^ i52i M ULL
La L2iLx: 8 i4iZ as 107/
14 9 150a aS .65/, 113 g. 113
. I ao 3, SL ij 1341 la . . . 1501, 151 a fir I44A N. 3i
ifi . . . ia8/. laof u ii8 49 a . N.
an ia8 ^ 13 .II7/,N. a, i49</ a2 . i43tf.M5g.t450.
93 . 1 la ee, ixa 00, m 117^ N. I
i^ laor 18 . . . II9t&, N. 2
17j 5 . . ni </, 131 y IQ 137^ ?2 I41
La . . liû, i^Slx. 11 M3 33
11 . . .133^. 134/ afi 15a d 34 . 76 A, io6,-, i49</
L5 "8^ 32 . . . 80^, N. I 32
i5 iilb 31 . . ia8v, 138^/ 26. 2 1 u^
12 . 136 jr. 134
. 33 if5^ U2 . . XJL7, N. 3
20 . . . . 112 rr a? 82/ u . . . 82 J, 152/
2J 133 1 40 7^J^ 13
34, Ill A 4^ 135/
'34'', 14 . . . . 155 Hf
35 ._aax, si, 60^, ai. a . 901, 119^, IS20 l& 117/

IOO/,II4F,ri$7 a . . 55A L3I 19 73(ia
afi
iiZlM^ 5 . . . II9g, N. 2 20 Ml d
afi i36 <- 5 133^ 27. 2 "ag, \\2dd
aa ii2p a 139^ 10 . . . 150 a, N. I
34 . iia AJk, Lafi r, 2 . . . IfiOf. ILJ 28. 3 . io6/, 154a, N.

IQ I02g' ft 149 <^
38 LL2// 14 ;_6orfj 75^,1 31 >M, 2 . ;3</, 2^ liSii;

40 1211 N.3 130*
4i "3 m 150^ 8 . . . loAj 46^
43 IMo 82. a 7500 10 aaA
45 14i/ S LLfi 13 . . . \%2h. BL a
47 SlAi4i 2 . ii7if, ia^L53 15 48 59l^ 25
48 ... . LU MM 9 90* 102/
55 III /, L2l5 aa, L3 LL3_? 24 684
15 . . . 67 tcr, ifo/V 29. a . . ._49i, I30f
58 . . . 136 1, 126/ as, 1 93 r o 1444
18. I "Ktf 4 . . . . . 1 53 30. a 1567
9 Ifi . . .113*, 117 6 M4*
lO . . . fi4 IIOK U . 150^. N.I, ISOW 8 . 150*, 154, J.
14 156^ L5 90<? 12 . . I34#, N. I
.
15 ^57c 12 5>' 34 161 c

i& 137a aa .6a,i35*,i44</, 21^
15 . 114 9, "S^. N. 2L_a ifi 10/
I Samuel 15, 4 2 Samuel 21, 4. 579
1 Samuel 2 Samuel 2 Samuel
81, 2 . .
53 0, 1 165 0 15.27 72 i
2 . 3 liiZ 32 . . 1 16 i. 121 d
2 . . \2^r 10. 7 Tî 33 4^ 75 w
a . . 145 i^â 34 . .
67"^ 143
" S4^ 32 23^
2 Samuel IL ?1X 16. I i34#
1. . . . l^C 4 llli 5 . . iia//, ngr
U . . . 149a, N. 2 laSZ
9 15 . . .
Llii N. a 13 93^, Ua/
10 . (ii ^, 1073 afl 157 f IL 5 L3&/
. . . iFôt 14 75 rr 8 \V7h
ai 130 a* 153/?- 35 n7/ 3 I44f
44<:, 154a, N. 32 60 IQ 67^
116/ 12, I 12^ 11 1061
2 . ia5</,i a6jr,i46/' La . . .109*/, 122/
ii 5 131/ 6 . . . . .
ftlA 13 io6d
2 . . . . 144M ii I3a
IQ . . . . lUjf m laj a
21 14 51^ 12 . . iia 4'. i36r
aa 10a/. 150 r 15 &1 "... 2^ i30/f
1 11^, ii6t(/ iS . . 113/, ii7y 33 ^w
4iZ 17 ... . 75 rr an 118^
?1 . 159 ec aS . . . 61 13 5 a/ I81 3 ^lii 92^
11 21 r, iiSe 30 I37 < IJ . Il4/,ri9aa,i543
8r 1 ISj 4 . . p. 481, N, I la . . .I37r, IM*
a 5 ILSL L3 . . .
159<"<"
8 12 ... . 75 liS 225
u . -LLS^ If ... . 117 9 i8 wid
iS xi3*/</, N. 3 12 . , 64^, 117?
. ift . . . . Ii9jf
5 18 . 47/, 112 it, N. 3, " 74
1 1?// 23 iio^
ao 117a 15 Hi? 32 . . .114/ 5oa
107 / 2Q .84a J, 118 /, 32 . . . J33A M.3
ijâ, N. li 1 . . .135/ '51 b
aa 23 i .î J 6 70 (T
Lli^ 35. . I53jr, 165 a ii 112 1

a aS . . . . 159^ II fSiA
128A ifi . . .
97 ^, 1 1 a //
141 e 31 noT is
m , 114/. N- 3 aa 23/ i5i'
u 32 .
liLfi lio ?5 SlA 112/
14, a 25 32 133/
6 3 76^ 30 iSjT
8 . .167 a 4 136^ 43 76*
la . .135 A 6 6od 44 ^7w
21 . .146/ >o 145 20, I . . .ii6rf, 147
1I3J!, I I7</ " zlC 5 "587
& X 13 93^ 8 I43 g
a Ift . . . 47^, N. I 2 . . . 68 A, 141 c
136: 21 ... . 106m " 155^
?4 I5 L3 62a/
16 . LL2 UU afi . . 118A, i34.g- L4 "5^*
ao 30 21 18 ... . II3TC
L 5 112 r, 150 </ 31 IQii Ift . . . 130/. N.
I 1 2 WW 15, a 3fl . . .149 a, 149^
aft . I20</ 4- '"A '5ia ai 53 J
8^ a 136 m . . . . ii7</ y . . . 16 A, 127
3 . 17 ^ ai . 93a<i, n., i?,oc 21, 2 "74T
1 . 692/ ?3 LLI/ 3 1 10
B . 131 g 4 Lao^
P p 2
oogle
a Samuel 1 Kings I Kings
. . .ii8f 2. ali . 7<i s . Il8, I aR /
10 . . . 25 . 112 dd, 113a

. . 25'^ . . 1 28 If
ij, . . . . . . 80*. QO( 10, 8 . . 1262, N.

20 39 12Q<-
. . ' 35 . . .
4.0
ail ...
. * 15
Ml . . I28r
22. I . .a J, 53/, liod ^ . . . . . 7a aa
43 . . LaSA 2^ . . HQ Ht 1^2
3. 4 . . . . . 107 *
7 . . . . . 114^
8 . . . . . 166^ 3 . . .145^
ti* II . . . . .112//
fA h La . . . . . 166^ 8 . . . 1*1 A, N. I
M 1
41 IQ j 1 111 TV IS ... 71 . . .138*
US . . . . . 107
ifi . . . 120^ lr
5 . .
LIS 'w. 150" 2IS . . . . . 46 < tat
6 . . 9^ 143A . . 03//
112/ 25 117 fn, N. 3
I ' ' 2 . . . . .
S . . u . . . . . 90 t
13 . . . . . I28f
L3 . . . .134* 14 . . . . . 90</
n '
' iS. . . . .
116 s, 144
116^ . . . 23</
15 . . fi, I . . .
a . 145". 54^ 2 . . . . . 68 f
3 . . . L31<" .64 117^
11 . . 2 . . . . .ii^dd a . . 116^, Ii8y
L3 . . 145^ 0 . . . . . 131 *
La . . . 134^
17L . . . . . 117A If . .
. . .93// 2 "*P-/T _
* a8 . . . . . 133<-
106 m 25 31
.
.
.
. .113^ I
6
.
.
.
.
.
. 134A, 134
. . . . . . . -LSf'
1 KingB 7 . . . . . 131^ 3 '
1^ 1 . . . 67^ LI . , . . . 67 jr 2 .
Lfi . . . . . 117 </ 12 . . 155 155^.

5 IQ . . . . . 661 . . .i^6d
6 . . . 11971;, N. 2 L6. . . 93^
La 117/ 7 . . . 118/, I26u; 33 . . . . . 109/
. . . . iToM a . . . . . 118^ . . . 3^
If . . . Sod, go 14 . . . 41 0, 131 * 3 . . . .
ao . . . . .
L5 . 117 5 . 94 </, II 2
. s
21 . I40</, 154a, N. 22 . . . . 134/ fi . 118/, iai</, N. a
24 . . loa, 150 ^ aB . . . . . 20 m . . 64*/ .
2 i.VS;?' 32 . . 91/ La . . . .22r, N.

n tso/" 8i I . . . . . logA L3 . . . .I39f
31 16<5'' 3 . . . . . IIQ< if
40. . .117^, 145 < 5 ifk . . . . . L3<-

4i 146 a 15 . . .
42 7^ 29 . . . . . 91 15 . . i2Qd, it,oe
2i a 116 ^ 30 . . .
. . . 951/, 1140 31 . . . . 145^

lOQd 33 . . . . . ms,/ 15^12 ' . . I iQjr
l 116^ 44 . . 75 to n .
12 LllZ 48. . . . . 44i 34/

iB Ias a 64. . . n^'' 16, 2 . .
11 121 3 , 3 . . . . 75 w . 134" .
11 . . iioa, 154^ a . . . 67^ 24 . 29/, MA

33 14<id u . . . . 75'
2 Samuel 21, 9 2 Kings 20, 19. 581
1 Kings a Kings 2 Kings

17. i Ij u iod 8.12
3 . . . . 119 J 2, I , . , 10 A, 114^ u . . 0^
9 - . . . 901 10 . ^J, II4. N. 2 72 w, 76 A
LI . . . . . ifi . 93, io2f, 4 .
1124
11 u Z5<w 12 . . 80/
U . 66, Z5r
a^
7fi<^<y
laa;
1^ 1030, 119A
15
. . .
33_^ 22
16 . . . . . 146 a ! 3 135/ 33 : :l7
18 5 . 4 . arf', J 12 A, 111* 32 .
2i
.
10 . . . . . 107 r S iM^ 10 I 124^, N.

La . . . . . ij^ e 15 . . . . 113 MM lai h, N. I
27 . . m . . . 133^ 15 . . I59-^
3a . .
11 LL3W 21
43 4 75# 23 . 152 w
i4 . 35 ii2e 29 ui^

19 4 107 >^ U I . H2//>

U . .
L3iZ t I .... 125A a . ii6
.
Ul^ a6^, 90 901 3 9 A

N. l A'^C. 1 4 75iy, TlJL QZS.
12 . .... 134<^ a .... I36j 5 . .it6A
2a 2Qm 13 . ii7r . ii4i^. 12 .
ll
.
ai . . . . 131 Li .... Il* L3

ao.14 137* .... 33-4 15 113 ^-t^, lUK
au 145 ?i .... 6fic 12 9 72 A, 66^ 9P
Zi LL2^ 12 p. aSii iL I
22 ... 5^ .... îe^ 1& 6 ... 244
. logg . . .... aoi> u . . .laJJ
. . . 5iV .... 62/ 12 ... 26/
33
43 .... Ii3fg 15 114 A, i59</</
.... 118^
.
35 . . 75 mm a LI . . .111^
3S ... 51*
I
3 .... 1 51 <f 14 2 _ai LLa //
40 . .116^ . .... I39</ S . . 156^

.
21 2 ... Mi iioi, 113A*, 159 </ LI LLa ULi

& 134^, N. II .... 113/
m . . > 10^Z La . . . . 107/ 15 1^ 1271
LL 1 16^, 118^ 13 no/. i43/. i59<r<- 25 . . 8qA
La lliqqy 111 ft II '04/". L59'*' 16 4 . . 65.
li ... 69/ i& .... 75^^ 2 . 7^/>
ao U)fi, N. 113^ 3^ L4 . . 122^
aj aa .... lap 12 . . 127 A
25 . . . jaw ?3 . . SSLk
22 3 . . .iôt 6, . . 117 m, N. 3 17. llSu
.
1 . . .103* .... 91 a i . .134^

. . .
9 . . . . ii 1 . . 3^
L2 . . . no/ . . . . iM*" 15 . .103/
. . . isor II 36 29 . . 124 r
.
. liir 19 . 34 ^ N. L &a 18, 1 . .Ii4^
23 . . . 126 aa . . p. 481. N. I 4 . n J //
22 . . . . 109 A 12 LaSw, N.
. . . 1 31 c ?9 7Al 20 . . 44_t
2& 135 3a . . aa/, isiol afi . . a a
30 . . . . Liir/ aS . . 2a
. . .
21 . . . . 113^ 29 . . 24^
. . . i . . . . 471 30 L2i ^ a
10 . . 1 35 A N. 3 10 2 LI! A, N. 1
2 Kings 13 . . . . iriZ 14 124^ N.

li 1 . . i . . . . inA ai . .
211
8, I . 32-4 25 n/> 25
3 6 53 m, 20 ,
1 4<>
Z S . ia6> Li . . I2bx
10 . .141/1
2 Kings Isaiak Isaiah
21. II . . . . . 2^ 2, 6 . . . 44^1 91 " ex 6 -04 IÂ, 156*
13 . . . . . 62 Z Ull 2 113X
li . 113 A, iL a 8 . . . . . 145 8 .6ije-. ii7f, 124^.
2^ . . . 144 iN. a 9 . . . I09<> ii7.g- N. 3,1^2^
32, I . . . . .T34^ II . . . 113 f. 146 a 9 . . . 113''
li . . . i%Sh 12 45 Ifl . . . 67 y, 136^
. 61 A, 1341- iS ifZ LI . 106 tf, 144 </, ijjar
23, a 137 c ao .84bff,i35ff.i45m La 67
.75t;,ii2/Ap.354, aa ,
. .116^, ii9i
N. 1 3, I , . . 116/, Li2t' N. Ij L211</
a 3 "6^ 7j 2 . . . 73 Liai
10 . . 1 1 a 114^ 5 . . . 103^, 118^ 3 2i
Li . . P-3Ji4. N. I 2 i7^. 117". i5<><^ 4 113*^
II 67 P . . . 53 33 VJAt
11 137/. 137^ 2 . . . Li&. 156^ 2 . . . 133^, 144^
. . 117 </
. la . . . 134^^, I4S / a . . . . . Ii5jr
a . . . 1M li 115^ 2 . . . I48(/, 159^^
24 ! 1 . . .144^ 14 . .. . laSA. 154^ li 39 X
L4 -97^ 15 aii L3 . . . ii4tf i3-^<^
86 . . . a ifi . 53^. 75 , 111 14

Z4Zi I"/, 113A,
. av ua , i_L3 " ia6r,p. 459.N. 1.
, . . iioz '350 13s g
. . .I34 12. .91 Qt/ 14/ li Hi/
. . . 131 ^ asZ 12 49''
. . . 133^ 34^ 131^ ao
3$ . . .75^ 4i 4 . 106 0, 107/, 113^. ?2 1-^4*
150 , N. 35 . . . u8/. I44 i
Isaiah 5j I . 87/rN.,io8^,i38t> 8i I . .39/, 53/, 119K
L a 1 16 If, 136^ 2 . . 114 m, 117K a . . . . 49 ^, 96
I 3 iio" 4 . . . . .144^
4 M7^ 4 . . .114^, 150m D . . 2tf, N. 3^ 130a
. . 37. ^ nil 5 . ii3,ii3</, 113/. 2 \1aI
,
67 m, 144 1534? Il4ij, N. Li l lO^t a 145 0
, 116/. 1 l8jr, 143 a 116/ 9 110/
9 , . 106 fi, 1 1 8 -r 6 . ii7, ii7V, HQy 11 . . . .45*^.59*
IJ . . 106 II"- 8 . iiaty, n6.r,i44/, L2 . . .
47 w, 117r
L2 . . . il /, IOOf 147 </ 1^ 67
,66^, 766, 102 4, 3 153^ 12 .... .
Zii
1)4 r, ii9<ia IQ aa 145 IK
If 60/, 61 ^, 117 z.
, II . iL3>, I30<i,i55</, 21 . . . 54i(, ii8if
ia4. 145 g 3^ .67 V, 90/, LaSJ
. 54</. Lifir L2 .
93 JX, 1 06 /. 141 d Oj I 106 w, 130 tf, 133^^
.
1 13</, 1 1 7 w L3 12a a 103^. 130a

LZ . . . .. .
I36, i6oa 14 . . . 30/, 1L2/ ^ mh, lah, 67 tv,

.
s . . . I30 15 mm. 93 iia , L3i

aa . sê, LUC L2 . . . 143/ 4.112 mm, 134 ft.
21 QoA 95*, ^
107 15 . . . 48 (/, u&d 143 lAde
148 33 . . ii6.r. 145 m 5 . . .
144^/
, . . . uhm 2 . . . Ii4r, \ it,k Q
. 07^. 134/ 35 ' .^6 // a . . . 137^. 145 f
34 ifi . 133*. N. 2. i45 II ia7f
, . ii&w, 12^1 aS 2qA i_3 116/
Ilfi/, N. Li '35 a^ 15a/ 145*
, . . . 30 136^ 10. I . . . lOyf. 23**
aB . . . . .I47<- 6^ I Ill ^ a ii4_r
?9 . . . . .144 /> 2 .88/, ii9, 134^ 4 .... . 163^
30 , ^d, ii6f\ 153(7 3 . 113*, I33i>. I3g<. 5 1514
il .... 93^ N. 3i 141 / 2 a
2, I . . 154a, N. 4 . 107*, 107 </, 117* m 133^
3 Ii6r 5 . 106 If, I38j>, 147 11 . . . 47 * i37
2 Kings 21, II Isaiah 29, 15. 583
Iiaioh
16. 10 . .LU^, 144^ 23, 11 . . . aoo, 53^
N. 1 17, 1 . 1 19 jr, 111^ La .35* 46 ii8g.
14 . . ii8t/, 133 <f
4 . . . .L2&r 130^. 133^
. ii5i,i34A,i50/4 5 . 112 "
* 13 . . Si6d, N.
62/ 6 Il8,I3l jLJi^li L5 44/, 116/, u&i
11 93f 1341 12 ' tV/, 9i<
.
62 8 .... 35/ 24, a 35^ liolr37

13 1 17 X 30M,N. 1, 117<r<; 3 .... 6jj
. . . 58 1, n9< 11 . . 73 II9X
a? 12 . 47 75 L2 131 (/
33 . . .114^,1190 16, a 19 . 67 o, 80^. ii3tt#

as*- 3 . . . 26
3 I2&a 4 2 .... 23^
2 . . . . 133 t S 39 ^ 67 V, 72 dJ, LQ . . . . 731;
8 .... 143/ \ALL 4i 26 4 . . . .1191
ioow.ii4f,t i5</,
,
... ^
9
ii6/",N.i7ii7,
1363
18,
6
I
3
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
67^
% 2
10
II
....
. . .
144
159*:
.47JW
in "95?" . 1341, 133 A l
L2 2Sim !2 . . 95*7 Lia J
14 . . . . . 93M 9 .... 86 ao , . -
-IMI
I . . . . . lOQ * . . . .138^ 37 I 3 . . . .boa
a . . . . . 80^ II . . . .1334. 4 10*. 65^, 21.
. . . ii6<f i3 . . . .143/ ii7.yt 151 b
. . . laaj L2 95<^> '43^ 5 . . . .ifiaa
18, 3 . . . I35 18 .... aa 8 . . . ss/
3:2 . . . .LUX 9 . . . .156/
. . .II8j: I 115* u 70a, N. 3^ I34g
& 1 a . 1131, 118 M 28 . .134^ 138 <:
4 . . iiStf a .... lasf

31, I .... 1140 S . 42j*
. . .
68 a 44 g, 72 ^> Lii b 4 9rr,i38tc/,i35,

aa .
93 dd, wjq 144 <r
14, a 54^ S2i N. 3, . . . . ii8r 6 . .90(, ii^hh
. . . .ij^d 2 .... 7a/
a .aa/, ioa*,ii5^, U 90/. 93'. 8 . . . I37f .
LU 121 / L2 39 A 7Stt,7&rr . . .130 a .
4 .
49 ^> 49 148 3 lA . . . . 76d ^loaA, 147 g
D . . .117 IJOtf 11 I37tf,LaSoj 146^ u .... 116^
2 ii6jr t
I . ^1 ^, 150/
. La *3 114 *> N. a
9 lA^l a 751;, ai^t 1173. 16 . i3o/.w.. ii
71. 130/.W..lj>fi/
11 . . .93W, 1450 I36<.ia8jr,i53 </ 12 . . 391*, 14a/
L4 8li 3 . . 1191& iS 145"
12 1170 5.
"3#. laSfl ao 133 f
19 ^9/> 1^6/, i3o<i . . i38r 21 . . .118/, 133^
m1

33 5iyS "3' . . . 2Qm 24 IMi

24 144^, 149 It u .
95 0, 124k afi . , . . uu rr
?2 itog, 126 k LI a2 . . . . . 15a
30 . . .
21 w ii3<^ iB . .113 m, 113
ai 73 , 1 13x^,149^,149^ 20. I . I9f, 66/, 69*,N.,
15 a . . 7o</, 36 90 OT, l44/
5 . . . 7aff L2 . . 1
3 r . 1
4 "o^
7 . .
'UtLi 18 . . .n8r 5 . 136/. 133 b, N. a
8 . . 119^ i9 . 144 />
. . 5 . ..84aj, 144^
10 . . TWA ia8Ti>, 133 A 2 .
75 qq, 1 16 I, ll&i
16 a . . .136/ 1 iiok, 119^ 8 J
4 . . .145^ 4 . . 153 s
.
9 . 5r^> 7^/
2 . . . 7o</ & ii8, La8J 13 . 13707143^
15 1
8 US" . .136 S,N. L4 -hoe, 113 w, 155/

2 i . .23^ If . 53^, 1I3
. .
Isaiah . Isaiah Isaiah
29, i6 . . .147 f, 150/ 35, 2 . . 113W, 130A ^.33 .48^, BLa, 7/j
. 118/. 13a c, iijjh 4 65/ 75 logd
23 131 g 7 35/ 34 Iff
80. I . . . . 6^^, N. 2 . . 84b/, I3a f 35 . . . 33/, 76(/
a . . . 631^ 12q 36^ 2 . . . w, N. 42, 4 . . . . . 67^
zii 2 . . ii9J> iiû R . 65 </, 93 //, 134^
6 iii^ 11 aa n . 107 fiL I, logk
& . . . 6L6lii^ L4 ..... 747 ifi 93/
II loa^ lis . . .110/, 137/ ifi .35^, "6^ 136/
La .6i</, iiiv, ii4(/, 17 ... . aiAT 2fi^ . .
75 , 144^
ii4r 37i 3 . . 69 w. If 3^ U I30r
i^ \\6d 4 aa . . . 2Qq, 134^
L4 .631, ii3, is^jf u . . . . . ijjo a 34 . . ii^d, 138*
iB . . ^^f, 130 a 14 . . . 1 34 ^. N ?S i3*
15
75 12 10^ 48, I . .61 A, 74^, 91 (/
. 1^1 f, 145. 15 . . "A/i 113* 2 . . i59'^ ^S9f

ai 56 aa 130^ 6 112V
22 . 135 , 145 fn
. 24 138r 8 . 53, 691;, 2aI
23 -^J a5 75y'/ H4't-.ii7 '< 2 L?
24 63' a8 ii4<r ifi . - p. 4.';q. N.
afi . . ii4r, 134 39 . . . . II a MM 3 I4 *
2& 73 f 30 . ii3.ii3M,iafi^ *ii 3 Zi
II i^d 88i 3 157^ 2 54
11 Ill 5 .50^113**. lis/ 13 641
81. a 141 / 9 UAL 15 'o.3/> N. 3
3 . . . . 2iJf iQ , . 108/, md ifi

62 f
5 . . . 67 p, \\2,t 14 . . 48 >. 61/. w. l& 7a
6 138/, 2^ 144'!' 15 fiZ ai .ao/ STi N. a,
8 . . .125^, 153a 16 .
75 WW, 103 g, 117 jr
82. I I43 g aa 73/

7 . . I54tf, N.
. 12 ... . .119/ aS . . .53> "4/
~
2 440 lE . . 116//, 15a s 45, 1 57/
u . 481. 670, no-* an . . . S6 i, 1141 2 7o7
u . . . ii6x, 144 89. I . . . 124^, N. 4 . . . Ill ^, N. a
r3 i38f 40. 3 146 * 9 >5
12 ii^c 4 o
iB 134/ 6 . . 112 qq, i27c Li
83. 1 i2i9* 53 9 "-S*. 46^ 5 75''''
67 , iao5, 1 56 LQ 119* 47. 1 130^
3 ^dd " a . . 63/ . 464/,
4 L4 UAl 8 90 w
& ix6j . . Ii Zi<*' IQ . 61k, lP, 116/
6 130^ ij . . . . 119.4A 13 138/
25 14
I
2
10
. . .
afi^ 145_/
54_
aa
aî
. . . . . i26<
134^
^ B
9
.
. .
. .
.
afid,
. 1
67
3*
19 44
i_a aoi 39 isav II 67/
14^ . 84a/, 117
. W 30 69 f 14 ... . 119 44
15 . ii7r, i!L 3, iiQg ai 8* 2 9MI
ia 134^ 41, 1 ... . iiQjeg 16 . . Ill X. Ifil c
15 62 a -35 w> N.i,75g'> 49, d .67Ml5a.i4'/>

aa 153/ N. a
84. 4 . . .67/, 1367 4 . . P' 459. N. 2
s hiA 5 75 " M5
6 54 2 39/ I 160^
10 loat 8 liSd ifi 33^
11. . . UCy 80/ ifl 75^^ 15 67 <A/
12 >i78 La 76<^ a 73/
,^ 12I IS 26 31. 133/. N., is6f
86, 47 17 IQI a6 135^
Isaiah 29, 16 Jeremiah 16, 16. 595
Isaiah Isaiah Jeremiah
60, 2 . 1 33 I SOW, 1 60, 4 . . 1230 6. 1
8 . . . I5<", 3o/ 9 . . 58-?' 13 . . . S3 0, 1,^8/
12
136<- L4 . .118^^,125*
u 61, 1 . . . 84. b
. . .581, 58*, (iQ<r
51. I J.^fi-* 1 . .00^, 119^^ 67 ;
J . . . 107 N. I 62. 1 . . . 16 f, 2nm 28

9 . . . li^S^ JlilK . . 15a g. N. 6. 5
lO OA /A 138* 63. 3 107 N. fi3A 8 51 f, 152a, N.
mm 1,
. . . .
II . . . . Ifi
13 50/ 11
la 12
12 19 . ao
. . . 4Tb, 122 q 64. % . . . .7e,AA 28
21 6 .
52. 2 Z3&io6^ 65, I . ' ' 51 ?5 " Ia 4 . . 133 A N-3

a . 117a, N. 2j 146^ 5
9 . . LL2 0, I lite
11 M 10
12 12 .
15 . . 57) ^- 2, 135*
lA . 9ii 18 . . . . 150W
_ _ 0
53. 2 5
a ...96^ 12&1 ee.tj . . . . .155'' Li 75^?. ^33Ai55
. . 116/, 1171V i8 .
13 . . 12 aa, iijiy
14
8 . . . 103/; 14, 3 Jeiremiah . . 100 m, 102 m
i6oc 9 ^ m9 A
io> /, i^l 0
-m
9 9, i
. . lAhudi a ' 53 npx

ij . 117//, lao/j.i.î/' 2, 3 .
3 63 f
54. I .67^^,144^155/ 8 . . . '55 4 .53y"3''
. . . 91/ .... 73* 11
.124*, 134^, 11-3 L2
5 fiSZ . . . .44W 12 74*
li: . . .117// 3 . 144''
II . . . 153 a, N. . . 116^, N- a 10, 3 . . .145 W,
L2 9
4
L4 . . . 540 llOf 2Q . . . 44A, N. 2 5 33. 42- 75<"'
15 . . . . I59W 1
^ J
55, 2 . . 6of, I33r
3 23 . . 59/^, 6()s IS
63 i36_y
9 13 . . .
56. 3 138^ .... 44 22 . . . .
4 13^/ 13
8 .... CiiLi Z
9 . > . . 39/ 3, I . . ii3<'^ 159 tt;
LS 5390^. !Al
57. 4 5 .47 i, CO/.rtgr . . . . 84
6 . .75". 32^ IS
1 l?!
1 '
4
8 421 a , .... 91/ 5
7 9 . . . 113 SS 9
1 1
13. Lfi
68. a . 30 4, 19
*
150 m 11 . 75 /A 75 rr
9 . . . 6tf, llfid It 144
la . . . . 119^^ . . . .laoA 12 60^
69, 3 z
IS . . .7S. "8^
5 . . . n^yî 21
9 u 14, I . . . p. 468, N.
ifi iB ,
. . . . ZA Ifi 03^
L2 19 108^, 133 A N. 3 L& . >59/>
LI . 5a*,75, iTI^ 16. 10 . . . 91^, N.
.
14 .... 145' . . . 50/, m2_Z

2J 6, 6 . . . 20d, 6'JCC 16,16 . . .73^. 132'!'
Index of Passages.
Jeremiah Jeremiah Jeremiah
0
17. a 4.fif 31,32 .
1 t
. 47 'î OOd, n
V 1 1 ^ f A
1 23
c
a 1 *T A l/> t J *v ^
1 TC
11 1 ^ aa . . . 2Q 02
Lq . . 7aj', 74/
1 1*? A
-tsf. 3^ .
5^ ii 124^, N. . . . .62dd
a
Q 75
15 21 . * 1 16^, N. a 3i 53A
4 1 Uf 1 1 2 ir#, 1 3' O L 3 . . 17^. 152 A, N.
L5 S2Z. 2- . . . .25??
12 . Ill/, 1 22 ri. 2 . . Ill W, N. I
1 1 .
f f
1-1 2 Mti
9 IVW
U Bh it f m III//
. . 2oi. ^hf
I'-
87 5^

to 3:J/
1A I I ^ A
12 > *
20 . . . loA, 46 d 1 1 1 /
13 t r Ibekiel
33 A3 . . 87/. 88/
ni /
17 A 1 13 '1 N 2
14 .
I H N a
. . i33A>'-3
. 'J- V V ^ > 9 a T V
23.^ . , 20</, 60 c, 74 ^
I A I 2 r dp, 2 *i 9 St

ail Zi
ii la . . . . .58*
33 . . .iij m, N. 61U . . . 72 r, logd
32 . . . 58/. 75// 40. 3 . LU 12 . Bin, 75 95
32 L3 .... 54^
24. 2 "5*^ . .75*^
OR 1
41. fi . IIS"
T 9 t ^ V 'ft
67 /, 5L 2, 67 dJ
i 75/ s .
J2 D . 17 fl, 32 </
2
. . . II9M
30
QA e AJL fl
L2 . . . . . qie
D . . . , 0 , 37 p < Q . . 67^ 14 . .... 1.33/
QT
7b'H 15 53*, -58 jT, 144 m L I
/ 10
1 Q
. .
u . 72 2, 113 s.
72^, 76^ 34
o f ^ iT
25 . .... 90/
^Vt I 1 p. 468. N. 3
1
Q
a
7 1 )
53"
^ ^ 111
Q
. 126 w 0, a
Hi
.
:
.
:
.
:
.
:m
ao . 84b M 3 IxGiy L2I (/, N. 2
I iaJi N 47. <i . 8 . .... 64
30. II 48, 2 . . . .116A
1^ 10, 3 . I3<i3' I*-
26 . . . . 1 34 m L5 . . .145 li
3L I 75A/4
12 . . 72jr, T2dd
a . . . . ii7,dd IT, 34^ ,
3 36 .
80^ 13, 2 ,
21 . . . 44 A, ii6y 401 3 . 54* II .
22 8 . 46a, N. I l& .
87/. o3/ K-a
28 19
-75// .
Jeremiah 17, 2 Hosea 4, 18. ^ 587
Esekiel Esekiel Esekiel
18. 30 .331,91/ 23,47 88.31 .... 49/
^ ^
. . . .
3 . . . 5 ^ 5'/ 48 ssAi 91/ 33 . . . .
lA 49 76^144 g 30, 2 . . . 55Z

Xi . . iix I, 12^ 24,11 2& . . -75^^
16, 4 33 X, 53^, 53/, 10 40. 3 . . 74i . .
.... 24^
.
a6 51ii 54* 4
H 25, 3 . . 07U - . .I34' .
.... 91/
.
6 . . . I33</, N. 2
4 . . 91 e
u> t .33r, 74^ 12
12 26, 3 . . 67 / 19 .
3] 10 . .130^ 32 . '34A^
33 14 . . 47>^ 28 . . . . 1 26 tf/
33 *5 3 . . . . .
93
45 96 12 . .138^ 43
47 . . . . 103 m 21 45 . . 136</, N.
27,19 48 . .... 93^
31 . . SoA 41, 7 .
33 . . a^^ . . . . 9/
&3 . . . 91 ^, gl / 34 116^, N. a Ifi .
54 28, 4 . . . . 5W
55 . 33</, 68^. 75 ^ry, . . . .lAih
57 72i^ 1 1 1 W, N. I 42. 5 . . . . . fiSA
17 . . 75 43. 2 . . . . 117 m
VL 5 i9 n . . 55<^ 12 .
Z 53^ 34 . .
12P 32
9 . . . 45*93'w ad, 3 . .inx 44i 3 . . . . 117W

IS . . 39 23
f 2 8 . .... sif:
30, 9 9 . 93**. 143 <
. . . . iiT m 16 L2 . . . liar. SL-i
18, ill 8I1 3 . . 67 46. a , . ... 65*/
Z 5 4o, !> . . . 133^. N. I
10 .wqw, N. 3,139</ 2
14 i 1 38 a. N. 1 aa . . 53 f til
?9 32,13 . . 51
19. a
3a mi la
30
46 a, N.
30 iw, 2i
1
13
8|2
33
M3.
. m
N. 3
47, 3
7
.
i5 . . . . li^w aii 44* k .... 75W

12 34. a . 57. N. a 12 . . . 17 1 w
23/ 8 52iN-a
. 48,14 - . . . .12
38 u> 149 167*
81, n 2J .103*
. Hosea
i 31 . . 33 . 530, i30rf .
21 86, 6 . . uiA 6 . lao^, Ii3, N.

9 . .
21A 7 .
51/ 10 . 117
31 . 80*, 113W, iL a 12 . .84b* 3 . 96
33 36, a 75/. "3^ 5
33 . . . 45 00 5 . . 91 * 6 .
35 11 . . 2o
22, 4 L2 l
iSi*' 35 35 . . 153 a, N.
ao 66/ 87, a "3// 8, 1 .
23. ao 48</ .60a, N. . . . an A

2
aB . . .
91 138/ 8 .QU, 391 5 . . . 3 V, N. a
32 4li u 116/, 119 J . . .
.ii3#
42 66^, ti9 4 . . . -'SS/
44 s 17 53 i 64* 15 . . . . 145 m
19 [I7 W, N. 3
1^
Hosea Joel Amos
__ L
6, 3 1, 17 . 0, 3 . 1 35 1 30 :
u
19 W,N.

3 35 I
0 03^^,93*,1
8 M7^ . . . . 145* 10 . . .145 m, 153 J

J
60^ 2, a . 13 . .I33fl, N., 1441/
_ ^ _ 1
e, I
4 . . 731/, 136/ 13 . . . . 153 a, N.
a . 119^, N. I, I34J '4
3 ^Shg 7, I . . oo<, '47'^
liog < 3
4
>
6 4 _ y
9 23/, 75aa, 93 j 7
10 < /
.... 144a 5
7, 4 34 . .... 93'- 8, 4 53?
5 55/ 93 36 . 8
0 4, I . 10 . . . I38A, 135/
za Hjt 70 .... 133* 3 . . . 54^,146^
....

4 64 yl 0, I . . . 61^, 144
10 34 ^> *
M . . . 133^ 147. 3
w 3 18 7 150'
4 31 . . -49^175* 8 . 53^. ii3, "S^^
7 90/ 1 . . . 116 d, 1 18 w
9 Amos 3
10 . 3o^, 1 1 1 n;, N. I 1, 3 . . . 134 J, 158 f
9, 0 Obadlah
9
0
.... 145'
1, 3 . . . . 90 /, 93 jr
II 9 . . 1 14 r, 158 c
10 1 38 a
la II . 58^, II3I, Ii4r II 9^, 6i y, 69
5 Q A . .
3
10, 4 7
0 9 . 3**
10 . . . . 60 7' Jonah
1 16 .... ii8 1. 3 . ii6d, I22t, 135/
14 9* 33^, 53 , 8, 4 .
73/, 156<- 5 .... 113^ 6

. . . 150*
"5 7 7 . .
11, I /is /'

8 . . . . .159-4 9 3*
3 . >9'55^ 9
10 "7^
^0 - 1 ii3, 165a
4 11 . 67', 88/, 154a, N. . . .
7 75*^ 4 16/
12, I35<'. 5 6i(
I 4, I . . . M4<
a 75<W, 113 JT 2, a
5 . . .
18, a 9>' 3 . . . .44^,69 4

3 8, 5 33^
0
0 4, "77
' 113/i, N. 3, 144 r
10
i
8 .... 134J 3
6
. 16/, 114//, N. 3
>4 9
II . . . 510, ii5</ 9
10 j8 V
14, I . 84 a^, 145 13 . . . 116^, N. 3 . . . . 96, 1
3 6, a . .... ia8/t II . 20m, 97/^, 150a

4 3 .1173, 129^
10 . 09^1 100 a, N. I
4 . Mioah
7 . .... 136A 1. I
Joel 8 . . . II I M, 1
1 7 a
1, a . 100 M, 136^,150^ 6ic 5 '3<-, >.^7<
4 49 M . . . 109*, 153^ 7 52 A 67^, 1 17 II
5 8 . . 69 N., 118 If
6 18 10 113*'
7 19 . . . 113 m, i36r 1 . . . 133 J, 131 (
8 . . . 63/, 116 /J ai . 3oA,io6^,i54a,N.
13 26 . . II 3 X, 11 3 rr
>5 M7'' 6, I . 2, 3
- I
Google
Hosea 5, 2 Malachi h 6. 589
Micah Nahum Zechaxiah

a, 4 w, 144''. 148* 3, 17 20 A L_Lt

^11 "7f
~
fi . . .
y </</, 145 c 17 7TT
2 . . .ioo, ii8 Habakkuk 2, 8 nSr
8 116^ li 5 ii6x K 154^
La . . . 72 A, 127 ^. . . i3<". 55' II . . . 390, N. a
8^ I iiW a 67 12 2i"
4 iSJ L4 15a w 8, 1 ii5f
. . . Ii9te', I44r La 6.1 / 4 ii3
La 82 ^, Lii</ 1^ 103 ]r 1 53^
4i 3
.
.
.
.
.
. 91 n, 145 f 17 . . . 114A, i^ 8 126^

. ^ A, l i2 S 1 37
a 68/ 3 7idJ 4j a . . . 21 ' 92
9 ii3' 6 . . . . . axe 7 ia6x
IQ^. l^/t, 145 a Ifi . . . no/, iiK> in ,'J3M,136w,12tA
i_i iiqdd La ii3ff " 10^
L2 90/ .90M, 116/, N. Ij fii a I34
15^ 3 . . . . nmm
14 1190 15 . . . 90IW, 113a 4 . . 735. 80
6i I . 35/> 17. . 2Q , 6q ^, 67 r 7 74 . Wi/. N.
a . . . 106 a, i.s-;/ iil^ 2 Tli
7a , 138/. 134 J 3^ 1 Tf^mm ii It
6, I I^ê 6 62 A, 62 u 33 A, 72 ee, 103
IPf
. . . .
3 B2A 25''. 63* 8 liir . 2

9 "3W
I . . 163^ 10 91/ " i5ii
9 . . 146 d 15 .33/, 25a, 75 L I 134^
47 ^ 'i8g 113* 5 .59 a>ii3'>"7^.
II .
IS 144 >w 1151
13
....
l6 156^
i45
7
IQ
ml
139^
7. I .
93^ 12
2 . 117/; 119 1, 153^ 15 86* L4 .fa H
3 IMl 81 3 117 ^
4 '33'. Zephaniah 5 i3aa
8 122 S 1, a . 73 ga, i^w, N. 3 fi iSoa
ifi -75/. 75 'f. 75 'iA. 14 511 9 >36j^
i45" 2i 2 \h2y 12 117/
II iifix 1 USlA 33 i57<
LI 1 26 flg 2 8^ Oi 5 -75/- 75^^
14 90 W ^ liH 9 72j,i j4g.m4(t,N.
12 iiBA 8i I 25''''
ifi uS f 1 tao^ L2 I 16 J
i^ lao^ u l^n 10, 2 134 A
1^ ^45/* 5 72/
Nahuzn l8 6^/ D 73 X
ao 91 / 11, a i4(iw
2 75 AA, 1^3 a I^
. . 00 u Haggal 7 9<. *3o^. 33f,
u . . . 07/ 133*
54^ 4 . 136 g, 131 A. N. I ,
ifl 62tt'
5 .^5.f> 93 135^ 12 90/
S 113* 13^ U2 . . p. 469, N. 1
n . . iM/ 2 STZ La i33</
lA . . .21/ 2i & . . . 44l^ LUT 18, 2 . 2a 1 10 A, 144 a
5 . . 51^ 7 L4i^ 14j 4 . . 93V, I38/,N.

7 3 2i 67 2 . 73V, II7/W, IQ 21/
& 70 ^, I5a u tfaJ
9 . . .qi
IQ . . 69 u Zeohariah Malaohi
U . . L45/ L a 13a c 1^ a 68/
5 iioa, iio i3 3L 6 3^'
Fsalni I
Psalm
1, 1X1 . . . 151a, 8^ 4 . . . . \t)<)dd 18, 28 ly. f
L3 .
aZ2 L4l 5 . io7,iiim,i5oA 30 . . . 67^, 1190
1^ . . . . Hq^, n. I Q . . . . nice 31 . 126<:, i40</, I43rt
2, 5 67 0, I 5A 33 . Ii6/,ii6x,ii7rf
15 \AA a . . . I3f, 138^?; 35 LIL*
\h . . . ii6j, I55 1 ULL io2
8^ 2 02 11 io6k 40 not
14 14 . . . ao^, 63 / 41 P- 390. ^-
^
2Q 1 16
44 <^
L5 ftii 42
15 152^ 19. 3 20/
Psalm lOi I 5^ 4 42*
1, 2 163a a 66f S iA5/>
. 16^ 107.^. ij^c 5 L4i<^ (i 1230
^
9 ai^ 8 114
% I
2
.
.
.
.
.
\\ad,
^ /,
1 26
isAl ifl
11
91
io6^
!<>
tl
. . Lafi bt \\\ c
Llfii
3 108 ^ L2 76 ^ i4
4 ia6/jt 11, 1 . ii8r, 129 f,i48^ 20. 3 . . . . I35*
a 47 4 48f
2 . . . .44 1/. 69 / 4^ Ii5' 21, a iififl
10 . . . I20>4. lhAl> 109 it 4 . . . . wiff
La . . 118^, X., 1 30 2 037 I . .
71 1 24 c tV, 1
3j 1 laQ f la, 3 . . . 117/. 133/ 11 . .p. 390.

a 62 4 q 22, a 59 A
3 . . 90^, 1^3 , N. 2 '>^> 92 ^ 3 i.^'^
. . 111/, 144 m 8 120y 2 Tift /
6 4fi 2 4i 8 119^
8 . . .
12 s. Hill 13i 4 . . ii7r. N. 2 . 9
14 ii8r
^
IHl 44^. S9'.
in LU LL2 n.
3 ai^ 47 * fso*' 14^ I . .. 154a, N. . .
4 3 >5^ iS 107 J
7 2^ 5 Ull xa . . . 23/. 119/
a . 133 ^ N.a^ ifiT? 2 151 ^ 22 iiox
6, 4 iiSi 15, a . . . . ii8 32 wfxe
. , 116/ 117^^ le, 1 . . 48/, 61 /, N. 28i a . . . 134^. 1 38/
1 128/ a 44 4 . . 107 Jf. 159 w
8 107 J 3 . . 130*/, 143 5 . . .I4K-, 141 d
2 . . 34/, 70*
.
4 93i45Ai55/ . . . 69>w, N. I
10 . I22r;,i24f, i45w, 5 24. I . . .ia9<-, 130a
152 0 6 . . .
80^, f a 107 b
Ll 29 g 8 ii6x 4 ^^\y
1-2 .. . 1 16^, 156^ 9 Ill r IQ 136 C
Li 117^^ II . . 114m, 122 25. I
2 i.s2^ IL 3 59 ^ îce m 141 f

4 L4I 4 i4ii II . . . . UL2
Q 153 0 2 138^ 14 ^M*
1 106^ ifi 21Z 26. a 481
m 142/ La ... . 126 ;> 3 . . . . Wiqq
7, 3 152 / 13 ... . 144m 1 sii
4 IS'J 18, I .3^, Si^ 130*^, m ao/
i54g. N. " "llll
a 63 3 . . . . . 27. 2 ^44
2 7*. "9^. 156 4 . . .110*, 133 o 13 -S"* I59<^<^. '<^7o

Ifi . 124^. 132/4, 2 . IO,fiL 3,107* 28. 1 . ...
ii9jf
La . . . ! 127 ^ ^ Ifl 69 / 2 M
Li lao^' L2 log A 2
1^ 155-* n LLiz 29. I 124 g
12 10 h iii L2fi_l 4 . . . 141 ^ N.3
8, 2 . , . . . (ibh la . . . . 119^ IQ Ill r
3 128a 26 93 -f 80. a 60/
Malachi \, lo Psalm 77, 11. 591
Psalm Psalm
. . 69 m 44. 6 1190 60. 6 . . . ia8jr,i3ij
. . .93aa 1& _L56Z 159J
. . . 23r 20 . .110^ 0i 4 75/^
75 liiA 93 . .138^ 5 1^1 f
.
. 143
. .
^
155*
153
46. 3
.
22s,
.
^
61A
61.
L3
I

. . . 80^, 158a
80/
ILIL
114a, iiî, 1
1 47 . .13K: 62i 4 ii'/
I ii o, 390, N. a 8 lAi
. ii6j 8 ii7 63, 2 133<3^
ii8w 9 87/. Ui'/ 4 6oe
.145' IQ . . 24<r 6 117/
67 w U 75 100/1 64, 2 67 g
.1154 16 . . 76^ a "7#
. 1 16 s 1^ 2 130 a
. 5^ 46 L 3 65, 6 93^
. ai</ 4 13a N. a IQ . . . 53 60^
. 109^ 5 li ii7.y
. 55/ 1 . .119^ 66, 6 108^
. 60/ 48 164^. N. 1 12 ... . 144 *
73'' II 9M. aa 68, a . . i9<r, 62_/
S ii9
. gu 49 'I . ma/ 2 . . . LS^'^j N.
93^^ 1 1363 iS 21 92^
^
. . . . .
8 . 113V 12
lii?, N.3 . 155^ u i^S.
35
15 ?3 Iî
. 25 N. I 24 . . . io.<r. 10.^ m
ILE 50. 3 1 09', M4 f 69. 4 118 /
4 5 . 13' ^>N .^
m 4^*
5-4,
.
.
^
Z5^*
20/
u
12
u iia<-r,
go tt
I43</ U
2
Ifi
34
.
.
.
.
.
.
95 3,
1447,
N. I
64 A
LSI*
. .1163 ai
. 1296 . . 58 71. 33 44<'
ago. 75 w 51, 4 72, 2 107 g
. 131/ 5 . . lAll ij 69
159** 2 . . 64^ 11
Ui* 9 . .165a iQ 51^
. SA^ U2 13, a 75
. 61 c 14 2 . . . . . 145^
. IQ A 18 108/ 9 . , . 63 , 6g J
IS 14 a3<:
62. If li) . . . 49 g, 108 r
93'"<- 53^ 6 91 e, ii6t 12 ISÂ
. 10^/ 54. 6 . . 119 1 ^ ' 53f "9>. N. i
29 0, N. 2 55^ 3 . . 108^ 22 "9#
Z . ._Li8</ afi 73*/
. loê tr> . .
5i 74, 7 ... . ii9|y
.
in
TAi 16 . .
UA
. / iM . .mS^ U2 64 e
9 "9^V' 15 80/
. . 10^ 76, 4 I46
56, 4 . .155/ 28i . . . .
54 a, N.
. IIJX 57, a . UlE i-l 134<
5 . 144 m 77, a 630
68, a . . 5a 4- 75 A 75
5 . . 63 ifi 62r
144 2 69^ ,9 6 ii8r ,
u 62r
Psalm Psalm Psalm
77 l6 20 I' I aK 104, 1 .
106 191 c T 4 J A
. cc A a2 a , ao iw. N. 2. as h 122, 0
JO h I a^ A 123, I IM
TF^^ F
78 6 107 ^
* VJ / g 1 a7 tf'
I e 1 ^ I I y^ ^ A
xa, 4
1 2 nj 1 126 5
75 iS ao #M I an jt 127, I . . . . X 1 8
Â6 an ,
100 A I CO ^ 2 . 2a / 80 A WAtt
80 8 . . * o* ' 21 ' '4/ 128 7c i> o^5
u e a /; I 3 1 (/ ae
*P a T 1 0
. . . .5, 56 2fi . . . . 138^ 132. A 80 ^

? / aR . 42 w, 159 c L2 .34^,91 n,iz^_^
81. 9 , , , , loQ h 105, 1 a . . . . Ii8x 186, 7 53 ^
83 I 2 . . . . 131^ 28 53'' 136, 1 ..... 2 X
til 1 ^ * 6 6c^f
86, a 107 2 I 5 " 137. * 117 IT^
AH. AJ fit ....
f CO rn
1 jjy IM
87 1 I a I N a 109 1 . . .
117/
117* c8r
c 1 aa '
c7 K a
aZj
a . . 7c ec. 116 J
88 K I s a f/ to 64 g 138, a . . . i6f
6 > . . . 1 16 >l 1 a .
ibJ 6 , .6q6. 6q *
17 HO, 1 139, I CO A
89. 7 I 3.1 ^ 1 10 ^ 2 . 7a . . 6^ ^ ^ , . . . 90 / 8 . 66^, 159)91
lit f 111^ I . .... it /
u . loa </ 1 1 1 X
. . . . .jiqA 112, I C il 159/
90, 2 . . . . 107 8 . . . 164/- IA 75 vVt i top
loait III/ (\
' ^-^.> iS I CO N <r
3 . . . . ii8r 113, ^ 90/ ao .221 68 A 7 C <M

tc e XT
*55 114 1 1 1 sO%*y Pi 2 21 .... 7
/*a **
/"^
i 1_U / a . yO W, 90 tt 22 1 1 7 / 1 a8 f
g /o** 115 7 *4ii ^47 * 140, I QI /
49' . .10 ^ .... 7^ fftfrt
6 . . ca /J I a AA i
. . 87 n, ixod 7 . 7a J. 01 / 141 ^ . 20 A a8 t
91 A 67 l> ton i . . . u& . . : is
67 / 1 1 R 1 1 c
ifi
c
a 74 A
z 1 1 7 it 118 K ao XT cn f iininr 7e ZA
1 ao /
z . . 1
L r rk 9
ff
142, S , . . . II3W
13 . t
fto g LO u- 143, 6 . . . . ug
Q9 I 3 I a1 A 1 a
ia
f t 9 A
7S* . . . - 00 L4 . . . . Lai^
94 I . 18 .... û^' 145, I iJl
oa oit aa 74 I . . . . I32^
... JO ae

ca
aa Mt
11 . . . . la.^r
20 . 60 i!^. 6a m afi . .... CO

147, I 5'/
99. 6 119, I . ^ w. 7c 2 . . . . asm
100 * 101 75 149, a . . . . 124A
101, i . '^^b, Qotn 28 . ... .91 ft
102, 4 67 M 117 . . . 75 Proverbs

9 . . . . Liiii 128 . 130/, N. . . .6aA,7A
U . . . . 67<-i- 136 . . . . i5.i . . . . 145
la . . . . ia6e lil
. 145'* . ... 20/
28 67^, p. 459. N. 120, I . 9>^,iI' 2Sl . 42 A. 48 rf, 85T
108, I . , .10^
.
S . . . 117M ia4
3 . . . 9W, 01/ 6 . . . iigs. 21 . . . . pv
4 587 1 ' , .
4 f , N. 22 . . . . 63 m
fi
. . 145 A, is6/ 121, 1 . . . 127/. 2S.
. . . . "7^ 3 107/, 09* Sj LO . . . .145*
Psalm 77, i6 Job 5, 5. 593
Proverbs Proverbs
l*j 13 . . 131 , li- 30,
|
. . .1 34 ^
. . . L2AW lA 73/ 10 (H) V
. . . . 1 16 Ifi 131/ 12 . . 10^. 24 ^
... .144^ 30 I34</ iS . . . . .134/
.... 110/ 34 U . -'.^.Vs'
. . . . 22s 18. I . . . 20 c, 22 s. 2a . '44''
. . . . Ifii 5 30 . , . 1^2 />
. . . . 109^ L3 ioA 31 . . . .33'"

. . . . llQt 20 ^07/ 37/
....
.
.
^ . . 20 A
'j2fe
16,
VL
11
4,
*
. . . 128a, N. 1
73'^
68
137 i 3^

.
.
.
.
53fr7^
.
.
2 .
a/, 5 A
4,
.... joi ifl 66/
. . . .145W La . ii.U<-. .^3^. N.3. JOD
96 LLa A, 156 r
. . . .75'^ 18. 16 93^ 3 -
.... ie,2o 23 159 ^ 4 22 iia

60 r. 131 m, N. ^ ?4 "dli!^ ' 107 112 y , I 1 w ^
.12SW 10. a
^ I i9<-r, 1 20 J,
. . .
155^
. . , .
2 9 Z
. . . .LQiA 2^ . . . 63 6tJ La .
.... 91 ^ 20, a ia8 A 11 I l6r,I \(.lC(A22(

.... 94*/ 2 107 / US'' '4*
. . ^<U, ifl 23/ 494?, 122^, 135(7
. . 47^. 48 12 iloT . 1 LU Iffy IQ4 "
26 22 22s 18 1 1 /i
fiV 21^ 6. I28<: til
.... LLl/ u ng f J.^y I 74 * now

T T /
22. 2
:
.
:
.
:
.
:^
.62r
23^ I
.
.
lo/t, 134/fr,
. . 73a, 73</
f ^1 3
2
to

.
. . 1 lOy ,
J50^lf3
1 50 0
....

2^t; 22 J, 3 .
. .I55 U 59' 3 29 Cy 'In <ij 107 I*.
13' ^ i07*.S.S.l5.->/
. . . 1194*1 24, ^ 29 0 4 . . . rî f, N. 3
. . . .134^ L4 48/ Q . .... Ta*"
.
.mH
. .
153 , N. a
12 SJJ.
0
a . . 1 14 m
I2 *
. .
11 nil 2 109 <l, N.,
.... uLL 25, a f 3>(-
Ui 7a A ml 5 12611 13 \Sxp, l^Qaa
124* Lt Si** 15 . ISS ^
. . . . 67 i_2 . . . . i6ia, N. 12
. . . . 32J L3 134*
. . . . 69 If 16 26 A 2X2 .
.... 16/ 12 691* 2A

. . . .li^T 1$ . .52 J, 62 J, Q2.e la
. . .
.Tiqq 22 11.^^ 0 1 e, I aO rn
. . . .108^ 26. 7 TAi* 3 . 107
. . . .153;? 12 J.5' III/ I 4J A

. . . -Lllfl 23 145" . . . .143*/
. . . .144 A 27, a (>Ac z . . . . 1.^6 f
. iijc 146
. . .
2 f 7 . 107/. 33*. N- 3,
.... 15 lAH 150/4

. iî
. m 24 . . . 150^, ^L I 15 . . Hi^
86/. p. 49, UL 1 25 ao . .29/, 67^.67
. . . .\\6k 28. 6 . . . me, N. a . . . 50 m
' ' ill la loA 61 2 .
29. 6 67 y 3 . . .35<
. . . . 22 S 80, I .96 5
Job Job
8p, ifiifl 9^ 22 107 g 15.11 133^
. 107 X ^ . ii6j, I52i/, i66a L3 LiAi:
. 136^ 23 . . .1091, 153 15 67
.
. iiSu
.91 e
10,
MI
^^'^
^4/</
IS ii6
12 .7J>^^,I.^8A,I4.V/
J . . iigaa, n. 3 \B. liAi
8 Ill ^ 2a 1 46 a
. 109^ 15 ... . . '59# 21 r r8 <r
m . . 109^, 120^ 22 . . . 75*'. '
J'
17 . . . 154a, N. 16. 3 150
l8 107 ft 4 . 103/, 108/, 119^
13 107 a 5 60/
" 90^> , N. 6 . 63 /. IflS 159/"
IL 2 ii&i 2 53/. Zii^ LM/
. . nod 3 . . . . iiiw fi TJST
5 lii* 2 . . 118^, 119^
6 . iioi, I2r, N. 2 IQ . . . j;4*. 119^'
. I54g. N. 2 914 12 112//
. . 126 a u 1^ 3 24^
14 i26;>
. . 119 J 13 . . 1
19 w, 159 ^ 15 . . w, 5f f
ijr . 152^, N., i6of
144 <r 124^
23 ^, 64 fl, 69 20 ... . 103m 69 J
154a 12, 22 . 75, i45
. .
a 's^'' . .
.05/. 69 . . . .Ill 17. I I 24< :
. . 120^ 2^ 75K, 124* 2 . . . 2q4, 25/"

. 155^ Z . . . . ; 141* 4 7
121c, 14^ u . . 135 <i loi a 5
L2 1414/ 2 ..... Zi^
. . i .^ .t^ 14 ... 159 . ifl . loA, I20tf, i^r
2 . ii6i, ii6x. ii8g Li 124 ^
. 581, 6q</ 23 ii7 16 42^
. ill*
. 24 . . 138a, I.S3 U 18. 3 130tf
. 123^
. 13, a . . .53*, ii3</ a IMl
io2l. iigaa, 159A 4 ai . 139/
Lil^ . .
-37/
. 2 150 >^ 2 . . 62/</, L25
159'' 2 . . . . . 8 54 *
M5 12 . . usL/Hm^ 12 1 09 it
. 14K/ 15 lia 44^
125 f m iê 21 130</
5rr^f 50^.l52^, N.
n US'- 19. 2 . 2i</, fio/, 75^
is h}> f 3 . . . 53, 12^^
12 r, 9300 21 . 29^, 6o</, 64 h 2 . . . 63 A, N.
.
39^, ?5 Llli m 69/

. 145 </
. 22 SlZiai'' 5oa
28 . . 144/, If 5 h 12 . . . 67**, 69X
. . Mi 14, 1 ti^/ . . , . . 159^
109^, 16^ 2 I II J 12 38^
. . 82 J 22 .S3, 62J!i L2fij.
. . 117 n . 151*/
9 . . .fes^, iia m ?4 51 w
. . Ill X ifi Ill / 25 ii8m
20A, 114m u lAl <7 2fi . . ii9 7t', i44jf
. 147^
. 19 14-; ^ 28 L12
Si, 1074: 20. 4 150^'
. ifidi
. 15j 3 . i3>i, II9>4A 2 13^/
ifoA N. I I4ji 1/ lii Tik
JSSi', >6l rt, N. 2 \%id ' L15_*
. . . i59 ifl 131 ^ Li I5M
5; 7 2. 595
Job Job Job
20,17 . . . lOQ^, lAO^ 26, i . >7/' 31. -li^ . . . . . I f I <^
. . . i54<i, S. 32, d . . . 68 69 m
12 . . . 74^, ii%e 2
11 . . .
103/, N. 3 6 . . . .681
lA . .lÔC . . .
M . . . . 119 m . . . .103.1
.68/. 145 , 156/
2fi 2Z. 3 128^ 12 . . . .
6^/
25 . r3i^, 135W
.
5 M9 lS . . . 33/, 747
21. ^ .UiQ.n, 135/, (1 . . . 1
1 9 zt/, N . a
>43, 150^ 2 33. 4 . lAA, III
L2 . . . 11370
.
& . . . 48 1 , S4 ^
L . 68 //, J2od, N. a 21 . . 14^64^
u
, 1 IQW, 141 C, U . . . 103AN.
3 35 . 66
28. ^ 55 ^ 30
I . . 51 A 73
L3 . 20 1 66
. . ,
/ 2 . . Laj </, 122 a
i . 20/, 106 w, N. a . . .121/, Lid-A i& . . .113^^, N.4
11 5.
. . . . iiS'v . . . -I'S^
XI . . . 37</, 146 a d 36 . . . . 1.59.
. . . .ia4>
n 39^ Ll . . . . *'9^ .... 6&A
. . . . lijim LI i>a c L5 . . . . .lf,2Jk
. >55* 25 . . . . 6i,e
. . . ^d', 64/ 32 600' *
L . . 111^ N. a
29. 2 . Ii8m, i3o^/,i5i 6 33 .
22. 1 o3.A N-3 3 .

67A iiHA, 131 0 36 . . M3''
3 67^' 6 33/-
I 8 . . . lao^, N. 2 . . . .75^^
9
52f
. . . 44f, 146a .... 90/
Ll . 20 1, II r, La . 153 w, 14 . . . 1 1 7 70
158a 15
l . . L2i </, 1 49 a . . 130(/, 155 l& . .... 150^
. . . ia6/i, n. 2 2J . . 30/, a4<', 67^ 34 . . . .
SQ
. . .
91/, I49 33 . . . . iiSzv 38. a .
2J .48^/, no/; i.vs/> 3 .
13 '59/ 30, 3 . . . 1 26 ^. J 33 / 5 . . . . isgJd

33/ d . . 1 14 1 3.^ /i d . . . . .137 A
22 LQ >o6^
23, 1 . . . . lic)aa Ll . . iS2u,ij^n L2 . . . 1 197c/, N. 1
a "TS" 11 .
6 li . 118 tt>, 134 r
2 15 . . . 59/; Tf// . . . .150 A

u Z6^ 13. . . laa^, 150A
1 2 U.W ad . . . ê, lq8^
. . Ii8, 1^6^ 11 . . .107^,1461!
t5 31, 1 u^g ^
ad
LZ 155^ 72/ . . 53i
24, I . . .75///, 121/ 2 . . . aA<-, io8y . . -n?,^
.
. . ii8r, i4,f/ 9 . . . . 159//'

10 . . XiHo, 152 M ID 82^ 30 . . . iiStif
M . io<)i6, u8x,i jo<- U . . . .12/, 131 S 33 . . . . 145*//
>9 L2 '55/
i\ L& . . . 58 72r<- 2 . . .9"/, 150/.
22 . . . 87 1 56/ . Ii7x,ia6/,i63* 3 . . . . 1 35 (1
1^ . . 9ir
. . .
2
lA 5'
i?o/,
^ w. 67^ N. ij ii:;a<
2d . 67/*, 111 jui8, L3 . . . . i.so/^
.
L5 -^^thP
25, 2
il 75^ 12 . . . tlQm
3 aS . . . . i59(/</
5 39
26, 2 . rt, X., 1^ , 11 lldf'
3i J 56/ 40. 1 .
gq 2
59^ Index of Passages.
Jo\> Ruth
40, a 1, 1 . . . .49^, N. 2 4,17 roo<>
8 150^ 3 S"" 5, . . . . 73^, N.
19 . ii6/vti. 3, 1271 8 . . . X35, 144 xo X4511
67 9-4^/* 74*. 74*
66/ xioi'
150^ xa . . . X06/, 107 jr
J' t22r
< 09^ 13 . loa/, .4. 1, I
41, I 93 14 76^ 4 116/

t 7a rr 19 9'/ 9 "57'
4 103^ ao . . . .46/, 80 A 12 , , . . 13?, r
7 ii8r ai . . . . iiSff 13 . . . .p. 353. N.

la . , . 154<I, N. aa . . .salt, 138^^ 16 13$3
>5 156^ 2, 6 \i%k 17 86/
7 76^ 8 . . ,
.47*.47f 3, 1 1353
90 laSv 9 iiaM 5 . . * .p. 35.^
3 J 14 .
'hZ'^t^(, 103^ 7 M5
.2Ab, 75 W, 126*
3, 4 35^ 8 I32f
. 16/, 117a, N. I 13 . . . 34^, 133 *
4t, a . . . . 44/ . 21 . . . 47fl, laa^ 5 . . . 93''i 35'
3 3, 2 9/ ao 64 <
3 70 HMt 3 .44 A, 104^, 141 r ai 131
164*/ 4 . 47 XO94, XI2S 33 36
I * . .i63</ 6 59^ 36 75 <w
10 ^\ k 14 107 f 8, 3 2 J
S3 . , , 80 /ft,
97 c 15 . . . 64 f, i34 4 "4*
>5 . . 135^1 143 18 . . 163^, 163^, N. 10 131
4, 3 . . . 129^, 138* II 152^
4 . . a9ff, N., 1520 14 165*
7 nth , >'4
Song of Bolomon 16 59^ 18 . . . . 36. 67/
If I 133 > >9 93
6 . . . 60a, 75 jr ai . 100 iw, 1501, N. 4
7 . 36, 75 Lameutatiuns aa 103 i
8 tok 1, I . . . .
5 A, 90 / 4. XX3^
10 7.?,f 4 ... 69 /, 87 ^
,
3 117/
15 . . . . . 141 8 .677, 7a , 117/ 10 I24
9, a . . . . . loA 10 . . . laotf, 155/ 14 35^
3 139</ lA . . , iiod, 155 '7 133^
7 i-H* 16 .75, 117 , 135/ 5 5 53^
9 7SW 18 KOtf 7 i4*
11 . . . T/, N. I 19 . . . xo7f, 165 J . 8 .32/
14 . . , 69 I/, 93 JJ a, 7 64^ II . . . . 6911
17 119/
13
iz
16
fl/ M 109
3t 7 15 r 15 161
8 . 50/" X8 80/
"
.
S M7f
75 3, X 144/ 8 P- 353 N., 141 A
15 .69^ 5 53 7, 7 1 17^
4, 2 . . 69/, 7i / 12 80A 16 . .54^,54^1 3 9

5 35^ 14 87/ 34 133^
9 *
59 aa 200 a6 . 75 en
16 ... . %Sig, N. a6 107 f 37 .... laar
0, 8
II
32 M 33 ^9** 8, I .... . 75"'
. , , , .67./^/ 4 . 39^>69/, 117: 10 . 54^, XX9A', ia8,
7, a . . , . 93-' 50 logk N.
10 1 33 /i
3 691* 4 M3
8, a . 87/, 131 c, N. a 4, 1 . . . 54*. 75 13 53J
. 59^, N.
. . a 7S'''' >4 P ^SS* K.
i. 93 6 "7" 10 5 . . 7dff. 55*
10 . . 74 9 '52/ 7 9>^
H "9' 14 . 4, xao^ ao . . . . . $3Ji
Digitized by Google
Job 40, 5 2 Chronicles 25, 17. 597
Siooleaiaatea 1 Chronicles
3,13 > ^ . taooa 8,30 . . . . .I53
A. ft
3 . as 75 ^ 55'' 48 . . . . .145
U, 1 . 3. 5 . . . 09/
4 . . 7a^ 138 Of II > R
Vm> 4,10 . . . 61 tf, 167 a
5 7, 13
*
6, 2 . ... .141(1
6 . . <7?67/ 30 30 . . 03r-
7, 5 . . . .1345?
. . . .X45A 3 8, 8 . . . . 53<'
* 0
11 . . 105 a . . . . 39^
IB ,J3 . ... 138
Esther 23 5' " . . p. 459>N.
1, 4 . , , , 93 m/ 35 ^5 . . . . J34*
39 ^7 .... 133
6 . . . . .123' 30 10. 3 .
. 53''
. .
36 . . , iiarr 11. 39 . .... 23/

Id, 2 .
24/f N. I, 70
75 ^ 10,13 1 4 1 0 . , , . 1144)
. . . 1371, 1381 7 . . . . . 6i<
3, 4 . \t 3 . . . .155''
. . . .114/ . . . 137c, N. 33 123/
8 . . . . 93 m& 38 . .... 23/
16, 8 . . . . .137/
Nehonuaa 13 . .155**
5 . .... 74.?; a, 3 . 19 . . . . .131a
8 .
7 53''>55<
13 li'
30 . 631
0, I . . p. 459>. 13 5 ^7
' 66 "7^
7 3, 8 16, 8 . .... zs
n ' xa4, i45i, N. I 13 .... 09/
3. , .49<', N. 3, 53 ft 21, I . . 125/
4 i * , 119W 17 . . 141 h, N. 2
Daniel 7 22, 7 . . . 143a, M. 3
1. 4 . 23,i28a,N.x 9 49'. N.3. 67^ 23, 6 . . . . .63//
13 . . . ii6i, N. 24, 3 . . . . . 63M
,"4 86,38 . . . . .138/
e, 8 . . . 33f, 741 37,13 . . . .I37(/
.
10 *44 28, 3 . , .14341, N. 3

a 4 . XI . . . . loom IX . 96
a, 3 . 7. 3 1 1 8 -t 29, I . . . . .X55</
3 . . . .i55
>3 . I5*,i26,i37/ 33 * .... 65/
32 .
47 S7/, 95 tf, 8, 8 2/
10 .85 A'. ia8/.
a Chronioles
. . , X17M 9,13 1, 4 . . 138 , 155//
.... 48 35 . . . . ii6x
11, 6 . . 1271, 139 y% 10,37 , , . 123<l, N.

I
6, 18 . .... 93
. - 53^,54* 39 16, 4 . . . . .1^5^/
11, 17 53^ . ,l^^n
12, 2 .103^, 134 r 12,44 95 13 . . . . .75^'
7 . . 93M, N. 47 . . . . 95 14 . . . . . I24<-
. . .i34vf
. 13, 9 17,11 . . . . . 93*
3 53i%5.?" 20, I . . . . . 102

....
.
16 . 9^' 33 . If 5/
21 73/ 34 .... <K^f>
24 . . . . 2 a, 2 Tf 35 . . .540, N.
21, 4 . . .XI9W, N. 3
69 . . . . . 97r '7 . . . 133^'
1 Chronicles 22, J,
. . . . . 35</
....
;
2,X3 , 47* 1 28,17 . . . 136^, N.l
Digitized by Google
15/IO/H
CLARENDON PRESS, OXFORD.

SELECT LIST OF STANDARD WORKS.
DrCTIONAUIES jNge i
HISTORY. BIOGRAPHY, ETO/ I

'.
J! 4
PUILOSOPHY, LOGIC, ETOt
PSTSICAL saxNcs, Bia ....
7
1. DICTIONABXS.
A NEW ENGLISH DICTIONABY
ON HISTORICAL PKINCIPLES,
Founded mairUy on th materials collected the IkUological SoeSHif*
I 111 po rial 4to.
DITD BY MURRAY.
Pbisbbt Statb of EBB ! Won . 4f.
Vol. I. m IS 6
Vol. II. C By Dr. Mttrrat . . . . . . Half-morocco a 19 6
Vol III. D, E By Dr. Muh&ay and Mr. Bkaclkt Ilalf-morocco a 13 6
Vol IV. F, G Bjr Mr. B&adlxy . . . . . . Half-morooco 3 la 6
VoL 8 la 6
a 6
Vol VI. ItV By Mr. BsAi>ir . Lap-Leisurely . , 0 5 0
| Leisureneaa-Lief . . 0 a 6
Vol. VIL 0, P By Dr. Musbat O-Onomastio 0 0
Vol. VIII. a^B Bj Mr. Oraxcmb .
.
.
. .
. * . . . 5
0 a 6
The rem.îmIt ^ f tin work ia in active preparation; the dSttribntioii of th
letters into the vulumeti will be approximately as follows
Vol. VIII Q-8 ByMr.CsAioii.
Vols. TX, X S-Z
Ordm can be jpven tlirouG^ any bookseller for the deliveiy of the remainder of
the work either in eomplele VoLirma or in SteHmu or in PorCi.
HALF- VOLUMES. Tlic of Imir-voluuieK. bound, with Btraiglit-c^r iii d
t i
"< t .
Persian leather back, cloth sides, gilt top, UCl 7c. 6d. each, or 13 154. for the ten
now ready, namely, A, B, C-Ooninu, Coinm.-Cxech, D, . F, G, H, I-K.
SECTIONS. A single Section of 64 pagM at M. 6(1. or a donUe Saotion of ISS
pages at >;. is issued quarterly.
PARl^. A Part (which ia generally the equivalent of liTe single Seotiooa
and is priced at i a. 6tf .) ia inneo whenever ready.
Nearly all the Parte and Sections ia wUob Volnmee X-V were first iaaoed are
itOl obtainable in the original covers.
FORTHCOMING mSOE, JAVUABT i, 1903. Xilof-Iiook. By Mr.
Bbaolit.
Osftinl: ClatieBdeti Pnet. troodon: Bwar Faowm, JUnea Oomer, B.CL
Digitized by Ql^^li.:
2 ENGUSH AND ROMAN LA W.
A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament, with
ra Appndix containing the Blbliat Antnuiie, ImummI on t1i TiMMiinis
and Lexicon of Oesenius, by Francis Brown. D.D., S. R. Driver, D.D.*
and A. Briggf, D r>. Pwrts I-X. Small 4to, 2. 6rf. each.
Theaaxuns Syriacus coUegenmt Quatremere, Bernstein, Lorsbacb,
:
Arnoldi. Agrell, Field, Roediger: edidit R Payne Smith, 8.T.P.

VoL I, containing Faaeicnli I-V, nm. fol., *,.
Yol. Up oompleting tho work, containing Fasi-iculi VI-Z, 8L St.

CompendioTiB Syriao Dictionary, founded upon the above.
Edited by Mnu Margoliouth. Parts I~IIL Small 4to, Sa. 6d, ntt aeh.
71^ Work ua h eompUM in Four ^rtt,
A Dictionary of the Dialeota of Vemaonlar Syrlao as spoken
by the Rastem Syrians of Kurdistan, North-West Persia, and tlM Plain
of Mosul By A. J Mar Vnn, M A,, F.TI.G.S. Small 4to, I5.
An English-Swahili Dictionary, liy A. C. Madan, M.A. Second
Edition^ Jteviaed. Extra fcap. 8vo, 7. 6rf. net.
A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Etyraologicnlly and Pbilologically

arranged, with special reference to cognate Indo-European Languages.
By Sir M. Monier-Williams, M.A., K.C.I.E.; wiOi the rrtllnhoratinn of
Prof. E, Leumann, Ph,D. ; Prof. C. Cappeller, Ph.D. and other Hcholara. ;
V EdUhmf gnaO^ JEMm^ and ImpromU Cloth, bevelled edgM, 31. 13a. (WL $
half-morocco, 4Z. 44.
A Greek-English Lexicon. By H. G. Liddell, D.D., and
Robert Scott, D.D. Eigklh Edition^ Rrtmefl. 4to. ll. i6s.
An Etymological Dictionary of the English Language,

arvBttged
Edition.
on an
4to.
Hiatorieal Baaia.
il. 41s.
By W. W. Skaat, LittD. 2M
A Middle-En gliflh Dictionary. "Rv F, H. 5^traiiiiaim A new
edition, by H. Bradley, M.A. 4to, halt morocco, if. lit. 6rf.
The Student's Dictionary of Anglo-Saxon. By H. Sweet, MA.,

Fh.D.,UfcD. Small 4to. U,6i.mL
An Angto-Sttzon Diettonary, based on the MS.
eolleetionB of the
][o Boflworth, D.D, Edited and enlarged by Prof, T. N. Toller,
.T,.H.'|.h
MJL Parts I-IU. A-SAB. 4to, stiff eovers, 15s. each. Part IV. r,
ÂR-SWIPBIA. Stiff eovers, St. 64. Part lY, i a, SWtp.SKIr-
TTMEBT, i8t. 6dl
An Icelandic-English Dictionary, LfiRed on the MS. oollectioos of

the lato Richard Cleaaby. Bnlaigad and eompleted by O, Yigftaioii,
M.A. 4to. 3i. 7s.
9. LAW.
Anson. Principles of the \
Anson. Law and Custom of
English Law of Contract, and of Agmey Um OonMuiion. a vols. 8vo.
in its Eda'ion to Contract, By Sir Fartl. ParUament. fMnlMMtai.
W. R, Anson, D.G.Ifc NiidkMmtlL J2s.6d.
8vo. 10$. 6d, PartlL TheCrown. SMxmdEd, 149,
Digitized by Google
LAW. 3
Bryoe. Studi$8 in HUtory Illnstrutive Doctimenta. By Sir

atul Juri^pntdeuft:, 2 Vols. 8vo.
Courtenay Ilbert, K.G.&I. 8vo,
half-nwa. tf.
By the lOglit Hon. J. Bryce, M.r.
95c. iw(. Legislative Forms avd
Methods. 8vo, half-roan. l6s.
Digby. An IntroducHon to
Jenks. Modem Larui Lata,
the HisUry qf tht Lav 0/ Real Property.
By Edward Jeuks, M.A. 8vo.
BySirKenelm.Digby,M.A. Fifth
Editioru 8vo. 1 2. 6d. JenkynB. British Ride and
Jurisdictuv hajond thu Sedn. By the
Grueber. Lex Aquilia. Bv lite Sir Henry Jeukyus, K.C.B.
Bnrln Gnwber, fir. Jur., M.A. With ft Piefaee by Sir Courtenay
Ilhert. K.a8.L 8vo, half-ioan.
Hall. I nternatiuiml Law.
By W. E. Hall, M.A. FtimiKMmoH, Markby. Elements of Law
8vo. 335. 6i.
OtiieralJurisprudence. P>v Sir William
A Treatiseonthe Foreign Markby, D.C.L. i^ i^tiitton. 8to.
PMflurt and Jtit tstHcdon q/* the British
ist. 6d,
Onttn, By W..H*U, M.A. 8vo.
Moyl0. Impertttoria lus'
io. 6d.
(inlnvi frivr/'f/'f-num Lihri QuattuoTf
Holland. MemenU of Jiirib- with luLruduotiuns, UomnieuUry,
pmdmet. By T. B. HoUand, D.C.L. Bzeorana andTraaalation. "BjitB,
Ifinth Editum, 8yo.

Stvdies in International
By T. . HoUuid, fi-CL.
ios. 6d, Moyle, D.C.L. Third Edition, avoli.
8vo. Vol. 1. i6.
Contract of Sale in the

Vol. 11. 6a.
Lîtc.
hivo. 106. 6d.
OMt Lm. 8vo. xot. 64*
GentUis, Alberici, De Follook and Wright. An
Essay on Possession in the Coitimon Laic.
/Mr Bm LSbH 7Vm. Edidit T. E.
By Sir F. Pollock. Bart., M.A., and
Holland. LCD. 8maU 4^0, luOf-
SirRS.Wright,B.C.L. 8vo. 8i.6d.
morocco,
tinkat,
a 15.
The Imtitutes o/ Jua-

edited m
a reoeneion of
PoBte. Gaii Institutimvwn
Cotnmeufnnt Quuttuor ; or,
./j/is Cil ihs
EieuieulH of Koiiiau L:iW by Uuiu.
the Institutes of Qaius, by T. . With a Tranalation and ComuK ii-
Holland. D.C.L. Second MdUitm, tary by Edward Potjte^ MJL Xiurd
Extra fcap. 8vo. 5*. Edition. 8vo. iS.
Holland and Shadwell. Select Sohm. The InMuUs, A

DigtM of Justinian. By
Titles from the Text-book of the History and
T. E. Holland, D.C.L., and C. L. System of Komau Private Law.
Shadvvell. D.C.L. 8yo. 144. By Kudolph Sohm. Translated by
J. C. Ledlie, B.C.L. With an
Also sold in Parts, in paper eovwf* IntrrKliictioii by Erwin Grueber,
Part I. IntroduefeoiyTitlee. 9*6d.
Dr. J ur., M.A. Second EdUicHf revised
Part II. Faiuily Law. is.
an4 miUrge4, 8vo. i St.
Fart m. Property Law. a. 6(i,
Stokes. The A ')uflo- Indian
PkrtlV. Law of Obligation* (Mo. I )
39. 64, (Ko. a), 4. 6dL Codi-s. By Whitley Stokee, LL.D.

Vol. I. Substantive Law. 8vo. 30s.
Ilbert. The Government of Vol. II. Adjective Law. 8vo. 351.
India. ppiiit? a Digest of the FirKt and Second Supplements to
Statute Law relating thereto. the above,! 887-1891. 8vo. 6$,6d.
With Hutoriwl Introduetioii and Sepaimtely, M0.1, at.6<i. ; No. a, i,64.
London x UsNaT Feowdk, Amen Comer, . C.
Digitized by G'
4 HISTORY^ BIOGRAPHY^ ETC,
3. HISTOKY, BIOGRAPHY, ETC.

Adamnani Vita S. Coluiubae. SupplemcHiury Extrcuts from the others.
Ed. J. T. Fowler, D.C.L. Crown A Revised Text, edited, with Intn^

duction, Notes, Appendices, and
8vo, halMwund, S$. 6d. nM (tiitb
Gloitiary, by Charles Plummert
translation, 9s. 6d. net).
M.A., on the basis of an edition bj
Aubrey. *
Brief Lives' chiefly John Earle, M.A 1 TOli. CfOWn
qf ConteinporarieSf net dotcn hy John 8tO| half-roan.
Aubrey f Mioeen the Years 1669 and
Edited from the Author's
YoL L Text, Appendices, and
i6()6. Glossary, los. 6d.
KSS., bvAndraw Clark, UJL, LL.D. Vol. II. Introductioiiy KoteSf and
With iMdmilea. a Sm ast. Index. 12s. (id.
Btmda/^Sistoria EcdesiaaUca, Freeman. The History

Edited by C. Plummcr, M.A. of
lO.
SkOigfnm 9t EmMui Ifsiit.
a vols. Crown Svo. 213. net,
Vols. I and 11. Svo, cloth. 2I. as.
Barnard. Campanion to Eng- Vol. III. The Athenian and
liMh Hiahry {MiddU Ages). With 97 Carthaginian Invasions. 7^.
niustrationa. By P. P. Barnard,
Vol. IV. Fh>m the Tyranny of
M.A. Crown Svo. 8t. 6d. ndL
Dionysios to the Death of
Boswell'fl Life of Samud Agatiioklds. Edited by Arthur
Johnson, LL.D. Edited by G. Birk- /. BTan% HA. ai#.
beok Hill, D.C.L. In six vol umes,
medium 8vo. With PortniiU aud
FrMnunu The Bdgn of
FMiimiles. Half'bcmnd. 3I. 33.
WiUiam Rtifus and the Accession ^
Henry the First, By . A. Freeman,
Bright. Chapters of Early D.O.L. a Tola. 8to. xI. i<ii.
English Cfiurch HMory. By W.
Bright, D.D. Third Edition, Revised Ckurdiner. OanstUuiwnal
mtdnim^td. With a Map. 8vo. 1:25. Documents 0/ ihr Pj/nfan Retnlutiort,
i6a$-i66o. Selected and Edited
Bzyoe. Studies in History
bySaiiNMlBawaoikGard{Bor,D.C.L.
and Jurisprudence. By the Right Seoond BdtHon, CrownSvo. tos.Sd.
Hon. J. Bryce, M.P. a Tola. Svo.
ast. net.
Gross. The Gild Merchant;
Casanbon (Isaac), I559-IÎ4- A Contribution to British Municipal
By Mark Pattis li' Svo. t6s.
History. By Charles GfoaS| I1iJ>.
a vols. 8to. 34.
Clwrendoxi's Hidury of the
JtMioN mA OMl Wars in Eng^nd. Hastings. Hadivgs and the
Biheditod from a frr-^h collation of RohiUa War. By Sir John Strachey
G.C.S.I. Svo, oloth. io. 6d,
111* original MS. in the Bodleian
library, wtthmtrgiiuddafeeaBndoo* Hill. 8(mrc8 far Greek
Rsi<,n.il notes, by W. Dttnn Macray, History between the Persian and Pelopon-
il.A., F.S. A. 6 vols. CrownSvo. al. 5*. nesian Wars. Collected and arranged
Xarle. Haiidhook to the Land- by G. F. Hill, M.A
Svo. lo*. 6d.
Cka/t&m, and other Saxenic Domments. HodgUn. Italy and her In^
^JohnEarlo.M.A. CrownSvo. 16s.
voders. With Plates & Map^ StoIs.
The Alfred Jen el : An 8vOb By T. Hod gk n T>. C. L. i ,
Historical Essay. With Illustra- Vols. I-II. Secotid Edition. ^2$,

tions and Map. Snudl 4to, buck- T0IB.III-IV. Second Sdmm. $6$*
ram. l 2.<f. ^xi. n^t Vols. V-VI. 36?,
Earle and Plummer. Ttvo of Vol. VII-VIII {ctmpieting the
SaxoH CkrwideSf ParalM, uiUh k). 24J.

the
OiJurd : OUranduD FruM.
v.
Digitized by Google
HISTOnV^ BiOGRAPHY^ ETC,
Johnson. Lcttere of Saviuel Maohlavelli. II Frimipe.
Johnaony LL.D. Collected and Edited Edited by L. Arthur Burd, M.A.
by O. Birkbeok Hill, D.C.L. a vola. With au Introduction by Lord
lutlf.nMui. aSat. Acton. 8to. 149.
JohTisonian MisieUomitB, Merriman. Life and Letters of

jvoU. Medium Svo, h&if-roan. aSa. Tlwmas CromtcelL With a Portrait
and Facsimile. By R. B. Merriman,
BLitchin. A Hititory of France.
B.Litt. a vols. Svo. iSh. net.
VVilL NumerouA Maps, Plana, aud
Tables. By G. W. Kitohin, D.D. Morris. The We/.^h Wars of
In three Volumes. .Vew E4iim, Edward I. With a Map and Pedi-
Crown 8to, each io. dd, grees. By J. E. Xorrla, M.A. 8tow
9s. 6d. ntt.
V*L L to 1453. VoL IJ. 1453-
1614. Vol. 111. 1624-1793. Oman. A History of the Peninr'
Kyd. The Works of nomas \ sularWar, 6 vols. Svo. With Maps,
Flans, and Portraits. By O. Oman,
Kyd. Edited from the original MA. Jiu-f Puhlished. Vol I ( 1 807- 809.
. 1
Texts, with Introdaction, l^tes,
From the Trmty of Fontainebleau
and Facai miles. By F. SL BOM* to tlM Battle of Oorunita). 14a. $ut.
M.A- Svn ;t, net.
r
La Strange. Baghdad during

Pasme. Hidory of the New
M'orld called America* By E. J
theAUasid CaiiphaU. By Q. Lo Payne, M.A. 8vo.
Stnmgs. Byo 169. mtL Vol. oontaining Tk IHuovcnf
I,
Lewis (Sir G. ComewcUl). and Aboriginal America, iSs.
Ah Esaay on the Oovemment 0/ Dt- VoL II, Aboriyi$Hd America Coon-
pndmcie Edited by C. F. Lucas, dnded), ixt.
B.A. SvOf ludf-rMui. 14s. Plmniiier. The Life andTimes

of Alfred the Great. Witli an Appen-
Iiucas. HUtorical Geography
dix and Map. By Charl^ PI ummer,
qf the British Colonies. Bv C. P.LttflU,
B.A. With Maps. Cr. 8vo.
ILA. Crown Sra 5a. nA
Introdaetion. 4s. 6d. Poole. HittoriccU Atlas of
Vol. I. TI16 Muditerranean and Modt-rn Europe from the decline of the
Eastern CoioniM (ttMliuiTe of liQiiutH Empire^ comprising also
India). 5s. Maps of parts of Asia, AfKca, and
tho Ntnv World, counecteM with
Tol. II. ThWit Indian Colo-
7s. 6d.
European Hiatory. Edited by
nies.
R. L. Poole, U.A. 5!. 1 5s. 6d. tuL
Vol. III. West Africa. Second
EdUion, reviMd lb Hbs mi ^1899, Prothero. /Select iStatuteb and
other Constitutional Documenls, ilhcstra-
B. S. Egerton. 7. 6(1.
Vol. IV. South and East Africa.
tive of the Reiyns and
q/' Elizabeth
Uitoric&l and Geographical. James I. Edited by G. W. Prothero,

M.A. Cr, Svo. Edition a. io. 6d.
9. 6d.
Also Vol. IV in two Parts Bamsay (Sir J. H.). Lancaster
Part I. Historical, 6s. 6d. and York, (a.o. li^î^&S)' > ôla.
Part II. Geographical, 3s. 6d. 8vo. With Index. 3711 M.
Vol. V. The History of Canada
(Part I, New France). 6s.
BamMy (W. K.). TheCUUe
Bishoprics of Vhrîgia.
Ludlow. The Memoirs of VoLL PartL The Lycos Valley
E4mmi Zvdtow, LtnUmaiMt'Ommil of ad 8oath*Weatera FbrygiA.
the Horse in the Army of the Commnn- Boyal Svo. 18s net.
W9aUhq/Enffiandfi62S-i6ji, ditt;d VoL I. Part II. Weat and West-
hj C. H. Firth, M.A. 1 ipols. 26$. Central Phrygia. aia. nst
Loodon: Hknry Frowdk, Anuin Curaer, B.C.
Digitized by Google
PHILOSOPHY^ LOGlCt ETC.
Baiike. A History of Eng^ Stephens. Frpncipal

latuJf principally in ihe Seventeenth Speeches of the Statisjnen and Orators of
Cnuur\i, By
L. von H&nke. Traua- the I^rench Hevolutionf 1789-179S.
lated under the sufierintendence of By H. Mone
Stephana. % vols.
G. W. KiU-hin. D.D., and C. \V. Crown 8vo. 3 is.
Boase, M.A. 6 voiu. 8vo. 63. StubbB. Select Charters and
Bcndaed Index, separately, is. other lUustration^f 0/ Eiiglii,h Con&tttu-
Baahdall. Ths UmverHtiea of ibmal HMoni, from the Earliest Times
Europe jn tl: die Ages. By Uafit- to the Heign of Edward I. Arranged
ingit Kaahdull, M.A. 2 vols, (in 3 and edited by W. Stubby D.D.,
Parts) 8vo. With MapH. 2I. 5. neL late Bishop of Oxford. Sieklh
EUtion. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d.
Bb^s. Studiea in the Arthur-
TJie Constitutional His-
im LogmA, By John BhfB, MJL
8to. 1 28. 6d.
tory qf England, in its Onyin and
Devd^munk LOrmy BdtUm, 3 Tola.
* Celt ic Folklore : and Wukh D* iiiy 8vo. 2l. 8s.
Mtiux. By the same. 2 vols. 8vo. 3 is. Albo 1 11 3 vols, crowu 8 vo. i as. each.
Scaccario. De NecestariU Seveutten Lectures on
Oitstrmntiis Scaccarii Dmlogus. Com- tht Study nf Mediaeval and Modtm
monly called DialoKUsde Scaccario. History and Kindrtd mhkcLs. Crown
By Richard, Sou of Nigol/rrt-asuror 8vo. 2'htrd Edition, revised and cm*
of Kngland imd Bishop of London. iM^Mi. 8s. 6d>
Edited by Arthur lliii^ht^s, C. G. Begistrum Sacrum
Ciuiup, and C. Jolmtiou. 8vo, Small 4to.
Anglicamtm. Sscmd
X3. 6l(. fWf.
EdUwn. los, (id.
Smith's Lectures on Jvîee^ Swift (F. B.). The Life and
Police, Revenue and Arms. Edited, Titties of James the First of Aragon.
with Introduction and Noteni by Hy F. ]>. Swift,B.A. 8vo. 12s. 6H,
Bdwin CSannan. Svo. 109. 6d.ntt.
Vmogradofll Villainage in
Wealth of Natione. Enffitmd, Bfiaaya in Engliah Medi^
With Noteb. by J. K. Tliorold Rogers, aeval History. By Puuiyinogradofll
JI1.A. 2 voU. 8vo. a IS. 8vo, half.bound. i6.
4. PHILOSOPHY, LOGIC, ETC.

Baoon. Kovtm Organum. Boeanquet. Logic; or, the
Edited, with Introduction, Notes,
&c, by T. Fowler, D.D. Ssoond
Morpluion JTnQieMp** ^ By B.
BoMUiquet, M.A. 8vo. 2 is.
EditioH, 8vo. IAS.
Berkeley. The Works Butler. The Works of Josepfi
of BtUler, Ji / . iine Lord Bishop
ôTiii't
Qtorge Berkeley, D,D^ formerly Bishop
doyne; including many of his tcrit'
of Duriiaiu. LUitcd by the Right
ings hitherto unpublished. With Vro' Hon. W. B. OladBfeooe. a toIb.
faces. Annotations, Appendices, llediam Sto. 14s. each.
and an Account of his Life, by A. Campagnao. The Cambridge

Campbell Fniser,Uun.i>.CL.,LL.D. : being Selections from the
HatMtisfs
New Bditaon in 4 Tola. crown 9wo, writings uf Benjamin Whichcote,
04$, John Smith, and Natlianael Culver-
The Life and Letters, wel, with Introduction by 1^ T.
%oithan account qf his Fhitosophy. By Campugnac, M.A. Crowu hvo.
A. Campbell Fraaer. 8vow i<St. 6. 6<t. iMfL
Oxford : CUrendoo Pna.
Digitized by Google
7
Fowler. Logic; Deductive and by Robert Latta, iLA^ D.Phil.

Inductive, combined ia a single Crown Svo. St. 64.
olnm. ExttA f(Mp. Svo. J.6d. Iiooke. An Essay Concern'
Fowler and Wilaim. The inq TTninnn TJndersfnnding. By .Tohn
Locke. Collated and Annotated,
Principles of ^fornh. T. Fowler, By with Prolegomena, Biographical,
D. D., and J. IL Wilton. B.D. 8to,
Critical, and Historic, bv A. Camp-
cloth. 14M.
bell Fraser, Hon. D.G.L., LL.D.
Qreen. Prolegomena toEthics. a volt. Svo. 1 3 A.
By T. n. Green. M.A. Edited by Iiotse^s Logic, in Three Books

A. C. Bradley. M.A. FmrtkEdmrn, Thought, of Invostiât ion, and
Crown Svo. 7*. 6d. of Knowledge. English Translation;
Hegel. The Logic of Hegel. edited bj B. BoMUiqiiet. H.A.
Second Edition. 2 vols. Gr. Svo. i at,
Tniiulated from tho Eneyclopaedia
of the Philosophical Scienc*s. With in
Metapfiysir, Three
Prolegomena to the Study of Hegel's
Books Ontology, Cosmology, and
Logie and Philosophy. By W. Wal P^yebology. Engllih TVuulation
laco, M.A. fêcnnd Edition, Rnisfd e<lit<^d hy B. Bosanquet, M.A.
and Augmented, a vola. Crown Svo. Sfcnnd Edi'ion. 3 vols. Cr. Rvo. 135.
tOt.6d. 6Mh. Martineau. Types of Ethical
HegePfl Philosophy of Mind. Theory. Bj
James Martinean, D.D.
Third Edition. 3 vols. Cr. Svo, 15s.
Translated from tho Encyolop.ifldia
oftho PhtMsophical Bciencea. Witli A Study of Religion :
Five Introductory Essays. By Wil- its Sottreesand Contents. Second Edition.
liam Wallace, H.A., ILJ}. Crown a volt. Cr. Svo. 15*.
Svo. ICS. 6<j. Selby-Bigge. British Morale
Hume'8 Treatise of Human ists. Setectinns from Writers prin*
cipallv of the Eighteenth Century,
Natwre, Edited, with Analytical
IndoXfby L. A. Solb7*Bigge, M.A. Edited hy L. A. Selby-Bigge^
7 voji. Crown Svo. tS??,
mX
Seemd Edition. Crown 8to. 8t.
Enquiry concerning
Spinoza. A Study in the
yfum Understanding^ and an
Ethics of Spinota, By Harold H.
Joachim. Svo. ios 6d. net.
Enquiry concerning the Principiea of
Morale. Edited by L. A. Selby-Biggo, Wallace. LeHiires avd Ef^says
M.A. Crown Svo. 'js. f>d.
on Natural and Ethics. By
Theotogjf
WUlIam Wallace. M.A., LI..D.
Iieibniz. 21ie Monadology a nd Edited, with a Bioqrnphinal Tntro-
other Philosophicai Writings. Trans- 1
duot!on,byd wardCaird, M.A.,Hon.
latod, with Introduetion and Notet, *
D.C.Ii.8vo^withaPortniit I3t.6tf.
5. PHYSICAL SCIENCE, ETC.

Balfimr. The NaUtral History Chambers. A Handbook of
cftieMvHeaiJS&m. AChapterinthe Detcriptirf and Pracfical Aslnmomy,
Developmental History of Stringed By G. F. Chambers, F.R.A.S. Fmrth
InstniTTients of Munic.
EdUion, in zrolM. Demy Svo.
Pnr^ T.
Vol. I. The Bun, Phmeta, and
Primitive Ty|*e. By Henry Baifour. Comets, a I s.
MA. . Royal 8vo, paper covers. Vol. II. Inttruments and Prae-
4t. 6d. tieal Aatronotny. tit.
Vol III. The Starry Hesviiis. I4t.
.
Digitized by Google
8
De Bary. Comparative A na- pfeflfer. The Phyfnologif of

tomy of the Vegtiatite Orgatis of the FUxnti. A Treaiiae upon O^c Mi UiMtsm
Phanerogaynt and Ftr%. By Dr. A. and Soureen of Energy in PUtn^n. By
dt^ Bary. TrHn<?1nffd by F. O. Prof. Dr, W.Secon<! fully
Pfeffer.
Bower, M. A., and D. H. Scott, U.A. Revised Edition, translated and
edited by Alfred J. Ewart, D.Se.,
Ph D.,F.L.S. PartL, Sojal avo*
half-mnrocco. jRji.
logy and Biology qf Fungi, Mycetosoa
and Bacteria, By Dr. A. de Bary. Frestwich. Geology Ckemi-
Tnuulatod by H. E. F. Oamsey, eal. Physical, amd StraiigrttpMeaiL By
M.A. R<*Ti8e<! by Isaac Bayley Sir Joseph Prestwich, M. A. F.R.S. ,
Balfour, M.A.,M.D.,F.R.S. Boyal In two Yolumea. Royal Svo. 6i.
Sachs. A Histo'nj of Botany.

Lidures on Bacteria. Translated by 11. E. i". Gamaey,
By Dr, A. de Barj\ Sfrorj-f Im-
M.A. Revised by I. Bayley BaUblir,
proved Edition, Translated aud re- M.A.,M.D.,F.BLS. Crown 8to. lot,
vlMd by th Mm. Crown 8vo.
Solms-Laubach. Fomil Bot-
any. Being an Introduction to Palaeth
Ffaofatr. The Structure and phytdogy from Ik* Staddpoint *f iM
Functions of Baderia, Alfred By BoianielU By H. Graf rw fô!m8-
Fischer. Translated into English lAubaeh. TrantUted and revised
by A. Goppen Jonea. Royal 8vo, by the Mine. Boyal Sro, ]uUI>
with Twoufynia Woodoota. notnooOf tSfi*
Ss. 6d.
Qoebel. OiUlines of Ciasbifi.' OXFORD IIISTOEY OF MUSIC.

mitmmdi^pkiMofj>hôgvqfPlant$, Edited by W. IL Hadow, M.A.
By Dr. K. Goebel. Translated by Tk* "Nlyfktmtt BmVmI. Pari I
H. K. F. Oamfiey,M.A. Revised by Method of Musical Art, 330-i3,=lo)'
Isaac Bayley Ballbdr, M. A., M.D.,
By H. . Wooldridge, M.A. 8vo.
F.K.& Bognd 8to, tuUf^moroow. 15s. IMt
ai.
Organography ofPlanU^ Tht SmnUadk Ctntvty. By Sir
C Hubert H. Parry. M.A., D.Moa
ettpedaUy of the A nhegonUUae emd BpeT- 15s. rtff. ( Jusf I'uhliishc'l.)
maphyta. By Dr. K. Qoebel. Autho-
rized English Edition, by Isaac lite Age 0/ Bach and Handel. By
Bayley Balfour, M. A., M.D., F.R.S. J. A. Fuller-HaiUaod, M.A. tîL
USt. (^Nearly itadyA
Part I, General Organography.
Knyal 8vo, half-morocco. l J.t. 6d. IN PREPARATION.
The Polyphonic Period. Part II.
Hiall and Hammond. The By H. S. Wooldrtdge, M.A.
Stmdun and Lije-liistory qf the
J?iBi9M<n (MvnfiomKV B7L.C. Hie Viennese School, By W. H,
Hndow, M A.
Miall, F.R.8 nn-i A R. Hammond,
,
F.L.& 8to. With zô lUustra- Th Romantic Period. By .

tiona. 7. 6tf. Dannieatliery 11.A.
OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
LONDON. EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK
UNRY FROWDE
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
SiMiiofd DntvwNy LtowlM
iiiiiiiniiiii
3 bias D2M b2M bbS
STANFORD UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES

STANFORD AUXILIARY LIBRARY
STANFORD, CALIFORNIA 94305-6004
(650) 723-9201
5alcirc@sulmail.stanford.edu
All books are subject to recall.
DATE DUE

Bub GB N3ckaaaaiaaj

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bub GB N3ckaaaaiaaj

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bub GB N3ckaaaaiaaj

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gesenius'

U>RI>ON, BDIMBURGU, AND NBW YORK

TRANSLATED FROM THE TWENTY-FIFTH GERMAN EDITION

REV. G. W. COLLINS, M.A.

TBE TRANSLATION REVISED AND ADJUSTED

AT THE CLARENDON PRESS

PRIMTKK TO TUK UNtVKKSITY

The Hebrew Gmmmar of William Gesenius originally

delayed, partly by the intervention of other work, and partly

(1896), which of course had to be incoi atcd. With reg^ard

be clearly and readily apprehended by English students.

During that period so many important works appeared on

as occasion But this twenty-sixth edition has

by the regard paid systematically to phonetic and philological

Arnons:^ smaller monographs the studies of Knudtzon,

use of such valuable works as Fricdrich Delit/scli's Assyrische

which, according to the dose of his review of the twenty-fifth

The old complaint that reference to the Grammar was

j 4. Division and Arrangement of the Grammar . . . .21

10. The Half Vowels and the Syllable Divider (WA)

U. Other Signs which affect the Reading

Chapter IL Peculiarities and Changes of Letters: the

21. The Aspiration of the Tenucs 23

25. Firm or Immo\'abIe Vowels 8j

CHAPTRR T. ThF Pt^O\()T7N.

The Personal Pronoun.

Chaptkr II. Thf. Vi.rr.

38. General \'icw 115

40. Tenses. Moods. Flexion n8

I. The Strong Verb.

A. The Pure Siem, or Qal.

50. The Participle 13^

B. Verba Derivativay or Derived Conjugations.

51. Niph'al 139

C Strong Verb ivitk Pronominal Suffixes.

57. In general 158

Vfrbs tvith Gutturals.

S2. In general 169

n. The Weak Verb.

The Weakest Verbs {Verba Quiescentia).

68. Verbs ^t^''D 190

\ 75. Verbs rf1> 21$

Chapter III. The Noun.

85. Nouns with Preformative^ and Afformatives

90. Probable Remains of Early Casc-endings

Chapter IV. The PARTTrT.E.<>.

I 9^, General View 304

I. Syntax of the Verb.

A. Use of the Tenses and Moods.

106. Use of the Perfect 320

112. The Perfect with Wuw Consecutive

B. The Infinitive and Parlicipie.

C. T/ie G<n'emment of the Verb.

\ 117. The Direct Subordination of the Noun to the Verb as

II. Syntax of the Woun.

122. Indication of the Gender of the Noun .....

and by the Repetition of Words 414

III. Syntax of the Pronoun.

Chapter II. The Sentence.